Today's Hours: 8:00am - 6:00pm

Books

all 2050 "P" titles
  • Digital
    Paul Alexander Gonzales, MPAS, PA-C (Physician Assistant, Comprehensive Epilepsy Center, Children's Health, Dallas, Texas).
    Summary: "The first complete review book for all of the PA Rotation Exams! At last! A complete exam review book for the PA Rotation (EOR) exams that specifically addresses PAEA requirements! Presented in a full-color, concise format, The PA End of Rotation Exam Review covers all the information required to succeed on the EOR Exams for Internal Medicine, Family Medicine, Pediatrics, OB/GYN, Surgery, Emergency Medicine, and Psychiatry. Closely following the PAEA EOR Exam blueprint and featuring practice questions, as well as online review questions for each rotation, this practical solution gives PA students everything they need for EOR exam success. Excellent Value: ll PA rotations are covered in a single text. Focused: Content mirrors the PAEA Blueprint for EOR exams, ensuring that students learn the information they need to excel on the exam. Concise: the tabular and outline format is ideal for quick exam study. High-yield: Information and questions are geared toward each EOR exam and cover high-yield topics, ensuring strong preparation. Easy-to-use: Overlapping content between rotations is fully cross-referenced and easy to locate, regardless of the student's current rotation. Full color: High-quality artwork and photos provide must-know visual information, including dermatology images. Online resources: Practice tests--50 review questions per rotation - provide additional practice and review. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience with Enhanced Video, Audio and Interactive Capabilities! Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. Adapt for unique reading needs, supporting learning disabilities, visual/auditory impairments, second-language or literacy challenges, and more"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Jón Eiríksson, Leifur A. Símonarson.
    Summary: This volume sheds new light on the marine fauna and geological setting of the Tjörnes Sequence, North Iceland, which is a classic site for the Pliocene and Pleistocene stratigraphy of the North Atlantic region. Readers will discover descriptions of new data collected by the editors over a period of over three decades on marine faunal assemblages and sedimentology available for palaeoenvironmental reconstructions, as well as the tectonic and stratigraphical relationships on Tjörnes Peninsula. The book includes a comprehensive account of all the collections of marine fossil invertebrate macrofossils and foraminifera known to the editors from the Tjörnes Sequence. It is expected to elucidate sedimentological and faunal changes from relatively stable Pliocene conditions to highly variable and periodically harsh climatic conditions of recurring Quaternary glaciations. The distribution, recent or fossil, of various species is recorded and pertinent ecological and biological features are also discussed. The Tjörnes Sequence records the Neogene migration of Pacific species into the North Atlantic. Researchers in geology, climate science, environmental science and earth science will find this book particularly valuable.

    Contents:
    Chapter1. A Brief Resumé of the Geology of Iceland
    Chapter2. The Marine Realm Around Iceland
    a Review of Biological Research
    Chapter3. The Evolution of the Tjörnes Sedimentary Basin in Relation to the Tjörnes Fracture Zone and the Geological Structure of Iceland
    Chapter4. A Review of the Research History of the Tjörnes Sequence, North Iceland
    Chapter5. Lithostratigraphy of the Tjörnes Sequence in Barmur and Höskuldsvík on the West Coast of Tjörnes, North Iceland
    Chapter6. An Age Model for the Miocene to Pleistocene Tjörnes Sequence, North Iceland
    Chapter7. Systematic Overview of the Pliocene Molluscs and Barnacles of the Barmur Group on Tjörnes, North Iceland
    Chapter8. Foraminifera in the Pliocene Barmur Group on Tjörnes, North Iceland
    Chapter9. Reconstructing the Palaeoenvironments of the Pliocene Barmur Group in the Tjörnes Basin, North Iceland
    Lithostratigraphy of the Upper Part of the Tjörnes Sequence in Furuvík, Breiðavík, Öxarfjörður, and Central Tjörnes Mountains, North Iceland
    Systematic Overview of the Molluscs and Barnacles of the Quaternary Breiðavík Group, North Iceland
    Chapter12. Foraminifera in the Early Pleistocene Part of the Breiðavík Group, North Iceland Knudsen
    Chapter13. Reconstructing the Palaeoenvironments of the Quaternary Tjörnes Basin, North Iceland
    Chapter14. Migration of Pacific Marine Mollusc Fauna into the North Atlantic Across the Arctic Ocean in Pliocene and Early Pleistocene Time.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sondos Albadri, Claire L. Stevens, editors.
    Summary: This book is a practical, comprehensive guide to the management of children and adolescents in general dental practice. A logical, evidence-based approach to oral health is adopted throughout. The commonly encountered oral and dental problems and their diagnosis and treatment are covered in detail, with particular attention to dental caries, dental trauma, developmental anomalies, periodontal problems, and soft tissue conditions. Up-to-date guidance is provided on history taking, dental examination, preventive strategies and advanced behaviour management. In addition the relevance of common medical conditions to dental management is discussed. The book is divided into four sections, each of which focusses on a specific age group, helping the reader to relate clinical issues to the different dental developmental stages. The readily understandable text is supported by many informative colour illustrations and diagrams.

    Contents:
    Birth To 3 Years Old: Growth and Development in Relation to Paediatric Dentistry
    Introduction to the Dental Surgery
    Prevention and Interventions in Oral Health Care in Children. 3 To 6 Years Old: Behaviour Management of the Paediatric Patient for Dental Procedures
    Management of Dental Caries in Primary Teeth
    Dento-Alvoeolar Trauma in the Primary Dentition
    Safeguarding for the Paediatric Patient. 6- 12 Years Old: Medical History and Dental Management of the Young Patient
    Tooth Eruption and Common Disturbances
    Dental Anomalies in the Young Permanent Teeth
    Management of Dental Caries in the Young Permanent Teeth
    Dento-Alvoeolar Trauma in the Permanent Dentition. 12 To 16 Years Old: Periodontal Conditions
    Tooth Surface Loss
    Common Soft Tissue and Hard Tissue Lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Matthew Pitt.
    Summary: Paediatric Electromyography is a single-author textbook which covers the full range of applications of the techniques of nerve conduction and electromyography (EMG) in children from the neonatal period to the late teenage years. It comprises five sections. Section 1 in its first chapter, gives a detailed introduction to the different skills that are needed to effect successful interventions in paediatric EMG. The emphasis here is that paediatric EMG is not simply adult EMG applied to younger subjects.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Basic physiology
    Nerve physiology
    Pathophysiological correlations in neuropathies
    Nerve damage and entrapment syndromes
    Motor unit anatomy and physiology
    Needle EMG findings in different pathologies
    Investigation of channelopathies
    Techniques used to test the neuromuscular junction in children
    Pthophysiological associations in paediatric neuromuscular junction disorders
    Results of the clinical application of SPACE in suspected disorders of the neuromuscular junction
    More advanced techniques.
    Digital Access Oxford 2018
  • Digital
    Hong Wang, editor.
    Summary: This book introduces the clinical analysis and accompany cases of paediatric Kawasaki disease. It has 14 chapters about typical Kawasaki disease, atypical Kawasaki disease, recurrent, misdiagnosis, and complications involved different systems, such as cardiovascular, digestive, nervous, blood, respiratory, urinary, bone and joints, and endocrine systems complications. In this book, 53 Kawasaki cases are presented with clinical history, physical examination, laboratory findings, diagnosis, treatment and discussion. This book is helpful for clinicians, ultrasonologist, and radiologist to support early diagnosis and proper treatment, which can significantly improve the prognosis of Kawasaki disease.

    Contents:
    Cardiovascular System
    Digestive System
    Nervous System
    Blood System
    Respiratory System
    Urinary System
    Bone and Joint System
    Endocrine System
    IVIG Resistance
    Kawasaki Disease Recurrence
    Missed Diagnosed Cases
    Atypical Kawasaki Disease Cases
    Vaccination Related Case
    Contraversial Cases
    Cardiac Tumor.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Rob Forsyth, Consultant and Senior Lecturer in Child Neurology, Great North Children's Hospital, Newcastle University, UK, Richard Newton, Honorary Consultant Paediatric Neurologist, Royal Manchester Children's Hospital, UK.
    Contents:
    1. Clinical approaches
    2. Neurodiagnostic tools
    3. Signs and symptoms
    4. Specific conditions
    5. Consultation with other services
    6. Emergencies
    7. Pharmacopoeia.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Benjamin Joseph, James Robb, Randall T. Loder, Ian Torode.
    Summary: The book presents a problem-based, rational approach to the diagnosis of orthopaedic problems in children. It is divided into five sections based on the age at which specific problems may be encountered; the newborn, the neonate and infant, the toddler and the pre-school child, the child in the school-going age and the adolescent. The authors outline a systematic approach to arrive at a tentative diagnosis by asking relevant questions related to the presenting symptom and then performing a thorough clinical examination. They then suggest the most appropriate investigations to confirm the diagnosis. Each chapter deals with the common conditions that may lead to the problem; the rarer causes of the problem are listed at the end.

    Contents:
    The deformed hip
    The deformed femur
    The deformed knee
    The bowed tibia
    The deformed foot
    The inverted foot
    The everted foot
    The deformed shoulder
    The deformed elbow
    The deformed wrist
    The deformed spine
    Anomalies of fingers or toes
    Absence of digits of the hands or feet
    Duplication of fingers
    Duplication of toes
    Deformities of the fingers or toes
    Limb length inequality at birth
    Abnormal body proportions or dwarfism evident at birth
    Decreased movement of an upper or lower limb in the neonate
    Deformities of the neck and limitation of movement of the neck
    The child with multiple deformities
    Acquired deformities of the knee
    In-toeing gait and out-toeing gait
    Toe walking
    The flat foot
    The child with a painless limp
    The delayed walker
    Deformities and limitation of movements of the shoulder girdle
    Deformities and limitation of motion of the forearm
    Deformities and limitation of movements of the wrist
    Brittle bones and frequent fractures
    The child with a painful limp
    The painful hip
    Short stature and altered body proportions
    Gigantism
    Acquired limb length inequality
    The painful hip in adolescence
    The painful knee in adolescence
    The painful foot adolescence. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nick A. Aresti, Matthew Barry, Mark (J.M.H.) Paterson, Manoj Ramachandran, editors.
    Contents:
    Vulnerable Bodies and Embodied Boundaries
    Rural Women?s Bodies and Invisible Hands: Neoliberalism and Population Control in China
    Arrogant Perceptors, World-Travellers, and World-Backpackers: Rethinking María Lugones? Theoretical Framework through Lukas Moodysson?s Mammoth
    Embodied Vulnerability in Large Scale Technical Systems
    Vulnerable Dam Bodies, Water Bodies and Human Bodies
    Toxic Skin and Animal Mops: Ticks and Humanimal Vulnerabilities
    Mothering With Neuroscience in a Neoliberal Age: Child Disorders and Embodied Brains
    Sexual Arousal, Danger and Vulnerability
    The Author?s Body: Almodóvar, auteur, and the Film Object
    Performativity and Expression: The Case of David Cronenberg?s M. Butterfly.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sattar Alshryda, James S. Huntley, Paul A. Banaszkiewicz, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Richard Hain and Satbir Jassal.
    Summary: Now in its second edition Paediatric Palliative Medicine covers all aspects of the care of children with life limiting illnesses, including symptom control, the philosophy and models that support delivery of palliative medicine to children, and the practical delivery of palliative medicine to other professionals and to families.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Randi Zlotnik Shaul, editor.
    Summary: This book provides the reader with a theoretical and practical understanding of two health care delivery models: the patient/child centred care and family-centred care. Both are fundamental to caring for children in healthcare organizations. The authors address their application in a variety of paediatric healthcare contexts, as well as the ethical and legal issues they raise. Each model is increasingly pursued as a vehicle for guiding the delivery of health care in the best interests of children. Such models of health care delivery shape health care policies, programs, facility design, resource allocation decisions and day-to-day interactions among patients, families, physicians and other health care professionals. To maximize the health and ethical benefits these models offer, there must be shared understanding of what the models entail, as well as the ethical and legal synergies and tensions they can create. This book is a valuable resource for paediatricians, nurses, trainees, graduate students, practitioners of ethics and health policy.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Michael Paddock, Amaka C. Offiah.
    Summary: This book provides readers with a comprehensive evaluation of paediatric radiographs in preparation for the demanding Rapid Reporting component of the Fellowship of the Royal College of Radiologists (FRCR) Part 2B examination, where the margin between pass and fail is very narrow. While other resources may include only a handful of paediatric images in a practice reporting packet, this book is dedicated solely to improving paediatric reporting skill and knowledge. It is designed to address an important deficiency identified in the FRCR Part 2B Examiners' Report, in that "many candidates struggle with interpretation of paediatric imaging - even for common paediatric pathologies". The ten practice tests presented, each with 30 images, will assist readers not only in passing the examination but also in the real world when they have to report paediatric radiographs independently. The range of cases covered, from neonate to adolescent, delivers a sound knowledge of both common paediatric fracture patterns and patterns which are subtler but require a definitive answer as to whether they are normal or abnormal. Guidance is also provided on how to describe each abnormality.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Albert Martin Li, Kate Ching-Ching Chan, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide readers with updated information on the diagnosis and management of common sleep disorders in children. An overview of sleep physiology and sleep disorders evaluation followed by an in-depth discussion with illustrative case examples of the most frequent sleep disorders encountered in children. A section on sleep disorders in children with neuromuscular and developmental diseases has also been included. Written by members of the Asia Pacific Paediatric Sleep Alliance and experts from the region, this case-based textbook will be a valuable reference for sleep researchers, paediatricians, and child neurologists, as well as those who are interested in this field of medicine.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Introduction
    1: Functions and Control of Sleep
    1.1 The Need to Sleep
    1.2 Control of Sleep
    1.2.1 Generation of Circadian Rhythm
    1.2.2 Sleep and Arousal
    1.2.3 The NREM and REM Sleep
    1.2.3.1 NREM Circuit
    1.2.3.2 REM Circuit
    1.2.3.3 The Role of Hypocretin/Orexin
    1.3 Functions of Sleep
    1.3.1 Sleep and EEG Recovery
    1.3.2 Sleep, Brain Energy Replenishment, Molecular Regeneration
    1.3.3 Sleep and Toxin Removal Within the Brain
    1.3.4 Sleep and Memory
    1.3.5 Sleep and Immunity 1.3.6 Sleep, Mood, and Emotion
    1.3.7 Sleep: The Developmental Perspective
    References
    2: Sleep Physiology and Architecture
    2.1 Sleep Architecture
    2.2 Sleep Physiology
    References
    3: Sleep Needs: Cross-Cultural Comparisons and Problems with Sleep Deprivation
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Sleep Duration
    3.2.1 Developmental Alteration of Sleep Duration
    3.2.2 Cross-Cultural Difference of Sleep Duration
    3.2.3 Factors Associated with Sleep Duration
    3.2.4 Problems Associated with Decreased Sleep Duration
    3.3 Sleepiness
    3.3.1 Sleepiness vs. Sleep Duration 3.3.2 Factors Associated with Sleepiness
    3.4 Sleep Need Index (SNI)
    3.5 Conclusion
    References
    Part II: Evaluation of Sleep Disorders
    4: Clinical Assessment
    4.1 Preparation
    4.2 History Taking
    4.2.1 Chief Complaint and Associated Symptoms
    4.2.2 Sleep Patterns and Sleep-Wake Schedule
    4.2.3 Treatment History, Medical History, Developmental History, and Psychiatric History
    4.2.4 Family History
    4.3 Physical Examination
    4.3.1 Sleep-Associated Physical Examination
    4.4 Questionnaire and Scale 4.4.1 Bedtime Problems, Excessive Daytime Sleepiness, Awakenings, Regularity and Snoring Screener (BEARS)
    4.4.2 Children's Sleep Habit Questionnaire: Preschool and School Ages (CSHQ)
    4.4.3 Sleep Disturbance Scale for Children (SDSC)
    4.4.4 Pediatric Daytime Sleepiness Scale (PDSS)
    4.4.5 Children's Sleep Comic
    4.4.6 Sleep Diary and Sleep Log
    4.4.7 Structured Interview
    4.5 Laboratory Test
    4.5.1 Blood Test
    4.5.2 Dim Light Melatonin Onset (DLMO)
    4.5.3 Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) Hypocretin (Orexin) Level
    4.6 Imaging Test
    4.6.1 Cephalometry 4.6.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI)
    4.7 Conclusions
    References
    5: Sleep Diagnostics
    5.1 Diagnosis
    5.2 Home Audio and Video Recording
    5.3 Pulse Oximetry
    5.3.1 Technology Behind Pulse Oximetry
    5.3.2 Limitations of Pulse Oximetry
    5.4 Actigraphy
    5.4.1 Indications for Actigraphy
    5.4.2 Limitations
    5.5 Paediatric Polysomnography
    5.5.1 Mechanics of Polysomnography
    5.5.2 Interpretation and Scoring
    5.5.3 Indications for Paediatric Polysomnography
    5.5.4 Limitations of Polysomnography
    5.5.5 Multiple Sleep Latency Test (MSLT)
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    volume editor, Gabor Szinnai.
    Contents:
    Evolution, child development and the thyroid : a phylogenetic and ontogenetic introduction to normal thyroid function / Krude, H.
    Human fetal thyroid function / Polak, M.
    The role of thyroid hormones for brain development and cognitive function / Rovet, J. F.
    Neonatal screening for congenital hypothyroidism / Torresani, T.
    Diagnosis, treatment and outcome of congenital hypothyroidism / Van Vliet, G.; Deladoëy, J.
    Clinical genetics of congenital hypothyroidism / Szinnai, G.
    Central hypothyroidism in children / Garcí́a, M., Fernssndez, A., Moreno, J.C.
    Thyroid hormone cell membrane transport defect / Ramos, H.E.
    Resistance to thyroid hormone / Onigata, K., Szinnai, G.
    Iodine deficiency in children / Pearce, E.N.
    Thyroid autoimmunity / Wiersinga, W.M.
    Clinical aspects of Hashimoto's thyroiditis / Radetti, G.
    Graves' disease in children / Léger, J.
    Thyroid nodules and differentiated thyroid cancer / Bauer, A.J.
    Medullary thyroid carcinoma in children / Viola, D., Romei, C.; Elisei, R.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Print
    WHO Classification of Tumors Editorial Board.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    RC281.C4 P34 2022
    2
  • Digital
    Alaa Abd-Elsayed, editor.
    Summary: This concise but comprehensive guide covers all common procedures in pain management necessary for daily practice, and includes all topics on the pain medicine curricula of the American Board of Anesthesiology, World Institute of Pain/Fellow of Interventional Pain Practice, and American Board of Pain Medicine. All nerve blocks (head, neck, back, pelvis and lower extremity) are discussed. Pain: A Review Guide is aimed at trainees in pain medicine all over the world. This book will also be beneficial to all practitioners who practice pain.

    Contents:
    Tation
    Temperature modalities
    Manipulation, mobilization, massage, traction
    Casting and splinting
    Exercise therapy
    23. Work Rehabilitation
    Importance of early intervention and early return to work in reducing absence
    Psychosocial factors as the main determinants of disability
    Identification of obstacles to recovery
    Components of successful comprehensive rehabilitation program
    Multidisciplinary approaches for those who do not return to work within a few weeks
    Functional Capacity Evaluation
    24. Complementary Therapies (CAM)
    CAM
    25. Clinical States: Taxonomy
    IASP classification of chronic pain syndromes
    Application and definition of pain terms
    26. Pain in special population
    Pain in Infants, Children, and Adolescents
    Pain in older adults
    Delirium in the elderly
    Pain Issues in Individuals with Limited Ability to Communicate Due to Neurocognitive Impairments
    27. Pain Relief in Persons with Substance use and Addictive Disorders
    Biopharmacologic and neurophysiologic basis of addiction
    Interactions between addiction and pain
    Screening for substance use disorder or addiction in patients with pain
    Principles of comprehensive approach to pain management in patients with addiction
    Pharmacologic treatment of patients with addiction
    Acute pain management of patients with active addiction or in recovery
    Analgesic response to opioids in patients with addiction
    Risks and benefits of opioid use in treatment of chronic/cancer pain in patients with substance use disorder
    Needs of special populations
    Legal, regulatory, reimbursement issues limiting access to care for patients with pain and addiction
    Treatment of withdrawal
    List of addictive drugs and their metabolites in urine
    Impact of alcohol use on pain
    28. Pain Relief in Areas of Deprivation and Conflict
    Variability of availability and access to adequate pain treatment worldwide
    Causes of pain worldwide
    Spect cal principles in clinical assessment, explanation, and treatment
    Common causes, diagnostic evaluation, and treatment in men
    Common causes, diagnostic evaluation, and treatment in women
    Superior hypogastric plexus block
    Ganglion impar block
    16. Surgical Pain Management
    Importance of general health status in preoperative evaluation
    Surgical lesioning of brain, brain stem, spinal cord, peripheral nerves
    Radiofrequency treatment
    Neurolysis
    Spinal cord and peripheral nerve stimulation
    Intrathecal drug delivery
    DRG stimulator
    Cordotomy
    Kyphoplast and vertebroplasty
    17. Nerve conditions
    Complex Regional Pain Syndromes
    Phantom limb pain
    Peripheral neuropathy
    Other nerve conditions as mononeuropathy, mononeurpathy multiplex and others
    18. Central pain
    Central pain
    19. Cancer Pain
    Palliative care
    Hospice care
    Comprehensive evaluation of patients with cancer pain
    Principles of treatment
    Analgesic ladder approach
    Anesthetic approaches
    Surgical and interventional radiologic approaches
    Neurostimulatory approach
    Physical therapy
    Psychological approaches
    Needs of special populations
    Benefit to burden ratio
    Anorexia and cachexia associated with cancer
    20. Pain in Pregnancy and Labor
    Factors influencing the perception of pain in pregnancy compared with the non-pregnant state
    Causes of pain and principles of pain management in pregnancy
    Mechanisms, characteristic, benefits, consequences and management of labor pain
    21. Acute Pain
    Epidemiology of inadequate control
    Physiologic and psychologic effects
    Pharmacologic properties of major classes of drugs used for acute pain management
    Comprehensive plan for optimal perioperative pain management
    Non-pharmacologic treatment
    Clinical outcomes to be evaluated
    Tools for assessment and measurement
    Role of patient and family education
    Treatment of nonsurgical pain
    22. Physical Medicine and Rehabili.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gisèle Pickering, Stephen Gibson, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the reciprocal interactions between pain, emotion and cognition. International experts report on their findings, clinical experience and the most recent literature on the complex relations between these three domains. Clinical, psychological, behavioral and neuroimaging approaches converge towards aiding patients suffering from pain, cognitive impairment or emotional distress. Beyond the pathophysiological aspects of pain, difficulties encountered with patients are analyzed and strategies are proposed to optimize treatment, doctor-patient relationships, and patient well-being. This work will appeal to a broad readership, from clinical medical practitioners to psychologists, nurses and pain specialists.

    Contents:
    Part I Nociception, Pain, Emotion and Cognition Interconnections
    Cognitive Psychology and Neuropsychology of Nociception and Pain
    Emotional Aspects of Chronic Pain
    Cerebral and Spinal Modulation of Pain by Emotions and Attention
    Understanding the Suffering of Others: The Sources and Consequences of Third-person Pain
    Neuroplasticity in the Pain, Emotion and Cognition Nexus
    Part II Measurement Issues
    Tools that Should be Considered in Pain Assessment: Cognitive Factors, Emotion and Personality
    Pain Evaluation in Patients with Cognitive Impairment
    Behavioural/Facial Markers of Pain, Emotion, Cognition
    Part III Management Issues
    Pharmacological Pain Management: For Better or for Worse?
    Psychological Approaches to the Management of Pain, Cognition and Emotion
    Physical Therapy and Exercise: Impacts on Pain, Mood, Cognition, and Function
    Part IV Special Populations
    Phantom Pain: The Role of Maladaptive Plasticity, Emotional and Cognitive Variables
    Pain in Parkinson Patients
    Clinical Pain in Schizophrenia, a Forgotten Area
    The Pain, Emotion and Cognition Nexus in Older Persons and in Dementia.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Sanjong Pangarkar, Quynh G. Pham, Blessen C. Eapen.
    Summary: "Covering the newest trends and treatments in pain care, as well as the pain treatment strategies that have been successfully employed in the past, Pain Care Essentials and Innovations brings you fully up to date with effective treatments for acute and chronic pain. It offers expert guidance on both interventional and non-interventional strategies, provided by respected academic physicians who practice evidence-based medicine at major universities and affiliated ACGME-accredited Pain Medicine Training programs"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Basic science of pain
    Headache
    Central pain syndromes
    Visceral pain: mechanisms, syndromes, and treatment
    Neuropathic pain
    Musculoskeletal pain
    Palliative care and cancer pain
    Complementary and integrative health
    Pain and addiction
    Geriatric pain management
    Cannabis in pain
    Inpatient pain
    Pain care essentials: interventional pain
    Rehabilitation in pain medicine
    Comorbid chronic pain and posttraumatic stress disorder: current knowledge, treatments, and future directions
    Opioids in pain
    Regenerative medicine
    Future research in pain.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Hans-Georg Schaible, editor.
    Contents:
    Emerging concepts of pain therapy based on neuronal mechanisms
    The pharmacology of nociceptor priming
    Sodium channels and pain
    Role of nerve growth factor in pain
    Central sensitization in humans: assessment and pharmacology
    Nitric oxide-mediated pain processing in the spinal cord
    The role of the endocannabinoid system in pain
    The role of glia in the spinal cord in neuropathic and inflammatory pain
    Plasticity of inhibition in the spinal cord
    Modulation of peripheral inflammation by the spinal cord
    The relationship between opiods and immune signalling in the spinal cord
    The role of proteases in pain
    Amygdala pain mechanisms
    Itch and pain differences and commonalities
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Kanishka Rajput, Nalini Vadivelu, Alan David Kaye, Rinoo Vasant Shah, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of the, challenges, risk, stratification, and approaches and techniques needed to improve pain control in ambulatory surgery centers (ASCs). It addresses not only the management of acute perioperative pain but also describes modalities that could potentially reduce the risk of evolution of acute pain into chronic pain, in addition to weaning protocols and follow ups with primary surgical specialties and pain physicians as needed. Organized into five sections, the book begins with the foundations of managing ASCs, with specific attention paid to the current opioid epidemic and U.S. policies relating to prescribing opioids to patients. Section two and three then explore facets of multimodal analgesia and non-operating room locations, including the use of ultrasounds, sedation in specific procedures, regional anesthesia, ketamine infusions, and the management of perioperative nausea and intractable pain in outpatient surgery. Section four examines the unique challenges physicians face with certain patient demographics, such as the pediatric population, those suffering from sleep apnea, and those with a history of substance abuse. The book closes with information on discharge considerations, ambulatory surgery protocols, recovery room protocols, and mandatory pain management services. An invaluable reference for all health personnel and allied specialties, Pain Control in Ambulatory Surgery Centers (ASCs) meets the unmet need for a resource that covers optimum pain control in patients undergoing outpatient surgery as well as the urgent ASCs challenges that are presented on an immense scale with national and international impact. .

    Contents:
    Academic and Non-academic Ambulatory Surgery Centers and Hospital Outpatient Departments
    Opioid Epidemic
    Current US Policy for Opioid Prescribing
    Rationale and Goals for Optimal Pain Control in ASCs
    Challenges of Pain Control in Ambulatory Surgery Setting
    Assessment and Optimization of Available Resources for Pain Control
    Benefits of optimum pain control in ASCs
    Structuring Pain Control Regimens in ASCs
    Preoperative Planning
    Comprehensive Pain Management: Opioid Naïve Vs Opioid Tolerant
    Risks and Benefits of Opioids in Chronic/Cancer Pain
    Maximization of non-opioid multimodal therapy in ASCs
    Use of Ultrasound in an Ambulatory Setting
    Use of Regional anesthesia/Neuraxial anesthesia in ASCs
    Ketamine infusions
    Management of Perioperative Nausea and Intractable Pain in Outpatient Surgery
    Sedation for Interventional Pain Procedures
    Sedation and Analgesia for GI Procedures
    Management of Perioperative Pain for IR Procedures
    Management of Perioperative Pain for Bronchoscopy
    Perioperative management of obstructive sleep apnea patients in an ambulatory setting
    Special Considerations
    Management of Pediatric Pain in an Ambulatory Setting
    Pain management in former addicts on MAT (Medication assisted treatment)
    Special Considerations
    Medical Marijuana and Active Substance Abuse
    Special Considerations
    Indwelling Intrathecal Pumps and Spinal Cord Stimulators
    Discharge from Recovery Room in Ambulatory Surgery Centers
    Recovery Room Protocols for nursing in ASCs and HOPDs
    Weaning protocols for Ambulatory Surgery
    Role of a Focused Ambulatory Pain Specialist
    Inclusion of mandatory pain management services in ASCs
    New Vistas: Opioid Sparing Multimodal Therapy in the Post-Operative Period. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Inna Belfer, Luda Diatchenko.
    Contents:
    How do pain genes affect pain experience? / Marshall Devor
    Conservation of pain genes across evolution / Thang Manh Khuong and G. Greg Neely
    Defining human pain phenotypes for genetic association studies / Christopher Sivert Nielsen
    Genetic contributions to pain and analgesia : interactions with sex and stress / Roger B. Fillingim and Jeffrey S. Mogil
    Monogenic pain disorders / Geoff Woods
    Alternative pre-mRNAsplicing of mu opioid receptor gene: molecular mechanisms underlying the complex actions of mu opioids / Ying-Xian Pan
    Discovering multi-locus associations with complex pain phenotypes / Chia-Ling Kuo, Luda Diatchenko, Dmitri Zaykin
    Overlapping phenotypes : genetic contribution to nausea and pain / Charles C. Horn
    A counterpart to pain : itch / Adam P. Kardon and Sarah E. Ross
    Translating genetic knowledge into clinical practice for musculoskeletal pain conditions / Luda Diatchenko, Shad B. Smith, William Maixner
    The human chronic pain phenome : mapping non-genetic modifiers of the heritable risk / Ze'ev Seltzer, Scott R. Diehl, Hance Clarke and Joel Katz.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Maria Assunta Cova, Fulvio Stacul, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses all pain imaging aspects related to both the central nervous system and the body (thorax, abdomen and pelvis), thus updating the international literature on the topic. By adopting a clinical-radiological approach and offering a comprehensive differential diagnosis for a number of painful syndromes (many of which can mimic one other), the work aims to support and enhance the diagnostic management of these patients, suggesting the most appropriate diagnostic algorithm. The book is divided into separate sections for each anatomical macro-area, and the chapters cover the respective topics from both clinical and radiological perspectives. Further, the book includes extensive electronic supplementary material. As such, it offers an invaluable tool for radiologists, neuroradiologists and clinicians working in internal medicine, surgery and neurology, and could also be used in residency programs for these group.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents;
    1: Mechanisms of Pain; 1.1 Peripheral Mechanisms; 1.2 Spinal Mechanisms; 1.3 Central Mechanisms and Pain Matrix; References;
    2: Brain Imaging of Pain; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Structural and Functional Neuroimaging Techniques; 2.2.1 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI); 2.2.2 Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging (fMRI); 2.2.3 PET; 2.2.4 MEG; 2.2.5 NIRS; 2.3 Structural Neuroimaging of Pain; 2.3.1 Central Post Stroke Pain; 2.3.2 Multiple Sclerosis; 2.4 Functional Neuroimaging of Pain; 2.4.1 Pain Network and Connectivity; 2.4.2 Pain in Infants 2.4.3 Chronic Pain2.4.4 Phantom Limb Pain (PLP); References;
    3: Headache: Clinical Features; 3.1 Primary Headaches; 3.1.1 Migraine; 3.1.1.1 Premonitory Phase; 3.1.1.2 Aura; Types of Aura Symptoms; Visual Aura; Sensory Aura; Language Aura; Motor Aura; Less Typical Aura Symptoms; 3.1.1.3 Headache; 3.1.1.4 Postdrome; 3.1.2 Tension-Type Headache; 3.1.3 Trigeminal Autonomic Cephalalgias (TACS); 3.1.3.1 Cluster Headache; 3.1.3.2 Paroxysmal Hemicrania; 3.1.4 SUNCT/SUNA; 3.1.4.1 Hemicrania Continua; 3.1.5 Other Primary Headache Disorders; 3.1.5.1 Primary Cough Headache 3.1.6 Primary Exercise Headache3.1.7 Primary Headache Associated with Sexual Activity; 3.1.8 Primary Thunderclap Headache; 3.1.9 Other Primary Headache Disorders; 3.2 Secondary Headaches; 3.2.1 Subarachnoid Haemorrhage; 3.2.2 Intracerebral Haemorrhage; 3.2.3 Cerebral Venous Thrombosis; 3.2.4 Cervical Artery Dissection; 3.2.5 Brain Tumours; 3.2.6 Intracranial Infections; References;
    4: Imaging of Headache; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Imaging Modalities; 4.3 Imaging Findings; 4.3.1 Primary Headaches; 4.3.1.1 Migraine; Hemiplegic Migraine; Retinal Migraine; Chronic Migraine Migrainous Infarction4.3.1.2 Tension-Type Headache (TTH); 4.3.1.3 Trigeminal Autonomic Cephalalgias (TACs); 4.3.2 Secondary Headaches; 4.3.2.1 Headache Attributed to Trauma or Injury to the Head and/or Neck; 4.3.2.2 Headache Attributed to Cranial or Cervical Vascular Disorder; Ischemic Stroke; Subarachnoid Hemorrhage (SAH); Other Intracranial Hemorrhages; Cervical Carotid or Vertebral Artery Dissection; Cerebral Venous Sinus Thrombosis (CVST); Reversible Vasoconstriction Syndrome (RCVS); Cerebral Autosomal Dominant Arteriopathy with Subcortical Infarcts and Leukoencephalopathy (CADASIL) 4.3.2.3 Headache Attributed to Nonvascular Intracranial DisordersSpontaneous Intracranial Hypotension; Increased Cerebrospinal Fluid Pressure; Intracranial Neoplasia; Chiari Malformation Type I; 4.3.2.4 Headache Attributed to Intracranial Infection; 4.3.2.5 Painful Cranial Neuropathies and Other Facial Pains; Glossopharyngeal Neuralgia; Tolosa-Hunt Syndrome; Optic Neuritis; References;
    5: Trigeminal Nerve: Clinical Features; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Pathophysiology; 5.3 Clinical Features; 5.3.1 Trigeminal Neuralgia; 5.3.2 Classical Trigeminal Neuralgia
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    volume editors, David P. Finn, Brian E. Leonard.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Rajesh Gupta.
    Summary: Pain management is a vast subject and is changing rapidly. Finding a good resource for learning, however, is difficult. Most of the available books are lengthy volumes including many details irrelevant to physicians sitting for examinations or assessment. Furthermore, books aimed at assisting preparation for entire anaesthesia exams typically address pain management in only one chapter or a few pages. This book covers the entire curriculum relating to pain management and will make it easy to learn all aspects of the subject by covering key concepts in a reader-friendly manner. It comprises nine concise and simple chapters that aim to impart the maximum information within a limited space. These chapters address anatomy, assessment of pain, diagnosis of pain, pharmacology, non-pharmacological pain management, acute and chronic pain management, pain management in special groups, and special techniques. Pain Management: Essential Topics for Examinations will be an ideal resource for those who plan to sit for examinations, wherever they are based in the world. In addition, it will be an invaluable reference for higher and advanced pain trainees, residents, and physicians working in chronic pain.

    Contents:
    Pain Pathway
    Nociceptors
    Pain Processing
    Neuropathic Pain
    Patient Evaluation
    Assessment and Measurement of Acute Pain
    Psychological Assessment of Chronic Pain
    Assessment of Neuropathic Pain
    Pain Assessment in Paediatrics
    Assessment of Pain in Elderly
    Imaging
    Sodium Channels
    Potassium and Calcium Channels
    Serotonergic Receptors
    Glutamate and GABA Receptors
    Opioids
    Opioids-Clinical Use
    Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drugs
    NSAIDs 2
    Antidepressants
    Anticonvulsants
    Topical Agents
    Miscellaneous Drugs
    Placebo and Nocebo Effect
    Acupuncture
    Biofeedback
    Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
    Burns
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Painful Neuropathies
    Phantom Pain Syndromes
    CRPS
    Postherpetic Neuralgia
    Central Pain Syndromes
    Headache
    Fibromyalgia
    Trigeminal Neuralgia
    Pain Management and Substance Abuse
    Epidemiology and Mechanisms of Cancer Pain
    Assessment of Cancer Pain
    Breakthrough Pain
    Mucositis
    Lumbar Radiculopathy
    Lumbar Facet Joint Pain
    Lumbar Spinal Stenosis
    Lumbar Discogenic Pain
    Sacroiliac Joint Pain
    Piriformis Syndrome
    Cervical Radiculopathy
    Cervical Facet Pain
    Radiofrequency Treatment
    Spinal Cord Stimulation.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kimberly A. Sackheim, editor.
    Contents:
    I. Evaluation of the Pain Patient
    Physiology of Pain
    Obtaining a Pain History
    Physical Exam: Approach to the Pain Patient
    Diagnostic Imaging
    Painful Surgical Referrals and Emergencies
    Urine Toxicology Screen
    Opioid Overdose and Withdrawal
    Detoxification From Opiates and Benzodiazepines
    Discharging the Non-Compliant Patient
    II. Medication Management for the Pain Patient
    Non-steroidal Anti-inflammatory Drugs (NSAIDs)
    Muscle Relaxants and Antispasticity Medications
    Neuropathic Antidepressant Medications
    Neuropathic Anticonvulsant Medications
    Opioid Medications
    Topical Analgesic Medications
    III. Clinical Care for the Pain Patient
    Headache
    Facial Pain
    Post Herpetic Neuralgia
    Joint Pain
    Post-Amputation Pain
    Spinal Pain
    Chronic Pelvic and Abdominal Pain
    Neuropathic pain
    Complex Regional Pain Syndrome (CRPS)
    Fibromyalgia
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Cancer Pain
    Palliative Care
    Hospice Medicine
    IV. Pain Management in Patients with Special Circumstances
    Pain Management in Patients with Renal Impairment
    Pain Management in Patients with Hepatic Impairment
    Pain Management During Pregnancy and Breast Feeding
    Pain Management in Geriatric Patients
    Acute Post-Surgical Pain and PCA Management
    V. Interventional Management for the Pain Patient
    Hematologic-altering Medications and Spinal Injections
    Injections in Patient?s with Bleeding Risks and Comorbid Conditions
    Spinal Procedure Injectables
    Radiation Safety and Monitoring
    Cervical Injections
    Thoracic Injections
    Lumbar Injections
    Sacral Injections
    Sympathetic Block Injections
    Neuromodulation
    Intrathecal Drug Delivery Systems
    Joint, Tendon and Nerve Injections
    Regenerative Injection Therapy
    Injection Complications and Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Carl Edward Noe, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on the modern clinical management of acute and chronic pain syndromes. It not only presents information in a clinically illuminating format, but in a manner that is cognizant of the current prescription opioid epidemic. Divided into seven sections, this book covers acute pain, common pain conditions, regional pain problems, interdisciplinary evaluation and treatment, medical treatments and pain in different stages of life. Concluding with the exploration of several special topics, the last section includes an important discussion on the regulatory and legal issues in the use of controlled substances. Chapters are concise and relevant, with an emphasis on treatment based upon evidence from clinical trials and interpretation by practitioners in the field. Expertly written text is further supplemented by high-quality figures, images and tables outlining proven treatments with drug, dose or other information describing details of treatment. Timely, informative, and socially conscious, Pain Management for Clinicians: A Guide to Assessment and Treatment is a valuable reference for clinicians who manage patients with chronic and common pain problems.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Introduction
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Acute Pain
    Chapter 1: Pain Assessment and Treatment for the Trauma and Burn Patient
    Pain Management of the Trauma Patient
    Introduction
    Traumatic Pain Pathologies
    Assessment of Pain in the Trauma Patient
    Opioid Medications
    Non-opioid Medications
    Interventional Pain Procedures
    Non-pharmacological Interventions
    Special Populations
    Summary of Treatments for Trauma Pain (Tables 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4)
    Pain Management for the Burn Patient
    Introduction
    Burn Insult Classification Steroids
    Local Anesthetics
    Gabapentinoids
    Ketamine
    Alpha-2-agonists
    Opioids
    Beta-Blockers
    Potentially Helpful Agents with Less Evidence
    Nonpharmacologic Treatments that May Be Useful
    Future Perioperative Pain Management Modalities
    Opioid-Free Analgesia?
    Charts
    Evidence-Based Treatment
    Strong Evidence
    Weak or Insufficient Evidence
    Emerging or Promising Treatments
    Timing Basic Options
    Enhanced Recovery After Surgery Example Pain Management Protocols
    Inguinal Hernia Repair (Ambulatory: Mild to Moderate Pain Anticipated) Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy (Ambulatory: Moderate Pain Anticipated)
    Open Reduction Internal Fixation Calcaneus (Ambulatory: Severe Pain Anticipated)
    Multilevel Spine Fusion (Hospitalized: Severe pain, Opioid tolerance, and Comorbid Conditions Anticipated)
    Open Thoracotomy (Hospitalized: Severe Pain and Comorbid Conditions Anticipated)
    References
    Chapter 3: Inpatient Pain Management
    Acute Pain Service with Regional and Neuraxial Blocks
    Upper Extremity Pain
    Thoracic Pain
    Abdominal Pain
    Lower Extremity
    Summary of Treatment Principles and Methods Formulation of Individualized Treatment and Rehabilitation Plan
    Evaluation of Medications for Effectiveness, Side Effects, Dependency, and Interactions
    Medications
    Classes of Medications
    Antiepileptics
    Opioids
    Treatment of the Psychological Distress that Often Accompanies Intractable Pain
    Relaxation Training
    Biofeedback
    Group Therapy
    Family Involvement
    Medications
    Serotonin-Norepinephrine Reuptake Inhibitors (SNRIs)
    Tricyclic Antidepressants (TCAs)
    Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors (SSRIs)
    Physical Function/Behavior Modification
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gisèle Pickering, Sandra Zwakhalen, Sharon Kaasalainen, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses relevant issues to enhance pain management nurses need to advocate for effective pain treatment in the elderly. Significant changes in the evolving nursing and healthcare environment require adequate information on this topic, as pain is a very challenging area. As other care professionals, nurses are daily confronted with issues on pain assessment and management. This volume offers an overview within an evolving health environment, in which nurses dealing with pain play a growing role. It showcases best practices in pain assessment and management, details non pharmacological and pharmacological treatments. It also addresses core issues defined by the International Association for the Study of Pain (IASP), such as knowledge translation, that are most relevant for clinical nurses, student nurses, nurse researchers as well as other care professionals.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Charles E. Argoff, Andrew Dubin, Julie Pilitsis.
    Summary: "For more than 30 years, the highly regarded Secrets Series® has provided students and practitioners in all areas of health care with concise, focused, and engaging resources for quick reference and exam review. Pain Management Secrets, 4th Edition, features the Secrets' popular question-and-answer format that also includes lists, tables, and an easy-to-read style - making reference and review quick, easy, and enjoyable"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    I. Overview. Definitions
    Classification of pain
    Basic mechanisms
    Topiceuticals
    II. Clinical approach. History taking in the patient with pain
    Physical examination of the patient with pain
    Pain measurement
    Psychological assessment of chronic patients
    III. Clinical syndromes defined by pain. Neuroimaging in the patient with pain
    Tension-type headache
    Migraine
    Cluster headache
    The paroxysmal hemicranias
    Subarachnoid hemorrhage
    Brain tumor headaches
    Increased and decreased intracranial pressure
    Temporal giant cell arteritis
    Headaches associated with systemic disease
    Trigeminal neuralgia
    Glossopharyngeal and other facial neuralgias
    Low back pain
    Neck and arm pain
    Abdominal pain
    Chronic pelvic pain
    Fibromyalgia and myofascial pain
    IV. Syndromes in which pain is a significant component. Postoperative pain management
    Cancer pain syndrome
    Pain in rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis
    Neuropathic pain
    V. Psychological syndromes
    VI. Special patient populations. Pain in children
    Pain in the older patient
    VII. Pharmacologic management. Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
    Opioid analgesics
    Addiction and pain management
    Regulatory issues
    Adjuvant analgesics
    VIII. Nonpharmologic management. Temporary neural blockade
    Permanent neural blockade and chemical ablation
    Sympathetic neural blockade
    Intraspinal opioids
    Neurostimulatory and neuorablative pocedures
    Psychological constructs and treatment interventions
    Physical modalities: adjunctive treatments to reduce pain and maximize function
    Pain clinics
    Interventional pain management
    Complementary and alternative medicine.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    R. Jason Yong, Michael Nguyen, Ehren Nelson, Richard D. Urman, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Charlotte Allerton.
    Summary: This book presents a contemporary review of the field of Pain Therapeutics, including the historical medicines which still dominate standard of care treatments, as well as the new mechanisms and combinations/reformulations that have dominated the regulatory approvals over the last decade. In addition this book provides a deep review of the key biological mechanisms currently under investigation for their utility into the treatment of pain, such as ion channels, opiates and others. Additional discussion highlights the current challenges of pain research, covering a range of topics from difficulties in identifying new targets from pre-clinical models to the current regulatory and commercial challenges. This background sets the scene for recent scientific changes in pain research, such as the drive for genetic validation of targets and the derivation of human cell platforms from stem cells. Finally the book covers the discovery and development stories for two pain products approved in the last decade. These case studies for Lyrica and the Butrans patch, will give insight into the discovery and development challenges and successes for both an oral and non-oral product.
    Digital Access R Soc Chem 2014
  • Digital
    Michael D. Stein and Sandro Galea.
    Summary: "As a country, the United States overinvests in medical care, often at the expense of the social, economic, and cultural forces that produce health. Indeed, the rise of medicine as a cornerstone of American life and culture has coincided with a social and political devaluation of factors demonstrated to mean more to one's vitality than anything else-influences like where one lives, works, and plays; livable wages that create opportunity for healthy living; and gender and racial equity. As such, this book pushes the conversation around American health toward matters of class, money, and culture. It highlights how the structural components of everyday life ultimately determine who gets to be healthy in today's America. In doing so, it makes a case for reframing the political discourse on public health in less myopic, more effectual terms"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Oxford 2020
  • Digital
    Lynn R. Webster.
    Contents:
    It's personal : pain as a human experience
    More than a survivor : the resiliency of hope
    Caught in a web : the complexity of pain
    Friendly fire : rejecting stigma
    The new scarlet letter : addiction and recovery
    Soul mates : love amid pain
    The God prescription : spirituality and pain
    Everyday saints and unsung heroes : caregiving and care receiving
    Coming of age : self-advocacy
    The chilling effect : opioids and law enforcement
    A human right : toward curing.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Antonio L. Dans, Leonila F. Dans, Maria Asuncion A. Silvestre.
    Contents:
    Evaluation of articles on therapy
    Evaluation of articles on diagnosis
    Evaluation of articles on harm
    Evaluation of articles on prognosis
    Evaluation of systematic reviews
    Evaluation of clinical practice guidelines
    Evaluation of articles on screening
    Literature searches.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Charlotte Lindqvist and Om P. Rajora.
    Summary: Advances in genome-scale DNA sequencing technologies have revolutionized genetic research on ancient organisms, extinct species, and past environments. When it is recoverable after hundreds or thousands of years of unintended preservation, "ancient DNA" (or aDNA) is often highly degraded, necessitating specialized handling and analytical approaches. Paleogenomics defines the field of reconstructing and analyzing the genomes of historic or long-dead organisms, most often through comparison with modern representatives of the same or similar species. The opportunity to isolate and study paleogenomes has radically transformed many fields, spanning biology, anthropology, agriculture, and medicine. Examples include understanding evolutionary relationships of extinct species known only from fossils, the domestication of plants and animals, and the evolution and geographical spread of certain pathogens. This pioneering book presents a snapshot view of the history, current status, and future prospects of paleogenomics, taking a broad viewpoint that covers a range of topics and organisms to provide an up-to-date status of the applications, challenges, and promise of the field. This book is intended for a variety of readerships, including upper-level undergraduate and graduate students, professionals and experts in the field, as well as anyone excited by the extraordinary insights that paleogenomics offers.

    Contents:
    Part1. Concepts, Technical Advances and Challenges
    Chapter1. Technical Advances and Challenges in Genome-Scale Analysis of Ancient DNA
    Chapter2. Paleoproteomics: An Introduction to the Analysis of Ancient Proteins by Soft Ionization Mass Spectrometry
    Chapter3. Ancient RNA
    Chapter4. Ancient Epigenomics
    Part2.
    Chapter5. Ancient Pathogens Through Human History: A Paleogenomic Perspective
    Chapter6. Paleovirology: Viral Sequences from Historical and Ancient DNA
    Chapter7. Reconstructing Past Vegetation Communities Using Ancient DNA from Lake Sediments
    Chapter8. Archaeogenomics and Crop Adaptation
    Chapter9. Herbarium Genomics: Plant Archival DNA Explored
    Chapter10. Paleogenomics of Animal Domestication
    Chapter11. Paleogenomic Inferences of Dog Domestication
    Chapter12. Of Cats and Men: Ancient DNA Reveals How the Cat Conquered the Ancient World
    Chapter13. An Ancient DNA Perspective on Horse Evolution
    Chapter14. Primate Paleogenomics
    Chapter15. Structural Variants in Ancient Genomes
    Chapter16. Genomics of Extinction.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Michel Drancourt, Didier Raoult.
    Summary: "Only recently was it determined that two of the world's most devastating plagues, the plague of Justinian and the medieval Black Death, were caused by distinct strains of the same pathogen. Use of paleomicrobiological techniques led to this discovery. This work is just one example of the historical mysteries that this emerging field has helped to clarify. Others, such as when tuberculosis began to afflict humans, the role of lice in plague pandemics, and the history of smallpox, are explored and further illuminated in Paleomicrobiology of Humans. Led by editors Michel Drancourt and Didier Raoult, the book's expert contributors address larger issues using paleomicrobiology. These include the recognition of human remains associated with epidemic outbreaks, identification of the graves associated with disasters, and the discovery of demographic structures that reveal the presence of an epidemic moment. In addition, this book reviews the technical approaches and controversies associated with recovering and sequencing very old DNA and surveys modern human diseases that have ancient roots."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    1. Demographic Patterns Distinctive of Epidemic Cemeteries in Archaeological Samples / Sacha Kacki
    2. Characterization of the Funeral Groups Associated with Plague Epidemics / Michel Signoli
    3. Paleogenetics and Past Infections: the Two Faces of the Coin of Human Immune Evolution / Didier Raoult
    4. A Personal View of How Paleomicrobiology Aids Our Understanding of the Role of Lice in Plague Pandemics / Didier Raoult
    5. Sources of materials for Paleomicrobiology / Gerard Aboudharam
    6. Paleomicrobiology Data: Authentification and Interpretation / Michel Drancourt
    7. Human Coprolites as a Source for Paleomicrobiology / Matthieu Le Bailly
    8. Ancient Resistome / Jean-Marc Rolain
    9. The History Of Epidemic Typhus / Didier Raoult
    10. Paleopathology of Human Infections: Old Bones, Antique Books, Ancient and Modern Molecules / Olivier Dutour
    11. Past Bartonelloses / Pierre-Edouard Fournier
    12. Paleomicrobiology of Human Tuberculosis / Helen Donoghue
    13. Paleomicrobiology of Leprosy / Mark Spigelman and Mauro Rubini
    14. Past Intestinal Parasites / Matthieu Le Bailly and Adauto Araujo
    15. Paleopathology and Paleomicrobiology of Malaria / Andreas Nerlich
    16. History of Smallpox and Its Spread in Human Populations / Catherine Theves, Eric Crubezy, and Philippe Biagini
    17. Cholera / Donatella Lippi, Eduardo Gotuzzo, and Saverio Caini
    18. Human Lice in Paleoentomology and Paleomicrobiology / Rezak Drali, Kosta Y. Mumcuoglu, and Didier Raoult.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Howard H. Goldman, Richard G. Frank, Joseph P. Morrissey, editors.
    Summary: This handbook is the definitive resource for understanding current mental health policy controversies, options, and implementation strategies. It offers a thorough review of major issues in mental health policy to inform the policy-making process, presenting the pros and cons of controversial, significant issues through close analyses of data. Some of the topics covered are the effectiveness of various biomedical and psychosocial interventions, the role of mental illness in violence, and the effectiveness of coercive strategies. The handbook presents cases for conditions in which specialized mental health services are needed and those in which it might be better to deliver mental health treatment in mainstream health and social services settings. It also examines the balance between federal, state, and local authority, and the financing models for delivery of efficient and effective mental health services. It is aimed for an audience of policy-makers, researchers, and informed citizens that can contribute to future policy deliberations.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: 1. Mental Health Policy: Fundamental Reform or Incremental Change?
    2. Division of Labor: Function Shifts and Realigned Responsibilities in the Evolving Mental Health Services System / Joseph P. Morrissey / Howard H. Goldman
    3. Economic Perspectives on the Organization and Governance of Mental Health Care / Joseph P. Morrissey / Howard H. Goldman
    4. What Is the Meaning of Recovery? / Richard G. Frank / Sherry A. Glied
    5. Balancing Access to Medications and Psychosocial Treatments / Larry Davidson / Timothy Schmutte
    6. Are There Enough Inpatient Psychiatric Beds? / Patricia A. Aredn / Anna Ratzliff
    7. Mandated Community Treatment in Services for Persons with Mental Illness / Marisa Elena Domino / Eric Slade
    8. Shared Decision-Making and Self-Directed Care / Marvin S. Swartz / Jeffrey W. Swanson
    9. Suicide Prevention: Rising Rates and New Evidence Shape Policy Options / Michelle P. Salyers / Yaara Zisman-Ilani
    10. How Should the United States Respond to the Opioid Addiction and Overdose Epidemic? / Michael F. Hogan
    11. Early Intervention in Psychosis: From Science to Services / Keith Humphreys / Harold A. Pollack
    12. Policy Effects on Mental Health Status and Mental Health Care Disparities / Thomas E. Smith / Lisa B. Dixon
    13. Mental Health Insurance Parity: How Full Is the Glass? / Rupinder K. Legha / Lonnie R. Snowden / Jeanne Miranda
    14. Housing for People with Serious Mental Illness / Haiden A. Huskamp
    15. What Is the Role of Schools in the Treatment of Children's Mental Illness? / Josh Leopold
    16. Policy Issues Regarding Employment for People with Serious Mental Illness / Jeff Q. Bostic / Libby K. Nealis / Sharon A. Hoover
    17. Adults with Serious Mental Illnesses Who Are Arrested and Incarcerated / Gary R. Bond / Ellen R. Meara / Robert E. Drake
    18. Gun Violence Prevention and Mental Health Policy / Fred Osher / Michael Thompson
    19. Stigma as a Mental Health Policy Controversy: Positions, Options, and Strategies for Change / Marvin S. Swartz / Colleen L. Barry / Jeffrey W. Swanson
    20. How Shall We Promote Citizenship and Social Participation? / Bernice A. Pescosolido
    21. Evidence-Based Practices or Practice-Based Evidence: What Is the Future? / Michael Rowe / Allison N. Ponce
    22. New Financing Models in Behavioral Health: A Recipe for Efficiency or Under-Provision? / Marcela Horvitz-Lennon
    23. Mental Health Disability, Employment, and Income Support in the Twenty-First Century / Thomas G. McGuire.
  • Digital
    Michael Silbermann, editor.
    Summary: Palliative Care for Chronic Cancer Patients in the Community: Global Approaches and Future Applications offers a much-needed account of the current state of global palliative care in the community - the good, the bad and, especially, the hopeful. This extraordinary compendium, with chapters form 46 countries, edited by Professor Michael Silbermann, tells the remarkable stories of palliative care - from grass-root efforts by volunteers in resource-constrained countries such as India to the full integration of palliative care in high-resource countries such as the United States, the United Kingdom, New Zealand and Australia. What is so unique about this book is that it captures the enormous range and diversity of palliative care efforts: some led by nurses (Iran), some led by governments (Turkey) and many led by local charities and non-governmental agencies. Readers of this textbook can also learn about the challenges of a government-led palliative care initiative in the post-genocide era in Rwanda or the attempts to provide palliative care services in the conflict zones of Iraq, Palestine and Sudan. Contextual issues requiring cultural sensitivity in Afghanistan, Latin America and the Middle East present a real picture of both the exceptional leadership and environmental hardships that palliative care advocates face in their journeys forward. Each of the 53 chapters in the book tells a narrative of the country's own experience, thus creating a source of on the ground information outlining the barriers, challenges and successes as individual efforts progress. Many reports in the book point toward real change and hope as they relate to healthcare providers becoming empowered advocates for their patients. There are high expectations for the role of nurses to continue to grow. Educating and engaging patients, and the families in their care, has had a measurably positive impact on outcomes. The collaborative spirit of this book gives voice to the incredible vision, tenacity and resilience of the teams of professionals and their supporters who work in palliative care, particularly those who work in the community. In addition, it underscores that all future efforts can only be successful with the concerted and continuous commitments of governments, academics and NGOs across and within national boundaries. - HRH Princess Dina Mired President - Union for International Cancer Control (UICC).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Lieve Van den Block, Gwenda Albers, Sandra Martins Pereira, Bregje Onwuteaka-Philipsen, Roeline Pasman, and Luc Deliens.
    Summary: One of the most challenging roles of the psycho-oncologist is to help guide terminally-ill patients through the physical, psychological, and spiritual aspects of the dying process. Patients with cancer, AIDS, and other life-threatening illnesses are at increased risk for the development of major psychiatric complications, and have an enormous burden of both physical and psychological symptoms. Concepts of adequate palliative care must be expanded beyond the current focus on pain and physical symptom control to include the psychiatric, psychosocial, existential, and spiritual aspects of care. The psycho-oncologist, as a consultant to or member of a palliative care team, has a unique role and opportunity to fulfill this promise of competent and compassionate palliative care for those with life-threatening illnesses. Psychosocial Palliative Care guides the psycho-oncologist through the most salient aspects of effective psychiatric care of patients with advanced illnesses. This handbook reviews basic concepts and definitions of palliative care and the experience of dying, the assessment and management of major psychiatric complications of life-threatening illness, including psychopharmacologic and psychotherapeutic approaches, and covers issues such as bereavement, spirituality, cultural sensitivity, communication and psychiatric contributions to common physical symptom control. A global perspective on death and palliative care is taken throughout the text, and an Appendix provides a comprehensive list of international palliative care resources and training programs. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Palliative Care for Older People : An introduction
    A public health perspective to palliative care for older people: An introduction
    Organization of and policies for palliative care for older people
    Long-term Care Systems
    Development of palliative care in long-term care
    Development of integrated person-centred care in long-term care
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Africa
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Asia
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Australia
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Europe
    Policies on palliative care for older people in North America
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Latin America and the Caribbean
    Socio-cultural and clinical context of dying in old age
    Dying in place in old age: public health challenges
    Symptoms and trajectories experienced by older people approaching and at the end of life: Implications to care
    End-of-life decisions for older patients who are approaching death
    Ethical issues in palliative care for older people
    Cultural issues in palliative care for older people
    Spirituality and spiritual palliative care in older people
    Use and access of palliative care for older people
    Use of generalist and specialist palliative care for older people
    Compassionate communities: Caring for older people towards the end of life
    Palliative care for older people with dementia
    Collaboration between professionals as a necessary condition for palliative care
    Communication and advanced care planning (ACP) in older people
    Innovations in palliative care for older people
    EU civil society initiatives to protect the right to live and die in dignity
    Care pathways for older people in need of palliative care
    A program for advance care planning for older people: Respecting Patient Choices
    Conclusion: What does a public health approach to improving palliative care in older people look like?
    A public health approach to improving palliative care for older people
    Digital Access Oxford 2015
  • Digital
    Massimo Romanò, editor.
    Summary: This book analyzes the main topics of Palliative Care in Cardiac Intensive Care Units (CICU), from the changing epidemiology of patients admitted to the ICU, to the main clinical and ethical issues. The changing epidemiology of patients has led to new and emerging patient needs at the end of life. Care has shifted from acute coronary syndrome patients towards elderly patients, with a high prevalence of non-ischemic cardiovascular diseases and a high burden of non-cardiovascular comorbid conditions: both increase the susceptibility of patients to developing life-threatening critical conditions. These conditions are associated with a significant symptom burden, high mortality rate, and increased length of stay. The main new challenges involve shared decision-making, symptom control (pain, dyspnea, etc.), and ethical issues (withholding/withdrawing life sustaining treatments, deactivation of implanted cardiac devices, palliative sedation), all of which necessitate formal education on end-of-life care. Written by opinion leaders in their respective fields, who share their experience with improving the cultural and clinical competence of medical/nursing teams, this volume is chiefly intended for cardiologists, anesthesiologists, palliative care doctors and nursing staff.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    About the Author
    1: Epidemiology and Patterns of Care in Modern Cardiac Intensive Care Units
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Is There a Background for the Evolution of CICU? From the Blitz-3 to Modern International CICU Registries
    1.3 Aging, Comorbidity, and the Risk of Futility in CICU
    1.4 The COVID-19 Tsunami and Its Effect on CICU
    1.5 Conclusions
    References
    2: The Intensive and Advanced Treatments in the Cardiac Intensive Care Units
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Cardiac Arrest and Post-cardiac Arrest Syndrome 2.3 Advanced Heart Failure and End-Stage Heart Failure
    2.4 Cardiogenic Shock (CS) and Low-Output Syndrome
    2.5 Mechanical Circulatory Supports (MCSs)
    2.6 Heart Replacement Therapies
    2.7 Cardiac Implanted Electronic Devices (CIEDs)
    2.8 Palliative Care in CICU
    2.9 Palliative Inotrope Care
    References
    3: Symptom Assessment and Management
    3.1 The Cardiologist's Palliative Competencies
    3.2 Measuring a Symptom
    3.2.1 Dyspnea
    3.2.2 Pain
    3.2.3 Thirst
    3.3 Cognitive and Mood Disorders
    3.3.1 Fatigue
    3.3.2 Gastrointestinal Symptoms
    References 4: The Meanings of Prognosis: When and How to Discuss It?
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Deciding Between Prognosis and Uncertainty
    4.3 Criteria for Prognosis Definition
    4.4 Communicating Prognosis
    4.5 Barriers to Communication
    4.5.1 The Disease
    4.5.2 The Patient
    4.5.3 Treatment Approach
    4.5.4 The Doctor
    4.6 Conclusions
    References
    5: Informed Consent, Advance Directives, and Shared Care Planning
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Legal and Ethical Aspects
    5.3 Shared Care Planning and Advance Directives in Cardiology
    5.4 Conclusions
    References 6: Withholding or Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatments
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Forgoing Life-Sustaining Treatments: The Clinical Practice
    6.3 Physician Preferences
    6.4 Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatment: Arguments in Favor
    6.5 Withholding Life-Sustaining Treatment: Arguments in Favor
    6.6 Withdrawing or Withholding Life-Sustaining Treatments: Means or Goals?
    6.7 Forgoing Life-Sustaining Treatments: How to Do
    6.7.1 Ethical Principles
    6.7.2 Decision to Forgo Life-Sustaining Treatments: Theoretical Approach 6.7.3 Decision to Forgo Life-Sustaining Treatments: The Goals
    6.7.4 Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatments: Basics in Clinical Practice
    6.8 Conclusions
    References
    7: Deactivation of Cardiac Implantable Electronic Devices (CIEDs) at the End of Life
    7.1 Introduction
    7.2 Implantable Cardioverter-Defibrillators (ICDs)
    7.2.1 Ethical Problems
    7.2.2 Information and Patient Awareness
    7.2.3 The Opinion of Physicians and Nurses
    7.3 Cardiac Pacemaker (PM)-Cardiac Resynchronisation Therapy-Pacemaker (CRT-P)
    7.4 Conclusions
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Kathleen O. Lindell, Sonye K. Danoff, editors.
    Summary: This book details the benefits of palliative care to improve the lives of patients with serious lung disease and their caregivers. Palliative care is specialized medical care for people living with a serious illness. This type of care is focused on providing relief from the symptoms and stress of a serious illness, and is often described as "an extra layer of support" for patients and their caregivers, as patients with malignant and nonmalignant lung disease experience great symptom burden and have advanced care planning needs. This book has three main objectives: Define the role of palliative care in advanced lung disease Incorporate a patient-centered perspective in describing symptom burden and interventions to improve quality of life Provide current initiatives to expand evidence-based practice and improve access to palliative care Written by leading experts in palliative care and respiratory medicine, the chapters seek to answer those objectives by first defining and describing palliative care, advanced lung disease, and inadequate palliative care in this patient population. Patient reported outcomes, quality of life, and interventions to help deal with the psychological toll of serious illness are then detailed, as well as pharmacological and non-pharmacological interventions for symptom management. Detailed information is additionally provided on current research studies and management for several lung diseases, including COPD, ILD, Lung Cancer, Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension, Neuromuscular disease, and pediatric lung disease. The more administrative aspects of palliative care programs are then covered with an example of a specialty palliative care program for advanced lung disease and advice on how to address policy that promotes palliative care. Finally, palliative care's role during a pandemic is thoughtfully considered. This book is an ideal guide for clinicians, nurses, hospital administrators, teachers, students to help them understand and fill unmet care needs that many patients with serious lung disease experience.

    Contents:
    Palliative Care in Lung Disease
    An Introduction to Advanced Lung Disease
    Inadequate Palliative Care in Lung Disease
    Patient-Centeredness & Patient Reported Measures (PRM) in Palliation of Lung Disease
    Quality of Life in Chronic Lung Disease
    Breathlessness
    Preparatory and anticipatory grief, anxiety and depression in life-limiting lung disease
    Symptom Management in Advanced Lung Disease
    Communication in Palliative Care
    Palliative Care in COPD
    Palliative care in interstitial lung disease
    The Role of Palliative Care in Lung Cancer
    Palliative care in patients with neuromuscular diseases
    Palliative Care in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Palliative Care for Children with Lung Diseases
    Specialty Palliative Care Program ILD
    Withdrawal of Mechanical Ventilation: Considerations to Guide Patient and Family Centered Care and the Development of Health Care Policy
    Palliative Care during a Pandemic.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bernd Alt-Epping, Friedemann Nauck, editors.
    Summary: Palliative care provides comprehensive support for severely affected patients with any life-limiting or life-threatening diagnosis. To do this effectively, it requires a disease-specific approach as the patients? needs and clinical context will vary depending on the underlying diagnosis. Experts in the field of palliative care and oncology describe in detail the needs of patients with advanced cancer in comparison to those with non-cancer disease and also identify the requirements of patients with different cancer entities. Basic principles of symptom control are explained, with careful attention to therapy for pain associated with either the cancer or its treatment and to symptom-guided antineoplastic therapy. Complex therapeutic strategies for palliative cancer patients are highlighted that involve both cancer- and symptom-directed options and address a range of therapeutic aims. Issues relating to drug use in palliative cancer care are fully explored, and a separate section is devoted to care in the final phase. A range of organizational and policy issues are also discussed, and the book concludes by considering likely future developments in palliative care for cancer patients. Palliative Care in Oncology will be of particular interest to palliative care physicians who are interested in broadening the scope of their disease-specific knowledge, as well as to oncologists who wish to learn more about modern palliative care concepts relevant to their day-to-day work with cancer patients.

    Contents:
    1. Disease-specific oncology - disease-specific palliative care
    2. Oncological and palliative care for patients with lung cancer and patients with breast cancer: two opposite ends of a spectrum
    3. Palliative care for patients with haematological malignancies
    4. Definition, pathophysiology, and assessment of pain
    5. Therapy of cancer-related pain and cancer therapy-related pain
    6. Radiation therapy in patients with non-curable cancer
    7. Symptom management: the nursing view
    8. The Liverpool Care pathway for the dying patient
    9. The final phase
    10. Options and problems of drug application in patients with advanced cancer
    11. Drug interactions in palliative cancer care and oncology
    12. Outpatient and inpatient structures: what does it need to integrate palliative care services?
    13. Early palliative care
    14. Psycho-oncology and palliative care: two concepts that fit into comprehensive cancer care
    15. Cancer therapy in developing countries: the role of palliative care
    16. Emergencies in oncology and crises in palliative care
    17. Palliative care for patients participating in experimental or clinical oncology studies
    18. The future of oncology palliative care.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Joanne Wolfe, Barbara L. Jones, Ulrika Kreicbergs, Momcilo Jankovic, editors.
    Summary: This textbook is the first to focus on comprehensive interdisciplinary care approaches aimed at enhancing the wellbeing of children with cancer and their families throughout the illness experience. Among the topics addressed are the epidemiology of pediatric cancer distress, including physical, emotional, social, and spiritual dimensions; the role of the interdisciplinary team; communication and advance care planning; symptom prevention and management; care at the end of life; family bereavement care; and approaches to ease clinician distress. The contributing authors are true experts and provide guidance based on the highest available level of evidence in the field. The book has not only an interdisciplinary but also an international perspective; it will appeal globally to all clinicians caring for children with cancer, including physicians, nurses, psychosocial clinicians, and chaplains, among others.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of suffering in childhood cancer
    Impact of cancer on the child, parents, siblings and community.- The interdisciplinary oncology team and the role palliative care consultation.- Communication in pediatric palliative oncology
    The relationship between cancer-directed therapy and the pediatric oncology experience
    Easing physical distress
    Easing psychological distress
    Easing existential distress
    Easing social distress
    Care at the end of life
    Family bereavement Care
    Easing clinician distress.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Marianne Matzo, Deborah Witt Sherman.
    Summary: Palliative Care Nursing, Fifth Edition, delivers advanced empirical, aesthetic, ethical and personal knowledge. This new edition brings an increased focus on outcomes, benchmarking progress, and goals of care. It expounds upon the importance of the cross-disciplinary collaboration introduced in the previous edition. Every chapter in Sections I, II, and III includes content written by a non-nursing member of the interprofessional team. Based on best-evidence and clinical practice guidelines, this text presents comprehensive, targeted interventions responsive to the needs of palliative and hospice patients and family. Each chapter contains compassionate, timely, appropriate, and cost-effective care for diverse populations across the illness trajectory.

    Contents:
    Understanding Palliative Care
    Caring for the whole Person and His or Her Family
    Physical Health: Threatening Diseases
    Physical Health: Symptom management.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by Neha Vapiwala, Joshua Jones, Kavita Dharmarajan.
    Summary: Offering practical, comprehensive coverage of the many nuanced technical and clinical aspects of this growing field, Palliative Radiation Oncology provides up-to-date clinical guidance in a thorough yet concise manner. In an easy-access format, it integrates basic science, pathologies, and research with clinical applications, covering different ways to approach problems, tumor assessment, precise target definition, and dosing-specific guidelines to minimize side effects/toxicities while balancing with desired outcomes.

    Contents:
    Foundations and principles of palliative care in oncology
    Techniques and modalities
    Foundations and principles of palliative radiation by body site or special population
    Management of symptoms and treatment-related toxicities.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Kate Aberger, David Wang, editors.
    Summary: Rooted in everyday hospital medicine, Palliative Skills for Frontline Clinicians addresses the challenges of delivering complex care to patients living with serious illnesses. Spanning emergency medicine, internal medicine, surgery and various subspecialties, each chapter reads like a story, comparing usual care with a step-by-step palliative-based approach. This case-based book features a multidisciplinary, palliative-trained authorship, including neurologists, nephrologists, emergency physicians, surgeons, intensivists, and obstetricians. Divided into four parts, Palliative Skills for Frontline Clinicians outlines common clinical scenarios across settings and specialties to highlight unmet needs of patients with potentially terminal illnesses. Each case is broken down into the usual standard approach, and delves into detail regarding different palliative interventions that can be appropriate in those scenarios. These are meant to be practice changing; down to the actual words used to communicate with patients. In addition to the books focus on the principles of palliative care and the "art" of treating the patient, approaches to communication with the patients families for the best long-term outcomes are discussed. Concise and pragmatic, Palliative Skills for Frontline Clinicians is meant to be practice changing. It provides readers with both a new conceptual framework, as well as actual words to communicate with patients and medication doses for symptom management. It is an invaluable resource for non-palliative trained clinicians who wish to strengthen their palliative care skills.

    Contents:
    Part I: Emergency Medicine
    High Yield Approach to the ED Goals of Care Conversation
    A Palliative Approach to End Stage COPD
    This POLST Makes No Sense
    Treating Pain and Prognosticating in Metastatic Cancer
    Complex Pain Management and Goals of Care in a Debilitated Cancer Patient
    To Intubate or Not to Intubate: Ask the Right Questions
    ED Approach to the Hospice patient
    Part II: Inpatient Internal Medicine
    "We cant let him starve": Artificial Nutrition in Patients with Advanced Dementia
    Shared Decision-Making in the Setting of a Large Ischemic Stroke
    Prognostication and Goals of Care in Advanced Parkinsons Disease
    Saying Yes to Aggressive Measures: The Role of Neuropalliative Care in Critically Ill Patients with Potential for Recovery
    "I am a Fighter": Recognizing and Responding to Cancer Metaphors
    "What does the awake ventilated patient really want?": Shared-decision making in the ICU
    A Mothers Love
    Support Despite Disagreeing with Goals of Care
    End-Stage Renal Disease and Shared Decision-Making Dilemmas
    Discontinuing Continuous Renal Replacement Therapy (CRRT) in the Intensive Care Unit
    Teaching Learners How to Approach Family Decisions as a Process
    Part III: Surgery
    Trach/PEG Consult in the ICU
    Rescinding DNR Orders in the Operating Room
    A Threshold Moment, Preserving Patient Dignity, and the Value of a Time Limited Trial
    Between a Rock and a Hard Place: Anticipating Poor Surgical Outcomes while Honoring Patient Autonomy
    Surgery for the Hospice Patient: When is it Appropriate?
    Non-Operative Approach To Caring For The Ischemic Limb
    Placing a Feeding Tube in a Patient with Dementia
    Malignant Bowel Obstruction In A Dying Patient: To Operate Or Not?
    Geriatric Trauma Decision-Making Based on Functional Outcomes
    Part IV: Specialty Medicine
    Decision by Surrogates for a Patient with a Psychiatric History
    Palliative Approach to Patients with Concurrent Seriou s Illness and Substance Use Disorder
    Responding To Spiritual Suffering And Hope During A Goals Of Care Conversation
    Trisomy 18: Early And Concurrent Palliative Care Enhances Delivery And Neonatal Planning
    Navigating Colleagues and Parents in the Pediatric ICU.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Matthias W. Wichmann, Guy Maddern, editors.
    Summary: Palliative surgery can greatly contribute to improving symptom control and quality of life for terminal cancer patients. Owing to the advanced stage of the disease, however, this type of surgery is also associated with significant morbidity and mortality. It is therefore important for surgeons to have a sound understanding of the medical and scientific background underlying treatment decisions in palliative surgery, a foundation that this book provides. The opening chapters examine the relationship between palliative medicine and palliative surgery and address general issues including pain management and anesthesiological considerations. The role of palliative surgery in a wide range of disease settings is then thoroughly explored, including detailed information on surgical techniques and their indications and outcomes. This book will be an invaluable resource for all who wish to learn more about the emerging role of palliative surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Bernhard Reichert.
    Contents:
    Basic principles
    Shoulder complex
    Elbow complex
    Hand
    Hip and groin region
    Knee joint
    Foot
    Soft tissues
    Posterior pelvis
    Lumbar spine
    Thoracic spine and thoracic cage
    Cervical spine
    Head and jaw.
  • Digital
    Bernhard Reichert.
    Contents:
    Basic principles
    Shoulder complex
    Elbow complex
    Hand
    Hip and groin region
    Knee joint
    Foot
    Soft tissues
    Posterior pelvis
    Lumbar spine
    Abdominal Regional
    Thoracic spine and thoracic cage
    Cervical spine
    Head and jaw.
  • Digital
    Christophe Le Tourneau, Maud Kamal, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Rationale for Precision Medicine Clinical Trials.- The Key Role of Pathology in the Context of Precision Medicine Trials
    Basis for Molecular Genetics in Cancer
    Microarrays Based Molecular Profiling to Identify Genomic Alterations
    High Throughput Technologies: DNA and RNA Sequencing Strategies and Potential
    Bioinformatics for Precision Medicine in Oncology
    Assessment of Biomarkers? Predictive Value of Efficacy
    Designs for Evaluating Precision Medicine Trials
    Conclusions and Perspectives: Challenges for the Clinical Implementation of Precision Medicine Trials.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Eve Hoover, Kimberly Carter, Robyn Sears, Sarah Bolander.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
    Limited to 2 simultaneous users
  • Print
    by Dwayne A. Williams.
    Summary: Easy to follow and redesigned algorithms and charts that help to organize medicine for maximum retention, especially for visual learners. Essential information for medical examinations, important correlations for clinical rotations and useful material for practicing clinicians. Not only will you quickly establish your strengths, but you will quickly improve on your areas of weakness. -- Publisher description

    Contents:
    Cardiovascular
    Pulmonary Disorders
    Gastrointestinal/Nutritional
    Musculoskeletal/Rheumatology
    EENT (Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat) Disorders
    Reproductive, obstetrics & gynecology
    Endrocrine
    Nephrology & urology
    Neurologic disorders
    Psychiatry & Behavioral science
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Infectious Diseases
    Hematologic Disorders
    Pharmacology
    Pediatric blueprint topics.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R697.P45 W55 2017
    1
  • Print
    Williams, Dwayne A.
    Contents:
    Book A.
    1. Cardiovascular System
    2. Pulmonary system
    3. Gastrointestinal system/nutritional
    4. Musculoskeletal system
    5. EENT (eyes, ears, nose, & throat) disorders
    6. Reproductive system (male and female)
    Index
    Book B. 7. Endocrine
    8. Renal system
    9. Genitourinary system (male and female)
    10. Neurologic system
    11. Psychiatry and behavioral disorders
    12. Dermatologic system
    13. Infectious Diseases
    14. Hematologic system
    15. Pediatric pearls
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R697.P45 W55 2019
    2
  • Print
    Dwayne A. Williams.
    Contents:
    Book A.
    1. Cardiovascular System
    2. Pulmonary system
    3. Gastrointestinal system/nutritional
    4. Musculoskeletal system
    5. EENT (eyes, ears, nose, & throat) disorders
    6. Reproductive system (male and female)
    Index
    Book B. 7. Endocrine
    8. Renal system
    9. Genitourinary system (male and female)
    10. Neurologic system
    11. Psychiatry and behavioral disorders
    12. Dermatologic system
    13. Infectious Diseases
    14. Hematologic system
    15. Pediatric pearls
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R697.P45 W55 2022
    2
  • Digital
    Kulwinder Dua, Reza Shaker, editors.
    Contents:
    Elevated Amylase and Lipase: Physiology Including Non-Pancreatitis Related Elevations
    Acute Pancreatitis
    Chronic Pancreatitis
    Recurrent Acute Pancreatitis
    Steroid-Responsive Chronic Pancreatitides: Autoimmune Pancreatitis and Idiopathic Duct Centric Chronic Pancreatitis
    Pancreas Adenocarcinoma and Ampullary Cancer
    Neuroendocrine Tumors of the Pancreas
    Cystic Lesions of the Pancreas
    Bile Duct: Brief Anatomy, Investigations Used
    Gallstone Disease
    Choledocholithiasis including Acute Cholangitis
    Benign Biliary Strictures
    Cholangiocarcinoma
    Autoimmune Liver Diseases: Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Gallbladder Cancer
    Motility Disorders. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Abha Goyal, Rema Rao, Momin T. Siddiqui, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on all aspects of pancreatic pathology, from key features of benign and malignant lesions to diagnostic pearls for differential diagnosis of encountered entities in pancreatobiliary fine needle aspirations and small biopsies. Chapters include a brief introduction and a practical approach to diagnose benign and malignant lesions. The key cytomorphologic features and main differential diagnoses are also summarized in concise tables. Richly colored images complement the text and represent key findings pertaining to the text discussion. An important and current chapter on molecular testing proves to be very useful for the readership for their daily practice in this era of targeted therapy. Written by experts in the fields, all authors contribute their collective experience of preeminent cytopathology service spanning a long time span. Pancreas and Biliary Tract Cytohistology serves as a practical resource for cytotechnologists, cytopathologists and pathologists who are practicing cytopathology and rendering diagnoses on small biopsy samples on pancreatic lesions.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Editors; Contributors;
    1: Indications and Techniques of Fine-Needle Aspiration of the Pancreas; Introduction; Diagnostic EUS; EUS-FNA; EUS-FNA Techniques; Position and Number of Passes; Needle Choice; Histology and Fine-Needle Biopsy; Suction; Stylet; On-Site Cytopathology; Complementary Techniques; Summary; References;
    2: Reporting of Pancreatico-biliary Cytopathology; Diagnostic Categories; Nondiagnostic; Negative; Atypical; Neoplastic; Neoplastic: Benign; Neoplastic: Other; Suspicious for Malignancy; Positive/Malignant; Risk of Malignancy Impact of Pap Society GuidelinesReferences;
    3: Cytology of Normal Pancreas; Introduction and Approach to Pancreaticobiliary Fine-Needle Aspiration; Anatomy and Embryology of Pancreas; Cytology of Normal Pancreas; Benign Ductal Cells; Important Cytologic Features; Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis and Pitfalls; Benign Acinar Cells; Important Cytologic Features; Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis and Pitfalls; Islet Cells; Important Cytologic Features; Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis and Pitfalls; Contamination; Important Cytologic Features Benign Duodenal EpitheliumBenign Gastric Epithelium; Benign Mesothelial Cells; Benign Hepatocytes; Differential Diagnosis and Pitfalls; Approach to Pancreatic EUS-FNA Cytology; References;
    4: Nonneoplastic Solid Mass Lesions of the Pancreas; Introduction; Chronic Pancreatitis; Background; Imaging and Gross Findings; Key Cytomorphologic Features; Key Histologic Features; Differential Diagnosis; Autoimmune Pancreatitis; Background; Imaging and Gross Findings; Key Cytomorphologic Features; Key Histologic Features; Differential Diagnosis; Paraduodenal Groove Pancreatitis; Background Imaging and Gross FindingsKey Cytomorphologic Features; Key Histologic Features; Intrapancreatic Accessory Spleen; Background; Imaging and Gross Findings; Key Cytologic Features; Histologic Features; Differential Diagnosis; Intrapancreatic Reactive Lymph Node; Key Cytomorphologic Features; Sarcoidosis; Background; Key Cytologic Features; Histologic Features; References;
    5: Pancreatic Ductal Adenocarcinoma and Its Variants; Introduction and Clinical Presentation; Radiographic Features and Fine Needle Aspiration; Pancreatic Cancer Precursors: Pancreatic Intraepithelial Neoplasia (PanIN) Important Cytologic FeaturesHistologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis (Cytology and Histology); Ancillary Testing and Molecular Signature; Ductal Adenocarcinoma, Conventional Type; Important Cytologic Features; Well-Differentiated PDCA; High-Grade PDCA; Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis; Ancillary Testing and Molecular Signature; Undifferentiated (Anaplastic) Carcinoma; Important Cytologic Features and Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis; Ancillary Testing and Molecular Signature; Undifferentiated Carcinoma with Osteoclast-Like Giant Cells
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Duck-Jong Han, Takashi Kenmochi, Yi-Ming Shyr, editors.
    Summary: This book is the first to provide a thorough overview of the experience of pancreas transplantation in Asian countries, including in particular Korea, Taiwan, and Japan. Recent trends are identified and attention drawn to differences in comparison with the United States and Europe. Such differences relate, for example, to the history of pancreas transplantation, the operative procedure, and the organ-sharing system. In addition, the insulin-secreting ability of pancreatic islet cells is thought to vary depending on race. Beyond these aspects, the coverage also encompasses ABO-incompatible living donor pancreas transplantation, which is very rarely performed elsewhere in the world. By introducing the number, technique, and outcomes of pancreas transplantation in Asian countries, the book will hopefully further stimulate the pancreas transplantation program in this region and beyond. It will be of value for all medical professionals in the field and will be informative for diabetic patients receiving insulin treatment in Asia.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. History of pancreas transplantation.-a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    3. Indication of pancreas transplantation(Donor and Recipient)
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    4. Pre operative evaluation
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    5. Surgical aspect of pancreas transplantation
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    6. Post operative management(general care,immunosuppressant, graft monitoring etc)
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    7. Outcomes
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    8. Complication
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    9. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Elizabeth D. Thompson, Ralph H. Hruban, Kiyoko Oshima.
    Summary: "New in the Differential Diagnosis in Surgical Pathology series, this abundantly illustrated title helps you systematically solve tough diagnostic challenges in pancreatic and biliary pathology. It uses select images of clinical and pathological findings, together with succinct, expert instructions and diagnostic pearls, to guide you through the decision-making process. By presenting material according to the way pathologists actually work, this user-friendly volume helps you quickly differentiate commonly confused entities that have overlapping morphologic features. Presents nearly 100 differential diagnoses in pancreatic and biliary pathology, including the most common entities as well as selected rare diseases. Provides concise, bulleted summaries of clinical and pathological findings and relevant pictorial examples on the corresponding pages. Features 1,000 high-quality, full-color images of similar-looking lesions side by side for easy comparison with respect to clinicopathologic features and ancillary tests. Includes more than 30 detailed chapters on the pancreas, as well as coverage of the ampulla, extrahepatic bile duct, and gallbladder. Ideal for practicing pathologists, pathologists in training, residents, and medical students"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    John P. Neoptolemos, Raul Urrutia, James L. Abbruzzese, Markus W. Büchler, editors.
    Summary: In organizing the second edition of this renowned Handbook, Dr. Neoptolemos and his co-editors have produced and updated a revised edition to the distinguished Major Reference Work devoted to pancreatic cancer. Like its preceding edition, the second edition continues to have a widespread appeal among clinicians, pathologists and basic scientists, who are now struggling to understand this complex and rapidly expanding field. Because of the recent and vast growth in both the clinical and scientific research being done in pancreatic cancer, (there is currently an unprecedented investment by academia and industry in this field), each research's knowledge of other specialty areas outside his or her own is often quite limited. The aim of the new edition is to place the tangible advances, including new developments in surgical approaches with regards to resection techniques, the state of laparoscopic approaches, the growing impact of surgical approaches in the management of recurrent pancreatic cancer, controversies in the management of IMPN as the precursor lesion for PDAC and others - readily at hand. The second edition focuses on advances that will not become dated, and the editors have chosen authors, who are the very best in each area.

    Contents:
    Section: The Nature of Pancreatic Cancer
    Cell Cycle Machinery and Its Alterations in Pancreatic Cancer
    Animal modelling of Pancreatitis-to-Cancer Progression
    Stromal Inflammation in Pancreatic Cancer: Mechanisms and Translational Applications
    Familial Pancreatic Cancer
    Section: Clinical Management of Pancreatic Cancer
    Therapeutic Endoscopy in the Management of Pancreatic Cancer
    Controversies in Pathology Reporting and Staging
    Staging and Postoperative Outcomes Using the International Study Group of Pancreatic Surgery (ISGPS) Classifications
    Borderline Respectable Pancreatic Cancer
    New Japanese Classification of Pancreatic Cancer
    Arterial Resection in Pancreatic Cancer
    Treatment of Recurrent Pancreatic Cancer After Surgery
    Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy in Pancreatic Cancer
    Differential Therapy Based on Tumor Heterogeneity in Pancreatic Cancer
    Neoadjuvant Chemoradiation for Operable Pancreatic Cancer: the Importance of Local Disease Control
    Section: New Directions
    Development of Novel Therapeutic Response Biomarkers
    Clinical Applications of Genomics and Proteomics in Pancreatic Cancer
    Approaching Pancreatic Cancer Phenotypes via Metabolomics
    Circulating Tumour Cells
    Cancer Exosomes for Early Pancreatic Cancer Diagnosis and Role Metastasis
    Metabolism in Pancreatic Cancer
    Secondary Screening for Inherited Pancreatic Ductal Adenocarcinoma
    Role of Radiotherapy in Locally Advanced Pancreatic Cancer
    Evolution of Pancreatic Cancer Surgery
    Multiparameter Modalities for the Study of Patients in the Setting of Individualized Medicine
    Epigenetic Pharmacology
    Precision Medicine Based on Next Generation Sequencing and Master Controllers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Manoop S. Bhutani, Matthew H.G. Katz, Anirban Maitra, Joseph M. Herman, Robert A. Wolff, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the-art overview of pancreatic cancer. The text presents new data about risk factors and genetic predisposition for pancreatic cancer, highlights current screening strategies and preliminary results, and reviews diagnosis and staging of pancreatic cancer, with a focus on imaging evaluations, laparoscopy, endoscopic ultrasound-guided biopsies, and biomarkers. The book also spotlights emerging paradigms in pancreatic cancer management, such as minimally invasive surgical approaches and emerging radiation approaches, and provides valuable insight into the role of nutrition and early integration of supportive/palliative care for pancreatic cancer patients. Written by experts in the field, Pancreatic Cancer: A Multidisciplinary Approach is an invaluable resource for physicians and researchers with an interest in pancreatic cancer.

    Contents:
    Pancreatic Cancer at a Glance
    Risk Factors and Genetic Predisposition
    Pancreatic Cancer and Diabetes Mellitus
    Pancreatic Cancer Screening
    Diagnosis and Staging of Pancreatic Cancer
    Imaging Evaluations: Pancreatic Protocol CT and MRI, PET-CT
    Laparoscopy
    Role of Gastroenterologists: Endoscopic Ultrasound (EUS), EUS-guided Biopsy
    Role of Ca 19-9 in Diagnosis/Staging and Management
    Management of Locally Advanced/ Metastatic Disease
    Medical Oncology
    Radiation Oncology
    Management of Resectable and Borderline Resectable Disease
    Surgery
    Medical Oncology
    Radiation Oncology
    Endoscopic Management of Pancreatic Cancer Symptoms
    Jaundice/Biliary Obstruction: ERCP/EUS BD
    Gastric Outlet Obstruction: Antroduodenal Stenting, Venting PEG, EUS-guided Gastrojejunostomy
    Pain Control: Celiac Plexus Neurolysis
    Emerging Paradigms in Pancreatic Cancer
    Minimally Invasive Surgical Approaches
    EUS-Guided Local Therapies
    Imaging Based Biomarkers for Pancreatic Cancer
    Liquid Biopsies in Pancreatic Cancer
    Molecular Profiling and Precision Medicine for Pancreatic Cancer
    The Prospects of Immunotherapy in Pancreatic Cancer
    Microbiome in Pancreatic Cancer
    Early Drug Development in Pancreatic Cancer
    Mechanisms and Evidence on Pancreatic Cancer Prevention
    Nutrition in Pancreatic Cancer
    Prioritizing the Patient Experience: Early Integration of Supportive/Palliative Care in Pancreatic Cancer Management
    Patient Reported Outcomes and Quality of Life
    Alternative/Integrative Medicine in Pancreatic Cancer. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Sun-Whe Kim, Hiroki Yamaue, editors.
    Summary: This book provides state of the art knowledge on a broad range of clinical issues in pancreatic cancer, covering topics from screening and pathophysiology to surgical treatments. In particular, the focus is on current controversies and on evidence-based surgical techniques. Further aspects considered include the management of precancerous lesions, diagnostic methods, perioperative care and nonsurgical treatment. The description of surgical methods is supported by many helpful illustrations and important technical issues are carefully addressed. Determination of resectability and extent of surgery is also discussed. Based on recent developments in surgical techniques, some surgeons are performing more and more radical operations. It is essential, however, that surgical strategy is based on the best available evidence and surgeons will find that this book offers valuable help in achieving this aim. In addition, it will be a great asset in clinical practice for all who are involved or interested in the management of pancreatic cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Hans G. Beger, MD, FAS ; Akimasa Nakao, MD, PhD, FACS ; John P. Neoptolemos, MA, MB, BDChir, MD, FRCS, FMedSci ; Shu You Peng, MD, FACS, FRCSG, ESA ; Michael G. Sarr, MD.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    George H. Sakorafas, Vassileios Smyrniotis, Michael G. Sarr, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a thorough overview of the detection of PCNs using modern imaging techniques and a clear guide to the recognition of the different subtypes of PCN based on their radiologic and histopathologic features. This volume will serve as an excellent aid to the selection of optimal therapeutic strategies based on preoperative diagnosis. A further important feature is the emphasis placed on radiologic, clinical, and surgical correlations. Pancreatic cystic neoplasms (PCNs) have been increasingly recognized during the past decade, mainly because of the widespread use of modern imaging modalities for the investigation of often unrelated abdominal symptoms. The three most common subtypes of PCN are serous cystic neoplasms, mucinous cystic neoplasms, and intraductal papillary mucinous neoplasms. These subtypes have distinct radiologic and histopathological features, and their biological behavior differs greatly. Accurate preoperative diagnosis is of prime importance in selecting the optimal therapeutic strategy: while serous cystic neoplasms are almost always benign, and may be treated conservatively, mucinous cystic neoplasms and intraductal papillary mucinous neoplasms have malignant potential, warranting an aggressive surgical approach, i.e., pancreatectomy. Pancreatic Cystic Neoplasms will be of great interest to surgeons, gastroenterologists, radiologists, oncologists, and pathologists, and also to internists and residents in these specialties.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Classification
    Serous cystic neoplasms
    Mucinous cystic neoplasms
    Intraductal Papillary Mucinous Neoplasms
    Rare cystic neoplasms
    Diagnostic evaluation
    Imaging
    Cross sectional Imaging
    US, CT, MRI
    Endoscopic ultrasonography
    ERCP / MRCP
    Intraductal ultrasonography / ductoscopy
    FNA and analysis of the cystic fluid
    Cytology
    Biochemical analysis
    Treatment
    Indications for surgery
    Surgical treatment
    Adjuvant therapy
    Follow-up
    Prognosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Atif Zaheer, Elliot K. Fishman, Meredith E. Pittman, Ralph H. Hruban, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Miriam Ramírez-Domínguez.
    Contents:
    Historical Background of Pancreatic Islet Isolation / Miriam Ramírez-Domínguez
    The Different Faces of the Pancreatic Islets / Midhat H.Abdulreda, Rayner Rodriguez-Diaz, Over Cabrera, Alejandro Caicedo, Per-Olof Berggren
    Isolation of Mouse Pancreatic Islets of Langerhans / Miriam Ramírez-Domínguez
    Pancreatic Islets: Methods for Isolation and Purification of Juvenile and Adult Pig Islets / Heide Brandhorst, Paul R.V. Johnson, Daniel Brandhorst
    Isolation of Pancreatic Islets from NonHuman Primates / Dora M. Berman
    Necessities for a Clinical Islet Program / Wayne John Hawthorne
    Clinical Islet Isolation / Wayne John Hawthorne, Lindy Jane Williams, Yi Vee Chew
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Mihir S. Wagh, Peter V. Draganov, editors.
    Contents:
    Classification of Pancreatic Lesions
    Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma
    Less Common Solid Tumors of Pancreas
    Cystic Lesions of the Pancreas
    Autoimmune pancreatitis
    Pancreatitis-related pancreatic masses: Chronic Pancreatitis
    Radiographic imaging
    EUS Imaging in the Diagnosis of Pancreatic Masses
    Contrast-enhanced EUS
    Endoscopic Ultrasonography: Role of EUS Sampling in Solid Pancreas Lesions
    Endoscopic Ultrasonography: Role of EUS sampling in Cystic lesions
    Role of ERCP in Diagnosing Pancreatic Masses
    Endoscopic Retrograde Cholangiopancreatography (ERCP): Pancreatoscopy for the evaluation of pancreatic neoplasia
    Recent Advances in Cytologic and Histologic Specimen Evaluation, FISH and Molecular Markers
    Evaluation and Surveillance Strategies for Patients at Increased Risk of Pancreatic Cancer
    Differential Diagnosis and Diagnostic Evaluation Algorithm
    Surgery for Solid Pancreatic Neoplasms
    Radiation Therapy for Pancreatic Cancer
    Chemotherapy
    Endoscopic therapy: ERCP based therapy
    Endoscopic therapy: EUS-based therapy
    Endoscopic Therapy of Gastric Outlet Obstruction
    Management of Cystic Lesions of the Pancreas
    Recent Advances and Novel Treatments of Pancreatic Masses.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    volume editors, Barbara A. Centeno, Jasreman Dhillon.
    Summary: "This book provides a comprehensive review of entities that may be encountered in pancreatic cytology. It is designed for cytotechnologists, pathology trainees, pathologists, and cytopathologists. It is also a useful guide for advanced endoscopists performing EUS-guided FNA, and surgeons and oncologists treating patients with pancreatic disease wanting to understand their pathology reports"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to pancreatic pathology and fine-needle aspiration cytology / Dhillon, J.
    Processing of fine-needle aspiration specimens from pancreatic lesions / Dhillon, J.
    Imaging of pancreatic tumors / Morse, B., Klapman, J.
    Normal components and contaminants / Dhillon, J.
    Non-neoplastic masses of the pancreas / Centeno, B.A., Thomas, S.
    Non-neoplastic and neoplastic cysts of the pancreas / Centeno, B.A., Thomas, S.
    Pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma / Betancourt, M., Dhillon, J.
    Non-ductal tumors of the pancreas / Dhillon, J.
    Metastases, secondary tumors, and lymphomas of the pancreas / Centeno, B.A.
    Mesenchymal tumors of the pancreas / Dhillon, J.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Digital
    Terumi Kamisawa, Hisami Ando, editors.
    Summary: From embryology to epidemiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis, complications, treatment and prognosis, this book provides a comprehensive overview and the latest evidence-based data on pancreaticobiliary maljunction (PBM), a congenital malformation in which the pancreatic and bile ducts join anatomically outside the duodenal wall. Resulting in various pathologic conditions, such as biliary cancer and pancreatitis, immediate prophylactic surgery is recommended upon diagnosis. The standard operative procedure for congenital biliary dilatation (CBD) is extrahepatic bile duct resection with bilioenteric anastomosis, but the optimal treatment of adult patients with PBM without biliary dilatation remains highly debatable. This book, written by pioneering editors and authors provides latest data, sheds new light on the disease. With abundant figures to aid understanding, Pancreaticobiliary Maljunction and Congenital Biliary Dilatation appeals to a wide readership, especially adult and pediatric surgeons, physicians including gastroenterologists and endoscopists, as well as radiologists and pathologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by David B. Adams, Peter B. Cotton, Nicholas J. Zyromski, John Windsor.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology and genetics of pancreatitis / David C Whitcomb
    Pathobiology of the acinar cell in acute pancreatitis / Stephen J Pandol
    Locoregional pathophysiology in acute pancreatitis: pancreas and intestine / Alistair BJ Escott, Anthony J Phillips, John A Windsor
    Pathophysiology of systemic inflammatory response syndrome and multiorgan dysfunction syndrome in acute pancreatitis / Pramod Kumar Garg
    Diagnosis, prediction, and classification / Efstratios Koutroumpakis, Georgios I Papachristou
    Medical treatment / Andree H Koop, Timothy B Gardner
    Nutritional treatment in acute pancreatitis / Maxim S Petrov
    Gallstone pancreatitis: diagnosis and treatment / Marsela Sina, Gregory A Coté
    Treatment of local complications / Stefan AW Bouwense, Thomas L Bollen, Paul Fockens, Marc GH Besselink for the Dutch Pancreatitis Study Group
    Treatment of systemic complications and organ failure / Alexsander K Bressan, Chad G Ball
    Specific treatment for acute pancreatitis / Li Wen, Muhammad A Javed, Kiran Altaf, Peter Szatmary, Robert Sutton
    Sequelae of acute pancreatitis / Nicholas J Zyromski, Lucas McDuffie
    History of chronic pancreatitis / Peter A Banks
    Epidemiology and pathophysiology: epidemiology and risk factors / Dhiraj Yadav, Julia Greer
    Epidemiology and pathophysiology: genetic insights into pathogenesis / David C Whitcomb
    Pancreatic stellate cells: what do they tell us about chronic pancreatitis? / Minoti V Apte, Zhihong Xu, Ron C Pirola, Jeremy S Wilson
    Autoimmune pancreatitis: an update / Thiruvengadam Muniraj, Raghuwansh P Sah, Suresh T Chari
    Etiology and pathophysiology: tropical pancreatitis / Rajesh Gupta, Sunil D Shenvi, Ritambhra Nada, Surinder S Rana, Deepak Bhasin
    Mechanisms and pathways of pain in chronic pancreatitis / Dana A Dominguez, Kimberly S Kirkwood
    Imaging of chronic pancreatitis / Ferenc Czeyda-Pommersheim, Bobby Kalb, Diego Martin
    Endoscopic ultrasonography in chronic pancreatitis / Brenda Hoffman, Nathaniel Ranney
    Pancreatic enzyme replacement therapy (PERT) / Ravi K Prakash, Alexander Schlachterman, Chris E Forsmark
    Nutritional treatment: antioxidant treatment / Ajith K Siriwardena
    Pancreatogenic diabetes: etiology, implications, and management / Dana K Andersen
    Nutrition without a pancreas: how does the gut do it? / William Lancaster, Matthew Kappus, Robert Martindale
    Endoscopic management of chronic pancreatitis / Wiriyaporn Ridtitid, Stuart Sherman
    Shocking and fragmenting pancreatic ductal stones / Rupjyoti Talukdar, Duvvur Nageshwar Reddy
    Endoscopic management: celiac plexus blockade / Vikesh K Singh
    A brief history of modern surgery for chronic pancreatitis / Michael G Sarr, Charles F Frey, Thomas Schnelldorfer
    Surgery for chronic pancreatitis: indications and timing of surgery / Philippus C Bornman, Dirk J Gouma, Jake E J Krige
    Chronic pancreatitis: surgical strategy in complicated diseases / Philippus C Bornman, Jake E J Krige, Sandie R Thomson
    Surgery for chronic pancreatitis: pancreatic duct drainage procedures / Dirk J Gouma, Philippus C Bornman
    Surgical management: resection and drainage procedures / Tobias Keck, Ulrich Wellner, Ulrich Adam
    The role of pancreatoduodenectomy in the management of chronic pancreatitis / Kristopher P Croome, Michael B Farnell
    Total pancreatectomy and islet cell autotransplantation: patient selection / Sydne Muratore, Martin Freeman, Greg Beilman
    Total pancreatectomy and islet cell autotransplantation: the science of islet cell preservation, from pancreas to liver / Appakalai N Balamurugan, Melena D Bellin
    Total pancreatectomy and islet cell autotransplantation: long-term assessment of graft function / Giuseppe Garcea, Ashley Dennison.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Timothy B. Gardner, Kerrington D. Smith, editors.
    Summary: This clinical casebook provides a comprehensive yet concise state-of-the-art review of pancreatic disease. Presented in a case-based format, each case focuses on a different varient of pancreatic disease and pancreatic cancer, with sections on diagnosis and early detection, management of the disease, and treatment of complications from the disease. The role of neoadjuvant therapy for pancreatic cancer and emerging treatment algorithms for chronic pancreatitis are also highlighted in the text. Written by experts in the field, Pancreatology: A Clinical Casebook is a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons, and researchers interested in caring for patients with pancreatic disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Andreas Musolff, Ruth Breeze, Kayo Kondo and Sara Vilar-Lluch.
    Summary: "The COVID-19 pandemic has led to a host of critical reflections about discourse practises dealing with public health issues. Situating crisis communication at the centre of societal and political debates about responses to the pandemic, this volume analyses the discursive strategies used in a variety of settings. Exploring how crisis discourse has become a part of managing the public health crisis itself, this book focuses on the communicative tasks and challenges for both speakers and their public audiences in seven areas: - establishment of discursive and political authority - official governmental and expert communication to the public - public understanding of government communication - legitimation of public health management as a 'war' - judging and blaming a collective other - cross-national comparison and rivalry - empathy and encouragement Covering global discourses from Asia, Europe, the Middle East, North and South America, and New Zealand, chapters use corpus-based data to cast light on these issues from a variety of languages. With crisis discourse already the object of fierce national and international debates about the appropriateness of specific communicative styles, information management and 'verbal hygiene', Pandemic and Crisis Discourse offers an authoritative intervention from language experts"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    List of Contributors
    Introduction, Andreas Musolff, Ruth Breeze, Kayo Kondo and Sara Vilar-Lluch
    Part I: The Discourse of Authority in a Global Crisis: Who Defines (If There Is) a Pandemic?
    1 COVID-19 Press Conferences Across Time: World Health Organization vs. Chinese Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Dennis Tay
    2 Exploring the Multimodal Representation of COVID-19 on the Official Homepage of World Health Organization (WHO): A Social-Semiotic Approach, Amir H. Y. Salama
    3 COVID-19 Representations in Political Statements: A Corpus-Driven Analysis, Alexandra Papamanoli and Themis P. Kaniklidou
    4 How Autocrats Cope with the Corona Challenge: Belarus vs. Russia, Daniel Weiss
    5 Counting Coronavirus: Mathematical Language in The UK Response to Covid-19, Lee Jarvis
    Part II: The Discourse of Crisis Management: How is the Public Meant to and How Does it Understand the Pandemic?
    6 "Coronavirus Explainers" for Public Communication of Science: Everything the Public Needs to Know, María José Luzón
    7 'COVID Warriors: An Analysis of the Use of Metaphors in Children's Books to Help them Understand Covid-19, María Muelas-Gil
    8 Corona in the Linguistic Landscape, Neele Mundt and Frank Polzenhagen
    9 Political Comedy and the Challenges of Public Communication during the Covid-19 Crisis: A Corpus-Based Study of Last Week Tonight's Coverage of the Pandemic, Virginia Zorzi
    10 Social Reaction to a New Health Threat: The Perception of the COVID-19 Health Crisis by British and Spanish Readerships, Sara Vilar-Lluch
    11 How to Pass this Exam? Dealing with COVID-19 through Metaphors in Turkish Online Public Discourse, Melike Bas and Esranur Efeoglu-Özcan
    Part III: The Discourse of 'War' against the Pandemic: How to 'Fight' COVID-19?
    12 When Wars are Good: Emotional Unpacking Anti-Coronavirus Measures, Molly Xie Pan and Joanna Zhuoan Chen
    13 Legitimising a Global Fight for a Shared Future: A Critical Metaphor Analysis of the Reportage of COVID-19 in China Daily, Yating Yu. 14 Metaphoric Framings of Fighting COVID-19, Mariana Neagu
    15 From an Invisible Enemy to a Football Match with the Virus: Adjusting the COVID-19 Pandemic Metaphors to Political Agendas in Serbian Public Discourse, Nadežda Silaški and Tatjana Đurovic
    16 Are Health Care Political Responses Gendered? A Case Study, Fabienne Baider and Maria Constantinou
    17 "War against COVID-19": Is the Pandemic as War Metaphor Helpful or Hurtful?, Andreas Musolff
    Part IV: The Discourse of Judgement and Rivalry: Blaming Other/s for the Pandemic and Comparing National Performances
    18 "Chinese Virus": A Multimodal Critical Discourse Analysis of U.S. Government Communication about COVID-19 and its Impact on Chinese and Asian Americans in the U.S., Peiwen Wang and Theresa Catalano
    19 'Those Lunatic Zombies': The Discursive Framing of Wuhan Lockdown Escapees in Digital Space, Janet Ho and Emily Chiang
    20 Identity as Crime: How Indian Media's Coverage Demonised Muslims as Coronavirus Spreader, Aaquib Khan
    21 Media Discourse in Slovenia and in the Slovenian-Italian Cross-Border Area during the COVID-19 Pandemic, Vesna Mikolic
    Part V: The Discourse of Empathy and Encouragement: How to Foster Solidarity among Doctors, Patients and Health Experts
    22 Agency in End-of-Life Conversations during the COVID-19 Pandemic, Dariusz Galasinski and Justyna Ziólkowska
    23 Doctors' Empathy and Compassion in Online Health Consultations during the COVID-19 Pandemic in Japan, Kayo Kondo
    24 "Masks aren't Comfortable or Sexy, but...": Exploring Identity Work on Dr Mike's Instagram during the First Phase of the COVID-19 Pandemic, Kim Schoofs, Dorien Van De Mieroop, Stephanie Schnurr, Haiyan Huang and Anastasia Stavridou
    25 Choosing to Stay Fit? Glocalized Ideologies of Health and Fitness during a Pandemic, Ulrike Vogl, Geert Jacobs, Karin Andersson and Jesper Andreasson
    26 Unite against COVID-19: Jacinda Ardern's Discursive Approach to the Pandemic, Marta Degani
    Index.
  • Digital
    Hervé Tettelin, Duccio Medini, editors.
    Summary: This open access book offers the first comprehensive account of the pan-genome concept and its manifold implications. The realization that the genetic repertoire of a biological species always encompasses more than the genome of each individual is one of the earliest examples of big data in biology that opened biology to the unbounded. The study of genetic variation observed within a species challenges existing views and has profound consequences for our understanding of the fundamental mechanisms underpinning bacterial biology and evolution. The underlying rationale extends well beyond the initial prokaryotic focus to all kingdoms of life and evolves into similar concepts for metagenomes, phenomes and epigenomes. The books respective chapters address a range of topics, from the serendipitous emergence of the pan-genome concept and its impacts on the fields of microbiology, vaccinology and antimicrobial resistance, to the study of microbial communities, bioinformatic applications and mathematical models that tie in with complex systems and economic theory. Given its scope, the book will appeal to a broad readership interested in population dynamics, evolutionary biology and genomics.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Genomic diversity and the pan-genome concept
    Chapter 1: The pan-genome: a data-drivendiscovery in biology
    Chapter 2: The prokaryotic species concept and challenges
    Chapter 3: Bacterial guide on how to design a diversified gene portfolio
    Chapter 4: A review of pan-genome tools and recent studies
    Part 2: Evolutionary biology of pan-genomes
    Chapter 5: Structure and dynamics of bacterial populations: pan-genome ecology
    Chapter 6: Bacterial microevolution and the pan-genome
    Chapter 7: Pan-genomes and selection: the public goods hypothesis
    Chapter 8: A pan-genomic perspective on the emergence, maintenance and predictability of antibiotic resistance
    Part 3: Pan-genomics: an open, evolving discipline
    Chapter 9: Metapangenome: at the crossroad of pangenomics and metagenomics
    Chapter 10: Pan-genome flux balance analysis towards pan-phenomes
    Chapter 11: Bacterial epigenomics: epigenetics in the age of population genomics
    Chapter 12: Eukaryotic pan-genomes
    Chapter 13: Computational strategies for eukaryotic pan-genome analyses.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Antonio Egidio Nardi, Rafael Christophe R. Freire, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Eric Sowey, Peter Petocz.
    Contents:
    Part I Introduction
    Why is statistics such a fascinating subject?
    How statistics differs from mathematics
    Statistical literacy- essential in the 21st century
    Statistical inquiry on the web
    Part II Statistical description
    Trustworthy statistics are accurate, meaningful and relevant
    Let's hear it for the standard deviation!
    Index numbers- time travel for averages
    The beguiling ways of bad statistics I
    The beguiling ways of bad statistics II
    Part III Preliminaries to inference
    Puzzles and paradoxes in probability
    Some paradoxes of randomness
    Hidden risks for gamblers
    Models in statistics
    The normal distribution: history, computation and curiosities
    Part IV Statistical inference
    The pillars of applied statistics- estimation
    The pillars of applied statistics- hypothesis testing
    'Data snooping' and the significance level in multiple testing
    Francis Galton and the birth of regression
    Experimental design- piercing the veil of random variation
    In praise of Bayes
    Part V Some statistical byways
    Quality in statistics
    History of ideas: statistical personalities and the personalities of statisticians
    Statistical eponymy
    Statistical 'laws'
    Statistical artefacts
    Part VI Answers
    Answers to the chapter questions.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Peter Lanzer, editor.
    Summary: Vascular management and care has become a truly multidisciplinary enterprise. As a result of scientific progress, the number of specialists involved in the treatment of patients with vascular diseases is steadily increasing. While in the past, treatments were delivered by individual specialists, in the twenty-first century a team approach is without doubt the most effective strategy. Depending on the clinical manifestations, cardiologists, cardiac surgeons, vascular specialists, angiologists, radiologists, vascular surgeons, neurologists, neurointerventionalists, lipidologists, blood coagulation specialists, and diabetologists, to name but a few, may be involved. In order to promote professional excellence in this dynamic and rapidly evolving field, a shared knowledge base and interdisciplinary standards need to be established. PanVascular Medicine, 2nd edition℗ℓhas been designed to offer such an interdisciplinary platform, providing vascular specialists with state-of-the-art descriptive and procedural knowledge. Basic science, diagnostics, and therapy are all comprehensively covered. In a series of succinct, clearly written chapters, renowned specialists introduce and comment on the current international guidelines and present up-to-date reviews of all aspects of vascular care.℗ℓ℗ℓ℗ℓ℗ℓ℗ℓ

    Contents:
    Knowledge and Skills
    PanVascular domain
    Vascular Biology, Molecular Biology and Genetics
    Clinical Vascular Physiology and Pathophysiology
    Prevention
    Vascular Diagnosis
    X-ray Angiography and Venography
    Epidemiology and Risk Factors
    Nosology
    Coronary Artery Disease
    Cerebrovascular Disease
    Peripheral Artery Disease
    Vascular Disease of the Lungs
    Vascular Disease of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Renovascular Disease
    Urogenital Vascular Disease
    Peripheral Venous Disease
    Vascular Pharmacology
    Catheter-based and Surgery-related Management Instrumentation
    Access, Hemostasis
    Coronary ? Interventional
    Coronary: Surgery
    Cerebrovascular ? Interventional
    Cerebrovascular: Interventional
    Aortic: Interventional Surgery
    Aortic, Visceral: Interventional
    Aortic, Visceral: Surgery
    Peripheral, Arterial
    Interventional
    Peripheral, Arterial ? Surgery
    Peripheral, Venous . Interventional and Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Martha Bishop Pitman, Lester James Layfield.
    Contents:
    Overview of Diagnostic Terminology and Reporting
    Category I: Non-Diagnostic
    Category II: Negative (for Malignancy)
    Category III: Atypical
    Category IV: Neoplastic-Benign
    Category IV: Neoplastic-Other
    Category V: Suspicious (for Malignancy)
    Category VI: Positive or Malignant
    Appendix A: Template for Cyst Diagnosis
    Appendix B: Mucinous Etiology
    Appendix C: Useful Ancillary Tests.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Shantanu Bhattacharya, Sanjay Kumar, Avinash K Agarwal, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides an overview of the recent advances in the field of paper microfluidics, whose innumerable research domains have stimulated considerable efforts to the development of rapid, cost-effective and simplified point-of-care diagnostic systems. The book is divided into three parts viz. theoretical background of paper microfluidics, fabrication techniques for paper-based devices, and broad applications. Each chapter of the book is self-explanatory and focuses on a specific topic and its relation to paper microfluidics and starts with a brief description of the topics physical background, essential definitions, and a short story of the recent progress in the relevant field. The book also covers the future outlook, remaining challenges, and emerging opportunities. This book shall be a tremendous up-to-date resource for researchers working in the area globally.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors; 1 A Historical Perspective on Paper Microfluidic Based Point-of-Care Diagnostics; Abstract; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Paper Microfluidics: Historical Perspective; 1.3 Outline; References; 2 Fluid Transport Mechanisms in Paper-Based Microfluidic Devices; Abstract; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Fluid Transport; 2.2.1 Classical Lucas-Washburn Equation (Capillary Flow); 2.2.2 Darcy's Law for Fluid Flow; 2.2.3 Fluid Transport in the Porous Media of Varying Cross Section/Arbitrary Shape; 2.2.4 Radial Fluid Transport in Porous Media 2.2.5 Diffusion-Based Fluid Transport; 2.2.6 Lateral Flow Immunoassay (LFIA); 2.3 Summary; References; 3 Fabrication Techniques for Paper-Based Microfluidic Devices; Abstract; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Fabrication Methods; 3.2.1 2D Fabrication Methods; 3.2.2 Flexographic Printing; 3.2.3 3D Fabrication Methods; 3.3 Comparison of Various Fabrication Methods; References; 4 Flow Control in Paper-Based Microfluidic Devices; Abstract; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Fluid Flow Through Porous Substrates; 4.2.1 Lucas-Washburn Equation; 4.2.2 Darcy's Equation for Fluid Flow 4.2.3 Richard's Equation for Partially Saturated Flows; 4.3 Controlling the Fluid Flow in Paperfluidic Devices; 4.3.1 Techniques to Achieve Flow Control Without Valves; 4.3.1.1 Changing the Channel Dimensions; 4.3.1.2 Creation of Alternate Flow Paths; 4.3.1.3 Changing the Surface Wettability; 4.3.1.4 Changing the Properties of the Porous Substrate; 4.3.1.5 Increasing the Resistance to Fluid Flow Using Physicochemical Barriers; 4.3.1.6 Electrostatic Interactions Between Device Components; 4.3.1.7 Varying the Channel Dimensions for Specific Introduction of Reagents 4.3.2 Techniques to Achieve Flow Control Utilizing Valve-Like Tools; 4.3.2.1 Dissolvable Species; 4.3.2.2 Mechanical Tools Which Connect or Disconnect Channels; 4.3.2.3 Wax-Based Valves; 4.3.2.4 Fluidic Diodes; 4.3.2.5 Automatically Actuated External Valves; 4.4 Challenges to Translation of Flow Control-Based Paperfluidic Devices; References; 5 Paper Microfluidic Based Device for Blood/Plasma Separation; Abstract; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Physiological Hemodynamics and Porous Media Hemodynamics; 5.3 Recent Advances in Paper Based Blood Plasma Separation Devices; 5.4 Summary and Future Perspectives
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    edited by Norman P. Salzman.
    Contents:

    v. 1. The Polyomaviruses.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QR406 .P36
    1
  • Digital
    Jianghui Hou.
    Summary: The Paracellular Channel: Biology, Physiology and Disease serves as the first volume to offer a cohesive and unifying picture of the critical functions of paracellular channels (tight junctions) in different tissues. This new class of ion channel utilizes a completely different mechanism to create ion passage pathways across the cell junction. This volume outlines common principles that govern the organization and regulation of these diverse cellular structures, describes the methodology of study, and highlights the pathophysiologic consequence of abnormal structure and functions of the paracellular channels in human diseases. Coverage includes biochemical, biophysical, structural, physiologic analyses of the paracellular channel, and new technologies for recording and characterization.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Paracellular channel formation
    Paracellular channel recording
    Paracellular cation channel
    Paracellular anion channel
    Paracellular water channel
    Paracellular channel in organ system
    Paracellular channel in human disease
    Paracellular channel as drug target
    Paracellular channel evolution
    Perspective.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Howard Friel and Sally Frautschy.
    Contents:
    Monotargeting versus multitargeting
    The Pleiotropic pharmacology of plant polyphenols
    Primary prevention of Alzheimer's disease
    Secondary prevention of Alzheimer's disease
    Treatment mechanisms in mild to moderate Alzheimer's disease
    Pleiotropic theory
    Dose-adherence and intent-to-treat.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Gaafar Ragab, Luca Quartuccio, Hadi Goubran, editors.
    Summary: This book presents paraproteinemia and the highly complex scientific information behind it to clinicians in a way they can understand and, ultimately, apply to their diagnostic and treatment practices. Paraproteinemia or dysproteinemia is characterized by the overproduction of an immunoglobulin by clonal expansion of cells from the B cells lineage which includes the plasma cells. The resultant monoclonal protein can be composed of the entire immunoglobulin or of its components. The identification and categorization of the different representatives of this group of disorders have traveled a long distance, but despite its high prevalence there is surprisingly limited evidence, in some areas, to guide the best clinical practice both at the time of diagnosis and during follow up. This book seeks to fill that gap. The book is divided into three sections, introductory chapters, disease entities and experimental therapies. The text guides clinicians through these diseases and disorders. The group of renal diseases attributed to deposition of monoclonal immunoglobulins or their components are arranged as one disease category in order to simplify the understanding of these complicated diseases in plasma cell dysplasia. In emulation of this practical approach, at a larger scale, the volume editors and chapter authors attempt to encompass the whole spectrum of the paraproteinemias in this text. This will have the dual benefit of offering the audience a panoramic view of this group of disorders and simultaneously keeping them focused on its individual representatives. There have been many recent advances in diagnosis, risk stratifications, and management of many members of this group of diseases and they are explored in depth here. This is an ideal guide for rheumatologists, hematologists, nephrologists, immunologists, oncologists, and relevant trainees caring for patients with paraproteinemia and related disorders.

    Contents:
    The phenomenon of Paraproteinemia
    B Cell in Health and Disease
    Immunoglobulins, structure and function
    The Bone marrow as a hotbed for Plasma Cell activation
    Animal Models in Monoclonal Immunoglobulin Related Diseases
    An Approach to The Diagnosis of Paraproteinemia
    Amyloidosis: Pathogenesis, types and diagnosis
    Amyloidosis: Clinical Manifestations and Treatment
    Primary Light Chain (AL) Amyloidosis
    Monoclonal Immunoglobulin Deposition Disease
    Multiple Myeloma
    Monoclonal Gammopathy of Undetermined Significance (MGUS) & Highlight on Monoclonal Gammopathy of Neurological Significance (MGNS)
    Monoclonal Gammopathy of Renal Significance: An Insight
    Waldenstrom Macroglobulinemia
    IgG4 Related Disease Overview: Pathology, Clinical picture and Treatment
    Type I cryoglobulinemia
    Paraproteinemias associated with Autoimmune Diseases
    Infections and Paraproteinemia
    Paraproteinemia In Autoinflammatory Diseases
    Paraproteins associated with malignancy
    Monoclonal Gammopathies with Miscellaneous Associations
    Novel and Experimental Clone-directed Therapies
    Non-Pharmacological Management of Paraproteinemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Heinz Mehlhorn, Sven Klimpel, editors.
    Summary: Rivers are the "blood vessels" of all living organisms on earth - they live in the water, drink the water or use it to spread into new regions in order to avoid overcrowding in specific locations. Since the early beginnings of human life on earth, riverbanks have been used as settlement sites, to provide food and for transport. However, since the oldest human cultures many agents of diseases have also spread along these rivers. Written by leading international parasitologists and physicians, this book discusses the involvement of rivers in the spread of diseases, but also their contributions to the development and destruction of human cultures. Examining past and current data, it shows how important and vulnerable river regions are and how they are increasingly endangered by pollution.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Important rivers and their worldwide contributions to epidemics on earth
    Chapter 2: Conquering the God of Plague in China: a tale of over 60 years
    Chapter 3: Cholera (Blue skin disease) and its history
    Chapter 4: Spreading of cholera along rivers in early times of the USA before detection of the agents of disease
    Chapter 5: Human cercarial dermatitis (HCD) or swimmer's itch along rivers and lakes
    Chapter 6: Blood sucking leeches
    not only nasty but also dangerous and helpful
    Chapter 7: Important foodbornetrematodiases in Lower Mekong River Basin
    Chapter 8: Important protozoan diseases in Lower Mekong River Basin
    Chapter 9: Free-living amoebae and associated drug resistant bacteria in surface waters-A public health concern?
    Chapter 10. Nile River, Impact on Human Health in Egypt from Pharaohs until now
    Chapter 11: Epidemic status of schistosomiasis control in Guangdong province. Chapter 12: Konna
    a help for a self-help project at the Niger River in Mali
    Chapter 13: Leishmaniasis in Israel and Palestinian territories
    Chapter 14: Past and present of tropical diseases in the Amazon river
    Chapter 15: Brazil's big river projects and their impact on the occurrence of tropical diseases
    Chapter 16: The major rivers and the genesis of the recent area of ticks Ixodes persulcatus in Western Siberia
    Chapter 17: The Main River and Main-Danube Canal
    a hub for Ponto-Caspian parasite invasion
    Chapter 18: "Father Rhine"
    from the Alps to the North Sea
    Chapter 19: The River Rhine as hotspot of parasite invasions
    Chapter 20: Free-living amoebae in rivers and ponds and their multiple role in environmental health.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Christopher Peacock, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, WA, Australia.
    Contents:
    The eukaryotic pathogen databases : a functional genomic resource integrating data from human and veterinary parasites
    From sequence mapping to genome assemblies
    Sequencing and annotation of mitochondrial genomes from individual parasitic helminths
    A beginners guide to estimating the non-synonymous to synonymous rate ratio of all protein-coding genes in a genome
    Exploiting genetic variation to discover genes involved in important disease phenotypes
    Identification and analysis of ingi-related retroposons in the trypanosomatid genomes
    Approaches for studying mRNA decay mediated by SIDER2 retroposons in Leishmania
    Gene suppression in schistosomes using RNAi
    Construction of Trypanosoma brucei illumina RNA-seq libraries enriched for transcript ends
    Techniques to study epigenetic control and the epigenome in parasites
    The genome-wide identification of promotor regions in Toxoplasma gondii
    RNA-seq approaches for determining mRNA abundance in Leishmania
    Protein microarrays for parasite antigen discovery
    A transposon-based tool for transformation and mutagenesis in Trypanosomatid protozoa
    Separation of basic proteins from Leishmania using a combination of free flow electrophoresis (FFE) and 2D electrophoresis (2-DE) under basic conditions
    Proteomic analysis of posttranslational modifications using iTRAQ in Leishmania
    Large-scale differential proteome analysis in Plamsmodium falciparum under drug treatment
    Use of ¹³C stable isotope labelling for pathway and metabolic flux analysis in Leishmania parasites
    Molecular genotyping of Trypanosoma cruzi for lineage assignment and population genetics
    Screening Leishmania donovani complex-specific genes required for visceral disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sven Klimpel, Thomas Kuhn, Julian Münster, Dorian D. Dörge, Regina Klapper, Judith Kochmann.
    Summary: This textbook provides a comprehensive, reliable and practical guide to the dissection and parasitological examination of marine fish and cephalopods. The first part provides a general introduction, presenting basic information on: parasitology, ecology of the marine environment, history and methods of fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the ecology of marine fish and cephalopods and the impact of parasites on hosts. In turn, the second part provides general information on the morphology and anatomy of marine fish and cephalopods using the example of abundant morphotypes (including e.g. habitus photos of the body cavity and internal organs). The third part covers the relevant parasitic groups, their ecology (e.g. lifecycles, transmission), related diseases, and detection. The fourth part, a comprehensive methods section, provides essential protocols and applications of common dissection methods (for roundfish, flatfish and cephalopods) and stomach content analyses, as well as parasite preservation, preparation and molecular identification. Basic calculations of the most common infection and ecological parameters are also introduced. The book's fifth and final part provides information on health risks associated with fish and cephalopod consumption, as well as the prevention of human infection through the correct handling and processing of fish samples. The appendix provides e.g. blank sheets for recording fish dissections and parasitological examinations.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Anatomy and morphology of fish and cephalopods
    Chapter 3. Parasitic groups
    Chapter 4. Techniques
    Chapter 5. Food safety considerations
    Appendix
    Register.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Nico J. Smit, Niel L. Bruce and Kerry A. Hadfield.
    Summary: This book offers the first comprehensive review of parasitic Crustacea, which are among the most successful and diverse parasites. Starting with an introductory chapter, followed by an historic overview and topic-specific chapters, each presenting a different aspect of parasitic crustacean biology, it enables readers to gain a better understanding of how these parasites function and allows direct comparisons between the different parasitic crustacean groups. The authors also discuss, in depth, the adaptations and interactions that have made parasitic Crustacea as successful as they are today, covering topics ranging from the history of their discovery, their biodiversity, phylogeny, evolution and life strategies to their role as vectors, or hosts of other organisms, and their significance in ecological processes. Consisting of ten chapters from leading international experts in the field, this volume offers a one-stop resource for all researchers, lecturers, students and practitioners.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. History of Discovery of Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 3. Biodiversity and Taxonomy of the Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 4. Adaptations and Types of Crustacean Symbiotic Associations
    Chapter 5. Life Cycle and Life History Strategies of Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 6. Effects of Parasitic Crustacea on Hosts
    Chapter 7. Parasitic Crustacea as Vectors
    Chapter 8. Hypersymbionts and Hyperparasites of Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 9. Unravelling the Evolutions of the Rhizocephala: A Case study for Molecular Based Phylogeny in the Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 10. The Ecological Significance of Parasitic Crustaceans.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Monica Florin-Christensen, Leonhard Schnittger, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an in-depth yet concise overview of the most common and emerging protozoa that cause diseases in both farm animals and companion animals. As outlined in the concise introduction, pathogenic protozoans represent an evolutionary highly diverse and little understood group of disease-causing microorganisms. For each of the featured parasitic unicellular eukaryotes, it discusses the morphology, lifecycle, epidemiology and host-pathogen interactions. In addition, the book highlights the latest developments in diagnostic methods, as well as prevention and treatment strategies. Thorough information on genomes and genetic manipulation strategies for some of the protozoa covered in this book is also included. Infections involving parasitic protozoa can cause productivity losses and/or reduce the quality of life of infected animals. Some infections are zoonotic, posing an on-going public health threat. In most cases, prevention and treatment are either non-existent or need considerable improvement. On the other hand, a great deal of research has recently been conducted on these organisms, yielding valuable new information on their global distribution and revealing the mechanisms of host-pathogen interactions at the molecular level - and essential insights that can be used for the development of new control tools. This book includes extensive information on both basic aspects and recent scientific discoveries on these protozoa and thus constitutes a unique resource for students, veterinarians, and researchers alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    College of American Pathologists Microbiology Resource Committee ; Bobbi S. Pritt.
    Summary: "User-friendly guide containing more than 70 full-color identifications of parasites commonly found in the clinical laboratory plus detailed descriptions of the most significant morphologic elements, ecology, and clinical significance."-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    volume editor, Maria Luisa Brandi.
    Contents:
    Primary hyperparathyroidism / Masi, L.
    Asymptomatic primary hyperparathyroidism / Clarke, B.L.
    Normocalcemic hyperparathyroidism / Corbetta, S.
    Familial and hereditary forms of primary hyperparathyroidism / Cetani, F., Saponaro, F., Borsari, S., Marcocci, C.
    Familial hypocalciuric hypercalcemia and neonatal severe hyperparathyroidism / Vannucci, L., Brandi, M.L.
    Parathyroid carcinoma / Cetani, F., Pardi, E., Marcocci, C.
    Nonparathyroid hypercalcemia / Goltzman, D.
    Secondary and tertiary hyperparathyroidism / Messa, P., Alfieri, C.M.
    Hypoparathyroidism / Hakami, Y., Khan, A.
    Classification of hypoparathyroid disorders / Cianferotti, L.
    Clinical presentation of hypoparathyroidism / Giusti, F., Brandi, M.L.
    Inactivating PTH/PTHrP signaling disorders / Mantovani, G., Elli, F.M.
    Conventional treatment of hypoparathyroidism / Marcucci, G., Brandi, M.L.
    A new era for chronic management of hypoparathyroidism : parathyroid hormone peptides / Marcucci, G., Brandi, M.L.
    Digital Access Karger 2019
  • Digital
    Mahmoud F. Sakr.
    Summary: The book offers a comprehensive overview of all parathyroid gland disorders both, benign and malignant. It emphases established concepts, presents the ongoing controversies, challenges and debates on diagnosis and treatment of different parathyroid gland disorders, with a view of clarifying some uncertainties, making suggestions to resolve others, and establishing strategies to reach therapeutic success.In addition to general information on parathyroid gland embryology, surgical anatomy, histology and physiology, the chapters explore hyperparathyroidism, osteitis fibrosa cystica, hypoparathyroidism, hungry bone syndrome, the importance of calcium in the human body and differential diagnosis of hypercalcemia. The last chapters investigate post-thyroidectomy hypocalcemia, thyroid cancer, recent intra-operative localizing tools, and illustrate new techniques of parathyroidectomy, as well as parathyroid transplantation. The book will be an invaluable and indispensable source of knowledge and reference for all specialists and trainees entrusted with the care of patients suffering from parathyroid disease.

    Contents:
    Parathyroid Glands: Historical Review
    Embryology of the Parathyroid Gland
    Surgical Anatomy of the Parathyroid Gland
    Histology of the Parathyroid Gland
    Physiology of the Parathyroid Gland
    Calcium: Why is it Important? Hyperparathyroidism (HPT)
    Osteitis Fibrosa Cystica
    Hypoparathyroidism
    Metabolic Syndromes of Parathyroid Failure
    Hungry Bone Syndrome
    Post-thyroidectomy Hypocalcemia: Incidence and Risk Factors
    Post-thyroidectomy Hypocalcemia: Clinical Presentation
    Post-thyroidectomy Hypocalcemia: Prevention
    Parathyroid Transplantation
    Parathyroid Cancer
    Intra-operative tools in Parathyroidectomy
    Parathyroidectomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Adrian Covic, David Goldsmith, Pablo A. Ureña Torres, editors.
    Summary: This concise book provides practical strategies to help nephrologists and endocrinologists correctly diagnose and treat the various forms of parathyroid disease they may encounter in the management of chronic kidney disease. Each chapter deals with various topics related to parathyroid gland anatomy and physiology, as well as diagnostic tests and their particularities in regard to chronic disease. The book highlights the range of therapies used for the treatment of secondary hyperparathyroidism, and critically analyses the latest research in the field. Providing an up-to-date review of the current literature, including innovations in both medical and surgical treatment and current indications for parathyroidectomy, this practice-oriented book is an excellent resource for nephrologists, endocrinologists, endocrine surgeons and family medicine physicians.

    Contents:
    Parathyroid glands in CKD: anatomy, histology, physiology and molecular biology in CKD
    PTH regulation by the Klotho/FGF23 axis in CKD
    Parathyroid Imaging in Patients with Renal Hyperparathyroidism
    PTH regulation by phosphate and miRNAs
    Relation between PTH and biochemical markers of MBD
    Effect of PTH on the Hematologic System
    Control of secondary hyperparathyroidism (SPHT) by older and newer vitamin D compounds
    Parathyroidectomy in Chronic Kidney disease
    Relation between PTH and the risk of mortality in CKD.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Karen Bearss, Cynthia R. Johnson, Benjamin L. Handen, Eric Butter, Luc Lecavalier, Tristram Smith, and Lawrence Scahill.
    Summary: The RUBI Autism Network has developed and tested a structured parent training manual for children with autism spectrum disorder and disruptive behaviours. The manual is based on principles of applied behaviour analysis and is designed for therapists to use with parents of children with autism spectrum disorder and co-occurring challenging behaviours, such as tantrums, noncompliance, difficulties with transitions, and aggression.
    Digital Access Oxford [2018?]
  • Digital
    Karen Bearss, Cynthia R. Johnson, Benjamin L. Handen, Eric Butter, Luc LeCavalier, Tristram Smith, Lawrence Scahill
    Summary: "Parent training for disruptive behavior is an 11-session intervention for parents who wish to learn how to reduce disruptive behaviors and increase adaptive skills in their children with ASD. Each session introduces effective behavior change strategies and includes easy-to-use worksheets, checklists, and take-home activities to help parents apply what they have learned. By participating in this intervention with a trained therapist, parents can help their children overcome behavior problems, promoting happier kids and families."--Back cover
    Digital Access Oxford 2018
  • Digital
    Suanne Kowal-Connelly.
    Summary: "Puberty is tough on kids--and maybe even more so on parents! Parenting Through Puberty explains the physical and emotional changes you can expect to see in your child. Dr. Kowal-Connelly covers the nitty-gritty of adolescents' changing bodies, and, critically, addresses the emotional toll puberty can take, covering issues of moodiness, body image, and self-esteem. Dr. Kowal-Connelly's reassuring advice also includes ways to encourage your tween or teen to embrace a healthy, active lifestyle in these crucial years, with tips on exercise and nutrition"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I. The physical changes. The basics of physical growth during puberty
    Body image is everything
    Variations of puberty growth and growing pains
    Part II. The emotional changes. Understanding the emotional and intellectual stages of puberty
    Moodiness, depression, and anxiety: what parents need to know
    The value of your child's one-on-one time with the pediatrician
    Part III. A time to value health and wellness. Taking control of weight issues
    Living with a chronic condition
    The effects of puberty on exercise and sports performance
    Caring about health and wellness
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Print
    by B.C. Gruenberg...
    Contents:
    v
    .1. For parents of children under school age.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    O656 .G88
    1
  • Digital
    Shiri Sadeh-Sharvit and James Lock.
    Contents:
    Understanding the risk of the offspring of parents with eating disorders
    The broader context of the transition to parenthood in adults with eating disorders and their partners / Shiri Sadeh-Sharvit, Madeline R. Sacks, James D. Lock
    The development of typical and atypical feeding and eating processes in children and youth / Shiri Sadeh-Sharvit, Madeline R. Sacks, James D. Lock
    Two families seeking help
    Overview of parent-based prevention
    Adapting parent-based prevention to diverse family structures and backgrounds
    Treatment planning and real-time evaluation using assessment tools
    Phase one : setting up joint goals
    Session 1 : gearing up
    Session 2 : the family meal
    Session 3 : embracing change
    Phase two : distinguishing the parental eating disorder from parental functioning
    Session 4-5, 7-8 : individual sessions with the affected parent
    Session 6 : a conjoint meeting with both parents
    Phase three : enhancing parental efficacy and family resilience
    Parent-based prevention in action : Stacey and Rob
    Parent-based prevention in action : Dave and Gabby.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Giuseppe Vallar and H. Branch Coslett.
    Summary: "The Parietal Lobe, Volume 151, the latest release from the Handbook of Clinical Neurology series, provides a foundation on the neuroanatomy, neurophysiology and clinical neurology/neuropsychology of the parietal lobe that is not only applicable to both basic researchers and clinicians, but also to students and specialists who are interested in learning more about disorders brought on by damage or dysfunction. Topics encompass the evolution, anatomy, connections, and neurophysiology, the major neurological and neuropsychological deficits and syndromes caused by damage, the potential for improvement via transcranial stimulation, and the role of the parietal in the cerebral networks for perception and action"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Neuro-anatomy and neurophysiology of the parietal lobe. The history of the neurophysiology and neurology of the parietal lobe
    The evolution of the parietal lobe: rats, monkeys, apes and humans
    Cortico-cortical and cortico-subcortical connections of the parietal lobe
    Somatosensory maps
    The parietal lobe and pain perception
    The parietal lobe and the vestibular system
    Multisensory and sensorimotor maps
    The parietal lobe "reach" region
    Section 2: Neurological and neuropsychological deficits after parietal lobe damage. Somatosensory deficits
    Pain syndromes and the parietal lobe
    Optic ataxia
    Simultanagnosia and balint's syndrome
    Perceptual deficits of object identification: the apperceptive agnosias
    Unilateral spatial neglect
    Disorders of body knowledge
    Constructional apraxia
    Limb apraxia
    Language deficits
    Memory deficits
    Gerstmann's syndrome
    Parietal lobe epilepsy
    Transcranial stimulations of the parietal lobe for improving neurological deficits
    Section 3: The parietal lobe and brain networks for action and perception
    The "dorsal" parietal stream
    Action systems in the human brain
    Parietal lobe and tool use
    Parieto-frontal networks for eye-hand coordination and movements
    The parietal lobe and memory
    The parietal lobe "mirror" neuron system.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Dorothy L. Rosenthal, Eva M. Wojcik, Daniel F.I. Kurtycz, editors.
    Contents:
    Pathogenesis of Urothelial Carcinoma
    Adequacy of Urine Specimens (Adequacy)
    Negative for High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (Negative)
    Atypical Urothelial Cells (AUC)
    Suspicious for High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (Suspicious)
    High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (HGUC)
    Low Grade Urothelial Neoplasia (LGUN)
    Other Malignancies Primary and Metastatic and Miscellaneous Lesions
    Ancillary Studies in Urinary Cytology
    Cytopreparatory Techniques
    Clinical Management, Including Microscopic Hematuria.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Dorothy L. Rosenthal, Eva M. Wojcik, Daniel F.I. Kurtycz, editors.
    Summary: The first edition of The Paris System for Reporting Urinary Cytology introduced a completely new paradigm for detecting bladder cancer by urine cytology. This system concentrated on defining morphological characteristics of the most clinically significant form of bladder cancer, High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma. This new approach has been widely accepted throughout the world, and has become part of the daily practice of cytology. Considering that the first edition of The Paris System (TPS) introduced a new model of urinary cytodiagnosis, verification and expansion of initial material and data were anticipated. Based on evolving knowledge and readership requests, the group of highly experienced authors have created a new edition of TPS. This second edition includes areas and issues not originally covered. A new chapter on urine cytology of the upper tract, a rarely addressed topic, has been introduced. Furthermore, the issue of cellular degeneration is discussed in the criteria of all diagnostic categories. Examples of standardized reports are included in each chapter. Most importantly, a separate chapter presents data defining the risk of malignancy (ROM) for each diagnostic category to inform clinical management. New high quality images augment those of the first edition to better illustrate diagnostic clues and potential pitfalls. In addition to chapters on diagnostic criteria, current concepts of pathogenesis of bladder cancer, specimen adequacy and preparation, and ancillary tests are covered in separate chapters. A bonus to the volume is a comprehensive history of urine as the earliest diagnostic sample of human disease, richly illustrated with artworks from major museums. Written by internationally recognized authorities, this comprehensive and evidence-based guide to urine cytology is supported by the newest data confirming the original concept and significance of diagnostic criteria defining High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma. TPS is an essential tool for anyone who is practicing urinary cytology, including cytotechnologists, pathologists-in-training and practicing pathologists. This book should find a place in every cytology laboratory throughout the world. The Concept has been endorsed by the American Society of Cytopathology, and the International Academy of Cytology.

    Contents:
    Pathogenesis of Urothelial Carcinoma
    Adequacy of Urine Specimens (Adequacy)
    Negative for High-Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (Negative)
    Atypical Urothelial Cells (AUC)
    Suspicious for High-Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (Suspicious)
    High-Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (HGUC)
    Low-Grade Urothelial Neoplasia (LGUN)
    Cytology of the Upper Urinary Tract
    Other Malignancies Primary and Metastatic and Miscellaneous Lesions
    Ancillary Studies in Urinary Cytology
    Cytopreparatory Techniques
    Risk of Malignancy (ROM) and Clinical Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Myung K. Park.
    Summary: Park's Pediatric Cardiology for Practitioners is the essential medical reference book for the ever-changing field of pediatric cardiology. Comprehensive in its content, it provides the practical guidance you need to diagnose and manage children with congenital and acquired heart disease. From history and physical examination through preventative treatment and the management of special problems, the fully revised 6th edition incorporates all of the latest concepts in cardiology, distilled in a way that is understandable to pediatricians, family practitioners, NPs, and PAs alike. Apply the latest knowledge and methods with coverage of surgical techniques in pediatric cardiology, the application of interventional non-surgical techniques, blood pressure standards, and cardiac arrhythmia treatments. Easily grasp the latest techniques with helpful line drawings throughout. Select the best approaches for your patients with extensive coverage of special problems, including congestive heart failure and syncope.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Myung K. Park, Mehrdad Salamat.
    Summary: "Providing authoritative, everyday guidance in the diagnosis and management of children with congenital and acquired heart disease, Park's Pediatric Cardiology for Practitioners is the go-to reference of choice for pediatricians, family practitioners, NPs, and PAs--as well as medical students, residents, and fellows. The 7th Edition of this core text comprehensively covers every aspect of pediatric cardiology in an easy-to-read, practical manner for the non-specialist"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Basic tools in routine evaluation of cardiac patients. History taking
    Physical examination
    Electrocardiography
    Chest radiography
    Part 2: Special tools in evaluation of cardiac patients. Noninvasive imaging tools
    Other noninvasive investigation tools
    Invasive procedures
    Pathophysiology. Fetal and perinatal circulation
    Pathophysiology of left-to-right shunt lesions
    Pathophysiology of obstructive and valvular regurgitation lesions
    Pathophysiology of cyanotic congenital heart defects
    Part 4: Specific congenital heart defects. Left-to-right shunt lesions
    Obstructive lesions
    Cyanotic congenital heart defects
    Miscellaneous congenital cardiac conditions
    Vascular ring
    Chamber localization and cardiac malposition
    Part 5: Acquired heart disease. Primary myocardial disease
    Cardiovascular infections
    Acute rheumatic fever
    Valvular heart disease
    Cardiac tumors
    Cardiovascular involvement in systemic diseases
    Part 6: Arrhythmias and atrioventricular conduction disturbances. Cardiac arrhythmias
    Disturbances of atrioventricular conduction
    Cardiac pacemakers and implantable cardioverter-defibrillators in children
    Part 7: Special problems. Congestive heart failure
    Systemic hypertension
    Pulmonary hypertension
    The child with chest pain
    Syncope
    Palpitation
    Dyslipidemia and other cardiovascular risk factors
    Athletes with cardiac problems
    Cardiac transplantation
    Appendices. Miscellaneous
    Blood pressure values
    Cardiovascular risk factors
    Normal echocardiographic values
    Drugs used in pediatric cardiology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Print
    Roger L. Albin.
    Summary: "Description and discussion of the many aspects of Parkinson disease (PD) is dogged by the fact that PD is an ambiguous concept. What we call PD is an etiologically and clinically heterogeneous meta-syndrome overlapping a number of other disorders. Definitions, diagnostic criteria, and classification schema provide essential common vocabularies for communication among clinicians and researchers. Definitions, diagnostic criteria, and classification schemes for PD, however, are constructs imposed on variable and imperfectly understood disease biology. Difficulties with formulation of PD definitions, diagnostic criteria, and classification schemes include historical and contemporary use of competing definitions of PD, disease heterogeneity, the existence of disorders with overlapping clinical and pathological features, and ambiguous use of the terms disease and syndrome. For the purposes of exposition and discussion in this book, an inclusive, perhaps vague, definition of PD is employed:"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Definition, History, Nosology, and Classification
    Epidemiology
    Pathology
    Pathophysiology I : Basal Ganglia Architecture and The Standard Model
    : Pathophysiology II : Neurotransmitter System Dysfunctions
    Genetics of Parkinson Disease
    Pathogenesis
    Prodromal Parkinson Disease
    Clinical Features I : Initial Evaluation
    Clinical Features II : Non-Motor Features
    Clinical Features III : Natural History
    Pharmacology I : L-Dopa Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Pharmacology II : Treating Parkinson Disease
    Surgery
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC382 .A43 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Lars P. Klimaschewski.
    Summary: What happens in the brain when we are ageing? How does neuronal cell death occur when we become forgetful? Which new therapies are available to combat the death of brain cells? This non-fiction book informs those interested in neuroscience and medicine about the latest findings on the therapy of neurodegeneration with a focus on Alzheimer's dementia and Parkinson's disease. Supported by illustrative drawings, Lars P. Klimaschewski presents the latest developments in neurobiological research on ageing in a comprehensible way and reports exciting news from the Alzheimer's and Parkinson's laboratories worldwide. From the contents Introduction to brain development: Why do we need billions of nerve cells? What distinguishes our cerebral cortex from that of other mammals? - Ageing and neurodegenerative diseases: Why are nerve cells lost? The normal ageing process; B-synuclein: A key protein in Parkinson's disease; Dementia and Alzheimer's disease: The amyloid and tau pathology; Viral infections in neurodegenerative diseases: Does Covid-19 lead to neurodegeneration? - Saving or replacing nerve cells: Stem cell, immune or antisense therapies? The author Prof. Dr. med. Lars P. Klimaschewski is a professor at the Medical University of Innsbruck, head of the Institute of Neuroanatomy there and the author of numerous papers on neuronal degeneration and regeneration.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1 Introduction to Brain Development: Why do We Need so Many Nerve Cells?
    1.1 Neurons and Glia in the Central Nervous System
    1.2 What Happens During Brain Development?
    1.3 Evolutionarily Old Brain Parts are Simpler in Structure than the Neocortex
    1.4 What Distinguishes the Left from the Right Brain?
    1.5 Brain Development in Childhood and Adolescence
    1.6 The Child's Brain is Enormously Plastic and can Still Heal
    1.7 Is a Large Brain "Smarter" than a Small One?
    1.8 Absolute and Relative Brain Weight 1.9 With the Second Evolutionary Leap, Our Brain Reaches its Maximum Size
    1.10 Neural Stem Cells Remain Capable of Dividing for a Long Time
    1.11 The Frontal Lobe is Especially Important for Higher Brain Functions
    1.12 The Prefrontal Cortex Encodes Human Specific Properties
    1.13 Brain Performance in Comparison
    Further Reading
    2 Aging and Neurodegenerative Diseases: Why do Nerve Cells Die?
    2.1 The Normal Aging Process
    2.1.1 Mechanisms of Cellular Aging
    DNA Telomeres Determine the Number of Cell Divisions
    Aging Cells Maintain a Chronic Inflammation The Importance of Protein Homeostasis for Cellular Aging
    Self-cleaning of Nerve Cells
    Two Sides of a Coin: Oxygen Radicals
    Endogenous Radical Scavengers Protect Our Nerve Cells
    Chronic Inflammatory Processes in the Brain
    2.1.2 Neuronal Cell Death
    How do neurons die?
    2.1.3 Blood Supply of the Aging Brain
    Barrier Disorders are Not Uncommon in the Elderly
    2.2 Parkinson's Disease
    2.2.1 General Pathomechanisms
    The Problem with Parkinson's Begins in the Lower Brainstem
    2.2.2 Special Morphology of Affected Neurons
    Special Requirements for Highly Branched Neurons Many Amine-releasing Neurons are Constantly Active and Therefore More Easily Stressed
    2.2.3 Specific Causes of Parkinson's Disease
    2.2.4 Alpha-synuclein: A Key Protein in Parkinson's Disease
    Fibrils Are More Dangerous Than Aggregates
    Aggregates Are Not Only Found in Nerve Cells
    2.2.5 The Prion Theory of Parkinson's Disease
    Cranial Nerves Transport Pathological Proteins into the Brain
    The Difficulties of a Clear Pathogenesis of Parkinson's Disease
    2.3 Dementia and Alzheimer's Disease
    2.3.1 How Does Alzheimer's Disease Manifest Itself?
    2.3.2 General Pathomechanisms
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Patrik Verstreken.
    Contents:
    The neurogenetics of Parkinson's Disease and putative links to other neurodegenerative disorders / C.M. Lill, C. Klein
    Electron transport train / L. Aerts, V.A. Morais
    Mitochondrial fission and fusion / V.L. Hewitt, A.J. Whitworth
    Axonal mitochondrial transport / E. Shlevkov, T.L. Schwarz
    Mitophagy / L. King, H. Plun-Favreau
    Autophagy / P.A. Lewis, M. Perez-Carrion, G. Piccoli
    Endocytosis and synaptic function / S.F. Soukup, P. Verstreken, S. Vilain
    Neuroinflammation as a potential mechanism underlying Parkinsons Disease / C. Cebrián, D. Sulzer
    Protien translation in Parkinson's Disease / J.W. Kim, L. Abalde-Atristain, H. Jia, I. Martin, T.M. Dawson, V.L. Dawson.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joseph Jankovic, MD, Eduardo Tolosa, MD.
    Summary: Top experts from all over the world have been brought together by the editors, to give a world of expertise on this important subject, with a strong emphasis on therapy and management.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Kapil D. Sethi, Roberto Erro, Kailash P. Bhatia, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses the challenges in the differential diagnosis and management of paroxysmal movement disorders. It provides the latest information on the genetics and pathophysiology, neurophysiology and neuroimaging of the core group of disorders in the field, namely the paroxysmal dyskinesias (PxD). Focused and concise, this guide features chapters that discuss other conditions that may be paroxysmal such as, episodic ataxia, startle syndromes and other more complicated groups of paroxysmal movement disorders such as ATP1A3 spectrum disorders. A chapter on secondary (acquired) paroxysmal dyskinesia highlights medical and other disorders that may result in paroxysmal dyskinesia. The book features a particularly nuanced chapter that discusses recent discoveries in the genetic aspects of PxD, relaying that paroxysmal dyskinesias are not channelpathies, but in fact are synaptophies and transportopathies. Additionally, expertly written chapters are supplemented by high quality images, tables, and videos. Paroxysmal Movement Disorders: A Practical Guide is primarily written to educate the reader on how to make a syndromic diagnosis of paroxysmal movement disorders and how to build the diagnostic work-up accordingly, as well as how to manage patients with paroxysmal movement disorders.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Paroxysmal Dyskinesia: Definitions and Clinical Approach
    Definitions
    Clinical Approach
    References
    Chapter 2: The Early History of Paroxysmal Dyskinesias
    Earliest Descriptions of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia Were Reported as Epilepsy
    Earliest Reports That These Types of Conditions Are a Paroxysmal Disorder of Involuntary Movements
    Early Reports of Paroxysmal Hypnogenic Dyskinesia
    Early Reports of Transient Paroxysmal Dystonia/Torticollis in Infancy
    Early Reports of Paroxysmal Ataxias and Tremor
    References Chapter 3: Paroxysmal Kinesigenic Dyskinesia
    PRRT2-Related PKD
    PKD Associated with Other Genetic Conditions
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 4: Paroxysmal Non-kinesigenic Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    Epidemiology
    History
    Genetics
    Clinical Features
    Investigations
    Treatment
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: Paroxysmal Exercise-Induced Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    SLC2A1 (GLUT1)-Related Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    GCH1-Related Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    ECHS1-Related Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Deficiency
    Early-Onset Parkinson's Disease Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 6: Acquired Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    Clinical Features
    Etiology
    Autoimmune/Inflammatory
    Endocrine/Metabolic
    Hypoparathyroidism and Pseudohypoparathyroidism (HP and PHP)
    Hyperthyroidism
    Disorders of Glucose Metabolism
    Autoimmune Disorders
    Faciobrachial Dystonic Seizures (FBDS)
    Vascular
    Trauma
    Spinal Cord Lesions
    Functional (Psychogenic) Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Miscellaneous Causes
    Investigations
    Treatment
    References
    Chapter 7: Pathophysiology of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    PRRT2 PRRT2 Mice
    PNKD
    PNKD Mice
    GLUT1
    Glut1 Mice
    Other "Dyskinetic" Genes
    SCN8A
    KCNMA1
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 8: Neurophysiology of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    Neurophysiology in the Diagnosis of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Electroencephalography
    Electromyography
    Other Clinical Neurophysiology Studies
    Neurophysiology in the Pathophysiological Study of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Magnetoencephalography
    Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation
    Other Research Neurophysiology Studies
    Conclusion
    References Chapter 9: Other Paroxysmal Movement Disorders
    Introduction
    ADCY5 Mutations
    ATP1A3 Spectrum Disorders
    SCN8A Mutations
    CACNA1A Mutations
    SLC16A2 Mutations
    References
    Chapter 10: Functional Paroxysmal Movement Disorders
    Introduction
    Phenotypic Characteristics
    Associated Signs
    Diagnosis and Treatment Approach
    References
    Chapter 11: Episodic Ataxias
    Introduction
    EA1
    EA2
    EA3-EA8
    Other Paroxysmal or Episodic Disorders Presenting with Ataxia
    References
    Index
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Yuzuru Kanakura, Taroh Kinoshita, Jun-ichi Nishimura, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Nicola J. Curtin, Ricky A. Sharma, editors.
    Contents:
    History of the discovery of poly (ADP-ribose)
    Discovery of the PARP superfamily and focus on the lesser exhibited but not lesser talented members
    The role of PARPs in DNA Strand Break Repair
    TIPs: Tankyrase Interacting Proteins
    PARP and Carcinogenesis
    Multitasking roles for poly(ADP-ribosyl)ation in aging and longevity
    Overview of PARP Inhibitor Design and Optimization
    Structure Based Design of PARP Inhibitors
    Preclinical chemosensitization by PARP inhibitors
    Classification of PARP inhibitors based on PARP trapping and catalytic inhibition, and rationale for combinations with topoisomerase I inhibitors and alkylating agents
    Radiosensitisation by poly(ADP-ribose) polymerase inhibition
    The vasoactivity of PARP inhibitors
    Synthetic lethality with Homologous Recombination Repair defects
    Targeting tumour hypoxia with PARP Inhibitors: Contextual synthetic lethality
    Other determinants of sensitivity
    Synthetic sickness with molecularly targeted agents against the EGFR pathway
    Disruption of DNA repair by cell cycle and transcriptional CDK inhibition
    Resistance to PARP Inhibitors Mediated by Secondary BRCA1/2 Mutations
    PARP inhibitor resistance
    what is beyond BRCA1 or BRCA2 restoration
    Introduction to PARPi clinical trials and future directions
    Clinical trials investigating PARP inhibitors as single agents
    Clinical trials of PARP inhibitors with chemotherapy
    Combination of PARP inhibitors with clinical radiotherapy
    Biomarkers for PARP Inhibitors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Andrew Sizer, Bidyut Kumar, Guy Calcott.
    Summary: "Preface: The current format of the Part 2 MRCOG examination is now well established with the change to written papers containing single best answer (SBA) and extended matching questions (EMQs) commencing in March 2015. The Part 2 MRCOG examination is primarily concerned with testing candidates' knowledge of the entire specialty of Obstetrics & Gynaecology as defined by the RCOG curriculum. The new Part 3 examination now provides the clinical assessment. It is always preferable to enter an examination having had ample opportunity to practice the type of questions with which one will be faced. To this end we have produced this book that contains 250 SBA and 250 EMQ questions"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Andrew Sizer, Chandrika Balachander, Nibedan Biswas, Richard Foon, Anthony Griffiths, Sheena Hodgett, Banchita Sahu, Martyn Underwood.
    Contents:
    Questions. IT, Governance and Research
    Core Surgical Skills
    Postoperative Care
    Surgical Procedures
    Antenatal Care
    Maternal Medicine
    Management of Labour
    Management of Delivery
    Postnatal Care
    Gynaecological Problems
    Subfertility
    Sexual and Reproductive Health
    Early Pregnancy Problems
    Gynaecological Oncology
    Urogynaecology and Pelvic Floor Problems
    Explanations. IT, Governance and Research
    Core Surgical Skills
    Postoperative Care
    Surgical Procedures
    Antenatal Care
    Maternal Medicine
    Management of Labour
    Management of Delivery
    Postnatal Care
    Gynaecological Problems
    Subfertility
    Sexual and Reproductive Health
    Early Pregnancy Problems
    Gynaecological Oncology
    Urogynaecology and Pelvic Floor Problems .
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Albert Losken, Moustapha Hamdi ; illustrations by Jennifer N. Gentry.
    Summary: The new edition includes increased video/DVD coverage, new chapters on BRAVA tissue expansion, flaps, and increased detail on mega-filling the breast with fat. The book is published with a bundled eBook, which includes an image library so all the images can be downloaded.

    Contents:
    Part One: Evolution of oncoplastic surgery
    Fundamentals of oncoplastic breast surgery
    Current approach to oncoplastic breast surgery
    How to incorporate oncoplastic surgery into your practice
    Part Two: Principles and considerations of oncoplastic breast conservation
    Applied anatomy and breast aesthetics: definition and assessment
    Breast-conserving therapy
    Breast-conserving therapy: decision-making and anticipating the unfavorable aesthetic and functional result
    Oncologic safety of the oncoplastic approach for breast conservation surgery
    Improving the partial mastectomy deformity
    Improving the quadrantectomy defect
    Breast radiotherapy in oncoplastic surgery
    Indications and benefits of oncoplastic breast surgery
    Designing the oncoplastic operation
    Timing of the oncoplastic reconstruction: immediate, delayed, and delayed-immediate
    Psychosocial aspects of oncoplastic breast conservation
    Part Three: Immediate partial breast reconstruction
    Reduction techniques to optimize results
    Reduction and mastopexy techniques with parenchymal autoaugmentation
    Central defect reconstruction
    The role of local flaps as volume replacement in oncoplastic reconstruction
    Latissimus dorsi miniflap reconstruction
    Endoscopic latissimus dorsi flap reconstruction
    Omental flap reconstruction
    Pedicled perforator flap reconstruction
    Partial breast reconstruction using distant flaps
    Part Four: Correction of the breast-conserving therapy deformity: delayed partial breast reconstruction
    Classification and analysis of the breast-conserving therapy deformity
    Rearrangement surgery
    Correction of the breast-conserving therapy deformity using local flaps
    Perforator flap reconstruction of breast-conserving therapy deformities
    Local perforator flaps in oncoplastic breast-conserving surgery: the nottingham experience
    Breast lumpectomy reconstruction with external vacuum expansion and autologous fat grafting
    Fat grafting in the breast-conserving therapy deformity
    Can implants correct a breast-conserving therapy deformity?
    Part Five: Outcomes and future directions
    Cancer surveillance after partial breast reconstruction
    Complications and outcomes after immediate partial breast reconstruction
    Outcomes and tumor recurrence after oncoplastic surgery of the breast: eighteen-year follow-up.
  • Digital
    Cristina Baldauf, editor.
    Summary: It has long been claimed that addressing biodiversity loss and other environmental problems demands a better understanding of the social dimensions of conservation; nevertheless, the active participation of indigenous peoples and local communities (IPLCs) in conservation initiatives is still a challenging and somehow controversial issue. In this context, this book hopes to give voice to other perspectives related to biodiversity conservation beyond the "fortress conservation" model and emphasize one of the pillars of democracy - popular participation. It covers a wide range of environments and issues of special significance to the topic, such as the expansion of culturally constructed niches, protected areas and food security, community-based management, participatory agroforestry, productive restoration and biocultural conservation. The contents also explore the limitations and shortcomings of participatory practices in protected areas, the relationship between the global crisis of democracy and the decline of biocultural diversity, as well as present current discussions on policy frameworks and governance systems for effective participatory biodiversity conservation. In sum, this book provides a comprehensive and realistic perspective on the social dimensions of conservation based on a series of interrelated themes in participatory biodiversity conservation. The connections between biocultural conservation and the current political and economic environment are highlighted through the chapters and the book closes with a debate on ways to reconcile human welfare, environmental justice and biodiversity conservation.

    Contents:
    1. Concepts and evolving perspectives on biodiversity conservation
    2. Domesticated Nature: The culturally constructed niche of humanity
    3. The right to food? Protected areas, conservation and access
    4. The role of local perceptions in environmental diagnosis
    5. People and nature conservation: Participatory praxis in natural protected areas planning and management
    6. Policy trends in the recognition of indigenous and local knowledge in Amazonia
    7. Community-based management of Amazonian biodiversity assets
    8. Mariculture of macroalgae as a social and environmental alternative in traditional communities located in the semi-arid coastal region of northeastern Brazil
    9. Challenges for rural livelihoods, participatory agroforestry and biodiversity conservation in a neotropical Mexican MAB reserve
    10. Participatory monitoring of natural commons in Brazil: Lessons from the literature and the field
    11. Productive restoration as a tool for socio-ecological landscape conservation: The case of "La Montaña" in Guerrero, Mexico
    12. ATBC's conservation activities around the world: How effective have our declarations and resolutions been in driving policy change and management responses?
    13. Avoiding deforestation policies: A socio-political approach
    14. Participatory biodiversity conservation: What prospects?
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Michael T. Wright, Krystyna Kongats, editors.
    Summary: "This groundbreaking resource explores core issues in participatory health research (PHR) and traces its global emergence as a force for improving health and well-being, health care services and quality of life."--Publisher.

    Contents:
    Central ThemesIntroduction:Michael WrightBuilding Consensus, Celebrating Diversity: The Work of the International Collaboration for Participatory Health Research:Michael WrightWhat is Participatory Health Research?Michael Wright, Jane SpringettEthics in Participatory Health Research:Sarah BanksEvaluating Participatory Health Research:Nina Wallerstein, John Oetzel, Jane SpringettThe Challenges of Reviewing the Participatory Health Research Literature:Jon Salsberg, Janet HarrisChildren and Participatory Health Research:Lisa GibbsThe Role of Participatory Health Research in Training Health Professionals:Irma BritoDemonstrating Impact in Participatory Health Research:Tina Cook, Jane SpringettThe Role of Theory in Participatory Health Research:Sónia AcioliRegional PerspectivesParticipatory Health Research in Portuguese-Speaking Countries: A Review:Irma BritoPartKommPlus
    The German Research Consortium for Healthy Communities:Michael WrightParticipatory Health Research and Post-Colonial Scholarship in Latin America:Francisco MercadoParticipatory Research in Health Care Organizations in North America: A Review:Paula Bush, Jon SalsbergParticipatory Health Research for Planning Work in Sweden:Margareta RämgårdParticipatory Health Research for Improving Healthcare in the Netherlands:Tineke AbmaA History of Participatory Health Research in North America: A Look Back From Where We Are Today:Jon SalsbergParticipatory Health Research in the UK and Ireland:Jane Springett, Siobhán O'Higgins.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Atul Bhargava and Shilpi Srivastava.
    Summary: Plant breeding has played a significant role in the development of human civilizations. Conventional plant breeding has significantly improved crop yield by genetically manipulating agronomically important traits. However, it has often been criticized for ignoring indigenous germplasm, failing to address the needs of the marginal and the poor farmers, and emphasizing selection for broad instead of local adaptation. Participatory plant breeding (PPB) is the process by which the producers and other stakeholders are actively involved in a plant-breeding programme, with opportunities to make decisions throughout. The Working Group on Participatory Plant Breeding (PPBwg) was established in 1996 under the framework of the Consultative Group on International Agricultural Research (CGIAR). Research in PPB can promote informed participation and trust in research among consumers and producers, and in recent years, PPB has had a significant impact on food production by quickly and cost-effectively producing improved crop varieties. At the same time, there has been significant research in the area. PPB offers significant advantages that are particularly relevant to developing countries where large investments in plant breeding have not led to increased production, especially in the marginal environments. In addition to the economic benefits, participatory research has a number of psychological, moral, and ethical benefits, which are the consequence of a progressive empowerment of the farming communities. PPB can empower groups such as women or less well-off farmers that are traditionally left out of the development process.This book explores the potential of PPB in the coming decades. The topic is more relevant since international breeding efforts for major crops are aimed at decentralizing local breeding methods to better incorporate the perspective of end users into the varietal development process. The first book incorporating the upcoming research on this novel breeding approach, it reviews the important tools and applications of PPB in an easy-to-read, succinct format, with illustrations to clarify these complex topics. It provides readers with a basic idea of participatory plant breeding as well as advances in the field and insights into the future to facilitate the successful integration of farmers into breeding programmes. This book is a valuable reference resource for agriculturists, agricultural advisers, policy makers, NGOs, post-doctoral students and scientists in agriculture, horticulture, forestry and botany.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Arabinda Kumar Rath, Narayan Sahoo, editors.
    Contents:
    Particle Therapy in the Third Millennium Current Status and Future Outlook
    Development of Cyclotrons for Proton and Particle Therapy
    Development of C-ion Radiotherapy Technologies in Japan
    Physical rationale for protontherapy and elements to build a clinical center
    Radiation Dosimetry of Proton Beams
    Clinical pencil beam scanning: present and future practices
    Treatment planning for protons
    An essay.- Radiation Therapy with Protons and Heavy Ions
    Robustness Quantification and Worst-Case Robust Optimization in Intensity-Modulated Proton Therapy
    Modeling of Biological Effect of Charged Particles for C-Ion RT
    SFUD, IMPT and plan robustness.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Henk G. Merkus, Gabriel M.H. Meesters, Wim Oostra, editors.
    Summary: This edited volume brings together the expertise of numerous specialists on the topic of particles - their physical, chemical, pharmacological and toxicological characteristics - when they are a component of pharmaceutical products and formulations. The book discusses in detail properties such as the composition, size, shape, surface properties and porosity of particles with respect to how they impact the formulations and products in which they are used and the effective delivery of pharmaceutical active ingredients. It considers all dosage forms of pharmaceuticals involving particles, from powders to tablets, creams to ointments, and solutions to dry-powder inhalers, also including the latest nanomedicine products. Further, it discusses examples of particle toxicity, as well as the important subject of pharmaceutical industry regulations, guidelines and legislation. The book is of interest to researchers and practitioners who work on testing and developing pharmaceutical dosage and delivery systems.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Editors and Contributors; 1 Introduction; Abstract; 1.1 Objective of This Book; 1.2 Pharmaceutical Products; 1.3 Relevance of Particle and Powder Characteristics for Product Quality; 1.4 Particle, Powder and Liquid Dispersion Characteristics [54-56, 58]; 1.4.1 Composition; 1.4.2 Particle Size and Particle Size Distribution (PSD); 1.4.3 Particle Shape; 1.4.4 Particle Morphology; 1.4.5 Particle Density and Porosity; 1.4.6 Surface Area; 1.4.7 Wettability; 1.4.8 Zeta Potential; 1.4.9 Powder Packing, Density and Porosity; 1.4.10 Powder Flowability; 1.4.11 Segregation 1.4.12 Rheology of Emulsions and Suspensions [55, 60]1.4.13 Stability of Emulsions and Suspensions [55, 60]; 1.5 Measurement Methods and Techniques [52, 54, 55]; 1.5.1 Sampling [39, 57, 70]; 1.5.2 Dispersion/Dilution [40, 58]; 1.5.3 Measurement Techniques for API Concentration and Coating; 1.5.4 Measurement Techniques for Particle Characteristics; 1.5.4.1 True Skeleton Density; 1.5.4.2 Crystallinity and Crystal Structure; 1.5.4.3 Elemental Analysis; 1.5.4.4 Particle Size Distribution (PSD); 1.5.4.5 Particle Shape; 1.5.4.6 Surface Area, Porosity and Pore Size Distribution; 1.5.4.7 Wettability 1.5.4.8 Zeta Potential1.5.5 Measurement Methods for Powder Characteristics; 1.5.5.1 Bulk Density; 1.5.5.2 Flow Properties; 1.5.6 Characterization Techniques for Liquid Dispersions; 1.5.7 Characterization Techniques for Sprays; 1.6 Set up of the Book; 1.7 Definitions, Abbreviations and Symbols; References; 2 Guide to Pharmaceutical Product Quality; Abstract; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Quality by Design and Process Analytical Technology; 2.3 Guidelines for Quality Control of Drug Substances; 2.4 Analysis of PSD and Particle Shape and Acceptance Criteria; 2.5 Quality Management 2.6 Definitions, Abbreviations and SymbolsReferences; 3 Bio-nano: Theranostic at Cellular Level; Abstract; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Janus Particles, Superparticles and Core-Shell Particles; 3.2.1 Janus-Particles; 3.2.2 Superparticles; 3.2.3 Core-Shell Particles; 3.3 Overview Drug Delivery Systems (DDS); 3.4 Surface Modification; 3.4.1 Amphiphillic Micelle Structures; 3.4.2 Multidentate Polymeric Ligands; 3.4.3 Bi-functional Ligands; 3.5 Biomedical Application-Diagnostics and Therapy; 3.5.1 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI); 3.5.2 Hyperthermia; 3.5.3 Computed Tomography (CT) 3.5.4 Photothermal and Photodynamic Therapy3.6 Tumor Microenvironment; 3.7 Biodistribution and Functionalization of the DDS; 3.8 Bio-nano Interface; 3.9 Electronic Properties of Nanomaterials; 3.9.1 Luminescence of Quantum Dots; 3.10 Nanoparticles as Enzyme Mimetics; 3.11 Protein Corona; 3.12 Passive and Active Targeting; 3.13 Endocytose; 3.14 Gatekeeper; 3.15 Biorelated Degradation of the DDS; 3.16 Cancer Immunotherapy; 3.17 Limitation of the DDS; 3.18 Abbreviations; References; 4 Moving Liposome Technology from the Bench to the Oncological Patient: Towards Performance-by-Design; Abstract
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Janis Tondora, Rebecca Miller, Mike Slade, Larry Davidson.
    Contents:
    What is mental health recovery and how does it relate to person-centered care planning?
    Key principles and practices of person-centered care planning
    Preparing for the journey : understanding various types of recovery plans and orienting participants to the PCCP process
    Strength-based assessment, integrated understanding, and setting priorities
    Creating the plan through a team meeting
    Documentation of PCCP : writing the plan to honour the person and satisfy the chart
    So you have a person-centered care plan, now what?
    Plan implementation and quality monitoring
    PCCP implementation : common concerns & person-centered responses.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Laura Weiss Roberts, Daryn Reicherter, Steven Adelsheim, Shashank V. Joshi, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Andrew Loveitt, Margaret M. Martin, Marc A. Neff, editors.
    Summary: The Certified Bariatric Nurse (CBN) designation was created by the American Society for Metabolic and Bariatric Surgery to fill the rapidly growing need for nurses specialized in the care of patients undergoing weight loss surgery. This book approaches this subject area to assist nurses interested in passing the CBN exam. It can also be used as a general resource for those interested in a comprehensive but concise review of the rapidly growing field of Bariatric Surgery. This would include medical students, residents, dietitians, and other allied health professionals. Dr. Marc Neff is a recognized expert in the field of Bariatric Surgery. In his current position, his hospital is fortunate to have several CBNs caring for the Bariatric patients. With his guidance, along with several nurses who successfully completed the CBN designation, the authors have created a concise, "quick hit" review of the material required to successfully pass the exam. The format is short chapters followed by 5-10 review questions with in-depth explanations. Where appropriate, graphics are provided to highlight the essential anatomy and surgical procedures. Questions are in multiple choice format to simulate the actual CBN exam.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Marc A. Neff, editor.
    Summary: Edited by Dr. Marc Neff, Passing the General Surgery Oral Board Exam, Second Edition helps candidates prepare for the General Surgery Oral Board Exam in a different way than other review books. In addition to covering concepts frequently addressed on the test, the review also alerts you to 'common curveballs' and 'strikeouts'- the unexpected problems or seemingly benign actions (or inactions) that could result in a missed diagnosis or misdiagnosis, and thus result in failure to pass the exam. Fully updated and expanded to reflect the many changes in standards of care, this unique study guide is the first to expose the potential traps and pitfalls of the exam by providing examples of how the questions may be asked and what not to say in response.

    Contents:
    Organizational Theme / Marc A. Neff
    Breast / Linda Szczurek
    Colon and Small Bowel / Linda Szczurek, Devin C. Flaherty, and Marc A. Neff
    Abdominal Endocrine / Anna Goldenberg Sandau and Roy L. Sandau
    Head and Neck Endocrine / Anna Goldenberg Sandau and Roy L. Sandau
    Esophagus / Christina Sanders
    Genitourinary / Marc A. Neff
    Hepatobiliary / Linda Szczurek
    Pancreas / Linda Szczurek, Jonathan Nguyen, and Marc A. Neff
    Pediatric / Linda Szczurek
    Perioperative Care / Jonathan Nguyen and Marc A. Neff
    Skin and Soft Tissue / Marc A. Neff
    Stomach and Duodenum / Marc A. Neff and Devin C. Flaherty
    Thoracic / Nicole M. Harris
    Trauma and Critical Care / Leigh Ann Slater [and others]
    Vascular / Brandt D. Jones
    Conclusions: Last Curveballs Considerations / Marc A. Neff.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Haralampos M. Moutsopoulos.
    Summary: This autobiography chronicles the life and career of Haralampos M. Moutsopoulos, an internationally renowned professor of medicine and prolific researcher on Sjogrens syndrome and autoimmune rheumatic diseases. In language that is simple and direct, he takes us on a fascinating journey from the days of his first scientific awakenings at a hospital in his native town of Ioannina, Greece, through his university years in Athens and training in the U.S., to his eventual return to his homeland. In Greece, he developed two centers of excellence in his field, first at the newly founded University of Ioannina Medical School Department of Internal Medicine and, second, at the Athens University Medical School, Department of Pathophysiology, where he taught until his retirement in 2011. Along the way, he introduces us to his teachers and mentors, and to the colleagues and students he mentored in turn, many of whom went on to assume high-ranking positions in Greece and abroad. A major theme throughout the book is his impassioned struggle for excellence, meritocracy, and transparency in universities and in the National Health System in Greece. Peppered with both amusing and unsettling incidents from this lifelong crusade to raise professional standards and against misconduct, the book is a must-read for anyone interested in learning about or entering the medical profession.

    Contents:
    1. Coming of Age
    2. Student Years
    3. Young Physician
    4. In the Army
    5. Public Health Service.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Cyril Mauffrey, David J. Hak, editors.
    Contents:
    ABOUT THE FRCS
    ANATOMY
    Upper limb
    Lower limb
    Surgical approaches
    SPINE
    Spinal trauma
    Tumours
    Infections
    Stenosis
    Disc prolapse
    Scoliosis (Paediatric and adult)
    Back pain
    Ankylosing spondylitis
    Rheumatoid spine
    Spondylolisthesis
    Cervical spondylosis
    Kyphosis
    PAEDIATRICS
    DDH
    Perthes
    SCFE
    CP
    Neurofibromatosis
    Skeletal dysplasias
    Paediatric trauma
    Club feet
    Metatarsus adductus
    Congenital vertical talus
    BASIC SCIENCES
    Statistics
    Cartilage
    Bone
    Muscles
    Tendons/ligaments
    Meniscus
    Radiation
    Arthritides
    Metals
    Theatre design
    Traction
    Free body diagrams
    Gait cycle
    LOWER LIMB ARTHROPLASTY
    Hip replacement
    Knee replacement
    TRAUMATOLOGY
    Upper limb
    Lower limb
    Scores in trauma
    FOOT AND ANKLE
    Biomechanics
    Arthroscopy
    Arthritis
    Instability
    Hallux rigidus
    Hallux valgus
    Interdigital neuroma
    Neuropatic foot
    Rheumatoid foot
    Tarsal tunnel
    Lesser toe deformities
    Pes planus
    Charcot Marie Tooth
    ORTHOTICS/AMPUTATIONS/REHABILITATION
    Orthotics and braces
    Amputation
    Rehabilitation
    SPORTS
    HANDS
    Rheumatoid hand
    Tendon injuries (flexors/extensors)
    Distal radial fractures
    Scaphoid fractures
    Kienbocks disease
    Trigger fingers
    Dupuytrens disease
    DRUJ and TFCC injuries
    Concepts of tendon transfers
    Carpal instability
    CMCJ thumb arthritis
    Wrist arthritis
    Carpal tunnel syndrome
    De quervain tenosynovitis
    UPPER LIMB
    ACJ arthritis
    Sub acromial impingement
    Cuff tear
    Cuff arthropathy
    Shoulder arthritis
    Shoulder rheumatoid arthritis
    Shoulder ON
    Calcific tendinopathy
    Frozen shoulder
    SLAP
    Shoulder instability
    Elbow OA
    Rheumatoid arthritis
    Instability
    Tendinopathies
    Biceps rupture
    Elbow arthroscopy
    Elbow arthroplasty
    ONCOLOGY
    Basic concepts (classifications, biopsy...)
    Benign tumors (bone, cartilage, others)
    Malignant tumors (bone, cartilage, others)
    PHYSICAL EXAMINATIONS
    Hip
    Knee
    Shoulder
    Spine
    Elbow
    Hand
    Foot and ankle
    Gait cycle
    GEMS
    What you will not find in the books but might be asked in the exam
    UP TO DATE REFERENCES
    Per topics.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Carole Boulanger, David McWilliams, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1: The Person Before the Patient: The Importance of a Good History
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 When to Attain a Patient History in the ICU
    1.3 How to Obtain an Effective Patient History in the ICU
    1.3.1 The Clinical Frailty Scale
    1.3.2 Patient Questionnaires: Key Relative Involvement
    1.4 What a Good History Should Include in the ICU
    1.5 Why an Early, Detailed History Is Important
    1.5.1 Family: Key Relationships
    1.5.2 Mobility 1.5.3 Functional Independence and Housing
    1.5.4 Hobbies, Interests and Work
    1.5.5 Medical History
    1.5.6 Lifestyle History
    1.5.7 Understanding and Expectations
    1.6 Conclusions
    References
    2: Respiratory and Mechanical Ventilation Management: Avoidance of Complications
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Respiratory Management During Invasive Mechanical Ventilation
    2.2.1 Endotracheal Suctioning
    2.2.2 Subglottic Suctioning
    2.2.3 Humidification of Respiratory Gases
    2.3 Chest Physiotherapy
    2.3.1 Manual or Ventilator Pulmonary Hyperinflation 2.3.2 Manual Chest Compressions/Vibrations (MCC)
    2.4 Mechanical In-Exsufflation (MI-E)
    2.5 Inspiratory Muscle Training
    References
    3: Patient Care: From Body to Mind
    3.1 Introduction: Patient Care in a Critical Environment
    3.2 "Interventional Patient Hygiene"
    3.3 Bathing and Skin Integrity
    3.4 Oral Care
    3.5 Eye Care
    3.6 Pain Assessment and Nursing Care
    3.6.1 Assessment
    3.6.2 Management
    3.7 Conclusion
    References
    4: Nutrition: Calories Count
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Presence of Pre-existing Conditions on Admission to ICU 4.2.1 Chronic Co-morbidities
    4.2.2 Sarcopenia
    4.2.3 Malnutrition
    4.3 Factors Which Affect Nutritional Status During ICU Stay
    4.3.1 Metabolic Response to Critical Illness
    4.3.2 Iatrogenic Undernutrition
    4.3.3 Immobilisation
    4.4 Assessing Malnutrition in the Critically Ill Patient
    4.4.1 Nutrition Screening Tools
    4.4.2 Muscle Mass
    4.5 Strategies to Improve Physical and Functional Outcomes
    4.5.1 Targeted Nutrition Delivery
    4.5.2 Volume-Based Feeding
    4.5.3 Energy Versus Protein
    4.5.4 Exercise and Protein
    4.5.5 Supplementation 4.6 Recovery Phase of Critical Illness
    4.7 Adequacy of Nutrient Delivery
    4.7.1 Factors Influencing Nutritional Recovery
    4.8 Potential Strategies to Facilitate Optimal Nutritional Delivery in the Recovery Phase of Critical Illness
    4.8.1 Coordinated Multidisciplinary Approach to Nutritional Care
    4.8.2 Systematic Handover to Ward-Based Staff
    4.8.3 Early Involvement of Family
    4.8.4 Conclusion
    References
    5: Promoting Independence
    5.1 Introduction: What Is Dysphagia?
    5.2 Dysphagia Assessment and Screening
    5.3 Bedside Assessment
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Marzia Martina, Department of Translational Bioscience, National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa, ON, Canada, Stefano Taverna, Department of Neuroscience & Brain Technologies, Italian Institute of Technology, Genoa, Italy.
    Contents:
    1. History of electrophysiology and the patch clamp / Alexei Verkhratsky and Vladimir Parpura
    2. Whole-cell patch-clamp analysis of recombinant NMDA receptor pharmacology using brief glutamate applications / Nathan G. Glasgow and Jon W. Johnson
    3. Patch clamp combined with voltage/concentration clamp to determine the kinetics and voltage dependency on N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor open channel blockers / Chris G. Parsons and Kate E. Gilling
    4. State-of-the-art automated patch clamp: heat activation, action potentials, and high throughput in ion channel screening / Sonja Stoelzle-Feix
    5. Industrializing electrophysiology: HT automated patch clamp on SyncroPatch96 using instant frozen cells / Liudmila Polonchuk
    6. Planar patch clamp for neuronal networks
    considerations and future perspectives / Alessandro Bosca, Marzia Martina, and Christophe Py
    7. Methods for the study of synaptic receptor functional properties / Enrica Maria Petrini and Andrea Barberis
    8. Single cell RT-PCR, a technique to decipher the electrical, anatomical, and genetic determinants of neuronal diversity / Maria Toledo-Rodriguez and Henry Markham
    9. Whole-cell voltage clamp on skeletal muscle fibers with the silicone-clamp technique / Romain Lefebvre, Sandrine Pouvreau, Claude Collet, Bruno Allard, and Vincent Jacquemond
    10. Multiphoton imaging approaches for studying striatal dendritic excitability / Joshua L. Plotkin and D. James Surmeier
    11. Investigation of synaptic microcircuits using patch-clamp paired recordings in acute brain slices / Giovanni Russo and Stefano taverna
    12. Outside-out "sniffer-patch" clamp technique for in situ measures of neurotransmitter release / Émilie Muller-Chrétien
    13. A cost-effective method for preparing, maintaining, and transfecting neurons in organotypic slices / Cary Soares, Kevin F.H. Lee, Denise Cook and Jean-Claude Béïque
    14. Acute brain slice methods for adult and aging animals: application of targeted patch clamp analysis and optogenetics / Jonathan T. Ting, Tanya L. Daigle, Qian Chen and Guoping Feng
    15. Synaptic connectivity in engineered neuronal networks / Peter Molnar, Jung-Fong Kang, Neelima Bhargava, Mainak Das and James J. Hickman
    16. Modeling of action potential generation in NG108-15 cells / Peter Molnar and James J. Hickman
    17. Whole-cell patch-clamp recordings in freely moving animals / Albert K. Lee, Jâerãome Epsztein and Michael Brecht
    18. Pressure-polished borosilicate pipettes are "universal sealer" yielding low access resistance and efficient intracellular perfusion / Marco Aquila, Mascia Benedusi, Anna Fasoli and Giorgio Rispoli
    19. Current recordings at the single channel level in adult mammalian isolated cardiomyocytes / Romain Guinamard, Thomas Hof, and Laurent Sallâe
    20. Dynamic clamp as a tool to study the functional effects of individual membrane currents / Géza Berecki, Arie O. Verkerk, Antoni C.G. van Ginneken and Ronald Wilders
    21. Dynamic clamp in cardiac and neuronal systems using RTXI / Francis A. Ortega, Robert J. Butera, David J. Christini, John A. White and Alan D. Dorval II
    22. Ion selectivity of pore-forming peptides and ion channels measured in xenopus oocytes / Thierry Cens and Pierre Charnet
    23. Principles of single-channel kinetic analysis / Feng Qin.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jean-Marie Lachappelle, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Summary: This third edition of the essential guide has been extensively revised and updated and includes additional color illustrations. It reflects the rapid expansion in knowledge of the subject due to progress in the chemical, immunological, and clinical fields.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface to Fourth Edition
    Introductory Remarks
    Nomenclature: A Few Definitions
    Xenobiotics
    Haptens
    Modifications of Molecules [3]
    An Updated Overview of the Skin Barrier Structure and Function
    References
    Contents
    Contributors
    Abbreviations
    Part I: Patch Testing
    Chapter 1: Pathophysiology of Allergic and Irritant Contact Dermatitis
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Pathophysiology of Irritant and Allergic Skin Inflammation
    1.2.1 Irritant and/or Allergic Chemicals
    1.2.2 Skin Irritation: Activation of Innate Immunity
    1.2.2.1 Innate Immunity 1.2.2.2 Skin Irritation: Mechanisms of Action
    1.2.2.3 Direct Responsibility of the Chemical in ICD
    1.3 Skin Allergy: The Role of Specific Immunity
    1.3.1 Antigen-Specific Immunity
    1.3.2 Skin Allergy: Mechanisms of Action
    1.3.3 Indirect Responsibility of Chemicals in Skin Irritation
    1.4 Pathophysiology of Skin Inflammation: The Connection Between Innate and Acquired Immunity
    References
    Chapter 2: Diseases for Which Patch Testing Is Recommended: Patients Who Should Be Investigated
    2.1 Allergic Contact Dermatitis
    2.1.1 Clinical Signs and Symptoms 2.1.2 Histopathological Features
    2.1.2.1 Epidermal Lesions
    2.1.2.2 Dermal Changes
    2.2 Allergic Contact Dermatitis Syndrome
    2.2.1 Stage 1 of ACDS
    2.2.1.1 Morphological Aspects
    2.2.1.2 Topographical Variants
    2.2.2 Stage 2 of ACDS
    2.2.3 Stage 3 of ACDS
    2.2.3.1 Stage 3A of ACDS
    2.2.3.2 Stage 3B of ACDS
    2.3 Allergic Contact Dermatitis Versus Irritant Contact Dermatitis: Criteria for Differential Diagnosis
    2.4 Other Skin Diseases in Which Patch Testing Is of Major Interest
    2.5 Algorithmic Approach: Key Role of Patch Testing 2.6 Hand Dermatitis: Definition and Procedures Applied in Differential Diagnosis
    2.6.1 Hand Dermatitis: Exogenous and Endogenous Factors
    2.6.2 A Classification of Hand Dermatitis
    2.6.3 Tools of Investigation
    2.6.4 Hand Dermatitis: Some Examples of an Algorithmic Approach
    2.6.5 Hand Eczema: A Controversial Issue
    References
    Chapter 3: Patch Testing Methodology
    3.1 Historical Background
    3.2 Definition and Aims
    3.2.1 Requirements for an Ideal Patch Testing Procedure
    3.2.2 Is Patch Testing the "Gold Standard" to Investigate Patients with Allergic Contact Dermatitis? 3.3 Patch Test Units
    3.3.1 Nonchamber Patch Tests
    3.3.2 Chamber Patch Tests
    3.3.2.1 Finn Chambers
    3.3.3 Plastic Square Chambers
    3.3.3.1 IQ Square Chambers Chemotechnique
    3.3.3.2 allergEAZE Chambers SmartPractice
    3.3.3.3 allergEAZE Patch Test Chamber
    3.3.3.4 allergEAZE Clear Patch Test Chamber
    3.3.4 Reinforcement of Patch Test Units
    3.4 A General Overview of Allergens
    3.4.1 Allergens
    3.4.2 Bioavailability of Allergens
    3.4.3 Quality Control of Allergens
    3.4.4 Appropriate Amounts of Petrolatum to Be Applied at Patch Testing
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jean-Marie Lachapelle, Magnus Bruze, Peter U. Elsner, editors.
    Summary: This book is a compendium of tips on many different aspects of patch testing based on the recommendations of the International Contact Dermatitis Research Group (ICDRG), which is the reference group for all dermato-allergologists. It is intended to complement the book Patch Testing and Prick Testing: A Practical Guide by J.-M. Lachapelle and H. Maibach, which is an official publication of the ICDRG now in its third edition. Among the wide variety of topics covered are pitfalls, legal aspects, patch testing with ultrasonic bath extracts, the role of patch testing in occupational contact dermatitis and atopic dermatitis, semi-open tests, the implications of a negative test, patch testing validity, selection of extra allergens and patch testing in the tropics. Many illustrations are included and all information is completely up-to-date. This book will be of value to all practicing dermatologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editor, Shital N. Parikh, MD (professor of orthopaedic surgery, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine ; co-director, Orthopaedic Sports Center, Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Cincinnati, Ohio)
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    Jason L. Koh, Ryosuke Kuroda, João Espregueira-Mendes, Alberto Gobbi, editors.
    Summary: This practical case-based book assists clinicians in the evaluation and treatment of patellofemoral patients by reviewing critical elements for assessment and presenting clinical scenarios in which different experts provide their recommendations for treatment. Subdivided in 6 parts it explores the joints anatomy and mechanics, as well as case-based evaluation and treatment of patellofemoral instability, arthritis and chondrosis, traumatic injuries and degenerative tendinopathies. Moreover, the closing part offers an overview of the latest advances and future developments. Written in collaboration with ISAKOS, this book offers a valuable guide for orthopedists and sports medicine treating common and complex injuries of this joint.

    Contents:
    I Patellofemoral anatomy, mechanics and evaluation
    1 Patellofemoral anatomy and mechanics
    2 Patient and family history in the evaluation of patellofemoral patients
    3 Examination of patients with patellofemoral symptoms
    4 Imaging evaluation of patients with patellofemoral symptoms
    5 Principles of prevention and rehabilitation for patellofemoral - Christopher Powers
    6 Newest surgical treatments for patellofemoral osteochondral lesions
    II Case based evaluation and treatment of patellofemoral patients
    7 The pediatric patient with open physes: case 11 year old girl with dysplasia
    8 Adolescent patient with closed physes, mild dysplasia and malalignment: case 15 year old girl case presentation, and commentary and treatment recommendations by international surgeons
    9 Young male soccer player with second dislocation, closed physes, normal trochlea 19 year old
    10 21 year old male with alta, recurrent instability
    11 19 year old girl with high tttg, trochlear dysplasia
    12 25 year old with large chondral lesion, patellofemoral instability, tttg 15mm
    13 35 year old with recurrent instability, chondrosis of patella and trochlea
    III Patellofemoral pain. Chondrosis, and arthritis
    14 19 year old with anterior knee pain, normal articular cartilage
    15 22 year old with anterior knee pain, normal cartilage, mild alignment abnormalities
    16 21 year old with patellofemoral pain and mal torsion of the lower limbs: place of derotation osteotomies
    22 27 year old male, basketball, with central trochlear lesion
    23 35 year old woman, lateral patella and trochlear chondrosis
    24 55 year old, marginal osteophytes, general patellofemoral chondrosis
    IV Traumatic injuries to the patellofemoral joint
    25 Patellofemoral fracture, stellate, in 54 year old woman
    26 Patella fracture of inferior pole, in 48 year old man
    27 Quadriceps tendon rupture in 54 year old man
    28 Patella tendon rupture in 37 year old man
    V Degenerative tendinopathies of the patellofemoral joint
    29 Osgood-Schlatters disease in a 12 year old
    30 Patella tendinitis in a 21 year old basketball player
    31 Patella tendinitis at Osgood-schlatters lesion of 32 year old
    32 Quadriceps tendinitis in a 35 year old
    VI Advances and the future treatment of patellofemoral disorders
    33 Evidence based medicine
    34 Biologic treatments.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Alberto Gobbi, João Espregueira-Mendes, Norimasa Nakamura, editors.
    Summary: A comprehensive and thorough selection of contributions from across the world, this book aims to review the current state-of-the-art in assessment and management of the patellofemoral joint. While featuring a wide range of surgical techniques for different pathologies, detailed attention is also devoted to conservative treatment and approaches involving mesenchymal stem cells, autologous chondrocyte implantation, platelet-rich plasma, and pulsed electromagnetic fields. Anatomy, clinical examination, and methods of evaluation are discussed, and individual chapters address important miscellaneous topics, including rehabilitation, complications of surgery, injuries in specific patient populations, and scoring systems. Though patellofemoral joint pathology is a frequent clinical problem, its management remains challenging for the orthopaedic surgeon. Conceived at the ISAKOS Congress held in Toronto in June 2013 as a small booklet, this work quickly turned into a major project involving more than 35 authors worldwide. The editors believe that this book will be of great value to orthopaedic doctors to improve understanding, diagnosis, and treatment of future patients.

    Contents:
    Morphogenesis of the patellofemoral joint
    Anatomy of the patellofemoral
    Anatomy and biomechanics of MPFL
    Clinical examination of patellofemoral joint
    Patellofemoral evaluation: an imagiological objective kinematic approach
    MRI of patellofemoral joint
    Gait analysis in patellofemoral disorder
    Prevention of patellofemoral injuries
    Patellofemoral syndrome
    Patellofemoral instability
    Patellar dislocation: pathomechanism and treatment
    First-time traumatic patellar dislocation: a systematic review
    Medial patellar instability
    a little known cause of anterior knee pain
    Non-operative treatment of patellofemoral joint
    Surgical treatment of the patellofemoral joint: lateral release
    MPFL repair for recurrent or traumatic patellar dislocation
    Medial patellofemoral ligament reconstruction
    Proximal realignment: medial plication
    MPFL reconstruction based on graft tension change and anatomy
    Elmslie-Trillat Procedure: a distal based procedure for patellar stabilization
    Open proximal trochleaplasty (grooveplasty)
    Sulcus-deepening trochleoplasty for the treatment of recurrent patellar dislocation with high-grade trochlear dysplasia
    Role of rotational osteotomy in the treatment of patelofemoral dysfunction
    New techniques for cartilage repair of the patella
    Cartilage lesions of the patellofemoral joint: long term results after ACI
    Role of mesenchymal stem cells in patellofemoral disorders
    Prosthetic indications in patellofemoral osteoarthritis
    Patellofemoral postoperative rehabilitation
    Treatment of patellofemoral disorders in skeletally immature athletes
    Treatment of patellofemoral dislocation in skeletally immature
    Platelet-rich plasma for the treatment of symptomatic patellofemoral cartilage lesions
    Pulsed electromagnetic fields for the treatment of symptomatic patellofemoral cartilage lesions of the knee
    Matrix autologous chondrocyte implantation of the patella: from ACI to MACI to ICC
    Patellofemoral joint pathology and sports
    Patellofemoral injuries in soccer players
    Complications of patellofemoral surgeries: prevention and management
    Scores to evaluate patellofemoral joint
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Robin V. West, Alexis C. Colvin, editors.
    Summary: Patellofemoral disorders are extremely prevalent in athletes and can lead to chronic pain, instability, weakness, and inconsistent or poor athletic performance. These disorders can be difficult to diagnose.Treatment options can vary depending upon several factors, including the sport andthe time during the sports season when the symptoms occur. Treatment also varies depending on the age of the patient and their competition level. The Patellofemoral Joint in the Athlete provides an extensive review of the physical examination, radiographic evaluation, differential diagnoses, and treatment options of common patellofemoral disorders, including patellar chondrosis, pain and instability. The contributors are nationally recognized experts in the patellofemoral joint that treat athletes of all ages and abilities. Appropriate for orthopedic surgeons, sports medicine physicians, rehabilitation physicians and physical therapists, this book is a comprehensive guide to the unique and sport-specific concerns of athletesof all ages and abilitieswith regard to the patellofemoral joint.

    Contents:
    Anatomy of the Patellofemoral Joint
    Lateral Patella Dislocations: History, Physical Exam and Imaging
    Rehabilitation Considerations for Non-Operative Management of Patellofemoral Conditions
    Surgical Treatment of Patellar Instability in Skeletally Immature Athletes
    Cartilage Restoration in the Patellofemoral Joint
    MPFL Repair and Reconstruction
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Patellofemoral Resurfacing Arthroplasty in the Active Patient
    Overview of Surgical Decision Making.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by David Dejour, Stefano Zaffagnini, Elizabeth A. Arendt, Petri Sillanpää, Florian Dirisamer.
    Summary: This excellently illustrated book adopts an evidence-based approach to evaluate the efficacy of different techniques for the imaging and treatment of patellofemoral pain, instability, and arthritis. The aim is to equip practitioners with an informative guide that will help them to manage disorders of the patellofemoral joint by casting light on the many issues on which a consensus has been lacking. The opening chapters supply essential background information and explain the role of various imaging modalities, including radiography, CT, MRI, and bone scan. The various conservative and surgical treatment approaches for each of the three presentations - pain, instability, and arthritis - are then described and assessed in depth, with precise guidance on indications and technique. Postoperative management and options in the event of failed surgery are also evaluated. Throughout, careful attention is paid to the literature in an attempt to establish the level of evidence for each imaging and treatment method. The new edition has been thoroughly updated, with inclusion of additional chapters, in order to present the latest knowledge on biomechanics, diagnosis, surgical techniques, and rehabilitation.

    Contents:
    Classification and general considerations
    Syndromes genetics
    Detecting and addressing psychological factors
    Imaging Analysis of Patella Instability Factors
    MRI of the Patellofemoral Articular Cartilage
    Computed Tomography and Arthro-CT Scan in Patellofemoral Disorders move to imaging
    The Role of Tibial and Femoral Rotational Torsion abnormalities in the Treatment of Patellofemoral Dysfunction
    Pathophysiology of Anterior Knee Pain
    Patellofemoral Pain Syndrome
    Non operative Treatment of PF pain
    Is there a surgical Treatment of PF pain
    Instability Factors Principals and Secondary for Instability
    Influence of Risk Factors in the Natural History
    Clinical Symptoms and Examination of Acute and Chronic Patellar Dislocations
    First Time Dislocation: How to deal with it
    Medial Side Patellofemoral Anatomy: Surgical Implications in Patellofemoral Instability
    Is there any place for medial reefing in acture PF dislocation which technical procedure?
    Medial Patellofemoral Ligament Reconstruction Indications and Surgical Technique
    MPTL (Medial Patellotibial Ligament) Reconstruction
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Indications and results
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Techniques
    AMZ
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Techniques
    Distalization
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Techniques
    Medialization
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies Complications
    Trochleoplasty Indications and results
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Arthroscopy
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Deepening Bereiter
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Deepening Lyon
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Elevating/lateral
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Recession Osteotomy
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Complications
    Lateral Release of the Lateral Patellar Retunaculum
    Lateral Retinaculum Lengthening
    Lateral retinaculum reconstruction
    Surgical Rehabilitation for select individual procedures
    Designing a rehabilitation programme for PFJ rehabilitation
    Complex primary cases
    Obligatory dislocators in flexion
    Is there an indication for Patella osteotomies
    Is there an indication for correcting a valgus knee
    Isolated Patellofemoral Osteoarthritis: Natural History and clinical Presentation
    The Non-operative Treatment of Patellofemoral Arthritis
    Techniques for cartilage restoration in pf joint
    Isolated Patellofemoral unipolar pf cartilage lesions when to intervene
    Partial Lateral Facetectomy
    Isolated Patellofemoral Osteoarthritis: Prosthetic Indications
    Patellofemoral disorders in skeletally immature patients
    Specific procedures for pediatric dislocation
    Mpfl techniques and constraints: what does this mean?
    Patellar tendon shortening
    Tibial tubercule procedure / old Osgood Schlatter
    Femoral and tibial osteotomies
    Epiphsiodesis : we already have limb lengthening.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Zahid Amin, Jonathan M. Tobis, Horst Sievert, John D. Carroll.
    Contents:
    SECTION I: BACKGROUND AND ANATOMY
    Historical perspective and importance of PFO
    Embryology, Neonatal Circulation and Anatomy of PFO
    Anatomical variations of Patent Foramen Ovale
    Aging and Patent Foramen Ovale
    SECTION II: METHODS AND TECHNIQUES FOR DETECTION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF PFO
    Echocardiographic detection and transcranial Doppler quantification of right-to-left shunting.
    ICE: intra-procedural evaluation and guidance during closure of PFO
    A Comparison of Methods to Detect and Quantitative PFO: TCD, TTE, ICE and TEE
    Angiographic evaluation for PFO and Pulmonary AVMs
    SECTION III: PFO AND CLINICAL SYNDROMES
    An Overview of Clinical Syndromes (Keeping The Heart In Mind)
    The Association of Patent Foramen Ovale and Migraine Headache
    Current Patient Management Issues, Clinical Trial Design Challenges, and the Pathway Forward
    Patent foramen ovale and divers
    Orthodeoxia and Platypnea
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea and Patent Foramen Ovale
    PFO and Various Types of Surgery
    When a PFO is Discovered Incidentally
    SECTION IV: CLOSURE METHODS
    The GORE Septal Occluder
    The novel PFO specific closure devices: Why did they fail?
    Optimal device for children and closure indications in pediatric population
    Occlutech, PFM, Lifetech, and other new devices. What?s on the horizon?
    Complications of PFO Closure
    SECTION V: STATISTICAL METHODS, TRIALS AND TRIBULATIONS
    Device Closure of Patent Foramen Ovale or Medical Therapy for Cryptogenic Stroke: The CLOSURE I Trial
    The Gore REDUCE Clinical Study
    The PC Trial: An Effective Treatment Not Demonstrating Effective Power
    From FDAs point of view: What is needed to move PFO closure for stroke prevention forward?
    The Medical Device Manufacturer?s Perspective ? W.L. Gore & Associates, Inc
    PFO-Patient?s Perspective
    Clinical Trials to Assess the Relationship between Patent Foramen Ovale and Migraine Headaches
    Do We Need More PFO Trials: Hypercoaguable Syndromes, Obstructive Sleep Apnea, and Arrhythmias
    SECTION VI: DIFFICULTIES/OBSTACLES IN STARTING PFO CLOSURE PRACTICE
    Obstacles in Starting a PFO Closure Program. How I Did It
    Developing a successful integrated PFO closure program.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jennifer M. Manning.
    Summary: This textbook provides a one-stop reference resource and guide for nurses interested in advancing their careers. It addresses self-assessment, goal setting and self-discipline, as well as academic paths and non-academic career paths, and includes two chapters on strategic path development, covering internal motivation, risk taking, work--life balance, work environment, networking, professional membership and mentorship. Lastly, the book discusses professional growth topics such as civility, burnout, professional development and "keeping informed," and explores specific professionalism topics like professional behavior, ethics, social media and executive presence. Intended for nurses at any level, this textbook examines topics relevant to today's nursing professionals and offers guidance on building a successful nursing career. It also helps student nurses create a path for their career and professional growth, both during their training program and beyond.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    Section I. Chapter 1: Self-Assessment
    Chapter 2: Goal Setting and Self Discipline
    Section II. Chapter 3: Professional Nursing Career Paths: the non-academic path
    Chapter 4: Professional Nursing Career Paths: the academic path
    Section III. Chapter 5: Charting YOUR Career Path: internal strategies
    Chapter 6: Charting YOUR Career Path: external strategies
    Chapter 7: The basics of Professional Growth
    Chapter 8: Ensuring Continued Professional Growth
    Chapter 9: Professionalism.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Janos Minarovits, Hans Helmut Niller, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Epigenetic regulation
    2. HIV-induced epigenetic alterations in host cells
    3. Epigenetic alterations in Epstein-Barr virus-associated diseases
    4. Epigenetic dysregulation in virus-associated neoplasms
    5. Epigenetic alterations induced by bacterial lipopolysaccharides
    6. Patho-epigenetics of infectious diseases caused by intracellular bacteria
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Linda M. McManus, Richard N. Mitchell.
    Contents:
    Part 1. General disease pathogenesis
    Part 2. Organ systems pathophysiology
    Part 3. Diagnostic pathology
    Part 4. Techniques in experimental pathology.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Evaluation of genetic diversity of Candida spp. and Klebsiella spp. isolated from the denture plaque of COPD patients
    Particulate matter in the air of the underground chamber complex of the Wieliczka Salt Mine Health Resort
    Comparison of thymic stromal lymphopoietin concentration in various human biospecimens from asthma and COPD patients measured with two different ELISA kits
    Prevalence of Neisseria meningitidis carriage with identifcation of serogroups and genogroups in professional soldiers
    Bacteriological assessment of pneumonia caused by gram-negative bacteria in patients hospitalized in intensive care unit
    Bacteriological assessment of pneumonia caused by gram-negative bacteria in patients hospitalized in intensive care unit
    Whooping cough in adults: a series of severe cases
    Limited clinical significance of dimeric form of pyruvate kinase as a diagnostic and prognostic biomarker in non-small cell lung cancer
    Clostridium Difficile infection due to pneumonia treatment: mortality risk models
    Predictors of progression in IgA nephropathy in childhood.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Ellen Hsu, Louis Du Pasquier.
    Contents:
    Evolution of immunity and pathogens
    A host-pathogen interaction reduced to first principles: Antigenic variation in T. brucei
    Antigenic variation in Plasmodium falciparum
    Polymorphic mucin-like proteins in Schistosoma mansoni, a variable antigen and a key component of the compatibility between the schistosome and its snail host
    Fibrinogen-related proteins (FREP) in mollusks
    Somatic and germline diversification of a putative immunoreceptor within one phylum: Dscam in arthropods
    An immune effector system in the Protochordate gut sheds light on fundamental aspects of vertebrate immunity
    Variable lymphocyte receptors: a current view
    Antibody repertoire in fish
    Unique features of fish immune repertoires: particularities of the adaptive immunity within the largest group of vertebrates
    The evolution and structure of atypical T cell receptors
    Diversification of the primary antibody repertoire by AID-mediated gene conversion
    Antibody isotype switching in vertebrates.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Yasuhiko Tomino., editor
    Contents:
    Part I. Pathogenesis
    Chapter 1. Is IgA nephropathy the same disease/a homogenous disease?
    Chapter 2. Genetic variations of IgA nephropathy
    Chapter 3. Is IgA nephropathy a familial or sporadic disease?
    Chapter 4. Heterogeneity of GdIgA1
    Chapter 5. Differences of histological classification between the Japanese guideline and the Oxford classification
    Chapter 6. Podocyte injury and the role of megalin
    Chapter 7. Complement activation
    Part II. Treatment
    Chapter 8. How different are the current understandings of treatments for IgA nephropathy?
    Chapter 9. Differences in etiology and treatment in China
    Chapter 10. Differences in etiology and treatment in Korea
    Chapter 11. Differences in etiology and treatment in Japan
    Chapter 12. The VALIGA study: Differences in treatment approaches within the EU
    Chapter 13. Differences in etiology and treatment in Scandinavian countries
    Chapter14 The Implication of the KDIGO Clinical Practice Guidelines on management of IgA Nephropathy
    Chapter15 Japanese Clinical Practice Guidelines for IgA Nephropathy: Difference from KDIGO Guidelines
    Chapter16 Limitations of RAS blockade in IgA nephropathy
    Chapter17 What is the goal for proteinuria in IgA nephropathy?
    Chapter 18. Rationale of tonsillectomy and steroid pulse therapy (TSP): Is it race dependent?
    Chapter 19. Is tonsillectomy a possible treatment for IgA nephropathy from RCT?
    Chapter 20. Is tonsillectomy a possible treatment for IgA nephrology from a retrospective analysis?.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Christos C. Zouboulis, Andreas D. Katsambas and Albert M. Kligman, editors.
    Summary: This book, written by experts from across the world, provides comprehensive coverage of acne and rosacea, focusing in particular on pathogenesis and treatment but also considering clinical aspects, prognostic factors, and impacts on quality of life. Both standard knowledge and important, clinically relevant insights that have emerged over the past decade are presented with the goal of assisting the reader in understanding these diseases and improving treatment outcome. It is explained how high-level research has recently given rise to a variety of new concepts in etiology and treatment, and emerging trends are also discussed. The book is in a reader-friendly format that highlights core messages with a very practical and clinical focus. Pathogenesis and Treatment of Acne and Rosacea will be an indispensable reference for all physicians who care for patients with acne or rosacea and for scientists working in the field.

    Contents:
    The Sebaceous Gland Through the Centuries: A Difficult Path to Independence
    Embryology of the Pilosebaceous Unit
    Molecular Aspects of Sebaceous Differentiation
    Anatomy of the Sebaceous Gland
    Sebum and Sebaceous Lipids
    Experimental Models of the Sebaceous Gland
    Acne Epidemiology and Socioeconomic Aspects
    Acne Pathogenesis: What We Have Learned Over the Years
    The Role of Hyperkeratinization
    The Role of the Sebaceous Gland
    The Role of Bacteria
    Inflammation in Acne
    A New Concept of Acne Pathogenesis
    Acne and Genetics
    Acne and Androgens
    Acne and Inflammation
    Acne and Neuropeptides
    Acne and Bacteria
    The Acne Biofilm
    The Evidence Supporting a Link Between Acne and Nutrition
    Acne and Smoking
    Antimicrobial Peptides in Acne
    Acne and Antimicrobial Lipids
    Natural and Artificial Suntanning
    Acne and Environmental Pollution (Chloracne)
    Myths and Beliefs of Acne Pathogenesis: Diet, Smoking, Hygiene
    Understanding Acne as a Chronic Disease
    Clinical Aspects of Acne Vulgaris
    Clinical Aspects of Acne Fulminans
    Childhood Acne
    Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia and Acne in the Male Patients
    Adult Acne
    Drug-Induced Acne
    Body-Builder Acne
    Acne Cosmetica
    Acne in Persons with Dark Skin
    Acne and Heredity
    Acne Neonatorum
    Serum Androgens
    Body Mass Index
    Sebum Secretion, Skin Type, and pH
    Lipids in Serum and Sebum
    The Leeds Acne Grading Technique
    Evaluation of Clinical Severity by Acne Grading and Lesion Counting
    Modern Technology for Imaging and Evaluation of Acne Lesions
    Acne and Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia
    The Acne Genes
    Vitamins and the Skin
    Urinary Hormone Analysis in Acne
    Laboratory Evaluations in Acne
    Evidenced-Based Treatment of Acne
    The Difficult Acne Patient
    Improving Compliance with Acne Therapy
    Keratolytic Treatment
    Topical Antibiotics
    Benzoyl Peroxide
    Topical Retinoids
    Azelaic Acid
    Emerging Acne Treatments
    Oral Antibiotics
    The Antibiotic Resistance in Acne
    Prescribing Oral Isotretinoin: The European Approach
    Oral Isotretinoin: The US Approach
    Hormonal Therapy for Acne
    Less Common Treatments
    Risk Factors of Acne Relapse
    Acne Maintenance Therapy
    Cosmetics and Cleansers in Acne
    Chemical Peeling in Acne
    Lasers and Phototherapy in Acne
    Treatment of Acne Scarring
    Concepts of Future Acne Treatment
    Acne and Quality of Life
    Instruments of Measurement of Quality of Life in Acne
    The SAHA Syndrome
    The Polycystic Ovary Syndrome and Acne
    The SAPHO Syndrome
    The PAPA Syndrome
    Acne in Transplantation Patients
    Rosacea: The State of the Art
    The Vascular Concept
    Rosacea and Neuropeptides
    Rosacea and Demodex folliculorum
    The Role of Adenosine Triphosphate in the Pathogenesis of Rosacea: An Explanation for the Mode of Action of Tetracyclines for the Treatment of Rosacea
    Standard Grading System for Rosacea
    Classical Clinical Presentations of Rosacea
    Rhinophyma: A Variation of Rosacea?
    Ocular Rosacea
    Childhood Rosacea
    Differential Diagnosis of Rosacea
    A Treatment Strategy for Rosacea
    Topical Treatment of Rosacea
    Systemic Treatment of Rosacea
    Laser and Light Therapy of Rosacea
    Nonclassical Treatments
    Cosmetics in Rosacea
    Treatment of Rhinophyma
    The Future of Rosacea Treatment
    Impact of Rosacea on Quality of Life.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Masafumi Machida, Stuart L. Weinstein, Jean Dubousset, editors.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive coverage of current topics in idiopathic scoliosis (IS). A three-dimensional deformity of the spine, the condition is characterized by lateral curvature combined with vertebral rotation. The primary lesion, however, lies in the median sagittal plane, taking the form of a lordosis. Although the clinical manifestations of scoliosis have been well documented, its cause and pathogenesis have not yet been determined. Research into what causes IS has focused on the structural elements of the spine, spinal musculature, collagenous structures, the endocrine system, the central nervous system, and genetics. Results of these studies have brought about a new perception of IS epiphenomena, but the main cause of IS remains unknown. Recently, several investigators have produced new hypotheses regarding the cause of IS using the developing techniques of genetics, biochemistry, and neurology. This book is a review of the various causative factors thus far proposed for IS and an introduction to the directions in which research is heading to determine the primary cause of IS.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Daryl I. Smith, Hai Tran, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive source on the pathogenic origins of neuropathic pain covers the detailed molecular bases of the currently known neuropathies as classified by their pathogenic origins. Filling a critical need, this book fills the need for a resource on a syndrome that demands improved understanding by clinicians and researchers alike so that treatment options for patients are not categorically limited to a pill or a needle. If the clinician understands the origins of a patients' neuropathic pain, they can work cooperatively toward improving it with tailored therapies that don't create societal diseconomies and that ultimately are effective in helping patients. The book presents in detail the molecular bases of some currently known neuropathies by their pathogenetic origins, allowing clinicians to tailor more specific and more effective treatment regimens for their patients. For basic researchers, this book is a general resource to better direct research on neuropathy-specific molecular mechanisms. The improved understanding of the pathogenesis of neuropathic pain can then be used to develop more specific and more effective manipulations of these pathways.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Transitional Neuropathy: Chronification of Acute Pain
    Diabetic Neuropathy
    Complex Regional Pain Syndrome (CRPS)
    Autoimmune Disease-Related Neuropathy
    Methylation Disorder Neuropathy
    Alcohol-Related Neuropathy
    Perfusion-Related Neuropathy
    Uremic Neuropathy
    Chemotherapy Induced Neuropathy
    Antibiotics and Antifungals
    Miscellaneous
    Treatment
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Richard F. Spaide, Kyoko Ohno-Matsui, Lawrence A. Yannuzzi.
    Summary: Pathological Myopia is a major cause of severe vision loss worldwide. The mechanisms for vision loss include cataract, glaucoma, retinal detachment, and above all, degeneration of the macula within the posterior staphyloma. Pathological Myopia is one of the only current books to specifically address this disease and discusses recent developments in imaging technologies and various approaches to treatments, such as laser photocoagulation, photodynamic therapy, pharmaco-therapeutic injections in the vitreous, and surgery. Complete with high-quality color images, this book is written and edited by leaders in the field and is geared towards ophthalmologists, including residents and fellows in training, glaucoma and cataract specialists, and vitreoretinal macula experts.

    Contents:
    1. Myopia: A Historical Perspective
    2. Genes involved in the development of myopia
    3. Epidemiology of Myopia
    4. Animal Models of Experimental Myopia: Limitations and Synergies With Studies on Human Myopia
    5. The Sclera and its Role in Regulation of the Refractive State
    6. Public Health Impact of Pathologic Myopia
    7. Update on the Pathology of Pathologic Myopia
    8. The Sclera and Induced Abnormalities in Myopia
    9. The Choroid
    10. The Optic Nerve in High Myopia
    11. Vitreous Changes
    12. Staphyloma, Part 1
    13. Staphyloma, Part 2
    14. Myopic Chorioretinal Atrophy
    15. Choroidal Neovascularization
    16. Myopic Macular Retinoschisis
    17. Peripheral Retinal Abnormalities
    18. Retinal Detachment
    19. Glaucoma in Myopia
    20. Myopic Optic Neuropathy
    21. Special Considerations for Cataract Surgery in the Face of Pathologic Myopia
    22. Ocular Motility Abnormalities
    23. Myopia: Ocular and Systemic Disease
    24. Prevention of Myopia
    25. Sclera-targeted Therapies for Pathologic Myopia.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Richard F. Spaide, Kyoko Ohno-Matsui, Lawrence A. Yannuzzi, editors.
    Summary: Pathologic Myopia is a major cause of severe vision loss worldwide. The mechanisms for vision loss include cataract, glaucoma, retinal detachment, and above all, myopic maculopathy within the posterior staphyloma. The first edition of Pathologic Myopia is one of the only current books to specifically address this disease and discusses recent developments in imaging technologies and various approaches to treatments, such as laser photocoagulation, photodynamic therapy, pharmaco-therapeutic injections in the vitreous, and surgery. This new edition is a timely update to the standard reference in the field, with new chapters on advanced refractive error correction, genetics, developing a classification system, and special surgical approaches for pathologic myopia. Complete with even more high-quality color images and informative tables, this book is written and edited by leaders in the field and is geared towards ophthalmologists, including residents and fellows in training, glaucoma and cataract specialists, and vitreoretinal macula experts.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Basic Science of Pathologic Myopia.
    Chapter 1. Myopia: A Historical Perspective
    Chapter 2. Definition of pathologic myopia (PM)
    Chapter 3. Epidemiology of Myopia, High Myopia and Pathological Myopia
    Chapter 4. Genetics of Pathologic Myopia
    Chapter 5. Public Health Impact of Pathologic Myopia
    Chapter 6. Animal Models of Experimental Myopia: Limitations and Synergies with Studies on Human Myopia
    Chapter 7. The Sclera and its Role in Regulation of the Refractive State
    Section 2 - Ocular Changes in the Development of Pathologic Myopia.
    Chapter 8. Update on the Pathology of Pathological Myopia
    Chapter 9. The Sclera and Induced Abnormalities in Myopia
    Chapter 10. The Choroid Fin
    Chapter 11. Theories of Myopization: Potential Role of a Posterioly Expanding Bruch's Membrane
    Chapter 12. The Optic Nerve Head in High Myopia / Abnormalities of the Intrapapillary and Parapapillary Region
    Chapter 13. Vitreous Changes in Myopia
    Chapter 14. Ultra-widefield imaging of vitreous in pathologic myopia
    Section 3- Sequella of Pathologic Myopia and Their Potential Treatments.
    Chapter 15. Staphyloma I
    Chapter 16. Staphyloma II
    Chapter 17. Overview of OCT-based classification of macular lesions due to pathologic myopia
    Chapter 18. Myopic Maculopathy
    Chapter 19. Choroidal Neovascularization
    Chapter 20. Myopic Macular Retinoschisis
    Chapter 21. surgical approaches for complications of PM
    Chapter 22. Peripheral Retinal Abnormalities
    Chapter 23. Retinal Detachment
    Chapter 24. Glaucoma in Myopia
    Chapter 25. Myopic Optic Neuropathy
    Chapter 26. Special Considerations for Cataract Surgery in the Face of Pathologic Myopia
    Chapter 27. Ocular Motility Abnormalities
    Chapter 28. Ocular and Systemic Disease
    Section 4 - Treatment of pathologic myopia.
    Chapter 29. Prevention of myopia progression in children and adolescents
    Chapter 30. OPTICAL METHODS TO SLOW THE PROGRESSION OF MYOPIA
    Chapter 31. Sclera-targeted therapies for pathologic myopia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    von E. Finger und M. Sänger.
    Contents: <br/
    >1. T. Die Pathologie und Therapie der Sterilität beim Manne.
    Digital Access Google Books 1898-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N59 .F49 1898
    1
  • Digital
    Norbert Weiss, Alexandra Koschak, editors.
    Summary: Calcium ions represent Mother Nature's "ion-of-choice" for regulating fundamental physiological functions, as they initiate a new life at the time of fertilization and guide subsequent developmental and physiological functions of the human body. Calcium channels, which act as gated pathways for the movement of calcium ions across the membranes, play a central part in the initiation of calcium signals, and defects in calcium channel function have been found to result in a plethora of human diseases, referred to as the calcium channelopathies. Pathologies of Calcium Channels brings together leading international experts to discuss our current understanding of human diseases associated with the various calcium channels, from their molecular basis to potential future therapeutic targeting of calcium channels.

    Contents:
    Part I. Pathologies of Voltage-Gated Calcium Channels
    Part II. Pathologies of Transient Receptor Potential Channels
    Part III. Pathologies of Ligand-Gated Calcium Channels.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Orth, Johannes; Orth, Johannes.
    Digital Access Google Books 1876-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J25 .O76 1917
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Hering, Heinrich Ewald.
    Contents: <br/
    >1. Die Funktionsstörungen des Herzens, der Gefässe und des Blutes.
    Digital Access Google Books 1921-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J113 .H54
    1
  • Digital/Print
    von Carl Breuss und Alexander Kolisko.
    Summary: This is a classic description and classification of pelvic deformities.

    Contents:
    1. Bd. Allgemeines, Missbildungs-, Assimilations- und Zwergbecken, riesen-Rachitisbecken und Dimensional-Anomalien ([1900]-1904. vii, [1], 707 p., incl. 216 ill., tables)
    2. Bd. Osteomalaciebecken, ostitische und synostotische Becken, Exostosen-, Neubildungs-, Fractur- und Lacerationsbecken ([1908]-1910. vi, [2], 583 p. incl. 175 ill., tables)
    3. Bd. Abnorme Beckenformen infolge von Anomalien der Wirbelsäule, der unteren Extremitäten und des Nervensystems (1900-1912. v, [1], 696 p. incl. 182 ill., tables).
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J27 .B846
    3
  • Digital
    [edited by] Howard M. Reisner, PhD, Department of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.
    Contents:
    Disease and the genome : genetic, developmental and neoplastic disease
    Cell injury, death and aging and the body's response
    Environmental injury
    Clinical practice : anatomic pathology
    Clinical practice : molecular pathology
    Clinical practice : laboratory medicine and patient care
    The vascular system
    Pulmonary pathology
    Pathology of the gastrointestinal tract
    Pathology of the liver, gallbladder and extrahepatic biliary tract
    Pathology of the pancreas
    Pathology of medical renal disease
    Urologic pathology of the lower urinary tract and male gu system
    Hematopathology
    Basic principles of clinical endocrinology
    Breast pathology
    The female reproductive tract
    Soft tissue and bone pathology
    Neuromuscular pathology
    Pathology of the skin
    Pathology of the nervous system.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2015
  • Digital
    Howard M. Reisner.
    Summary: "We have continued to center our presentations around case studies designed to emphasize the role of the pathologist in the team that provides patient care, examining the role of anatomic, clinical, and molecular pathologists in that multi-membered group both in dedicated chapters and in descriptions of the pathology of specific organ systems."--Preface

    Contents:
    1. Cancer and the Genome
    2. Cell Injury, Cell Death, and Aging
    3. Hemostasis and Thrombosis --4. Environmental Injury
    5. Clinical Practice: Anatomic Pathology
    6. Clinical Practice: Molecular Pathology
    7. Clinical Practice: Laboratory Medicine and Patient Care
    8. The Cardiovascular System
    9. Pulmonary Pathology
    10. Pathology of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    11. Pathology of the Liver, Gallbladder, and Extrahepatic Biliary Tract
    12. Pathology of the Pancreas
    13. Pathology of Medical Renal Disease
    14. Urologic Pathology of the Lower Urinary Tract, Male GU System, and Kidney
    15. Hematopathology
    16. Pathology of the Endocrine System
    17. Breast Pathology
    18. The Female Reproductive Tract
    19. Soft Tissue and Bone Pathology
    20. Neuromuscular Pathology
    21. Pathology of the Skin
    22. Pathology of the Nervous System
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
  • Print
    Catherine Cavallaro Goodman, Kenda S. Fuller.
    Contents:
    I, Introduction :
    1. Introduction to concepts of pathology
    2. Behavioral, social, and environmental factors contributing to disease and dysfunction
    3. The psychosocial-spiritual impact on health care
    4. Environmental and occupational medicine
    5. Problems affecting multiple systems
    6. Injury, inflammation, healing, and repair. II, Clinical medicine :
    7. The immune system
    8. Infectious disease
    9. Oncology
    10. The integumentary system
    11. The endocrine and metabolic systems
    12. The cardiovascular system
    13. The lymphatic system
    14. The hematologic system
    15. The respiratory system
    16. The gastrointestinal system
    17. The hepatic, pancreatic, and biliary systems
    18. The renal and urologic systems
    19. The male genital/reproductive system
    20. The female genital/reproductive system
    21. Transplantation. III, Pathology of the musculoskeletal system :
    22. Introduction to pathology of the musculoskeletal system
    23. Genetic and developmental disorders
    24. Metabolic disorders
    25. Infectious diseases of the musculoskeletal system
    26. Musculoskeletal neoplasms
    27. Soft tissue, joint, and bone disorders. IV, Pathology of the nervous system :
    28. Introduction to central nervous system disorders
    29. Infectious disorders of the central nervous system
    30. Central nervous system neoplasms
    31. Degenerative diseases of the central nervous system
    32. Stroke
    33. Traumatic brain injury
    34. Traumatic spinal cord injury
    35. Cerbral palsy
    36. Seizures and epilepsy
    37. Headache
    38. Vestibular disorders
    39. The peripheral nervous system
    40. Laboratory tests and values.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB111 .G66 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Francisco F. Nogales, Rafael E. Jimenez, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Massimo Loda, Lorelei A. Mucci, Megan L. MIttelstadt, Mieke Van Hemelrijck, Maura Bríd Cotter, editors.
    Contents:
    Basic Principles of Patho-Epidemiology
    The Intersection of Epidemiology and Pathology
    Introduction to Histology
    Introduction to Pathology
    Basic Techniques in Molecular Pathology
    Introduction to Cancer Epidemiology
    Cancer Screening
    Molecular and Genetic Epidemiology of Cancer
    Bioinformatic Analysis of Epidemiological and Pathological Data
    Cancer Types
    Epidemiology of Prostate Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Prostate Cancer
    Epidemiology of Breast Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Breast Cancer
    Epidemiology of Ovarian and Endometrial Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Uterine and Ovarian Cancers
    Brain Tumors
    Epidemiology
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Brain Cancer
    Epidemiology of Renal Cell Carcinoma
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Renal Cancer
    Epidemiology of Lung Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Lung Cancer
    Epidemiology of Colorectal Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Colorectal Cancer
    Epidemiology of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    The Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Epidemiology of Pancreatic Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Pancreatic Cancer
    Epidemiology of Bladder Cancer
    Bladder Cancer
    Epidemiology of Hematologic Malignancies
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Hematologic Malignancies
    Epidemiology of Melanoma
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Melanoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Elizabeth McInnes.
    Contents:
    An Introduction to Pathology Techniques / Elizabeth McInnes
    Recording Pathology Data / Cheryl L Scudamore
    General Pathology and the Terminology of Basic Pathology / Elizabeth McInnes
    Common Spontaneous and Background Lesions in Laboratory Animals / Elizabeth McInnes
    Target Organ Pathology / Elizabeth McInnes
    Clinical Pathology / Barbara Beust
    Adversity: A Pathologist's Perspective / Bhanu Singh
    Limitations of Pathology and Animal Models / Natasha Neef.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Tim D. Oury, Thomas A. Sporn, Victor L. Roggli, editors.
    Summary: The third edition of Pathology of Asbestos-Associated Diseases builds on the success of the previous editions by fully updating knowledge on diagnostic and epidemiologic aspects and presenting important new insights derived from new epidemiologic studies and animal studies. Background information is first provided on the mineralogy of asbestos, occupational and environmental exposure, and asbestos bodies. The various diseases associated with asbestos exposure are then considered in turn, with detailed description and illustration of pathologic features as well as extensive discussion of etiology, epidemiology, differential diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis. Further chapters are devoted to cytopathology, experimental models of disease, and analysis of tissue mineral fiber content. In addition, the medicolegal issues relating to asbestos-associated diseases are analyzed from the point of view of both the plaintiff and the defendant. This book will be an essential reference for pathologists and an invaluable source of information for pulmonologists, radiologists, and occupational medical practitioners.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Christopher R. Shea, Jon A. Reed, Victor G. Prieto, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Introductory Chapters
    Chapter 1. Gross Prosection of Melanocytic Lesions
    Chapter 2. Histopathologic Staging and Reporting of Melanocytic Lesions
    Chapter 3. Clinicopathologic Correlation in Melanocytic Lesions
    Chapter 4. Anathema or Useful? Application of Immunohistochemistry to the Diagnosis of Melanocytic Lesions
    Chapter 5. Applications of Additional Techniques to Melanocytic Pathology
    Part 2: Diagnostic Challenges
    Chapter 6. Spitz Nevus versus Spitzoid Melanoma
    Chapter 7. Halo Nevus versus Melanoma with Regression
    Chapter 8. Nevoid Malignant Melanoma versus Melanocytic Nevus
    Chapter 9. Dysplastic Nevi versus Melanoma
    Chapter 10. Blue Nevus versus Pigmented Epithelioid Melanocytoma
    Chapter 11. Recurrent Melanocytic Nevus versus Melanoma
    Chapter 12. Neurothekeoma versus Melanoma
    Chapter 13. Melanoma in situ versus Paget?s Disease
    Chapter 14. Desmoplastic Nevus versus Desmoplastic Melanoma
    Chapter 15. Cutaneous Metastatic Melanoma versus Primary Cutaneous Melanoma
    Chapter 16. Acral Nevus versus Acral Melanoma
    Chapter 17. Capsular (Nodal) Nevus versus Metastatic Melanoma
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Consolato M. Sergi.
    Summary: This book covers the full range of pathologic conditions encountered during childhood and youth, including tumors and tumor-like conditions of all organ systems, with direct links to developmental biology pathways and genetics. It provides a user-friendly road map to the main diagnostic criteria and combines an organ-related approach with an explanation of the diagnostic approaches to various specific diseases and syndromes, including sequential segmental analysis of congenital heart disease. More than 1000 new full-color macro- and microphotographs using more than 500 multi-photographic panels are included to provide a realistic basis for comparison macroscopically and under the lens, and summarizing tables highlight key information in the concise form required for at-a-glance review. Pathologists will find the book very helpful when signing out complex and challenging cases, and it will also prove invaluable for exam preparation and continuing medical education.

    Contents:
    Cardiovascular System
    Lower Respiratory Tract
    Gastrointestinal Tract
    Liver
    Pancreas, Gallbladder, and Extrahepatric Biliary System
    Kidney, Pelvis, and Ureter
    Lower Urinary and Male Genital System
    Female Genital System
    Breast
    Hemato-Lymphoid System
    Endocrine System
    Soft Tissue
    Arthro-Skeletal System
    Head & Neck
    Central Nervous System
    Peripheral Nervous System
    Skin
    Placenta, Abnormal Conception, and Prematurity. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Takuya Moriya, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on precursor lesions, borderline lesions, and early carcinomas of female-specific organs from the standpoint of pathology. In 2012, the latest WHO Classification of Tumours of the Breast, 4th ed., was published and subsequently, in 2014, the WHO Classification of Tumours of Female Reproductive Organs, 4th ed., was published. In these fourth editions, several new concepts are addressed that were not described in the previous editions, and many of them are related to the awareness of the specific pathogenesis of tumors in female patients. Although some of these issues are still controversial, several paradigm shifts should be understood by medical scientists. Thus researchers, diagnostic pathologists, and clinicians must share current information about what is taking place in the field and what the next issue to resolve is. This volume greatly broadens the reader's understanding of the new concepts and paradigm shifts, as it includes informationon how to diagnose and make differential diagnoses on a practical basis and also provides a thorough explanation of the molecular-clinicopathologic basis of the new concepts. The book thus benefits gynecologists, breast surgeons, gynecologic-medical oncologists, and cytotechnologists.

    Contents:
    A new strategy for diagnosing of squamous intraepithelial neoplasia of the cervix / Yoshiki Mikami
    Adenocarcinoma and its precursor of the uterine cervix : current concept / Suzuko Moritani
    Heterogeneity of the precursor lesions of endometrial carcinoma, according to the histologic subtype / Hiroyuki Yanai
    Current concept of precancerous and early stage of serous ovarian carcinoma / Takako Kiyokawa, Masami Iwamoto
    Ovarian carcinoma associated with endometriosis / Masanori Yasuda, Mitsutake Yano
    Problems with the histological diagnosis of epithelial borderline tumors of the ovary / Miki Kushima
    Development of breast carcinoma in relation to the intrinsic subtype / Takuya Moriya
    Morphological and molecular approaches to breast cancer risk assessment / Shinobu Masuda.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Pallav Gupta, Ramesh K. Gupta.
    Summary: This book provides clear understanding of morphological appearances of various glomerular lesions encountered in a wide range of diseases involving renal glomeruli. Chapters cover various diseases with each chapter including a brief text and multiple colored microphotographs depicting the distinctive morphological features of glomeruli as may be encountered in these diseases. It presents complete clinical history with thorough lab workup and other related investigations as considered essential for proper evaluation of the patient. The book provides systemic approach for proper diagnosis of the underlying disease condition in view of the clinical workup and renal biopsy assessment. It provides visual understanding of the glomerular pathology that helps the consultant nephrologist to have a clear understanding of underlying renal disease thus helping in proper evaluation and appropriate therapeutic management of the patient. It may also guide to predict the likely prognostic outcome of the patient. This book is not only helpful to renal pathologists and nephrologists but also serves as a valuable resource for clear understanding of the glomerular lesions to the beginners and postgraduates in nephrology and renal pathology and other physicians managing the patients of renal diseases.

    Contents:
    Evaluation of Renal Biopsy
    Minimal Change Disease
    Focal Segmental Glomerulosclerosis
    Membranous Glomerulonephritis
    Immune Complex Mediated Membranoproliferative Glomerulonephritis
    C3 Glomerulopathy
    Post-infectious Glomerulonephritis
    IgA Nephropathy and Henoch-Schonlein Purpura
    Alport Syndrome and Thin Basement Membrane Disease
    Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome and Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis
    Lupus Nephritis and Lupus Podocytopathy
    Anti-glomerular Basement Membrane Disease
    Pauci-immune Crescentic Glomerulonephritis
    Post-partum Thrombotic Microangiopathy
    Haemolytic Uremic Syndrome (HUS)
    Diabetic Nephropathy
    Diabetic Nephropathy
    Renal Involvement in Plasma Cell Dyscrasia
    Glomerular Diseases with Organized Deposits (Cryoglobulinemia, Fibrillary, Collagenofibrotic)
    Renal Involvement in Storage Disorders (Fabry's Disease, LCAT Deficiency, Niemann Pick Disease)
    Hypertensive Nephrosclerosis
    Renal Sarcoidosis
    HIV Associated Nephropathy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Cecilia C. S. Yeung, Howard M. Shulman, editors.
    Summary: GVHD is the major cause of non-relapse morbidity and mortality after hemopoietic cell transplantation. This text provides a comprehensive, state-of-the art review of the pathology of GVHD for clinicians, pathologists and researchers with an interest in GVHD. The book covers the histologic spectrum of GVHD, clinicopathologic features, pathobiology, grading, risk factors affecting outcome, and differential diagnosis. It profiles the new NIH consensus and international guidelines for diagnosing GVHD. The text chapters are based on actual patient cases covering the gamut of acute and chronic GVHD and associated complications. The discussion initiated teaching points and key histologic points make the reading and teaching more interactive while providing a stimulating discussion of difficult differentials. The chapters are richly illustrated with colored comparative gross and histologic images and include extensive references by experts in the fields including the most up-to-date scientific and clinical information.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Michael T. Ashworth.
    Summary: In recent years, there have been no books published on paediatric cardiac pathology despite enormous developments in genetics, a marked explosion of paediatric transplant programmes, surges in knowledge of fetal cardiac pathology and understanding of congenital heart disease, and the emergence of a flourishing cardiac imaging discipline. This book will be the first unified and comprehensive source of reference for childhood heart disease, covering the full field of paediatric cardiac pathology, in one volume. Comprising the twenty-five year experience of a single pathologist, the full spectrum of the pathology of heart disease, from the fetus to the adult, is uniquely presented here. Richly illustrated, with over 800 colour photographs, general and paediatric pathologists alike will be able to examine the microscopic features of the conditions described, with a specific focus on metabolic disease for practitioners worldwide.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Gary W. Procop, Bobbi S. Pritt.
    Summary: Pathology of Infectious Diseases, by Gary W. Procop, MD, packs all of today's most essential information on infectious disease pathology into a compact, high-yield format! Well-organized and segmented by type of infectious organism, the book's pragmatic approach complemented by abundant full-color, high-quality photomicrographs and clinical photos, and at-a-glance tables makes it easy to access the information you need to quickly and accurately detect and identify pathogenic organisms. Chapters on immunohistochemical and molecular techniques as well as artifacts and pitfalls guide you to accurate detection and identifications.

    Contents:
    Principles of Infectious Disease Pathology: An Introduction
    Herpes Virus Infections
    Viral Hepatitis
    Human Papillomavirus, Polyomaviruses, and Parvovirus Infections
    Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection
    Influenza and Other Respiratory Virus Infections
    Arbovirus Encephalomyelitis
    Viral Encephalomyelitis: Rabies, Enterovirus, and LCM
    Orf Infections and Molluscum Contagiosum
    Skin and Soft Tissue Infections
    Endocarditis and Other Intravascular Infections
    Bacterial Pneumonia
    Nocardiosis and Infections by Related Species
    Mycetoma: Eumycetoma and Actinomycetoma
    Botryomycoses
    Bacterial Gastrointestinal Infections
    Anaerobic Bacterial Infections
    Bartonella, Coxiella, and Tropheryma Infections *
    Rickettsia, Ehrlichia, and Anaplasma Infections
    Tuberculosis and Infections by Nontuberculous Mycobacteria
    Leprosy
    Buruli Ulcer
    Hyalohyphomycoses
    Zygomycosis
    Dematiaceous Fungal Infections
    Infections with Yeasts and Yeastlike Fungi
    Helminth Infections *
    Protozoal Infections
    Artifacts and Pitfalls in Infectious Disease Pathology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Stephen W. Barthold, Stephen M. Griffey, Dean H. Percy.
    Contents:
    Mouse
    Rat
    Hamster
    Gerbil
    Guinea pig
    Rabbit.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Gary C. Kanel.
    Contents:
    Normal liver
    Viral hepatitis
    Fatty liver diseases
    Diseases of the biliary tract
    Non-viral infectious diseases
    Granulomatous hepatitis
    Autoimmune hepatitis
    Vascular disorders
    Genetic and metabolic hepatic diseases
    Developmental hepatobiliary disorders and cystic diseases
    Drug- and toxin-induced liver diseases
    Liver transplantation
    Hepatic tumors, benign
    Hepatic tumors, malignant
    Miscellaneous hepatic disorders.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Helmut Popper.
    Summary: This well-illustrated book covers the full range of lung and pleural diseases from the pathologic standpoint. It has been updated from the first edition by including the most recent molecular data for the different lung diseases, tumor as well as non-tumor ones. New diagnostic tests are included, new aspects for the understanding of diseases have been added. Both diseases of adults and pediatric lung diseases are presented. The chapter on lung development has been expanded due to the many new findings being reported since the first edition. The book will serve as an excellent guide to the diagnosis of these diseases, but in addition it explains the disease mechanisms and etiology. Genetics and molecular biology are also discussed whenever necessary for a full understanding. The author is an internationally recognized expert who runs courses on lung and pleural pathology attended by participants from all over the world. In compiling this book, he has drawn on more than 30 years experience in the field.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Development of the Lung
    Chapter 2 Normal Lung
    Chapter 3 Pediatric Pulmonary Pathology
    Chapter 4 Edema
    Chapter 5 Air Filling Diseases
    Chapter 6 Airway Diseases
    Chapter 7 Smoking Related Lung Diseases
    Chapter 8 Pneumonia
    Chapter 9 Lung Diseases Based on Adverse Immune Reactions
    Chapter 10 Eosinophilic Lung Diseases
    Chapter 11 Vascular Lung Diseases
    Chapter 12 Metabolic Lung Diseases
    Chapter 13 Environmentally Induced Lung Diseases and Pneomuconiosis
    Chapter 14 Iatrogenic Lung Pathology
    Chapter 15 Bronchoalveolar Lavage as a Diagnostic and Research Tool
    Chapter 16 Lung Transplantation-Related Pathology
    Chapter 17 Lung Tumors
    Chapter 18 Metastasis
    Chapter 19 Molecular Pathology of Lung Tumors
    Chapter 20 Immunotherapy of Lung Tumors
    Chapter 21 Diseases of the Pleura
    Chapter 22 Lung Tumors in Experimental Models
    Chapter 23 Handling of Tissues and Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Helmut Popper ; with contribution by prof. Fiorella Calabrese.
    Summary: This well-illustrated textbook covers the full range of lung and pleural diseases from the pathologic standpoint. Both diseases of adults and pediatric lung diseases are presented. The book will serve as an excellent guide to the diagnosis of these diseases, but in addition it explains the disease mechanisms and etiology. Genetics and molecular biology are also discussed whenever necessary for a full understanding. The author is an internationally recognized expert who runs courses on lung and pleural pathology attended by participants from all over the world. In compiling this book, he has drawn on more than 30 years' experience in the field.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Raymond L. Barnhill, editor-in-chief ; Michael W. Piepkorn, Klaus J. Busam, co-editors.
    Summary: Highly acclaimed and considered the leading reference in the field, Pathology of Melanocytic Nevi and Melanoma has once again been fully revised, updated, and expanded to reflect the most recent advances and techniques in the field of melanoma pathology. New chapters on mucosal melanoma, ocular melanoma, and pigmented lesions of the nail apparatus have been included in this new edition. The successful focus and format of the previous editions have been preserved. Each lesion and diagnosis is clearly illustrated withthe aid of a wealth of digitally enhanced full-color photomicrographs. A concise description of the clinical features, histopathology, differential diagnosis, and outstanding characteristics of each lesion provides readers with a quick yet comprehensive overview of each topic covered. Pathology of Melanocytic Nevi and Melanoma is the essential reference for every practicing dermatopathologist, pathologist, dermatologist, and cancer research scientist today.

    Contents:
    Melanocytes
    Biopsies, Tissue Processing, Immunohistochemistry, and Ancillary Techniques
    Genetic and Molecular Pathology of Melanoma
    Circumscribed Pigmented Lesions Composed of Basilar Melanocytes
    Common Acquired and Atypical (Dysplastic) Melanocytic Nevi
    Congenital Melanocytic Nevi and Associated Neoplasms, Congenital and Childhood Melanoma
    Spitz Nevus and Variants
    Dermal Melanocytoses, Blue Nevi, and Related Conditions
    Melanocytic Nevi with Phenotypic Heterogeneity
    Cutaneous Malignant Melanoma
    Benign and Malignant Melanocytic Neoplasms of the Mucosa
    Benign and Malignant Melanocytic Neoplasms of the Ocular Apparatus
    Metastatic Malignant Melanoma
    Prognostic Factors in Cutaneous Malignant Melanoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Klaus J. Busam, Pedram Gerami, Richard A. Scolyer.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Ramesh K. Gupta, Pallav Gupta, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction to Opportunistic Infections
    Opportunistic Bacterial Infections
    Opportunistic Viral Infections
    Opportunistic Fungal Infections
    Opportunistic Parasitic Infections
    Mixed Opportunistic Infections.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Pierre Russo, Eduardo D. Ruchelli, David A. Piccoli, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric gastrointestinal and liver biopsies account for a significant portion of the specimens examined by a pathology laboratory. The increasingly widespread use of endoscopic procedures in children, the improved sophistication of medical imaging techniques, and the exciting expansion of knowledge in genetic medicine have all led to new advances and opportunities in pediatric hepatogastroenterology and pathology. Pathology of Pediatric Gastrointestinal and Liver Disease provides the pediatric pathologist, the GI or general pathologist, and the pediatric gastroenterologist with the most complete and current reference on the subject. With an emphasis on clinical-pathological correlation, the book includes in-depth discussions on disorders and issues that are frequently encountered but for which up-to-date information is often not readily available, as well as infrequent disorders unique or specific to children that are not covered in standard texts. Significant revision has been undertaken since the first edition, with the inclusion of many new illustrations and electron micrographs. Among the topics covered are malabsorption and motility disorders, immunodeficiencies, including HIV, developmental malformations, food allergies, cystic diseases of the liver, hepatic tumors, and esophageal and pancreatic disorders. The book is richly illustrated, with many figures in color, and the high-quality endoscopic and radiographic images permit ready correlation with the pathologic principles under discussion.

    Contents:
    Developmental Anatomy and Anomalies of the Gastrointestinal Tract with Involvement in Major Malformative Syndromes
    Esophageal Disorders in Childhood
    Gastritis and Gastropathies of Childhood
    Enteropathies Associated with Chronic Diarrhea and Malabsorption in Childhood
    Gastrointestinal and Hepatic Involvement in Immunodeficiencies and Systemic Disease of Childhood
    Colitis in Infancy and Childhood
    Intestinal Motor Disorders
    Polyps and Tumors of the Gastrointestinal Tract in Childhood
    Normal and Abnormal Liver Development
    Diseases of the Biliary Tree
    Hepatocellular and Intrahepatic Cholestasis
    Hepatitis and Liver Failure in Infancy and Childhood
    The Liver in Metabolic Disease
    Hepatic Tumors in Childhood
    GI and Liver Transplantation Pathology in Childhood.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Olivier Glehen, Aditi Bhatt, editors.
    Summary: This book covers some well-known and some unexplored pathological aspects of management of peritoneal metastases and should be read by both surgeons and pathologists involved in the management of peritoneal surface malignancies. The evaluation of cytoreductive surgery specimens is explored for the prognostic information it can provide and recommendations for evaluation of such specimens are provided. The pathways and patterns of peritoneal dissemination and their clinical implications on the extent of surgery performed and other aspects of management are discussed for some common peritoneal tumours. The exploratory studies presented here provide a new perspective on the surgical resection of peritoneal metastases. Other important aspects of pathological evaluation like pathological response to chemotherapy, diagnosis and classification of rare peritoneal tumors have also been covered in different chapters. Keeping in sync with the progress in molecular oncology, the role of molecular oncology in the current and future management of peritoneal metastases is addressed for different tumors. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Mechanisms of Peritoneal Metastasis Formation
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Mechanisms of Trans-mesothelial Metastasis
    1.2.1 Mechanisms of Cancer Cell Spillage into the Peritoneal Cavity
    1.2.2 Adhesion of PFCCs and Mesothelial Cells (Fig. 1.1, Process 1)
    1.2.3 Morphological Changes of Mesothelial Cells (Fig. 1.1, Process 1), Submesothelial Invasion of PFCCs, Attachment of PFCCs to the Basement Membrane (Fig. 1.1, Process 2)
    1.2.4 Adhesion of PFCCS to the Submesothelial Basement Membrane (Fig. 1.1, Process 2 and Fig. 1.6) 1.2.5 Invasion into the Submesothelial Tissue (Fig. 1.1, Process 3)
    1.2.6 Destruction of Submesothelial Basement Membrane and Extracellular Matrix (ECM) and Invasion into Submesothelial Tissue (Fig. 1.1, Process 3)
    1.2.7 Proliferation in the Subperitoneal Tissue (Fig. 1.1, Process 4: Angiogenesis and Proliferation)
    1.3 Trans-lymphatic Metastasis
    1.4 Mechanisms of Superficial Growing Metastasis
    References
    2: Extent of Peritoneal Resection for Peritoneal Metastases: Inferences from Pathophysiology
    2.1 Background and Introduction 2.1.1 Evolution of Peritoneal Surface Oncology
    2.2 Pathophysiology of Peritoneal Metastases and Its Clinical Implications
    2.2.1 Peritoneal Metastatic Cascade
    2.2.2 Distribution of Disease in the Peritoneal Cavity
    2.2.2.1 Epithelial Ovarian Cancer
    2.2.3 Implications of Mechanism of Peritoneal Dissemination on Surgical Resection
    2.2.4 Morphology of Peritoneal Deposits and Morphological Evolution of Peritoneal Metastases
    2.2.4.1 Morphological Evolution of PM
    2.2.4.2 Alteration in Morphology After Systemic Chemotherapy
    2.2.4.3 Histological Subtype 2.2.5 Impact on the Extent of Surgical Resection
    2.2.6 Resection of Uninvolved Regions
    2.2.7 Primary Tumor Type
    2.2.8 Lymphadenectomy in Addition to Cytoreductive Surgery
    2.2.9 Prognostic Implications of Lymph Node Involvement
    2.3 Extent of Peritoneal Resection for PM Arising from Various Primary Tumors
    2.3.1 Studies Looking at the Extent of Peritoneal Resection
    2.3.2 Application in Clinical Practice and Question for Future Research
    2.4 Conclusions
    References
    3: Therapeutic Rationale and Data Set for Reporting Cytoreductive Surgery Specimens 3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Anatomical Considerations
    3.2.1 Peritoneal Regions
    3.2.2 Lymphatic Drainage
    3.2.3 Subperitoneal Nodes
    3.2.4 Omental Nodes
    3.2.5 Retroperitoneal Nodes
    3.2.6 Paracardiac and Mediastinal Nodes
    3.3 Pathological Evaluation of Cytoreductive Surgery Specimens
    3.3.1 The Surgeon's Role
    3.3.1.1 Labelling of Surgical Specimens by the Surgeon
    3.3.1.2 Morphological Description
    3.3.2 The Pathologist's Role
    3.3.2.1 Handling of Specimens by the Pathologist
    3.3.2.2 Gross Description and Sectioning
    Peritonectomy Specimen(s)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Alessandro Franchi, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, up-to-date review of the field of diagnostic histopathology of sinonasal tumors and tumor-like lesions. It includes well-known and recently described structures, focusing on their epidemiological, clinical, radiological, and molecular features. It also discusses the latest surgical and medical treatment of these tumors. Primarily written for pathologists and pathology residents, the topics discussed make it a valuable resource for head and neck surgeons, radiologists, oncologists, and other clinical physicians. Written by experts in the field, this book further our understanding of the pathology of sinonasal tumors.

    Contents:
    Part 1 - General Features
    1. Epidemiology of sinonasal tumors
    2. Imaging of sinonasal tumors
    3. Molecular pathology of sinonasal tumors
    4. Clinical aspects and surgical treatment
    Part 2 - Histopathology Sinonasal Tumor-like Lesions
    5. Histopathology Sinonasal Tumor-like Lesions
    Part 3 - Sinonasal Tumors
    6. Epithelial Tumors
    7. Mesenchymal Tumors
    8. Neuroectodermal/melanocytic tumors
    9. Haematolymphoid tumors
    10. Germ cell tumors
    11. Metastatic tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Patricia V. Turner, Marina L. Brash, Dale A. Smith.
    Contents:
    Rabbits
    Mice
    Ferrets
    Guinea Pigs
    Chinchillas
    Rats
    Hamsters
    Gerbils
    Mice
    Hedgehogs.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Maurizio Colecchia, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I: Testicular Tumors: Epidemiology
    Epidemiology of Testicular Cancer
    Part II: Tumors of the Testis and Paratesticular Structures
    Congenital Lesions
    Entities Contributing to Infertility and their Relationship to Oncogenic Risk
    Germ Cell Tumor of Infancy and Childhood
    The Stem Cell Origin and Pathogenetic Routes of Testicular Germ Cell Tumors
    Tumours of the Testis
    Prognostic and Predictive Factors in Pathology of the Testis
    Handling of the Surgical Specimen and Pathology Reporting of Malignant Germ Cell and Sex Cord-Stromal Tumors of the Testis
    Cysts and Epithelial Proliferations of the Testicular Collecting System
    Paratesticular Soft Tissue Neoplasms
    Frozen Section in Testicular Pathology
    Part III: Pathology of Precancerous Lesions and Tumors of the Penis
    Precancerous Lesions of the Penis
    Tumours of the Penis and Scrotum
    Handling of the Surgical Specimen and Pathology Reporting of Penile Neoplasms. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    C. Simon Herrington, editor.
    Summary: This is the third volume in the Essentials of Diagnostic Gynecological Pathology series sponsored by the British Association of Gynecological Pathologists. Focusing on cervical pathology, it provides an update on current diagnostic criteria, the use of biomarkers and specimen handling. It serves as a quick desktop reference facilitating accurate diagnosis, and also provides detailed descriptions and an exhaustive reference list for more in-depth study. Sections devoted to the changing landscape of cervical screening, current management and future directions are included. Standardized terminology, the biology of HPV-related pre-invasive disease, and the staging of early cervical cancers are discussed. As most histopathology departments receive many gynecological specimens, Pathology of the Cervix has been written to be useful diagnostically to general as well as specialist gynecological pathologists and pathologists in training. Gynecologists, oncologists, dermatologists, genitourinary physicians and cancer nurse specialists will find expert insights here that will help in treatment and counselling of their patients.

    Contents:
    Preface; Preface to the Series; Contents; Contributors; 1: Development of the Uterine Cervix and Its Implications for the Pathogenesis of Cervical Cancer; Introduction; Development of the Lower Female Reproductive Tract; Immunophenotypic Characterization of the Developing Human Fetal Squamocolumnar Junction; Progenitor Cells in the Adult Squamocolumnar Junction; Definition of the Cervical Transformation Zone (TZ); Squamous Metaplasia; Potential Target Cells for HPV Infection; Premalignant Lesions; Low-Grade Squamous Intraepithelial Lesion (LSIL). High-Grade Squamous Intraepithelial Lesion (HSIL) Adenocarcinoma In Situ (AIS); References; 2: Human Papillomaviruses (HPVs); Introduction; Classification; HPV Genome Organization and Life Cycle; Epidemiology; Prevalence in the General Population; Clearance and Risk; Prevalence in Disease (Histological); Prevalence in Disease (Cytologically Defined); Host Defenses; HPV Immunization; Delivery and Immunogenicity; Therapeutic Vaccines; Impact (Prophylactic Vaccines); HPV Testing; Justification for HPV Testing; Targets and Types of HR-HPV Test. Tools and Biomarkers for the Risk Stratification of HR-HPV Infection HPV Testing in Various Biospecimens; HPV Testing in Immunized Populations; References; 3: Cervical Screening: History, Current Algorithms, and Future Directions; Principles of Screening; The Condition; The Test; The Treatment; The Screening Program; Epidemiology of Cervical Cancer; Papanicolaou and the Development of Cytology-Based Population Screening; Cervical Cancer Screening in the UK (1950-1985); UK Terminology of Cervical Cytology and Histology; The NHS Cervical Screening Program (1986-2004). NHSCSP 2004 to the Present Liquid-Based Cytology (LBC); HPV Testing; Triage of Low-Grade Abnormality; Test of Cure; Automation in Cervical Screening; NHSCSP Beyond 2016: Cervical Screening in the Era of HPV Vaccination; HPV Vaccination; Primary HPV Testing; References; 4: Surgical and Nonsurgical Management of Cervical Cancer: Current Practice and Future Directions; Introduction; Stage IA Carcinoma of the Cervix; Stage IA1: Invasive Lesion d" mm Wide and d" mm Deep; Stage IA1 Plus Lymphovascular Space Invasion; Stage IA2: Width d"7 mm and Depth> 3 mm But d" mm. Adenocarcinoma Versus Squamous Cell Carcinoma in Early Cervical Cancer Stage IB1 Carcinoma of the Cervix; Stage IB1: Depth>5 mm, Or Width>7 mm, But Tumour Less Than 4 cm Diameter; or a Clinically Visible Lesion Confined to the Cervix; Stage IB1: Diameter Less Than 1 cm; Stage IB1: 1-2 cm Diameter Tumor; Trachelectomy; Stage IB1: 2-4 cm in Diameter; Stage IB2
    IV Carcinoma of the Cervix; Reducing the Risks of Treatment; Strategy 1: Assess the Risk of Recurrence Prior to Undertaking Surgical Treatment; Strategy 2: Lymph Node Assessment; Strategy 3: Radical Surgical Techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by George L. Mutter, Jaime Prat.
    Summary: Covering a comprehensive range of common, rare, benign and malignant lesions, Pathology of the Female Reproductive Tract, 3rd Edition, authored by an international panel of subspecialty experts, brings you the latest scientific and diagnostic information for diseases of the female reproductive tract. From basic concepts of pathophysiology and diagnostic criteria to clinical correlation, this updated medical reference book delivers an integrated and practical approach to diagnosis and management of women with reproductive tract disorders. Quickly and easily access key information with user-friendly bullet points, diagnostic flowcharts, decision-making algorithms, summary tables, and take-home messages, as well as a "Road Map" at the beginning of each chapter for effortless navigation.Avoid diagnostic errors with the help of practical, expert advice on common pitfalls in differential diagnosis. Browse the complete contents from any location with online access at Expert Consult.

    Contents:
    Embryology
    Disorders of Sexual Development
    Vulvar Dermatoses and Infections
    Vulvar Squamous Lesions
    Vulvar Cysts, Adenocarcinoma, Melanocytic, and Miscellaneous Lesions
    Vulvar Mesenchymal Neoplasms and Tumor-Like Conditions
    Vagina
    Cervical Benign and Non-Neoplastic Conditions
    Biology of Cervical Squamous Neoplasia
    Cervical Squamous Intraepithelial Lesions
    Cervical Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Cervical Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Miscellaneous Cervical Neoplasms
    The Normal Endometrium
    Exogenous Hormones and their Effects on the Endometrium
    Endometritis, Metaplasias, Polyps, and Miscellaneous Changes
    Endometrial Hyperplasia without Atypia and EIN
    Endometrial Adenocarcinoma
    Uterine Smooth Muscle Tumors
    Endometrial Stromal Tumors, Mixed Mullerian Tumors, Adenomyosis, Adenomyomas and Rare Sarcomas
    Fallopian Tube
    Endometriosis
    Normal Ovaries, Inflammatory and Non-Neoplastic Conditions
    Non-Neoplastic and Tumor-Like Conditions of the Ovary
    Ovarian Epithelial-Stromal Tumors. Serous Tumors
    Ovarian Mucinous Tumors
    Ovarian Endometrioid, Clear Cell, Transitional, and Mixed Epithelial Stromal Tumors
    Ovarian Sex Cord Stromal and Steroid Cell Tumors
    Ovarian Germ Cell Tumors
    Metastatic Tumors of the Ovary
    The Peritoneum --Implantation and Placenta
    Non-Neoplastic Maternal Gestational Diseases
    Gestational Trophoblastic Disease
    Gross Description and Processing of Specimens
    Practical Biomarkers for Female Genital Tract Lesions
    Appendix A FIGO Staging of Cancers of the Female Genital Tract
    Appendix B Online Resources
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2014
  • Digital
    Fátima Carneiro, Paula Chaves, Arzu Ensari, editors.
    Summary: This book covers the complete field of the pahology of the Gastrointestinal tract - form Abetalipoproteinemia to Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Pieter Slootweg.
    Contents:
    Non-neoplastic Diseases of the Maxillofacial Bones
    Cysts
    Odontogenic Tumours
    Fibro-Osseous Lesions
    Giant Cell Lesions
    Bone forming Lesions of the Maxillofacial Bones
    Cartilaginous Lesions of the Maxillofacial Bones
    Other Diseases that involve Bone
    Diseases of the Temporomandibular Joint.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Alberto M. Marchevsky, Mark R. Wick.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2015
  • Digital
    Nafisa Wilkinson, editor.
    Summary: As the second volume in the Essentials of Diagnostic Gynecological Pathology series sponsored by the British Association of Gynecological Pathologists, Pathology of the Ovary, Fallopian Tube and Peritoneum is one of the very few dealing wholly with this subject. Pathology of the Ovary, Fallopian Tube and Peritoneum introduces the topic with a discussion of the anatomy, development, histology and normal function of the ovary, followed by chapters on non-neoplastic disorders of the ovary; surgery and medical management of ovarian cancer; and the use of imaging, frozen sections and cytology in ovarian pathology. The book then goes on to describe specific disorders of the ovary, fallopian tube and peritoneum in detail, and finishes with a chapter on specimen cut-up. Pathology of the Ovary, Fallopian Tube and Peritoneum has been written to be useful diagnostically to general as well as specialist gynecological histopathologists and pathologists in training. Gynecologists, oncologists, genitourinary physicians and cancer nurse specialists will find expert insights here that will help in treatment and counselling of their patients.

    Contents:
    Anatomy, Development, Histology and Normal Function of the Ovary
    Non-neoplastic Disorders of the Ovary
    The Surgery of Ovarian Cancer
    Advances in the Medical Management of Ovarian Cancer
    Integration of Imaging and Pathology in the Multidisciplinary Process
    Frozen Section Use in the Diagnosis of Ovarian Pathology
    The Role of Cytology in the Management of Ovarian Lesions
    Overview of Epithelial Ovarian Carcinoma (EOC): Pathogenesis and General Considerations
    Serous Neoplasms of the Ovary
    Mucinous Neoplasms of the Ovary
    Endometrioid Ovarian Carcinomas
    Clear Cell Carcinoma of the Ovary
    Undifferentiated, Transitional, Mixed and Other Epithelial Tumors of the Ovary
    Germ Cell Tumors of the Ovary and Dysgenetic Gonads
    Sex Cord Stromal Tumors
    Pathology of Malignancies Metastatic to the Ovary and of Synchronous Ovarian and Endometrial Carcinoma
    Pathology of the Fallopian Tube
    Pathology of the Peritoneum
    Mesenchymal Tumors of the Ovary
    Specimen Cut-up.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Irene Esposito, Eva Karamitopoulou-Diamantis, editors.
    Summary: This encyclopedia volume covers the complete field of pathology of the pancreas-- from Acinar cell neoplasms to Vascular resections. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need.

    Contents:
    Acinar cell carcinoma
    Acinar cell nodules
    Acinar cystic transformation of the pancreas
    Acinar-to-ductal metaplasia
    Acute pancreatitis
    Age-related changes
    Agenesis
    Alcohol-related chronic pancreatitis
    Anatomic variants, Surgical Pathology
    Anatomy and Organogenesis of the pancreas
    Anatomy, gross, Pathology of Pancreas
    Annular Pancreas
    Autoimmune pancreatitis
    Cystic fibrosis
    Ductal adenocarcinoma and Variants
    Ectopic tissue
    Familial and inherited pancreatic cancer
    Foregut cyst
    Glucagon-cell hyperplasia and neoplasia
    Groove pancreatitis
    Grossing of distal pancreatectomy specimens, Surgical Pathology
    Grossing of pancreatoduodenectomy specimens, Surgical Pathology
    Haemochromatosis
    Hereditary Chronic Pancreatitis
    Histology, Pathology of Pancreas.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    by Fiona Campbell, Caroline S. Verbeke.
    Summary: This updated volume provides a practical guide to pancreatic pathology that covers recent changes in concepts and classifications. Potential pitfalls and mimics in pancreatic pathology are highlighted and illustrated, and guidance is provided regarding how to recognise and avoid them. There is a new chapter on transplant pathology, and more than 200 new macroscopic and microscopic images have been added. Pathology of the Pancreas: A Practical Approach aims to enable readers to recognise the various pathological entities and provide the key information in their pathology reports, which is necessary for the individual patient's further management. The book provides the diagnostic pathologist with a comprehensive, well-illustrated, and extensively cross-referenced approach to pancreatic pathology.

    Contents:
    Embryology, Anatomy, and Histology
    Pancreatic Specimen Types
    Specimen Dissection and Sampling
    The Pancreatic Multidisciplinary Team
    Common Minor Changes
    Hereditary Exocrine Disorders
    Inflammatory Disorders
    Pancreatic Intraepithelial Neoplasia
    Ductal Adenocarcinoma
    Acinar Cell Carcinoma
    Non-epithelial Neoplasia
    Secondary Neoplasia
    Congenital and Developmental Abnormalities
    Cystic Lesions: Classification and Sampling
    Serous Cystic Neoplasia
    Mucinous Cystic Neoplasia
    Intraductal Papillary Neoplasia
    Solid-Pseudopapillary Neoplasia
    Other Cystic Lesions
    Endocrine Neoplasia
    Endocrine Cell Hyperplasia
    Pathology of the Transplanted Pancreas
    The Role of Frozen Section
    The Role of Cytology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Khong, T. Yee; Gordijn, Sanne J.; Mooney, Eoghan E.; Morgan, Terry K.; Nikkels, Peter G. J.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Timothy Craig Allen, Saul Suster.
    Summary: This book covers the complete field of pleura and mediastinum pathology - from acquired multilocular thymic cyst to well-differentiated papillary mesothelioma. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Antonio Lopez-Beltran, Liang Cheng, Maria R. Raspollini, Rodolfo Montironi.
    Summary: Prostate cancer is the most commonly diagnosed noncutaneous neoplasm in men in the United States and is the second leading cause of cancer mortality. It poses diagnostic challenges in day-to-day practice in misdiagnosis of tumor-like lesions and secondary tumors. This book is a concise, practical guide to prostate pathology and is structured to guide pathologists, both practicing and trainees, in the diagnostic process. Numerous color images and algorithms show, in a practical manner, how to integrate pathologic and immunohistochemical features to reach a correct diagnosis in prostate tumors and tumor-like lesions. The book incorporates recent developments in biomarkers applied to immunohistochemistry, representing the best immunohistochemistry practice applied to current diagnosis of prostate cancer in biopsies and surgical specimens. It takes a multidisciplinary approach to the clinical management of prostate cancer and will also appeal to all healthcare professionals treating patients, particularly urologists, oncologists, biomedical scientists, and researchers. This book provides access to an online version on Cambridge Core, accessed via the code printed on the inside of the cover.

    Contents:
    Basic anatomy and histology of the prostate
    Inflammatory and tumor-like conditions of the prostate
    Preneoplastic lesions and conditions of the prostate
    Adenocarcinoma of the prostate
    Gleason grading of prostate cancer
    Histologic subtypes of prostatic carcinoma
    Neuroendocrine tumors of the prostate
    Pathologic prognostic factors of prostate cancer
    Pathology of the prostate after treatment
    Basic molecular pathology of prostate cancer
    Rare forms of prostatic carcinoma
    Tumors and tumor-like conditions of the prostate stroma
    Soft tissue and miscellaneous primary tumours of the prostate
    Metastatic and secondary tumors of the prostate
    The seminal vesicles and ejaculatory ducts
    Pathology of the prostatic urethra
    Practical immunohistochemistry of prostate cancer and related lesions.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2017
  • Digital
    Antonio Lopez-Beltran, Rodolfo Montironi, Liang Cheng.
    Summary: This concise, practical guide is structured to reflect the thought process of the practising pathologist. A key feature is the use of algorithms to aid in reaching the correct diagnosis, for both common and complex bladder tumors and tumor-like lesions. Its coverage of diagnostic criteria is in keeping with international standards and best practice, and the practical layout provides quick access to relevant information, integrating conventional histology, immunohistochemical markers and key clinical knowledge. Topics covered include the full spectrum of pathologic conditions that afflict the bladder and urothelium, as well as the pathology of the renal pelvis, ureter and the urethra. Accompanied by numerous images, this is an essential guide for trainee and practising surgical pathologists, urologists and oncologists.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Urinary bladder
    Basic anatomy and histology
    Inflammatory and tumor-like conditions
    Flat intraepithelial lesions and carcinoma in situ
    Benign papillary neoplasms and inverted papilloma
    Pathology of urothelial carcinoma
    Glandular neoplasms
    Pathology of the urachus
    Squamous cell neoplasms
    Neuroendocrine tumors
    Myofibroblastic proliferations and tumors
    Soft tissue tumors
    Other rare malignancies
    Metastatic and secondary tumors
    Pathology of the renal pelvis and ureter
    Pathology of the urethra
    Immunohistochemistry in urothelial lesions.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2016
  • Digital
    René P. Michel, Gerald J. Berry, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Immunobiology and Immunopharmacology of Transplantation
    3. Pathology of Cardiac Transplantation
    4. Pathology of Hepatic Transplantation
    5. Pathology of Pancreatic Transplantation
    6. Pathology of Renal Transplantation
    7. Pathology of Pulmonary Transplantation
    8. Pathology of Intestinal Transplantation
    9. Pathology of Bone Marrow/Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation
    10. Malignancies Post-Transplantation
    11. The Future of Transplantation Pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Chapman H. Binford and Daniel H. Connor ; sponsored and supported by Armed Forces Institute of Pathology ... [et al.].
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC961 .P37 1976
    2
  • Digital
    Lewis A. Hassell, Michael L. Talbert, Jane Pine Wood, editors.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Money and the Practice of Pathology
    Healthcare Finance and the Pathology Practice
    The Trend Outcomes, Accountable Care and Value-Based Purchasing
    Coding and Billing
    Revenue Cycle Management
    Applying the Knowledge
    Current Major Trends and Considerations for the Future
    Section 2: Financial Management of a Practice
    The Income Statement
    More Complex Arrangements
    Practice Sales and Mergers
    Section 3: Contracting
    Payor Contracts
    Hospital Contracts
    Pathologist Employment Contracts
    Section 4: Human Resources
    Human Resources (HR) Management
    Section 5: Pathology Group Issues
    Group Dynamics
    Section 6: Better Practice Management
    Skills and Tools for Better Practice Management
    Section 7: Managing Ricks and Opportunities
    Professional Liability Risk
    Corporate and General Liability
    Disaster Risks and Preparedness Planning
    Market and Valuation Risks
    Technologic and Regulatory Risks
    Opportunities and Entrepreneurism
    Identifying and Capitalizing on Opportunities
    Section 8: Looking Ahead
    The High Performing Practice into the Future
    Bringing It All Together
    Appendix A: Cases for Discussion
    Appendix B: You and Your Environment: Cases for Group Discussion.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Walter L. Kemp, Travis Brown.
    Contents:
    Cell injury, adaptations, and death
    Inflammation and repair
    Hemodynamics
    Diseases of the immune system
    Neoplasia
    Genetic and pediatric diseases
    Environmental and nutritional disease
    Diseases of the cardiovascular system
    Diseases of the hematopoietic and lymphoid systems
    Diseases of the respiratory system
    Diseases of the kidney and urinary tract
    Diseases of the mouth and gastrointestinal tract
    Diseases of the liver, gallbladder, and biliary tract
    Diseases of the pancreas
    Diseases of the male and female genital tract
    Diseases of the breast
    Diseases of the endocrine system
    Diseases of the musculoskeletal system
    Diseases of the peripheral and central nervous systems
    Diseases of the skin
    Mixed items
    Images.
  • Digital
    Douglas H. Richie, Jr.
    Summary: This new book consolidates the current knowledge of lower extremity biomechanics and pathomechanics and makes this information relevant to the study of common foot and ankle pathologies. The content is presented in a language and format that allows the clinician to review current evidence explaining the etiology of these disorders in order to formulate effective treatment interventions. In order to understand pathomechanics, the clinician must also become versed in the normal, healthy biomechanics of the lower extremity. A review of gait, muscle function and forces acting on the lower extremities during physical activity will be the focus of the first part of this book. The second part of the book will study the common, challenging pathologies treated on a daily basis by foot and ankle clinicians: hallux abducto valgus, hallux rigidus, metatarsalgia, digital deformities, adult acquired flatfoot, and plantar heel pain. These chapters discuss all the relevant factors contributing to these conditions, evaluating and exposing myths and misconceptions about the pathomechanics and treatments of these conditions. For each disorder, a comprehensive review of published research provides a foundation for an updated, valid description of etiology and risk factors. Providing a fresh approach to lower extremity pathomechanics and management strategies, Pathomechanics of Common Foot Disorders is a valuable resource for podiatrists and orthopedic foot and ankle surgeons at all levels. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Pathomechanics
    References
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    1: Comparative Anatomy and Introduction to the Twisted Plate Mechanism
    The Specialization of the Human Foot
    Ontogeny of the Human Foot
    Does Ontogeny Recapitulate Phylogeny of the Human Foot?
    Ankle and Hindfoot Development: Twisting the Plate of Bones
    Ontogeny of the Forefoot
    Rotation of Segments
    The Twisted Plate Provides the Specialized Function of the Human Foot
    Clinical Application of the Twisted Plate Mechanism
    Twisting the Plate and Locking for Optimal Foot Function High-Gear Push Off
    What Initiates High-Gear Push Off?
    Testing the Theory of High-Gear Push Off
    What Is the Ideal Alignment of the Human Foot?
    The Myth of Midfoot "Locking"
    What Stiffens the Human Foot?
    The Springlike Function of the Human Foot
    Summary
    References
    2: Human Walking: The Gait Cycle
    Introduction
    Kinetics
    Key Events in the Walking Gait Cycle
    Phase 1 Initial Contact 0- 2% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.3)
    Phase 2 Loading Response 2-12% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.4)
    Phase 3 Midstance 12- 31% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.5) Phase 4 Terminal Stance 31-50% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.6)
    Phase 5 Pre-swing 50-62% of the Gait Cycle
    Phase 6 Initial Swing 62-75% of the Gait Cycle Events (Fig. 2.8)
    Phase 7 Mid-swing 75-87% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.9)
    Phase 8 Terminal Swing 87-100% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.10)
    Common Compensatory Changes Observed in Gait
    References
    3: Motion of the Foot: Joints, Muscles, and Sensorimotor Control
    Introduction
    General Motion of the Foot Segments
    The Bone Pin Studies
    The Lateral Metatarsals Move More than the Medial The Navicular-Cuneiform Joints Move More than the Midtarsal Joint
    The Midfoot Joints Contribute More Sagittal Plane Motion than the Ankle
    The Medial Column Moves More than the Ankle
    Pure Ankle Joint Motion Can Now Be Measured
    The Ankle Moves in the Transverse and Frontal Planes
    There Is more Frontal Plane Motion in the Ankle than the Subtalar Joint
    The Talonavicular Joint and the Calcaneocuboid Joints Move More than the Subtalar Joint
    Majority of First Ray Motion Is as the Naviculocuneiform Joint
    The Lateral Metatarsals Move More than the Medial Metatarsals The Lateral and Medial Columns Have the Same Sagittal Plane Motion
    How Does the "Normal" Foot Function in Gait?
    Neuromuscular Control
    Do Joint Axes Determine Direction and Range of Motion?
    Muscle Function in the Lower Extremity
    Phasic Activity
    Muscle Strength
    Moment Arm
    Major Muscle Contributors in Six Planes of Motion (Summary of Table 3.2)
    Sagittal Plane
    Frontal Plane
    Transverse Plane
    Muscle Activity/Demand and Foot Type
    The Plantar Intrinsic Muscles
    Storage and Return of Energy
    Twisting the Plate Stores and Releases Energy
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Abdelhamid H. Elgazzar, editor.
    Summary: This book, now in its third edition, aims to promote a deeper understanding of the scientific and clinical basis of nuclear medicine and the new directions in medical imaging, which will lead to better utilization of nuclear medicine techniques in patient management and to further modifications and innovations in the field. The new edition has been revised and updated to reflect recent changes and to ensure that the contents are in line with likely future directions. The book starts by providing essential basic information on general pathophysiology, cell structure, and cell biology as well as the mechanisms of radiopharmaceutical localization in different tissues and cells. The clinical applications of nuclear medicine are then presented in a series of chapters covering every major organ system. These chapters relate the basic relevant knowledge of anatomy, physiology, and pathology to the clinical utilization of various scintigraphic modalities. The therapeutic applications of nuclear medicine, including recent advances, are discussed in a separate chapter. The final chapter is devoted to the biologic effects of ionizing radiations, including radiation from medical procedures. A glossary at the end of the book has been expanded with clear explanations of certain terms and uncommon disease conditions that will help students and trainees in understanding pertinent concepts. It is hoped that this book will continue to help nuclear medicine practitioners, trainees, students, and researchers, as well as professionals in various other medical fields.

    Contents:
    The Cell: Structure, Function, and Molecular Biology
    Pathophysiology and Mechanisms of Radiopharmaceutical Localization
    Inflammation
    Musculoskeletal System
    Thyroid Gland
    Parathyroid Gland
    Adrenal Gland
    Genitourinary system
    Oncology 1: Basic Principles of Tumor Pathology and Biology
    Oncology 2: Tumor Imaging: Scintigraphic and Pathophysiologic Correlation
    Respiratory System
    Cardiology 1: Myocardial Contractility and Assessment of Cardiac Function
    Cardiology 2: Basis of Myocardial Perfusion, Metabolism, Infarction and Receptor imaging
    Digestive system 1: Gastrointestinal Tract
    Digestive system 2: Liver and Biliary Tract
    Central Nervous System
    Nuclear Hematology
    Lymphoscintigraphy
    Basis of Therapeutic Nuclear Medicine
    Biological Effects of Ionizing Radiation.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Abdelhamid H. Elgazzar, editor.
    Summary: This book, now in its fourth edition, aims to promote a deeper understanding of the scientific and clinical basis of nuclear medicine and the new directions in medical imaging. The new edition has been revised and updated significantly to reflect recent changes and to ensure that the contents are in line with likely future directions. In addition to that, chapters have been reorganized in order to simplify the contents and to increase the readability. The book starts by providing essential information on general pathophysiology, cell biology and biologic effects of ionizing radiation followed by the mechanisms of radiopharmaceutical localization in different tissues and cells. This is followed by a series of chapters that covers all relevant organ systems presenting the basic knowledge of anatomy, physiology, and pathology and relating them to the clinical utilization of various scintigraphic modalities. The final chapter is devoted to the basis of therapeutic applications of nuclear medicine. The book will prove invaluable to all with an interest in the pathophysiologic basis of Nuclear Medicine, including nuclear medicine professionals, radiologists, surgeons, pediatricians and internal medicine physicians.

    Contents:
    General Concepts of Pathophysiology
    Cell Biology and Biologic Effects of Ionizing Radiation
    Basis of Radiopharmaceutical Uptake
    Basis of Inflammation Imaging
    Basis of Musculoskeletal Imaging
    Basis of Endocrine System Imaging
    Basis of Genitourinary System Imaging
    Basis of Respiratory System Imaging
    Basis of Cardiovascular System Imaging
    Basis of Digestive System Imaging
    Basis of CNS Imaging
    Basis of Oncologic Imaging
    Basis of Therapeutic Radionuclide Therapy. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Lachel Story.
    Summary: "Story, Pathophysiology: A Practical Approach, is a solid undergraduate text for a course of the same name. It is a fourteen-chapter text attractive to the modern student: concise, well-written, focused on the essential, and applicable to practice"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Cellular function
    Immunity
    Hematopoietic function
    Cardiovascular function
    Respiratory function
    Fluid, electrolyte, and acid-base homeostasis
    Urinary function
    Reproductive function
    Gastrointestinal function
    Endocrine function
    Neural function
    Musculoskeletal function
    Integumentary function
    Sensory function.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    volume editors, Jeffrey S. Borer, O. Wayne Isom.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
  • Digital
    Gowraganahalli Jagadeesh, Pitchai Balakumar, Khin Maung-U, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jon C. Aster, H. Franklin Bunn.
    Summary: "Introduction to the physiological principles underlying the regulation and function of blood cells and hemostasis, as well as the pathophysiologic mechanisms responsible for the development of blood disorders. Featuring a strong emphasis on key principles, the book covers diagnosis and management primarily within a framework of pathogenesis." -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Contributors
    1 Introduction to blood and hematopoietic tissues
    2 Hematopoiesis
    PART I ANEMIA AND RED CELL DISORDERS
    3 Overview of the anemias
    4 Anemias due to bone marrow failure or infiltration
    5 Iron homeostasis: deficiency and overload
    6 Megaloblastic anemias
    7 Anemias associated with chronic illness
    8 Thalassemia
    9 Sickle cell disease
    10 Inherited hemolytic disorders of the red cell membrane and red cell metabolism
    11 Acquired hemolytic anemias
    12 Erythrocytosis
    PART II HEMOSTASIS AND THROMBOSIS
    1 Overview of hemostasis
    14 Platelet disorders
    15 Inherited coagulation disorders
    16 Acquired coagulation disorders
    17 Thrombotic disorders
    PART III WHITE BLOOD CELL DISORDERS
    18 Leukocyte function and nonmalignant leukocyte disorders
    19 Introduction to hematologic malignancies
    20 Myeloproliferative neoplasms and myelodysplastic syndromes
    21 Acute leukemias
    22 Non-Hodgkin lymphomas and chronic lymphocytic leukemias
    23 Hodgkin lymphoma
    23 Multiple myeloma and related disorders
    PART IV TRANSFUSION MEDICINE
    25 Blood transfusion
    26 Hematopoietic stem cell transplantation
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessMedicine
    AccessHemOnc
  • Digital/Print
    McPhee, Stephen J.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB113 .P365
    3
  • Digital
    Messoud Ashina, Pierangeo Geppetti, editors.
    Contents:
    1 Anatomy of headache
    2 Animal models of migraine
    3 Animal models of other primary headaches
    4 Genetics of headache
    5 Human models of primary headaches
    6 Imaging of migraine
    7 Imaging of other primary headaches
    8 Neurophysiology of migraine
    9 Neurophysiology of other primary headaches
    10 Biochemistry of primary headaches
    11 Pathophysiology of migraine: current status and future directions
    12 Pathophysiology of TTH: current status and future directions
    13 Pathophysiology of cluster headache: current status and future directions
    14 Pathophysiology of MOH: current status and future directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editor, Leonard S. Lilly.
    Contents:
    Normal cardiac structure and function / Jacob E. Lemieux, Elazer R. Edelman, Gary Strichartz, and Leonard S. Lilly
    The cardiac cycle: mechanisms of heart sounds and murmurs / David B. Fischer and Leonard S. Lilly
    Cardiac imaging and catheterization / Diana M. López and Patricia Challender Come
    The electrocardiogram / David B. Fischer and Leonard S. Lilly
    Atherosclerosis / SarrahShahawy and Peter Libby
    Ischemic heart disease / Jayme Wilder, Marc S. Sabatine, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Acute coronary syndromes / Jayme Wilder, Marc S. Sabatine, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Valvular heart disease / Elizabeth Ryznar, Patrick T. O'Gara, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Heart failure / David Miranda, Gregory Lewis and Michael A. Fifer
    The cardiomyopathies / P. Connor Johnson, G. William Dec, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Mechanisms of cardiac arrhythmias / Morgan J. Prust, William G. Stevenson, Gary R. Strichartz, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Clinical aspects of cardiac arrhythmias / Morgan J. Prust, William G. Stevenson, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Hypertension / Joshua Drago, Gordon H. Williams, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Diseases of the pericardium / Leonard S. Lilly
    Diseases of the peripheral vasculature / SruthiRenati and Mark A. Creager
    Congenital heart disease / Zena L. Knight and David W. Brown
    Cardiovascular drugs / Andrey V. Dolinko, Michael T. Kuntz, Elliott M. Antman, Gary R. Strichartz, and Leonard S. Lilly.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Medical Education)
  • Digital
    Leonard S. Lilly.
    Summary: Enthusiastically acclaimed by medical students and faculty worldwide, this text is specifically designed to prepare students for their first encounters with patients with cardiovascular disease. Thoroughly revised by internationally recognized Harvard Medical School faculty and a team of select cardiology fellows and internal medicine residents, this seventh edition equips students with a clear, complete, and clinically relevant understanding of cardiovascular pathophysiology, setting a strong foundation for patient diagnosis and management. Review questions and answers in each chapter prepare students for course and board exams. Updated content reflects the latest understanding of mechanisms of cardiac disease and technological advances. Medical imaging and color clinical photographs show real-world examples of many clinically relevant cardiovascular conditions. Introductory chapter outlines and end-of-chapter summaries provide organized, quick review of core information.

    Contents:
    Normal Cardiac Structure and Function
    The Cardiac Cycle: Mechanisms of Heart Sounds and Murmurs
    Cardiac Imaging and Hemodynamic Assessment
    The Electrocardiogram
    Atherosclerosis
    Ischemic Heart Disease
    Acute Coronary Syndromes
    Valvular Heart Disease
    Heart Failure
    The Cardiomyopathies
    Mechanisms of Cardiac Arrhythmias
    Clinical Aspects of Cardiac Arrhythmias
    Hypertension
    Diseases of the Pericardium
    Diseases of the Peripheral Vasculature
    Congenital Heart Disease
    Cardiovascular Drugs
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2021
  • Digital
    Paramjit S. Tappia, Bram Ramjiawan, Naranjan S. Dhalla, editors.
    Summary: According to the World Health Organization, the epidemic of global obesity has nearly tripled since 1975. In 2016, more than 1.9 billion adults were overweight, over 650 million of which were obese. Being overweight and obese has been linked to a number of non-communicable, chronic diseases. Pathophysiology of Obesity-Induced Health Complications is a compilation of review articles dedicated to describe co-morbidities associated with obesity. The wide range that is covered is of significant interest to basic research scientists, clinicians and graduate students who are engaged in studying obesity-induced health complications. Furthermore, this book highlights the potential of novel approaches for the prevention and treatment of obesity and its related illnesses. Nineteen articles in this book are organized in four sections that are designed to provide an overview of obesity-induced health complications. The first section serves as an introductory section on the prevalence, causes, consequences, treatments and preventive approaches for obesity. Section two covers the metabolic disturbances and inflammation due to obesity. The third section is focused on neurological and visceral complications as a consequence of obesity. The final section covers strategies for the prevention of obesity-induced complications. The book illustrates that obesity can result in a diverse range of pathophysiological conditions that adversely affect health.

    Contents:
    Prevalence, consequences, causes and management of obesity
    Adipocytes Under Environmental Assault: Targets for Obesity?
    Obesity and its Complications Pathogenesis
    Extracellular Vesicles and Circulating miRNAs
    Exercise -Induced Mitigation of Obesity and Associated Metabolic Diseases
    Pathophysiology of Obesity Induced Hyperglycemia and Insulin Resistance
    Obesity and Osteoarthritis: Are Adipokines Bridging Metabolism, Inflammation, and Biomechanics
    Understanding the Initiation and Progression of Diet-Induced Obesity and Associated Pathophysiology: Lessons Learned from a Rat Model
    Immune Modulation and Macrophage Polarization in Pathogenesis of Pancreatic Dysfunction in Obesity
    Association Between Obesity and Poor Sleep: A Review of Epidemiological Evidence
    Exploration of the Bidirectionality of Obesity and Depression by means of the Neuropsychological Model of Obesity Genesis
    Obesity-Induced Non-Alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD): role of hyperhomocystenemia
    Mechanisms of Obesity Related Kidney Disease
    Consequences of Maternal Obesity on Neonatal Outcomes and Cardio-Metabolic Health in Infancy
    The Developmental Mechanisms of Obesity by Maternal Obesity
    Diet Induced Maternal Hypercholesterolemia and In Utero Fetal Programming
    Modified Denouement in Bariatric Surgery due to Genetic Polymorphism
    Anti-Inflammatory Components from Functional Foods for Obesity
    Attenuation of Obesity-Associated Oxidative Stress by Cucurbita maxima Seed Oil in High Fat Diet Induced Obese Rats
    Pathophysiology of Obesity-Related Non-Communicable Chronic Diseases and Advancements in Preventive Strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Lund-Mackay system for computed tomography evaluation of paranasal sinuses in patients with granulomatosis and poliangitis
    Oxidative stress and nitric oxide in sedentary older adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities
    Foreign body in the airway a female patient with myasthenia gravis
    Relevance of immune-sympathetic nervous system interplay for the development of hypertension
    The influence of insulin therapy on the course of acute exacerbation of bronchial asthma
    Association of allergic rhinitis in female university students with socio-economic factors and markers of estrogens levels
    Psychosocial context of differences between asthma and diabetic patients in adaptation to the disease
    Exacerbations of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and quality of life of patients
    Effects of glucocorticosteroids on myocardial ultrastructure in experimentally-induced acute myocardial ischemia
    Breathing in Parkinsonism.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    edited by Carly Meyer, Nerina Scarinci, Louise Hickson.
    Contents:
    Principles and outcomes of patient- and family-centered care / Carly Meyer, Nerina Scarinci, Caitlin Barr
    Getting ready to be a patient- and family-centered clinician / Caitlin Barr
    Getting the environment ready for patient- and family-centered care / Nerina Scarinci, Carly Meyer
    Planning a patient- and family-centered approach to service delivery / Carly Meyer, Nerina Scarinci
    Identifying patient and family member needs through assessment / Louise Hickson, Tanya Rose, Nerina Scarinci, Carly Meyer
    Meeting patient and family member needs through collaborative management planning / Louise Hickson
    Consideration of cultural and linguistic diversity in patient- and family-centered care / Nerina Scarinci, Carly Meyer, Leanne Sorbello.
  • Digital
    Pranavi V. Sreeramoju, Stephen G. Weber, Alexis A. Snyder, Lynne M. Kirk, William G. Reed, Beverly A. Hardy-Decuir, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the interface between the patient and the healthcare system as the entryway to high-quality care and improved outcomes. Unlike other texts, this book puts the patient back in the center of care while integrating the various practices and challenges. Written by interdisciplinary experts, the book begins by evaluating the entire quality landscape before giving voice to all parties involved, including physicians, nurses, administrators, patients, and families. The text then focuses on how to develop a structure that meets needs of all of these groups, effectively addressing common threats to positive outcomes and patient satisfaction. The text tackles the most common challenges clinicians face in a hospital setting, including infection prevention, medication error and stewardship that may jeopardize recovery, complex care, and employee-patient engagement. The Patient and Healthcare System: Perspectives on High-Quality Care is an excellent resource for physicians across broad specialties, nurses, hospital administrators, social workers, patient caregivers and all healthcare professionals concerned with infection prevention, quality and safety of care delivery, and patient satisfaction.

    Contents:
    Voice of the Patient
    Voice of the Physician
    Voice of the Nurse
    The Quality Landscape
    Access to Affordable Health Care Coverage
    Access to Affordable Healthcare: Healthcare Executive Perspective
    Health and Healthcare Disparities: The Next Frontier in Population Health?
    Preventing Mistakes in Health Care
    Timeliness of Care
    Effectiveness of Care
    Improving the Efficiency of Care
    Quality Assurance of Data
    Patient-Centeredness through Shared Decision Making
    Relationship-based Care
    When Technical Solutions are not Enough: Engaging Everyone in Improving Healthcare.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Richard N. Herrier, Pharm. D., FAPhA, CAPT., USPHS (Ret.), Professor, Department of Pharmacy Practice and Science, College of Pharmacy, University of Arizonia, Tuscon, Arizonia, David A. Apgar, Pharm D., PA-C (1976-78), CAPT., USPHS (Ret.), Assistant Professor, Department of Pharmacy Practice and Science, College of Pharmacy, University of Arizona, Tucson, Arizona, Robert W. Boyce, RPh, FASHP, CAPT., USPHS, (Ret.), Director of Pharmacy, Plageman Student Health Center, College of Pharmacy, Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oregon, Stephan L. Foster, Pharm. D., FAPhA, FNAP, CAPT., USPHS (Ret.), Professor and Vice Chair, Department of Clinical Pharmacy, College of Pharmacy, University of Tennessee Health Sciences Center, Memphis, Tennessee.
    Summary: This unique text explains how to integrate pathophysiology, medical history, physical findings, and laboratory test results to accurately assess and monitor patient problems.

    Contents:
    Approach to differential diagnosis
    Obtaining a patient history
    Documentation
    Dealing with patients and health care providers
    Dealing with patient adherence issues
    Organizing patient visits
    Symptoms related to the ear, nose and throat
    Cough
    Chestpain
    Heartburn and abdominal pain
    Nausea and vomiting
    Diarrhea and constpation
    Headache
    Inflamed (red) eye
    Musculoskeletal symptoms
    Dysuria and vaginal discharge
    Common skin disorders
    Essential hypertension
    Hyperlipidemia
    Diabetes mellitus
    Asthma/COPD
    Heart failure
    Seizure disorders
    Liver and renal disease
    Anemia, bleeding and infection.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Hans Gombotz, Kai Zacharowski, Donat Rudolf Spahn ; translator, Sarah Venkata.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2016
  • Digital
    Christian von Heymann, Christa Boer, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a multidisciplinary approach to the maintenance of hemostasis and minimisation of blood loss in patients undergoing cardiac surgery. All aspects of patient blood management are covered that may contribute to a reduction in perioperative bleeding and transfusion requirements in cardiac surgery. This is achieved through practical cases and a theoretical background that gives a better understanding of patient hemostasis and the occurrence of bleeding complications. This book is relevant to cardiac surgeons, anesthesiologists, clinical perfusionists, hematologists and intensivists.

    Contents:
    Team Approach
    Identification of patients at high risk for bleeding
    Definition and Risk Factors of Bleeding
    Relevance of Blood Loss and Economic Impact
    Preoperative measures to reduce anemia
    Risk of Anemia
    Therapy of Anemia
    Perioperative drug management to prevent bleeding and thrombosis
    Antiplatelet Drug Management
    Preoperative Management of Anticoagulants
    Bridging
    Monitoring of coagulation and hemostasis
    Platelet Function Monitoring
    Coagulation Monitoring
    Intraoperative measures to reduce bleeding and maintain hemostasis
    Anticoagulant Management
    Fibrinolysis
    Cardiopulmonary Bypass
    Blood Conservation Strategies
    Minimally Invasive Extracorporeal Circulation Systems
    Volume Replacement
    The Jehovah's Witness
    Postoperative treatment of coagulopathy and microvascular bleeding
    Treatment Algorithms for Bleeding
    Treatment with Procoagulants
    Transfusion Thresholds for Packed Red Blood Cells
    Bleeding Management in the Intensive Care Unit
    Venous Thromboembolism Prophylaxis.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    edited by Catherine D. DeAngelis.
    Contents:
    Medical professionalism from the patient's perspective: is there an advocate in the house? / Martha E. Gaines, Rachel Grob, Mark J. Schlesinger, and Sarah Davis
    The Hippocratic Oath as an example of professional conduct / Howard Markel
    Professionalism and politics in the United Kingdom / Carol Black, Cyril Chantler
    The role of specialty boards in promoting professionalism: the case of the American Board of Internal Medicine / Clarence H. Braddock III, Eric S. Holmboe, Christine K. Cassel
    Medical professionalism in the twenty-first century / Catherine D. DeAngelis
    Professionalism and nursing: a quest or an accomplishment? / Kathleen M. White
    Public health: the "population" as patient / Lawrence O. Gostin
    Exploring the role of law and legal systems in the therapeutic relationship / James G. Hodge, Jr.
    Professionalism and fiduciary responsibilities in health care leadership / Phil B. Fontanarosa
    Professionalism, medicine, and religion / Patricia M. Fosarelli
    Professionalism: the science of care and the art of medicine / James C. Harris.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R727.3 .P3634 2014
    1
  • Print
    edited by Alice D. Domar, Denny Sakkas, Thomas L. Toth.
    Summary: "Most chromosomal abnormalities are incompatible with life, but a small minority of them leads to normal development and lifespan (e.g., balanced Robertsonian translocations), while others, although life-compatible, have appreciable effects on the individual's phenotype (e.g., sexual chromosomes imbalances). Because of their compatibility with life, some aneuploidies may be present in the karyotype of individuals in reproductive age and therefore be transmitted to their offspring. The presence of a balanced or unbalanced translocation in the oocyte or spermatozoon that will form the embryo will determine embryo and fetus' karyotype (normal or abnormal) for that chromosome. The ability to evaluate the presence of structural rearrangements in individuals looking to conceive a baby would determine whether they require ART (and screening of the specific condition in embryos generated through IVF) or if they are not at risk for that determined condition. In this case, the use of ARTs will drastically reduce the chance of miscarriage, fetal death, abnormal conception, and birth defects. Age-related chromosomal conditions are not inheritable. They are caused by defects in the chromosomal set of germinal cells due to various reasons. The most common one is the accumulation of errors in the meiotic machinery, which results in a significantly inefficient process of germinal cell maturation during meiosis. This defective process is significantly more common in females than males due to the lengthy oocyte maturation progression[2]. According to standard scientific evidence, the number of female germinal cells is determined at birth and from this point in time they suspend their maturational process at an early stage of the first meiosis (dictyotene), which resumes during ovulation. There is solid evidence that the incidence of aneuploidy in embryos generated by women of advanced maternal age is significantly higher than in younger patients. This suggests that the longer the oocytes remain in this suspended maturational state, the higher the chance that the meiotic machinery accumulates defects and is unable to complete the process without resulting in the formation of chromosomal abnormalities. This defective process impacts the ability of females of advanced maternal age to naturally conceive a healthy baby. Since the occurrence of these chromosomal defects is not hereditary, ECS programs cannot precisely identify the risk of an individual to generate chromosomally abnormal gametes or embryos. The only effective strategies to assess the presence of nonhereditary chromosomal abnormalities in embryos and fetuses remain preimplantation and prenatal genetic testing"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Access to Infertility Care / Kevin Doody and Kaitlin Doody
    The Patient Evaluation of the Future : Genetics, New Diagnostics, and Prediction Modeling / Maurizio Poli, Monica Clemente, Carmen Rubio, Antonio Capalbo, and Carlos Simon
    Advances in ART Pharmacology : Drug Delivery Systems and the Pipeline / Colin M Howles
    ART Monitoring : An End to Frequent Clinic Visits and Needle
    Sticks / Jan Gerris
    The IVF Cycle to Come : Laboratory Innovations / Denny Sakkas and David K Gardner
    Integrative Care / Sarah R Holley and Lauri A Pasch
    Psychological Counseling : Ethical Challenges of the Future / Elizabeth Grill and Lindsay Childress-Beatty
    Using Technology to Enhance Communication in Medically Assisted Reproductive Care / Karin Hammarberg, Lone Schmidt, Gritt Malling, and Emily Koert
    The Economics of IVF : Evaluating the Necessity and Value of Public Funding / Evelyn Verbeke, Jeroen Luyten, and Thomas D'Hooghe
    Medical and Elective Fertility Preservation : Options and Suggestions for a Patient-Centered Approach / Pasquale Patrizio and Marcia Inhorn
    Patient Retention, Nursing Retention : The Importance of Empathic Communication and Nursing Support / Alice D Domar
    Patient-Centered IVF Care / Sofia Gameiro
    The IVF Patient Journey of the Future / Thomas Toth and Angela Leung.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    by Gregory L. Hall.
    Summary: This title is an easy-to-read guide outlining specific differences in communication, clinical therapies, medications, protocols, and other critical approaches to the care of African Americans. The book discusses a wide range of disorders impacting African Americans and takes a comprehensive and evidence-based approach to the clinical support of providers that see African American patients. Recording the worst medical outcomes of any racial/ethnic group in America, African Americans have the highest mortality, longest hospital length of stay, worst compliance with medications and referrals, and the lowest trust of the healthcare system. Indeed, there are countless well-designed studies that validate verified differences in the clinical care of a number of pervasive diseases in African Americans, including hypertension, heart disease, kidney disease, obesity, cancer, and more. Despite the widespread acknowledgement of the existence of health disparities among racial/ethnic groups, the overall outcomes for African Americans are still the most shocking. From high infant mortality to death by almost any cause, African Americans have the worst data of any other racial or ethnic group. Patient-Centered Clinical Care for African Americans, a highly practical and first-of-its-kind title, illuminates these alarming issues and represents a major contribution to the clinical literature. It will be of significant interest to all physicians, clinicians, and allied health personnel.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Why is Patient-Centered Culturally Competent Care important?
    Chapter 2 Establishing Trust
    Chapter 3 Deliver Consistent and Equitable Care
    Chapter 4 Important Differences in Cardiovascular Care
    Chapter 5 Important Differences in the Care of Obesity and Diabetes
    Chapter 6 Important Differences in Cancer Care
    Chapter 7 Important Differences in Renal Disease
    Chapter 8 Important Differences in Rheumatological Diseases
    Chapter 9 Important Differences in Pulmonary Diseases
    Chapter 10 Other Important Differences in Clinical Care
    Chapter 11 Dietary Differences and Ways to Impact Choices
    Chapter 12 Connect with Stories: Improving Patient Adherence and Compliance
    Chapter 13 Our Hippocratic Oath
    Appendix: Instructors Notes.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Natacha J. Moreno.
    Summary: "A practical resource that provides keys to improved patient-provider communication in healthcare "Engages its readers not only on an intellectual level but also on an emotional one.... This is a must read for everyone in the healthcare field and also for those involved in any form of caregiving. Natacha has written an inspiring book!" George Kohlrieser, PhD, Distinguished Professor of Leadership and Organizational Behavior Patient-Centered Communication: The Seven Keys to Connecting with Patients by Natacha Moreno supports and enhances caring communication and empathetic dialogue between providers and patients, an extremely important topic that exemplifies excellence in medical practice. The book focuses on seven essential components which form the foundation of compassionate communication. These are mindfulness, intention to bond, positive body language, empathetic vocal tone, attending to the patient's state and perspective, and listening with the heart and mind. The chapters provide instruction on effective verbal and nonverbal skills that support each vital key to connection. Key Highlights Opening vignettes provide an example of each chapter's topic in practice Imagine This and Take Action boxes stimulate thinking, motivate action, and provide an opportunity to apply knowledge and communication skills Videos demonstrate how to nonverbally reflect engagement, openness, kindness, and compassion, and also provide positive and negative examples of tone and vocal style This highly compelling and inspirational book is an essential read for all healthcare professionals and caregivers and serves as a vital teaching guide. Natacha J. Moreno, MS, CCC-SLP, is a Speech-Language Pathologist, Private Practice, Moreno SLP, Largo, Florida"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Being mindful of personal state
    Attending to the patient's state
    Considering the patient's perspective
    Addressing the patient with the intention to bond
    Employing positive body language
    Listening with the heart and the mind
    Using vocal tone that reflects empathy.
  • Digital
    David H. Rosen, Uyen B. Hoang.
    Contents:
    Medicine as a human experience
    Clinical application of the biopsychosocial model / George L. Engel
    The care of the patient : art or science / George L. Engel
    The doctor-patient relationship
    The patient-centered interview
    The experience of illness and hospitalization
    The nature of the healing process.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    by Alan Bleakley.
    Summary: The recent history of medicine is one of great biological and technological advances. Diagnoses are being made earlier, diseases caught sooner, patients living longer. And yet there is one area that lags behind the rest of the field: despite the efforts of graduate courses and training manuals, too many doctors still find communication a challenge. In Patient-Centered Medicine in Transition, the focus is not on skills or tools but on context to improve communication not only with patients, but between colleagues, with management, and within and across teams. Rigorous and readable, this timely manifesto presents new models of team process in patient-centered care, emphasizing their value in reducing harmful medical errors and improving patient care, safety, and outcomes. Further, the author provides significant research evidence supporting democratic approaches to communication in medicine while also addressing vital questions of ethics, empathy, gender dynamics, and physician self-care. Included in the coverage: The epidemic of communication hypocompetence. Patient-centeredness without a center. How doctors think can be judged from how they listen and speak. Working and learning in teams in the new era of health care. Blunting Occam's Razor: team process and complexity theory. Building a collaborative community in medical education research. Patient-Centered Medicine in Transition offers a bold new reconceptualization of an important topic and a roadmap to new frontiers in practice to be read and discussed by researchers and practitioners in medical education.

    Contents:
    Communication hypocompetence--an iatrogenic epidemic
    Democracy in medicine
    Patient-centeredness without a center
    How doctors think can be judged from how they listen and speak
    A new wave of patient-centeredness
    Models of patient-centered care
    What is meant by empathy?
    Gender matters in medical education
    Working and learning in teams in a new era of health care.-Theorizing team process through cultural-historical activity theory (CHAT): networking and knotworking
    Theorizing team process through a Foucauldian perspective: gaining a voice in team activity at the clinical coalface
    Theorizing team process through actor-network-theory (ANT): communication practice as a theory in action
    Theorizing team process through Deleuzean rhizomatics: becoming a medical professional in nomadic teams
    Team process and complexity theory: blunting Occams Razor
    Building a collaborative community in medical education research
    Conclusion: professing medical identities in the liquid world of teams.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Alexander Blount ; foreword, Frank deGruy, MD, MSFM.
    Summary: "There have been great strides made in designing the administrative structures of patient-centered care, but it is still difficult to design truly patient-centered clinical routines that the entire healthcare team can enact. The kind of partnership, in which patients are fully part of the team that guides their own care, goes against so much of the training and socialization of health professionals and, for that matter, the expectations of many patients. This is particularly true for patients we sometimes call "complex." In other contexts, we call them "high utilizers," "disadvantaged," "heartsink patients," or "people with trauma histories." Blount calls them "multiply-disadvantaged" patients. To successfully serve these patients requires our best versions of team-based care, including behavioral health and care management team members, though every member of the team needs help in engaging these patients and mutual support in adapting to the rapid changes in roles that new team approaches are creating. This book offers a summary of the approaches that are currently in growing use, such as health literacy assessment, motivational interviewing, appreciative inquiry, shared decision making, minimally disruptive care, trauma informed care, enfranchisement coaching, relationship-centered care, and family-informed care. Finally, it offers a transformative method, based on familiar elements, that is Transparent, Empowering, Activating, and Mutual: the T.E.A.M. Way."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Foreword / Frank deGruy
    Getting to Patient-Centered Care
    From a Squad to a Team: Creating Team-Based Care
    Behavioral Health and Care Enhancement: Building a Team to Do the Whole Job
    Getting from "Delivering Care to Patients" to "Partnership with Patients"
    When the Doctor-Patient Divide is a Chasm
    Bridging the Chasm: The Current State of the Art
    "T" is for Transparent
    "E" is for Empowering
    "A" is for Activating
    "M" is for Mutual
    Growing and Retaining an Expert Team
    Quality Improvement, Data, and Partnership
    Articulating the Model.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Yuzhuo Wang, Dong Lin, Peter W. Gout, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    Thom J. Mansen, Julieta Gabiola.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC71.3 .M2745 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Karen M. Facey, Helle Ploug Hansen, Ann N.V. Single, editors.
    Summary: "If you're not involving patients, you're not doing HTA!"--Dr. Brian O'Rourke, President and CEO of CADTH, Chair of INAHTA This is the first book to offer a comprehensive guide to involving patients in health technology assessment (HTA). Defining patient involvement as patient participation in the HTA process and research into patient aspects, this book includes detailed explanations of approaches to participation and research, as well as case studies. Patient Involvement in HTA enables researchers, postgraduate students, HTA professionals and experts in the HTA community to study these complementary ways of taking account of patients' knowledge, experiences, needs and preferences. Part I includes chapters discussing the ethical rationale, terminology, patient-based evidence, participation and patient input. Part II sets out methodology including: Qualitative Evidence Synthesis, Discrete Choice Experiments, Analytical Hierarchy Processes, Ethnographic Fieldwork, Deliberative Methods, Social Media Analysis, Patient-Reported Outcome Measures, patients as collaborative research partners and evaluation. Part III contains 15 case studies setting out current activities by HTA bodies on five continents, health technology developers and patient organisations. Each part includes discussion chapters from leading experts in patient involvement. A final chapter reflects on the need to clearly define the goals for patient involvement within the context of the HTA to identify the optimal approach. With cohesive contributions from more than 80 authors from a variety of disciplines around the globe, it is hoped this book will serve as a catalyst for collaboration to further develop patient involvement to improve HTA.

    Contents:
    1. Health Technology Assessment
    2. Exploring Ethical Rationales
    3. Reflections on Terms, Goals and Organisation
    4. Patient-Based Evidence in HTA
    5. Developing the Mosaic of Patient Participation in HTA
    6. Patient Input to HTA
    7. Discussion
    Attending to Values and Quality of Patient Involvement in HTA
    8. Patients as Collaborative Partners in Clinical Research to Inform HTA
    9. Developing Patient-Reported and Relevant Outcome Measures
    10. Discrete Choice Experiments
    11. Analytic Hierarchy Process
    12. Ethnographic Fieldwork
    14. Deliberative Methods to Involve Patients in HTA
    15. Qualitative Evidence Synthesis
    16. Evaluation of Patient Involvement in HTA
    17. Discussion
    Making Sense of Patients' Perspectives, Experiences and Preferences in HTA
    18. Discussion
    Research to promote patient-based HTA
    19. Australia
    20. Brazil
    21. Canada
    22. Denmark
    23. England
    24. EUnetHTA
    Patients' Perspectives in the HTA Core Model®
    25. Germany
    26. Italy
    27. Scotland
    28. Sweden
    29. Taiwan
    30. USA
    Comparative Effectiveness Research
    31. Discussion of Approaches in Different Countries
    32. Discussion
    Patient Participation in HTA; Evidence of Real Change?
    33. Patient Involvement in Medicine Development and Assessment
    34. Medical Technologies: Involving Patients in Development and Assessment
    35. Role of Patient Organisations
    36. Discussion
    Perspective of an HTA Appraisal Committee Chair
    37. Reflections for Future Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Muhammad Saad, Timothy J. Vittorio, Manoj Bhandari.
    Contents:
    10 real cases on acute coronary syndrome : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Nisha Ali, MD, Timothy. J. Vittorio, MD
    10 real cases on arrhythmias : diagnosis of tachyarrhythmia and bradyarrhythmia with management / contributed by Nisha Ali, MD, Manoj Bhandari, MD
    10 real cases on syncope and dizziness : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Nikhitha Mantri, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD, Timothy. J. Vittorio, MD
    10 real cases on valvular heart disease : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Nikhitha Mantri, MD, Ayyadurai Pavanalingam, MD, Marin Nicu, MD
    10 real cases on acute heart failure syndrome : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Swathi Roy, MD, Gayathri Kamalakkannan, MD
    10 real cases on hypertensive emergency and pericardial disease : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Niel Shah, MD, Fareeha S. Alavi, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD
    10 real cases on transient ischemic attack and stroke : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Miranda Jeirym, MD, Fareeha S. Alavi, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD
    10 real cases on peripheral artery disease and carotid artery disease : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Niel Shah, MD, Muhammad Ameen, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD
    10 real cases on electrolyte management and miscellaneous cases on telemetry / contributed by Niel Shah, MD, Nisha Ali, MD, Miranda Jeirym, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD
    10x10 abnormal electrocardiogram, echocardiogram and miscellaneous imaging / contributed by Vincent S. Prawoko, MD, Ayyadurai Pavanalingam, MD, Marin Nicu, MD.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessCardiology
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    Peter N. Benotti.
    Summary: "Patient Preparation for Bariatric Surgery provides a comprehensive and state of the art review of all aspects of the patient preparation process, The text reviews current literature and controversies involving sources of referrals and the difficulties encountered by primary care physicians in managing patients with extreme obesity. Strategies for addressing this problem and integrating primary care physicians in comprehensive obesity programs are presented. The text also reviews current indications for surgery and the current patient access limitations that have resulted in the need for revised surgical indications based more on medical need than mere extent of obesity. Written by an authority in the field, Patient Preparation for Bariatric Surgery is a valuable resource for bariatric surgeons, bariatric physicians and all allied health personnel who manage patients with extreme obesity and will assist in the advancement of this area of surgery as well as stimulate new discovery."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Indications and Patient Referrals for Bariatric Surgery
    Chapter 3. Patient Education and Informed Consent
    Chapter 4. Initial Medical Evaluation
    Chapter 5. Psychological and Behavioral Evaluation
    Chapter 6. Comprehensive Medical Evaluation
    Chapter 7. Nutrition I: Protein and Vitamins
    Chapter 8. Nutrition II: Minerals
    Chapter 9. Pregnancy
    Chapter 10. Diagnostic Endoscopy: Perioperative
    Chapter 11. Therapeutic Endoscopy
    Chapter 12. Risk Assessment in Bariatric Surgery
    Chapter 13. Management of the High-Risk Bariatric Surgery Candidate
    Chapter 14. Anesthesia Considerations in Bariatric Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Yasser El Miedany, editor.
    Contents:
    PROMs and Quality of Care
    A Guide to PROMs Methodology and Selection Criteria
    PROMs (MDHAQ/RAPID3) and Physician RheuMetric Measures
    PROMs in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    PROMs in Spondyloarthritis
    PROMs in Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
    PROMs in Fibromyalgia
    PROMs in Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis
    PROMs in Gouty Arthritis
    PROMs for Osteoarthritis
    PROMs in Systemic Sclerosis (Scleroderma)
    PROMs in Sjögren's Syndrome
    PROMs in Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
    PROMs in Polymyalgia Rheumatica
    Electronic Patient Reported Outcome Measures (ePROMs) in Rheumatology
    PROMs and Patient Education
    PROMs vs. PREMs (Patient Reported Experience Measures)
    PROMs and Musculoskeletal Ultrasonography. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Tim Benson.
    Summary: This book shows how PROMs and PREMs can help improve patient experience and outcomes. Part 1 covers the core principles of PROMs and PREMs, including their strengths and weaknesses, reporting and analysis, data sharing and valuation. Part 2 covers measures of patient experience, health status, wellbeing, self-efficacy, individualized measures, social determinants of health and impact evaluation. It concludes with a discussion of staff-reported measures, proxies and caregivers. Patient-Reported Outcomes and Experience: Measuring What We Want with PROMs and PREMs concisely covers how to use these measures successfully to improve patient experience of healthcare services and associated outcomes. It is a critical resource for trainee and practicing clinicians, managers, analysts and policymakers seeking an up-to-date reference on the latest developments in this rapidly expanding field.

    Contents:
    Why PROMs and PREMs matter?
    History
    Terminology
    Why PROMs are Hard: People
    Noise and complexity
    Analysis
    Interoperability
    Value of health and lives
    Patient-reported measures
    Patient experience
    Health status
    Wellbeing
    Patient-centred Care
    Individualised Measures
    Social factors
    Innovation Evaluation
    Staff-reported measures
    Proxies, caregivers and care home residents.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Thanos Athanasiou, Ara Darzi, Aung Ye Oo, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a guide to the assessment of patient reported outcomes measures and quality of life in cardiovascular interventions, which have become a fundamental component of decision making in bedside medicine, health policy, health economics, and public health. Cardiac surgery, cardiovascular interventions, vascular interventions, and the core principles of quality of life are all covered. This book is the first book to demonstrate how clinicians and policy makers can easily get access to a single source of quality of life and patient reported outcomes measures evidence to help them make the best informed decisions in the field of cardiovascular interventions. This is a rapidly emerging field and the book would be relevant to doctors, healthcare scientists, allied-health professionals, healthcare managers, medical statisticians, healthcare economists, and consultants working in healthcare.

    Contents:
    Unveiling the concept of minimal clinically important difference (MCID) in cardiac surgery
    Quality of life following the use of mechanical circulatory support devices
    What Factors Predict an Improved Quality of Life Outcome Following Coronary Artery Bypass Graft Surgery? A Systematic Review
    Thoracic Aortic Surgery
    Patient Reported Outcomes and Quality of Life following Heart Transplantation
    QOL and PROMS following Transcatheter Aortic Valve Implantation
    Patient-Reported Quality of Life after Stand-alone and Concomitant Arrhythmia Surgery: a systematic review and meta-analysis
    Transcatheter Mitral Valve Procedures
    Percutaneous Interventions in Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    The Impact of Valve Surgery on the Health-Related Quality of Life of Elderly Patients: Systematic Review
    Quality of life after mitral valve and tricuspid valve surgery
    Quality of Life and patient reported outcomes in Paediatric Cardiac Surgery patients
    Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Quality of Life and Patient Reported Outcome Measures Following Carotid Artery Intervention
    Quality of Life and Patient Reported Outcome Measures Following Percutaneous Aortic Intervention for Aortic Aneurysms and Dissection
    QOL and PROMS in Catheter Ablation of Cardiac Arrhythmia
    Patient Reported Outcomes and Quality of Life following Percutaneous and Surgical Intervention for Subclavian Artery Disease
    QoL and PROMS following Percutaneous and Surgical Intervention for Renal Artery Disease
    Health-Related Quality of Life Outcomes for Endovascular and Open Surgical Interventions in Aortoiliac and Femoropopliteal Steno-occlusive Arterial Disease
    Infrapopliteal arteries (classical and percutaneous)
    Quality-of-life (QOL) and Patient-Reported Outcome Measures (PROMs) following intervention for Chronic Venous Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Krisa Tailor.
    Summary: "The future of the health care industry rests on advanced analytics Health Data's Destiny provides a visionary overview of how advanced analytics is set to transform the health care industry. Beginning with the plethora of opportunities already in place, this book addresses the ways in which each stakeholder--payers, providers, governments, consumers, entrepreneurs, employers, and others--can benefit from the next generation of health data. The future of the industry is laid out in terms of technology, data sources, and integrated systems, giving you an expansive, holistic, yet reality-based preview of what's to come. Claims and clinical data are only the beginning; upcoming sources like mobile applications, wearable technology, and more are beginning to provide the kind of patient data that will lead to an integrated, connected health care system in which advanced analytics is key in establishing premier patient care. The health care industry's size, scope, and sheer complexity make developing an integrated system all the more difficult. This book shows how big data and advanced analytics can streamline the process and make the vision a reality. Improve outcomes, reduce cost, and establish the best patient care Learn how data is being used, and how it will continue to evolve Discover how up-and-coming data sources will revolutionize health care Stay on the front lines of innovation with mobile and "wearable" data Data is the future of health care, and smart organizations are putting systems and strategies in place now to continue providing top-of-the-line care as technology evolves and the environment changes. Health Data's Destiny gives you a preview of the future, so you can stay out in front and not get left behind"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Christoph Rehmann-Sutter, Heike Gudat, and Kathrin Ohnsorge.
    Summary: Wish to die statements are becoming a frequent phenomenon in terminally ill patients. Those confronted by these statments need to understand the complexity of such wishes, so they can respond competently and compassionately to the requests. If misunderstood, the statements can be taken at face-value and the practitioner may not recognise that a patient is in fact experiencing ambivalent feelings at the end of life, or they may misinterpret the expressed wish to die as a sign of clinical depression. Public debate about the morality and ethics of various end-of-life care options has exploded in recent years. However, it has never been sensitive to the finer aspects of clinical reality or the experiences of patients. The Patient's Wish to Die: Research, Ethics, and Palliative Care brings together that reality and the patient's voice, combining them with different research approaches. It presents the best available knowledge and research methodologies about patients' wishes at the end-of-life, together with a series of ethical views and a discussion about the clinical implications for palliative care. The book presents material in an open and unbiased manner whilst remaining sensitive to the spiritual and existential dimensions of dying, and to the different cultural views that provide meaning to the individual. Written by the best specialists and ethics scholars from around the world, including palliative care practitioners and end-of-life scholars from countries where assisted dying practices are legalized and from those where it isn't, The The Patient's Wish to Die: Research, Ethics, and Palliative Care will prove essential reading for all those working or studying in the field of palliative care.--Description from back cover.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Research
    Ethics
    Practice
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Oxford 2015
  • Digital
    Abha Agrawal, editor.
    Summary: Despite the evolution and growing awareness of patient safety, many medical professionals are not a part of this important conversation. Clinicians often believe they are too busy taking care of patients to adopt and implement patient safety initiatives and that acknowledging medical errors is an affront to their skills. Patient Safety provides clinicians with a better understanding of the prevalence, causes and solutions for medical errors; bringing best practice principles to the bedside. Written by experts from a variety of backgrounds, each chapter features an analysis of clinical cases based on the Root Cause Analysis (RCA) methodology, along with case-based discussions on various patient safety topics. The systems and processes outlined in the book are general and broadly applicable to institutions of all sizes and structures. The core ethic of medical professionals is to do no harm. Patient Safety is a comprehensive resource for physicians, nurses and students, as well as healthcare leaders and administrators for identifying, solving and preventing medical error.

    Contents:
    Concepts
    Examples
    Special considerations
    Organizational issues
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Deborah Sesok-Pizzini, editor
    Summary: Patient Safety in Anatomic & Clinical Pathology Laboratories describes patient safety culture in the laboratory and how it fits in with the larger mission and purposes of the health care enterprise. The text addresses common types of errors seen in pathology and the role of cognitive bias in contributing to these errors, reducing errors through communication and technology, and tools and methods to improve patient safety. Also addressed are building high-reliability teams and the role of the patient navigator in addressing patient safety issues through continuity, coordination, and care. The book also describes developing and implementing a patient safety curriculum in order to fulfill ACGME training requirements to meet standards for resident and fellow education for anatomic pathology and laboratory medicine -- Back cover

    Contents:
    Introduction / Tina Ipe, Lee Hilborne
    The Culture of Patient Safety in the Laboratory / Frederick L. Kiechle
    Human Factors and Patient Safety in the Laboratory / Scott R. Owens
    Communication, Handoffs, and Transitions / Virginia Elizabeth Duncan, Suzanne Renee Thibodeaux, Gene P Siegal
    Utilizing Technology to Improve Laboratory Patient Safety / Anand S. Dighe
    Tools and Methods to Improve and Evaluate Patient Safety in the Laboratory / Tina Ipe, Lee Hilborne
    Diagnostic Errors and Cognitive Bias / Stephen S. Raab
    Building High-Reliability Teams in the Laboratory / Nicole D. Riddle
    Developing a Patient Safety Curriculum for Resident and Fellow Education / Deborah Sesok-Pizzini
    Patient Safety and the Patient Navigator / Elizabeth A. Wagar
  • Digital
    Rahul K. Shah, Sandip A. Godambe, editors.
    Summary: This text uses a case-based approach to share knowledge and techniques on how to operationalize much of the theoretical underpinnings of hospital quality and safety. Written and edited by leaders in healthcare, education, and engineering, these 22 chapters provide insights as to where the field of improvement and safety science is with regards to the views and aspirations of healthcare advocates and patients. Each chapter also includes vignettes to further solidify the theoretical underpinnings and drive home learning. End of chapter commentary by the editors highlight important concepts and connections between various chapters in the text. Patient Safety and Quality Improvement in Healthcare: A Case-Based Approach presents a novel approach towards hospital safety and quality with the goal to help healthcare providers reach zero harm within their organizations.

    Contents:
    Introduction: A Case-Based Approach to Quality Improvement
    Organizational Safety Culture: The Foundation for Safety and Quality Improvement
    Creation of Quality Management Systems: Frameworks for Performance Excellence
    Reliability, Resilience, and Developing a Problem-Solving Culture
    Building an Engaging Toyota Production System Culture to Drive Winning Performance for our Patients, Caregivers, Hospitals, and Communities
    What to Do When an Event Happens: Building Trust in Every Step
    Communication with Disclosure and Its Importance in Safety
    Using Data to Drive Change
    Quality Methodology
    Designing Improvement Teams for Success
    Handoffs: Reducing Harm Through High Reliability and Inter-Professional Communication
    Safety II: A Novel Approach to Reducing Harm
    Bundles and Checklists
    Pathways and Guidelines: An Approach to Operationalizing Patient Safety and Quality Improvement
    Accountable Justifications and Peer Comparisons as Behavioral Economic Nudges to Improve Clinical Practice
    Diagnostic Errors and Their Associated Cognitive Biases
    An Improvement Operating System: A Case for a Digital Infrastructure for Continuous Improvement
    Patient Flow in Healthcare: A Key to Quality
    It Takes Teamwork: Consideration of Difficult Hospital-Acquired Conditions
    Human Factors in Healthcare
    Workforce Safety
    Changing the Improvement Paradigm for Our Kids.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Christopher E. Dandoy, Joanne M. Hilden, Amy L. Billett, Brigitta U. Mueller, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    volume editors, Matthias K. Widmer, Jan Malik.
    Contents:
    Patient safety: what is it all about? / Schwappach, D.
    Patients with chronic kidney disease : safety aspects in the preoperative management / Malovrh, M.
    What every doctor should know about drug safety in patients with chronic kidney disease / Paparella, M., Martina, V., Rizzo, M.A., Gallieni, M.
    Patient safety in vascular access patients on hemodialysis : contrast agents and renal function / Vogt, B.
    Contrast agents and ionization with respect to safety for patients and doctors / von Tengg-Kobligkl, H., Karal, L., Klinkl, T., Khanichehl, E., Heverhagenl, J.T., Böhml, I.B.
    Cardiac safety in vascular access surgery and maintenance / Malik, J., Kudlicka, J., Tesar, V., Linhart, A.
    Simulation in vascular access surgery / Widmer, M.K., Widmer, L.W., Schmidli, J., Wyss, T.R., Davidson, I.
    Team training to establish a safety culture in dialysis access surgery / Davidson, I., Slakey, D., Widmer, M.K., Nolen, B., Ross, J.
    How to perform safe anesthesia in patients with end-stage renal disease / Seidl C., Eberle B.
    Careful and safe vascular access creation / Wyss, T.R., Widmer, M.K.
    Improving patient safety in vascular access : a role for individualization and patient preferences / Roy-Chaudhury, P., Verma, A.
    How to prolong the patency of vascular access / Glazer S., Saint, L., Shenoy, S.
    Safety issues in surgical and endovascular techniques to rescue failing or failed arteriovenous fistulas and arteriovenous grafts / Lazarides, M., Georgiadis, G., Argyriou, C.
    Vascular access-induced hand ischemia : risks and safe management / Sessa, C., De Lambert, A., Pirvu, A., Palacin, P., Pichot, O.
    Patient safety in peritoneal dialysis / Slakey, D.P., Davidson I.
    Safety aspects in patients on hemodialysis with catheters / Polakovi, V., Lopot, F.
    Nosocomial infections in dialysis access / Schweiger, A., Marschall, J., Trevino, S.
    How to improve vascular access care? / van Loon, M.
    The patient's role in patient safety and the importance of a dedicated vascular access team / Shemesh, D., Olsha, O., Goldin, I., Danin, S.
    Patient safety in dialysis access : education and research / Tordoir, Jan H.M., Widmer M.K.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Philip F. Stahel, Cyril Mauffrey, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1. General Aspects
    1: Quality Assessment in Surgery: Mission Impossible?
    2. Incidence of 'Never Events' and Common Complications
    3. Cognitive Errors
    4. Diagnostic Errors
    5. Technical Errors
    6. The Missed Injury: A 'Preoperative Complication'
    7. Non-Technical Aspects of Safe Surgical Performance
    8. Postoperative Monitoring for Clinical Deterioration
    9. Effective Communication- Tips and Tricks
    10. Professionalism in Health Care
    11. Accountability in the Medical Profession
    12. The Role of the Surgical Second Opinion
    13. Compliance to Patient Safety Culture
    14. The Universal Protocol: Pitfalls and Pearls
    15. Patient Safety in Graduate and Continuing Medical Education
    16. Translation of Aviation Safety Principals to Patient Safety in Surgery
    17. Handovers: The 'Hidden Threat' to Patient Safety
    18. Public Safety-Net Hospitals- The Denver Health Model
    19. Electronic Health Records and Patient Safety
    20. Research and Patient Safety
    Part 2. The Surgeon's Perspective
    21. The Surgery Morbidity and Mortality Conference
    22. Reporting of Complications
    23. Disclosure of Complications
    24. Surgical Quality Improvement
    25. Surgical Safety Checklists
    Part 3. Other Perspectives
    26. The Anesthesia Perspective
    27. The Nursing Perspective
    28. The Patient's and Patient Family's Perspective
    29. The Ethical Perspective
    30. Patient Safety- A Perspective from the Developing World
    Part 4. Case Scenarios
    31. Improving Operating Room Safety: A Success Story
    32. Management of Unanticipated Outcomes: A Case Scenario
    33. The Preventable Death of Michael Skolnik: An Imperative for Shared Decision-Making
    Epilogue
    Appendices.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Andras Nagy, Kursad Turksen.
    Contents:
    Generation of patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell from peripheral blood mononuclear cells by Sendai reprogramming vectors / Oscar Quintana-Bustamante and Jose C. Segovia
    Doxycycline-inducible system for genetic correction of iPSC disease models / Xiuli Sim ... [et al.]
    Generation and characterization of patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell for disease modeling / Renuka Sivapatham and Xianmin Zeng
    Modeling genomic imprinting disorders using induced pluripotent stem cells / Stormy J. Chamberlain ... [et al.]
    Generation and characterization of induced pluripotent stem cells from patients with mtDNA mutations / Riikka H. Hssamssalssainen and Anu Suomalainen
    Skin biopsy and patient-specific stem cell lines / Yao Li, Huy V. Nguyen, and Stephen H. Tsang
    Directed myogenic differentiation of human induced pluripotent stem cells / Emi Shoji, Knut Woltjen, and Hidetoshi Sakurai
    Using human induced pluripotent stem cells to model skeletal diseases / Emilie Barruet and Edward C. Hsiao
    Modeling cardiovascular diseases with patient-specific human pluripotent stem cell-derived cardiomyocytes / Paul W. Burridge ... [et al.]
    Calcium imaging in pluripotent stem cell-derived cardiac myocytes / Anna Walter ... [et al.]
    Patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell models : generation and characterization of cardiac cells / Fabian Zanella and Farah Sheikh
    Differentiation of human pluripotent stem cells to cardiomyocytes under defined conditions / Cathelijne W. van den Berg ... [et al.]
    Generation of cardiomyocytes from pluripotent stem cells / Hiroko Nakahama and Elisa Di Pasquale
    Generation and characterization of patient-specific iPSC model for cardiovascular disease / Yee Ki Lee ... [et al.]
    Transgene-free disease-specific iPSC generation from fibroblasts and peripheral blood mononuclear cells / Kerem Fidan ... [et al.]
    Generation and neuronal Differentiation of patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cells derived from Niemann-Pick type C1 fibroblasts / Michaela Trilck, Rayk Hubner, and Moritz J. Frech
    Multisystemic disease modeling of liver-derived protein folding disorders using induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) / Amy Leung and George J. Murphy
    In vitro modeling of alcohol-induced liver injury using human-induced pluripotent stem cells / Lipeng Tian, Neha Prasad, and Yoon-Young Jang
    Generation of human induced pluripotent stem cells using RNA-based sendai virus system and pluripotency validation of the resulting cell population / Valeria Chichagova ... [et al.]
    Modeling axonal phenotypes with human pluripotent stem cells / Kyle R. Denton, Chong-Chong Xu, and Xue-Jun Li
    Mitochondrial disease-specific induced pluripotent stem cell models : generation and characterization / Xuan Zhang ... [et al.]
    Patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell models : characterization of iPS cell-derived cardiomyocytes / Toru Egashira ... [et al.]
    Generation of integration-free patient specific iPS cells using episomal plasmids under feeder free conditions / Sara Caxaria ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Air & Surface Transport Nurses Association ; edited by Reneé Semonin Hollera, Allen C. Wolfe, Jr., Michael A. Frakes.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2018
  • Digital
    Almut Böer-Auer, Harald Kittler, Philipp Tschandl.
    Summary: Pattern analysis is a powerful method that changed dermatopathology, nowadays an indispensable tool in the diagnostic workup of inflammatory and neoplastic lesions. The diagnosis of melanocytic lesions can also be mastered by pattern analysis, which is the link between pathology, dermatoscopy, and clinical dermatology and supports the integration of all views. The histopathologic diagnosis of melanocytic lesions can be challenging for novices and experts alike. While classifications of melanocytic lesions come and go, pattern analysis is timeless; it can be assigned to any classification, current or future, and provides a framework that allows to address complex and uncertain cases in a repeatable manner. While uncertainty cannot be totally eliminated, pattern analysis helps to express this uncertainty in a meaningful way. Written by expert dermatopathologists with experience in dermatoscopy, this book is dedicated to young colleagues and to those who have not yet settled on one of the competing schools of thought; it is intended as a practical guide to help making correct observations, to describe them with a well-defined terminology, and to yield critical decisions in the face of incomplete or conflicting information. The illustrations contained in the volume are all original pictures in high-quality and full-color: reproductions of histopatological cuts in low and high magnification will assist pathologists, dermatologists, and dermatopathologists in interpreting histological slides of melanocytic skin lesions.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Historical perspective
    Classifications
    Pattern analysis
    Integration of patterns
    Integration of context
    Pattern analysis in practice
    Bias, Noise, and Error.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Dewen Hu, Ling-Li Zeng.
    Summary: This book presents recent advances in pattern analysis of the human connectome. The human connectome, measured by magnetic resonance imaging at the macroscale, provides a comprehensive description of how brain regions are connected. Based on machine learning methods, multiviarate pattern analysis can directly decode psychological or cognitive states from brain connectivity patterns. Although there are a number of works with chapters on conventional human connectome encoding (brain-mapping), there are few resources on human connectome decoding (brain-reading). Focusing mainly on advances made over the past decade in the field of manifold learning, sparse coding, multi-task learning, and deep learning of the human connectome and applications, this book helps students and researchers gain an overall picture of pattern analysis of the human connectome. It also offers valuable insights for clinicians involved in the clinical diagnosis and treatment evaluation of neuropsychiatric disorders.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; 1 Introduction; 1 Multimodal Brain Imaging; 2 sMRI-Based Structural Connectivity; 3 DTI-Based Anatomical Connectivity; 4 fMRI-Based Functional Connectivity; 5 Dynamic Functional Connectivity; 6 Multivariate Pattern Analysis; 7 Feature Extraction; 8 Dimensionality Reduction; 9 Classifier Design and Performance Evaluation; 10 The Content of the Book; References; 2 Multivariate Pattern Analysis of Whole-Brain Functional Connectivity in Major Depression; 1 Introduction; 2 Subjects; 3 Image Acquisition and Preprocessing; 4 Identification of Features with High Discriminative Power 2 Participants3 Image Acquisition and Preprocessing; 4 ALFF-FC Map of Dynamic Functional Connectivity; 5 Partial Least-Squares Analysis and Age Prediction; 6 Age-Dependent Changes in the Variability of the Dynamic FC During Maturation; 7 Control Analysis; 8 Reproducibility; 9 Discussion; Functional Connectivity Fluctuations Decode Individual Brain Maturity; Specific Brain Networks Exhibit Changed Connectivity Fluctuation with Age; Inter-network Rather Than Within-Network Connectivity Dynamics Shows Strong DevelopmentalTrends; Control Analysis, Limitations, and Directions for Future Research 5 DiscussionReferences; 7 Locality Preserving Projection of Functional Connectivity for Regression; 1 Introduction; 2 Data Acquisition and Preprocessing; 3 Parametric Curve Fitting and Age-Related Changes in Interregional Functional Connectivity; 4 Low-Dimensional Embeddings; 5 Locally Adjusted Support Vector Regression (LASVR) for Age Prediction; 6 Discussion; References; 8 Intrinsic Discriminant Analysis of Functional Connectivity for Multiclass Classification; 1 Introduction; 2 Participants; 3 Data Acquisition and Preprocessing; 4 IDA Algorithm and Intrinsicconnectomes 5 Support Vector Classification and Performance Evaluation6 Altered Resting-State Functional Connectivityin Major Depression; 7 Discussion; References; 3 Discriminative Analysis of Nonlinear Functional Connectivity in Schizophrenia; 1 Introduction; 2 Participants; 3 Imaging Acquisition and Preprocessing; 4 MIC and eMIC; 5 High Discriminative Connectivity Features; 6 Support Vector Classification and Performance Evaluation; 7 Functional Connectivity Changes; 8 Discussion; References; 4 Predicting Individual Brain Maturity Using Window-Based Dynamic Functional Connectivity; 1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Leslie C. Grammer with Paul A. Greenberger.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Print
    George D. Clayton and Florence E. Clayton, editors ; contributors, M. C. Battigelli ... [et al.].
    Contents:
    v. 1. General principles
    v. 2A, Toxicology ; v. 3. Theory and rationale of industrial hygiene practice.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC967 .P37
    3
  • Print
    George D. Clayton, Florence E. Clayton, editors ; contributors, R.E. Allan ... [et al.].
    Contents:
    v. 1, pt. A-B. General principles
    v. 2, pt. A-F. Toxicology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC967 .P37
    8
  • Digital
    [edited by] Martin F. Flajnik, Nevil J. Singh, Steven M. Holland.
    Summary: "Selected as a Doody's Core Title for 2022!Defining the field of immunology for 40 years, Paul's Fundamental Immunology continues to provide detailed, authoritative, up-to-date information that uniquely bridges the gap between basic immunology and the disease process. The fully revised 8th edition maintains the excellence established by Dr. William E. Paul, who passed away in 2015, and is now under new editorial leadership of Drs. Martin F. Flajnik, Nevil J. Singh, and Steven M. Holland. It's an ideal reference and gold standard text for graduate students, post-doctoral fellows, basic and clinical immunologists, microbiologists and infectious disease physicians, and any physician treating diseases in which immunologic mechanisms play a role. Reflects the latest advances in the field, including current insights on immune system function, both basic and translational. Contains 50 chapters written by leaders in all subfields of immunology. Provides extensive coverage of the molecular biology that explains the dynamics underlying immune disorders and their treatment. Includes 10 entirely new chapters covering invertebrate and plant immunity, eosinophils, innate lymphoid cells, gamma/delta T cells, NKT and MAIT cells, immunometabolism, maternal-fetal immunology and more. Contains abundant full-color illustrations and tables that provide essential information at a glance. Features annual updates from the authors to the VST version, keeping you current with changes in this dynamic field from the experts. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. "-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access 2023
  • Print
    Contents:
    Introduction: Certification Examination and Tips for Preparation
    Part I: Practice Questions and Answers With Rationales
    Chapter 1: Cardiovascular Questions
    Chapter 2: Pulmonary Questions
    Chapter 3: Endocrine, Hematologic, Neurologic, Gastrointestinal, and Renal Questions
    Chapter 4: Musculoskeletal, Multisystem, and Psychosocial Questions
    Chapter 5: Professional Caring and Ethical Practice Questions
    Part II: Practice Test and Answers With Rationales
    Chapter 6: Practice Test
    Chapter 7: Answers With Rationales.
    Digital Access R2Library [2022]
  • Digital
    Ann J. Brorsen, RN, MSN, PHIN, CCRN, CEN, Keri R. Rogelet, RN, MSN, MBA/HCM, CCRN, RNC-NIC.
    Summary: "PCCN Certification Review, Third Edition is the ideal study guide for nurses preparing to take the Progressive Care Certified Nurse (PCCN) exam administered by the American Association of Critical-Care Nurses (AACN). It includes more than 1,100 questions and comprehensive answers with rationales. The Third Edition has been updated and revised in all sections to reflect changes in the new PCCN test plan, including gerontological issues, cardiac surgery, pacemakers, infectious diseases, and palliative care"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    History
    Exam
    Test-taking strategies
    Cardiovascular
    Pulmonary
    Endocrine
    Hematology/immunology
    Neurology
    Gastrointestinal
    Renal
    Multisystem
    Behavioral.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    editors, Robert A. Sinkin, Christian A. Chisholm.
    Summary: This popular resource features step-by-step skill instruction and practice-focused exercises covering neonatal care. Developed by a distinguished editorial board, the Perinatal Continuing Education Program (PCEP) is a comprehensive, self-paced education program in 4 volumes. This book features 11 units covering information and skills assessment and initial management of frequently encountered neonatal illnesses, plus a brand-new unit on how to care for babies with neonatal abstinence syndrome (neonatal opioid withdrawal syndrome).

    Contents:
    Intro
    Unit 1: Oxygen
    Unit 2: Respiratory Distress
    Unit 3: Umbilical Catheters
    Unit 4: Low Blood Pressure (Hypotension)
    Unit 5: Intravenous Therapy
    Unit 6: Feeding
    Unit 7: Hyperbilirubinemia
    Unit 8: Infections
    Unit 9: Identifying and Caring for Sick and At-Risk Babies
    Unit 10: Preparation for Neonatal Transport
    Unit 11: Neonatal Abstinence Syndrome (Neonatal Opioid Withdrawal Syndrome)
    Pretest Answer Key
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Robert A. Sinkin, Christian A. Chisholm
    Summary: The fourth edition of this popular resource features step-by-step skill instruction and practice-focused exercises covering maternal and fetal evaluation and immediate newborn care. Developed by a distinguished editorial board, the Perinatal Continuing Education Program (PCEP) is a comprehensive, self-paced education program in 4 volumes.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Unit 1: Is the Mother Sick? Is the Fetus Sick?
    Skill Unit: Determining Fetal Presentation With Leopold Maneuvers
    Unit 2: Fetal Age, Growth, and Maturity
    Unit 3: Fetal Well-being
    Skill Unit: Electronic Fetal Monitoring
    Unit 4: Is the Baby Sick? Recognizing and Preventing Problems in the Newborn
    Skill Unit: Electronic Cardiorespiratory Monitoring
    Skill Unit: Pulse Oximetry
    Unit 5: Resuscitating the Newborn
    Skill Unit: Suctioning
    Skill Unit: Management of Oxygen in the Delivery Setting
    Skill Unit: Free-Flow Oxygen and Positive-Pressure Ventilation
    Skill Unit: Endotracheal Intubation
    Skill Unit: Chest Compressions
    Skill Unit: Emergency Medications
    Skill Unit: Apgar Score
    Unit 6: Gestational Age and Size and Associated Risk Factors
    Skill Unit: Estimating Gestational Age by Examination of a Newborn
    Unit 7: Thermal Environment
    Skill Unit: Radiant Warmers
    Skill Unit: Incubators and Neutral Thermal Environment
    Unit 8: Hypoglycemia
    Skill Unit: Blood Glucose Screenings
    Pretest Answer Key
    Glossary
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Robert A. Sinkin, Christian A. Chisholm
    Summary: The fourth edition of this popular resource features step-by-step skill instruction and practice-focused exercises covering maternal and fetal care. Developed by a distinguished editorial board, the Perinatal Continuing Education Program (PCEP) is a comprehensive, self-paced education program in 4 volumes. This book features 12 units containing information and skills essential for the recognition and initial management of high-risk and sick pregnant women and their fetuses. In this updated fourth edition, new units have been added on psychosocial risk factors in pregnancy and obstetric risk.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Unit 1: Hypertension in Pregnancy
    Unit 2: Obstetric Hemorrhage
    Unit 3: Infectious Diseases in Pregnancy
    Unit 4: Other Medical Risk Factors in Pregnancy
    Unit 5: Obstetric Risk Factors: Prior or Current Pregnancy
    Unit 6: Psychosocial Risk Factors in Pregnancy
    Unit 7: Gestational Diabetes
    Unit 8: Prelabor Rupture of Membranes and Intra-amniotic Infection
    Skill Unit: Sterile Speculum Examination
    Skill Unit: Tests for Suspected or Proven Rupture of Membranes
    Unit 9: Preterm Labor
    Unit 10: Inducing and Augmenting Labor
    Unit 11: Abnormal Labor Progress and Difficult Deliveries
    Unit 12: Imminent Delivery and Preparation for Maternal/Fetal Transport
    Pretest Answer Key
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Robert A. Sinkin, Christian A. Chisholm
    Summary: This fourth edition of this popular resource features step-by-step skill instruction and practice-focused exercises covering maternal and fetal evaluation and immediate newborn care. Developed by a distinguished editorial board, the Perinatal Continuing Education Program (PCEP) is a comprehensive, self-paced education program in 4 volumes. This book features 8 units on complex neonatal therapies, including 2 new units on neonatal encephalopathy and the ethical issues surrounding perinatology, especially when caring for fetuses of periviable gestational ages.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Unit 1: Direct Blood Pressure Measurement
    Unit 2: Exchange, Reduction, and Direct Transfusions
    Unit 3: Continuous Positive Airway Pressure
    Unit 4: Assisted Ventilation With Mechanical Ventilators
    Unit 5: Surfactant Therapy
    Unit 6: Therapeutic Hypothermia for Neonatal Hypoxic-Ischemic Encephalopathy
    Unit 7: Continuing Care for At-Risk Babies
    Unit 8: Biomedical Ethics and Perinatology
    Pretest Answer Key
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Print
    [editors-in-chief Andrew Wilcock, Paul Howard, Sarah Charlesworth].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM301.12 .P35 2020
    1
  • Print
    [edited by] Andrew Wilcock, Paul Howard and Sarah Charlesworth.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM301.12 .P46 2022
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Chhandak Basu.
    Summary: "This volume provides an overview on design PCR primers for successful DNA amplification. Chapters focus on primer design strategies for quantitative PCR, in silico PCR primer design , and primer design using software. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls." -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Fast masking of repeated primer binding sites in eukaryotic genomes / Reidar Andreson, Lauris Kaplinksi, and Maido Remm
    Primer design for PCR reactions in forensic biology / Kelly M. Elkins
    Design of primers and probes for quantitative real-time PCR methods / Alicia Rodríguez, Mar Rodríguez, Juan J. Córdoba, and María J. Andrade
    Large-scale neucleotide sequence alignment and sequence variability assessment to identify the evolutionarily highly conserved regions for universal screening PCR assay design: an example of influenza A virus / Alexander Nagy, Tomáš Jiřinec, Lenka Černíková, Helena Jiřincová, and Martina Havlíčková
    Low-concentration initiator primers improve the amplification of gene targets with high sequence variability / Kenneth E. Pierce and Lawrence J. Wangh
    Multiplex PCR primer design for simultaneousu detection of multiple pathogens / Wenchao Yan
    Degenerate primer design for highly variable genomes / Kelvin Li, Susmita Shrivastava, and Timothy B. Stockwell
    Allele-specific real-time polymerase chain reaction as a tool for urate transporter 1 mutation detection / Juliet O. Makanga, Antonius Christianto, and Tetsuya Inazu
    MultiPLX: automatic grouping and evaluation of PCR primers / Lauris Kaplinski and Maido Remm
    In silico PCR primer designing and validation / Anil Kumar and Nikita Chrodia
    Primer design using Primer Express® for SYBR green-based quantitative PCR / Amarjeet Singh and Girdhar K. Pandey
    Designing primers for SNaPshot technique / Greciane Gaburro Paneto and Francisco de Paula Careta
    Rapid and simple method of qPCR primer design / Brenda Thornton and Chhandak Basu
    PRIMEGENSw3: a web-based tool for high-throughput primer and probe design / Garima Kushwaha, Gyan Prakash Srivastava, and Dong Xu
    Selecting specific PCR primers with MFEprimer / Wubin Qu and Chenggang Zhang.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Reynaldo R. Rivera, Joyce J. Fitzpatrick.
    Summary: "Nurses are in charge of the patients and their families throughout the hospital and health system experience. They assist patients through illness to achieve higher levels of health. They coordinate the care throughout the patients' experiences with the healthcare system. Nurses are the leaders of patient care at the bedside and beyond. It is important that as clinical leaders, nurses have the most accurate, most up-to-date, and evidence-based information available so that they can always do the right thing. The PEACE model develops clinical nurses as leaders in care of both patients and their families. Clinical nurses, those at the point of care, have embraced this model for guiding their practice. The PEACE model helps clinical nurses solve challenging problems through a rigorous evidence-based practice process-from problem identification to evaluation and dissemination. The crux of the PEACE model is the mnemonic that simplifies the evidence-based practice (EBP) process for clinical nurses. The PEACE model is used across New York-Presbyterian (NYP), one of the nation's most comprehensive academic healthcare delivery systems. NYP is composed of 10 hospitals in New York and employs more than 11,000 nurses across the enterprise. One striking advantage of the model is that it emerged from the work of clinical nurses who were struggling to find a way to remember and apply the components of other EBP models. The mnemonic PEACE promotes understanding and application by clinical nurses, providing a way to easily remember the EBP component stages. The uniqueness of the PEACE model is its simplicity. This relevance leads to continued application in day-to-day nursing practice. As we strive for peace at many levels of our lives and work, the mnemonic is easy to remember. The PEACE model may be adapted to any setting where nurses practice"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1: Evidence-Based Practice, Research, and Quality Improvement
    Chapter 2: Problem Identification
    Chapter 3: Evidence Review
    Chapter 4: Appraise the Evidence
    Chapter 5: Change Practice
    Chapter 6: Conduct Research
    Chapter 7: Evaluation
    Chapter 8: Disseminate Findings
    Chapter 9: Resources
    Chapter 10: Practice Exemplars
    Index.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Schuyler S. Korban.
    Summary: Addressing the pear genome, this book covers the current state of knowledge regarding genetic and genomic resources, breeding approaches and strategies, as well as cutting-edge content on how these tools and resources are being / soon will be utilized to pursue genetic improvement efforts that will combine fruit quality, high productivity, precocious fruit bearing, and long postharvest storage life, along with elevated levels of resistance to various major diseases and insect pests. Throughout, the book also explores potential opportunities and challenges in genomic analysis, sequence assembly, structural features, as well as functional studies that will assist in future genetic improvement efforts for pears. The pear (Pyrus), an important tree fruit crop, is grown worldwide, and has several economically relevant cultivars. In recent years, modern genetic and genomic tools have resulted in the development of a wide variety of valuable resources for the pear. In the past few years, completion of whole genome assemblies of 'Dangshansuli', an Asian pear, and 'Bartlett', a European pear, have paved the way for new discoveries regarding for example, the pear's genomic structure, chromosome evolution, and patterns of genetic variation. This wealth of new resources will have a major impact on our knowledge of the pear genome; in turn, these resources and knowledge will have significant impacts on future genetic improvement efforts.

    Contents:
    Botany and taxonomy of pear
    Pear germplasm resources: origin, characterization, and conservation
    Genetics and breeding of pears
    Using genetic data for taxonomic, diversity, and domestication assessments in pear
    Genetic linkage maps in pear
    Molecular mapping of major genes and QTLs in pear
    Whole genome sequencing strategy, and genome assembly of Asian pear
    Whole genome sequencing strategy, and genome assembly of European pear
    Repetitive sequences in pear
    Regulatory sequences in pear.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Morris E. Hartstein, Guy G. Massry, John B. Holds, editors.
    Summary: Pearls and Pitfalls in Cosmetic Oculoplastic Surgery, Second Edition addresses the need among surgeons for cleanly distilled and clinically relevant information. The second edition of this popular text highlights the changes and updates to the ever expanding field of facial cosmetic surgery. There are updates regarding the advances, for example in blepharoplasty techniques, fillers and filler techniques, periorbital fat grafting, brow lifting techniques, and midface rejuvenation. Additionally, nearly every chapter has full color illustrations to bring each one to life. This concise and practical "how to" book is written and edited by experts in their fields and offers "here?s how I do it" advice on the most commonly performed procedures. Each chapter becomes the voice of an expert and experienced colleague, reminding readers of the pearls and pitfalls of each procedure. These pearls will lead to more efficient techniques, fewer complications, and enhance outcomes for physicians and their patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Alessandro Franchi, University of Florence, Italy.
    Summary: Avoid unnecessary diagnostic markers, and pathology pitfalls with this practical approach to head and neck surgical pathology. Written by experts in the field, this book features practical algorithms and ninety illustrative cases, guiding the reader through neoplastic and non-neoplastic head and neck pathology, with ease. With additional access to the full online version, including expandable images on Cambridge Core, achieve accuracy every time. Master practical challenges of efficiently diagnosing diseases in lesions of the nasopharynx, sinonasal tract, salivary glands, oral cavity lesions and soft tissues of the neck. Confidently provide all aspects of care, in tackling new entities in the field, through to reviewing appropriate ancillary studies. Discover a clinical history, histopathology, differential diagnosis and teaching points with each case, alongside working with state-of-the-art immunohistochemistry and molecular technologies. Equipping the reader to make successful diagnoses, maximise surgery time, and avoid common errors, this invaluable guide supports busy practitioners worldwide.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Ophelia E. Dadzie and Meera Mahalingam.
    Summary: This practical book takes the challenge of the dermatopathology sign-out and walks the reader through a diagnostic approach, explaining how to distinguish between benign and malignant lesions and identifying histopathologic features unique to each entity. Through discussion of some 150-200 lineage-unrelated cutaneous neoplastic disorders (primary and secondary), the reader will become familiar with common and sometimes uncommon but clinically relevant conditions. Each chapter adopts a consistent style for quick and easy reading, covering typical microscopic features, clinical vignettes, histological variations, diagnostic pitfalls and differentials, and key diagnostic pearls. Chapters also explain general pathological principles, laboratory processing of specimens and medico-legal aspects of neoplastic dermatopathology. Each copy of the book is packaged with a password, providing online access to all text and images. Written by leading pathologists and educators, this is an essential resource for trainees and more experienced pathologists tackling the daily sign-out as well as board exams in dermatopathology.

    Contents:
    Keratinocytic tumors / Ophelia E. Dadzie
    Melanocytic tumors / Meera Mahalingam
    Adnexal tumors / Dorendra Maisnam and Ophelia E. Dadzie
    Hematolymphoid tumors / Brett Mahon and Vijaya B. Reddy
    Fibrous and myofibroblastic tumors and reactive lesions / Diana Murro and Vijaya B. Reddy
    Neural tumors / Meera Mahalingam
    Smooth and striated muscle tumors / Mark Jabbour and Ossama Abbas
    Vascular and perivascular tumors, and tumor-like conditions / Ophelia E. Dadzie
    Adipocytic tumors / Mark Jabbour and Ossama Abbas
    Bone and cartilage / Mark Jabbour and Ossama Abbas
    Uncommon lineage-unrelated tumors / Meera Mahalingam
    Cutaneous metastases / Meera Mahalingam
    Medicolegal pitfalls in dermatopathology : perspectives from the USA and the UK / Ophelia E. Dadzie and Meera Mahalingam.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2016
  • Digital
    Martin Lacher, Shawn D. St. Peter, Augusto Zani, editors.
    Summary: Providing core information on pediatric surgery, this book serves as a supplement to standard pediatric surgical textbooks. It offers pearls of wisdom that will help those who participate in pediatric surgical care, as well as to provide state-of-the-art insights based on physiological principles, literature reviews, and clinical experience. This book is an ideal tool to help readers prepare for questions they will be asked on ward rounds, in the OR, or in oral exams. The depth of exploration is intended for medical students, residents in pediatrics and pediatric surgery, pediatric surgical trainees, pediatric nurse practitioners, primary care pediatricians, and family practitioners.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword by Benno Ure
    Foreword by George W. Holcomb
    Foreword by Agostino Pierro
    Preface
    Contents
    Chapter 1 Evaluation of the Pediatric Surgical Patient
    Abstract
    1.1 Introduction
    References
    Chapter 2 Nutrition, Fluids and Electrolytes for the Pediatric Surgical Patient
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 3 Chest Wall Deformities
    Abstract
    Bibliography
    Chapter 4 Congenital Diaphragmatic Hernia
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 5 Esophageal Atresia With or Without Tracheoesophageal Fistula
    Abstract
    References Chapter 6 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 7 Caustic Ingestion of the Esophagus
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 8 Esophageal Foreign Bodies
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 9 Congenital Lung Malformations
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 10 Acquired Lung and Pleural Disease
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 11 Tracheobronchial Foreign Bodies
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 12 Pediatric Surgical Diseases of the Larynx, Trachea, and Bronchi
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 13 Mediastinal Masses
    Abstract
    References Chapter 14 Congenital Cardiac Anomalies
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 15 Hemangiomas and Vascular Malformations
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 16 Umbilical Problems
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 17 Hernias-Epigastric, Inguinal and Incisional
    Abstract
    17.1 Inguinal Hernia
    17.2 Epigastric Hernia
    17.3 Incisional Hernia
    References
    Chapter 18 Abdominal Wall Defects, Gastroschisis and Omphalocele
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 19 Exstrophy-Epispadias Complex
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 20 Prune Belly Syndrome
    Abstract
    References Chapter 21 Normal Embryology, Anatomy, and Physiology of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 22 Small Intestinal Obstruction
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 23 Intestinal Atresia and Webs
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 24 Malrotation and Midgut Volvulus
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 25 Gastrointestinal Surgical Aspects of Cystic Fibrosis
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 26 Necrotizing Enterocolitis (NEC)
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 27 Meckel's Diverticulum & Vitelline Duct Remnants
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 28 Appendicitis Abstract
    References
    Chapter 29 Intussusception
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 30 Small Left Colon Syndrome (SLCS)
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 31 Disorders of Colonic Motility/Hirschsprung Disease
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 32 Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 33 Gastrointestinal Bleeding
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 34 Anorectal Malformations
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 35 Anorectal Complaints (Proctology): Hemorrhoids, Fissures, Abscesses, Fistulae
    Abstract
    35.1 Hemorrhoids
    35.2 Anal Fissures
    35.3 Abscesses
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jean-Pierre Chavoin, editor.
    Summary: This book with accompanying videos focuses on pectus excavatum correction using custom-made silicone implants. It discusses patient evaluation, the minimally invasive procedure and follow-up care. It also describes in detail, and in a way that is comprehensible for practicing clinicians, the procedure for creating silicone implants using a scanner (computer-aided design). Further, the book presents the possibility of using fat grafting to correct this congenital deformity and highlights secondary surgical procedures and complications (e.g. infections). Correcting pectus excavatum using a computer-aided design silicone implant is a simple and reliable technique that yields high-quality, aesthetic results. In the medium term, the approach may render invasive techniques obsolete, however, these operations remain risky.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Paulo Freire ; translated by Myra Bergman Ramos ; with an introduction by Donaldo Macedo and an afterword by Ira Shor.
    Summary: "First published in Portuguese in 1968, [this book] was translated and published in English in 1970. Paulo Freire's work has helped to empower countless people throughout the world and continues to possess a special urgency as the creation of a permanent underclass among the underprivileged and minorities in urban centers around the world continues. The 50th anniversary edition includes a new introduction by Donaldo Macedo, an afterword by Ira Shor, and interviews with Marina Aparicio Barberán, Noam Chomsky, Gustavo E. Fischman, Ramón Flecha, Ronald David Glass, Valerie Kinloch, peter Mayo, Peter McLaren, and Margo Okazawa-Rey to inspire a new generation of educators, students, and general readers for years to come."--Page [4] of cover.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the 50th Anniversary Edition / Donaldo Macedo
    Preface
    Chapter 1
    Chapter 2
    Chapter 3
    Chapter 4
    "A luta continua": Afterword to Pedagogy of the Oppressed / Ira Shor
    Interviews with Contemporary Scholars : Marina Aparicio Barberan ; Noam Chomsky ; Gustavo E. Fischman ; Ramon Flecha ; Ronald David Glass ; Valerie Kinlock ; Peter Mayo ; Peter McLaren ; Margo Okazawa-Rey
    Foreword to the Original English Edition (1970) / Richard Shaull.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    LB880.F73 P4313 2018
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Beth Nachtsheim Bolick, Karin Reuter-Rice, Maureen A. Madden, Paul N. Severin.
    Summary: "Pediatric Acute Care: A Guide for Interprofessional Practice takes an evidence-based, interprofessional approach to pediatric acute care as it exemplifies the depth and diversity that's needed for the dynamic healthcare environments in which acutely ill children receive care. Coverage includes how to work with the pediatric patient and family, major acute care disorders and their management, emergency preparedness, common acute care procedures, and much more. With contributions from more than 200 practicing clinicians and academic experts, it represents a wide variety of disciplines including medicine, nursing, pharmacy, child life, nutrition, law, integrative medicine, education, public health, and psychology, among others. The second edition also features the addition of new physician and nurse practitioner co-editors as well as extensive content updates including updated evidence-based content throughout the text, the integration of the 2016 IPEC Core Competencies for Interprofessional Collaborative Practice, a new full-color design, and new vivid illustrations throughout"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part I. Interprofessional patient care. The interprofessional team
    Research and evidence-based practice
    Certification, licensure, and credentialing/privileging for the healthcare professional
    Documentation and coding
    Team communication and handoffs
    Patient safety
    Part II. Approach to the pediatric patient and family
    Child life: developmental considerations
    Patient- and family-centered care
    Communicating bad news
    Ethical considerations
    Care of the minor and legal considerations
    Transition to adulthood
    Care of children with medical complexity
    Management in the emergency setting
    Management in the inpatient setting
    The premature infant in the pediatric acute care setting
    Management of the chronically ill child
    Transport of the ill of injured pediatric patient
    Rehabilitation
    Palliative care and integrative medicine
    Part III. Selected disorders and their management. Analgesia, paralytics, sedation, withdrawal, and opioid disorders
    Cardiac disorders
    Dermatologic disorders
    Endocrine disorders
    Fluid, electrolytes, and nutrition
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Genetic and metabolic disorders
    Hematologic and oncologic disorders
    Immunologic/autoimmune and rheumatologic disorders
    Infectious disorders
    Kidney and genitourinary disorders
    Musculoskeletal disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Orofacial disorders
    Pulmonary disorders
    Child maltreatment
    Toxicologic exposure
    Traumatic injuries
    Part IV. Emergency preparedness. Principles of disaster management and clinical practice
    Part V. Procedures. Arterial catheter insertion
    Central venous catheter insertion and removal
    Chest tube insertion and removal
    Intracardiac line removal
    Intraventricular catheter insertion and shunt access
    Lumbar puncture
    Postpyloric feeding tube insertion
    Peripherally inserted central venous catheter insertion and removal
    Peritoneal catheter insertion
    Rapid sequence intubation
    Ultrasound
    Wound closure
    Part VI. Laboratory values. Laboratory values
    Part VII. Learning and evaluation. Simulation
    The role of assessment in teaching and learning.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Digital
    Motohiro Kato, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses key aspects of childhood acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL), presenting the latest research on the biology and treatment of the disease and related issues. The cure rate for ALL has improved dramatically due to advances such as supportive care, treatment stratification based on relapse risk, and the optimization of treatment regimens. Gathering contributions by eminent scholars Pediatric Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia is a valuable resource for pediatric hematologists as well as for medical students, interns, residents and fellows. It not only offers comprehensive insights, but also provides a springboard for future research.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I: Epidemiology and Diagnosis of Pediatric ALL;
    Chapter 1: Overview; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Symptoms and Diagnosis; 1.3 Treatment; 1.4 Future Directions; References;
    Chapter 2: Genetic Alterations of Pediatric Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia; 2.1 B Precursor ALL with Recurrent Fusion or Chromosomal Abnormality; 2.1.1 KMT2A Rearrangement; 2.1.2 ETV6-RUNX1 and High Hyperdiploid; 2.1.3 TCF3 Rearrangement; 2.1.4 Hypodiploid; 2.1.5 BCR-ABL1; 2.2 New Subtype of B-ALL; 2.2.1 IKZF1 Deletion, CRLF2 Deregulation, and Ph-Like ALL; 2.2.2 iAMP21 2.2.3 MEF2D and ZNF384 Rearranged ALL2.2.4 DUX4 Rearranged ALL; 2.2.5 Others; 2.3 Genetic Alterations of T-ALL; 2.4 Genetic Alterations of Acute Leukemia Ambiguous Lineage; 2.5 Genetic Alterations of Relapsed B-ALL; 2.6 Clinical Implications of Genetic Studies; References;
    Chapter 3: Germline Biology of Pediatric ALL; 3.1 Importance of Germline Variants in Leukemia Biology; 3.2 Germline Biology for Drug Response; 3.2.1 Pharmacogenomics of Adverse Events; 3.3 Germline Biology for Leukemogenesis; 3.3.1 Leukemia Predisposing Syndrome; 3.3.2 Leukemia Predisposing in Non-syndromic ALL; References
    Chapter 4: Immunophenotype of Pediatric ALL4.1 Diagnostic Criteria of Pediatric ALL According to Immunophenotyping; 4.2 Immunophenotyping of B-Lineage ALL; 4.3 Immunophenotyping of T-Lineage ALL; 4.4 Relationship Between Immunophenotyping and Cytogenetic Abnormalities; References;
    Chapter 5: MRD in Pediatric ALL; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Detection Methods of Minimal Residual Disease; 5.2.1 PCR-Based MRD Detection; 5.2.2 FCM-Based MRD Detection; 5.3 Clinical Impact of MRD; 5.4 Future of Minimal Residual Disease Detection; References; Part II: Treatment of Pediatric ALL
    Chapter 6: B-Cell Precursor ALL6.1 Risk Stratification of B-Cell Precursor ALL; 6.2 Treatment Backbone of B-Cell Precursor ALL; 6.2.1 Induction Therapy; 6.2.2 Consolidation Therapy; 6.2.3 Maintenance Therapy; 6.2.4 CNS Directed Therapy; 6.2.5 Immunotherapy; References;
    Chapter 7: Pediatric T-Cell Acute Lymphobastic Leukemia; 7.1 Epidemiology; 7.2 Diagnosis; 7.3 Clinical and Biological Characteristics; 7.4 Treatment; 7.5 Prognostic Factors; 7.6 Future Directions; 7.7 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 8: Mature B-Cell Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia; 8.1 Epidemiology; 8.2 Pathology/Biology 8.3 Clinical Presentation8.4 Treatment; 8.4.1 Standard Treatments; 8.4.2 Relapsed or Refractory Disease; References;
    Chapter 9: Infant ALL; 9.1 Introduction; 9.2 Risk Stratifications in Infant ALL; 9.3 Treatment of Infant MLL-r ALL; 9.3.1 Chemotherapy; 9.3.2 Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation; 9.3.3 Novel Therapies; 9.3.3.1 Nucleoside Analogues; 9.3.3.2 FLT3 Inhibitors; 9.3.3.3 Epigenetic Agents; 9.3.3.4 BCL-2 Inhibitors; 9.3.3.5 Immunotherapies; 9.4 Treatment of Infant MLL-g ALL; 9.5 Treatment of Relapsed Infant ALL; 9.6 Acute and Late Toxicities on Infant ALL Treatment; References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Steven L. Shein, Alexander T. Rotta, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise yet comprehensive overview of pediatric acute respiratory distress syndrome (PARDS). The text reviews the emerging science behind the new PARDS definition; explores epidemiology, pathobiology, etiologies, and risk factors; reviews state-of-the-art treatment modalities and strategies; and discusses clinical outcomes. Written by experts in the field, Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome: A Clinical Guide is a valuable resource for clinicians and practitioners who specialize in pediatric critical care.

    Contents:
    The History of ARDS and the Need for a Pediatric Definition
    Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome: Definition and Epidemiology
    Pathobiology of the Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Risk Factors and Etiologies of Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Imaging and Monitoring in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Conventional Mechanical Ventilation in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Non-conventional Mechanical Ventilation for Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome: High-frequency Oscillatory Ventilation and Airway Pressure Release Ventilation
    Ventilator Weaning and Extubation Strategies for Children with PARDS
    Non-Invasive Respiratory Support in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Ancillary Pulmonary Treatments for Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Analgesia, Sedation and Neuromuscular Blockade in PARDS
    Fluids, Nutrition, and Acute Kidney Injury in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Heart-Lung Interactions and Cardiovascular Support in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Red Blood Cell Transfusion in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome in Immunocompromised Patients
    ECMO for Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Clinical Outcomes in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    American Heart Association.
    Contents:
    Part 1: Course overview
    Part 2: Review of BLS and AED for Infants and Children
    Part 3: Systematic Approach to the Seriously ill or Injured Child
    Part 4: Recognition and Management of Cardiac Arrest
    Part 5: Effective Resuscitation Team Dynamics
    Part 6: Recognition of Respiratory Distress and Failure
    Part 7: Management of Respiratory Distress and Failure
    Resources for Management of Respiratory Emergencies
    Part 8: Recognition of Shock
    Part 9: Management of Shock
    Resources for Management of Circulatory Emergencies
    Part 10: Recognition of Arrhythmias
    Part 11: Management of Arrhythmias
    Part 12: Post-Cardiac Arrest Care
    Appendix
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC87.9 .P35 2016
    1
  • Digital
    American Heart Association.
    Contents:
    Part 1: Course overview. Course objectives ; Precourse preparation ; Course materials ; Course completion requirements ; Science update ; The chain of survival
    Part 2: Review of BLS and AED for infants and children. Learning objectives ; BLS for infants and children ; AED for infants and children younger than 8 years
    Part 3: High-performance teams. High-performance team roles and dynamics
    Part 4: Systematic approach to the seriously ill or injured child. Learning objective ; Initial assessment to identify a life-threatening condition ; Initial assessment ; Evaluate-Identify-Intervene ; Primary assessment ; Secondary assessment ; Diagnostic assessments
    Part 5: Recognizing and managing cardiac arrest. Learning objective ; Rapidly intervene to prevent cardiac arrest ; Life-threatening problems ; Cardiac arrest in infants and children ; Definition of cardiac arrest ; Pathways to cardiac arrest ; Causes of cardiac arrest ; Recognizing cardiac arrest ; Managing cardiac arrest
    Part 6: Effective high-performance team dynamics. Learning objective ; Roles in a high-performance team ; Elements of effective high-performance team dynamics
    Part 7: Recognizing respiratory distress and failure. Learning objective ; Fundamental issues associated with respiratory problems ; Identifying respiratory problems by severity ; Identifying respiratory problems by type ; Summary: recognizing respiratory problems flowchart
    Part 8: Managing respiratory distress and failure. Learning objective ; Rescue breating ; Initial management of respiratory distress and failture ; Principles of targeted management ; Managing upper airway obstruction ; Managing lower airway obstruction ; Managing lunch tissue disease ; Managing disordered control of breathing ; Summary: managing respiratory emergencies flowchart ; Resources for managing respiratory emergencies
    Part 9: Recognizing shock. Learning objective ; Defining shock ; Pathophysiology of shock ; Identifying shock by severity (effect on blood pressure) ; Identifying shock by type ; Recognizing shock flowchart
    Part 10: Managing shock. Learning objective ; Goals of shock management ; Fundamentals of shock management ; General management of shock ; Fluid therapy ; Glucose ; Management according to type of shock ; Managing shock flowchart ; Resources for managing circulatory emergencies
    Part 11: Recognizing arrhythmias. Learning objectives ; Bradycardia definitions ; Recognizing bradycardia ; Tachyarrhythmias
    Part 12: Managing arrhythmias. Learning objectives ; Principles of managing pediatric arrhythmias ; Management: pediatric bradycardia with a pulse ; Managing tachyarrhythmias ; Summary of emergency interventions ; Pediatric tachycardia with a pulse algorithm
    Part 13: Post-cardiac arrest care. Learning objective ; Goals of therapy ; Respiratory system ; Cardiovascular system ; Neurologic system
    Appendices: BLS skills testing checklists ; Initial assessment: pediatric assessment triangle ; Primary assessment ; Skills station competency checklists ; Rhythm recognition review ; Learning station competency checklists and PALS case scenario testing checklists.
    Digital Access AHA 2020
  • Print
    American Academy of Pediatrics.
    Summary: This convenient reference provides clinicians with point-of-care guidance on the assessment and treatment of pediatric allergies in children of all ages, from infants to young adults

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Tab 1. Allergic Conjunctivitis
    Tab 2. Allergic Rhinitis
    Tab 3. Respiratory Exposures
    Tab 4. Remediation Strategies for Common Respiratory Allergens
    Tab 5. Mold Exposures
    Tab 6. Mold-Related Illness and Health Effects
    Tab 7. Hymenoptera Venom Allergy
    Tab 8. Classic Reactions to Antibiotics
    Tab 9. Immediate Reactions to Antibiotics
    Tab 10. Nonimmediate Reactions to Antibiotics
    Tab 11. Nickel Allergy
    Tab 12. Latex Allergy
    Tab 13. Diagnosis of Atopic Dermatitis
    Tab 14. Treatment of Atopic Dermatitis
    Tab 15. Avoiding Eczema Triggers Tab 16. Food Allergies
    Tab 17. Cow's Milk Allergy
    Tab 18. Peanut Allergy
    Tab 19. Anaphylaxis Recognition
    Tab 20. Anaphylaxis Treatment
    Tab 21. AAP Allergy and Anaphylaxis Emergency Plan
    Tab 22. Allergy testing
    Tab 23. Immunotherapy
    Digital Access AAP ebooks [2023]
  • Digital
    Nima Rezaei, editor.
    Summary: This book comprises a collection of case-based chapters, submitted by physicians and pediatricians in all specialties and meticulously refined and selected to cover the most common and important aspects of Pediatric Allergy knowledge. Commonly encountered disorders such as allergic rhinitis, food allergy, and atopic dermatitis are covered among many others. Each chapter starts with a brief of the initial presentation and lab data of the patient, followed by a series of 3-6 multiple choice questions (MCQs), leading the reader to the diagnosis and best of practice in a step-wise manner. Clinical pearls presented as "practical points", and the MCQ format along with detailed answers, makes Pediatrc Allergy an essential reading material that a pediatric allergologist cannot afford to miss.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Donald Y.M. Leung, Cezmi A. Akdis, Stanley J. Szefler, Hugh A. Sampson, Francisco A. Bonilla.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Donald Y.M. Leung, Cezmi A. Akdis, Leonard B. Bacharier, Charlotte Cunningham-Rundles, Scott H. Sicherer, Hugh A. Sampson.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Carlo Foresta, Daniele Gianfrilli, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses and summarizes the main andrological disorders (genital, reproductive or sexual diseases) that may originate in childhood or adolescence. Since many of the andrological diseases that occur in adulthood originate before the age of 18 and sometimes even during gestation, andrological evaluation is essential during childhood to highlight anomalies in the genital organs. During puberty, evaluation can help to monitor growth and secondary sex characteristics, and to assess e.g. the possible presence of an eunucoid habitus, gynecomastia, testicular hypotrophy or varicocele, a very common pathology in young people. During adolescence, the assessment of risk factors, such as those related to certain lifestyles, is of fundamental importance for primary prevention. Moreover, in late adolescence the focus shifts to preventing sexually transmitted infections, or to dealing with possible discomforts related to the sexual sphere. Finally, ensuring young people's genital and sexual health also means protecting their fertility. Written by respected experts in the field, this book constitutes an innovative resource, combining updated, reliable and comprehensive information with agile consultation in order to provide a streamlined approach to the care of children and adolescents with such disorders.

    Contents:
    Genetics and alterations in the development of reproductive systems: diagnosis and clinical management
    Impact of endocrine disruptors on male sexual development
    Risk factors affecting male reproductive health, role of epigenetics
    Congenital anomalies of the penis
    Disorders of pubertal development: from hypogonadotrophic hypogonadism to constitutional delay of puberty
    Disorders of pubertal development: precocious puberty
    Clinical management and treatment of varicocele in the adolescence
    Congenital causes of hypergonadotropic hypogonadism: Klinefelter syndrome
    Acquired testicular disorders (trauma, torsion, orchitis, iatrogenic damage)
    Risk factors affecting puberty: environment, obesity and lifestyles
    Sexually transmitted infections and risk behaviors in the adolescence
    Sexual disorders in adolescents and young adults
    Diagnosis and management of testicular tumors
    Gender dysphoria: management in the transition age.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Sarah M. Creighton, Adam Balen, Lesley Breech, Lih-Mei Liao.
    Summary: "Pediatric and Adolescent Gynecology (PAG) is now a recognized sub-speciality which encompasses a spectrum of conditions affecting gynecological health from birth through to adulthood. Serious and life threatening diseases may be relatively rare, but problems such as atypical development of the genital tract are highly complex. The development of specialist centers is important for appropriate and timely referral. For conditions that affect fertility, sexuality, health and well-being, multi-disciplinary care is the gold standard. In addition, for conditions requiring life-long care, the development of methodical transition from pediatric to adolescent and adult services is necessary. Collaborative clinical networks not only promote quality and consistency in care delivery, they also improve professional learning and raise the standard of research"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Sattar Alshryda, Jason J. Howard, James S. Huntley, Jonathan G. Schoenecker, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an evidence-based approach to treating the increasing number of children and adolescents presenting with hip disorders. It integrates the most up-to-date data with essential knowledge, gleaned from decades of previous research and practice. Each chapter provides a comprehensive text which integrates relevant pathophysiology, clinical assessment, and imaging, with an evidence-based approach to non-operative and operative management, authored by globally recognized experts in the field of pediatric hip surgery. Detailed surgical techniques, illustrated with original medical drawings and accompanied by their respective indications, anticipated outcomes, and potential complications, are also featured, in this first orthopedic text dedicated solely to the pediatric and adolescent hip. The Paediatric and Adolescent Hip: Essentials and Evidence will be an indispensable resource for wide spectrum of audience including paediatric orthopaedic surgeons, general practitioners, general orthopaedic surgeons, trauma surgeons, orthopaedic residents, emergency department doctors, and physiotherapists seeking a clear and consistent evidence-based guide to treating the paediatric hip. .

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents; Part I: Foundational Aspects;
    1: The History of Pediatric Hip Surgery: The Past 100 Years; Scientific Developments That Have Allowed Childhood Hip Surgery to Advance; Anesthesia; Bacterial Basis for Surgical Infection; Unfortunate Timing: Discovery of Anesthesia vs. Discovery of Antiseptic Technologies; Röntgen and Radiographs (X-Rays); Stainless Steel Implants; Antibiotics; Hospitals and Children's Orthopedic Hip Surgery; Congenital Dysplasia of the Hip 'First CDH-Now DDH'; Anatomy; First Treatment: Pravaz, France; Surgical Methods; Open Reduction for CDH Boston ContributionsMedial vs. Anterior Approach for Hip Reduction; Osteotomies to Stabilize Reduction; Surgical Improvements: Deepening the Acetabulum Along with Open Reduction; Femoral Shortening for Older Children; Extreme Cases; Traction Prior to Reduction Surgery; Osteotomies for Residual Hip Dysplasia; Perthes Disease 'Also Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease'; Non-operative Treatment; Surgical Containment; Newer Methods; Slipped Capital Femoral Epiphysis (SCFE); Surgical Stabilization; In-Situ Pinning vs. Reduction; Societal Change and Surgical Choices Stable vs. Unstable Slip and Surgical ChoicesUnstable Slips; The Move Towards Anatomic Reduction; Less Complete Reduction/Monitoring Blood Supply; The "Athletic Hip": Deformity Due to Extreme Training; Hip Preservation Surgery; Summary; References;
    2: Anatomy and Physiology of the Pediatric Hip; Introduction; Prenatal Development of the Hip Joint; The Embryonic Phase of Hip Joint Development; The Fetal Phase of Hip Joint Development; Postnatal Development of the Hip Joint; Acetabulum; Femur; Normal Hip Joint Anatomy and Geometry; Acetabular Depth; Acetabular Diameter; Femoral Head Diameter The Neck-Shaft AngleFemoral Anteversion Angle; Postnatal Ossification of the Femoral Head; Periarticular Muscles About the Hip Joint; Functional Muscle Groups About the Hip Joint; Surgical Considerations for Muscles About the Hip Joint; Surgical Approaches to the Hip Joint; Vascular Supply to the Hip Joint; Vascular Supply of the Femoral Head; Prenatal Development of the Femoral Blood Supply; Postnatal Development of the Femoral Blood Supply; Surgical Implications for the Femoral Vascular Supply; Vascular Supply of the Acetabulum Surgical Implications for the Vascular Supply of the AcetabulumReferences;
    3: Biomechanics of the Hip During Gait; Introduction; Functional Anatomy; Bony Structures; Passive Soft Tissues; Muscles and Moments; Biomechanics of the Hip During Gait; Gait Terminology; Kinematics; Typical Gait Kinematics; Kinetics; Altered Kinematics and Kinetics of the Hip Joint; Joint Contact Forces; Final Note; Classic Literature; Key Evidence; References; Part II: Developmental Dysplasia of the Hip;
    4: Developmental Dysplasia of the Hip in Young Children; Introduction; Pathophysiology
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Branski, D.
    Digital Access Karger v. 1-, 1991-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    8
  • Digital
    Teresa K. Woodruff, Yasmin C. Gosiengfiao, editors.
    Summary: Reflecting the increasing interest in fertility management for pediatric and adolescent patients and fulfilling an urgent need to have a comprehensive guide to the management of these individuals, this is the first book of its kind to present a comprehensive discussion of pediatric and adolescent oncofertility. It carefully examines the impact of pediatric cancer and cancer therapy on fertility and presents both current and emerging fertility preservation techniques for both males and females, such as cryopreservation. Fertility concerns beyond cancer are also discussed, including disorders of sexual differentiation, gender dysphoria and thalassemia. Practical chapters on pediatric oncofertility in the clinic round out the book, covering setting up a practice, counseling and consent, disclosure and insurance considerations. Concluding chapters document fertility preservation techniques and outcomes internationally, with contributions from Portuguese, Brazilian and Japanese authors. Timely and wide-ranging, Pediatric and Adolescent Oncofertility is an ideal resource for reproductive medicine specialists, pediatric oncologists, and primary care physicians treating pediatric and adolescent cancer patients looking to protect fertility options.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Aleksandar M. Vlahovic, Emir Q. Haxhija.
    Summary: This book describes plastic surgery treatments in children for e.g. cleft lip and palate, polydactyly and syndactyly, pigment lesions, benign and malign skin and soft tissue tumors, and vascular anomalies. Every chapter starts with a short introduction, followed by sections on patient evaluation, treatment options and postoperative care. Supporting images and pitfalls are also included. Based on the authors experience, the book offers pediatric plastic surgeons a valuable guide in their everyday work, while also introducing interested practitioners to the field. Pediatric plastic surgery is a specific field of surgery which includes reconstructive and aesthetic-cosmetic procedures in children. The majority of procedures are reconstructive in nature, making aesthetic considerations especially important. As aesthetic procedures in children are not so frequent, only a small group of clinicians are familiar with this part of surgery.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Otoplasty
    Microtia and other congenital auricular deformities
    Breast augmentation in children
    Breast reconstruction in congenital deformities
    Male breast reduction
    Cleft lip and palate
    Polydactyly
    Syndactyly
    Pigment lesions
    Benign soft tissue tumors
    Malign soft tissue tumors
    Hemangiomas
    Lymphatic malformation
    Venous malformation.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Vincenzo Guzzanti, editor.
    Summary: This handy volume focuses on the evaluation and treatment of a wide range of sports injuries, in relation to the Tanner stage of sexual development in young athletes. Recognized leaders in each subspecialty illustrate their own treatment preferences, and a series of detailed chapters address the injuries likely to be encountered in different parts of the body, including the spine, shoulder, elbow, wrist and hand, hip, knee, ankle, and feet. Among the topics that receive particular attention are epiphyseal-physeal injuries, the still controversial issue of capsular ligament tears and the impact of their treatment on joint and bone development, and stress syndromes of the musculoskeletal system. Helpful algorithms covering the diagnosis and treatment of ligament tears are included, and advice is provided on when to return an athlete to training. One chapter is devoted to non-sports-related pathologies that have to be considered in the differential diagnosis of sports injuries in adolescents. Written by a multidisciplinary team of experts, this volume will be an excellent guide in diagnosis and in evaluating the impact of treatments for all professionals dealing with young athletes; orthopedic surgeons, physiotherapists, general practitioners and athletic trainers.

    Contents:
    Basic science and injury in growing athletes: Cartilage, Menisci and Bone
    Muscle, Tendon and Ligament
    Evaluation of the pediatric and adolescent athlete
    Overuse injuries
    Physeal and epiphyseal cartilage injury
    The Spine: Sports-related pathology
    The Shoulder: skeletal injuries and ligamentous instability
    The Elbow: Ligamentous and skeletal injuries
    Wrist and Hand: Ligamentous and skeletal injuries
    The Hip: Femoro-acetabular Impingement
    The Knee: Ligamentous tears
    Meniscal Lesions
    Osteochondritis Dissecans of the Knee
    Patello-femoral disorders
    Osteochondritis Dissecans of the Talus
    Acute ligamentous tears of the Ankle
    Chronic instability of the Ankle
    Foot Abnormalities and Pathologies
    Non-sports-related pathologies in young athletes
    Imaging and techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Lane S. Palmer, Jeffrey S. Palmer, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive reference for health care providers of children and adolescents with urologic conditions. The first section covers the principles of each radiologic modality as well as radiation safety and the history of uroradiology. The second section integrates the lessons of the first section into specific urologic conditions arranged anatomically and includes additional unique conditions.

    Contents:
    Part I. Radiology principles
    part II. Clinical imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Claire Sampankanpanich Soria, Suraj Trivedi, editors.
    Summary: Of Clinical Teaching Points -- Reference -- Chapter 6: Awake Tracheostomy (Adult) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Case Narrative -- Scoring Rubric -- Summary of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 7: Brain Code (Adult) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Case Narrative -- Scoring Rubric -- Summary of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 8: Bronchospasm (Pediatric) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Scenario Development -- Scoring Rubric. Of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 9: Burn Resuscitation (Pediatric) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Scenario Development -- Scoring Rubric -- Summary of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 10: Button Battery Foreign Body (Pediatric) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Case Narrative -- Scoring Rubric -- Summary of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 11: Code Sepsis (Adult) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    References
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Automatic Implantable Cardioverter Defibrillator (AICD) Misfiring (Adult)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Scenario Development
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 2: Amniotic Fluid Embolism (Adult)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Scenario Development
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 3: Anaphylaxis (Adult)
    Case Outline Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Scenario Development
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 4: Anterior Mediastinal Mass (Pediatric)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Case Narrative
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    Preparation and Anticipation
    In Summary
    References
    Chapter 5: APNEA in Post-Anesthesia Care Unit (Adult)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Scenario Development
    Scoring Rubric Case Narrative
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 12: Craniosynostosis (Pediatric)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Case Narrative
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 13: Delivery Room Resuscitation (Pediatric)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Case Narrative
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 14: Difficult Airway in Obstetrics (Adult)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    methods
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Hakan Ilaslan, Murali Sundaram.
    Summary: MRI is the only imaging technique that allows direct visualization of bone marrow and its components with good spatial and contrast resolution. Accordingly, it is an optimal imaging modality for bone marrow assessment in both adults and children. This comprehensive atlas is unique in being devoted to the MRI appearances of bone marrow in the axial and appendicular skeleton of adults and children. Normal MRI findings, including common variants and degenerative changes, are first documented. MRI appearances in the entire spectrum of neoplastic and non-neoplastic infiltrative marrow disorders are then presented, with accompanying explanatory text. Among the conditions considered are multiple myeloma, the acute and chronic leukemias, diffuse metastases, diffuse lymphomas, the anemias, polycythemia vera, myelofibrosis, storage disorders, and infections. Characteristic changes to bone marrow following various forms of treatment are also displayed and discussed. The selected images reflect the use of a variety of sequences and techniques, such as fat suppression, and contrast-enhanced imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Paul R. Barach Jeffery P. Jacobs, Steven E. Lipshultz, Peter C. Laussen, editors.
    Summary: This book is the first in a two-volume set of textbooks and focuses on outcomes analysis in pediatric cardiac care, supporting the coverage of quality improvement and patient safety in its sister title. There has been a huge research effort undertaken in pediatric and congenital cardiac care to understand and measure what is done, to establish collaborative definitions and tools of measurement, and to determine robust benchmarks and methodologies to analyze outcomes. This book concentrates on implementation science in terms of continuous quality improvements and safety science and systems. Pediatric and Congenital Cardiac Care: Volume 1 ? Outcomes Analysis reveals the remarkable developments that have been seen in the fields of pediatric cardiology and cardiac surgery. This unique collaboration between four Editors from disparate medical disciplines (cardiac surgery, cardiology, anesthesia, and critical care) incorporates an international community of scholarship with articles by luminaries and cutting edge thinkers on the current and future status of pediatric and congenital cardiac care. The goal of this and its companion volume is to understand and advance the profession and its activities, to use common terms, and to improve the management of risk and safety in order to enhance pediatric and congenital cardiac care.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Paul R. Barach, Jeffery P. Jacobs, Steven E. Lipshultz, Laussen, Peter C. Laussen, editors.
    Summary: This book is the second in a two-volume set of textbooks and focuses on quality improvement and patient safety, supporting the coverage of outcomes analysis in its sister title. There has been a huge research effort undertaken in pediatric cardiac care to understand and measure what is done, to establish collaborative definitions and tools of measurement, and to determine robust benchmarks and methodologies to analyze outcomes. This book concentrates on implementation science in terms of continuous quality improvements and safety science and systems. Pediatric and Congenital Cardiac Care: Volume 2 - Quality Improvement and Patient Safety reveals the remarkable developments that have been seen in the fields of pediatric cardiology and cardiac surgery. This unique collaboration between four Editors from disparate medical disciplines (cardiac surgery, cardiology, anesthesia, and critical care) incorporates an international community of scholarship with articles by luminaries and cutting edge thinkers on the current and future status of pediatric and congenital cardiac care. The goal of this and its companion volume is to understand and advance the profession and its activities, to use common terms, and to improve the management of risk and safety in order to enhance pediatric and congenital cardiac care.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Selection, Training and Mentoring of Cardiac Surgeons
    Improving Pediatric Cardiac Care with Continuous Quality Improvement Methods and Tools
    Quality Improvement in Pediatric Cardiology: The National Pediatric Cardiology Quality Improvement Collaborative
    Teams, Team Training, and the Role of Simulation
    The Cardiac Intensive Care Unit and Operating Room Continuum: Quality and Safety in the Cardiac Intensive Care Unit
    Professional Formation of Physicians Focused on Improving Care
    Surgical Volume and Outcome Relationship in Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    The Pediatric Perioperative Cardiac Arrest (POCA) Registry
    Reporting in Pediatric Resuscitation: Get With the Guidelines-Resuscitation Registry
    Addressing Nutrition and Growth in Children with Congenital Heart Disease
    Patients as Observers and Reporters in Support of Systems and Patient Safety
    Failure to Rescue and Failure to Perceive in Pediatric Cardiac Surgery: Lessons Learned from Aviation
    Quality Improvement in Noninvasive Imaging?Present and Future Initiatives
    Improving Clinical Outcomes in Pediatric Cardiology
    The Impact of Continuous Quality Improvement on Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    Leadership and Quality Improvement
    A Brief Description of the Role of the Federal Government in the Improvement of Healthcare Costs and Quality in the United States
    Lessons Learned from the Public
    Inquiry into Children's Heart Surgery at the Bristol Royal Infirmary and the English Safe and Sustainable Cardiac Review
    Lean in the Cardiac Intensive Care Unit
    Local Improvement Teams
    Implementation Science?The Next Frontier
    Leadership, Surgeon Well-Being and Other Non-Technical Aspects of Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    Quality and Safety in a Children's Hospital
    The Children?s Hospital of Michigan Quality and Safety Journey: Making Safety First and Making It Last
    Resilience and Systems Engineering
    Measuring and Assessing Adverse Medical Events
    The Role of Communication and Patient Handovers in Pediatric Cardiac Care Centers
    The Role of Technology and Medical Devices in Enhancing Pediatric Cardiac Critical Care Outcomes
    Human Factors and Outcomes in Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    Information Management and Hospital Enterprise Information Systems
    Towards Effective Data Utilization in Congenital Cardiac Critical Care
    Clinical Decision Making
    Design of Cardiac Surgery Operating Rooms and the Impact of the Built Environment
    Simulation-Based Training to Enhance Patient Safety in Pediatric Cardiovascular Care
    Epilogue ?A Vision for the Future.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Eduardo M. Da Cruz, Dunbar Ivy, James Jaggers, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric and Congenital Cardiology, Cardiac Surgery and Intensive Care provides a consistent and comprehensive approach to multiple congenital and acquired cardiac pathologies pre, peri and postoperatively, with the use of algorhythms, guidelines and current research issues. Included with this book are interactive videos with the most common interventions, online access to practical learning activities, and to the comprehensive Aristotle score and database. This reference work satisfies the need for a universal and practical review of management of critically ill children and adults with congenital heart disease, based upon taskforce decisions and the cumulative experience of the world leaders in the field.

    Contents:
    General aspects
    Fetal cardiology
    Assessment of the cardiac patient
    Preventive cardiology
    Cardiovascular anesthesia
    Cardio-pulmonary bypass
    Monitoring of the cardiac patient
    Cardiopulmonary and intracardiac interactions
    Cardiovascular pharmacology
    General principles of interventional cardiac catheterization
    Innovative interventional techniques
    Cardiopulmonary resuscitation
    Nursing issues related to the cardiac patient
    Congenital cardiovascular diseases in pediatrics
    Cardiovascular dysfunction in infants, children and adolescents
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Systemic vasculopathies
    Acquired cardiac diseases
    The adult with congenital cardiac defects
    Extracorporeal life support (ecls) of the cardiac patient
    Heart and lung transplant
    Arrhythmias and conductive disorders
    Upper airway and tracheal pathology
    Extra-cardiac issues and complications
    Outcomes, long term follow-up and cardiac recovery
    Leadership issues of a pediatric heart center
    Miscellaneous.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Kirk Lalwani, Ira Todd Cohen, Ellen Y. Choi, and Vidya T. Raman
    Summary: This volume, part of the Problem-Based Learning series, reviews key topics in Pediatric Anesthesia found on the American Board of Anesthesiology's Pediatric Anesthesiology Certification Exam using illustrative clinical cases. With real-world clinical cases and discussion questions that guide case progression, this book facilitates both individual and small-group learning. Each case is further broken down to include additional related subtopics for maximum yield. Evidence-based reviews and multiple-choice self-assessment questions follow each case, making this book ideal for continuing education in pediatric anesthesia for the generalist and specialist practitioner. Teachers and trainees in anesthesiology will take advantage of this book's features for targeted teaching, learning, and retention.
    Digital Access Oxford 2018
  • Digital
    Robert S. Holzman, Thomas J. Mancuso, Joseph P. Cravero, James A. DiNardo, editors.
    Summary: This text is designed for those who may become consultants in pediatric anesthesia. It is based on a curriculum developed since 1992 to illustrate the breadth and depth of the practice of pediatric anesthesia and the program is an integral part of the didactic series in the Department of Anesthesiology, Perioperative and Pain Medicine at Boston Children's Hospital. This second edition has the same purpose as the first -- to accompany the reader's journey in attaining proficiency, expertise and finally, mastery in pediatric anesthesiology. The format of the book is designed to encourage the readers' free flow of ideas and the written examinations, seen at the beginning of the text as a baseline in pediatric medicine, are primarily knowledge-based, reflecting factual medical information necessary for the subspecialty practice of pediatric anesthesiology. With this basic guidance, the reader can bring him or herself "into the operating room" and manage the patient in an expert fashion.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Robert S. Holzman, Thomas J. Mancuso, Joseph P. Cravero, James A. DiNardo.
    Summary: This book functions as a workbook for consultants in pediatric anesthesia. Based on a curriculum developed at the Boston Children's Hospital Department of Anesthesiology, the content illustrates the breadth and depth of the practice of pediatric anesthesia. Organized into two parts, the book seeks to provide a sense of progression and feedback using clinical scenarios to aid the medical professional in developing autonomy, while preserving the availability of expert level discussion. Each chapter features self-assessments in question and answer format, and encourages the reader to be creative in their responses by invoking not only their clinical knowledge, but their philosophical views of pediatric anesthesia practice as well. Practical and accessible, The Pediatric Anesthesiology Review is an essential resource for those looking to attain proficiency, expertise, and mastery in pediatric anesthesiology.

    Contents:
    Part I. PEDIATRIC MEDICINE FOR PEDIATRIC ANESTHESIOLOGISTS
    1.General Pediatrics.-2. Newborn Medicine
    3. Respiratory System
    4. Cardiology
    5. The Musculoskeletal System
    6. Hematology/Oncology
    7. Surgery
    Part II. CONSULTATIONS IN PEDIATRIC ANESTHESIA
    8. Prematurity and Extreme Prematurity
    9. Newborn Emergencies
    10. Fetal Surgery
    11. Conjoined Twins
    12. Neuroanesthesia
    13. Orthopedics I
    Spine Surgery
    14. Orthopedics II
    15. Congenital Bone and Connective Tissue Disorders
    16. Otolaryngology
    17. Craniofacial and Maxillofacial Surgery
    18. Ophthalmology
    19. Respiratory System
    20. Thoracic Surgery.-21. Cardiac I
    22. Cardiac II
    23. Cardiac III
    24. Cardiac IV
    Mechanical Support.-25. Genitourinary System
    26. Transplantation
    27. Minimally Invasive Surgery
    28. Ambulatory Surgical Procedures
    29. Anesthesia Outside the Operating Room
    30. Vascular Anomalies
    31. Dental Procedures
    32. Trauma I
    33. Trauma II
    34. Burns
    35. Behavioral Issues
    36. Adolescents
    37. Obesity and Surgery
    38. Gastrointestinal Disease
    39. Renal Disease
    40. Acid-Base Disturbances
    41. Skin Disorders
    42. Allergy and Immunology
    43. Inborn Errors of Metabolism
    44. Infectious Diseases
    45. Neuromuscular Diseases
    46. Endocrinopathies
    47. Equipment and Monitoring
    48. Regional Anesthesia
    49. Pain Management
    50. Post Anesthesia Care Unit
    51. Critical Care Unit
    52. Resuscitation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Jane R. Madell, PhD, FAAA, CCC-A/SLP, LSLS Cert AVT, Director Pediatric Audiology Consulting, New York, New York, Carol Flexer, PhD, FAAA, CCC-A, LSLS Cert AVT, Consultant in Pediatric Audiology Distinguished Professor Emeritus, Audiology School of Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology The University of Akron, Akron, Ohio, Jace Wolfe, PhD, CCC-A, Director of Audiology Hearts for Hearing Foundation Adjunct Assistant Professor Department of Audiology University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, Erin C. Schafer, PhD, FAAA, CCC-A, Professor Department of Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology College of Health and Public Service University of North Texas, Denton, Texas.
    Summary: "Leverages real-life cases to foster in-depth understanding of pediatric audiology Pediatric Audiology Casebook, Second Edition is fully updated with more than 60 new cases presented in four sections, covering all facets of the diagnosis and management of hearing disorders in children. Renowned experts Jane R. Madell, Carol Flexer and rising stars Jace Wolfe and Erin C. Schafer have compiled an impressive compendium of basic to complex diagnostic cases, covering the most salient topics in the field. The book effectively bridges the gap between content knowledge and clinical application, enabling readers to put acquired theory into active practice by engaging in problem-based learning. Key Features - All cases include key information for diagnosing and managing pediatric patients: clinical history, audiologic testing, evaluative reader questions, thought-provoking answers, definitive diagnosis, recommended treatment options, and final outcome - Expanded use of cochlear implants including implant performance issues - Overcoming challenges from family non-compliance and complicated mapping to professional collaboration and multidisciplinary assessments. Paired with the best-selling textbook Pediatric Audiology: Diagnosis, Technology, and Management, Third Edition, this robust classroom duo is an essential resource for instructors and students alike. Acquire in-depth knowledge from the textbook, apply it to practical case studies, and achieve deeper understanding of the full spectrum of pediatric audiology"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Farzaneh Rahmani, Nima Rezaei, editors.
    Summary: This book is a collection of case-based questions, directed towards and meticulously selected to cover the most common and important aspects of pediatric autoimmune disorders. Autoimmune disorders of infancy and childhood, rheumatological disorders, dermatologic autoimmune disorders, autoinflammatory disorders, and clinical immunology in solid organ and hematopoietic stem cell transplantation are among the topics covered. Each chapter starts with a case description followed by a series of 5-6 multiple choice questions (MCQ), presenting the flow from diagnosis to treatment in a step-wise, logical manner. The text guides the reader through the stream of real clinical practice from initial presentation, differential diagnosis, next best step, lab data, and definitive diagnosis to management and adverse effects of therapy. This MCQ format along with precise, yet detailed answer ensure a quick, reality learning to the reader. The book provides a quick guide and hands-on learning experience for pediatricians, hematologists, immunologists, transplant specialists, pulmonologists, as well as PhD and post-graduate researchers around the world.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Autoimmunity, Secondary Immunodeficiency, and Transplantation-Fever and Cervical Lymphadenopathy-Prolonged Refractory High Fever-Pain in Both Knees-Challenging Pain in Knee and Ankle-Fever and Urticarial Rash-Knee Swelling and Rash-Malaise, Weight Loss and Intermittent Fever-Anemia, Microhematuria and Proteinuria-Fever, Anasarca and Arthralgia-Bradycardia in a Neonate-Annular Rash in a Neonate
    Itchy Facial Rash
    Muscle Weakness and Fever-Pruritic Erythematous Rashes on Face and Eyelids-Edema of Hands and Hypopigmented Lesions on Her Neck and Cheeks-Asymptomatic Atrophic Plaque on the Face-Morbiliform Rash and Fever-Recurrent Interstitial Keratitis and Audiovestibular Dysfunction-Breathlessness and Weight Loss
    Neck Swelling and Fever
    Puffy Face and Abdominal Distension
    Hematuria and Abdominal Mass-Pitting Edema and Desquamation-Fever and Cutaneous Nodules
    Neck Stiffness and Fever-Rash and Generalized Body Pains-Positive HIV and Violet Macular Rash-Weight Loss and Tuberculin Skin Test Anergy-Edema on Lower Limbs-Asthenia and Fatigue-Infections, Whitish Skin Papules and Subcutaneous Nodules-Recurrent Pneumonia and History of Transplantation-Painful Skin Nodules, Prolonged Fever and Cervical Lymphadenopathy-Malaise, Laryngitis and Fever-Acute Myeloid Leukemia Requiring Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation
    Acute Myeloid Leukemia Requiring Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation-Suspected Immunodeficiency
    Acute Myeloid Leukemia Requiring Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation
    T-Lymphoblastic Lymphoma
    No Lymphocytes in an Infant
    DOCK8 Deficiency and No Matched Donor
    Diarrhea Post-HSCT
    Follow-Up of a Severe Combined Immunodeficiency, Who Received Bone-Marrow-Transplantation Four Decades Ago
    Nonalcoholic Steatohepatitis Referred for Liver Transplantation
    Acute Respiratory Distress during Stem Cell Infusion
    Acute Dyspnea after Platelet Transfusion-Requiring Immunization after Rescue Autologous HSCT-Fever and Abdominal Pain-Prolonged Fever, Rash and Mucosal Bleeding-Recurrent Infections, Diarrhea and Hypereosinophilia-Liver Transplantation Who Developed Pancytopenia Post-Transplantation-Kidney Transplant Candidate Showing Presence of Pre-Formed Donor-Specific-Antibodies Against a Prospective Living Donor
    Heart Transplant Candidate Who Required Extra-Corporal Membrane-Oxygenation (ECMO)-Acute Antibody-Mediated Rejection (AMR) Transplantation with Negative-Prospective Crossmatch Results-Kidney Transplantation in a Patient with End Stage Renal Disease (ESRD)-Secondary to Focal Segmental Glomerulosclerosis-Itchy Violaceous Plaques
    Photosensitivity and Bullous Lesions-Recurrent Bullous Lesions-Refractory Blisters and Erosions-Annular Blisters and Erosions-Vesicular Pruriginous Lesions
    Widespread Vesiculobullous Rash-Itchy Skin Rashes
    Blisters on Back and Upper Extremities-Itchy Blisters-Sudden Onset Grouped Blisters-Pruritic Blisters
    Widespread Depigmented and Hypopigmented Patches
    Whitish Patches
    Hyperpigmented Patches-Outbreaks of Erythematous and Necrotic Papules with Hemorrhagic Crusts
    Persistant, Annular Urticarial Plaque
    Yellow, Reddish Brown Skin Lesions
    Erythroderma
    Erythematous Scaly Plaques
    Multiple Circinate, Sterile, Flaccid, Relapsing Pustules
    Purpuric Macules and Oral Erosions
    Diffuse Skin Rash and Mucosal Lesions
    Painful Facial Ulceration
    Patchy Hair Loss
    Concerning Weight Loss Over Three Weeks
    Toddler with Bruising on Knees.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Areej Hassan, MD, MPH.
    Contents:
    Determinants of dietary behavior among youth : an umbrella review / Ester F.C. Sleddens, Willemieke Kroeze, Leonie F.M. Kohl, Laura M. Bolten, Elizabeth Velema, Pam J. Kaspers, Johannes Brug, and Stef P.J. Kremers
    Dietary intake of children participating in the USDA summer food service program / Betty Del Rio-Rodriguez and Karen W. Cullen
    Parental feeding practices and child weight status in Mexican American families : a longitudinal analysis / Jeanne M. Tschann, Suzanna M. Martinez, Carlos Penilla, Steven E. Gregorich, Lauri A. Pasch, Cynthia L. De Groat, Elena Flores, Julianna Deardorff, Louise C. Greenspan, and Nancy F. Butte
    Development of the general parenting observational scale to assess parenting during family meals / Kyung E Rhee, Susan Dickstein, Elissa Jelalian, Kerri Boutelle, Ronald Seifer, and Rena Wing
    Mealtime behavior among siblings and body mass index of 4-8 year olds : a videotaped observational study / Rana H. Mosli, Alison L. Miller, Niko Kaciroti, Karen E. Peterson, Katherine Rosenblum, Ana Baylin, and Julie C. Lumeng
    Frequency and socio-demographic correlates of eating meals out and take-away meals at home : cross-sectional analysis of the UK national diet and nutrition survey, waves 1-4 (2008-12) / Jean Adams, Louis Goffe, Tamara Brown, Amelia A. Lake, Carolyn Summerbell, Martin White, Wendy Wrieden, and Ashley J. Adamson
    Feeding practices of low-income mothers : how do they compare to current recommendations? / Thomas G. Power, Sheryl O. Hughes, L. Suzanne Goodell, Susan L. Johnson, J. Andrea Jaramillo Duran, Kimberly Williams, Ashley D. Beck, and Leslie A. Frankel
    Overweight among students aged 11-15 years and its relationship with breakfast, area of residence and parents' education : results from the Italian HBSC 2010 cross-sectional study / Giacomo Lazzeri, Mariano Vincenzo Giacchi, Angela Spinelli, Andrea Pammolli, Paola Dalmasso, Paola Nardone, Anna Lamberti, and Franco Cavallo
    Maternal educational level and children's healthy eating behaviour : role of the home food environment (cross-sectional results from the inpact study) / Wilke J.C. Van Ansem, Carola T.M. Schrijvers, Gerda Rodenburg, and Dike Van De Mheen
    A pilot study of a pictorial bilingual nutrition education game to improve the consumption of healthful foods in a head start population / Veronica Piziak
    Blending better beverage options : a nutrition education and experiential workshop for youths / Kathy K. Isoldi and Veronika Dolar
    Self-regulation and the management of childhood obesity / Moria Golan and Rachel Bachner-Melman
    Weight self-regulation process in adolescence : the relationship between control weight attitudes, behaviors, and body weight status / Jordi Pich, Maria del Mar Bibiloni, Antoni Pons, and Josep A. Tur
    The role of self-regulating abilities in long-term weight loss in severely obese children and adolescents undergoing intensive combined lifestyle interventions (HELIOS) : rationale, design, and methods / Jutka Halberstadt, Sabine Makkes, Emely de Vet, Anita Jansen, Chantal Nederkoorn, Olga H. van der Baan-Slootweg, and Jacob C. Seidell
    Enhancing self-regulation as a strategy for obesity prevention in head start preschoolers : the growing healthy study / Alison L. Miller, Mildred A. Horodynski, Holly E. Brophy Herb, Karen E. Peterson, Dawn Contreras, Niko Kaciroti, Julie Staples-Watson, and Julie C. Lumeng.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    John J. Hutton, editor.
    Summary: The book describes the core resources in informatics necessary to support biomedical research programs and how these can best be integrated with hospital systems to receive clinical information that is necessary to conduct translational research. The focus is on the authors' recent practical experiences in establishing an informatics infrastructure in a large research-intensive children's hospital. This book is intended for translational researchers and informaticians in pediatrics, but can also serve as a guide to all institutions facing the challenges of developing and strengthening informatics support for biomedical research. The first section of the book discusses important technical challenges underlying computer-based pediatric research, while subsequent sections discuss informatics applications that support biobanking and a broad range of research programs. Pediatric Biomedical Informatics provides practical insights into the design, implementation, and utilization of informatics infrastructures to optimize care and research to benefit children. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Amy L. Dunn, Bryce A. Kerlin, Sarah H. O'Brien, Melissa J. Rose, Riten Kumar.
    Summary: This clinical casebook provides a concise, state-of-the-art review of pediatric bleeding disorders. Presented in a case-based format, each case presents a different variant of bleeding disorder, illustrates the etiology, pathology, genetics, diagnosis, and management of the disorder, and offers clinical pearls. Disorders covered include hemophilia A and B, rare factor deficiencies, von Willebrand disease, immune thrombocytopenia purpura, and platelet dysfunctions. Written by experts in the field, Pediatric Bleeding Disorders: A Clinical Casebook is a valuable resource for clinicians and practitioners treating patients with challenging coagulation issues.

    Contents:
    Management of an Infant with Hemophilia A
    Clinical Care of a Child with Hemophilia A and Inhibitors
    Diagnosis and Management of a Patient with Newly Diagnosed Hemophilia B
    Approach to a Child with Hemophilia B and Anaphylaxis to Factor IX
    Manifestations and Treatment of Congenital Fibrinogen Deficiency
    Diagnosis and Management of FVII Deficiency
    Approach to Mucosal Bleeding in an Adolescent with FXI Deficiency
    Recognition and Care of a Newborn with FXIII Deficiency
    Classification and Management of Type 1 von Willebrand Disease
    Presentation and Management of Type 2 von Willebrand Disease
    Clinical Approach to Type III von Willebrand Disease
    Pathophysiology and Management of Acquired von Willebrand Syndrome
    Approach to a Patient with Sudden Onset Mucocutaneous Bleeding and Thrombocytopenia
    A Pre-teen Female with Fatigue and Incidental Finding of Thrombocytopenia
    Diagnosis and Management of an Infant with Micro Thrombocytopenia
    Care of a Toddler with Epistaxis and Bernard-Soulier Syndrome
    Caring for an Infant with Heelstick Bleeding
    Approach to a Child with Epistaxis and Macrothrombocytopenia
    Recognition and Management of Congenital Platelet Granule Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Osama I. Naga, editor.
    Summary: Building upon the highly successful 1st edition, this book is a comprehensive review designed to prepare pediatric residents, fellows, and pediatricians for the General Pediatrics Certifying Examination, and for the American Board of Pediatrics Maintenance of Certification. Pediatric Board Study Guide: A Last Minute Review, 2nd edition, covers all aspects of pediatric medicine; each chapter has been updated according to the most recent content specifications provided by the ABP. The 2nd edition provides more illustrations, diagrams, radiology images, and clinical case scenarios to further assist readers in reviewing pediatric subspecialties. New chapter topics include nutrition, sports medicine, patient safety, quality improvement, ethics, and pharmacology. Finally, the book closes with a ?Last Minute Review? of high-yield cases arranged in the same sequence as the chapters, providing readers with a concise study guide of critical cases and conditions. Pediatric residents and fellows preparing for the board examination, pediatricians, and pediatric subspecialists preparing for certification maintenance will find Pediatric Board Study Guide: A Last Minute Review, 2nd edition easy to use and comprehensive, making it the ideal resource and study tool. .

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. General Pediatrics
    Chapter 2. Neonatology
    Chapter 3. Adolescent Medicine
    Chapter 4.Genetic Disorders
    Chapter 5.Metabolic Disorders
    Chapter 6.Mental and Behavioral Health
    Chapter 7.Emergency Medicine
    Chapter 8.Critical Care
    Chapter 9.Infectious Diseases
    Chapter 10.Hematology/Oncology
    Chapter 11. Allergy and Immunology
    Chapter 12. Endocrinology
    Chapter 13.Orthopedics
    Chapter 14. Sports Medicine
    Chapter 15. Rheumatology
    Chapter 16.Neurology
    Chapter 17.Ophthalmology
    Chapter 18.Ear, Nose, and Throat
    Chapter 19.Cardiology
    Chapter 20.Pulmonology
    Chapter 21. Nutrition
    Chapter 22. Gastroenterology
    Chapter 23. Fluid and Electrolytes
    Chapter 24.Nephrology
    Chapter 25.Urology
    Chapter 26.Dermatology
    Chapter 27 .Psychosocial Issues and Child Abuse
    Chapter 28.Ethics
    Chapter 29.Research and Statistics
    Chapter 30.Patient Safety and Quality Improvement
    Chapter 31. Pharmacology and Pain Management
    Chapter 32. Radiology Review
    Last Minute Review.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Edward Y. Lee, Mark C. Liszewski, Michael S. Gee, Pedro Daltro, Ricardo Restrepo.
    Summary: This book is a unique, authoritative and clinically oriented text on pediatric body MRI. It is your one-step reference for current information on pediatric body MRI addressing all aspects of congenital and acquired disorders. The easy-to-navigate text is divided into 17 chapters. Each chapter is organized to comprehensively cover the latest MRI techniques, fundamental embryology and anatomy, normal development and anatomic variants, key clinical presentation, characteristic imaging findings with MRI focus, differential diagnosis and pitfalls, as well as up-to-date management and treatment. Written by internationally known pediatric radiology experts and editorial team lead by acclaimed author, Edward Y. Lee, MD, MPH, this book is an ideal guide for practicing radiologists, radiology trainees, MRI technologists as well as clinicians in other specialties who are interested in pediatric body MRI.

    Contents:
    SECTION I: MRI of Pediatric Thorax
    Lung and Pleura
    Large Airways
    Great Vessels
    Mediastinum
    Chest Wall and Diaphragm
    SECTION II: MRI of Pediatric Abdomen and Pelvis
    Liver
    Bile Duct and Gallbladder
    Pancreas
    Spleen
    Adrenal Glands
    Gastrointestinal Tract
    Kidney, Ureter, and Bladder
    Male Genital Tract
    Female Genital Tract
    Peritoneum and Retroperitoneum.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Nathaniel H. Robin, Meagan Farmer.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of childhood cancer
    The genetic evaluation of a child with cancer
    Genetic counseling
    Cancer genetics and biology
    Genetic syndromes with an associated cancer risk
    Cancer syndromes that present in childhood
    Ethical and legal issues
    Multidisciplinary care of the pediatric cancer patient
    Case examples
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Daniela Cristina Stefan, Mhamed Harif.
    Summary: This text is the only book of its kind to provide specific guidance applicable to limited resource settings and builds up from the foundation of general practitioner or general pediatrician competence. Written and edited by leaders in the field, this manual educates physicians on the essential components of the discipline, filtered through the experience of specialists from developing countries, with immediate applicability in the specific healthcare environment in these countries. Typically, manuals of pediatric hematology-oncology are written by specialists from high-income countries, and usually target an audience with a sub-specialist level of training, often assisted by cutting-edge diagnostic and treatment facilities. However, approximately 80% of new cases of cancer in children appear in mid- and low-income countries. Almost invariably, general practitioners or general pediatricians without special training in oncology will look after children with malignancies who enter the health care system in these countries. The diagnostic facilities are usually limited, as are the treatment options. The survival figures in these conditions are somewhere below 20%, while in high-income countries they are in the range of 80% for many childhood cancers. This book includes simplified therapy protocols, pain therapy and palliation, as well as ward procedures such as bone marrow aspiration/biopsies, intravenous therapy and chemotherapy drugs mixing. It provides an overview of pediatric cancer epidemiology, cancer registration and organizing support networks and features the management of cancers with associated pathology like AIDS, malnutrition, malaria and tuberculosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jorge DiMartino, Gregory H. Reaman, Franklin O. Smith, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the scientific, medical, regulatory, and economic considerations associated with the discovery, development, and delivery of novel therapeutics for children with cancer. Co-authored by a diverse team from academic, government, and industry backgrounds, the book describes the steps in the process from the identification of a promising therapeutic target to the evaluation of drug candidates in the various phases of clinical testing and regulatory review. Throughout, special emphasis is placed on the unique biology of pediatric malignancies and the medical and social needs of children and their families. In providing a firm grounding in the drug development process, the book will be of value to all with an interest in how medicines currently used to treat pediatric cancer were made available. This includes trainees as well as established practitioners and others participating in translational and clinical research in the academic setting.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1: History of Drug Development for Children with Cancer
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Initial Progress
    1.3 Rise of the Cancer Cooperative Groups
    1.4 Impact of Regulation to Improve Safety and Efficacy Federal Laws Providing a Regulatory Framework for Drug Development in Children
    1.5 Indications
    1.6 Summary
    References
    2: Targeted Small Molecule Drug Discovery
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Stage Gating
    2.3 Phenotypic Drug Discovery
    2.4 Target-Based Drug Discovery: Considerations for Target Selection/Identification 2.5 Target-Based Drug Discovery: Identifying Chemical Starting Points
    2.6 Hit-to-Lead
    2.7 Lead Optimization
    2.8 Candidate Nomination
    References
    3: An FDA Oncology Perspective of Juvenile Toxicity Studies to Support Pediatric Drug Development
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Should a JAS Be Considered?
    3.2.1 ICH S11: Nonclinical Safety Testing in Support of Development of Pediatric Medicines
    3.2.2 ICH S9: Nonclinical Evaluation for Anticancer Pharmaceuticals Questions and Answers
    3.3 Dinutuximab and Naxitamab
    3.4 TRK Inhibitors
    3.5 Conclusion
    References 4: Design and Statistical Considerations for Early Phase Clinical Trials in Pediatric Oncology
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Rule-Based Designs
    4.2.1 Traditional 3 + 3 Design
    4.2.2 Accelerated Titration Design
    4.2.3 Rolling Six Design
    4.3 Model-Based Designs
    4.3.1 Continual Reassessment Method (CRM)
    4.3.2 EWOC and BLRM
    4.3.3 TITE-CRM and TITE-EWOC
    4.4 Model-Assisted Designs
    4.4.1 Modified Toxicity Probability Interval (mTPI) Design
    4.4.2 Keyboard Design
    4.4.3 Bayesian Optimal Interval (BOIN) Design
    4.5 New Designs
    4.5.1 Modified 4 + 4 Design 4.6 Conclusions
    References
    5: Exploratory Clinical Development: From First in Humans to Phase 3 Ready
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 The Therapeutic Hypothesis
    5.3 Dose and Schedule Determination
    5.4 Clinical Proof of Concept (PoC)
    5.5 Putting It All Together: Combined Phase 1-2 Studies
    5.6 A Role for Pediatric Cancer in Exploratory Drug Development
    References
    6: Gene and Cell Therapy: How to Build a BioDrug
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 BioDrug ToolKit: Cells
    6.2.1 Hematopoietic Stem Cells (HSCs)
    6.2.2 T Lymphocytes
    6.2.3 Natural Killer (NK) Cells
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Viviane G. Nasr, James A. DiNardo.
    Contents:
    The Basics. Cardiovascular Development
    Important Concepts in Congenital Heart Disease
    Preoperative Evaluation
    Intraoperative Management
    Interpretation of Cardiac Catheterization Data
    Cardiopulmonary Bypass
    Mechanical Support Devices
    Specific Lesions. Patent Ductus Arteriosus
    Aortopulmonary Window
    Coarctation of the Aorta
    Atrial Septal Defect
    Ventricular Septal Defect
    Atrioventricular Canal Defects
    Double Outlet Right Ventricle
    Truncus Arteriosus
    Total Anomalous Pulmonary Venous Return
    Left Ventricular Outflow Tract Obstruction
    Mitral Valve
    Pulmonary Atresia/Intact Ventricular Septum (PA/IVS)
    Tetralogy of Fallot (TOF)
    Tetralogy of Fallot with Pulmonary Atresia (TOF/PA)
    Tetralogy of Fallot with Absent Pulmonary Valve (TOF/APV)
    Transposition of the Great Arteries (TGA)
    Single-Ventricle Lesions
    Hypoplastic Left Heart Syndrome
    Interrupted Aortic Arch
    Vascular Rings
    Tricuspid Atresia
    Heart Transplantation
    Heart-Lung and Lung Transplantation
    Anomalous Origin of the Left Coronary Artery from the Pulmonary Artery (ALCAPA)
    Heterotaxy
    Ebstein Anomaly.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Dilachew A. Adebo, editor.
    Summary: This book serves as a comprehensive guide to pediatric cardiac computed tomography (CT), particularly for patients with congenital heart disease. Congenital heart disease (CHD) is the leading cause of congenital abnormalities (8/1000 of live births). Over the past two decades, the diagnostic medical approach has significantly changed with a considerable increase in the number of CT studies in pediatric patients. Preoperative surgical or interventional planning for children with CHD remains crucial and challenging, but despite this and the advancement in the development of new CT techniques and radiation dose reduction methods, there are limited books addressing pediatric cardiac CT. This work fills that gap by offering a complete look at the techniques and clinical utilization for pediatric cardiac CT with liberal use of images. The text begins with overarching themes of pediatric cardiac CT, like its advantages and techniques, and moves into covering different areas of the heart and possible presentations, like atrioventricular connections and cardiac tumors. Each chapter begins with a short introduction section followed by preoperative and postoperative cardiac CT imaging, management approach, and short-term and long-term outcomes. This book also describes the novel technologies being used for three-dimensional modelling and three-dimensional printing in the surgical preparation of patients with complex congenital heart disease. This book is the first to address pediatric cardiac CT image fusion to fluoroscopy to guide cardiac catheterization in patients with complex congenital heart disease. Radiation dose reduction during cardiac catheterization is also an important part of diagnostic and interventional cardiac catheterization that is covered in detail. The book concludes with an overarching look of the role cardiac CT plays in the pre- and post-operative evaluation of congenital heart disease in children. This book is an ideal guide for pediatric radiologists, pediatric cardiologists, pediatric cardiothoracic surgeons, related trainees, and any physician interested in advanced cardiac imaging.

    Contents:
    Advantages of Cardiac CT Scan over Other Diagnostic Techniques
    Techniques of Cardiac CT Scan: Patient Preparation, Contrast Medium, Scanning and Postprocessing
    Evaluation of Cardiac Malposition, Cardiac Segmental Approach, and Heterotaxy Syndrome
    Systemic Venous Anomalies
    Anomalous Pulmonary Venous Connections and Cor Triatriatum
    Septal Defects: Atrial Septal Defects, Ventricular Septal Defects, Atrioventricular Septal Defects, and Unroofed Coronary Sinus
    Atrioventricular Valves: Tricuspid Valve
    Atrioventricular Valves: Congenital Mitral Valve Abnormalities
    Atrioventricular Connections: Double Inlet Ventricle, Atrioventricular Discordance, Congenitally Corrected Transposition of Great Arteries
    Right Ventricular Outflow Tract: Pulmonary Valve Stenosis
    Right Ventricular Outflow Tract: Pulmonary Atresia with Intact Ventricular Septum
    Right Ventricular Outflow Tract: Pulmonary Valve Atresia, Ventricular Septal Defect, Major Aortopulmonary Collateral Arteries
    Right Ventricular Outflow Tract: Tetralogy of Fallot
    Right Ventricular Outflow Tract: Absent Pulmonary Valve Syndrome
    Left Ventricular Outflow Tract: Congenital Aortic Valve and Left Ventricular Outflow Anomalies
    Left Ventricular Outflow Tract: Hypoplastic Left Heart Syndrome
    Double Outlet Right Ventricle
    Dextro-Transposition of Great Arteries
    Truncus Arteriosus
    Anomalous Aortic Origin of Pulmonary Arteries.-Anomalous Coronary Arteries
    Aneurysm of the Sinus of Valsalva, Aorta-Left Ventricle Tunnel
    Aortopulmonary Window
    Aortic Arch Anomalies: Coarctation of Aorta and Aortic Arch Hypoplasia
    Aortic Arch Anomalies: Aortic Arch Interruption
    Vascular Rings and Slings
    Cardiac Tumors
    Cardiac Computed Tomography after Single Ventricle Palliation
    Cardiac Computed Tomography in Evaluation of Ventricular Function
    Role of Cardiac CT in Pre-operative and Post-operative Evaluation of Congenital Heart Defects in Children
    Non-cardiac Findings of Cardiac CT.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Nikolaus A. Haas, Ulrich Kleideiter ; translator, Melanie Nassar ; illustrators, Rose Baumann, Heike Hübner.
    Contents:
    Basics and diagnostics
    Clinical history and examination in pediatric cardiology
    Electrocardiography
    Echocardiography
    Chest X-ray
    Cardiac magnetic resonance imaging and computed tomography
    Nuclear medicine in pediatric cardiology
    Pediatric exercise testing
    Cardiac catheterization
    Electrophysiology studies
    Leading synptoms
    Cyanosis
    Cardiac murmurs
    Chest pain
    Palpitations
    Syncope
    Syndromes
    Congenital heart defects
    Acquired cardiac diseases
    Cardiomyopathies
    Cardiac arrhythmias
    Heart failure
    Arterial hypertension
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Eisenmenger syndrome
    Syndromic diseases with cardiac involvement
    Treatment
    Interventional catheterization
    Postoperative pediatric cardiac treatment
    Operations with cardiopulmonary bypass
    Mechanical circulatory support systems
    Initial treatment of critically ill neonates with cardiac defects
    Heart transplantation
    Vaccinations for pediatric patients with cardiac disease
    Pharmacological treatment.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2015
  • Digital
    Christine M. Houser.
    Summary: Often, information in review books can raise as many questions as it answers. This interferes with the study process, because the learner must either look up additional information or skip ahead without truly comprehending what he or she has read. As an alternative, Pediatric Cardiology and Pulmonology: A Practically Painless Review presents bite-sized chunks of information that can be read and processed rapidly, helping learners to stay active while studying to understand and process new information the first time they read it. This book's question and answer format allows for self-testing or study with a partner or a group. The format also facilitates dipping into the book during a few minutes of downtime at the hospital or office. Pediatric Cardiology and Pulmonology: A Practically Painless Review is a quick and easy way to master these tricky topics and is suitable for those studying for the pediatric board exam, practicing physicians brushing up on their skills, medical students and pediatric residents doing rotations, and any busy clinician who wants to learn more about these topics while on the go.

    Contents:
    General Cardiology Question and Answer Items
    Pulmonology: The Lungs, Oxygen and Perfusion
    General Pulmonary Question and Answer Items
    Selected Cardiopulmonary Topics.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    volume editors, Paolo Nucci.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Siddharth Agrawal, editor.
    Summary: The book covers all clinical aspects of pediatric cataract surgery. Chapters cover basic sciences, etiology, pre-operative evaluation, choice of intraocular lenses, steps of surgery, complications, considerations in traumatic cataract and post-operative rehabilitation. It includes photographs, diagrams, flow charts and tables for easy memorization and understanding. Multiple choice questions at the end of each chapter help to evaluate the understanding and reinforce important concepts. The book aims to encourage ophthalmic surgeons to successfully treat children with cataract as all of them perform adult cataract surgeries but usually avoid managing pediatric cases. This hesitation is primarily due to exhaustive pre-operative evaluation and long term follow up. As a result the back log of this disease in the developing world is significant and many such children are unable to receive timely intervention during their crucial period of visual development. The chapters primarily focus on the clinically relevant issues to keep the reader interested. The book includes contributions from some of the most talented and experienced pediatric cataract surgeons. The book is relevant for ophthalmologists not commonly practicing pediatric cataract surgery and post graduate students.

    Contents:
    The pediatric eye
    Etiology (including genetics) of pediatric cataract
    Pre-operative evaluation of pediatric cataract
    Intraocular lenses in pediatric patients
    Pediatric cataract surgery
    Complications and subsequent procedures after cataract surgery in children
    Considerations in traumatic cataract in children
    Post-operative rehabilitation after cataract surgery in children.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Courtney L. Kraus, editor.
    Summary: Pediatric Cataract Surgery and IOL Implantation: A Case Based Guide is a must-have resource for ophthalmologists, surgeons, residents, and fellows who work with pediatric cataracts and their surgical management as well as ancillary readers such as parents or supportive caregivers to a child with cataracts. This book offers a comprehensive overview of the epidemiology of pediatric cataract surgery and IOL considerations and implantation. It addresses pre-operative considerations and examinations as well as surgical steps and techniques for various pediatric cataract conditions. Chapters begin with an introduction and are followed by discussions that offer countering viewpoints and case studies. In addition, chapters illustrate the complexity of the management of pediatric lens opacities. The book closes with a case-based approach to special considerations in IOL implantation: including considerations in the uveaitic patient, placement without capsular support, and cataract surgery in the developing world. Providing thoughtful chapters that seek to expand on the currently available literature without redundancy, this book a solid companion piece to any other text discussing pediatric cataracts.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Approach to Lens opacities
    Cataract epidemiology & genetics
    Non-visually significant cataracts
    Unilateral congenital cataracts
    Bilateral congenital cataracts
    Secondary/Acquired cataracts
    Pre-operative examination
    Pre-operative counseling
    Part 2: Surgery
    Surgical steps
    Calculation of IOL power
    Post-operative care
    Part 3: Correcting Surgically-Induced Aphakia
    Contact Lenses
    Aphakic glasses
    Part 4: Correcting Surgically-Induced Aphakia
    Intraocular Lens Placement
    Primary intraocular lens placement
    Refractive targets
    Multifocal and Accommodative IOLs
    Polypseudophakia ("Piggyback IOLs")
    Secondary intraocular lens placement
    IOL exchange
    Part 5: Correcting Surgically-Induced Aphakia
    Special considerations in IOL implantation
    IOL placement without capsular support
    IOL placement in the setting of trauma
    IOL placement in the uveitic patient
    IOL placement in the setting of glaucoma
    IOL placement in the abnormal anterior segment
    IOL placement in developmentally delayed patients
    Cataract surgery in the developing world.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    editor, by Ruth Anne Herring ; section editors, Joan O'Hanlon Curry, Joy Hesselgrave, Colleen Nixon, Mary Lynn Rae.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC281.C4 P33 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Pilar García-Peña, R. Paul Guillerman, editors.
    Summary: Since the previous edition of Pediatric Chest Imaging was published in 2007, there have been significant advances in our understanding of chest diseases and continued development of new imaging technology and techniques. The third edition of this highly respected reference publication has been thoroughly revised and updated to reflect this progress. Due attention is paid to the increased role of hybrid imaging, and entirely new chapters cover topics such as interventional radiology, lung MRI, functional MRI, diffuse/interstitial lung disease, and cystic fibrosis. As in previous editions, the focus is on technical aspects of modern imaging modalities, their indications in pediatric chest disease, and the diagnostic information that they supply. The full range of imaging techniques and all important disorders are thoroughly covered. The editors are confident that this latest edition of Pediatric Chest Imaging will be an essential asset for pediatricians, neonatologists, cardiologists, radiologists, and pediatric radiologists everywhere. The combined expert knowledge and experience contained within its pages should contribute in further improving patient care and outcomes.

    Contents:
    Advances in Chest Radiography Techniques: CR, DR, Tomosynthesis, and Radiation Dose Optimization
    Classic Chest Radiology Findings, Pearls and Pitfalls
    Ultrasound Study of the Pediatric Chest
    The Contribution of Nuclear Medicine to Pulmonary Imaging
    Helical Multidetector Chest CT
    High-Resolution CT of the Lung in Children: Technique, Indications, Anatomy, and Features of Lung Disease
    High-Resolution CT of the Lung in Children: Clinical Applications
    Fetal MR Imaging of the Chest
    Neonatal Chest Imaging
    Pulmonary Malformations Beyond the Neonatal Period
    Congenital and Acquired Large Airway Disorders in Pediatric Patients
    Congenital and Acquired Mediastinal Vascular Disorders in Children
    Acute Chest Diseases: Infection and Trauma
    Pediatric Tuberculosis
    Foreign Body Aspiration: Imaging Aspects
    Imaging of the Pediatric Thymus and Thymic Disorders
    Pulmonary and Extrathymic Mediastinal Tumors
    Diffuse Lung Disease
    Thoracic Manifestations of Systemic Diseases
    Radiology of the Chest Wall
    Pediatric Cardiac CT
    Pediatric Cardiac MRI
    MRI of Lung Morphology and Perfusion
    Hyperpolarized Gas MRI in Pediatric Lung Disease
    Interventional Radiology Management of Pediatric Chest Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey
    ScienceDirect
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    60
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    197
  • Digital
    Nalin Gupta, Anuradha Banerjee, Daphne Haas-Kogan, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Low-grade gliomas
    2. High-grade gliomas
    3. Brainstem gliomas
    4. Ependymoma
    5. Embryonal tumors
    6. Intracranial germ cell tumors
    7. Craniopharyngioma
    8. Neuronal tumors
    9. Choroid plexus tumors
    10. Intramedullary spinal cord tumors
    11. Rare tumors
    12. Neurocutaneous syndromes and associated CNS tumors
    13. Modern neuroimaging of pediatric brain tumors
    14. Current surgical management
    15. Chemotherapy
    16. Advances in radiation therapy
    17. Late effects of treatment and palliative care.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Nancy M. Young, Karen Iler Kirk, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    Cochlear Implant Design Considerations
    Part 2: Clinical Management
    Cochlear Implant Candidacy in Children: Audiological Considerations
    Vaccines and the Chochlear Implant Patient
    Medical and Radiologic Issues in Pediatric Cochlear Implantation
    Surgical Considerations
    Cochlear Implant Programming for Children
    Diagnosis and Management of Cochlear Implant Malfunctions
    The Role of Electrophysiological Testing in Pediatric Cochlear Implantation
    Part 3: Cochlear Implant Outcomes in Children
    Speech Perception and Spoken Word Recognition in Children with Cochlear Implants
    Binaural an Spatial Hearing in Implanted Children
    Language and Literacy Skills in Cochlear Implants: Past and Present Findings
    Benefits of Cochlear Implantation on the Whole Child: Longitudinal Changes in Cognition, Behavior, Parenting and Health-Related Quality of Life
    Part 4: Cochlear Implant Outcomes in Special Populations
    Redefining Cochlear Implant Benefits to Appropriately Include Children with Additional Disabilities
    Cochlear Nerve Deficiency
    The Neuroscience of The Pediatric Auditory Brainstem Implant
    Cochlear Implants as Treatment of Single-sided Deafness in Children
    Part 5: Maximizing Cochlear Implant Outcomes Learning
    Elementary Cognitive Processes Underlying Verbal Working Memory in Pre-lingually Deaf Children with Cochlear Implants
    Working Memory Training in Deaf Children with Cochlear Implants
    Auditory Training: Predictors of Success and Optimal Training Paradigms
    Integrated Language Intervention for Children with Hearing Loss
    Music as Communication and Training fort Children with Cochlear Implants
    Part 6: Educational Management of Children with Cochlear Implants
    Early Intervention Programs: Therapy Needs of Children Ages 0-3 Years Pre and Post Cochlear Implantation. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    by American Academy of Pediatrics Committee on Coding and Nomenclature
    Summary: Pediatric Coding Basics was developed to give pediatric healthcare professionals a basic overview of medical coding for services completed.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Welcome and Overview
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Medical Coding
    Introduction to Medical Coding
    Getting Paid
    Documentation and Coding
    Code Assignment
    Coding Keys
    Resources
    Coding Challenge
    Chapter 2: Diagnosis Coding
    Diagnoses
    Internatinal Classification of Diseases, 10th Revision, Clinical Modification (ICD-10-CM)
    ICD-10-CM Tips
    Code Selection
    Reporting ICD-10-CM Codes
    Coding Keys
    Resources
    Coding Challenge
    Chapter 3: Current Procedural Terminology®
    Coding Professional Services Current Procedural Terminology (CPT) Categories, Sections, and Codes
    The CPT Codebook
    Selecting Codes
    General Tips and Principles for Reporting CPT Codes
    Coding Keys
    Resources
    Coding Challenge
    Chapter 4: Healthcare Common Procedure Coding System and National Drug Codes
    Healthcare Common Procedure Coding System (HCPCS)
    HCPCS Codes
    Using a HCPCS Manual
    HCPCS Coding Instructions
    National Drug Codes (NDCs)
    Coding Keys
    Resources
    Coding Challenge
    Chapter 5: Coding Assignment and Billing Processes
    Codes Tell the Encounter Story An Overview of the Billing Process
    Coding Keys
    Resources
    Coding Challenge
    Chapter 6: Health Plan Policies and Coding Compliance
    Covered Services
    Coding Compliance
    Code Edits
    Modifiers
    Global Period Edits
    Codes and Payment Policies
    Coding Keys
    Resources
    Coding Challenge
    Appendix A: Coding Challenge Answer Key
    Appendix B: Glossary of Common Coding Acronyms
    Appendix C: History of Medical Payment
    Appendix D: Certificate of Completion
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony P.S. Guerrero, Paul C. Lee, Norbert Skokauskas.
    Summary: This ambitious resource presents an inventive approach to integrating pediatric and mental health care based in comprehensive, family-centered service delivery. Its framework adds a problem-solving focus to the core principles of pediatric consultation-liaison psychiatry, emphasizing young patients' developmental, family, and social context. An international panel of expert clinicians explores the value of the mental health component in treating complex and chronic cases across varied settings, as well as practical considerations in implementing collaborative pediatric care systemwide, including at the global level. Detailed case histories illustrate skills and traits essential to making this problem-based approach work, such as multidimensional thinking, a prevention mentality, a dedication to lifelong learning, and empathy and respect for young clients and their families. Included in the coverage: · Pediatric medicine for the child psychiatrist. · Safety issues in a general medical facility setting. · "Other medical" presentations and considerations in pediatric consultation-liaison psychiatry. · Principles of biopsychosocial formulation and interventions in the pediatric medical setting. · Preventive models for reducing major causes of morbidity and mortality in childhood. Child and adolescent psychiatrists, child and school psychologists, and physicians in pediatrics, general practice, and family medicine will welcome Pediatric Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry as both a robust training text and a blueprint for the future of children's medicine.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    General principles of pediatric psychosomatic medicine, including developmental and systems of care perspectives
    Essential pediatrics for the pediatric consultation-liaison psychiatrist
    Essential psychiatry and substance use disorders for the non-psychiatrist
    Psychopharmacological principles
    Common scenarios and concerns in traditional inpatient pediatric consultation-liaison psychiatry
    Suicidality, self-harm and dangerousness
    Eating and feeding disorders
    Adjustment to medical illness
    Acute mental status change
    Other common medical considerations for behavioral symptoms
    Contemporary value-building roles spanning inpatient and outpatient care
    Principles of bio-psycho-social formulations and interventions in medical settings (case examples from pediatric nephrology, pediatric gastroenterology)
    Psychological testing and pre-procedure evaluation (case example from pediatric cardiology, pediatric endocrinology, pediatric oncology,)
    Improving adherence and promoting behavioral change (case example from adolescent medicine, pediatric allergy/pulmonology, etc.)
    Identifying and managing brain/behavioral conditions (case example from pediatric rheumatology, pediatric neurology, etc.)
    Multidisciplinary management of complex conditions (case example from genetics, etc.)
    Interfacing with palliative and end-of-life care and ethical decisions (case example from neonatology, etc.)
    Healthcare systems and global perspectives.-Administrative and financing models
    Patient experience, safety, and quality
    Primary care integration
    Preventive models for reducing major causes of morbidity and mortality in childhood
    Addressing healthcare disparities
    Complementary and alternative approaches to improving comfort and access
    Pediatric psychosomatic medical approach to optimize global access to child and adolescent mental healthcare
    Appendices
    Teaching tools: basic psychiatry for other children's healthcare professionals
    Screening tools
    "Talking points" for justifying the value of pediatric psychosomatic medicine services.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Farahnak Assadi, Fatemeh Ghane Sharbaf.
    Contents:
    Acute kidney injury
    CRRT as treatment.- Water and solute movements: basic physiology
    CRRT modalities
    Hemodialysis (diffusive) versus hemofiltraion (Convective) CVVH
    CRRT Principles
    General consideration for CRRT
    Specific consideration for pediatric CRRT
    Vascular access and catheter size
    Blood flow rate (BFR)
    Ultrafiltation rates
    Calculating the desired fluid removal rate
    Replacement/dialysate solutions
    Drug dosing in CRRT
    Blood priming
    Nutrition in CRRT
    Monitoring during CRRT
    Compliance of CRRT
    Replacement/dialysate solution composition
    Factors influencing the clearance of drug during CRRT
    CRRT impact on pharmacokinetic parameters
    Case Studies.-
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Concezio Di Rocco, Nejat Akalan, editors.
    Summary: "Provides a comprehensive approach to CVJ diseases and their management based on the multidisciplinary cooperation of neurosurgeons, anatomists, neuroradiologists, and neuroanesthesiologists. The main topics highlighted are embryology, normal and abnormal development of the CVJ, including the related vessels, modern radiological contributions to diagnosis, genetic and metabolic factors which may impact on the surgical strategies, the opportunities offered by traditional operative techniques, and the recently introduced minimally invasive and endoscopic surgical modalities. Special emphasis is also placed on the evolution of the principles of surgical treatment as matured during the past decade by experiences in the still open field of pediatric neurosurgery"--publisher description.

    Contents:
    Nosographic identification and management of pediatric craniovertebral junction anomalies: evolution of concepts and modalities of treatment
    Embryology, classification, and surgical management of bony malformations of the craniovertebral junction
    Extracranial segments of the vertebral artery: insight in the developmental changes up to the 21st year of life
    Imaging of the craniovertebral junction anomalies in children
    Anaesthesiological and intensive care management in craniovertebral junction surgery
    Technical advances in pediatric craniovertebral junction surgery
    Craniovertebral junction instability: special reference to pediatric age group
    Minimally invasive posterior trans-muscular C1-C2 screw fixation through an anatomical corridor to preserve occipitalcervical tension band: surgical anatomy and clinical experience
    Os odontoideum syndrome: pathogenesis, clinical patterns and indication for surgical strategies in childhood
    Craniovertebral junction anomalies in achondroplastic children
    Craniovertebral junction pathological features and their management in the mucopolysaccharidoses
    Pediatric craniovertebral junction trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Christopher W. Mastropietro, Kevin M. Valentine, editors.
    Contents:
    Important Topics for Further DiscussionFuture Directions; References;
    2: Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation for Acute Pediatric Respiratory Failure; Introduction; Indications for ECMO; Hypoxemic Respiratory Failure and Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome; Hypercarbic Respiratory Failure; Airway Disorders; Patient Selection; Diagnosis; Duration of Mechanical Ventilation; Patient Comorbidities; ECMO Modality and Cannulation Strategy; Pulmonary Management; Ventilator Management; Secretion Clearance on ECMO; Extubation on ECMO; Recommendations Centralization of ECMO and the Effect of Center VolumeProlonged ECMO and Lung Transplantation; Long-Term ECMO; ECMO as a Bridge to Lung Transplant; Considerations on Prolonged ECMO; Termination of Extracorporeal Support; Conclusion; References;
    3: Weaning and Extubation Readiness Assessment in Pediatric Patients; Introduction; Definitions; Ventilator Weaning Versus Extubation Readiness; Extubation Failure; Post-Extubation Stridor and Upper Airway Obstruction; Ventilator Weaning; Causes of Ventilator Weaning Failure; Respiratory Muscle Weakness; Cardiac Dysfunction and Pulmonary Hypertension Fluid OverloadSedation Optimization; Mucociliary Clearance; Extubation Readiness Assessment in Pediatric ICU; Screening for Entry Criteria into the ERT; Respiratory Support during the ERT; Duration of the ERT; Criteria for What Constitutes a Successful ERT; Anticipation of Post-Extubation Respiratory Support; Establishing a Respiratory Therapist-Driven Extubation Readiness Assessment Protocol; Potential Adjuncts to Extubation Readiness Assessment; Extubation Failure; Strategies to Prevent Post-Extubation Upper Airway Obstruction; Extubation in Special Patient Populations Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; List of Contributors; Part I: Respiratory Controversies;
    1: Ventilator Management for Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome; Pathogenesis of Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome; Definition of Pediatric ARDS; Noninvasive Respiratory Support; Lung-Protective Strategies; Tidal Volume Delivery: Volutrauma; PEEP Titration: Atelectrauma; Plateau Pressure and Drive Pressure (ΔP): Barotrauma; High-Frequency Oscillatory Ventilation; Adjunctive Therapies; Recruitment Maneuvers; Prone Positioning; Inhaled Nitric Oxide; Surfactant Congenital or Acquired Cardiac DiseaseTraumatic Brain Injury; Neuromuscular Disease; Patient with Chronic Respiratory Support; Future Directions; References;
    4: Management of Status Asthmaticus in Critically Ill Children; Introduction; Pathophysiology: A Brief Précis; Clinical Assessment; Diagnostic Evaluation; Fiberoptic Bronchoscopy; Xenon Ventilation Computed Tomography; Exhaled Nitric Oxide; Pharmacological Management; Inhaled β-Adrenergic Agonists; Anticholinergic Agents; Anti-inflammatory Drugs; Magnesium; Methylxanthine Drugs; Intravenous Albuterol; Intravenous Terbutaline
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Steven E. Lucking, Frank A. Maffei, Robert F. Tamburro, Arno Zaritsky, editors.
    Summary: This extensively updated textbook is a comprehensive study guide that covers pediatric critical care principles and specific disease entities commonly encountered by the pediatric critical care medicine (PCCM) practitioner. Pathophysiologic aspects unique to the pediatric patient are emphasized. The first edition has become a highly utilized text for pediatric critical care fellows. The second edition will prove even more valuable to the fellow in-training and indeed to any clinical pediatric intensivist. In addition to updating the chapters from the previous edition, there are new chapters on topics such as central nervous structure and function, palliative care, child abuse and practical biostatistics. Pediatric Critical Care: Text and Study Guide is an invaluable clinically focused resource for PCCM practitioners. Allowing for concise reading on specific topics, this book acts as both text and study guide covering advanced physiology, pathophysiology, diagnostic considerations and treatment approaches that should be mastered by the higher level PCCM practitioner. The large number of illustrations complements the text in each chapter that also includes key references and case-orientated questions that help reinforce important ideas learned in the chapter.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Derek S. Wheeler, Hector R. Wong, Thomas P. Shanley, editors.
    Summary: The Editors and contributors of this book take seriously the statement that For all of the science inherent in the specialty of pediatric critical care medicine, there is still art in providing comfort and solace to our patients and their families. No technology will ever replace the compassion in the touch of a hand or the soothing words of a calm and gentle voice. The four volumes of Pediatric Critical Care Medicine: Basic Science and Clinical Evidence, 2nd Edition detail the continued growth and evolution of the pediatric critical care medicine speciality. They reveal the technological innovations in monitoring and information management and gives witness to the rapid evolution and adoption of novel monitoring techniques, such as continuous venous oximetry and near-infrared spectroscopy. They also cover advances in molecular biology that have led to the era of personalized medicine with the ability to individualize treatment to the unique and specific needs of a patient. As such this volume and its three sister titles will be of immense value to all studying and practicing pediatric critical care medicine or those involved in the management of this group of patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Derek S. Wheeler, Hector R. Wong, Thomas P. Shanley, editors.
    Contents:
    Section I. The Respiratory System in Critical Illness and Injury
    Section II. The Cardiovascular System in Critical Illness and Injury
    Section III. The Central Nervous System in Critical Illness and Injury
    Section IV. The Gastrointestinal System in Critical Illness and Injury
    Section V. The Endocrine System in Critical Illness and Injury
    Section VI. The Renal System in Critical Illness and Injury
    Section VII. The Hematologic System in Critical Illness and Injury
    Section VIII. Oncologic Disorders in the PICU
    Section IX. The Immune System in Critical Illness and Injury.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Derek S. Wheeler, Hector R. Wong, Thomas P. Shanley, editors.
    Summary: The Editors and contributors of this book take seriously the statement that 'For all of the science inherent in the specialty of pediatric critical care medicine, there is still art in providing comfort and solace to our patients and their families. No technology will ever replace the compassion in the touch of a hand or the soothing words of a calm and gentle voice.' The four volumes of Pediatric Critical Care Medicine: Basic Science and Clinical Evidence, 2nd Edition detail the continued growth and evolution of the pediatric critical care medicine speciality. They reveal the technological innovations in monitoring and information management and gives witness to the rapid evolution and adoption of novel monitoring techniques, such as continuous venous oximetry and near-infrared spectroscopy. They also cover advances in molecular biology that have led to the era of personalized medicine with the ability to individualize treatment to the unique and specific needs of a patient. As such this volume and its three sister titles will be of immense value to all studying and practicing pediatric critical care medicine or those involved in the management of this group of patients.

    Contents:
    Gastrointestinal Bleeding
    Liver Failure in Infants and Children
    Acute Pancreatitis
    Abdominal Compartment Syndrome in Children
    Obesity in Critical Illness
    Nutrition in the PICU
    Diabetic Ketoacidosis
    Hyperglycemia, Dysglycemia and Glycemic Control in Pediatric Critical Care
    Hypoglycemia
    The Adrenal Glands in Critical Illness and Injury
    Thyroid and Growth Hormone Axes Alteration in the Critically Ill Child
    Applied Renal Physiology in the PICU
    Electrolyte Disorders in the PICU
    Acid-Base Disorders in the PICU
    Acute Kidney Injury
    Kidney Disorders in the PICU: Thrombotic Microangiopathies and Glomerulonephritis
    Kidney Pharmacology
    Renal Replacement Therapy
    Transfusion Medicine
    Hematologic Emergencies in the PICU
    Coagulation Disorders in the PICU
    Therapeutic Apheresis in the Pediatric Intensive Care Unit
    Thromboembolic Disorders in the PICU
    Care of the Oncology Patient in the PICU
    Critical Illness as a Result of Anti-Neoplastic Therapy
    Hemophagocytic Lymphohistiocytosis Syndromes
    Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation in the PICU
    The Immune System in Critical Illness and Injury
    Primary and Secondary Immunodeficiencies
    Sepsis
    Thrombocytopenia-Associated Multiple Organ Failure Syndrome
    Toxic Shock Syndrome in Children
    Hospital-Acquired Infections and the Pediatric Intensive Care Unit
    Anaphylaxis
    Rheumatologic Disorders in the PICU
    Infectious Disease-Associated Syndromes in the PICU
    Life Threatening Tropical Infections.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Derek S. Wheeler, Hector R. Wong, Thomas P. Shanley, editors.
    Summary: The Editors and contributors of this book take seriously the statement that For all of the science inherent in the specialty of pediatric critical care medicine, there is still art in providing comfort and solace to our patients and their families. No technology will ever replace the compassion in the touch of a hand or the soothing words of a calm and gentle voice. The four volumes of Pediatric Critical Care Medicine: Basic Science and Clinical Evidence, 2nd Edition detail the continued growth and evolution of the pediatric critical care medicine speciality. They reveal the technological innovations in monitoring and information management and gives witness to the rapid evolution and adoption of novel monitoring techniques, such as continuous venous oximetry and near-infrared spectroscopy. They also cover advances in molecular biology that have led to the era of personalized medicine with the ability to individualize treatment to the unique and specific needs of a patient. As such this volume and its three sister titles will be of immense value to all studying and practicing pediatric critical care medicine or those involved in the management of this group of patients.

    Contents:
    Section I. Anesthesia in the Critically Ill or Injured Child
    Section II. General Principles of Peri-operative Care
    Section III. Trauma
    Section IV. Cardiac Surgery and Critical Care
    Section V. Critical Care of the Solid Organ Transplant Patient.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Praveen S. Goday, Nilesh M. Mehta.
    Summary: Understanding the unique nutritional needs of infants and children in the pediatric critical care unit and written with the goal of shortening recovery time and improving overall clinical outcomes, Pediatric Critical Care Nutrition is the first text to offer comprehensive, in-depth coverage of the nutritional needs of infants and children in the pediatric care unit. This practical text imparts basic concepts, critically appraises the literature, and provides a complete review of the key principles of pediatric critical care nutrition. Combining clinical strategies with a compilation of available evidence, Pediatric Critical Care Nutrition, covers essential topics such as: Metabolic alterations and nutrients in the critically ill child - Delivery of nutrition support to the critically ill child - Disease-related nutrition considerations including burns and wound healing, solid-organ transplantation, renal and pulmonary failure, gastrointestinal issues, cancer, obesity, and more - Practical aspects of the delivery of nutrition support. Optimum nutrition therapy is essential during the entire continuum of critical illness until recovery, and requires the multidisciplinary awareness, knowledge, and effort taught in this groundbreaking text.

    Contents:
    The acute metabolic response to injury in children
    Nutritional assessment of the critically ill child
    Energy and macronutrient requirements in the critically ill child
    Micronutrient requirements in the critically ill child
    Fluid-electrolyte and acid base requirements
    Drug
    nutrient interactions
    Parenteral versus enteral nutrition
    Enteral nutrition in the critically ill child
    Guidelines and algorithms for feeding the critically ill child
    Neonate
    Trauma including traumatic brain injury
    Burns and wound healing
    Solid-organ transplantation
    Renal failure
    Pulmonary failure
    Gastrointestinal issues including hepatic failure and acute pancreatitis
    Nutrition for the postoperative cardiothoracic patient
    Nutrition support of the pediatric surgical ICU patient
    Immunonutrition
    Cancer and immunodeficiency
    Care of the obese child in the PICU
    Nutrition in resource-limited settings
    Nursing considerations in the provision of nutrition support to the critically ill child
    Case studies.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2015
  • Digital
    Sara E. Monaco, Lisa A. Teot, editors.
    Summary: This text presents serious challenges for trainees, clinicians, and practicing pathologists and cytopathologists due to the wide spectrum of diagnoses that may be seen in children and the lack of familiarity with these entities. This reference book has been designed as a practical, high-yield review of pediatric cytopathology. Key findings are highlighted and up-to-date information is provided on the diagnosis of pediatric lesions by cytology, with extensive guidance on differential diagnosis. The book includes tables and full-color images of the cytomorphology and ancillary studies, as well as pertinent histological correlation and guidance on technical issues. Pediatric Cytopathology: A Practical Guide will be an essential reference for anyone interested in the cytomorphological findings in childhood diseases.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Fine Needle Aspiration in Pediatric Patients: Approach and Technique
    Lymph Nodes
    Head and Neck
    Soft Tissue and Bone
    Mediastinum and Lung
    Kidney, Adrenal, and Retroperitoneal
    Liver, Bile Ducts, and Pancreas
    Body Fluids
    CSF and CNS Cytology
    Artifacts, Contaminants and Mimics in Cytology.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Albert J. Pomeranz, Svapna Sabnis, Sharon L. Busey, Robert M. Kliegman.
    Summary: Designed to accompany Nelson Textbook of Pediatrics and Nelson Essentials of Pediatrics, Pediatric Decision-Making Strategies is a concise, user-friendly reference uses a unique algorithmic approach to facilitate diagnosis, testing, and basic treatment of common pediatric disorders. For any given symptom, an algorithm guides the reader through the appropriate investigative procedures and lab tests to reach definitive diagnoses. An updated format that enhances usability makes this medical reference book a must-have for medical students, residents, and practitioners treating pediatric patients.

    Contents:
    Ear pain
    Rhinorrhea
    Sore throat
    Neck masses
    Abnormal head size, shape, and fontanels
    Red eye
    Strabismus
    Visual impairment and leukocoria
    Abnormal eye movements
    Cough
    Hoarseness
    Stridor
    Wheezing
    Cyanosis
    Hemoptysis
    Apnea
    Chest pain
    Syncope
    Palpitations
    Heart murmurs
    Abdominal pain
    Vomiting
    Diarrhea
    Constipation
    Gastrointestinal bleeding
    Jaundice
    Hepatomegaly
    Splenomegaly
    Abdominal masses
    Dysuria
    Enuresis
    Red urine and hematuria
    Proteinuria
    Edema
    Hypertension
    Scrotal pain
    Scrotal swelling (painless)
    Dysmenorrhea
    Amenorrhea
    Abnormal vaginal bleeding
    Vaginal discharge
    Limp
    Arthritis
    Knee pain
    Extremity pain
    Back pain
    Stiff or painful neck
    In-toeing, out-toeing, and toe-walking
    Bowlegs and knock-knees
    Headaches
    Seizures and other paroxysmal disorders
    Involuntary movements
    Hypotonia and weakness
    Ataxia
    Altered mental status
    Hearing loss
    Alopecia
    Vesicles and bullae
    Fever and rash
    Lymphadenopathy
    Anemia
    Bleeding
    Petechiae/purpura
    Neutropenia
    Pancytopenia
    Eosinophilia
    Short stature stature
    Pubertal delay
    Precocious puberty in the male
    Precocious puberty in the female
    Atypical or ambiguous genitalia
    Hirsutism
    Gynecomastia
    Obesity
    Polyuria
    Fever without a source
    Fever of unknown origin
    Recurrent infections
    Irritable infant (fussy or excessively crying infant)
    Failure to thrive
    Sleep disturbances
    Acidemia
    Alkalemia
    Hypernatremia
    Hyponatremia
    Hypokalemia
    Hyperkalemia
    Hypocalcemia
    Hypercalcemia.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Emmanuelle Waubant, Timothy E. Lotze, editors.
    Summary: SECTION I: Diseases that Affect the Brain -- 1. Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis -- 2. Acute Necrotizing Encephalopathy mimicking ADEM -- 3. Pediatric Multiple Sclerosis Manifesting with Primary Psychiatric Symptoms -- 4. Multiple Sclerosis in the Extremely Young -- 5. Breakthrough Disease in Pediatric MS -- 6. Neuromyelitis Optica Spectrum Disorder with Neuropsychiatric Presentation -- 7. Pediatric Tumefactive Demyelination -- 8. Radiologically Isolated Syndrome -- 9. Anti-Glutamic Acid Decarboxylase Limbic Encephalitis -- 10. Anti-NMDA Receptor Antibody Encephalitis -- 11. Pediatric Central Nervous System Vasculitis -- 12. Neuroinflammatory disease in association with Morphea (Localized Scleroderma) -- 13. Susac's Syndrome -- 14. Infectious Mimics of Multiple Sclerosis -- 15. Central nervous system lymphoma -- 16. Methotrexate Toxicity -- 17. Alexander Disease Type II -- 18. Neurodegenerative Langerhans Cell Histiocytosis -- 19. X-linked Adrenoleukodystrophy -- 20. Rapid-onset Obesity with Hypothalamic dysfunction, Hypoventilation and Autonomic Dysregulation (ROHHAD) -- 21. ADEM Mimic with Thiamine Transporter Deficiency -- SECTION II: Diseases that Affect the Brainstem -- 22. Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis-Brainstem and Cerebellar Presentation -- 23. Multiple Sclerosis with Brainstem Presentation -- 24. Neuromyelitis Optica Spectrum Disorder with Brainstem Presentation -- 25. Infection mimics with brainstem presentation -- 26. Chronic Lymphocytic Inflammation with Pontine Perivascular Enhancement Responsive to Steroids -- SECTION III: Diseases that Affect the Spinal Cord -- 27. Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis with Spinal Cord Presentation -- 28. Post-Infectious Acute Transverse Myelitis -- 29. Complete transverse myelitis (idiopathic) -- 30. Transverse Myelitis with Acute Inflammatory Polyradiculoneuropathy -- 31. Acute Flaccid Myelitis -- 32. Neuromyelitis optica spectrum disease with transverse myelitis presentation -- 33. Transverse myelitis in lupus -- 34. Acute Demyelination associated with TNF alpha- inhibiting biologic therapy -- 35. Myelopathy due to occult trauma mimicking transverse myelitis -- 36. Hypomyelination with Brainstem and Spinal Cord Abnormalities and Leg Spasticity (HBSL) -- SECTION IV: Diseases That Affect the Optic Nerve -- 37. Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis followed by recurrent or monophasic optic neuritis -- 38. Chronic Relapsing Inflammatory Optic Neuropathy (CRION) -- 39. Optic Neuritis as the Presenting Symptom for MS -- 40. Steroid Dependent Recurrent Optic Neuritis in Pediatric Multiple Sclerosis -- 41. Neuromyelitis optica presenting with bilateral optic neuritis -- 42. Sarcoidosis with Optic Nerve Presentation.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Nikolaos Kotsanos, Haim Sarnat, Kitae Park, editors.
    Summary: This textbook provides dental practitioners and students with all the knowledge required in order to treat optimally the oral conditions encountered in children and adolescents and to offer appropriate guidance on subsequent oral health self-care. The opening chapters are designed to assist readers in providing empathic care on the basis of a sound understanding of the processes of physical and psychological maturation. The use of sedation and anesthesia is then discussed, followed by detailed information on such key topics as tooth eruption and shedding, preventive and interceptive orthodontics, and control of dental caries. Restoration procedures and pulp treatment necessitated by dental caries, trauma and/or developmental anomalies are clearly described, with reference to relevant advances in dental technology and materials. Subsequent chapters focus on conditions compromising dental or general oral health in the pediatric age group, such as periodontal diseases, dental wear, dental anomalies, TMJ disorders, and soft tissue lesions. The book concludes by examining treatment approaches in children and adolescents with disabilities, syndromes, chronic diseases, craniofacial abnormalities, and generally advocating children centered dentistry as it affects their quality of life.

    Contents:
    1. Pediatric Dentistry - Past, present and future
    2. Child Cognitive Development: Building Positive Attitudes Towards Dentists and Oral Health
    3. Pediatric body growth
    4. Child dental fear, communication and cooperation
    5. Behavior Guidance and Communicative Management
    6. Examination, diagnosis and treatment plan implementation
    7. Local Anesthesia in Pediatric Dentistry
    8. Pharmacologic behavior management (sedation-general anesthesia)
    9. Growth of the Craniofacial Complex
    10. Tooth Eruption, Shedding, Extraction and Related Surgical Issues
    11. Orthodontic knowledge and practice for the pediatric dentist
    12. Dental Caries Prevention in Children and Adolescents
    13. Restoration of Carious hard dental tissues
    14. Pulp therapy in Pediatric Dentistry
    15. Periodontal diseases in children and adolescents
    16. Dentoalveolar trauma of children and adolescents
    17. Developmental defects of the teeth and their hard tissues
    18. Tooth wear in children and adolescents
    19. Temporomandibular Disorders in Children and Adolescents
    20. Oral Lesions in Children and Adolescents
    21. The young dental patient with systemic disease
    22. Disabilities, neuropsychiatric disorders and syndromes in childhood and adolescence
    23. Child-centered dentistry: engaging and protecting children.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Bernard A. Cohen.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Section on Dermatology, American Academy of Pediatrics ; editors, Anthony J. Mancini, Daniel P. Krowchuk
    Summary: Significantly updated and revised, this quick reference provides practical and concise guidance on the recognition and treatment of more than 100 pediatric and adolescent skin conditions.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    Thuy L. Phung, Teresa S. Wright, Crystal Y. Pourciau, Bruce R. Smoller.
    Summary: This book provides practicing pathologists, dermatologists, cutaneous oncologists and dermatopathologists with a reference textbook that reviews the clinical and histopathologic features of skin disorders that affect children, along with a discussion of the molecular pathogenesis for each disease as it is currently known. The book includes a concise discussion of the clinical presentation, as well as the histologic and, when appropriate, immunohistochemical features of each disease. The book is divided into two main sections, non-neoplastic and neoplastic skin diseases. Each section is comprised of a series of chapters organized according to histologic findings rather than by clinical classification systems. This will enable the practicing pathologist to browse chapters based upon observation of routine histologic patterns. Each chapter addresses the differential diagnoses of skin disorders with focus on salient histologic characteristics. The text is richly illustrated with over 1000 colorful clinical and histologic photographs for each of the 400 entities discussed. Pediatric Dermatopathology provides a microscope table reference for the practicing pediatric pathologist, general pathologist and dermatopathologist. Further, it will serve as a reference volume for dermatologists, pediatricians and oncologic surgeons.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Christine M. Houser.
    Summary: Often, information in review books can raise as many questions as it answers. This interferes with the study process, because the learner must either look up additional information or skip ahead without truly comprehending what he or she has read. As an alternative, Pediatric Development and Neonatology: A Practically Painless Review presents bite-sized chunks of information that can be read and processed rapidly, helping learners to stay active while studying to understand and process new information the first time they read it. This book's question and answer format allows for self-testing or study with a partner or a group. The format also facilitates dipping into the book during a few minutes of downtime at the hospital or office. Pediatric Development and Neonatology: A Practically Painless Review is a quick and easy way to master these tricky topics and is suitable for those studying for the pediatric board exam, practicing physicians brushing up on their skills, medical students and pediatric residents doing rotations, and any busy clinician who wants to learn more about these topics while on the go.

    Contents:
    Developmental Topics
    Neonatal Physiology: Things That Make Them Special
    Brief Overview of Reproductive Embryology
    Cryptoorchism and Contraindications to Breast Feeding in Developed Nations
    Neonatal Topics.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rita Marie John, editor.
    Summary: This textbook helps nurses, physician assistants, medical students and residents to order appropriate tests and understand how to interpret them to improve their diagnostic reasoning. Children are not like adults, and interpreting of the results of their diagnostic laboratory tests requires knowledge of the biochemical and metabolic differences. Using a combination of information, questions and case studies, the book allows readers to gain an understanding of the key concepts of sensitivity, specificity, and positive and negative predictive values, as well as the indications for diagnostic lab tests. This book presents the state of art in testing across body systems and guidance on how to order and interpret diagnostic laboratory tests in pediatric patients. Each chapter includes learning objectives, tables and figures, as well as questions and references for further learning. This textbook provides an update for clinicians and is a valuable learning tool for students and new clinicians. .

    Contents:
    1. Pediatric Diagnostic Lab Tests: An Overview
    2. Laboratory Screening and Diagnostic Testing in Antepartum Care
    3. Care of the Newborn
    4. The Well Pediatric Primary Care Visit and Screening Laboratory Tests
    5. PointofCare Testing in Primary Care
    6. Care of the Child with an Infectious Disease or Immunological Defect
    7. Genetics and Pediatric Patient
    8. Hematology
    9. Care of the Child with a Gastrointestinal Disorder
    10. Care of the Child with a Renal Problem
    11. Care of the Child with a Pediatric Endocrine Disorder
    12. Care of the Child with a Possible Rheumatological Disorder.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Andrew J. White.
    Summary: "Using a practical, case-based presentation, Pediatric Diagnostic Medicine helps you develop diagnostic skills, gain further knowledge through interesting cases, and improve critical thinking to reach a correct diagnosis. Dr. Andrew J. White, vice chair of education and director of the residency program at Washington University in St. Louis, presents dozens of real-world cases highlighted by full-color photographs. This unique case collection is an invaluable resource for pediatricians, residents, hospitalists, physician assistants, nurse practitioners, and anyone who provides care to children. Uses case-based teaching to develop higher-level medical thinking, based on James P. Keating's concept of pediatric diagnostic medicine. Teaches how to think about a patient's symptoms, dissect the issues, think backwards, and arrive at the correct diagnosis. Presents notable clinical cases starting with the presenting symptoms and then discussing vital signs, patient and family history, lab results, consults, differential diagnoses, and the ultimate diagnosis, finishing each case with teaching points. Includes additional relevant information on each case, such as why one diagnosis was chosen over another, or why certain tests were not run"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Bradley A. Warady, Steven R. Alexander, Franz Schaefe, editors.
    Summary: The optimal management of children who receive dialysis therapy requires a thorough understanding of the multidisciplinary nature of their treatment. The multiple organ systems that are often impacted by acute and chronic impairment of kidney function makes the care of this patient population highly complex. This 3rd edition of Pediatric Dialysis provides authoritative and comprehensive information on all aspects of dialysis-related care for children to assist the clinician in achieving the best possible patient outcomes. Like the two preceding editions, the 3rd edition enlists experts from North America, South America, Europe, and Asia to provide their perspectives on virtually all issues pertaining to dialysis-related management for children, based on years of clinical and research experience. The book contains sections on all essential topics including when to initiate dialysis, peritoneal dialysis, hemodialysis, managing secondary complications, nutritional therapy, drugs and dialysis, dialysis outcomes, and transition to adult care. Each chapter has been thoroughly updated in terms of content and references. The book also includes several new chapters on topics such as remote patient monitoring, acute kidney injury management in the developing world, and antibiotic stewardship in the dialysis unit, maintaining the text's preeminent status as a worldwide source for pediatric dialysis care.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Essential Primers
    1: Notes on the History of Dialysis Therapy in Children
    Introduction
    Peritoneal Dialysis
    Hemodialysis
    Patient Registries and Multicenter Studies
    Conclusion
    References
    2: The Biology of Dialysis
    Introduction
    Biology of Uremic Toxicity
    Solute Removal Mechanisms in Extracorporeal Dialysis
    Diffusion
    Solute Removal by Convection
    Solute Removal by Internal Filtration
    New Membrane Designs for Enhanced Removal of Large Toxins
    Solute Removal by Adsorption Peritoneal Dialysis: Biologic and Mass Transfer Considerations
    Factors Affecting Solute Transport
    Relationship Between Clearance and Mass Removal Rate Among Various Renal Replacement Therapies
    Clearance as a Dialyzer Performance Parameter
    Whole-Blood Clearance
    Blood Water and Plasma Clearance
    Dialysate-Side Clearance
    Whole-Body Clearance
    References
    3: The Demographics of Dialysis in Children
    Introduction
    Sources of Demographic Data on Pediatric Dialysis Patients
    Incidence and Prevalence
    Access to Dialysis Around the World Effect of Era on the Incidence and Prevalence of ESKD in Children
    Effect of Age on the Incidence of RRT and Treatment Modality
    Primary Kidney Disease Diagnosis
    Mortality Risk
    Conclusion
    References
    4: Chronic Dialysis in Developing Countries
    Introduction
    Economic Indicators
    Epidemiology of Renal Replacement Therapy in Developing Countries
    Demographics of the ESRD Population in Developing Countries
    Challenges Faced by Developing Countries in the Provision of Pediatric RRT
    Conclusion
    References
    5: Organization and Management of a Pediatric Dialysis Program Introduction
    Operational Management
    Facility Culture and Organization
    Physical Space Needs
    Staffing the Unit
    Billing and Regulatory Guidelines
    Care Implementation
    Modality Selection
    Patient/Family Education
    Patient Care Plans
    Patient and Family Support
    Transition and Transfer of Care
    Quality Improvement and Safety
    Oversight and Ongoing Operations
    Conclusion
    References
    6: Role of the Advanced Practice Provider in a Pediatric Dialysis Program
    Introduction
    History of the Advanced Practice Provider (APP)
    Nurse Practitioner Physician Assistant
    Orientation for the APP
    The APP in the Dialysis Unit
    Role of the APP in Hemodialysis
    Role of the APP in Peritoneal Dialysis
    Role of the APP in Critical Care Nephrology
    Billing Practices for the APP
    The Role of the APP in Transitions of Care
    CKD-ESKD
    Dialysis to Transplant
    Pediatric to Adult Care
    The Role of the APP in Improving Patient Outcomes
    Conclusion
    References
    7: Quality Improvement Strategies and Outcomes in Pediatric Dialysis
    Introduction
    Clinical Practice Guidelines and Clinical Performance Measures
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bradley A. Warady, Franz Schaefer, Steven R. Alexander, editors.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Peritoneal access
    Chapter 2. Peritoneal equilibration testing and application
    Chapter 3. Peritoneal dialysis prescription
    Chapter 4. Dialysis during infancy
    Chapter 5. Hypotension in infants on peritoneal dialysis
    Chapter 6. Ethical dialysis decisions in infants with end-stage kidney disease
    Chapter 7. Catheter exit-site and tunnel infections
    Chapter 8. Peritonitis
    Chapter 9. Relapsing and recurrent peritonitis
    Chapter 10. Peritoneal dialysis-associated hydrothorax and hernia
    Chapter 11. Ultrafiltration failure in children undergoing chronic PD
    Chapter 12. Encapsulating peritoneal sclerosis
    Chapter 13. Difficult vascular access
    Chapter 14: Hemodialysis prescription
    Chapter 15. Intensified hemodialysis
    Chapter 16. Home haemodialysis
    Chapter 17. Myocardial stunning
    Chapter 18. Catheter-related bloodstream infection
    Chapter 19. Intradialytic hypotension: potential causes and mediating factors
    Chapter 20. Dialyzer reaction
    Chapter 21. Nutritional management of infants on dialysis-- Chapter 22. Nutritional management of children and adolescents on dialysis
    Chapter 23. Anemia management
    Chapter 24. Chronic kidney diseases: Mineral and bone disorder
    Chapter 25. Growth delay
    Chapter 26. Hypertension
    Chapter 27. Cardiovascular diseases
    Chapter 28. Sleep disorders
    Chapter 29. The highly sensitized dialysis patient
    Chapter 30. Health-related quality of life in youth on dialysis
    Chapter 31. Nonadherence
    Chapter 32. Transition to adult care
    Chapter 33. Pregnancy in a woman approaching end-stage kidney diseases
    Chapter 34. Withholding and withdrawal of dialysis
    Chapter 35. Peritoneal dialysis as treatment fo acute kidney injury (AKI)
    Chapter 36. Continuous renal replacement therapy (CRRT) and acute kidney
    Chapter 37. Continuous renal replacement therapy (CRRT) for a neonate-- Chapter 38. Anticoagulation and continuous renal replacement therapy (CRRT)
    Chapter 39. Extracorporeal liver dialysis in children
    Chapter 40. Therapeutic apheresis
    Chapter 41. Neonatal hyperammonemia
    Chapter 42. Primary hyperoxaluria
    Chapter 43. Intoxications
    Chapter 44. Acquired cystic kidney disease
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Julina Ongkasuwan, Eric H. Chiou, editors.
    Summary: This text provides the reader with a comprehensive understanding of pediatric swallowing and presents a practical, evidence-based approach to the diagnosis and management of swallowing difficulties in children. It highlights particular clinical challenges and controversies in the management of pediatric dysphagia. Part one of the text begins with an overview of the anatomy and physiology of swallowing, with a focus on normal development as we currently understand it. It also discusses new information regarding reflexive interactions between the larynx and esophagus that potentially influence swallowing, and the advantages and limitations of currently available diagnostic modalities. It highlights current controversies regarding frame rate, radiation exposure, breastfeeding infants, and grading of studies, as well as current literature regarding medical and behavioral-based therapy options. Part two addresses specific diagnoses which can cause or be associated with dysphagia such as prematurity, velopharyngeal insufficiency, ankyloglossia, laryngeal clefts, laryngomalacia, vocal fold paralysis, and cricopharyngeal dysfunction; and explores the pathophysiology and treatment options for each. Anatomic, inflammatory, and neuromuscular esophageal causes of dysphagia are also evaluated as well as the impact of craniofacial anomalies, sialorrhea, and psychological factors on swallowing. As the most up-to-date text in this field, Pediatric Dysphagia: Challenges and Controversies will be a valuable reference guide for both learners and practitioners caring for these children. Comprehensive coverage addresses the full spectrum of dysphagia to strengthen the care provider's clinical evaluation and diagnostic decision-making skills. All chapters are written by experts in their fields and include the most up-to-date scientific and clinical information. It also incorporates the perspectives of multiple types of clinicians that care for these patients including otolaryngologists, gastroenterologists, pulmonologists, speech pathologists, occupational therapists, and lactation consultants.

    Contents:
    Diagnosis and treatment of pediatric dysphagia
    Special topics and controversies in pediatric dysphagia.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Joshua M. Abzug, Martin J. Herman, Scott Kozin, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    [contributors] Ricardo A. Samson, MD [and others].
    Digital Access AHA 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ370 .P4273 2017
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Steven M. Selbst.
    Contents:
    Childhood resuscitation
    Neonatal resuscitation
    Respiratory failure
    Shock
    Abdominal pain
    Altered mental status
    Apnea, sudden infant death syndrome, and apparent life-threatening events
    Chest pain
    Cough
    Crying and irritability in the young child
    Diarrhea
    Ear pain
    Fever
    Foreign bodies in children
    Headache
    Hematuria and dysuria
    Hypertension
    Jaundice
    Limp
    Neck masses
    Pediatric rashes
    Red eye
    Scrotal pain
    Sore throat
    Stiff neck
    Stridor
    Syncope
    Vaginal bleeding/discharge
    Vomiting
    Anaphylaxis
    Cardiac emergencies
    Central nervous system emergencies
    Endocrine disorders
    Fluids and electrolytes
    Gastrointestinal emergencies
    Gynecologic emergencies
    Hematologic and oncologic emergencies
    Infectious disease emergencies
    Poisonings
    Psychiatric emergencies
    Respiratory emergencies
    Technology-assisted children-acute care
    Dental/periodontal emergencies
    General surgery emergencies
    Neurosurgical emergencies
    Ophthalmologic emergencies
    Orthopedic emergencies
    Otorhinolaryngology emergencies
    Urologic emergencies
    Abdominal trauma
    Burns and smoke inhalation
    Child abuse
    Dental injuries
    Extremity injuries
    Eye injuries
    Head trauma
    Minor trauma
    Multiple trauma
    Neck and cervical spine trauma
    Pelvic trauma and genitourinary injury
    Pediatric sports injuries
    Thoracic trauma
    Bites and stings
    Drowning
    Electrical and lightning injuries
    Heat-related illness
    Hypothermia
    Chemical and biologic terrorism
    Emergency medical services and prehospital care
    Patient safety in the emergency department
    Risk management and legal issues
    Sedation and analgesia
    Transport medicine.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Sheila Sanning Shea, Karen Sue Hoyt, Kathleen Sanders Jordan.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    Dennis M. Styne.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to Pediatric Endocrinology : The Endocrine System
    2. The Evaluation of a Child or Adolescent with Possible Endocrine Disease
    3. Disorders of the Hypothalamic-Pituitary Axis
    4. The posterior pituitary gland and the disorders of Vasopressin Metabolism
    5. Disorders of Growth
    6. Disorders of the Thyroid Gland
    7. Disorders of Calcium Metabolism and Bone
    8. Disorders of Sexual Differentiation
    9. Disorders of Puberty
    10. Disorders of the Adrenal Gland
    11. Diabetes Mellitus
    12. Hypoglycemia
    13. Obesity
    14. Pediatric Endocrine Emergencies
    15. Medications for Pediatric Endocrinology
    16. Laboratory Values for Pediatric Endocrinology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Sally Radovick, Madhusmita Misra, editors.
    Summary: A state-of-the-art and concise resource presenting the clinical management of pediatric endocrine diseases and disorders, this third edition of the highly regarded textbook covers the most common and challenging conditions seen by practicing endocrinologists and primary care physicians, including growth, hypothalamic, pituitary, adrenal, thyroid, calcium and bone, and reproductive disorders, as well as metabolic syndromes. This expanded third edition includes new topics such as conditions of overgrowth, low bone density and its management, endocrine issues related to sexual identity, mineralocorticoid disorders and endocrine hypertension, and endocrine emergencies. Some existing chapters are expanded to take into account recent advances in the field. Each chapter contains key points, an introductory discussion of the problem, a review of the clinical features that characterize it, the criteria needed to establish a diagnosis, and a comprehensive therapy section delineating the risks and benefits of the best therapeutic options available. New to this edition are concluding sections in each chapter containing relevant case material and multiple choice review questions. Pediatric Endocrinology: A Practical Clinical Guide, Third Edition is a comprehensive resource for all clinicians concerned with the myriad endocrinologic disorders seen in children and adolescents.

    Contents:
    Childhood Growth Hormone Deficiency and Hypopituitarism.- Growth Hormone Insensitivity.- Normal Variant and Idiopathic Short Stature
    Growth Hormone Treatment of the Short Child Born Small for Gestational Age
    Growth Hormone Therapy in Children with Prader-Willi Syndrome.- Growth Hormone Therapy in Children with Turner Syndrome, Noonan Syndrome, and SHOX Gene Mutations
    Management of Adults with Childhood-Onset Growth Hormone Deficiency
    Skeletal Dysplasias
    Growth Hormone Excess and Other Conditions of Overgrowth
    Diabetes Insipidus
    Management of Acute and Late Endocrine Effects Following Childhood Cancer.- Treatment Endocrinologic Sequelae of Anorexia Nervosa and Obesity
    Adrenal Insufficiency
    Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia
    Cushing Syndrome in Childhood
    Mineralocorticoid Disorders and Endocrine Hypertension
    Congenital Hypothyroidism
    Autoimmune Thyroid Disease
    Non-Thyroidal Illness Syndrome
    Resistance to Thyroid Hormone (RTH) and Resistance to TSH (RTSH)
    Thyroid Neoplasia
    Abnormalities in Calcium Homeostasis
    Rickets: The Skeletal Disorders of Impaired Calcium or Phosphate Availability
    Osteoporosis: Diagnosis and Management
    Delayed Puberty and Hypogonadism
    Precocious Puberty
    Management of Infants Born with Disorders/Differences of Sex Development
    Menstrual Disorders and Hyperandrogenism in Adolescence.- Contraception
    Hypoglycemia
    Type 1 Diabetes in Children and Adolescents
    Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus in Youth
    Disorders of Lipid Metabolism
    Autoimmune Endocrine Disorders
    Multiple Endocrine Neoplasia Syndromes
    Care of Gender Nonconforming / Transgender Youth
    Management of Endocrine Emergencies
    The Endocrine Response to Critical Illness
    The Endocrine Response to Critical Illness.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    David B. Allen, Kristen Nadeau, Michael S. Kappy and Mitchell E. Geffner.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Kyriakie Sarafoglou, Georg F. Hoffmann, Karl S. Roth.
    Contents:
    Newborn screening, emergency treatment, and molecular testing
    Disorders of fuel metabolism
    Thyroid gland disorders
    Disorders of the adrenals
    Disorders of growth and puberty
    Disorders of the reproductive system
    Bone and mineral density
    Disorders of water metabolism and transport systems
    Select disorders of complex molecule biosynthesis
    Newrotransmitter deficiencies
    Endocrine-related neoplasias
    Endocrine and metabolic laboratory and radiologic testing.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Haminder Singh, Jeffrey P. Greenfield, Vijay K. Anand, Theodore H. Schwartz.
    Summary: "Today, expanded endonasal approaches (EEA) have revolutionized the surgical treatment paradigm for pediatric central skull base lesions. Specially adapted micro-instruments have been developed to permit passage through the narrow sinonasal pathways in children, enabling access to the entire midline skull base, from the crista galli to the cervico-medullary junction. Pediatric Endoscopic Endonasal Skull Base Surgery is the first textbook focused solely on endoscopic endonasal management of cranial base pathologies in children. The book reflects in-depth expertise from an extraordinary group of international contributors from five continents, who share extensive knowledge on this emerging field. Thirty four chapters are presented in three comprehensive sections. Key Features: 1) Core topics including anatomy, rhinological and anesthetic considerations, patient positioning and OR set-up, instrumentation, and endonasal corridors and approaches; 2) Fifteen chapters detail endoscopic treatment of a full spectrum of pediatric pathologies, such as encephalocele/meningoencephalocele, cysts, and benign and malignant tumors; 3) Discussion of multiple skull closure techniques, managing complications, and neurosurgical and otolaryngological postoperative care; 4) Visually rich, the succinct text is enhanced with 500 high-quality surgical illustrations and intraoperative photographs, as well as procedural videos. This unique reference is essential reading for neurosurgical and otolaryngology residents and fellows, as well as veteran surgeons, nurse-practitioners, and physician-assistants who treat and care for pediatric patients with skull-base conditions"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
  • Digital
    Prasad P. Godbole, Martin A. Koyle, Duncan T. Wilcox, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric Endourology Techniques, Second Edition enables surgeons to carry out commonly performed minimally invasive pediatric urological procedures. It not only encompasses the majority of commonly performed pediatric endourological procedures in a standardised format, but also newer techniques and procedures that have developed since publication of the first edition. Pediatric Endourology Techniques,Second Editionis a fully illustrated text with accompanying online video content through Springer Extras, which addresses these issues. It is a valuable tool for pediatric urologists as well as pediatric surgeons, general surgeons, adult urologists and those with an interest in minimally invasive surgery.

    Contents:
    1. Laparoscopy in Children: Basic Principles
    2.Ergonomics of Laparoscopy
    3. Basic Principles of Robotic Surgery
    4. Physiology of Minimally Invasive Surgery versus Open Surgery
    5. Learning Curves, Costs and Practical Considerations
    6. Laparoscopic Nephrectomy and Heminephrectomy
    7. Laparoscopic Pyeloplasty
    8. Robotic Assisted Laparoscopic Pyeloplasty
    9. Transposition of Lower Pole Vessels: The Vascular Hitch
    10. Minimally Invasive Ureteroureterostomy
    11. Laparoscopic Adrenalectomy
    12. Operative Pneumovesicoscopy
    13. Laparoscopic ExtravesicalReimplantation
    14. Bladder Diverticulectomy
    15. Excision of Prostatic Utricle.-16. Laparoscopic-assisted Bladder Reconstruction
    17. Robotic-assisted Laparoscopic Ileocystoplaty: Our Technique
    18. Impalpable Testis
    19. Laparoscopic Varicocelectomy
    20. Disorders of Sex Development (DSD)and Laparoscopy
    21. General Principles of Cystourethroscopy
    22.Endoscopic Injection Techniquesfor Vesicoureteral Reflux
    23.Bladder OutletInjection for Urinary Incontinence
    24. Injection Techniques for Bladder and Sphincter
    25.Posterior Urethral Valves
    26. Endoscopic Management of Ureteroceles and Syringoceles
    27. Extracorporeal Shock Wave Lithotripsy: Principles of FragmentationTechniques
    28. Pediatric Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy
    29.Ureteroscopy for Urinary Calculi
    30. Minimally Invasive Techniques to Approach Complications of Enterocystoplasty and Continent Catheterizable Channels
    31. Minimally Invasive Uro-Oncology
    32. Preparing the Child for Minimally Invasive Surgery and What Parents and Children Truly Remember.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Cemal Cingi, Emin Sami Arısoy, Nuray Bayar Muluk, editors.
    Summary: The book provides a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of pediatric ENT infections. It brings together the experience of authors from more than 30 countries and aims to provide a broader understanding of the prevention and treatment of infectious diseases in children, that will likely lead to improve their health globally. In addition to new infections like COVID-19, the work reviews the latest treatments modalities. The list of topics ranges from basic to very advanced and the book will be therefore an invaluable resource for ENT and pediatrics trainees and students, as well as for experienced practitioners in these fields.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    author, Council on Environmental Health, American Academy of Pediatrics ; Ruth A. Etzel, editor, Sophie J. Balk, editor.
    Summary: Significantly revised and updated, the fourth edition of this popular AAP policy manual helps you identify, prevent, and treat pediatric environmental health problems.

    Contents:
    Background: addressing environmental health in primary care. Introduction
    History and growth of pediatric environmental health
    Children's unique vulnerabilities to environmental hazards
    Individual susceptibility to environmental toxicants
    Taking an environmental history and giving anticipatory guidance
    Laboratory testing of body fluids and tissues
    Environmental measurements
    Toxic or environmental preconceptional and prenatal exposures
    Environments. Community design
    Child care settings
    Schools
    Workplaces
    Waste sites
    Considerations for children from low- and middle-income countries
    Food and water. Human milk
    Infant formula
    Drinking water
    Food safety
    Herbs, dietary supplements, and other remedies
    Chemical and physical exposures. Air pollutants, indoor
    Air pollutants, outdoor
    Arsenic
    Asbestos
    Cadmium, chromium, manganese, and nickel
    Carbon monoxide
    Cold and heat
    Electric and magnetic fields
    Electronic nicotine delivery systems and other alternative nicotine products
    Endocrine disrupting chemicals
    Gasoline and its additives
    Ionizing radiation (excluding radon)
    Lead
    Mercury
    Nitrates and nitrites in water
    Noise
    Perfluoroalkyl and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFAs)
    Persistent bioaccumulative toxic substances
    Persistent organic pollutants-DDT, PCBs, PCDFs, and dioxins
    Personal care products
    Pesticides
    Plasticizers
    Radon
    Tobacco use and tobacco smoke exposure
    Ultraviolet radiation
    Special topics. Antimicrobial use and resistance in animal agriculture
    Arts and crafts
    Asthma
    Birth defects and other adverse developmental outcomes
    Cancer
    Chelation (non-approved use for environmental toxicants)
    Chemical and biological terrorism
    Developmental disabilities
    Emerging technologies and materials
    Environmental disasters
    Environmental equity
    Ethical issues in environmental health research
    Fracking
    Global climate change
    Green offices and practice sustainability
    Idiopathic environmental intolerance
    Methamphetamine laboratories
    Obesity
    Public health aspects of environmental health. Environmental health advocacy
    Precautionary principle
    Risk assessment, risk management, and risk communication
    Chemicals and chemicals regulation
    Appendices. Pediatric environmental health specialty units (PEHSUs)
    Resources for pediatric environmental health
    Curricula for environmental education and environmental health science education in primary and secondary schools
    AAP policy statements, technical reports, and clinical reports authored by the Council on Environmental Health
    Chairs of the AAP Council on Environmental Health
    Selected abbreviations
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    volume editors, Wieland Kiess, Carl-Gustav Bornehag, Chris Gennings.
    Contents:
    Ethical issues in paediatric epidemiology / Rotzoll, M.; Willer, M
    Epidemiological studies of child maltreatment : difficulties and possibilities / Staffan, J
    Legislation on genetic testing in different countries / Rossler, F.; Lemke, J.R
    The incidental findings dilemma / Hiemisch, A.; Kiess, W
    Challenges and opportunities in conducting research in developing countries / Khan, M.I.; Memon, Z.A.; Bhutta, Z.A.
    How to recruit a representative sample and how to look for it? / Hoffmann, R.; Gosswald, A.; Houben, R.; Lange, M.; Kurth, B.-M
    The epidemiology of global child health / Persson, L.Å
    How to deal with proxy-reports / Genuneit, J
    Biology at a young age differs from biology at later ages : developmental aspects of growth and body functions in children and young adults / Soder, O
    Basic epidemiology, statistics, and epidemiology tools and methods / Vogel, M.; Poulain, T.; Jurkutat, A.; Spielau, U.; Kiess, W
    How to deal with confounding / Genuneit, J.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Oğuz C̦ataltepe, George I. Jallo.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Alan R. Fleischman.
    Summary: This book examines the many ethical issues related to health care in children. It explores the moral obligations of families and clinicians facing hard choices for critically ill and dying children, ranging from neonates to adolescents. It also addresses the ethical concerns in research, genetic testing and screening, and surgical and medical enhancement.

    Contents:
    Children are special : hard questions, hard choices
    Ethical issues in creating a child
    Ethical issues in giving birth to a baby
    Ethical issues in neonatal intensive care
    Ethical issues in genetic testing and screening in children
    Ethical issues at the end of life : caring for gravely ill children
    Ethical issues in general pediatric practice
    Ethical issues in the care of adolescents
    Ethical issues in medical and surgical enhancement
    Ethical issues in research involving children.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Lindsay P. Carter, Meredith G.A. Eicken, Vandana L. Madhavan.
    Summary: "The practice of pediatric medicine can feel very personal; there is an incomprehensible level of trust placed by parents in pediatric providers caring for their children and the enormity of this responsibility is felt by all"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Lily Zhu-Tam, Ida Chung.
    Summary: "This reference book is a clinical procedure book that provides step-by-step pediatric eye care examination techniques and will serve as a great learning and teaching tool for all eye care professionals"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section 1. History. Chapter 1. Case history for the pediatric eye examination
    Section 2. Examination. Chapter 2. Testing color vision in children ; Chapter 3. Testing stereopsis in children ; Chapter 4. Pediatric visual acuity testing ; Chapter 5. Testing visual fields in children ; Chapter 6. Pupil examination in children ; Chapter 7. Ocular motility testing in children ; Chapter 8. Refraction in the pediatric eye examination ; Chapter 9. Binocular examination in children ; Chapter 10. Testing accommodation in children ; Chapter 11. Diagnostic agents in the pediatric eye examination ; Chapter 12. Slit lamp examination on pediatric patients ; Chapter 13. Fundus examination in pediatric patients: direct ophthalmoscope and panoptic ophthalmoscope ; Chapter 14. Fundus examination in pediatric patients using indirect ophthalmoscopy: binocular indirect ophthalmoscopy (BIO), BIO with scleral indentation, BIO in premature infants ; Chapter 15. Ocular emergencies in children: techniques and procedures to assist in diagnosis and treatment ; Chapter 16. Myopia management.
  • Digital
    Daniel J. Hedequist, Benton E. Heyworth, editors.
    Contents:
    The Pediatric Femur: Development, Growth & Surgical Anatomy
    Radiologic Evaluation of Femur Fractures
    Femur Fractures in Neonates, Infants and Toddlers and Femur Fractures in Child Abuse
    Femoral Head Fractures in Children
    Fractures of the Femoral Neck in Children
    Subtrochanteric Femur Fractures in Children
    Treatment of Pediatric Diaphyseal Femur Fractures: Spica Casting & Traction
    Treatment of Pediatric Diaphyseal Femur Fractures: External Fixation
    Treatment of Diaphyseal Pediatric Femur Fractures with Flexible Intramedullary Fixation
    Treatment of Pediatric Diaphyseal Femur Fractures with Plate Fixation
    Treatment of Pediatric Diaphyseal Femoral Fractures with Locked Intramedullary Implants
    Physeal, Epiphyseal, & Intra-Articular Fractures of the Distal Femur
    Evaluation and Management of Pathologic Femur Fractures in Children
    Evaluation and Management of Complications of Pediatric Femur Fractures.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Lois K. Lee, Eric W. Fleegler, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric firearm injuries are a significant public and medical community issue. Clinicians are on the front line caring for children, adolescents, and their families after a firearm injury or death. They also represent the best hopes for preventing firearm injuries to children and adolescents in the future. In circumstances of injury and violence they provide medical, mental health, and rehabilitative care. They also provide anticipatory guidance to prevent firearm injuries and deaths and should have a strong voice in the local, state and national discussions about firearm policies for injury prevention. This book provides an overview of the epidemiology and risk factors for firearm injuries in children and adolescents. It will serve as a practical clinical guide for firearm injury prevention at the individual, state and national levels. The beginning of the book focuses on the epidemiology of firearm injuries, primarily centered in the United States, but also including an international perspective. It addresses the role of firearms in suicide, homicide, and domestic violence, and examines mass shootings as well. The second half of the book focuses on preventive measures for firearm injuries including primary care and hospital-based interventions, community interventions, and state and federal legislation. It concludes with a background on the history of firearm research in the United States and future directions for decreasing firearm injuries. The book's overall focus is on public policy and the role of clinicians and public health advocates, while simultaneously offering practical tools and information about the clinician's role in intervention. Written by experts in the field, Pediatric Firearm Injuries and Fatalities is an ideal resource for pediatric, adolescent medicine, emergency medicine, primary care and family medicine clinicians. At the same time, it appeals to all clinicians and public health advocates wishing to develop a better understanding of pediatric firearm injuries and a path forward to decreasing them.

    Contents:
    Children and Firearms: Inevitable Interactions or Needless Calamities?
    Access to Firearms and Youth Suicide in the US: Implications for Clinical Interventions
    Firearm Homicide and Assaults
    Unintentional Firearm Injuries in Children
    School Shootings: No Longer Unexpected
    Firearm Violence in the Pediatric Population: An International Perspective
    Talking with Families: Interventions for Health Care Providers
    Emergency Department and Hospital-Based Interventions
    Depression and Means Restriction
    Caring for Pediatric Patients after Gun Violence
    Violence Intervention Advocacy Program and Community Interventions
    Safety Devices for Firearms
    Firearm Legislation and Advocacy
    The Clinician Guide to Firearm Legislative Advocacy
    Future Directions for Firearm Injury Intervention, Policy, and Research.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Michelle L. Butterworth, John T. Marcoux, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    David L. Robinson.
    Summary: This book provides guidance to all professionals working with children who present with injuries, neglect, illness falsification and other forms of child abuse. Clinical findings and the current literature are analyzed. The author's clinical experience is shared to assist the reader in diagnosing the cause of injury and other presentations. This text is the result of many years of experience in the UK working with children in an East London hospital (which receives over 1000 children a week through the children's Emergency Department) and the analysis of over 400 cases for the Family and Crown Courts. Mainstream opinions, the medical literature, and examples from extensive experience on the wards and in Court are discussed. Pediatric Forensic Evidence is aimed at doctors, lawyers, the Courts, social workers, health visitors, teachers, the police and others, guiding them through the analysis of injury and when to raise concerns.

    Contents:
    General Aspects of Child Protection
    Bruising in Infants & Children
    Fractures
    Burns
    Abusive Head Trauma (AHT)
    Abdominal and Thoracic Trauma
    Neglect and Emotional Abuse
    Fabricated or Induced Illness by Carers (FII)
    Child sexual abuse.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Daniel Bar-Shalom, Klaus Rose, editors.
    Summary: As the first book that specifically addresses pediatric formulations in the context of drug development, Pediatric Formulations: A Roadmap covers anatomy and physiology of children as well as the technical state of the art, gives hints about where to find inspiration, and provides a suitable background on the regulatory framework. Existing books on pediatric formulations mainly discuss compounding at the pharmacy. This is not a "how to formulate" textbook for pharmaceutical scientists; the subtitle "A Roadmap" indicates that we are on a path in largely unexplored territory. It is an attempt to equip the reader with necessary information on how to get started with the appropriate mindset. Among medicinal specialties, pediatrics is a young discipline. The potential dangers of medicine were often underestimated in earlier times. Cough suppressants labeled as "suitable for children and adults" a hundred years ago could kill children as they contained opioids. Since then, a complex framework has evolved, with physicians, pharmacists, drug development companies, generic companies, academic scientists, regulatory authorities, reimbursement organizations, patients and children's parents as key players. The position of children in our society has changed dramatically during the last century. Children were protected against clinical trials, yet thanks to clinical trials, many more children with cancer survive today. The development of age-adjusted drug formulations is not only a technical challenge. For new drugs today, there are laws both in the United States and the European Union that compel the research-based pharmaceutical industry to also consider children during drug development. One of the major demands of authorities is the development of age-appropriate formulations.

    Contents:
    Pediatric Development: Anatomy
    Age, Weight, Body Surface and Stature, Organ Development
    Pediatric Development: Physiology. Enzymes, Drug Metabolism, Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Pediatric Development? Gastrointestinal
    How to Estimate the Dose to be Given for the First Time to Pediatric Patients
    The Clinical Relevance of Pediatric Formulations
    General Considerations for Pediatric Oral Drug Formulation
    Orosensory Perception
    Flavor Is Not Just Taste: Taste Concealing
    Liquid Formulations
    Paediatric Solid Formulations
    Semi-Solid Formulations
    The Challenge of Automated Compounding
    Pediatric Formulations in Clinical Testing and the Challenge of Final Market Formulation
    Buccal/Sublingual Drug Delivery for the Paediatric Population
    Topical and Transdermal
    Parenteral Liquids for Intravenous and Transdermal Use
    The Challenges of Paediatric Pulmonary Drug Delivery
    Nasal, Ocular and Otic Drug Delivery
    Rectal Drug Delivery
    Intraosseous Infusions in Infants and Neonates
    Compounding for Children? The Compounding Pharmacist
    Food Ingredients
    Excipients and Active Pharmaceutical Ingredients (APIs)
    Clinical Testing in Children
    Pediatric Formulations and Dosage Forms and Future Opportunities: Impact of Regulations in the United States and Implementation of Quality by Design
    Pediatric Pharmaceutical Legislation and its impact on Adult and Pediatric Drug Development: The EU Regulatory View
    Pediatric Pharmaceutical Legislation in USA and EU and their impact on Adult and Pediatric Drug Development
    Checks and Balances in the EU: The Role of the European Ombudsman, with a Focus on the Paediatric Regulation
    The Dangerous Business Of Predicting The Future.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Christine M. Houser.
    Summary: Often, information in review books can raise as many questions as it answers. This interferes with the study process, because the learner must either look up additional information or skip ahead without truly comprehending what he or she has read. As an alternative, Pediatric Gastroenterology and Nutrition: A Practically Painless Review presents bite-size chunks of information that can be read and processed rapidly, helping learners to stay active while studying and to pick up new information the first time they read it. This book's question and answer format allows for self-testing or study with a partner or a group. The format also facilitates dipping into the book during a few minutes of downtime at the hospital or office. Pediatric Gastroenterology and Nutrition: A Practically Painless Review is a quick and easy way to master these tricky topics and is suitable for those studying for the pediatric board exam, practicing physicians brushing up their skills and any busy clinician who wants to learn more about these topics while on the go.

    Contents:
    The Bilirubin Pathway
    Selected Gastroenterology Topics
    General Gastroenterology Question and Answer Items
    General Vitamin and Nutrition Question and Answer Items.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Robert Wyllie, Jeffrey S. Hyams, Marsha Kay.
    Summary: "The world has turned upside down since the last edition of this textbook was published in 2016. The COVID-19 pandemic and its resultant need for social distancing has changed the manner in which we practice medicine with televisits now often being substituted for in-person visits. As uncomfortable as that has become for many clinicians, one outgrowth has been the need to emphasize once again the importance of the patient's history rather than relying on imaging and invasive testing that may be more difficult to arrange. The role of a central compendium of knowledge of pediatric gastrointestinal, hepatic, and nutritional disorders has never been more important. Having such a resource at the clinician's fingertips should facilitate a more directed and focused problem-based approach. That was our goal 27 years ago with the publication of the first edition of this textbook, and it remains our goal now. For novices to the field as well as for experienced clinicians, it is invaluable to have a primary resource even in this age of instant electronic searches. As powerful as today's search engines are, they cannot substitute for a well-written comprehensive textbook."--Preface.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    edited by Michelle Forcier, Gerrit Van Schalkwyk, Jack L. Turban.
    Summary: This book serves as a guide to key topics regarding pediatric gender identity to help clinicians better care for transgender and gender diverse youth. Written by experts in the field, it covers critical considerations for child health providers from a variety of disciplines in a range of clinical settings. Patients, families and other community agencies can also find useful information about current practices and recommendations for care and support. The text begins by overviewing terminology, epidemiology, gender identity development, and relevant neurobiology. Next, the text focuses on the emergence of affirmative treatment paradigms using a patient-centered, consent based framework. Topics include psychotherapeutic support, gender-affirming medical and surgical care, management of co-existing psychiatric conditions, sexual health and fertility, legal considerations, international considerations, and more. Pediatric Gender Identity can be used as a framework to address core clinical issues and offers practical considerations for gender-affirming care. Using the growing science and understanding of gender development, this book is an excellent resource for all professionals working with gender diverse youth, including child and adolescent psychiatrists, pediatricians, pediatric surgeons, psychologists, therapists, researchers, school and educational leaders, and students.

    Contents:
    1. Overview and Terminology
    2. Epidemiology of Pediatric Gender Identity
    3. Pathways of Gender Development
    4. Neurobiology of Pediatric Gender Identity
    5. Minority Stress & The Impact of Acceptance
    6. Sex Positive Approaches to Educating, Supporting, and Listening to TGD Youth in Clinical Encounters
    7. Patient-Centered Care: Providing Safe Spaces in Behavioral Health Settings
    8. Primary Care
    9. Mood, Anxiety & Other Mental Health Concerns
    10. Caring for Transgender and Gender Diverse Youth with Co-occurring Neurodiversity
    11. Pediatric Gender Identity: Considerations for Acute Care of TGD Youth
    12. Psychotherapy
    A Clinical Overview
    13. Treatment Paradigms for Pre-pubertal Children
    14. Treatment Paradigms for Adolescents: Gender-Affirming Hormonal Care
    15. Fertility Considerations for Gender Diverse Youth
    16. Gender Affirming Surgical Care
    17. Late Adolescence to Early Adulthood
    18. Cultural Considerations in the United States
    19. International Considerations & Variations in Practice: An African Perspective
    20. Legal Considerations for Transgender and Gender Diverse Youth.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Christine M. Houser.
    Summary: Often, information in review books can raise as many questions as it answers. This interferes with the study process, because the learner must either look up additional information or skip ahead without truly comprehending what he or she has read. As an alternative, Pediatric Genetics and Inborn Errors of Metabolism: A Practically Painless Review presents bite-size chunks of information that can be read and processed rapidly, helping learners to stay active while studying and to pick up new information the first time they read it. This book's question and answer format allows for self-testing or study with a partner or a group. The format also facilitates dipping into the book during a few minutes of downtime at the hospital or office. Pediatric Genetics and Inborn Errors of Metabolism: A Practically Painless Review is a quick and easy way to master these tricky topics and is suitable for those studying for the pediatric board exam, practicing physicians brushing up their skills, and any busy clinician who wants to learn more about these topics while on the go.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    A. Lindsay Frazier, James F. Amatruda, editors.
    Summary: Germ cell tumors are relatively rare compared with other malignancies, and compilations of knowledge that encompass the entire spectrum of the disease are lacking. This textbook, written by the foremost authorities in the field, rectifies the situation by discussing in depth a broad range of topics, including biology, epidemiology, pathology, treatment, and late effects. Bearing in mind that germ cell tumors are most prevalent in the adolescent and young adult age group, causes of disease and treatment approaches in pediatric and adult patients are compared and contrasted. By spanning the entire life course, from prenatal origins of disease through to treatment in adults and late effects of treatment, the editors have produced a book that will be of interest to both pediatric and adult oncologists.

    Contents:
    Biology of germ cell tumors
    Epidemiology of germ cell tumors
    Pathology of germ cell tumors
    Clinical treatment of extracranial pediatric germ cell tumors
    Management of disseminated germ cell tumor in adults
    Clinical treatment of adult women with ovarian germ cell tumors
    Ovarian and testicular sex cord-stromal tumors
    Late effects in testicular cancer survivors.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ahmed H. Al-Salem.
    Summary: This richly-illustrated book is a reader-friendly reference guide on pediatric gynecology covering both congenital and acquired conditions. Discussing a broad range of conditions from ovarian cysts and endometriosis to disorders of sexual development and breast disorders, this book presents the topics in a concise manner using a practical approach. Each chapter is divided into sections that cover all aspects of the topic including radiology, surgery and clinical aspects and the text is accompanied by ample images.The book will be of use to general surgeons, pediatricians, pediatric surgeons, pediatric endocrinologists, pediatric urologists, obstetricians and gynaecologists.

    Contents:
    1. Development of the female reproductive system
    2. Delayed Puberty in Girls
    3. Precocious puberty
    4. Breast disorders in female children and adolescents
    5. Fused Labia (Labial Adhesions)
    6. Imperforate Hymen
    7. Labial and inter-labial masses
    8. Pediatric Vulvovaginal Disorders and Vulvovaginitis
    9. Inguinal and femoral hernias in girls
    10. Persistent Mullerian duct syndrome
    11. Vaginal atresia, agenesis and vaginal septum
    12. Cloacal anomalies
    13. Menstruation disorders in adolescents
    14. Polycystic ovarian syndrome
    15. Endometriosis in adolescence girls
    16. Amenorrhea in adolescents
    17. Ovarian Cysts and Tumors
    18. Rhabdomyosarcoma of female children genital tract
    19. Disorders of sexual development
    20. Congenital adrenal hyperplasia (CAH)
    21. Androgen insensitivity syndrome (Testicular feminization syndrome)
    22. Deficient testosterone biosynthesis
    23. Gonadal dysgenesis
    24. Ovotestis disorders of sexual development.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Joshua M. Abzug, Scott H. Kozin and Rebecca Neiduski.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Paolo Campisi, Vito Forte, Bo-Yee Ngan, Glenn Taylor, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on Pediatric Head and Neck Surgical Diseases and Pediatric Surgical Pathology. The core objective is to provide the reader the essential background of various head and neck diseases that are common and/or unique to children by highlighting the key diagnostic, clinical, and pathologic features. It encompasses a comprehensive spectrum of pediatric head and neck diseases that are congenital or acquired. Many chapters describe the clinical and radiologic presentation, age-specific differential diagnosis, and diagnostic histopathologic features. The clinical and pathologic aspects of diseases that are unique to children and young adults that are amenable to surgical care are specifically emphasized. Pediatric Head and Neck Textbook: Pathology, Surgery and Imaging is aimed at trainees and specialists in Pediatrics, Otolaryngology Head & Neck Surgery, General and Pediatric Surgery, Pediatric Radiology and Pediatric Pathology.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Introduction to Pediatric Head and Neck Surgical Pathology
    Surgical pathology.-Radiological investigations
    Surgical consultation
    Section 2: Clinical Aspects of Head and Neck Diseases in infants, children and young adolescents
    Ear and temporal bone: Clinical features and surgical management
    Ear and temporal bone: Pathology and diagnostic features
    Nasal cavity and paranasal sinus: Clinical features and surgical management
    Nasal cavity and paranasal sinus: Pathology and diagnostic features
    Nasal pharynx and hypopharynx: Clinical features and surgical management
    Nasal pharynx and hypopharynx: Pathology and diagnostic features
    Larynx and trachea: Clinical features and surgical management
    Larynx and trachea: Pathology and diagnostic features
    Oral cavity, maxilla and mandible: Clinical features and surgical management
    Oral Cavity, Maxilla and mandible Pathology and diagnostic features
    Salivary glands: Clinical features and surgical management
    Salivary glands: Pathology and diagnostic features
    Thyroid and parathyroid: Clinical features and surgical management
    Thyroid and parathyroid: Pathology and diagnostic features
    Paraganglionic system: Clinical features and surgical management
    Paraganglionic system: Pathology and diagnostic features
    Lymphoid system: Clinical features and surgical management
    Lymphoid system: Pathology and diagnostic features
    Surgical skin diseases of the head and neck: Clinical features and management
    Clinical Dermatology of the head and neck
    Dermatopathology of the Head and Neck: Pathology and Diagnostic features
    Disease of the nasal and tracheal cilia: Clinical aspects
    Diagnostic pathology of disorders of nasal and tracheal cilia
    Pathology of Paediatric Sarcoma of the Head and Neck
    Pathology of Paediatric head and neck neoplasm unique to specific geographic regions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Reza Rahbar, Carlos Rodriguez-Galindo, John G. Meara, Edward R. Smith, Antonio R. Perez-Atayde, editors.
    Summary: The pediatric head and neck cancer patient necessitates a multidisciplinary team of specialists to provide an optimal continuum of care. This A-Z guide provides practical, in-depth information for all medical professionals involved in the evaluation and treatment of these patients. Written in an easy to follow format, each entry contains illustrative figures to aid in pathological and radiographical diagnosis, as well as structured discussion of evaluation and multimodality management. The alphabetical layout eliminates redundancy and allows the busy physician to quickly locate relevant information. Pediatric Head and Neck Tumors is ideal for young physicians as well as attending physicians seeking to expand their knowledgebase to the various subspecialties involved in the multidisciplinary care of their patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Jack Gladstein, Christina L. Szperka and Amy A. Gelfand.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Christopher B. Oakley, editor.
    Summary: Pediatric headache is the most common neurological complaint that presents to the general pediatrician, urgent care and emergency rooms, and to pediatric neurology. Despite how common headaches are in the pediatric population and how many children continue to suffer from their headaches on a daily basis, there remains a tremendous disconnect for those tasked with being the first-line providers (general pediatric providers). This stems from the fact that headache patients can be so variable and challenging, with numerous comorbid concerns, all the while requiring an individualized treatment approach without a cure. The purpose of this proposed book is to help foster a better understanding of how to approach, assess, and ultimately treat pediatric headache for the general pediatric provider in an attempt to make what once was a daunting, overwhelming complaint from patients and their families into something each general pediatric provider can conquer with confidence. With the aid of experts in the field of pediatric headache, this book will begin by providing the foundation as to what types of headaches, primary and secondary as well as their precursors, are commonly seen in the pediatric population. From there, the focus will turn to when should the provider worry about a patient who presents with headaches. The clinic visit -- from the history to the pertinent exam -- will be reviewed in depth to help distinguish between primary and secondary headaches as well as who warrants an evaluation. Additionally, comorbid concerns will be covered as these may have direct impact on the evaluation and subsequent treatments offered. The next section will delve into the treatment of pediatric headache with a comprehensive approach covering everything from lifestyle to complementary and alternative therapies/treatments, to medications, both acute and prophylactic. Other more specialized treatment options such as procedures and devices will also be discussed albeit these options are more likely to be offered by a specialist rather than a general provider. A subsequent section will highlight the unique challenges for the older adolescent patients as they transition into young adulthood. The closing section will highlight the future of pediatric headache.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Introductory Overview
    Chapter 01: Historical Overview of Pediatric Headache
    Chapter 02 MIGRAINES IN CHILDREN
    Chapter 03: Migraine Precursors in the Pediatric Population
    Chapter 04: Other Primary Headaches Commonly Seen in Pediatrics (tension-type, cluster, TACs)
    Chapter 05
    Chronic Daily Headaches in Pediatrics
    Section 2: When To Worry and How to Evaluate the Pediatric Headache Patient
    Chapter 06: The Clinic Visit: From History and Exam to When and How to Evaluate a Pediatric Headache Patient
    Section 3: Comorbid Concerns in the Pediatric Headache Patients
    Chapter 07: Neurologic and Psychiatric Comorbidities in Pediatric Headache Patients
    Chapter 08: Dysautonomia and Atopy in Pediatric Headache Patients
    Section 4: Treatment of Pediatric Headache A Multi-Tiered Approach
    Chapter 09: Lifestyle Modifications and Complimentary/Alternative Therapies
    Chapter 10
    Prophylactic and Acute Pharmacology for Pediatric Headache
    Section 5: Conclusions
    Chapter 11: Transitioning from Pediatric to Adulthood with Regard to Headaches and Their Subsequent Care
    Chapter 12: Future of Pediatric Headache Where Do We Go From Here?
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Michael Weiner, Darrell J. Yamashiro, Prakash Satwani, Monica Bhatia, Cindy Neunert.
    Summary: Pediatric Hematology & Oncology Secrets, 2nd Edition, offers practical, up-to-date coverage of the full range of essential topics in this dynamic field. This highly regarded resource features the Secrets’ popular question-and-answer format that also includes lists, tables, pearls, memory aids, and an easy-to-read style – making inquiry, reference, and review quick, easy, and enjoyable.

    Contents:
    Coagulation overview
    Developmental erythropoiesis
    Sickle cell syndromes
    Intrinsic and extrinsic red blood cell defects
    Thalassemias
    Nutritional anemia
    Granulocytes
    Disorders of platelets
    Bone marrow failure syndromes
    Hematological manifestations of systemic disease
    Epidemiology
    Principles of chemotherapy
    Principles of immunotherapy
    Precision medicine and systems biology
    Predisposition syndromes
    Health equity and disparities in pediatric and adolescent/young adult oncology
    Clinical emergencies in children with cancer
    Transfusion medicine
    Pediatric radiation oncology
    Principles of infectious disease and management of febrile neutropenia
    Neoplastic hematopathology
    Pediatric solid tumors pathology
    Molecular pathology
    Survivorship and late effects
    Integrative therapies
    Palliative Care
    An overview of the Emotional and educational needs of children with hematological and oncological conditions
    Global health issues in pediatric oncology
    Principles of pediatric surgical oncology
    Acute lymphoblastic leukemia
    Acute myeloid leukemia
    Chronic myeloid leukemia/other leukemia
    Soft tissue sarcomas
    Bone tumors
    Neuroblastoma
    Hepatic tumors
    Kidney tumors in children and adolescents
    Hodgkin lymphoma in children and adolescents
    Non-hodgkin lymphoma in children and adolescents
    Neuro-Oncology
    Post-Transplant lymphoproliferative disorder (PTLD)
    Retinoblastoma
    Langerhans Cell Histiocytosis (LCH)
    Hemophagocytic lymphohistiocytosis
    Principles and practice of pediatric hematopoietic cell transplantation
    Autologous hematopoietic stem cell transplantation for children and young adults
    Car-T cells: expanding the universe of immunotherapy in children with malignant diseases
    Gene therapy for hemoglobinopathies and other diseases
    Hematopoietic cell transplantation for malignant disorders
    Stem cell transplantation for children with nonmalignant disorders
    Complications associated with allogeneic hematopoietic cell transplantation in children.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Daniela Cristina Stefan, Carlos Rodriguez-Galindo, editors.
    Summary: Typically, manuals of pediatric hematology-oncology are written by specialists from high-income countries, and usually target an audience with a sub-specialist level of training, often assisted by cutting-edge diagnostic and treatment facilities. However, approximately 80% of new cases of cancer in children appear in mid- and low-income countries. Almost invariably, general practitioners or general pediatricians without special training in oncology will look after children with malignancies who enter the health care system in these countries. The diagnostic facilities are usually limited, as are the treatment options. The survival figures in these conditions are somewhere below 20%, while in high-income countries they are in the range of 80% for many childhood cancers. Pediatric Hematology-Oncology in Countries with Limited Resources is the only book of its kind to provide specific guidance applicable to limited resource settings and builds up from the foundation of general practitioner or general pediatrician competence. Written and edited by leaders in the field, this manual educates physicians on the essential components of the discipline, filtered through the experience of specialists from developing countries, with immediate applicability in the specific healthcare environment in these countries.

    Contents:
    Childhood Cancer in Low-Income and Middle-Income Countries in the Twenty-First Century
    Cancer Registries and the Descriptive Epidemiology of Pediatric Cancer in Low
    and Middle-Income Countries
    The Role of International Organizations on Collaborationfor Global Pediatric Cancer Control
    The Role of Twinning Programs and Telemedicine in Pediatric Oncology
    Pediatric Cancer Units and Optimization of Resources
    Early Warning Signs of Cancer in Children/Models for Early Diagnosis
    Care and Prevention of Infection
    Nutritional Assessment and Intervention
    Oncologic Emergencies
    Essential Medicines and Pharmacy Services
    Palliative and Supportive Care
    Psycho-Social Aspects/Parent Support Groups
    Nursing Care of Children with Cancer
    Paediatric Radiotherapy
    Procedures in Pediatric Oncology: Practical Guidelines
    Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia
    Acute Myeloid Leukemia
    Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Retinoblastoma
    Soft Tissue Sarcomas
    Bone Tumors
    Neuroblastoma
    Nephroblastoma
    Paediatric Neuro-Oncology
    HIV and Malignancy in Children
    Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplant.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Carolina Witchmichen Penteado Schmidt.
    Summary: This unique book is the first on pediatric hematopoietic stem cell transplantation that is especially intended for pharmacists - in recognition of the fact that Pediatric Oncology Pharmacy is an area where more and more specific knowledge is required in daily practice, yet pharmacists who work in pediatric stem cell transplantation do not have a book addressing their specific needs. This pioneering book will likely become the new gold standard for practice, addressing subjects such as stem cells and their differentiation mechanisms; aspects of embryonic and non-embryonic stem cells; stem cell transplantation in pediatrics; stem cell sources and related technical choices; stem cell donors; scheduling transplantations; diseases and chemotherapy protocols that require stem cell transplantation; stem cell homing; engraftment and repopulation of stem cells in bone marrow; autologous stem cell transplantation in pediatrics; allogeneic stem cell transplantation in pediatrics; and indications for autologous and allogeneic pediatric stem cell transplantation. Further, it discusses pediatric graft-versus-host disease and the pharmacist; antibacterial and antifungal prophylaxis; detailed chemotherapy, conditioning and trials for pediatric stem cell transplantation; conditioning granulocyte colony-stimulating factor (G-CSF) in pediatric stem cell transplantation; analyzing prescriptions and programming a pediatric stem cell transplantation; handling chemotherapy and adjuvant drugs for pediatric stem cell transplantation; stem cell transplantation in children up to 1 year old; and clinical pharmacy in pediatric stem cell transplantation. An easy-to-read yet comprehensive guide covering a wide range of topics essential to daily practice, the book offers an invaluable asset for pediatric hemato/ oncology pharmacists, hematologist pharmacists, clinical pharmacists, pediatric pharmacists, pharmaceutical residents and researchers alike.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Author
    Chapter 1: The Pharmacist in Pediatric Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation
    Chapter 2: Stem Cells
    2.1 General Aspects of Stem Cells
    2.2 Types of Stem Cells
    2.3 Differentiation and Self-Renew
    2.3.1 Differentiation
    2.3.2 Progenitor Cells
    2.4 Embryonic and Non-embryonic Stem Cells
    2.4.1 Embryonic Stem Cells and the Possibility to Use Them in Pediatric Oncology/Hematology
    2.5 Basic Concepts on Researching and Handling with Stem Cells
    2.5.1 NOD/SCID Mice 3.2.2 Myeloablative, Non-myeloablative, and Reduced-Intensity Pediatric Regimens for Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation
    3.3 Autologous Stem Cell Transplantation in Pediatrics
    3.3.1 Acute Lymphoid Leukemia (ALL)
    3.3.2 Acute Myeloid Leukemia (AML)
    3.3.3 Chronic Myeloid Leukemia
    3.3.4 Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    3.3.5 Hodgkin Lymphoma
    3.3.6 Solid Tumors
    3.3.7 Wilms Tumor
    3.3.8 Osteosarcoma
    3.3.9 Germ Cell Tumors
    3.3.10 Rare Tumors
    3.4 Allogeneic Stem Cell Transplantation in Pediatrics
    3.4.1 Donors 3.4.2 Risks for the Recipient of Allogeneic Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation Regarding the Sources of Stem Cells
    3.4.3 Acute Lymphoid Leukemia (ALL)
    3.4.4 Biphenotypic Leukemia
    3.4.5 Acute Myeloid Leukemia (AML)
    3.4.6 Chronic Myeloid Leukemia
    3.4.7 Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    3.4.8 Hodgkin Lymphoma
    3.4.9 Juvenile Myelomonocytic Leukemia, Anemias, Myelodysplasia, Primary Immunodeficiency, and Inborn Error of Metabolism
    Chapter 4: Homing of Stem Cells to the Bone Marrow: Finding the Way Home
    4.1 Homing
    4.1.1 A Big Picture of Homing
    4.1.2 Homing First Step 4.1.3 Homing Second Step: Activation of Lymphocyte Function-Associated Antigen 1 (LFA-1), Very Late Antigen 4/5 (VLA-4/5), and CD44
    4.1.4 Homing Third Step: Cytoskeleton Rearrangement, Membrane Type 1 (MT1)-Matrix Metalloproteinase (MMP) Activation and Secretion of MMP2/9
    4.1.5 Homing Fourth Step: Rolling and Firm Adhesion of Progenitors to Endothelial Cells in Small Marrow Sinusoids Under Blood Flow
    4.1.6 Homing Fifth Step: Trans-Endothelial Migration Across the Physical Endothelium/Extracellular Matrix (ECM) Barrier 4.1.7 Homing Sixth Step: Stem Cells Finalize Their Homing by Selective Access and Anchorage to Their Specialized Niches in the Extravascular Space of the Endosteum Region and Periarterial Sites
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Lorenzo D'Antiga, editor.
    Summary: This book is the first to provide balanced examination of both pediatric liver disease and liver transplantation - two topics that are inherently related, given that most chronic liver disorders eventually require organ replacement. The different forms of liver disease encountered in the pediatric age group are first discussed in a series of disease-specific chapters that have a reader-friendly, uniform structure covering pathophysiology, diagnostic and treatment algorithms, clinical cases, and transition to adult care. Key topics in the field of liver transplantation are then addressed. Examples include indications and contraindications, surgical techniques and complications, immunosuppression, in pediatric liver transplantation, acute and chronic rejection and allograft dysfunction, and CMV and EBV infection in transplant recipients, long-term graft injury and tolerance. A section on pediatric hepatology across the world includes chapters presenting the features and management of pediatric liver disease in South-America, Africa and Asia. A closing section considers what the future holds for pediatric liver disease and its management, including novel genetic testing, cell therapy and gene therapy. Pediatric Hepatology and Liver Transplantation will be of value for a range of practitioners, from residents making their first approach to pediatric liver disease through to specialists working in transplantation centers.

    Contents:
    Part I: Paediatric hepatology: 1. Liver disease in paediatric medicine : an overview / Valeria Casotti and Lorenzo D'Antiga
    2. Basic principles of liver physiology / Valeria Casotti and Lorenzo D'Antiga
    3. The anatomy and histology of the liver and biliary tract / Maria Guido, Samantha Sarcognato, Diana Sacchi, and Kathrin Ludwig
    4. Laboratory evaluation of hepatobiliary disease / Henrik Arnell and Björn Fischler
    5. Diagnostic and interventional radiology / R. Agazzi, P. Tessitore, and S. Sironi
    6. Practical approach to the jaundiced infant / Ekkehard Sturm and Steffen Hartleif
    7. Biliary atresia and other congenital disorders of the extrahepatic biliary tree / Pietro Betalli and Mark Davenport
    8. Acute liver failure in children / Naresh Shanmugam and Anil Dhawan
    9. Chronic viral hepatitis / Giuseppe Indolfi and Lorenzo D'Antiga
    10. Autoimmune liver disease / Giorgina Mieli-Vergani and Diego Vergani
    11. Fibrocystic liver disease / Laura Cristoferi, Giovanni Morana, Mario Strazzabosco, and Luca Fabris
    12. Gallstone disease / Fabiola Di Dato, Giusy Ranucci, and Raffaele Iorio 13. Genetic cholestatic disorders / Emanuele Nicastro and Lorenzo D'Antiga
    14. Wilson's disease / Piotr Socha and Wojciech Janczyk
    15. Liver disease in cystic fibrosis / Dominique Debray
    16. Inherited metabolic disorders / Nedim Hadzic and Roshni Vara
    17. Nonalcoholic fatty liver disease and steatohepatitis in children / Antonella Mosca, Silvio Veraldi, Andrea Dellostrologo, Mariateresa Sanseviero, and Valerio Nobili
    18. Complications of liver cirrhosis / A. Holvast and H. J. Verkade
    19. Portal hypertension / Angelo Di Giorgio and Lorenzo D'Antiga
    20. Vascular liver disease / Simon C. Ling and Ines Loverdos
    21. Liver tumours and nodular lesions / Chayarani Kelgeri, Khalid Sharif, and Ulrich Baumann
    22. The liver in systemic illness / Melanie Schranz, Maria Grazia Lucà, Lorenzo D'Antiga, and Stefano Fagiuoli
    23. Nutrition and liver disease / Florence Lacaille
    24. Intensive care management of children with liver disease / Isabella Pellicioli, Angelo Di Giorgio, and Lorenzo D'Antiga. Part II: Paediatric liver transplantation: 25. Precision medicine in liver transplantation / Alastair Baker
    26. Liver allograft donor selection and allocation / James E. Squires and George V. Mazariegos
    27. Surgical techniques / Michele Colledan and Stefania Camagni
    28. Pediatric living donor liver transplantation / Mureo Kasahara, Seisuke Sakamoto, and Akinari Fukuda
    29. Listing for transplantation : postoperative management and long-term follow-up / Nathalie Marie Rock and Valérie Anne McLin
    30. Surgical complications following transplantation / Michele Colledan, Domenico Pinelli, and Laura Fontanella
    31. Immunosuppression in pediatric liver transplant / Patrick McKiernan and Ellen Mitchell
    32. Pathology of allograft liver dysfunction / Aurelio Sonzogni, Lisa Licini, and Lorenzo D'Antiga
    33. Chronic rejection and late allograft hepatitis / Deirdre Kelly
    34. Cytomegalovirus and Epstein-Barr virus infection and disease / Emanuele Nicastro and Lorenzo D'Antiga
    35. Liver transplantation for inherited metabolic disorders / Alberto Burlina and Lorenzo D'Antiga
    36. Immune tolerance after liver transplantation / Sandy Feng and Alberto Sanchez-Fueyo
    37. Long-term outcome and transition / Marianne Samyn
    38. Neurodevelopment and health related quality of life of the transplanted child / Vicky Lee Ng and Jessica Woolfson. Part III: Paediatric hepatology across the world: 39. Pediatric liver disease in Latin America / Daniel D'Agostino, Maria Camila Sanchez, and Gustavo Boldrini
    40. Pediatric liver disease in the African continent / Mortada H. F. El-Shabrawi and Naglaa M. Kamal
    41. Pediatric liver disease in the Asian continent / Anshu Srivastava and Rishi Bolia. Part IV: Future perspectives: 42. Next-generation sequencing in paediatric hepatology / Lorenzo D'Antiga
    43. Cell therapy in acute and chronic liver disease / Massimiliano Paganelli
    44. Gene therapy in pediatric liver disease / Andrès F. Muro, Lorenzo D'Antiga, and Federico Mingozzi.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Melissa G. Cossey, Lauren K. Gambill
    Summary: "This educational guide provides a much-needed subspeciality-specific learning resource for pediatric hospital medicine. Featuring 50 of the most commonly presenting topics encountered by pediatric hospitalists, this book brings readers into the morning meeting and walks them through patient presentation, diagnosis, treatment, and resolution, providing realistic examples in an engaging case-based format. This book is designed to supplement the educational experience of trainees during their inpatient pediatrics rotation, and its versatility allows it to be used as an educational guide to lead learning sessions or as an individual resource or study guide. Each chapter dives into an individual case that is titled with a fictitious patient name, often related to the case topic, which provides a helpful memory tool for learners. Each case includes a Documentation Tips section, designed to ensure accurate and clear communication across the interdisciplinary team that cares for hospitalized children, as well as Clinical Pearls summarizing the main chapter take-aways. Back to Basics boxes are included in cases as needed, to serve as a refresher of examination techniques, laboratory test result analysis, or other foundational information related to the cases. In addition, Health Equity Focus boxes related to social determinants of health are featured throughout the book to help clinicians recognize and address potential inequities in care"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Emma, a 16-month-old girl with vomiting and diarrhea
    Anita, a 4-month-old girl with respiratory distress
    Baby girl smith, a newborn with respiratory distress
    Parker, a 3-year-old boy with difficulty breathing
    John, a 4-day-old boy with hyperbilirubinemia
    Isaiah, an 8-year-old boy with shortness of breath
    Rose, a 3-week-old girl with fever
    Austin, an 8-month-old boy with fever and vomiting
    Holly, a 5-year-old girl with fever, vomiting, and thigh swelling
    Ilyas, a 6-year-old boy with acute abdominal pain
    Judah, a 2-year-old boy with buttock pain and redness
    Maryam, a 4-year-old girl with fever and cough
    Freddy, a 9-week-old boy with an episode of decreased responsiveness
    Brian, a 2-year-old boy with fussiness and fever
    Liam, a 6-week-old boy with poor weight gain
    Simon, a 15-month-old boy with abnormal movements and fever
    Polly, a 16-year-old girl with fever, abdominal pain, and vomiting
    Payton, a 14-year-old boy with throat pain and fever
    Ida, a 15-month-old girl with pallor and fatigue
    Jenny, a 14-year-old girl with a severe headache
    Katelyn, a 4-year-old girl with fever and neck swelling
    Taj, a 12-year-old boy with hyperglycemia
    Finn, a 2-year-old boy with fever and leg pain
    Aubree, a 15-year-old girl with recurrent abdominal pain
    Andy, a 9-year-old boy with respiratory distress and vomiting
    Janice, an 11-year-old girl with prolonged menses
    Amaia, a 16-year-old girl with hematemesis
    Chandler, a 7-year-old boy with eye swelling
    Philip, a 7-year-old boy with intermittent abdominal pain
    Alex, a 9-year-old boy with edema and hematuria
    Ella, an 8-year-old girl with 2 weeks of fever
    Maria, a 15-year-old girl with lower extremity weakness
    Juan, a 16-year-old with shoulder pain
    Bernard, a 15-year-old boy with abdominal pain and diarrhea
    Ricky, a 3-year-old boy with shaking
    Alberto, a 7-year-old boy with edema
    Reese, a 12-year-old girl with weight loss
    Lily, a 6-month-old girl with fever and lethargy
    Isla, a 15-month-old girl with fever and rash
    Rena, a 14-year-old girl with abdominal pain and vomiting
    Malik, a 2-year-old boy with pneumonia and persistent fever
    Flora, an 8-year-old girl with worsening epigastric pain and emesis
    Scott, a 3-year-old boy with bloody diarrhea and decreased urination
    Lucy, a 16-year-old girl with altered mental status
    Sam, a 10-month-old boy with hypoglycemia
    Makayla, a 16-year-old girl with fever and blurry vision
    Olive, a 4-month-old girl with lethargy and hyponatremia
    Aria, a 16-year-old girl with headache and confusion
    Tomás, a 17-month-old boy with worsening respiratory status
    Anna, an 11-year-old girl with medical complexity, fever, increased secretions, and increased seizure frequency.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Cinalli, M. Memet Özek, Christian Sainte-Rose, editors.
    Summary: Since the first edition of this book, the impressive development of neuroendoscopy has dramatically changed the surgical approach to hydrocephalus, the main pathology pediatric neurosurgeons worldwide have to deal with. This revised and updated second edition, written by worldwide leaders in the field, fully reflects this progress: not only existing chapters have been reviewed whenever required, but new ones have been added thus taking into consideration every aspect of hydrocephalus, even when associated with the rarest pathologies. The general part include now more data on history, biomechanics, circulation and molecular basis. Special consideration for fetal surgery has been added, whereas the section on neonatal hydrocephalus has been further developed. Section 4, on the different pathologies associated with hydrocephalus, has been significantly expanded. and is now amazingly detailed, as well as the section on shunt treatment. Infections are now dealt with in two different chapters, and special attention to shunt complications (the nightmare of every Pediatric Neurosurgeon.) is paid in five different chapters. A very complete overview of the endoscopic treatment, that will surely draw the reader's attention thanks to the wonderful full color images, is also included. Written by acknowledged experts in the field, this title is an indispensable tool for all those facing this pathology in their daily practice.

    Contents:
    From the contents: History of Hydrocephalus and of its treatment
    Experimental Hydrocephalus: Models and study Methods
    Genetics of hydrocephalus
    Development of the cerebrospinal fluid pathways during embryonic and fetal life in humans
    Anatomy and histology of cerebral and spinal meninges
    The choroid plexus
    CSF circulation
    CSF hydrodynamics
    Molecular basis of Hydrocephalus
    Biomechanics of Hydrocephalus
    Pathology of Hydrocephalus
    Radiology of Hydrocephalus
    Classification and definition of Hydrocephalus
    Clinic of Hydrocephalus.-Prenatal Hydrocephalus
    Post haemorrhagic hydrocephalus in prematures
    Post haemorrhagic hydrocephalus in prematures
    Post haemorrhagic hydrocephalus in prematures
    Hydrocephalus and Myelomeningocele
    Hydrocephalus associated with cerebral malformations
    Hydrocephalus in posterior fossa tumors
    Hydrocephalus in suprasellar and basal ganglia tumors
    Hydrocephalus in pineal and tectal tumors
    Hydrocephalus and colloid cysts
    Hydrocephalus and spinal tumors
    Post-infectious Hydrocephalus
    Hydrocephalus in developing countries
    Multiloculated Hydrocephalus
    Hydrocephalus and Parasitosis
    Hydrocephalus and Dandy-Walker malformation
    Hydrocephalus and aqueductal stenosis
    Extraventricular intracisternal obstructive hydrocephalus
    Hydrocephalus and arachnoid cysts
    Hydrocephalus in Achondroplasia and venous hypertension
    CSF Hydrodynamics in Craniosynostosis
    Hydrocephalus and Neurofibromatosis
    Hydrocephalus and malformations of Cranio cervical junction
    Hydrocephalus and vein of Galen Malformation
    Post-traumatic Hydrocephalus
    Post tubercular Hydrocephalus
    Fetal surgery
    ICP Monitoring: Indications, Techniques, interpretation
    CSF hydrodynamics applied to the CSF shunt design
    Shunt hardware
    CSF shunt insertion: Surgical techniques
    Mechanical complications in CSF shunts
    CSF shunt infection
    Abdominal complications in shunts
    Slit ventricle syndromes
    Endoscopic anatomy
    Third Ventriculostomy
    Third Ventriculostomy and Choroid Plexus Coagulation
    Aqueductoplasty and Aqueductal stenting
    Septostomy and complex procedures
    Third ventriculostomy in shunt malfunction
    Radiological assessment before and after endoscopic third ventriculostomy
    Complications of third ventriculostomy
    Obstruction of third ventriculostomy
    Outcome analysis
    ETV under 2 years in Triventricular hydrocephalus
    Long term evaluation and QOL assessment of hydrocephalus outcome
    Growth and puberty in Hydrocephalus
    Hydrocephalus and Epilepsy
    Rehabilitation for hydrocephalic children
    Transitional care in pediatric neurosurgical patients
    Benign pericerebral collections in infants
    Syringomyelia in pediatric age
    Benign intracranial Hypertension in children.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Joseph T. Flynn, Julie R. Ingelfinger, Karen M. Redwine, editors.
    Summary: The fourth edition of this book is the most comprehensive major reference work on hypertension in children and adolescents. Since the publication of the previous edition, there have been notable changes in the field, with the arrival of new evidence of the long-term sequelae of hypertension in youth, an evidence-based review of the value of routine BP screening in children and adolescents, and further evidence of the cardiovascular consequences of the childhood obesity epidemic. This expanded edition covers these new findings, while featuring new chapters on such timely topics as routine blood pressure screening, hypertension in late adolescents/young adults, and current pediatric hypertension research. The reference work also includes thorough updates on chapters from the previous edition, as well as new clinical practice guidelines for childhood hypertension, which have not been revised since 2004. Written by experts in the field, Pediatric Hypertension, Fourth Edition is the definitive resource for clinicians and researchers interested in childhood hypertension.

    Contents:
    Neurohumoral and Autonomic Regulation of Blood Pressure
    Vasoactive Factors and Blood Pressure in Children
    Cardiovascular Influences on Blood Pressure
    Ions and Fluid Dynamics in Hypertension
    Uric Acid in the Pathogenesis of Hypertension
    Insulin Resistance and Other Mechanisms of Obesity Hypertension
    Monogenic and Polygenic Contributions to Hypertension
    Perinatal Programming of Arterial Pressure
    Hereditability and Familial Aggregation of Blood Pressure
    The Role of Dietary Electrolytes and Childhood Blood Pressure Regulation
    Endothelial Dysfunction and Vascular Remodeling in Hypertension
    Stress and Salt Sensitivity in Childhood Hypertension
    Methodology of Casual Blood Pressure Measurement
    Value of Routine Screening for Hypertension in Childhood
    Development of Blood Pressure Norms and Definition of Hypertension in Children
    Ambulatory Blood Pressure Monitoring Methodology and Norms in Children
    Methodology and Applicability of Home Blood Pressure Monitoring in Children and Adolescents: Home Blood Pressure Monitoring
    Epidemiology of Primary Hypertension in Children
    Epidemiology of Cardiovascular Disease in Children
    Ethnic Differences in Childhood Blood Pressure
    Obesity Hypertension: Clinical Aspects
    Hypertension in Children with Type 2 Diabetes or the Metabolic Syndrome
    Primary Hypertension in Children
    Secondary Forms of Hypertension in Children: Overview
    Hypertension in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Hypertension in End-Stage Renal Disease: Dialysis
    Hypertension in End-Stage Renal Disease: Transplantation
    Renovascular Hypertension, Vasculitis, and Aortic Coarctation
    Endocrine Hypertension
    Neonatal and Infant Hypertension
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea and Hypertension
    Hypertension in the Pregnant Teenager
    Cognitive and Behavioral Aspects of Childhood Hypertension
    Substance-Induced Hypertension: Mechanisms and Management
    Hypertension in Oncology and Stem-Cell Transplant Patients
    Hypertension in Older Adolescents and Young Adults
    Hypertension in the Developing World
    Diagnostic Evaluation of Pediatric Hypertension
    Sequelae of Hypertension in Children and Adolescents
    Vascular and Cardiac Imaging Techniques and Their Applicability to Childhood Hypertension
    The Role of ABPM in Evaluation of Hypertensive Target-Organ Damage
    Exercise Testing in Hypertension and Hypertension in Athletes
    Nonpharmacologic Treatment of Pediatric Hypertension
    Pharmacologic Treatment of Pediatric Hypertension
    Management of Hypertensive Emergencies
    Hypertensive Models and Their Relevance to Pediatric Hypertension
    Cohort Studies, Meta-analyses, and Clinical Trials in Childhood Hypertension
    Changes in Drug Development Regulations and Their Impact on Clinical Trials.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Brady, Tammy M.; Flynn, Joseph T.; Ingelfinger, Julie R.
    Summary: For the past 17 years, Pediatric Hypertension has served as the definitive reference text on hypertension in children and adolescents. Each edition has incorporated the latest research on the pathophysiology, clinical significance and management of hypertension in the young, and has incorporated the most current consensus guidelines on diagnosis and management. The years since publication of the fourth edition have seen further advances in the field that merit publication of an updated, expanded text, including: Analysis of the implications of updated hypertension guidelines on identification of youth at highest cardiovascular risk Additional data on the proximate effects of high blood pressure in children in adolescents Further understanding of the links between high blood pressure in youth and surrogate markers of adult cardiovascular disease The fifth edition is a readable, informative text that provides a comprehensive guide to the diagnosis, management and therapy of hypertension in children and adolescents, and presents new data that very clearly indicate that the origins of adult cardiovascular disease are rooted in pediatric hypertension. It will, as a result, be very important for therapeutic decisions and will also be highly relevant for those in internal medicine, who care for the millions of adults who have hypertension, cardiovascular disease and kidney disease. In this sense, the book fulfills the longstanding goal of showing that hypertension that begins in childhood is important to track, diagnose and treat, and that the present understanding of adult hypertension necessitates the study of blood pressure in youth. The fifth edition has a similar structural format to the prior editions and covers all aspects of pediatric hypertension, from basic science research to the most recent clinical information.

    Contents:
    Neurohumoral and Autonomic Regulation of Blood Pressure
    Vasoactive Factors and Blood Pressure in Children
    Cardiovascular Influences on Blood Pressure
    Ions and Fluid Dynamics in Hypertension
    Uric Acid in the Pathogenesis of Hypertension
    Insulin Resistance and Other Mechanisms of Obesity Hypertension
    Monogenic and Polygenic Contributions to Hypertension
    Perinatal Programming and Blood Pressure
    Heritability and Familial Aggregation of Blood Pressure
    The Role of Dietary Electrolytes and Childhood Blood Pressure Regulation
    Endothelial Dysfunction and Vascular Remodeling in Hypertension
    Early life stress and blood pressure
    Salt Sensitivity in Childhood Hypertension
    Early vascular aging in childhood hypertension
    Methodology of Casual Blood Pressure Measurement
    Value of Routine Screening for Hypertension in Childhood
    Development of Blood Pressure Norms and Definition of Hypertension in Children
    Ambulatory Blood Pressure Monitoring Methodology and Norms in Children
    Methodology and Applicability of Home Blood Pressure Monitoring in Children and Adolescents
    Epidemiology of Hypertension and CVD in Children
    Ethnic Differences in Childhood Blood Pressure
    Obesity Hypertension: Clinical Aspects
    Hypertension in Children with Type 2 Diabetes or the Metabolic Syndrome
    Primary Hypertension in Children
    White Coat Hypertension
    Hypertension in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Hypertension in End-Stage Renal Disease: Dialysis
    Hypertension in End-Stage Renal Disease: Transplantation
    Renovascular Hypertension, Vasculitis and Aortic Coarctation
    Endocrine Hypertension
    Neonatal and Infant Hypertension
    Sleep Apnea and Hypertension
    Hypertension in the Pregnant Teenager
    Cognitive and Behavioral Aspects of Childhood Hypertension
    Stroke and Childhood hypertension
    Substance-Induced Hypertension: Mechanisms and Management
    Hypertension in Oncology and Stem-cell Transplant Patients
    Hypertension in Older Adolescents and Young Adults
    Hypertension in the Developing World
    Diagnostic Evaluation of Pediatric Hypertension
    Sequelae of Hypertension in Children and Adolescents
    Cardiovascular Assessment of Childhood Hypertension
    The Role of ABPM in Evaluation of Hypertensive Target-Organ Damage
    Exercise Testing in Hypertension and Hypertension in Athletes
    Nonpharmacologic Treatment of Pediatric Hypertension
    Pharmacologic Treatment of Pediatric Hypertension
    Management of Hypertensive Emergencies
    Hypertension Care during Emergencies and Pandemics
    Hypertensive Models and Their Relevance to Pediatric Hypertension
    Cohort Studies, Meta-analyses, and Clinical Trials in Childhood Hypertension
    Changes in Drug Development Regulations and Their Impact on Clinical Trials.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    American Academy of Pediatrics.
    Summary: "For the pediatric provider, coder, and biller, here's the most helpful and easy-to-use manual on ICD-10-CM yet. Featuring a laser-sharp pediatrics focus, it provides codes and guidelines in a simplified, yet familiar format. This purpose-built tool streamlines the coding process by condensing the vast ICD-10-CM code set to only pediatric-centered guidelines and codes. This yields a 50% reduction of codes to search for faster, efficient coding. The guidelines are included directly at the chapter and code level, helping ensure that coders will always use the right codes in the right situations. Tabular, indexed navigation helps you find needed items fast"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
  • Digital
    editors, Steven L. Blumer, David M. Biko, Safwan Halabi.
    Contents:
    1. Pediatric gastrointestinal tract
    2. Pediatric genitourinary tract
    3. Pediatric musculoskeletal system
    4. Pediatric chest radiology
    5. Pediatric neuroradiology
    6. Pediatric vascular radiology
    7. Pediatric cardiac radiology
    8. Pediatric multisystem radiology.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Michael Riccabona, Professor, Department of Radiology, Division of Pediatric Radiology, Graz University Hospital, Graz, Austria ; with contributions by Ingmar Gassner, Gabriele Hahn, Wolfgang Hirsch, Marcus Hoermann, Thekla von Kalle, Kathrin Maurer, Heimo Nemer, Gerald Paertan, Brigitte Povysil, Ianina Scheer, Jens-Peter Schenk, Gisela Schweigmann, Maria Sinzig, Erich Sorantin, Gundula Staatz, Peter Waibel, Doris Zebedin.
    Summary: "For all radiologists diagnosing infants and children, knowledge of best practices in pediatric imaging is essential to successful, high-quality results. This informative, reader-friendly text covers current guidelines and key topics in the field, including choice of modality, equipment and dosages, child-specific diseases, and safety factors. It is invaluable for all specialists who diagnose and manage this sensitive, highly targeted population. Special Features: Explores the use of all standard imaging modalities in children vs. adults, especially in regard to ultrasound, CT, and MRI, Supplies more than 600 clear, clinically relevant images to help in visualizing every concept, including imaging of suspected child abuse. Shows how to adapt examination protocols and equipment requirements for the specialized needs of pediatric patients. Describes important safety protection measures in children utilizing the ALARA principle of radiation exposure (As Low As Reasonably Achievable). Summarizes a wide array of pediatric diseases and disorders in a quick, checklist format, including clinical features, imaging findings, differential diagnosis, associated syndromes, and treatment recommendations for each. Includes lists of indications, summary tables, flowcharts of imaging protocols, case studies, and quiz questions to test your knowledge. Discussing differences in body proportions, heart and respiratory rates, skeletal structure, and more, this book provides a fundamental understanding of imaging in infants and children as compared to adults. It is an ideal practice-oriented reference for residents, fellows in pediatric radiology, general radiologists, and students preparing for the pediatric sections of the national and international specialty examinations in radiology"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Special imaging issues in children
    Imaging of the pediatric chest
    Imaging of the pediatric gastrointestinal tract
    Imaging of the pediatric central nervous system and spine
    Pediatric uroradiology
    Imaging of pediatric trauma
    The pediatric musculoskeletal system
    Pediatric oncoradiology
    Syndromes, metabolic diseases, and other special issues in children.
  • Digital
    Robert Vezzetti, Jestin Carlson, Debra Pennington.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Nima Rezaei, editor.
    Summary: This book comprises a collection of categorized case-based questions, directed and meticulously selected to cover the most common and most important aspects of immunodeficiency diseases. Immunodeficiency disorders of infancy and childhood such as antibody deficiencies, phagocyte defects and defects in innate immunity are addressed among others. Each chapters starts with a brief of the initial presentation and lab data of the patient, followed by a series of 5-6 multiple choice questions (MCQs), leading the reader to the diagnosis and best of practice in a step-wise manner. This MCQ format along with precise, yet detailed answer ensures a quick, case-based, reality learning to the reader. This comprehensive MCQ series, is an essential reading material that a pediatric clinician, hematologist, immunologist, transplant specialist, or pulmonologist, can not afford to miss.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgments; Abbreviations; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Primary Immunodeficiencies; References;
    Chapter 2: Workup of Recurrent Respiratory Infections and a Positive Family History; References;
    Chapter 3: Pseudomonas Meningitis; References;
    Chapter 4: Fever and Sleepiness; References;
    Chapter 5: Recurrent Pneumonia; References;
    Chapter 6: Developmental Regression; References;
    Chapter 7: Recurrent Ear Infections and Pneumonia; References;
    Chapter 8: Positive Urine Culture for Klebsiella pneumoniae; References
    Chapter 9: Brothers with Recurrent Sinopulmonary Infections and Chronic Lung DiseaseReferences;
    Chapter 10: Recurrent Infections and Arthritis; References;
    Chapter 11: Initial Diagnosis of Neutropenia and Later Crohn's Disease; References;
    Chapter 12: Diagnosis of "Sweat-Chloride Negative" Cystic Fibrosis; References;
    Chapter 13: Diagnosis of Sarcoidosis; References;
    Chapter 14: Refractory Crohn's disease; References;
    Chapter 15: Asthma Which Was Not Asthma; References;
    Chapter 16: Generalized Lymphadenopathy and Hypogammaglobulinemia After Abdominal Trauma; References
    Chapter 17: Weakness and AnemiaReferences;
    Chapter 18: Normal Primary Care Workup for Recurrent Sinopulmonary Infections; References;
    Chapter 19: Recurrent Sinusitis and Persistent Giardia Infection; References;
    Chapter 20: Recurrent Respiratory Infections; References;
    Chapter 21: Siblings Presenting with Mild and Severe Lymphoproliferation; References;
    Chapter 22: Non-Malignant Lymphoproliferation; References;
    Chapter 23: Portal Hypertension and Progressive Lymphoproliferation; References;
    Chapter 24: Recurrent Otitis and Upper Airway Obstruction; References;
    Chapter 25: Recurrent Pneumonia
    Chapter 35: Autoimmune CytopeniaReferences;
    Chapter 36: Recurrent Respiratory Tract Infections; References;
    Chapter 37: Protracted Diarrhea and Hypogammaglobulinemia; References;
    Chapter 38: Gingivitis and Recurrent Tonsillitis; References;
    Chapter 39: Respiratory Distress; References;
    Chapter 40: Intestinal Cryptosporidiosis; References;
    Chapter 41: Shortness of Breath; References;
    Chapter 42: Pneumocystis jiroveci Pneumonia Without Failure to Thrive; References;
    Chapter 43: Recurrent Infections and CNS Vasculitis; References;
    Chapter 44: Recurrent Infections and Widespread Warts; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Christine M. Houser.
    Summary: Often, information in review books can raise as many questions as it answers. This interferes with the study process, because the learner must either look up additional information or skip ahead without truly comprehending what he or she has read. As an alternative, Pediatric Infectious Disease: A Practically Painless Review presents bite-size chunks of information that can be read and processed rapidly, helping learners to stay active while studying and to pick up new information the first time they read it. This book's question and answer format allows for self-testing or study with a partner or a group. The format also facilitates dipping into the book during a few minutes of downtime at the hospital or office. Pediatric Infectious Disease: A Practically Painless Review is a quick and easy way to master tricky infectious disease topics and is suitable for those studying for the pediatric board exam, practicing physicians brushing up their skills, and any busy clinician who wants to learn more about this topic while on the go.

    Contents:
    Infectious Disease Prevention Question and Answer Items
    Selected Infectious Disease Topics
    General Infectious Disease Question and Answer Items.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    editor, Samir S. Shah ; associate editors, Alex R. Kemper, Adam J. Ratner.
    Summary: "The most practice-oriented guide to diagnosing and managing infectious diseases in children"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2018
  • Digital
    Petar Mamula, Andrew B. Grossman, Robert N. Baldassano, Judith R. Kelsen, Jonathan E. Markowitz, editors.
    Summary: The latest edition of this essential text provides a comprehensive overview of the unique pediatric issues of inflammatory bowel disease. Through new and thoroughly revised chapters, the volume features updates regarding pathogenesis, clinic features, and management, with an emphasis on recent understanding of pharmacokinetics and the utilization of cutting edge therapeutic monitoring to maximize efficacy of medical management. The new edition also highlights newer, recently approved drugs, emerging therapies, and the most recent recommendations regarding post-operative management for patients who ultimately require surgery. Written by experts in the field, Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease, Third Edition is a valuable resource for both pediatric and adult gastroenterologists involved in the care of children with inflammatory bowel disease.

    Contents:
    Genetics of Inflammatory Bowel Diseases
    The Intestinal Immune System During Homeostasis and Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Cytokines and Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    The Gut Microbiota and Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Immune Dysregulation Associated with Very Early-Onset Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Epidemiology of Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    The Natural History of Crohn Disease in Children
    Natural History of Ulcerative Colitis in Children
    Natural History of Pediatric Indeterminate Colitis
    Extraintestinal Manifestations of Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Liver Disease in Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Growth Impairment in Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Inflammatory Bowel Diseases and Skeletal Health
    Puberty and Pediatric-Onset Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Classification of Inflammatory Bowel Disease in Children
    The History and Physical Exam
    Differential Diagnosis of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Laboratory Evaulation of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Fecal Biomarkers in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Radiologic Evaulation of Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Endoscopy and Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    The Pathology of Chronic Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Video Capsule Endoscopy in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Bone Health in Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    5-Aminosalicylate Therapy
    Antibiotic Therapy
    Nutritional Management of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Probiotic Therapy
    Corticosteroids
    6-Mercaptopurpine Therapy
    Methotrexate
    Infliximab Therapy for Pediatric Crohn Disease and Ulcerative Colitis
    Anti-TNF Biologic Therapies Other Than Infliximab
    Therapeutic Drug Monitoring in Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    New Non-anti-TNF Therapies for the Treatment of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Medical Treatment of Perianal Crohn's Disease Fistulae
    Treatment of Acute Severe Ulcerative Colitis
    Dietary Therapies for Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Complementary and Alternative Therapies
    Management of Intraabdominal Complications of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Surgical Management of Crohn Disease in Children
    Surgical Treatment of Ulcerative Colitis
    Postoperative Surveillance and Management of Crohn's Disease
    Pouchitis After Ileal Pouch-Anal Anastomosis
    Enteral Feeding Devices and Ostomies
    Clinical Indices for Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease Research
    Clinical Trials (Clinical Perspective)
    Clinical Trials (Industry/Regulatory Perspective)
    Infectious Complications of Pediatric Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Psychological Aspects of Inflammatory Bowel Disease in Children and Adolescents
    Measurement of Quality of Life in Pediatric Inflammatory BOwel Disease
    Irritable Bowel Syndrome and Functional GI Disorders in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease in Pregnancy
    Immunizations in the Child with Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Malignant Tumors Arising in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Quality Improvement in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Fostering Self-Management and Patient Activation
    Advocacy for Pediatric Patients with Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Legislative Advocacy
    Transition from Pediatric to Adult Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Stephanie J. Phelps, Tracy M. Hagemann, Kelley R. Lee, A. Jill Thompson.
    Summary: "Pediatric Injectable Drugs, also known as "The Teddy Bear Book," is one of the ASHP's most recognized and trusted resources dedicated to helping pharmacists treat pediatric patients with injectable drugs. For more than 20 years, pharmacists and hospital pediatric teams have looked to Pediatric Injectable Drugs (The Teddy Bear Book) for the most comprehensive research-based information on pediatric intravenous infusions. Now for the first time since 2013, a new edition of this trusted resource is available! The "Teddy Bear Book", is the only reference of its kind that focuses on the unique issues that pediatric practitioners face when dealing with pediatric injectable drugs, such as limited fluid amounts, limited intravenous sites, and maximum doses. The updated edition of this comprehensive resource by respected editors Stephanie J. Phelps, PharmD, BCPS, Kelley R. Lee, PharmD, Amanda Jill Thompson, PharmD, and Tracy M. Hagemann, PharmD, FCCP, includes 15 new monographs and updates based on the latest evidence-backed literature"--Publisher's description
    Digital Access STAT!Ref 2018
    Limited to 2 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    edited by R. Scott Watson, Ann E. Thompson.
    Contents:
    Resuscitation and stabilization / Vinay Nadkarni, Robert M. Sutton, Robert A. Berg
    Extracorporeal life support / Heidi J. Dalton, Mark Davidson, and Peter P. Roeleveld
    Transport of the critically ill child / Kathryn Felmet and Richard Orr
    Procedures / S. Pascala, E. Ocal, Stephen M. Schexnayder
    Basic pediatric hemodynamic monitoring / Bradley P. Fuhrman and Jorge G. Sainz
    Respiratory / Jan Hau Lee and Ira M. Cheifetz
    Cardiac disease in pediatric intensive care / Vamsi V. Yarlagadda and Ravi R.Thiagarajan
    Pediatric shock : recognition and management / Diana Pang and Joseph A. Carcillo
    Neurocritical care / Steven L. Shein and Robert S. B. Clark
    Sedation and analgesia / Lynn D. Martin and Iskra I. Ivanova
    Fluids and electrolytes / Desmond Bohn
    Diagnosis and management of renal disorders in the pediatric intensive care unit / Dana Y. Fuhrman and Michael L. Moritz
    Hematology/onc / Phillip Spinella and Jeffrey Bednarski
    Gastrointestinal and nutrition / Renán A. Orellana and Jorge A. Coss Bu
    Infections in the intensive care unit / Samina Afreen, Hector R. Wong, and Marian G. Michaels
    Endocrine disorders in pediatric critical care / Carmen Soto-Rivera, Michael Agus
    Toxicological emergencies / Sandra D.W. Buttram and Anne-Michelle Ruha
    Pharmacology / Athena Zuppa
    Trauma and burns / Joanna C. Lim, Catherine Goodhue, Elizabeth Cleek, Erik R. Barthel, Barbara Gaines, and Jeffrey S. Upperman
    Supportive and end-of-life care in the pediatric intensive care unit / Kelly N. Michelson and Joel E. Frader.
    Digital Access Oxford [2017]
  • Digital
    Michael Temple, Francis E. Marshalleck, editor.
    Summary: The introductory section of the book will highlight the unique elements of pediatric practice that are necessary to provide safe patient care. The remainder of the book will discuss all major vascular and non-vascular PIR procedures. The organization will be procedure specific with secondary area classification.The procedural chapters will be organized using a standard format to make it easier for readers to find information. The chapters will contain introductory descriptions of disease processes, indications for intervention, technical information about the procedures and post procedure care.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Patricia Jones, Dennis J. Dietzen, Shannon Haymond, Michael J. Bennett.
    Contents:
    Daily issues in the practice of pediatric laboratory medicine
    Common tests and considerations important in pediatric medicine
    Inborn errors of metabolism
    Diagnostic approach to the patient with a suspected inborn error of metabolism
    Newborn screening
    Cystic fibrosis and sweat testing
    Pediatric reference intervals
    Maternal-fetal testing
    Pediatric toxicology and therapeutic drug monitoring
    Lipids and lipoproteins
    Point of care testing in the pediatric setting
    Pediatric laboratory testing for specific endocrine conditions
    Molecular diagnostic testing
    Pediatric microbiology
    Pediatric hematology and hemoglobinapathies
    Pediatric coagulation
    Pediatric transfusion medicine.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2017
  • Digital
    Yizhi Liu, editor.
    Contents:
    Embryonic Development of the Human Lens
    Human Visual Development
    Anatomy and Physiology of the Crystalline Lens
    Etiology of Pediatric Lens Diseases
    Epidemiology of Pediatric Cataracts
    Classification and Morphology of Pediatric Cataracts
    Overview of Pediatric Cataract Treatments
    History Taking and Specialized Examination of Lens Diseases in Children
    Perioperative Challenges and Solutions in the Management of Children with Cataracts
    General Anesthesia in Pediatric Lens Surgery
    Care of Pediatric Lens Surgery
    Pediatric Cataract Extraction
    Calculation and Selection of Intraocular Lens Power for Children
    Selection of Intraocular Lenses for Children
    Pediatric Intraocular Lens Implantation
    Cataract Surgery in Children with Anomalies of Uvea
    Ectopia Lentis in Children
    Cataract Surgery in Children with Preexisting Posterior Capsular Defects
    Surgery of Congenital Cataracts Associated with Persistent Fetal Vasculature
    Pediatric Cataract Surgery in Microphthalmic Eyes
    Lens Trauma in Children
    Intraoperative Complications and Management
    Postoperative Complications and Management
    Prevention and Management of Pediatric Secondary Cataracts
    Reposition, Explantation, and Exchange of Intraocular Lenses
    Postoperative visual rehabilitation in children with lens diseases
    Quality of Life Assessment in Children with Lens Anomalies.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Nedim Hadžić, Ulrich Baumann, Valérie Anne McLin
    Contents:
    Brief history of pediatric liver transplantation
    What is different between pediatric and adult liver transplantation?
    Health system requirements for pediatric liver transplantation
    Managing a scarce resource in pediatric liver transplantation
    Indications and contraindications for pediatric liver transplant
    Preparation for pediatric liver transplant: medical aspects
    Psychological/social aspects
    Living donor liver transplantation in children
    ABO incompatibility: indications and management
    Liver and hematopoietic stem cell transplantation
    Combined liver and kidney transplantation
    Combined transplantation liver-heart, lung, and/or pancreas
    Combined liver and small bowel transplantation
    The transplant procedure: surgical aspects and techniques
    Anesthetic aspects
    Post-operative care after liver transplantation
    Types of rejection
    Anti-rejection strategies
    Anti-infection strategies
    Early vascular complications
    Biliary complications in pediatric liver transplantation
    General aspects of early management
    Hematologic complications after liver transplant
    Role of histology following pediatric liver transplantation
    Surgical complications
    Recurrence of disease after liver transplantation
    Immunological and other late complications
    Post-transplant lymphoproliferative disease
    Role of radiology and interventional radiology after pediatric liver transplantation
    Role of biomarkers in monitoring liver allograft function
    Liver assist systems in pediatric liver failure
    Cell transplantation
    Gene therapy
    Biliary atresia
    Alagille syndrome
    Liver transplantation for acute liver failure in children
    Auxiliary liver transplantation for acute liver failure in children
    Liver transplantation for liver tumors in children
    Metabolic conditions
    Liver retransplantation
    Pediatric liver transplantation in Asia
    Pediatric liver transplantation in South America: incidence and indications
    Psychosocial outcomes after pediatric liver transplantation
    Chronic graft injury
    Prospects for immune tolerance
    Challenges for young people with liver disease including transition to adult services
    Future of liver transplantation in children.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Sanjeev Sabharwal, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I: General Principles and Techniques
    Etiology of Lower Limb Deformity
    Clinical Evaluation Including Imaging
    Decision Making in Lower Extremity Deformity Correction
    Growth Modulation for Angular and Length Correction
    Physeal Bar Excision
    Acute Deformity Correction Using an Osteotomy
    Gradual Deformity Correction
    Hybrid Techniques for Limb Length and Deformity Correction
    Motorized Intramedullary Lengthening, an Emerging Technology for Limb Length and Deformity Correction
    Part II: Related Concepts and Management Options
    Biomechanically Based Clinical Decision Making in Pediatric Foot and Ankle Surgery
    Pediatric Joint Contractures
    Physical Therapy During Limb Lengthening and Deformity Correction: Principles and Techniques
    Amputation and Prosthetic Management: Amputation as a Reconstructive Option
    Working in Resource-Challenged Environments
    Part III: Underlying Conditions
    Metabolic Disorders
    Osteogenesis Imperfecta
    Lower Limb Deformity in Neuromuscular Disorders: Pathophysiology, Assessment, Goals and Principles of Management
    Arthrogryposis
    Limb Lengthening and Deformity Correction in Patients with Skeletal Dysplasias
    Lower Extremity Benign Bone Lesions and Related Conditions
    Management of Juxtaphyseal Malignant Bone Tumors Around the Knee Joint: New Concepts in Limb-Sparing Surgery
    Part IV: Congenital and Developmental Disorders
    Congenital Femoral Deficiency Reconstruction and Lengthening Surgery
    Fibular Hemimelia: Principles and Techniques of Management
    Tibial Hemimelia
    Congenital Pseudarthrosis of the Tibia
    Controversies in Blount?s Disease
    Part V: Sequelae and Complications
    Methods to Enhance Bone Formation in Distraction Osteogenesis
    Residual Deformities of the Hip
    Post-traumatic Lower Limb Deformities in Children
    Postinfectious Deformities of the Lower Limb
    Iatrogenic Deformities.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    David M. Parham, Joseph D. Khoury. M. Beth McCarville, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric Malignanies: Pathology and Imaging serves as a state-of-the-art reference for understanding the fundamental biology and diagnostic aspects of pediatric tumors. This volume stands apart from other books covering pediatric neoplasia by providing an in-depth analysis of the pathogenetic and diagnostic aspects of the most commonly encountered tumors. The volume covers the new advances in our understanding of the molecular processes underlying a number of pediatric tumors and the novel, sophisticated diagnostic tools that have now become an integral part of practice standards. Pediatric Malignanies: Pathology and Imaging will be of great value for practicing clinicians, oncologists, radiologists, surgeons, pediatricians and pathologists for characterizing and diagnosing childhood tumors.

    Contents:
    Laboratory Techniques Used in the Diagnosis of Pediatric Tumors
    Imaging Techniques Used in the Diagnosis of Pediatric Tumors
    Soft Tissue Sarcomas
    Malignant Bone Tumors
    Tumors of Lymphoid and Hematopoietic Tissues
    Tumors of the Central Nervous System
    Pediatric Cancer in the Head and Neck
    Malignancies of the Pediatric Lower Respiratory Tract
    Gastrointestinal Cancers in Children
    Malignant Renal Tumors
    Germ Cell and Gonadal Tumors
    Tumors of the Adrenal Gland
    Malignant Skin Tumors in Children
    Intraocular Tumors
    Malignant Tumors of Peripheral Nerves.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    George M. Kushner, Lewis C. Jones, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to assist the reader in navigating the potentially complex decision-making process involved in selecting the most appropriate intervention for each particular scenario that may be encountered by the practitioner or surgeon in the growing patient with facial trauma. Among the topics covered are the initial management of both soft and bony trauma, including different types of fracture, as well as the management of complications and revision surgery. The discerning practitioner will learn how to provide the appropriate intervention at the appropriate time, by taking into account skeletal growth when matching techniques to the injuries more common in the skeletally immature patient. It is also emphasized that in some cases, no intervention is advisable owing to the possibility of damaging growth centers or introducing additional scar tissue that may impede future growth. Pediatric Maxillofacial Trauma will provide key knowledge for surgeons treating growing patients, ensuring that their decisions to operate or delay intervention are evidence based.

    Contents:
    Growth and Development of the Maxillofacial Skeleton
    The Use of Resorbable Implants in Pediatric Facial Fractures
    Soft Tissue Trauma in the Growing Patient
    Soft Tissue Revision Surgery in the Growing Patient
    Management of Dog Bites
    Dentoalveolar Trauma
    Mandible Fractures in Primary, Mixed and Permanent Dentition Phases
    Midface (Maxillary and Zygomatic) Fractures
    Orbital and Nasal Fractures
    Considerations in Pediatric Populations (Including Patterns of Abuse).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    American Academy of Pediatrics.
    Summary: This new compendium is your source for trustworthy recommendations on quality care of children and adolescents with mental health issues.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    Sarah Y. Vinson, Ebony S. Vinson, editors.
    Summary: This book contains practical, clinical information for responding to the increasing unmet mental health needs of pediatric populations. Edited by mental health experts with hands-on experience working in primary care, this book describes the most common pediatric psychiatric concerns that are most appropriately treated by PCPs and integrated care teams and it is written specifically for such providers. It also provides clinical pearls for diagnosis, behavioral interventions, and pharmacologic interventions in order to inform early identification and treatment, which can change the trajectory of mental illness in youth. With broad applicability, the tools in this text can be used in urban, suburban, rural, resource-rich and resource-poor communities alike as well as in clinics that have varying degrees of mental health care integration. Pediatric Mental Health for Primary Care Providers: A Clinician's Guide is the ultimate resource for primary care clinicians and all members of integrated care teams working with children, including onsultant psychiatrists and psychologists, pediatricians, family physicians, social workers, nurse practitioners, physician's assistants, nurses, and care coordinators.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Mohan V. Belthur, Ashish S. Ranade, Martin J. Herman, James A. Fernandes, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric musculoskeletal infections are common globally. If untreated or treated inadequately, pediatric bone and joint infections can cause significant mortality and morbidity. The functional and economic burden to the family and community at large also presents a significant public health problem. This book serves as an evidence-based, comprehensive review of the current concepts for the early diagnosis and management of pediatric musculoskeletal infections. This first-of-its-kind book also uses a multidisciplinary and global approach by including contributions from authors worldwide. The book comprises five sections, making it easy to read starting from any chapter. Written by experts in the field, Pediatric Musculoskeletal Infections: Principles and Practice serve as an easily accessible resource for a wide-reaching audience of healthcare providers from multiple disciplines to aid them in making informed decisions while treating children with bone and joint infections.

    Contents:
    Section 1: General principles
    Epidemiology of musculoskeletal infections
    The Microbiology of MSK infections and antibiotic therapies
    Pathology of musculoskeletal infections
    Imaging modalities to diagnose musculoskeletal infections
    Infection mimics: differential diagnoses of musculoskeletal infections
    MRSA and virulent MSSA infections
    Systemic effects of musculoskeletal infections and ICU management
    Local antibiotic drug delivery systems for musculoskeletal infections
    Evidence based management of musculoskeletal infections
    Section 2: Acute musculoskeletal infections
    Acute hematogenous osteomyelitis
    Septic arthritis
    Pyomyositis
    Musculoskeletal infections in the neonate
    Subacute osteomyelitis
    Surgical site infection in pediatric orthopaedic surgery
    Surgical site infection in spine surgery
    Infections related to external fixators
    Pediatric musculoskeletal infections: a LMIC perspective
    Section 3: Chronic musculoskeletal infections and their sequelae
    Chronic hematogenous Osteomyelitis
    Post-traumatic chronic osteomyelitis
    Chronic non-bacterial recurrent osteomyelitis (Chronic non-infective osteitis)
    Pathological fractures with osteomyelitis
    Post infective deformities: strategies for limb reconstruction
    Sequelae of septic arthritis of the hip and late reconstruction
    Post infective bone gap management of the upper extremity
    Post infective bone gap management of the lower extremity
    Post infective bone gap management: Induced membrane technique
    Section 4: Region specific musculoskeletal infections
    Epiphyseal osteomyelitis
    Pediatric hand infections
    Pediatric foot infections
    Tuberculosis of the axial skeleton
    Tuberculosis of the appendicular skeleton
    Non-tuberculous infections of the spine
    Section 5: Uncommon musculoskeletal infections
    Musculoskeletal infections in immunocompromised children
    Fungal infections
    Necrotizing fasciitis
    Gas gangrene
    Meningococcal infections
    Brucellosis, Hydatid disease, and viral osteomyelitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editors, Kenneth Noonan, Mininder Kocher.
    Summary: "Musculoskeletal complaints represent a large percentage of cases seen by pediatricians, family physicians, and other first-line clinicians who work with children and adolescents. Pediatric Musculoskeletal Physical Diagnosis: A Video-Enhanced Guide helps health care practitioners arrive at an accurate diagnosis and determine the need for a referral. Written by leaders in pediatric orthopaedics, this practical guide is a comprehensive, multimedia resource covering the physical examination and the next steps to the diagnosis of disorders of the growing musculoskeletal system. Uses an easy-to-follow, consistent format that comprehensively covers physical diagnostic techniques for suspected pediatric and adolescent musculoskeletal disorders. Discusses relevant anatomy, patient history, and musculoskeletal physical diagnostic techniques, including diagnostic tests, treatments, and pearls and pitfalls. Provides access to procedural videos from Boston Children's Hospital that clearly demonstrate physical examination methods covered in the text"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Common Pediatric Orthopedic Nomenclature / Aristides I. Cruz Jr and Joseph G. Khoury
    Differences Between Pediatric and Adult Musculoskeletal Systems / James G. Jarvis and Megan E. Johnson
    Pearls and Pitfalls of the Pediatric Musculoskeletal Examination / Andrew Howard, Martin Herman, and Michael Wolf
    Observational Gait Analysis and Correlation With Static Examination / Robert M. Kay, Susan A. Rethlefsen, and Tom F. Novacheck
    Diagnostically Directed Examination for Neurological Disorders / M. Wade Shrader and A. Noelle Larson
    Physical Examination for Unusual and Syndromic Conditions / Pooya Hosseinzadeh, Ron El-Hawary, Craig Eberson, and Kishore Mulpuri
    Diagnostically Directed Examination for Infectious, Inflammatory, and Neoplastic Conditions / Jonathan G. Schoenecker, Stephanie N. Moore-Lotridge, Samuel Johnson, and Alexandre Arkader
    Evaluation for Nonaccidental Trauma / Karen L. Lakin
    Examination of the Injured Child / Anthony I. Riccio and Shital N. Parikh
    Evaluation of the Concussed Child/Adolescent / Naomi Brown, Eileen P. Storey, William P. Meehan III, Corina Martinez, and Christina L. Master
    Spine and Spinal Conditions / Amy L. McIntosh and Bryan Tompkins
    Foot and Ankle Deformity / Benjamin Shore and Megan E. Johnson
    Leg Disorders / Ryan D. Muchow and Vishwas R. Talwalkar
    Knee Conditions / Eric W. Edmonds and Benton E. Heyworth
    Limb Alignment and Limb Length Discrepancies / Christopher A. Iobst and Raymond W. Liu
    Hip Disorders / Matthew D. Milewski and Pablo Castañeda
    Chest and Shoulder Deformity / Dennis E. Kramer and Derek M. Kelly
    Pediatric Elbow and Forearm Conditions / Joshua M. Abzug, Danielle A. Hogarth, and Dan A. Zlotolow
    Hand and Wrist Problems / Roger Cornwall.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Pediatrics)
    LWW Health Library (Orthopedics
  • Digital
    Yasser El Miedany, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive compilation of musculoskeletal ultrasonography (MSUS) fundamentals in pediatric rheumatology with emphasis on imaging techniques, normal anatomy, approaches towards standardization, and the spectrum of pathologic findings seen in the pediatric population. It examines the techniques and pitfalls of MSUS in pediatrics and compares sonoanatomy in pediatric patients versus adults. Chapters cover a range of anatomical sites, including shoulder and arm, elbow and forearm, wrists and hands, hip and thigh, knee and leg, and ankle and feet. The text also discusses the use of ultrasonography in juvenile inflammatory arthritic conditions and sports-related injuries. Finally, the book concludes with a summary of the recent advances in pediatric musculoskeletal ultrasonography. Featuring contributions from a large international group of leaders in the field, Pediatric Musculoskeletal Ultrasonography is an authoritative reference for pediatric and adult rheumatologists, sonographers, radiologists, physiotherapists, and orthopedic specialists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction to Musculoskeletal Ultrasonography
    Chapter 2. Pediatric Musculoskeletal Ultrasound: Pediatric Techniques and Applications
    Chapter 3. Standardized Musculoskeletal Ultrasound in Pediatric Rheumatology: Normal Age-Related Ultrasound Findings
    Chapter 4. Sonoanatomy
    Chapter 5. Imaging Approach and Tissue Pathology
    Chapter 6. Sononeurology: Individual Anatomic Sites and Clinical Applications
    Chapter 7. Shoulder (Including Arm)
    Chapter 8. Elbow (Including Forearm)
    Chapter 9. Wrist and Hand
    Chapter 10. Hip and Thigh
    Chapter 11. Knee (Including Leg)
    Chapter 12. Ankle and Foot
    Chapter 13. Neonatal and Infant Spine
    Chapter 14. Trauma and Sports Injury
    Chapter 15. Reporting Ultrasound Diagnosis and Findings
    Chapter 16. US Guided Interventional Procedures (Biopsy, Joint Procedures)
    Chapter 17. Advances in Pediatric Musculoskeletal Ultrasonography
    Chapter 18. Musculoskeletal US in Standard Clinical Practice: Disease Activity Monitoring, Cut Off Points, Disease Monitoring, Patient Education.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Ellis D. Avner, William E. Harmon, Patrick Niaudet, Norishige Yoshikawa, Francesco Emma, Stuart L. Goldstein.
    Contents:
    Embryology
    Glomerular Circulation and Function
    Renal Tubular Development
    Perinatal Urology Renal Dysplasia/Hypoplasia
    Syndromes and Malformations of the Urinary Tract
    Sodium and Water: Developmental Physiology and Basic Disorders
    Potassium: Developmental Physiology and Basic Disorders
    Acid-Base Homeostasis: Developmental Physiology and Basic Disorders
    Calcium and Phosphorus: Developmental Physiology
    Disorders of Calcium and Phosphate and Therapy Nutrition: Developmental Physiology and Basic Disorders
    Fluid and Electrolyte Maintenance and Therapy of Basic Disorders (Na/HO/K/Acid Base)
    Molecular Biology
    Animal Models
    Clinical Investigation
    Genomic Methods in the Diagnosis and Treatment of Pediatric Kidney Disease
    Renal Stem Cells
    Tissue Engineering
    Clinical Evaluation
    Laboratory Investigation
    Growth and Development
    Diagnostic Imaging
    Renal Pathology
    Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome
    Inherited Glomerular Diseases
    Idiopathic Nephrotic Syndrome: Genetic Aspects
    Idiopathic Nephrotic Syndrome: Clinical Aspects
    Immune Mediated Glomerular Injury
    Complement Mediated Glomerular Injury
    Acute Postinfectious Glomerulonephritis
    Immunoglobulin A Nephropathies (includes HSP)
    Membranoproliferative and C3-Mediated GN
    Membranous Nephropathy
    Nephronophthisis-Medullary Cystic Kidney Disease
    Polycystic Kidney Disease
    Animoaciduria and Glycosuria
    Tubular Disorders of Electrolyte Regulation
    Renal Tubular Acidosis
    Nephrogenic Diabetes Insipidus
    Cystinosis
    Fanconi Syndrome
    Primary Hyperoaxaluria
    Tubulointerstitial Nephritis
    Vasculitis
    Systemic Lupus Erythematosis
    HUS
    Sickle Cell Nephropathy
    Diabetic Nephropathy
    Renal Manifestations of Metabolic Disorders
    Infectious Diseases and the Kidney Nephrotoxins
    Urinary Tract Infections
    Vesicoureteral Reflux and Scarring
    Obstructive Uropathy
    Bladder Dysfunction
    Urolithiasis
    Pediatric Renal Tumors
    Epidemiology of Hypertension
    Pathophysiology of Hypertension
    Evaluation of Hypertension in Childhood Diseases
    Management of the Hypertensive Child
    Pathogenesis of Acute Renal Failure
    Evaluation and Management of Acute Kidney Injury
    Pathophysiology of Progressive Renal Disease
    Management of Chronic Kidney Disease
    Handling of Drugs in Children with Abnormal Renal Function
    Endocrine and Growth Abnormalities
    Chronic Kidney Disease Mineral and Bone Disorder
    Peritoneal Dialysis
    Hemodialysis
    Transplantation Immunology
    Pediatric Renal Transplantation
    Immunosuppression
    Complications of Renal Transplantation
    IPNA: Global Pediatric Nephrology, Introduction and Overview
    AFPNA
    ALANEPE
    AsPNA
    ASPN
    ANZPNA
    ESPN
    JSPN.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Francesco Emma, Stuart L. Goldstein, Arvind Bagga, Carlton M. Bates, Rukshana Shroff, editors.
    Summary: Over the course of the previous seven editions, Pediatric Nephrology has become the standard reference text for students, trainees, practicing physicians (pediatricians, nephrologists, internists, and urologists), subspecialists, and allied health professionals seeking information about children’s kidney diseases. It is global in perspective, reflecting the fact that the international group of editors are all acknowledged world experts. The latest edition of this text is no different, providing a comprehensive, state-of-the-art overview on pediatric nephrology. Much like the previous edition, the latest edition reviews the most critical aspects of the field. Topics covered include developmental physiology and diseases, renal physiology and diagnostic approaches, glomerular disease, kidney involvement in systemic diseases, renal tubular disorders, homeostasis, cystic kidney disease and related disorders, urinary tract disorders, hypertension, acute kidney injury, and chronic kidney failure. Unlike the previous edition, however, the chapters in this edition now combine physiology, clinical management, and pathology for ease of use. The latest edition also includes a new section on the evaluation of different disorders that can have multiple etiologies, setting the stage for the evaluation and management of specific diseases. This book serves as a superb resource and an invaluable asset for practitioners, health professionals, and trainees seeking out information about children's kidney diseases. .

    Contents:
    Pre-natal development of the kidneys and urinary tract
    Post-natal renal maturation
    Congenital abnormalities of the kidneys and the urinary tract
    Stem cells and kidney regeneration
    Assessment of kidney function
    Imaging kidneys and the urinary tract
    Technical aspects of renal pathology
    Approach to the child with hematuria and/or proteinuria
    Nephrotic syndrome: classification and evaluation
    Genetic bases of nephrotic syndrome
    Congenital nephrotic syndrome
    Clinical aspects of genetic forms of nephrotic syndrome
    Inherited diseases of the glomerular basement membrane
    Steroid sensitive nephrotic syndrome
    Non-genetic forms of steroid resistant nephrotic syndrome
    Membranous nephropathy
    Evaluation of children with nephritic syndrome
    IgA Nephropathy
    Henoch Schönlein Purpura Nephritis
    Renal vasculitis
    Lupus nephritis
    Autoantibodies and kidney diseases
    C3 glomerulopathies
    Atypical HUS and TTP
    Infection-related HUS
    Acute post-streptococcus glomerulonephritis
    Infections that affect the kidney (non-viral)
    Viral infections and the kidney
    The kidney in sickle cell disease
    The kidney in type I diabetes
    The kidney in metabolic syndrome
    Renal Manifestations of Metabolic Disorders
    The kidney in methyl malonic acidemia
    The kidney in mitochondrial cytopathies
    Fabry disease
    Primary hyperoxaluria
    Fanconi Syndrome
    Cystinosis
    Aminoaciduria and Glycosuria
    Renal hypophosphatemia
    Inherited disorders of sodium and potassium handling
    Inherited disorders of renal magnesium handling
    Inherited disorders of renal calcium handling
    Renal Tubular Acidosis
    Inherited disorders of water handling
    Tubulointerstitial nephritis
    Sodium and Water Disorders: evaluation and management
    Potassium disorders: evaluation and management
    Clinical use of diuretics
    Autosomal Dominant Polycystic Kidney Diseases
    Autosomal Recessive Polycystic Kidney Diseases
    Renal involvement in tuberous sclerosis
    Nephronophtisis and other ciliopathies
    Autosomal Dominant Tubulointerstitial Kidney Diseases
    Urolithiasis and nephrocalcinosis
    Urinary tract infections
    Vesicoureteral reflux
    Obstructive uropathies
    Bladder disorders
    Enuresis
    Pediatric renal tumors
    Onconephrology
    Pathophysiology and epidemiology of hypertension in children
    Evaluation and management of hypertension
    Renovascular hypertension: evaluation and management
    Pathogenesis of acute kidney injury
    Evaluation and management of acute kidney injury in neonates
    Evaluation and management of acute kidney injury in children
    Nephrotoxins
    Progression of chronic kidney disease and nephroprotection
    Epidemiology and management of Chronic Kidney Disease
    Nutrition, Growth and Development
    CKD-MBD
    Anemia in CKD
    Assessment of volume status in CKD
    Peritoneal Dialysis
    Hemodialysis
    Infant dialysis
    Adequacy of dialysis
    Renal Transplantation: Evaluation of children and donors
    Renal transplantation: surgical and perioperative management
    Renal transplantation: immunosuppression
    Renal transplantation: disease recurrence
    Renal transplantation: infectious complications
    Renal transplantation: non- infectious complications and long-term outcome
    Multi-organ transplants and the kidney in other solid organ transplantation
    Ethical issues in pediatric nephrology
    Drug dosing in abnormal kidney functions in Children with Abnormal Renal Function
    Normal reference values.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Katrin Scheinemann, Eric Bouffet, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Epidemiology of pediatric brain tumors
    3. Clinical signs and symptoms of pediatric brain tumors
    4. Neuro-imaging
    5. Neuro-surgery
    6. Low grade glioma
    7. High grade glioma
    8. Medulloblastoma/ PNET
    9. Ependymoma
    10. Germ cell tumors
    11. ATRT
    12. Craniopharyngeoma
    13. Rare brain tumors (CPP, CPC etc.)
    14. Infant brain tumors
    15. Radiotherapy
    16. Chemotherapy
    17. Targeted treatment
    18. Long term sequelae
    19. Neurocognitive outcome
    20. Quality of life
    21. Palliative care
    22. Cancer syndromes
    23. Brain tumor stem cells
    24. Pediatric neurooncology in developing countries
    25. Neuropathology 26. HDCT/ ASCT
    27. Developmental neurobiology
    28. Basic science of pediatric brain tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Michael C. Brodsky.
    Summary: Pediatric Neuro-Ophthalmology, 3rd edition provides the single authoritative resource on the pathophysiology, diagnostic evaluation, and treatment of neuro-ophthalmologic disorders in children. This book is encyclopedic in scope, incorporating extensive references for each condition, numerous diagrams and pictures, and a detailed analysis of the clinical disorders included in the differential diagnosis of each condition. The third edition builds upon this format to incorporate new discoveries about mechanisms of disease, new diagnostic modalities, advances in treatment in the field of pediatric neuro-ophthalmology, and updated neuroimaging figures.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Christophe Faure, Nikhil Thapar, Carlo Di Lorenzo, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides a comprehensive and up-to-date theoretical review and practical guide on pediatric gastrointestinal motility and functional disorders. The latest edition includes extensively revised and new chapters to reflect the rapidly growing field of pediatric neurogastroenterology. New topics covered include neurobiology of pain in children, functional oropharyngoesophageal assessment, dysautonomia, and psychotropic drugs. The text also features instructive illustrations, photographs, and tables. Written by world-renown experts in the field, Pediatric Neurogastroenterology: Gastrointestinal Motility and Functional Disorders in Children, Second Edition is a valuable resource for pediatric gastroenterologists, adult gastroenterologists, pediatricians, and all professionals involved in the treatment and management of children with such disorders. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Development of the Enteric Neuromuscular System
    Development of Gut Motility
    Visceral Sensitivity
    The Microbiome in Neurogastroenterology
    Integration of Biomedical and Psychosocial Issues in Pediatric Functional Gastrointestinal and Motility Disorders
    Esophageal Manometry
    Antroduodenal Manometry
    Colonic Manometry
    Anorectal Manometry
    Assessment of Feeding and Swallowing Disorders
    Esophageal pH and Impedance Monitoring
    Barostat and Other Sensitivity Tests
    Radionuclide Gastrointestinal Transit Tests
    Electrogastrography, Breath Tests, Ultrasonography, Transit Tests, and SmartPill
    Autonomic Nervous System Testing
    Pathology of Enteric Neuromuscular Disorders
    Genetics of Motility Disorder: Gastroesophageal Reflux, Triple A Syndrome, Hirschsprung Disease, and Chronic Intestinal Pseudo-Obstruction
    Allergy and Neurogastroenterology
    Swallowing and Oropharyngeal Disorders
    Esophageal Achalasia
    Other Esophageal Motility Disorders
    Gastric Motor Disorders
    Pediatric Chronic Intestinal Pseudo-Obstruction
    Hirschsprung Disease
    Motility Problems in Developmental Disorders: Cerebral Palsy, Down Syndrome, Williams Syndrome, Autism, Turner's Syndrome, Noonan's Syndrome, Rett Syndrome and Prader Willi
    Familial Dysautonomia and Mitochondrial Disorders
    Esophageal Atresia
    Anorectal Malformations
    Motility After Small Bowel and Colonic Surgery
    Gastric Function After Fundoplication
    Rome Criteria for Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Infant Regurgitation and Pediatric Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Infant Colic
    Functional Diarrhea in Toddlers (Chronic Nonspecific Diarrhea)
    Functional Dyspepsia
    Irritable Bowel Syndrome
    Functional Abdominal Pain
    Cyclic Vomiting Syndrome: Comorbidities and Treatment
    Aerophagia
    Rumination Syndrome
    Functional Constipation in Children
    Fecal Incontinence in Children
    Drugs Acting on the Gut: Prokinetics, Antispasmodics, Laxatives
    Drugs That Work in the Brain
    Electrical Stimulation of the GI Tract
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Complementary and Alternative Treatments for Motility and Sensory Disorders
    Cellular Based Therapies for Pediatric GI Motility Disorders
    Chronic Intestinal Pseudo-Obstruction Syndrome: Surgical Approach and Intestinal Transplantation. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Christophe Faure, Nikhil Thapar, Carlo Di Lorenzo, editors.
    Summary: This third edition brings together the latest in research and clinical practice of the expanding field of pediatric neurogastroenterology. In addition to a comprehensive review of the current state of the art, many chapters have been significant revised and updated, covering the latest discoveries of the delicate and detailed mechanisms of the neuroenteric system as well as relationships of the latter with microbiota and metabolites produced by resident intestinal bacteria. The book also covers rapidly-changing techniques to assess clinical problems, along with international diagnostic criteria and recommendations and guidelines for clinical management. The content is supported by ample figures and photographs. Remaining the gold standard text in this up-and-coming field, Pediatric Neurogastroenterology 3e is dedicated to reporting the most accurate and recent knowledge available. Written by international experts in the field, the book is a comprehensive and up-to-date theoretical review and practical guide to pediatric gastrointestinal motility and functional disorders to pediatricians, pediatric gastroenterologists and all professionals involved in the treatment of children with such disorders.

    Contents:
    Physiology and Development of Enteric Neuromuscular System and Gastrointestinal Motility
    Introduction to Gut Motility and Sensitivity
    Development of the Enteric Neuromuscular System
    Development of Gut Motility
    Visceral Sensitivity
    Chronic Pain in Neurogastroenterology
    The Microbiome in Neurogastroenterology
    Integration of Biomedical and Psychosocial Issues in Pediatric Disorders of Gut Brain Interaction
    Motility and Sensory Testing
    Assessment of Oropharyngeal Function
    pH monitoring and Impedance
    Esophageal Manometry
    Antroduodenal Manometry
    Colonic Manometry
    Anorectal Manometry
    Esophageal Functional Luminal Imaging Probe
    Barostat and Other Sensitivity Tests
    Radionuclide Gastrointestinal Transit Tests
    Electrogastrography, Breath Tests, Ultrasonography, Transit Tests, Wireless Motility Capsule and Cine-MRI
    Autonomic Nervous System Testing
    Disorders of Digestive Motility
    Pathology of Enteric Neuromuscular Disorders
    Allergy and Neurogastroenterology
    Disorders of Deglutition in Infants and Children: Etiology and Management
    Esophageal Achalasia
    Other Esophageal Motility Disorders
    Gastric Motor Disorders
    Pediatric Chronic Intestinal Pseudo-Obstruction
    Hirschsprung Disease
    Motility Problems in Developmental Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disturbances in Autism Spectrum Disorder
    Motility Disorders after Surgery and Developmental Anomalies of the Enteric Neuromuscular System Secondary to Anatomical Malformations
    Esophageal Atresia
    Anorectal Malformations
    Motility Changes after Small Bowel and Colonic Surgery
    Gastric function after Fundoplication
    Disorders of the Gut Brain Interactions
    Rome Criteria for Disorders of Gut-Brain Interaction (DGBI)
    Infant Regurgitation and Pediatric Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Esophageal Functional Disorders
    Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders in Infants and Toddlers
    Abdominal Pain-Related Functional Gastrointestinal Disorder and Disorders of Brain-Gut Interactions
    Cyclic Vomiting Syndrome, Abdominal Migraine and Chronic Nausea
    Aerophagia
    Rumination Syndrome
    Functional Constipation in Children
    Fecal incontinence in Children
    Treatments
    Drugs Acting on the Gut: Prokinetics, Antispasmodics, Laxatives
    Drugs Acting on the Brain
    Electrical Stimulation of the GI Tract
    Hypnotherapy in Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Disorder of Brain Gut Interaction
    Complementary and Alternative Treatments for Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Cellular-Based Therapies for Paediatric GI Motility Disorders
    Surgery in Motility Disorders
    Gut Dysmotility and Transplantation: Long-Term Outcomes with New Insights into Surgical Integration and Allograft Motility Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    A. James Barkovich, Charles Raybaud.
    Contents:
    Imaging techniques / Christopher Hess
    Normal development of the neonatal and infant brain, skull, and spine / Matthew J. Barkovich and A. James Barkovich
    Metabolic, toxic, and autoimmune/inflammatory brain disorders / A. James Barkovich and Zoltan Patay
    Brain and spine injuries in infancy and childhood / James Barkovich and Erin Simon-Swartz
    Congenital malformations of the brain and skull / A. James Barkovich and Charles Raybaud
    Neurocutaneous disorders / Gilbert Vézina and A. James Barkovich
    Intracranial, orbital, and neck masses / Charles Raybaud and Zoltan Patay
    Hydrocephalus / Charles Raybaud
    Developmental disorders of the spine and spinal cord / Erin Simon-Swartz
    Neoplasms of the spine / A. James Barkovich
    Infections of the developing and mature nervous system / Gary Hedlund and James F. Bale, Jr.
    Anomalies of the cerebral vasculature / Steven W. Hetts, Philip M. Meyers, Van V. Halbach, and A. James Barkovich.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    Hongsheng Liu, Xiaoan Zhang, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide readers practical information on clinical diagnosis of pediatric neurological diseases. Topic areas include congenital malformations of the brain and cerebral vessels, brain tumors, intracranial infections, vascular diseases, metabolic encephalopathy, brain damage and destructive diseases. Utilizing a case-based format, the procedure of streamline disease recognition is presented in a clear and concise manner. Each case is supported by representative images, a discussion of the disease, and a description of the most characteristic imaging features of the disorder. Written by radiologists who have been involved pediatric imaging diagnosis for a long time, this case-based book will be a valuable reference for radiologists, paediatricians and neurologists, as well as those who are interested in related field.

    Contents:
    1 Congenital Malformations of the Brain. 2 Brain Tumors
    3 Intracranial Infection
    4 Vascular Diseases
    5 Metabolic Encephalopathy
    6 Neonatal Craniocerebral Trauma
    7 Brain Damage, Destructive Diseases
    8 Neurodegenerative Diseases
    9 Other Brain Diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Gregory L. Holmes, MD, Professor and Chair of Neurological Sciences, University of Vermont, Burlington, Vermont, Peter M. Bingham, MD, Professor of Neurological Sciences and Pediatrics, University of Vermont, Burlington, Vermont.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Asim F. Choudhri.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    edited by Nathan Selden and Lissa Baird.
    Summary: Part of the 'Neurosurgery by Example' series, this volume on pediatric neurosurgery presents exemplary cases in which renowned authors guide readers through the assessment and planning, decision making, surgical procedure, aftercare, and complication management of common and uncommon disorders. As pediatric neurosurgery approximates the anatomical and pathophysiological breadth of all specialty areas of adult neurosurgery, the cases provided are particularly relevant to and more frequently encountered in pediatric practice.
    Digital Access Oxford 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Alan R. Cohen.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Georgios Alexiou, Neofytos Prodromou, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a detailed overview of a spectrum of pediatric neurosurgical conditions. It features detailed insight into the techniques available for examining abnormalities, hemorrhages and a variety of tumors. Relevant surgical methodologies are described in relation to a clinical problem or disorder, ensuring that the reader can systematically develop their knowledge of how to perform both routine and more-obscure procedures presently utilized to treat these conditions. Pediatric Neurosurgery for Clinicians is a comprehensive guide detailing methodologies for applying a range of surgical techniques based upon a range of clinical questions. Therefore, it is a critical resource for all practicing and trainee physicians who encounter children with disorders affecting their neurological systems in disciplines within neurosurgery, neurology, radiology, oncology and pathology.

    Contents:
    I. General Topics
    History of Pediatric Neurosurgery
    Neurological Examination
    II. Congenital and Developmental Cerebral Anomalies
    Hydrocephalus
    Intraventricular Hemorrhage in the Newborn
    Arachnoid Cysts
    Dandy-Walker Malformation
    Chiari Malformation
    Cephaloceles
    Craniosynostosis
    Craniofacial Syndromes
    III. Congenital and Developmental Spinal Anomalies
    Myelomeningocele
    Lipomeningocele
    Diastematomyelia
    Myeloschisis
    Non-Dysraphic Lipomas
    IV. Tumors
    Predisponsing Syndromes
    Scalp and Skull Tumors
    Astrocytomas
    Medulloblastoma
    Ependymoma
    Atypical Teratoid / Rhabdoid Tumors
    Craniopharyngiomas and other sellar tumors
    Brainstem Tumors
    Pineal Region Tumors
    Rare variantsi
    Spinal Tumors
    V. Trauma
    Non accidental Trauma
    Fractures
    Epidural Hematoma
    Subdural Hematoma
    Intracerebral Hematoma
    Diffuse Axonal Injury
    Penetrating Head Trauma
    Spine trauma
    VI. Vascular Malformations
    Arteriovenous Malformations
    Cavernous Malformations
    Aneurysms
    Moya-Moya Disease
    Vein of Galen Aneurysms
    VII. Functional
    Temporal Lobe Epilepsy
    Extratemporal Lobe Epilepsy
    Hemispherectomy
    Spasticity
    VIII. Infections
    Shunt Infection
    Epidural Abscess
    Subdural Empyema
    Brain Abscess
    Encephalitis
    Spine Infections
    IX. Modern Concepts and Practices
    Advanced MRI Techniques for Brain Disorders
    Intraoperative Flow Cytometry in Pediatric Brain Tumors
    Advances in Radiotherapy for Pediatric Brain Tumors
    Pediatric Rehabilitation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    S. Ted Treves, editor.
    Summary: "This pioneering book, now in its fourth edition, presents the cutting-edge developments in pediatric nuclear medicine. Thoroughly revised and updated, it retains the fundamentals that anchor the book's distinguished reputation and includes the latest advances in PET/CT, SPECT, hybrid imaging, and molecular imaging. Pediatric Nuclear Medicine and Molecular Imaging, Fourth Edition, is an excellent resource for nuclear medicine physicians, diagnostic radiologists, pediatricians, and residents and fellows."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    American Nurses Association, National Association of Pediatric Nurse Practitioners, Society of Pediatric Nurses.
    Summary: "Co-published with the National Association of Pediatric Nurse Practitioners (NAPNAP) and the Society of Pediatric Nurses (SPN). Pediatric nursing focuses on the protection, promotion, and optimization of the health and abilities for children from newborn age through young adulthood. Utilizing a patient- and family-centered care approach, pediatric nurses strive for preventing illness and injury, restoring health, and maximizing comfort in health conditions and at the end of life, through diagnosis, treatment, and management of the child’s condition and advocacy in the care of children and families"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Scope of pediatric nursing practice.
    Practice context
    Quality and outcome guidelines for nursing of children and families
    Differentiated areas of pediatric nursing practice
    Regulatory challenges for advanced practice registered nurses
    Caring for a diverse population
    Healthcare transitions
    Settings for pediatric nursing practice: pediatric registered nurse and advanced practice registered nurse
    Trends and issues in pediatric nursing
    Standards of pediatric nursing practice.
    Standards of practice
    Standards of professional performance
    References
    Appendices. Comprehensive list of assessment criteria for pediatric nursing
    Pediatric nursing: scope and standards of practice (2008).
    Digital Access R2Library 2015
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Luanne Linnard-Palmer.
    Contents:
    Introduction to children's health care
    Care across clinical settings
    Essential safety models
    Cultural and religious influences to care
    Working and communicating with an interdisciplinary team
    Caring for neonates and infants
    Caring for toddlers
    Caring for preschoolers
    Caring for school-age children
    Caring for adolescents
    Symptom management across childhood
    Caring for families under stress
    Caring for an abused child
    Gastrointestinal elimination
    Metabolism
    Gas exchange and oxygenation
    Skin integrity
    Cellular regulation
    Cardiovascular perfusion
    Sensory perceptions : impairments and disorders
    Intracranial regulation
    Genitourinary elimination
    Mobility
    Cognition and mental health
    Immune system disorders
    Infection and communicable diseases in childhood
    Essential skills for pediatric nursing
    Safe and legal aspects of care
    Care of the acutely ill or critically ill child
    The dying child
    Appendices. Pediatric nursing care : helpful professional organizations
    18 common pediatric medication and supportive calculations
    Pediatric-focused laboratory values
    Nationally normed growth charts
    Best practices in pediatric nursing care : handoff sheets and huddle tips
    Pediatric-focused checklists and helpful mnemonics
    Steps to prevent pediatric medication errors : safety tips
    Rapid response, code blue skills, and PEWS tools
    Tips for maintaining professional boundaries in pediatric/family nursing care
    Formula feeding guidelines for infants
    How to effectively talk to children
    Quick guide to selected developmental theorists.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Summary: Prepare for your Certified Pediatric Nurse (CPN®) or Pediatric Nursing Certification (PED-BC"! exam with Pediatric Nursing Certification Practice Q & A. With 350 high-quality questions and comprehensive rationales based on the most recent Pediatric Nursing Certification Board (PCNB) and American Nurses Credentialing Center (ANCC) exam blueprints, this essential resource is designed to help you sharpen your specialty knowledge with practice Q & A organized by exam topic and strengthen your test-taking skills with the 175-question practice test. Combined, it gives you everything you need to pass the first time, guaranteed! Key Features *Includes 350 questions with in-depth rationales that address both correct and incorrect answers *Offers two study options-by exam topic area and full 175-question practice test *Provides key information about the PNCB and ANCC pediatric nursing certification exams *Boosts your confidence with a 100% pass guarantee (details inside) CPN® is a registered trademark of the Pediatric Nursing Certification Board (PNCB), and PED-BC"!is a registered trademark of the American Nurses Credentialing Center (ANCC). PNCB and ANCC do not sponsor or endorse this resource, nor do they have a proprietary relationship with Springer Publishing Company. -- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
  • Digital
    Vicky R. Bowden, DNSc, RN, Vice Provost for Undergraduate Programs, Professor, School of Nursing, Azusa, California, Cindy Smith Greenberg, DNSc, RN, PNP-BC, FAAN, Interim Associate Dean, College of Health and Human Development, Professor, School of Nursing, California State University, Fullerton, Fullerton, California.
    Contents:
    Unit 1: Caring for children
    Pediatric guidelines and procedures.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ronald E. Kleinman, Frank R. Greer.
    Summary: Proper childhood nutrition can be the bedrock of lifelong health. This AAP policy manual makes clear policies and procedures for the best nutrition for well children as well as those with metabolic abnormalities and serious illnesses.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    volume editor: Berthold Koletzko ; co-editors: Jatinder Bhatia, Zulfiqar A. Bhutta, Peter Cooper, Maria Makrides, S.A. Ricardo Uauy, Weiping Wang.
    Contents:
    Specific aspects of childhood nutrition
    Nutrition of healthy infants, children, and adolescents
    Nutritional challenges in special conditions and diseases
    Annexes.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    volume editor: Berthold Koletzko ; co-editors: Zulfiqar A. Bhutta, Wei Cai, Muhammad Ali Dhansay, Christopher P. Duggan, Maria Makrides, Marina Orsi.
    Summary: "Concise information for readers who seek quick guidance on the practice of nutrition of infants, children, and adolescents"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Specific aspects of childhood nutrition
    Nutrition of healthy infants, children and adolescents
    Nutritional challenges in special conditions and disease
    Perioperative nutritional support.
    Digital Access Karger 2022
  • Digital
    Michael S. Freemark, editor.
    Summary: "This second edition of Freemark’s text embodies all of the strengths of the original work but is deeper and broader in scope, with new chapters on emerging themes including metabolomics, genomics, and the roles of gastrointestinal hormones, the microbiome, brown adipose tissue, and endocrine disruptors in the pathogenesis of childhood obesity. Reviews of the effects of weight excess on cognitive performance and immune function complement detailed analyses of the biochemical and molecular pathways controlling the development of childhood adiposity and metabolic disease. Critical assessments of nutritional interventions (including new chapters on infant feeding practices and vegetarian diets) and superb reviews of behavioral counseling, pharmacotherapy, and bariatric surgery provide practical guidance for the management of overweight children. Penetrating analyses of the obesity epidemic in its social, cultural, economic, and political contexts highlight challenges and opportunities for obesity prevention and community action. The perspective is international in scope and reflects the expertise and experience of many of the leading figures in the field"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part I: The obesity epidemic: a global perspective. Childhood obesity in the modern age: global trends, determinants, complications, and costs
    Part II: Hormonal and metabolic control of appetite, fat deposition, and energy expenditure. Central control of energy metabolism and hypothalamic obesity
    Gastrointestinal hormones and the control of food intake and energy metabolism
    The gut microbiome and control of weight gain
    Part III: Adipocyte development and function in obesity and insulin resistance. White adipose tissue development and function in children and adolescents: preclinical models
    White adipose tissue accumulation and dysfunction in children with obesity
    Brown adipose tissue and body weight regulation
    Part IV: The genetics of childhood obesity. Monogenic obesity
    Syndromic obesity
    Polygenic obesity
    Part V: Pre- and peri-natal determinants of childhood obesity. Maternal determinants of childhood obesity: maternal obesity, weight gain and smoking
    Fetal and infancy growth
    Intrauterine exposure to maternal diabetes and childhood obesity
    Endocrine disruptors as obesogens
    Part VI: The roles of diet and energy expenditure in obesity pathogenesis and complications. Early feeding practices and development of childhood obesity
    Dietary interventions in the treatment of paediatric obesity
    Vegetarian diets and pediatric obesity
    Energy expenditure in children: the role of neat (non-exercise activity thermogenesis)
    Part VII: Metabolic complications of childhood obesity. Obesity and the endocrine system, part I: pathogenesis of weight gain in endocrine and metabolic disorders
    Obesity and the endocrine system, part II: the effects of childhood obesity on growth and bone maturation, thyroid and adrenal function, sexual development, and bone mineralization
    Metabolomic signatures and metabolic complications in childhood obesity
    Immune function in obesity
    Pathogenesis of insulin resistance and glucose intolerance in childhood obesity
    Youth-onset type 2 diabetes
    Pathogenesis and management of dyslipidemia in obese children
    Fatty liver disease
    Pathogenesis of hypertension and renal disease in obese children
    Sleep-disordered breathing and sleep duration in childhood obesity
    Pediatric metabolic syndrome: long-term risks for type 2 diabetes and cardiovascular disease
    Childhood obesity, atherogenesis, and adult cardiovascular disease
    Childhood obesity and cognitive function
    Part VIII: Treatment of childhood obesity: lifestyle intervention. Family-based behavioral interventions for childhood obesity
    Exercise and childhood obesity
    School- and community-based interventions for childhood obesity
    Part IX: Pharmacotherapy and bariatric surgery for obesity and co-morbidities. Role of pharmacotherapy in the treatment of pediatric obesity and its comorbidities
    Pathogenesis and management of adiposity and insulin resistance in polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS)
    Prevention and treatment of obesity and metabolic dysfunction in children with major behavioral disorders: second-generation antipsychotics
    Bariatric surgery in adolescents
    Part X: Challenges to long-term success. The role of the primary care provider in long-term counseling: establishing a therapeutic alliance with the child and family
    The sociocultural context for obesity prevention and treatment in children and adolescents: influences of ethnicity and gender
    Part XI: The future of childhood obesity in the global marketplace
    Fast-food value chains and childhood obesity: a global perspective
    Why we need local, state, and national policy-based approaches to improve children’s nutrition in the United States
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    by American Academy of Pediatrics Section on Obesity; edited by Christopher F. Bolling and Victoria W. Rogers.
    Summary: Obtain the latest tools and practice recommendations from leading experts on how to tackle childhood obesity. Completely revised and updated, the third edition provides clinicians with point-of-care guidance on the assessment, prevention, and treatment of obesity in children older than 2 years. This convenient flip chart includes full-color illustrations throughout, providing health care professionals with practical support and guidance to help improve care and outcomes for all children.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Carolina Witchmichen Penteado Schmidt.
    Summary: There are few publications about chemotherapy in children, and none of them is a book aimed at pharmacists. Pediatric Oncology Pharmacy is an area where more and more specific knowledge is required in daily practice. Pharmacists who work in pediatric oncology area do not have a book directed at them; none of the oncopediatric books addresses topics unique to pharmacy - such as manipulation of cytotoxic drugs for children, analysis of oncopediatric prescriptions, clinical pharmacy in oncopediatrics, pharmaceutical care in oncopediatric area, and other subjects that are of exclusive interest to these professionals, but no less essential for a therapy of excellence. As for this need, the purpose of this book is to be a guideline for all subjects that pediatric oncology pharmacists need to know to work in this area. It will be an essential guide to pediatric oncology pharmacists, clinical pharmacists, pharmaceutical residents who work with drug therapy in children and pharmaceutical researchers. It will be a pocket guide to assist in daily practice, and it will be essential to Pediatric Oncology/ Hematology Institutions. The essential propose of this book is to be the first one focusing pediatric oncology for pharmacists.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Paul Imbach, Thomas Kuehne, Robert Arceci, eds.
    Contents:
    General Aspects of Childhood Leukemia
    Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia
    Acute Myeloid Leukemia
    Myelodysplastic Syndrome
    Myeloproliferative Neoplasms
    Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Hodgkin Disease
    Histiocytoses
    Brain Tumors
    Neuroblastoma
    Renal Tumors
    Soft Tissue Sarcomas
    Osteosarcoma
    Ewing Sarcoma Family of Tumors
    Retinoblastoma
    Germ Cell Tumors
    Hepatic Tumors
    Rare Tumors
    Emergencies in Pediatric Oncology
    Oncological Nursing Care
    Psychology and Psychosocial Issues in Children with Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editor, Leonard B. Nelson, MD, MBA, Director, Strabismus Center, Co-Director, Pediatric Ophthalmology and Ocular Genetics, Wills Eye Hospital, Associate Professor of Ophthalmology and Pediatrics, Jefferson Medical College of Thomas Jefferson University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania ; section editors, Michael J. Bartiss, OD, MD, Caroline DeBenedictis, MD, Kammi B. Gunton, MD, Judith B. Lavrich, MD, Kara C. LaMattina, MD, Alex V. Levin, MD, MHSc, FRCSC, Scott E. Olitsky, MD, Bruce M. Schnall, MD, Aldo Vagge, MD, PhD student, Barry N. Wasserman, MD ; series editor, Christopher J. Rapuano, MD, Director and Attending Surgeon, Cornea Service, Co-Director, Refractive Surgery Department, Wills Eye Hospital, Professor of Ophthalmology, Sidney Kimmel Medical College at Thomas Jefferson University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
    Contents:
    Abnormalities affecting the eye as a whole
    Congenital corneal opacity
    Glaucoma
    Iris anomalies
    Lens anomalies
    Pediatric uveitis
    Congenital abnormalities of the optic nerve
    Retinal anomalies
    Eyelid anomalies
    Lacrimal anomalies
    Strabismus disorders
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Aparna Ramasubramanian, editor.
    Summary: The book provides a comprehensive review of the current trends in pediatric ophthalmology. It covers well-researched and up-to-date information and keeps the readers updated with the current literature. Pediatric ophthalmology is a vast area with multiple subspecialties and the book helps streamline the literature for rapid reference. The editors and authors are experts in the field. The book is helpful for the general ophthalmologist, ocular oncologist, ophthalmology residents and fellows in training optometrists.

    Contents:
    1 Epidemiology of myopia and update on slowing the progression of myopia
    2 Current management of amblyopia
    3 Update on pediatric refractive surgery
    4 Advances in management of retinopathy of prematurity
    5 Update on infantile periocular hemangioma
    6 Current management of pediatric uveitis
    7 Update on retinoblastoma management
    8 Current update on idiopathic intracranial hypertension
    9 Current management of pediatric glaucoma
    10 Congenital cataract an update
    11 Pediatric corneal transplantation
    12 Clinical guide to management of childhood nystagmus
    13 Update on management of optic nerve glioma.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Kenneth W. Wright, Yi Ning J. Strube.
    Summary: Completely updated and revised, the fourth edition provides primary care physicians with must-know information on eye examinations, eye disorders, vision screening, strabismus, dyslexia, ocular trauma, genetic syndromes, and all pediatric-specific eye issues likely to be encountered in primary care.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Roman Shinder, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to cover the important pediatric ophthalmic diagnoses that present in the emergency room. A collaborative work of experienced experts, it describes the history, examination, testing, epidemiology, pathogenesis, treatment, and prognosis for a variety of disorders. Richly illustrated, the book offers an invaluable tool for all specialists and trainees entrusted with the care of children presenting with ocular conditions. Across 17 comprehensive yet concise chapters, this book provides an overview on a number of typical pathologies, including trauma, infections, inflammations, and tumors. Organized into five sections, each chapter is written to relay broad insight into the common ophthalmic conditions that may bring a child in for an acute healthcare visit. Additionally, skillfully written text is further supplemented by many high-quality images, including clinical photographs, fundus images, radiographs, and intraoperative photos. Pediatric Ophthalmology in the Emergency Room meets the market need for a resource on this specific topic designed for trainee instruction. It is a valuable text for medical students, residents, and fellows, as well as anyone involved in the urgent or emergent care of children, including ER physicians, ophthalmologists, optometrists and other personnel.

    Contents:
    PART 1. INTRODUCTION
    1. Pediatric Patient Encounter in the Emergency Department
    2. Ocular Motility in the Pediatric Emergency Room
    3. Imaging the Pediatric Patient
    PART 2. OPHTHALMIC TRAUMA
    4. Orbital Trauma
    5. Eyelid Trauma
    6. The Nasolacrimal System
    7. Pediatric Corneal Emergencies
    8. Anterior Chamber and Lens
    9. Retina and the Posterior Segment
    10. Neuro-Ophthalmic Trauma
    PART 3. INFECTIONS
    11. Ocular Infections
    12. Extraocular
    PART 4. INFLAMMATIONS
    13. Ocular Inflammation
    14. Extraocular Inflammation
    PART 5. OPHTHALMIC CANCER AND MASSES
    15. Tumors
    16. Ophthalmic Plastics
    17. Headache and Visual Loss.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sylvia H. Yoo.
    Summary: "Children can be affected by a wide range of ophthalmic disorders, many of which require surgical intervention. Pediatric Ophthalmology Surgery and Procedures: Tricks of the Trade by esteemed pediatric ophthalmologist Sylvia Yoo and expert contributors covers the full range of pediatric ophthalmic procedures. As with other titles in this series, the book is consistently formatted with concise, step-by-step guidance. Chapters include goals, advantages, expectations, key principles, indications, contraindications, preoperative preparation, surgical planning, perioperative tips and pearls, operative technique and tools, what to avoid, complications, and postoperative care"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Preparation for Strabismus Surgery / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Surgical Anatomy for Strabismus Surgery / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Conjunctival Incisions for Strabismus Surgery / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Rectus Muscle Surgery / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Adjustable Suture Technique / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Inferior Oblique Muscle Surgery / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Superior Oblique Surgery / Catherine S. Choi and Sylvia H. Yoo
    Reoperations / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Special Strabismus Procedures / Catherine S. Choi and Sylvia H. Yoo
    Botulinum Toxin Injection for Strabismus / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Nasolacrimal Duct Probing, Intubation, and Balloon Dilation / Catherine S. Choi and Maanasa Indaram
    Dermoid Cyst Excision / Alison B. Callahan
    Pediatric Cataract Extraction. / Sylvia H. Yoo
    Goniotomy / Helen H. Yeung
    Trabeculotomy / Helen H. Yeung
    Corneal Collagen Cross-Linking for Keratoconus / Maanasa Indaram
    Laser Therapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity / Shilpa J. Desai and Michelle C. Liang
    Anti-Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor Therapy for Retinopathy of Prematurity / Michelle C. Liang and Shilpa J. Desai
    Preparations for Examinations under Anesthesia / Sylvia H. Yoo.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    editors, John F. Sarwark and Cynthia R. LaBella
    Summary: Fully revised and updated, the third edition delivers targeted guidance on the diagnosis, treatment, and management of orthopaedic problems and sports injuries.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    Frederic Shapiro.
    Summary: Volume 2 of this comprehensive and state-of-the-art text on pediatric orthopedic deformities focuses on conditions of the lower extremity. Developmental disorders of the hip - developmental dysplasia of the hip (DDH), Legg-Calvé-Perthes disease (LCP), coxa vara including slipped capital femoral epiphysis (SCFE), and femoroacetabular impingement (FAI) - the knee, the ankle and foot, as well as rotational and angular deformities of the lower limb are discussed in detail. Presentation for each deformity includes: definition, detailed review of the pathoanatomy, experimental biological investigations (where applicable), natural history, review of the evolution of diagnostic and treatment techniques, results achieved with the various approaches, and current management approaches with detailed descriptions of surgical technique. Extensive illustrations, figures and photos provide clear visual depictions of the range of deformity for the various disorders, underlying histopathology, imaging findings and treatment approaches. Multiple tables provide concentrated information, especially for the treatment options based on the severity of the particular disorder and deformity. Based on a solid understanding of the underlying pathobiology of deformities of the developing musculoskeletal system, this second volume of Pediatric Orthopedic Deformities provides a penetrating, in-depth presentation on the lower extremity for pediatric orthopedic surgeons, adult orthopedic surgeons seeking a deeper understanding of how deformities developed, and all clinicians caring for pediatric patients with developmental deformities.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Rebecca Stein-Wexler, Sandra L. Wootton-Gorges, M.B. Ozonoff, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric Orthopedic Imaging is an indispensable reference for pediatric and musculoskeletal radiologists, as well as orthopedic surgeons. It offers in depth analysis of pediatric orthopedic imaging, covering normal and aberrant development as well as both common and unusual pediatric disorders. Chapters on the spine, shoulder, elbow, hand and wrist, hip and pelvis, lower extremity, and foot and ankle address site-specific congenital and acquired lesions. Subsequent chapters cover generalized orthopedic diseases such as neurofibromatosis and osteogenesis imperfecta, infectious processes, neuromuscular diseases, musculoskeletal tumors, trauma, and orthopedic procedures. The chapters review associated epidemiology, clinical presentation and evolution, treatment, and differential diagnoses, with in-depht analysis of imaging characteristics. With more than 1800 images, high-quality MRI, CT, and US examples complement the radiographs of a broad variety of musculoskeletal disorders. The book has been thoroughly researched and clearly written by expert pediatric and musculoskeletal radiologists and extensively reviewed by pediatric orthopedic surgeons. This canonical text addresses conventional and advanced imaging of the complete spectrum of pediatric orthopedic pathology. Pediatric Orthopedic Imaging is an essential reference for all radiologists and orthopedic surgeons whose practice includes pediatrics.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Spine
    Upper Extremity
    The Hip
    The Lower Extremity
    The Foot
    Generalized Orthopedic Diseases of Childhood
    Neuromuscular Diseases
    Skeletal Trauma
    Orthopedic Procedures.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Christopher Iobst, Steven L. Frick, editors.
    Summary: Because pediatric orthopedic trauma involves fixing bones that are still growing, it has unique concerns and complexities that distinguish it from adult orthopedic trauma. Unlike previous books on this topic, this book utilizes a case atlas format to provide current management strategies for pediatric orthopedic injuries to the upper and lower extremity and axial skeleton in a clear and concise manner, demonstrating real-world clinical situations and methodology for successful treatment. Each case will be authored by an expert in the field and will contain comprehensive step-by-step instructions on how to handle each injury. In addition to pre-operative, intra-operative, and post-operative recommendations, each case will include multiple color images and radiographs, clinical pearls, and possible pitfalls to further guide the reader and provide the orthopedic surgeon, resident and fellow with quick, credible and reliable answers to "How do I fix this?".

    Contents:
    Acture with Closed Triradiate
    Hip Dislocation
    Hip Dislocation with Acetabular Fracture
    Hip Dislocation with Proximal Femoral Physeal Fracture
    Femoral Head Fractures
    Transphyseal Fracture of Proximal Femur
    Femoral Neck Fractures in Children
    Pediatric Intertrochanteric Proximal Femur Fracture
    Pathologic Proximal Femur Fracture
    Proximal Femoral Stress Fractures
    Greater Trochanter Fracture
    Hip Dislocation with Midshaft Femur Fracture
    Femoral Shaft Fracture: Pavlik Harness
    Femoral Shaft Fracture: Spica Cast
    Femoral Shaft Fracture: Plating
    Femoral Shaft Fracture: Flexible Intramedullary Nails
    Femur Fracture: Alternatives to Spica Casting for Fractures in Patients Under Age 6
    Comminuted Femoral Fracture Treated with Locked Enders Nails
    Pathologic Femoral Shaft Fracture
    Open Femur Fracture with Soft Tissue Loss
    Supracondylar Femur Fracture: Treatment with a Submuscular Plate
    Treatment of a Pediatric Open Supracondylar Femur Fracture with External Fixation
    Salter-Harris I Fracture of the Distal Femur
    Salter-Harris II Distal Femur Fracture
    Salter-Harris III Distal Femur Fracture
    Salter-Harris IV Distal Femur Fracture
    Floating Knee: Combined Femoral and Tibial Fractures
    Patella Fracture
    Patellar Sleeve Fracture
    Tibial Spine Fractures: Open Treatment
    Arthroscopic Treatment of Tibial Spine Fractures
    Tibial Tuberosity Fracture
    Youth Type
    Physeal Type Tibial Tuberosity Fracture in an Adolescent
    Tibial Tuberosity Fractures: Intra-Articular Type
    Tibial Tubercle Fracture: Teen Type
    Proximal Tibial Metaphyseal Fracture
    Tibial Shaft Fracture: Flexible Nails
    Tibial Shaft Fracture: Plating
    Submuscular Plating of Tibial Fractures
    Tibial Shaft Fracture Treated with a Rigid Nail
    Tibial Shaft Fracture Treated with a Circular External Fixator
    Tibial Shaft Fracture with Soft Tissue Loss
    Tibial Shaft Fracture with Bone Loss
    Tibial Shaft Stress Fracture
    Compartmen t Syndrome of the Leg
    Tibial Shaft Fracture: Cast Treatment
    Osteochondral Fracture
    Distal Tibial Metaphyseal Fracture
    Plating
    Distal Tibial Shaft Fracture with Metaphyseal Extension: External Fixation
    Salter-Harris II Distal Tibia and Fibula Fractures
    Salter-Harris III Distal Tibia Fracture
    Isolated Lateral Malleolus Fracture
    Triplane Distal Tibia Fractures
    Management of Tillaux Fractures
    Isolated Medial Malleolus Fracture
    Talar Fracture
    Calcaneus Fracture in Children
    Pediatric Lisfranc
    Base of Fifth Metatarsal Fracture
    Pediatric Metatarsal Fractures
    Intra-articular Phalanx Fracture of Great Toe
    Compartment Syndrome of Foot.-.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Amr Abdelgawad, Osama Naga, editors.
    Summary: Topics in pediatric orthopedics routinely surface in general pediatrics and primary care medicine, whether on board exams or in clinical practice. Musculoskeletal-related problems are common presenting complaints in any general pediatric or family medicine practice, and in emergency medicine. From birth injuries to musculoskeletal infections and sport-related injuries, many orthopedic conditions and presenting complaints must be addressed by the primary care physician or pediatrician. Pediatric Orthopedics: Handbook for Primary Care Physicians is a concise and targeted handbook filled with all need-to-know conditions, injuries, and diseases, supplemented by over three hundred photos and illustrations. It describes common orthopedic conditions, how to diagnose them, and the indications to either treat these conditions or refer the child to an orthopedist. Readers will learn the natural history of orthopedic diseases and how to differentiate between normal development and abnormal pathological conditions. An easy-to-read bulleted format highlights the most pertinent information for conditions commonly encountered in primary care. In addition, the book provides critical information used to answer musculoskeletal questions on the pediatrics board exam. The two editors come from different specialties (pediatric orthopedics and pediatrics) and present topics in a practical and problem-oriented method. Pediatric Orthopedics: Handbook for Primary Care Physicians is invaluable to all health providers taking care of children, including pediatricians, family medicine physicians, emergency medicine physicians, nurse practitioners, physical therapists, and medical students.

    Contents:
    Introduction to topics in pediatric orthopedics
    Birth injuries
    Musculoskeletal infections
    Tumor and tumor-like conditions
    Hip
    Knee
    Foot
    Upper extremity
    Spine
    Neuromuscular diseases
    Trauma
    General/metabolic conditions affecting bones.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jan Douwes Visser.
    Summary: This book presents the most common site-specific pediatric orthopedic problems seen in clinical practice. Detailed discussions of disorders of the chest wall, neck, back, pelvic, upper- and lower limb, leg length discrepancy, abnormal gate, congenital deficiencies, bone and joint infections are included in this comprehensive resource. Operative treatments are discussed throughout the book with the key focus on managing the patient and the use of the conservative approach. As such, the main benefit of this book is as a diagnostic tool to assess children with orthopedic disease. Designed to lead the reader from the initial physical examination through to making the most likely diagnosis, there is advice on what additional studies are meaningful, when there is an indication for referral and what advice can be provided for the patient. The value of the book is increased by hundreds of color images, thus making it easily accessible for pediatric orthopedic surgeons, pediatricians, pediatric physiotherapists, podiatrists, pediatricians, rehabilitation specialists and primary care physicians with an interest in the subject.

    Contents:
    Shoulder
    Elbow
    Forearm
    Wrist And Hand
    Hip Disorders
    Knee
    Lower Leg
    Ankle
    Foot
    Toes
    Leg Length Discrepancy
    Abnormal Gait
    Chest Wall
    Neck
    Back
    Pelvis
    Bone And Joint Infections
    Congenital Deficiencies.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Amr Abdelgawad, Osama Naga, Marwa Abdou, editors.
    Summary: The revised and the expanded second edition of this concise and targeted handbook presents the need-to-know musculoskeletal conditions and injuries required for all health care providers dealing with pediatric patients, including primary care physicians, emergency medicine physicians, radiologists, residents, students, nurses, and therapists, to brush up on pediatric orthopedics and sports medicine topics with ease. The most up-to-date information is contained within themed chapters--sports injuries and pediatric trauma, for example--as well as by anatomical region--the hip, knee, foot, spine, etc.--including chapters new to this edition covering pediatric musculoskeletal image interpretation and general aspects of sports medicine. This book addresses high-yield points needed for both general day-to-day pediatric orthopedics and sports medicine practice as well as information needed for the musculoskeletal section of the General Pediatrics Certifying Examination and other board exams for other specialties, physician assistants, nurse practitioners, and physical therapists. Well-illustrated and utilizing an easy-to-follow, bullet-pointed format, Pediatric Orthopedics and Sports Medicine gives the reader the basic knowledge to be able to identify and understand the management of common pediatric orthopedic and sports medicine conditions, and indications to either treat these conditions or refer the patient to an orthopedist.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Orthopedic Nomenclature
    Pediatric Musculoskeletal Imaging
    Growth and Development and Their Relation to Musculoskeletal Conditions
    Metabolic Diseases
    General Conditions Affecting the Bones
    Birth Injuries and Orthopedic Manifestations in Newborns
    The Hip
    The Knee/Leg
    The Foot
    The Hand and Upper Extremity
    Sports Medicine: General Aspects
    Sports Injury: Lower Extremity
    Sports injury: Upper Extremity
    Management of Pediatric Orthopedic Patients During the Postoperative Period
    Tumors and Tumor-like Conditions
    Spasticity and Gait
    Non-Accidental Trauma
    Orthopedic Trauma
    Approach to the Limping Child
    Casts, Splints and Braces
    Pediatric Spine
    Neuromuscular Conditions
    Musculoskeletal Infections.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sattar Alshryda, Lisa Jackson, Nandu Thalange, Ali AlHammadi, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, evidence-based guide on how to manage pediatric orthopedic problems safely and confidently. The format allows the reader to identify key points whilst working in their busy clinical practice. Each chapter is co-written by an orthopedic surgeon and general practitioner to ensure the content is relevant to primary care, but also sufficiently detailed to meet the needs of those in specialist training. The book is divided into two parts; general topics including assessment, normal variants, infections and specific disorders; followed by a section based on specific anatomical regions. Pediatric Orthopedics for Primary Healthcare: Evidence-Based Practice will be an essential resource for a wide audience including but not limited to general practitioners and trainees, pediatric orthopedic surgeons, trauma surgeons, orthopedic residents, emergency department doctors, physiotherapists, podiatrists and medical students who are seeking a concise, yet comprehensive evidence-based resource for this important specialty.

    Contents:
    A. General section: This covers general topics including the followings:
    1. Introduction
    2. Children normal development
    3. General assessment
    4. Normal variants
    5. Infections
    6. Tumours
    7. Metabolic bone diseases
    8. Neuromuscular conditions
    9. Relevant syndromes
    10. Musculoskeletal Dysplasias
    11. Limb Deformity
    12. Safeguarding Children
    13. Miscellaneous Paediatric Orthopaedic Condition
    B. Region specific topics. This is based on body regions:
    14. Paediatric hip disorders
    15. Paediatric knee disorders
    16. Paediatric foot disorders
    17. Paediatric spine disorders
    18. Paediatric shoulder disorders
    19. Paediatric elbow disorders
    20. Paediatric hand and wrist disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Fritz Hefti ; foreword second edition from S. Wientroub and D. R. Wenger ; foreword first edition from J. R. Kasser and G. D. MacEwen in collaboration with R. Brunner, F. Freuler, C. Hasler, G. Jundt and A. Krieg ; translated by R. Hinchliffe ; freehand drawings by Franz Freuler ; schematic drawings by F. Hefti.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] R.W. Clarke.
    Summary: Ear, nose, and throat diseases present and progress very differently in children than in adults, needing different diagnostic and treatment strategies. Training in the subspecialty of pediatric otolaryngology is often part of a general ENT program and not a program in itself. As such, the general otolaryngologist may be insufficiently prepared to handle certain pediatric cases. R.W. Clarke's Pediatric Otolaryngology: Practical Clinical Management aims to provide the pediatric ENT resident or fellow, as well as the general ENT practitioner, with sound clinical guidance on ENT pathologies as th.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
  • Digital
    Scott R. Schoem, David H. Darrow, editors
    Summary: Pediatric Otolaryngology for Primary Care, 2nd Edition is the first place to turn for expert help with the myriad ear, nose, and throat disorders.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Section 1: Ear and Temporal Bone
    Chapter 1: Neonatal Hearing Screening, Hearing Loss, and Treatment for Hearing Loss
    Chapter 2: Management and Treatment of Patients With Acute and Chronic Otitis Media
    Chapter 3: Facial Paralysis
    Chapter 4: Diseases and Anomalies of the Auricle and External Auditory Canal
    Chapter 4: Diseases and Anomalies of the Auricle and External Auditory Canal
    Section 2: Nose and Sinus
    Chapter 6: Neonata Nasal Obstruction
    Chapter 7: Rhinosinusitis
    Chapter 8: Epistaxis Chapter 9: Pediatric Nasal and Facial Fractures
    Section 3: Oropharynx
    Chapter 10: Disorders of the Tonsils and Adenoid
    Chapter 11: Pediatric Oropharyngeal Trauma
    Chapter 12: Cleft Lip and Palate
    Section 4: Neck
    Chapter 13: Neck Masses and Adenopathy
    Chapter 14: Deep Neck Space Infection
    Chapter 15: Salivary Gland Disorders in Children
    Section 5: Airway and Swallowing
    Chapter 16: Stridor in Infants and Children
    Chapter 17: Feeding Disorders and Ankyloglossia in Infants and Children
    Chapter 18: Gastroesophageal and Laryngopharyngeal Reflux Chapter 19: Speech and Voice Disorders
    Chapter 20: Drooling and Salivary Aspiration
    Chapter 21: Chronic Cough in Children
    Chapter 22: Aerodigestive Tract Foreign Bodies
    Chapter 23: Pediatric Tracheostomy
    Section 6: General
    Chapter 24: Otolaryngological Disorders in Down Syndrome
    Chapter 25: Vascular Anomalies
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    [editors,] Karen Frush, Steven E. Krug.
    Contents:
    Quality improvement methods and improvement science / Binita Patel, Joan Shook
    Applying quality improvement in practice / David B. Cooperberg, Alex R. Kemper
    Medical errors, adverse events, and human factors / John M. Brookey, Doug Bonacum
    Medication safety / Lori Kotsonis-Chiampas, Janice Nuuhiwa, Steven Krug
    The role of leaderhship in safe and reliable peditatric care / Allan Frankel, Michael Leonard
    Teamwork and communication / Kyle J. Rehder, Susan M. Hohenhaus, Heidi B. King
    The importance of information technology in pediatric patient safety / Eric Tham
    Engaging patients and families / Leigh Ann Simmons, Sorrel King, Karen Frush
    Special perspectives for neonates / Chris DeRienzo
    Professional accountability and pursuit of a culture of safety / Gerald B. Hickson, Ilene N. Moore.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2015
  • Digital
    Reggie C. Hamdy, Neil Saran, editors.
    Summary: This unique, case-based text offers a comprehensive discussion of pelvic and proximal femoral osteotomies in the pediatric population. Beginning with chapters on preoperative planning and radiologic evaluation of the adolescent hip, subsequent chapters are sensibly divided into three thematic sections, which use a consistent chapter format presenting the case history, relevant imaging, treatment goals, the management strategy, and clinical pearls and pitfalls. Part I describes the various pediatric pelvic osteotomies, including the Salter, Pol de Coeur, Tönnis, Pemberton, and San Diego approaches, among others. Pediatric proximal femoral osteotomies comprise part II, presenting the McHale procedure, varus and valgus osteotomies, Morscher osteotomy, and Shepherd's Crook deformity, to name just a few. The final section covers combined and miscellaneous osteotomies and procedures for the pediatric hip, such as osteochondroplasty, hip instability, hip arthrodesis, and SUPERhip and SUPERhip2 procedures for congenital femoral deficiency. Each chapter is generously illustrated and includes a handy table of indications and contraindications for the procedure described. In infancy, childhood and adolescence, the hip joint is very susceptible to abnormalities (congenital or acquired) that may lead to morphological alterations with potential sequelae, specifically pain and difficulty to ambulate, sit and perform daily activities. Restoring normal anatomy and biomechanics of the hip joint by various pelvic and/or proximal femoral osteotomies remains the cornerstone in the management of these conditions. To this end, Pediatric Pelvic and Proximal Femoral Osteotomies will be an invaluable resource for all pediatric orthopedic surgeons, trainees and students both in the medical and paramedical field.

    Contents:
    Perioperative planning for pelvic and/or proximal femoral osteotomies
    Radiologic evaluation of the adolescent hip
    Pediatric pelvic osteotomies
    Pediatric proximal femoral osteotomies
    Combined/miscellaneous osteotomies and procedures around the hip joint.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors: Wieland Kiess, Matthias Schwab, Johannes van den Anker.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Karen G. Duderstadt.
    Summary: This guide teaches the unique range of skills needed to assess children of all ages. Provides quick reference in clinical settings.

    Contents:
    Approach to care and assessment of children and adolescents
    Assessment parameters
    Developmental surveillance and screening
    Comprehensive information gathering
    Environmental health history
    Newborn assessment
    Skin assessment
    Heart and vascular assessment
    Chest and respiratory assessment
    Head and neck assessment
    Lymphatic system assessment
    Eyes
    Ears
    Nose, mouth, and throat
    Abdomen and rectum
    Male genitalia
    Male and female breast
    Female genitalia
    Musculoskeletal assessment
    Neurological assessment.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Arin K. Greene.
    Summary: With contributions from top experts in the field, Pediatric Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery provides clinically-focused text on the full spectrum of common and rare congenital and acquired pediatric conditions. Organized into six major sections, every chapter reflects the expertise of leading authorities who discuss specific topics for which they have achieved prominence. The organizational structure is consistent throughout 43 chapters, covering core essentials for managing the patient: introduction, diagnosis, nonsurgical management, operative treatment, complications, and key points. Key Features: Surgical approaches for craniofacial disorders such as craniosynostosis, craniofacial syndromes, plagiocephaly, and hemifacial microsomia; The use of cranioplasty to repair skull defects and orthognathic correction for jaw deformities; Treatment of unilateral and bilateral cleft lip, cleft palate, Robin sequence, secondary cleft deformities, and velopharyngeal insufficiency; Reconstructive techniques for soft tissue deformities of the head and neck including microtia; Trunk and lower extremity disorders including genital and breast abnormalities; Upper extremity disorders such as hypoplastic thumb, syndactyly, polydactyly, as well as hand trauma; Diseases of the integument including vascular anomalies, burns, melanocytic nevi, and skin lesions. -- Publisher

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: I. Craniofacial Disorders / Gary F. Rogers
    1. Craniosynostosis / Stephen M. Warren
    2. Craniofacial Syndromes / June K. Wu
    3. Deformational Plagiocephaly, Brachycephaly, and Scaphocephaly / Benjamin C. Wood
    4. Craniofacial Microsomia / Jesse A. Taylor
    5. Orbital Hypertelorism / Anand Kumar
    6. Rare Craniofacial Clefts / Reza Jarrahy
    7. Facial Fractures / Joseph Edward Losee
    8. Cranioplasty / Gary F. Rogers
    9. Osseous Lesions of the Craniofacial Region / Salim Afshar
    10. Distraction Osteogenesis / Derek M. Steinbacher
    11. Orthognathic Correction of Jaw Deformities / Cory M. Resnick
    II. Cleft Lip and Palate / Arin K. Greene
    12. Dental and Orthodontic Management of Cleft Lip and Palate / Stephen Shusterman
    13. Unilateral Cleft Lip / Paul Durand
    14. Bilateral Cleft Lip / Alexander C. Allori
    15. Cleft Palate / Carolyn R. Rogers-Vizena
    16. Robin's Sequence / Kamlesh B. Patel Note continued: 17. Secondary Cleft Lip and Nasal Reconstruction / Roberto L. Flores
    18. Velopharyngeal Dysfunction / Howard Wang
    III. Soft-Tissue Deformities of the Head and Neck / Arin K. Greene
    19. Soft-Tissue Injuries / Arin K. Greene
    20. Ear Reconstruction / Arin K. Greene
    21. Microtia / Akira Yamada
    22. Nasal Reconstruction / Peter J. Taub
    23. Facial Paralysis / Greg Borschel
    24. Scalp, Cheek, and Neck Deformities / Arin K. Greene
    IV. Trunk and Lower Extremity / Brian I. Labow
    25. Macromastia / Brian I. Labow
    26. Gynecomastia / Brian I. Labow
    27. Breast Asymmetry / Brian I. Labow
    28. Anterior Trunk Disorders / Brian I. Labow
    29. Posterior Trunk Disorders / Arin K. Greene
    30. Genital Anomalies / Richard J. Redett
    31. Lower Extremity / Amir H. Taghinia
    V. Upper Extremity / Amir H. Taghinia
    32. Embryology and Classification of Hand Differences / Gill Smith
    33. Disorders of Failure of Formation in the Upper Limb / Bran Sivakumar Note continued: 34. Thumb Hypoplasia / Joseph Upton
    35. Syndactyly / Amir H. Taghinia
    36. Polydactyly / Steven L Moran
    37. Macrodactyly / Brian I. Labow
    38. Brachial Plexus Palsies / Angela B. Lipira
    39. Pediatric Hand Trauma / Amir H. Taghinia
    VI. Integument / Arin K. Greene
    40. Vascular Anomalies / Arin K. Greene
    41. Burns / Branko Bojovic
    42. Melanocytic Nevi / Arin K. Greene
    43. Pediatric Skin Lesions / Arin K. Greene.
  • Digital
    edited by Peter J. Taub and Timothy W. King.
    Summary: With contributions from the leading experts in the field, Pediatric Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery for Primary Care provides primary care pediatricians and other professionals who care for children comprehensive coverage of both common and rare congenital and acquired pediatric conditions

    Contents:
    Intro
    Acknowledgments
    Preface
    Chapter 1: Cleft Lip and Palate
    Chapter 2: Craniosynostosis
    Chapter 3: Vascular Anomalies
    Chapter 4: Congenital Ear Deformities
    Chapter 5: Orthognathic Surgery
    Chapter 6: Pediatric Facial Fractures
    Chapter 7: Eyelid Anomalies
    Chapter 8: Facial Paralysis
    Chapter 9: Pediatric Neck Masses
    Chapter 10: Congenital Hand Anomalies
    Chapter 11: Pediatric Burn Injury
    Chapter 12: Skin and Soft-Tissue Lesions
    Chapter 13: Breast Anomalies
    Chapter 14: Abdominal Wall Anomalies
    Chapter 15: Posterior Trunk Anomalies Chapter 16: Aesthetic Surgery in the Pediatric Patient
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Print
    Francis X. Paletta, with 419 ill. ; original artwork by Elisabeth North.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Trauma.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    P526 .P15 1967
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Michael S. Kappy, Mitchell E. Geffner, David B. Allen.
    Contents:
    General concepts and physiology / Kathleen Bethin and John S. Fuqua
    Normal growth and growth disorders / Orit Pinhas-Hamiel, Paul Czernichow, Philip Zeitler, and David B. Allen
    Puberty / Jon M. Nakamoto, Sherry L. Franklin, and Mitchell E. Geffner
    Thyroid / Ari J. Wassner & Stephen A. Huang
    Adrenal disorders / Mimi S. Kim and Patricia A. Donohoue
    Disorders of sex development / Peter A. Lee, Selma F. Witchel, and Christopher P. Houk
    Disorders of bone and mineral metabolism / Andrea Kelly and Michael A. Levine
    Posterior pituitary and disorders of water metabolism / Abhinash Srivatsa, Joseph A. Majzoub, and Michael S. Kappy
    Obesity, metabolic syndrome, and dyslipidemia / Lisa D. Madison, Laurie R. Armsby, and Bruce A. Boston
    Enteric hormones / Matthew Egberg, Ellen Lancon Connor, Matthew Egberg, and Ellen Lancon Connor
    Diabetes mellitus. Part A. Introduction to diabetes / David W. Cooke [and seven others]
    Part B. Type 1 diabetes mellitus / David W. Cooke and Leslie Plotnick
    Part C. Type 2 diabetes mellitus / R. Paul Wadwa, Dana Dabelea, and Georgeanna J. Klingensmith
    Part D. Other specific types of diabetes mellitus and causes of hyperglycemia / Elizabeth Fudge, Janet H. Silverstein, and William E. Winter
    Hypoglycemia / Emily R. Miller, David B. Allen, and Robert J. Ferry, Jr.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2014
  • Digital
    Tina M. Slusher, Ashley R. Bjorklund, Stephanie M. Lauden, editors.
    Summary: Despite global advancements in pediatric medicine, technologies which have become standard-of-care in high-resource settings are unavailable in low-and middle-income countries due to cost, availability, or challenges maintaining equipment. This book compiles evidence-based and expert clinical procedural adaptations in an approachable, case-based, step-by-step guide, aimed to provide educational support for healthcare providers practicing in resource-limited settings. This responds to both the high demand for this content and the importance of gathering experts across continents and pediatric disciplines. Each chapter provides both a theoretical framework and practical discussion of high-yield procedural adaptations. Leading international researchers and seasoned clinicians with expertise using these adaptations were selected by the editors as authors. Chapters include an example case with adaptation use and detailed instructions including supplies, indications, risks, and benefits. Content is grounded in current best practice recommendations and evidence-based research. Highlighted by the COVID-19 pandemic, a mature understanding of pathophysiology and device design/safety is required when providing care in low-resource settings or in crisis times. In-person instruction is not always feasible. Written and virtual platforms remain critical in disseminating high-yield, practical content. This book is not a substitute for appropriate procedural training, though is easily modified to meet the educational needs of diverse learner groups. It is a valuable resource for appropriately trained practitioners practicing in accordance with local guidelines. Knowledge and fluency with pediatric procedural adaptations is critical in efforts to reduce global inequities and pediatric morbidity/mortality in low-resource settings.

    Contents:
    Background
    Procedural Adaptation Concepts in a low-resource settings
    Basics of Neonatal Intensive Care and Pediatric Intensive Care in a low-resource settings
    Neonatal Resuscitation Adaptations in a low-resource settings
    Phototherapy in a low-resource settings
    Umbilical Venous Catheter Placement in a low-resource settings
    Exchange Transfusions for Severe Hyperbilirubinemia in a low-resource settings
    Breastfeeding Tips in a low-resource settings
    Kangaroo Mother Care in a low-resource settings
    Obtaining Blood in Neonates and Children in a low-resource settings
    Pediatric Resuscitation in a low-resource settings
    Oral Rehydration in low-resource settings
    Nutrition and Fluid Alternatives and Tips in a low-resource settings
    Intra-osseous (IO) Needles with Stabilizers in a low-resource settings
    Intravenous Fluid Administration without Pumps in a low-resource settings
    Mixing Intravenous Fluids in a low-resource Setting
    Respiratory Equipment Adaptations in a low-resource Setting
    Bubble CPAP in a low-resource Setting
    Chest Drainage System in a low-resource Setting
    Performing Lumbar Puncture in a low-resource Setting
    Peritoneal Dialysis in a low-resource Setting
    Wound Vacuum-Assisted Closure Therapy in a low-resource Setting
    Burn Care in a low-resource Setting
    Low-fidelity simulations in a low-resource Setting
    Practice and implementation of procedural adaptations in a low-resource Setting.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Anna Belloni Fortina, Francesca Caroppo.
    Summary: This book focuses on childhood psoriasis; it comprehensively discusses various concepts and topics related to this widespread auto-immune disease, including its pathogenesis, clinical aspects, the most recent and proven therapeutic approaches as well as the management of the psychological burden generated in younger patients. By highlighting the latest information on the pathogenic mechanisms, this unique book illustrates the great variety of clinical manifestations of this condition in pediatric patients, which are often very different from those in adults and later onset cases. It describes state-of-the-art therapeutic approaches and the advantages and limitations of latest treatment options available, and also presents all comorbidities of the disease in childhood, focusing on cardiovascular and metabolic disorders, as well as on the psychological impact of the disease in both children and adolescents. Including over 200 original full-color illustrations, this book raises dermatologists’ and pediatricians’ awareness of this disease, which is increasingly being diagnosed during childhood. It also provides practical tools for best management. This clear, concise guide is intended for dermatologists, pediatricians, clinicians and researchers as well as residents in dermatology and pediatrics, but will appeal to all readers wanting to update their understanding of psoriasis in childhood.

    Contents:
    Preface
    1 Introduction
    2 Epidemiology
    3 Pathogenesis
    4 Immunopathogenesis
    5 Genetic Factors
    6 Environmental Factors
    7 Clinical Features of Pediatric Psoriasis
    8 Clinical types of Pediatric Psoriasis
    9 Plaque-type Psoriasis
    10 Guttate Psoriasis
    11 Inverse Psoriasis
    12 Scalp Psoriasis
    13 Napkin Psoriasis
    14 Nail Psoriasis
    15 ErythrodermicPsoriasis
    16 PustularPsoriasis
    17 Diagnosis
    18 Differential Diagnosis.-19 Treatment options for of Pediatric Psoriasis
    20 Topical Treatments
    21 Phototherapy
    22 Systemic Treatments
    23 Biologic Treatments
    24 Comorbidities of Pediatric Psoriasis
    25 Impact on Quality of Life.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rochelle Caplan, Julia Doss, Sigita Plioplys, Jana E. Jones.
    Summary: This volume describes the basics for short- and long-term treatment of Psychogenic Non-Epileptic Seizures (PNES) in children. The text acknowledges that the disorder, though rare and highly morbid, is treatable when it is not misdiagnosed. Given the limited diagnostic and clinical training offered to clinicians, this book aims to equip professionals with the tools needed to improve the poor quality of life of youth with PNES. The text begins by introducing the main features of the disorder and the problems involved in diagnosing PNES in children. It then describes techniques to overcome these problems in order to make a reliable and valid diagnosis of PNES, as well as provide feedback on the diagnosis and treatment plan. The last section describes the indications for cognitive behavior therapy for youth with PNES and suggested treatment paradigms. Incorporation of do's and don'ts and their relevant clinical examples in all sections of the proposed guide provide the reader with skills and techniques. The book also includes an appendix with resources for parents, children, and school nurses and teachers, relaxation techniques for the child and parents, templates of letters for the child's school about the condition and behavior management plan, templates of supporting letters from epileptologists and primary care physicians, CBT treatment paradigm, and information on individual supervision, workshops and webinars. Written by the few experts in this area, Pediatric Psychogenic Non-Epileptic Seizures is the ultimate guide for psychiatrists, psychologists, nurses, primary care physicians, neurologists, epileptologists, social workers, nurses, school counselors, and all medical professionals working with children experiencing seizures.

    Contents:
    Introduction and Overview
    Overview
    The underlying psychopathology, triggers, and risk factors
    Gold standard diagnosis
    Why is it difficult to diagnose pediatric PNES?
    Red flags during the clinical exam
    Techniques for the child diagnostic interview
    Strategies to use in the Initial parent interview
    Introduction: The importance of the feedback
    How to present feedback and treatment plan to the parents
    Approaches to use in the child feedback and description of the treatment plan
    Combined parent and child feedback and treatment plan
    Psychoeducation about PNES: Child, parents, treatment team, teachers
    How to develop rapport with the child and parents
    Strategies for NES symptom resolution through individual child therapy and work with the parents
    Child reintegration to school and regular life routines
    Treatment of comorbid psychopathology
    Long-term Therapy
    Introduction
    Goals for child therapy
    Goals for work with the parents
    Indications
    Application of CBT in anxiety and depression
    Essential CBT elements that enhance child goals
    Application of CBT to enhance parent goals
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    Kristin H. Kroll.
    Summary: "This book was written to help traditionally trained mental health clinicians become familiar with the basic principles and strategies used in pediatric psychology. This book provides resources to help clinicians enhance their clinical practice as well as providing resources for how to find further resources in specific areas based on the presenting problems of their patients and their own burgeoning clinical interests"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to pediatric psychological care
    Working with young children with medical concerns
    Working with school-aged children with medical concerns
    Working with adolescents with medical concerns
    Chronic illness and the family unit
    Psychological guidelines for specific medical conditions
    Special populations in pediatric psychology
    Technological applications and pediatric psychological care.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Mark A. Riddle, MD ; contributing editors, Rebecca A. Baum, Susan dosReis, Jane Meschan Foy, Emily Frosch, Cori Green, Lynne C. Huffman, David B. Pruitt, Gloria M. Reeves, Lawrence S. Wissow.
    Summary: Completely revised and updated, this best-selling resource provides primary care clinicians with practice-tested, condition-specific treatment recommendations for various childhood mental disorders. Obtain clear guidance on dosing, monitoring, and potential adverse reactions of psychotropic medications. Ease medication decision-making with a clear, straightforward methodology -- based on current research and clinical experience. This simple, systematic approach defines discrete groups of psychotropic medications and spells out group-specific roles and responsibilities in accordance with American Academy of Pediatrics policies. -- From publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Conceptual framework for prescribing psychotropic medication
    The psychosocial assessment in primary care
    Assessment of disorders, formulation, and feedback
    Before prescribing
    Group 1 medications for attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder
    Group 1 medications for anxiety and depression
    Group 2 medications: antipsychotics and mood stabilizers
    Group 3 medications
    What to do when treatment is not successful.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Mark A. Riddle
    Summary: Completely updated and revised, the third edition provides primary care physicians with practice-tested, condition-specific treatment recommendations for various childhood mental disorders. Obtain clear guidance on dosing, monitoring, and potential adverse reactions of psychotropic medications for treatment of common psychiatric disorders and mental health or behavioral problems in children and adolescents. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part 1: Before Prescribing
    Chapter 1. Getting Started
    Chapter 2. Conceptual Framework for Prescribing Psychotropic Medications
    Chapter 3. Making a Diagnosis
    Chapter 4. Laying the Groundwork
    Part 2: Group 1 Medications for Specific Diagnoses: Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder, Anxiety, and Depression
    Chapter 5. Group 1 Medications for Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
    Chapter 6. Group 1 Medications for Anxiety and Depression
    Part 3: Group 2 and Group 3 Medications
    Chapter 7. Group 2 Medications: FDA-Approved Antipsychotics and Mood Stabilizers
    Chapter 8. Group 3 Medications: Others Commonly Prescribed
    Part 4: After Prescribing: Midcourse Corrections
    Chapter 9. Fine Tuning Treatment
    Chapter 10. Managing Treatment Impasses
    Appendix A. Assessment and Symptom Monitoring Tools
    Appendix B. Resources for Clinicians
    Appendix C. Training Resources for Clinicians
    Appendix D. Quality Ratings for Psychotherapies and Efficacy Data for Medications
    Appendix E. Resources for Caregivers
    Appendix F. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition, Complete Criteria of Select Diagnoses.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Digital
    Anna N. Abrams, Anna C. Muriel, Lori Wiener, editors.
    Contents:
    Overview of Pediatric Oncology
    Communication
    Physical Impact of the Disease
    Assessment/Coping/Quality of Life
    Family Systems
    Psychiatric issues and treatment
    Education
    Adolescents
    Social Media
    Complementary Therapies
    End of Life Care
    Survivorship
    Advocacy.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    author, American Academy of Pediatrics Section on Pediatric Pulmonology and Sleep Medicine ; editors in chief, Dennis C. Stokes, Allen J. Dozor ; associate editors, Lee J. Brooks [and 5 others] ; radiology imaging editor, Lisa H. Hutchinson.
    Summary: Obtain practice-focused guidance on the diagnosis, evaluation and treatment of the most commonly encountered pediatric respiratory conditions, asthma-related difficulties, and sleep disorders -- Back cover.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2018
  • Digital
    [editors], Louis S. Constine, MD, FASTRO, The Philip Rubin Professor of Radiation Oncology and Pediatrics, Vice Chair, Department of Radiation Oncology, Director, The Judy DiMarzo Cancer Survivorship Program, James P. Wilmot Cancer Institute, University of Rochester Medical Center, Rochester, New York, Nancy J. Tarbell, MD, FASTRO, CC Wang Professor of Radiation Oncology, Department of Radiation Oncology, Massachusetts General Hospital, Dean for Academic and Clinical Affairs, Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts, Edward C. Halperin, MD, MA, Chancellor/Chief Executive Officer, Professor of Radiation Oncology, Pediatrics, and History, New York Medical College, Provost for Biomedical Affairs, Touro College and University, Valhalla, New York.
    Contents:
    The cancer problem in children
    Leukemias in children
    Supratentorial brain tumors
    Tumors of the posterior fossa and the spinal canal
    Retinoblastoma
    Neuroblastoma
    Hodgkin lymphoma
    Non-Hodgkin lymphoma
    Ewing sarcoma
    Osteosarcoma, chordoma, and chondrosarcoma
    Rhabdomyosarcoma
    Soft tissue sarcomas other than rhabdomyosarcoma; desmoid tumor
    Wilms tumor
    Liver tumors in children
    Germ and stromal cell tumors of the gonads and extragonadal germ cell tumors
    Endocrine, aerodigestive tract, and breast tumors
    Langerhans cell histiocytosis
    Vascular neoplasms and skin cancer
    Late effects of cancer treatment
    Second primary cancers
    Anesthesia for external beam radiotherapy
    Psychosocial aspects of radiotherapy for the child and family with cancer.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    Thomas E. Merchant, Rolf-Dieter Kortmann, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Ewing Sarcoma and DSRCT
    Rhabdomyosarcoma
    Non-rhabdomyosarcoma soft-tissue Sarcoma, Desmoid tumor and Osteosarcoma
    Neuroblastoma
    Wilms Tumor
    Rare in pediatric oncology
    Pediatric Glioma
    Medulloblastoma/non medulloblastoma embryonal tumors
    ATRT
    CNS Germ Cell Tumors
    Chilhood ependymoma
    Childhood craniopharyngioma
    Hematopoitic Stem Cell Transplantation
    Utilization of radiation for pediatric hodgkin Lymphoma
    Basic principles and advances in technology used for pediatric Radiotherapy
    Proton Therapy for pediatric malignancies
    Helical tomo therapy in pediatric-adolescent patients
    Localization, Verification, and Anesthesia
    Palliative radiotherapy and management of the pediatric oncology patients
    Pediatric radiotherapy in Low and Middle Income Countries
    Future Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editor, Edward Y. Lee ; associate editors, Winnie C. Chu, Jonathan R. Dillman, Andrea S. Doria, Ricardo Restrepo, Sara O. Vargas.
    Contents:
    Skull / Edward Yang and Tina Young Poussaint
    Brain / Sanjay P. Prabhu, Savvas Andronikou, Sara O. Vargas, and Richard L. Robertson, Jr
    Head and neck / Amy F. Juliano, Sara O. Vargas, and Caroline D. Robson
    Spinal cord / Ben Haverkamp, Peter Winningham, Winnie Chu, Lisa H. Lowe, and Paul G. Thacker
    Vertebral column / Esperanza Pacheco-Jacome, Kevin Moore, Sara O. Vargas, and L. Santiago Medina
    Lung / Benard Laya, Behrang Amini, Evan J. Zucker, Tracy Kilborn, K.M. Das, and Edward Y. Lee
    Pleura / Rama S. Ayyala and Edward Y. Lee
    Airway / Evan J. Zucker, Supika Kritsanepaiboon, Omolola M. Atalabi, Ricardo Restrepo, and Edward Y. Lee
    Heart / Lorna P. Browne, Edward Y. Lee, Oleksandr Kondrachuk, Marielle V. Fortier, Zhu Ming, and Cynthia K. Rigsby
    Great vessels / Monica Epelman, Pilar Garcia-Pena, Eric Chong, Magdalena Gormsen, and Edward Y. Lee
    Mediastinum / Paul G. Thacker, Ricardo Restrepo, and Edward Y. Lee
    Chest wall / Dawn R. Engelkemier, Peter Kruk, John Naheedy, Fred Avni, Yeun-Chung Ray Chang, and Edward Y. Lee
    Diaphragm / Mark C. Liszewski, Pedro Daltro, Celia Ferrari, Gloria Soto, Fred Avni, and Edward Y. Lee
    Liver, bile ducts, and gallbladder / Andrew T. Trout, Daniel B. Wallihan, Alexander J. Towbin, and Daniel J. Podberesky
    Pancreas, adrenal glands, and spleen
    Ethan a. smith, jonathan r. dillman, and peter j. strouse
    Gastrointestinal tract / Sudha A. Anupindi, Andria Powers, Suma Chandra, Jonathan R. Dillman, Michael S. Gee, and Asef Khwaja
    Kidneys and urinary tract / Jonathan R. Dillman and Kassa Darge
    Male genital tract / Andrew Phelps, Jesse Courter, Peter Marcovici, Sara O. Vargas, and John MacKenzie
    Female genital tract / Sharon W. Gould, Sabah Servaes, Edward Y. Lee, Jose Lipsich, Victor M. Terrazas Loya, and Monica S. Epelman
    Abdominal wall, mesentery, peritoneum, and vessels / Michael S. Gee, Rahul A. Sheth, Salwa Haidar, Dilip Sankhla, and Edward Y. Lee
    Normal growth and development/congenital disorders / Victor Ho-Fung, Adji Saptogino, Timothy Cain, Selim Doganay, and Diego Jaramillo
    Infection/inflammation / Clara Ortiz-Neira, Jennifer Stimec, Marcia Torre Moreira, and Andrea S. Doria
    Neoplasms / Hye-Kyung Yoon, Jung-Eun Cheon, and Hee Kyung Kim
    Trauma / Mark Bittman, Jeannette M. Peréz-Rossello, Donald A. Tracy, Abdu Shabani, and Edward Y. Lee
    Endocrine, metabolic, and arthropathies / Ricardo Restrepo, Edward Y. Lee, Paul Babyn, and Andrea S. Doria.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    [edited by] Michele Walters, Richard L. Robertson Jr.
    Contents:
    Introduction / Michael J. Callahan, Angela Franceschi, Stephen D. Brown, Sabeena Chako, and Michele Walters
    Chest / Patricia Trinidad Chang and Laureen Sena
    Cardiac / Jamie Frost and Laureen Sena
    Gastrointestinal / Stephanie DiPerna and Carlo Buonomo
    Hepatobiliary, pancreas, and spleen / Erica L. Riedesel and George A. Taylor
    Genitourinary imaging / Rama S. Ayyala, Cassandra Sams, George A. Taylor, and Jeanne S. Chow
    Musculoskeletal / David Whitmer Swenson and Michele Walters
    Brain / Michel Anthony Breen and Richard Robertson
    Spine / Thierry A.G.M. Huisman and Thangamadhan Bosemani
    Head and neck / Caroline D. Robson and Amy Juliano.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Charles A. James, Leah E. Braswell, Charles M. Glasier, S. Bruce Greenberg, Joanna J. Seibert.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    Pablo Bertrand, Ignacio Sánchez, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive and authoritative textbook on pediatric pulmonology. Edited by Pablo Bertrand and Ignacio Sánchez, renowned academics and pediatricians from the Pontifical Catholic University of Chile, it encompasses five sections and 74 chapters, presenting and discussing the most important topics related to pediatric respiratory diseases. Written and presented in a simple and didactic format, it intends to that ease learning and settlement of doubts in pediatric respiratory diseases. The reader is naturally introduced into the physiology, diagnosis, syndromes, diseases and the treatment associated to the respiratory pathologies affecting children. The chapters within this book includes algorithms for the treatment of syndromes and updated treatment proposals grounded on evidence-based medicine for more than 50 pulmonary diseases of pediatric importance. Pediatric Respiratory Diseases - A Comprehensive Textbook is an essential material for the proper clinical approach of respiratory diseases in children. It is intended for all interns, residents and fellows with interest in pediatric pulmonary medicine, as well as to physicians, general practitioners, pediatricians and pulmonologist who face pediatric respiratory disorders on their clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: History of Specialist Training in Respiratory Diseases
    Introduction
    The Situation in South America
    Sources
    2: Development of the Respiratory System
    Introduction
    Stages in Lung Development
    Development of Bronchial Circulation
    Respiratory Mechanics
    Lung Weight/Body Weight and Lung Volume/Body Weight Ratios
    Genetic Control of Lung Development
    Factors That Influence Lung Development
    Conclusion
    Sources
    3: Physiological Basis of the Respiratory System
    Respiratory Mechanics
    Airway Resistance Pulmonary Ventilation
    Alterations in Pulmonary Ventilation
    Alveolar Hypoventilation
    Alveolar Hyperventilation
    Pulmonary Circulation
    The Ventilation/Perfusion Ratio
    Respiratory Gases in the Blood
    Sources
    4: Clinical History and Physical Examination of the Respiratory System
    Anamnesis
    Physical Examination
    Inspection
    Palpation
    Percussion
    Auscultation
    Wheezing
    Crackles
    Stridor
    Grunting
    Pleural Friction Rub
    Sources
    5: Physiological Evolution of Sleep
    Introduction
    History and Anamnesis
    Age and Development
    The Fetal Stage Premature Newborns
    Newborns
    Infants
    Preschool Children and Older Infants (1-3 Years of Age)
    Schoolchildren and Neuronal Plasticity
    Adolescents
    Risk Factors and Academic Performance
    Specific Sleep-Associated Symptoms
    Sources
    6: Immunological Defense Mechanisms of the Respiratory System
    Organization of the Respiratory Immune System
    Immune Induction in the Lung
    Innate Immunity
    Adaptive Immunity
    Immune Responses to Respiratory Infections
    Immunology of Acute Alveolar Damage and Tissue Repair
    The Microbiome
    Sources 7: New Frontiers in Research on the Respiratory System
    Cystic Fibrosis as a Model for Dealing with Chronic Lung Disease
    Novel Strategies for Current Objectives
    Gene Therapy
    Small Molecules
    Introduction to Complex Mutations
    The Challenge: How Can We Know It Works?
    The Problem: Delicate Secondary Effects Associated with Longevity
    Selection of Resistant Organisms
    Allergies to Antibiotics
    Chronic Renal Insufficiency
    Chronic Lung Disease Crises or Attacks: Lessons for a Long-Term Response
    Pulmonary Attacks in Cystic Fibrosis
    Pulmonary Attacks in Asthma Genetically Associated Diseases and Their Close Systemic Relationship: Ciliopathy
    Learning from Follow-Up Studies on Chronic Lung Diseases
    Beyond Tucson: Patterns of Wheezing in Preschool Children
    Improved Phenotyping
    The Microenvironment of the Airway and Development of Respiratory Diseases: The Microbiome
    The Importance of the Microbiome in Healthy Children
    The Microbiome in Early Wheezing Disorders
    The Microbiome and Cystic Fibrosis
    Is Clinical Pediatric Pneumology Dead?
    Sources
    8: Evaluation of Pulmonary Function in Infants and Preschool Children
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mary Elizabeth Hartnett ; section editors, Arlene V. Drack [and four others].
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    R.V. Paul Chan, editor.
    Summary: This volume on pediatric retina covers all aspects of pediatric retinal diseases as their understanding, diagnosis and management is still under evolution and a challenging task. Newer diagnostic and surgical techniques are being developed and are being adapted for better visual outcome in pediatric cases. It comprises of 10 chapters describing the medical and surgical aspects. The text and figures have been provided in a lucid manner to enhance the understanding of the reader. This volume covers OCT angiography for pediatric retinal disease, clinical spectrum of retinopathy of prematurity, which has become an ever increasing burden of disease for the society and needs special attention, anti-VEGF for retinopathy of prematurity, surgical management of retinopathy of prematurity, retinopathy of prematurity: atypical aspects, Coats disease, pediatric retinal inflammatory disorders, congenital X-linked retinoschisis, familial exudative vitreoretinopathy, hematologic disorders: leukemia, hyperviscosity, anemia. It provides descriptions of these disease accompanied by numerous helpful images to highlight these conditions. This atlas will assist the vitreoretinal specialists, general ophthalmologists, retina fellows and post graduate students in successfully identifying the key features of these challenging pediatric vitreoretinopathies. Pediatric Retinal Diseases is one of the nine volumes of the series Retina Atlas. This series provides global perspective on vitreoretinal diseases, covering imaging basics, retinal vascular disease, ocular inflammatory disease, retinal degeneration, surgical retina, ocular oncology, pediatric retina and trauma. Retina Atlas is spread over 9 volumes and about 100 chapters, covering validated and comprehensive information on retinal disorders.

    Contents:
    OCT Angiography for pediatric retinal disease
    Clinical Spectrum of Retinopathy of Prematurity
    Anti-VEGF for Retinopathy of Prematurity
    Surgical Management of Retinopathy of Prematurity
    Retinopathy of Prematurity: Atypical Aspects
    Persistent Fetal Vasculature
    Familial Exudative Vitreoretinopathy
    Coats Disease
    Pediatric Retinal Inflammatory disorders
    Congenital X-Linked Retinoschisis
    Hematologic Disorders: Leukemia, Hyperviscosity, Anemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ulrich Spandau and Sang Jin Kim.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive and up-to-date information on diagnosis, medical and surgical treatments for pediatric retinal vascular conditions, which are leading causes of childhood blindness throughout the world. Experienced ophthalmologists in the field discuss basic knowledge about these diseases and practical aspects of management such as exam under anesthesia, diagnostic approaches including spectral-domain hand-held optical coherence tomography (OCT) and OCT angiography. The reader will learn about the recent advances in medical and surgical treatments for pediatric retinal vascular diseases. The surgical treatments, anti-VEGF injections, laser photocoagulation and lens sparing vitrectomy are explained step-by-step and can be observed in several videos. Both the general ophthalmologist who cares for children with retinal diseases and the specialist (pediatric ophthalmologists and vitreoretinal surgeon) will find this book to be an informative resource in providing best care for children with pediatric retinal vascular conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sujata Sawhney, Amita Aggarwal, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction to Pediatric Rheumatology
    History of Pediatric Rheumatology
    Basic Immunology for the Pediatrician
    Genetics of Pediatric Rheumatic Diseases
    Human Joint Anatomy and Physiology
    Epidemiology of Pediatric Rheumatic Diseases
    Trial Dezign and Collaborative Work in Pediatric Rheumatology
    Non Biologic Drugs in Rheumatology
    Biologic Response Modifiers in Pediatric Rheumatology
    Clinical Examination of the Child with a Rheumatic Disease
    Laboratory and the Pediatric Rheumatologist
    Imaging in Pediatric Rheumatology
    Transition: Moving from Pediatric to Adult Rheumatology Care
    Outcome measures in Pediatric Rheumatology
    Part II: Arthritis in Childhood
    Approach to a Child with Joint Pains
    Approach to a Child with a Limp
    Common Orthopedic Problems in Children
    Overview of Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis
    Systemic Onset Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis
    Juvenile Spondyloarthropathies
    Management of Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis
    Infections and Arthritis in Childhood
    Macrophage Activation Syndrome
    Clinical Case Vignettes: Arthritis in Children
    Part III: Connective Tissue Diseases in Childhood
    Connective Tissue Diseases in Childhood: An Approach to the Diagnosis and Classification
    Pediatric and Neonatal Lupus
    Pediatric Lupus Nephritis
    Juvenile Dermatomyositis
    Antiphospholipid Antibody Syndrome in Childhood
    Juvenile Localized Scleroderma
    Juvenile Systemic Sclerosis
    Undifferentiated Connective Tissue Disease, Mixed Connective Tissue Disease and Overlap Syndromes in Children
    Clinical Case Vignettes : Connective Tissue Diseases in Children
    Part IV: Vasculitis in Childhood
    Pediatric Vasculitis: Classification and Clinical Approach
    Henoch Schnolein Purpura
    Kawasaki Disease
    Granulomatosis with Polyangiitis in Children.-Childhood Polyarteritis Nodosa
    Behcets Disease
    Pediatric Takayasu arteritis
    Childhood Central Nervous System Vasculitis
    Cogans Syndrome and other Vasculitides in Children
    Clinical Case Vignettes: Childhood Vasculitis
    Part V: Miscellaneous Rheumatic Diseases in Childhood
    Autoinflammatory syndromes in children
    Metabolic bone disease and osteoporosis in children
    Joint Hypermobility and Pain Syndromes in Children
    Childhood Sarcoidosis
    Rheumatic Manifestations of Genetic Disorders and Hemophilia
    Immunodeficiency and Rheumatic Diseases
    Pediatric Uveitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Ronald M. Laxer, David D. Sherry, Philip J. Hashkes.
    Contents:
    General Presentation of Musculoskeletal Problems in Childhood
    General Principles of Management
    Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis (JIA)
    Systemic Lupus Erythematosus (SLE)
    Juvenile Dermatomyositis
    Scleroderma and Related Disorders
    Overlap Syndromes
    Vasculitis
    Lyme Arthritis
    Autoinflammatory Syndromes
    Acute Rheumatic Fever and Post Streptococcal Arthritis
    Noninflammatory Mechanical Pain Syndromes
    Amplified Musculoskeletal Pain
    Hereditary Conditions of Bone and Cartilage. Benign and Malignant Tumors Involving the Musculoskeletal System.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Hassan H. Ramadan, Fuad M. Baroody, editors.
    Summary: The volume provides a comprehensive, up-to-date and exhaustive review of pediatric rhinosinusitis for clinicians, surgeons, researchers, advanced care providers as well as emergency personnel. It provides information regarding pathophysiology of sinusitis, and how to distinguish between the differential diagnoses of a child with a runny nose. It also utilizes current evidence-based guidelines and consensus statements to clarify this condition to the physician and discusses available medical and surgical treatment. Authored by clinicians with long-time expertise with this disease, Pediatric Rhinosinusitis also reviews definitions, burden of disease, microbiology and pathophysiology of the disease; role of adenoids, allergy and asthma as co-morbid conditions; comprehensive medical management; and the role of topical treatment. It also covers the latest advancements in new treatments such as drug-eluting stents; comprehensive surgical management; and complications of rhinosinusitis. It will be a valuable resource for otolaryngologists, surgeons, residents, medical students and advanced practice providers for years to come.

    Contents:
    Part I: Definitions and Basics
    Definition and Clinical Signs and Symptoms
    Burden and Health Impact of Pediatric Rhinosinusitis
    Pathogenesis of Pediatric Sinusitis
    Imaging in Children
    Microbiology of Pediatric Sinusitis
    Part II: Sinusitis and other Pediatric Issues
    The Role of Adenoids in Pediatric Sinusitis
    Allergy and Sinusitis
    Sinusitis and Asthma
    Chronic Rhinosinusitis in Children with Cystic Fibrosis
    Sinusitis and Immune Deficiency in Children
    Pediatric Rhinosinusitis and Gastroesophageal Reflux
    Sinusitis and Adenoiditis
    Part III: Medical Treatment of Sinusitis
    Antibiotics: Intranasal and Systemic Treatment of Sinusitis in Children
    Saline Irrigation in Pediatric Rhinosinusitis
    Medical Treatment of Pediatric Rhinosinusitis: Focus on Intranasal and Systemic Corticosteroids
    Part IV: Adenoidectomy and Sinus Lavage
    Balloon Sinuplasty in Children
    Endoscopic Sinus Surgery for Pediatric Patients
    Septoplasty and Turbinate Reduction in Children
    Post-operative Management of Pediatric Sinusitis
    Failure of Surgical Treatment in Children with Chronic Rhinosinusitis
    Part V: Complications
    Complications of Sinusitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Girolamo Mattioli, Paolo Petralia, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the state of the art across the entire field of pediatric robotic surgery, including thoracic, abdominal, oncologic, gynecologic, and urologic procedures. Indications for each type of robotic surgery are clearly set out and technical aspects are described in detail, illustrating the patient's position and explaining the robotic assessment and the optimal use of robotic instruments. Anesthetic issues and the management of robotic complications are discussed, and managerial aspects are also considered, with provision of helpful suggestions on how to approach robotic surgery in each pediatric department. For surgeons who wish to start using the pediatric robotic approach, simple illustrations of robotic assessment and principles of robotic surgery are included. Pediatric robotic surgery has undergone significant development in recent years, and the technology is now applied to a variety of pediatric diseases beyond urology. This book has been written by a group of world-renowned pioneers of pediatric robotic surgery and will appeal to pediatric surgeons of all disciplines, to residents, and to hospital general managers and medical directors.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Strategic planning, training and preoperative setup: 1. Management aspects
    2. Cost analysis
    3. Training in pediatric robotic surgery
    4. Operating room setup and robotic instrumentation
    5. Moving from conventional minimally invasive surgery to robotic surgery
    6. Management of robotic complications
    7. Anesthetic aspects of robotic surgery. Part 2 Urologic surgery: 8. Pyeloplasty
    9. Vascular hitch
    10. Ureteral reimplantation
    11. Robotic bladder augmentation
    12. Nephrectomy and heminephrectomy
    13. Gynecologic procedures
    Part 3 Gastrointestinal surgery
    14. Hepatobiliary procedures
    15. Fundoplications
    16. Colectomy
    17. Proctectomy and ileal J-pouch anorectal anastomosis
    Part 4 Thoracic surgery: 18. Congenital lung malformations
    19. Cardiac surgery
    20. Upper airway surgery
    Part 5 Oncology surgery
    21. Principle of minimally invasive surgery applied to oncology patients
    22. Adrenal neuroblastoma
    23. Prostate cancer
    24. Thoracic mass.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Richard A. Polin, Mark F. Ditmar.
    Contents:
    Adolescent medicine
    Behavior and development
    Pediatric cardiology
    Dermatology
    Emergency medicine
    Endocrinology
    Gastroenterology
    Genetics
    Hematology
    Infectious diseases
    Neonatology
    Nephrology
    Neurology
    Oncology
    Orthopedics
    Pulmonology
    Rheumatology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RJ48.2 .P65 2021
    1
  • Digital
    Keira P. Mason, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I. Pediatric Sedation Outside the Operating Room
    1. The History of Sedation
    2. Sedation Policies, Recommendations and Guidelines Across the Specialties and Continents
    3. Procedural Sedation: Let's Review the Basics
    4. The Pre-Sedation Assessment and Implications on Management
    5. Sedation Scales and Discharge Criteria: How Do They Differ? Which One to Choose? Do They Really Apply to Sedation?
    6. Physiological Monitoring for Procedural Sedation: The Routine and Beyond
    7. The Pediatric Airway: Anatomy, Challenges and Solutions
    8. Pediatric Physiology: How Does It Differ from Adults?
    9. The Pharmacology and Clinical Application of Sedatives, Analgesics, and Adjuncts
    10. Sedatives: Effects on Memory and Amnesia
    11. Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics in the Pediatric Population
    12. Billing and Reimbursement for Sedation Services in the United States
    Part II. Sedation Models Delivered by Different Specialties: A Global Voyage
    13. The Pediatric Hospital Medicine Service: Models, Protocols and Challenges
    14. The Anesthesia Directed Sedation Service: Models, Protocols and Challenges
    15. Sedation in the Neonatal Intensive Care Unit: International Practice
    16. Sedation in the Pediatric Intensive Care Unit: Challenges, Outcomes and Future Strategies in the United States
    17. Sedation in the Pediatric Intensive Care Unit: Current Practice in Europe
    18. Sedation for Pediatric Gastrointestinal Procedures
    19. Sedation in the Emergency Department: A Complex and Multifactorial Challenge
    20. Sedation of Pediatric Patients for Dental Procedures: The United States, European and South American Experience
    21. Pediatric Sedation: The European Experience and Approach
    22. Pediatric Sedation: The South American Approach
    23. Pediatric Sedation: The Asian Approach ? Current State of Sedation in China
    24. Pediatric Sedation: The South Pacific Approach
    25. Pediatric Sedation in the Underdeveloped Third World ? An African Perspective: Models, Protocols and Challenges
    Part III. Safety in Sedation
    26. Pediatric Sedatives and the Food and Drug Administration (FDA): Challenges, Limitations and Drugs in Development
    27. Is there Evidence for Long-term Neurocognitive Effects of Sedatives?
    28. Incidence and Stratification of Adverse Events Associated with Sedation: Is there a Benchmark?
    29. Medicolegal Risks and Outcomes of Sedation
    30. Improving the Safety of Pediatric Sedation ? Human Error, Technology and Clinical Microsystems
    Part IV. Sedation into the 22nd Century
    31. Intravenous Infusions for Sedation: Rationale, State of the Art and Future Trends
    32. Usage of Complementary and Alternative Medicine in Pediatric Sedation
    33. Pediatric Research: Designing, Implementing, and Interpreting Strong Trials
    34. Non-pharmacological Distraction Techniques as Sedation Adjunct
    35. The Role of Simulation in Safety and Training
    36. Michael Jackson: Medical Ethics and What Went Wrong
    37. Ethics and Clinical Aspects of Palliative Sedation in the Terminally Ill Child
    38. Future of Pediatric Sedation.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ingo Marzi, Johannes Frank, Stefan Rose.
    Summary: This book provides all the knowledge needed to treat injuries to the pediatric extremities, spine, and pelvis. It aims to enable age-appropriate diagnosis and optimal treatment selection, with particular consideration of the current developmental age of an injured child. A general overview section presents the features of skeletal growth, growth plate fusion, and the concept of non-growth-damaging treatment of pediatric fractures. The well-structured specialized chapters detail the characteristics of individual injuries with corresponding case studies. Thus, the book offers a learning opportunity but can also be used as a practical daily reference to facilitate orientation. Three chapters focus on options for the correction of injuries that have healed poorly. The book offers exceptional value through:- Classifications of fractures and injuries Schematic drawings of typical fractures with developmental characteristics Structured overview tables for all regions of injury with representation of the fracture types and their characteristic radiographs Presentation of conservative and operative treatment options and illustration of all typical situations.

    Contents:
    Part I. General
    Bone Growth and Bone Healing
    Types of Injuries
    Fracture Classification
    Radiological Diagnostics
    Conservative Principles
    Operative Principles
    Specific Injuries (vascular, neurological
    General Therapeutic Principles
    Part II. Specific Injuries
    Shoulder
    Humerus
    Elbow
    Supracondylar Fractures
    Radial Condyle Fracture
    ulnar Epicondyle Fracture and Elbow Luxation
    Proximal Radius
    Proximal Ulna
    Monteggia Lesion
    Forearm Fracture
    Distal Forearm Fracture
    Galeazzi Fracture
    Wrist
    Hand
    Fingers
    Spine
    Pelvis
    Proximal Hip
    Femur Shaft
    Distal Femur
    Patella
    Knee Joint
    Proximal Tibia
    Tibia Shaft
    Distal Lower Leg
    Ankle Joint
    Foot
    Part III. Secondary Reconstructions
    Differential Diagnosis to Pathological Fractures and Abnormalities
    Overseen Monteggia lesions
    Secondary Reconstructions of the Upper Leg
    Secondary Reconstructions of the Lower Leg
    Limb lengthening
    Axis-Correction
    Reconstructions of Inborn Abnormalities.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Nanette B. Silverberg, Carola Duran-McKinster, Yong-Kwang Tay, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric Skin of Color is the first textbook devoted to the issues of pediatric skin of color. In 2052, more than fifty percent of the United States will be of color, and currently seventy percent of the world's population is termed of color. Therefore, this book fills the need for an instructional and educational referebce work regarding these populations. Pediatric Skin of Color discusses the biology and clinical data regarding normal skin, skin conditions exclusive to individuals of color, systemic diseases of individuals of color that have a strong component of skin involvement, and the appearance and demographics of common skin diseases, comparing Caucasian and all skin of color populations. Written for dermatologists and pediatric dermatologists, this text includes data on African American, Asian (Southeast and East), Hispanic/Latino, and Middle Eastern patients, as well as Indigenous populations (i.e. Native Americans, Aborigines).
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    David Gozal, Leila Kheirandish-Gozal, editors.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive coverage of all aspects related to pediatric sleep and its associated disorders. It addresses the ontogeny and maturational aspects of physiological sleep and circadian rhythms, as well as the effects of sleep on the various organ systems as a function of development. Organized into nine sections, the book begins with a basic introduction to sleep, and proceeds into an extensive coverage of normative sleep and functional homeostasis. Part three then concisely examines the humoral and developmental aspects of sleep, namely the emerging role of metabolic tissue and the intestinal microbiota in regulation. Parts four, five, and six discuss diagnoses methods, techniques in sleep measurement, and specific aspects of pharmacotherapy and ventilator support for the pediatric patient. Various sleep disorders are explored in part seven, followed by an in-depth analysis of obstructive sleep apnea in part eight. The book concludes with discussions on the presence of sleep issues in other disorders such as Down syndrome, obesity, cystic fibrosis, and asthma. Written by recognized leaders in the field, Pediatric Sleep Medicine facilitates an extensive learning experience for practicing physicians who encounter specific sleep-related issues in their practice.

    Contents:
    Part I. Basic Introduction to Sleep
    Chapter 1. Normal Sleep in Humans
    Part II. Physiologic Regulation in Sleep and During Development
    Chapter 2. Control of Breathing During Sleep and Wakefulness in the Fetus, Newborn and Child
    Chapter 3. Normal Respiratory Physiology During Wakefulness and Sleep in Children.-Chapter 4. Upper Airway and Motor Control During Sleep
    Chapter 5. Endocrinology of Sleep
    Chapter 6. Thermoregulation and Metabolism
    Chapter 7. Sleep and Immunity
    Chapter 8. Sleep and the Gastrointestinal System
    Chapter 9. Circadian Rhythms in Children
    Part III. Sleep Mechanisms: Developmental Aspects
    Chapter 10. Developmental Aspects of Sleep
    Chapter 11. Humoral and Other Sleep Promoting Factors
    Part IV. Measurement of Sleep
    Chapter 12. Survey Tools and Screening Questionnaires to Pediatric Sleep Medicine
    Chapter 13. The Pediatric Patient With a Sleep Complaint - Initial Interview and Diagnostic Planning
    Chapter 14. Best Practices for Accommodating Children in the Polysomnography Lab: Enhancing Quality and Patient Experience
    Chapter 15. Technologies in the Pediatric Sleep Lab: Present and Future
    Chapter 16. Upper Airway Imaging in Pediatric Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Chapter 17. Laboratory Tests in Pediatric Sleep Medicine
    Chapter 18. The Nocturnal Polysomnogram - Approaches to Recording, Scoring and Interpretation in Infants and Children
    Chapter 19. Multiple Sleep Latency Test
    Chapter 20. Actigraphy
    Chapter 21. Defining Normal in Pediatric Sleep: Some Thoughts and Things to Think About
    Part V. Pharmacotherapy of Sleep Disorders in Children
    Chapter 22. Stimulants
    Chapter 23. Somnogenic Agents in Children
    Chapter 24. Drugs Which Affect Sleep
    Part VI. Acute and Chronic Ventilatory Support in Children
    Chapter 25. Non-Invasive Respiratory Support in Children With Sleep Disordered Breathing
    Part VII. Disorders of Sleep
    Chapter 26. Pediatric Insomnia: Etiology, Impact, Assessment and Treatment
    Chapter 27. Apnea of Infancy, Apparent Life-Threatening Events, and Sudden Unexplained Death in Infancy
    Chapter 28. Apnea of Prematurity
    Chapter 29. Disorders of Respiratory Control and Central Hypoventilation Syndromes
    Chapter 30. Disorders of Excessive Sleepiness
    Chapter 31. Restless Legs Syndrome and Periodic Leg Movements of Sleep
    Chapter 32. Circadian Sleep Disorders
    Chapter 33. Parasomnias
    Part VIII. Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Chapter 34. Obstructive Sleep Apnea - Definition
    Chapter 35. Pathophysiology of Obstructive Sleep Apnea Syndrome in Childhood
    Chapter 36. Obstructive Sleep Apnea: Clinical Presentation and Differential Diagnosis.-Chapter 37. Surgical Treatment of Pediatric Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Chapter 38. Obstructive Sleep Apnea - Treatment - Anti-Inflammatory Therapy
    Chapter 39. Pediatric Obstructive Sleep Apnea - Orthodontic Management
    Chapter 40. Myofunctional Approaches to Pediatric Sleep Medicine
    Chapter 41. Illustrative Clinical Cases
    Part IX. Sleep in Other Disorders
    Chapter 42. Sleep Disordered Breathing in Neuromuscular Diseases
    Chapter 43. Obstructive Sleep Apnea and Asthma
    Chapter 44. Cystic Fibrosis
    Chapter 45. Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Chapter 46. Down Syndrome
    Chapter 47. Sleep in Obese Children and Adolescents
    Chapter 48. Sleep in Sickle Cell Disease
    Chapter 49. Epilepsy and Sleep, Common Bedfellows
    Chapter 50. Autism Spectrum Disorder
    Chapter 51. Sleep and Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
    Chapter 52. Sleep and Mood Disorder
    Chapter 53. Prader Willi Syndrome
    Chapter 54. Craniofacial Syndromes
    Chapter 55. Sleep Problems and Developmental Delay
    Chapter 56. Sleep in Children Following Brain Concussion
    Chapter 57. Diabetes
    Chapter 58. Cerebral Palsy
    Chapter 59. Sleep in Children With Myelomeningocele
    Chapter 60 .Inborn Errors of Metabolism: Mucopolysaccharidoses and Others.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Lourdes M. DelRosso, Richard B. Berry, Suzanne E. Beck, Mary H. Wagner, Carole L. Marcus.
    Summary: Following in the steps of the bestselling Sleep Medicine Pearls, this practical resource provides authoritative guidance on the evaluation and management of common pediatric sleep medicine problems using concise clinical vignettes. Experts in this rapidly growing field, led by Drs. Lourdes M. DelRosso, Richard B. Berry, Suzanne E. Beck, Mary H. Wagner, and Carole L. Marcus, provide a hands-on, case-based approach, perfect for physicians studying for the sleep boards, fellows learning sleep medicine, and physicians who see children in their practice.

    Contents:
    Title page; Table of Contents; Copyright; Dedication; Preface; Acknowledgments;
    Part 1. Introduction to Pediatric Sleep Medicine;
    Section 1. Evaluation of the Pediatric Sleep Patient; Case 1. Pediatric sleep history: A 4 year-old with snoring, gasping and witnessed apneas; Case Presentation; Question; Answer; Discussion; Case 2. A 6-year-old girl with tonsillar hypertrophy, high-arched palate, and snoring; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Question; Answer; Discussion; Case 3. A 10-year-old girl with an unusual finding on physical exam; Case Presentation; Physical Exam. Laboratory and Sleep FindingsQuestions; Answers; Discussion;
    Section 2. Pediatric Polysomnography; Case 4. Overview of pediatric polysomnography: A newborn infant with snoring and witnessed apnea; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Questions; Answers; Discussion; Case 5. A 2-week-old infant with some challenging epochs on polysomnography; Case Presentation; Question; Answer; Discussion; Case 6. A 14-year-old with an abnormal end-tidal CO2 waveform during polysomnography; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Question; Answer; Discussion.
    Section 3. Common Polysomnographic Findings in ChildrenCase 7. A 3-year-old boy with rhythmic activity on electroencephalogram; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Questions; Answers; Discussion; Case 8. A 3-month-old infant with monomorphic waves on electroencephalogram; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Questions; Answers; Discussion; Case 9. A newborn infant with an alternating electroencephalogram pattern; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Questions; Answers; Discussion. Case 10. A 2-month-old infant with sleep-onset REM period on polysomnographyCase Presentation; Physical Exam; Question; Answer; Discussion; Case 11. An infant with high amplitude on an electroencephalogram recording; Case Presentation; Question; Answer; Discussion; Case 12. A 7-month-old infant with a series of central apneas; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Question; Answer; Discussion; Case 13. A 15-month-old with central apnea; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Question; Answer; Discussion. Case 14. A 19-month-old child with irregular, heavy breathing during sleepCase Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Question; Answer; Discussion; Case 15. A 4-week-old infant with jerking movements during sleep; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Question; Answer; Discussion; Case 16. An 8-year-old boy with abnormal capnography on polysomnogram; Case Presentation; Physical Exam; Laboratory and Sleep Findings; Questions; Answers; Discussion;
    Section 4. Artifacts in Pediatric Polysomnography.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    editor, Marilyn J. Siegel, MD, FACR, Professor of Radiology and Pediatrics, The Edward Mallinckrodt Institute of Radiology, Washington University School of Medicine, St. Louis, Missouri.
    Summary: Pediatric Sonography has long been recognized as the leading technical reference in its field. Now, the fifth edition continues in that tradition, providing up-to-date guidance on sonographic image decision-making, examination, and interpretation in both children and adolescents. Each chapter covers a specific organ system and the disease processes associated with it. Overflowing with over 1800 updated figures, including Doppler sonograms and full color illustrations. Briskly covers all aspects of sonography in children and adolescents, including imaging techniques, instrumentation, examination, and diagnosis. Depicts the presentation of normal anatomy and identifies technical errors that may affect your interpretation of the sonographic image. -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    guest editors, Sigurd H. Berven, Marinus de Kleuver.
    Contents:
    Early-onset scoliosis : classification and natural history / Michael G. Vitale and Daniel J. Miller
    Adolescent idiopathic scoliosis : classification and natural history / Zeeshan Mohammad Sardar and Lawrence G. Lenke
    Preoperative evaluation and imaging techniques in adolescent idiopathic scoliosis / Kenny Kwan, Kenneth M.C. Cheung, and Michael To
    Late sequelae of untreated pediatric deformity / Sergio Mendoza-Lattes and Faisal Konbaz
    Surgical techniques for the management of early-onset scoliosis / Joshua S. Murphy, Burt Yaszay, and Behrooz A. Akbarnia
    Surgical techniques for adolescent idiopathic scoliosis and the selection of fusion levels / Andre Luis Fernandes Andujar, Luis Eduardo Munhoz da Rocha, and Cristiano Magalhaes Menezes
    Novel nonfusion growth-modulating techniques for pediatric scoliosis / Caglar Yilgor and Ahmet Alanay
    Long-term outcomes of operative management in adolescent idiopathic scoliosis / Manabu Ito, Katsuhisa Yamada, and Ekkaphol Larpumnuayphol
    Revision pediatric spinal deformity surgery / Lawrence G. Lenke
    Spondylolisthesis : classification and natural history / Kariman Abelin-Genevois and Pierre Roussouly
    Adolescent spondylolisthesis associated with scoliosis : which condition should surgery address? / Yong Qiu
    Pediatric spondylolysis and spondylolisthesis / Michael LaBagnara, Durga R. Sure, Justin S. Smith, and Christopher I. Shaffrey
    Dysplastic high-grade spondylolisthesis / Yazeed M. Gussous and Sigurd H. Berven
    Kyphotic deformity in the pediatric spine / Avery L. Buchholz, John C. Quinn, Christopher I. Shaffrey, Sigurd H. Berven, David W. Polly, Jr., and Justin S. Smith
    Spine surgery in the developing world / Oheneba Boachie-Adjei and Irene Adorkor Wulff
    Safety and complications in pediatric surgery / Stephen Lewis, Michael Dodds, and Sam Keshen
    Measuring outcomes in pediatric spinal deformity / Sayf S.A. Faraj, Tsjitske M. Haanstra, Steven J. Kamper, and Marinus de Kleuver.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2018
  • Digital
    Brendon J. Coventry, editor.
    Summary: Written by internationally acclaimed specialists, Pediatric Surgery provides pertinent and concise procedure descriptions spanning benign and malignant problems and minimally invasive procedures. Complications are reviewed when appropriate for the organ system and problem, creating a book that is both comprehensive and accessible. Stages of operative approaches with relevant technical considerations are outlined in an easily understandable manner. Forming part of the series, Surgery: Complications, Risks and Consequences, this volume Pediatric Surgery provides a valuable resource for all general surgeons and residents in training. Other healthcare providers will also find this a useful resource.

    Contents:
    Pediatric Anesthesia for Surgery
    Pediatric Abdominal Surgery
    Pediatric Tumor Surgery
    Pediatric Thoracic Surgery
    Pediatric Vascular Access Surgery
    Pediatric Urological and Genital Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Prem Puri, Michael E. Höllwarth, editors.
    Summary: This is the second edition of a leading international reference on the surgical management of congenital and acquired conditions in infants and children. The editors have assembled outstanding pediatric surgeons and pediatric urologists from all five continents to analyze current practice and provide comprehensive details on both surgical techniques and pre- and postoperative management. The text is organized in a systematic manner, providing step-by-step, detailed practical guidance. Individual sections are devoted to the head and neck; esophagus; chest; abdomen; liver, pancreas, and spleen; spina bifida and hydrocephalus; tumors; and urology. The important advances that have occurred since the first edition in 2006 are all covered, with nine new chapters as well as more than 60 additional figures.The most unique feature of the book is the generous use of high quality color illustrations to clarify and simplify various operative techniques. This atlas will be an invaluable reference for pediatric surgeons, paediatric urologists and for general surgeons with a special interest in pediatric surgery.

    Contents:
    Head and Neck: Thyroglossal duct cyst
    Branchial cysts and sinus
    Lymphangioma
    Tracheostomy
    Oesophagus: Oesophageal atresia
    Gastroesophageal reflux and hiatus hernia
    Achalasia
    Colonic replacement of the oesophagus
    Gastric transposition for oesophageal replacement
    Chest: Thoracoscopy
    Repair of pectus excavatum
    Pulmonary malformations
    Congenital diaphragmatic hernia and eventration
    Extracorporeal membrane oxygenation
    Abdomen: Hernias
    Exomphalus
    Gastroschisis
    Hypertrophic pyloric stenosis
    Gastrostomy
    Malrotation
    Duodenal obstruction
    Jejunoileal atresia
    Meconium ileus
    Gastrointestinal duplications
    Short bowel syndrome
    Hirschsprung's disease
    Anorectal anomalies
    Intussusception
    Appendicectomy
    Omphalomesenteric duct remnants
    Ulcerative colitis
    Crohn's disease
    Liver, pancreas and spleen: Biliary atresias
    Choledochal cyst
    Cholecystectomy
    Surgery for persistent hyperinsulinaemic hypoglycaemia of infancy
    Splenectomy
    Spina bifida and hydrocephalus: Spina Bifida
    Hydrocephalus
    Dermal sinus
    Tumours: Sacrococcygeal teratoma
    Neuroblastoma. -Wilms tumour
    Liver tumours. -Testicular tumours
    Urology: Pyeloplasty
    Endoscopic treatment of Vesicoureteral reflux
    Vesicoureteral reflux – Surgical treatment
    Ureteric duplications
    Posterior urethral valves
    Hypospadias
    Phimosis and buried penis
    Orchidopexy
    Variocele
    Genitoplasty for congenital adrenal hyperplasia
    Bladder exstrophy and epispadias
    Cloacal extrophy
    Augmentation cystoplasty and appendicovesicostomy
    The ACE procedure.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Emmanuel A. Ameh, Stephen W. Bickler, Kokila Lakhoo, Benedict C. Nwomeh, Dan Poenaru, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: The second, fully updated edition of this book applies and contextualizes up-to-date information on pediatric surgery for low and middle-income countries (LMICs). The book is organized in general anatomic and thematic sections within pediatric surgery, such as urology, oncology, orthopedics and gastroenterology and includes chapters addressing the unique challenges and approaches for pediatric surgery in low-resource settings. Each chapter has dual authorship LMIC author providing context-specific insights and authors from high-income countries (HICs) contributing experience from well-resourced settings. Written in a reader-friendly format, this book has a uniform structure in each chapter, with introduction, demographics, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical presentations, investigations, management, outcome, prevention, ethics, evidence-based surgery and references. This comprehensive volume fills the gap between up-to-date pediatric surgical scholarship and knowledge developed and applied in HICs, and the practical needs of practitioners in low-resource settings. This is an indispensable guide for postgraduate surgical trainees in Africa and other LMICs as well as general surgeons practicing in Africa and other LMICs, who need to care surgically for children.

    Contents:
    1. Paediatric surgery specialty and its relevance to Africa
    2. Neonatal physiology and transport
    3. Respiratory physiology and support
    4. Cardiovascular physiology and support
    5. Fluids and electrolyte therapy in the paediatric patient
    6. Nutritional support
    7. Haemoglobinopathies
    8. Wound healing
    9. Vascular access in children
    10. Anaesthesia and perioperative care
    11. Pain management
    12. Intensive care
    13. Ethics of paediatric surgery in Africa
    14. Psychological issues in paediatric surgery
    -- 15. Common bacterial infections in children
    16. Surgical site infection
    17. Surgical complications of typhoid fever
    18. Tuberculosis
    19. Pyomyositis
    20. Omphalitits
    21. Necrotizing fasciitis
    22. Haematogenous osteomyelitis and septic arthritis
    23. Parasitic infestation of surgical importance in children
    24. HIV/AIDS and the paediatric surgeon
    -- 25. Paediatric trauma: epidemiology, prevention and control
    26. Paediatric trauma scoring and trauma registry
    27. Initial assessment and resuscitiation of the trauma patient
    28. Thoracic trauma
    29. Abdominal trauma
    30. Craniocerebral and spinal trauma
    31. Urogenital and perineal trauma
    32. Musculoskeletal trauma
    33. Burns
    34. Injuries from child abuse
    35. Birth injuries
    -- 36. Neck: cysts, sinuses and fistulas
    37. Lymphadenopathy in African children
    38. Sternomastoid tumour in infancy
    39. Salivery gland diseases in children and adolescents
    40. Thyroid and parathyroid glands
    -- 41. Laryngoscopy, bronchoscopy and oesophagoscopy
    42. Paediatric upper airway obstruction
    43. Tracheomalacia
    44. Congenital cystic lung lessions
    45. Congenital diaphragmatic hernia and diaphragmatic eventration
    46. Pleural effusion and empyema
    47. Lung abscess
    48. Oesophageal atresia
    49. Gastro-oesophageal reflux disease
    50. Achalasia
    51. Corrosive ingestion and oesophageal replacement
    52. Aerodigestive foreign bodies in children
    53. Chest wall deformities
    54. Mediastinal masses
    55. chylothorax
    -- 56. Congenital anterior abdominal wall defects: exomphalos and gastroschisis
    57. Disorders of the umbilicus
    58. Inguinal and femoral hernias and hydroceles
    -- 59. Infantile hypertrophic pyloric stenosis
    60. Peptic ulcer disease
    61. Neonatal intestinal obstruction
    62. Duodenal atresias and stenosis
    63. Intestinal atresias and stenosis
    64. Vitelline duct anomalies
    65. Intestinal malrotation and midgut volvulus
    66. Gastrointestinal duplications
    67. Meconium ileus
    68. Intussusception
    69. Miscellaneous causes of intestinal obstruction
    70. Necrotizing enterocolitis
    71. Short bowel syndrome
    72. Gastrointestinal stomas
    -- 73. Colonic atresias
    74. Appendicitis
    75. Inflammatory bowel disease
    76. Hirschsprungs disease and allied malformations
    77. Anorectal malformation
    78. Polyps
    79. Other anorectal conditions
    -- 80. Obstructive jaundice
    81. Biliary atresia
    82. Choledochal cyst
    83. Cholelithiasis (gallstones)
    84. Annular pancreas
    85. Pancreatitis
    86. Spleen
    87. Portal hypertension
    -- 88. Cystic diseases of the kidney
    89. Congenital ureteropelvic junction stenosis
    90. Ureteric duplications and ureterocoeles
    91. Vesicoureteric reflux
    92. Bladder exstrophy and epispadias
    93. Urethral valves
    94. Hypospadias
    95. Circumcision
    96. Phimosis, meatal stenosis, and paraphimosis
    97. Urolithiasis
    98. Undescended testis
    99. Disorders of sex development
    100. Bladder outlet obstruction
    101. Acute scrotum
    -- 102. Kidney tumours
    103. Teratomas
    104. Lymphomas and the paediatric surgeon
    105. Neuroblastoma
    106. Malignant soft tissue tumours
    107. Liver tumours
    108. Primary bone tumours
    109. Brain and spinal cord tumours
    -- 110. Lymphangioma
    111. Haemangioma
    112. Arteriovenous malformations
    113. Unilateral limb enlargement
    -- 114. Hydrometrocolpos
    115. Mullerian Duct Anomalies
    116. Labial adhesions and agglutination
    117. Ovarian lesions
    -- 118. Disability and Rehabilitation: General concepts
    119. Neurodisability
    120. Common Paediatric Orthopaedic Diseases
    121. Plastic and reconstructive surgery
    -- 122. Minimal invasive surgery in paediatric patients
    123. Prenatal diagnosis and fetal therapy
    124. Conjoined and parasitic twins
    125. Otorhinolaryngology
    126. Paediatric transplantation
    127. Telemedicine and e-health
    128. Paediatric surgical education in sub-saharan Africa.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Prem Puri, Michael Höllwarth, editor.
    Summary: This comprehensive book provides detailed practical advice on the diagnosis and surgical management of congenital and acquired conditions in infants and children. Following the great success of the first edition, the new edition has been fully updated to reflect the major developments in the field of the past decade. Advances in prenatal diagnosis, imaging, anaesthesia and intensive care as well as the introduction of new surgical techniques, including minimally invasive surgery and robotic technology that have radically altered surgical conditions are now discussed in the book. In addition new chapters have been added on surgical safety in children, surgical problems of children with disabilities and surgical implications of HIV infection in children among others. This is a superbly structured and richly illustrated guide aimed at trainees, young pediatric surgeons and general surgeons with interest in pediatric surgery. The book also serves as a handy, quick and easy reference for those making decisions in daily practice. Pediatric Surgery, Diagnosis and Management features contributions by leading experts in pediatric surgery and pediatric urology who have unique experience in their respective fields.

    Contents:
    1 The Epidemiology of Birth Defects
    2 Prenatal Diagnosis and Fetal Counselling for Surgical Congenital Malformations
    3 Transport of the Surgical Neonate
    4 Pre-operative Management and Vascular Access
    5 Anaesthesia and Analgesia
    6 Fluid, Electrolyte and Respiratory Management
    7 Sepsis
    8 Nutrition
    9 Access for Enteral Nutrition
    10 Haematological Problems
    11 Genetics
    12 Ethical Considerations in Paediatric Surgery
    13 Minimally Invasive Surgery in Infants and Children
    14 Surgical Safety in Children
    15 Surgical Problems of Children with Disabilities
    16 Surgical Implications of HIV infection in Children
    Part II Trauma
    17 Birth Trauma
    18 Pediatric Thoracic Trauma
    19 Abdominal and Genitourinary Trauma
    20 Traumatic Head Injuries
    21 Paediatric Orthopedic Trauma
    22 Injuries to the Tendons
    23 Burns
    24 Foreign Bodies
    25 Physical and Sexual Child Abuse
    Part III Head and Neck
    26 Pierre Robin Sequence
    27 Choanal Atresia
    28 Thyroglossal and Branchial Cysts, Sinuses and Fistulas
    29 Tracheostomy
    Part IV Chest
    30 Chest Wall Deformities
    31 Breast Disorders in Children and Adolescents
    32 Congenital Airway Malformations
    33 Mediastinal Masses in Children
    34 Pleural Effusion and Empyema
    35 Congenital Malformations of the Lung
    36 Congenital Diaphragmatic Hernia
    37 Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation
    Part V Esophagus
    38 Esophageal Atresia and Tracheoesophageal Fistula
    39 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    40 Achalasia
    41 Esophageal Perforations and Caustic Injuries in Children
    42 Esophageal Replacement
    Part VI Gastrointestinal
    43 Infantile Hypertrophic Pyloric Stenosis
    44 Gastrostomy and Jejunostomy
    45 Duodenal Obstruction
    46 Intestinal Malrotation
    47 Jejuno-Ileal Atresia
    48 Meconium Ileus
    49 Duplications of the Alimentary Tract
    50 Necrotizing Enterocolitis
    51 Constipation
    52 Hirschsprungs Disease
    53 Variant Hirschsprungs Disease
    54 Anorectal Anomalies
    55 Appendicitis
    56 Intussusception
    57 Omphalomesenteric Duct Remnants
    58 Hernias
    59 Short Bowel Syndrome
    60 Inflammatory bowel disease
    61 Paediatric Small Bowel Transplantation
    Part VII Liver, Biliary Tract and Pancreas
    62 Biliary Atresia
    63 Choledochal Cyst
    64 Hepatic Cysts and Abscesses
    65 Portal Hypertension
    66 Gallbladder Disease
    67 Pancreatic Disorders
    68 Splenic Disorders
    69 Pediatric Liver Transplantation
    Part VIII Anterior Abdominal Wall Defects
    70 Omphalocele and Gastroschisis
    71 Bladder Exstrophy
    72 Cloacal Exstrophy
    73 Prune Belly Syndrome
    74 Conjoined Twins
    Part IX Tumors
    75 Vascular Anomalies
    76 Congenital Nevi
    77 Lymphatic Malformations
    78 Sacrococcygeal Teratoma
    79 Neuroblastoma
    80 Wilms Tumor
    81 Soft Tissue Sarcoma
    82 Hepatic Tumors in Childhood
    83 Lymphomas
    84 Ovarian Tumors
    85 Testis Tumors
    Part X Spina Bifida and Hydrocephalus
    86 Spina Bifida and Encephalocoele
    87 Hydrocephalus
    88 Dermal Sinus and Tethered Cord
    Part XI Genitourinary
    89 Urinary Tract Infection
    90 Imaging of the Paediatric Urogenital Tract
    91 Management of Prenatal Hydronephrosis
    92 Upper Urinary Tract Obstructions
    93 Ureteric Duplication Anomalies
    94 Vesicoureteral Reflux
    95 Posterior Urethral Valves
    96 Neuropathic Bladder
    97 End Stage Renal Disease and Renal Transplantation
    98 Disorders of Sexual Development
    99 Cryptorchidism
    100 Acute Scrotum
    101 Hypospadias
    102 Circumcision and Buried Penis
    Part XII Paediatric Gynaecology
    103 Hydrometrocolpos
    104 Gynecologic Conditions of Childhood
    Part XIII Long-term Outcomes
    105 Long-term Outcomes in Pediatric Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Christopher P. Coppola, Alfred P. Kennedy, Jr., Ronald J. Scorpio, editors.
    Contents:
    Fluids and Electrolytes
    Nutrition
    Pediatric Anesthesiology
    Procedural Sedation
    Postoperative Neonatal and Pediatric Critical Care
    Disorders of Clotting
    Epidemiology of Trauma
    Injury Prevention and Safety
    Non-accidental Trauma
    Initial Trauma Assessment
    Pathophysiology of Brain Injury
    Algorithm of Treatment for Head Trauma
    Thoracic Trauma
    Abdominal Trauma
    Traumatic Spinal Injury in Children
    Burns
    Pelvic Fractures
    Common Pediatric Fractures
    Necrotizing Enterocolitis
    Congenital Diaphragmatic Hernia
    Esophageal Atresia and Tracheoesophageal Fistula
    Pyloric Stenosis
    Duodenal Atresia
    Intestinal Atresia
    Hirschsprung's Disease
    Malrotation
    Gastroschisis
    Omphalocele
    Imperforate Anus and Cloaca
    Congenital Lung Malformations
    Meconium Plug Syndrome and Meconium Ileus
    Hypospadias
    Disorders of Sexual Differentiation
    Biliary Atresia
    Inguinal Hernia/Hydrocele
    Umbilical Hernia
    Intussusception
    Foreign Body Ingestion and Aspiration
    Branchial Cleft Remnants
    Choledochal Cyst
    Thyroglossal Duct Cyst
    Renal Duplication Anomalies
    Cryptorchidism
    Vesicoureteral Reflux
    Megaureter
    Ureteropelvic Junction Obstruction
    Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Gastrointestinal Bleeding
    Vascular Rings and Slings
    Lymphadenopathy
    Appendicitis
    Hereditary Spherocytosis
    Idiopathic Thrombocytopenic Purpura
    Thrombotic Thrombocytopenic Purpura
    Sickle Cell Anemia
    Gynecomastia
    Pectus Deformity
    Imperforate Hymen
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Multiple Endocrine Neoplasia Syndromes
    Thyroid Nodules
    Breast Nodules
    Adrenal Tumors
    Pancreatitis
    Gallbladder Disease
    Varicocele
    Acute Scrotum
    Pediatric Urolithiasis
    Wilms' Tumor
    Neuroblastoma
    Hepatoblastoma
    Leukemia
    Rhabdomyosarcoma
    Parenteral Access
    Enteral Access
    Chest Tube
    Scoliosis Exposure
    Hydrocephalus: Ventricular Shunts and Endoscopy
    Circumcision
    Patent Ductus Arteriosus Ligation
    Tracheostomy
    Note Templates
    Common Medications
    Vaccination Schedule
    Developmental Milestones.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Christopher P. Coppola, Alfred P. Kennedy Jr, Marc S. Lessin, Ronald J. Scorpio, editors.
    Summary: The heavily revised second edition of this essential textbook describes how to utilize a range of surgical techniques applicable to pediatrics. Chapters contain flowcharts to facilitate rapid assessment and decision-making. In addition, learning objectives and review questions are contained within each chapter to reinforce the key points covered. Topics covered include routinely encountered adolescent problems and neoplasms in children. Pediatric Surgery: Diagnosis and Treatment concisely describes how to apply a range of diagnostic and treatment techniques that are applicable to the pediatric patient in a variety of surgical scenarios for a range of diseases. Furthermore, it is an ideal resource for trainees and active practitioners taking board examinations.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Introduction
    The History of Pediatric Surgery
    Origins
    Development into a Specialty
    Refinement and Growth of Pediatric Surgery into the Modern Era
    The Future of Pediatric Surgery
    References
    Further Reading
    Resources for Pediatric Surgery
    References
    Further Reading
    COVID-19 Pandemic and Contamination Response
    Origins
    Pathophysiology and Clinical Presentation
    Management
    Mitigation
    Impact of the COVID-19 Pandemic on Pediatric Surgery
    Conclusion
    Study Questions Further Reading
    Part II: Perioperative Issues
    Fluids and Electrolytes
    Special Situations
    Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Pediatric Anesthesiology and Opioid Use
    Essentials of Anesthetic Management of Pediatric Patients
    Pharmacology of Anesthetic Medications
    Use of Anesthetics and Sedatives in Infants and Toddlers
    Additional Notes
    Use of Opioids in Pediatric Patients
    Study Questions
    References
    Further Reading
    Procedural Sedation
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Postoperative Neonatal and Pediatric Critical Care Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Nutrition
    Introduction
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    Reference
    Further Reading
    Disorders of Clotting
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    References
    Further Reading
    Part III: Trauma
    Epidemiology of Trauma
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Injury Prevention
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    References
    Non-accidental Trauma
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    References
    Further Reading
    Initial Trauma Assessment
    Additional Notes
    Historical Perspective
    Future Directions Study Questions
    References
    Further Reading
    Pathophysiology/Pathobiology of Brain Injury
    Study Questions
    References
    Further Reading
    Pediatric Head Trauma and Treatment Algorithm
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    References
    Further Reading
    Abdominal Trauma
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    References
    Thoracic Trauma
    Algorithm to Guide Diagnosis and Treatment of Thoracic Trauma in Children
    Discussion of Specific Injuries in Respect to Thoracic Trauma
    Additional Notes
    Review Questions
    References
    Further Reading
    Burns
    Outline Narrative Section
    Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Cervical Trauma
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    Bibliography
    Traumatic Thoracolumbar Spinal Injuries in Children
    Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Pelvic Fractures
    Discussion
    Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Common Pediatric Fractures
    Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Part IV: Neonatal Problems
    Fetal Surgery and Interventions
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    References
    Necrotizing Enterocolitis
    Additional Notes
    Study Questions
    Further Reading
    Congenital Diaphragmatic Hernia
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Prem Puri, editor.
    Summary: Pediatric Surgery provides an authoritative, up-to-date and comprehensive analysis of current practice in the field. It is divided into three topical volumes, with a total of seven sections focusing on general principles, newborn surgery, general pediatric surgery, tumor surgery, trauma, transplantation, and pediatric urology surgery. Detailed descriptions of surgical techniques and pre- and postoperative management are provided by experts from various parts of the world. The result is an international reference on the surgical management of both common and rare diseases of infants and children that will be an ideal source of information and guidance for pediatric surgeons, pediatric urologists, neonatologists, pediatricians, and all those seeking more detailed information on surgical conditions in children. The three topical volumes are as follows: General Principles and Newborn Surgery General Pediatric Surgery, Tumors, Trauma and Transplantation Pediatric Urology.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editor
    About the Section Editor
    Contributors
    Part I: General: Head and Neck
    1 Thyroglossal and Branchial Cysts, Sinuses, and Fistulas
    Introduction
    Thyroglossal Duct Remnants
    Embryology (Sadler 2006)
    Pathology
    Clinical Presentation and Diagnostic Workup
    Surgery
    Branchial Cysts and Sinuses
    Embryology (Sadler 2006)
    Pathology
    Clinical Presentation and Diagnostic Workout
    Surgery
    Conclusion and Future Directions
    Cross-References
    References
    2 Lymph Node Disorders
    Introduction Anatomy and Physiology
    Pathology
    Benign Disorders
    Lymphatic Malformations: Lymphangioma, Lymphangiomatosis, and Absence of Lymph Vessels
    Infections (Lymphadenitis)
    Nonspecific Infections
    Specific Lymphadenitis
    Other Causes of Lymph Node Enlargement in Children
    Malignant Causes of Lymphadenopathy
    Primary Malignancies of Lymph Nodes Are Called Malignant Lymphoma (Thomas et al. 2011)
    Secondary Malignancies (Lymph Node Metastasis)
    Diagnosis of Lymph Nodes Disorders
    Clinical and Laboratory Examination
    Imaging
    Imaging Findings in Common Clinical Entities Neoplasia
    The Role of PET-CT Scan of Lymph Nodes in Children with Malignant Tumors
    Invasive Diagnostic Procedures
    Fine Needle Aspiration Cytology (FNAC)
    Benign Lymphadenopathy
    FNAC in the Diagnosis of Lymphoma
    Surgical Biopsy
    Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy (SLNB)
    Treatment
    Lymphadenitis
    Medical Treatment: Antibiotics for (Cervical) Lymphadenitis
    Surgical Treatment
    Role of Surgical Excision in Benign Lymphadenopathy
    Role of Surgical Treatment in Malignant Lymphadenopathy
    Primary Lymphoma
    Lymph Node Metastases and Regional Lymph Node Dissection Conclusions and Future Directions
    Cross-References
    References
    3 Disorders of Salivary Glands
    Introduction
    Anatomy of the Salivary Glands
    Diagnostic Evaluation
    History
    Physical Examination
    Radiographic Imaging
    Laboratory Studies
    Biopsy
    Sialoendoscopy
    Salivary Gland Pathology
    Congenital Salivary Gland Pathology
    Branchial Cleft Anomalies
    Vascular Malformations
    Acquired Salivary Gland Pathology
    Inflammatory Disease
    Bacterial Sialadenitis
    Viral Sialadenitis
    Chronic Sialadenitis and Sialolithiasis
    Granulomatous Disease Mucoceles and Mucous Retention Cysts
    Sialorrhea and Ptialism
    Salivary Neoplasms
    Benign Neoplasms
    Hemangiomas
    Pleomorphic Adenoma (Benign Mixed Tumor)
    Warthin Tumor (Papillary Cystadenoma Lymphomatosum)
    Sialoblastoma
    Malignant Neoplasms
    Mucoepidermoid Carcinoma
    Acinic Cell Carcinoma
    Adenoid Cystic Carcinoma
    Rhabdomyosarcoma
    Surgical Considerations
    Conclusion and Future Directions
    Cross-References
    References
    4 Torticollis
    Introduction
    Definitions and Terminology
    Differential Diagnosis of Torticollis Torticollis Due to a Tight Sternomastoid Muscle (Congenital Torticollis, Sternomastoid Tumor, Sternomastoid Fibrosis).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    senior medical and critical care editor, Kevin M. Creamer ; senior surgical editor, Michael M. Fuenfer.
    Digital Access R2Library 2016
  • Digital
    Zacharias Zachariou, editor.
    Summary: This updated volume offers a praxis-oriented and up-to-date overview of all subjects in paediatric surgery according to the European Training Requirements for Paediatric Surgery ( Approved by UEMS in April 2020). Written by experts in the field, Pediatric Surgery Digest aims to give readers quick access to information on all aspects of pediatric surgery, as well as interdisciplinary topics related to paediatrics, adult surgery, obstetrics, and other disciplines working with children. Practical information on child-adapted dosage for pharmacotherapy as well as age-specific injury patterns from scalding in young children to spleen rupture in teenaged vehicle users are taken into consideration. The role of surgery in modern pediatric oncology is also covered.

    Contents:
    1. What is Pediatric Surgery?
    2. Timing of operations in pediatric surgical patients
    3. Preoperative management
    4. The newborn as a pediatric surgical patient
    5. Enteral / Parenteral nutrition
    6. Emergencies / Resuscitation
    7. Blood / Blood-products transfusion
    8. Pain management
    9. Wounds / Surgical techniques
    10. Minimal invasive surgery principles
    11. Imaging in Pediatric Surgery
    12. Expert opinion
    13. Special situations
    14. Birth Trauma
    15. Skull
    16. Spinal column
    16. Face
    17. Neck
    18. Thorax
    19. Diaphragm
    20. Esophagus
    21. Abdominal wall
    22. Abdomen
    23. Stomach and Duodenum
    24. Intestinal congenital malformations
    25. Intestinal diseases
    26. Anorectal diseases
    27. Inflammatory bowel diseases
    28. Blunt abdominal trauma
    29. Liver and Pancreas
    30. Liver and Pancreas
    31. Pediatric surgical oncology
    32. Urogenital Tract
    33. Penis
    34. Testicles
    35. Vagina and External female genitalia
    36. Ovarian cysts
    37. Kidney and Bladder
    38. Kidney insufficiency
    39. Skin and Soft tissues
    40. Osteoarticular system
    41. Skeletal system
    42. Embryology
    43. Vaccinations
    44. Notifiable infectious diseases
    45. Fever types
    46. Catheter sizes
    47. Reference values
    48. Commonly used pharmaceuticals
    49. Syndromes.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    by American Academy of Pediatrics
    Summary: Pediatric Telehealth Best Practices goes beyond AAP policy to offer straightforward strategies for establishing and sustaining a successful telehealth program. Its contents are curated from AAP published content, including guidance from the Section on Telehealth Care as well as journals and books

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Section 1
    Section 2 Guidance for Parents and Caregivers
    Section 3 American Academy of Pediatrics Publications
    Antibiotic Prescribing During Pediatric Direct-to-Consumer Telemedicine Visits
    The Current Pediatric Telehealth Landscape
    Electronic Communication of the Health Record and Information With Pediatric Patients and Their Guardians
    Guiding Principles for Team-Based Pediatric Care
    How to provide good care using telehealth and reduce medical liability risks
    Pediatric mental health experts share tips to make the most of telehealth visits Pediatric Telehealth in the COVID-19 Pandemic Era and Beyond
    Rapid Implementation of Telehealth Services in a Pediatric Pulmonary Clinic During COVID-19
    Strategies for Evaluating Telehealth
    Technology improves pediatric patient engagement, outcomes
    Telehealth and Autism: Treating Challenging Behavior at Lower Cost
    Telehealth Home Monitoring and Postcardiac Surgery for Congenital Heart Disease
    Telehealth: Improving Access to and Quality of Pediatric Health Care
    Telehealth: Opportunities to Improve Access, Quality, and Cost in Pediatric Care Telemedicine for Evaluation of Retinopathy of Prematurity
    Section 4 Forms and Tools
    Section 5 Appendixes
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Print
    Barton D. Schmitt.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ48 .S453 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Girolamo Mattioli, Paolo Petralia, Michele Torre, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses all thoracic diseases of surgical interest, from thorax malformations to airways disorders. It is divided into six main sections; the first two analyze general aspects, while the following three focus on malformations of the thorax, airways, esophagus and diaphragm. The final section describes the main pediatric tumors involving the chest and internal thoracic organs. Each chapter starts with a classification of the main pathologies related to the anatomical region considered. For each pathology, the various aspects of the diagnostic-therapeutic procedure are described in details - from the clinical presentation and diagnosis to the pre-operative preparation, the surgical aspects, and the post-operative course. Possible future developments are also evaluated. The volume will be a useful tool for specialists in pediatric and thoracic surgery, but will also represent an educational resource for medical and nursing students. .

    Contents:
    Part 1. Introductory aspects
    Chapter 1. Thoracic surgery in pediatric patients
    Chapter 2. Managment aspects: ethics and economic sustainability
    Part 2. General aspects
    Chapter 3. Prenatal diagnosis and fetal surgery
    Chapter 4. Imaging of thorax
    Chapter 5. Anesthesia in thoracic surgery
    Chapter 6. Extracorporeal membrane oxygenation
    Chapter 7. Pulmonary function tests
    Part 3. Chest wall
    Chapter 8. Pectus Excavatum
    Chapter 9. Pectus Carinatum
    Chapter 10. Poland Syndrome
    Chapter 11. Jeune Syndrome
    Part 4. Airways
    Chapter 12. Pathologies of the larynx
    Chapter 13. Anomalies of the trachea
    Chapter 14. Tracheostomy
    Chapter 15. Mediastinal cysts: managment and surgical treatment
    Chapter 16. Congenital Lung Malformations
    Part 5. Oesphagus and diaphragm
    Chapter 17. Oesophageal Atresia and Oesophageal Duplications
    Chapter 18. Diaphragmatic Hernia
    Chapter 19. Diaphragmatic Eventrations
    Chapter 20. Sternal clefts and Cantrell syndrome
    Part 6. Oncology
    Chapter 21. Main Thoracic Tumors in Pediatric Age and Surgical Approaches. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [editors] William J. Steinbach, Michael D. Green, Marian G. Michaels, Lara A. Danziger-Isakov, Brian T. Fisher.
    Summary: As the number and types of pediatric transplants increase and the complexity of chemotherapy regimens continues to evolve, there is a greater need for authoritative guidance, clinically actionable strategies, and easy-to-find information in the challenging area of immunocompromised pediatric patients. Pediatric Transplant and Oncology Infectious Diseases offers up-to-date, targeted coverage of this complex field, compiled by world-renowned editors and authors into one convenient volume. Covers the must-know principles for diagnosing and managing opportunistic infections in immunocompromised populations and detailed aspects of their care - information not specifically covered in pediatric infectious disease textbooks or pediatric oncology books. Features algorithms in every chapter that provide visual, accessible overviews of treatment protocols. Discusses key topics such as microbiome implications in transplantation and oncology, antimicrobial resistant Gram-negative bacteria, EBV-associated post-transplant lymphoproliferative disorders, and many others. Offers well-referenced, evidence-based content throughout, with targeted suggested readings provided. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.

    Contents:
    The surgical and immunosuppressive basis for infections in the pediatric solid organ transplant recipient
    Immunology recovery and basis for infections in the pediatric hematopoietic stem cell transplant recipient
    Cancer and antineoplastic therapies and the risk of infection in the pediatric cancer patient
    Infectious disease evaluation of infants and children awaiting solid organ or hematopoietic stem cell transplant
    Donor screening and donor-derived infections
    Prevention of infections in the hematopoietic stem cell transplant recipient
    Prevention of infections in the solid organ transplantation recipient
    Management principles for patients with neutropenia
    Vaccination issues for transplantation and chemotherapy
    Microbiome implications in transplantation and oncology
    Antimicrobial stewardship in immunocompromised hosts
    Hospital infection prevention for pediatric transplant recipients and oncology patients
    Safe living after transplantation or chemotherapy
    Multidrug-resistant gram-negative infections in transplant and oncology patients
    Bartonella, legionalla, mycoplasma, and ureaplasma
    Nontuberculous and tuberculous mycobacterium
    Cytomegalovirus
    Epstein-Barr virus and posttransplant lymphoproliferative disorder
    Herpes simplex and varicella-zoster viruses
    Human herpevirus 6, 7, and 8
    Respiratory viruses
    Adenoviruses
    BK and other polyomavirus associated diseases in children
    Aspergillosis
    Mucormycosis, fusariosis, scedosporiases, and other invasive mold diseases
    Candidiasis
    Cryptococcosis and other rare invasive yeast infections
    Histoplasmosis, blastomycosis, and coccidiodomycosis
    Toxoplasma gondii
    Nocardia and actinomyces
    Pneumocystis pneumonia
    Strongyloides, cryptosporidium, and other parasitic infections
    Gastrointestinal viruses
    Clostrdioides difficile infection.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Alfred P. Kennedy Jr., Romeo C. Ignacio, Robert Ricca, editors.
    Summary: This book meets the need for a detailed resource that focuses on the unique challenges encountered in pediatric trauma and its clinical management. Short practically oriented chapters describe how to successfully treat a range of injuries across a variety of anatomical areas. Emphasis is placed on accounting for the injury mechanism providing recommendations on rapid assessment, initial stabilization and management strategies. Pediatric Trauma Care - A Practical Guide, comprehensively covers how to approach treating pediatric trauma patients suffering with a variety of injuries. Therefore, it is an ideal resource for all medical professionals who encounter these patients in their day-to-day practice.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction - (Unique Factors to Pediatric Trauma).-2 Injury Prevention
    3 Trauma Systems and Pedaitric Trauma Centers
    4 Rural Pediatric Trauma Surgery
    5 Disaster Management
    6 Pediatric Trauma in Humanitarian and Deployed Settings
    7 Initial Trauma Resuscitation
    8 Airway Management
    9 Management of Shock
    10 Blood Tranfusions in Trauma
    11 VTE Prophylaxis and Treatment
    12 Surgical Nutrition
    13 Thromboelastogram
    14 Traumatic Brain Injury
    15 Facial Injury
    16 Neck Injuries
    17 Spinal Injury
    18 Thoracic Injury (Lung and Chest Wall)
    19 Penetrating Abdominal Injury
    20 Liver Injury
    21 Pancreas, Gallbladder and Duodenum
    22 Splenic Injury
    23 Gastric Injury
    24 Small Bowel/Colon Injury
    25 Rectal Injury
    26 Perineal (saddle) injury
    27 Upper Tract Genitourinary Trauma
    28 Lower Tract Genitourinary Trauma
    29 Pelvic injury
    30 Extremity Orthopedic Injury
    31 Injuries to the Hand
    32 Vascular Injuries to the Heart and Great Thoracic Vessels
    33 Vascular injuries of the Abdominal Vessels
    34 Vascular Injuries of the Extremity
    35 Envenomation, bites and stings
    36 Child Abuse
    37 Hypothermia and Near-drowning
    38 Burns
    39 New Technologies in Pediatric Trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Christine M. Houser.
    Summary: With hundreds of question and answer items and bite-sized chunks of information that can be read and processed easily, reviewing for the pediatric board exams - or just brushing up in your spare time - has never been easier. Pediatric Tricky Topics, Volume 1: A Practically Painless Review includes review items in pediatric orthopedics, trauma, environmental medicine, toxicology, rheumatology, and neurology topics, among others. The Q&A format allows for self-testing or study with a partner or a group and is practical and accessible enough to dip into during a few minutes of downtime at the hospital or office, and as such it is suitable for those studying for the pediatric board exam, practicing physicians brushing up their skills, and any busy clinician who wants to learn more about these topics while on the go.

    Contents:
    General Orthopedic Question and Answer Items
    General Trauma Question and Answer Items
    General Environmental Medicine Question and Answer Items
    General Toxicology Question and Answer Items
    General Prevention Question and Answer Items
    General Research and Statistics Question and Answer Items
    General Rheumatology Question and Answer Items
    Selected Neurology Topics
    General Neurology Question and Answer Items.-.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Harriet J. Paltiel, Edward Y. Lee, editors.
    Summary: This book is a unique, authoritative and clinically oriented text on pediatric ultrasound. It is your one-step, comprehensive reference for up-to-date information on pediatric ultrasound, addressing all aspect of congenital and acquired disorders encountered in clinical practice. The easy-to-navigate text is divided into 20 chapters. Each chapter is organized to cover the latest ultrasound techniques, normal development and anatomy, anatomic variants, key clinical presentations, characteristic ultrasound imaging findings, differential diagnosis and pitfalls where relevant. With more than 2000 images, examples of new technological developments such as contrast-enhanced ultrasound and elastography are included. Written by internationally known pediatric radiology experts and editorial team lead by acclaimed authors, Harriet J. Paltiel, MDCM and Edward Y. Lee, MD, MPH, this book is a practical and ideal guide for practicing radiologists, radiology trainees, ultrasound technologists as well as clinicians in other specialties who are interested in pediatric ultrasound.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Contributors and Editors
    Contributors
    About the Editors
    1: Ultrasound Imaging Techniques and Artifacts
    Introduction
    Acoustics
    Wavelength and Frequency
    Sound Propagation
    Acoustic Impedance
    Reflection
    Refraction
    Attenuation
    Distance Measurement
    Instrumentation
    Transmitter
    Transducer
    Receiver
    Image Display
    Image Storage
    Mechanical Transducer
    Array Transducer
    Transducer Selection
    Harmonic Imaging
    Spatial Compounding
    Three-Dimensional Ultrasound
    Doppler Ultrasound Continuous Wave Doppler
    Pulsed Wave Doppler
    Color Doppler
    Power Doppler
    B-Flow
    Elastography Imaging
    Quasi-Static Strain Elastography
    Dynamic Elastography
    Ultrasound Contrast Imaging
    Contrast Agents
    Pulse Inversion Imaging
    Ultrasound Artifacts
    Grayscale Artifacts
    Mirror Image: Multipath Reflection
    Refraction
    Reverberation, Comet-Tail, and Ring-Down Artifacts
    Side Lobe Artifact
    Enhancement and Shadowing Attenuation Artifacts
    Partial Volume Artifact
    Doppler Artifacts
    Technically Related Doppler Artifacts
    Inappropriate Doppler Settings Aliasing (Wraparound)
    Color Doppler Noise
    Flow Directional Abnormalities
    Anatomically Related Doppler Artifacts
    Spectral Mirror Image Artifact
    Tissue Vibration Artifact
    Twinkling Artifact
    Blooming Artifact
    Three-Dimensional Ultrasound Artifacts
    Ultrasound Contrast Agent Artifacts
    Blooming Artifact
    Systolic Peak Velocity Increase
    High-Intensity Transient Signals
    Ultrasound Safety
    Thermal Bioeffects
    Nonthermal Bioeffects
    Regulations and Policies
    References
    2: Brain
    Introduction
    Technique
    Patient Positioning Ultrasound Transducer Selection
    Imaging Approaches
    Normal Development and Anatomy
    Normal Development
    Normal Anatomy
    Cerebral Cortex
    Basal Ganglia and Thalami
    Ventricles
    Cisterna Magna
    Extra-Axial Fluid Spaces
    Congenital Brain Anomalies
    Dorsal Induction Disorders
    Chiari Malformations
    Anencephaly
    Hydranencephaly
    Ventral Induction Disorders
    Holoprosencephaly
    Septo-Optic (Pituitary) Dysplasia
    Anomalies of the Corpus Callosum
    Dandy-Walker Syndrome
    Neuronal Proliferation Disorders
    Hemimegalencephaly
    Neuronal Migration Disorders Lissencephaly
    Gray Matter Heterotopia
    Post-Migration Disorders
    Polymicrogyria
    Schizencephaly
    Intracranial Hemorrhage
    Preterm Infants
    Periventricular Hemorrhagic Infarction
    Cerebellar Hemorrhage
    Term Infants
    Epidural Hemorrhage
    Subdural Hemorrhage
    Subpial Hemorrhage
    Parenchymal Hemorrhage
    Choroid Plexus Hemorrhage
    Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Global Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Preterm Infants
    Term Infants
    Focal Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Arterial Ischemic Stroke
    Venous Sinus Thrombosis
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Infectious Brain Disorders
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Michael Riccabona ; with contributions by Brian Coley, Andreas Gamillscheg, Bernd Heinzl, Gerolf Schweintzger.
    Summary: Ultrasound plays an important role in the diagnostic imaging of infants and children and has indeed become the workhorse for many conditions. This is attributable both to the avoidance of ionizing radiation and to the unique features displayed on ultrasound in children in almost all body areas. In the future the potential of ultrasound can be expected to increase further owing to new developments such as ultrasound contrast material, three- or four-dimensional ultrasound, and ultrasound elastography. This book systematically covers the use of ultrasound in all organ systems and throughout childhood. After discussion of the basics, including physics, artifacts, and procedural details, decision making regarding the use of ultrasound is elucidated by listing next imaging steps based on recommended imaging algorithms. The indications and prerequisites for a particular examination are documented, and practical tips and tricks are highlighted. The normal, age-dependent ultrasound findings and typical appearances in different pathologies are presented in detail and illustrated by numerous high-quality images. Particular emphasis is placed on those findings that differ from the adult sonographic appearances. In addition to the classic pediatric abdominal applications, detailed consideration is given to neurosonography, echocardiography, chest ultrasound, musculoskeletal and hip ultrasound, Doppler sonography, and interventional ultrasound. The potential role of the most modern techniques in various situations is explained. Pediatric Ultrasound will prove an invaluable source of information and an indispensable aid to decision making and diagnosis for radiology residents, experienced (pediatric) radiologists, sonographers, pediatricians, pediatric surgeons and urologists, and all other physicians who deal with children as a part of their daily practice.

    Contents:
    Basics: Physics of diagnostic ultrasound (US). US techniques. Artifacts. Biological effects of US. Practical US approach. Documentation and reporting. Future US methods. Basics of (Color) Doppler sonography
    Diagnostic flow charts, imaging algorithms, and graphs: Urinary tract diseases. Tumors and oncology. Abdomen. Systemic diseases. Graphs and illustrations for standardized measurements and volume calculations
    US investigations of various organs and systems: Pediatric cranial neurosonography. US of the neonatal spinal cord. Neck and facial/cervical glands. Chest US. Basics of pediatric and neonatal echocardiography. Abdominal US. Musculoskeletal and other small part US. US-guided interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Michael Riccabona, editor.
    Summary: This book, now in a revised and updated second edition, systematically covers the use of ultrasound in all organ systems throughout childhood. After discussing the basics, including physics, ultrasound methods, and artifacts, it elucidates decision-making regarding the use of ultrasound by discussing diagnostic flow charts based on recommended imaging algorithms. The main part of the book addresses ultrasound investigations of the various organs. It documents the indications and prerequisites for specific examinations and offers practical tips and tricks. The normal, age-dependent ultrasound findings and typical appearances in different pathologies are presented in detail and illustrated by numerous high-quality images, with a particular emphasis on those findings that differ from the adult sonographic appearances. And finally, dedicated chapters explore point-of-care and emergency ultrasound, interventional ultrasound, and present orienting tables. This state-of-the-art book covers modern techniques and applications, like contrast-enhanced ultrasound, ultrasound elastography, and automated-image optimization, as well as all pediatric ultrasound applications from point-of-care ultrasound and orienting assessment also at the intensive care unit/emergency room to more detailed and advanced applications, e.g., in dedicated tertiary referral centers. Pediatric Ultrasound is an invaluable source of information and an indispensable aid to decision-making and diagnosis for radiology residents, (pediatric) radiologists, sonographers, pediatricians, (pediatric) surgeons, urologists, and all other physicians who deal with children as a part of their daily practice.

    Contents:
    PART I Basics / Theory / Methods: US Physics
    US Methods, artifacts, biologic effects and practice
    (Color) Doppler US: theory and artifacts, typical applications in childhood
    Contrast-enhanced US, and Ultrasound elastography in childhood
    Paediatric limited field of view US/point of care US (POCUS) and emergency US - when, how and for what
    Part II Diagnostic flow charts, imaging algorithms, and graphs: Imaging and imaging algorithms for common queries in childhood
    Measurements and volume calculations: basic considerations, graphs and illustrations for standardisation
    PART III US investigations of the various organs: Neurosonography in Neonates, Infants and Children
    US of the neonatal spinal canal and cord
    US of the neck in childhood
    Basics of pediatric echocardiography
    Ultrasound of the Chest
    Upper abdominal US in neonates, infants and children
    including novel applications
    US of the paediatric gastrointestinal tract
    Ultrasound of the urogenital tract in neonates, infants and children
    Neonatal and pediatric hip US
    Musculo-skeletal- & other small part US in childhood
    US of peripheral nerves in childhood
    PART IV Miscellaneous: US-guided interventions and invasive US procedures, and respective follow-up in childhood
    Normal values as relevant for paediatric US.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Melvin A. Shiffman, editor.
    Summary: The book starts with a short introduction to the topic, followed by a detailed description of the anatomical differences between exstrophy and gastroschisis. In the following chapters, the authors describe the surgical umbilicoplasty for congenital defects in children. Outcomes and complications will be discussed in the last chapter. Written by respected authors, this book will offer residents and fellows as well as practicing and highly experienced plastic surgeons essential guidance on treatment and decision-making concerning umbilical reconstruction. Its numerous illustrations and clearly structured content make the book a must-read.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anatomical Differences
    History
    Pediatric Umbilicoplasty
    Exstrophy
    Gastroschisis
    Urachal Pathology
    Complications and Outcomes.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Joshua M. Abzug, Scott H. Kozin, Dan A. Zlotolow, editors.
    Summary: Sub-specialization within pediatric orthopedics is growing, in part due to the development of free-standing children's hospitals and the desire by patients and their parents to have "experts" care for them. We are at the forefront of a trend in physicians classifying themselves as pediatric upper extremity surgeons. Numerous pediatric hospitals now have or are recruiting physicians to focus their practice in this area. Historically, these issues were treated by general orthopedic surgeons, adult hand surgeons, pediatric orthopedic surgeons, or plastic surgeons. However, none of these professionals treat the entirety of pediatric upper extremity pathology, and no single reference has focused on the treatment of the pediatric upper extremity as a whole. For example, fractures have typically been written about in pediatric textbooks, while tendon and nerve injuries are covered in adult hand textbooks. This textbook is a comprehensive, illustrated reference that discusses all aspects of the pediatric upper extremity, from embryology and functional development to nerve injuries, trauma, tumors, burns, sports injuries and more.

    Contents:
    I: DEVELOPMENT
    Embryology
    Functional development
    II: PHYSICAL EXAMINATION
    Physical examination
    Outcome measures
    III: IMAGING
    IV: ANESTHESIA
    V: OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY
    Splinting and casting
    Occupational therapy evaluation and treatment
    VI: CONGENITAL DIFFERENCES
    Introduction to congenital differences and genetics
    Failure of formation
    Failure of differentiation
    Duplication
    Overgrowth
    Undergrowth
    Constriction band syndromes
    Metabolic and endocrine abnormalities
    Genetic syndromes
    Skeletal dysplasias
    VII: NERVE
    Nerve anatomy and diagnostic evaluation
    Ulnar nerve injury
    Median nerve injury
    Radial nerve injury
    VIII: BRACHIAL PLEXUS PALSY
    Obstetrical brachial plexus palsy
    Microsurgery for obstetrical brachial plexus birth palsy
    Glenohumeral joint secondary procedures
    Elbow flexion secondary procedures
    Traumatic brachial plexus injuries
    IX: TETRAPLEGIA
    Introduction to tetraplegia
    Treatment
    X: NEUROMUSCULAR: Cerebral palsy
    Arthrogryposis
    XI: TRAUMA
    Multiply injured child
    Non-accidental trauma
    Nail bed injuries
    Flexor tendon injuries
    Extensor tendon injuries
    Amputations/replantation
    Phalangeal fractures
    Metacarpal fractures
    Hand dislocations
    Carpal fractures
    Distal radius fractures
    Forearm fractures
    Monteggia fracture dislocations
    Galeazzi and Essex Lopresti injuries
    Pediatric elbow and supracondylar fractures
    Distal articular humerus fractures
    Medial epicondyle fractures, elbow dislocations, and transphyseal separations
    Radial head, neck and olecranon fractures
    Proximal humerus and humeral shaft fractures
    Clavicle fractures, AC dislocations, SC dislocations and scapula fractures
    XII: INFECTIONS
    Hand infections
    Cellulitis and necrotizing fasciitis
    Osteomyelitis and septic arthritis
    XIII: TUMORS
    Benign soft tissue lesions
    Benign bony lesions
    Malignant lesions
    XIV: COMPARTMENT SYNDROME
    XV: SKIN LESIONS
    Congenital lesions
    Acquired lesions
    XVI: BURNS
    XVII: VASCULAR DISORDERS
    XVIII: RHEUMATOLOGIC DISORDERS
    XIX: FACTITIOUS DISORDERS
    XX: SPORTS INJURIES
    Caring for the athlete
    The throwing athlete
    The gymnast
    XXI: ARTHROSCOPY
    Wrist
    Elbow
    Shoulder
    XXII: OTHER TOPICS
    Trigger digits
    Kienbock's disease
    Madelung's deformity
    Torticollis and Sprengel's deformity
    Multi-ligamentous laxity
    Thoracic outlet syndrome
    Prostheses.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Mario Lima, Gianantonio Manzoni, editors ; foreword by Göran Läckgren.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Saul P. Greenfield, Christopher S. Cooper.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Ronald Rabinowitz, William C. Hulbert, Robert A. Mevorach, editors.
    Summary: While there are Pediatric Urology texts for pediatric urologists and for general urologists, there are none for primary care physicians. This book is written specifically for the primary care physician, the initial contact for the many children with urologic conditions. The text will assist the primary care physician in the recognition of and participation in the care of children with these common problems including both congenital and acquired conditions. Specific chapters are also dedicated to the management of cases that may include medical and/or surgical intervention. The contributing authors of this text were selected for their internationally recognized expertise and straight forward educational styles in the field of Pediatric Urology. Pediatric Urology for the Primary Care Physician will significantly help our primary care colleagues in the evaluation and management of children with genito-urinary problems.

    Contents:
    Fetal Hydronephrosis
    Multicystic Dysplastic Kindney
    Renal Agenesis and Associated Anomalies
    Renal Duplication Anomalies
    Ureteropelvic Junction Obstruction in the Pediatric Population
    Pediatric Renal Trauma
    Renal Stones
    Rediatric Renal Tumors
    Ureteroceles
    Megaureter
    Ectopic Ureter
    Cystitis
    Vesicoureteral Reflux
    Posterior Urethral Valves
    Bladder Exstrophy for the Primary Care Provider
    Daytime Wetting
    Tumors of the Lower Genitourinary Tract in Children and Adolescents
    Pediatric Hernias and Hydroceles
    Retractile Testes
    Undescended Tests
    Testicular Torsion
    Testis Tumor
    Adolescent Varicocele
    Phimosis
    Paraphimosis
    Meatal Stenosis
    Balanitis
    Urethrorrhagia
    Urethral Stricture
    Hypospadias
    Chordee
    Epispadias
    Female External Genitalia for Primary Care Providers
    Ambiguous Genitalia
    Myelodysplasia: From Birth to Adulthood
    Continent Urinary Diversion
    Managing Pediatric Lower Urinary Tract Dysfunction and Associated Constipation in the Primary Care Setting
    Pyelonephritis
    Nephrologic Aspects of Urologic Disease
    Pediatric Primary Nocturnal Enuresis (Bedwetting).
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Summary: "This handy visual aid guides clinicians in discussions with patients and parents about the importance of vaccines, the diseases they help prevent and the various vaccines recommended. The chart includes infographics and clinical images to help illustrate why vaccines remain important in preventing diseases. Vaccines covered include influenza, varicella (chickenpox), human papillomavirus, polio, meningitis, and much more. The chart also includes information for health care professionals about the origin and nature of the diseases and current recommendations for vaccine schedules. In addition, it provides steps to take when a child or community is exposed to a potential infection, including prophylaxis and reporting to local health departments"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    DTaP, Tdap, Td
    Haemophilus influenzae type B (HIB)
    Hepatitis A and B
    Human papillomavirus (HPV)
    Influenza (“flu”)
    Measles-mumps-rubella (MMR)
    Meningococcal infections
    Pneumococcal infections
    Polio
    Rotavirus
    Varicella (chickenpox).
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    Abhishek Agrawal, Gavin Britz, editors.
    Summary: This book is a detailed resource on the technical aspects of pediatric neurosurgery that relate to vascular malformations of the brain and spinal cord. It introduces concepts relevant to cerebrovascular system development and the classification of vascular malformations. Information on a range of disorders is then provided with an emphasis placed on answering frequently asked questions in relation to a particular condition. Therefore, enabling the reader to systematically improve their understanding of how approach treating patients utilizing techniques such as ultrasound and spinal angiography. The chapters, authored by experts in their respective field, provide a standard of care based on current diagnostic and management guidelines for pediatric neurosurgical diseases. Pediatric Vascular Neurosurgery: Technical Nuances in Contemporary Pediatric Neurosurgery (Part 2) is a comprehensive overview of how to approach diagnosing and treating a range of vascular malformations encountered in pediatric patients. The problem-solving approach of this work makes it a valuable addition to the literature and suitable for use by residents, fellows and consultants within pediatrics and allied specialities, including Neurosurgery, Neurology, Neuro-anesthesia, Neuro-critical care and advanced health care providers amongst others.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Leonard G. Feld, John D. Mahan.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Christina A. Di Bartolo, Maureen K. Braun.
    Summary: With the proliferation of research studies posted online, media outlets scrambling to pick up stories, and individuals posting unverified information via social media, the landscape for parents trying to understand the latest science as it pertains to their children has never been more challenging to navigate. This book is intended to assist pediatricians when discussing research findings with parents. It provides an overview of research practices and terminology, clarifies misconceptions about studies and findings, and explains the limitations of research when applied to medical decision making. Through this framework, physicians can explain their reasoning behind specific clinical recommendations. In addition to examining the broad concepts comprising research literacy, this book reviews the current findings in topics that pediatricians report discussing most often with parents, such as vaccines, diet, medications, and sleep. Pediatrician's Guide to Discussing Research with Patients is a unique resource for pediatricians in encouraging the development of research literacy in their patients.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    2 Funding and Bias
    3 Study Design and Related Considerations
    4 Significance: Statistical versus Clinical
    5 Incorporating Research into Health Care Decisions
    6 Vaccines
    7 Diet
    8 Food Allergies
    9 Discipline Techniques
    10 Medications
    11 Sleep
    12 Screen Time
    13 School Refusal
    14 Infectious Diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Parisa M. Garrett, Kahyun Yoon-Flannery, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of what comes after the completion of a pediatrics residency. Chapters review several areas of fellowships and how to navigate through the application process, provide a guide for finding a job and negotiating through your first position, and also discuss other difficult topics such as how to deal with malpractice lawsuits. The book is comprised of six parts. Part 1 explains pediatric fellowships, including how to apply, prepare, and choose your ideal fellowship. Part 2 describes what to expect on your first job search and what to consider when choosing a career path. Part 3 and Part 4 aim to prepare readers for what happens after finding and starting a job in pediatrics, such as moving, setting up an office, supervising residents, and how to deal with difficult patients. Part 5 discusses long term goals and planning, which helps prepare readers for the long road ahead. This includes pursuing partnerships, additional degrees, and training. It also shares knowledge on how to manage medical school debt, retirement planning, switching jobs, and much more. Finally, Part 6 aims to help readers maintain their personal health and family life by setting boundaries, managing stress, and discussing ways to avoid burnout. Written by experts in the field, A Pediatrician's Path: What to Expect After a Pediatrics Residency is a valuable resource for pediatricians, residents and medical students interested in a career in pediatrics.

    Contents:
    Applying for Fellowship
    Adolescent Medicine
    Pediatric Critical Care
    Pediatric Emergency Medicine
    Pediatric Endocrinology
    Pediatric Gastroenterology
    Pediatric Infectious Diseases
    Neonatal-Perinatal Medicine
    Pediatric Palliative Care
    Post Pediatric Portal Program Fellowship
    Completion of Multiple Fellowships: finding a Job
    Your First Job: Where to Look
    Applications and Interviews
    Contract Considerations: Preparation
    Contract Considerations: Understanding the Contract
    Choosing a Career in Academic Medicine
    Choosing a Career as a Pediatric Hospitalist
    Choosing a Career in Private Practice
    Choosing a Career in Public Health
    Choosing a Career in Pediatric Urgent Care
    Choosing a Career in Direct Primary Care
    Non-clinical Roles
    Moving
    Licenses, Credentials, and Privileges
    Setting Up Your Office
    Risk Management and Patient Safety
    Mentorship
    Patient Experience
    Preparing for Your First Day
    Daily Considerations
    Electronic Health Records
    Asking for Help
    Impostor Syndrome
    Supervising Residents
    Balancing Resident Autonomy and Patient Safety
    Working with Advanced Practice Providers
    Research
    Staff Considerations
    Billing and Insurances
    Pediatric Boards, Continuing Medical Education, and Maintenance of Certification
    How to Deal with a Difficult Patient
    Keeping up to Date is more than UpToDate
    Pursuing Partnership in a Private Practice
    Pursuing Additional Degrees and Training
    Your 5 and 10 Year Plan
    Disability Insurance 101
    Life Insurance 101
    Managing Your Medical School Debt
    Retirement Planning
    Switching Jobs
    Your Side Hustle
    Your Online Presence
    Personal Health and Family Life
    Setting Boundaries
    Stress Management
    Developing Interests Outside of Medicine and Avoiding Burnout.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] David L. Skaggs, MD, MMM, Chief of Orthopedic Surgery, Children's Hospital Los Angeles, Endowed Chair of Pediatric Spinal Disorders, Professor of Orthopaedic Surgery, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California, Mininder S. Kocher, MD, MPH, Professor of Orthopaedic Surgery, Harvard Medical School, Associate Director, Division of Sports Medicine, Boston Children's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Lloyd J. Brown, Ryan J. Coller, Lee Todd Miller.
    Summary: "BRS Pediatrics is a comprehensive review of general and subspecialty pediatrics aimed for medical students on their core clerkship in pediatrics. Written in the popular Board Review Series outline format, this text presents the essentials of pediatrics through concise descriptions, clinical correlations, numerous figures and nearly 100 tables. This revision will include over 500 board-style questions with complete answers and explanations, with exams at the end of each chapter and an end-of-book Comprehensive Examination"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Pediatric health supervision
    Behavioral and developmental pediatrics
    Adolescent medicine
    Neonatology
    Genetic disorders and inborn errors of metabolism
    Endocrinology
    Infectious diseases
    Cardiology
    Pulmonology
    Gastroenterology
    Nephrology and urology
    Neurology
    Hematology
    Oncology
    Allergy and immunology
    Rheumatology
    Orthopedics
    Ophthalmology
    Dermatology
    Emergency medicine.
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Robert J. Yetman, Mark D. Hormann.
    Contents:
    General pediatrics
    The newborn infant
    The cardiovascular system
    The respiratory system
    The gastrointestinal tract
    The urinary tract
    The neuromuscular system
    Infectious diseases and immunology
    Hematologic and neoplastic diseases
    The adolescent.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2016
    Users must create a username and password
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ48.2 .P42 2016
    2
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Robert J. Yetman, Mark D. Hormann.
    Summary: "The PreTest Clinical Science Series prepares medical students for the USMLE Step 2 CK, which assesses students' medical knowledge of core clinical topics with USMLE style review questions. Useful as reviews for clerkship exams following core clinical rotations, each PreTest book contains 500 questions with comprehensive, targeted answers and rationale. Discussions review correct and incorrect answer options to reinforce learning. The 15th edition of Pediatrics: PreTest simulates the USMLE Step 2 CK test-taking experience by including vignette-style questions and updates on the latest treatments and therapies for infants, children and adolescents. To ensure that questions are representative of the style and level of difficulty of the exam, each PreTest book is reviewed by students who either recently passed Step 2CK or completed their Pediatrics rotation"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2020
    Users must create a username and password
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RJ48.2 .P42 2020
    2
  • Digital
    edited by Andrew R. Peterson, MD, MSPH, Clinical Associate Professor, Stead Family Department of Pediatrics, Carver College of Medicine, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa, Kelly E. Wood, MD, Clinical Assistant Professor, Stead Family Department of Pediatrics, Carver College of Medicine, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa.
    Contents:
    Adolescent medicine and gynecology / Gayathri Chelvakumar and Paula Cody
    Allergic and immunologic disorders / Amy O. Thomas and Alex Thomas
    Behavioral and mental health issues / Linda J. Cooper-Brown and Jennifer McWilliams
    Blood and neoplastic disorders / Adam D. Wolfe
    Cardiology / Benton Ng
    Cognition, language, and learning disabilities / Amy L. Conrad, Todd Kopelman, and Tammy L. Wilgenbusch
    Collagen vascular and other multisystem disorders / Sandy Hong and Kelly E. Wood
    Critical care / Ashley Loomis and Niyati Patel
    Ear, nose and throat disorders / Derek Zhorne
    Emergency care / Sarah L. Miller
    Endocrine disorders / Vanessa Curtis
    Ethics / Becky Benson
    Eye disorders / Melanie Schmitt
    Fetus and newborn / Erin Osterholm
    Fluids and electrolyte metabolism / Jeff Van Blarcom
    Pediatric gastroenterology / Dina Al-Zubeidi
    Genetics and dysmorphology / Greg Rice
    Genital system disorders / Kathleen Kieran
    Growth and development / Erin Howe
    Infectious disease / Nathan Price
    Metabolic disorders / Eric T. Rush
    Musculoskeletal disorders / Natalie Stork and Blaise Nemeth
    Neurologic disorders / Satsuki Matsumoto and Leah Zhorne
    Nutrition / Kelly E. Wood
    Patient safety and quality improvement / Elizabeth H. Mack
    Pharmacology. Part I, Pharmacology and pain management / Susan S. Vos, Gary Milavetz, Jeff Van Blarcom, and Laura Steinauer
    Pharmacology, Part II, Sedation / Jeff Van Blarcom
    Poisoning and environmental exposure to hazardous substances / Christopher Hogrefe
    Preventative pediatrics / Ashley Miller and Rebecca Lozman-Oxman
    Psychosocial issues & child abuse. Part 1, Psychosocial issues / Cassandra Collins, James Burkhalter, and Kelly E. Wood
    Psychosocial issues & child abuse. Part 2, Child abuse / Cassandra Collins, James Burkhalter, and Kelly E. Wood
    Research and statistics / Andrew R. Peterson
    Renal and urologic disorders / Jen Jetton and Kathy Lee-Son
    Respiratory disorders / Anthony Fischer
    Skin disorders / Will Aughenbaugh and Lisa Muchard
    Sports medicine and physical fitness / Andrew R. Peterson
    Substance abuse / LaTisha L. Bader and Ross Mathiasen.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPediatrics
    AccessPediatrics
    Review Questions Users must create a username and password
  • Digital
    edited by Klaus M. Beier.
    Summary: This book provides extensive information on pedophilia (sexual interest in the prepubescent body age), hebephilia (sexual interest in the early-pubescent body age) and sexual offenses against children, i.e., the various forms of child sexual abuse, including the use of child sexual abuse images, along with the current state of knowledge concerning offender groups. The book makes it clear that pedophilia or hebephilia do not inevitably lead to offenses against children - that there are those who keep their desires in their fantasies and do not act them out on the behavioral level. The World Health Organization classifies pedophilia as a mental disorder. It can be safely assumed that many pedophile men in a given community live their lives, unrecognized and adamant about hiding their sexual drives from society and from themselves, and who are genuinely motivated not to act upon their sexual fantasies. The numbers of exactly this particular group of pedophilically inclined non-offenders can be increased by preventive therapeutic measures. For this purpose, two treatment programs have been developed at the Institute of Sexology and Sexual Medicine at the Charité-Universitätsmedizin Berlin (University Clinic) since the initiation of the Prevention Project Dunkelfeld in 2005 - First, the project involving adult participants (Berlin Dissexuality Therapy: BEDIT) and later, another for adolescents (BEDIT-A), who find themselves attracted to children. Both program manuals are completely integrated into this work, which reflects 15 years of assessment and treatment experience.

    Contents:
    1. Pedophilia and Hebephilia
    2. Child Sexual Abuse and the Use of Child Sexual Abuse Images
    3. Therapeutic Options
    4. The Berlin Prevention Project Dunkelfeld
    5. BEDIT-Manual for Adults
    6. Modules for Adults
    7. BEDIT-A Manual for Adolescents
    8. Modules for Adolescents
    9. Worksheets BEDIT
    10. Worksheets BEDIT-A.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jonathan D. Avery, editor.
    Summary: The book serves as a guide for all clinicians seeking to improve healthcare outcomes by implementing peer support in the treatment and management of medical and mental health conditions. The book begins with a chapter that describes the importance of peers and how peers are increasingly being utilized to improve medical outcomes. Each chapter opens with an introductory section, include tables and figures, and ends with a summary section for quick reference. Written by experts in the field, this resource covers the clinical implications for peer support in substance misuse, chronic medical conditions, in special populations, and mental illness generally. Each chapter is designed specifically to be accessible for a broad clinical audience of experts and non-experts across medical specialties. Peer Support in Medicine is an excellent resource for all clinicians seeking to improve healthcare outcomes using the gains made by the peer support model, including psychiatrists, psychologists, healthcare researchers, and medical students across specialties, nurses, social workers, and all others.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Peer Support for Substance Use Disorders
    Peer Support for Mental Illness
    Peer Support for Chronic Medical Conditions
    Peer Support for Bereavement
    Peer Support for Adolescents
    Peer Support for Elderly
    Peer Support for Families
    Peer Support for the Medical Community.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    H.R. Patel ... [and others].
    Summary: The fully comprehensive book brings together the three main pelvic specialties (Urology, Gynecological Oncology and Colorectal Surgery) into one volume. Patients have been shown to benefit from a multidisciplinary approach since it allows surgeons of different specialties to learn from one another therefore enhancing the treatment for the patient. Pelvic cancer outcomes are poor in low volume centres. These centres account for 80% of the global centres dealing with these cancers. Pelvic Cancer Surgery: Modern Breakthroughs and Future Advances is a much needed book that can focus training and assist health professionals in their care of patients with pelvic dysfunction. Pelvic Cancer Surgery: Modern Breakthroughs and Future Advances is complete with full color illustrations and schematic diagrams and makes use of key points and stepwise figures for an enhanced learning experience.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Giulio A. Santoro, Andrzej P. Wieczorek, Abdul H. Sultan.
    Summary: This excellent textbook provides up-to-date information on all aspects of pelvic floor disorders. After an opening section on anatomy and physiology, it explains the methodology, role and application of the integrated imaging approach in detail, including the most advanced 3D, 4D, and dynamic ultrasound techniques, illustrated with hundreds of images. It then discusses in depth the epidemiology, etiology, assessment, and management of the full range of pelvic floor disorders from multidisciplinary and practical perspectives. The book also provides information on the various forms of obstetric perineal trauma, urinary incontinence and voiding dysfunction, anal incontinence, pelvic organ prolapse, constipation and obstructed defecation, pelvic pain and sexual dysfunction, and fistulas, and includes treatment algorithms as well as helpful guidance on what to do when surgical treatment goes wrong. The authors are leading experts in the field from around the globe. Since the first edition from 2010 (more than 200,000 chapter downloads), the book has been extensively rewritten and features numerous additional topics. The result is a comprehensive textbook that is invaluable for gynecologists, colorectal surgeons, urologists, radiologists, and gastroenterologists, beginners and veterans alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Achille Lucio Gaspari, Pierpaolo Sileri, editors ; foreword by Giorgio De Toma.
    Summary: During recent decades, more than 100 surgical procedures have been proposed to treat pelvic organ prolapse, and surgeons are still searching for the ideal approach. Although generally accepted guidelines and algorithms are still lacking, careful preoperative work-up and patient selection can serve as a sound basis for tailored surgery. In this comprehensive book, leading experts from around the world provide a detailed, up-to-date overview of the diagnostic and surgical approaches employed in patients with prolapse of the middle or posterior pelvic floor compartment. Each surgical technique is explained step by step with the aid of instructive figures. Guidance is also included on the management of surgical complications and of recurrent disease aspects that are too frequently overlooked in the scientific literature. This book will prove essential reading for all who are interested in functional colorectal disorders of the pelvic floor and will represent a unique and invaluable source of knowledge for general surgeons, colorectal surgeons, and urogynecologists, whether in training or practice.

    Contents:
    The Multidisciplinary View of a Pelvic Floor Unit
    Epidemiology and Prevalence of Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Pelvic Floor Anatomy
    Imaging of Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Anorectal Physiology
    Pelvic Floor Ultrasonography
    Pelvic Floor Ultrasonography
    Fecal Incontinence
    Obstructed Defecation Syndrome
    Solitary Rectal Ulcer Syndrome and Obstructed Defecation: Common Pathology
    Chronic Anorectal Pain: Pathophysiological Aspects, Diagnosis, and Treatment
    Biofeedback and Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Biofeedback Training and Physiokinetic Therapy
    STARR and TRANSTARR Procedures
    Delorme's Procedure
    The Altemeier's Procedure for External Rectal Prolapse
    The Express Procedure for Internal Rectal Prolapse
    Transperineal Rectocele Correction
    Mesh Rectopexy (Ripstein, Orr-Loygue, Wells, and Frykman-Goldberg)
    Rectopexy without Mesh
    Laparoscopic Ventral Rectocolpopexy for Rectal Prolapse Syndromes: Restoration of Anatomy and Improvement of Function
    Pelvic Organ Prolapse Suspension.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    David A. Gordon, Mark R. Katlin, editors.
    Summary: This text provides a comprehensive, state of the art review of this field and will serve as a resource for urologists, colorectal surgeons, geriatricians, and gynecologists as well as researchers interested in neuromuscular phenomena in the pelvis. The book also reviews new data regarding risk factors for pelvic floor muscle dysfunction and profiles new minimally invasive surgical strategies for well known pelvic disease processes. Each chapter is chock full of data from landmark trials which have been published over the past few years and placed in context with respect to current management techniques for pelvic floor disorders. Written by experts in their field, Pelvic Floor Dysfunction and Pelvic Surgery in the Elderly: An Integrated Approachprovides a concise yet comprehensive summary to help guide patient management.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Lewis Chan, Vincent Tse, Stephanie The, Peter Stewart, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Principles of Ultrasound and Instrumentation
    2. Functional Anatomy and Approaches to Imaging of the Pelvic Floor
    3. Essentials for Setting Up Practice in Clinician Performed Ultrasound
    4. Ultrasound Imaging in Assessment of the Male Patient with Voiding Dysfunction
    5. The Female Patient 1- Assessment of Female Voiding Dysfunction
    6. The Female Patient 2- Pelvic Organ Prolapse
    7. Imaging of Gynaecologic Organs
    8. Ultrasound Assessment of the Patient with Fecal Incontinence
    9. 3D Ultrasound Imaging of the Pelvis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Peter A. Philip.
    Summary: “Pelvic Pain and Dysfunction: A Differential Diagnosis Manual is a comprehensive guide on the management of patients suffering from pelvic pain as well as dysfunction of the bowel and bladder systems. It integrates differential diagnosis concepts of orthopaedic medicine to the urogynecological patient. Using the concepts described, clinicians will have the opportunity to readily determine the underlying cause of their patients? suffering, and a means to ameliorate their pain and dysfunction. Regardless of chronicity, the strategies outlined have proven effective in restoration of function and comfort.” - Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Introduction to pelvic pain
    General concepts
    Evaluation
    Interpretation
    Management.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Assia T. Valovska.
    Contents:
    Pelvic pain management : an introduction / Louis Saddick, Richard D. Urman, and Assia T. Valovska
    Anatomy of the abdomen and pelvis / Mona Patel and Assia T. Valovska
    Pain mechanisms in chronic pelvic pain / Juan Diego Villegas-Echeverri, J.D. López-Jaramillo, A.L. Herrera-Betancourt, J.D. López-Isanoa, and M.P. Pardo-Bustamante
    Multidisciplinary approaches to pelvic pain treatment : a physical therapist's perspective / Stephanie Prendergast
    Pharmacologic management of pelvic pain / Michelle L. Matthews and Vesela Kovacheva
    Dyspareunia and vulvodynia / Adeoti Oshinowo, Alin Ionescu, Tanya Anim, and Georgine Lamvu
    Endometriosis : treatment and pain management / Karina Gritsenko
    Painful bladder syndrome and interstitial cystitis in women / Sybil Dessie and Eman Elkadry
    Functional abdominal pain syndrome / Karina Gritsenko
    Pudendal neuralgia / Michael Hibner and Mario Castellanos
    Incapacitating pelvic congestion syndrome / Neeraj Rastogi, Nii-Kabu Kabutey, Gillian Lieberman, and Ducksoo Kim
    Male pelvic pain / Michel A. Pontari and Emmanuel A. Ghormoz
    Musculoskeletal causes of pelvic pain / Chris R. Abrecht, Lesley E. Bobb, and Assia T. Valovska
    Pelvic cancer pain / Karina Gritsenko
    Surgical treatment of pelvic pain / Adam Duke, Elmira Manoucheri, and Karen Wang
    Chronic pelvic pain and psychological disorders / Mohammed Issa and Raheel Bengali
    The physical therapy approach to pelvic pain : evaluation
    / Lila Bartkowski-Abbate and Amy Stein
    The physical therapy approach to pelvic pain : treatment / Amy Stein
    Implantable devices for the treatment of pelvic pain / Chris R. Abrecht, Alison M. Weisheipl, and Assia T. Valovska
    Sample clinical cases / Sawsan (Suzie) As-Sanie, Nichole Mahnert, and Beth Skinner.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Axel Gänsslen, Jan Lindahl, Stephan Grechenig, Bernd Füchtmeier, editors.
    Summary: This book provides in-depth coverage of all aspects of pelvic ring fractures and their management. The opening chapters supply essential information on surgical anatomy, biomechanics, classification, clinical evaluation, radiological diagnostics, and emergency and acute management. The various operative techniques, including navigation techniques, that have been established and standardized over the past two decades are then presented in a step-by-step approach. Readers will find guidance on surgical indications, choice of approaches, reduction and fixation strategies, complication management, and optimization of long-term results. Specific treatment concepts are described for age-specific fractures, including pediatric and geriatric injuries, and secondary reconstructions. Pelvic ring fractures represent challenging injuries, especially when they present with concomitant hemodynamic instability. This book will help trauma and orthopaedic surgeons at all levels of experience to achieve the primary treatment aim of anatomic restoration of the bony pelvis to preserve biomechanical stability and avoid malunion with resulting clinical impairments.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 The History of Pelvic Fracture Treatment
    Chapter 2 Surgical Anatomy of the Pelvis
    Chapter 3 Biomechanics of the Pelvis
    Chapter 4 Classification of Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 5 Prehospital Treatment of Suspected Pelvic Injuries
    Chapter 6 Inhospital Clinical Examination
    Chapter 7 Radiological Diagnostics
    Chapter 8 Introduction
    Emergency Management
    Chapter 9 Emergency Stabilization
    Pelvic Binder
    Chapter 10 Emergency Management
    Pelvic C-Clamp
    Chapter 11 Mechanical Stabilization: DC-Osteosynthesis
    Chapter 12 Pelvic Packing
    Chapter 13 Direct Hemorrhage Control: Vascular DC-Treatment
    Chapter 14 Emergency Management
    Resuscitative Endovascular Balloon Occlusion of the Aorta (REBOA)
    Chapter 15 Indirect Hemorrhage Control: Angiography/Embolization (AE)
    Chapter 16 Coagulation Management
    Chapter 17 Open Pelvic Fractures
    Chapter 18 Morel-Levallee Lesions
    Chapter 19 Pelvic Compartment Syndrome
    Chapter 20 Traumatic Hemipelvectomy
    Chapter 21 Urological Trauma
    Chapter 22 Principles of Treatment of Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 23 Symphyseal Disruption
    Chapter 24 Retrograde Pubic Rami Screw
    Chapter 25 External Fixation
    Chapter 26 Subcutaneous Anterior Pelvic Fixation
    Chapter 27 Ilium Fractures
    Chapter 28 Anterior Plating SI-joint
    Chapter 29 SI-joint
    Posterior Reduction and Stabilization
    Chapter 30 Fracture Dislocations of the SI-joint
    Chapter 31 Iliosacral Screw Fixation
    Chapter 32 Local Sacral Plating
    Chapter 33 Lower Transverse Sacral Fractures
    Chapter 34 Ilio-iliacal Osteosynthesis
    Chapter 35 Lumbopelvic Fixation
    Chapter 36 Pediatric Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 37 Avulsion Injuries
    Chapter 38 Fragility Fractures
    Chapter 39 Intraoperative 3D Imaging of the Pelvic Ring
    Chapter 40 Implant Removal
    Chapter 41 Infectious Complications After Pelvic Ring Surgery
    Chapter 42 Pelvic Malunion and Non-Union
    Chapter 43 Outcome After Pelvic Ring Injuries.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Nam Cheol Park, Sae Woong Kim, Du Geon Moon, editors.
    Contents:
    I. Introduction
    II. Historical & cultural perspective
    III. Penis anatomy
    IV. Patient selection and counselling
    V. Psychologic perspective
    VI. Preoperative preparation and postoperative care
    VII. Girth Enhancement
    Dermal, dermofat graft
    Fat graft
    Penile disassembly & Glans detachment
    Glans augmentation
    Injectable Filler
    Allograft and synthetic injectables
    Silicon
    Paraffin injection
    Tissue Engineering
    Stem Cell.- VIII. Penile Lengthening
    VY plasty
    Z-plasty.- Double-Z plasty
    Suspensory ligament release/division/ligamentolysis
    Penile lengthening device.
    IX. Pediatric perspective
    micropenis, concealed penis, webbed penis, penoscrotal transposition
    Correction of webbed penis
    Correction of concealed penis
    Correction of penoscrotal transposition
    X. Penile reconstruction of amputated penis
    forearm cutaneous fascial graft.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Philippe E. Spiess, editor.
    Summary: This fully updated and revised second edition address specifically some of the significant advances made in our understanding of the pathophysiology of penile cancer including discussion of the suspected role of the human papilloma virus in penile carcinogenesis. Similarly, the molecular pathways implicated in precancerous and penile cancer will be discussed as these are the present targets of novel therapeutic approaches to this disease. The text details the recent national and international diagnostic and treatment guidelines that have been developed by both the National Comprehensive Cancer Network© and the European Urological Association establishing evidence based standards upon which the care of penile cancer should be based. The text also covers significant advances made in the diagnostic and therapeutic approach to both primary tumors and inguinal nodal metastases resulting from penile cancer such as penile sparing surgery and minimally invasive inguinal lymph node surgery. The text will similarly highlights the improvement in cancer specific outcome in the management of loco-regionally advanced (N2/3) penile cancer managed by upfront systemic chemotherapy followed by consolidative surgery in appropriately selected patients based on recent prospective phase II data. It also covers the role of radiotherapy in the management of penile cancer for both primary tumors and/or at sites of regional or distant metastases. Finally, some of the novel systemic approaches being devised in the management of advanced penile cancer along with some upcoming international trials soon to be opened which likely will re-define the present therapeutic approaches to penile cancer are discussed. The Second Edition of Penile Cancer: Diagnosis and Treatment will constitute a comprehensive review of the above mentioned subjects in addition to a few select topics of high clinical relevance, with the readership predominantly consisting of urologists, medical and surgical oncologists, and other healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    Understanding the Pathophysiology of Penile Cancer and Its Preneoplastic Lesions
    Diagnostic Tools in the Evaluation and Management of Penile Cancer
    Penile-Sparing Surgical Approaches in the Management of Primary Penile Tumours
    Dynamic Sentinel Node Biopsy and FDG-PET/CT for Lymph Node Staging in Penile Cancer
    Surgical Decision Making, Technical Considerations and Clinical Pearls in Therapeutic Inguinal Node Dissection Surgery for Penile Cancer
    Minimally Invasive Surgical Approaches to Inguinal Nodes in the Absence of Palpable Adenopathy
    Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection for Penile Cancer: Answering the Conundrum of When and How It Should Be Conducted
    Multmodal Approach to Locally Advanced and Metastatic Penile Cancer
    The Role of Radiotherapy in the Management of Penile Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Philippe E. Spiess, Andrea Necchi, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive and state-of the-art approach to caring for penile carcinoma patients and provides foundational information related to the molecular pathways implicated in penile carcinogenesis and progression. Penile carcinoma remains one of the most debilitating and life-altering malignancies to affect men, with significant impacts on quality of life, erectile function/sexual activity, and length of life. This book illuminates recent advances in penile cancer sparing treatment approaches and oncologically appropriate therapeutic options that help to maintain quality of life, sexual function, and intimacy for patients. It also elucidates recent understandings of human papilloma virus (HPV) and non-HPV driven pathways, which are suspected to have distinct treatment responses and prognoses. The book explores the management of inguinal lymph nodes in the setting of penile cancer, which can now be managed with the integration of key surgical principles/techniques including the adoption of minimally invasive surgery. Considering a multidisciplinary treatment approach for patients exhibiting either locally advanced or more widespread metastatic disease, the book introduces novel systemic therapies currently in development. Further, this book raises clinician awareness of the significant psychosocial impact of penile carcinoma on patients and their families. Penile Carcinoma: Therapeutic Principles and Advances provides readers with the necessary knowledge and insight to care for penile cancer patients with the use of truly state-of-the-art diagnostic and therapeutic approaches. Cancer patients and their families will greatly benefit from adoption of these principles and the accessibility of such advances to their personalized care.

    Contents:
    Mechanism of Carcinogenesis and Progression
    Pathologic Features of Invasive Penile Carcinomas and Precursor Lesions
    Characterization of Penile Cancers with Comprehensive Genomic Profiling
    Functional and Psychosocial Impact of Penile Cancer Treatments
    Penile Sparing Surgical and Non-Surgical Approaches
    Management of Primary Penile Tumors - Partial and Total Penectomy
    In the Clinical Setting of Non-Palpable/Non-Bulky Inguinal Nodes
    Management of Bulky Inguinal/Pelvic Metastases in Squamous Penile Cancer
    Neoadjuvant and Adjuvant Multimodality Treatments for Patients with Lymph Node Involvement
    Management of Locally Recurrent Penile Cancer
    Management of Metastatic Penile Cancer
    Overview of Insightful Systemic Approaches
    Clinical Trials Corner.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Eduardo P. Miranda, John P. Mulhall, editors.
    Summary: Penile implants have been an effective treatment for erectile dysfunction (ED) for more than 40 years. However, there is now a growing interest in this treatment option, as the number of procedures is expected to increase in the future. This book offers a reference guide for all those practitioners interested in understanding and/or performing this procedure. It will also benefit those in medical education who want to obtain specialized and high-quality knowledge regarding the complexities involved in penile implant surgery. Although the basic description of penile implant surgery is well documented in the literature, a detailed and comprehensive guide with a special focus on the most challenging and controversial aspects is lacking. The few books available on the topic provide a broad overview of prosthetic surgery in general, mainly discuss basic principles, and fail to provide a more detailed perspective. This comprehensive book discusses various aspects of penile implant surgery, ranging from indications to long-term complications. It addresses the most common and serious challenges regarding penile implants, which are rarely discussed elsewhere. The respective chapters were written by internationally respected experts on the controversies of penile prosthetic surgery. The book is intended for all those who plan to specialize in penile implant surgery, which include, but are not limited to, residents and fully trained urologists, as well as fellows and practitioners in sexual medicine and reconstructive urology.

    Contents:
    Patient and Device Selection
    Critical Analysis of Maneuvers to Reduce Infection in Penile Implant Surgery
    Strategies for Optimal Pain Control in the Penile Implant Patient
    Implant Surgery in the Anticoagulated Patient
    Management of Residual Curvature in the Patient with Peyronie's Disease Undergoing Penile Implant Surgery
    Considerations in Reservoir Placement
    The Hostile Penis: Managing the Patient with Penile Fibrosis
    The Role of Penile Lengthening Procedures at the Time of Penile Implant Surgery
    Considerations in the Management of Visceral Perforation During Penile Implant Surgery
    Implant Surgery in the Patient with Neophallus
    Approach to Managing the Patient with Impending Erosion
    Management of Long-term Complications of Penile Implant Surgery
    Medicolegal Aspects of Penile Implant Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Thomas J. Guzzo, Robert C. Kovell, Justin B. Ziemba, Dana A. Weiss, Alan J. Wein.
    Summary: Brief, well-illustrated chapters, an easy-to-read format, and a convenient, portable size make Penn Clinical Manual of Urology, 3rd Edition, your go-to resource for fast reference on the effective diagnosis and treatment of urologic disorders. Concise and practical, this manual is indispensable for both residents and practitioners as a daily clinical guide as well as an outstanding review tool for board exam preparation.

    Contents:
    Signs and symptoms: The initial examination
    Diagnostic and interventional uroradiology
    Lower urinary tract infections in women and pyelonephritis
    Lower urinary tract infection in males
    Specific infections of the genitourinary tract
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Interstitial cystitis/bladder pain syndrome
    Urolithiasis in the adult
    Penn clinical manual chapter on urologic emergencies
    Urinary and genital trauma
    Urethral stricture and lower urinary tract reconstruction
    Urinary fistula
    Nocturia
    Lower urinary tract function and dysfunction; urinary incontinence
    Benign prostatic hyperplasia and related entities
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Prostate and bladder
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Renal and testicular
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Urethral and penile
    Radiation therapy
    Laparoscopic surgical anatomy, laparoscopy, and robotic-assisted laparoscopic surgery
    Male sexual dysfunction
    Male fertility and sterility
    Disorders of the adrenal gland
    Retroperitoneal tumors and retroperitoneal fibrosis
    Embryology and differences of sex development
    Congenital anomalies
    Pediatric oncology
    Pediatric urolithiasis
    Pediatric voiding function and dysfunction
    Transitional urology
    Geriatric urology
    Quality and safety considerations in urology
    Clinical research design and statistics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Print
    Mary Lynne Knighten, DNP, RN, NEA-BC, KT Waxman, DNP, MBA, RN, CNL, CENP, CHSE, FSSH, FAONL, FAAN.
    Summary: "The original textbook by Dr. Susan Penner was written 20 years ago as the Introduction to Health Care Economics and Financial Management: Fundamental Concepts with Practical Application. It has helped nurses, nurse leaders, students, and faculty to understand, develop knowledge, and gain competency in the often complex world of finance and economics. It has been a very thorough and practical book for both the classroom and practice environments. We want to thank Dr. Penner for her vision and the execution of a resource that has stood the test of time and changing healthcare and reimbursement environments. Furthermore, we are humbled and grateful that Dr. Penner would entrust her life's work to us in revising the fourth edition of Economics and Financial Management for Nurses and Nurse Leaders, so many more generations of nurses may benefit from her wisdom. To honor Dr. Penner, it is with these sentiments in mind that we've renamed the book Penner's Economics and Financial Management for Nurses and Nurse Leaders, Fourth Edition"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Economics of health care
    Chapter 2. Healthcare reimbursement and insurance
    Chapter 3. Quantifying nursing care, staffing, and productivity
    Chapter 4. Budget planning
    Chapter 5. Reporting and managing budgets
    Chpater 6. Special purpose, capital, and other budgets
    Chapter 7. Cost-benefit analysis
    Chapter 8. Assessing financial health
    Chapter 9. Building a business case
    Chapter 10. Entrepreneurship, contract negotiation, and practice management
    Chapter 11. Grant writing for helathcare programs
    Chater 12. Ethical issues and financial issues in international healthcare systems
    Chapter 13. Health policy and future trends.
    Digital Access R2Library [2024], ©2024
  • Digital
    edited by David Tuckett and Nadine A. Levinson.
    Summary: "Compilation of terms, definitions, and discussion from major published psychoanalytic glossaries. In addition to the Language of Psychoanalysis (Laplanche and Pontalis), PEP has integrated three additional glossaries: the Edinburgh International Encyclopaedia of Psychoanalysis (Skelton), Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts (Moore and Fine), and the Dictionary of Kleinian Thought (Hinshelwood). PEP has also integrated the EPF Glossary of Psychoanalysis in Europe (Junkers), which provides a mapping of each psychoanalytic term across several languages."
  • Digital
    edited by Vincent L. Pecoraro.
    Contents:
    Chapter One. Chemical posttranslational modification with designed rhodium(II) catalysts
    Chapter Two. Cell-binding assays for determining the affinity of protein-protein interactions: technologies and considerations
    Chapter Three. Protein and antibody engineering by phage display
    Chapter Four. Incorporation of unnatural amino acids into proteins expressed in mammalian cells
    Chapter Five. Method for enzyme design with genetically encoded unnatural amino acids
    Chapter Six. Methods for solving highly symmetric de novo designed metalloproteins: crystallographic examination of a novel three-stranded coiled-coil structure containing D-amino acids
    Chapter Seven. SpyRings declassified: a blueprint for using isopeptide-mediated cyclization to enhance enzyme thermal resilience
    Chapter Eight. Engineering and application of LOV2-based photoswitches
    Chapter Nine. Minimalist design of allosterically regulated protein catalysts
    Chapter Ten. Combining design and selection to create novel protein-peptide interactions
    Chapter Eleven. Metal-directed design of supramolecular protein assemblies
    Chapter Twelve. Designing fluorinated proteins
    Chapter Thirteen. Solid phase synthesis of helically folded aromatic oligoamides
    Chapter Fourteen. Conformational restriction of peptides using dithiol bis-alkylation
    Chapter Fifteen. Engineering short preorganized peptide sequences for metal ion coordination: copper(II) a case study
    Chapter Sixteen. De Novo construction of redox active proteins
    Chapter Seventeen. Design strategies for redox active metalloenzymes: applications in hydrogen production
    Chapter Eighteen. Equilibrium studies of designed metalloproteins
    Chapter Nineteen. Reconstitution of heme enzymes with artificial metalloporphyrinoids
    Chapter Twenty. Creation of a thermally tolerant peroxidase
    Chapter Twenty-One. Designing covalently linked heterodimeric four-helix bundles
    Chapter Twenty-Two. Design of heteronuclear metalloenzymes
    Chapter Twenty-Three. Periplasmic screening for artifical metalloenzymes
    Chapter Twenty-Four. De Novo designed imaging agents based on lanthanide peptides complexes
    Chapter Twenty-Five. Peptide binding for bio-based nanomaterials
    Author Index
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Gunnar Houen.
    Contents:
    Peptide Antibodies: Past, Present, and Future / Gunnar Houen
    Structure of natural and recombinant antibodies / Hui Ma and Richard O'Kennedy
    Prediction of antigenic B and T cell epitopes via energy decomposition analysis : description of the web-based prediction tool BEPPE / Claudio Peri ... [et al.]
    Prediction of antibody epitopes / Morten Nielsen and Paolo Marcatili
    Fmoc solid-phase peptide synthesis / Paul R. Hansen and Alberto Oddo
    Peptide-carrier conjugation / Paul R. Hansen
    Solid-phase peptide-carrier conjugation / Gunnar Houen and Dorthe T. Olsen
    Analysis of peptides and conjugates by amino acid analysis / Peter Højrup
    Characterization of synthetic peptides by mass spectrometry / Bala K. Prabhala ... [et al.]
    Interpretation of tandem mass spectrometry (MSMS) spectra for peptide analysis / Karin Hjernø and Peter Højrup
    Polyclonal Peptide Antisera / Tina H. Pihl, Kristin E. Illigen, and Gunnar Houen
    Production and screening of monoclonal peptide antibodies / Nicole Hartwig Trier ... [et al.]
    Production of epitope-specific antibodies by immunization with synthetic epitope peptide formulated with CpG-DNA- liposome complex without carriers / Dongbum Kim, Younghee Lee, and Hyung-Joo Kwon
    Thioredoxin-displayed multipeptide immunogens / Angelo Bolchi ... [et al.]
    Purification of natural and recombinant peptide antibodies by affinity chromatographic strategies / Hui Ma and Richard O'Kennedy
    Isolation of camelid single-domain antibodies against native proteins using recombinant multivalent peptide ligands / Norah A. Alturki ... [et al.]
    Generation of TCR-Like antibodies using phage display / Brian H. Santich ... [et al.]
    Structural characterization of peptide antibodies/ Anna Chailyan and Paolo Marcatili
    Automated high-throughput mapping of linear B-cell epitopes using a statistical analysis of high-density peptide microarray data / Thomas Østerbye and Søren Buus
    Characterization of peptide antibodies by epitope mapping using resin-bound and soluble peptides / Nicole Hartwig Trier
    Screening and characterization of linear B-cell epitopes by biotinylated peptide libraries / Ida Rosenkrands and Anja Olsen
    Bead-based peptide arrays for profiling the specificity of modification state-specific antibodies / Angela Filomena ... [et al.]
    Surface plasmon resonance method to evaluate anti-citrullinated protein/peptide antibody affinity to citrullinated peptides / Feliciana Real-Fernández ... [et al.]
    Specificity analysis of histone modification-specific antibodies or reading domains on histone peptide arrays / Goran Kungulovski ... [et al.]
    Prion-specific antibodies produced in wild-type mice / Peter M. H. Heegaard ... [et al.]
    Immunoblotting with peptide antibodies : differential immunoreactivities caused by certain amino acid substitutions in a short peptide and possible effects of differential refolding of the peptide on a nitrocellulose or PVDF membrane / Takenori Yamamoto ... [et al.]
    Immunocytochemical and immunohistochemical staining with peptide antibodies / Tina Friis ... [et al.]
    Designing B-cell epitopes for immunotherapy and subunit vaccines / Harinder Singh ... [et al.]
    Enterovirus-specific anti-peptide antibodies / Chit Laa Poh ... [et al.]
    Therapeutic HIV peptide vaccine / Anders Fomsgaard.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ben M. Dunn.
    Contents:
    Peptide therapeutics
    Methods for the peptide synthesis and analysis
    Peptide design strategies for g-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs)
    Peptide-based inhibitors of enzymes
    Discovery of peptide drugs as enzyme inhibitors and activators
    Discovery of peptide drugs from natural sources
    Modification of peptides to limit metabolism
    Delivery of peptide drugs.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ratmir Derda.
    Contents:
    Design, synthesis, and application of OB2c combinatorial peptide and peptidomimetic libraries
    Synthesis of macrocyclic organo-peptide hybrids from ribosomal polypeptide precursors via cuAAC-/hydrazide-mediated cyclization
    Synthesis and screening of one-bead-one-compound cyclic peptide libraries
    Creating site-specific isopeptide linkages between proteins with the traceless staudinger ligation
    Macrocyclic templates for library synthesis of peptido-conjugates
    Synthesis and alkylation of aza-gly-pro building blocks of peptidomimetic libraries for developing prostaglandin f2alpha receptor modulators as therapeutics to inhibit preterm labor
    A fragment-based selection approach for the discovery of peptide macrocycles targeting protein kinases
    Peptide and peptide library cyclization via bromomethylbenzene derivatives
    Phage selection of bicyclic peptides based on two disulfide bridges
    De novo discovery of bioactive cyclic peptides using bacterial display and flow cytometry
    Chemical posttranslational modification of phage-displayed peptides
    Mapping protein-protein interactions with phage-displayed combinatorial peptide libraries and alanine scanning
    Identifying reactive peptides from phage-displayed libraries
    The best and the brightest: Exploiting tryptophan-sensitized tb(3+) luminescence to engineer lanthanide-binding tags
    Synthesis and cell-based screening of one-bead-one-compound peptide libraries
    Screening peptide array library for the identification of cancer cell-binding peptides
    Next-generation sequencing of phage-displayed peptide libraries
    Maleimide-based method for elaboration of cysteine-containing peptide phage libraries.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors Marina Cretich, Marcella Chiari.
    Contents:
    Peptide arrays on planar supports / Víctor Tapia Mancilla and Rudolf Volkmer
    High-throughput microarray incubations using multi-well chambers / Johannes Zerweck ... [et al.]
    Analysis of protein tyrosine kinase specificity using positional scanning peptide microarrays / Yang Deng and Benjamin E. Turk
    Secondary structure determination of peptides and proteins after immobilization / Stella H. North and Chris R. Taitt
    Peptides and anti-peptide antibodies for small and medium scale peptide and anti-peptide affinity microarrays : antigenic peptide selection, immobilization, and processing / Fan Zhang, Andrea Briones, and Mikhail Soloviev
    Low-cost peptide microarrays for mapping continuous antibody epitopes / Ryan McBride ... [et al.]
    Peptide microarray-based resonance light scattering assay for sensitively detecting intracellular kinase activity / Tao Li ... [et al.]
    Anomalous reflection of gold : a novel platform for biochips / Amir Syahir ... [et al.]
    High-throughput peptide screening on a bimodal imprinting chip through MS-SPRi integration / Weizhi Wang, Qiaojun Fang, and Zhiyuan Hu
    Analyzing peptide microarray data with the R pepStat package / Gregory Imholte, Renan Sauteraud, and Raphael Gottardo
    Chemoselective strategies to peptide and protein bioprobes immobilization on microarray surfaces / Alessandro Gori and Renato Longhi
    Manufacturing of peptide microarrays based on catalyst- free click chemistry / Denis Prim and Marc E. Pfeifer
    Clickable polymeric coating for oriented peptide immobilization / Laura Sola ... [et al.]
    Oriented peptide immobilization on microspheres / Lisa C. Shriver-Lake, George P. Anderson, and Chris R. Taitt
    Cell microarray format : a peptide release system using a photo-cleavable linker for cell toxicity and cell Uptake Analysis / Kenji Usui, Kin-ya Tomizaki, and Hisakazu Mihara
    Peptide microarrays for medical applications in autoimmunity, infection, and cancer / Carsten Grötzinger
    Synthetic peptide-based ELISA and ELISpot assay for identifying autoantibody epitopes / Judit Pozsgay ... [et al.]
    IgE and IgG4 epitope mapping of food allergens with a peptide microarray immunoassay / Javier Martínez-Botas and Belén de la Hoz
    IgE epitope mapping using peptide microarray immunoassay / Gustavo Gimenez, Sara Benedé, and Jing Lin
    Spot synthesis : an optimized microarray to detect IgE epitopes / Salvatore G. De-Simone, Paloma Napoleão-Pêgo, and Thatiane S. De-Simone
    Mapping of epitopes occurring in bovine αs1-casein variants by peptide microarray immunoassay / Maria Lisson and Georg Erhardt.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Peter E. Nielsen, Daniel H. Appella.
    Summary: Exemplifying and illustrating recent exciting advances in PNA chemistry, the second edition of Peptide Nucleic Acids: Methods and Protocols serves as a vital complement to the first edition of the book. Since the discovery of peptide nucleic acids, many interesting new derivatives and analogues in terms of nucleic acid recognition specificity and affinity have emerged. Also, as this detailed volume presents, great ingenuity in exploiting the unique properties of PNAs for a wide variety of applications within drug discovery, medical diagnostics, chemical biology and nanotechnology has unfolded. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and key tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Peptide Nucleic Acids: Methods and Protocols, Second Editionserves as a source of useful specific methods and protocols as well as a source of inspiration for future developments.

    Contents:
    MiniPEG-PNA / Arunava Manna [and others]
    Cyclopentane peptide nucleic acids / Ethan A. Englund, Ning Zhang, and Daniel H. Appella
    Chiral PNAs with constrained open-chain backbones / Roberto Corradini [and others]
    Synthesis, characterization, and evaluation of radiometal-containing peptide nucleic acids / Holger Stephan, Christian Foerster, and Gilles Gasser
    Preparation of metal-containing peptide nucleic acid bioconjugates on the solid phase / Gilles Gasser
    Formation and characterization of PNA-containing heteroquadruplexes / Bruce A. Armitage
    Sequence selective recognition of double-stranded RNA using triple helix-forming peptide nucleic acids / Thomas Zengeya, Pankaj Gupta, and Eriks Rozners
    Assembly of PNA-tagged small molecules, peptides, and carbohydrates onto DNA templates : programming the combinatorial pairing and inter-ligand distance / Nicolas Winssinger [and others]
    Site-selective scission of human genome using PNA-based artificial restriction DNA cutter / Kenichiro Ito and Makoto Komiyama
    PNA openers and their applications for bacterial DNA diagnostics / Irina V. Smolina and Maxim D. Frank-Kamenetskii
    DNA-Templated Native chemical ligation of functionalized peptide nucleic acids : a versatile tool for single base-specific detection of nucleic acids / Alexander Roloff [and others]
    Use of peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) for genotyping by solution and surface methods / Stefano Sforza [and others]
    Analysis of PNA Hybridization by surface plasmon resonance / Bruce A. Armitage
    PNA fluorescent in situ hybridization (FISH) for rapid microbiology and cytogenetic analysis / Henrik Stender, Brett Williams, and James Coull
    Rapid miRNA imaging in cells using fluorogenic templated staudinger reaction between PNA-based probes / Katarzyna Gorska and Nicolas Winssinger
    Cellular delivery of peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) / Takehiko Shiraishi and Peter E. Nielsen
    Peptide nucleic acid-mediated recombination for targeted genomic repair and modification / Erica B. Schleifman and Peter M. Glazer
    Antisense effects of PNAs in bacteria / Shan Goh, Jem Stach, and Liam Good.
    Digital Access Springer 2013
  • Digital
    Anwar Sunna, Andrew Care, Peter L. Bergquist, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Programmable bio-surfaces for biomedical applications
    2. Solid-binding peptides in biomedicine
    3. Molecular modelling of peptide-based materials for biomedical applications
    4. Design principles of peptide based self-assembled nanomaterials
    5. Bioprinting and biofabrication with peptide and protein biomaterials
    6. Peptides as bio-inspired molecular electronic materials
    7. Peptide-based materials for cartilage tissue regeneration
    8. Peptides and drug delivery
    9. Peptide lipidation-- a synthetic strategy to afford peptide based therapeutics
    10. Molecular engineering of Conus peptides as therapeutic leads
    11. Uptake mechanism of cell-penetrating peptides
    12. Empowering the potential of cell-penetrating peptides for targeted intracellular delivery via molecular self-assembly
    13. The current role of cell-penetrating peptides in cancer therapy
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Kevin M. Reavis, editor ; introduction by Haruhiro Inoue.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    by Xiangbin Pan, Ziyad M. Hijazi, Horst Sievert.
    Summary: This book provides an extensive discussion of echocardiography-guided percutaneous interventional techniques for clinical practitioners, including cardiologists, interventional physicians, surgeons and specialist training candidates. It allows readers to gain a thorough understanding of interpreting echocardiography-guided procedures, which not only protect patients from pain and other complications associated with conventional surgery, but also obviate the use of fluoroscopy or contrast agents and so avoid radiation damage and the risks of allergy or renal function impairment. Further, these procedures could help to save patients in areas lacking medical resources. The book first demonstrates the substitution of transesophageal for transthoracic echocardiography to avoid intubation under general anesthesia, and then presents key technical and practical aspects of echo-guided percutaneous interventions for structural heart diseases, such as ASD, VSD, PDA, PS, MS, AS and CoA. Lastly, it explores the lessons learned in echocardiography, anesthesia and postprocedural management of echo-guided percutaneous interventions.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anesthesia Management in Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventions for Structural Heart Disease
    Use of Echocardiography in Percutaneous Interventions for Structural Heart Disease
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Atrial Septal Defect Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional for Pulmonary Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Patent Ductus Arteriosus Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Closure of Perimembranous Ventricular Septal Defect
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Left Atrial Appendage Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Mitral Valve Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Aortic Valve Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Coarctation of Aorta
    Post-procedural Management of Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Emerson Lima, Mariana Lima.
    Summary: Percutaneous Collagen Induction with Microneedling is a minimally invasive technique widely used to treat numerous dermatologic conditions such as facial and body scars, melasma, wrinkles, skin laxity, stretch marks, alopecies, vitiligo and scleroderma. Microneedling can also be used to optimize transdermal drug delivery for many substances. This technique uses modern microneedling devices containing multiple fine needles, typically 0.5 to 2.5 mm in length, which are mounted on a barrel and rolled onto the skin to create numerous perforations into the stratum corneum and the papillary dermis. These micro-wounds initiate the release of growth factors, triggering collagen and elastin formation, which results in dermal remodeling and skin resurfacing. This book provides a step-by-step approach to microneedling, based on the authors' more than ten years of experience with the technique, during which they have treated more than 3,000 patients in Brazil for numerous dermatologic conditions. Richly illustrated throughout, it includes over 400 illustrations.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Presentation
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Chapter 1: Fundamentals of Percutaneous Collagen Induction (PCI) with Needles
    1.1 Percutaneous Needle Collagen Induction (PCI) Versus Ablative Procedures
    1.2 Principles of the PCI Technique
    1.3 Characteristics of the PCI Technique
    1.4 PCI Advantages
    1.5 Disadvantages of PCI
    Sources
    Chapter 2: Classification and Characteristics of the Injury Provoked by PCI
    2.1 Level of the Injury and Its Relationship to the Length of the Needle
    2.2 Classification of Injury Level
    2.3 Final Considerations 4.2.10 Peripheral Nerve Blocks
    4.2.11 Blocking the Supraorbital and Supratrochlear Nerves
    4.2.12 Infraorbital Nerve Block
    4.2.13 Nasociliary Nerve Block
    4.2.14 Lacrimal Nerve Block
    4.2.15 Zygomatic Nerve Block
    4.2.16 Mental Nerve Block
    4.3 Local Anesthetic Intoxication
    4.3.1 Special Features of Anesthesia for PCI
    Sources
    Chapter 5: Preparing the Skin for PCI and Postoperative Management
    5.1 Skin Care That Favors Treatment
    5.2 Detailing the Guidelines for Moderate Injury
    5.3 Detail of the Guidelines for Deep Lesion
    5.4 Biocellulose in Post-procedure 5.5 Closing Considerations
    Sources
    Chapter 6: Histopathological Evidences of the Percutaneous Collagen Induction with Microneedling
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Photoaging and Melasma
    6.3 Acne and Stretch Mark Scars
    Sources
    Chapter 7: Managing Complications in PCI
    7.1 PCI Versus Ablative Interventions
    7.2 Expected Reactions and Adverse Effects
    7.2.1 Edema
    7.2.2 Erythema
    7.2.3 Hematoma, Petechiae, and Purple
    7.2.4 Crusts
    7.2.5 Post-inflammatory Hyperpigmentation
    7.2.6 Desquamation
    7.2.7 Burning and Awareness
    7.2.8 Infections
    7.2.9 Pain 7.2.10 Depressed or Elevated Scars
    Sources
    Chapter 8: PCI in Aging Skin
    8.1 PCI Fundamentals in Skin Aging
    8.2 Applicability of PCI to Skin Aging
    8.3 Thickness of Skin
    8.4 Wrinkle Depth
    8.5 Flaccidity
    8.6 Step-by-Step
    8.6.1 Deep Injury
    8.7 Methodological Sequence for Deep Injury
    8.7.1 Moderate Injury
    8.8 Final Considerations
    Sources
    Chapter 9: PCI in the Treatment of Melasma
    9.1 Lima Protocol
    9.2 Mechanism of Action
    9.2.1 Proposed Methodological Sequence
    9.3 Final Considerations
    Sources
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Stéphane Rinfret, editor.
    Summary: The second edition of this essential text provides readers with a detailed guide to performing various percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI) techniques for treating coronary chronic total occlusion (CTO). PCI continues to be an effective procedure to help patients with this pathology, with high success and low complications rates. Chapters feature a step-by-step approach to relevant techniques and describe their potential pitfalls, enabling the reader to develop a thorough understanding of how to perform those procedures successfully. Details of the latest methods for angiography analysis and the management of ostial CTOs, plus heavily revised chapters on topics such as contemporary device-based antegrade dissection and the retrograde approach through septal and non-septal collateral channels ensure that this Work remains the most up-to-date reference on the subject. Percutaneous Intervention for Coronary Chronic Total Occlusion: The Hybrid Approach represents a vital reference to assist practicing and trainee interventional cardiologist in learning these techniques. Various examples are provided, with a vast selection of still images and angiographic video loops to enable the reader become confident in applying these methodologies into their day-to day clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface of the First edition
    Preface of the Second edition
    Contents
    About the Editor
    1: What Is What: Important Definitions in Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Introduction
    Anatomical and Procedural Definitions
    Efficacy and Safety Endpoints
    Conclusion
    References
    2: The Histopathophysiology of Chronic Total Occlusion and Its Impact on Mode of Treatment
    Introduction
    Mechanisms of Lesion Progression and Histologic Studies of CTO
    Characteristics of the Arterial Wall
    The Lesion Characteristics of CTO With or Without Prior CABG
    Clinical Translation from a Pathological Point of View
    Conclusions
    References
    3: Who Are Best Candidates for Chronic Total Occlusion Revascularization
    Introduction
    Prior Evidence
    EXPLORE Trial
    REVASC Trial
    EUROCTO Trial
    DECISION-CTO Trial
    Conclusions from Trials
    Which Patients Are Best Candidates?
    Final Remarks
    Conclusions
    References
    4: Why, When and How to Assess Ischemia and Viability in Patients with Chronic Total Occlusions
    Introduction
    Ischemia, Hibernation, and Viability
    Why to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Ischemia
    Ischemia and Collaterals, and After Opening the CTO
    Ischemia and Prognosis
    Ischemia and Symptoms
    Viability
    When to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Guideline Recommendations
    STEMI Patients with a CTO
    Stable Patients with a CTO
    Case Examples
    How to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Ischemia
    Nuclear Myocardial Perfusion Imaging
    Stress Echocardiography
    Stress Cardiac Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    Viability
    Stress Echocardiography
    Cardiac Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    Nuclear Imaging
    Conclusion
    References
    5: How to Set Up a Chronic Total Occlusion Angioplasty Program
    Introduction
    Developing CTO Skills. Operator Selection
    Operator Training
    CTO Program Built Around Two Operators
    Infrastructure
    Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory Volume
    Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory
    Cardiac Surgery Program/Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO)
    Nonmedical Staff
    Administrative Support
    Quality Control
    Pre-procedure: CTO Clinic
    Pre-PCI Explanation of the Plan
    Post Procedure: CTO Rounds
    Getting Started, the Practicalities
    References
    6: Equipment Requirement for Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Sheaths
    Guide Catheters
    Microcatheters
    Finecross
    Corsair Series
    Turnpike Series
    Mamba Series
    Guidewires
    Dissection/Reentry Equipment
    Guide Catheter Extensions
    Snares
    Equipment for "Uncrossable-Undilatable" Lesions
    Intravascular Ultrasound (IVUS)
    Complication Management Equipment
    References
    7: The Hybrid Approach and Its Variations for Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Introduction and Historical Perspective
    Simplifying the Complex
    The Algorithms.... Combined
    Who Should Do the Procedure?
    Pre-procedure Coronary CT Angiography
    Choosing the Initial Strategy
    Antegrade Wiring
    Secondary and Bailout Strategies with Primary AW Approach
    Antegrade Dissection and Reentry (ADR)
    The Retrograde Approach
    In-Stent Chronic Total Occlusion
    Switching Strategies
    Ending the Procedure
    Conclusions
    References
    8: When, Why, and How to Perform Good Angiographic Analysis Before CTO PCI
    Introduction
    When and Why
    How
    CTO Angiography
    CTO Angiographic Analysis
    Target Vessel
    CTO Characteristics
    Donor Vessels
    Collateral Circulation
    Collateral Pathways
    Interventional Collaterals
    Conclusion
    References
    9: Specific Basic Techniques to Master in CTO PCI
    Approaching the CTO Segment. Wire Manipulation Techniques in CTO
    Trapping Balloon Technique
    References
    10: When, Why and How to Perform an Antegrade Approach Using a Wiring Technique
    Introduction
    Anatomical Subsets That Favor Antegrade Wiring
    Lesion Length
    Proximal Cap Anatomy
    In-CTO Tortuosity (&gt
    45°)
    Presence of Intra-CTO Calcium
    Previous Procedural Failure
    Other Factors
    Degree of Disease in the "Distal Landing Zone"
    Presence of "Interventional Collaterals"
    Basic Principles of CTO PCI
    Planning
    Visibility
    Backup Support
    Use of "Over-the-Wire" Equipment
    Wire Selection
    Tapered Polymer-Coated Wires
    Medium Weight Wires
    High Gram Weight Wires
    The Proximal Cap and How to Assess It
    Wire Selection: Principles and Rationale
    Polymer-Coated Wires
    Penetration Force
    Tactile Feel
    Torque Transmission
    Wire Selection
    Wire Shaping
    Confirming Progress and Ensuring Safety
    Confirming True Lumen Entry
    Angiographically
    Wire Feel
    Intravascular Ultrasound (IVUS)
    Advancing Equipment
    Anchor Balloon
    Guide Extension
    Higher Support Microcatheter
    Laser Atherectomy
    Rotational Atherectomy
    Indications and Use of Adjunctive Imaging Strategies
    CTA
    IVUS
    When to Switch Strategy
    References
    11: When, Why, and How to Perform Wire-Based Antegrade Dissection and Reentry Technique
    References
    12: When and How to Perform Contemporary Device-Based Antegrade Dissection and Re-entry Technique
    Introduction
    Evolution of Strategies for ADR
    Primary ADR: A Step-by-Step Approach
    Troubleshooting ADR Procedures and Bailout Manoeuvres
    Outcomes with ADR in Contemporary Practice
    Conclusions
    References
    13: How to Deal with Difficult Antegrade Issues
    Difficult Antegrade Issues That Apply to Both AW and ADR
    Ambiguous Proximal Cap
    Impenetrable Cap. Uncrossable Lesion
    Difficult Antegrade Issues That Are Unique to Antegrade Dissection Reentry
    Crossboss Challenges
    Reentry Challenges
    References
    14: Intra-occlusion Microinjection of Contrast: When, Why, and How
    References
    15: When, Why, and How to Perform the Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry Technique
    Introduction
    Pathophysiological Bases and Development of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Procedural Description of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Real-Life Experience with Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Role of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR) in the Hybrid Algorithm
    Further Developments in Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Conclusions
    References
    16: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Septal Collateral Channels
    When to Select the Retrograde Approach: How to Analyze the Coronary Angiography
    How to Set Up the Procedure
    Pathways to the Distal Cap (Table 16.1)
    Collateral Channels
    Step-by-Step Approach
    Selecting the Microcatheter, Crossing the Collateral Channel with a Wire, and the Microcatheter
    Selecting the Microcatheter
    Crossing a Septal CC with the Wire
    Surfing from PDA to LAD: A More Difficult Task
    Advancing the Microcatheter to the Distal Cap Through the Septal CC
    Special Situations and Considerations
    Using an Internal Mammary Artery as a Donor Artery to Septal CCs
    LAD or LCX CTOs in a Dominant Left System
    References
    17: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Epicardial and Non-septal Collateral Channels
    When to Perform Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections? Anatomic Evaluation
    Algorithms for Performing Retrograde Approach
    Collateral Channel Scores
    Why Performing Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal CCs? Clinical Evaluation. Indication and Timing of Using Non-septal Collateral CCs
    Risk-Benefit Assessment of Selecting Non-septal CCs
    How to Perform Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections: Practical Considerations
    Arterial Access
    Non-septal Collateral Channel Crossing
    Crossing the CTO
    Externalization
    Complications Related to Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections
    Perforation of the CC When the CTO Is Crossed
    Perforation of the CC When the CTO Remains Uncrossed
    References
    18: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Patent or Occluded SVGs
    Introduction
    CTO PCI in Post-CABG Patients
    Retrograde Approach Through an SVG
    Retrograde Via Diseased But Patent SVGs
    Retrograde Via Occluded SVGs
    Guide Extensions in SVGs
    Specific Situations
    Stumpless SVG Use
    Retrograde Access Via Acutely or Recently Thrombosed SVG in ACS Patients
    How to Deal with Acute Angle of Distal Anastomosis
    Distal Anastomosis Ambiguity
    Stenting Coronary Across Distal SVG Anastomosis After CTO PCI
    Dealing with Anastomotic Stents in SVGs
    Protecting the Graft
    What To Do with the SVG Once the Native Artery CTO is Open?
    Potential Complications When Using SVGs as Retrograde Conduits
    Distal Embolization
    SVG Perforation
    Aortic Dissection
    Mediastinal Bleeding/Haematoma
    References
    19: How to Cross the Occlusion Using a Retrograde Approach, How to Externalize, and How to Snare Long Wires
    Introduction
    Retrograde Wiring
    Wire Choice
    Confirming Wire Position
    Note on Safety in RW
    Retrograde Dissection and Re-entry
    Creating an Antegrade Dissection
    Use of Guide Catheter Extension
    Creating a Retrograde Dissection
    Joining the Spaces
    Externalization
    Use of Snare for Externalization
    Principles of Snaring
    How to Snare.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Kamran Ahrar, Sanjay Gupta, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive source for all aspects of percutaneous image-guided biopsy. A synthesis of rationale, technique and evidence-based medicine, it offers a clear approach to imaging, devices, procedures and patient care.

    Contents:
    Biopsy devices and techniques
    CT-guided biopsy
    Radiation protection during CT-guided interventions
    Ultrasound-guided biopsy
    MRI-guided biopsy
    Fluoroscopy-guided biopsy
    Advanced tools and devices: navigation technologies, automation, and robotics in percutaneous interventions
    Pathologic evalution of tissues obtained by interventional radiology techniques
    Biopsy of head and neck lesions
    Biopsy of mediastinal lesions
    Percutaneous transthoracic lung biopsy
    Pleural biopsy
    Liver biopsy
    Percutaneous biopsy of the pancreas
    Spleen biopsy
    Adrenal gland biopsy
    Renal mass biopsy
    Percutaneous and transjugular kidney biopsy
    Nodes and soft tissue masses involving the retroperitoneum, mesentery, omentum and peritoneal ligaments
    Biopsy of pelvic lesions
    MRI-guided prostate biopsy
    Biopsy of the spine
    Anatomic guidelines and approaches for biopsy of the long bones
    Musculoskeletal biopsies: extremities.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Stéphane Rinfret, editor.
    Contents:
    1. How to justify CTO revascularization
    2. How to set up a chronic total occlusion angioplasty program
    3. What equipment should be available?
    4. Specific basic techniques to master in CTO PCI
    5. When and how to perform an antegrade approach using a wire escalation technique
    6. When and how to perform an antegrade dissection/re-entry approach using the CrossBoss and Singray Catheters
    7. How to deal with difficult antegrade issues
    8. Intra-occlusion microinjectin of contrast: when, why and how
    9. How and when to perform the retrograde approach
    10. How to recanalize in-stent chronic total occlusion
    11. How to fix common problems encountered in CTO PCI: the expanded hybrid approach
    12. How to improve catheter support during CTO PCI
    13. When and how to perform a transradial appraoch for CTO PCI
    14. How to manage radiation and contrast during chronic total occlusion percutaneous coronary intervention
    15. Complications of chronic total occlusion percutaneous coronary intervention
    16. How to prevent perforation during CTO PCI
    17. How to prevent and manage ischemic complications during CTO PCI
    18. Managing entrapped gear during chronic total occlusion interventions
    19. How to start and build your CTO practice and maintain referrals in a competitive environment
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Guohua Zeng, Kemal Sarica, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Nina Dragicevic, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Contents:
    NANOCARRIERS IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Role Of Nanotechnology In Skin Delivery Of Drugs
    LIPID-BASED VESICLES
    Liposomes As Drug Delivery Systems In Dermal/Transdermal Drug Delivery (From The Beginning)
    Transfersomes For Enhanced Skin Permeation Of Drugs
    Mechanism Of Penetration Enhancement Of Ultra deformable Vesicles
    Enhanced Skin Permeation Using Ethosomes
    Invasomes-Vesicles For Enhanced Skin Delivery Of Drugs
    Penetration-Enhancer-Containing Vesicles For Cutaneous Drug Delivery
    Stratum Corneum Lipid Liposomes
    Vesosomes
    Surface-Charged Vesicles For Penetration Enhancement
    SURFACTANT-BASED VESICLES
    Niosomes And Pro-Niosomes For Enhanced Skin Delivery
    Novasomes For Enhanced Skin Delivery
    LIPID-BASED ICULATE CARRIERS (OR ICLES)
    Solid Lipid Nanoicles, Nano structured Lipid Carriers And Lipid Nano capsules For Topical Delivery
    POLYMER-BASED NANOCARRIERS (ICULATE CARRIERS) IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Polymeric Nano (And Micro-) Particles As Carriers For Enhanced Skin Penetration (General)
    Polymeric Nanocapsules For Cutaneous Application
    Polymeric Micelles In Dermal/Transdermal Drug Delivery
    Dendrimers In Enhancing Skin Penetration
    Dendritic Core-Multishell (CMS) Nanotransporters For Skin Delivery
    NANOCRYSTALS IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Nanocrystals For Enhanced Skin Delivery Of Drugs.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Nina Dragicevic, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Summary: Percutaneous Penetration Enhancers in a mini-series format comprising five volumes, represents the most comprehensive reference on enhancement methods - both well established and recently introduced - in the field of dermal/transdermal drug delivery. In detail the broad range of both chemical and physical methods used to enhance the skin delivery of drugs is described. All aspects of drug delivery and measurement of penetration are covered, and the latest findings are provided on skin structure and function, mathematics in skin permeation, and modern analytical techniques adapted to assess and measure penetration. In offering a detailed description of the methods currently in use for penetration enhancement, this book will be of value for researchers, pharmaceutical scientists, practitioners, and also students.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Manoj Monga, Abhay Rane.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Introduction
    section 2. Percutaneous management of large renal calculi (Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy)
    section 3. Percutaneous management of transitional cell cancer (Percutaneous resection of tumor)
    section 4. Percutaneous ablation of renal cell cancer (Thermal and nonthermal).
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    David R Webb.
    Contents:
    Foreword
    Anatomy
    Equipment, Instruments, and Personnel
    Indications for PCNL-Patient Selection and Evaluation
    Percutaneous Nephrostomy
    Routine Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy and Pyeloplasty
    Complex Punctures
    Complications of PCNL and their Management
    Critical Pathways, Theatre Equipment Lists and Setups
    PCNL Workshop.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Servillo, Paolo Pelosi, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Tracheostomy: from surgical to percutaneous techniques
    2. Anatomiical and sonographic landmark
    3. Indication and timing
    4. Surgical tracheostomy
    5. Percutaneous tracheostomy: the ciaglia techniques
    6. Balloon dilation tracheostomy
    7. Percutaneous tracheostomy: the guide wire dilating forceps technique
    8. Frova's rotational technique and Fantoni's translaryngeal tracheostomy
    9. Choice of the appropriate tracheostomy technique
    10. Complications of percutaneous and surgical tracheostomy in critically ill patients
    11. Emergency percutaneous tracheotomy
    12. Tracheostomy tube types and criteria of choice
    13. Airway managment during tracheostomy: conventional device, laryngeal mask airway, double lumen endotracheal tube
    14. Medical and nursing management of tracheostomy
    15 .Quality of life and complications after percutaneous tracheostomy
    16. Clinical practice of informed consent for percutaneous tracheostomy
    17. Tracheostomy in intensive care unit: the need of European guidelines.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Patrizia Presbitero, Julinda Mehilli, Anna Sonia Petronio, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Women and invasive diagnostic procedures
    2. Intracoronary imaging and intracoronary functional tests
    3. Interventional treatment of stable coronary artery disease in women
    4. Interventional treatment of Acute Coronary Syndrome (ACS): non-ST-elevation ACS (NSTE-ACS)
    5. Interventional treatment of acute coronary syndrome: ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction
    6. Peri- and Post-procedural Antithrombotic Therapy in Women
    7. Aortic valve valvuloplasty
    8. Transcatheter aortic valve implantation
    9. Mitral valvuloplasty for mitral stenosis
    10. Treatment of mitral regurgitation
    11. Surgical and percutaneous treatment of tricuspid valve
    12. Left atrial appendage closure
    13. Closure of atrial septal defect and patent foramen ovale
    14. Ablation of atrial fibrillation in women
    15. Biventricular pacing in women for heart failure
    16. Thoracic and abdominal aorta percutaneous treatment
    17. Treatment of peripheral arteriopathy in women
    18. Gender Differences in Carotid Artery Stenting
    19. Percutaneous treatment during pregnancy
    20. Left ventricular assist devices.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Edward C. Halperin, David E. Wazer, Carlos A. Perez, Luther W. Brady.
    Summary: For more than 30 years, Perez and Brady's Principles and Practice of Radiation Oncology has been a reference for radiation oncologists and radiation oncology residents who need a comprehensive text covering both the biological and physical science aspects of this complex field as well as disease site-specific information on the integrated, multidisciplinary management of patients with cancer. The book has established itself as the discipline's "text-of-record," belonging on the shelf of all of those working in the field. The Seventh Edition continues this tradition of excellence with extensive updates throughout, many new chapters, and more than 1,400 full-color illustrations that highlight key concepts in tumor pathogenesis, diagnosis, and targeted radiation therapy.

    Contents:
    Sect. I: Overview and basic science of radiation oncology
    Pt. A: Cancer biology
    Pt. B: Medical radiation physics
    Sect. II: Techniques, modalities, and modifiers in radiation oncology
    Sect. III: Clinical radiation oncology Pt. A: Skin
    Pt. B: Central nervous system
    Pt. C: Head and neck
    Pt. D: Thorax
    Pt. E: Breast
    Pt. F: Gastrointestinal
    Pt. G: Urinary tract
    Pt. H: Male genitourinary
    Pt. I: Gynecologic
    Pt. J: Adrenal and retroperitoneal tumors
    Pt. K: Lymphoma and hematologic tumors
    Pt. L: Bone and soft tissue
    Pt. M: Pediatric
    Pt. N: Benign diseases
    Sect. IV: Palliative and supportive care
    Sect. V: Economics, education, ethics, and technology assessment.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Michel Gagner, Almino Ramos Cardoso, Mariano Palermo, Patrick Noel, David Nocca, editors.
    Summary: Sleeve gastrectomy (SG) is the most common bariatric procedure, accounting for more than 55% of all such surgeries performed worldwide. Obesity has become a major global problem that continues to spread in both developed and developing countries. While prevention of obesity is the best approach for the future, the current challenge is managing those who are already obese or morbidly obese, who constitute close to two thirds of the population in many countries, such as the US. Today, bariatric surgery is the only evidence-based treatment for morbid obesity with a low complication rate and acceptable results in the long-term for both weight loss and resolution of comorbidities. This book details all the approaches used in sleeve gastrectomy (SG), offering readers the tools needed to perform the perfect SG. Each chapter focuses on the clinical problems and the indications for the sleeve, and describes the technique step-by-step (including videos), the staplers, the different sizes of bougies, reinforcement of the sutures after the sleeve and the metabolic effects of surgery. The book also presents nontraditional SG techniques, such as the endoscopic approach, stapled sleeve and robotic technologies, discussing how to immediately identify complications and their treatment using endoscopy, laparoscopy and percutaneous image guided surgery. Further, it includes a chapter on revision surgery and revision procedures, not only from sleeve to other procedures, but also from other procedures to SG. The last section offers an overview of what the authors imagine the future holds for this bariatric procedure. The Perfect Sleeve Gastrectomy - A Clinical Guide to Evaluation, Treatment, and Techniques is an ideal reference resource for general surgeons, bariatric surgeons, endoscopists and gastroenterologists as well as researchers with an interest in obesity and its management. It also appeals to residents and fellows, dietitians, diabetes specialist, psychotherapists and hospital administrators and quality officers.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Operative preparation and background
    Part 2: Technical aspects
    Part 3: Sleeve gastrectomy GERD and hiatal hernia
    Part 4: Nontraditional sleeve gastrectomy
    Part 5: Treatment of complications
    Part 6: Revisional Surgery
    Part 7: Education and future. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    edited by Phillip N. Blondeel, Steven F. Morris, Geoffrey G. Hallock, Peter C. Neligan; with illustrations by Jennifer C. Darcy.
    Summary: Nearly two decades ago, the first edition of Perforator Flaps: Anatomy, Technique, & Clinical Applications was published, thereby filling a gap in the literature, and providing invaluable clinical pearls on the use of soft tissue flaps for reconstructive surgery. Since the publication of the second edition, technological advances including MRI angiography, standard color duplex ultrasound, ultra-high frequency ultrasound, and indocyanine green enabled better understanding of select pertinent physiology and delineation of perforators anywhere in the body. Greater anatomical knowledge and the ability to map the course of individual perforators is reflected in the updated third edition by renowned global experts and editors of the prior editions, Phillip N. Blondeel, Steven F. Morris, Geoffrey G. Hallock, and Peter C. Neligan. The primary goal of the third edition is to discuss evidenced-based perforator concepts and techniques that have been incorporated into global practice worldwide. Although condensed into a single volume, the new edition follows a similar format as prior editions, with chapters divided into four sections. The first section provides a solid foundation of knowledge with discussion of rudimentary fundamentals. The second section illustrates the use of basic types of local perforator flaps; introduces the vascularized dermal graft; describes routine suprafascial flap dissections with perforators themselves as recipient and donor vessels; lymphatics reconstituted in concert with perforator flaps; and how to minimize donor site morbidity with "kiss" flaps. The third section outlines basic anatomy and techniques for common perforator flaps, while the fourth section provides a brief overview of suggested preferences for clinical applications, with both sections organized by body region.-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joshua L. Levine, Julie Vasile, Constance M. Chen, Robert J. Allen, Sr.
    Contents:
    The history of the use of perforator flaps for microsurgical breast reconstruction / Sarah E. Appleton and Steven F. Morris
    Starting a perforator flap breast program / Christina R. Vargas and Bernard T. Lee
    Essential equipment needed for perforator flap breast reconstruction and
    Operating room setup / David Greenspun
    Deep inferior epigastric perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Robert J. Allen, Sr., Constance M. Chen, and Maria M. Lotempio
    Superficial inferior epigastric artery flap for breast reconstruction / Aldona J. Spiegel
    Gluteal artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Richard Mahlon Kline, Jr., and James Ernest Craigie
    Profunda artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Robert J. Allen, Sr., Maria M. Lotempio, and Constance M. Chen
    Free lumbar artery perforator flap for autologous breast reconstruction / Koen Van Landuyt and Steven F. Morris
    Pedicled lateral thoracic flap for breast reconstruction / Moustapha Hamdi and Assaf Zeltzer
    Bipedicled (double or stacked) abdominal perforator flap in unilateral breast
    Reconstruction / Julie V. Vasile and Joshua L. Levine
    Venus salvage procedures in the deep inferior epigastric perforator flap for
    Breast reconstruction / Thomas Constantinescu and Ming-Huei Cheng
    Imaging for perforator flap breast reconstruction / Julie V. Vasile
    Lateral thigh perforator flap (septocutaneous tensor fasciae latae flap) / Stephania Tuinder, Arno Lataster, and Rene Remmelt Willie Johan van der Hulst
    Stacked diep/pap flap breast reconstruction / James L. Mayo and Robert J. Allen, Sr
    Deep circumflex iliac artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Edward Buchel
    Indocyanine green/spy imaging in perforator flap breast reconstruction / Michael R. Zenn.
  • Print
    National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.5 P47 2019
    1
  • Print
    National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.7.T62 P47 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Howard A. Bird.
    Contents:
    1. Expert Care of the Performing Artist
    2. Musical Instruments and their Demands on the Body
    3. Styles of Dance and Their Demands on the Body
    4. The Voice and the Musculoskeletal System
    5. Principles of Management
    6. Illustrative Musical Case Studies
    7. Illustrative Dance Case Studies
    8. Overuse Syndromes
    9. Hypermobility in Dance; Asset not Liability
    10. Scoliosis in Musicians and Dancers
    11. Drugs and Therapeutics
    12. The Disabled Performer
    13. The Multi-Talented Performer
    14. Future Trends.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Massimo Morbidelli, Moritz Wolf, Jean-Marc Bielser.
    Summary: This book is a monography about perfusion cell cultures for the production of biopharmaceuticals, such as therapeutic proteins (i.e. biomolecules like monoclonal antibodies), and describes the fundamentals, design and operation of these processes. Context is given in the first chapters to understand the state-of-the-art of the technology. We then give an overview of the challenges and objectives in operating mammalian cell perfusion cultures and provide guidelines for the design and setup of lab-scale bioreactor systems, and the required control structure to achieve stable operation. Scale-down devices and PAT tools are described in the context of continuous manufacturing and guidelines for process optimization are given using a variety of case studies to illustrate different approaches. Scale-up is also adressed with a strong focus on bioreactor aeration and mixing, shear stress and cell retention device. Finally, a general introduction for the application of mechanistic and statistic models in bioreactor process development and optimization is given in the last chapter. Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Perfusion mammalian cell culture for recombinant protein manufacturing
    Perfusion bioreactors : the set up and process characterization
    Scale-down models and sensors for process development
    Design and optimization of mammalian cell perfusion cultures
    Clinical and commercial scale reactors
    Mechanistic and statistical modeling of bioprocesses.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Gregory S. Matte.
    Contents:
    Equipment for bypass
    Priming the bypass circuit
    The bypass plan
    Typical phases of cardiopulmonary bypass
    Additional notes based on bypass tasks
    Bypass considerations based on diagnosis
    Notes on select issues during bypass
    Notes on select emergency procedures during bypass
    Brief overview of named procedures and terms
    Abbreviations for congenital heart surgery.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Anastasia Kelekis-Cholakis, Reem Atout, Nader Hamdan, Ioannis Tsourounakis.
    Summary: This book is an up-to-date reference that provides detailed guidance on how to diagnose and manage the soft and hard tissue complications that may be associated with a functioning dental implant placement, such as peri-implant mucositis, soft tissue loss, and peri-implantitis. Treatment options for each complication are described and illustrated step by step and carefully selected cases are presented to further explain the individual stages in management and to highlight key learning points. Practical advice is offered on all aspects of diagnosis, and information is also presented on the definition and etiology of the various complications. The book is in an easy-to-read format and includes a review of the latest literature on the topic.

    Contents:
    An introduction to understanding the basics of teeth vs. dental implants : similarities and differences
    Peri-implant soft tissue deficiencies
    Peri-implant mucositis
    Hard tissue complications/peri-implantitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Vijay Vohra, Nikunj Gupta, Annu Sarin Jolly, Seema Bhalotra, editors.
    Summary: The book covers all aspects of peri-operative anesthetic management of liver transplant patients. It provides a comprehensive coverage of the relevant history, surgeons, hepatologists, intensivists and pediatricians perspective of the disease, its pathogenesis, clinical presentation and indication for transplant. It discusses the practical aspects like fluid management and use of vasopressors. The book is divided into sections for a better and comprehensive delivery of information. Individual sections provide up to date information on the pre-operative issues and optimisation, intra-operative care and management and post-operative critical care issues and management of all transplant patients with special emphasis on recent advances. Separate sections cover ICU care of these patients in great detail and anesthetic management of pediatric liver transplant. The book includes anesthetic techniques involved in conducting multiorgan transplant. It discusses clinical approach to a patient with acute liver failure, brain death criteria and laws and organ donor management. It also presents newer techniques and methodologies adopted in the field of liver transplant. It includes ample illustrations, flowcharts, key points in each chapter, figures and photographs. The book contains chapters focusing on post-transplant patients presenting for non-transplant surgery. The book fills the gap in the literature for a comprehensive guide for the anesthetist performing or pursuing liver transplant, students/trainees/examinees who have a keen interest in this field and doctors dealing with such patients in critical care, donor management, pursuing general anesthesia. It is also helpful for hepatologists, intensivists and surgeons associated with liver transplant.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: The History of Liver Transplantation in India
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Background
    1.3 Step I: Public Education
    1.4 Step 2: Changing the Law
    1.5 Step 3: The Initial Procedures
    1.6 Step 4: Sustainable Programmes
    1.6.1 Numbers
    1.6.2 Statewise Distribution
    1.6.3 The Situation in 2020
    1.7 India Vs the World
    1.8 Concerns
    1.9 Recommendations
    1.10 Conclusions
    Part I: Basics Anatomy and Pathophysiology of Liver Disease
    2: Physiological Role of Liver and Interpreting Liver Function Tests 2.1 Gross Anatomy of the Liver
    2.1.1 Hepatic Blood Flow Regulation
    2.2 Cellular Anatomy of the Liver
    2.2.1 Models of Liver Microanatomy
    2.3 Liver, the Immunological Gateway
    2.3.1 Innate and Adaptive Immunity
    2.3.2 Immune Tolerance
    2.4 Hepatic Drug Metabolism
    2.4.1 First Pass Effect
    2.4.2 Phases of Drug Metabolism
    2.4.3 Drug Extraction Ratio
    2.5 Energy Metabolism
    2.5.1 Glucose Homeostasis
    2.5.2 Nitrogen Metabolism
    2.5.3 Fatty Acid Metabolism
    2.6 Role of the Liver in Coagulation
    2.7 Hepatic Endocrine Function 2.8 Chronic Liver Disease
    2.9 Interpreting Liver Function Tests
    2.10 Tests Detecting Hepatocyte Injury
    2.10.1 Serum Aminotransferases
    2.10.2 AST to ALT Ratio
    2.10.3 Lactate Dehydrogenase
    2.11 Tests Detecting Injury to Bile Ducts
    2.11.1 Alkaline Phosphatase
    2.12 5′-Nucleotidase
    2.13 Gamma-Glutamyl Transferase
    2.14 Tests Assessing Biliary Organic Anion Transport
    2.14.1 Serum Bilirubin
    2.15 Tests Measure Hepatic Synthetic Capacity
    2.15.1 Serum Proteins
    2.16 Prothrombin Time and International Normalized Ratio 2.17 Tests Measuring Blood Flow and Metabolic Capacity of Liver
    2.18 Pattern of Liver Test Abnormalities
    2.19 Monitoring Liver Transplant
    References
    3: Surgical Anatomy of the Liver
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Ligaments of the Liver (Fig. 3.1)
    3.2.1 Ligamentum Venosum (Arantius Ligament)
    3.3 Lobar and Segmental Anatomy of the Liver
    3.3.1 Functional Surgical Anatomy of the Liver
    3.3.2 Bismuth's Liver Segmentation
    3.4 Caudate Lobe
    3.4.1 Hepatocaval Ligament (Makuuchi Ligament)
    3.4.2 Riedel Lobe (Fig. 3.8)
    3.5 Hepatic Veins (Venous Outflow) 3.5.1 Right Inferior Hepatic Veins: RIHV (Fig. 3.11)
    3.5.2 Inferior Phrenic Veins
    3.6 Anatomical Relations Around the Hilum
    3.6.1 Extrahepatic and Intrahepatic Vasculature
    3.7 Portal Vein
    3.8 Hepatic Artery
    3.9 Biliary Anatomy
    3.9.1 Intrahepatic Bile Duct Anatomy
    3.9.2 The Right Hepatic Duct
    3.9.3 The Left Hepatic Duct
    3.9.4 Extrahepatic Biliary Anatomy
    3.9.5 Biliary Ductal Anomalies
    3.9.6 Bile Duct Blood Supply
    3.10 Gallbladder and Cystic Duct
    3.10.1 The Calot's Triangle (Fig. 3.19)
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Daphne Stannard, Dina A. Krenzischek.
    Summary: PeriAnesthesia Nursing Care: A Bedside Guide for Safe Recovery is a key reference for clinicians practicing in preoperative areas, phase I and phase II PACU nursing areas, and nurses working in critical care, OB, and other specialty recovery units. Ideal for perianesthesia nursing orientation and perioperative cross-training programs, this text is beneficial for all those caring for pre- and postanesthesia patients. Additionally, it is a valuable tool for nursing students specializing in critical care and perianesthesia nurses preparing to sit for the certified post anesthesia nurse (CPAN) and certified ambulatory perianesthesia nurse (CAPA) certification examinations. Divided into three sections that cover the lifespan, PeriAnesthesia Nursing Care: A Bedside Guide for Safe Recovery is specifically designed to be functional for the clinician and grounding for the student nurse. The first section focuses on core concepts applicable to all perianesthesia patients and families, while the second is population specific, and the third concentrates on particular surgeries and procedures that follow body systems. --Book Jacket.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    ASPAN, American Society of PeriAnesthesia Nurses ; [edited by] Lois Schick, Pamela E. Windle.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Digital
    Alireza Fazeli, William V. Holt, editors.
    Summary: "This book presents a timely collection of reviews by experts in periconception and fertilization. The book provides a good introduction for those new to the field as well as those who have worked in this field for some time, but not have been able to keep up-to-date with recent advances on the topic. The book reviews the current knowledge in this field, then focuses its attention on short-term and long-term effects of the periconception period, both from a physiological and medical perspective. Finally the volume covers the examination of the potential mechanisms involved in controlling periconception period. From the early days of discovery about the basics of the fertilization process, scientist shave known that early events happening during conception play a major part in the creation of new offspring. However, until nearly a decade ago we thought these events were just concerned with the conception and nothing to do with lifelong health and welfare, or wellbeing of the offspring. Early indications from IVF in sheep and cattle suggested that the embryo culture conditions employed in the laboratory could result in unusually large and unhealthy offspring. These observations sounded alarm bells and stimulated research into the impacts of in vivo and in vitro conditions on the health of embryos and offspring. This book provides a summary of the state-of-the-art research being done to more fully understand the importance of the periconception environment"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction: a brief guide to the periconception environment / Alireza Fazeli, William V. Holt
    Epigenetic influences during the periconception period and assisted reproduction / Akwasi A. Amoako, Tamer M. Nafee [and others]
    The importance of the periconception period: immediate effects in cattle breeding and in assisted reproduction such as artificial insemination and embryo transfer / Mieke Van Eetvelde, Sonia Heras, J. L. M. R. Leroy, Ann Van Soom, Geert Opsomer
    The consequences of maternal-embryonic cross talk during the periconception period on subsequent embryonic development / Dimitrios Rizos, Veronica Maillo, Maria-Jesús Sá́nchez-Calabuig [and others]
    The role of maternal nutrition during the periconceptional period and its effect on offspring phenotype / Tom P. Fleming, Judith J. Eckert, Oleg Denisenko
    The long-term effect of the periconception period on the embryo's epigenetic profile and phenotype: the role of maternal disease such as diabetes and how the effect is mediated (example from a rabbit model) / Bernd Fischer, Maria Schindler, S. Mareike Pendzialek, Jacqueline Gürke, Elisa Haucke [and others]
    Long-term effects of the periconception period on embryo epigenetic profile and phenotype: the role of stress and how this effect is mediated / James Ord, Alireza Fazeli, Penelope J. Watt
    The long-term effects of the periconceptional period on embryo epigenetic profile and phenotype; the paternal role and his contribution, and how males can affect offspring's phenotype/epigenetic profile / Emma S. Lucas, Adam J. Watkins
    Exploitation of non-mammalian model organisms in epigenetic research / William V. Holt.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Alexander Birbrair, editor.
    Summary: This volume explores novel concepts of pericyte biology. The present book is an attempt to describe the most recent developments in the area of pericyte biology which is one of the emergent hot topics in the field of molecular and cellular biology today. Here, we present a selected collection of detailed chapters on what we know so far about the pericytes. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Different Organs and Pericyte Biology in Disease, Pericyte Biology - Novel Concepts presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and researchers or clinicians involved with specific diseases. .

    Contents:
    Pericyte biology: development, homeostasis, and disease / Alexander Birbrair
    The NG2 proteoglycan in pericyte biology / William B. Stallcup
    Pericytes for therapeutic bone repair / Carolyn A. Meyers, Joan Casamitjana, Leslie Chang, Lei Zhang, Aaron W. James, Bruno Péault
    Pericyte biology in zebrafish / Nabila Bahrami, Sarah J. Childs
    The microvascular pericyte: approaches to isolation, characterization, and cultivation / Paula Dore-Duffy, Nilufer Esen
    Pericytes in veterinary species: prospective isolation, characterization and tissue regeneration potential / Cristina L. Esteves, F. Xavier Donadeu
    Pericytes in the human vocal fold mucosa / Kiminori Sato
    Ca2+ signalling in pericytes / Theodor Burdyga, Lyudmyla Borysova
    Pericytes derived from human pluripotent stem cells / John Jamieson, Bria Macklin, Sharon Gerecht
    Pericytes in tissue engineering / Betül Çelebi-Saltik
    Pericyte Secretome / Abderahim Gaceb, Gesine Paul
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Alexander Birbrair, editor.
    Summary: The present book is an attempt to describe the most recent developments in the area of pericyte biology which is one of the emergent hot topics in the field of molecular and cellular biology today. Here, we present a selected collection of thirteen detailed chapters on what we know so far about pericytes in distinct organs in physiological and pathological conditions. Further, it provides an update on the most novel functions attributed to these cells and will introduce a newer generation of researchers and scientists to the importance of these cells, ranging from their discovery in different organs through current state-of-the-science. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and vascular research. This volume explores pericytes' physiologic roles in different tissues, ranging from the pancreas, lungs and liver through skeletal muscle, gut, retina and more. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Disease and Pericyte Biology - Novel Concepts, Pericyte Biology in Different Organs presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and researchers or clinicians involved with specific organs. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Pericytes in the Retina
    Pancreatic Pericytes in Glucose Homeostasis and Diabetes
    Pericytes in the Lung
    Pericytes in Skeletal Muscle
    Pericytes in the Gut
    Pericytes in Bone Marrow
    Cochlear Capillary Pericytes
    Pericytes in the Placenta: Role in Placental Development and Homeostasis
    Pericytes in the Liver
    Pericytes in the Periodontal Ligament
    Pericytes in the Heart
    Pericytes in the Umbilical Cord
    The Pluripotent Microvascular Pericytes Are the Adult Stem Cells Even in the Testis
    Index
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Alexander Birbrair.
    Summary: This volume explores pericytes' roles under distinct pathological conditions, ranging from tumors, ALS, Alzheimers disease, Multiple Sclerosis, stroke, diabetes, atherosclerosis, muscular dystrophies and more. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Different Organs and Pericyte Biology – Novel Concepts, Pericyte Biology in Disease presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cell biology and clinicians involved with these specific diseases.

    Contents:
    Pericytes in cutaneous wound healing
    Pericytes in glioblastomas: multifaceted role within tumor microenvironments and potential for therapeutic interventions
    Pericytes in breast cancer
    Pericytes in sarcomas and other mesenchymal tumors
    Pericytes in metastasis
    The role of pericytes in Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    Pericytes in Alzheimers Disease: novel clues to cerebral amyloid angiopathy pathogenesis
    Pericytes in Multiple Sclerosis
    Pericytes in ischemic stroke
    Pericytes in Hereditary Hemorrhagic Telangiectasia
    Pericytes in primary familial brain calcification
    Pericytes in type 2 diabetes
    Pericytes in atherosclerosis
    Pericytes in chronic lung disease
    Pericytes in muscular dystrophies
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sandraluz Lara-Cinisomo, Katherine Leah Wisner, editors.
    Summary: Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women:A Global Perspective on Detection and Treatment. As more is known about postpartum depression, the more it is recognized as a global phenomenon. Yet despite the large numbers, information about this condition as experienced by Spanish speaking women and Latinas has not always been easy to come by. Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women focuses on four diverse Latina populations (Mexico, Chile, Spain, and U.S.) to analyze key similarities and differences within this large and wide-ranging group. This first-of-its-kind reference reviews current research on the topic, including prevalence, screening methods, interventions, and--of particular salience for this population--barriers to care. Findings on psychoeducation, assessment tools, and cognitive-behavioral and other forms of therapy provide important insights into best practices, and continuity of care. And psychosocial, cultural, and linguistic considerations in working with Latinas are described in depth for added clinical usefulness. This landmark volume: Outlines characteristics of Spanish-speaking women and Latinas screened for postpartum depression Introduces the Edinburgh Postnatal Depression Scale, English and Spanish versions, and reviews their use with Latina women Compares postpartum depression and health behaviors in Spanish and Latina immigrant mothers Offers streamlined assessment-to-intervention models Provides two in-depth case studies illustrating cultural factors influencing the treatment of Latinas with perinatal depression Presents an instructive firsthand account of postpartum depression. Between its thorough coverage of the issues and its innovative clinical ideas, Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women has a wealth of information of interest to researchers and practitioners in maternal and child health, obstetrics/gynecology, mental health, and women's health.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. A global perspective on postpartum depression: An overview of the current research with Spanish-speaking women in the U.S. and abroad
    Chapter 2. Characteristics of Hispanic Women Screened for Postpartum Depression
    Chapter 3. Maternity, migration and mental health: Comparison between Spanish and Latina immigrant mothers in postpartum depression and health behaviors
    Chapter 4. Assessment, Engagement and Treatment Entry for Latina Women with Perinatal Depression
    Chapter 5. Screening for postpartum depression in Chilean women with the Postpartum Depression Screening Scale, Spanish version
    Chapter 6. Perinatal Depression Treatments for U.S. Latinas: A Review of Research Findings
    Chapter 7. Psychosocial and cultural considerations in detecting and treating depression in Latina perinatal women in the United States
    Chapter 8. Perinatal depression in Mexican women: Prevalence, risk factors, and prevention of postpartum depression
    Chapter 9. Treating Latinas with postpartum depression: Two case reports
    Chapter 10. Maternidad Tab , the Silent Epidemic: An autobiographical story of postpartum depression in Mexico.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [editors], Mary E. Norton, Jeffrey A. Kuller and Lorraine Dugoff.
    Summary: "Get a quick, expert overview of the fast-changing field of perinatal genetics with this concise, practical resource. Drs. Mary Norton, Jeffrey A. Kuller, and Lorraine Dugoff fully cover the clinically relevant topics that are key to providers who care for pregnant women and couples contemplating pregnancy. It's an ideal resource for Ob/Gyn physicians, maternal-fetal medicine specialists, and clinical geneticists, as well as midwives, nurse practitioners, and other obstetric providers"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Principles of medical genetics and genomics
    Non-Mendelian genetics
    Principles of genetic counseling
    Cytogenetics: part 1, general concepts and aneuploid conditions
    Cytogenetics: part 2, structural rearrangements and reproductive impact
    Molecular genetics
    Carrier screening
    Serum and ultrasound based screening tests for aneuploidy
    Cell free DNA screening
    Ultrasound markers for aneuploidy
    Genetic evaluation of fetal sonographic abnormalities
    Chromosomal microarray analysis
    Exome and genome sequencing
    Prenatal diagnostic testing
    Preimplantation genetic screening and diagnosis
    Fetal treatment of genetic disorders.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Antonio L. Teixeira, Danielle Macedo, Bernhard T. Baune, editors
    Summary: Perinatal psychiatry is an emerging field that investigates the role of perinatal events - for example pregnancy complications and infections - in the development of neuropsychiatric conditions, such as schizophrenia and mood disorders. Among the implicated pathological mechanisms, perinatal-induced inflammation seems to play a major role and is being considered as a potential target for therapeutic intervention. Bringing together various approaches in the field (preclinical and clinical, epidemiological, immunological and genetic methods), the book discusses the available evidence, the putative mechanisms and the challenges ahead. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Perinatal psychiatry : ready for prime time? / Sudhakar Selvaraj, Haitham Salem, Cristian P. Zeni, Antonio L. Teixeira
    Developmental programming during psychological stress in pregnancy : a neurobiological perspective / Natalie Aboustate, Bernhard T. Baune
    Epigenetic modifications of early-life stress and adult life psychopathology / Chris Murgatroyd
    Hypothalamus-pituitary-adrenal axis programming by early-life stress : a role played by inflammatory and epigenetic mechanisms / Gabriel R. Fries
    Intergenerational aspects of immune and endocrine function in perinatal depression / Andrew J. Perrin, Carmine M. Pariante, Patricia A. Zunszain
    Neonatal meningitis mechanisms and implications in adult life / Vijayasree V. Giridharan, Lutiana R. Simoes, Pavani Sayana, Fabricia Petronilho, Rodrigo Hasbun, Tatiana Barichello
    Toxoplasma gondii infection as a risk factor for major psychiatric disorders : pre-clinical and clinical evidence / João Luís Vieira Monteiro de Barros, Aline Silva de Miranda, Antonio Lucio Teixeira
    A critical appraisal on the epidemiological evidence linking perinatal inflammation and risk of psychosis / Lia Snaders, Felicia Gabler, David De Lucena
    Maternal immune activation as a risk factor for schizophrenia : evidence from preclinical and clinical studies / Camila Nayane de Carvalho Lima, Tejaswini Doifode, Allan Colodel, Pavani Sayana, Vijayasree V. Giridharan, Danielle S. Macedo et al.
    Sex and age influence in the effects of perinatal immune activation in animals / Danielle S. Macedo, Manuel Alves Santos Júnior, Aline Santos Monte, Germana Silva Vasconcelos, Tatiane da Silva Araújo, Silvânia Maria Mendes Vasconcelos
    Maternal immune activation and neuropsychiatric disorders : the intricate puzzle of autism specturm disorder / Mellanie Fontes-Dutra, Bruna Rabelo, Júlio Santos-Terra, Iohanna
    Zika virus infection and potential mechanisms implicated in neuropsychiatric complications / Fernanda Martins Marim, Vidyleison Neves Camargos, Celso Martins Queiroz-Junior, Vivian Vasconcelos Costa
    The immune responses at the fetomaternal interface / Moisés Evandro Bauer, Priscila Vianna
    Placenta and cord blood as source of immune markers of offspring neurodevelopment and psychopathology / Ana Cristina Simões e Siva, Janaina Matos Moreira, Rafael Coelho Magalhães
    Cytokine model of cognition in relation to mental disorders during neurodevelopment / Célia Fourrier, Bernhard T. Baune.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC454 .P47 2020
    1
  • Print
    edited by Frederick C. Battaglia, Giacomo Meschia, E. J. Quilligan.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RG600 .P416
    2
  • Digital
    Fabio Triulzi, Cristina Baldoli, Cecilia Parazzini and Andrea Righini.
    Contents:
    Normal development.- Normal and abnormal commissures development, midline anomalies
    Posterior fossa malformations
    Malformations of cortical development
    Malformations of eye and orbit
    Vascular malformations
    Ventriculomegaly
    Infections
    Ischemic and hemorrhagic lesions
    Twin to twin transfusion syndrome. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Glenda Fregia Butnarescu.
    Contents:
    v.1 Reproductive health; v.2 Reproductive risk.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RG951 .B88
    2
  • Digital
    [clinical] editors, Kathleen Rice Simpson, Patricia A. Creehan, Nancy O'Brien-Abel, Cheryl K. Roth, Annie J. Rohan.
    Summary: "The goal of the book is to provide useful clinical information to practicing perinatal nurses. A perinatal nurse assist women during their pregnancy educating about childbirth techniques, prenatal health, and what to expect throughout their pregnancy as well as how to bond and care for their baby after birth. Perinatal Nursing provides up-to-date information on best practices, standards, guidelines, etc. It is a comprehensive text for the standard of care"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Erin M. Denney-Koelsch, Denise Côté-Arsenault.
    Summary: This unique book is a first-of-its-kind resource that comprehensively covers each facet and challenge of providing optimal perinatal palliative care. Designed for a wide and multi-disciplinary audience, the subjects covered range from theoretical to the clinical and the practically relevant, and all chapters include case studies that provide real-world scenarios as additional teaching tools for the reader. Perinatal Palliative Care: A Clinical Guide is divided into four sections. Part One provides the foundation, covering an overview of the field, key theories that guide the practice of perinatal palliative care, and includes a discussion of perinatal ethics and parental experiences and needs upon receiving a life-limiting fetal diagnosis. Part Two delves further into practical clinical care, guiding readers through issues of obstetrical management, genetic counseling, neonatal pain management, non-pain symptom management, spiritual care, and perinatal bereavement care. Part Three discusses models of perinatal palliative care, closely examining evidence for different types of PPC programs: from hospital-based programs, to community-based care, and examines issues of interdisciplinary PPC care coordination, birth planning, and team support. Finally, Part Four concludes the book with a close look at special considerations in the field. In this section, racial, ethnic, and cultural perspectives and implications for PPC are discussed, along with lessons in how to provide PPC for a wide-range of clinical and other healthcare workers. The book closes with a look to the future of the field of perinatal palliative care. Thorough and practical, Perinatal Palliative Care: A Clinical Guide is an ideal resource for any healthcare practitioner working with these vulnerable patient populations, from palliative care specialists, to obstetricians, midwifes, neonatologists, hospice providers, nurses, doulas, social workers, chaplains, therapists, ethicists, and child life specialist s.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Foundations of Perinatal Palliative Care
    1. Introduction to Perinatal Palliative Care
    2. Theoretical Perspectives to Guide the Practice of Perinatal Palliative Care
    3. Perinatal Ethics
    4. Parental Experiences and Needs After Life-Limiting Fetal Diagnosis.-Part 2 Clinical Care for Families Facing Life-Limiting Fetal Conditions
    5. Obstetrical Management in Life-Limiting Fetal Conditions
    6.Genetics and Genetic Counseling in Perinatal Palliative Care.-7. The Neonatologists Role in Prenatal Counseling
    8. Neonatal Pain Management
    9. Non-Pain Symptom Management
    10. The Role of the Palliative Care Specialist in Perinatal Care
    11. Spiritual Care in the Perinatal Period
    12. Perinatal Bereavement Care
    Part 3 Models of Perinatal Palliative Care
    13. Structure and Development of Hospital-Based Perinatal Palliative Care Programs
    14. Community-Based Perinatal Palliative Care
    15. Interdisciplinary Perinatal Palliative Care Coordination, Birth Planning, and Support of the Team
    Part 4 Special Considerations for the Field of Perinatal Palliative Care
    16. Considerations in Unique Populations in Perinatal Palliative Care: From Culture, Race, Infertility, and Beyond
    17. Education in Perinatal Palliative Care for Nurses, Physicians, and Other Health Professionals
    18. Advancing the Field of Perinatal Palliative Care: Needs and Strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Marta C. Antonelli, editor.
    Contents:
    Changes Induced by Prenatal Stress in Behavior and Brain Morphology. Can they be Prevented or Reversed?
    Sleep in Prenatally Restraint Stressed Rats, a Model of Anxious Depression
    Hormonal Modulation of Catecholaminergic Neurotransmission in a Prenatal Stress Model
    Involvement of Nitric Oxide, Neurotrophins and HPA Axis in Neurobehavioral Alterations Induced by Prenatal Stress
    Prenatal Stress and Adult Drug-seeking Behavior: Interactions with Genes and Relation to Non-drug Related Behavior
    A Self-medication Hypothesis for Increased Vulnerability to Drug Abuse in Prenatally Restraint Stressed Rats
    How Postnatal Insults May Program Development
    Studies in Animal Models
    Perinatal Positive and Negative Influences on the Early Neurobehavioral Reflex and Motor Development
    Short and Long-term Consequences of Perinatal Asphyxia: Looking for Neuroprotective Strategies
    Affective, Cognitive and Motivational Processes of Maternal Care
    Role of Sensory, Social and Hormonal Signals from the Mother on the Development of Offspring
    Retrospective Studies
    Prenatal Stress and its Effects on the Fetus and the Child; Possible Underlying Biological Mechanisms
    Using Natural Disasters to Study Prenatal Maternal Stress in Humans
    Early Life Influences on Cognition, Behavior and Emotion in Humans: From Birth to Age 20
    Perinatal Programming of Neurodevelopment. Epigenetic Mechanisms and the Prenatal Shaping of the Brain
    Epigenetic Mechanisms of Perinatal Programming: Translational Approaches from Rodent to Human and Back
    Perinatal Administration of Aromatase Inhibitors in Rodents as Animal Models of Human Male Homosexuality: Similarities and Differences
    Impact of the Perinatal Environment on Child Development: Implications for Prevention Policies
    Perinatal Programming Prevention Measures
    Pregnancy Outcomes after a Maternity Intervention for Stressful EmotionS (PROMISES): A Randomised Controlled Trial.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Faruk Uguz, Laura Orsolini, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on recent advances in research and practical recommendations regarding the use of psychotropic drugs during pregnancy and lactation, two important social and psychological life events for women. In addition to the social context, including the addition of a new family member, many women experience the occurrence or recurrence of psychiatric disorders during the perinatal period. Psychiatric disorders during this period can have negative effects on the fetus, infant and other children in the family, and can result in functional impairment among mothers. The book offers a comprehensive overview of psychopharmacological treatments for nearly all specific psychiatric conditions (e.g. bipolar disorder, panic disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder) and includes chapters on clinical approaches to treating these disorders. As such, it will appeal to a wide readership, including psychiatrists, obstetricians, gynecologists and pediatricians.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Zhong Chao Han, Tsuneo A. Takahashi, Zhibo Han, Zongjin Li, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive introduction to various types of perinatal stem cells. Given their unique regenerative abilities, stem cells offer a promising avenue in the treatment of degenerative diseases or injury. Currently, the limitations of postnatal cell sources and expanding efficiency may limit autologous stem cell therapies. Although embryonic stem cells (ESCs) and induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) can be cultured indefinitely ex vivo, and can differentiate into three germ layers, ethical issues, the teratoma formation of ESCs and oncogenic risk of iPSCs are major obstacles to their clinical application. More recently, perinatal stem cells have been isolated from the umbilical cord, Wharton's Jelly, placenta, amniotic membrane and amniotic fluid, which are normally discarded as medical waste. This book, after describing perinatal stem cells in detail, introduces readers to the various types of perinatal stem cells, addressing their characterization, banking, quality control and stability. Importantly, it also reviews the clinical applications of perinatal stem cells to therapy of diseases. Accordingly, it offers a valuable resource for clinicians, researchers and graduate students alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony Atala, Kyle J. Cetrulo, Rouzbeh R. Taghizadeh, Sean V. Murphy, Curtis L. Cetrulo, Jr.
    Summary: Perinatal Stem Cells provides researchers and clinicians with a comprehensive description of the current clinical and pre-clinical applications of stem cells derived from perinatal sources, such as amniotic fluid, placenta and placental membranes, the umbilical cord and Wharton's jelly. It's compiled by leading experts in the field, offering readers detailed insights into sources of perinatal stem cells and their potential for disease treatment. Therapeutic applications of perinatal stem cells include the treatment of in utero and pregnancy related diseases, cardiac disease, liver disease, pulmonary disease, inflammatory diseases, for hematopoietic regeneration, and for neural protection after stroke or traumatic brain injury. In addition, the rapid advance in clinical translation and commercialization of perinatal stem cell therapies is highlighted in a section on Clinical and Industry Perspective which provides insight into the new opportunities and challenges involved in this novel and exciting industry.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Renato Augusto Moreira de Sá, Eduardo Borges da Fonseca, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest evidence-based guidelines for perinatal management and is designed to help obstetricians and neonatologists minimize complications and offer patients the best possible care. Since 1960, there has been a significant increase in basic and clinical investigations on normal and pathological pregnancy in the developed world. This has provided insights into the physiopathology of pregnant women, fetuses and newborns and led to the development of new technologies, bringing about a new medical subspecialty: perinatal medicine. The book is divided into eight main sections: The first examines basic periconceptional care and discusses the ethical aspects of perinatology. The next section focuses on prenatal considerations, such as the nutritional aspects of gestation and puerperium, physical exercise during pregnancy, routine laboratory tests, prenatal care of multiple gestations and the role of the neonatologist in prenatal care. The third and fourth sections then explore fetal evaluation, and clinical intercurrences in pregnancy, respectively. The next section addresses pregnancy complications: prevention, diagnosis and management. The sixth section covers the basic aspects of congenital infections and the seventh examines labor and delivery aspects. Lastly, the final section includes chapters on neonatal assistance. Written by leading experts in obstetrics, neonatology, and perinatology, this thoroughly updated, comprehensive resource reflects the latest information in all areas, including genetics and imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rolando Cimaz, editor.
    Summary: This book, written by very well-known opinion leaders in the field, covers all aspects of periodic and non -periodic fevers, and related disorders. The expression refers to several different auto-inflammatory diseases, showing similar symptoms-the primary symptom being a recurrent fever for an infectious cause cannot be found. The opening chapters give some historical hints, explain the genetic basis of the disease and provide insights into the pathogenesis derived from recent experimental studies and guides the reader through classification and nomenclature. A large part of the book is then devoted to a detailed description of the specific related diseases and their clinical presentations, the disease course, and potential complications in both pediatric and adult patients. The advice regarding treatment is based on the best currently available evidence in this constantly evolving area. The book is part of Springers series Rare Diseases of the Immune System, which presents recently acquired knowledge on pathogenesis, diagnosis, and therapy with the aim of promoting a more holistic approach to these conditions. Autoinflammatory diseases are hereditary disorders that are caused by single-gene defects in innate immune regulatory pathways and are characterized by a clinical and biological inflammatory syndrome in which there is limited, if any, evidence of autoimmunity. Periodic and Non-Periodic Fevers will be an invaluable source of up-to-date information for all practitioners involved in the care of patients with these disease.

    Contents:
    Preface
    I From Pathogenesis to Classification
    1 Historical notes on Autoinflammatory disorders
    2 Pathogenesis:Genetic basis, Innate Immunity, Inflammosomes, Cytokines
    3 Classification and nomenclature of Periodic and Non Periodic fevers
    II Specific diseases
    4 Mevalonate Kinase Deficiency (MKD)
    5 Tumor necrosis factor receptors associated syndrome (TRAPS)
    6 Cryopyrin-Associated Periodic Syndromes (CAPS)
    7 Pyogenic Arthritis, Pyoderma gangrenosum and Acne Syndrome (PAPA)
    8 Adenosine deaminase syndrome 2 (ADA2)
    9 Interferonopathies
    10 Inflammatory bone disease
    11 Amyloidosis
    12 Dermatologic autoinflammatory diseases
    13 Autoinflammatory diseases with immunodeficiency
    14 Periodic Fever, Aphthous Stomatitis, Pharyngitis, Adenitis Syndrome (PFAPA)
    15 Proteasome. related disorders
    16 Chronic Non-bacterial osteomyelitis
    17 Systemic JIA and adult onset Still disease
    18 Behcet disease
    19 Recurrent idiopathic pericarditis
    20 Schnitzler syndrome
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Khadija Amine, Wafa El Kholti, Jamila Kissa.
    Summary: This book is an evidence-based guide to periodontal root coverage that provides up-to-date information on the etiology of gingival recession defects, prognostic factors relating to the defect, patient, or operator, and surgical techniques. Attention is drawn to critical elements in the execution of surgical procedures that can impact on outcomes. In order to ensure that the guidance reflects the highest level of evidence, the authors have undertaken an exhaustive literature search of the four main electronic databases (MEDLINE/PubMed, Cochrane Library, ScienceDirect, and EBSCOhost) for studies on root coverage, including randomized clinical trials, systematic reviews, meta-analyses, and network meta-analyses. The aim is to supply readers with a truly reliable source of knowledge that will help them to navigate this complex field, in which numerous surgical procedures have been described, with great variability in clinical and statistical outcomes. The book will be of value to all who wish to improve their understanding of gingival recession defects and the techniques to achieve root coverage that offer the best long-term results.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents; About the Authors; Part I;
    1: Gingival Recessions: Definition and Classification; 1.1 Definition; 1.2 Classifications; 1.2.1 Classification of Sullivan and Atkins [9]; 1.2.2 Classification of Miller [10]; 1.2.3 Classification of Cairo [11]; References;
    2: Etiology of Gingival Recessions; 2.1 Anatomical Factors; 2.1.1 Thin Gingival Biotype; 2.1.2 Abnormal Tooth Position; 2.1.3 High Frenum Attachment; 2.2 Pathological Factors; 2.2.1 Periodontal Disease; 2.2.2 Bacterial Plaque; 2.2.3 Dental Calculus; 2.3 Traumatic Factors; 2.3.1 Toothbrushing; 2.3.2 Flossing Trauma; 2.4 Iatrogenic Factors; 2.4.1 Orthodontic Movement; 2.4.2 Prosthetic and Restorative Treatment; References;
    3: Summary; Part II;
    4: Prognostic Factors: Defect Related Factors; 4.1 Recession Classification; 4.2 Recession Size; 4.3 Adjacent Papilla Dimension; 4.4 Keratinized Tissue; 4.5 Noncarious Cervical Lesions (NCCLs); 4.6 Tooth Malposition and Tooth Location; References;
    5: Prognostic Factors: Patient Related Factors; 5.1 Plaque Control; 5.2 Toothbrushing; 5.3 Tobacco Smoking; References;
    6: Prognostic Factors: Operator-Related Factors; References;
    7: SummaryPart III;
    8: Surgical Procedures; 8.1 Free Gingival Graft (FGG); 8.2 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF); 8.2.1 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF) for the Management of Isolated Gingival Recession Defects; 8.2.2 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF) for the Management of Multiple Gingival Recession Defects; 8.3 Laterally Positioned Flap (LPF); 8.4 Double Papilla Flap (DPF); 8.5 Tunnel Technique; 8.6 Summary; References;
    9: Critical Factors in Execution; 9.1 Root Conditioning; 9.2 Flap Tension/Stability; 9.3 Microsurgical Approach; 9.4 Summary; References.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Julien Santi-Rocca, editor.
    Summary: Periodontitis is a disease that affects more than half the adult population in the world. Treatment is often based on ancient recommendations consisting in mechanically removing material from damaged zones. However, novel therapeutic management strategies exist, from prevention to efficient treatment, and regeneration. The need of integrative approaches to circumvent this worldwide pledge can be achieved through: A better understanding of this complex disease by promoting scientific research and a comprehensive multidisciplinary approach, including epidemiology, microbiology, immunology, physiology, therapeutics, psychology, etc. A better outreach by promoting vulgarization and recommendations for health professionals. A better information of the empowered patients, leading them to consider prevention and to take part in their therapeutic course. The book "Periodontitis: Advances in Experimental Research" includes a timely collection of chapters covering all the fields of research about periodontitis, consisting in concise reviews by the best specialists themselves and with clinical perspectives for periodontitis. Recent technological advances have allowed to explore shadowed areas of periodontology. The book "Periodontitis: Advances in Experimental Research" is a unique occasion to set a milestone for a more integrated field of periodontitis, with a broad scientific, medical, and public audience thanks to dedicated sections in each chapter: Abstract and main body (scientific audience and expert clinicians) Highlights (scientific audience and clinicians) Impact for Practice (clinicians and economical/political decision makers) Summary for Patients (patients and economical/political decision makers).

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter1. Advances in experimental research about periodontitis: lessons from the past, ideas for the future (Julien Santi-Rocca)
    Part I: Periodontal microbiota
    Chapter 2. Microbiota in Periodontitis: advances in the omic era (Shao Bing Fong, Emile Boyer, Martine Bonnaure-Mallet, Vincent Meuric)
    Chapter 3. Aggregatibacter actinomycetemcomitans: from basic to advanced research (Abdelhadi Hbibi, Amal Bouziane, Badiaa Lyoussi, Mimoun Zouhdi, Driss Benazza)
    Chapter 4. Meta-analyses on the Periodontal Archaeome (Jéssica Alves de Cena, Yuri Silvestre-Barbosa, Aline Belmok, Cristine Miron Stefani, Cynthia Maria Kyaw, Nailê Damé-Teixeira)
    Chapter 5. Parasites in periodontal health and disease: a systematic review and meta-analysis (David Felipe Martin-Garcia, Malik Sallam, Gabriela Garcia, Julien Santi-Rocca)
    Chapter 6. Fungi - a component of the oral microbiome involved in periodontal diseases (Justyna Karkowska-Kuleta, Dorota Satala, Magdalena Smolarz, Marcin Zawrotniak, Maria Rapala-Kozik)
    Chapter 7. Herpesviruses in periodontitis: An umbrella review (Aleksandar Jakovljevic, Miroslav Andric, Jelena Jacimovic, Jelena Milasin, Javier Enrique Botero)
    Part II: Periodontitis pathophysiology
    Chapter 8. Recent updates on microbial biofilms in periodontitis: an analysis of in vitro biofilm models (Maick Meneguzzo Prado, Nathalia Figueiredo, Andréa Pimenta, Tamires Szeremeske Miranda, Magda Feres, Luciene Cristina Figueiredo, Josiane de Almeida, Bruno Bueno-Silva)
    Chapter 9. Update on B cell response in periodontitis (Julien Demoersman, Jacques Olivier Pers)
    Chapter 10. Polarization profiles of T lymphocytes and macrophages responses in periodontitis (Franco Cavalla, Marcela Hernández)
    Chapter 11. Complementary experimental methods in genetics open up new avenues of research to elucidate the pathogenesis of periodontitis (Arne S. Schaefer)
    Part III: Periodontitis-associated conditions
    Chapter 12. Update on the bidirectional link between diabetes and periodontitis (Leila Salhi, Michèle Reners)
    Chapter 13. Periodontitis as a risk factor for Alzheimer's disease: the experimental journey so far, with hope of therapy (Alice Harding, Shalini Kanagasingam, Richard Welbury, Sim K. Singhrao)
    Chapter 14. Cardiovascular diseases and periodontitis (Peter Riis Hansen, Palle Holmstrup)
    Part IV: Therapeutic management of periodontitis
    Chapter 15. Update on the role of cytokines as oral biomarkers in the diagnosis of periodontitis (Triana Blanco-Pintos, Alba Regueira-Iglesias, Carlos Balsa-Castro, Inmaculada Tomás)
    Chapter 16. Non-surgical periodontal treatment: SRP and innovative therapeutic approaches (Alexia Vinel, Antoine Al Halabi, Sébastien Roumi, Hélène Le Neindre, Pierre Millavet, Marion Simon, Constance Cuny, Jean-Sébastien Barthet, Pierre Barthet, Sara Laurencin-Dalicieux)
    Chapter 17. Update on the roles of oral hygiene and plaque control on periodontal disease (Leila Salhi, Bruno De Carvalho, Michèle Reners)
    Chapter 18. Multi-photonic adjunctive therapy for the management of periodontitis: recent advances and new treatment approach (Marco Giannelli, Daniele Bani)
    Chapter 19. Probiotics during the therapeutic management of periodontitis (Flavia Furlaneto, Karin Hitomi Ishikawa, Michel Reis Messora, Marcia P A Mayer)
    Chapter 20. Periodontal cell therapy: a systematic review and meta-analysis (Antoine Dubuc, Valérie Planat-Bénard, Mathieu Marty, Paul Monsarrat, Philippe Kémoun)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Richard Palmer, Peter Floyd, editors.
    Summary: This book guides through all essentials in the field of periodontology including the pathology, diagnosis, and treatment of the most common periodontal conditions. Now in its 4th edition, this fully updated version marks the 25th anniversary of the first edition. It discusses the developments in classification while maintaining a no-nonsense logical approach to what many people find a complex subject. The book will help clinicians acquire and maintain the knowledge and skill to treat the many patients encountered in day-to-day practice. It covers the scientific background of periodontal-systemic disease interactions, the clinical application of periodontal surgery and the management of multi-rooted teeth. With newly incorporated supplementary information, the book will be a helpful source for general dentist, dental students, dental hygienists and even for postgraduate students.

    Contents:
    1. Periodontal examination and screening
    2. Pathology of periodontal disease
    3. Periodontal disease and systemic health
    4. Diagnosis, prognosis and treatment planning
    5. Effective communication with patients to improve motivation
    6. Non-surgical treatment and supportive periodontal care
    7. Periodontal surgery
    8. Treatment of multi-rooted teeth
    9. Reconstructive periodontal treatment
    10. Multidisciplinary integrated treatment
    11. Diagnosis and management of acute conditions
    12. Patient presentations.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carin A. Hagberg, Vijaya N. R. Gottumukkala, Bernhard J. Riedel, Joseph L. Nates, Donal J. Buggy.
    Summary: More than 80% of patients with cancer will need the services of anesthesiology and perioperative medicine, intensive care medicine, and pain management specialists during their cancer journey for diagnostic, therapeutic, and symptom management needs, as well as for the management of recurrent disease, secondary cancers, and ongoing non-oncologic surgical needs during survivorship. Perioperative Care of the Cancer Patient is today's most up-to-date, authoritative, comprehensive reference on the acute care of surgical patients with cancer, from a team of international experts in this emerging and dynamic specialty-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Sheila Ryan Barnett, Sara E. Neves.
    Summary: "Older patients carry some of the highest risks of suffering an adverse event or death following anesthesia and surgery. They are inherently vulnerable, presenting with numerous comorbidities and reduced physiological reserve, requiring 'gero-centric' perioperative care for everything from routine eye surgery to major cardiac surgeries. Dementia, frailty, and the need for palliative care and pain management for the orthopedic patient are important areas requiring special consideration in this group. This book provides a general overview of these topics for those healthcare providers who may not have extensive knowledge of this patient population, while at the same time offering practical tips for the more experienced clinician. Chapters cover the spectrum of perioperative care including preoperative management of comorbid conditions, intraoperative anesthetic management, postoperative pain control, and a primer on advanced directive discussions. This book is appropriate not only for anesthesiologists but for any perioperative physician caring for the older patient"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    C. Ronald MacKenzie, Charles N. Cornell, Stavros G. Memtsoudis, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Preoperative Conditions
    General Principles and Practices of Perioperative Medicine
    The Prevalence of Disabling Musculoskeletal Conditions and the Demand for Orthopedic Surgery in the 21st Century
    The Connective Diseases: The Rheumatologist's Perspective
    The Pathophysiologic Events of Total Joint Replacement Surgery
    Part II: Anesthesiological Management
    Anesthesiology in the Orthopedic Patient
    Pediatric Anesthesia for Orthopedic Surgery
    Anesthetic Techniques and Their Clinical Application for Specific Orthopedic Procedures
    The Role of the Post-Anesthesia Care Unit in the Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient
    Postoperative Pain Management in the Orthopedic Setting
    Part III: Medical Management in Specific Clinical Settings
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Connective Tissue Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Cardiac Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Chronic Pulmonary Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Renal Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Diabetes Mellitus
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Gastrointestinal and Liver Issues
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Neurological Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Psychiatric Disease
    Part IV: Specific Perioperative Problems in Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Care of the Elderly Orthopedic Patient
    Venous Thromboembolism and Orthopedic Surgery
    Coagulation Disorders and Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Nutrition in the Orthopedic Surgical Patient
    Infection and Perioperative Orthopedic Care
    Risk and Benefits of Bilateral Total Knee Replacement Surgery
    Compartment Syndrome and Orthopedic Surgery: Diagnosis and Management
    Bone Health and Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Care of theComplex Spine and Scoliosis SurgeryPatient
    Management of Blood Products in Orthopedic Surgery
    Part V: Role of Allied Services
    Professional Nursing Practice in the Orthopedic Care Setting
    The Approach to Physical Therapy Following Orthopedic Reconstructive Surgery
    Quality Improvement in the Perioperative Orthopedic Setting
    Introduction of Clinical Pathways in Orthopedic Surgical Care: The Experience of the Hospital for Special Surgery
    Ethical Considerations in Perioperative Orthopedic Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    C. Ronald MacKenzie, Charles N. Cornell, Stavros G. Memtsoudis, editors.
    Summary: References -- 2: Perioperative Risk Models -- Introduction -- General Risk Assessment Models -- Cardiac Risk Assessment Tools -- Pulmonary Risk Assessment Tools -- Hepatic Risk Assessment Tools -- Venous Thromboembolism Risk Assessment Tools -- Renal/Genitourinary Risk Assessment Tools -- Additional Models -- Discussion and Summary -- Case Study -- How Does One Approach the Perioperative Risk Assessment of Such a Patient? -- References -- 3: The Prevalence of Disabling Musculoskeletal Conditions and the Demand for Orthopedic Surgery in the Twenty-First Century -- Introduction This is a comprehensive, multidisciplinary manual providing preoperative considerations, postoperative complications, and guidelines for the anesthetic and medical management of patients undergoing orthopedic surgery. The editors are leaders in their field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword to the Second Edition
    Preface to the Second Edition
    Preface to the First Edition
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Preoperative Considerations
    1: General Principles and Practices of Perioperative Medicine
    Introduction
    Preoperative Consultation
    Goals of the Preoperative Medical Consultation
    Identification of Conditions that Affect Postoperative Outcome
    Optimization of Conditions that May Affect Postoperative Outcome
    The Assessment of Perioperative Risk
    Patient Education and Preventive Practices
    Efficacy of Preoperative Consultation Incidence of Degenerative Disorders of the Spine
    Incidence of Spine Procedures
    Incidence of Complications After Spine Surgery
    Definition and Classification of Complications
    Study Methodology
    Surgeon-Related Factors
    Procedure-Related Factors
    Patient-Related Factors
    Prevalence of Osteoarthritis and Related Reconstructive Surgeries of the Hip and Knee
    The Incidence of Complications After Total Knee and Total Hip Arthroplasty
    General Trends
    Specific Complications: Medical
    Infection
    Dislocation
    Venous Thromboembolism
    Periprosthetic Fractures
    Summary Effects in Other Organ Systems
    The Role of Embolic Load
    The Role of Cement
    The Role of Fat Embolization: The Fat Embolism Syndrome
    The Pathophysiology of Spine Fusion Surgery
    Timing of Complications
    Interventions
    Summary
    Case Study
    References
    Part II: Anesthesiologic Management
    6: Anesthesia in the Orthopedic Patient
    Introduction
    The Orthopedic Population
    Advanced Age
    Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Osteoarthritis
    Positioning
    Regional Anesthesia
    Mortality
    Postoperative Analgesia and Rehabilitation
    Respiratory Complications
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ehab Farag, Andrea Kurz, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the most recent evidence-based facts on perioperative fluid management and discusses fluid management from basic sciences to clinical applications and the patientsℓ́ℓ outcomes. Recent advances in understanding the Revised Starling principle with new concepts in tissue perfusion and the most recent techniques of perioperative goal directed fluid management are described. The endothelial glycocalyx functions and the influence of fluid management on its integrity are covered in detail; moreover, the techniques for its protection are also discussed. The dilemma of perioperative use of hydroxyethyl starch solutions and the resurgence of interest in using human albumin as an alternative colloid is explored. The problems of using unbuffered solutions during the perioperative period and comparison between restrictive versus liberal fluid management are discussed in full. Perioperative Fluid Management will be of interest to anesthesiologists and also intensivists.

    Contents:
    PART I. FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUID MANAGEMENT
    1. A History of Fluid Management / Elizabeth A. M. Frost
    2. The Revised Starling Principle and Its Relevance to Perioperative Fluid Management / C. Charles Michel , Kenton P. Arkill , and FitzRoy E. Curry
    3. The Functions of Endothelial Glycocalyx and Their Effects on Patient Outcomes During the Perioperative Period. A Review of Current Methods to Evaluate Structure-Function Relations in the Glycocalyx in Both Basic Research and Clinical Settings / FitzRoy E. Curry , Kenton P. Arkill , and C. Charles Michel
    4. Techniques for Goal-Directed Fluid Management / Paul E. Marik
    5. The Perioperative Use of Echocardiography for Fluid Management / Maged Argalious
    6. Microcirculatory Blood Flow as a New Tool for Perioperative Fluid Management / Daniel De Backer
    7. Mean Systemic Filling Pressure Is an Old Concept but a New Tool for Fluid Management / Hollmann D. Aya and Maurizio Cecconi
    8. Restricted or Liberal Fluid Therapy / Thomas E. Woodcock
    9. The Perioperative Use of Albumin / Ehab Farag and Zeyd Y. Ebrahim
    10. The Dilemma for Using Hydroxyethyl Starch Solutions for Perioperative Fluid Management / Christiane S. Hartog and Konrad Reinhart
    11. Balanced Versus Unbalanced Salt Solutions in the Perioperative Period / Sheldon Magder
    12.Positive Fluid Balance and Patients' Outcomes / John Danziger
    13. Fluid Management and Its Role in Enhanced Recovery / Andrew F. Cumpstey , Michael P. W. Grocott , and Michael (Monty) G. Mythen
    PART II. CASE SCENARIOS MANAGEMENT DURING COLORECTAL, ORTHOPEDIC, AND SPINE CASES
    14. Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management in Major Orthopedic Surgery / Wael Ali Sakr Esa
    15. Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management for Major Colorectal Surgery / Kamal Maheshwari
    16. Case Scenario for Fluid Therapy in Septic Shock / William Phillips
    17. Case Scenario for Fluid Management in Liver Resection / Maged Argalious and Harendra Arora
    18. Case Scenario for Fluid Management During Major Spine Surgery / Verna L. Baughman
    19. Case Scenario for Fluid Management After Subarachnoid Hemorrhage in the Neuro- intensive Care Unit / Jamil R. Dibu and Edward M. Manno.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Ehab Farag, Andrea Kurz, Christopher Troianos, editors.
    Summary: This revised and expanded second edition presents the most recent evidence-based facts on perioperative fluid management and discusses fluid management from basic sciences to clinical applications and the patients' outcomes. Recent advances in understanding the Revised Starling principle with new concepts in tissue perfusion and the most recent techniques of perioperative goal directed fluid management are described. The endothelial glycocalyx functions and the influence of fluid management on its integrity are covered in detail; moreover, the techniques for its protection are also discussed. The dilemma of perioperative use of hydroxyethyl starch solutions and the resurgence of interest in using human albumin as an alternative colloid is explored. The problems of using unbuffered solutions during the perioperative period and comparison between restrictive versus liberal fluid management are discussed in full. Lastly, case scenarios for every possible clinical situation describe in full the most up-to-date fluid management for the corresponding clinical problem. Perioperative Fluid Management, Second Edition is of interest to anesthesiologists and also intensivists.

    Contents:
    Part I Fundamentals of Fluid Management
    A History of Fluid Management
    The Revised Starling Principle and Its Relevance to Perioperative Fluid Management
    The Functions of Endothelial Glycocalyx and Their Effects on Patient Outcomes During the Perioperative Period. A Review of Current Methods to Evaluate Structure-Function Relations in the Glycocalyx in Both Basic Research and Clinical Settings
    Techniques for Goal-Directed Fluid Management
    The Perioperative Use of Echocardiography for Fluid Management
    Microcirculatory Blood Flow as a New Tool for Perioperative Fluid Management
    Mean Systemic Filling Pressure Is an Old Concept but a New Tool for Fluid Management
    Restricted or Liberal Fluid Therapy
    The Perioperative Use of Albumin
    The Use of Albumin in Intensive Care Unit
    The Dilemma for Using Hydroxyethyl Starch Solutions for Perioperative Fluid Management
    Balanced Versus Unbalanced Salt Solutions in the Perioperative Period
    Positive Fluid Balance and Patients' Outcomes
    Fluid Management and Its Role in Enhanced Recovery
    Venous Circulation: a New Concept in Fluid Management
    Pathophysiology of Fluid Management in Neonate and Pediatric Patient
    Zero Fluid Balance versus Liberal Fluid Management. pro and Con
    Pathophysiology of perioperative Fluid Management from Surgeon Point of View
    Part II FluidManagement Case Scenarios
    Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management in Major Orthopedic Surgery
    Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management for Major Colorectal Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Therapy in Septic Shock
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management in Liver Resection
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management During Major Spine Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management After Subarachnoid Hemorrhage in the Neuro- intensive Care Unit
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Open Heart Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Thoracic Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Major Vascular Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management for Patients in Cardiothoracic Intensive Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Carlo Enrique Marcucci, Patrick Schoettker, editors.
    Summary: All anesthesiologists are confronted with patients who show bleeding disorders, whether congenital, acquired, or pharmacologically induced. Although many studies, meta-analyses, guidelines, and textbooks have been published on the subject, they mostly cover specific aspects or require a thorough knowledge of hemostasis. The goal of this book is to provide the anesthetist with an overview of hemostasis and the mechanisms underlying bleeding and coagulation in general and to assist in the understanding of specific coagulation disorders as they may occur in the various anesthetic subspecialties. It is hoped that, through the provision of practical information and tools, the book will help residents and trained anesthetists to manage one of the most frustrating challenges that they face: the bleeding patient. A full understanding of coagulation requires a lifelong career, and this book is not intended to replace the consulting hematologist, whose expert opinion should always be sought. The available procoagulant blood products and drugs all have potentially dangerous side-effects; furthermore, in bleeding disorders pitfalls are frequent and a misdiagnosis can have potentially catastrophic consequences. The aim of the editors is thus instead to enhance the collaboration between the disciplines of Anesthesiology and Hematology.

    Contents:
    Part I: Pre-operative haemostasis: Cell based coagulation model
    Laboratory testing of hemostasis
    Viscoelastic tests of hemostasis
    Point of care platelet function tests
    Hemostasis assessment and evaluation
    Hereditary coagulopathies
    Acquired coagulopathies
    Drug induced
    Antiplatelet drugs
    Intravenous fluids and coagulation
    Split blood products
    Isolated coagulation products
    Pro-coagulant drugs
    Patient blood management. Part II: Per-operative haemostasis: In cardiac surgery
    In Hepatic Surgery
    In Pediatric Surgery
    In Obstetrics Surgery
    In Trauma
    In Neurosurgery
    In Orthopedic Surgery
    In Neuraxial and Peripheral Nerve blocks. Part III: Post-Operative: Intensive Care
    Anti-Coagulation. Part IV: Economic aspects and organization.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Charuhas V. Thakar, Chirag R. Parikh, editors.
    Summary: The kidneys participate in all vital processes of the body to maintain overall homeostasis and health. When kidneys are injured during surgical interventions, metabolic and hemodynamic control is disrupted, leading to dysfunction associated with greater mortality, length of hospital stay, and cost. Peri-operative Kidney Injury presents the epidemiology, risk factors, diagnosis, treatment, and outcomes associated with kidney injury during the peri-operative period. Concepts and principles of care to prevent kidney complications during surgical procedures are provided to equip health care professionals along with strategies to manage acute kidney injury and associated challenges when they occur. Chapters detail diverse surgical settings, ranging from the more common, such as abdominal, cardiac, and vascular surgeries, to the intricately complex, including the use of the left ventricular assist device and organ transplants. This practical and comprehensive text blends the evidence-based standards of care with cutting edge advances in the field, while also providing the reader with a peek into innovations on the horizon.

    Contents:
    Part I Peri-operative AKI: Overview and Approach
    1 Incidence, Trends and Diagnosis of Peri-operative AKI
    2 Serious peri-operative complications: Hospital Medicine Perspectives
    3 Role of Novel Kidney Injury Biomarkers in Perioperative AKI
    4 Clinical Pearls: Renal Replacement Therapy for AKI in the Post-operative Period.- 5 Clinical Pearls: Non-dialytic Management of Kidney Complications in the Post-operative Period
    6 Intra-Operative Considerations to Prevent Post-Operative AKI
    Part II Cardiac and Vascular Surgery
    7 AKI after Cardiac Surgery in Adults.- 8 AKI after Cardiovascular Surgery in Children
    9 AKI in the Era of Ventricular Assist Devices.- 10 Kidney Injury after Vascular Surgery.- Part III Abdominal and Urologic Surgery.- 11 AKI after Major Abdominal Surgery.- 12 Kidney Injury in Abdominal Compartment Syndrome.- 13 Kidney Function and Injury after Nephrectomy for Kidney Cancer
    Part IV Transplant Surgery
    14 The Kidney in Non-Renal Solid Organ Transplantation
    15 Acute Allograft Injury After Kidney Transplantation
    Part V Special Topics in Peri-operative AKI.- 16 Trauma and Acute Kidney Injury
    17 Fluid-Electrolyte Imbalances and Extra-Corporeal Therapy in the Neurosurgical Setting
    18 Nutrition in Peri-operative Patients with Kidney Failure.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Karen Stuart-Smith, editor.
    Contents:
    Perioperative medicine: defining the anaesthesiologist's role in shaping perioperative outcomes
    Prehabilitation
    Impact of co-morbidities, physiological status and age on survival
    Transthoracic echocardiography in the preoperative clinic
    Defining postoperative quality of recovery
    Enhanced recovery for colorectal surgery
    Perioperative beta-blockade: the pros and cons. The story of beta-blockade and cardiac protection
    Perioperative management of the diabetic patient
    Perioperative management of non-diabetic patients with hyperglycaemia (stress-induced hyperglycaemia)
    Postoperative Pulmonary Complications
    Haemostatic resuscitation for perioperative bleeding
    Fluid therapy in trauma
    Role of multimodal monitoring in the perioperative period: improving outcomes in high-risk surgical patients
    Can perioperative interventions during cancer surgery affect recurrence or metastasis?
    Transverse abdominis plane block: evolution and current understanding
    Future ultrasound technologies for the perioperative physician
    Lung ultrasound in anaesthesia and critical care medicine
    The acute pain team
    The transition of acute post-operative pain to acute persistent pain to chronic pain: assessing and managing the risks.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mark F. Newman, Lee A. Fleisher, Clifford Ko, Michael (Monty) Mythen.
    Summary: Based on the most current evidence and best practices, Perioperative Medicine: Managing for Outcome, 2nd Edition, is an easy-to-follow, authoritative guide to achieving optimal outcomes in perioperative care. Written and edited by recognized authorities in anesthesiology and surgical critical care, this fully updated edition helps you think critically about complex, long-term issues surrounding the care of the surgical patient, providing decision trees that define strategies to enhance the medical outcome of care. Focuses on what anesthesiologists, surgeons, and intensivists need to know in order to improve outcomes through evidence- and outcome-based approaches. Provides practical guidance on potential risks to all major organ systems, the etiology of particular organ dysfunctions, preoperative and intraoperative risk factors, and perioperative protection strategies to minimize potential complications. Features a consistent chapter format - with even more color-coded algorithms, summary tables, and boxes - that enables you to quickly explore and determine the best management approaches. Includes six all-new chapters: Perioperative Fluid Management; Delirium and POCD; Role of Palliative Care/ICU; Value-Based Care: The UK Model; CFO Perspective on Value; Hospital to Home (Perioperative Transitions of Care) Discusses timely topics such as quality improvement, pay-for-performance, preexisting disease and comorbid conditions in anesthesiology, and the team-based model of care. Features two new editors, surgeon Clifford Ko, MD, and Perioperative Summit leader, Michael (Monty) Mythen, MD. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Print
    [editors] Molly Blackley Jackson, Somnath Mookherjee, Nason P. Hamlin.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Molly Blackley Jackson, Ronald Huang, Elizabeth Kaplan, Somnath Mookherjee, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive third edition provides robust support to clinicians providing perioperative care for patients. Patients with a range of medical conditions undergo surgeries of varying levels of risk, and the evolving field of consult medicine aims to address their needs, whether pre- or post-surgery. This book offers evidence and experience-based information, advice, and guidelines on all aspects of perioperative medicine. Care around surgeries in many major clinical areas are included, including cardiology, pulmonology, gastroenterology, rheumatology, endocrinology and so on. This new edition has been updated throughout with the latest literature, more visual content (tables and algorithms), and eleven new chapters on topics such as: chronic pain, congestive heart failure, hormone therapy and transgender patients, and postoperative hypoxemia. This new edition focuses on high value care in order to improve outcomes, including minimizing complications and readmissions. It also provides streamlined key points for caring for patients with medical diagnoses that may be especially complicated around surgery. This resource is invaluable for practicing physicians (including medical consultants, surgeons, and anesthesiologists) and other professionals who aim to optimize care of surgical patients.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The Preoperative Evaluation
    Perioperative Medication Management
    Anesthesia Fundamentals
    Cardiovascular Risk Stratification
    Ischemic Heart Disease
    Congestive Heart Failure
    Atrial Fibrillation
    Hypertension
    Valvular Heart Disease
    Implantable Cardiac Devices
    Diabetes
    Stress Dose Steroids
    Thyroid Disease
    Hormone Therapy and Transgender Patients
    Liver Disease
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Chronic Anticoagulation
    Disorders of Hemostasis
    Thrombophilias
    Thrombocytopenia
    Anemia
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Venous Thromboembolic Disease
    Cerebrovascular Disease
    Epilepsy and Seizure Disorders
    Parkinsons Disease
    Spinal Cord Injury
    Chronic Pain
    Pulmonary Risk Assessment and Management
    Asthma and COPD
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea / Obesity Hypoventilation Syndrome
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    Special Topics in Lung Disease: Restrictive, Myesthenia Gravis
    Chronic Kidney Disease
    Acute Kidney Injury
    Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
    Gout and Pseudogout
    Decision-Making Capacity
    Elderly Patients and Frailty
    Nutrition
    Patients with Solid Organ Transplant
    Substance Use and Dependence
    Postoperative Evaluation and Care
    Postoperative Fever
    Postoperative Delirium
    Postoperative Ileus
    Postoperative Hypoxemia
    Postoperative Tachycardia
    Postoperative Emergencies
    Postoperative Electrolyte Abnormalities
    Acute Pain Management Pearls
    Surgical Procedures Overview.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Marinella Astuto, Pablo M. Ingelmo, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Perioperative medicine and anesthesia
    PART I Perioperative care before surgery
    Preoperative evaluation
    Preoperative preparation
    Prehospital care and transport
    PART II Perioperative care during surgery
    Perioperative care in day hospital surgery
    Perioperative care in remote locations
    Perioperative care in orthopedic surgery
    Perioperative care of the neurosurgical patient
    Perioperative care in thoracic surgery
    Perioperative care in abdominal and urological surgery
    PART III Perioperative care in special situations and conditions
    Perioperative care of children with difficult airway
    Perioperative care of children with neuromuscular disease
    Perioperative care of children with metabolic disease
    Perioperative care in children with congenital heart disease
    Perioperative care of children with OSA
    Perioperative care of children with trauma
    Perioperative care of children with cancer
    Perioperative care of children with cerebral palsy and behavioural problems
    PART IV Important techniques for perioperative care
    Vascular and nonvascular access in the perioperative period
    US-guided nerve targets
    Noninvasive hemodynamic and respiratory monitoring during the perioperative period
    PART V. Early and long term consequences of anesthesia and surgery
    Negative behavior after surgery
    Acute pain prevention and control
    How to protect the infant brain during surgery
    Can anesthesia induce apoptosis in children?- Long-term consequences of anesthesia and surgery on the infant brain
    Prevention of chronic postsurgical pain.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Roderic G. Eckenhoff, Niccolò Terrando.
    Summary: "The occurrence of personality, sensory and cognitive disturbances after anesthesia and surgery has been recognized for many decades, although the magnitude, duration and causes have remained a matter of debate. Certainly the transient occurrence of delirium after surgery is well known, and the various forms are reviewed here by Drs. Proekt, Gabbard, Sieber and Oh. The more durable forms of cognitive impairment after surgery have been more enigmatic. In the past two decades, the application of strict neurocognitive testing by research groups have definitively documented impairments lasting from weeks to months, and thus a term was coined; post-operative cognitive dysfunction" or POCD, a "syndrome" reviewed in depth here by Drs. Nelli, Culley and Crosby. Complicating the analysis of POCD has been the fact that a large number of patients may actually have cognitive improvement as a result of enhanced mobility after orthopedic surgery or reduced pain perhaps following cancer resection. Thus, post-operative cognitive improvement (POCI) is reviewed here by Drs. Arias, Sibille and Price Completing the first section of this book is the more contentious, but critically important topic of whether anesthesia and surgery result in a persistent cognitive disorder, such as mild cognitive impairment or dementia, an area discussed in detail by Drs. Schenning and Hogan"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Peter F. Svider, Anna A. Pashkova, Andrew P. Johnson, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text is an easy-to-access reference that provides a foundation for understanding contemporary evidence-based practices relating to pain management in the perioperative setting. Chapters review the exponential increase in prescription drug abuse associated with the "opioid epidemic"; surgeons' important role in managing perioperative and chronic pain in a variety of practice settings; the role of quality improvement in patient safety initiatives; inadequate opioid prescribing education (OPE) in surgical training programs; and literature demonstrating the existence of evidence-based alternatives to opioids. Written and edited by experts in the field of anesthesiology and pain medicine, Perioperative Pain Control: Tools for Surgeons is a practical resource for surgical trainees and surgeons of all specialties including general surgery, thoracic surgery, otolaryngology, plastic surgery, urology, gynecology, vascular surgery, neurosurgery, and orthopedic surgery.

    Contents:
    Perioperative Pain Control: Practical Tools for Surgeons
    The Surgeon's Role in the Opioid Epidemic
    Pain Prescription Legislation: What You Need to Know as the Surgeon
    Opioid Prescribing Education in Surgical Training (Follow COP)
    Pre-operative Optimization
    Non-Opioid Adjuncts and Alternatives
    Post-Operative Analgesia for the Chronic Pain Patient
    Non-Enteral Pain Management
    Perioperative Annalgesia in General Abdominal, Vascular, and Thoracic Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia for Thyroid and Parathyroid Surgery
    Evidence-Based Perioperative Analgesia for Otolaryngology-Head and Neck Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia in Cranial and Skull Base Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia for Orthopedic and Spine Surgery
    Evidence-Based Perioperative Analgesia for Urologic Surgery
    Obstetrics and Gynecology
    Perioperative Analgesia and Pain Management in Pediatric Patients
    Approaches to Perioperative Pain Management in the Plastic Surgical Patient. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carol J. Peden, Lee A. Fleisher, Michael Englesbe.
    Summary: "Quality improvement (QI) principles are increasingly important in every area of today's healthcare, encompassing efforts to make healthcare delivery safer, more effective, patient-centered, timely, equitable, and efficient. Perioperative Quality Improvement provides up-to-date, easy-to-read guidance for perioperative clinicians on this critical topic. Each chapter covers a pertinent area of QI in the perioperative setting, focusing on both concepts and implementation. Written and edited by key international opinion leaders in the field, this text is a relevant, concise resource for anesthesiologists, surgeons, nurse anesthetists, and hospitalists--anyone involved in perioperative medicine regardless of specialty area"-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] David L. Reich, Gregory W. Fischer.
    Contents:
    Principles and the normal heart
    Getting started with echocardiography: the twenty standard views
    Principles and physics: principles of ultrasound
    Principles and physics: principles of Doppler ultrasound
    Principles and physics: equations to remember (the Bernoulli equation, velocity-time integrals, and the continuity equation)
    Principles and physics: transducer characteristics
    Principles and physics: imaging artifacts and pitfalls
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: components of the complete examination
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: epiaortic imaging
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: three-dimensional views: replicating the surgeon's view
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: extracardiac anatomy
    Quantitative and semiquantitative echocardiography: dimensions and flows
    Quantitative and semiquantitative echocardiography: ventricular and valvular physiology
    Understanding how transesophageal echocardiography demonstrates cardiovascular pathology
    Myocardial ischemia and aortic atherosclerosis
    Aortic valve anatomy and embryology
    Mitral valvular disease
    Tricuspid valvular disease
    Pulmonic valvular disease
    Cardiomyopathies
    Aneurysms and dissections
    Endocarditis
    Imaging of cardiac tumors and solid and gaseous materials
    Intracardiac devices, catheters, and cannulas
    Echocardiographic evaluation of pericardial disease
    Adult congenital heart disease
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Recent advances
    Maintaining quality of perioperative echocardiography
    Indications for transesophageal echocardiography
    Complications of transesophageal echocardiography
    Equipment, infection control, and safety
    Oversight and administration
    Training and certification for transesophageal echocardiography
    Medical insurance claims, compliance, and reimbursement for anesthesiology
    Regulatory, legal, and liability issues pertaining to transesophageal echocardiography.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Ashraf Badawi, editor.
    Summary: This title represents a comprehensive manual of periorbital rejuvenation and includes an in-depth review of the anatomy of the orbit and periorbital region. Physiological changes associated with the aging of the periorbital region and potential rejuvenation options are also covered, while readers are given a series of step-by-step illustrative guides to procedural techniques. The book provides a valuable selection of clinical pearls on how to avoid potential pitfalls using a number of cases in which a range of potential invasive and non-invasive treatment options, including neuromodulators and cosmeceuticals, are used. Periorbital Rejuvenation: A Practical Manual provides a comprehensive and concise overview of periorbital anatomy and the potential effects of aging. Cutting-edge laser treatment options including laser assisted and neuromodulator techniques are ideal for the trainee to develop their knowledge and as a reference guide for the experienced practitioner.

    Contents:
    1. Anatomy of the Orbit and periorbital region
    2. Aging of the orbit and rejuvenation options
    3. Eye Medications and its effect on orbital fat and cosmesis
    4. Soft tissue fillers for the periorbital region
    5. Neuromodulators in Periorbital Rejuvenation
    6. CHEMICAL PEELINGS IN THE PERIORBITAL REGION
    7. Periorbital rejuvenation by lasers and energy-based devices
    8. Oculoplastic surgery for periorbital rejuvenation
    9. Cosmeceuticals for the periorbital region
    10. Editor's Tips.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Akira Kudo, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Brendon J. Coventry, editor.
    Contents:
    Diagnostic Biopsy Procedures
    Cutaneous Surgery
    Hand Surgery
    Foot Surgery
    Hernia Surgery
    Head and Neck Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Nicolas W. Shammas, editor.
    Summary: This book examines new technologies (device and pharmacologic) that have evolved over the past few years in treating peripheral arterial disease. Chapters offer optimal strategies to treat PAD, supported by peer-reviewed data. The pillars of this strategy will focus on (a) changing vessel compliance to allow better lumen expansion, (b) less recoil and dissections, and (c) less bailout stenting. Chapters also review embolic protection devices and apply the adjunctive use of anti-proliferative therapy to maintain good long term outcomes. In addition, the book reviews drug coated balloons and drug eluting stent technologies and other means of drug delivery into the vessel wall. The goal of this book is to discuss all these emerging technologies under the strategy of treating patients with the focus on both acute and long term outcomes. Featuring world renown experts, this book offers a critical and comprehensive overview of the current data and future directions that would pave the way for optimal PAD management. Peripheral Arterial Interventions is an essential resource for physicians, residents, fellows, and medical students in cardiology, radiology, vascular surgery, primary care, and health promotion and disease prevention as well as internal and vascular medicine specialists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Atherosclerosis and inflammation in Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 2. Epidemiology and Public Health Implications of Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 3. Risk factors and Outcomes of Patients with Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 4. Pharmacologic Interventions in Patients with Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 5. The Role of Exercise in Managing the PAD patient
    Chapter 6. Vessel Compliance, Barotrauma and Dissections with Endovascular Therapy of the PAD patient
    Chapter 7. Femoropopliteal Dissections and Their Impact on Procedural and Long Term Outcomes
    Chapter 8. The Role of Atherectomy in Vessel Prepping Prior to Definitive Endovascular Treatment of the PAD patient
    Chapter 9. Lithoplasty of severe calcified disease
    Chapter 10. Specialty balloons and Vessel Prepping
    Chapter 11. The FLEX atherotome role in reducing dissections and stenting
    Chapter 12. Distal embolization in treating PAD
    Chapter 13. Drug coated balloons in infrainguinal arterial interventions
    Chapter 14. Iliac artery Disease Management
    Chapter 15. Drug Eluting Stents in PAD management
    Chapter 16. Infrapopliteal Artery Interventions in Critical Limb Ischemia Patients
    Chapter 17. Reducing the Metal Burden in the infrainguinal arteries: Tack Endovascular System and Spot Stenting
    Chapter 18. Approach to Chronic Total Occlusions
    Chapter 19. Thrombotic Infrainguinal Arterial Disease: Mechanical and Pharmacological Approaches to Therapy
    Chapter 20. Endovascular Management of Aortic Aneurysms
    Chapter 21. Putting it All Together: An algorithm based approach to managing the PAD patient.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Emile R. Mohler, Michael R. Jaff.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of PAD
    Office evaluation of peripheral artery disease : history and physical examination strategies
    Vascular laboratory evaluation of peripheral artery disease
    Magnetic resonance, computed tomographic, and angiographic imaging of peripheral arterial disease
    Non-atherosclerotic peripheral artery disease
    Medical therapy of peripheral artery disease
    Endovascular treatment of peripheral artery disease
    When to refer patients with claudication.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Aynur Özge, Derya Uludüz, Ömer Karadaş, Hayrunnisa Bolay, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses interventional treatment options on intractable (drug resistant) headache patients and extended headache attacks and extensively reviews the reasons behind treatment failure in intractable headaches, offering potential solutions based on clinical black holes of headache outpatient practice. The most appropriate interventions for certain types of headache such as chronic migraine and medication-overuse headaches, are discussed among others. The book provides practical advice on properly administering the interventional treatments either as a bridge treatments or prophylaxis options. The expected complications of the treatments, and strategies to minimize them are also discussed. Approaches in special patient populations such as pediatric or pregnancy cases and other non-standard cases are also extensively discussed.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; List of Videos;
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Interventional Procedures; Timing and Patient Selection; 1.1 About Headache; 1.2 Management; 1.3 Interventional Techniques; References;
    Chapter 2: Headache Anatomy and Mechanisms of Peripheral Nerve Interventions; 2.1 Transmission of Nociception from Peripheral Structures; 2.2 Convergence of Peripheral Inputs on Second-Order Neurons; 2.3 Projections to the Thalamus; 2.4 Projections to the Brainstem and Hypothalamus; 2.5 Sphenopalatine Ganglion; 2.6 The Vagus Nerve and Parasympathetic Efferents 2.7 Antinociceptive ProjectionsReferences;
    Chapter 3: Pharmacology of Interventional Headache Management; 3.1 Local Anesthetics; 3.1.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.1.2 Recommended Doses; 3.1.3 Side Effects; 3.2 Corticosteroids; 3.2.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.2.2 Recommended Doses; 3.2.3 Side Effects; 3.3 Botulinum Toxin; 3.3.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.3.2 BoNT Preparations; 3.3.3 Efficacy; 3.3.4 Immunogenicity; 3.3.5 Side Effects; 3.3.6 Contraindications; 3.3.7 Recommended Doses; References;
    Chapter 4: Greater Occipital Nerve and Lesser Occipital Nerve Blocks 4.1 GON and LON Blocks for the Treatment of Various Headache Types4.1.1 Cluster Headache; 4.1.2 Migraine; 4.1.3 Occipital Neuralgia; 4.1.4 Postdural Puncture Headache; 4.2 Treatment Intervals and the Drugs; 4.3 Outcome; 4.4 Side Effects; 4.5 Contraindications; 4.6 Personal Comments; References;
    Chapter 5: The Role of Other Peripheral Nerve Blocks; 5.1 Nerve Blocks; 5.1.1 Auriculotemporal Nerve Block; 5.1.2 Supratrochlear Nerve Block; 5.1.3 Supraorbital Nerve Block; 5.1.4 Infraorbital Nerve Block; 5.1.5 Mental Nerve Block; 5.1.6 Sphenopalatine Ganglion Block; 5.1.7 Cervical Root Block
    Chapter 7: The Role of Interventional Procedures in Childhood and Adolescent Headaches-Peripheral Neuromodulation7.1 Greater Occipital Nerve Block; 7.1.1 Selection of Patients; 7.1.2 Contraindications for GON Block; 7.1.3 GON Block Procedure; 7.1.4 Response to Treatment; 7.2 Greater Occipital Nerve Stimulation; 7.3 Trigeminal Nerve Stimulation: Supraorbital Branch; 7.4 Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation; References;
    Chapter 8: Interventional Headache Management in The Elderly; 8.1 Botulinum Toxin (BonT) Treatment; 8.2 Peripheral Nerve Blocks; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ningfei Liu, editor.
    Summary: This book provides extensive knowledge of peripheral lymphedema, including the etiology and pathophysiology of the disease, as well as the anatomy and physiology of the lymphatic system and guide for the treatment of lymphedema to clinicians. The ultimate goal of lymphedema therapy is the targeted and individualized treatment. New technology of multimodality lymphatic imaging emerged in the recent years largely improves the diagnosis of lymphatic circulation disorders. The treatment of peripheral lymphedema is expected to have new achievement. This book illustrates the latest achievements in clinical and basic research of lymphedema to the clinical investigators as well as basic researchers. Pathogenesis of lymphatic system, diagnosis of lymphedema, treatment and further complication management are demonstrated in this book. Some special lymphedema related syndromes, issues on prevention and prognosis are also included.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Overview of lymphatic system
    1 Physiology of lymphatic system (physiology of capillary filtrate flow to lymphatics)
    2 Anatomy of lymphatic system
    3 Formation and transport of lymph
    4 Function of the lymphatic system
    Part 2 Lymphedema
    5 Introduction
    6 Etiology of primary lymphedema
    7 Secondary lymphedema of different types
    8 Stage of lymphedema
    Part 3 Pathogenesis of lymphatic system in lymphedema
    9 Changes in lymphatic vessels in primary lymphedema
    10 Changes in lymph node in primary lymphedema
    11 Pathology of collecting lymph vessels in secondary lymphedema
    12 Pathology of the initial lymph vessels in lymphedematous skin
    13 Co-malformations of venous and lymphatic vessels in primary lymphedema
    Part 4 Pathology of lymphedematous tissue
    14 Lymphedema fluid
    15 Inflammation
    16 Tissue overgrowth in lymphedema
    Part 5 Diagnosis of lymphedema - Assistant in diagnosis
    17 Clinical diagnosis and differential diagnosis
    18 MR lymphangiography (MRL)
    19 Nuclear Medicine imaging in the diagnosis of Peripheral lymphedema : Lymphoscintigraphy
    20 Indocyanine green lymphography
    21 Nuclear Medicine imaging in the diagnosis of Peripheral lymphedema : Single-Photon Emission Computed Tomography/Computed Tomography(SPECT/CT)
    22 Comparison of current imaging methods in diagnosis of peripheral lymphedema
    Part 6 Treatment of lymphedema - conservative treatment
    23 Compression Therapy
    24 Complex Physical Decongestive Therapy for Lymphedema (CDT)
    25 Far infrared radiation thermotherapy
    Part 7 Treatment of lymphedema - Surgical treatment
    26 Suction Assisted Lipectomy with simultaneous skin excision for lymphedema
    27 Microsurgery - Vascularized Lymph Vessel Transfer
    28 Microsurgery - Lymphaticovenular anastomosis for the treatment of lymphedema
    29 Microsurgery - Lymph node/flap transplantation
    30 Microsurgery - Lymphatic Tissue Transfer for the Treatment of Axillary Dissection Related Lymphedema
    31 Silicone tube implantation
    32 Liposuction
    Part 8 Curative effect assessment
    33 Circumference measurement
    34 Bioelectrical impedance analysis
    35 Skin fibrometer and Lymph Scanner
    Part 9 Lymphedema in children
    36 Lymphedema in childhood
    Part 10 Prevention of tumor treatment related lymphedema
    37 Prevention of lymphedema after breast cancer surgery
    38 Prevention of pelvic malignancies and related lymphedema.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jeffrey A. Cohen, Justin J. Mowchun, Victoria H. Lawson, Nathaniel M. Robbins.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jean-Michel Vallat, Joachim Weis.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Andrea M Trescot, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I. Peripheral nerve entrapments: general principles
    Part II. Headache
    Part III. Facial and cervical nerve entrapments
    Part IV. Chest wall peripheral nerve entrapment syndromes
    Part V. Upper extremity peripheral nerve entrapments
    Part VI. Abdominal wall pain
    Part VII. Pelvic pain
    Part VIII. Low back pain
    Part IX. Lower extremity
    Index
    Index of symptoms.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Christopher J. Dy " David M. Brogan, Eric R. Wagner, editors.
    Summary: Peripheral nerve issues are potential sequalae of orthopedic surgery, even after cases in which technically excellent surgery was performed. These injuries can impede the expected recovery of function after the primary surgery. Given the manifold challenges associated with recovery of peripheral nerve injuries, this book is designed as a multidisciplinary guide to the diagnosis, prognostication and treatment of peripheral nerve issues after common orthopedic surgeries. Beginning with an overview of nerve compression, injury and regeneration, as well as a presentation of the current diagnostic and imaging modalities for peripheral nerve injuries, this unique text is organized by anatomic region and by type of procedure performed. Topics covered include shoulder and elbow arthroplasty and arthroscopy, fractures of the hand and wrist, hip preservation surgery, total knee replacement, open surgery of the foot and ankle, lumbosacral myeloradiculopathy, and more. Each chapter is authored by both a subspecialty surgeon who routinely performs the surgeries described and a subspecialized hand/peripheral nerve surgeon with experience in evaluating and treating nerve issues after that particular injury. Emphasis is placed on multidisciplinary team approaches, patient counseling, and technical aspects of surgical treatment. Generously illustrated and written by experts in the field, Peripheral Nerve Issues after Orthopedic Surgery is a truly interdisciplinary resource for orthopedic, plastic, hand and trauma surgeons, physiatrists, and all professionals managing postoperative peripheral nerve pain.

    Contents:
    Nerve Compression, Nerve Injury, and Nerve Regeneration: An Overview
    Evaluation of the Patient with Postoperative Peripheral Nerve Issues
    Nerve Injury after Shoulder Arthroscopy, Stabilization, and Rotator Cuff Repair (axillary, musculocutaneous, suprascapular nerves)
    Nerve Injury after Shoulder Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Humerus, Elbow, and Forearm Fractures (radial, posterior interosseous, and ulnar nerves)
    Nerve Injury Associated with Elbow Procedures
    Nerve Injury after Distal Radius, Metacarpal and Finger Fractures
    Median and Ulnar Nerve Injury at the Elbow and Wrist
    Pelvic, Acetabular, Hip, and Proximal Femur Fractures: Intra-pelvic and Extra-pelvic Neuroanatomy
    Pelvic, Acetabular, Hip, and Proximal Femur Fractures: Surgical Exposures and Treatment of Nerve Injury
    Nerve Injury after Total Hip Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Hip Arthroscopy, Hip Preservation Surgery, and Proximal Hamstring Repair
    Nerve Injury after Distal Femur, Tibial Plateau, and Tibial Shaft Fractures
    Nerve Injury after Total Knee Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Knee Arthroscopy, ACL Reconstruction, Multiligament Knee, and Open Knee Surgery
    Nerve Injury after Distal Tibia, Pilon, and Ankle Fractures
    Nerve Injury after Fractures of the Hindfoot, Midfoot, and Forefoot
    Nerve Injury after Open and Arthroscopic Surgery of the Ankle and Foot, Including Morton Neuroma
    Lumbosacral Double Crush Syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Alaa Abd-Elsayed, Andrea M. Trescot.
    Summary: At last—a single, convenient reference on this interventional pain management technique, covering all recent advances in this fast-changing field. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation: A Comprehensive Guide is a one-stop resource offering practical guidance on performing a wide array of pain-relieving procedures using office-based ultrasound-guided techniques, fluoroscopy, and more. Concise and user-friendly, this easy-to-use guide helps physicians deliver safe, accurate, and cost-effective care by demonstrating how to evaluate the causes of pain, identify the most promising stimulation technique, locate the site with precision, and provide effective pain relief.

    Contents:
    History of Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Pain
    Peripheral Nerve Entrapments
    Mechanism of Action of Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Ultrasound Versus Fluoroscopy
    Surgical Tools For Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Surgical Techniques For Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation Education and Psychological Evaluation
    Occipital Nerve Stimulation
    Trigeminal Nerve Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    The Sphenopalatine Ganglion: Associated Illnesses and Therapeutic Modalities
    Axillary and Suprascapular Nerves
    Brachial Plexus
    Ulnar Nerve
    Median Nerve
    Radial Nerve
    Intercostal Nerves
    Ilioinguinal and Iliohypogastric Nerve
    Genitofemoral Nerve
    Superior Cluneal Nerves
    Middle Cluneal Nerves
    Inferior Cluneal Nerve
    Pudendal Peripheral Nerve Stimulation For Chronic Pelvic Pain
    Lateral Femoral Cutaneous Nerve
    Femoral Nerve
    Sciatic Nerve
    Genicular Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peroneal Nerves (Fibular Nerves)
    Saphenous Nerve
    Posterior Tibial Nerve
    Sural Nerve
    Superior Gluteal Nerve
    Craniofacial Stimulation and Headache
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Complex Regional Pain Syndrome
    Postherpetic Neuralgia
    Approach to Low Back Pain and Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Chronic Pelvic Pain
    Postamputation Pain
    Peripheral Neuropathy
    Overactive Bladder
    Gastric Stimulation For Gastroparesis
    Motor Stimulation
    Vagal Nerve Stimulation.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Mark Bromberg.
    Summary: Do you find the evaluation of a patient presenting clinical symptoms of distal extremity numbness and weakness daunting and complex? Are you unsure of the diagnostic processes and best-practices in the treatment of peripheral neuropathy? This invaluable guide presents a practical approach to the diagnosis and successful management of patients with peripheral neuropathies. Starting with a structured series of patient queries for symptoms and examination signs, the diagnostic process emphasizes the role of electrodiagnostic tests in defining the neuropathy. Specific neuropathies are presented with their epidemiology, causative pathology, diagnostic and laboratory factors, alongside advised treatments and overall management strategies. This leading resource will assist non-neuromuscular neurologists, physiatrists, neurology and physiatry residents, and will also be useful to electromyographers, proving an ideal aid for busy clinic schedules.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Venera A. Shaimova, editor ; English text edited by Yana Gorodechnaya.
    Summary: This book provides an illustrated guide to peripheral retinal degenerations and the role of spectral domain coherence tomography (SD-OCT) in diagnosis and treatment. The book discusses 73 clinical cases and gives detailed information on the principles of SD-OCT and its application in the imaging of peripheral retina. Peripheral Retinal Degenerations: Optical Coherence Tomography and Retinal Laser Coagulation, 2nd edition, discusses a broad range of retinal pathologies such as chorioretinal degenerations, posterior vitreous detachment, vitreoretinal adhesions and tractions and includes a plethora of high-quality clinical images throughout. Ophthalmologists and retinal specialists will find this updated edition to be the perfect didactic resource for furthering skills and knowledge in this clinical area.

    Contents:
    Principles and methods of peripheral retina OCT scanning
    Optical coherence tomography of the peripheral retina and the vitreoretinal interface
    Peripheral retinal degenerations as a risk factor for rhegmatogenous retinal detachment
    Intraretinal degenerations
    Vitreoretinal degenerations
    Chorioretinal degenerations
    Retinal laser photocoagulation in peripheral degenerations.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Owen A. O'Connor, Won Seog Kim, Pier Luigi Zinzani.
    Summary: "The immune system can be classified into 2 basic component: (1) the innate immune system, and (2) the acquired immune system. The innate immune system is considered to be relatively agnostic to any specific antigen, and is often described as invariant. The innate immune response is the first line of defense, and typically exhibits limited specificity. Examples of innate immune response may include phagocytosis by macrophases, barriers to infect provided by the skin and tears, NK- and mast cells, and complement mediated cytolysis. In contrast, the adaptive (or sometimes called acquired) immune response develops in response to specific antigen, being 'custom' designed for the antigen in question, usually occurs later in the immune response, and has the ability to recall the response to past infections. Components of a functioning acquired immune response might involve antigen presenting cells presenting antigen ot T-cells, the activation of specific T-cells which would signal to B-cells enlisting their engagement in the response and the production of highly specific antibody capable of binding specific antigen. T- and B- lymphocytes are the major types of lymphocytes found in the human body, where they can constitute 20-40% of all white blood cells, with only about 2-3% of these being found in the peripheral circulation, the remainder being localized to various lymphoid organ is (lymph nodes, spleen, submucosal tissue). Remarkably, the total mass of lymphocytes in the body can approximate the mass of the brain and liver"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals T-Cell Lymphocyte Biology / Claudio Tripodo, Stefano Pilleri
    Mechanisms of T-Cell Lymphomagenesis / François Lemonnier, Philippe Gaulard, Laurence de Leval
    Epigenetics of T-Cell Lymphoma / H. Miles Prince, Jasmine Zain, Anas Younes, Sean Whittaker, Owen O'Connor, Sean Harrop
    Animal Models of T-Cell Lymphoma / Keiichiro Hattori, Raksha Shrestha, Tatsuhiro Sakamoto, Manabu Kusakabe, Mamiko Sakata-Yanagimoto
    The Geographic Distribution of the PTCL : Global Epidemiology / Amulya Yellala, Avyakta Kallam, James Armitage
    Classification of the Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Neval Ozkaya, Elaine Jaffee
    Molecular Classification of the PTCLs / Tyler A. Herek, Javed Iqbal
    Peripheral T-Cell Lymphoma
    Not Otherwise Specified / Nora Bennani, Stephen Ansell
    Angioimmunoblastic T-Cell Lymphoma (AITL) / Jehan Dupuis, Franck Morschhauser
    The Spectrum of Anaplastic Large Cell Lymphoma / Jianping Kong, Andrew Feldman
    HTLV-1-Positive Adult T-Cell Leukemia-Lymphoma (ATL) / Wataru Munakata, Kensei Tobinai
    Natural Killer/T Cell Lymphomas / S.J. Kim, R. Suzuki, A. Jaccard, S.T. Lim, Won Seog Kim
    T-Prolymphocytic Leukemia (T-PLL) / Dima El-Sharkawi, Claire Deardon
    Large Granular Lymphocytes Leukemia (LGL) / Karolina H. Dziewulska, Katharine B. Moosic, HeeJin Cheon, Kristine C. Olson, David J. Feith, Thomas P. Loughran, Jr. Gamma Delta T-Cell Lymphomas / Francine Foss, Aadil Ahmed, Mina Xu
    Enteropathy Associated T-Cell Lymphoma and Monomorphic Epitheliotropic Intestinal T-Cell Lymphoma / Craig R. Soderquist, Jennifer Shingleton, Sandeep Dave, Govind Bhagat
    Hepatosplenic T-Cell Lymphomas / Robert N. Stuver, Mwanasha Merrill, Salvia Jain
    Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma / Alejandro Ariel Gru, Bethanie Rooke, Kevin Molloy, Julia Scarsbrick
    Other Rare Subtypes of PTCL / Pier Paolo Picaluga
    Standard Front-line Therapies / Raphael Koch, Lorenz Truemper
    Approved Agents in the Relapsed or Refractory Setting, Excluding Brentuximab Vedotin / Helen Ma, Owen A. O'Connor
    The Role for Autologous Stem Cell Transplantation (ASCT) in Peripheral T Cell Lymphomas (PTCL) / Juan Alejandro Ospina, H. Martinez-Cordero, J. Enciso, H. Idrobo
    Allogeneic Stem Cell Transplantion / Anna Dodero, Paolo Corradini
    Emerging Immunotherapy Approaches in Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Barbara Pro, Andrei Shustov
    Emerging New Small Molecules in Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Alessandro Broccoli, Pier Luigi Zinzani
    The Value and Relevance of T-Cell Lymphoma Registries / Tetiana Skrypets, Martina Manni, Monica Civallero, Iryna Kriachok, Massimo Federico
    Innovative Chemotherapy-Free Approaches for the Treatment of PTCL / Enrica Marchi, Ahmed Sawas, Helen Ma, Luigi Scotto, Francesca Montanari
    Global Collaborations / Dejan Radjeski, Eliza Hawke, Owen A. O'Connor, Pier Luigi Zinzani, WonSeog Kim, Enrica Marchi.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Radhika Tandon, Anat Galor, Virender Singh Sangwan, Manotosh Ray, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sergio Sandrucci, Baudolino Mussa, editors.
    Summary: Indications for central venous cannulation in critically ill patients have increased dramatically in recent years owing to the use of more complex therapies unsuitable for delivery via peripheral veins. The main drawbacks of central venous access are morbidity and the growing scarcity of experienced operators. Ultrasound-guided peripheral venous access offers a solution, in that it reduces morbidity and can be performed by a dedicated nursing team. The aim of this book is to teach the fundamentals of this emerging technique. Advice is provided on the choice of materials and on vein selection. The advantages and disadvantages of peripherally inserted central venous catheters (PICC) in relation to other types of central venous catheter are discussed, and the principles of use and practical applications of ultrasound for venipuncture are explained. Maneuvers for PICC positioning, techniques for the evaluation of PICC tip placement, and the prevention, diagnosis, and management of complications are all described in detail. Advice is also provided on the organization of a dedicated PICC team within a hospital or a supportive care program, and psychological, legal, and economic issues are considered. Peripherally Inserted Central Venous Catheters will be of interest to a wide range of professionals, including nutritionists, oncologists, anesthesiologists, surgeons, registered nurses, nurse practitioners, physicians, physician assistants, and radiologists.

    Contents:
    Introduction and Overview of PICC History
    Which Material and Device? The Choice of PICC
    Vessel Health and Preservation: The Proactive Approach
    The Choice of a Vein in Critically Ill Patients: Cost-Effectiveness
    Advantages, Disadvantages, and Indications of PICCs in Inpatients and Outpatients
    Ultrasound Anatomy of Peripheral Veins and Ultrasound-Guided Venipuncture
    Evaluation Techniques of the PICC Tip Placement
    Frequency, Diagnosis, and Management of Occlusive and Mechanical PICC Complications
    Clinical Problems Associated with the Use of Peripheral Venous Approaches: Infections
    Clinical Problems Associated with the Use of Peripheral Venous Approaches in Clinical Practice: Thrombosis
    Maneuvers, Precautions, and Tricks for PICC Positioning Procedure
    The "Off-Label" Use of PICCs
    Venous Access Devices and Emotional Response in Oncologic Patients: Diagnostic and Management Aspects
    Peripheral Inserted Central Catheters: Medicolegal Aspects
    The PICC Team.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Bryan D. Springer, Javad Parvizi, editors.
    Summary: Periprosthetic Joint Infection of the Hip and Knee is a practical reference for the diagnosis and treatment of total joint infections following hip and knee arthroplasty. In addition to useful chapters presenting common tests and algorithms used for diagnosis, the book gives background on the epidemiology, risk factors, and prevention strategies of periprosthetic joint infection. Additionally, practical clinical information is given, including antibiotic treatment strategies and delivery methods and medical optimization techniques for physicians to follow for patient care and follow-up. Covering a topic that is currently underrepresented in the medical literature, Periprosthetic Joint Infection of the Hip and Knee will be useful to orthopedic surgeons, rheumatologists, and other physicians involved in the care of patients with hip and knee prosthetic implants.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of Total Hip and Knee Arthroplasty Infection
    Risk Factors for Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Prevention of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Medical Optimalization of Patients Prior to Surgery
    Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection: An Algorithmic Approach to Patients
    Intraoperative Tests to Aid in Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Biofilm-Related Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Microbiology of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Antibiotics in Treatment of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    PMMA and Antimicrobial Delivery
    Prosthetic Retention: Treatment Options
    Single-Stage Exchange for Treatment of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Two-Stage Exchange Hip Arthroplasty: Static Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Hip Arthroplasty: Articulating Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Knee Arthroplasty: Static Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Knee Arthroplasty: Articulating Spacers
    Knee Arthrodesis
    Resection Arthroplasty and Hip Joint Fusion
    Above-Knee Amputation
    Post-Operative Management of Periprosthetic Joint Infection.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniel Kendoff, Rhidian Morgan-Jones, Fares S. Haddad, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Incidence and Socioeconomic Impact
    Part II. Prevention of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Part III. Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Part IV. Local Antibiotic Therapy
    Part V. The Hip Joint
    Part VI. The Knee Joint
    Part VII. Perioperative Optimization
    Part VIII. Long-term Perspectives
    Part IX. Future Approaches.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Raymond T. Krediet, Dirk G. Struijk, Sadie van Esch ; foreword by Norbert Lameire.
    Contents:
    Anatomy and physiology of the peritoneum / Krediet, R.T.
    Treatment modalities / Struijk, D.G.
    Access- and catheter-related complications / Struijk, D.G.
    Measurement of peritoneal transport / Krediet, R.T.
    Assessment of the peritoneum by biomarkers in peritoneal effluent / Krediet, R.T.
    Peritonitis and other catheter-related infections / Esch, S. van
    Information technology in peritoneal dialysis / Struijk, D.G.
    Residual renal function and peritoneal dialysis dose in adequacy of peritoneal dialysis / Krediet, R.T.
    Peritoneal dialysis solutions / Krediet, R.T.
    Long-term peritoneal dialysis and encapsulating peritoneal sclerosis / Krediet, R.T.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Emel Canbay, Yutaka Yonemura.
    Contents:
    1. Anatomy of Peritoneum and Preoperative Assessment of Patients with Peritoneal Surface Malignancies
    2. Surgical Technique for Cytoreductive Surgery
    3. Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy Applications
    4. Management of Special Issues
    5. Molecular Mechanism of Peritoneal Metastases.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Beate Rau, Alfred Königsrainer, Faheez Mohamed, Paul H. Sugarbaker, editors.
    Summary: This book provides surgeons and oncologists with a well-founded and detailed overview of the available treatment options for peritoneal malignancy and differential selection of the appropriate forms of therapy. Systemic chemotherapy options are also considered, as are surgical cytoreduction (CRS) and all forms of intraperitoneal chemotherapy (IPC) especially hyperthermic IPC (HIPEC), and immunotherapy, including specific procedures such as PIPAC. Subsequent chapters address perioperative care, complications and recurrences, as well as psycho-oncological, palliative medical and nursing care. The process of parietal and visceral peritonectomy in the large and small intestine is additionally illustrated by three video clips accessible online. Covering a broad range of aspects, including peritoneal metastasis and intraperitoneal chemotherapy, the book offers a valuable tool for surgeons, oncologists and anesthesiologists alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ariane J. Marelli, Jamil A. Aboulhosn.
    Summary: Covering the full spectrum of CHD from infants through adults, Perloff's Clinical Recognition of Congenital Heart Disease, 7th Edition, provides unparalleled guidance on the diagnosis and treatment of common and uncommon CHD in one definitive resource. The editors of this new edition, Drs. Ariane J. Marelli and Jamil A. Aboulhosn, have maintained Dr. Joseph Perloff's richly nuanced approach while bringing this classic text completely up to date with all the latest evidence and technologic advances in the field. With its comprehensive, step-by-step approach, you'll acquire a structured understanding of CHD across age ranges, allowing you to effectively detect these conditions as early as possible. NEW in the 7th Edition: Updated images throughout, as well as phonocardiograms, electrocardiograms, flow charts, and anatomic drawings Specific, integrated findings for individual patients with Dr Perloff's classic approach to diagnosis and treatment Streamlined review of sequelae and complications Historical Notes at the beginning of each chapter Tips on selecting among the increasing array of currently available procedures, helping foster and develop clinical judgment skills Update on genetic contributions to clinical recognition for a more complete presentation of patient diagnosis. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Mark Sobel, editor.
    Summary: This unique book is a practical, "go to" source of comprehensive information on the care of peroneal tendon injuries, accurately illustrating this hot topic with many anatomical drawings of how the anatomy influences the diseases we see clinically. This presentation opens with a review of the normal anatomy, biomechanics and examination of the peroneal tendons, followed by a discussion of congenital variations and imaging strategies used in diagnosis and evaluation. Both conservative and surgical management techniques are then elucidated in injury-specific chapters, from peroneus brevis splits and stenosing tenosynovitis to painful os peroneum syndrome (POPS) and acute dislocation. Chapters on rehabilitation and comorbid pathologies round out the presentation. The diagnosis of peroneal tendon injury is much more common today than it was 20 years ago. Utilizing the latest evidence and presenting the most cutting-edge management techniques, The Peroneal Tendons will be useful for orthopedic and podiatric surgeons, sports medicine specialists, and students and residents in these areas.

    Contents:
    Normal Anatomy and Physical Examination of the Peroneal Tendons
    Biomechanics of the Peroneal Tendons
    Congenital Variations of the Peroneal Tendons
    Imaging of the Peroneal Tendons
    Conservative Treatment of the Peroneal Tendons
    Peroneal Brevis Splits
    Peroneal Brevis Splits Associated with Chronic Lateral Ankle Instability
    Stenosing Tenosynovitis along the Lateral Wall of the Calcaneus
    Painful Os Peroneum Syndrome (POPS)
    Attritional Rupture of the Peroneal Tendons
    Acute Subluxation/Dislocation of the Peroneal Tendons
    Immobilization and Rehabilitation of the Peroneal Tendons
    Peroneal Tendon Pathology Associated with the Cavovarus Foot
    Peroneal Tendon Pathology Associated with Calcaneous Fractures.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gérard Lizard, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of the biology and biochemistry of peroxisomes, and discusses the contribution of these organelles to peroxisomal and neurodegenerative diseases. It begins with a detailed introduction to the biogenesis and metabolic functions of peroxisomes, and highlights their role in oxidative stress and in lipid metabolism such as fatty acid oxidation. The following chapters focus on the molecular and clinical aspects of peroxisomal disorders caused by defects in peroxisomal function. In particular, the biological aspects of peroxisomal biogenesis disorders such as Zellweger syndrome and Heimler syndrome are discussed. This includes their underlying genetic causes as well as the biochemical and metabolic defects associated with the disorders. In addition, several chapters cover recent observations suggesting an association between peroxisomal dysfunction and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's, Multiple Sclerosis and other degenerative cerebellar pathologies. The final section of the book discusses important cell and animal models for studying the role of peroxisomes in human diseases and presents current therapeutic strategies for their treatment. This book deals with a highly topical subject that is at the heart of current research, and represents a valuable contribution for all students and researchers who want to understand the complex biology of peroxisomes and their role in human diseases.

    Contents:
    [II]. Peroxisomal diseases : biological characteristics and diagnosis: Peroxisome biogenesis disorders / Masanori Honsho, Kanji Okumoto, Shigehiko Tamura, Yukio Fujiki
    Fatty acid oxidation in peroxisomes : enzymology, metabolic crosstalk with other organelles and peroxisomal disorders / Ronald J. A. Wanders, Frédéric M. Vaz, Hans R. Waterham, Sacha Ferdinandusse
    Zellweger syndrome disorders : from severe neonatal disease to atypical adult presentation / David Cheillan
    Heimler syndrome / S. Mechaussier, I. Perrault, H. Dollfus, A. Bloch-Zupan, N. Loundon, L. Jonard et al. [IV]. Cell and animal model systems: A mouse model system to study peroxisomal roles in neurodegeneration of peroxisome biogenesis disorders / Yuichi Abe, Shigehiko Tamura, Masanori Honsho, Yukio Fujiki
    The Drosophila melanogaster as genetic model system to dissect the mechanisms of disease that lead to neurodegeneration in adrenoleukodystrophy / Margret H. Bülow, Brendon D. Parsons, Francesca Di Cara
    Human peroxisomal 3-ketoacyl-CoA thiolase : tissue expression and metabolic regulation / Norbert Latruffe. [V]. Treatment of peroxisomal diseases: Biological functions of plasmalogens / Md Shamim Hossain, Shiro Mawatari, Takehiko Fujino
    Therapeutic efficacy of plasmalogens for Alzheimer's disease, mild cognitive impairment, and Parkinson's disease in conjunction with a new hypothesis for the etiology of Alzheimer's disease / Takehiko Fujino, Md Shamim Hossain, Shiro Mawatari.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Tsuneo Imanaka, Nobuyuki Shimozawa.
    Summary: This book provides readers with a comprehensive overview of peroxisomes and their role in human diseases. It starts by describing the history of peroxisome research and then examines in detail the current understanding of the biogenesis and function of peroxisomes. It then focuses on peroxisomal disorders and the involvement of peroxisomes in cancer and age-related diseases, discussing in detail the use of model organisms to elucidate the pathogenesis of peroxisomal disorders and the physiological importance of peroxisomal proteins. Further, the book examines diagnostic and therapeutic strategies in peroxisomal disorders as well as significant recent advances. Lastly, it addresses various topics in peroxisome research, including the isolation of peroxisomes from mammalian tissues and cells, the structural biology of peroxisomal proteins, the lipidomics of peroxisomal disorders, the value of exome sequencing, and neuropsychological testing in X-linked adrenoleukodystrophy. Given its scope, the book is a valuable resource for postgraduate students and researchers in the life sciences and clinicians in the fields of internal medicine, pediatrics, and neurology.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Biogenesis and Function of peroxisome
    1 The history of peroxisomal research
    2 Peroxisome Biogenesis
    3 Peroxisome Degradation and Its Molecular Machinery
    4 The function of the peroxisome
    Part 2 Dysfunction of Peroxisome and Human Disease
    5 Peroxisomal disorders
    6 Model organisms used to understand peroxisomal disorders
    7 Diagnosis of peroxisomal disorders
    8 Therapeutic strategies for X-linked adrenoleukodystrophy, a representative peroxisome disease
    Part 3 Topics in Peroxisome Research
    9 The isolation of peroxisomes
    10 Structure Biology of peroxisomal proteins, peroxins
    11 Lipidomics of peroxisomal disorders
    12 Neurophysiology and neuropsychology for X-ALD.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Lewis, Kim.
    Summary: This volume is a collection of chapters from the leading experts in the relatively new and burgeoning field of persister cell studies. Persisters play a leading role in the recalcitrance of chronic infections, and enable the development of classical antibiotic resistance. The focus of the book is on studies that provide an understanding of the mechanisms of persister formation, antibiotic tolerance and role in disease, at the molecular level.

    Contents:
    Intro; Introduction; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Evolution Under Antibiotic Treatments: Interplay Between Antibiotic Persistence, Tolerance, and Resistance; 1.1 Distinguishing Between Resistance, Tolerance, and Antibiotic Persistence; 1.1.1 Antibiotic Resistance; 1.1.2 Antibiotic Tolerance; 1.1.3 Antibiotic Persistence; 1.1.4 Different Types of Persistent Bacteria; 1.1.4.1 Triggered Persistence [Previously Called Type I (Balaban et al. 2004)]; 1.1.4.2 Spontaneous Persistence [Previously Called Type II (Balaban et al. 2004)]; 1.2 Quantification of Antibiotic Tolerance and Persistence 1.3 Evolution of Antibiotic Tolerance Under Intermittent Antibiotic Treatments1.3.1 Tolerance and Persistence-by-Lag Evolve to Match the Duration of the Antibiotic Treatment; 1.3.2 Evolution of Stationary Phase Triggered Antibiotic Persistence; 1.3.3 Evolution of Drug-Induced Tolerance; 1.3.4 Antibiotic Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.3.4.1 Evolution of Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.3.4.2 Techniques to Detect Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.4 Antibiotic Tolerance and Persistence Promote the Evolution of Resistance; 1.5 Conclusion; References 2.3.2.1 The Mesenteric Lymph Nodes and Spleen Are Preferred Niches for Antibiotic-Tolerant S. Typhimurium During Infection2.3.2.2 The Subpopulation of S. Typhimurium Capable of Surviving Antibiotic Treatment During Infection Are Slow or Non-Growing ... ; 2.4 Molecular Mechanisms: How to Cope with Combined Host and Antibiotic Challenges?; 2.4.1 Formation of Salmonella Antibiotic Persisters During Infection; 2.4.2 Salmonella Antibiotic Persisters Must Survive the Immune Response During Infection; 2.5 Going Forward: Future Directions and Challenges; References
    Chapter 2: Antibiotic Persisters and Relapsing Salmonella enterica Infections2.1 Persistence of Infection, Antibiotic Persistence, and Antibiotic Persistence During Infection: What Is the Difference?; 2.2 A Brief Introduction to Salmonella enterica Infections; 2.3 Evidence for Role of Antibiotic Persistent Salmonella in Relapsing Infections; 2.3.1 Clinical Evidence for Antibiotic Persistence During Infection in Humans; 2.3.2 Experimental Evidence for Antibiotic Persistence During Infection in Mice
    Chapter 3: The Biology of Persister Cells in Escherichia coli3.1 Basic Concepts of Persister Cell Biology; 3.1.1 Persister Formation as a Phenotypic Switch into Dormancy; 3.1.2 Stochasticity and Heterogeneity of Persister Formation; 3.1.3 Biological Functions of Persister Cells; 3.2 Unraveling the Genetic Basis of Persister Formation; 3.2.1 Conceptual Overview; 3.2.2 Distinguishing Persister Formation/Survival from Phenotypic Resistance; 3.3 Non-Specific Mechanisms of Persister Cell Formation; 3.3.1 Energy Metabolism and Oxygen; 3.3.2 PASH: ``Persistence as Stuff Happenś́
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nira Ramachandran.
    Summary: The book revisits the causes of persisting undernutrition in India, but moves away from the usual focus on women and children to a broader view of the entire population. It estimates the economic losses resulting from ignoring undernutrition in the adult working population, and questions the current narrow focus of nutrition interventions, suggesting that a family-based approach may provide quicker results and long-term sustainability. It compares the best and worst performing states in the country to glean learnings from both successes and failures and emphasizes the need to hand over the ownership of nutrition outcomes from the state to the community and family for more sustainable results. The book is organized in three sections: Part 1 details the nutrition status of the population, regional variations in nutrition outcomes, and government response in terms of interventions. Part 2 reviews issues and concerns like gender discrimination, poor child nutrition status, ineffective implementation of government programmes in the field, and the possible impacts of emerging issues like climate change. Part 3 seeks solutions from both international and country experiences.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Brendan McCormack, Sandra van Dulmen, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdahl, Tom Eide.
    Contents:
    Person-centredness in healthcare policy, practice and research / Brendan McCormack, Sandra van Dulmen, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdahl, and Tom Eide
    Philosophical perspectives on person-centredness for healthcare research / Jan Dewing, Tom Eide and Brendan McCormack
    The knowing and being of person-centred research practice across worldviews : an epistemological and ontological framework / Angie Titchen, Shaun Cardiff, and Stian Biong
    Being a person-centred researcher : principles and methods for doing research in a person-centred way / Gaby Jacobs, Famke van Lieshout, Marit Borg, and Ottar Ness
    Research into person-centred healthcare technology : a plea for considering humanisation dimensions / Gaby Jacobs, Teatske van der Zijpp, Famke van Lieshout, and Sandra van Dulmen
    A participatory approach to person-centred research : maximising opportunities for recovery / Larry Davidson, Chyrell Bellamy, Elizabeth Flanagan, Kimberly Guy, and Maria O'Connell
    Co-creating flourishing research practices through person-centred research : a focus on persons living with dementia / Kirsti Skovdahl and Jan Dewing
    Leadership research : a person-centred agenda / Tom Eide and Shaun Cardiff
    Staffing structures for effectiveness in person-centred care : the rafaela system / Lisbeth Fagerström
    Giving voice to 'hard to reach groups' in healthcare research : a narrative approach / Catherine Buckley
    Promoting health across the lifespan : a systems approach / Elisabeth Fosse, Steffen Torp, and Ingun Stang
    How knowledge developed through ethnography may inform person-centred healthcare practices / Kristin Briseid, Astrid Skatvedt and Brendan McCormack
    Person-centred technology-supported interventions / Sandra van Dulmen, Espen Brembo, Janne Dugstad, and Hilde Eide
    Learning to be an effective person-centred practitioner / Caroline Williams and Brendan McCormack
    Doing eye and vision research in a person-centred way / Rigmor C. Baraas, Lene A. Hagen, Hilde R. Pedersen, and Jon V. B. Gjelle
    Person-centred communication research : systematic observation of real life practice / Hilde Eide, Linda Hafskjold, Vibeke Sundling, and Sandra van Dulmen
    Introducing sex and gender-sensitive person-centred healthcare research / Stina Öresland and Sylvia Määttä
    Future directions for person-centred healthcare research / Sandra van Dulmen, Brendan McCormack, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdal, and Tom Eide.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jan Dewing, Brendan McCormack, Tanya McCance.
    Summary: This book is the first ever to offer a contemporary collection of different perspectives on person-centredness in international doctoral nursing research. The research in the book is based on the ideas and values of personhood and person-centeredness, which have been used and can be seen to guide research approaches, inform research designs and theorize research findings. Further, a specific framework for person-centred nursing is embedded throughout the research studies presented in the text. The Person-centred Nursing Framework (PCNF) developed by Brendan McCormack and Tanya McCance in 2010, is recognized as a nursing theory and this book further develops it as a basis for research and for advancing person-centredness in nursing. The framework informs all stages of the research process, from design through to dissemination. The book is structured into a number of highly engaging chapters written by doctoral candidates, and recently graduated candidates. The opening and closing chapters, written by the editors, place the subsequent chapters in a global context of person-centredness and nursing. The potential for person-centred nursing research to be a global movement is recognized and debated. The subsequent chapters lead readers through philosophical ideas, methodologies and methods whilst also offering reflective and honest insights into learning how to become a person-centred researcher. This field is growing and developing but yet there is no specific book available. As a result, researchers spend considerable time and effort translating existing research methodologies into person-centred perspectives. This book fills this gap and acts as a key resource for future nurse researchers. The text is intended for, and benefits nursing doctoral candidates, masters candidates and academic staff who teach and supervise research candidates; it may also appeal to other graduate learners. The book has international contributions which makes it appealing internationally.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. Person-centred Nursing Research Principles
    Chapter 2. The Person-centred Nursing Framework and Nursing Research
    Chapter 3. Coming to know Personhood: philosophical 'dates'
    Chapter 4. Overviews of person-centered research: selected specific research examples.
    Chapter 5. Developing theoretical frameworks: integrating specific values and principles into research
    Chapter 6. Methodologies for Person-centred Nursing Research
    Chapter 7. Knowing how to act
    person centred research methods
    Chapter 8. Knowing, Being and Becoming in person-centred research (action research chapter).
    Chapter 9. Phenomenological and hermeneutic approaches
    Chapter 10. Experimentation and Quasi- experimentation in person-centred research
    Chapter 11. Multiple and mixed methods approaches
    Chapter 12. Person-centredness in education research
    Chapter 13. Adopting a person-centred approach in doctoral supervision
    Chapter 14. Summary chapter: facing the future with confidence.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pei-Yun Sabrina Hsueh, Thomas Wetter, Xinxin Zhu, editors.
    Summary: This book clarifies consumer and personal health informatics and their relevance to precision medicine and healthcare applications. Personal Health Informatics covers a broad definition of this emerging field, with individuals not simply consuming health but as active participants, researchers and designers in the healthcare ecosystem. The world of health informatics is constantly changing given the ever-increasing variety and volume of health data, care delivery models that shift from fee-for-service to value-based care, new entrants in the ecosystem and the evolving regulatory decision landscape. These changes have increased the importance of the role of patients in research studies for understanding work processes and activities, and the design and implementation of health information systems. Therefore, personal health informatics now provide research tools and protocols to engage within individual contexts when developing solutions, which can improve clinical practice, patient engagement and public health. Personal Health Informatics offers a snapshot of this emerging field, supported by the methodological, practical, legal and ethical perspectives of researchers and practitioners. In addition to being a research reader, this book provides pragmatic insights for practitioners in designing, implementing and evaluating personal health informatics in healthcare settings. It represents an excellent reader for students in all clinical disciplines and biomedical and health informatics to learn from the case studies provided in this emerging field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Overview
    Section I: The State-of-the-Art Novel Care Delivery Models
    Section II: Methods for Translating Biomedical Research and Real-World Evidence into Patient-Centric Precision Health Application
    Section III: Methods for Patient-Centric Design
    Section IV: Ethics, Bias, Privacy, and Fairness
    Acknowledgment
    Contents
    About the Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    About the Contributors
    Part I: The State-of-the-Art Novel Care Delivery Models
    Chapter 1: E-enabled Patient-Provider Communication in Context
    Introduction Case Example #1: Development of the E-Health Care Model and Implementation in the PreClinic in Denmark
    Evaluation of ECM Accomplishments
    Case Example #2: Task-Sharing Mental Health Primary Care Delivery Model Via Smart Phones in Pacific Island Countries
    The Study
    Summary of Results
    Challenges and Opportunities
    Future Directions
    Case Example #3: Colombia: Prenatal Care and Early Risk Identification
    A Systems Model for E-Health Enabled Collaborative Care Delivery
    Collaborative Care Delivery in the Time of COVID-19
    Lessons on Collaborative Care Delivery from COVID-19 Discussion
    References
    Chapter 2: Direct Primary Care: A New Model for Patient-Centered Care
    Primary Care, the Patient-Centered Medical Home, and Direct Primary Care
    Primary Care
    Patient Centered Medical Home
    Direct Primary Care
    Accreditation Process
    Experience of the Patient and Provider
    The Patient-Provider-Payer Shift
    The Implications for DPC in Practice
    Mixed Methods Research Methodology
    Qualitative Methods
    Quantitative Methods
    Data Types
    Data Quality
    Results
    Timely Access
    Effectiveness
    Patient-Centered
    Efficiency/Affordability Conclusions, Implications, and Future Directions
    References
    Chapter 3: Smart Homes for Personal Health and Safety
    Introduction
    Sense4Safety: Using Smart Home Technology to Reduce Fall Risk
    Falls and MCI as Significant Public Health Problems
    Rationale for Passive In-Home Sensing
    Use of Passive Monitoring Technology for Early Detection of Functional Changes
    The Sense4Safety Intervention
    Ethical Implications
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Health App by Prescription: The German Nation-Wide Model
    Introduction
    Overview
    German Healthcare System Licensing and Marketing Authorization
    Reimbursement by the Statutory Health Insurance (SHI)
    New Digital Services in the German Healthcare System
    Electronic Health Card and Personal Health Records (2000-2020)
    Digital Health Applications (Since 2020)
    First Experiences with DiGAs
    Acceptance and Knowledge About DiGA Among German Healthcare Professionals and Citizens
    DiGA as a New Business Model for Healthcare Start-ups and New Strategic Partnerships
    Conclusion
    Glossary
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Marie Benedict and Victoria Christopher Murray.
    Summary: "The remarkable, little-known story of Belle da Costa Greene, J. P. Morgan's personal librarian-who became one of the most powerful women in New York despite the dangerous secret she kept in order to make her dreams come true, from New York Times bestselling author Marie Benedict and acclaimed author Victoria Christopher Murray. In her twenties, Belle da Costa Greene is hired by J. Pierpont Morgan to curate a collection of rare manuscripts, books, and artwork for his newly built Morgan Library. Belle becomes a fixture on the New York society scene and one of the most powerful people in the art and book world, known for her impeccable taste and shrewd negotiating for critical works as she helps build a world-class collection. But Belle has a secret, one she must protect at all costs. She was born not Belle da Costa Greene but Belle Marion Greener. She is the daughter of Richard Greener, the first Black graduate of Harvard and well-known advocate for equality. Belle's complexion isn't dark because of her alleged Portuguese heritage that lets her pass as white-her complexion is dark because she is African American. The Personal Librarian tells the story of an extraordinary woman, famous for her intellect, style, and wit, and shares the lengths she must go-for the protection of her family and her legacy-to preserve her carefully crafted white identity in the racist world in which she lives"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access 2021
    SUNet ID login required
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    NCBI
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    T55.3.P75 W757 2016
    1
  • Print
    Stefania Boccia [and 5 others], editors.
    Summary: Practitioners are increasingly adopting a personalised medicine approach to individually tailored patient care, especially disease diagnosis and treatment with the use of biomarkers. However, development and implementation of such approaches to chronic disease prevention need further investigation and concerted efforts for proper use in healthcare systems. This book provides high-quality, multidisciplinary knowledge from research in personalised medicine, specifically personalised prevention of chronic disease. It addresses different perspectives of prevention in the field, and is the outcome of a four-year work of the Personalized prevention of Chronic Disease (PRECeDI) Consortium, a multi-disciplinary and multi-professional team of experts. The Consortium jointly agreed to document and address the five aspects or domains of personalised medicine and prevention as individual chapters: Identification of biomarkers for the prevention of chronic disease Evaluation of predictive genomic applications Ethico-legal and policy issues surrounding personalised medicine Roles and responsibilities of stakeholders in informing healthy individuals on their genome: a sociotechnical analysis Identification of organisational models for the provision of predictive genomic applications The book focuses on the Consortium's recommendations that are derived from each of these domains based on up-to-date evidence and research that the authors write, follow, and systematically organise and report. Personalisation of health care is, eventually, a driver of innovation in research and healthcare systems. With this SpringerBrief on Personalised Health Care: Fostering Precision Medicine Advancements for Gaining Population Health Impact, the Consortium provides further evidence of the clinical validity and utility of personalised medicine with special emphasis on the prevention of chronic diseases. The book is a useful resource for policy makers, industry and healthcare professionals, scientists, technology-sector professionals, investors, citizens, and private companies that need proper advice to realise the potential of personalised medicine.

    Contents:
    Introductions
    Identification of biomarkers for the prevention of chronic disease
    Evaluation of predictive genomic applications
    Ethico-legal and policy issues surrounding personalised medicine
    Roles and responsibilities of stakeholders in informing healthy individuals on their genome: a sociotechnical analysis
    Identification of organisational models for the provision of predictive genomic applications --
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sherif El-Khamisy, editor.
    Summary: "The mammalian genome is constantly challenged by exogenous and endogenous threats. Although much is known about the mechanisms that maintain genome integrity, little is known about the applications of this knowledge to combat human disease. The past 20 years has witnessed extensive research and progress in this area and scientists started to design new therapies harnessing individual genetic differences among patients to combatdegenerative disorders and cancer. We summarize these advancements and discuss perspectives for the future of personalized medicine"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Approaches for identifying novel targets in precision medicine: lessons from DNA repair / Dean T. Williams, Christopher J. Staples
    Nucleotide excision repair: from neurodegeneration to cancer / Anastasios Liakos, Matthieu D. Lavigne, Maria Fousteri
    Role of protein linked DNA breaks in cancer / Walaa R. Allam, Mohamed E. Ashour, Amr A. Waly, Sherif El-Khamisy
    The emerging role of proteomics in precision medicine: applications in neurodegenerative diseases and neurotrauma / Rana Alaaeddine, Mira Fayad, Eliana Nehme, Hisham F. Bahmad, Firas Kobeissy
    The role of nitric oxide from neurological disease to cancer / Ahmed Maher, Mohamed F. Abdel Rahman, Mohamed Z. Gad
    RNA nuclear export: from neurological disorders to cancer / Guillaume M. Hautbergue
    Can astrocytes be a target for precision medicine? / Chloe F. Allen, Pamela J. Shaw, Laura Ferraiuolo
    Mitochondrial diseases as model of neurodegeneration / Laila A. Selim, Heba Hassaan
    Personalised medicine: genome maintenance lessons learned from studies in yeast as a model organism / Arwa A. Abugable, Dahlia A. Awwad, Dalia Fleifel, Mohamed M. Ali, Sherif El-Khamisy [and others]
    The power of zebrafish in personalised medicine / Sarah Baxendale, Freek van Eeden, Robert Wilkinson
    Personalized medicine and resurrected hopes for the management of Alzheimer's disease: a modular approach based on GSK-3[beta] inhibitors / Reem K. Arafa, Nehal H. Elghazawy
    Regenerative medicine: advances from developmental to degenerative diseases / Nicholas F. Blair, Thomas J. R. Frith, Ivana Barbaric
    Gene therapy in the nervous system: failures and successes / Jayanth S. Chandran, Joseph M. Scarrott, Pamela J. Shaw, Mimoun Azzouz.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Danilo Garcia, Trevor Archer, Richard M. Kostrzewa, editors.
    Summary: Brain disorders (neurodevelopmental, neurodegenerative, and affective disorders) can be investigated, treated, and prevented using person-centered methods. Because researchers have not reached a clear consensus on whether or not personality is stable or changeable, it has been difficult to outline how to use these methods in the care of people with brain disorders. Thus, the first part aims to identify the ways in which brain disorders and personality are linked. The second part explores different person-centered approaches that can be incorporated in a healthcare or education setting to help people with various brain disorders and to promote physical, mental and social health. The third part focuses on challenges and new venues.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Chapter 1
    Personality and the Brain
    Chapter 2
    Personality Stability and Change in Alzheimer's Disease and Major Depressive Disorder
    Chapter 3
    Affect, Stress, and Neurodegenerative Onslaughts
    Chapter 4
    Aspects of Personality Traits and Changes in Different Stages of Dementia Disorders
    Chapter 5
    The Study of Personality Traits in the Blekinge part of the Swedish National Study on Aging and Care (SNAC-B)
    Chapter 6
    Neurodevelopmental Disorders, Temperament, and Character
    Part 2 Chapter 7
    Person-Centered Approaches
    Chapter 8
    A Case Study in Sweden: The Need of Person-Centered Methods in the Care of Dementia Patients with Severe Aggressive Behavior
    Chapter 9
    Life Narratives and Elderly Care
    Chapter 10
    Acting as a Person-Centered Approach: Theater for the Elderly
    Chapter 11
    Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder: a personalized approach
    Chapter 12
    Person-Centered Schools
    Chapter 13
    Integrating healthy personality development and educational practices: The case of student engagement with school
    PART 3 Chapter 14
    Current Directions in Psychiatric Classification: From the DSM to RDoC
    Chapter 15
    The Future of Person-Centered Care Services: Scientific, Measurement, and Practical Advancements in Personality and Brain Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Christoffer Johansen.
    Summary: A tremendous amount of research has been performed looking at the relationship between personality and disease. Research on this topic has been spread throughout scientific journals on psychology, behavioral health, psychoneuroimmunology, oncology, and epidemiology. Personality and Disease brings this research together in one place for the first time. With contributions from world experts, the book summarizes research findings on personality as it relates to cancer, heart disease, diabetes, asthma and allergies, dementia, and more. Is there such a thing as a cancer- prone personality? Do sadness, anger, stress, or shyness affect the likelihood that we will fall ill to specific diseases? Can we protect ourselves from disease through a positive outlook? This book will address both what we know, and what we persist in believing despite evidence to the contrary, and why such beliefs persist in the face of evidence.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Masaki Mandai, editor.
    Summary: This book thoroughly illustrates the designed and tailored medical approaches for tumors of the female reproductive organ. The chapters explore different cancer species such as ovarian cancer, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, etc. Various treatment modalities such as immunotherapy and histotype-specific treatment are delivered, and it offers a chapter on how genome-wide analysis contributes to personalized treatment. It is essential to understand this concept because many molecular target drugs and the prevalence of genome-based analysis in clinical settings have enabled us to introduce valid precision medicine in the field of gynecologic oncology. Chapters explain the stream of transition from conventional standardized treatment to personalized treatment and address future perspectives. Personalization Gynecologic Oncology is a well-designed source for beginning to advanced oncologists, gynecologists, geneticists, genetic counselors, and nurses. Offering the latest treatment strategies, the Editor hopes the ideas presented here will be a foundation for further development in the field.

    Contents:
    1 Personalized treatment in ovarian cancer
    2 Carcinogenesis and personalization in hpv-associated precancer lesions of the cervix
    3 Personalized treatment for gestational trophoblastic tumor
    4 Personalized treatment in uterine sarcoma
    5 Clinical relevance of brca1/2 pathogenic variants and impaired dna repair pathways in ovarian carcinomas
    6 Personalized treatment in immunotherapy for gynecologic cancer
    7 Risk assessment and prevention strategies for hereditary gynecological cancers
    8 How genome-wide analysis contributes to personalized treatment in cancers including gynecologic cancers
    9 Personalized treatment of gynecological cancer according to age and symptom benefit.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Robert A. Norman, editor.
    Contents:
    Personalized Dermatology
    Genetic testing
    Evolutionary Dermatology
    Climate change and Skin Cancer
    Ecological Dermatology
    Human skin biodiversity and how it is changing
    The Future of Dermatology
    Combining diagnostic skills with genetic results.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Pedro Gambus, Jan Hendrickx.
    Summary: "Because there is no disease condition that can be treated with the administration of anaesthetic medications, the specialty of anaesthesiology does not possess a curative effect in itself. Nevertheless, achieving the state of anaesthesia or the anaesthetic state relies completely on the use of drugs. Drugs used in anaesthesia are very powerful and able to transiently break the most deeply rooted physiological defence mechanisms. Some of the effects induced are lack of consciousness, absence of response to pain, absence of muscle tone, immobility, lack of breathing, dysfunction of the autonomous nervous system, to name just a few. Some of these effects might be considered target or "therapeutic effects", such as unconsciousness, analgesia or immobility, but others are "side effects" that are induced because of the relative low specificity of currently used anaesthetic drugs"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Mark C. Houston.
    Summary: "Personalized and Precision Integrative Cardiovascular Medicine embraces a systems-oriented medical approach that works to identify and understand the underlying or root causes of disease. It takes into account the personalization of healthcare as each patient is unique. It employs in-depth health history taking, scientific testing and environmental and lifestyle review. It is used as disease prevention and for the treatment of chronic conditions (such as heart disease) through nutrition, supplementation, life-style changes, and stress management. Integrative Medicine is a model of healthcare in which conventional Western medicine is integrated with non-conventional or alternative modalities. And Metabolic Medicine/Cardiology is a newer field of medicine which concentrates on the prevention, management and treatment of cardiovascular disease at the cellular level through biochemical interventions. All three of these complementary approaches to Cardiovascular Medicine will be covered in this new title"-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2020
  • Digital
    Terrence Adam, Constantin Aliferis, editors.
    Summary: This book adopts an integrated and workflow-based treatment of the field of personalized and precision medicine (PPM). Outlined within are established, proven and mature workflows as well as emerging and highly-promising opportunities for development. Each workflow is reviewed in terms of its operation and how they are enabled by a multitude of informatics methods and infrastructures. The book goes on to describe which parts are crucial to discovery and which are essential to delivery and how each of these interface and feed into one-another. Personalized and Precision Medicine Informatics provides a comprehensive review of the integrative as well as interpretive nature of the topic and brings together a large body of literature to define the topic and ensure that this is the key reference for the topic. It is an unique contribution that is positioned to be an essential guide for both PPM experts and non-experts, and for both informatics and non-informatics professionals.

    Contents:
    Intro; Acknowledgments; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Introduction;
    Chapter 1: Birth of a Discipline: Personalized and Precision Medicine (PPM) Informatics; Introduction to PPM and Its Relationship with Informatics; Purpose of the Present Book; Purpose of Present Volume; Contents and Structure of the Book; Classical Personalized and Precision Medicine; Newer and Emerging Forms of PPM; References; Part II: Classical PPM;
    Chapter 2: Clinical Risk Assessment and Prediction; Overview of Early PPM Modalities; Growth Curves; Risk Factors; Delivery of Classical PPM Tools at Point of Care Modeling Disease Severity and RiskDisease Staging; Prediction Models; Modeling Risk of Binary Events; Evaluating Prediction Models; Selection of New Risk Factors; Nomograms; Looking Forward; References;
    Chapter 3: Principles of Guideline-Driven PPM Informatics; Guidelines Driving Precision Care; Computable Guidelines and Informatics Considerations; References;
    Chapter 4: Genetic Counseling at the Intersection of Clinical Genetics and Informatics; Introduction; Genetic Counseling: Traditional Roles and Service Delivery Models; Genetic Testing; Genetic Testing Results; Carrier Screening Newborn ScreeningDiagnostic and Predictive Testing; Pharmacogenomics; Genetic Counseling Practice Guidelines; Genetic Counseling Educational Standards; Ethical and Legal Considerations; Autonomy, Beneficence, Non-maleficence, and Justice; The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); The Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act of 2008; Duty to Warn; Expanding Roles and Service Delivery Models for Genetic Counseling; Genetic Counselors in Utilization Management; Genetic Counselors in the Public Health Setting; Conclusion; References
    Chapter 5: Fundamentals of Drug Metabolism and Pharmacogenomics Within a Learning Healthcare System Workflow PerspectiveIntroduction; Foundations of Pharmacogenomics for Precision Medicine Informatics; Origins of Pharmacogenetics; Modern Pharmacogenomics; Learning Healthcare System Workflow for Pharmacogenomics; Reverse Translation: Advancing Pharmacogenomics Knowledge with Real World Data; Sequencing Technologies and Data Pre-processing; Publicly Available Data Sources and Resources; Translational Informatics Study Design; Agnostic Signal Detection and Dimensionality Reduction Signal Tuning and ValidationSignal Augmentation and a Priori Knowledge; Forward Translation: Augmenting Clinical Practice with Actionable Pharmacogenomics Knowledge; "N of 1" and Comparable Populations; Signal Robustness and Sequencing Technology Considerations; Knowledge Management and Representation; Computational Tools to Navigate Signals; Appropriate Conveyance of Knowledge; Future Directions; Summary and Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 6: The Growing Medication Problem: Perspective from Industry; Introduction; RightMed® Comprehensive Solution; Precision Medicine Information Challenge
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    M. Mohamed Essa, M. Walid Qoronfleh, editors.
    Summary: The book focuses on implications of traditional and processed foods for autism spectrum disorder (ASD) intervention and management. Numerous phytonutrients and pharmacologically active compounds in edible natural products and diet could influence and offer protection to neuronal dysfunction that occurs due to ASD. The neuroprotective effects of various fruits, vegetables, nuts and seeds phytochemicals, and other natural bioactive ingredients against ASD and related conditions are discussed. Topics such as the possible neuroprotective mechanism of action of these foods and the therapeutic role of antioxidants in relation to ASD are addressed. This book also highlights the scope of using anti-inflammatory agents and antioxidants to promote neurogenesis and improve other symptoms in ASD. It emphasizes personalized nutritional approaches with dietary management of neurodevelopmental disorders/ASD cases. Information in this book is relevant to researchers in the field of complementary and alternative medicine, nutraceuticals, neuroscience, agriculture, nutrition, and food science. This volume is beneficial to students of varying levels, and across multiple disciplines.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction Food and Brain
    2. Food and Behavior
    3. Food and Psychological Wellbeing
    4. Food and Cognition
    5. Autism and Food
    6. Healthy Brains: Types of Food and their Active Pharmacological Ingredients
    5. Dieting: Importance of Diet and Diet Types
    6. Nutrigenomics
    7. Epigenetics
    8. Gut Microbiota (microbiome)
    9. Personalized Nutrition
    10. Vegetables
    11. Fruits
    12. Nuts, Seeds and Spices
    13. Grains [Oats, Barley & Quinoa]
    14. Seafood [fish like Salmon, Oyster, Sea vegetables (algae)]
    15. Other
    16. Autism Management through Food and Diet
    17. Personalized Nutrition Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Travis L. Holloway, Ismail Jatoi.
    Contents:
    Personalized management of breast cancer / Travis L. Holloway & Ismail Jatoi
    Diagnosis and biomarkers / Aysegul Sahin & Alexandra Shaye Brown
    Molecular subtypes of breast cancer / Henry O. Ebili, A. Olayiwola Oluwasola & Olufunmilayo I. Olopade
    Surgery and radiotherapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Travis Holloway & Ismail Jatoi
    Hormone-blocking therapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Annie R. Su & Mothaffar F. Rimawi
    EGF receptor inhibitors : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Sean Warsch, Gabriel Tinoco, Stefan Glück, Kiran Avancha & Alberto J. Montero
    Antiangiogenic therapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Sheeba Irshad, Andrew Tutt & Paul Ellis
    Current guidelines of breast cancer management / Cristina Falci, Zora Baretta & Silvio Monfardini
    Management algorithms of breast cancer / Paolo Carli, Loredana Militello, Elena Torrisi, Alessando Tuzi & Andrea Veronesi
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    Jorge Hidalgo, Robert C Hyzy, Ahmed Mohamed Reda Taha, Yasser Younis A. Tolba, editors.
    Summary: In dealing with the unprecedented COVID-19 pandemic, there are an increased number of patients requiring personalized management as the disease pathology varies. With variable lung compliance and airway resistance as well as the severity of the disease, one size will not fit all patients. This book is problem-oriented with evidence-based discussions of the daily encountered scenarios in the ICU for mechanically ventilated patients, dealing with the pathology, monitoring and troubleshooting facing intensivists daily. These scenarios are managed utilizing a goal-directed approach and algorithms to achieve these goals. All chapters contain an explanation of a different solution illustrating the respiratory mechanics, physiology and pathology involved in such a scenario. Each chapter also closes with a take-home message to summarize the content. In addition to describing the ventilation of different patient categories, this text also features ventilation cases specific to COVID-19 including airway management in the enhanced air born isolated patient, pulmonary embolism, different states of shock and differential lung ventilation. There is also a specific chapter on monitoring mechanical ventilation with point of care ultrasound, which is an available modality in most ICUs. Another unique chapter describes how to connect more than one patient to one ventilator in case of a shortage of machines. Written by experts in the field, Personalized Mechanical Ventilation is a timely and valuable resource for critical care physicians, nurses and respiratory therapists on the front lines of both COVID-19 and day-to-day care of mechanically ventilated patients in the ICU.

    Contents:
    Respiratory Physiology and mechanics at the bedside
    Principals of Mechanical Ventilation
    Understanding Circuit, Filters and Humidification
    Airway management during Mechanical Ventilation COVID 19
    Non-invasive ventilation, AVAPS and high-flow nasal Cannula
    Modes of Mechanical Ventilation
    Acute respiratory failure
    Mechanical Ventilation in trauma patient
    Mechanical ventilation in Obese patient
    Postoperative Mechanical ventilation (fast track)
    Guidelines to set the ventilator for (COVID-19)
    Prone position during Mechanical Ventilation
    Using one ventilator for multiple patients
    Ventilator associated pneumonia
    Mechanical ventilation during pregnancy
    The Art of Weaning and Extubation
    Mechanical ventilation in shock state
    Respiratory monitoring Clinical and technical consideration
    Role of Point of Care Ultrasound during Mechanical Ventilation
    Acute respiratory distress and ARDS like syndromes
    Patient-ventilator dyssynchrony
    Unilateral lung disease and differential lung ventilation
    Obstructive airways disease
    Mechanical ventilation during ECMO (VV/VA)
    Mechanical ventilation in Neurocritical care patient
    Common Troubleshooting in daily practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ali Dabbagh, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses the current and future impact of cellular and molecular medicine (CMM) on anesthesiology and perioperative medicine. It covers the topic from a translational perspective and describes the relevance of CMM to daily clinical practice. Taking a bench-to-bedside approach, chapters examine topics including perioperative acute and chronic management, perioperative organ protection, and novel pharmaceuticals. Personalized Medicine in Anesthesia, Pain and Perioperative Medicine is aimed at anesthesiologists and pain physicians, and will also be of interest to pharmacists and those working in cellular and molecular medicine.

    Contents:
    The role of personalized medicine in current and future clinical practice; the impact of cellular and molecular medicine in perioperative care.- Personalized anesthesia and genomics, transcriptomics, proteomics and metabolomics of anesthesia and pain management.- Personalized anesthesia in central and peripheral nervous system.- Personalized cardiac anesthesia.- Personalized anesthesia for lungs and respiratory tract.- Personalized medicine in pain management.- Personalized anesthesia for pediatrics and neonates.- Personalized anesthesia for musculoskeletal system.- Personalized anesthesia for renal and genitourinary system.- Personalized anesthesia for GI tract and hepatobiliary system.- Personalized critical care medicine.- Personalized anesthesia in hematologic and coagulation system.- Personalized medicine in anesthetic pharmacology.- Personalized medicine and perioperative stress response modification.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Peter J. Polverini, editor.
    Contents:
    Emerging Role of Personalized Medicine in Oral Health: Personalized Oral Health Care and the New Health Care Environment
    Omics Technology: Application to Oral Disease Prevention, Disease Prediction and Diagnosis
    Omics-Based Technology Development
    Personalized Medicine in Dental Practice: Personalized Oral Medicine and Transformation of Dental Practice
    Health Information Technology and Integrative Medicine
    Comprehensive Genetic Testing in Dental Practice
    Biomarkers for Individualized Oral Cancer Therapy
    Metabolomics and Oral Disease Diagnosis
    Companion Diagnostics in the Dental Office
    Genomics of Dental Caries and Caries Risk Assessment
    Genomics of Periodontal Risk Assessment and Disease Progression
    Personalized Oral Medicine and Public Health: Personalized Oral Medicine and Personalized Health Insurance
    The Economics of Personalized Oral Medicine
    Educating Dental Students and Dental Practitioners for the Practice of Personalized Oral Medicine
    Personalized Oral Health Care and the Future Oral Health Care Workforce
    Personalized Oral Medicine and the Global Diagnostic Market Place
    Opportunities and Challenges Shaping the Future of Personalized Oral Health Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Ives Cavalcante Passos, Benson Mwangi and Flávio Kapczinski.
    Summary: This book integrates the concepts of big data analytics into mental health practice and research. Mental disorders represent a public health challenge of staggering proportions. According to the most recent Global Burden of Disease study, psychiatric disorders constitute the leading cause of years lost to disability. The high morbidity and mortality related to these conditions are proportional to the potential for overall health gains if mental disorders can be more effectively diagnosed and treated. In order to fill these gaps, analysis in science, industry, and government seeks to use big data for a variety of problems, including clinical outcomes and diagnosis in psychiatry. Multiple mental healthcare providers and research laboratories are increasingly using large data sets to fulfill their mission. Briefly, big data is characterized by high volume, high velocity, variety and veracity of information, and to be useful it must be analyzed, interpreted, and acted upon. As such, focus has to shift to new analytical tools from the field of machine learning that will be critical for anyone practicing medicine, psychiatry and behavioral sciences in the 21st century. Big data analytics is gaining traction in psychiatric research, being used to provide predictive models for both clinical practice and public health systems. As compared with traditional statistical methods that provide primarily average group-level results, big data analytics allows predictions and stratification of clinical outcomes at an individual subject level. Personalized Psychiatry – Big Data Analytics in Mental Health provides a unique opportunity to showcase innovative solutions tackling complex problems in mental health using big data and machine learning. It represents an interesting platform to work with key opinion leaders to document current achievements, introduce new concepts as well as project the future role of big data and machine learning in mental health. .
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nico van Weert, Jan Hazelzet, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the work of pioneers in this field, in order to inspire their peers, healthcare leaders and an interested audience. Prior to the respective care practices, the authors describe the core of personalized care and illustrate its connections to value-driven care and evidence-based medicine. The last part of the book addresses organizational and other conditions under which personalized care can thrive. In the Netherlands, substantial work is being done on value-driven care and more is currently being discussed. This book focuses on the benefits of value-driven care for patients and healthcare providers alike. To do so, it explores a range of representative cases and scenarios, such as: Scenario 1: You are able to surgically remove the most difficult tumors and find out one day that you don't need to do so in all indicated patients. Later you can find out how to recognize when surgery isn't the best treatment for certain patients. And now your team has a fixed routine to find the optimal choice together with the patient. Scenario 2: You consider yourself to be a patient-centered doctor who is really in touch with their patients--until you ask them to report for themselves on how they are doing. In the "patient-reported outcomes" you see that you have completely missed an important aspect. Later, you can structurally integrate this into your outpatient clinic. Scenario 3: In line with the planning principles of your hospital, you see chronic patients once a year--and of course also 'as needed'--until your data shows you that you see patients too early or too late, but rarely when it would be most helpful. Later you can discover how to offer your consultation exactly on time--based on early signals and often even before the patient calls the clinic. This is what value-driven care is all about: care is of more significance to the patient when it is tailored to his or her unique situation. Recognizing the patient's needs, preferences and values, and structurally adapting care accordingly--that is the noble profession of value-driven care, which takes us an important step closer to the ideal of personalized care.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Personalized care as value-driven care
    Evidence Based Medicine and personalized care
    The IBD coach for person-oriented care
    Onco-geriatric MDO is based on treatment goals of older oncology patients
    I repair: EHealth application in the interest of the patient, healthcare professional and the BV. The Netherlands. a school example of value-driven care!
    Metabolic network for customized prevention and treatment
    Personal attention for the patient in Zorgpad Pituitary tumor
    Value-driven care for chronic kidney damage
    From process improvement aimed at quality and safety to a change process with care providers and patients to achieve personalized care: Radboudumc Basis op Orde
    Care monitor supports outcome-oriented care for patients with head and neck cancer
    Cleft lip and palate
    Turner
    Breast Cancer in the Region with Dashboard / The State of Patient-Centered Breast Cancer Care: an Academic Center's Experience and Perspective
    Pregnancy and childbirth care
    Better experiences of rheumatism patients through value-driven patient journey
    Organizational bed for person-centered care
    Interprofessional learning and working
    With regional funding towards transparent and personalized care. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Masakazu Toi, Eric Winer, John Benson, Suzanne Klimberg, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I Treatment for the Patients Having Breast Cancer High-Risk
    Chapter I Risk-Reducing Surgery for Breast Cancer Patients with BRCA Mutations
    Chapter 2 Prophylactic Risk Reducing Surgery for Breast Cancer
    Chapter 3 Merits and Demerits of Practice for Hereditary Breast and Ovarian Cancer Syndrome (Advices and Issues)
    Part II Axillary Treatment
    Chapter 4 Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy and Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy in Breast Cancer Patients
    Chapter 5 Axillary Reverse Mapping (ARM) as a Means to Reduce Lymphedema During Sentinel Lymph Node or Axillary Node Dissection
    Chapter 6 Ultrasound for Axillary Staging
    Chapter 7 One Step Nucleic Acid Amplification(OSNA)Assay for Primary Breast Cancer
    Chapter 8 Management of the Clinically Node-Negative Axilla in Primary Breast Cancer
    Chapter 9 Lymphatic Mapping and Optimization of Sentinel Lymph Node Dissection
    Part III Radiation therapy
    Chapter 10 Personalization of Radiotherapy for Breast Cancer
    Chapter 11 New Technologies in Radiation Therapy
    Chapter 12 Radiotherapy Following Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy in Locally Advanced Breast Cancer
    Part IV Preoperative Hormone Therapy
    Chapter 13 Novel Translational Research of Neoadjuvant Endocrine Therapy
    Chapter 14 Alterations of Biomarkers by Neoadjuvant Endocrine Therapy
    Part V Preoperative chemotherapy
    Chapter 15 Essence of Neoadjuvant Therapy
    Chapter 16 The challenge to Overcome Triple Negative Breast Cancer Heterogeneity
    Chapter 17 Surgical Management of Breast Cancer after Preoperative Systemic Treatment
    Chapter 18 Imaging of Tumor Response by Preoperative Systemic Treatment
    Part VI Preoperative anti-HER2 therapy
    Chapter 19 Human Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (HER) Family Molecular Structure
    Chapter 20 Locoregional Therapy Following Neoadjuvant Therapy for HER2-Positive Breast Cancer: Opportunities and Challenges
    Part VII Mathematical prediction/assessment model
    Chapter 21 Nomograms to predict positive resection margin and to predict 3 or more positive lymph nodes
    Chapter 22 Practical Use of Nomograms
    Chapter 23 Data Mining and Mathematical Model Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Thomas Bieber, Frank Nestle, editors.
    Summary: This book is a quick reference guide to the new, more personalized approaches to the management of skin disorders that have emerged as a result of progress in our understanding of the genetic background and pathophysiology of skin diseases and the diversity of mechanisms underlying their clinical heterogeneity. A wide range of personalized and targeted therapies are described, including those for different skin cancers, chronic inflammatory skin diseases, and autoimmune diseases. In addition, readers will find that the book documents how research results in personalized medicine can be effectively transferred to dermatological practice and looks forward to future treatments that might be developed on the basis of recent research findings. The authors are all recognized experts in the field, and the text is presented in a reader-friendly format and well illustrated.

    Contents:
    Definition and Scientific Background of Personalized Management
    Dermato-Oncology: Malignant Melanoma
    A Personalized Approach to the Treatment of Basal Cell Carcinoma
    From Single Actinic Keratosis to Field Cancerization
    Cutaneous T Cell Lymphoma
    Merkel-Cell Carcinoma and Sarcomas
    Chronic Inflammatory Skin Diseases: Personalized Management of Atopic Dermatitis
    Immunosuppressors or Biologicals for Distinct Forms of Psoriasis?
    Autoimmune Diseases: Acknowledging the Clinical Heterogeneity of Lupus Erythematosus
    Bullous Diseases
    Vasculitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Stanley J. Szefler, Fernando Holguin, Michael E. Wechsler.
    Summary: Personalized medicine is a rapidly emerging area in health care, and asthma management lends itself particularly well to this new development. This practical resource by Dr. Stanley J. Szefler helps you navigate the many asthma medication options available to your patients, as well as providing insights into those which may be introduced within the next several years.

    Contents:
    A population management model of asthma and allergy / Tari Haahtela, Olof Selroos
    Population health management / Monica J. Federico, Katherine Johnston
    Management of severe asthma in adults / Eileen Wang, Nicole Barberis, Rohit Katial
    Management and prevention of severe asthma in children / Anne M. Fitzpatrick
    Exhaled nitric oxide as a biomarker for asthma in children / Joseph D. Spahn, Jonathan Malka
    Blood and sputum eosinophils as a biomarker for selecting and adjusting asthma medication / Claudia L. Gaefke, Tara F. Carr
    Regulatory aspects of pediatric biomarkers for assessing medication response / Gilbert J. Burckart, Dionna J. Green
    Discovery and validation of new biomarkers fo personalizing asthma therapy / Kian Fan Chung
    Pharmacogenomics and applications to asthma management / Emily J. Pennington, Michael E. Wechsler, Victor E. Ortega
    Environmental assessment and control / Perdita Permaul, Wanda Phipatanakul
    Phenotype and genotype determinants of asthma treatments / Fernando Holguin
    Predicting and preventing asthma exacerbations / Dr. Heather Hoch, Dr. Andrew H. Lui
    School-centered asthma programs / Lisa Cicutto
    Systems biology approaches to asthma management / Yasmeen Nkrumah-Elie, Nichole Reisdorph
    The microbiome in asthma / Yvonne J. Huang
    Preventing the development of asthma / Jeffrey R. Stokes, Leonard B. Bacharier
    Identifying and preventing the progression of asthma to chronic obstructive pulmonary disease / Padmaja Subbarao, Malcolm R. Sears
    Imaging procedures and bronchial thermoplasty for asthma assessment and intervention / Shweta Sood, Mario Castro
    Future directions in asthma management / Stanley J. Szefler, Michael E. Wechsler.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    by Dennis L. Dresang.
    Contents:
    Part Part I: Introduction
    chapter 1 Introduction: Personnel Management in Government Agencies and Nonprofit Organizations
    part Part II: Public Policies for Personnel Management in Government Agencies and Nonprofit Organizations
    chapter 2 The Development of the Merit System
    chapter 3 Ethics, Rights, and Responsibilities
    chapter 4 Diversity
    chapter 5 Productivity
    chapter 6 Organization for Personnel Management
    part Part III: Organizational Needs
    chapter 7 Succession Planning
    chapter 8 Position Analysis and Job Evaluation
    chapter 9 Performance Evaluation
    chapter 10 Selecting Employees
    part Part IV: Employee Needs
    chapter 11 Employee Training and Development
    chapter 12 Health and Safety
    chapter 13 Discipline and Dismissal
    chapter 14 Compensation
    chapter 15 Collective Bargaining
    part Part V: Conclusion
    chapter 16 Summary and Conclusions.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Mayuki Aibiki, Susumu Yamashita, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a valuable new perspective on Post-Cardiac Arrest Syndrome (PCAS), which was defined as system failure following whole-body ischemia-reperfusion injuries by the 2008 International Liaison Committee on Resuscitation. Recently, improving the survival rate of PCAS has become a major priority all over the world. A Perspective on Post-Cardiac Arrest Syndrome addresses various aspects, including: neurological outcomes in non-convulsive status epilepticus, target temperature management, interventions for PCAS after acute coronary syndrome, the significance of measuring lactate clearance, a specific scoring system in prognostication for PCAS, therapeutic indications for suicide hanging cases. This book will help a broad readership, including emergency physicians, intensivists, cardiologists and neurologists treating PCAS patients, to understand the history, current issues and future challenges in PCAS, presented by respected experts in this field.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Perumana R. Sudhakaran, editor ; co-edited by Oommen V. Oommen, M. Radhakrishna Pillai.
    Summary: Being a complex disease that affects millions of people world over, cancer research has assumed great significance. Translational cancer research transforms scientific discoveries in the laboratory or population studies into clinical application to reduce incidence of cancer, morbidity and mortality. It is becoming increasingly evident that cancer is a preventable disease. The IVth International Symposium on Translational Cancer Research held in Udaipur, India in December 2011, discussed various aspects of the biological processes in cancer cells and approaches to cancer prevention.

    Contents:
    1. Nutrition in Cancer: Evidence Based Nutrition Recommendations in Cancer Patients and Survivors
    2. Tumor Stem Cell Enrichment by Anticancer Drugs: A Potential Mechanism of Tumor Recurrence
    3. Curcumin: A potent candidate to be evaluated as a chemosensitizer in paclitaxel chemotherapy against cervical cancer
    4. Azadirachta indica (Neem) and Neem Limonoids as Anticancer Agents: Molecular Mechanisms and Targets
    5. In vitro studies on the antioxidant/antigenotoxic potential of aqueous fraction from Anthocephalus cadamba bark
    6. Possible involvement of Signal Transducer and Activator of Transcription-3 (STAT3) Signaling Pathway in the Initiation and Progression of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    7. Simple Sequence Repeats In 5? and 3? flanking sequences of Cell Cycle Genes
    8. Mechanisms of Chemopreventive Activity of Sulforaphane
    9. Reciprocal relationship between VE-cadherin and Matrixmetalloproteinase expression in Endothelial cells and its Implications to Angiogenesis
    10. Androgen receptor expression in human thyroid cancer tissues: a potential mechanism underlying the gender bias in the incidence of thyroid cancers
    11. Novel co-ordination complexes of a few essential trace metals: Cytotoxic properties and lead identification for drug development for cancer
    12. Why Gallbladder Cancer is common in Gangetic Belt?
    13. Stress & Cancer Risk: The Possible Role of Work Stress.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ena Ray Banerjee.
    Summary: "Perspectives in Inflammation Biology" outlines detailed studies using preclinical murine models in Inflammation. The book is meant for academicians, industry persons, research scholars and students alike. The detailed perspective for a beginner and the exhaustive methodologies and analyses outlined, for the veteran researcher, makes this book a unique link between someone who is thinking of embarking on a study of inflammation and one who is delving deep into this area of specialization. The book deals with asthma and allergy as specific disease areas of inflammation of the lung, aseptic peritonitis as a disease of systemic inflammation and details how each role player in its pathophysiology has a unique niche of activity. Data acquisition, sequentiality and analyses in context demonstrate how each role player is validated systematically to become a target for drug discovery. Methods and models used in the course of my work and their relevance will demonstrate to the researcher how a study can be developed from an idea. Further into a researcher's ongoing work, this book is meant to stimulate new questions and pave ways for better dissection of a phenomenon. The highlights of this book are the detailed tables tabulating sub species of immune cells, their inflammatory recruitment indices, their translation into tissue-to-tissue traffic of the inflammatory stimulus and the delicate interplay of resident structural cells, cells recruited from circulation, their feedback poiesis in bone marrow, their instruction in the lymphoid organs and tissues as well as the non-cellular mediators synthesized from corresponding genetic instruction. The book shall definitely help students and researchers how a disease can be simplified from its complex ramifications and network of implications and put back into perspective and the whole thing falls into place without an intimate understanding of the mechanism and the compelling circumstances that causes a disease, a drug hunter cannot hope to begin her quest. To find the Achilles heel and effectively neutralize the enemy!

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Pulmonary and Systemic inflammation
    Chapter 2. Preclinical models of acute and chronic models of lung inflammation
    Chapter 3. Studying the roles of some key molecules in acute allergic asthma
    Chapter 4. Role of integrins [alpha]4 and [alpha]2 onset and development of chronic allergic asthma in mice
    Chapter 5. Role of integrin [alpha]4 (VLA- Very Late Antigen 4) in lymphopoiesis by short and long term transplantation studies in genetic knockout model of mice
    Chapter 6. Studying the roles of some critical molecules in systemic inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Olav Giere.
    Summary: PRELIMINARY Although of high abundance, diversity and ecological importance, meiofauna is little covered by relevant scientific media. How can this negligence be overcome? The present treatise highlights promising meiofauna research fields, selected both from basic and applied science, as well as new methods that could strengthen the potential of meiobenthology. Selected recent meiofauna studies, often supported by rapidly advancing gene-based methods, underline the relevance and potential of meiobenthology revealing characteristics and harassments of ecosystems, not the least in extreme habitats. Also in the more classical domains such as taxonomy and phylogeny, progress in meiobenthos research defines a new and deeper scientific understanding.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface and Acknowledgements; Contents; List of Figures; 1 Introduction; References; 2 Fields of General Scientific Importance and Public Interest; 1 New Areas, Novel Communities, Exotic Biotopes; 2 The Deep-Sea-More Than an Interesting 'No Man's Land'; 3 Newly Accessible Polar Regions; References; 3 Pollution and Meiofauna-Old Topics, New Hazards; 1 Water Acidification by CO2 Increase; 2 Microplastics and Plastic Fibres; 3 Oil Spills at the Deep-Sea Floor; 4 Petroleum Hydrocarbons and Groundwater Aquifers; References; 4 Future Trend Lines in Ecological Meiobenthos Research 1 Aspects of Biodiversity 2 Reflections on Distribution, Dispersal and Colonization; 3 Organismic Interactions-Meiofauna Between Microbiota and Macrofauna; References; 5 Physiology, Biochemistry and Meiofauna-A Rarely Touched Terrain; 1 Hypoxia, Anoxia and Hydrogen Sulphide-Fields of Challenge; 2 Temperature-A Principal Physiological Driver; 3 Fatty Acids and Stable Isotopes as Biomarkers; 4 Physiological Pathways Revealed by the Genetic Background; References; 6 Towards an Integrated Triad: Taxonomy, Morphology and Phylogeny; 1 Advances at the Methodological Basis 2 New Trends Reviving 'Old Morphology'3 Phylogeny and Evolution-Meiofauna at the Deep Nodes; References; 7 Epilogue; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Sang-Hie Lee, Merry Lynn Morris, Santo V. Nicosia.
    Summary: Performing Arts Medicine (PAM) is a growing area of specialization within the performing arts field, which addresses the multi-faceted health and wellness of performing artists. This sub-discipline within performing arts is interdisciplinary in nature, involving the expertise of performing arts educators and researchers, physicians and other health professionals. This first of its kind text appeals to a very wide audience that includes performing arts clinical practitioners and health science researchers as well as performing arts pedagogues and performing arts students. The first part of the text gives the reader an overview of the field and discusses over-arching themes and issues in PAM. Part two presents an array of music and dance research involving primarily case studies that address significant issues of concern for performing artists and have implications for pedagogical practice. Part three provides research-based perspectives derived from professionals sharing their in-practice experiences. Finally, part four describes useful PAM models of implementation supporting the needs of performing artists in different settings. Written by experts in the field, Perspectives in Performing Arts Medicine Practice is a valuable resource for performing arts physicians, educators and researchers.

    Contents:
    Overview of Performing Arts Medicine
    This Wide and Universal Stage: How Empathy and Presence Inform the Contribution of Theatrical Practice to the Physician's Art
    Best of Both Worlds: An Odyssey of Medicine and Music
    Current Health Issues of Performing Artists: Implications for Health Promotion
    Exploring the Intersections of Arts and Medicine through the Painters' Lens
    Development of an Exercise Program for the Prevention of Playing Related Musculoskeletal Problems among Violinists
    Nikolai Bernstein's Theory of Movement Construction as a Foundation of Flow in Piano Technique
    Breathing Techniques in Collegiate Vocalists: The Effects of the Mind-Body Integrated Exercise Program on Singers' Posture, Tension, Efficacy and Respiratory Function
    Health Benefits of Culturally Oriented Dance
    Analyzing the Use of the Fifth Position in Dance Training
    A Case Report: Using Multimodalities to Examine a Professional Pianist with Focal Dystonia
    ^Discrepancies in Pianists Experiences in Playing Acoustic and Digital Pianos
    Musculoskeletal and Associated Conditions in the Instrumental Musician
    Experiences in Music Performance Anxiety: Exploration of Pedagogical Instruction among Professional Musicians
    Distilling Dart: Minding Bodily Approaches to Performance Through a Framework for Integration and the Alexander Technique
    Individualizing Training for Dancers
    Creating a Motor Learning Model for Dance Training
    Voice and Dance Technique Integration: Triple Threat or Double Trouble?
    The Role of Nutrition in Injury Prevention among Ballet Dancers
    When Prevention Makes Good Music
    Exploring Traditional Chinese Medicine in Musician Health
    Youth Dance Fundamental Movement Skills and Assessment
    Promoting Resilience and Fostering Mental Health Wellness Among University Dance Students
    ^Development of A Multidisciplinary Approach to Wellness and Injury Management at an Intensive Youth Orchestra Summer Festival
    Clinical Care of Performing Arts Students in the University Setting: A Successful Model with Wide Potential.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Perspectives in psychiatry to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    edited by Arthur N. Popper and Richard R. Fay.
    Contents:
    A brief history of SHAR
    Structures, mechanisms, and energetics in temporal processing
    Human auditory cortex: in search of the flying Dutchman
    From cajal to the connectome: building a neuroanatomical framework for understanding the auditory system
    Recording from hair cells
    Three decades of tinnitus-related research
    The sense of hearing in fishes
    A quarter-century's perspective on a psychoacoustical approach to loudness
    Nonsyndromic deafness: it ain't necessarily so
    Evolving mechanosensory hair cells to hearing organs by altering genes and their expression: the molecular and cellular basis of inner ear and auditory organ evolution and development
    The implications of discharge regularity: my forty-year peek into the vestibular system
    Aging, hearing loss, and speech recognition: stop shouting, i can't understand you
    Cochlear mechanics, otoacoustic emissions, and medical olivocochlear efferents: twenty years of advances and controversies along the areas ripe for new work
    Examining fish in the sea: a European perspective
    The behavioral study of mammalian hearing
    Hearing in insects: the why, when, and how
    The cognitive auditory system: the role of learning in shaping the biology of the auditory system
    Fundamentals of hearing in amniote vertebrates
    Directional hearing in insects and other small animals: the physics of pressure-difference receiving ears
    Distributed cortical representation of sound locations
    Pitch: mechanisms underlying the pitch of pure and complex tones
    Unavoidably delayed: apersonal perspective of twenty years of research on a sound localization cue
    Size matters in hearing: how the auditory system normalizes the sounds of speech and music for source size
    A changing view of the auditory system obtained from the ears of bats
    From cave fish to pile driving: a tail of fish bioacoustics
    Current topics in the study of sound conduction to the inner ear
    From degenerative debris to neuronal tracing: an anterograde view of auditory circuits
    Adventures in bionic hearing
    My dull deaf ears: four millennia of acquired hearing loss
    What's the use of genetics?
    Advances in the understanding of binaural information processing: consideration of the stimulus as processed
    Temporal processing: observations on the psychophysics and modeling of temporal integration and temporal resolution
    Psychoacoustics and auditory perception
    Appendix. The first 49 volumes.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rita Borg Xuereb, Julie Jomeen, editors.
    Summary: The book Perspectives on Midwifery and Parenthood explores contemporary issues relating to parenthood and midwifery. This book bridges a gap in the literature, where it highlights the close and unique relationships that midwives, nurses, doctors, other health care professionals and students enjoy with women and men during their transition to parenthood. Midwives work in close contact with and address the diverse needs of women and men during one of the most critical life's transitions, preconception, pregnancy, childbirth and early parenting and its long term implications on the psychosocial, emotional, physical and spiritual wellbeing of parents and infants. The chapters cover the transition and preparation for parenthood, midwives and parental-fetal-tie in pregnancy, perinatal mental health, maternal well-being, infertility, repeated loss and surrogacy, supporting early parenting following preterm birth, adolescent pregnancy and early parenthood, social challenges and parenthood including drug and alcohol use in pregnancy, intimate partners violence, migrants and transition to parenthood, fathers transition to parenthood, diversity of family formation - LGBTQ+ parents, breastfeeding, the role of spirituality during pregnancy, and midwifery and parenthood. Each person is unique and so is the response to parenthood, as the mother, father and family embark on this new lifeworld, a lifelong commitment. The book is a compendium of contemporary research depicting the strengths, opportunities, and recommendations how midwives and other health care professionals can nurture optimal, compassionate, respectful person- and family-centred care during pregnancy and early parenting, the transition to parenthood. .

    Contents:
    1. Midwifery and the Transition to Parenthood
    2. Preparation for Parenthood
    3. The Parental-Fetal Tie During Pregnancy
    4. Well-Being and Early Motherhood
    5. Midwifery and Perinatal Mental Health
    6. Infertility, Repeated Loss, and Surrogacy
    7. Supporting Early Parenting Following Preterm Birth
    8. Adolescent Pregnancy and Early Parenting
    9. Drug and Alcohol Use in Pregnancy and Early Parenthood
    10. Violence, Abuse and Coercive Control in Pregnancy and Early Parenting
    11. Migrants, Midwives, and the Transition to Parenthood
    12. Midwives and the Transition to Fatherhood
    13. Diversity of Family Formation: LGBTQ+ Parents
    14. Spirituality and Spiritual Care in the Transition to Motherhood
    15. Breastfeeding: Womens Experiences in the Transition to Motherhood
    16. Perspectives on Midwifery and Parenthood.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    volume editors, Hiroo Yokozeki, Hiroyuki Murota, Ichiro Katayama.
    Contents:
    New pathologies of skin disorders identified from the history of perspiration research / Yokozeki, H.
    Classification of systemic and localized sweating disorders / Ohshima, Y.; Tamada, Y.
    New findings on the mechanism of perspiration including aquaporin-5 water channel / Inoue, R.
    Old and new approaches for assessing sweating / Murota, H.
    Sweat as an efficient natural moisturizer / Shiohara, T.; Sato, Y.; Komatsu, Y.; Ushigome, Y.
    Genetic disorders with dyshidrosis : ectodermal dysplasia, incontinentia pigmenti, fabry disease, and congenital insensitivity to pain with anhidrosis / Wataya-Kaneda, M.
    Histamine modulates sweating and affects clinical manifestations of atopic dermatitis / Takahashi, A.; Tani, S.; Murota, H.; Katayama, I.
    Sweating in systemic abnormalities : uremia and diabetes mellitus / Murota, H.
    Abberant sudomotor functions in Sjögren's syndrome : comparable study with atopic dermatitis on dry skin manifestation / Katayama, I.
    Analysis and management of acquired idiopathic generalized anhidrosis / Satoh, T.
    Dyshidrotic eczema and its relationship to metal allergy / Nishizawa, A.
    Pathophysiology and treatment of hyperhidrosis / Fujimoto, T.
    New etiology of cholinergic urticaria / Tokura, Y.
    Sweat allergy / Hiragun, T.; Hide, M.
    Perspiration functions in different ethnic, age, and sex populations : modification of sudomotor function / Lee, J.-B.; Kim, J.-H.; Murota, H.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Sarah Klamroth ; with a preface by Prof. Dr. Klaus Pfeifer and Dr. Simon Steib.
    Summary: Sarah Klamroth describes a novel treadmill training device, which applies additional perturbations to the walking surface and thereby simulating an uneven surface. In a pilot study the author investigated the immediate effects on gait and postural control in patients with Parkinson's Disease after a single training session of perturbation treadmill training. The results show that perturbation treadmill training is feasible for mildly to moderately affected Parkinson patients, and that one training session led to improvements in overground walking speed and gait variability in these patients. Contents Devices for Perturbation Treadmill Training Motor Adaptations Gait and Postural Control in Parkinson's Disease Target Groups Scientists and students in the field of physical therapy, sport science, and neurology practitioners in the field of physical therapy, sport science, neurology, and rehabilitation. About the Author: Sarah Klamroth is Physical Therapist and Sport Scientist, and currently she does her PhD with a focus on Physical Activity and Quality of Life in Parkinson's Disease at the Department of Sport Science and Sport (Division of Exercise and Health, Prof. Dr. Klaus Pfeifer) of the Friedrich-Alexander-University Erlangen Nuremberg.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    Y96 .A84
    5
  • Digital
    edited by Omkar.
    Summary: This book comprehensively compiles information on some of the major pests that afflict agricultural, horticultural and medicinal crops in particular as well as many polyphagous pests. Not only does this book deal with the pests of common globally produced crops it also addresses those of rarely dealt with crops such as seed spices, medicinal and aromatic plants. While the perspective of insect pests is largely Indian and South East Asian in context, the book does deal with globally problematic pests, particularly polyphagous ones. Not only will the readers be acquainted with the pests, their damaging potential and their life cycle but also with the latest methods of managements including ecofriendly measures being employed to keep pest populations at manageable levels. The 27 chapters in the book, are grouped into four sections primarily based on crop types, viz. pest of agricultural, horticultural and medicinal crops, and polyphagous pests, making the book easy to navigate. Each of the chapters is comprehensive and well illustrated and written by academicians who have dedicated their entire lives to the study of a particular crop-pest complex. The final chapter of this book provides an overview on the principles and processes of pest management.

    Contents:
    Agricultural crops
    Horticultural crops
    Medicinal crops
    Polyphagous pests and management practices.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Eugene C. Lin, MD, Clinical Assistant Professor of Radiology, Department of Radiology, Virginia Mason Medical Center, University of Washington, Seattle, Washington, USA, Abass Alavi, MD, MD(Hon), PhD(Hon), DSc(Hon), Professor of Radiology and Neurology, Director of Research Education, Department of Radiology, Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, USA.
    Summary: Top-selling, concise guide to PET and PET/CT imaging from distinguished radiologists, now in a new edition! PET and PET/CT have been increasingly used as effective imaging modalities in the management of patients with cancer, neurologic disease, musculoskeletal disease, and cardiac disease. PET and PET/CT: A Clinical Guide, Third Edition by world renowned molecular imaging pioneer Abass Alavi and esteemed diagnostic and nuclear radiologist Eugene Lin features the latest advances in PET technology in an easy-to-read format. The book lays a solid foundation with opening chapters on scanner physi.

    Contents:
    PET and PET/CT: A Clinical Guide; Title Page; Copyright; Dedication; Contents; Preface; Contributors; Part I Basic Science; 1 The Physics of PET/CT Scanners; 2 The Basics of 2-[F-18]Fluoro-2-deoxy-D-glucose Radiochemistry and Biology; 3 The Role of Glucose and FDG Metabolism in the Interpretation of PET Studies; Part II Clinical Basics; 4 Patient Preparation; 5 Standardized Uptake Value; 6 Quantitative Whole-Body PET/CT Imaging; 7 Normal Variants and Benign Findings; 8 Interpretation of FDG PET Studies; 9 PET/CT; 10 PET/MRI: Introduction to Clinical Applications Part III Oncologic Applications11 Oncological PET by Anatomic Region; 12 Therapy Response; 13 Brain Neoplasms; 14 Head and Neck Cancer; 15 Thyroid Cancer; 16 Thoracic Neoplasms; 17 Breast Cancer; 18 Gastric, Esophageal, and Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumors; 19 Lymphoma; 20 Melanoma; 21 Hepatobiliary Tumors; 22 Pancreatic Cancer; 23 Gynecological Tumors; 24 Urological Tumors; 25 Colorectal Cancer; 26 Musculoskeletal Tumors; 27 18F Sodium Fluoride PET/CT in Bone; 28 68Ga-Based Imaging Techniques; Part IV Nononcologic Applications; 29 Pediatric PET/CT; 30 PET/CT in Radiation Therapy Planning 31 FDG-PET/CT in the Evaluation of Infection and Inflammation32 Neurological Applications of Fluorodeoxyglucose PET; 33 Neurological Applications of Nonfluorodeoxyglucose Tracers; 34 Cardiac PET and PET/CT; Index
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. Vries, Aren Waarde, editors ; Klaus L. Leenders, guest editor.
    Summary: PET and SPECT in Neurology highlights the combined expertise of renowned authors whose dedication to the investigation of neurological disorders through nuclear medicine technology has achieved international recognition. Classical neurodegenerative disorders are discussed as well as cerebrovascular disorders, brain tumors, epilepsy, head trauma, coma, sleeping disorders, and inflammatory and infectious diseases of the CNS. The latest results in nuclear brain imaging are detailed. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical neurologist and a nuclear medicine specialist to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state-of-the-art compendium will be valuable to anybody in the field of neuroscience, from the neurologist and the radiologist/nuclear medicine specialist to the interested general practitioner and geriatrician. It is the second volume of a trilogy on PET and SPECT imaging in the neurosciences, the other volumes covering PET and SPECT in psychiatry and in neurobiological systems.

    Contents:
    Nuclear Medicine Imaging Tracers for Neurology
    ¹⁸F-Fluorodeoxyglucose PET Procedures: Health Economic Aspects in Neurology
    Tracer Kinetic Modelling
    Quantification in Brain SPECT: Noninvasive Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements Using ⁹⁹mTc-Labeled Tracers
    MRI/PET Brain Imaging
    An Investigation of Statistical Power of [¹⁵O]-H₂O PET Perfusion Imaging: The Influence of Delay and Time Interval
    Molecular Imaging Using Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy in Neurology: The Past, the Present, and the Future
    The Default Network of the Brain
    Dementia Due to Neurodegenerative Disease: Molecular Imaging Findings
    Ass Imaging in Aging, Alzheimer's Disease and Other Neurodegenerative Conditions
    PET Imaging of the a4ss2* Nicotinic Acetylcholine Receptors in Alzheimer's Disease
    Neuroimaging Findings in Mild Cognitive Impairment
    Impact of the IWG/Dubois Criteria for Alzheimer's Disease in Imaging Studies
    Perfusion SPECT: Its Role in the Diagnosis and Differential Diagnosis of Alzheimer's Disease, with Particular Emphasis on Guidelines
    Nuclear Imaging in Frontotemporal Dementia
    Parkinson Dementia: PET Findings
    SPECT/PET Findings in Lewy Body Dementia
    Vascular Dementia
    Value of MIBG in the Differential Diagnosis of Neurodegenerative Disorders
    Linking Molecular Neurobiology to Therapeutic Approaches for Alzheimer's Disease with PET
    PET and SPECT Studies of Ageing and Cardiovascular Risk Factors for Alzheimer's Disease
    Carotid Plaque Imaging with SPECT/CT and PET/CT
    PET in Brain Arteriovenous Malformations and Cerebral Proliferative Angiopathy
    Transient Ischaemic Attack (Neuroimaging Findings)
    PET Reveals Pathophysiology in Ischemic Stroke
    Parkinson's Disease
    SPECT Imaging for Idiopatic M. Parkinson and Parkinsonian Syndromes: Guidelines and Comparison with PET and Recent Developments
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Parkinsonian Syndromes
    Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    PET in Huntington's Disease
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Dystonia
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Hyperkinetic Movement Disorders
    Clinical Applications of [¹²³I]FP-CIT SPECT Imaging
    PET Imaging of Microglia Activation in Neuropsychiatric Disorders with Potential Infectious Origin
    PET Imaging in Multiple Sclerosis: Focus on the Translocator Protein
    PET and SPECT Imaging of Neurotoxicity
    PET and SPECT in Hepatic and Uraemic Encephalopathy
    PET in Epilepsy
    SISCOM (Subtraction Ictal SPECT Coregistered to MRI)
    Nuclear Medicine Neuroimaging and Electromagnetic Source Localization in Nonlesional Drug-Resistant Focal Epilepsy
    Gliomas
    Single-Photon Emission Computed Tomography [Neuro-SPECT] Imaging of Brain Tumors
    The Value of ¹¹C-Methionine PET in the Differential Diagnosis Between Brain Tumor Recurrence and Radionecrosis
    Imaging Brain Metastases of Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Traumatic Brain Injury: Nuclear Medicine Neuroimaging
    Whiplash, Real or Not Real? A Review and New Concept
    PET Imaging in Altered States of Consciousness: Coma, Sleep, and Hypnosis
    Anaesthesia and PET of the Brain
    Modulation of Brain Functioning by Deep Brain Stimulation: Contributions from PET Functional Imaging
    Radionuclide Imaging Studies in Pediatric Neurology.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Klaus L. Leenders, guest editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the use of PET and SPECT in not only classic neurodegenerative disorders but also cerebrovascular disorders, brain tumors, epilepsy, head trauma, coma, sleeping disorders, and inflammatory and infectious diseases of the CNS. The new edition has been revised and updated to reflect recent advances and includes additional chapters, for example on the use of artificial intelligence and machine learning in imaging data analysis, the study of brain connectivity using PET and SPECT images, and the role of PET imaging in modulation of brain functioning by deep brain stimulation. The authors are renowned experts whose dedication to the investigation of neurological disorders through nuclear medicine technology has achieved international recognition. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical neurologist and a nuclear medicine specialist to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be invaluable for neurologists and radiologists/nuclear medicine specialists and will also be informative for interested general practitioners and geriatricians. Companion volumes on PET and SPECT in psychiatry and in neurobiological systems complete a trilogy.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Basics
    1: Nuclear Medicine Imaging Tracers for Neurology
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Glucose Consumption
    1.3 Translocator Protein TSPO
    1.4 GABA Receptor
    1.5 Dopaminergic System
    1.5.1 Dopamine Transporter (DAT)
    1.5.2 D1 Receptor
    1.5.3 D2 Receptor
    1.5.4 D2/D3 Agonists
    1.6 Beta-Amyloid Deposition
    1.7 NMDA Receptor, Glycine Transport
    1.8 P-Glycoprotein
    1.9 Cholinergic System
    1.10 Metabotropic Glutamate-5 Receptor
    1.11 Vesicular Monoamine Transporter
    1.12 Adenosine Receptors 1.13 Serotonergic System
    1.13.1 Serotonin Transporter
    1.13.2 5-HT Receptor Ligands
    1.14 Nonadrenergic System
    1.15 Opioid Receptors
    1.16 Monoamine Oxidase
    1.17 SV2A Receptors
    1.18 Sigma Receptors
    1.19 Tau Protein Deposition
    1.20 Phosphodiesterase
    1.21 P2X7 Receptor
    1.22 (Re)Myelination
    1.23 Cannabinoid Receptors
    1.24 Conclusions
    References
    2: Tracer Kinetic Modelling
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Principles of Modelling
    2.3 Single-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.4 Principles and Practice of Quantification 2.5 An Example: Measurement of CBF Using [15O]H2O
    2.6 Two-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.7 Reference Tissue Models
    2.8 Parametric Methods
    2.9 Conclusions
    References
    3: Quantification in Brain SPECT: Noninvasive Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements Using 99mTc-Labeled Tracers
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Method
    3.2.1 Theory of Graphical Analysis
    3.2.2 Brain Perfusion Index (BPI)
    3.2.3 Comparison of BPI and CBF Values Measured by Other Invasive Methods
    3.2.4 Alternative Approach to Estimation of BPI
    3.2.5 Calculation of Regional CBF from BPI 3.2.6 Consecutive rCBF Measurements at Baseline and Acetazolamide Challenge
    3.3 Clinical Application
    3.3.1 Cerebrovascular Diseases
    3.3.2 Heart Failure
    3.3.3 Idiopathic Normal Pressure Hydrocephalus
    3.3.4 Neurodegenerative Disorders
    3.3.5 Mood Disorders
    3.3.6 Other Neuropsychiatric Diseases
    3.4 Conclusion
    References
    4: From Positron to Pattern: A Conceptual and Practical Overview of 18F-FDG PET Imaging and Spatial Covariance Analysis
    4.1 18F-FDG PET Imaging
    4.1.1 Basic Concepts in PET
    4.1.2 18F-FDG PET Imaging 4.1.3 Studying Brain Function with 18F-FDG PET
    4.2 Analysis of Resting-State 18F-FDG PET Images
    4.2.1 Image Registration
    4.2.2 Normalization
    4.2.3 Analysis of Variance and Covariance
    4.2.4 Principal Component Analysis
    4.3 SSM PCA
    4.3.1 Defining the Data
    4.3.2 Normalization with the Scaled Subprofile Model (SSM)
    4.3.3 Calculating Eigenvectors from a Covariance Matrix
    4.3.4 Calculating Subject Scores and Selecting Disease-Related Components
    4.3.5 Prospective Application of the Pattern
    4.3.6 Validation
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Johan A. den Boer, guest editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, Iris E. Sommer.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the use of PET and SPECT in the classic psychiatric disorders such as depression, bipolar disorder, anxiety disorders, and schizophrenia. In addition, it discusses the application of these functional neuroimaging techniques in a variety of other conditions, including sleep disorders, eating disorders, autism, and chronic fatigue syndrome. The new edition has been extensively revised and updated to reflect the latest advances and results in nuclear imaging within the field. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical psychiatrist and a nuclear medicine expert to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be of value for all who have an interest in the field of neuroscience, from psychiatrists and radiologists/nuclear medicine specialists to interested general practitioners and cognitive psychologists. Companion volumes on the use of PET and SPECT in neurology and for the imaging of neurobiological systems complete a trilogy.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Paul G.M. Luiten, guest editor.
    Summary: PET and SPECT of Neurobiological Systems combines the expertise of renowned authors whose dedication to the development of novel probes and techniques for the investigation of neurobiological systems has achieved international recognition. Various aspects of neurotransmission in the brain are discussed, such as visualization and quantification of (more than 20 different) neuroreceptors, neuroinflammatory markers, transporters, and enzymes as well as neurotransmitter synthesis, -amyloid deposition, cerebral blood flow, and the metabolic rate of glucose. The latest results in probe development are also detailed. Most chapters are written jointly by radiochemists and nuclear medicine specialists to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be valuable to anyone in the field of clinical or preclinical neuroscience, from the radiochemist and radiologist/nuclear medicine specialist to the interested neurobiologist and general practitioner. It is the second volume of a trilogy on PET and SPECT imaging in the neurosciences. Other volumes focus on PET and SPECT in psychiatry and PET and SPECT in "neurology".

    Contents:
    BASICS: Animal Models for Brain Research
    Cerebral Glucose Metabolism
    Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements with Oxygen-15 Water PET
    Principles of Brain Perfusion SPECT
    The Impact of Genetic Polymorphisms on Neuroreceptor Imaging
    SYSTEMS: Imaging of Adenosine Receptors
    PET Tracers for Beta-Amyloid and Other Proteinopathies
    Imaging of Central Benzodiazepine Receptors in Chronic Cerebral Ischemia
    PET and SPECT Imaging of the Central Dopamine System in Humans
    PET Imaging of Endocannabinoid System
    Imaging Type 1 Glycine Transporters in the Central Nervous System Using PET
    Imaging Histamine Receptors Using PET and SPECT
    PET and SPECT Imaging of Brain Steroid Hormone Receptors
    Current Radioligands for the PET Imaging of Metabotropic Glutamate Receptors
    PET Imaging of Muscarinic Receptors
    Preclinical Aspects of Nicotinic Acetylcholine Receptor Imaging
    Development of Radioligands for In Vivo Imaging of NMDA Receptors
    Progress in PET Imaging of the Norepinephrine Transporter System
    PET Imaging of Opioid Receptors
    PET Imaging of ABC Transporters in the Blood-Brain Barrier
    PET Imaging of Translocator Protein Expression in Neurological Disorders
    Imaging of the Serotonin System: Radiotracers and Applications in Memory Disorders
    Serotonin Synthesis Studied with PET
    Monoamine Oxidase A and Serotonin Transporter Imaging with PET
    PET Imaging of Sigma-1 Receptors
    Radioligands for Imaging Vesicular Monoamine Transporters.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Adriaan A. Lammertsma, guest editor.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Basics
    1: Animal Models for Brain Research
    1.1 Introduction to Animal Modelling for Human Brain Disease
    1.1.1 Relevance of Animal Models
    1.1.2 Validity of Animal Models
    1.1.2.1 Face Validity
    1.1.2.2 Construct Validity
    1.1.2.3 Aetiological Validity
    1.1.2.4 Predictive Validity
    1.1.3 Homology, Analogy and Isomorphism
    1.1.4 Generalisation and Extrapolation
    1.2 Animal Models of Psychiatric Disorders
    1.2.1 The Endophenotype Concept in Psychiatry
    1.2.2 Approaches to Modelling Psychiatric Disease 1.2.2.1 Behavioural Approach
    1.2.2.2 Pharmacological Models
    1.2.2.3 Genetic Models
    1.2.3 Animal Models of Schizophrenia
    1.2.3.1 Aetiology and Symptomatology of Schizophrenia
    1.2.3.2 Validating Animal Models of Schizophrenia
    Electrophysiological Endophenotypes
    Cognitive Endophenotypes
    Locomotor Activity
    Sensory Discrimination
    Negative Symptoms
    1.2.3.3 Neurodevelopmental Schizophrenia Models
    1.2.3.4 Drug-Induced Schizophrenia Models
    Psychostimulant Models
    Hallucinogen Models
    1.2.3.5 Lesion-Induced Schizophrenia Models 1.2.3.6 Genetic Schizophrenia Models
    Inbred and Selectively Bred Rodent Strains
    Genetically Modified Models
    1.3 Animal Models of Neurological Disorders
    1.3.1 Approaches to Modelling Neurological Disorders
    1.3.2 Animal Models of Alzheimer's Disease
    1.3.2.1 Aetiology and Symptomatology of Alzheimer's Disease
    1.3.2.2 Validating Animal Models of Alzheimer's Disease
    Cognitive Symptoms
    BPSD-Related Symptoms
    Pathological Alterations
    Neurochemical Alterations
    1.3.2.3 Spontaneous and Selectively Bred Alzheimer's Disease Models 2.1.3.1 Volume of Distribution
    2.1.3.2 Input Function
    2.1.3.3 One-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.1.3.4 Two-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.1.3.5 Logan Plot
    2.1.4 Reference Tissue Models
    2.1.4.1 Binding Potential
    2.1.4.2 Simplified Reference Tissue Model
    2.1.5 Receptor Occupancy and Displacement
    2.1.6 Semiquantitative Approach
    2.1.7 Radioligands
    2.2 PET Motion Correction: State of the Art
    2.2.1 The Need for Awake PET: Anesthesia, Stress, and Its Impact on Small Animal PET
    2.2.2 Motion Correction in PET Reconstruction
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Peter S. Conti, Aarti Kaushik, editors.
    Contents:
    Normal Patterns and Variants
    Lung Neoplasms
    Breast Neoplasms
    Esophageal and Gastric Neoplasms
    Hepatobiliary, Pancreas, Adrenal, Melanoma, and GIST
    Colon Neoplasms
    Gynecologic Neoplasms: Cervical, Ovarian, Vulvar, Uterine, and Endometrial Cancer
    Urologic Neoplasms: Prostate, Bladder, and Renal Cell Carcinoma
    Lymphoma
    Musculoskeletal Neoplasms
    F-18 Fluoride Bone Scintigraphy
    Neuroradiology: Neoplasms and Epilepsy
    Dementia
    Pediatric Imaging
    Myocardial Viability
    Granulomatous Diseases
    Newer Tracers. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Amir H. Khandani, editor.
    Summary: This is a comprehensive guide for patient preparation, image acquisition, and image interpretation for PET/CT and PET/MR, specifically relevant to melanoma and sarcoma. Imaging specialists and referring physicians are often not as intimately aware of the particulars of PET imaging in management of patients with melanoma and sarcoma and how it could affect their treatment. This book fills that gap by presenting comprehensive information on melanoma, sarcoma, and the role of PET imaging in their diagnosis and management. The book begins by covering the basics of imaging for practicing physicians and trainees. Expert authors then further cover the biological concepts of melanoma and sarcoma and how they relate to imaging, particularly PET, the oncologist's perspective, and the surgeon's perspective on imaging for both the imaging specialist and the referring physician. Chapters review topics such as: PET/CT and PET/MR images in melanoma and sarcoma from a systemic approach, false-positives, false-negatives, pitfalls, and molecular imaging beyond PET. Images are used extensively throughout to enhance understanding for the reader. This is an ideal guide for radiologists, nuclear medicine physicians, oncologists, surgeons, trainees and technologists.

    Contents:
    What is Positron Emission Tomography?
    Patient Preparation for FDG PET with an Emphasis on Soft Tissue Sarcoma and Melanoma: What Matters (and What Doesn't)
    PET/CT and PET/MR in Soft Tissue Sarcoma and Melanoma Patients: What to Image and How to Image It
    Systematic Approach to Evaluation of Melanoma and Sarcoma with PET
    Review of PET/CT Images in Melanoma and Sarcoma: False-Positives, False-Negatives and Pitfalls
    PET beyond pictures
    The Role of PET/CT in Melanoma Patients: A Surgeon's Perspective
    PET in Sarcoma - Surgeons Point of View
    FDG PET in the Diagnosis and Management of Pediatric and Adolescent Sarcomas
    Beyond FDG: Novel Radiotracers for PET Imaging of Melanoma and Sarcoma
    Future Directions of PET and Molecular Imaging and Therapy with an Emphasis on Melanoma and Sarcoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Andrea Ciarmiello, Luigi Mansi, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreword
    Part 1-Basics
    Physics Of Hybrid Imaging
    Instrumentation
    Quantitation And Data Analysis In Hybrid PET/MRI Systems
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    Contrast Media
    Part 2-Most Frequent Clinical Applications
    FDG-PET in Dementia
    Amyloid imaging in dementia and related disorders
    Movement disorders: focus on Parkinsońs disease and related disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    PET/CT and PET/MRI in Neurology: Infection/Inflammation
    Brain Tumors
    Hybrid Imaging in Pediatric Central Nervous System Disorders
    Part 3-Most Frequent Clinical Applications
    Multimodality Imaging of Huntington's Disease
    Neuroimaging in Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    Hybrid imaging in vegetative state
    Hybrid imaging in cerebrovascular disease
    Hybrid imaging in Emergency Room
    Part 4-SWOT analysis
    SWOT Analysis and Stakeholder Engagement for Comparative Evaluation of Hybrid Molecular Imaging Modalities
    Worldwide Challenges and Opportunities of Hybrid Imaging: Perspective from the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)
    PET/CT vs PET/MRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Hiroshi Toyama, Yaming Li, Jun Hatazawa, Guang Huang, Kazuo Kubota, editors.
    Contents:
    1.2.3 Foam Cell Formation and FDG Uptake
    1.2.4 Polarization of Macrophages and Uptake of FDG
    1.2.5 Monitoring of the Therapeutic Effect
    1.2.6 Comparison with Other PET Tracers
    1.3 PET Imaging in Animal Model of Neuroinflammation 1
    1.3.1 Introduction
    1.3.2 Current Standard of Neuroinflammation Imaging
    1.3.3 Alternative Molecular Targets for Microglia Imaging
    1.4 PET Imaging in Animal Models of Neuroinflammation 2
    1.4.1 Introduction
    1.4.2 Brain Ischemia Model
    1.4.3 Traumatic Brain Injury Model
    1.4.4 Alzheimer's Disease Model 1.4.5 Other Models of Neuroinflammation
    1.4.6 New PET Tracer for Neuroinflammation
    1.4.7 Conclusion
    1.5 PET Imaging of Inflammation in the Peripheral System with [18F]FEDAC, a Radioligand for Translocator Protein (18 kDa)
    1.5.1 Introduction
    1.5.2 PET Imaging and Quantitative Analysis of TSPO in Rat Peripheral Tissues
    1.5.3 TSPO in Lung Inflammation
    1.5.4 TSPO in Nonalcoholic Fatty Liver Disease
    1.5.5 TSPO in Liver Damage
    1.5.6 TSPO in Liver Fibrosis
    1.5.7 TSPO in Multiple Sclerosis
    1.5.8 TSPO in Rheumatic Arthritis
    1.5.9 Conclusion 1.6 Role of Microglia in Neuroinflammation
    1.6.1 Introduction
    1.6.2 Microglia Diversity
    1.6.3 Microglia and Neuroinflammation
    1.6.4 Existence of Nontoxic Activated Form of Microglia in the Brain
    1.6.5 Direct Evidence of Neuroprotection by Microglia in the Brain
    1.6.6 Toxic Transformation of Microglia by Nef Protein Introduction
    1.6.7 CNS Cytokine Network
    1.7 Application of Preclinical PET Imaging for Infectious Diseases
    1.7.1 Introduction
    1.7.2 Imaging Laboratory for Infectious Diseases
    1.7.3 PET Imaging with Infectious Small Animals
    References 2: FDG-PET/CT in Patients with Inflammation or Fever of Unknown Origin (IUO and FUO)
    2.1 Role of FDG-PET/CT in the Diagnosis of Fever or Inflammation of Unknown Origin (FUO/IUO)
    2.1.1 What Is FUO?
    2.1.2 What Is IUO?
    2.1.3 Why FDG-PET/CT for FUO/IUO?
    2.1.4 Results of FDG-PET/CT for FUO/IUO
    2.1.5 Factors Affecting the Results
    2.1.5.1 Disease Prevalence and Positivity
    2.1.5.2 Markers of Inflammation
    2.1.5.3 Structured Evaluation FUO/IUO
    2.1.6 Conclusion
    2.2 Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis in FDG-PET/CT for Inflammatory Diseases
    2.2.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kanhaiyalal Agrawal, Annah Skillen, Abdulredha Esmail, Sharjeel Usmani, editors.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to provide concise information and quick reference on the basics and practice of PET/CT for beginners. The chapters are written by Nuclear Medicine experts from different countries with enormous experience in PET/CT practice. Starting with the basics of PET/CT describing physics and the use of radiopharmaceuticals in PET/CT, the book explores the principle of PET/CT in radiotherapy planning. The last five chapters explore normal variation, pitfalls and artefacts commonly seen with various routinely used PET radiotracers. The text is enriched by tables and highlighted clinical cases for better understanding. This book will be of interest mostly to nuclear medicine physicians and radiologists, but it may be appealing also to a wider medical community including oncologists and radiotherapists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Basic Principles of PET-CT imaging
    Chapter 2: Physics of PET and Respiratory Gating
    Chapter 3. The Physics of PET/CT for Radiotherapy Planning
    Chapter 4. 18F-FDG and Non-FDG PET Radiopharmaceuticals
    Chapter 5. PET/CT imaging: Patient instructions and preparation
    Chapter 6.18F-FDG PET/CT Imaging: Normal variants, pitfalls and artefacts.-Chapter 7: 68Ga-DOTA-peptides PET-CT: Physiological biodistribution, variants and pitfalls
    Chapter 8. 18F-methylcholine (FCH) PET-CT imaging: Physiological distribution, pitfalls and imaging pearls
    Chapter 9: 68Ga-PSMA PET/CT: Normal Variants, Pitfalls and Artefacts
    Chapter 10: 18F-NaF PET-CT Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Francesco Fraioli, editors.
    Summary: This well-illustrated pocket book offers up-to-date guidance on the clinical and research applications of PET/CT in the most common neurological and neuro-oncological disorders. The opening chapters cover the pros and cons of widely used radiological imaging techniques, scanners, and radiopharmaceuticals, with emphasis on the state of the art hybrid modalities, primarily PET/CT but also PET/MRI. Helpful information is provided on the clinical and research tracers used in neurodegenerative diseases, movement disorders, epilepsy and brain tumours. These four killers are then discussed in detail, highlighting the role of PET/CT and targeted tracers in their assessment and in radiotherapy planning. In addition, the clinical applications of PET/MRI are considered. Throughout, many images are included to better explain the diseases and the role of hybrid imaging, and the final chapter presents a large sample of teaching cases and files that will assist in daily clinical practice. The book has been compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society. It will be an excellent asset for nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, radiographers, neurologists and neurosurgeons.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgements; Contents; Contributors;
    1: Introduction to Brain Disorders; References;
    2: Radiological Imaging in Brain Disorders: An Overview; 2.1 Neuroimaging Modalities and Techniques; 2.1.1 Computed Tomography (CT); 2.1.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI); 2.1.2.1 Perfusion MRI; 2.1.2.2 MR Spectroscopy; 2.1.2.3 Diffusion Tensor Imaging; 2.1.2.4 Functional MRI (f-MRI); 2.2 Radiological Imaging in Neurodegenerative Diseases; 2.3 Radiological Imaging in Movement Disorders; 2.4 Radiological Imaging in Epilepsy; 2.5 Radiological Imaging in Neuro-Oncology 5.3 Frontotemporal Degeneration (FTD)5.4 Dementia of Lewy Body (DLB); 5.5 Other Neurodegenerative Diseases; 5.6 Advantages and Limitations; References;
    6: [18F]FDG-PET/CT in Movement Disorders; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Parkinson's Disease; 6.2.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.2.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.2.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.3 Multiple System Atrophy; 6.3.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.3.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.3.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.4 The Spectrum of Progressive Supranuclear Palsy and Corticobasal Degeneration; 6.4.1 Clinical Phenotypes 6.4.2 Neuropathology Findings6.4.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.5 Huntington's Disease; 6.5.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.5.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.5.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.6 Advantages and Limitations; 6.6.1 General Advantages; 6.6.2 General Limitations; References;
    7: 18F-FDG PET in Epilepsy; 7.1 Introduction; 7.2 Clinical Indications; 7.3 Classical Patterns; 7.3.1 Temporal; 7.3.2 Extratemporal; 7.3.3 Syndromes; 7.4 Advantages and Limitations; 7.5 Conclusion; References;
    8: PET in Neuro-Oncology; 8.1 Introduction 8.2 PET in Primary Glioma Diagnosis and Differential Diagnosis8.2.1 18F-FDG; 8.2.2 11C-MET; 8.2.3 18F-FET; 8.2.4 18F-FDOPA; 8.2.5 18F-CHO; 8.2.6 18F-FLT; 8.3 Amino Acid Tracers PET in Glioma Histological Subtyping; 8.4 PET in Glioma Grading; 8.4.1 18F-FET; 8.4.2 11C-MET; 8.4.3 18F-FDOPA; 8.4.4 18F-FLT; 8.5 Glioma Treatment Effect and Recurrence; 8.6 PET Tracers in Differentiating Recurrence from Treatment Effects; 8.7 Conclusion; References;
    9: 18F-FDG PET/CT Indications, Pitfalls and Limitations in Brain Imaging; 9.1 Introduction; 9.2 Indications
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mohsen Beheshti, Werner Langsteger, Alireza Rezaee.
    Contents:
    Head and neck cancers / Moshen Beheshti, Rathan M. Subramaniam, Alireza Rezaee, Martin Burian, and Werner Langsteger
    Lung cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Ken Hermann, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Michael Beheshti
    Breast cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Moshen Beheshti
    Gastroesophogeal cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Moshen Beheshti
    Gastoenteropancreatic neuroendocrine neoplasms / Moshen Beheshti, Alireza Rezaee, Markus Raderer, and Werner Langsteger
    Colorectal cancer / Moshen Beheshti, Alireza Rezaee, Ken Hermann, Markus Raderer, and Werner Langsteger
    Hepatobiliary cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Rathan M. Subramaniam, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Lymphoma / Alireza Rezaee, Heiko Schöder, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Gynecological cancers / Alireza Rezaee, Niklaus Schäfer, Norbert Avril, Lukas Hefler, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Prostate cancer / Mohsen Beheshti, Heiko Schöder, Jochen Walz, Alireza Rezaee, and Werner Langsteger
    Melanoma / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Niklaus Schäfer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Brain tumors / Karl-Josef Langen, Alexander Drzezga, and Norbert Galldiks.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Nagabhushan Seshadri, Chinnamani Eswar, editors.
    Summary: This pocket book offers a rapid and concise overview of the utility of PET/CT in the management of patients with cancer of unknown primary (CUP). Readers will gain an appreciation of the unique information provided by PET/CT on the molecular and metabolic changes associated with CUP, which can occur in the absence of corresponding anatomical alterations. Characteristic imaging appearances are documented with the aid of a series of teaching cases that serve to illustrate the potential improvements in patient management that may be achieved through early use of PET/CT in the diagnostic pathway. In addition, the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging is explained. The book is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging (compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society) and will be an excellent asset for all clinicians, nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, radiographers, and nurses who routinely work in multidisciplinary teams involved in the management of these patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Yong, Du, editor.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the science and practice of PET/CT imaging of colorectal malignancies. The role of PET/CT in these patients, the characteristic PET/CT findings, and the advantages and limitations of this hybrid modality are all clearly described. In addition, information is provided on clinical presentation, diagnosis, staging, pathology, management, and radiological imaging. The book is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is aimed at nuclear medicine/radiology residents and physicians, referring clinicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. Compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society, the series is the joint work of many colleagues and professionals worldwide who share a common vision and purpose in promoting and supporting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Tara Barwick, Andrea Rockall, editors.
    Contents:
    Causes
    Pathology
    Management
    Radiological Imaging
    Basic Principles of PET/CT Imaging
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    PET/CT in Gynecological Malignancies.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Nilendu Purandare, Sneha Shah, editors.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the role of PET/CT in malignancies of the hepatobiliary system and pancreas. Imaging findings characteristic of malignancies are described and illustrated, and attention drawn to normal variants and artifacts. In addition, information is presented on epidemiology, clinical presentation, pathology, staging, and management in order to provide the clinical insight required by the imaging specialist. The book will be of immense value to practicing nuclear physicians as well as hybrid imaging specialists, particularly during reading sessions and multidisciplinary team meetings. It will also serve as a quick reference for residents and fellows in the PET/CT department. The book is published within the series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society. The series is the joint work of professionals worldwide who share a common vision in promoting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Irfan Kayani, editor.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the practice of PET/CT imaging of Hodgkin's lymphoma. The role of PET/CT in Hodgkin's lymphoma, the characteristic findings and patterns, and the advantages and limitations of this hybrid modality are all clearly described. In addition, information is provided on clinical presentation, diagnosis, staging, pathology, management, and conventional radiological imaging. A useful pictorial atlas is included at the end of the book. PET/CT in Hodgkin's Lymphoma is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is aimed at referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. Compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society, the series is the joint work of many colleagues and professionals worldwide who share a common vision and purpose in promoting and supporting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Thomas Wagner, Sandip Basu, editors.
    Summary: This pocket book provides clinicians with the necessary information to understand the role of FDG PET/CT in infection and inflammation. It will help both in making appropriate imaging requests with adequate clinical information and in interpreting the report. The coverage encompasses a wide range of topics, including the role of PET/CT in pyrexia of unknown origin, vasculitis, autoimmune diseases, prosthetic joint infections, osteomyelitis and diabetic foot, immunodeficiency disease, and vascular graft surgery. The book will be a very useful guide to a great test that can provide significant assistance in patient management. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, in which leading professionals succinctly explain the importance of nuclear medicine in the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Sikandar Shaikh.
    Summary: This book covers all aspects of PET-CT including newer applications involving infection and inflammation and basic information on PET-CT new tracers. It explains the approach, protocols and miscellaneous applications about various infections and inflammation that helps in its early and better diagnosis in multiorgan and multisystem involvements in routine clinical practice. Chapters provide systematic approach to the diagnosis of various infections such as bacterial, viral, tuberculosis, inflammatory pathologies and overlap in coexisting tumors and superadded/associated infections. This book offers assistance to medical practitioners in understanding various advantages of PET-CT in single scan as compared to different modalities for diagnosis as well as oncologists dealing with concurrent malignant and non-malignant conditions, students, and interns.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    PET-CT Physics, Instrumentation and Techniques
    Physiological Variants in PET-CT
    Dual Time Point PET-CT Imaging
    PET-CT IN Fever of Unknown Origin
    PET-CT in Chest Infective Inflammatory Pathologies
    PET-CT in Myocardium, Epicardium and Pericardium Infective Inflammatory Pathologies
    PET-CT in Cardiovascular Pathologies
    PET-CT in Peripheral Vascular Pathologies
    PET-CT in Vasculitis
    PET-CT in Tuberculosis
    PET-CT IN Immunocompromised Status
    PET-CT in Polymyalgia Rheumatica
    PET-CT in Paediatric Infection and Inflammation
    PET-CT in Musculoskeletal Infections and Inflammations
    PET-CT in Evaluation of Prosthetic Joint Infections
    PET-CT in Urological Infections and Inflammations
    PET-CT in Viral Infections
    PET-CT in the Organ Transplantation
    Molecular Imaging in Infection and Inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Archi Agrawal, Venkatesh Rangarajan, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Michael S. Hofman, Rodney J. Hicks, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Valentina Ambrosini, Stefano Fanti, editors.
    Contents:
    Neuroendocrine Tumours: Epidemiology
    Pathology
    Management
    Radiological Imaging
    Radionuclide Imaging. PET/ CT in Neuroendocrine Tumors: Basic Principles of PET/ CT imaging
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    PET/ CT in Neuroendocrine Tumours.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Archi Agrawal, Venkatesh Rangarajan, Ameya D. Puranik, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date summary of the latest scientific developments on the use of PET-CT imaging in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma (NHL). It encompasses the entire spectrum of NHL from pathology to radiological and PET-CT imaging and to the management of NHL. The highlight of the book is the excellent pictorial depiction of normal variants, pitfalls and artifacts while exploring the different types of NHL and its manifestations. Each chapter, written by well-known and experienced oncologists and physicians, is enriched by a wide range of images to ensure a clear concept of PET-CT imaging in NHL and will definitely keep the readers interested. This book will be a useful tool for nuclear physicians, radiologists, referring clinicians and oncologists, as well as para-medical staff working in this field.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 - Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 2 - Pathology of Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 3 - Management of Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 4 Radiological imaging in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 5 PET-CT in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 6 PET-CT: Normal variants, artefacts and pitfalls in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 7 PET-CT in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma: Teaching cases. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Teresa Szyszko, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction and epidemiology
    2. Pathology of oesophageal cancer and gastric cancer
    3. Management of oesophageal and gastric cancers
    4. Radiological imaging in oesophageal and gastric cancers
    5. Basic principles of PET/CT imaging
    6. ¹⁸F-FDG and non-FDG PET radiopharmaceuticals
    7. PET/CT imaging: patient instructions and preparation
    8. ¹⁸F-FDG PET/CT imaging: normal variants, pitfalls and artefacts
    9. FDG-PET/CT in oesophageal and gastric cancer
    10. Oesophageal and gastric malignancy: pictorial atlas
    Appendix 1. Regional lymph node stations for staging esophageal cancer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Gary Cook, editor.
    Summary: This pocket book explains the significant and well-documented impact that PET/CT can have on the management of prostate cancer through the provision of high-quality evidence regarding function and structure. Up-to-date information is supplied on the relevance of PET/CT to diagnosis, treatment planning, and therapy, including the emerging role of PET/CT with PSMA. Readers will also find clear explanation of the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging and the value of PET/CT compared with conventional radiological imaging. The book will be an excellent asset for referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which presents contributions from professionals worldwide who share a common purpose in promoting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and Clinical Features of Prostate cancer
    Pathology of prostate cancer
    Management of Prostate Cancer
    Prostate cancer: Radiological Imaging
    The Role of PET/CT in Prostate Cancer Management
    Role of radiolabelled small molecules binding to PSMA in diagnosis and therapy of prostate cancer
    PET/CT in radiotherapy planning: current evidence in prostate cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sue Chua, editor.
    Summary: This pocket book offers a succinct but comprehensive overview of the role of PET/CT in radiotherapy planning. Individual chapters are devoted to specific application of the technique to particular tumor types, including non-small cell lung, gastrointestinal, head and neck squamous cell, prostate, gynecological, and pediatric tumors. Helpful information is also presented on the practical implementation of PET/CT in routine oncological practice. Technical and logistical issues are discussed, and guidance provided on potential problems and pitfalls and available solutions. The book will be invaluable in assisting readers to exploit PET/CT's ability to significantly improve delineation of tumor tissue through the addition of metabolic information to structural imaging data, thereby avoiding unnecessary radiation injury and associated complications while enhancing therapeutic effects and minimizing the risk of marginal recurrences. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sobhan Vinjamuri, editor.
    Summary: "This pocket book provides a comprehensive review of the current use of PET/CT in thyroid cancer, offering a multidisciplinary perspective and explaining the role of PET/CT in relation to other imaging modalities. A key aim is to help readers to choose the correct imaging modality to answer the clinical question at hand, thereby assisting in patient management. Highlights of the book include the exquisite depiction of normal variants, pitfalls, and artifacts and a pictorial atlas of the types of thyroid cancer and their imaging appearances. Readers will also find helpful information on the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging. The book will be an excellent asset for practitioners and trainees in Nuclear Medicine and members of endocrine and oncology teams. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, in which leading professionals succinctly explain the importance of nuclear medicine in the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions"--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Dragana Sobic Saranovic, Mariza Vorster, Sanjay Gambhir, Thomas Neil Pascual, editors.
    Summary: This book covers both the science of PET/CT imaging in tuberculosis and the impact that this technique can have on disease management through the provision of high-quality evidence regarding function and structure. The scientific principles of PET/CT, the radiopharmaceuticals used in the context of tuberculosis (FDG and non-FDG tracers), patient preparation, and imaging protocols are fully explained. Imaging findings obtained in different settings, including pulmonary and extrapulmonary tuberculosis, tuberculosis and HIV co-infection, and evaluation of response to antituberculous therapy, are described with the aid of many high-quality illustrations. Attention is drawn to mimics of tuberculosis, pitfalls, and limitations. The book will be an excellent asset for referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    1: Tuberculosis: A General Overview
    1.1 Introduction
    1.1.1 Epidemiology
    1.1.2 Geographic Distribution
    1.2 Risk Factors for Active TB (Progression from Latent TB Infection)
    1.3 Clinical Presentation
    1.4 Physical Examination
    1.5 Diagnosis
    1.5.1 Other Investigations
    1.5.2 Diagnosis of Latent Tuberculosis Infection (LTBI)
    1.5.3 Challenges in TB Diagnosis
    1.6 Special Categories
    1.6.1 TB and HIV
    1.6.1.1 Immune Reconstitution TB
    1.6.1.2 Drug-Resistant TB
    1.6.1.3 TB in Children 1.7 Future Developments
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    2: Diagnosis of Tuberculosis: Microbiological and Imaging Perspective
    2.1 Introduction
    2.1.1 Investigations-Microbiological Tests
    2.1.1.1 Mantoux Tuberculin Skin Test
    2.1.1.2 Interferon-Gamma Release Assays (IGRAs)
    2.1.1.3 Sputum Smear Microscopy
    2.1.1.4 Fluorescent Microscopy
    2.1.1.5 Mycobacterial Culture
    2.1.1.6 Molecular Test
    2.1.1.7 Drug Sensitivity Testing
    2.1.1.8 Biomarker Tests
    2.1.1.9 Challenges for Microbiological Diagnosis
    2.1.2 Imaging in TB
    2.1.2.1 Pulmonary Tuberculosis 2.1.2.2 Postprimary Tuberculosis
    2.1.2.3 Extrapulmonary Tuberculosis
    2.1.3 Tuberculous Lymphadenopathy
    2.1.3.1 Ultrasonography
    2.1.3.2 CT and MRI
    2.1.3.3 18F-FDG PET-CT
    2.1.4 Abdominal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.1 Abdominal Lymphadenopathy
    2.1.4.2 Peritoneal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.3 Gastrointestinal Tract Tuberculosis
    Barium Studies
    Computed Tomography
    2.1.4.4 Hepatosplenic Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.5 Adrenal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.6 Genitourinary Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.7 Renal Tuberculosis
    2.1.5 Female Genital Organs
    2.1.6 Male Genital Organs 2.1.7 Musculoskeletal Tuberculosis
    2.1.7.1 Tubercular Spondylitis
    Bone Scintigraphy
    18F-FDG PET-CT
    2.1.8 CNS Tuberculosis
    2.1.8.1 Tubercular Leptomeningitis
    2.1.8.2 Tubercular Pachymeningitis
    2.1.8.3 Tuberculoma
    Computed Tomography
    MRI
    2.1.8.4 Tubercular Abscess
    2.1.8.5 Rhombencephalitis
    2.1.8.6 Encephalopathy
    2.1.8.7 Spinal and Meningeal Involvement
    2.1.9 Other Tuberculosis
    2.1.9.1 Emerging Role of PET-CT: Challenges and Limitations
    2.1.9.2 TB Associated with HIV Infection
    2.2 Conclusion
    References 3: Radiological Imaging in Tuberculosis
    3.1 Primary Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.2 Postprimary Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.3 Radiological Patterns Encountered in Both Primary and/or Postprimary TB
    3.3.1 Miliary Tuberculosis
    3.3.2 Pleural Tuberculosis
    3.3.3 Tracheobronchial TB
    3.4 Complications
    3.5 Extrapulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.5.1 Genitourinary Tuberculosis
    3.5.2 Musculoskeletal Tuberculosis
    3.5.3 Central Nervous System Tuberculosis
    3.5.4 Gastrointestinal Tuberculosis
    References
    4: Management of Tuberculosis
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Prevention
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ignasi Carrio, Pablo Ros, editors.
    Summary: PET/MRI is an exciting novel diagnostic imaging modality that combines the precise anatomic and physiologic information provided by magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) with the molecular data obtained with positron emission tomography (PET). PET/MRI offers the promise of a simplified work flow, reduced radiation, whole-body imaging with superior soft tissue contrast, and time of flight physiologic information. It has been described as the pathway to molecular imaging in medicine. In compiling this textbook, the editors have brought together a truly international group of experts in MRI and PET. The book is divided into two parts. The first part covers methodology and equipment and comprises chapters on basic molecular medicine, development of specific contrast agents, MR attenuation and validation, quantitative MRI and PET motion correction, and technical implications for both MRI and PET. The second part of the book focuses on clinical applications in oncology, cardiology, and neurology. Imaging of major neoplasms, including lymphomas and tumors of the breast, prostate, and head and neck, is covered in individual chapters. Further chapters address functional and metabolic cardiovascular examinations and major central nervous system applications such as brain tumors and dementias. Risks, safety aspects, and healthcare costs and impacts are also discussed. This book will be of interest to all radiologists and nuclear medicine physicians who wish to learn more about the latest developments in this important emerging imaging modality and its applications.

    Contents:
    PET/MR system design
    Image distortions in clinical PET/MR imaging
    Workflow and Practical Logistics
    MR-PET in Breast Cancer
    PET/MRI in Evaluating Lymphomas
    PET-MRI of the Liver
    PET/MR IN COLORECTAL CANCER PET/MR in Brain Imaging
    MR-PET in Cardiology
    Risks and safety aspects of MR-PET
    Health care costs and impacts.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Andrei Iagaru, Thomas Hope, Patrick Veit-Haibach, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    James R. Ballinger.
    Summary: This book presents in a consistent format data on ~50 PET radiopharmaceuticals in clinical use. Parameters include basic chemical data, normal biodistribution and excretion, activity administered, radiation dosimetry, patient preparation, and clinical utility, together with a few key references. In some cases a representative image is presented. The organisation is first by clinical specialty (oncology, cardiology, neurology) and within each section by radionuclide (F-18, C-11, etc). This book will be of interest mostly to nuclear medicine physicians and trainees, but also to a wider medical community including radiologists, oncologists and radiotherapists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Oncology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 2: Oncology 11C-labelled agents
    Chapter 3: Oncology 68Ga-labelled agents
    Chapter 4: Oncology other agents
    Chapter 5: Cardiology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 6: Cardiology other agents
    Chapter 7: Neurology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 8: Neurology 11C-labelled agents
    Chapter 9: Neurology 15O-labelled agents.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Paul E. Christian, Nancy M. Swanston.
    Contents:
    PET radiopharmaceutical production
    PET radiopharmaceuticals
    Radiation principles and basic radiation detection devices
    PET instrumentation
    CT instrumentation
    Quality control and instrumentation artifacts
    Radiation safety in PET/CT
    Patient care and emergency procedures
    Oncology : patient preparation and imaging
    PET imaging in oncology
    Incorporation of CT and contrast media into PET practices
    Clinical artifacts
    PET imaging of the brain
    PET imaging of the heart.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.7.T62 C47 2015
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Vincenzo Savini.
    Summary: Pet-to-Man Travelling Staphylococci: A World in Progress explores Staphylococci, a dangerous pathogen that affects both humans and animals with a wide range of infection states. This bacteria can spread rapidly as a commensal organism in both humans and pets, and is an agent of disease. Staphylococci are potentially highly virulent pathogens which require urgent medical attention. In addition, Staphylococci remain a threat within hospital environments, where they can quickly spread across a patient population. This book explores the organisms' resistance to many compounds used to treat them, treatment failure and multidrug resistant staphylococci, amongst other related topics.

    Contents:
    1. Staphylococcal taxonomy
    2. Staphylococcal ecology and epidemiology
    3. Coagulase-positive and coagulase-negative staphylococci human diseases
    4. Coagulase-positive and coagulase-negative staphylococci animal diseases
    5. Transfer of staphylococci and related genetic elements
    6. Food-borne transmission of staphylococci
    7. The staphylococcal coagulases
    8. The stafphylococcal hemolysins
    9. The staphylococcal panton-valentine leukocidin (PVL)
    10. The staphylococcal exfoliative toxins
    11. Extracellular proteases of Staphylococcus spp.
    12. Staphylococcal lipases
    13. Staphylococcal bacteriocins
    14. Phage-associated virulence determinants of Staphylococcus aureus
    15. Diagnostics: routine identification on standard and chromogenic media, and advanced automated methods
    16. Molecular identification and genotyping of Staphylococci: genus, species, strains, clones, lineages, and interspecies exchanges
    17. Methicillin resistance in Staphylococcus aureus
    18. In vivo resistance mechanisms: Staphylococcal biofilms
    19. Autovaccines in individual therapy of Staphylococcal infections
    20. Experimental animal models in evaluation of Staphylococcal pathogenicity
    21. Application of staphylococci in the food industry and biotechnology
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    Bohan, Peter T.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L39 .P47
    2
  • Digital
    Laura Nabarro, Stephen Morris-Jones, David A.J. Moore.
    Contents:
    Arthropod-borne diseases
    Infections acquired through the gastrointestinal tract
    Infections acquired by airborne transmission
    Ectoparasites
    Bites, stings, venoms, toxins
    Nutrition
    Non-communicable disease
    Disease of unusual or uncertian aetiology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Michael Miloro, G.E. Ghali, Peter E. Larsen, Peter Waite, editors.
    Summary: The new edition of this outstanding reference textbook, in two volumes, offers comprehensive and authoritative coverage of the contemporary specialty of oral and maxillofacial surgery. The aim is to provide an all-encompassing, user-friendly source of information that will meet the needs of residents and experienced surgeons in clinical practice and will also serve as an ideal companion during preparation for board certification or recertification examinations. All of the authors, numbering some 100, are distinguished experts in the areas that they address. The new edition takes full account of the significant changes in clinical practice and guidelines that have occurred during recent years. Readers will find clear explanations of the practical application of surgical principles, with a wealth of supporting illustrative material, including atlas-type illustrations to complement the descriptions of specific procedures. The fourth edition of Petersons Principles of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery is a truly exceptional resource for clinicians and students alike. .

    Contents:
    Wound Healing
    Medical Management and Preoperative Patient Assessment
    Pharmacology of Outpatient Anesthesia Medications
    Outpatient Anesthesia
    Impacted Teeth
    Pre-Prosthetic Surgery
    Pediatric Dentoalveolar Surgery
    Utilization of Three-dimensional Imaging Technology to Enhance Maxillofacial Surgical Applications
    Dynamic Navigation for Dental Implants
    Implant Prosthodontics
    The Science of Osseointegrated Implant Reconstruction
    Comprehensive Implant Site Preparation: Mandible
    A Graft-less Approach for Treatment of the Edentulous Maxilla: Contemporary considerations for Treatment planning, Biomechanical principles and surgical protocol
    Soft Tissue Management in Implant Therapy
    Craniofacial Implant Surgery
    Initial Management of the Trauma Patient
    Soft Tissue Injuries
    Rigid versus Nonrigid Fixation
    Dentoalveolar and Intraoral Soft Tissue Trauma
    Contemporary Management of Mandibular Fractures
    Fractures of the Mandibular Condyle
    Management of Maxillary Fractures
    Management of Zygomatic Complex Fractures
    Orbital and Ocular Trauma
    Management of Frontal Sinus and Naso-orbitoethmoid Complex Fractures
    Nasal Fractures
    Maxillofacial Firearm Injuries
    Paediatric Facial Trauma
    Management of Panfacial Fractures
    Differential Diagnosis of Oral Disease
    Odontogenic Cysts and Tumors
    Benign Nonodontogenic Lesions of the Jaws
    Oral Cancer: Classification, Diagnosis, and Staging
    Oral Cancer Management
    Lip Cancer
    Head and Neck Skin Cancer
    Salivary Gland Disease
    Mucosal and Related Dermatologic Diseases
    Pediatric Maxillofacial Pathology
    Odontogenic Infections
    Osteomyelitis, Osteoradionecrosis(ORN) and Medication Related Osteonecrosis of the Jaws(MRONJ)
    Local and Regional Flaps
    Nonvascularized Reconstruction
    Vascularized Reconstruction
    Microneurosurgery
    Comprehensive Management of Facial Clefts
    Alveolar Cleft Reconstruction
    Nonsyndromic Craniosynostosis
    Craniofacial Dysostosis Syndromes: Evaluation and Treatment of the Skeletal Deformities
    Technology in Oral and Maxillofacial Reconstruction
    Anatomy and Pathophysiology of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Nonsurgical Management of Temporomandibular Disorders
    Arthroscopy and Arthrocentesis of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Internal Derangement of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Hypomobility and Hypermobility Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Pediatric temporomandibular disorders: Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis
    Vascularized Reconstruction
    Craniofacial Growth and Development
    Digital Data Acquisition and Treatment Planning in Orthognathic Surgery
    Orthodontics for Orthognathic Surgery
    Model Surgery and Computer-aided Surgical Simulation for Orthognathic Surgery
    Mandibular Orthognathic Surgery
    Maxillary Orthognathic Surgery
    Sequencing in Orthognathic Surgery
    Concomitant Orthognathic and Temporomandibular Joint Surgery
    Facial Asymmetry
    Soft Tissue Changes and Prediction with Orthognathic Surgery
    Complications in Orthognathic Surgery
    Cleft Orthognathic Surgery
    Distraction Osteogenesis of the Craniomaxillofacial Skeleton
    Surgical and Non-surgical Management of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Blepharoplasty
    Basic Principles of Rhinoplasty
    Rhytidectomy
    Forehead and Brow Procedures
    Otoplastic Surgery for the Protruding Ear
    Adjunctive Facial Cosmetic Procedures.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Roux, Georges.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M111 .R87 1938
    1
  • Digital
    Giorgio Cavallini, Gianni Paulis, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Anatomy of the penis, with special attention to the tunica albuginea and to the corpora cavernosa
    3. Epidemiology
    4. Aetiology and risk factors
    5. Nosology
    6. Natural history of Peyronie's disease
    7. Experimental models and laboratory research for Peyronie's disease
    8. Symptoms, their physiopathology, and outpatient clinical practice and diagnosis
    9. Congenital and acquired penile curvature: relationships and differences
    10. Psychological aspects of Peyronie's diseaese
    11. Imaging in Peyronie's disease
    12. Therapy: a general approach
    13. Medical therapy
    14. Combination therapy (in the treatment of Peyronie's disease)
    15. Surgical therapy for Peyronie's disease: why and when (an overview) --16. Advanced techniques of plication surgery with basal approach: when and why
    17. Corporoplasty: why and when
    18. Surgical treatment of Peyronie's disease of inflatable penile prosthesis
    19. Surgical techniques for difficult and complicated cases of Peyronie's disease
    20. Future perspectives in Peyronie's Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editor in chief: Grant C. Fowler ; section editors, Beth A. Choby [and six others].
    Contents:
    Anesthesia
    Dermatology
    Aesthetic medicine
    Eyes, ears, nose, and throat
    Cardiovascular and respiratory system procedures
    Gastrointestinal system procedures
    Urinary system procedures
    Male reproductive system
    Gynecology and female reproductive system
    Obstetrics
    Pediatrics
    Orthopedics and sports medicine
    Urgent care
    Hospitalist
    Appendices. Commonly used instruments/equipment
    Informed consent
    Latex allergy guidelines
    Supplier information
    Resources for learning and teaching procedures
    Universal precautions
    Neoplasms of the skin: ICD-9 codes
    Pearls of practice
    The Society of Teachers of Family Medicine Procedural Skills Task Force
    Outline of a comprehensive operative note
    Management guidelines for abnormal cervical cancer screening tests and histologic findings
    Buying major office equipment
    Special considerations in geriatric patients.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Christian Surber, Christoph Abels, Howard Maibach.
    Contents:
    The acid mantle : a myth or an essential part of skin health? / Surber, C., Humbert, P., Abels C. (Bielefeld), Maibach, H. (San Francisco, CA)
    Buffering capacity / Proksch, E. (Kiel)
    Measurement of skin surface pH / du Plessis, J.L. (Potchefstroom), Stefaniak, A.B. (Morgantown, WV), Wilhelm, K.-P. (Schenefeld)
    Skin surface pH in newborns : origin and consequences / Fluhr, J.W. (Berlin), Darlenski, R. (Stara Zagora/Sofia)
    Intrinsic and extrinsic factors affecting skin surface pH / Farage, W.A., Hood, W. (Cincinnati, OH), Berardesca, E. (San Francisco, CA), Maibach, H. (Rome)
    Gender, age, and ethnicity as factors that can influence skin pH / Choi, E.H. (Wonju)
    Endogenous factors that can influence skin pH / Bíró, T., Oláh, A., Tóth, B.I., Szollosi, A.G. (Debrecen)
    Lipids in the skin and pH / Wohlrab, J., Gebert, A., Neubert, R.H.H. (Halle (Saale))
    Influence of pH on skin stem cells and their differentiation / Charruyer, A., Ghadially, R. (San Francisco, CA)
    The influence of calcium on the skin pH and epidermal barrier during aging / Rinnerthaler, M., Richter, K. (Salzburg)
    pH and microbial infections / Rippke, F. (Hamburg), Berardesca, E. (Rome), Weber, T.M. (Wilton, CT)
    pH in atopic dermatitis / Danby, S.G., Cork, M.J. (Sheffield)
    Role of skin pH in psoriasis / Bigliardi, P.L. (Minneapolis, MN)
    pH and acne / Schürer, N. (Osnabrück)
    pH and buffer capacity of topical formulations / Wohlrab, J., Gebert, A. (Halle (Saale))
    The relation of pH and skin cleansing / Blaak, J., Staib, P. (Würzburg)
    pH and drug delivery / Ostergaard Knudsen, N., Pommergaard Pedersen, G. (Ballerup)
    Metamorphosis of vehicles : mechanisms and opportunities / Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Knie, U. (Bielefeld)
    Influence of topical formulations : lipid lamella organization and lipid composition of stratum corneum as a surrogate marker for barrier integrity / Dahnhardt, D. (Flintbek), Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Dahnhardt-Pfeiffer, S. (Flintbek)
    Skin care products : age-appropriate cosmetics / Abels, C. (Bielefeld), Angelova-Fischer, I. (Lübeck)
    Skin care products for healthy and diseased skin / Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Dragicevic, N. (Belgrade), Kottner, J. (Berlin).
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Rajen Gupta ; with the editorial assistance of Dr. Martin Beed.
    Summary: This book provides ophthalmic surgeons with a concise, clinical guide to performing the fundamentals steps in phacoemulsification cataract surgery. Clear diagrams and images are used throughout and the information can be adapted to a particular consultant's own technique once the surgical principles are understood. The chapters serve as a modular framework that allows for safe, effective learning of skills and use as a clinical training resource. Phacoemulsification Cataract Surgery serves as a helpful teaching aid for consultants, especially newly appointed, who have little experience in teaching. Basic fundamental rules are provided as a guide for training others to improve surgical techniques in clinical practice. Recently qualified and experienced consultants will find this book to be an indispensable resource for learning and teaching in the area of phacoemulsification cataract surgery. -- Publisher

    Contents:
    Understanding the Phacoemulsification Surgical Learning Process
    Irrigation/Aspiration
    Intraocular Lens Insertion
    Soft Lens Material Removal
    Manual Capsulorhexis
    Hydrodissection
    How to Palm an Instrument
    Phacoemulsification: Small Fragments
    Debulking of Lens Fragments
    Make-a-Space Technique
    Phacoemulsification: Grooving and Cracking
    Phacoemulsification: An Easy Stop, Chop and Crack Technique
    The Paracentesis Incision
    The Main Corneal Incision
    Essential Preparation: Draping, Safety and Surgeon Comfort
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Andrzej Górski, Ryszard Miȩdzybrodzki, Jan Borysowski, editors.
    Summary: This book gives a detailed yet clear insight into the current state of the art of the therapeutic application of bacteriophages in different conditions. The authors bring in their practical expertise within their respective fields of expertise and provide an excellent overview of the potential and actual use of phage therapy. Topics like economic feasibility compared to traditional antibiotics and also regulatory issues are discussed in far detail. This new volume is therefore a valuable resource for individuals engaged in the medical application of novel phage therapies.

    Contents:
    Part I: Bacteriophages as antibacterialagents
    Chapter 1:Production of PhageTherapeutics and Formulations
    InnovativeApproaches
    Chapter 2:Phagepharmacokinetics: relationship with administrationroute
    Chapter 3:BacterialResistance to Phage and itsImpact on Clinical Therapy
    Part II: Bacteriophages and the immune system
    Chapter 4:Phageinteraction with the mammalianimmune system
    Chapter 5:Humoralimmuneresponse to phage-basedtherapeutics
    Part III:Use of bacteriophages to combat bacterial infections
    Chapter 6:How to achieve a goodphage therapy clinical trial?
    Chapter 7: Perspectives on the RenewedInterest in the United States
    Chapter 8:Phage Therapy in Orthopaedic Implant-associated Infections
    Chapter 9:The use of bacteriophages in animalhealth and food protection
    Chapter 10:Combiningbacteriophages with otherantibacterialagents to combatbacteria
    Chapter 11: Phage therapy of infectious biofilms: Challenges and strategies
    Part IV:Phage therapy
    regulatory and ethical aspects
    Chapter 12:Regulatory Considerations for Bacteriophage Therapy Products
    Chapter 13:Developing phagesintomedicines for Europe
    Chapter 14: Phagetherapy in Europe: Regulatory and intellectualpropertyprotectionissues
    Chapter 15:Ethics of phagetherapy
    Part V: Bacteriophage-derived antibacterial agents
    Chapter 16: NovelAlternative to Antibiotics.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gert Folkerts, Johan Garssen, editors.
    Summary: This volume examines the effects of natural products and functional/medical foods (nutritional programming) on disease management. It specifically focuses on diseases related to inflammation and immunity, cancer and cachexia, allergies, and brain and neuro/immune. As both pharmacologists and nutritionists are recognizing that the one disease/one target/one drug (or nutrient) concept will be less successful than in the past, this book aims to stress the importance of a multi-target approach versus a single-target approach. It also presents aspects of molecular characteristics of food ingredients toward clinical effectiveness and relevance. The interest in food in health and disease has exploded in the past few years, and publications on the microbiome can be found in all major scientific journals and newspapers. A new concept uses functional foods hand in hand with standard pharmacological therapies, which can be conceptualized in the term 'pharma-nutrition.' With the complementary values of pharma and nutrition, scientists might be able to overcome the increased incidence worldwide of complex multi-factorial disorders, chronic and degenerative diseases in particular.

    Contents:
    1 Introductory Chapter
    2 New Developments in Food Safety Assessment: Innovations in Food Allergy and Toxicological Safety Assessment
    3 Bridging a Pharma-Like Innovation Gap in Medical Nutrition
    4 Modulation of the Gut Ecosystem in Irritable Bowel Syndrome
    5 The Role of Omega-6 and Omega-3 Fatty Acids in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    6 N-3 Polyunsaturated Fatty Acid and Neuroinflammation in Aging: Role in Cognition
    7 Nutritional Programming of Immune Defense Against Infections in Early Life?
    8 Impact on Non-Digestible Oligosaccharides on Gut Associated Lymphoid Tissue and Oral Tolerance Induction
    9 The Endocannabinoid System: Molecular Connection between Nutrition and Pharmacology
    10 Effects of Natural products on Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Drugs
    11 Nutrition and Gastrointestinal Health as Modulators of Parkinson's Disease
    12 Eat to Heal: Natural Inducers of the Hem Oxygenase-1 System
    13 Recent Developments in the Treatment of Cachexia
    14 Individualized Tumor Therapy: Biomarkers and Possibilities for Targeted Therapy with Natural Products
    15 Nutrition in Oncology: from Treating Cachexia to Targeting the Tumor
    16 Nutraceuticals in Preventive Oncology: Chemical Biology and Translational Pharmaceutical Science
    17 The Onset Of Eczema: Underlying Mechanisms
    18 Cow's Milk Allergy: Protein Hydrolysates or Amino Acid Formula
    19 Allergen Avoidance Versus Tolerance Induction
    20 Nutrition and Cognitive Decline in Older Persons: Bridging the Gap between Epidemiology and Intervention Studies
    21 Nutraceutical Regulation of the Neuroimmunoendocrine Super System
    22 Targeting (Gut)-Immune-Brain Axis with Pharmaceutical and Nutritional Concepts: Relevance for Mental and Neurological Disorders
    23 Nutritional Approaches for Healthy Aging of the Brain and the Prevention of Neurodegenerative Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kamal Biswas.
    Summary: The pharmaceutical industry needs a shot in the arm - and not a moment too soon. The executive suite is mired in a bygone era, a time when extensive, well-funded pharmaceutical R & D produced blockbuster drugs, kept everything in-house and reaped the financial rewards. But that way of working needs to change. Executives now need to know what the technologists in their companies are doing in order to survive the next decade. Written for those new to industry, as well as for experienced professionals or specialists looking to expand their knowledge, this book is a must-read for business executive.

    Contents:
    1.Pharma Health
    Critical Parts Need Redesigning
    2.The Pharmaceutical Value Chain
    An Introduction
    Drug Discovery
    Development
    Manufacturing
    Supply Chain Management
    Marketing
    Sales
    Regulatory Compliance
    Finance and Accounts
    Human Resources
    3.Technology Basics
    An Introduction
    Packaged and Custom Developed Technology Solutions
    Computer System Validation
    21 CFR Part 11 Compliance
    4.Courageous New World: Strategies to Improve Business Outcomes
    Staggering Genius in the Crowd: Nextgen R&D
    Feed Your Workhorse: Smarter Manufacturing
    Product Fast-Track: Remodel the Supply Chain
    In Digital We Trust: Industrialize Customer Centricity
    Scream With Mouth Shut: Global Compliance Strategy
    Why Patients Continue With Medicine: Patient Adherence
    The Perks in Emerging Markets: Go Global
    5.Measuring Business Values and Success
    The Pharma Value Cycle: How to Redefine Stakeholder Values
    The Unbearable Financials: Models to Realize Financial Value.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Daan J.A. Crommelin, Robert D. Sindelar, Bernd Meibohm, editors.
    Summary: This introductory text explains both the basic science and the applications of biotechnology derived pharmaceuticals, with special emphasis on their clinical use. It serves as a complete one-stop source for undergraduate/graduate pharmacists, pharmaceutical science students, and for those who did not receive formal training in this field. Pharmaceutical Biotechnology: Fundamentals and Applications, Fifth Edition completely updates the previous edition, and includes additional coverage on newer approaches such as oligonucleotides, mi/siRNA, gene therapy and advanced therapeutics.

    Contents:
    Molecular Biotechnology
    Biophysical and biochemical analysis of recombinant proteins
    Production and downstream processing of biotech products
    Formulation of biotech products, including biopharmaceutical considerations
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of peptide and protein drugs
    Immunogenicity of pharmaceutical proteins
    General considerations of monoclonal antibodies from structure to therapeutic application
    Genomics, Other "Omics" Technologies, Personalized Medicine and Additional Biotechnology-Related Techniques
    Dispensing biotechnology products: handling, professional education and product information
    Economic considerations in medical biotechnology
    Regulatory framework for biosimilars
    Vaccines
    Oligonucleotides and siRNA
    Gene therapy
    Stem cell technology
    Therapeutic Applications.-Endocrinology
    Insulin
    Follicle-stimulating hormone
    Growth hormone
    Cardiovascular and Respiratory Applications
    Recombinant coagulation factors and thrombolytics
    Recombinant human deoxyribonuclease
    Oncology
    Monoclonal antibodies in oncology
    Hematopoetic growth factors
    Inflammation and Immunemodulation
    Monoclonal antibodies in transplantation
    Monoclonal antibodies and antibody-based therapeutics in anti-inflammatory therapy
    Interferons and interleukins
    Anti-infectious diseases
    Monoclonal antibodies
    Enzyme replacement therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Michalakis Savva.
    Summary: Pharmaceutical Calculations: A Conceptual Approach, is a book that combines conceptual and procedural understanding for students and will guide you to master prerequisite skills to carry out accurate compounding and dosage regimen calculations. It is a book that makes the connection between basic sciences and pharmacy. It describes the most important concepts in pharmaceutical sciences thoroughly, accurately and consistently through various commentaries and activities to make you a scientific thinker, and to help you succeed in college and licensure exams. Calculation of the error associated with a dose measurement can only be carried out after understanding the concept of accuracy versus precision in a measurement. Similarly, full appreciation of drug absorption and distribution to tissues can only come about after understanding the process of transmembrane passive diffusion. Early understanding of these concepts will allow reinforcement and deeper comprehension of other related concepts taught in other courses. More weight is placed on the qualitative understanding of fundamental concepts, like tonicity vs osmotic pressure, diffusion vs osmosis, crystalloids vs colloids, osmotic diuretics vs plasma expanders, rate of change vs rate constants, drug accumulation vs drug fluctuation, loading dose vs maintenance dose, body surface area (BSA) vs body weight (BW) as methods to adjust dosages, and much more, before considering other quantitative problems. In one more significant innovation, the origin and physical significance of all final forms of critical equations is always described in detail, thus, allowing recognition of the real application and limitations of an equation. Specific strategies are explained step-by-step in more than 100 practice examples taken from the fields of compounding pharmacy, pharmaceutics, pharmacokinetics, pharmacology and medicine.

    Contents:
    Measurement
    Error Assessment if the Drug Concentration In Pharmaceutical Mixtures
    Density And Specific Gravity
    Units Of Concentration And The Salt Factor
    Dilution And Concentration Of Pharmaceutical Solutions And Other Physical Mixtures
    Mixture Problems In Pharmaceutical Sciences.-Isotonicsolutions
    Diffusion.-Use Of Prefabricated Dosage Forms In Extemporaneous Compounding
    Fluids And Electrolytes
    Essential Mathematics For Pharmacokinetics
    Rates And Orders Of Reactions
    Fundamental Concepts of Dosage Calculation
    Dosage Calculations Based On Body Surface Area.-Intravenous Infusion And Flow Rate
    Appendix I- Interpretation Of Prescriptions And Medication Orders.-Appendix II-Miscellaneous Abbreviations Commonly Used in Pharmacy
    Appendix III- Units Of Measurement And Equivalent Conversions
    Appendix IV- Selected Roman Numerals
    Appendix V -Specific Gravity Of Miscellaneous Liquids
    Appendix IV- Table Of Atomic Masses.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    edited by Herbert A. Lieberman, Martin M. Rieger, Gilbert S. Banker.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RS200 .P42 1988
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Jean Cornier, Andrew Own, Arno Kwade, and Marcel Van de Voorde.
    Contents:
    Entry to the Nanopharmacy Revolution. History: Potential, Challenges, and Future Development in Nanopharmaceutical Research and Industry / Albertina Ariën, Paul Stoffels
    Nanoscale Drugs: A Key to Revolutionary Progress in Pharmacy and Healthcare / Simon Sebastian Raesch, Marina Poettler, Christoph Alexiou, Claus-Michael Lehr
    The Emergence of Nanopharmacy: From Biology to Nanotechnology and Drug Molecules to Nanodrugs / Marilena Hadjidemetriou, Zahraa Al-Ahmady, Mariarosa Mazza, Kostas Kostarelos
    Understanding and Characterizing Functional Properties of Nanoparticles / Ester Polo, Valentina Castagnola, Kenneth A Dawson
    Omics-Based Nanopharmacy: Powerful Tools Toward Precision Medicine / Daniel Rosenblum, Dan Peer
    Fundamentals of Nanotechnology in Pharmacy. Nanostructures in Drug Delivery / Salma Nabil Tammam, Alf Lamprecht
    Characterization Methods: Physical and Chemical Characterization Techniques / Sven Even F Borgos
    Nanoparticle Characterization Methods: Applications of Synchrotron and Neutron Radiation / Martha Brennich, Marité Cardenas, Hiram Castillo-Michel, Marine Cotte, V Trevor Forsyth, Michael Haertlein, Simon A J Kimber, Geraldine Le Duc, Edward P Mitchell, Adam Round, Murielle Salome, Michael Sztucki
    Overview of Techniques and Description of Established Processes / Jan Henrik Finke, Michael Juhnke, Arno Kwade, Heike Bunjes
    Nanopharmacy: Exploratory Methods for Polymeric Materials / Kuldeep Bansal, Luana Sasso, Hiteshri Makwana, Sahar Awwad, Steve Brocchini, Cameron Alexander
    Overview and Presentation of Exploratory Methods for Manufacturing Nanoparticles/"Inorganic Materials" / Xavier Le Guevel
    Scale-Up and cGMP Manufacturing of Nanodrug Delivery Systems for Clinical Investigations / Mostafa Nakach, Jean-René Authelin
    Occupational Safety and Health / Thomas H Brock
    Development of Nanopharmaceuticals. Micro- and Nano-Tools in Drug Discovery / Andreas Dietzel, Monika Leester-Schädel, Stephan Reichl
    Computational Predictive Models for Nanomedicine / Marco Siccardi, Alessandro Schipani, Andrew Owen
    Drug Targeting in Nanomedicine and Nanopharmacy: A Systems Approach / Jingwei Shao, Lisa McConnachie, Rodney JY Ho
    Nanoparticle Toxicity: General Overview and Insights Into Immunological Compatibility / Marina A Dobrovolskaia
    An Overview of Nanoparticle Biocompatibility for Their Use in Nanomedicine / Matthew SP Boyles, Leagh G Powell, Ali Kermanizadeh, Helinor J Johnston, Barbara Rothen-Rutishauser, Vicki Stone, Martin JD Clift
    Translation to the Clinic: Preclinical and Clinical Pharmacology Studies of Nanoparticles
    The Translational Challenge / Rachel Tyson, Leah Osae, Andrew J Madden, Andrew T Lucas, William C Zamboni
    Regulatory Issues in Nanomedicines / Marisa Papaluca, Falk Ehmann, Ruben Pita, Dolores Hernan
    Social Studies of Nanopharmaceutical Research / Michael Schillmeier
    Pharmaceutical Applications of Nanomaterials. Nanoparticles for Imaging and Imaging Nanoparticles: State of the Art and Current Prospects / Thomas Maldiney, Nathalie Mignet
    Nanoparticle-Based Physical Methods for Medical Treatments / Christine Ménager
    Nanodrugs in Medicine and Healthcare: Oral Delivery / Alejandro Sosnik
    Steroidal Nanodrugs Based on Pegylated Nanoliposomes Remote Loaded with Amphipathic Weak Acids Steroid Prodrugs as Anti-Inflammatory Agents / Keren Turjeman, Yechezkel Barenholz
    Nanodrugs in Medicine and Healthcare: Pulmonary, Nasal and Ophthalmic Routes, and Vaccination / Christel C Müller-Goymann, Mukta Paranjpe
    Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Alzheimer's Disease / Maria Gregori, Francesca Re
    The Nanopharmaceutical Market. A Practical Guide to Translating Nanomedical Products / Raj Bawa
    Development and Commercialization of Nanocarrier-Based Drug Products / Marianne Ashford
    Future Outlook of Nanopharmacy: Challenges and Opportunities / Dan Peer, Jean Cornier, Marcel Van de Voorde.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Zaheer-Ud-Din Babar, editor.
    Summary: A comprehensive and granular insight into the challenges of promoting rational medicine, this book serves as an essential resource for health policy makers and researchers interested in national medicines policies. Country-specific chapters have a common format, beginning with an overview of the health system and regulatory and policy environments, before discussing the difficulties in maintaining a medicines supply system, challenges in ensuring access to affordable medicines and issues impacting on rational medicine use. Numerous case studies are also used to highlight key issues and each chapter concludes with country-specific solutions to the issues raised. Written by highly regarded academics, the book includes countries in Africa, Asia, Europe, the Middle East and South America.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I Low and Middle Income Countries
    Part II Upper Middle Income Countries
    Part III High Income Countries
    Part IV Further Perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Walkiria S. Schlindwein, Mark Gibson.
    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Introduction to Quality by Design (QbD) / Bruce Davis, Walkiria S Schlindwein
    Quality Risk Management (QRM) / Noel Baker
    Quality Systems and Knowledge Management / Siegfried Schmitt
    Quality by Design (QbD) and the Development and Manufacture of Drug Substance / Gerry Steele
    The Role of Excipients in Quality by Design (QbD) / Brian Carlin
    Development and Manufacture of Drug Product / Mark Gibson, Alan Carmody, Roger Weaver
    Design of Experiments / Martin Owen, Ian Cox
    Multivariate Data Analysis (MVDA) / Claire Beckett, Lennart Eriksson, Erik Johansson, Conny Wikström
    Process Analytical Technology (PAT) / Line Lundsberg-Nielsen, Walkiria S Schlindwein, Andreas Berghaus
    Analytical Method Design, Development, and Lifecycle Management / Joe Sousa, David Holt, Paul A Butterworth
    Manufacturing and Process Controls / Mark Gibson
    Regulatory Guidance / Siegfried Schmitt, Mustafa A Zaman
    Index
    Supplemental Images.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Reem K. Al-Essa, Mohammed Al-Rubaie, Stuart Walker, Sam Salek.
    Contents:
    1. Overview of Medicines Regulatory Systems in the Gulf Region
    2. The Regulatory Review Process in the Gulf Region
    3. Regulatory Review Times in the Gulf Region
    4. Quality Measures in the Gulf Regulatory Practices
    5. The Current Status of the Common Technical Document
    6. The Current Status of Drug Safety and Pharmacovigilance
    7. The Centralized Regulatory Review in the Gulf Region
    8. The Gulf States Assessment and Experience With the Centralised Procedure
    9. The Pharmaceutical Companies Assessment and Experience With the Centralised Procedure
    10. Proposal For an Improved Centralized Regulatory System
    11. The Strategic Planning Process of the GCC Regulatory Authorities: Barriers And Solutions
    12. The Regulatory Dilemma in the Gulf Region: The Way Forward.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Anthony J. Hickey, Hugh D.C. Smyth.
    Summary: Non-linear phenomena pervade the pharmaceutical sciences. Understanding the interface between each of these phenomena and the way in which they contribute to overarching processes such as pharmaceutical product development may ultimately result in more efficient, less costly and rapid implementation. The benefit to Society is self-evident in that affordable treatments would be rapidly forthcoming. We have aggregated these phenomena into one topic "Pharmaco-complexity: Non-linear Phenomena and Drug Product Development".

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chemistry and Thermodynamics
    Solid State
    Dynamics
    Quality by Design
    Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Poputaltion Biology
    Machine Learning.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Brian R. Moyer, Narayan P.S. Cheruvu, Tom C.-C. Hu, editors.
    Summary: Advances in drugs and biologics to mitigate or cure some of nature's most complex medical problems have been incredible to behold. These accomplishments are due to the actions of a wide theatre of participants from biologists, pharmacologists, geneticists, chemists and manufacturers, molecular biologists, toxicologists, clinicians, nurses, program managers, quality assurance personnel, regulatory professionals and a new group of innovators the Imaging Scientists. Imaging has grown from the microscopy sections put on slides with special stains to now in vivo slices created with innovative physics, imaging tracers and contrast agents, and incredibly fast and accurate computational systems. The world of biology has become one of witnessing the actions of drugs and biologics through the window of mechanical and electrical engineering creating instruments and reporter molecules that can help us see into our bodies and paint them with medical information needed to resolve disease. This book will inspire imagination and elicit even more innovations in the development of new and novel drugs and biologics through imaging.

    Contents:
    Imaging Platforms and Drug Development: An Introduction / Brian R. Moyer
    Imaging in Drug Development: Animal Models, Handling and Physiological Constraints / David B. Stout
    Considerations for Preclinical Laboratory Animal Imaging Center Design, Setup, and Management Suitable for Biomedical Investigation for Drug Discovery / Brenda A. Klaunberg and H. Douglas Morris
    Pharmaco-Imaging in Translational Science and Research / Immanuel Freedman
    The Role of Pharmacokinetics and Allometrics in Imaging: Practical Issues and Considerations / Brian R. Moyer
    Quantitative Imaging Using Autoradiographic Techniques / Eric G. Solon and Brian R. Moyer
    Preclinical Imaging in Oncology: Considerations and Recommendations for the Imaging Scientist / Daniel P. Bradley and Tim Wyant
    Use of Radiolabelled Leukocytes for Drug Evaluation in Man / Chrystalla Loutsios, Neda Farahi, Charlotte Summers, Prina Ruparelia, Jessica White [and 9 others]
    Application of Bioluminescence Imaging (BLI) to the Study of the Animal Models of Human Infectious Diseases / Hana Golding and Marina Zaitseva
    Preclinical Imaging in BSL-3 and BSL-4 Environments: Imaging Pathophysiology of Highly Pathogenic Infectious Diseases / Lauren Keith, Svetlana Chefer, Laura Bollinger, Jeffrey Solomon [and 4 others]
    Magnetic Resonance as a Tool for Pharmaco-Imaging / Brian R. Moyer, Tom C.-C. Hu, Simon Williams and H. Douglas Morris
    Technologies and Principles of Mass Spectral Imaging / Kevin A. Douglass, Demian R. Ifa and Andre R. Venter
    Regulatory Considerations Involved in Imaging / Brian R. Moyer, Narayan P. S. Cheruvu and Tom C.-C. Hu.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [editors], Jerika T. Lam, Mary A. Gutierrez, Samit Shah.
    Summary: " ... this textbook is created for clinicians who are interested in practicing precision medicine by using the science of pharmacogenomics and making actionable, genotype-guided recommendations to optimize treatments for their patients. Furthermore, this textbook contains updated information about pharmacogenomics resources and the ethical and legal considerations to assist clinicians who are interested in implementing pharmacogenomics in practice settings"--Introduction

    Contents:
    Introduction and Fundamentals of Pharmacogenomics
    Implementation: A Guide to Implementing Pharmacogenomics Services
    Ethical, Legal, and Social Issues in Pharmacogenomics
    Pharmacogenomics Resources
    Cardiology Pharmacogenomics
    Infectious Diseases Pharmacogenomics
    Oncology Pharmacogenomics
    Psychiatry and Neurology Pharmacogenomics
    Transplant Pharmacogenomics.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Qing Yan, PharmTao, Santa Clara, CA, USA.
    Contents:
    From pharmacogenomics and systems biology to personalized care : a framework of systems and dynamical medicine / Qing Yan
    Translational bioinformatics approaches for systems and dynamical medicine / Qing Yan
    Whole blood transcriptomic analysis to identify clinical biomarkers of drug response / Grant P. Parnell and David R. Booth
    Diagnostic procedures for paraffin-embedded tissues analysis in pharmacogenomic studies / Raffaele Palmirotta [and six others]
    Approach to clinical and genetic characterization of statin-induced myopathy / QiPing Feng
    Pharmacogenomics of membrane transporters : a review of current approaches / Tristan M. Sissung [and four others]
    G protein-coupled receptor accessory proteins and signaling : pharmacogenomic insights / Miles D. Thompson [and three others]
    G protein-coupled receptor mutations and human genetic disease / Miles D. Thompson [and four others]
    Pharmacogenetics of the G protein-coupled receptors / Miles D. Thompson [and six others]
    Pharmacogenomics of heart failure / Anastasios Lymperopoulos and Faren French
    Pharmacogenomics in the development and characterization of atheroprotective drugs / Efi Valanti, Alexandros Tsompanidis, and Despina Sanoudou
    Management of side effects in the personalized medicine era : chemotherapy-induced peripheral neuropathy / Paolo Alberti and G. Cavaletti
    Pharmacogenomics of Alzheimer's disease : novel therapeutic strategies for drug development / Ramón Cacabelos [and four others]
    Pharmacogenetics of antipsychotic treatment in schizophrenia / Jennie G. Pouget and Daniel J. Müller / Pharmacogenetics of addiction therapy / David A. Nielsen [and three others]
    Pharmacogenetics in rheumatoid arthritis / Deepali Sen, Jisna R. Paul, and Prabha Ranganathan
    Pharmacogenetics of osteoporotic fractures / José A. Riancho and Flor M. Pérez-Campo
    Pharmacogenomics and pharmacoepigenomics in pediatric medicine / Barkur S. Shastry
    Pharmacogenomics in children / Michael Rieder.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Weimin Cai, Zhaoqian Liu, Liyan Miao, Xiaoqiang Xiang , editors.
    Summary: This book provides an introduction to the principles of pharmacogenomics and precision medicine, followed by the pharmacogenomics aspects of major therapeutic areas such as cardiovascular disease, cancer, organ transplantation, psychiatry, infection, antithrombotic drugs. It also includes genotyping technology and therapeutic drug monitoring in Pharmacogenomics; ethical, Legal and Regulatory Issues; cost-effectiveness of pharmacogenetics-guided treatment; application of pharmacogenomics in drug discovery and development and clinical Implementation of Pharmacogenomics for Personalized Precision Medicine. The contributors of Pharmacogenomics in Precision Medicine come from a team of experts, including professors from academic institutions and practitioner from hospital. It will give an in-depth overview of the current state of pharmacogenomics in drug therapy for all health care professionals and graduate students in the era of precision medicine.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction and Principles of Pharmacogenomics and Precision medicine
    Chapter 2. Pharmacogenomics in Cardiovascular Diseases
    Chapter 3. Pharmacogenomics of Antitumor Chemotherapeutic Agents
    Chapter 4. Pharmacogenomics of Antitumor Targeted Agent and Immunotherapy
    Chapter 5. Pharmacogenomics of Immunosuppressant
    Chapter 6. Pharmacogenomics of Psychiatric drugs
    Chapter 7. Pharmacogenomics of Anti-Infective Agents
    Chapter 8. Pharmacogenomics of Antithrombotic drugs
    Chapter 9. Pharmacogenomics in Therapeutic Drug Monitoring
    Chapter 10. Pharmacomicrobiomics
    Chapter 11. Genotyping technology in Pharmacogenomics
    Chapter 12. The Ethical, Legal and Regulatory Issues Associated with Pharmacogenomics
    Chapter 13. Cost-effectiveness of pharmacogenetic-guided treatment
    Chapter 14. Application of pharmacogenomics in drug discovery and development
    Chapter 15. Barriers and Solutions in Clinical Implementation of Pharmacogenomics for Personalized Precision Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hector O. Ventura, editor.
    Contents:
    The Established Therapies: HF-PEF and HF-REF
    Novel Therapies for the Prevention and Management of Acute Decompensated Heart Failure
    A Comprehensive Transition of Care Plan For a Patient Admitted with Acute Decompensated Heart Failure
    Volume Assessment and Management: Medical and Device Therapies.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Parimelazhagan Thangaraj.
    Contents:
    1. Ethnobotanical study
    2. Pharmacognostical studies
    3. Extraction of bioactive compounds
    4. Preliminary phytochemical studies
    5. Proximate composition analysis
    6. Mineral quantification
    7. Anti-nutritional factors
    8. Quantification of secondary metabolites
    9. In vitro antioxidant assays
    10. In vitro antihaemolytic activity
    11. Antimicrobial activity
    12. In vitro anthelmintic assay
    13. Toxicity studies
    14. In vivo antioxidant assays
    15. Analgesic activity
    16. Anti-inflammatory activity
    17. Antipyretic activity
    18. Inflammatory bowel disease
    19. In vitro anti-arthritic activity
    20. Anti-diarrhoeal activity
    21. Anti-ulcer activity
    22. Hepatoprotective activity
    23. Anti-diabetic activity
    24. Evaluation of anti-diabetic property on streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats
    25. In vivo wound healing studies
    26. Determination of cytotoxicity
    27. Induction of apoptosis
    28. Anti-tumour activity
    29. Protein bioavailability in animal model
    30. Detection of phenolic and flavonoid compounds using high performance thin layer chromatography (HPTLC)
    31. Isolation of compounds
    32. Molecular docking of bioactive compounds against BRCA and COX proteins
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Yoo Keun Chan, Kwee Peng Ng, Debra Si Mui Sim, editors.
    Summary: This book is the 4th in a series of Acute Care books written with the aim to address the NEEDS of health care providers when handling the acutely ill patients. Globally it has become apparent that the study of pharmacology and subsequent clinical training has not always adequately equipped young doctors with the ability to administer drugs to their patients safely and confidently, particularly in the critically ill patient. Compounding this issue is the lack of resource material related to these pharmacological concepts contained in one book that can help health care providers to understand and manage drug therapy in the acute situation. In spite of progressively newer and more developed protocols, guidelines, algorithms and many other books addressing the technical aspects of what needs to be done, most health care providers still find it difficult to grasp the basic pharmacological knowledge and rationally deliver the CARE that is required in the acute phase of patient management. The editors/authors have therefore aimed for a book that highlights topics and pharmacological issues pertinent to management of patients in their hour of need. This is a multi-author book but the style has been guided by 3 editors. The editors have used a different perspective? that of normalizing abnormal physiological processes with pharmacological agents? to address the GAPS in a bedside to bench approach. The details are pared down but important principles/concepts are emphasized.

    Contents:
    Preface
    I General Principles of Pharmacology and Pharmaceutics.- Why drugs are administered.- Drug administration.- Drug absorption and bioavailability
    Drug distribution.- Drug elimination.- Steady-state principles.- Dose-response relationship.- Pharmaceutical aspects of drugs.
    Dosage forms, dose calculations and prescriptions.- Drug interactions. II Pharmacology of the various body systems.- Drugs and the cardiovascular system.- Drugs and the respiratory system.- Drugs and the central nervous system.- Drugs and the liver/ gastrointestinal system.- Drugs and the renal system.- Drugs and the endocrine system.- Drugs and the neuromuscular system.- Drugs for the management of pain.- III Pharmacology in special circumstances.- The patient in pain.- The pediatric patient.- The elderly patient.- The obstetric patient.- The obese patient.- The bleeding patient.- The septic patient.- The allergic patient.- The poisoned patient.- IV Pharmacology of special drugs.- Oxygen as a drug.- Fluids as drugs
    V Safety issues in pharmacology
    Medication Errors. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Abimbola Farinde, PhD, PharmD, Megan Hebdon, PhD, DNP, RN, NP-C.
    Summary: "An evidence-based, quick-access reference for adult gerontology nurse practitioners and related healthcare providers, this text describes a holistic, patient-centered approach to prescribing drugs to older adults. Comprehensive yet concise writing distills timely guidance on the complexities of safely prescribing to this unique population"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
  • Digital
    Dimos D. Mitsikostas, Koen Paemeleire editors.
    Contents:
    1. Headache classification
    2. Epidemiology of headache disorders
    3. General principles of pharmacotherapy for headache disorders.- 4. Placebo and nocebo effects
    5. Review of existing guidelines
    6. Acute migraine treatment
    7. Preventive (episodic) migraine treatment
    8. Drug treatment for chronic migraine
    9. Drug treatment for episodic and chronic tension-type headache (TTH)
    10. Cluster headache: acute and transitional treatment
    11. Cluster headache: preventive treatment
    12. Pharmacotherapy for other primary headache disorders
    13. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders in children
    14. Pharmacological strategies in the prevention of migraine in children
    15. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders during pregnancy and lactation
    16. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders in the elderly
    17. Acute and chronic posttraumatic headache
    18. Headache attributed to low and increased CSF pressure
    19. Medication-overuse headache
    20. Painful cranial neuropathies
    21. Dental and Musculoskeletal Pain
    22. Post-traumatic neuropathies and Burning mouth syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    María Alejandra Alvarez.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to offer information about the Pharmacological Properties of Native Plants from Argentina to students, researchers and graduates interested in the fields of Ethnobotany, Pharmacognosy, Phytochemistry, Pharmacy, and Medicine. The book includes summary information about the native plants from Argentina with medical activity comprising their botanical characteristics, distribution, characteristics of the regions where they grow, ethnobotanical information, chemical data, biological activity, establishment of in vitro cultures, toxicity, and legal status.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Medicinal Plants in Argentina
    Ethnobotany in Argentina
    Cuyo
    The Pampa: an infinite plain
    Mesopotamia-Paranaense Forest
    Puna- a surrealistic landscape in the Argentinean Highlands
    Yungas
    Chaco and Espinal
    Patagonia
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    George E. Barreto, Amirhossein Sahebkar, editors.
    Summary: Medicinal plants and their derived products remain as an indispensable source of bioactive molecules that serve as either drug candidates or lead compounds for drug design and discovery. There are several advantages for plant-derived therapeutics including wide availability, diverse pharmacological actions and a generally good profile of safety and tolerability. Over the recent years, there have been numerous reports from clinical studies testifying to the efficacy and safety of medicinal plants and phytochemicals in ameliorating several human diseases. A plethora of basic studies has also unravelled molecular mechanisms underlying the health benefits of herbal medicines. Nevertheless, issues such as identification of bioactive ingredients, standardization of the products and drug interactions remain to be further studied. In this book, we aim to put together several chapters on the medicinal properties and pharmacological action of medicinal plants, plant species and phytochemicals. The goal of this contributed volume is to present a comprehensive collection on most important therapeutic aspects of plant-derived natural products and their molecular mechanisms of action.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gustavo Alves Andrade dos Santos, editor.
    Summary: Alzheimers disease is the most prevalent form of dementia. Although it was discovered about a century ago, the first drugs applied in treatment were only introduced in therapy in the last 30 years. This book focuses on the clinical pharmacology of drugs that aim to delay the progression of Alzheimers disease, such as anticholinesterases and glutamate receptor antagonists, as well as treatment for the behavioral changes caused by the progression of the disease: antidepressants, antipsychotics, anxiolytics, and mood stabilizers. In addition, it describes important information about the pathophysiology and diagnostic methods of Alzheimers disease, emergency situations conditioned by the dementia process, and presents new perspectives for the treatment of Alzheimers disease. The ten chapters cover topics such as mechanism of action, dosage regimen, adverse reactions, drug interactions, toxicity profiles, among other information of clinical relevance. The work comprises evidence-based studies, providing a valuable resource for analyzing, prescribing and monitoring patients being treated for Alzheimers disease. Written by experts with solid professional experience, this book will appeal to pharmacologists, geriatricians, neurologists, psychiatrists, biomedical clinicians, and other healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Principles of Pharmacology in Dementia
    3. The Viability of Treatment Conditioned to the Pathophysiology of Alzheimer's Disease
    4. The Use of Esterase Inhibitors
    5. Pharmacology of NMDA (N-methyl-D-aspartate) receptor antagonists in Alzheimers Disease
    6. Supportive Pharmacological Treatment
    7. Herbal Medicines and Supplements
    8. Emergency Situations
    9. Relationships between Treatment and Clinical Evaluations
    10. New Perspectives for Treatment in Alzheimer's Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Pablo Avanzas, Juan Carlos Kaski, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the clinical challenge currently posed by stable angina pectoris and provides guidance for those making clinical decisions regarding its pharmacological treatment. The importance of providing effective treatment is beyond dispute and this book deals with the most relevant aspects related to its pharmacological treatment. The pathogenesis of myocardial ischemia as the basis for rational treatment of angina is discussed thoroughly together with all major management goals including optimal symptom control and the secondary prevention of serious cardiovascular events. Pharmacological Treatment of Chronic Stable Angina Pectoris provides a clear description of the mechanisms of action and clinical indications of available anti-angina drugs and strategies for the use of novel pharmacological agents. It also includes a critical appraisal of the major management guidelines, which will assist the reader to interpret current evidence and provide the most appropriate forms of treatment. The ongoing controversy regarding medical therapy versus myocardial revascularization for the management of stable angina pectoris is also addressed. This eminently practical book will help guiding the reader through the complexities of the field and will be highly appreciated by clinicians, clinical cardiologists and cardiology trainees alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Andrea E. Cavanna.
    Summary: "Seignot's 1961 scientific report of a case of Tourette syndrome effectively treated with Haloperidol promoted a further 'paradigm shift' from the psychoanalytic theories to the current genetic and neurochemical theories on the aetiology and pathogenesis of Tourette syndrome. Seignot's observation was replicated throughout the world, starting with Caprini and Melotti's case report, which was published in the same year. The introduction of a pharmacological agent to control tics led to the speculation about a neurochemical substrate upon which medications work. Specifically, the unprecedented success of Haloperidol in controlling tics by blocking dopamine receptors in the brain suggested that might therefore be an excess of dopaminergic neurotransmission. American psychiatrists Arthur and Elaine Shapiro promoted the description of Tourette syndrome as a neurological disorder that by definition stood in opposition to psychoanalytic claims. The psychoanalytic perspective was successfully challenged in a book on Tourette syndrome published by the Shapiros in 1978. This paradigm shift in turn kindled interest in tracing the genetic basis of Tourette syndrome, a line of research which has flourished since the 1970s. Throughout the 1980s, studies on other first generation antidopaminergic medications, as well as alpha-2 adrenergic medications, were published, whereas in the 1990s the second generation of antidopaminergic medications were developed. During the first decade of the new millennium, Aripiprazole (sometimes referred to as 'third generation antidopaminergic medication') was first shown to be characterized by good efficacy and tolerability in the treatment of tics. More recently, a range of other medications belonging to different pharmaceutical classes have been investigated in patients with Tourette syndrome. The vast majority of these medications are pharmacological agents initially developed to treat other neuropsychiatric conditions"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Catherine E. Pelletier-Dattu.
    Summary: Composed entirely of tables and diagrams, this innovative text delivers a complete review of pharmacology in a way that simulates the way students think and learn.

    Contents:
    Pharmacology basics
    Antimicrobial medications
    Autonomic nervous system structure and medications
    Psychiatric medications
    Drugs affecting neurologic function
    Medications affecting cardiac and renal function
    Respiratory drugs
    Gastrointestinal drugs
    Drugs affecting the endocrine system
    Oncologic drugs
    Immunomodulators
    Drugs used to treat inflammation
    Toxicology
    Alternative medications.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    Mark A. Simmons, PhD.
    Summary: "Pharmacology: An Essential Textbook covers the facts of pharmacology--the study of the effects of drugs on the body--and integrates the concepts to master for success in the classroom, in the laboratory and for board examinations. It provides a focused text for pharmacology courses. It can also be used as a source of key knowledge for daily clinical practice"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Hugh C. Hemmings, Talmage D. Egan.
    Summary: "Pharmacology and Physiology for Anesthesia: Foundations and Clinical Application, 2nd Edition, delivers the information you need in pharmacology, physiology, and molecular-cellular biology, keeping you current with contemporary training and practice. This thoroughly updated edition is your one-stop, comprehensive overview of physiology, and rational anesthetic drug selection and administration, perfect for study, review, and successful practice"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Basic principles of pharmacology. Mechanisms of drug action
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics for intravenous anesthetics
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of inhaled anesthetics
    Drug metabolism and pharmacogenetics
    Physiology and pharmacology of obesity, prematurity, and aging
    Pharmacodynamic drug interactions
    Adverse drug reactions
    Section 2: Nervous system. Central nervous system physiology: neurophysiology
    Central nervous system physiology: cerebrovascular
    Pharmacology of intravenous anesthetics
    Pharmacology of inhaled anesthetics
    Neuropharmacology
    Autonomic nervous system: physiology
    Autonomic nervous system: pharmacology
    Thermoregulation
    Physiology of pain
    Intravenous opioid agonists and antagonists
    Oral and non-intravenous opioids
    Non-opioid analgesics and anti-inflammatory drugs
    Local anesthetics
    Neuromuscular physiology and pharmacology
    Neuromuscular blockers and reversal drugs
    Section 3: Cardiovascular system. Cardiovascular physiology: cellular and molecular regulation
    Cardiovascular physiology: integrative function
    Vasopressors and inotropes
    Antihypertensive drugs and vasodilators
    Anti-arrhythmic drugs
    Cardiopulmonary resuscitation
    Section 4: Pulmonary system. Pulmonary physiology
    Pulmonary pharmacology
    Section 5: Gastrointestinal and endocrine systems. Liver and gastrointestinal physiology
    Liver and gastrointestinal pharmacology
    Nutritional and metabolic therapy
    Pharmacology of postoperative nausea and vomiting
    Endocrine physiology
    Endocrine pharmacology
    Physiology and pharmacology of obstetric anesthesia
    Section 6: Immunity and Infection. Chemotherapy, Immunosuppression, and Anesthesia
    Infection, Antimicrobial Drugs and Anesthesia
    Section 7: Fluid, electrolyte and hematologic homeostasis. Renal physiology
    Intravascular volume: regulation and replacement therapy
    Electrolytes and diuretics
    Section 8: Blood and hemostasis. Blood and coagulation
    Transfusion and coagulation therapy
    Antiplatelet and anticoagulant therapy.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Frank J. Dowd, DDS, PhD (Professor Emeritus, Pharmacology, Cheighton University, School of Medicine and School of Dentistry, Omaha, Nebraska), Barton S. Johnson, DDS, MS (Director, General Practice Residency Program, Swedish Medical Center, Private Practice, Seattle Special Care Dentistry, Seattle, Washington), Angelo J. Mariotti, DDS, PhD (Professor and Chair, Periodontology, the Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio).
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Tom Peck, Consultant Anaesthetist, Royal Hampshire County Hospital, Winchester; Honorary Consultant, University Hospital Southampton, Benjamin Harris, Consultant Anaesthetist, Hampshire Hospitals NHS Trust.
    Summary: "The art of anaesthesia includes many different facets deeply rooted in medical behaviour: listening and talking to the patient, evaluating, diagnosing and taking the right decisions. Drugs are central to patient care in many areas of medical practice and the anaesthetist as well as all healthcare practitioners need to have a clear understanding of therapeutics. However, competence in anaesthetic management during the whole perioperative management of our patients implies good knowledge of pharmacology; it is the bread and butter of our profession. The dynamic nature of drug development in this field compels a continuous updating of the characteristics of drugs that form such an essential part of our armamentarium"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Blaine Templar Smith.
    Summary: "The Second Edition teaches undergraduate nursing students the basic concepts of pharmacology. The text draws on the experience of contributing authors in the field of nursing. It takes a new approach to teaching the complex topic of pharmacology through its concise, digestible coverage of material, reader friendly design, and use of images and tables to reinforce content"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to pharmacology
    Introduction to drug action : the interplay of pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics
    Medication administration
    Central nervous system drugs
    Autonomic nervous system drugs
    Cardiovascular medications
    Respiratory medications
    Pharmacology of the gastrointestinal tract
    Endocrine system drugs
    Medications for eye and ear disorders
    Pharmacology of the genitourinary system
    Drugs associated with pregnancy, labor and delivery, and lactation
    Pharmacology in dermatologic conditions
    Pharmacology of psychotropic medications
    Pharmacology of anesthetic drugs
    Pharmacology of antimicrobial drugs.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Erin E. Jobst, Peter C. Panus, Marieke Kruidering-Hall.
    Summary: "The goal of this book is to provide a comprehensive - yet focused - foundation in pharmacology to help rehabilitation professionals understand how medication use may alter the clinical presentation of our patients as well as their responses to therapeutic interventions. In this second edition, two licensed physical therapists (Drs. Jobst and Panus) with extensive training in pharmacology worked closely with Dr. Marieke Kruidering-Hall, a pharmacologist previously involved in medical pharmacology texts. The information follows the sequence of traditional pharmacology textbooks and integrated organ systems-based curricula. The initial section is a synopsis of the nature of drugs, basic principles of pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics, and an overview of the drug development and approval process in the United States. Subsequent chapters include drugs that affect the autonomic and central nervous systems, cardiovascular and pulmonary systems, and the endocrine, gastrointestinal, and musculoskeletal systems. A chemotherapeutic section includes chapters covering anti-microbial drugs, cancer chemotherapy agents, and drugs that modify the immune system"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    PART I: BASIC PRINCIPLES
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Pharmacodynamics
    Chapter 3: Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacogenomics
    PART II: DRUGS AFFECTING THE CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
    Chapter 4: Introduction to Autonomic Pharmacology
    Chapter 5: Drugs Affecting the Cholinergic System
    Chapter 6: Sympathomimetics and Sympatholytics
    Chapter 7: Antihypertensive Drugs
    Chapter 8: Drugs Used in the Treatment of Angina Pectoris
    Chapter 9: Drugs Used in Heart Failure
    Chapter 10: Antiarrhythmic Drugs
    Chapter 11: Drugs Affecting the Blood
    PART III: DRUGS AFFECTING THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
    Chapter 12: Introduction to the Pharmacology of Central Nervous System Drugs
    Chapter 13: Sedative-Hypnotic Drugs
    Chapter 14: Antiseizure Drugs
    Chapter 15: General Anesthetics
    Chapter 16: Local Anesthetics
    Chapter 17: Pharmacologic Management of Parkinson's Disease and Other Movement Disorders
    ^Chapter 18: Antipsychotic Agents and Lithium
    Chapter 19: Antidepressant Agents
    Chapter 20: Opioid Analgesics and Antagonists
    Chapter 21: Drugs of Abuse
    PART IV: SELECTED TOPICS IN ENDOCRINE FUNCTION
    Chapter 22: Growth, Thyroid, and Gonadal Pharmacology
    Chapter 23: Corticosteroids and Corticosteroid Antagonists
    Chapter 24: Pancreatic Hormones and Antidiabetic Drugs
    Chapter 25: Drugs that Affect Bone Mineral Homeostasis
    Chapter 26: Antihyperlipidemic Drugs
    PART V: CHEMOTHERAPEUTICS
    Chapter 27: Antibacterial Agents
    Chapter 28: Antiviral Agents
    Chapter 29: Antifungal and Antiparasitic Agents
    Chapter 30: Miscellaneous Antimicrobial Agents: Disinfectants, Antiseptics, Sterilants, and Preservatives
    Chapter 31: Cancer Chemotherapy
    Chapter 32: Immunopharmacology
    PART VI: DRUGS AFFECTING THE MUSCULOSKELETAL SYSTEM
    Chapter 33: Skeletal Muscle Relaxants
    ^Chapter 34: Drugs Affecting Eicosanoid Metabolism, Disease-Modifying Antirheumatic Drugs, and Drugs Used in Gout
    PART VII: SPECIAL TOPICS
    Chapter 35: Drugs Affecting the Respiratory System
    Chapter 36: Drugs Used in Gastrointestinal Disorders.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Digital
    clinical editors, Carolyn Gersch, PhD (candidate), MSN, RN, CNE, Nicole M. Heimgartner, MSN, RN, COI, Cherie R. Rebar, PhD, MBA, RN, COI, Laura M. Willis, DNP, APRN, FNP-C.
    Summary: "The fully updated Pharmacology Made Incredibly Easy, Fourth Edition, clarifies all the major drug therapy concepts with expert direction on administering all classes of drugs."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of nursing pharmacology / Victoria Wilson
    Autonomic nervous system drugs / Sharon Wing
    Neurologic and neuromuscular drugs / Sarah Clark
    Pain medications / Adair Lattimer
    Cardiovascular drugs / Katrin Moskowitz
    Respiratory drugs / Katrin Moskowitz
    Gastrointestinal drugs / Margaret M. Gingrich
    Genitourinary drugs / Amy Beckmann
    Hematologic drugs / Emily Sheff
    Endocrine drugs / Tracy Taylor
    Psychotropic drugs / Sarah Clark
    Anti-infective drugs / Charity L. Hacker
    Anti-inflammatory, antiallergy, and immunosuppressant drugs / Tracy Taylor
    Antineoplastic drugs / Sarah Clark
    Drugs for fluid and electrolyte balance / Emily Sheff.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    clinical editors, Cherie R. Rebar, Nicole M. Heimgartner, Carolyn J. Gersch.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Clinton B. Mathias, Jeremy P. McAleer, Doreen E. Szollosi, editors.
    Summary: Medicine has entered a golden age in which therapeutic agents are becoming widely available due to advances in basic science and technology. As such, many drugs have been developed that target inflammatory processes and/or the immune system. This book is intended for health professionals examining the modulation of inflammation by immunotherapeutic drugs. The immune system fills the primordial role of host defense and resistance to infections with pathogenic microorganisms. Several hematopoietic-derived cells constituting the innate and adaptive immune systems cooperate to provide barriers for microbial colonization and/or promote pathogen destruction within the host. Conversely, many immune cells are also involved in the pathogenesis and propagation of chronic inflammatory diseases. The beginning of this book details various components of the immune system including the cell types, lymphoid tissues, soluble cytokines and surface molecules that are essential for host defense. Breakdowns in immune tolerance, or dysregulated immune responses to antigens derived from self tissues or innocuous sources, can lead to the development of autoimmunity or chronic inflammatory diseases. Pathophysiologic roles for the immune system are detailed in corresponding chapters on autoimmunity, epithelial surfaces (lungs, skin, intestine), and transplantation, with special emphasis placed on immunotherapeutic drug targets. The last section of the book focuses on treatments that stimulate our immune system to specifically target and fight infectious diseases and cancer. In each chapter, the medications used to treat various diseases/conditions in terms of their mechanism of action and other pharmacologic properties are discussed in detail. Chapters begin with a table showing drug names and classifications. The importance of basic science and clinical trials cannot be understated in the context of drug development. As such, the discovery of certain medications that had a lasting impact in medicine and pharmacy are highlighted in chapter subsections named "Bench to Bedside." Several clinical applications of immunotherapeutic drugs are described within end-of -chapter case studies including practice questions. The Pharmacology of Immunotherapeutic Drugs is a reference for immunologists and clinicians (medical doctors, pharmacists, nurses) examining the modulation of inflammatory processes by a variety of medications targeting the cells and mediators of our immune system.

    Contents:
    Preface Chapter 1: Overview of the Immune System and its Pharmacological Targets
    Chapter 2: Modulation of the Innate Immune System
    Chapter 3: Modulation of the Adaptive Immune System
    Chapter 4: Respiratory Disorders of the Immune System and their Pharmacological Treatment
    Chapter 5: Inflammation of the Skin and its therapeutic topics
    Chapter 6: Inflammatory Diseases of the Gastrointestinal Tract and Pharmacological Treatments
    Chapter 7: Mechanisms of Autoimmunity and Pharmacologic Treatments
    Chapter 8: Transplantation: Immunologic Principles and Pharmacologic Agents
    Chapter 9: Immunopathogenesis, Immunization, and Treatment of Infectious Diseases
    Chapter 10: Cancer Immunotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Alan Cowan, Gil Yosipovitch, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    editor, Anand Ramachandran.
    Summary: "Pharmacology Recall uses a 2-column Q&A format to provide quick and accessible review of pharmacology for medical students. Though the basic science volumes in this series have generally not fared well, this text has performed consistently and receives strong reviews from students. While subjects like Anatomy proved to be too complex for the Recall style, Pharmacology seems to be particularly effective due to the nature of the subject--there is lots to memorize, or "recall.""--Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RM301.12 .P44 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Mario Babbini, Mary Thomas.
    Contents:
    General principles of pharmacology
    Autonomic nervous system
    Central nervous system
    Cardiovascular and renal systems
    Endocrine system
    Respiratory, gastrointestinal, and hematopoietic systems
    Inflammation and immunomodulation
    Chemotherapeutic drugs.
  • Digital
    editors: Manish Kumar, Ashita Sharma, Praveen Kumar.
    Summary: The book presents a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of phytochemicals as efficient cancer therapeutics. Over the last few decades there has been a paradigm shift from conventional cancer therapeutic approaches to alternative and complementary medicinal approaches especially using phytoconstituents from natural products. As such, the book provides an in-depth understanding of phytochemicals targeting diverse signaling pathways involved in cancer along with the evaluation of the cancer modulatory effects of phytochemicals. It also highlights the potential modulatory effect of single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) on the cancer-associated cellular pathways and their interactions with the phytochemicals. Further, it analyzes the drug delivery methods, bioavailability of active components of botanicals, and toxicity of phytochemicals. Lastly, the book elucidates the 3D cell culture and animal models systems to analyze the beneficial effects of phytochemicals in cancer.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    List of Contributors
    1: Phytochemicals in Cancer Chemoprevention: A Brief Perspective
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Phytochemicals in Cancer Therapy
    1.3 Potential of Phytochemicals for Cancer Chemoprevention
    1.3.1 Phytochemicals as ROS Scavengers and Redox Modulators
    1.3.2 Phytochemicals in DNA Damage and Repair
    1.3.3 Phytochemicals Control Gene Expression
    1.3.4 Phytochemicals Modulate Phase 1 and Phase 2 Enzymes
    1.3.5 Phytochemicals Inhibit Cell Proliferation
    1.3.6 Phytochemicals Promote Autophagy 1.3.7 Phytochemicals Exhibit Anti-inflammatory Effects
    1.3.8 Phytochemicals Modulate Tumor Metabolism
    1.3.9 Phytochemicals Modulate Gut Microbiota to Prevent Cancer
    1.4 Limitations of Phytochemicals as Therapeutics for Chemoprevention
    1.4.1 Complex Mixture of Metabolites
    1.4.2 Bioavailability of Phytochemicals
    1.4.3 Biphasic Effects
    1.5 Phytochemicals in Clinical Trials and the Therapies
    1.6 Future Directions: Filling in the Gaps
    1.7 Conclusions
    References
    2: Role of Phytochemicals in Modulating Signaling Cascades in Cancer Cells 2.4.5.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of PI3K-AKT Signaling
    2.4.6 Wnt Cell Signaling
    2.4.6.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of Wnt Signaling
    2.4.7 mTOR Pathway
    2.4.7.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of mTOR Signaling
    2.4.8 Phytochemicals as Modulators of Antioxidant and Anti-Inflammatory Stress
    2.4.9 Cell Cycle Modulators
    2.4.10 Tumor Suppressor Genes Activation and DNA Repair Mechanism
    2.4.11 Inducing Programmed Cell Death/Apoptosis
    2.4.11.1 Induction of Apoptosis by Phytochemicals
    2.5 Conclusion
    References 3: Diverse Cancer Therapeutic Interactions: Complexities in Cancer Management
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Complex Interaction of Anticancer Drugs with Signal Transduction Pathways in Cells
    3.3 Therapeutic Limitations of Anticancer Drugs
    3.3.1 Doxorubicin
    3.3.2 Abiraterone
    3.3.3 Asparaginase (Erwinia chrysanthemi)
    3.3.4 Axitinib
    3.3.5 Tamoxifen
    3.3.6 Crizotinib
    3.4 Competing the Complex Cellular Networks Towards a Rational Cancer Therapy
    3.5 Therapeutic Limitations Due to Personalized Cancer Treatment
    3.5.1 Applications of Personalized Therapy
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Amritpal Singh Saroya, Jaswinder Singh.
    Summary: "Natural Products have always played a pivotal role as sources for drug lead compounds. This book is aimed at providing inside purview of the scope of natural products (including herbal and marine) in the possible treatment of neurological disorders. The book explains pre-clinical neuropharmacological investigations done on herbs including Bacopa monnieri, Hypericum perforatum, Passiflora incarnata, Scutellaria baicalensis and Piper methysticum. It provides a comprehensive overview of the role of phytoconstituents like huperzine, curcumin, Salvinorin A, bioflavonoids, sulforaphane, tanshinone IIA, tetramethylpyrazine, tetrahydrocannabinol, and cannabidiol in the treatment of neurological disorders. The book provides a modern concept of herbal medications, neuropharmacology of marine bioactive products and Ayurvedic formulations, herbal drugs with abuse potential and neurotoxic mycotoxins."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to Herbal Medicine
    2. Medicinal Herbs Used in Herbal Medicine for Neurological Disorders
    3. Neuropharmacology of Genus Hypericum. Hypericin and Hyperforin
    4. Neuropharmacology of Lavender, Rosemary and Salvia
    5. Neuropharmacology of Passiflora Genus
    6. Neuropharmacology of Scutellaria baicalensis Georgi
    7. Piper methysticum G. Forst: a Potent Antianxiety Agent
    8. Neuropharmacology of Melissa officinalis L.
    9. Neuropharmacology of Chamomiles
    10. Neuropharmacology of Bacopa monnieri with Reference to Bacosides
    11. Neuropharmacology of Acorus calamus L.
    12. Neuropharmacology of Celastrus paniculatus Willd.
    13. Phytopharmacology of Indian Nootropic Convolvulus pluricaulis
    14. Neuropharmacology of Rhodiola rosea L.
    15. Neuropharmacology of Salvia miltiorrhiza Bunge (Danshen)
    16. Neuropharmacology of Withania somnifera Dunal.
    17. Neuropharmacology of Nardostachys jatamansi DC.
    18. Neuropharmacology of Nutritional Supplements
    19. Neuropharmacology of Valeriana Genus
    20. Neuropharmacology of Curcumin. Intro; Contents; About the Authors; 1: Introduction toHerbal Medicine; 1.1 Some Basic Definitions; 1.2 History ofHerbal Medicine; 1.3 Renaissance ofHerbal Medicine; 1.4 Herbal Glossary; 2: Medicinal Herbs Used inHerbal Medicine forNeurological Disorders; 2.1 Albizia julibrissin Baker (Fabaceae); 2.2 Acorus gramineus Sol. Aiton (Acoraceae); 2.3 Acorus tatarinowii Schott (Acoraceae); 2.4 Amphilophium crucigerum (L.) L.G. Lohmann (Bignoniaceae); 2.5 Galphimia glauca Cav. (Malpighiaceae); 2.6 Hypoxis hemerocallidea Fisch. & C.A. Mey. (Hypoxidaceae) 2.7 Litsea glaucescens Kunth (Lauraceae)2.8 Leonurus sibiricus L. (Lamiaceae); 2.9 Melissa officinalis L. (Lamiaceae); 2.10 Nepeta cataria L. (Lamiaceae); 2.11 Nepeta hindostana (Roth) Haines (Lamiaceae); 2.12 Petiveria alliacea L.; 2.13 Salvia guaranitica St. Hil. (Lamiaceae); 2.14 Sceletium tortuosum (L.) N.E. Brown (Aizoaceae); 2.15 Sorbus alnifolia (Sieb. et Zucc.) K. Koch (Rosaceae); 2.16 Stereospermum kunthianum Cham. (Bignoniaceae); 2.17 Tilia tomentosa Moench (Tiliaceae); 2.18 Verbena officinalis L. (Verbenaceae); References 3.13.3 Hypericum andObsessive-Compulsive Disorder (OCD)3.13.4 Comparative Trials withSynthetic Drugs; 3.13.4.1 Hypericum Extract vs Maprotiline; 3.13.4.2 Hypericum Extract Versus Imipramine; 3.13.4.3 Hypericum Extract Versus Amitriptyline; 3.13.4.4 Hypericum Extract Versus Fluoxetine; 3.13.4.5 Hypericum Extract Versus Sertraline; 3.13.4.6 Hypericum Extract Versus Citalopram; 3.13.4.7 Hypericum Extract Versus Paroxetine; 3.14 Neuropharmacology ofOther Hypericum Species; 3.14.1 Hypericum calycinum L.; 3.14.2 Hypericum caprifoliatum Cham. & Schltdl. 3.6.1.5 Neuroprotective Activity3.7 Neuropharmacology ofHypericin; 3.7.1 Non-clinical; 3.7.2 Clinical; 3.8 Neuropharmacology ofPseudohypericin; 3.9 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Xanthones; 3.10 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Flavonoids; 3.11 Neuropharmacology ofHyperforin; 3.11.1 Non-clinical; 3.11.2 Clinical; 3.12 Neuropharmacology ofAdhyperforin; 3.13 Clinical Pharmacology ofH. perforatum Extract; 3.13.1 Clinical Trials inDepression; 3.13.1.1 Mild toModerate Depression; 3.13.1.2 Severe Major Depression; 3.13.2 Hypericum andSeasonal Affective Disorder (SAD) 3: Neuropharmacology ofGenus Hypericum: Hypericin andHyperforin3.1 Hypericum perforatum Linn. (Guttiferae); 3.2 Habitat; 3.3 Botany; 3.4 Traditional Use inTreatment ofDiseases oftheNervous System; 3.5 Chemistry; 3.5.1 Napthodianthrones; 3.5.2 Acylphloroglucinols; 3.5.3 Flavonoids; 3.5.4 Flavanols; 3.5.5 Xanthones andSterols (Mathis andOurisson 1964); 3.5.6 Terpenoids; 3.6 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Extract; 3.6.1 Non-clinical Studies; 3.6.1.1 Antidepressant Activity; 3.6.1.2 Anxiolytic Activity; 3.6.1.3 Anti-dementia Activity; 3.6.1.4 Antistress Activity
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Virginia P. Arcangelo, PhD, NP, Family Nurse Practitioner, Retired, Berlin, New Jersey, Andrew M. Peterson, PharmD, PhD, FCPP, John Wyeth Dean, Professor of Clinical Pharmacy and Professor of Health Policy, University of the Sciences in Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Veronica F. Wilbur, PhD, APRN-FNP, CNE, FAANP, Assistant Professor of Graduate Nursing, West Chester University, West Chester, Pennsylvania, Jennifer A. Reinhold, BA, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, University of the Sciences in Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
    Contents:
    Unit 1: Principles of therapeutics. Issues for the practitioner in drug therapy
    Pharmacokinetic basis of therapeutics and pharmacodynamic principles
    Impact of drug interactions and adverse events on therapeutics
    Principles of pharmacotherapy in pediatrics
    Principles of pharmacotherapy in pregnancy and lactation
    Pharmacotherapy principles in older adults
    Principles of pharmacology in pain management
    Principles of antimicrobial therapy
    Complementary and alternative medicine
    Pharmacogenomics
    Unit 2: Pharmacotherapy for skin disorders. Contact dermatitis
    Fungal infections of the skin
    Viral infections of the skin
    Bacterial infections of the skin
    Psoriasis
    Acne vulgaris and rosacea
    Unit 3: Pharmacotherapy for eye and ear disorders. Ophthalmic disorders
    Otitis media and otitis externa
    Unit 4: Pharmacotherapy for cardiovascular disorders. Hypertension
    Hyperlipidemia
    Chronic stable angina
    Heart failure
    Arrhythmias
    Unit 5: Pharmacotherapy for respiratory disorders
    Upper respiratory infections
    Asthma
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Bronchitis and pneumonia
    Unit 6: pharmacotherapy for gastrointestinal tract disorders
    Nausea and vomiting
    Gastroesophageal reflux disease and peptic ulcer disease
    Constipation, diarrhea, and irritable bowel syndrome
    Inflammatory bowel disease
    Unit 7: pharmacotherapy for genitourinary tract disorders. Urinary tract infection
    Prostatic disorders and erectile dysfunction
    Overactive bladder
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Unit 8: Pharmacotherapy for musculoskeletal disorders. Osteoarthritis and gout
    Rheumatoid arthritis
    Unit 9: Pharmacology for neurological/psychological disorders. Headaches
    Seizure disorders
    Major depressive disorder
    Anxiety disorders
    Insomnia and sleep disorders
    Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder
    Alzheimer disease
    Parkinson disease
    Unit 10: Pharmacotherapy for endocrine disorders. Diabetes mellitus
    Thyroid disorders
    Unit 11: Pharmacotherapy for immune disorders. Allergies and allergic reactions
    Human immunodeficiency virus
    Unit 12: Pharmacotherapy for hematologic disorders. Pharmacotherapy for venous thromboembolism prevention and treatment, stroke prevention in atrial fibrillation, and thromboembolism prevention with mechanical heart valves
    Anemias
    Unit 13: Pharmacotherapy in health promotion. Immunizations
    Smoking cessation
    Weight loss
    Unit 14: Women's health. Contraception
    Menopause
    Osteoporosis
    Vaginitis
    Unit 15: Integrative approach to patient care. The economics of pharmacotherapeutics
    Integrative approaches to pharmacotherapy: a look at complex cases.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Joseph T. DiPiro, Gary C. Yee, L. Michael Posey, Stuart T. Haines, Thomas D. Nolin, Vicki L. Ellingrod.
    Summary: "The 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach offers excellent information to address aspects of all four of these educational outcomes. Recognizing the need for a consistent process in the delivery of patient care across the profession, the Joint Commission of Pharmacy Practitioners (JCPP) in 2014 released the Pharmacists' Patient Care Process (PPCP). The process is applicable to any practice setting where pharmacists provide patient care and for any patient care service provided by pharmacists. ACPE Standards 2016 incorporated the PPCP as a required component of the curriculum. The 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach provides a new chapter fully describing the PPCP's purpose and components. In a unique and very innovative approach the new edition provides a "patient care process box" for the clinical conditions addressed. Each "box" focuses on the collection and assessment of information relevant to the clinical condition, the development of a plan of treatment and its implementation, as well as how to monitor and evaluate the success of the plan. This new feature should make the 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach stand out from any other clinical textbook for pharmacy students. Although I have focused this foreword, primarily as a textbook for faculty and students in the United States, as a site visitor for ACPE's International Services Program, I became aware of how much previous editions of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach have been adopted in other countries and the positive reactions from our international faculty and student colleagues. Likewise, because of the new edition's focus on the PPCP and the detail with which it is applied to various clinical conditions that pharmacists face in practice, I believe the 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach will prove to be an outstanding source for the continuing professional development of pharmacists in all practice settings."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Foundation issues
    Section 2. Common health problems
    Section 3. Special populations
    Section 4. Cardiovascular disorders
    Section 5. Respiratory disorders
    Section 6. Gastrointestinal disorders
    Section 7. Renal disorders
    Section 8. Neurologic disorders
    Section 9. Psychiatric disorders
    Section 10. Endocrinologic disorders
    Section 11. Gynecologic and obstetric disorders
    Section 12. Urologic disorders
    Section 13. Immunologic disorders
    Section 14. Rheumatologic disorders
    Section 15. Ophthalmic disorders
    Section 16. Dermatologic disorders
    Section 17. Hematologic disorders
    Section 18. Infectious diseases
    Section 19. Oncologic disorders
    Section 20. Nutritional disorders.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessAPN
    AccessAPN
    AccessPharmacy
  • Digital/Print
    editors, Joseph T. DiPiro, Robert L. Talbert, Gary C. Yee, Gary R. Matzke, Barbara G. Wells, L. Michael Posey ; associate editors, Vicki L. Ellingrod, Stuart T. Haines, Thomas D. Nolin.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM263 .P56 2017
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Terry L. Schwinghammer, Julia M. Koehler, Jill S. Borchert, Douglas Slain, Sharon K. Park.
    Contents:
    Principles of patient-focused therapy
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Renal disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Women's health (gynecologic disorders)
    Urologic disorders
    Immunologic disorders
    Bone and joint disorders
    Disorders of the eyes, ears, nose, and throat
    Dermatologic disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious disorders
    Oncologic disorders
    Nutrition and nutritional disorders
    Complementary and alternative therapies (Level III).
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    Terry L. Schwinghammer, Julia M. Koehler, Jill S. Borchert, Douglas Slain, Sharon K. Park
    Summary: Medicine is an ever-changing science. As new research and clinical experience broaden our knowledge, changes in treatment and drug therapy are required. The authors and the publisher of this work have checked with sources believed to be reliable in their efforts to provide information that is complete and generally in accord with the standards accepted at the time of publication. However, in view of the possibility of human error or changes in medical sciences, neither the authors nor the publisher nor any other party who has been involved in the preparation or publication of this work warrants that the information contained herein is in every respect accurate or complete, and they disclaim all responsibility for any errors or omissions, or for the results obtained from use of the information contained in this work. Readers are encouraged to confirm the information contained herein with other sources. For example and in particular, readers are advised to check the product information sheet included in the package of each drug they plan to administer to be certain that the information contained in this work is accurate and that changes have not been made in the recommended dose or in the contraindications for administration. This recommendation is of particular importance in connection with new or infrequently used drugs

    Contents:
    Principles of patient-focused therapy
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Renal disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Gynecologic and obstetric disorders
    Urologic disorders
    Immunologic disorders
    Bone and joint disorders
    Eyes, ears, nose and throat disorders
    Dermatologic disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious diseases
    Oncologic disorders
    Nutrition and nutritional disorders
    Complementary and alternative therapies (level III)
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessAPN
    AccessAPN
  • Digital
    Xingshun Qi, Yongping Yang, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide an updated information on different types of major and emerging drugs for managing liver cirrhosis and its complications, including acute gastroesophageal variceal bleeding, ascites, hepatic encephalopathy, liver failure, acute kidney injury, and portal venous thrombosis. The chapters are organized by drug class, such as anti-HBV drugs, anti-HCV drugs, anticoagulants, and antibiotics, etc. The clinical efficacy, indication, and contra-indication of the various drug therapies are discussed using supportive reference material from authoritative sources and published clinical trials. It will be an invaluable reference for physicians who are treating patients with liver cirrhosis, especially those presenting with acute life-threatening complications.

    Contents:
    Anti-HBV drugs in liver cirrhosis
    Anti-HCV drugs in liver cirrhosis
    Anticoagulants in liver cirrhosis
    Antibiotics in liver cirrhosis
    Silymarin in liver cirrhosis
    Ursodeoxycholic acid in liver cirrhosis
    Emricasan in liver cirrhosis
    Non-selective beta blockers in liver cirrhosis
    Somatostatin and octreotide in liver cirrhosis
    Terlipressin in liver cirrhosis
    Diuretics in liver cirrhosis
    Statins in liver cirrhosis
    L-Ornithine L-Aspartate in liver cirrhosis
    Lactulose in liver cirrhosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Barbara G. Wells, PharmD, FASHP, FCCP, Dean Emeritus and Professor Emeritus, Executive Director Emeritus, Research Institute of Pharmaceutical Sciences, School of Pharmacy, the University of Missippi, Oxford, Missippi, Joseph T. DiPiro, FCCP, Professor and Dean, Archie O. McCalley Chair, School of Pharmacy, Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, Virginia, Terry L. Schwinghammer, PharmD, FCCP, FASHP, FAPHA, BCPS, Professor and Chair, Department of Clinical Pharmacy, School of Pharmacy, West Virginia University, Morgantown, University, Cecily V. DiPiro, PharmD, CDE, Consultant Pharmacist.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Bone And Joint Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 1: Gout And Hyperuricemia
    Chapter 2: Osteoarthritis
    Chapter 3: Osteoporosis
    Chapter 4: Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Section 2: Cardiovascular Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 5: Acute Coronary Syndromes
    Chapter 6: Arrhythmias
    Chapter 7: Cardiac Arrest
    Chapter 8: Dyslipidemia
    Chapter 9: Heart Failure
    Chapter 10: Hypertension
    Chapter 11: Ischemic Heart Disease
    Chapter 12: Shock
    Chapter 13: Stroke
    Chapter 14: Venous Thromboembolism
    Section 3: Dermatologic Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 15: Acne Vulgaris
    Chapter 16: Dermatologic Drug Reactions And Common Skin Conditions
    Chapter 17: Psoriasis
    Section 4: Endocrinologic Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 18: Adrenal Gland Disorders
    Chapter 19: Diabetes Mellitus
    Chapter 20: Thyroid Disorders
    Section 5: Gastrointestinal Disorders Edited By Joseph T. Dipiro And Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 21: Cirrhosis And Portal Hypertension
    Chapter 22: Constipation
    Chapter 23: Diarrhea
    Chapter 24: Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Chapter 25: Hepatitis, Viral
    Chapter 26: Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Chapter 27: Nausea And Vomiting
    Chapter 28: Pancreatitis
    Chapter 29: Peptic Ulcer Disease
    Section 6: Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 30: Contraception
    Chapter 31: Menopausal, Perimenopausal, And Postmenopausal Hormone Therapy
    Chapter 32: Pregnancy And Lactation: Therapeutic Considerations
    Section 7: Hematologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 33: Anemias
    Chapter 34: Sickle Cell Disease
    Section 8: Infectious Diseases Edited By Joseph T. Dipiro
    Chapter 35: Antimicrobial Regimen Selection
    Chapter 36: Central Nervous System Infections
    Chapter 37: Endocarditis
    Chapter 38: Fungal Infections, Invasive
    Chapter 39: Gastrointestinal Infections
    Chapter 40: Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection
    Chapter 41: Influenza
    Chapter 42: Intra-abdominal Infections
    Chapter 43: Respiratory Tract Infections, Lower
    Chapter 44: Respiratory Tract Infections, Upper
    Chapter 45: Sepsis And Septic Shock
    Chapter 46: Sexually Transmitted Diseases
    Chapter 47: Skin And Soft-tissue Infections
    Chapter 48: Surgical Prophylaxis
    Chapter 49: Tuberculosis
    Chapter 50: Urinary Tract Infections
    Chapter 51: Vaccines, Toxoids, And Other Immunobiologics
    Section 9: Neurologic Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 52: Alzheimer Disease
    Chapter 53: Epilepsy
    Chapter 54: Headache: Migraine And Tension-type
    Chapter 55: Pain Management
    Chapter 56: Parkinson Disease
    Chapter 57: Status Epilepticus
    Section 10: Nutrition Support Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 58: Obesity
    Chapter 59: Nutrition Evaluation And Support. Section 11: Oncologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 60: Breast Cancer
    Chapter 61: Colorectal Cancer
    Chapter 62: Lung Cancer
    Chapter 63: Lymphomas
    Chapter 64: Prostate Cancer
    Section 12: Ophthalmic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 65: Glaucoma
    Section 13: Psychiatric Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 66: Generalized Anxiety Disorder, Panic Disorder, And Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
    Chapter 67: Bipolar Disorder
    Chapter 68: Major Depressive Disorder
    Chapter 69: Schizophrenia
    Chapter 70: Sleep-wake Disorders
    Chapter 71: Substance-related Disorders
    Section 14: Renal Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 72: Acid–base Disorders
    Chapter 73: Acute Kidney Injury
    Chapter 74: Chronic Kidney Disease
    Chapter 75: Electrolyte Homeostasis
    Section 15: Respiratory Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 76: Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 77: Asthma
    Chapter 78: Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Section 16: Urologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 79: Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia
    Chapter 80: Erectile Dysfunction
    Chapter 81: Urinary Incontinence
    Appendices Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Appendix 1: Drug Allergy
    Appendix 2: Geriatrics
    Appendix 3: Drug-induced Hematologic Disorders
    Appendix 4: Drug-induced Liver Disease
    Appendix 5: Drug-induced Pulmonary Disease
    Appendix 6: Drug-induced Kidney Disease.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Terry L. Schwinghammer, Joseph T. DiPiro, Vicki L. Ellingrod, Cecily V. DiPiro.
    Summary: Pharmacotherapy Handbook, Eleventh Edition delivers quick-access answers in any clinical setting. Whether you're a student, pharmacist, and hospital administrator, it offers a thorough understanding about what drugs are used in various situations, and why. The text delivers both the key points pharmacists needs to know in practice and the information students studying for the boards needs to pass. With JNC-VI guidelines-- the standard for drug therapy and pharmaceutical care--it facilitates fast and easy access to answers, and all text will appear on AccessPharmacy for the first time.

    Contents:
    Bone and Joint disorders
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Dermatologic disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Gynecologic and Obstetric disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious Diseases
    Neurologic disorders
    Nutrition Support
    Oncologic disorders
    Ophthalmic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Renal disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Urologic disorders.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2021
  • Digital
    Arturo Evangelista, Christoph A. Nienaber, editors.
    Summary: This book is driven by the considerable progress made by novel imaging techniques in understanding the pathophysiology and evolution of aortic disease and its diagnosis. Despite the lack of symptoms in stable conditions, most aortic diseases have a high morbidity and mortality. New therapeutic strategies such as endovascular treatment and surgical techniques have appeared to improve conventional surgery in advanced phases of the disease, but until recently, medical treatment has focused on the control of cardiovascular risk factors using beta-blockers to reduce aortic wall stress by reducing blood pressure and heart rate. Pharmacotherapy in Aortic Disease updates the reader on the new medical treatment that are changing the natural history of these diseases. Leading experts have created a critical in-depth, yet concise, analysis of the available medical treatments for different aortic disease entities. Both basic research studies and clinical trials discussed in this book serve as a base for improving therapeutic management, delaying the need for surgery, and prolonging survival in these patients.

    Contents:
    Aortic atherosclerosis as an embolic source
    Aortitis
    Aortic aneurysm
    Marfan Syndrome
    Acute Aortic Syndrome
    Chronic aortic dissection.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Marie A. Chisholm-Burns, Terry L. Schwinghammer, Patrick M. Malone, Jill M. Kolesar, P. Brandon Bookstaver, Kelly C. Lee.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2019
  • Digital
    Marie Chisholm-Burns, Terry Schwinghammer, Patrick Malone, Jill Kolesar, Kelly C Lee, P. Brandon Bookstaver.
    Summary: "Pharmacotherapy Principles & Practice uses a solid evidence-based approach to teach you how to design, implement, monitor, and evaluate medication therapy. Updated with additional content and reflecting the latest findings, this sixth edition provides everything you need to gain an in-depth understanding of the underlying principles of the pharmacotherapy of disease--and their practical application. All chapters were written or reviewed by pharmacists, nurse practitioners, physician assists, and physicians recognized by authorities in their fields. The book opens with an insightful introductory chapter and is followed by five chapters focused on specific populations: pediatrics, geriatrics, palliative care, critical care, and global health and travel medicine. The subsequent 97 disease-based chapters cover epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical presentation and diagnosis, and nonpharmacologic therapy, followed by clear recommendations for medication selection, desired outcomes, dosing, and patient monitoring"--Amazon.

    Contents:
    Part I. Special Populations. Part II. Disorders of Order Systems. Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic and Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders
    Immunologic Disorders
    Bone and Joint Disorders
    Disorders of the Eyes, Ears, Nose, and Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition and Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2022
  • Digital
    Kathryn R. Matthias, Michael D. Katz.
    Contents:
    An Introduction On How To Use Study Guide And Practice Case
    Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders - Immunologic Disorders
    Bone And Joint Disorders
    Disorders Of The Eyes, Ears, Nose, And Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases Of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition And Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2023
  • Digital
    Michael D. Katz, Kathryn R. Matthias.
    Contents:
    Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders - Immunologic Disorders
    Bone And Joint Disorders
    Disorders Of The Eyes, Ears, Nose, And Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases Of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition And Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2020
  • Digital
    I. Ralph Edwards, Marie Lindquist, editors.
    Contents:
    1. How to learn Pharmacovigilance, now and in the Future
    2. Lost in Regulation
    3. What is the Future of Pharmacovigilance and how can we Make it as Good as Possible?
    4. Some Other Ideas About the Future of Pharmacovigilance
    5. Best Safety Practices now and in the Future
    6. Is There a Benefit from the Medical Literature Monitoring Service of the EMA?
    7. The Unified Drug Safety-Clinical Database
    8. Behind the Scenes
    'Silent Factors' Influencing Pharmacovigilance Practice and Decisions
    9. Shaking up Culture and Communication in PV [V6]
    10. Broadening the Scope of Pharmacovigilance
    11. Effective Treatment Matters: Revitalizing Pharmacoviglance
    12. There are More Weber-Effects
    13. Herbal and Traditional Medicines, Now and Future
    14. The Concept of 'Health'
    15. Impact of Referral Procedures on the Interaction of RMP and PSUR
    16. Other Sources of Information for Monitoring Drug Safety: Now and in the Future
    17. Ecopharmacovigilance.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Edoardo Spina, Gianluca Trifirò, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction: History of pharmacovigilance in psychiatry
    2. Adverse drug reactions: definition and pathogenesis
    3. Methodologies for pharmacovigilance monitoring of psychotropic drugs
    4. The role of prescription event monitoring in pharmacovigilance of psychotropic drugs
    5. The role of healthcare databases in pharmacovigilance of psychotropic drugs
    6. Monitoring of plasma concentrations of psychotropic drugs in pharmacovigilance
    7. The role of pharmacogenetics in pharmacovigilance of psychotropic drugs
    8. Safety and tolerability of antidepressants
    9. Safety and tolerability of antipsychotics
    10. Safety and tolerability of anxiolytics/sedative hypnotics
    11. Safety and tolerability of mood stabilizers
    12. Safety and tolerability of medications for ADHD
    13. Safety of psychotropic drugs in children and adolescents
    14. Safety of psychotropic drugs in the elderly(Safety of psychotropic drugs in the elderly
    15. Safety of psychotropic drugs in pregnancy and breastfeeding.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    by W. Cary Mobley.
    Contents:
    Pharmacy Calculations
    Supplemental Video Chapter --
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Ahmed Ibrahim Fathelrahmen, Mohamed Izham Mohamed Ibrahim, Alian A. Alrasheedy, Albert I. Wertheimer.
    Summary: Pharmacy Education in the Twenty First Century and Beyond: Global Achievements and Challenges offers a complete reference on global pharmacy education, along with a detailed discussion of future issues and solutions. This book begins with a brief overview of the history of pharmacy education, covering all levels of education and styles of learning, from undergraduate, continuing professional education, and methods for self-learning and development. Teaching strategies such as team-based learning, problem-based learning and interdisciplinary education are also described and compared to conclude why certain pharmacy programs attract students, and why educators prefer particular teaching strategies, assessment tools and learning styles. As a result, this book provides pharmacy educators, administrators, students and practitioners with a comprehensive guide to pharmacy education that will enable readers to choose the best approaches to improve, reform or select a program based on worldwide experience and the latest available evidence and research.

    Contents:
    Section I. Defining pharmacy education
    Section II. Pharmacy education: basic roles and contributions
    Section III. Pharmacy education: features and contributing factors
    Section IV. Special issues in pharmacy education
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    William J. Feinberg.
    Contents:
    Federal law summary
    Alabama
    Arizona
    Arkansas
    California
    Colorado
    Florida
    Georgia
    Illinois
    Indiana
    Kentucky
    Louisiana
    Maryland
    North Carolina
    NJ
    Ohio
    Oregon
    Pennsylvania
    South Carolina
    Texas
    Wisconsin.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] David P. Zgarrick, Leticia R. Moczygemba, Greg L. Alston, Shane P. Desselle.
    Summary: Addresses various aspects of pharmacy management, including people, materials, money, time, and information, applicable to practice settings. This book covers what from personal management to managing operations (business planning, quality control, managing technology), human resources management, financial management, and marketing.

    Contents:
    SECTION I: WHY STUDY MANAGEMENT IN PHARMACY SCHOOL?
    1: THE “MANAGEMENT” IN MEDICATION THERAPY MANAGEMENT
    2: MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
    3: CREATING AND MANAGING VALUE
    SECTION II: MANAGING OPERATIONS
    4: STRATEGIC PLANNING IN PHARMACY OPERATIONS
    5: BUSINESS PLANNING FOR PHARMACY PROGRAMS
    6: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
    7: MANAGING MEDICATION USE PROCESS SUPPORTING TECHNOLOGIES AND AUTOMATION
    8: ENSURING QUALITY IN PHARMACY OPERATIONS
    9: RISK MANAGEMENT IN CONTEMPORARY PHARMACY PRACTICE
    10: PREVENTING AND MANAGING MEDICATION ERRORS: THE PHARMACIST’S ROLE
    11: COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS AND REGULATORY BODIES
    SECTION III: MANAGING PEOPLE
    12: TIME MANAGEMENT/ORGANIZATIONAL SKILLS
    13: ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND BEHAVIOR
    14: HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
    15: THE BASICS OF EMPLOYMENT LAW AND WORKPLACE SAFETY
    16: PERFORMANCE APPRAISAL SYSTEMS
    17: LEADERSHIP
    SECTION IV: MANAGING MONEY
    18: FINANCIAL REPORTS
    19: BUDGETING
    20: THIRD-PARTY PAYER CONSIDERATIONS
    SECTION V: MANAGING TRADITIONAL GOODS AND SERVICES
    21: MARKETING THEORY
    22: MARKETING APPLICATIONS
    23: CUSTOMER SERVICE
    24: PURCHASING AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT
    25: MERCHANDISING
    SECTION VI: MANAGING VALUE-ADDED SERVICES
    26: VALUE-ADDED SERVICES AS A COMPONENT OF ENHANCING PHARMACISTS’ ROLES IN PUBLIC HEALTH
    27: IMPLEMENTING VALUE-ADDED PHARMACY SERVICES
    28: IMPACT OF HEALTH POLICY ON HEALTH CARE DELIVERY
    SECTION VII: MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS IN SPECIFIC PHARMACY PRACTICE SETTINGS
    29: ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND INNOVATION
    30: APPLICATIONS IN INDEPENDENT COMMUNITY PHARMACY
    31: APPLICATIONS IN SAFETY NET CLINICS
    32: APPLICATIONS IN MANAGED AND SPECIALTY ENVIRONMENTS
    33: APPLICATIONS IN VARIED HEALTH CARE SYSTEMS.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] David P. Zgarrick, Leticia R. Moczygemba, Greg L. Alston, Shane P. Desselle.
    Summary: "The editors believed that there would be value in a comprehensive pharmacy management textbook that covered many content areas and gathered a variety of resources into one text. They also aimed to develop a text that uses "evidence-based management"; that is, material derived from the best and most contemporary primary literature, but that which at the same time focuses on the application of knowledge into skills that pharmacists will use every day"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    I. WHY STUDY MANAGEMENT IN PHARMACY SCHOOL?
    Chapter 1 The “Management” in Medication Therapy Management
    Chapter 2 Management Functions
    Chapter 3 Leadership in Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 4 Ethical Decision-Making, Problem-Solving, and Delegating Authority
    Chapter 5 Creating and Managing Value
    II. MANAGING OPERATIONS
    Chapter 6 Strategic Planning in Pharmacy Operations
    Chapter 7 Business Planning for Pharmacy Programs
    Chapter 8 Operations Management
    Chapter 9 Managing Technology that Supports the Medication Use Process
    Chapter 10 Ensuring Quality in Pharmacy Operations
    Chapter 11 Risk Management in Contemporary Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 12 Preventing and Managing Medication Errors: The Pharmacist’s Role
    Chapter 13 Compliance with Regulations and Regulatory Bodies
    III. MANAGING PEOPLE
    Chapter 14 Managing Yourself for Success
    Chapter 15 Negotiation Skills
    Chapter 16 Organizational Structure and Behavior
    Chapter 17 Human Resources Management Functions
    Chapter 18 The Basics of Employment Law and Workplace Safety
    Chapter 19 Pharmacy Technicians
    Chapter 20 Performance Appraisal Systems
    IV. MANAGING MONEY
    Chapter 21 Financial Reports
    Chapter 22 Budgeting
    Chapter 23 Third-Party Payer Considerations
    V. MANAGING TRADITIONAL GOODS AND SERVICES
    Chapter 24 Marketing Fundamentals
    Chapter 25 Marketing Applications
    Chapter 26 Customer Service
    Chapter 27 Supply Chain Management
    Chapter 28 Merchandising
    VI. MANAGING VALUE-ADDED SERVICES
    Chapter 29 Value-Added Services as a Component of Enhancing Pharmacists’ Roles in Public Health
    VII. MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS IN SPECIFIC PHARMACY PRACTICE SETTINGS
    Chapter 31 Entrepreneurship and Innovation
    Chapter 32 Applications in Independent Community Pharmacy
    Index.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2020
  • Digital
    Fred G. Weissman, Jim Pinder, Mark R. Berns.
    Summary: Intends to help pharmacy students better understand the concepts of tort law and apply it to their own experiences. Focusing on the civil liabilities a pharmacist may face in real-world practice, this book describes each tort in detail, outlining the elements that must be proven for successful litigation.

    Contents:
    Introduction to tort law and its relevance to the practice of pharmacy
    "Briefing" : a tort law case
    Intentional torts encountered in pharmacy practice
    Background to negligence in pharmacy practice : elements of negligence (part I)
    Negligence (part II) : duty and breach of duty
    Negligence (part III) : causation and injury
    Negligence (part IV) : defenses
    Negligence (part V) : remedies
    Negligence (part VI) : miscellaneous categories : vicarious and premise liability
    Defamation
    Invasion of privacy and issues pertaining to confidentiality
    Intentional interference with business relations
    Fraud and negligent misrepresentation
    Products liability (part I) : general principles
    Products liability (part II) : case presentations.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2016
  • Digital
    Zaheer-Ud-Din Babar, editor.
    Contents:
    Pharmacy Practice Research- Evidence and Impact
    Research Methodologies related to pharmacy practice: An Overview
    Quantitative Methods in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Qualitative Methods in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Action Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Participatory Action Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Mixed Methods Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Applying organizational theory in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Applying pharmacoeconomic methods in community and hospital pharmacy research
    Concept Mapping and pattern matching in pharmacy practice research
    Pharmacoepidemiological approaches in healthcare
    Future of Pharmacy Practice Research
    Pharmacists' attitudes towards pharmacy practice research: a review.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Zaheer-ud-Din Babar, editor.
    Summary: The first edition of Pharmacy Practice Research Methods provided a contemporary overview of pharmacy practice research, discussing relevant theories, methodologies, models and techniques. It included chapters on a range of quantitative, qualitative, action research and mixed methods as well as management theories underpinning change in pharmacy practice. This new edition of the book is much broader and more diversified. It includes the quality improvement methods in pharmacy practice research, focusing on the key differences between high and low-income countries with regard to pharmacy practice research, as well as the main challenges faced when conducting such research - areas of significant global interest. In addition, a number of the chapters covering fast-moving fields where new methods have been developed and published have been updated. Featuring seven new topics and presenting future trends, the book also explains in detail methods used in covert and overt observations in pharmacy practice, as well as methods involved in realist research, which are important to countries seeking to produce evidence-based information in this area.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Pharmacy Practice Research: Evidence, Impact and synthesis
    Chapter 2. Qualitative Methods in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Chapter 3. Action Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 4. Quality Improvement Methods in Pharmacy Practice Research
    Chapter 5. Covert and overt observations in Pharmacy practice
    Chapter 6. Realist Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 7. Importance of Mixed Methods Research in Pharmacy Practice
    Chapter 8. Grounded theory in pharmacy practice research
    Chapter 9. Pharmacoepidemiology and Pharmacoepidemiological research
    Chapter 10. Randomized Control Trials and pharmacy practice research
    Chapter 11. Information sources for pharmacy practice researchers
    Chapter 12. Systematic reviews and meta analysis in pharmacy practice research
    Chapter. 13. The future of pharmacy practice research.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Vasudha Gupta, PharmD, BCACP, CDCES, Trang Nguyen, PharmD, BCACP, Mickayla Clark, PharmD, BCPS, Evan Williams, PharmD, MBA, BCPS, BCACP, Catherine Cone, PharmD, BCPS, Shane P. Desselle, RPh, PhD, FAPhA.
    Summary: "This book provides 33 chapters, each representing one or more active learning exercises in various topic areas that faculty can use to enhance didactic and experiential education and that students can employ to apply their knowledge and improve their learning"--Preface

    Contents:
    Patient Interview and Presentation
    Utilizing SCHOLARMAC to provide-self care recommendations
    Motivational interviewing and health coaching
    Patient interviewing and medication reconciliation
    Introductory SOAP
    Comprehensive Community-Based SOAP Note
    SOAP Note and MTM
    Advanced SOAP
    Relationship-Centered Communication & Top 200 counseling
    Discharge counseling
    Dispensing Error Patient Counseling
    Counseling difficult patients
    Transgender & gender non-conforming patient communication
    Cultural Awareness during medication consultations
    Addressing Empathy
    Transference and countertransference
    Strengthening Teams through conflict management
    Communication with resistant provider
    Building interprofessional teamwork
    Interprofessional roles and responsibilities
    Hospital errors and omissions
    Red flags and fraudulent prescriptions
    Intravenous (IV) product verification
    Prescription drug coverage
    Sterile IV Compounding
    Reconstitution
    Vaccine administration
    Introduction to physical assessment
    Formulary review
    DI Questions and communicating with HCPs
    Introduction to journal article evaluation
    Advanced journal club
    formulary management
    Debates of controversial therapeutic topics
    Strengths-based leadership and escape room.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2021
  • Digital
    Ruth E. Nemire, BSPh, PharmD, EdD, Associate Executive Vice President, American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy, Alexandria, Virginia, Karen L. Kier, PhD, MSc, RPh, BCPS, BCACP, Professor of Clinical Pharmacy, Director of Assessment, Preventive Care Specialist, ONU Healthwise, Raabe College of Pharmacy, Ohio Northern University, Ada, Ohio, Michelle Assa-Eley, PhD, RPh, Princeton, New Jersey.
    Summary: Suitable for those who want to excel in pharmacy practice courses, this book offers a combination of calculations, kinetics, drug information, medical terminology, and laboratory data book that helps you to organize case information, improve problem-solving skills, learn terminology, and impress faculty during rounds.

    Contents:
    First practice course expectations / Elizabeth Frenzel Shepherd
    Ethics in pharmacy practice / Nancy S. Collins
    Pharmacy as a community-based profession / Kevin R. Kearney
    Communication : an overview / Michelle T. Assa-Eley, Ceressa T. Ward
    Rounding, documentation, and patient education / Jacquelyn L. Bainbridge, Caleb Y. Oh
    Monitoring drug therapy / Chasity M. Shelton, Kelly C. Rogers
    Legal implications for pharmacy : regulatory agencies with pharmacy oversight, legal requirements for filling a prescription and political advocacy / Dean L. Arneson, Harold Bobrow, Loretta Brickman
    A brief look at the construction of medical terminology and common definitions of words that are part of the pharmacy vernacular / Ruth E. Nemire, Karen L. Kier
    Pharmacy calculations / A. Timothy Eley
    Physical assessment skills / Cristina E. Bello-Quintero, Rachel H. Bardowell
    Interpretation of clinical laboratory data / Karen Whalen, Nancy Borja-Hart
    Designing patient treatment plans : pharmacokinetic foundations / Sandra B. Earle
    Drug information and drug literature evaluation / Karen L. Kier
    Community/ambulatory care / Maria Maniscalco-Feichtl, Karen L. Whalen
    Institutional pharmacy practice / Stephanie D. Garrett, Antonia Zapantis
    Managed care / Sherry Clayton, Karen Martin, Kathryn Shalek
    Public health / Stuart Feldman, Ruth E. Nemire
    Taking it to the streets : reducing health disparities through domestic and global outreach to the undeserved / Kelly L. Scolaro, Lisa Inge Stewart, Hazel H. Seaba.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2015
  • Print
    Frank S. David, Seth Robey, Andrew Matthews.
    Contents:
    Preparing to build a biotech financial model
    Income. Addressable patient population
    Adherence and compliance
    Pricing
    Market share
    Launch curves
    Loss of exclusivity
    Expenses. Costs of goods sold
    Sales, general, and administrative
    Sales force
    Marketing
    R&D
    Regulatory
    Valuation. R&D and regulatory probability of success
    Discount rate.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Bus & Mgt 101
    1
  • Digital
    Timothy A. Yap, Jordi Rodon, David S. Hong, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a detailed review of how oncology drug development has changed over the past decade, and serves as a comprehensive guide for the practicalities in setting up phase I trials. The book covers strategies to accelerate the development of novel antitumor compounds from the laboratory to clinical trials and beyond through the use of innovative mechanism-of-action pharmacodynamic biomarkers and pharmacokinetic studies. The reader will learn about all aspects of modern phase I trial designs, including the incorporation of precision medicine strategies, and approaches for rational patient allocation to novel anticancer therapies. Circulating biomarkers to assess mechanisms of response and resistance are changing the way we are assessing patient selection and are also covered in this book. The development of the different classes of antitumor agents are discussed, including chemotherapy, molecularly targeted agents, immunotherapies and also radiotherapy. The authors also discuss the lessons that the oncology field has learnt from the development of hematology-oncology drugs and how such strategies can be carried over into therapies for solid tumors. There is a dedicated chapter that covers the specialized statistical approaches necessary for phase I trial designs, including novel Bayesian strategies for dose escalation. This volume is designed to help clinicians better understand phase I clinical trials, but would also be of use to translational researchers (MDs and PhDs), and drug developers from academia and industry interested in cancer drug development. It could also be of use to phase I trial study coordinators, oncology nurses and advanced practice providers. Other health professionals interested in the treatment of cancer will also find this book of great value.

    Contents:
    Paradigm shift in oncology drug development
    Practicalities in setting up phase I trials
    Optimizing the preclinical development of antitumor agents for entry into phase I trials
    Considerations for the development of novel chemotherapies in phase I trials
    Considerations for the development of novel targeted agents in phase I trials
    Development of immunotherapeutic strategies in early phase clinical trials
    Assessment of radiotherapeutic strategies in phase I trials
    Development of combinatorial strategies in phase I trials
    Novel trial designs for early phase clinical trials
    Incorporating pharmacokinetic strategies for phase I trials
    Development of pharmacodynamic biomarkers for phase I trials
    Efficacy considerations for Phase I trials
    Incorporating precision medicine into Phase I clinical trials
    Molecular profiling of patients for clinical trials
    Incorporating circulating biomarkers into clinical trials
    Statistical considerations for early phase clinical trials
    Lessons from hematology for solid tumor drug development.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mohamed Fawzy Ramadan.
    Summary: Natural phenolics are powerful bioactive compounds, but their use as antioxidant agents in lipid-based foodstuffs and cosmetics is limited due to their hydrophilic traits. A promising technique to overcome low solubility of phenolics is to increase their hydrophobicity by grafting with lipophilic moiety to form lipid-enriched phenolics (lipo-phenolics). Another way to enhance the amphiphilic traits of phenolics is by lipophilization with phospholipids in a suitable solvent to form phenolics-enriched phospholipids (pheno-phospholipids). Both functionalized phenolics (phenolipids) exhibit high bioavailability and antioxidative potential. Functional phenolics-enriched phospholipids (pheno-phospholipids) play an important role in enhancing the functional properties of both phenolic compounds and phospholipids in food for their use in nutrition and health. Phenolipids have also found applications on an industrial scale, likely due to low costs, the availability of starting material and safety. Recent advances in the field of lipophilization allow accessing molecules with high potency and targeted action covering a wide spectrum of bioactivities. Owing to their cost and availability, phenolipids find applications in niche sectors such as cosmetics and pharmaceutics as well as in the novel food. This book reports on the chemistry, preparation, and functionality of lipid-enriched phenolics (lipo-phenolics), broadening their applications in food, pharmaceuticals and cosmetics. The strategies of the lipophilization of phenolics, the effect of modification on the biological properties and potential applications of the resulting lipo-phenolics are reviewed. The text also discusses the preparation, physicochemical characteristics and functional properties of phenolipids and phytosomes, including the latest developments and their current industrial status.

    Contents:
    1. Chemistry and Functionality of Phenolipids
    2. Chemistry, Functionality, and Techno-applications of Pheno-phospholipids
    3. Chemistry and Functionality of Lipo-phenolics.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ching Yee Oliver Wong, Dafang Wu.
    Summary: This casebook details key information and findings in PET oncology imaging. PET CT has been increasingly utilized in clinical practice for diagnostic evaluation, initial staging and restaging of malignancies, and plays an important role in optimal patient care. Although F-18 fluorodeoxyglucose (FDG) is still the dominant radioactive tracer in oncology PET imaging services, a handful of new tracers have recently gained the US FDA approval, such as Ga-68 or Cu-64 DOTATATE for carcinoid/neuroendocrine tumors, and F-18 Fluciclovine (AXUMIN) and PSMA for recurrent or metastatic prostate cancers. Clinical interpretation of PET CT oncology scans is often challenging, due to the specific nature of these positron emission radioactive tracers, variable background tracer activities in different organs/tissues with normal variants, complex tumor biology, and wide-ranged treatment responses, especially with emerging and new molecular and immune therapy agents. This book serves as a hands-on casebook on how to interpret oncologic PET CT studies in clinical services with a special emphasis on phenotypic nature of oncologic imaging. Clinical cases are presented in a way that is familiar to physicians from their training in nuclear medicine services. Each case starts with key clinical information or background, followed by well-displayed PET CT images, along with pertinent questions highlighting the key findings and explanation, as well as the importance in diagnosis and clinical implications on separate pages. Clinical and imaging key findings and final impressions are highlighted throughout along with qualitative and quantitative demonstrations of phenotypic nature of modern PET imaging. Written by two nuclear medicine PET specialists with decades of first-hand clinical experience, this is an ideal guide for nuclear medicine attending physicians, diagnostic radiologists, medical and surgical oncologists, and relevant trainees.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Case 1: Double Pulmonary Nodules
    1.1 Case 1: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 2: Case 2: Nodular Sclerosing Hodgkin's Lymphoma
    2.1 Case 2: Interpretation and Teaching
    2.2 Assessment of Treatment Response
    Reference
    Chapter 3: Case 3: Transformation in Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma
    3.1 Case 3: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 4: Case 4: Metabolic Phenotypes in Different Neoplasms
    4.1 Case 4: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference Chapter 5: Case 5: Marrow Involvement in Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma
    5.1 Case 5: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 6: Case 6: Hip Pain in Lymphoma
    6.1 Case 6: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 7: Case 7: Prostate Cancer-Specific PET Agent with Rising PSA
    7.1 Case 7: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 8: Case 8: Brain Tumor Evaluation
    8.1 Case 8: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 9: Case 9: Metabolic Phenotype in a Slowly Growing Lung Cancer
    9.1 Case 9: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference Chapter 10: Case 10: Metabolic Phenotype in Lung Metastasis from Colon Cancer
    10.1 Case 10: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 11: Case 11: PET and Bone Scans in Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer
    11.1 Case 11: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 12: Case 12: Neuroendocrine Cancer of the Ileum
    12.1 Case 12: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 13: Case 13: Coexisting Different PET Tumor Phenotypes
    13.1 Case 13: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 14: Case 14: COVID-19 Vaccination and Lung Nodules 14.1 Case 14: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 16: Case 16: Breast and Ovarian Uptake
    16.1 Case 16: Interpretation and Teaching
    References
    Chapter 17: Case 17: Rising PSA in Radical Prostatectomy for Prostate Cancer
    17.1 Case 17: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 18: Case 18: Concurrent Lung and Brain Metastatic Cancer
    18.1 Case 18: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 19: Case 19: Tumor Phenotypes in Metastatic Prostate Cancer
    19.1 Case 19: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference Chapter 20: Case 20: Metastatic Recurrent Melanoma
    20.1 Case 20: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 21: Case 21: Post-prostatectomy for Prostate Cancer with Rising PSA
    21.1 Case 21: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 22: Case 22: Left Adrenal Mass
    22.1 Case 22: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 23: Case 23: Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma
    23.1 Case 23: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Chapter 24: Case 24: Active Myeloma Versus Schmorl's Node
    24.1 Case 24: Interpretation and Teaching
    Reference
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Samir S. Shah, Lisa B. Zaoutis, Marina Catallozzi, Gary Frank.
    Contents:
    1. Adolescent Medicine
    2. Allergy and Asthma
    3. Analgesia and Sedation
    4. Calculations
    5. Cardiology
    6. Dermatology
    7. Emergency Medicine
    8. Endocrinology
    9. Fluids and Electrolytes
    10. Gastroenterology
    11. Genetics
    12. Hematology
    13. Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection
    14. Immunology
    15. Infectious Diseases
    16. Metabolism
    17. Neonatology
    18. Nephrology
    19. Neurology
    20. Nutrition
    21. Oncology
    22. Ophthalmology
    23. Orthopedics
    24. Otolaryngology
    25. Procedures
    26. Psychiatry
    27. Pulmonology
    28. Rheumatology
    29. Surgery
    30. Toxicology.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Samir S. Shah, Jeanine C. Ronan, Marina Catallozzi, Gary Frank.
    Summary: "Focusing specifically on caring for pediatric patients in the hospital setting, this unique handbook addresses more than 350 of the most commonly encountered inpatient pediatric medical conditions. Unlike similar handbooks on the subject, The Philadelphia Guide goes beyond diagnostic strategies to include complete treatment and management guidelines"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2021
  • Digital
    Chiayi Shen, H. Ralph Rawls, Josephine F. Esquivel-Upshaw.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Kenneth S. Kendler and Josef Parnas.
    Summary: The revisions of both DSM-IV and ICD-10 have again focused the interest of the field of psychiatry and clinical psychology on the questions of nosology. This book reviews issues within psychiatric nosology from clinical, historical and particularly philosophical perspectives. It brings together an interdisciplinary group of distinguished authors.

    Contents:
    Part I. Nature of psychiatric illness
    Part II. Reification, epidemics, and individual symptoms
    Part III. Epistemic iteration
    Part IV. Descriptive to etiologic and living document.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Engelhardt, H. Tristram; Spicker, Stuart F.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Philosophy and medicine to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Marta Bertolaso.
    Summary: Since the 1970s, the origin of cancer is being explored from the point of view of the Somatic Mutation Theory (SMT), focusing on genetic mutations and clonal expansion of somatic cells. As cancer research expanded in several directions, the dominant focus on cells remained steady, but the classes of genes and the kinds of extra-genetic factors that were shown to have causal relevance in the onset of cancer multiplied. The wild heterogeneity of cancer-related mutations and phenotypes, along with the increasing complication of models, led to an oscillation between the hectic search of the few key factors that cause cancer and the discouragement in face of a seeming endless complexity . To tame this complexity, cancer research started to avail itself of the tools that were being developed by Systems Biology. At the same time, anti-reductionist voices began claiming that cancer research was stuck in a sterile research paradigm. This alternative discourse even gave birth to an alternative theory: the Tissue Organization Field Theory (TOFT). A deeper philosophical analysis shows limits and possibilities of reductionist and anti-reductionist positions and of their polarization. This book demonstrates that a radical philosophical reflection is necessary to drive cancer research out of its impasses. At the very least, this will be a reflection on the assumptions of different kinds of cancer research, on the implications of what cancer research has been discovering over 40 years and more, on a view of scientific practice that is most able to make sense of the cognitive and social conflicts that are seen in the scientific community (and in its results), and, finally, on the nature of living entities with which we entertain this fascinating epistemological dance that we call scientific research. The proposed Dynamic and Relational View of carcinogenesis is a starting point in all these directions."

    Contents:
    Cancer Biology
    The Evolution of Explanatory Models of Cancer
    The Systemic Approach to Cancer: Models and Epistemology
    The Tissue Organization Field Theory and the Anti-reductionist Campaign
    Towards a Relational Ontology for Cancer
    On Biological Explanations
    Complementary issues of a relational view of biological determination
    Conclusion: beyond dichotomies.
  • Digital
    edited by Kostas Kampourakis, Université de Genève, Tobias Uller, Lund University.
    Summary: "Biologists rely on theories, apply models and construct explanations, but rarely reflect on their nature and structure. This book introduces key topics in philosophy of science to provide the required philosophical background for this kind of reflection, which is an important part of all aspects of research and communication in biology. It concisely and accessibly addresses fundamental questions such as: Why should biologists care about philosophy of science? How do concepts contribute to scientific advancement? What is the nature of scientific controversies in the biological sciences? Chapters draw on contemporary examples and case studies from across biology, making the discussion relevant and insightful. Written for researchers and advanced undergraduate and graduate students across the life sciences, its aim is to encourage readers to become more philosophically minded and informed to enable better scientific practice. It is also an interesting and pertinent read for philosophers of science"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Eric Mowatt-Larssen [and others], editors.
    Summary: The management of venous pathology has been revolutionized by technological advancements. Venous disease is now managed with a wide variety of techniques that collectively allow physicians to diagnose and treat venous problems in ways that few surgeons would have anticipated even a decade ago. Techniques include laser ablation, radiofrequency ablation, chemical ablation (sclerotherapy), high ligation with or without stripping, ambulatory phlebectomy, powered phlebectomy, subfascial endoscopic perforator surgery, three-dimensional venography, and intravascular ultrasound. All of these topics are covered in this comprehensive, up-to-date textbook, which guides the practitioner through every aspect of care of the venous patient and includes essential background information on anatomy and pathophysiology. This book is exceptional in that it is based entirely on the curriculum designed for board certification by the American College of Phlebology (ACP). A further unique aspect of the text is the integration of ultrasound and various other imaging modalities, that play a fundamental role in diagnosis and management. The authors come from a wide range of specialties, mirroring the diversity of practitioners who care for patients with venous disease. The book will accordingly serve the needs of vascular and general surgeons, interventional radiologists, phlebologists, nurses, ultrasonographers, allied health professionals, and scientists, as well as American College of Phlebology fellowship candidates and those preparing for board examinations in vascular surgery.

    Contents:
    Basic Sciences: Anatomy
    Pathophysiology of Reflux.-Presentation of Chronic Venous Disease.-Reflux Management. Vein Testing: Ultrasound Physics.-Ultrasound For Reflux.-Ultrasound For Phlebology Procedures.-Physiologic Testing
    Conventional and Cross-Sectional Venography. Superficial Vein Therapy
    Endovenous Thermal Ablation
    Chemical Superficial Vein Ablation
    Surgical Techniques
    Transcutaneous Laser Vein Ablation. Non-Superficial Veins: Perforator Veins
    Upper Deep Vein Disease
    Lower Deep Vein Disease
    Low Flow Vascular Malformations. Thrombosis: Ultrasound for Thrombosis
    Superficial Venous Thrombophlebitis
    Deep Vein Thrombosis
    Anticoagulation for Venous Thromboembolism
    Thrombophilias. Special Topics: Lymphedema
    Venous Leg Ulcers
    Biostatistics
    Vein Anesthesia.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    Pilch, Herbert.
    Access via Bibliotheca phonetica ; 1964; 1
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    1964.
    SHELVED AS A PERIODICAL UNDER: Bibliotheca phonetica ; no. 1.
  • Digital
    Antoinette am Zehnhoff-Dinnesen, Bozena Wiskirska-Woznica, Katrin Neumann, Tadeus Nawka, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Karen N. Allen.
    Summary: High-energy phosphate ester bonds are often thought of as the energetic currency of the cell. Phosphoryl transfer is involved in processes ranging from the biosynthesis and catabolism of carbohydrates and polysaccharides, nucleic acids, and cofactors, to the regulation if cellular pathways. In addition, Phosphoryl groups on small-molecule metabolites confer important properties - providing excellent "handles" for enzyme bonding, trapping metabolic intermediates within the cell, and controlling the reversibility of metabolic pathways. The phosphorylation states of proteins also afford key control points for signal transduction and the regulation of myriad critical physiological processes. For this reason, kinases are extremely important therapeutic targets and there is significant interest in developing diverse approaches to regulate their function through small-molecule inhibitors. We present here the less studied but equally important complement of phosphate ester chemistry, namely the coordinated action of phosphatases. Phosphatases represent control points in pathways and new opportunities for use in chemoenzymatic synthesis. In many cases, such critical players may be functionally unannotated. However, there are many challenges in their study - spurring on the efforts described in this volume ... This volume of Methods in Enzymology on phosphatases which draws upon approaches from the varied disciplines of computational and organic chemistry, biophysics, biochemistry, bioinformatics, and cell biology to address the structure, mechanism, and regulation of phosphatases."--Preface.

    Contents:
    Empirical Valence Bond Simulations of Organophosphate Hydrolysis: Theory and Practice / Miha Purg and Shina Caroline Lynn Kamerlin
    Analysis of Phosphoryl-Transfer Enzymes With QM/MM Free Energy Simulations / Daniel Roston, Xiya Lu, Dong Fang, Darren Demapan and Qiang Cui
    Defining Dynamics of Membrane-Bound Pyrophosphatases by Experimental and Computational Single-Molecule FRET / Steven P.D. Harborne, Jannik Strauss, Ainoleena Turku, Matthew A. Watson, Roman Tuma, Sarah A. Harris and Adrian Goldman
    A Simple Strategy to Determine the Dependence of Membrane-Bound Pyrophosphatases on K+ as a Cofactor / Jannik Strauss, Craig Wilkinson, Keni Vidilaseris, Steven P.D. Harborne and Adrian Goldman
    Crystallization of Liganded Phosphatases in the HAD Superfamily / Christine Harvey, Katherine H. O'Toole and Karen N. Allen
    Structure, Mechanism, and Substrate Profiles of the Trinuclear Metallophosphatases From the Amidohydrolase Superfamily / Swapnil V. Ghodge and Frank M. Raushel
    Affinities and Comparisons of Enzyme States by Principal Component Analysis of NMR Spectra, Automated Using TREND Software / Jia Xu and Steven R. Van Doren
    Assessment and Impacts of Phosphorylation on Protein Flexibility of the [alpha]-D-Phosphohexomutases / Kyle M. Stiers and Lesa J. Beamer
    Chemical Tools for Studying the Impact of cis/trans Prolyl Isomerization on Signaling: A Case Study on RNA Polymerase II Phosphatase Activity and Specificity / Nathaniel Tate Burkholder, Brenda Medellin, Seema Irani, Wendy Matthews, Scott A. Showalter and Yan Jessie Zhang
    Quantitative Analysis of Intracellular Response Regulator Phosphatase Activity of Histidine Kinases / Rong Gao and Ann M. Stock
    Measuring the Activities of Two-Component Regulatory System Phosphatases / Robert B. Bourret and Ruth E. Silversmith
    Assembly of PGAM5 Into Multimeric Complexes Provides a Mechanism for Allosteric Regulation of Phosphatase Activity / Peter Tipton, Tong Su and Mark Hannink
    Purification of Lipin and Measurement of Phosphatidic Acid Phosphatase Activity From Liposomes / Mitchell E. Granade and Thurl E. Harris
    Combining SAMDI Mass Spectrometry and Peptide Arrays to Profile Phosphatase Activities / Lindsey C. Szymczak, Che-Fan Huang, Eric J. Berns and Milan Mrksich
    Protein Chemical Approaches to Understanding PTEN Lipid Phosphatase Regulation / Daniel R. Dempsey and Philip A. Cole.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Mohammed S. Razzaque, editor.
    Summary: This contributed volume discusses the most important physiological aspects of phosphate metabolism, and how its pathological dysregulation can induce organ damage, which includes but is not limited to blood vessels, kidney, bone and tumor. The editor has selected a varied group of world renowned experts to provide a basic understanding of normal phosphate regulation, to then move on to explain the complex molecular mechanisms of abnormal phosphate regulation, also shedding some light on the downstream clinical consequences owing to phosphate toxicity. Each chapter clearly presents the biochemically important problems related to phosphate dysregulation with the necessary illustrations. Readers will be able to use the proposed book as a quick reference for updated information on phosphate metabolism, ranging from cellular system to physiology, from pathology to toxicity, also including the associated clinical consequences, without much prior acquaintance with the field.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1. Phosphate Metabolism: from Physiology to Toxicity (Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 2. Phosphate Burden and Inflammation (Sarah Erem , Satoko Osuka and Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 3. Extracellular Phosphate, Inflammation and Cytotoxicity (Toshimi Michigami, Miwa Yamazaki, Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 4. Phosphate-sensing (Yuichi Takashi and Seiji Fukumoto)
    Chapter 5. Vitamin D and phosphate interactions in health and disease (Nuraly S. Akimbekov, Ilya Digel, Dinara K. Sherelkhan, Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 6. Fibroblast growth factor 23 as regulator of vitamin D metabolism (Shinya Nakatani; Ayumi Nakatani, Katsuhito Mori, Masanori Emoto; Masaaki Inaba; and Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 7. Phosphate and Cellular Senescence (Ming Chang Hu and Orson W. Moe)
    Chapter 8. Phosphate toxicity and epithelial to mesenchymal transition (EMT) (Eric Lewis, Faith Seltun, Mohammed S. Razzaque, Ping He)
    Chapter 9. Phosphate & endothelial function: How sensing of elevated inorganic phosphate concentration generates signals in endothelial cells (Nima Abbasian, Alan Bevington and Dylan Burger)
    Chapter 10. Common dietary sources of natural and artificial phosphate in food (Ken-ichi Miyamoto, Joanna Oh, Mohammed S. Razzaque)
    Chapter 11. Phosphate is a Cardiovascular Toxin (Maren Leifheit-Nestler, Isabel Vogt, Dieter Haffner and Beatrice Richter)
    Chapter 12. Coordination of Phosphate and Magnesium Metabolism in Bacteria (Roberto E. Bruna, Christopher G. Kendra and Mauricio H. Pontes)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Louise von Stechow.
    Contents:
    Thiol-ene-enabled detection of thiophosphorylation as a labeling strategy for phosphoproteins / Kaelyn E. Wilke and Erin E. Carlson
    Phosphopeptide detection with biotin-labeled phos-tag / Emiko Kinoshita-Kikuta, Eiji Kinoshita, and Tohru Koike
    Phosphopeptide enrichment by covalent chromatography after solid phase derivatization of protein digests on reversed phase supports / Heinz Nika, Ruth Hogue Angeletti, and David H. Hawke
    Peptide labeling using isobaric tagging reagents for quantitative phosphoproteomics / Lei Cheng ... [et al.]
    Identification of direct kinase substrates using analogue-sensitive alleles / Daniel A. Rothenberg ... [et al.]
    Quantitative analysis of tissue samples by combining iTRAQ isobaric labeling with selected/multiple reaction monitoring (SRM/MRM) / Ryohei Narumi and Takeshi Tomonaga
    Enrichment strategies in phosphoproteomics / Alexander Leitner
    Phosphopeptide enrichment by immobilized metal affinity chromatography / Tine E. Thingholm and Martin R. Larsen
    Use of titanium dioxide for selective enrichment of phosphorylated peptides / Tine E. Thingholm and Martin R. Larsen
    Sequential elution from IMAC (SIMAC) : an efficient method for enrichment and separation of monoand multi-phosphorylated peptides / Tine E. Thingholm and Martin R. Larsen
    Improving the phosphoproteome coverage for limited sample amounts using TiO2-SIMAC-HILIC (TiSH) phosphopeptide enrichment and fractionation / Kasper Engholm-Keller and Martin R. Larsen
    Offline high pH reversed-phase peptide fractionation for deep phosphoproteome coverage / Tanveer S. Batth and Jesper V. Olsen
    Phosphopeptide enrichment using various magnetic nanocomposites : an overview / Íris L. Batalha and Ana Cecília A. Roque
    Two dimensional gel electrophoresis-based plant phosphoproteomics / Chao Han and Pingfang Yang
    Variable digestion strategies for phosphoproteomics analysis / Humberto Gonczarowska-Jorge ... [et al.]
    Online LC-FAIMS-MS/MS for the analysis of phosphorylation in proteins / Hongyan Zhao, Andrew J. Creese, and Helen J. Cooper
    Simple and reproducible sample preparation for single-shot phosphoproteomics with high sensitivity / Rosa R. Jersie-Christensen, Abida Sultan, and Jesper V. Olsen
    Identification of direct kinase substrates via kinase assay-linked phosphoproteomics / Liang Xue, Justine V. Arrington, and W. Andy Tao
    Phosphoprotein detection by high-throughput flow cytometry / Johannes Landskron and Kjetil Taskén
    Resources for assignment of phosphorylation sites on peptides and proteins / Vaishnavi Ravikumar, Boris Macek, and Ivan Mijakovic
    From phosphosites to kinases / Stephanie Munk ... [et al.]
    Search databases and statistics : pitfalls and best practices in phosphoproteomics / Jan C. Refsgaard, Stephanie Munk, and Lars J. Jensen
    Systems analysis for interpretation of phosphoproteomics data / Stephanie Munk, Jan C. Refsgaard, and Jesper V. Olsen.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Spiros Liras and Andrew S. Bell.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Christian Rommel, Bart Vanhaesebroeck, Peter K. Vogt, editors.
    Contents:
    Vol. 1 / (ix, 306 p.)
    v. 2. / (x, 301 p.).
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Paramjit S. Tappia, Naranjan S. Dhalla, editors.
    Summary: Phospholipases generate lipid signaling molecules through their hydrolytic action on phospholipids and are known to regulate function of a variety of cells under normal and diseased conditions. While several physiological, biochemical and molecular techniques have identified key players involved in different disease processes, phospholipases have also emerged as critical players in the pathogenesis of a number of different diseases including cancer and heart disease. In addition, phospholipases are also implicated in such conditions as brain disorder/injury, kidney and immune cell dysfunction. Phospholipases in Health and Disease is a compilation of review articles dedicated to the study of the field with respect to biochemical and molecular mechanisms of normal and abnormal cell function. The wide range of area covered here is of interest to basic research scientists, clinicians and graduate students, who are engaged in studying pathophysiological basis of a variety of diseases. Furthermore, this book highlights the potential of the different phospholipases as therapeutic targets as well as part of prevention strategies. Twenty three articles in this book are organized in four sections that are designed to emphasize the most characterized forms of the phospholipases in mammalian cells. The first section discusses general aspect of phospholipases. Section two covers the role and function of phospholipase A in different pathophysiological conditions. The third section is focussed on phospholipase C which is believed to play a central role in transmembrane signaling. The final section covers phospholipase D which is present in a variety of different cells. The book illustrates that the activation of phospholipases is of fundamental importance in signal transduction affecting cell function. Overall, this book discusses the diverse mechanisms of phospholipase mediated signal transduction in different pathophysiological conditions and raises the possibility of specific forms of phospholipases serving as novel targets for drug development.

    Contents:
    Phospholipases in Health and Disease
    Role of Phospholipases in Regulation of Cardiolipin Biosynthesis and Remodelling in the Heart and Mammalian Cells
    Role of Phospholipases and Oxidized Phospholipids in Inflammation
    Phospholipases in Cardiovascular Disease
    The Structures and Functions of Intracellular Phospholipase A1 Family Proteins
    Phospholipase A and Breast Cancer
    Pathophysiological Aspects of Lipoprotein Associated Phospholipase A2: A Brief Overview
    Phospholipase A2 Activity Exhibited by a Bacterial Virulence Protein that Enters and Operates within a Variety of Host Cells
    Expression and Role of Phospholipase A2 in Central Nervous System Injury and Disease
    Cytoplasmic Phospholipase A2 and Autotaxin Inhibitors as Potential Radiosensitizers
    Phospholipase A2 Enzymes: Potential Targets for Therapy
    The Role of Phospholipase C Isozymes in Cellular Homeostasis
    Phospholipase C in the Immune Cell
    Phosphoinositide-specific Phospholipase C Enzymes and Cognitive Development ?and Decline
    Where life begins: Sperm PLCz in mammalian egg activation and implications in male infertility
    Oocyte Activation and Phospholipase C zeta (PLC?): Male Infertility and ?Implications for Therapeutic Intervention
    Phospholipase C Signaling in Heart Disease
    Activation of Phospholipase C in Cardiac Hypertrophy
    The Protective Effect of Phospholipase C From Cardiac Ischemia-Reperfusion Injury
    Role of Phospholipase C in Cardioprotection During Oxidative Stress
    Mammalian Phospholipase D: Structure, Regulation and Physiological Functions of Phospholipase D and its Link to Pathology
    Emerging Roles of Phospholipase D in Pathophysiological Signaling
    Alterations in Phospholipase D During the Development of Myocardial Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    editors, Lloyd A. Horrocks, G. Brian Ansell, Giuseppe Porcellati.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Metabolism.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP752.P53 P48
    1
  • Digital
    Ratan Singh Ray [and 4 others], editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the problem of UV-R-induced photocarcinogenesis and its molecular mechanism. It covers different photosensitive xenobiotics (drugs, cosmetics, and environmental pollutants) and their photosensitization mechanisms under ambient UV-R exposure. It also summarizes the role of nanotechnology in skin cancer remedies. It provides a brief overview of the various novel nanocarriers for cosmeceuticals like nanoemulsions, liposomes, solid lipid nanoparticles (SLNs), dendrimers, inorganic nanoparticles, nanocrystals, etc., nanotechnology-based cosmeceutical products which are available in the market. It highlights the possible health hazards caused by nanoparticles on exposure of nano-based cosmetics and describes the recent regulatory rules applied to avoid the nanotoxicity.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Abbreviations;
    1: Ultraviolet Radiation (UVR): An Introduction; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Electromagnetic Radiation (EMR); 1.1.2 Nature of Ultraviolet Radiation; 1.1.3 UV Regions of Solar Spectrum; 1.1.4 Nomenclature and Units; 1.1.5 Minimum Erythemal Dose; 1.1.6 Standard Erythemal Dose; 1.1.7 UV Index; 1.1.8 Sources and Exposure of Solar UVR; 1.2 Ozone Depletion; 1.2.1 Production of O3 in Upper Atmosphere; 1.2.2 Consequences of O3 Depletion; 1.2.3 Detection of UVR; 1.3 Conclusion; References
    2: UVR-Induced Epigenetic Regulation and Photocarcinogenesis2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Mechanisms of Epigenetic Modification; 2.2.1 DNA Methylation; 2.3 Histone Modifications; 2.4 Noncoding RNAs in Skin Cancer; 2.5 Conclusion; References;
    3: Molecular and Genetic Response of Human Skin Under Ultraviolet Radiation; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Effects of Ultraviolet Radiation on Skin; 3.2.1 Ultraviolet Radiation and Vitamin D Synthesis in Skin; 3.2.2 Ultraviolet Radiation and Skin Pigmentation; 3.2.2.1 Molecular Mechanisms of Tanning; 3.3 Genetic Responses to UV Radiation 3.4 Photoproduct Formation3.5 UV and DNA Repair Systems; 3.6 DNA Damage and UV Radiation; 3.6.1 Genes Under UV Threat; 3.6.1.1 Tumor Suppressor Gene p53; 3.6.1.2 PTCH Tumor Suppressor Gene; 3.6.1.3 Ras Proto-Oncogenes; 3.6.1.4 Other Genes; 3.7 Conclusion; References;
    4: Photocarcinogenesis and Molecular Mechanism; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Types of Skin Cancer; 4.3 Mechanisms Involved in UVR-Induced Carcinogenesis; 4.3.1 ROS and DNA Damage; 4.3.2 Molecular Mechanisms; 4.3.3 Tumor Suppressor Genes (TSGs); 4.3.4 Oncogenes; 4.3.5 Other Molecules; 4.3.6 Signal Transduction Pathways 4.3.7 Mitochondrial DNA Damage4.3.8 Inflammation Cascade; 4.3.9 Immunosuppression; 4.3.10 Extracellular Remodeling: Network of Collagen, Elastin, and Matrix Metalloproteinases; 4.4 Treatment for Skin Cancer; 4.5 Photoprotection; 4.6 Photoprotective Agents; 4.7 Conclusion; References;
    5: Immunomodulation and Photocarcinogenesis; 5.1 The Immune System of Skin; 5.2 UVR-Induced Immunomodulation; 5.3 UVR-Induced Immunosuppression; 5.4 Mechanism of UVR-Mediated Immunomodulation; 5.5 Skin Cancer Immunotherapy; References;
    6: Epidemiological Aspects of Photocarcinogenesis 6.1 Introduction6.2 Basal Cell Carcinoma; 6.3 Squamous Cell Carcinoma; 6.4 Cutaneous Melanoma; 6.5 Geographical Variation in UV Radiation; 6.6 Geographical Variation of Skin Pigmentation; 6.7 Geographical Variation of Photocarcinogenesis; 6.7.1 Ethnic Origin; 6.7.2 Place of Residence; 6.8 Factors Responsible for Photocarcinogenesis; 6.8.1 Occupational Exposure; 6.8.2 Anatomic Site; 6.8.3 Total Lifetime Exposure; 6.8.4 Ambient Sunlight Exposure; 6.8.5 Safety Guidelines; 6.9 Conclusion; References;
    7: Photoaging; 7.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Johannes W. Rohen, Chihiro Yokochi, Elke Lütjen-Drecoll.
    Summary: Photographic Atlas of Anatomy features outstanding full-colour photographs of actual cadaver dissections, with accompanying schematic drawings and diagnostic images, to help students develop an unparalleled mastery of human anatomy with ease. Depicting anatomic structures more realistically than illustrations in traditional atlases, this proven resource shows students exactly what they will see in the dissection lab. Chapters are organised by region in the order of a typical dissection, with each chapter presenting regional anatomical structures in a systematic manner. This updated ninth edition includes revised content throughout and features additional cadaver dissection photos, medical imaging, and clinical illustrations, as well as a new appendix with learning resources that strengthen students' understanding of the vascular, lymphatic, muscular, and nervous systems.

    Contents:
    1. General anatomy
    2. Trunk
    3. Upper limb
    4. Lower limb
    5. Thoracic organs
    6. Abdominal organs
    7. Retroperitoneal organs
    8. Head and neck
    9. Brain and sensory organs.
  • Digital
    James W.H. Sonne, PhD.
    Summary: "Photographic Dissector for Students of Physical Therapy: A Step-by-Step Approach is designed to facilitate a mixed approach to cadaveric human dissection for students of physical therapy. This Dissector has been specifically modelled to follow the curriculum of Doctor of Physical Therapy programs, which often includes simultaneous courses in kinesiology and physiology. This dissection sequence benefits from, but does not require, concurrent study of kinesiology with musculoskeletal dissection, and physiology with the central nervous system and visceral dissections. Furthermore, this Dissector features clinical descriptions common to the Doctor of Physical Therapy that bring to life the anatomical structures and that provide a meaning to the laboratory work while inspiring diagnostic thinking about structure and function. Each chapter contains a checklist of important structures, the terms in bold within the step-by-step instructions, which provides a reference for studying. Also, chapters contain licensing exam-style multiple choice questions. Answers to those questions, along with explanations and strategies for working through the questions, can be found in the back of the book"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Back
    The Upper Limb
    The Lower Limb
    The Head and Neck
    The Brain
    The Thorax
    The Abdomen and Pelvis.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2020
  • Digital
    Paola Pasquali, editor.
    Summary: This book explains how medical photography is part of the workflow in many specialties: it is needed for registries, to preserve information, for follow up, second opinion and teaching, among others. The book gathers information on this field, providing valuable practical tips for those that have never used photography for medical uses as well as those who use it regularly. Covering specialities ranging from dermatology, plastic surgery, dentistry, ophthalmology and endoscopy to forensic medicine, specimen photography and veterinary medicine, it highlights standardization for each procedure and relevance to ethical, patients perception of medical photography, cybersecurity and legal aspects. The book also presents practical sections explaining how to organize a photographic file, coding, reimbursement, compliance, use of social media and preservation as well as in depth concepts on sharp focus on blurred vision. This volume will appeal to all clinicians and practitioners interested in acquiring a high level of technical skill in medical photography. .

    Contents:
    SECTION I: History of Medical Photography and its ancestors
    1. Medical iconographic representations in the pre-photographic era
    2. The Dermatology Photographic Ancestors
    3. History of Veterinary Illustration
    4. History of Medical Photography
    Section II: Approaching the subject
    5. Treating with patients: the photographic approach
    6. Doctors as subjects. Medical Imaging in Personal Branding
    SECTION III: Equipment and how to use it
    7. Basic equipment
    8. Basic photographic concepts
    9. Smartphone medical photography
    SECTION IV: Special Cameras
    10. 3D Photography Digital imaging software, stitching and stacking
    11. Panoptic Camera
    SECTION: V Color
    12. Understanding color
    13. Color calibration
    SECTION VI: Photography in Dermatology
    14. Standardizing images in dermatology Magnification Ratio
    15. Nail and Hair photography
    16. Digital Dermoscopy images
    17. Total Body Photography
    18. Dermatological Imaging a Survey of Techniques
    SECTION VII: Photography in other medical specialties
    19. Photography in Plastic Surgery
    20. Photography in Ophthalmology
    21. Photography in Dentistry
    22. Laboratory imaging
    23. Photography in Pathology. Photographing procedures
    24. Photo- Endoscopy
    25. Forensic Photography
    26. Veterinary Photography
    SECTION VIII: Special Settings
    27. Setting up a photographic medical studio
    28. Intraoperative photography
    SECTION IX: Photographing the invisible
    29. Beyond the visible - UV, IR and fluorescence imaging of skin
    30. Thermography
    SECTION X: After photography: whats next
    31. Storing images
    32. Metadata issues, DICOM standard
    33. Coding, reimbursement
    34. HIPPA/PHI Compliance
    35. Submitting images for publication
    36. Conservation, restauration and digitalization of medical images
    37. Imaging archives for teaching, learning & research
    SECTION XI: Ethical and Legal Aspects
    38. Ethical aspects
    39. Legal considerations
    SECTION XII: Becoming a Medical Photographer
    40. Formal training for the medical photographer
    SECTION XIII: Photography and the Web
    41. Cyber security. Medical Photography and Social Media
    SECTION XIV
    42. Deep learning performance for triage and diagnosis
    43. Philosophy in Image analysis: Fuzzy Pictures as Philosophical Problem and Scientific Practice
    44. Future of imaging
    Glossary of Terms. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Sidney Cambridge.
    Contents:
    Photoinduced damage resulting from fluorescence imaging of live cells / Matthew K. Daddysman, Michael A. Tycon, and Christopher J. Fecko
    Modification of purified proteins with photochemical protection compounds for high-resolution photoactivation of protein function in vitro and in vivo / Sidney Cambridge
    Optochemical activation of kinase function in live cells / Andrei V. Karginov, Klaus M. Hahn, and Alexander Deiters
    Photoswitching of cell surface receptors using tethered ligands / Andreas Reiner and Ehud Y. Isacoff
    Photocontrol of AMPA receptors with a photochromic ligand / Martin Sumser and Philipp Stawski
    Photoconversion of CFP to study neuronal tissue with electron microscopy / Nina Wittenmayer
    Light-inducible gene regulation with engineered zinc finger proteins / Lauren R. Polstein and Charles A. Gersbach
    Manipulation of plasma membrane phosphoinositides using photoinduced protein-protein interactions / Olof Idevall-Hagren and Pietro DeCamilli
    Roadmap to applying optogenetics in neuroscience / Consuelo Fois, Pierre-Hugues Prouvot, and Albrecht Stroh
    Salvaging ruins : reverting blind retinas into functional visual sensors / Marion Mutter, Natalia Swietek, and Thomas A. Münch
    Photoactivated adenylyl cyclases as optogenetic modulators of neuronal activity / Wagner Steuer Costa, Jana Liewald, and Alexander Gottschalk
    Structural basis of photoswitching in fluorescent proteins / Chenxi Duan ... [et al.]
    Using photoactivatable GFP to track axonal transport kinetics / Archan Ganguly and Subhojit Roy
    In vivo cell tracking using PhOTO zebrafish / William P. Dempsey, Hanyu Qin, and Periklis Pantazis
    In vivo optogenetics for light-induced oxidative stress in transgenic zebrafish expressing the killerred photosensitizer protein / Cathleen Teh and Vladimir Korzh
    Photoactivatable fluorescent proteins for super-resolution microscopy / Yuji Ishitsuka, Karin Nienhaus, and G. Ulrich Nienhaus
    pcSOFI as a smart label-based superresolution microscopy technique / Benjamien Moeyaert and Peter Dedecker.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony W.D. Larkum, Arthur R. Grossmann, John A. Raven.
    Summary: Algae, including cyanobacteria, are in the spotlight today for a number of reasons; firstly it has become abundantly clear over recent years that algae have been neglected in terms of basic research and that knowledge gap is being rapidly closed with the establishment of some surprising discoveries, such as the presence of Near-Infra-Red-Absorbing cyanobacteria and a wealth of natural products; secondly molecular approaches have provided a wealth of approaches to genetically modify algae and produce value-added products; thirdly it has become clear just how important, marine phytoplankton is to global carbon capture and the production of food globally; and fourthly, it has also become clear that algae present unparalleled opportunities to generate biofuels in a sustainable and non-polluting way. This volume presents 15 chapters by world experts on their subjects, ranging from reviews of algal diversity and genetics to in-depth reviews of special algal groups such as diatoms (which account for over 30% of marine carbon capture). Other chapters chart the ways in which this carbon capture occurs or how there are a multiplicity of ways in which algae intercept sun light and deploy this energy for carbon capture. A fascinating aspect here is the way in which sun light is harvested. A special chapter is devoted to the very recent and exciting possibility that algae use coherent light energy transformation to enhance the efficiency of light capture, an aspect of quantum physics that has implications for future developments at several levels and a variety of industries. Just how and why algae use Chlorophyll a as the major light capture pigment is discussed in several chapters. However, attention is also given to those cyanobacteria, which have been found to use the special Near-Infra Red absorbing chlorophylls mentioned above. And attention is also given to those algae that employ phycobiliproteins to fill in the "green window", i.e., the spectral region from 400 - 6 50 nm, which is not efficiently covered by chlorophyll and carotenoid pigments. Photoinhibition and photoprotection is the subject area of several chapters and one which it is essential to understand a we work towards greater efficiency of algal photosynthesis. A final chapter is devoted to understanding the molecular basis for coral bleaching, a much-neglected area that is essential in trying to come up with solutions to this very worrying phenomenon, caused by global warming and ocean acidification. This is a book for research scientists, environmentalists, planners in a range of areas including those of marine resources, nutrient control and pollution of water bodies and that growing body of concerned citizens interested in controlling carbon emissions and global warming. Special attention has been given to generating a set of articles that will be read by university students, informed laymen and all those whose wish to understand the rapid changes that have come about in our knowledge of algae over the past decade.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Introductory Chapters
    Chapter 1. Recent Advances in the Photosynthesis of Cyanobacteria and Eukaryotic
    Chapter 2. The Algal Tree of Life from a Genomics Perspective
    Part 2. Molecular Genetics Of Algae
    Chapter 3. Chlorophyll-Xanthophyll Antenna Complexes: in between Light Harvesting and Energy Dissipation
    Chapter 4. The Dynamics of the Photosynthetic Apparatus in Algae
    Chapter 5. Biosynthesis of Chlorophyll and Bilins and Assembly of the Photosynthetic Apparatus
    Part 3. Biochemistry and Physiology of Algae
    Chapter 6. Chloroplast Ion and Metabolite Transport in Algae
    Chapter 7. Structural and Biochemical Features of Carbon Acquisition in Algae
    Chapter 8. Light-Driven Oxygen Consumption in the Water-Water Cycles and Photorespiration, and Light Stimulated Mitochondrial Respiration
    Chapter 9. The Algal Pyrenoid
    Part 4. Light-Harvesting Systems in Algae
    Chapter 10. Light-Harvesting in Cyanobacteria and Eukaryotic Algae; An Overview
    Chapter 11. Light Harvesting by Long-Wavelegth Chlorophyll Forms (Red Forms) in Algae: Focus on their Presence, Distribution and Formation
    Chapter 12. Diversity in Photoprotection and Energy Balancing in Terrestrial and Aquatic Phototrophs
    Chapter 13. Photoinhibition in Algae
    Chapter 14. Modulating Energy Transfer from Phycobilisomes to Photosystems: State transitions and OCP-related Non-Photochemical Quenching
    Chapter 15. Coherent Processes in Photosynthetic Energy Transport and Transduction
    Chapter 16. Light Harvesting Complexes of Diatoms
    Fucoxanthin Chlorophyll. Proteins
    Chapter 17. Symbiodinium, Corals and Coral Bleaching.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Wei-Sheng Chong, Jiun-Yit Pan, Eugene Sern-Ting Tan.
    Summary: "Phototherapy, or the usage of light to treat diseases, is an important modality in a physician's therapeutic armamentarium. It is effective for a number of common skin conditions like atopic dermatitis, psoriasis and vitiligo. The accurate diagnosis of a photodermatosis or light-related skin disorder relies on a good clinical history and physical examination, supported by diagnostic investigations such as phototesting. Phototherapy and Photodiagnostic Methods for the Practitioner is the first published set of practical guidelines for Asian skin, drawing upon our cumulative clinical experience with phototherapy for various conditions at the National Skin Centre in Singapore, amalgamated with up-to-date evidence from the scientific literature. It is designed to serve as a concise and comprehensive reference manual for dermatologists, as well as clinicians, medical physicists and nurses with an interest in photodiagnostic investigations and phototherapy for the evaluation and treatment of skin disorders."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    Introduction to phototherapy
    Nursing considerations in phototherapy
    Narrowband ultraviolet B phototherapy
    Combined ultraviolet A/narrowband ultraviolet B phototherapy
    Psoralen-ultraviolet A photochemotherapy
    Ultraviolet A-1 phototherapy
    Excimer light phototherapy
    Photodynamic therapy
    Phototesting
    Photopatch testing
    Photoprovocation testing.
    Digital Access World Scientific 2017
  • Digital
    Rosa A. Scherson, Daniel P. Faith, editors.
    Summary: "Biodiversity" refers to the variety of life. It is now agreed that there is a "biodiversity crisis", corresponding to extinction rates of species that may be 1000 times what is thought to be "normal". Biodiversity science has a higher profile than ever, with the new Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services involving more than 120 countries and 1000s of scientists. At the same time, the discipline is re-evaluating its foundations - including its philosophy and even core definitions. The value of biodiversity is being debated. In this context, the tree of life ("phylogeny") is emerging as an important way to look at biodiversity, with relevance cutting across current areas of concern - from the question of resilience within ecosystems, to conservation priorities for globally threatened species - while capturing the values of biodiversity that have been hard to quantify, including resilience and maintaining options for future generations. This increased appreciation of the importance of conserving "phylogenetic diversity", from microbial communities in the human gut to global threatened species, has inevitably resulted in an explosion of new indices, methods, and case studies. This book recognizes and responds to the timely opportunity for synthesis and sharing experiences in practical applications. The book recognizes that the challenge of finding a synthesis, and building shared concepts and a shared toolbox, requires both an appreciation of the past and a look into the future. Thus, the book is organized as a flow from history, concepts and philosophy, through to methods and tools, and followed by selected case studies. A positive vision and plan of action emerges from these chapters, that includes coping with inevitable uncertainties, effectively communicating the importance of this "evolutionary heritage" to the public and to policy-makers, and ultimately contributing to biodiversity conservation policy from local to global scales.

    Contents:
    1. Phylogenetic diversity and conservation evaluation : perspectives on multiple values, indices, and scales of application / Daniel P. Faith
    2. The use of EDGE (evolutionary distinct globally endangered) and EDGE-like metrics to evaluate taxa for conservation / Nick J.B. Isaac and William D. Pearse
    3. Biodiversity, the tree of life, and science communication / James Rosindell and Yan Wong
    4. Indicators for the expected loss of phylogenetic diversity / Daniel P. Faith, Simon Veron, Sandrine Pavoine, and Roseli Pellens
    5. Phylogenetic resolution and metrics of biodiversity and signal in conservation / Nathan G. Swenson and Samantha J. Worthy
    6. Phylogeny-based measurements at global and regional scales / Shawn W. Laffan
    7. Phylogeny-based measures of biodiversity when data is scarce : examples with the vascular flora of Chile and California / Rosa A. Scherson, Taryn Fuentes-Castillo, Rafael Urbina-Casanova, and Patricio Pliscoff
    8. Priority areas for phylogenetic diversity : maximising gains in the Mediterranean Basin / Simon Veron, Daniel P. Faith, Roseli Pellens, and Sandrine Pavoine
    9. Evolutionary diversity patterns in the Cape flora of South Africa / Félix Forest, Jonathan F. Colville, and Richard M. Cowling
    10. Effects of phylogenetic diversity and phylogenetic identity in a restoration ecology experiment / Andrew L. Hipp, Mary-Claire Glasenhardt, Marlin L. Bowles, Mira Garner, Bryant C. Scharenbroch, Evelyn W. Williams, Rebecca S. Barak, Amy Byrne, Adrienne R. Ernst, Emily Grigg, Meghan G. Midgley, Hayley Wagreich, and Daniel J. Larkin.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jenny Lieberman.
    Summary: This compact book uniquely examines individual lived experience with spinal cord injury (SCI). It provides education and a clearer understanding of the many facets of a SCI -- medical, physical, psychological, cognitive, personal, and social -- in a single compact volume, so that readers learn the effect a SCI can have on a person. The contents also include resources for more specific exploration of information. SCI is a direct public health concern due to not only the cause of the injury itself, most often of violent origin, but also how the individuals perceive themselves after the injury and their participation in society, as well as how society welcomes them back. This compact book has four distinct chapters, each one addressing a different component of SCI with a set of resources to guide the individual with SCI, their family and their friends in the process. It first explores the physical as a means to provide an understanding of what body changes occur. From there, it goes on to examine what is the subjective meaning and lived experience of disability for persons with SCI. The brief ends with an examination of what organizations and programs exist to promote independence and a sense of community for persons with SCI. The Physical, Personal, and Social Impact of Spinal Cord Injury: From the Loss of Identity to Achieving a Life Worth Living is a book with broad appeal. It is written in such a way that it serves as a useful and accessible resource for people who work with persons with SCI, students and instructors with an interest in the subject, as well as persons with SCI themselves and their families. Jenny Lieberman, PhD, OTR/L, ATP is a senior clinical specialist of wheelchair seating and positioning in the Department of Rehabilitation and Human Performance at The Mount Sinai Hospital Center in New York, NY, USA. She is also an adjunct professor in the Department of Occupational Therapy at New York University in New York, NY, USA.

    Contents:
    1 Background
    2 Interventions
    3 Subjective Experience
    4 The Future
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Kazuyuki Kanosue, Satomi Oshima, Zhen-Bo Cao, Koichiro Oka.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Part I: Current Status of Physical Activity and Sedentary Behavior Research
    Physical Activity Levels and Physical Activity Recommendations in Japan
    Population Strategy for Physical Activity Promotion in the Community
    Promotion of Strength Training
    Does Newspaper Coverage Promote Cancer Prevention?
    Health Impact of Light
    Evaluation of Physical Activity and Sedentary Behavior
    Sedentary Behaviour
    Prevalence, Trends, and Correlates of Sedentary Behavior
    Part II: Effects of Physical Activity, Exercise, and Fitness on the Human Organism
    Responses of the Autonomic Nervous and Endocrine Systems to Exercise
    Exercise Modes and Vascular Functions
    Exercise, Appetite Control, and Body Weight Regulation
    Exercise and Food Intake
    Role of Physical Exercise on Postprandial Blood Glucose Responses to Low-Carbohydrate/High-Fat Diet Intake
    Posttranslational Modification of Proteins
    Relationship of Cardiorespiratory Fitness and Obesity Genes to Metabolic Syndrome in Adult Japanese Men
    Mechanisms Underlying the Suppression of Inflammatory Responses in Peritoneal Macrophages of Middle-aged Mice
    Effects of b2-Agonist Administration on Bacterial Phagocytosis by Splenic Macrophages in Mice
    Functional Roles of b2-Adrenergic Receptors in Skeletal Muscle Hypertrophy and Atrophy
    Part III: Physical Activity, Exercise, Nutrition, Aging, and Health
    The Role of Exercise and Nutrition in Lifestyle-related Disease
    Vasopressin V1a receptor gene and voluntary exercise in humans and mice
    The Role of Physical Activity in the Prevention of Atherosclerosis
    Association Between Exercise and Diet on Maintaining Bone Health in Postmenopausal Women and Female Athletes
    Pain Management Among Elderly People with Knee Pain
    Effective Exercise Programs Among Frail Elderly People
    Rowing
    Influence of Aging on Postural Control in Terms of Sensory Movements.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ronald Ross Watson.
    Summary: A complete guide to the manifold effects of exercise and physical activity on the aging brain. This book examines the role that exercise and physical activity play in halting or modulating the deleterious effects of these numerous aging concerns.

    Contents:
    Overview of exercise and neurological changes. Effects of physical activity on the cerebral networks / A. Begega, P. Alvarez-Suarez, P. Sampedro-Piquero and M. Cuesta
    Exercise and the developing brain in children and adolescents / M.M. Herting and M.F. Keenan
    Differential expression of the brain proteme in physical training / T. Ravikiran, R. Vani and S. Anand
    Physical exercise-induced changes in brain temperature / A.C. Kunstetter, W.C. Damasceno, C.G. Fonseca and S.P. Wanner
    Drugs of abuse with exercise to modify neurological structure and function. Physical activity as a therapeutic intervention for addictive disorders / S.S. Somkuwar, M.J. Fannon-Pavlich
    Pharmacological intervention of brain neurotransmission affects exercise capacity / X. Zheng and H. Hasegawa
    The endocannabinoid system and chronic disease / A. Yoder
    Factors modulating exercise in aging and neurological consequences. Changes in cerebral blood flow during steady-state exercise / M. Hiura and T. Nariai
    Biochemical mechanisms associated with exercise-induced neuroprotection in aging brains and related neurological diseases / M.S. Shanmugam, W.M. Tierney, R.A. Hernandez, A. Cruz, T.L. Uhlendorf and R.W. Cohen
    Role of melatonin supplementation during strenuous exercise / J. Díaz-castro, M. Pulido-Morán, J. Moreno-Fernández, N. Kajarabille, S. Hijano and J.J. Ochoa
    Exercises as therapy for neurological diseases. Mechanisms of functional recovery with exercise and rehabilitation in spinal cord injuries / M. Cowan and R.M. Ichiyama
    Neural structure, connectivity, and cognition changes associated to physical exercise / S. Bonativa and G. Tedeschi
    The effect of exercise on motor function in neuroplasticity in parkinson's disease / J. Watson, K.E. Welman and B. Sehm
    Physical exercise and its effects on alzheimer's disease / A.M. Stein and R.V. Pedroso
    Cortical reorganization in response to exercise / P. Stephane
    Exercise enhances cognitive capacity in the aging brain / S. Snigdha and G.A. Prieto
    Lifestyle exercise affecting neurological structure and function in older adults. Synergistic effects of combined physical activity and brain training on neurological functions / T.M. Shah and R.N. Martins
    Physical activity / R. Beurskens and M. Dalecki
    Update of nutritional antioxidants and antinociceptives on improving exercise-induced muscle soreness / N. Leelayuwat
    Effects of exercise-altered immune functions on neuroplasticity / A.L. Aral and L. Pinar.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Gordon G. Hammes, Sharon Hammes-Schiffer.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Heat, Work, and Energy (pages 1-21)
    Chapter 2. Entropy and Gibbs Energy (pages 23-42)
    Chapter 3. Applications of Thermodynamics to Biological Systems (pages 43-76)
    Chapter 4. Thermodynamics Revisited (pages 77-94)
    Chapter 5. Principles of Chemical Kinetics (pages 95-120)
    Chapter 6. Applications of Kinetics to Biological Systems (pages 121-152)
    Chapter 7. Fundamentals of Quantum Mechanics (pages 153-176)
    Chapter 8. Electronic Structure of Atoms and Molecules (pages 177-202)
    Chapter 9. X-ray Crystallography (pages 203-224)
    Chapter 10. Electronic Spectra (pages 225-252)
    Chapter 11. Circular Dichroism, Optical Rotary Dispersion, and Fluorescence Polarization (pages 253-276)
    Chapter 12. Vibrations in Macromolecules (pages 277-288)
    Chapter 13. Principles of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance and Electron Spin Resonance (pages 289-314)
    Chapter 14. Applications of Magnetic Resonance to Biology (pages 315-330)
    Chapter 15. Fundamentals of Statistical Mechanics (pages 331-356)
    Chapter 16. Molecular Simulations (pages 357-382)
    Chapter 17. Ligand Binding to Macromolecules (pages 383-414)
    Chapter 18. Hydrodynamics of Macromolecules (pages 415-440)
    Chapter 19. Mass Spectrometry (pages 441-456).
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Steven D. Waldman.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Salvatore Mangione, Peter D. Sullivan and Michael S. Wagner
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Géza T. Terézhalmy, Michaell A. Huber, Lily T. García, Ronald L. Occhionero.
    Summary: "The revised Second Edition of Physical Evaluation and Treatment Planning in Dental Practice has been expanded to include information pertinent when considering comprehensive treatment planning for a wide variety of dental procedures. Written by internationally recognized specialists and discipline experts in their field, the Second Edition offers new chapters on dental and oral diseases and disorders, including insights and diagnostics for each category. Readers will learn about diagnosis and planning considerations for orofacial pain, caries, periodontics, oral surgery, endodontics, restorative, prosthodontics and esthetic dentistry, and more. Beginning with a complete introduction of oral health and associated systemic health, the book incorporates discussions of patient history profiles, basic procedures in physical examinations, including examination of the head, neck, extraoral and intraoral tissues, radiographic examination and interpretation, as well as laboratory methods. Designed for general dental practitioners, periodontists, prosthodontists, dental residents and fellows, and dental students, Physical Evaluation and Treatment Planning in Dental Practice is a logically organized one-stop reference for patient evaluation and treatment"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the clinical process
    The historical profile
    Basic procedures in physical examination
    Examination of the head and neck
    Examination of oral cavity
    Radiographic examination
    Laboratory methods
    Diagnostic and treatment planning considerations for orofacial pain
    Evidence-Based treatment planning in restorative dentistry
    Periodontal and peri-implant examination
    Oral and maxillofacial surgery
    Endodontic evaluation : diagnosis and treatment planning / Anibal R. Diogenes and Fabricio B. Teixeira
    Prosthodontic restoration : diagnosis and treatment planning
    Exam, diagnosis and treatment planning in pediatric patients
    Orthodontics for the general practitioner
    Putting it all together : introduction to treatment planning.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Ryan J. Warth, Peter J. Millett.
    Contents:
    About this Book
    Range of Motion
    Strenght Testing
    Strength Testing
    Rotator Cuff Disorders
    Disorders of the Long Head of the Biceps Tendon
    Glenohumeral Instability
    The Acromioclavicular Joint
    The Sternoclavicular Joint
    Scapular Dyskinesis
    Neurovascular Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Todd J. Albert, Alexander R. Vaccaro.
    Contents:
    The fundamentals
    Physical examination of the cervical spine
    Physical examination of the thoracic spine
    Physical examination of the lumbosacral spine.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Junjie Xiao, editor.
    Summary: This book shares the latest findings on exercise and its benefits in preventing and ameliorating numerous diseases that are of worldwide concern. Addressing the role of exercise training as an effective method for the prevention and treatment of various disease, the book is divided into eleven parts: 1) An Overview of the Beneficial Effects of Exercise on Health and Performance, 2) The Physiological Responses to Exercise, 3) Exercise and Metabolic Diseases, 4) Exercise and Cardiovascular Diseases, 5) Exercise and Musculoskeletal Diseases, 6) Exercise and Neurological and Psychiatric Diseases, 7) Exercise and the Respiration System, 8) Exercise and Immunity, 9) Exercise and HIV/AIDS, 10) Exercise and Neuropsychiatric Disorders, and 11) Future Prospects. Given its scope, the book will be particularly useful for researchers and students in the fields of physical therapy, physiology, medicine, genetics and cell biology, as well as researchers and physicians with a range of medical specialties. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    [I]. Overview: An overview of the beneficial effects of exercise on health and performance / Andreas Kramer. [II]. The physiologicla responses to exercise: Type of exercise training and training methods / Sascha Ketelhut, Reinhard G. Ketelhut
    Molecular mechanisms mediating adaptation to exercise / Zahra Gholamnezhad, Bruno Mégarbane, Ramin Rezaee
    Exercise and organ cross talk / Zhiqing Fan, Minjun Xu. [III]. Exercise and metabolic diseases: Exercise and hyperlipidemia / Nana He, Honghua Ye
    Exercise and type 2 diabetes / Sasan Amanat, Simin Ghahri, Aria Dianatinasab, Mohammad Fararouei, Mostafa Dianatinasab
    Exercise and type 1 diabetes / Xiya Lu, Cuimei Zhao
    Exercise and polycystic ovary syndrome / Amie Woodward, Markos Klonizakis, David Brook
    Exercise and insulin resistance / Stephney Whillier. [IV]. Exercise and cardiovascular diseases: Exercise and hypertension / Şeref Alpsoy
    Exercise and coronary heart disease / Aydin Akyuz
    Exercise and peripheral arteriosclerosis / Demet Ozkaramanli Gur
    Exercise and stroke / Carmen García-Cabo, Elena López-Cancio
    Exercise and cardiovascular protection / Guohua Li, Jia Li, Feng Gao. [IX]. Exercise and HIV/AIDS: Effects of exercise on the immune function, quality of life, and mental health in HIV/AIDS individuals / Mostafa Dianatinasab, Simin Ghahri, Aria Dianatinasab, Sasan Amanat, Mohammad Fararouei. [V]. Exercise and musculoskeletal diseases: Exercise and osteoarthritis / Lei Chen, Yan Yu
    Exercise and chronic pain / Anna Borisovskaya, Elizabeth Chmelik, Ashwin Karnik
    Exercise and muscle atrophy / Nana He, Honghua Ye. [VI]. Exercise and neurologicla and psychiatric diseases: Exercise and depressive disorder / Javier Bueno-Antequera, Diego Munguía-Izquierdo
    Exercise and Parkinson's disease / Simona Bonavita
    Exercise and dementia / Zahra Gholamnezhad, Mohammad Hossien Boskabady, Zahra Jahangiri
    Exercise and schizophrenia / Javier Bueno-Antequera, Diego Munguía-Izquierdo
    Exercise and multiple sclerosis / Robert W. Motl
    Exercise and anxiety / Aaron Kandola, Brendon Stubbs. [VII]. Exercise and respiration system: Exercise and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) / Giuseppe Fiorentino, Antonio M. Esquinas, Anna Annunziata
    Exercise and asthma / Shengguang Ding, Chongjun Zhong
    Exercise and cystic fibrosis / Shengguang Ding, Chongjun Zhong. [VIII]. Exercise and immunity: Exercise regulates the immune system / Jing Wang, Shuqin Liu, Guoping LI, Junjie Xiao. [X]. Exercise and neuropsychiatric disorders: Effects of exercise on memory interference in neuropsychiatric disorders / Lindsay Crawford, Paul D. Loprinzi
    Effects of exercise on long-term potentiation in neuropsychiatric disorders / Paul D. Loprinzi. [XI]. Future prospects: Prospective advancesc in beneficial effects of exercise on human health / Zuoxu Hou, Xing Zhang, Feng Gao.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    David J. Castle, Peter F. Buckley, Fiona P. Gaughran.
    Contents:
    1. Physical morbidities and schzophrenia: more than a chance co-occurrence
    2. Reasons for excess medical morbidity in schizophrenia
    3. The metabolic syndrome in schizophrenia
    4. Other physical health problems in people with schizophrenia
    5. Smoking and schizophrenia
    6. Effects of antipsychotic medications on physical health
    7. A comprehensive monitoring approach to physical healthcare in people with schizophrenia
    8. Interventions for metabolic problems in people with schizophrenia.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Sara J. Cuccurullo
    Summary: "Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation Board Review, Fourth Edition, will appeal to medical students, residents, and practicing physiatrists. The book concentrates on board-related concepts in the field of Rehabilitation Medicine"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    editor, R. Samuel Mayer.
    Summary: "Revised second edition of the singular review book devoted to helping candidates prepare for and succeed on the ABPMR Part II certification examination. This interactive workbook has been updated and expanded to reflect changes to the oral exam format and introduce topics of increasing importance. With new chapters on complex medical rehabilitation, cancer rehabilitation, pain medicine, spinal disorders, and sports medicine and a total of 86 cases across all practice areas on the board outline, this is the study tool that positions you to pass Part II the first time out. The book uses a question and response format to actively engage readers for individual or group study. Chapter vignettes set up common physiatric problems and are structured to walk readers through the types of questions encountered in daily practice. This unique conversational method simulates a discussion between examiner and examinee, presenting a focused exchange that unfolds organically and leads respondents to the most appropriate answers. Case questions are organized by the five domains measured on the oral boards: data acquisition, problem solving, patient management, systems-based practice, and interpersonal and communication skills"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Amputations, prosthetics, and orthotics / Heikki Uustal
    Brain impairments and central nervous system disorders / Michael H. Marino, Miriam Segal, and Thomas K. Watanabe
    Cancer and other medically related impairments / Julie K. Silver
    Cardiovascular and pulmonary rehabilitation / Matthew N. Bartels
    Complex medical rehabilitation / R. Samuel Mayer
    Durable medical equipment / Brad E. Dicianno
    Geriatric rehabilitation / George Forrest
    Musculoskeletal impairments / Michael Mallow
    Neuromuscular impairments and electrodiagnosis / Tae Hwan Chung
    Pain rehabilitation / Andrew Nava
    Pediatric rehabilitation / Sarah A. Korth
    Soft tissue impairments / R. Samuel Mayer
    Spinal impairments / Bryt A. Christensen
    Spinal cord injury / Argyrios Stampas and Joel Frontera
    Sports medicine / Brian J. Krabak, Brian C. Liem, Melinda S. Loveless, and Amanda Wise
    Stroke rehabilitation / Benjamin J. Friedman, Deena Hassaballa, and Richard L. Harvey
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    edited by Bryan J. O'Young, Mark A. Young, Steven A. Stiens, Sam S. H. Wu.
    Summary: For more than 30 years, the highly regarded Secrets Series® has provided students, academics, and practitioners in all areas of health care with concise, focused, and engaging resources for quick reference and exam review. Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation Secrets, 4th Edition, offers practical, up-to-date coverage of the full range of essential topics in this dynamic field. This highly regarded resource features the Secrets’ popular question-and-answer format that also includes lists, tables, weblinks, pearls, memory aids, and an easy-to-read style – making an inquiry, reference, and review quick, easy, and enjoyable.

    Contents:
    The interdisciplinary team: Origins, interactions, and scope of interventions
    Scientific foundations of physiatric care
    Learning in rehabilitation
    Physical and psychological evaluation: Recognizing strengths and resilience
    Electrodiagnostic evaluation of neuromuscular conditions
    Coordination of person-centered transdisciplinary care
    Therapeutic modalities
    Interventional procedures
    Impairment and activity limitation focused interventions
    Musculoskeletal
    Neurological rehabilitation
    Other organ based rehabilitation
    Chronic pain
    Lifetime development with optimal function
    Person centered life role: Work and play
    Community participation of people with disabilities
    Past, present, and future of rehabilitation
    Emerging topics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Guillaume Duménil, Sven van Teeffelen, editors.
    Summary: This book emerges from the idea that specific physics-inspired approaches are necessary to understand different stage of bacterial physiology and the infections they cause. Many aspects of bacterial life depend on processes typically described by physical laws: The rheology of biofilms is determined by complex cohesive forces. Physical laws of diffusion are essential to all processes of bacterial metabolism. The formation of the numerous bacterial biomacromolecules require complex self-organization processes and their function are powered by potent molecular motors. Host-pathogen interactions during infection frequently occur in environments determined by fluid mechanics. In this book, different chapters represent research at the interface between microbiology and physics. Topics range from intracellular organization to cell-cell interactions. A good part of the book is devoted to mechanical forces, which are involved in the function of elaborate bacterial nanomachines, chromosome segregation, and cell division. The effect of bacterial toxins provides an example of the alteration of cellular membrane properties by bacteria. Symmetrically, histones from mammalian cells alter bacterial membranes as a defense mechanism during infection. The editors of this book, Guillaume Duménil and Sven van Teeffelen, have selected researchers at the forefront of research in physical microbiology to provide the most recent view in this fast-moving field. The contents of this book are designed to be accessible for scientists with training in biology and for scientists with training in physics. The objective is to provide a fresh perspective on microbiology and infection by highlighting recent multidisciplinary research and favor rapid advances at this fruitful interface.

    Contents:
    Dewetting: from physics to the biology of intoxicated cells
    Physical views on ParABS-mediated DNA segregation
    Mechanisms and dynamics of the Bacterial Flagellar Motor
    Efficiency and Robustness of Processes Driven by Nucleoid Exclusion in Escherichia coli
    ­The mechanical properties of bacteria and why they matter
    Physical Mechanisms of Bacterial Killing by Histones
    Complex Diffusion in Bacteria.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Zhongquan Sui and Xiangli Kong, editors.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive information on starch modification using physical approaches - a field that has attracted increasing interest in recent years due to the fact that it is no longer desirable to label starch a modified. The required functionalities can be conveniently achieved by physical methods that are less expensive and more environmentally friendly. Intended for researchers and product developers working on starch, the book summarizes recent developments in the areas of starch physical modifications and reviews the structure, function and potential industrial applications of modified starch.

    Contents:
    Structure and physiochemical properties of starch
    Heat-moisture treatment of starch
    Annealing
    Pre-gelatinized modification of starch
    Gamma irradiation of starch
    Microwave treatment
    Ultrahigh pressure treatment
    Ultrasonic treatment
    Milling process of starch.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Mary Ellen Goldberg, Julia Tomlinson.
    Contents:
    Introduction to physical rehabilitation for veterinary technicians/nurses / Mary Ellen Goldberg
    Joining a rehabilitation team / Julia E. Tomlinson
    The veterinary technician and rehabilitation pain management / Mary Ellen Goldberg
    Communicating the treatment plan / Tracy A. Darling and Chnthia M. Otto
    Manual therapy treatment / Judy Coates
    Home exercises / Abby Rafferty and Jacqueline R. Davidson
    Supporting the client and patient / Robin Downing and mary Ellen Goldberg
    Nutritional counseling / Kara M. Burns
    Motivating your patient / Megan Nelson and Julia E. Tomlinson
    The disabled patient part 1 : assistive devices and technology / Mary Ellen Goldberg and Julia E. Tomlinson
    The disabled patient part 2 : the neurological patient / Stephanie Kube and Mary Ellen Goldberg
    The disabled patient part 3 : special considerations for geriatrics / Mary Ellen Goldberg and Julia E. Tomlinson
    The disabled patient part 4 : home nursing care / Julia E. Tomlinson and Elizabeth E. Waalk
    Modalities part 1 : thermotherapy / Julia E. Tomlinson and Mary Ellen Goldberg
    Modalities part 2 : laser therapy / Kristin Kirkby Shaw and Liz Brown
    Modalities part 3 : electrotherapy and electromagnetic therapy / Shari Sprague and Mary Ellen Goldberg
    Modalities part 4 : therapeutic ultrasound / Carolina Medina and Wendy Davies
    Modalities part 5 : shockwave therapy / Douglas Stramel and Angela Stramel
    Therapeutic exercises part 1 : land exercises / Jance L. Huntingford and Jessy Bale
    Therapeutic exercises part 2 : hydrotherapy (aquatic therapy) / Pádraig Egan and Noel Fitzpatrick
    Troubleshooting as a team / Amie Hesbach, Julia E. Tomlinson, and Erin White
    Equine rehabilitation / Steve Adair and Dawn Phillips
    Adjunctive therapies part 1 : acupuncture and traditional Chinese medicine / Robin Downing
    Adjunctive therapiesm part 2 : veterinary chiropractic / Robin Downing
    Adjunctive therapies part 3 : myofascial trigger point therapy / Douglas Stramel and Angela Stramel.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Mark Dutton, PT, Melissa Schneider, PTA, M.Ed, Janice Lwin, PT, DPT, Cassady Bartlett, PT,DPT, Annie Burke-Doe, PT, MPT, PhD.
    Summary: "This book will provide the necessary information to prepare for the National Physical Therapist Assistant Examination (NPTAE) including a breakdown of the NPTAE format, a comprehensive content review of all body systems, clinical tips, yellow and red flags to treatment, testing strategies, and sample questions"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Digital
    Shinichiro Morishita, Junichiro Inoue, Jiro Nakano, editors.
    Summary: This collection of chapters describes in detail the physical therapy research in patients with various types of cancers to help medical professionals and physical therapists help improve the physical function, activity of daily living, quality of life, the survival rate in cancer patients and cancer survivors. It provides not only information on rehabilitation but details on physical therapy cancer research and research methods. The book provides practical skills to treat the patients and to create useful and effective physical therapy programs by giving step-by-step tutorials to help readers learn various techniques. Along with presenting an introduction to physical therapy of cance and new findings, the authors provide recommendations on each cancer therapy. Physical Therapy and Research in Patients with Cancer is aimed at physical therapists and student physical therapists. Undergraduate and postgraduate students also can use our book to understand the basics and get up-to-date information. By sharing the latest research with our readers, the book creates a foundation for further development in this field of study. .

    Contents:
    Part 1 Physical Function and Health Related Quality of Life
    1 Physical function and health related QOL in cancer survivors
    2 Physical function and health-related quality of life after breast cancer surgery
    3 Physical function and health-related quality of life in patients with gastrointestinal cancer
    4 Physical function and health related QOL in surgically treated patients with malignant pleural mesothelioma
    5 Muscle mass, cachexia, and health-related quality of life in patients with hematologic malignancies
    6 Exercise capacity and health-related quality of life in patients after lung resection for non-small cell lung cancer
    Part 2 Physical Exercise
    7 Effect of physical exercise on physical function and survival rate in cancer patients
    8 Exercise therapy on muscle mass and physical function in patients undergoing allogeneic hematopoietic stem cell transplantation
    9 Physical exercise and immune function in patients with hematological malignancies
    10 Exercise protocols for counteracting cancer cachexia-related declines in muscle mass and strength and the clinical assessment of skeletal muscle
    11 Physical Exercise and Skeletal Muscle Adaptation in Cancer Cachexia
    12 Physical function and physical activity in patients with advanced lung cancer
    13 Physical Activity in Patients with Breast Cancer
    Part 3 Physical Function and Other Symptom
    14 Multiple frailty in elderly patients with cancer
    15 Postoperative complications in patients with esophageal cancer
    16 Cancer-related lymphedema and obesity
    17 Cancer-related pain and effects of non-pharmacologic intervention
    18 Nutrition and daily activities in older patients after gastrectomy
    19 Frailty and mental health in older patients with gastrointestinal cancer
    20 Physical function and nutrition in patients with hematological malignancies
    21 Physical Function and Nutrition in Patients with Esophageal Cancer and Head and Neck Cancer
    Part 4 Skeletal Muscle
    22 Skeletal muscle oxygenation in patients with malignant hematopoietic disease
    23 Sarcopenia and physical performance in patients with cancer
    24 Cachexia and postoperative outcomes in elderly patients with gastrointestinal cancer
    25 Mechanism of skeletal muscle atrophy using a mice cancer cachexia model.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Eric S. Pelletier ; series editor: Erin E. Jobst.
    Summary: Thirty pediatrics physical therapy cases sharpen students' critical thinking skills and prepare them for real-world practiceThis unique review features case studies that help physical therapy students successfully transition from coursework to clinical work. Thirty pediatrics physical therapy cases sharpen students' critical thinking skills and prepare them for real-world practiceThis unique review features case studies that help physical therapy students successfully transition from coursework to clinical work. Each case includes a discussion of the health condition, examination, evaluation, diagnosis, plan of care, and interventions, evidence-based practice recommendations, and references. NPTE-style review questions accompany each case, reinforcing students' learning. These case studies give students practical experience before they actually work with patients and helps build the confidence they need to succeed in real-world clinical practice.

    Contents:
    1. Brachial Plexus Palsy 2. Spinal Cord Injury 3. Cerebral Hemispherectomy 4. Hemipolymicrogyria: Bracing for Gait 5. Extreme Prematurity and the Neonatal Intensive Care Unit 6. Cerebra Palsy
    Early Intervention 7. Cerebral Palsy
    Elementary School 8. Cerebral Palsy
    Postsecondary Education and Transition to Adulthood 9. Fitness in Cerebral Palsy 10. Down Syndrome 11. Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy 12. Developmental Coordination Disorder 13. Autism Spectrum Disorder: Motor Concerns 14. Anterior Neck Burn 15. Palmar Hand Burn 16. Chronic Wound 17. Congenital Muscular Torticollis 18. Osteogenesis Imperfecta 19. Spina Bifida 20. Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia 21. Cystic Fibrosis 22. Hemophilia 23. Complex Regional Pain Syndrome 24. Post-Concussion Syndrome 25. Congenital Limb Deficiency: Proximal Femoral Focal Deficiency 26. Relapsed Clubfoot 27. Joint Hypermobility Condition 28. Idiopathic Toe Walking 29. Femoroacetabular Impingement 30. Anterior Cruciate Ligament Rupture: Postoperative Management 31. Medial Epicondyle Apophysitis (Little League Elbow)
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2016
  • Digital
    Jason Brumitt ; series editor: Erin E. Jobst.
    Summary: "The Physical Therapy Case Files series gives students realistic cases designed to help them make the transition from classroom to clinical work and is an outstanding review for the specialty topics included on the American Physical Therapy Association certification exams. This evidence-based series can stand alone or is the perfect complement to textbooks for enhanced learning in the context of real patients. Each case includes clinical tips, evidence-based practice recommendations, analysis, and review questions. These cases teach students how to think through evaluation, assessment, and treatment planning. Includes 42 realistic sports medicine cases. A great clinical refresher for practitioners looking to brush up on their skills."--Provided by publisher
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2016
  • Digital
    Annie Burke-Doe.
    Summary: "Dozens of realistic neurology cases help students make the transition from classroom to clinic Physical Therapy Case Files: Neurology delivers 30 neurology cases that help students sharpen their critical thinking skills and prepare them for real-world practice. Clinicians will find the book to be a valuable refresher. Each case includes clinical tips, evidence-based practice recommendations, analysis, and references. Features National Physical Therapy Examination-style review questions accompany each case to prepare students for the boards Provides students with practical experience before working with patients Analysis of case includes remediation content, saving students the necessity of having to go a textbook for answers"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: Working with Patients; How to Approach Clinical Examination; How to Approach Clinical Decision-Making; How to Determine Treatment Approach using Evidence-Based Practice; Acute Care Case Studies; 50 cases.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2014
  • Digital
    Frances M. Wedge.
    Summary: "This book is a concise and condensed clinical pocket guide designed specifically to help physical therapist assistant students and practitioners easily obtain information in the areas of physical therapy evidence-based interventions"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    editor: Urs F. Greber.
    Summary: This book explores a new challenge in virology: to understand how physical properties of virus particles (virions) and viruses (infected cells) affect the course of an infection. Insights from the emerging field of physical virology will contribute to understanding of the physical nature of viruses and cells, and will open new ways for anti-viral interference. Nine chapters and an editorial written by physicists, chemists, biologists and computational experts describe how virions serve as trail blazers in uncharted territory of cells. The authors outline how particles change in composition as they interact with host cells. Such virus dynamics are crucial for virus entry into cells and infection. It influences the modern concepts of virus-host interactions, viral lineages and evolution. The volume gives numerous up-to-date examples of modern virology and provides a fascinating read for researchers, clinicians and students in the field of infectious diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ruth Ballweg, Darwin Brown, Daniel T. Vetrosky, Tamara S. Ritsema.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Print
    [edited by] James Van Rhee, MS, PA-C, DFAAPA; Jonathan Kilstrom, MPAS, PA-C, NRP; Stephanie Neary, MPA, MMS, PA-C; Mary Ruggeri, MEd, MMSc, PA-C
    Contents:
    Cardiovascular system
    Pulmonary system
    Gastroenterology system
    Musculoskeletal system
    Endocrine system
    Eyes, ears, nose, and throat system
    Neurologic system
    Reproductive system --Infectious disease
    Psychiatry/behavioral science
    Dermatologic system-- Hematologic system-- Genitourinary and Renal systems
    Pediatrics
    Pharmacology
    Laboratory medicine
    Professional issues
    Test-taking strategies.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R697.P45 P482 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Brennan Bowker.
    Summary: The first pocket-size resource to guide PA students through their surgery rotation Prepare for and thrive during your clinical rotations with the quick-access pocket guide series, The Physician Assistant Student's Guide to the Clinical Year. The Surgery edition of this 7-volume series, discounted when purchased as a full set, delineates the exact duties required in this specialty. Written by an experienced PA educator, this guide details common surgical procedures you'll see, such as thyroidectomy, hernia repair, mastectomy, and appendectomy. It also provides important information on surgical emergencies, including gastrointestinal bleeding, perforated viscus, and limb ischemia. System-based chapters reviewing the presentation and management of common conditions that may require surgery are also included. Advice on taking good SOAP notes, guidance on how to prepare patients for surgery, and tips on surgical etiquette will help you excel during this intense rotation. Additional chapters on pre- and post-operative management of patients, sterile technique, and common wound closure methods will arm you with the knowledge you'll need to succeed.
  • Digital
    Dipali Yeh, MS, PA-C, CHSE, Erin Marthedal, MS, PA-C.
    Summary: The first pocket-size resource to guide PA students through their emergency medicine rotation Prepare for and thrive during your clinical rotations with the quick-access pocket guide series, The Physician Assistant Student's Guide to the Clinical Year. The Emergency Medicine edition of this 7-volume series, discounted when purchased as a full set, delineates the exact duties required in this specialty.Written by experienced PA educators, this guide details the clinical approach to common presentations such as chest pain, altered mental status, and headache. It also provides a systems-based approach to more than 40 of the most frequently encountered disease entities you will see in this rotation, including traumatic injury, cerebrovascular accident, and acute coronary syndrome.Distinguished by brief, bulleted content with handy tables and figures, the reference offers all pertinent laboratory and imaging studies needed to confirm a diagnosis, with medication and management guidelines. This guide also describes the most common procedures you will learn during the emergency medicine rotation, including incision and drainage, wound repair, and foreign body removal. Also included is a special chapter on non-medical situations you'll find in the emergency department, such as drug-seeking behavior, violent or incarcerated patients, and malingering and factitious disorders
  • Digital
    Gerald Kayingo, PhD, PA-C, Deborah Opacic, MMS, EdD, PA-C, DFAAP, Mary Carcella Allias, MPAS, PA-C.
    Contents:
    Introduction: The Approach to the Patient in Family Medicine
    Chapter 1: Common Presentations in Family Medicine
    Chapter 2: Common Disease Entities in Family Medicine
    Chapter 3: Diagnostic Testing in Family Medicine
    Chapter 4: Patient Education and Counseling in Family Medicine
    Chapter 5: Urgent Management in Family Medicine
    Chapter 6: Common Procedures in Family Medicine
    Chapter 7: Common Abbreviations in Family Medicine
  • Digital
    Elyse Watkins, series editor Maureen Knechtel
    Summary: The first pocket-size resource to guide PA students through their OB/GYN rotation Prepare for and thrive during your clinical rotations with the quick-access pocket guide series, The Physician Assistant Student's Guide to the Clinical Year. The OB/GYN edition of this 7-volume series, discounted when purchased as a full set, delineates the exact duties required in obstetrics and gynecology. Written by an experienced PA educator, this guide details the clinical approach to common obstetric and gynecologic presentations such as pelvic pain, abnormal uterine bleeding, and an overview of the initial prenatal visit. It also provides treatment and management details for more than 30 of the most frequently encountered disease entities you will see in this rotation, including cervical dysplasia, dysmenorrhea, and ectopic pregnancy. Distinguished by brief, bulleted content with handy tables and figures, the reference offers all pertinent laboratory and imaging studies needed to confirm a diagnosis, with medication and management guidelines. This guide also describes the most common procedures you will learn during your OB/GYN, including PAP test, colposcopy, labor induction, and cesarean delivery. A special chapter on urgent gynecologic and obstetric conditions, such as placental abruption, sexual assault, and severe uterine bleeding, is also included.
  • Digital
    Tanya L. Fernandez, MS, PA-C, IBCLC, Amy Akerman, MPAS, PA-C.
    Summary: Written by experienced PA educators, this guide details the clinical approach to common presentations such as cough, fever, and skin changes. It also provides a systems-based approach to more than 60 of the most frequently encountered disease entities you will see in this rotation, including dermatitis, pharyngitis, and otitis media. Distinguished by brief, bulleted content with handy tables and figures, the reference offers all pertinent laboratory and imaging studies needed to confirm a diagnosis, with medication and management guidelines. This guide also describes the most common procedures you will learn during the pediatrics rotation, including foreign body removal, reduction of subluxed radial head, and administration of nebulizer treatments.A special chapter on management of urgent pediatric conditions, such as asthma exacerbation, head injuries, and fractures, is also included
  • Digital
    Roderick S. Hooker, James F. Cawley, Christine M. Everett.
    Contents:
    Introduction and overview of the profession
    Development of the profession
    Current status : a profile of the physician assistant profession
    Physician assistant education
    Physician assistants in primary care
    Physician assistant specialization : non-primary care
    Physician assistants in hospital settings
    Physician assistants in rural health
    Economic assessment of physician assistants
    Legal aspects of physician assistant practice
    Professional and workforce issues
    Physician assistants on multidisciplinary teams
    Future directions of the physician assistant profession.
  • Digital
    Kirk J. Brower, Michelle B. Riba, editors.
    Summary: This book explores the important topic of mental health and related problems among physicians, including trainees. The all-too-common human response of "suffering in silence" and refusing to seek help for professional and personal issues has ramifications for physicians who work in safety-sensitive positions, where clear-headed judgment and proper action can save lives. Problems covered include burnout, disruptive and unprofessional behaviors, impaired performance, traumatic stress, addiction, depression and other mood disorders, and suicide. The authors of this work include psychologists, psychiatrists, and other physicians who diagnose and treat a range of patients with stress-related syndromes. Among their patients are physicians who benefit greatly from education, support, coaching, and treatment. The book's content is organized into three parts with interconnecting themes. Part I focuses on symptoms and how physicians' problems manifest at the workplace. Part II discusses the disorders underlying the manifesting symptoms. Part III focuses on interventions at both the individual and organizational levels. The major themes investigated throughout the book are developmental aspects; mental health and wellbeing as a continuum; and the multifactorial contributions of individual, interpersonal, organizational, and cultural elements to physician health. This book is intended for anyone who works with, provides support to, or professionally treats distressed physicians. It is also intended for healthcare leaders and organizations that are motivated to improve the experience of providing care and to change the culture of silence, such that seeking help and counsel become normal activities while minimizing stigma. By writing this book, the authors aim to outline effective pathways to well-being and a healthy work-life balance among physicians, so that they may provide optimal and safe care to their patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editor, Karen M. Sanders.
    Summary: This unique volume teaches those in the medical fields about the scientific value of neuropsychology in assessing cognition, the 6th vital sign, as part of well integrated collaborative care. It offers physicians a comprehensive tour of the many dimensions neuropsychology can add to primary and specialized medical care across the lifespan. Noted experts examine cognitive ramifications of a wide range of medical, psychological, and neuropsychological conditions, among them brain tumors, stroke, epilepsy, pediatric and adult TBI, schizophrenia, and adult ADHD. The books generous selection of case examples demonstrates the benefits of cognitive assessment in building accurate diagnoses, better understanding of patient needs, and more appropriate treatment and management strategies, as well as other neuropsychologist roles in consulting, referral, and forensic areas. In addition, tables, callout boxes, review questions, and other features are included throughout the text for ease in comprehension and retention. A sampling of the coverage: · The value of neuropsychological evaluation in medical practice. · A model of collaboration between primary care and neuropsychology. · Neuropsychological assessment of extremely preterm children. · Alzheimers Disease and overview of dementia. · Deep brain stimulation for Parkinson's Disease. · Neuropsychology in the 21st century: the rise of multicultural assessment. · Neuropsychological interventions for individuals with brain injury. The Physicians Field Guide to Neuropsychology is both a rigorous and an accessible reference for clinicians in diverse disciplines including general practice, family medicine, neuropsychology, pediatrics, gerontology, and sports medicine.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The Distinct Worlds of Neuropsychology and Medicine. -The world of the neuropsychologist: origins in norm-referenced testing.-The world of the medical practitioner: origins in Bayesian model
    Existing models of collaboration
    The difference between neuropsychological testing, cognitive screens, and neuroradiological exams
    The current debates in assessment: issues concerning evidenced-based testing, cognitive screens, computer-based cognitive tests, and standard neuropsychological testing
    Symptom validity in neuropsychological and medical settings
    Case Examples
    Pediatrics: Neuroimaging.
    Pediatrics: Epilepsy. -Mild Cognitive Impairment vs. Alzheimers Disease. -Frontotemporal Dementia
    Vascular Dementia
    Middle Cerebral Artery Stroke
    Aneurysms: Ruptured and Unruptured.
    Cardiovascular: Hypoxia. -Cardiovascular Surgery Outcomes. -Parkinsons Disease
    Parkinsons Plus Disorders
    Huntingtons Disease
    Lewy Body Dementia. -Traumatic Brain Injury: Sports Concussion. -Pediatric Brain Injury. -Cancer and Chemotherapy Outcomes
    Adult Epilepsy
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Psychiatric: Schizophrenia
    Neuroimaging and Biomarkers
    Surgery: Pre- and Post-Neurological Testing.-Related Issues in Collaboration: Specialties and Essential Considerations
    Multicultural Considerations. -Learning Disorders
    Forensic and Medicolegal Issues
    Medical Rehabilitation.-Vocational Issues. -Psychotherapy and Neuropsychotherapy
    Neuropsychological Feedback.-Family Needs and Involvement. –Appendix. -References.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Amanda Christian, MD & Nick Christian, MBA.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R728.5 C47 2021
    1
  • Digital
    Nenad Blau, Marinus Duran, K. Michael Gibson, Carlo Dionisi-Vici, editors.
    Contents:
    Introductory Chapters
    Amino acids
    Organic acids
    Vitamins and neurotransmitter
    Energy metabolism
    Organelles
    Selected disorder
    Biochemical phenotypes of questionable clinical significance
    Profiles.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Nenad Blau, Carlo Dionisi Vici, Carlos R. Ferreira, Christine Vianey-Saban, Clara D. M. van Karnebeek, editors.
    Summary: This updated and enlarged second edition is a unique source of information on the diagnosis, treatment, and follow-up of metabolic diseases. The clinical and laboratory data characteristic of rare metabolic conditions can be bewildering for clinicians and laboratory personnel alike reference laboratory data is scattered, and clinical descriptions can be obscure. The new Physicians Guide with the additional more than 600 diseases now featured, documents 1200 conditions grouped according to type of disorder, organ system affected (e.g. liver, kidney, etc) or phenotype (e.g. neurological, hepatic, etc). It includes relevant clinical findings and highlights the pathological values for diagnostic metabolites. Guidance on appropriate biochemical genetic testing is also provided and established experimental therapeutic protocols are described, with recommendations on follow-up and monitoring. The authors are acknowledged experts, and the book is a valuable desk reference for all who deal with inherited metabolic diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Peter Yellowlees, MBBS, M.D.
    Summary: "The figures are stark: 10-15 years after entering medical school, the average physician has twice the level of burnout of the average professional. Suicide rates among physicians are 1.4 and 2 times higher than in the general population for men and women, respectively. Physician Well-Being argues that the major reasons for physician distress are organizational and systemic and focuses on solutions that work. The guide focuses its gaze on the range of the provider experience, from pre-med programs and practice settings that include a large health system and multidisciplinary clinic to specific scenarios such as medical marriages. Through fictional but realistic and nuanced case studies, it proposes solutions designed to make today's typical health care environments more effective. Concise literature reviews highlight each chapter's most salient points, and detailed lists of references serve as springboards for further exploration. Throughout the volume, wisdom gleaned from the author's 30-year career as a psychiatrist-during which he has treated hundreds of physicians as patients-makes a powerful case for changes in the culture and process of medicine that are essential for improving both provider well-being and patient care and safety"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: "Our Dedicated Dad"
    Chapter 2: Health Care Is a Team Sport
    Chapter 3: A Unified Mission
    Chapter 4: Trust, Mentoring, and Innovation
    Chapter 5: Pre-Med : Vulnerability and Trauma
    Chapter 6: Medical School : Implicit Biases and a Well-Being Curriculum
    Chapter 7: Residency : A Narcotic Addict's New Career -Chapter 8: Cognitive Dissonance and Defining Meaning in Medicine
    Chapter 9: Medical Marriages : Caring for Each Other
    Chapter 10: The Joy and Meaning of Medicine
    Index.
  • Print
    [edited by] Edward Chu, Vincent T. DeVita, Jr.
    Summary: "Completely revised and updated for 2023, the Physicians' Cancer Chemotherapy Drug Manual is an up-to-date guide to the latest information on standard therapy and recent advances in the field. Written by world-class experts in clinical cancer therapeutics, this essential reference provides a complete, easy-to-use catalogue of over 100 drugs and commonly used drug regimens-both on- and off-label-for the treatment of all the major cancers." -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library [2023]
  • Digital
    J. Donald Boudreau, Eric J. Cassell, Abraham Fuks.
    Summary: This book re imagines the education of medical students in its entire scope, from first year to graduation. The educational blueprint presented here rests on a new definition of sickness, one focused on impairments of function as the primary issue of concern for both patients and their care givers. This perspective avoids the common shift of medical attention from persons to diseases, and thus provides the basis for an authentic and robust patient-centered mindset.

    Contents:
    Health, illness and disease
    Functioning
    The goals of physicians
    Person-centeredness
    The doctor-patient relationship
    The "good doctor"
    The clinical method and subjectivity in medicine
    Medical education : highlights of the past two centuries
    Competency-based education
    The rise and fall of clinical teaching
    Teaching a clinical method adapted to contemporary medicine
    Building on past experience
    Theory
    Educational blueprint: phases I to IV
    Phase I: the person
    Phase II: sick persons
    Phases III and IV: doctoring.
    Digital Access Oxford 2018
  • Digital
    Antonio Pisano.
    Summary: This book, now in its 2nd edition, discusses, explains and provides detailed, up-to-date information on physics applied to clinical practice in anesthesiology and critical care medicine, with the aid of simple examples from daily life. Almost everything that happens around us, including in the operating room and intensive care units, can be explained by physical laws. An awareness and understanding of relatively simple laws such as the Hagen-Poiseuille equation, or of slightly more complex topics such as harmonic motion and electromagnetism, to name just a few, offer anesthesiologists and intensivists fascinating insights into why they do what they do. After an introductory chapter that brushes up on all the (few) mathematics the reader will need to face the book, with many practical examples and clinical applications, each of the following 20 chapters deals with some everyday phenomena, explains them with one or more physical laws, and shows why these laws are important in anesthesia and critical care practice. Many illustrations are included for extra clarity. This enriched and updated edition of Physics for Anesthesiologists is intended for anesthesiologists, intensivists, anesthesia and intensive care medicine teachers and trainees, as well as medical students.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Patricia Bassereau, Pierre Sens, editors.
    Summary: This book mainly focuses on key aspects of biomembranes that have emerged over the past 15 years. It covers static and dynamic descriptions, as well as modeling for membrane organization and shape at the local and global (at the cell level) scale. It also discusses several new developments in non-equilibrium aspects that have not yet been covered elsewhere. Biological membranes are the seat of interactions between cells and the rest of the world, and internally, they are at the core of complex dynamic reorganizations and chemical reactions. Despite the long tradition of membrane research in biophysics, the physics of cell membranes as well as of biomimetic or synthetic membranes is a rapidly developing field. Though successful books have already been published on this topic over the past decades, none include the most recent advances. Additionally, in this domain, the traditional distinction between biological and physical approaches tends to blur. This book gathers the most recent advances in this area, and will benefit biologists and physicists alike.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I Introduction; Understanding Membranes and Vesicles: A Personal Recollection of the Last Two Decades; 1 Introduction; 2 Fluid Domains and Rafts in Fluid Membranes; 2.1 Intramembrane Domains in Ternary Lipid Mixtures; 2.2 Lipid Phase Domains or Rafts In Vivo; 2.3 Intramembrane Domains Arising from Protein Clusters; 3 Segmentation of Membranes by Heterogeneous Environments; 3.1 Lateral Diffusion in Cell Membranes; 3.2 Ambience-Induced Segmentation of Membranes; 3.3 Impeded Formation of Intramembrane Domains; 4 Emergence of Membrane Curvature on Nanoscopic Scales 10.3 Exergonic Fission for Large Spontaneous Curvatures10.4 Free Energy Difference for Domain-Induced Fission; 11 Summary and Outlook; References; Advanced Concepts and Perspectives of Membrane Physics; Abbreviations; 1 Introduction; 2 The Composite Cell Membrane a Multipurpose Machine; 3 Generation of Functional Membrane Domains by Electrostatic-Hydrophobic Recruitment of Proteins; 4 Transmembrane Signal Transmission by Remodeling of Plasma Membranes; 4.1 Regulation of PI(4,5)P2-PI(3,4,5)P3 Equilibrium by the Tandem PTEN and PI-3K (Fig. 4a) 4.1 Basic Aspects of Membrane Curvature4.2 Tensionless States of Membranes; 4.3 Simulations of More Complex Membrane Processes; 5 Local Curvature Generation and Spontaneous Curvature; 5.1 Local Curvature Generated by Membrane-Bound Proteins; 5.2 From Local to Spontaneous Curvature; 5.3 Short History of Spontaneous Curvature; 5.4 Sign of Spontaneous Curvature; 6 Two Mechanisms for the Formation of Membrane Nanotubes; 6.1 Spontaneous Tubulation of Membranes; 6.2 Necklace-to-Cylinder Transformation of Nanotubes; 6.3 Increased Robustness of Tubulated Vesicles 6.4 Force-Induced Tubulation of Membranes7 Interplay Between Spontaneous and Force-Induced Tubulation; 7.1 Tube Width Determined by Composite Curvature; 7.2 Composite Curvature and Total Membrane Tension; 7.3 Total Membrane Tension Versus Aspiration Tension; 7.4 Different Parameter Regimes; 8 Engulfment of Nanoparticles by Membranes; 8.1 Nanoparticles in Contact with Membranes; 8.2 (In)stability of Free Particle State and Onset of Adhesion; 8.3 (In)stability of Completely Engulfed Particle State; 8.4 Engulfment Regimes of Single Nanoparticles 8.5 Engulfment Regimes and Local Energy Landscapes8.6 Exocytic Engulfment of Interior Nanoparticles; 8.7 Engulfment Patterns and Curvature-Induced Forces; 8.8 Further Aspects of Membrane-Nanoparticle Interactions; 9 Wetting of Membranes by Aqueous Droplets; 9.1 Transitions Between Distinct Wetting Morphologies; 9.2 Partial Wetting and Apparent Contact Angles; 9.3 Intrinsic Contact Angles; 9.4 Nucleation and Growth of Nanodroplets at Membranes; 10 Topological Transformations of Membranes; 10.1 Free Energy Landscapes of Fusion and Fission; 10.2 Exergonic Fusion for Small Spontaneous Curvatures
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Val M. Runge, Wolfgang R. Nitz, Miguel Trelles, Frank L Goerner.
    Summary: "The text is organized into concise chapters, each discussing an important point relevant to clinical MR and illustrated with images from routine patient exams. The topics covered encompass the breadth of the field, from imaging basics and pulse sequences to advanced topics including contrast-enhanced MR angiography, spectroscopy, perfusion, and advanced parallel imaging techniques. Discussion of the latest hardware and software innovations--for example, MR-PET, interventional MR, compressed sensing, and multishot EPI--is included because these topics are critical to current and future advances. Included in the third edition are a large number of new topics, keeping the text up-to-date in this increasingly complex field. The text has also been revised to include additional relevant clinical images, to improve the clarity of descriptions, and to increase the depth of content"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Val M. Runge, Wolfgang R. Nitz, Johannes T. Heverhagen.
    Summary: "To make optimal use of MRI technology, radiologists need an understanding of MRI physics. This can be a difficult area to master for radiologists, and it becomes increasingly challenging as new MRI techniques and new software programs are introduced. While most MRI physics books and chapters are filled with dense text and equations, Runge's book takes a very reader-friendly and practice-oriented approach, leading with images and presenting clear, concise text on understanding MRI physics and on using these principles to acquire optimal MRI Images and interpret results. The new edition text and images are extensively revised to reflect developments in the field, and there are 12 new chapters"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Runge, Val M.; Heverhagen, Johannes T.
    Summary: The objective of this 5th edition of the book, as with the prior editions, is to teach through images a practical approach to magnetic resonance (MR) physics and image quality. Unlike other texts covering this topic, the focus is on clinical images rather than equations. A practical approach to MR physics is developed through images, emphasizing knowledge of fundamentals important to achieve high image quality. Pulse diagrams are also included, which many at first find difficult to understand. Readers are encouraged to glance at these as they go through the text. With time and repetition, as a reader progresses through the book, the value of these and the knowledge thus available will become evident (and the diagrams themselves easier to understand). The text is organized into concise chapters, each discussing an important point relevant to clinical MR and illustrated largely with images from routine patient exams. The topics covered encompass the breadth of the field, from imaging basics and pulse sequences to advanced topics including contrast-enhanced MR angiography, spectroscopy, perfusion and advanced parallel imaging/data sparsity techniques. Discussion of the latest hardware and software innovations, for example next generation low field MR, deep learning, MR-PET, 7 T, interventional MR, 4D flow, CAIPIRINHA, spiral techniques, radial acquisition, simultaneous multislice, compressed sensing and MR fingerprinting, is included because these topics are critical to current clinical practice as well as to future advances. Included in the fifth edition are a large number of new topics, keeping the text up to date in this increasingly complex field. The text has also been thoroughly revised to include additional relevant clinical images, to improve the clarity of descriptions, and to increase the depth of content. The book is highly recommended for radiologists, physicists, and technologists interested in the background of image acquisition used in standard as well as specialized clinical settings. .

    Contents:
    Section I. Hardware
    Section II. Basic Imaging Physics
    Section III. Basic Image Acquisition
    Section IV. Advanced Image Acquisition
    Section V. Flow
    Section VI. Tissue-
    Section VII. Artifacts, Including Those Due to Motion, and the Recluction Thereof
    Section VIII. Further Improving Diagnostic Quality, Technologic Innovation
    Section IX Recent Innovations
    Section X Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Magnus Dahlbom.
    Contents:
    Principles of SPECT and PET imaging / Magnus Dahlbom and Michael A. King
    Scintillators for PET and SPECT / Charles L. Melcher
    Photodetectors / Magnus Dahlbom
    Acquistion electronics / Thomas K. Lewellen
    SPECT instrumentation / Wei Chang, Michael Rozler, and Scott D. Metzler
    PET instrumentation / Andrew L. Goertzen and Jonathan D. Thiessen
    SPECT corrections: quantitative SPECT / Irène Buvat
    PET corrections/quantitative PET / Suleman Surti
    Image reconstruction for PET and SPECT / Richard M. Leahy, Bing Bai, and Evren Asma
    High-performance computing in emission tomography / Guillem Pratx
    Methods and applications of dynamic SPECT imaging / Anna M. Celler, Troy H. Farncombe, Alvin Ihsani, Arkadiusz Sitek and R. Glenn Wells
    Dynamic PET imaging / Sung-Cheng Huang and Koon-Pong Wong
    PET/CT / Søren Holm, Osama Mawlawi, and Thomas Beyer
    SPECT/CT / Yothin Rakvongthai, Jinsong Ouyang, and Georges El Fakhri
    PET/mri instrumentation and applications / Ciprian Catana and Leon Menezes
    Preclinical PET and SPECT / Steven R. Meikle, Andre Z. Kyme, Peter Kench, Frederic Boisson, Arvind Parmar
    Clinical applications of PET-CT and SPECT-CT imaging / Johannes Czernin, Ora Israel, Ken Herrmann, Martin Barrio, David Nathanson, and Martin Allen-Auerbach.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Print
    Oordt, Marinus van.
    Contents:
    Bd.
    1. Die Behandlung innerer Krankheiten durch Klima, spectrale Strahlung und Freiluft, Meteorotherapie.
  • Digital
    Shabir H. Wani, Amita Mohan, Gyanendra Pratap Singh, editors.
    Summary: World population is growing at an alarming rate and may exceed 9.7 billion by 2050, whereas agricultural productivity has been negatively affected due to yield limiting factors such as biotic and abiotic stresses as a result of global climate change. Wheat is a staple crop for ~20% of the world population and its yield needs be augmented correspondingly in order to satisfy the demands of our increasing world population. "Green revolution", the introduction of semi-dwarf, high yielding wheat varieties along with improved agronomic management practices, gave rise to a substantial increase in wheat production and self-sufficiency in developing countries that include Mexico, India and other south Asian countries. Since the late 1980's, however, wheat yield is at a standoff with little fluctuation. The current trend is thus insufficient to meet the demands of an increasing world population. Therefore, while conventional breeding has had a great impact on wheat yield, with climate change becoming a reality, newer molecular breeding and management tools are needed to meet the goal of improving wheat yield for the future. With the advance in our understanding of the wheat genome and more importantly, the role of environmental interactions on productivity, the idea of genomic selection has been proposed to select for multi-genic quantitative traits early in the breeding cycle. Accordingly genomic selection may remodel wheat breeding with gain that is predicted to be 3 to 5 times that of crossbreeding. Phenomics (high-throughput phenotyping) is another fairly recent advancement using contemporary sensors for wheat germplasm screening and as a selection tool. Lastly, CRISPR/Cas9 ribonucleoprotein mediated genome editing technology has been successfully utilized for efficient and specific genome editing of hexaploid bread wheat. In summary, there has been exciting progresses in the development of non-GM wheat plants resistant to biotic and abiotic stress and/or wheat with improved nutritional quality. We believe it is important to highlight these novel research accomplishments for a broader audience, with the hope that our readers will ultimately adopt these powerful technologies for crops improvement in order to meet the demands of an expanding world population

    Contents:
    1. Food production: Global challenges to mitigate climate change
    2. Reduced-immunogenicity wheat now coming to age
    3. Wheat quality improvement for micronutrients
    4. Changing Nutrition Scenario: Color wheat- a new perspective
    5. Genetics and Breeding of Fe and Zn improvement in wheat
    6. Membrane Fluidity and Compositional Changes in Response to High Temperature Stress in Wheat
    7. Current understanding of thermo-tolerance in Wheat
    8. Advances in molecular markers and their use in genetic improvement of wheat
    9. Genomic selection for wheat improvement
    10. Genetic Dissection for Yield and Yield Related Traits in Bread Wheat (Triticum aestium L.)
    11. Marker-assisted breeding for resistance against wheat rusts
    12. Genome Editing and Trait Improvement in Wheat.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Frederick Sargent II [and others].
    Contents:
    Pt 1 Efficiency of young men under temperate conditions
    Pt. II, v. 1. Efficiency of young men under conditions of moderate cold
    Pt. III. Efficiency of young men under conditions of moist heat
    Pt. III, v.2. Efficiency of young men under conditions of moist heat appendices of methods and original data
    Pt. IV. Integrative study of the all-purpose survival ration for temperate, cold and hot weather.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    1
  • Print
    mit Beiträgen von J. Crossland ... [and others].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L407 .M74 1963
    2
  • Print
    Hrsg. von B. Flaschenträger unter Mitwerkung von E. Lehnartz.
    Contents:
    1. Bd. Die Stoffe
    2. Bd. Der Stoffwechsel.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F514 .F58
    2
  • Print
    Bell, George Howard.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F40 .P57 [n.d.]
    1
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Patricia J. Metting, PhD.
    Contents:
    High-yield facts
    General principles: cellular physiology
    General principles: multisystem processes
    Physiology of the hematopoeitic and lymphoreticular systems
    Neurophysiology
    Musculoskeletal physiology
    Respiratory physiology
    Cardiovascular physiology
    Gastrointestinal physiology
    Renal and urinary physiology
    Reproductive physiology
    Endocrine physiology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    QP40 .P73 2014
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Pim van Dijk, Deniz Başkent, Etienne Gaudrain, Emile de Kleine, Anita Wagner, Cris Lanting, editors.
    Contents:
    Effects of Age and hearing loss on the processing of auditory temporal fine structure / Brian C. J. Moore
    Aging effects on behavioural estimates of suppression with short suppressors / Erica L. Hegland and Elizabeth A. Strickland
    Contributions of coding efficiency of temporal-structure and level information to lateralization performance in young and early-elderly listeners / Atsushi Ochi, Tatsuya Yamasoba and Shigeto Furukawa
    Investigating the role of working memory in speech-in-noise identification for listeners with normal hearing / Christian Füllgrabe and Stuart Rosen
    The contribution of auditory and cognitive factors to intelligibility of words and sentences in noise / Antje Heinrich and Sarah Knight
    Do hearing aids improve affect perception? / Juliane Schmidt, Diana Herzog, Odette Scharenborg and Esther Janse
    Suitability of the binaural interaction component for interaural electrode pairing of bilateral cochlear implants / Hongmei Hu, Birger Kollmeier and Mathias Dietz
    Binaural loudness constancy / John F. Culling and Helen Dare
    Intelligibility for binaural speech with discarded low-SNR speech components / Esther Schoenmaker and Steven van de Par
    On the contribution of target audibility to performance in spatialized speech mixtures / Virginia Best, Christine R. Mason, Jayaganesh Swaminathan, Gerald Kidd, Kasey M. Jakien, Sean D. Kampel, Frederick J. Gallun, Jörg M. Buchholz and Helen Glyde
    Optimization of a Spectral contrast enhancement algorithm for cochlear implants based on a vowel identification model / Waldo Nogueira, Thilo Rode and Andreas Büchner
    Roles of the contralateral efferent reflex in hearing demonstrated with cochlear implants / Enrique A. Lopez-Poveda, Almudena Eustaquio-Martín, Joshua S. Stohl, Robert D. Wolford, Reinhold Schatzer and Blake S. Wilson
    Deactivating cochlear implant electrodes based on pitch information for users of the ACE Strategy / Deborah Vickers, Aneeka Degun, Angela Canas, Thomas Stainsby and Filiep Vanpoucke
    Speech masking in normal and impaired hearing: interactions between frequency selectivity and inherent temporal fluctuations in noise / Andrew J. Oxenham and Heather A. Kreft
    Effects of pulse shape and polarity on sensitivity to cochlear implant stimulation: a chronic study in guinea pigs / Olivier Macherey and Yves Cazals
    Assessing the firing properties of the electrically stimulated auditory nerve using a convolution model / Stefan B. Strahl, Dyan Ramekers, Marjolijn M. B. Nagelkerke, Konrad E. Schwarz, Philipp Spitzer, Sjaak F. L. Klis, Wilko Grolman and Huib Versnel
    Modeling the individual variability of loudness perception with a multi-category psychometric function / Andrea C. Trevino, Walt Jesteadt and Stephen T. Neely
    Auditory fMRI of sound intensity and loudness for unilateral stimulation / Oliver Behler and Stefan Uppenkamp
    Tinnitus- and task-related differences in resting-state networks / Cris Lanting, Aron Woźniak, Pim van Dijk and Dave R. M. Langers
    The role of conduction delay in creating sensitivity to interaural time differences / Catherine Carr, Go Ashida, Hermann Wagner, Thomas McColgan and Richard Kempter
    Objective measures of neural processing of interaural time differences / David McAlpine, Nicholas Haywood, Jaime Undurraga and Torsten Marquardt
    Minimum audible angles measured with simulated normally-sized and oversized pinnas for normal-hearing and hearing-impaired test subjects / Filip M. Rønne, Søren Laugesen, Niels S. Jensen and Julie H. Pedersen
    Moving objects in the Barn Owl's auditory world / Ulrike Langemann, Bianca Krumm, Katharina Liebner, Rainer Beutelmann and Georg M. Klump
    Change detection in auditory textures / Yves Boubenec, Jennifer Lawlor, Shihab Shamma and Bernhard Englitz
    The relative contributions of temporal envelope and fine structure to mandarin lexical tone perception in auditory neuropathy spectrum disorder / Shuo Wang, Ruijuan Dong, Dongxin Liu, Luo Zhang and Li Xu
    Interaction of object binding cues in binaural masking pattern experiments / Jesko L.Verhey, Björn Lübken and Steven van de Par
    Speech intelligibility for target and masker with different spectra / Thibaud Leclère, David Théry, Mathieu Lavandier and John F. Culling
    Dynamics of cochlear nonlinearity / Nigel P. Cooper and Marcel van der Heijden
    Responses of the human inner ear to low-frequency sound / Markus Drexl, Eike Krause, Robert Gürkov and Lutz Wiegrebe
    Suppression measured from chinchilla auditory-nerve-fiber responses following noise-induced hearing loss: adaptive-tracking and systems-identification approaches / Mark Sayles, Michael K. Walls and Michael G. Heinz
    Does signal degradation affect top-down processing of speech? / Anita Wagner, Carina Pals, Charlotte M. de Blecourt, Anastasios Sarampalis Deniz Baṣkent
    The effect of peripheral compression on syllable perception measured with a hearing impairment simulator / Toshie Matsui, Toshio Irino, Misaki Nagae, Hideki Kawahara and Roy D. Patterson
    Towards objective measures of functional hearing abilities / Hamish Innes-Brown, Renee Tsongas, Jeremy Marozeau and Colette McKay
    Connectivity in language areas of the brain in cochlear implant users as revealed by fNIRS / Colette M. McKay, Adnan Shah, Abd-Krim Seghouane, Xin Zhou, William Cross and Ruth Litovsky
    Isolating neural indices of continuous speech processing at the phonetic level / Giovanni M. Di Liberto and Edmund C. Lalor
    Entracking as a brain stem code for pitch: the Butte Hypothesis / Philip X Joris
    Can temporal fine structure and temporal envelope be considered independently for pitch perception? / Nicolas Grimault
    Locating melody processing activity in auditory cortex with magnetoencephalography / Roy D. Patterson, Martin Andermann, Stefan Uppenkamp and André Rupp
    Studying effects of transcranial alternating current stimulation on hearing and auditory scene analysis / Lars Riecke
    Functional organization of the ventral auditory pathway / Yale E. Cohen, Sharath Bennur, Kate Christison-Lagay, Adam Gifford and Joji Tsunada
    Neural segregation of concurrent speech: effects of background noise and reverberation on auditory scene analysis in the ventral cochlear nucleus / Mark Sayles, Arkadiusz Stasiak and Ian M. Winter
    Audio visual integration with competing sources in the framework of audio visual speech scene analysis / Attigodu Chandrashekara Ganesh, Frédéric Berthommier and Jean-Luc Schwartz
    Relative pitch perception and the detection of deviant tone patterns / Susan L. Denham, Martin Coath, Gábor P. Háden, Fiona Murray and István Winkler
    Do Zwicker tones evoke a musical pitch? / Hedwig E. Gockel and Robert P. Carlyon
    Speech coding in the midbrain: effects of sensorineural hearing loss / Laurel H. Carney, Duck O. Kim and Shigeyuki Kuwada
    Sources of variability in consonant perception and implications for speech perception modeling / Johannes Zaar and Torsten Dau
    On detectable and meaningful speech-intelligibility benefits / William M. Whitmer, David McShefferty and Michael A. Akeroyd
    Individual differences in behavioural decision weights related to irregularities in cochlear mechanics / Jungmee Lee, Inseok Heo, An-Chieh Chang, Kristen Bond, Christophe Stoelinga, Robert Lutfi and Glenis Long
    On the interplay between cochlear gain loss and temporal envelope coding deficits / Sarah Verhulst, Patrycja Piktel, Anoop Jagadeesh and Manfred Mauermann
    Frequency tuning of the efferent effect on cochlear gain in humans / Vit Drga, Christopher J. Plack and Ifat Yasin.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    edited by E.J. Briskey, R.G. Cassens [and] J.C. Trautman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I602.1 .B85 1965
    1
  • Digital
    S. Ali Mirjalili, editor.
    Summary: This book is designed as a learning tool to assist candidates to become familiar with the common, yet often complex, physiology topics covered in the GSSE examination. Its aim is to give candidates ideas to focus their studies in high yield areas. It is specially designed for the GSSE exam, which is a requirement for applying any surgical program in Australia and New Zealand. An important component of the guide is diagrams to aid better understanding of normal human physiology. Great care has been taken to ensure the subject and emphasis of the questions accurately simulates the actual exam. The book is organized in 5 chapters, totaling 140 pages including colour images, diagrams and tables. This is an accompany book with Anatomy for the Generic Surgical Sciences Examination (GSSE), Springer, 2017, which is written by the same author.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Endocrine and Reproductive Physiology; 1.1 Mechanisms of Hormonal Action; 1.2 Hypothalamus and Posterior Pituitary; 1.3 Anterior Pituitary; 1.4 Adrenal Medulla; 1.5 Adrenal Cortex; 1.6 Thyroid Hormones; 1.7 Calcium and Phosphate Metabolism; 1.8 Glucoregulatory Hormones; 1.9 Female Hormones; 1.10 Male Hormones;
    Chapter 2: Gastrointestinal Physiology; 2.1 Gastrointestinal Function; 2.2 Liver and Pancreas; 2.3 Stomach, Small Intestine and Large Intestine; 2.4 Hormones; 2.5 Absorption of Nutrients; 2.6 Disorders of Swallowing and of the Oesophagus
    Chapter 3: Cardiovascular Physiology3.1 The Cardiac Cycle: Mechanical Events; 3.2 Conduction with ECG; 3.3 Cardiac Output; 3.4 Blood Pressure; 3.5 Control Through Different Circulations; 3.6 Flow, Arteries, Veins and Lymph;
    Chapter 4: Respiratory Physiology; 4.1 Structure and Function; 4.2 Ventilation; 4.3 Diffusion; 4.4 Blood Flow and Metabolism; 4.5 Ventilation-Perfusion Relationship; 4.6 Gas Transport in the Blood; 4.7 Mechanics of Breathing; 4.8 Control of Ventilation;
    Chapter 5: Renal Physiology; 5.1 Body Water; 5.2 Function of Glomerulus and Tubules; 5.3 Renal Blood Flow 5.4 Control of Osmolarity, ECF and RBF5.5 Acid Base; 5.6 Ion Transport; Index
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nikolai Petrovich Alekseev.
    Summary: This comprehensive Monograph examines all peripheral and central mechanisms of regulating the secretion of milk from the lactating breast. The author reviews the complete female breast development, starting with the early childhood, up to pregnancy and lactation. Structural and ultrastructural data on the alveolar-ductal system, together with details of breast innervation, are used to investigate the physiological process of lactation. Readers will appreciate the special focus on reflexes, both in the child and the mother, that help to regulate maternal milk production and secretion. Following this, the author sheds a light on the composition and dynamics of milk components during the different periods of lactation. The final section of this volume focusses on practical aspects of modern breastfeeding, like the use of breast pumps or galactogogues, to influence the productivity of milk production. These fundamental principles and structural details will be particularly useful for physiologists and clinicians working in gynecology and pediatrics.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Origin and development of the breast
    Chapter 3: Structure of the lactating breast
    Chapter 4: Breast function during the initial period of lactation (lactogenesis I and II)
    Chapter 5: The period of established lactation (lactogenesis III).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Zsolt Radák.
    Summary: The Physiology of Physical Training provides complete coverage of the physiological and methodological aspects of physical training, providing essential knowledge for anyone involved in exercise physiology. Physiological processes at the cellular level (and for the whole organism) are covered to better explain particular training methods and convey a deeper knowledge and understanding of training techniques. Coverage of exercise training-induced adaptive responses and the most appropriate training methods to bring about targeted adaptive changes are also included. This is the perfect reference for researchers of physiology/kinesiology and human kinetics, practicing coaches, graduate students and sports medicine specialists.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    foreword by Walter B. Lancaster.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Optics
    v. 2. Vision.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    Q5 .L75
    2
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief Hamid M. Said ; associate editors Fayez K. Ghishan, Jonathan D. Kaunitz, Juanita L. Merchant, Jackie D. Wood.
    Summary: "Physiology of the Gastrointestinal Tract, Sixth Edition, a Two-Volume set, covers the study of the mechanical, physical and biochemical functions of the GI Tract by linking clinical disease and disorder, thus bridging the gap between clinical and laboratory medicine while also covering breakthroughs in gastroenterology, such as the brain-gut axis and microbiome. Additionally, information is provided at the organism level, including animal models of gastrointestinal disorders and therapeutic possibilities. The book covers a wide range of conditions, from food allergies, constipation, chronic liver disease and IBS, also exploring emerging techniques to diagnose and normalize functions of the GI tract. As a highly referenced book, this is a useful resource for gastroenterologists, physiologists, internists, professional researchers and instructors teaching courses for clinical and research students. Discusses the multiple processes governing gastrointestinal function Presents new information on the brain-gut axis and microbiome Edited by preeminent scientists in the field Includes coverage of issues, such as food allergies, constipation, chronic liver disease, IBS, Crohn's disease, and more"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Section I: Basic cell physiology, genetics, and growth of the GI tract
    Transcription and epigenetic regulation
    Gastrointestinal hormones
    Growth factors in the intestinal tract
    Hedgehog signaling in gastrointestinal morphogenesis and morphostasis
    The role of hippo signaling in intestinal homeostasis
    Notch pathway regulation of intestinal cell fate
    WNT signaling in the intestine: development, homeostasis, disease
    The cell cycle
    Cell death
    Molecular physiology of gastrointestinal function during development
    Section II: Neurogastroenterology. Development of the enteric nervous system
    Enteric neurogenesis
    The physiology and pathophysiology of interstitial cells of Cajal: pacemaking, innervation, and stretch sensation
    Enteric nervous system structure and neurochemistry related to function and neuropathology
    Enteric nervous system: brain-in-the-gut
    Brain processing of gastrointestinal sensory signaling
    Extrinsic sensory afferent nerves innervating the gastrointestinal tract in health and disease
    Neuroimaging of brain-gut interactions in functional gastrointestinal disorders
    Enteric neural regulation of mucosal secretion
    Neuromuscular function in the biliary tract
    Physiology of gastric motility patterns
    Clinical and translational aspects of normal and abnormal motility in the esophagus, small intestine and colon
    Neurophysiologic mechanisms of human large intestinal motility
    Neuromuscular physiology of the pelvic floor
    Section III: Host environmental interaction. Tight junctions and the intestinal barrier
    Gut barrier: adaptive immunity
    Gut barrier: innate immunity
    Chemosensing in the colon
    Mucosal restitution and repair
    Luminal chemosensing and mucosal defenses in the upper GI tract
    Intestinal tuft cells
    Section IV: Gut microbiome. Gastrointestinal microbial ecology with perspectives on health and disease
    Diet effects on gut microbiome composition, function, and host physiology
    Influence of the gut microbiome on immune development during early life
    Gut microbiome and metabolism
    Microbial physiology of the digestive tract and its role in inflammatory bowel diseases
    Volume 2. Section V: Physiology of secretion. Salivary gland secretion
    The cell biology of gastric acid secretion
    Structure-function relationships in the pancreatic acinar cell
    Regulation of pancreatic secretion
    Bile formation and the enterohepatic circulation
    Mechanisms of hepatocyte organic anion transport
    Mechanisms of hepatocyte detoxification
    Physiology of cholngiocytes
    Section VI: Digestion and absorption. Molecular mechanisms of polarized protein trafficking in epithelial cells
    Sugar absorption
    Protein digestion and absorption
    Enterocyte fatty acid handling proteins and chylomicron formation
    Genetic regulation of intestinal lipid transport and metabolism
    Digestion and intestinal absorption of dietary carotenoids and vitamin A
    The vitamin D system: biological and molecular actions in the intestine and colon
    Bioavailability of vitamin E
    Intestinal absorption of vitamin K: cellular and molecular mechanisms
    Intestinal absorption of water-soluble vitamins: cellular and molecular mechanisms
    Water transport in the gastrointestinal tract
    Na+/H+ exchange in mammalian digestive tract
    Intestinal anion absorption
    Ion channels of the gastrointestinal epithelial cells
    Molecular mechanisms of intestinal transport of calcium, phosphate, and magnesium
    Mechanisms and regulation of intestinal iron transport
    Trace metal absorption and transport
    Section VII: Integrated GI physiology and pathophysiology. The gastrointestinal tract and control of food intake
    Mechanisms of helicobacter pylori-induced gastric inflammation
    Host-pathogen interactions in pathophysiology of diarrheal disorders
    Recruitment of inflammatory and immune cells in the gut
    Mechanisms of gastrointestinal malignancies
    Neuropathophysiology of the irritable bowel syndrome
    Pathophysiology of diarrhea and its clinical implications
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital/Print
    Contents:
    [1] 1901-1921.
    [2] 1922-1941.
    [3] 1942-1962.
    [4] 1963-1970.
    Digital Access 1901-present.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    v. 1-3, 1964-67.
    (Covers 1901-1962)
    QP31.2 .P497
    3
  • Digital
    Abraham M. Joshua, editor.
    Summary: This is a comprehensive book on physiotherapy for adult neurological disorders with chapters describing physiotherapy assessment and management for those adult patients in the acute care and rehabilitation units of hospitals or centers. Each chapter additionally provides brief introduction, historical background, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, medical and surgical management. The aim is to help build a theoretical foundation on which principles of management are laid, and to improve and update the readers' clinical and therapeutic skills. Improving the overall care and management of patients suffering from adult neurological conditions such as stroke, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, and multiple sclerosis, is the key objective. Supported with ample practical contents (exercise training and therapeutic strategies) and pictures it prepares the readers to effectively manage patients with neurological conditions. The contents of this book will serve as a guide and source of knowledge of both contemporary and advanced treatment techniques for undergraduate and post-graduate students and therapists practicing worldwide in adult neurological physiotherapy.

    Contents:
    1 Neuroplasticity
    2 Therapeutic Approaches
    3 Stroke
    4 Extrapyramidal Disorders
    5 Cerebellar Dysfunction
    6 Traumatic Brain Injury
    7 Vestibular Rehabilitation
    8 Motor Neuron Disease
    9 Multiple Sclerosis
    10 Infections Of The Central Nervous System
    11 Peripheral Nerve Disorders
    12 Muscular Dystrophies
    13 Myasthenia Gravis
    14 Perceptual Disorders
    15 Neurobehavioral Issues In Adult Neurological Conditions
    16 Gadgets And Technologies In Adult Neurological Physiotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Naveen Kumar Arora, Narendra Kumar, editors.
    Summary: The increasing human population and the associated activities have negatively influenced the ecosystems and life on earth. The continuous addition of agrochemicals, heavy metals and industrial wastes/ effluents in the ecosystems have caused great harm, including loss of productivity, biodiversity, climate change and diseases in plants, animals and humans, resulting in increased marginal lands and endangered sustainability of life on earth. Hence, there is an urgent need to reverse the impact of dangerous pollutants through a holistic, sustainable and biotic approach. Bioremediation involves the utilization of biological systems, mainly plants (phytoremediation) or microorganisms or both in combination (rhizoremediation) for the removal or degradation of pollutants and revive the habitats in an eco-friendly manner. Recently, there have been many success stories related to bioremediation involving plants or plant-microbe interactions. These success stories are related to the removal of heavy metals, pesticides, polyaromatic hydrocarbons, explosives, radionuclides or reduction of biological oxygen demand, total dissolved solids, total suspended solids, oil spills in water bodies. Rhizoremediation has also been successfully used for reclamation of saline or marginal soils. With the range of pollutants and the total area (on earth) covered by these toxic chemicals, it is important that these eco-friendly technologies be utilized in a better way. The book throws light on the recent happenings, research and success stories related to bioremediation of polluted habitats through phytoremediation or rhizoremediation. The book also highlights some of the significantly important plant and microbial species involved in remediation, the physiology, biochemistry and the mechanisms of remediation by various plants and microbes, and suggestions for future improvement of bioremediation technology.

    Contents:
    1. Natural and artificial soil amendments for the efficient phytoremediation of contaminated soil 2. Rhizoremediation: A sustainable approach to improve the quality and productivity of polluted soils. 3. Phycoremediation of Pollutants for Ecosystem Restitution 4. Phytoremediation of heavy metals and pesticides present in water using aquatic macrophytes 5. Plant growth promoting rhizospheric microbes for remediation of saline soils 6. Plant-microbe-soil interactions for reclamation of degraded soils: potential and challenges 7. Lichens as sinks of airborne organic pollutants: A case study in the natural ecosystem of Himalayas 8. Rhizoremediation of poly aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs): A task force of plants and microbes 9. Cadmium stress tolerance in plants and role of beneficial soil microorganisms 10. Acid Tolerant Microbial Inoculants
    A Requisite for Successful Crop Production in Acidic Soils 11. Plant growth promoting microbes as front runners for onsite remediation of organophosphate pesticide residues in agriculture soils 12. Influence of zeolite support on integrated biodegradation and photodegradation of molasses wastewater for organic load reduction and colour removal 13. An overview on the microbial degradation of linear alkylbenzenesulfonate (LAS) surfactants.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Manoj Kumar Solanki, Prem Lal Kashyap, Baby Kumari, editors.
    Summary: To satisfy the food demands of the global population, advanced technology based research is needed, that can extract the information from the plant metabolism and microbial gene pool and use it for improving plant health and productivity. Modern biotechnological tools have the ability to unlock the limitations of agricultural practices. However, the application of these tools is not well equipped. Moreover, eco-friendly agriculture by microbial inoculants is known to have positive influences on soil/plant health. Therefore it is relevant to explore the plant associated microbial niches, especially endophytes, epiphytes, and soil microbes and understand how they are benefitting each other. It can open new insights to develop sustainable agriculture practices by using consortia of microbes as plant helpers that recover the imbalanced agriculture systems and manage pathogenic diseases. This book presents the updates about the plant associated microbiomes and their contemporary uses. It covers the knowledge gap between soil and plant helper microbiomes and their application in the agriculture and allied sectors. Modern insights of phytobiomes are explored in various chapters on a variety of interrelated aspects of the fascinating areas like plant microbial interaction, integrated pest management, soil fertility intensification, sustainable crop production, and disease management. Sections in the book describe how to plant beneficial microbiomes have been utilized for sustainable green farming, with the aim to resolve the global food problem without harming the soil and environment health. This book is intended for everyone who is involved in agriculture, microbial biotechnology, bioinformatics, and all disciplines related to microbial biotechnology. These include academic students, scientists, and researchers at universities, institutes, industries, and government organizations who want to understand microbial linkages in a shorter time. It contains basic information th at will be help to the non-specialist readers to understand progressive research.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Phytobiomes: Role in Nutrient Stewardship and Soil Health
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Plant-Soil-Microbe Interactions in a Typical Phytobiome
    1.3 Beneficial Rhizospheric Microbes and Phytobiome
    1.4 Phytobiome and Nutrient Stewardship in Soil
    1.4.1 C-Cycle and Phytobiome
    1.4.1.1 Endurance of Soil Organic Matter and Its Microbial Decomposition
    1.4.1.2 Microbial Functions in Soil Carbon Cycle Subsequent Climate Change
    1.4.1.3 Microbial Growth Dynamics and Energy Balance
    1.4.2 N Cycle and Phytobiome 1.4.2.1 Nitrogen Fixation and Transformations
    1.4.2.2 N in Soil and Its Mineralization
    1.4.3 Phosphorus Nutrition and Phytobiome
    1.4.3.1 Phytobiomes and P Nutrition in Plants
    1.4.3.2 Microbiome and P Nutrition in Plants
    1.4.3.3 Rhizosphere Engineering and P Nutrition
    1.4.4 K-Bioavailability and Phytobiome
    1.4.4.1 K-Solubilizing Microbial Species
    1.4.5 S Cycle and Phytobiome
    1.4.5.1 Mineralization and Immobilization of Sulfur
    1.4.5.2 Microbial Oxidation and Reduction of S
    1.4.6 Trace Metals and Phytobiome 1.4.6.1 Conducive Soil Condition for Trace Metal Toxicity
    1.4.6.2 Trace Metals' Crop Response and Phytoremediation
    1.4.6.3 Siderophore and Phytosiderophore Engineering and Trace Metal Chemistry
    1.5 Phytobiome: An Early Indicator of Soil Health
    1.6 Future Outlook
    1.7 Conclusions
    References
    2: Role of a Quorum Sensing Signal Acyl-Homoserine Lactone in a Phytobiome
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Plant Senses and Responds to AHL
    2.3 AHL Impact on Plant Root Growth and Architecture
    2.4 AHL as Plant Strengthener
    2.5 Effect of AHL on Symbiosis and Nitrogen Cycle 2.6 AHL-Induced Plant Diseases
    2.7 AHL Uptake in Plant and Possible Signaling Pathways for Plant Response to AHL
    2.8 Plant Interference with QS Signals
    2.8.1 Plant Interferes with QS via AHL Mimics
    2.8.2 Plant Metabolites and Enzymatic Interference of QS
    2.9 Role of Endophyte in a Phytobiome
    2.10 Conclusion and Forthcoming Prospects
    References
    3: Plant Microbiomes: Understanding the Aboveground Benefits
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Soil Microbiome Characterization
    3.3 Structural and Compositional Factors in Plant-Associated Microbial Network 3.3.1 Plant-Associated Bacterial and Archaeal Microbiomes
    3.3.2 The Fungal Microbiota of Plants
    3.3.3 Plant-Associated Protists: The Outcasted Fraction of the Plant Microbiota
    3.4 Microbial Currency: Exudates
    3.4.1 Plant Uptake and Release
    3.4.2 Microbial Uptake/Release
    3.5 Ecological Considerations for Utilizing Plant's Benefits in the Farmer's Field
    3.5.1 Impact on Plant Functions
    3.5.2 Impact on Bacterial Functions
    3.6 Formation of Biofilm
    3.7 Molecular Communications
    3.8 Ecology of the Microbiome
    3.8.1 Rhizosphere and Rhizoplane
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Vivek Kumar, Manoj Kumar, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: This book offers present-day retrospectives and future perspectives on 'phytobiont' studies in the context of phyto-micro restitution, filling some of the information gaps in this promising research field. It discusses several ecosystem restitution strategies using dissimilar groups of microbes alone or in association with plants, as well as advances in metagenomics technology for studying in situ micro and macro communities in contaminated soil. It addresses topics such as the status quo, and the perspectives of microbial researchers and scientists, foresters, students, environmentalists, agriculturists and professional engineers. The rising pollution levels caused by xenobiotics is one of the biggest problems of our times, and as such the book comprehensively elaborates the latest research in this field and describes how the issue can be tackled using micro-organisms.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; About the Editors;
    1: Nanobiotechnology Approaches for Crop Protection; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Nanoparticles Against Pathogens; 1.3 Nanoparticles for Plant Disease Suppression; 1.4 Nano-encapsulated Phytoextracts for the Control of Pest; 1.5 Nanoparticles in Bioremediation; 1.6 Nanosystems in Biofertilizers; 1.7 Conclusions; References;
    2: Roles of Plants and Bacteria in Bioremediation of Petroleum in Contaminated Soils; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Fate of Petroleum in Soil; 2.3 Use Bacteria in Bioremediation; 2.3.1 Thermophilic Bacteria; 2.3.2 Bacterial Populations 2.3.3 Bioaugmentation2.3.4 Effects of Abiotic Factors; 2.3.4.1 Temperature; 2.3.4.2 pH; 2.3.4.3 Other Factors; 2.3.5 Genetic Engineering; 2.3.6 Tracking GMB; 2.4 Phytoremediation: Role of Plants; 2.4.1 The Rhizosphere; 2.4.2 Potential Use of Plants; 2.4.3 Plant-Bacteria Interactions; 2.4.4 Limitations of Petroleum Phytoremediation; 2.5 Conclusion; References;
    3: Recent Advances in Microbial Remediation of Textile Azo Dyes; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Toxicity of Azo Dyes; 3.3 Biodegradation Azo Dyes; 3.3.1 Reduction of Azo Dye; 3.3.2 Degradation of Aromatic Amines; 3.3.3 Decolourisation 3.4 Congo Red, Bordeaux, Ranocid Fast Blue and Blue3.4.1 Reactive Red Black 5, Reactive Orange 16, Disperse Red 78 and Direct Red 81; 3.4.2 Reactive Black-B; 3.4.3 Reactive Blue 160; 3.4.4 C.I. Remazol Red; 3.4.5 Acid Maroon V; 3.4.6 Red 3BN; 3.4.7 Reactive Violet 5R; 3.4.8 Methyl Red; 3.4.9 Acid Orange 10; 3.4.10 Hexavalent Chromium and Reactive Black-5; 3.4.11 Metanil Yellow; 3.4.12 Remazol Black-B; 3.4.13 Scarlet R; 3.4.14 Reactive Yellow 107, Reactive Red 198, Reactive Black-5 and Direct Blue 71; 3.5 Conclusion and Future Prospective; References 4.11 Plant-Microbe Interactions in Management of Phytopathogens4.12 Plant-Microbe Interactions for Enhanced Phytoremediation of Contaminants; 4.12.1 Organic Acids; 4.12.2 Biosurfactants; 4.12.3 Bioaccumulation/Biosorption; 4.12.4 Bioexclusion; 4.12.5 Bioleaching; 4.12.6 Oxidation and Reduction of Metals; 4.13 Conclusion; References;
    5: Phytoremediation for the Elimination of Metals, Pesticides, PAHs, and Other Pollutants from Wastewater and Soil; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Phytoremediation of Soil; 5.3 Soil Phytoremediation Process; 5.3.1 Phytostimulation (Biodegradation of Enhanced Rhizosphere)
    4: Application of Plant-Microbe Interactions in Contaminated Agroecosystem Management4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Beneficial Plant-Microbe Interactions; 4.3 Harmful Plant-Microbe Interactions; 4.4 The Role of Plant Signal Molecules in Plant-Microbe Interactions; 4.5 Role of Microbial Signal Molecules in Plant-Microbe Interactions; 4.6 Bacterial Quorum-Sensing Signals; 4.7 Management of Contaminants in Agroecosystem; 4.8 Advances in Microbial Bioremediation; 4.9 Advances in Phytoremediation; 4.10 Relevance of Plant-Microbe Interactions to Agroecosystem
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Reinhard Jetter.
    Summary: The Phytochemical Society of North America (PSNA) is a nonprofit scientific organization with membership open to those interested in plant biochemistry, phytochemistry, and the role of plant substances in related disciplines. The PSNA exists to encourage and stimulate research in the chemistry and biochemistry of plant constituents, their effects upon plant and animal physiology and pathology, and their industrial importance and utilization. Annual meetings featuring symposium topics of current general interest and contributed papers by conference participants are held throughout Canada, the United States, and Mexico. PSNA meetings provide participants with exposure to cutting-edge research presented by prominent international scientists, but remain intimate enough to allow interaction and collegiality.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Soybean Seed Isoflavonoids: Biosynthesis and Regulation
    Mehran Dastmalchi and Sangeeta Dhaubhadel
    Chapter 2: Biosynthesis of Natural Products in Plants by Fungal Endophytes with an Emphasis on Swainsonine
    Daniel Cook, Dale R. Gardner, James A. Pfister and Daniel Grum
    Chapter 3: Lectins from Medicinal Plants: Bioeffectors with Diverse Activities
    Alexander V. Timoshenko, Irina V. Gorudko and Hans-Joachim Gabius
    Chapter 4: Bioactive Phytochemicals from Canadian Boreal Forest Species Used Traditionally by Eastern James Bay Cree Aboriginals to Treat Diabetes Mellitus
    Jose A Guerrero-Analco, Asim Muhammad, Ammar Saleem, Louis C. Martineau, Lina Musallam, Hoda M. Eid,?Nan Shang, Paleah Black, Alain Currier, Pierre S. Haddad and John T Arnason
    Chapter 5: Bioproducts, Biofuels and Perfumes: Conifer Terpene Synthases and their Potential for Metabolic Engineering
    Philipp Zerbe and Jorg Bohlmann
    Chapter 6: Engineering Elevated Vitamin C in Plants to Improve their Nutritional Content, Growth and Tolerance to Abiotic Stress
    Katherine A Lisko, Siddique I Aboobucker, Raquel Torres and Argelia Lorence
    Chapter 7: Evaluating the Phytochemical Potential of Camelina? an Emerging New Crop of Old World Origin
    Mark A. Berhow, Steven F. Vaughn, Bryan Moser, Deniz Belenli and Umit Polat
    Chapter 8: Analysis of?-Methylamino-Alanine in Environmental and Food Samples
    W. Broc Glover and Susan J. Murch.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Shashank Kumar, Chukwuebuka Egbuna, editors.
    Summary: Phytochemistry is the branch of science that deals with the study of plant-derived chemicals or compounds, which are also known as phytochemicals or plant-derived secondary metabolites. Plants are known to produce phytochemicals that are essential for their growth and reproduction, as they protect them from insects, pathogens, and herbivores. Some of the major groups of plant-derived secondary metabolites are phenolics, flavonoids, terpenoids, alkaloids, tannin etc. Plant-derived phytochemicals are pharmacologically active and have the potential to cure various human diseases and disorders. Natural plant products have been known for their medicinal properties for untold years, and form the basis of several medicinal systems such as Chinese, Unani, and Ayurvedic Medicine. This book offers an essential introduction to phytochemicals and their synthetic analogues. It discusses various in silico approaches used to identify pharmacologically active phytochemicals and their biological activities, as well as in vitro and in vivo models/assays that have been utilized for the pharmacological profiling of plant-derived products to combat cancer, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases and neurological disorders. The intended audience includes upper-level undergraduate and graduate students; researchers and scientists from the pharmaceutical/food chemistry/nutrition sciences/biochemistry, and clinical biochemistry fields; and medical students. Sharing the latest findings, the book will familiarize these readers with the concepts, chemistry, and tremendous potential of phytochemistry.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sarah E. Edwards, Ines Rocha, Elizabeth M. Williamson, Michael Heinrich.
    Summary: Healthcare professionals, including doctors, pharmacists and nurses, are often confronted with patients who use over-the-counter (OTC) herbal medicinal products and food supplements. While taking responsibility for one's own health and treatment options is encouraged, many patients use these products based on limited (and sometimes inaccurate) information from non-scientific sources, such as the popular press and internet. There is a clear need to offer balanced, well-informed advice to patients, yet a number of studies have shown that, generally, conventionally trained health practitioners consider their knowledge about herbal medicinal products and supplements to be weak. Phytopharmacy fills this knowledge gap, and is intended for use by the busy pharmacist, nurse, or doctor, as well as the 'expert patient' and students of pharmacy and herbal medicine. It presents clear, practical and concise monographs on over a hundred popular herbal medicines and plant-based food supplements. Information provided in each monograph includes: Indications Summary and appraisal of clinical and pre-clinical evidence Potential interactions Contraindications Possible adverse effects An overview of the current regulatory framework is also outlined, notably the EU Traditional Herbal Medicinal Products Directive. This stipulates that only licensed products or registered traditional herbal medicinal products (THRs), which have assured quality and safety, can now legally be sold OTC. Monographs are included of most of the major herbal ingredients found in THRs, and also some plant-basedfood supplements, which while not strictly medicines, may also have the potential to exert a physiological effect.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Govind Pratap Rao, Assunta Bertaccini, Nicola Fiore, Lia W. Liefting, editors.
    Summary: Provides recent and updated information on emerging and re-emerging phytoplasma diseases affecting important crops in tropics and subtropics. Provides comprehensive information on disease distribution, occurrence, and identification of the phytoplasmas Includes the recent approaches for diagnostics, transmission, and information about losses and geographical distribution along with and management aspects.

    Contents:
    Phytoplasmas: an update
    Phytoplasmas infecting vegetable, pulse and oil crops
    Occurrence and epidemiological aspects of phytoplasmas in cereals
    Phytoplasma diseases of industrial crops
    Grapevine phytoplasmas
    Fruit Crop phytoplasmas
    Phytoplasma diseases in ornamental crops
    Phytoplasma diseases of medicinal crops
    Phytoplasma diseases of palms
    Major phytoplasma diseases of forest and urban trees
    Phytoplasma in weeds and wild plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Assunta Bertaccini, Phyllis G Weintraub, Govind Pratap Rao, Nicola Mori, editors.
    Summary: Phytoplasma-associated diseases are a major limiting factor in the context of the quality and productivity of many ornamental, horticultural and other economically important agricultural crops worldwide. Annual losses due to phytoplasma diseases vary, but under pathogen-favorable conditions they have disastrous consequences for the farming community. As there is no effective cure for these diseases, the management options focus on their exclusion, minimizing their spread by insect vectors and propagation materials and on the development of host plant resistance. This book discusses the latest information on the epidemiology and management of phytoplasma-associated diseases, providing a comprehensive, up-to-date overview of distribution, occurrence and identification of the phytoplasmas, recent diagnostics approaches, transmission, losses and geographical distribution as well as management aspects.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Insects as phytoplasma vectors: ecological and epidemiological aspects
    Chapter 2. The biology and ecology of leafhopper transmission of phytoplasmas
    Chapter 3. Psyllid vectors
    Chapter 4. Vector role of cixiids and other planthopper species
    Chapter 5. Transovarial transmission in insect vectors
    Chapter 6. Phytoplasma transmission by seed
    Chapter 7. Transmission of phytoplasmas by agronomic practices
    Chapter 8. Control of phytoplasma diseases through resistant plants
    Chapter 9. Phytoplasma elimination from perennial horticultural crops
    Chapter 10. Microbes relationship with phytoplasmas in plants and insects
    Chapter 11. Integrated management of phytoplasma diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Assunta Bertaccini, Kenro Oshima, Michael Kube, Govind Pratap Rao, editors.
    Summary: Phytoplasma III is the last of three books in the series covering all the aspects of phytoplasma-associated diseases. Phytoplasmas are a major limiting factor in the quality and productivity of many ornamental, horticultural and economically important agriculture crops worldwide, and losses due to phytoplasma diseases have disastrous consequences for farming communities. As there is no effective cure for these diseases, management strategies focus-on exclusion, minimizing their spread by insect vectors and propagation materials, and developing host plant resistance. This book provides an update on genomics, effectors and pathogenicity factors toward a better understanding of phytoplasma-host metabolic interactions. It offers a comprehensive overview of biological, serological and molecular characterization of the phytoplasmas, including recently developed approaches in diagnostics, such as transcriptomics studies, which have paved the way for analyzing the gene expression pattern in phytoplasmas on infection and revealed the up-regulation of genes associated with hormonal response, transcription factors, and signaling genes. Although phytoplasmas remain the most poorly characterized pathogens, recent studies have identified virulence factors that induce typical disease symptoms and have characterized the unique reductive evolution of the genome. Reviewing the advances in cultivation in axenic media together with the perspectives for future research to reduce the global incidence of these pathogens and the associated agricultural losses, the book is a valuable resource for plant pathologists, researchers in agriculture and PhD students.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Genome sequencing
    Chapter 2. Phytoplasma effectors and pathogenicity factors
    Chapter 3. Transcriptomic and proteomic studies of phytoplasma-infected plants
    Chapter 4. Plant-insect host switching mechanism
    Chapter 5. Diversity and functional importance of phytoplasma membrane proteins
    Chapter 6. Phytoplasma cultivation
    Chapter 7. Molecular and serological approaches in detection of phytoplasmas in plants and insects
    Chapter 8. The development and deployment of rapid in-field phytoplasma diagnostics exploiting isothermal amplification DNA-detection systems
    Chapter 9. Multilocus genetic characterization of phytoplasmas
    Chapter 10. Host metabolic interaction and perspectives in phytoplasma research.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Brian R. Shmaefsky, editor.
    Summary: This book provides in-situ phytoremediation strategies that are particularly well suited for developing nations. Its goal is to promote the use of field-tested phytoremediation methods for removing soil and water pollutants from agricultural, industrial, military, and municipal sources. These strategies include using algae and a variety of aquatic and terrestrial plants. The book subsequently discusses the use of crops and native plants for phytoremediation, and how phytoremediation efforts impact the rhizosphere. After having finished the book, readers will be able to directly adapt the strategies described here for their specific purposes.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1 Principles of Phytoremediation
    1.1 Introduction
    1.1.1 Origins of Phytoremediation
    1.1.2 History of Pollution Remediation
    1.2 Traditional Methods of Removing Contaminants
    1.2.1 Traditional Soil Remediation
    1.2.2 Traditional Methods of Removing Water Contaminants
    1.3 A Survey of Bioremediation
    1.3.1 History of Bioremediation
    1.3.2 Mechanisms of Bioremediation
    1.4 A Survey of Phytoremediation
    1.4.1 Phytoremediation Defined
    1.4.2 History of Phytoremediation
    1.4.3 Mechanisms of Phytoremediation 1.5 Genetic Modification and Phytoremediation
    1.6 The Reality of Phytoremediation
    References
    2 Phytoremediation of Agricultural Pollutants
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Agricultural Pollutants and Their Sources
    2.2.1 Major Agricultural Pollutants
    2.2.2 Mechanism and Sources of Organic and Inorganic Agricultural Pollutants
    2.3 Strategies for the Removal of Agricultural Pollutants
    2.4 Phytoremediation of Nitrates and Phosphorus
    2.4.1 Phytoremediation of Nitrate
    2.4.2 Phytoremediation of Phosphorus
    2.5 Phytoremediation of Heavy Metals
    2.5.1 Pytoextraction of HMs 2.5.2 Phytovolatilization of HMs
    2.5.3 Phytostabilization of HMs
    2.5.4 Rhizofiltration of HMs
    2.5.5 Dendroremediation of HMs
    2.6 Phytoremediation of Pesticides
    2.6.1 Phytoaccumulation/Phytoextraction of Pesticides
    2.6.2 Phytodegradation of Pesticides
    2.6.3 Phytovolatilization of Pesticides
    2.6.4 Rhizoremediation of Pesticides
    2.7 Phytoremediation of Other Pollutants
    2.8 Major Challenges to Phytoremediation
    2.9 Overcoming the Challenges
    2.10 Conclusions
    References
    3 Phytoremediation of Soils Contaminated by Hydrocarbon
    3.1 Introduction 3.2 Contaminated Soil and the Rhizosphere
    3.2.1 The Role of the Microorganisms and the Rhizosphere in the Degradation of Hydrocarbons
    3.3 Degradation of Hydrocarbons Through the Combination of Tree Species and Organic Fertilizers
    3.4 Perspectives and Necessary Research
    3.5 Conclusions
    Literature Cited
    4 In Situ Phytoremediation of Metals
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 What is In Situ Phytoremediation?
    4.3 Mechanisms of In Situ Phytoremediation
    4.3.1 Phytoextraction
    4.3.2 Phytostabilization
    4.3.3 Phytovolatilization
    4.3.4 Phytodegradation 4.4 Advantages of In Situ Phytoremediation
    4.5 Limitations of In Situ Phytoremediation
    4.6 In Situ Phytoremediation of Some Important Metals
    4.6.1 Nickel (Ni)
    4.6.2 Arsenic (As)
    4.6.3 Iron (Fe)
    4.6.4 Cobalt (Co)
    4.6.5 Copper (Cu)
    4.6.6 Selenium (Se)
    4.6.7 Lead (Pb)
    4.6.8 Cadmium (Cd)
    4.6.9 Chromium (Cr)
    4.6.10 Mercury (Hg)
    4.7 Conclusions and Future Recommendations
    References
    5 In Situ Phytoremediation of Uranium Contaminated Soils
    5.1 Introduction
    5.1.1 Uranium-History, Discovery, Occurrence and Uses
    5.1.2 Uranium and Human Health
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Abid A. Ansari, Sarvajeet Singh Gill, Ritu Gill, Guy R. Lanza and Lee Newman.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Phytoremediation Applications: An Update;
    Chapter 1: Redesigning Abandoned Gas Stations Through Phytotechnologies; 1.1 Scope andIntroduction; 1.2 Method; 1.3 Background; 1.3.1 Benefits ofReclaiming Urban Brownfields intoPublic Open Space; 1.3.2 Abandoned Gas Stations andTheir Contaminants; 1.3.3 Phytotypologies asPhytotechnology Planting Types; 1.3.4 Application ofPhytotypologies forGas Stations andAuto-Repair Shops; 1.3.4.1 Planted Stabilization Mat; 1.3.4.2 Phytoirrigation; 1.3.4.3 Green andBlue Roof; 1.3.4.4 Interception Hedgerow 1.3.4.5 Degradation Bosque1.3.4.6 Degradation Hedge: Living Fence; 1.3.4.7 Degradation Cover; 1.3.4.8 Airflow Buffer; 1.3.4.9 Stormwater Filter; 1.3.5 Plant Selection; 1.4 Application of Phytotypologies at a Former Gas Station in Hadley, MA; 1.4.1 Site Description and Analysis; 1.4.2 Overall Design Description and Considerations; 1.4.3 Selection and Application of Phytotypologies; 1.5 Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 2: Microbial-Assisted Phytoremediation: A Convenient Use of Plant and Microbes to Clean Up Soils; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Phytoremediation of Metals Assisted by Fungi 2.3 Phytoremediation of Metals Assisted by Bacteria2.4 Phytoextraction; 2.4.1 Assisted by Fungi; 2.4.2 Assisted by Bacteria; 2.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects; References; Part II: Phytoremediation Applications for Contaminated Soils;
    Chapter 3: Sorption: Release Processes in Soil-The Basis of Phytoremediation Efficiency; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Soil Sorption and Bioavailability; 3.2.1 Soil Properties; 3.3 Sorption Processes in Soil; 3.3.1 Modeling Soil Sorption; 3.3.1.1 The Langmuir Equation; 3.3.1.2 The Freundlich Equation; 3.3.1.3 Further Equations; 3.3.2 Desorption Processes 3.4 A Case Study: The Relationship Between Desorption Parameters and Plant Uptake at a Pb Contaminated Site 3.4.1 The Site; 3.4.2 Experimental Procedure; 3.4.3 Results and Discussion; 3.5 Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 4: A Survey on the Metal(loid) Accumulation Ability of Spontaneous and Established Plants for the Phytomanagement of an Industrial Landfill in the Venice Lagoon; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Materials and Methods; 4.2.1 Study Area; 4.2.2 Plant, Water, and Soil Sampling; 4.2.3 Sample Preparation for Soil Characterization and Metal(loid) Analysis in the Matrices 4.2.4 Soil and Groundwater Properties and Chemical Analysis4.2.5 Heavy Metal and Metalloid Concentration Analysis; 4.2.6 Data Analyses; 4.3 Results; 4.3.1 Characterization of Soil and Groundwater; 4.3.2 Characterization o f the Plant Community; 4.3.3 Metal(loid) Concentrations in Plants; 4.3.4 Bioconcentration Factor (BCF); 4.4 Discussion; 4.5 Conclusion; References; Part III: Phytoremediation Applications for Contaminated Waters;
    Chapter 5: Role of PGPR in the Phytoremediation of Heavy Metals and Crop Growth Under Municipal Wastewater Irrigation; 5.1 Introduction; 5.1.1 Phytoremediation
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Iqbal Ramzan.
    Contents:
    Phytotherapies : past, present, and future / Iqbal Ramzan, George Q. Li
    Quality control and quality assurance of phytomedicines : key considerations, methods, and analytical challenges / Wai-Ping Yau, Cheong Hian Goh, Hwee-Ling Koh
    Pre-clinical (in vivo) and laboratory (in vitro) evidence of phytomedicine efficacy / Mohi Iqbal Mohammed Abdul, Tom Hsun-Wei Huang
    Clinical efficacy trials with herbal medicines / Christina L. Nance
    Novel formulations and drug delivery systems for phytotherapies / Shengpeng Wang, Meiwan Chen, Qi (Tony) Zhou, Hak-Kim Chan
    Phytotherapies used by indigenous populations / Bradley S. Simpson, Susan J. Semple
    Phytotherapies from traditional Chinese medicines / Michael Rieder
    Integrating traditional Greco-Arab and Islamic herbal medicine in research and clinical practice / Bashar Saad
    Evolution of herbal medicine in Europe and its relationship with modern medicine / Elizabeth M Williamson, Kelvin Chan
    Chemical classification and chemistry of phytotherapeutic constituents / Pei H. Cui, Colin C. Duke
    Therapeutic potential of ginsenosides in management of atherosclerosis / Xiao-Jing Zhang, Huanxing Su, Jian-Bo Wan, Yi-Tao Wang
    Phytotherapy pharmacophores for major cellular drug targets / Jennifer A. Ong, Paul W. Groundwater, David E. Hibbs
    Use of kava as a phytotherapeutic agent and kava related hepatotoxicity / Dong Fu, Iqbal Ramzan
    Phytotherapies as new drug sources : gossypol and curcumin / Vivian Wan Yu Liao, Rajeshwar Narlawar, David E. Hibbs, Paul W. Groundwater
    Phytotherapies for the management of obesity and diabetes / Michel Rapinski, Alain Cuerrier
    Phytotherapeutics for cancer therapy / Daniel M.-Y. Sze, Hao Liu, Maureen V. Boost, Raimond Wong, Stephen Sagar
    Phytomedicines for fatty liver disease and functional gastrointestinal conditions / George Q. Li, Moon-Sun Kim, Fangming Jin, Jun-Lae Cho
    Phytomedicines for inflammatory conditions / Sigrun Chrubasik
    Phytotherapies for infectious diseases : are these really useful? / Gail B. Mahady, Gabrielle Escalante, Pooja Mikkilineni, Laura J. Mahady, Temitope O. Lawal, Bolanle A. Adeniyi
    Phytomedicines for CNS disorders : safe issues for use with anti-epileptic drugs? / Sophia Yui Kau Fong, Rosina Yau Mok, Qiong Gao, Yin Cheong Wong, Zhong Zuo
    Phytotherapy drug interactions in cancer / Andrew J. McLachlan, Stephen J. Clarke
    Quality use of medicines (QUM) considerations in phytotherapy / Lynn Weekes
    Intellectual property and patent issues with phytotherapy products / Gint Silin, Jennifer Tan, Kelvin Chan
    International regulatory status of phytotherapies / Ernest V. Linek.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Mohammad Faisal, Quaiser Saquib, Abdulrahman A. Alatar, Abdulaziz A. Al-Khedhairy, editors.
    Summary: This book provides relevant findings on nanoparticles' toxicity, their uptake, translocation and mechanisms of interaction with plants at cellular and sub-cellular level. The small size and large specific surface area of nanoparticles endow them with high chemical reactivity and intrinsic toxicity. Such unique physicochemical properties draw global attention of scientists to study potential risks and adverse effects of nanoparticles in the environment. Their toxicity has pronounced effects and consequences for plants and ultimately the whole ecosystem. Plants growing in nanomaterials-polluted sites may exhibit altered metabolism, growth reduction, and lower biomass production. Nanoparticles can adhere to plant roots and exert physicochemical toxicity and subsequently cell death in plants. On the other hand, plants have developed various defense mechanisms against this induced toxicity. This books discusses recent findings as well as several unresolved issues and challenges regarding the interaction and biological effects of nanoparticles. Only detailed studies of these processes and mechanisms will allow researchers to understand the complex plant-nanomaterial interactions.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; Editors and Contributors; About the Editors; List of Contributors;
    1: Nanoparticle Uptake by Plants: Beneficial or Detrimental?; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Nanoparticle Physicochemical Properties; 1.3 Nanoparticles in Agriculture; 1.3.1 Pesticides and Fertilizers; 1.3.2 Nanoparticle Soil Interaction and Accumulation; 1.4 Nanoparticle Uptake in Plants; 1.4.1 Nanoparticle Uptake Routes; 1.4.2 Nanoparticle Composition-Dependent Uptake in Plants; 1.4.3 Nanoparticle Size-Dependent Plant Uptake; 1.4.4 Nanoparticle Crystalline Structure-Dependent Plant Uptake. 1.4.5 Nanoparticle Charge-Dependent Plant Uptake1.5 Detrimental Effect of Nanoparticles in Plants; 1.5.1 Composition and Plant-Specific Phytotoxicity; 1.5.2 Plant Growth Inhibition; 1.5.3 Nutrient Depletion in Nanoparticle-Contaminated Plants; 1.5.4 Nanoparticle-Induced Genotoxicity; 1.5.5 Nanoparticle Transgenerational Effects in Plants; 1.6 Beneficial Effects of Nanoparticles in Plants; 1.7 Nanoparticle Toxicity in Humans and Animals; 1.7.1 Nanoparticle Physicochemical Characteristic-Dependent Toxicity; 1.7.2 Nanoparticle Internalization and Biodistribution. 1.7.2.1 Inhalation, Ingestion, and Dermal Exposure1.7.2.2 Nanoparticle Persistence and Disease; 1.7.2.3 Nanoparticle Size-Dependent Accumulation; 1.7.2.4 Nanoparticle Corona; 1.7.2.5 Nanoparticle Uptake by Cells; 1.7.3 Nanoparticle Association to Respiratory Diseases; 1.7.4 Nanoparticle Association to Cardiovascular Diseases; 1.7.5 Nanoparticles in the Central Nervous System; 1.7.6 Nanoparticle Toxicity Following Maternal Exposure; 1.7.7 Nanoparticles in the Liver, Kidneys, and Other Organs; 1.7.8 Toxicity of Nanoparticles with Various Compositions; 1.7.8.1 Toxicity of Gold Nanoparticles. 1.7.8.2 Toxicity of Silver Nanoparticles1.7.8.3 Toxicity of Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.4 Toxicity of Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.5 Toxicity of Copper Oxide Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.6 Toxicity of Cerium Oxide Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.7 Iron Oxide, Cobalt, and Nickel Nanoparticle Toxicity; 1.7.8.8 Toxicity of Silicon and Silica Nanoparticles; 1.7.8.9 Toxicity of Carbon-Based Nanoparticles; 1.7.9 Comparative Toxicity of Nanoparticles with Various Compositions; 1.8 Beneficial or Detrimental Effect of Nanoparticles?; References.
    2: Interplay Between Engineered Nanomaterials (ENMs) and Edible Plants: A Current Perspective2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Engineered Nanomaterials (ENMs); 2.3 Production and Release of ENMs into the Environment; 2.4 Exposure Conditions of Plants to ENMs; 2.5 Mechanisms of ENMs Uptake; 2.6 Foliar Uptake; 2.7 Uptake by Roots; 2.8 Role of Plant Cell Walls and Membranes in Uptake; 2.9 Bioaccumulation and Subcellular Distribution of ENMs in Plants; 2.10 ENM Interactions with Secretions of Plant; 2.11 Biotransformation of ENMs; 2.12 Translocation of ENMs in Plant Tissues.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Nandini Dey, Pradip De, Brian Leyland-Jones, editors.
    Contents:
    PI3K-Akt-mTOR Signaling in Cancer and Cancer Therapeutics
    Part 1: PI3K-mTOR Pathway in Cancers
    The mTOR Complexes in Cancer Cell Metabolism
    PI3K-AKT-mTOR Pathway Co-operates with the DNA Damage Repair Pathway: Carcinogenesis in Triple Negative Breast Cancers and Beyond
    The AKT-mTOR Signaling Pathway for Drug Response Prediction and Prognostic Signatures
    Resistance to PI3K Pathway Inhibition
    Part 2: PI3K-mTOR Pathway in Cancer Medicine
    Combination Therapies Targeting the PI3K/AKT/mTOR Pathways
    Phospho-Inositol-3-Kinase Activity and Dysregulation in Pediatric Leukemia and Lymphoma
    HER2 Signaling Network in Advanced Breast Cancer: Opportunities for Combination Therapies
    The PI3K-mTOR Pathway in Prostate Cancer: Biological Significance and Therapeutic Opportunities.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    co-sponsored by University Affiliated Program, Childrens Hospital of Los Angeles and the University of Southern California Schools of Education and Religion ; editors, Marie K. Poulsen, Gerald I. Lubin.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    BF723.C5 I57 1978
  • Digital
    Antonio Malvasi, Domenico Baldini, editors.
    Summary: This richly illustrated book focuses on one of the specific and crucial steps of the Medically Assisted Procreation techniques that is often overlooked: the oocyte pick-up. Enhanced by a large number of high-quality pictures, this atlas of oocyte retrieval comprehensively describes important aspects such as the setting of the ultrasonic equipment, the choice of needle, the layout of the devices in the room and the technique to be used, which, if not properly handled, can lead to erroneous behaviors. The original and detailed illustrations, mainly microscopic images and explanatory drawings, help readers to better understand how to manage all the phases of the ovarian pick-up and oocyte management. This practical atlas provides a valuable guide for all specialists who want to improve their skills and gain confidence with the MPA techniques.

    Contents:
    Brief Pick Up History. PART I ANATOMY: Pelvic Anatomy
    Ultrasonography Pelvic Anatomy
    Hysteroscopy Before Pick Up
    PART II PREPARATION: Surgery Room Preparation
    Device And Probe Setting
    Patient Preparation
    PART III OVARIAN STIMULATION: Oocyte Stimulation
    Monitoring
    Trigger And Pick Up Timing
    Ultrasound In OHSS
    PART IV PICK UP: Anesthesia Technique And Complications
    The Classic Technique Of Oocyte Pick Up
    Alternative Pick Up Techniques
    Oocyte Pick Up In Poor Responders And Washing Utility
    The Oocyte Pick Up In IVM
    The Pick Up In Oocyte Donation
    The Pick Up Double Stimulation
    PART V COMPLICATIONS : Patients With Hemocoagulative Problems
    Severe And Chronic Complications
    PART VI SPECIAL CASES: Endometriosis Patients
    Oncological Patients
    Patients With Previous Surgery
    ART in aged patient: ovary and uterus implications
    PART VII OOCYTE QUALITY: Oocyte Quality
    Oocyte Damage After The Pick Up
    Relationship Between Oocyte Embryo And Endometrium
    Pharmacological supplementation to improve Oocyte Quality
    Ovarian Aging
    Gamete Aneuploidya
    PART VIII ETHICAL AND MEDICO-LEGAL ISSUES: Ethical Issues
    Medico-Legal Issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Bruce J.W. Evans.
    Summary: Now in a fully up-to-date 6th Edition, Pickwell's Binocular Vision Anomalies provides a practical introduction to binocular vision, offering comprehensive theory, how-to clinical guidance, and a summary of current research in a single, consolidated volume. Ideally suited for both students and clinicians, this bestselling text serves as an accessible, evidence-based reference when faced with binocular vision or pediatric challenges. Covers routine examinations and testing protocols, including CISS questionnaire, cover test, foveal suppression, fixation disparity, four prism diopter base out test, Lindblom's method, and double Maddox rod test. Includes numerous video clips of key testing procedures, including new clips on Mallett fixation disparity test and fusional reserve testing, as well as an interactive video quiz to help you test your knowledge. Features sweeping content updates such as the latest information on 3-D displays, therapeutic uses of computer games and virtual reality for vision therapy, computerized testing methodologies, binocular and accommodative mechanisms associated with myopia, updated prescribing criteria, therapeutic use of contact lenses, detection of pathology associated with strabismus, drugs causing diplopia, and the evidence-based treatment of convergence insufficiency syndrome and amblyopia. Contains helpful study features throughout, including Clinical Key Points boxes, step-by-step test routines, typical features of extraocular muscle palsies and syndromes, and Case Study boxes that cover important clinical and legal scenarios, and new boxes that summarize testing procedures for each of the main binocular vision tests. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Vinay K. Kapoor, editor.
    Summary: This book covers various aspects of gall bladder cancer, e.g. its epidemiology, etiology, pathology, clinical presentation, diagnosis, investigations, staging, management, prevention, etc. Gall bladder cancer is the most common form of biliary tract cancer worldwide, there are peculiar geographical variations in its incidence; while it is rare in the developed west (North America and Western Europe), high incidence rates are reported from Central and South America, Central and Eastern Europe, East Asia (Japan and Korea) and northern India. In addition, the book addresses a number of related issues including thick walled gall bladder, gall bladder cancer with surgical obstructive jaundice, incidental gall bladder cancer, the role and place of common bile duct excision, the Japanese aggressive surgical approach, management of asymptomatic gall stones, etc. An authoritative work that provides detailed insights into various aspects of gall bladder cancer and its management, the book offers a valuable resource for physicians in high-incidence areas and low-incidence areas alike. It is richly illustrated throughout with radiographs (US, CT, MRI, etc.) and operative and specimen photos.

    Contents:
    Anatomy of the biliary tract
    Physiology of obstructive jaundice
    Epidemiology of gall bladder cancer
    Etiopathology of gall bladder cancer
    Clinical presentation of gall bladder cancer.-Diagnosis and staging of gall bladder cancer
    Management of gall bladder cancer
    Incidental gall bladder cancer
    Adjuvant and neoadjuvant therapy in gall bladder cancer
    Prognosis of gall bladder cancer
    Prevention of gall bladder cancer
    Institutional contributions in gall bladder cancer
    Unanswered questions and areas for research in gall bladder cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Ranna A. Rozenfeld, MD, Professor of Pediatrics, The Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Attending Physician, Division of Critical Care Medicine, Hasbro Children's Hospital, Providence, Rhode Island.
    Summary: "An innovative new survival guide for the pediatric intensive care unit (PICU) The PICU Handbook is a unique, portable compilation of the information essential for residents and fellows to successfully navigate the modern Level 1 and Level 2 pediatric intensive care unit (PICU). Enhanced by numerous tables, formulas, algorithms, guidelines, checklists, rapid-sequence medication formularies, troubleshooting guides, and clinical pearls this is a true must read for all residents and fellows in pediatrics, family medicine, emergency medicine, and critical care, as well as pediatric hospitalists, pediatric nurse practitioners and advance practice nurses, physician assistants, and medical students. The Handbook is designed to be an easy-reference guide and is logically divided into two parts: Part 1: General Pediatric Critical Care covers important topics such as resuscitation and stabilization, surgical critical care procedures, and pharmacology Part 2: Organ Systems includes sections on respiratory, cardiovascular, neurology, renal/fluids & electrolytes, hematology/oncology, gastroenterology/nutrition/hepatology, environmental/toxicology emergencies, and allergy/immunology/genetics The book reflects the fact that pediatric critical care medicine requires a true multidisciplinary approach, with expert chapter contributors who are physicians, nurses, nurse practitioners, respiratory therapists, pharmacists, and nutritionists"-- Provided by publisher. "The essential pediatric critical care data you need to survive the PICU"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2018
  • Digital
    Prasad Kumarasinghe, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Constantin E. Orfanos, Christos C. Zouboulis, Chalid Assaf, editors.
    Summary: The vast majority of the global population has pigmented non-Caucasian skin; accordingly, this book focuses on the diagnosis and management of skin diseases in dark-skinned populations, paying particular attention to different reactive profiles, the frequency and the clinical pictures of diseases in pigmented ethnic skin that arise in hot climate zones. Supplemented by a wealth of high-quality, full-color images, this comprehensive work covers the full range of dermatological entities and issues characteristic of the tropical and subtropical regions of the globe, including those that are now emerging in developed countries as a result of intensified travel, globalized business, and migration. Each disorder is described by respected experts on subtropical and tropical countries, and each chapter is clearly structured, examining the incidence, pathogenesis, clinical presentation, management and course. The book illustrates the clinical features and includes major schedules for the diagnosis and management of skin diseases presented in darkly pigmented to black skin. As such, it offers an invaluable tool for all dermatologists in developing and developed countries, especially those who are used to dealing with skin lesions mainly in white Caucasian skin. While enabling physicians to provide proper advice, medical services and support, Pigmented Ethnic Skin and Imported Dermatoses also represents a guide for a broader range of professionals working for governmental institutions, health and refugee agencies.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Verena Geweniger, Alexander Bohlander.
    Summary: "Millions of people use Pilates training to improve health and fitness, or regain movement capability following injury or disease. Competent, professional support from physiotherapists, sports teachers and trainers is of vital importance for every client or patient. "Pilates: A teachers' manual“ provides you, as a professional, with fundamental teaching structures and practical guidelines. The concepts which characterized the traditional approach to Pilates are combined with the evolved methods of modern Pilates training, and backed up by current findings in sports science and kinesiology."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. History
    3. The Pilates concept
    4. Pilates as preventative exercise: foundations
    5. The exercises
    6. Class formats
    7. Therapeutic Pilates: fundamental prinicples
    8. Therapeutic Pilates: applications
    9. Therapeutic Pilates: clinical conditions/patient examples
    10. Pilates and motor learning
    11. General and specialized instruction
    12. Formal basis for the implementation of Pilates training
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jan G. van den Tweel, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    David Tolhurst.
    Contents:
    INTRODUCTION
    LIST OF PIONEERS
    19TH CENTURY SURGEONS
    Short review of main developments
    Abbe
    Bier
    Diefffenbach
    Fergusson
    Joseph
    Lanz
    Lexer
    Morestin
    20th CENTURY SURGEONS
    Short review of main developments
    Blair
    Burian
    Esser
    Gillies
    Kilner
    Mowlem
    McIndoe
    Sanvenero
    Staige
    Davis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Von G. Samedi, Therese Bocklage, .
    Contents:
    Breast Cytology
    Female Reproductive System Cytology
    Salivary Gland Cytology
    Gastrointestinal Tract
    Pancreaticobiliary Tract
    Liver Cytology
    Respiratory Tract Cytology
    Urinary Tract Cytology
    Endocrine Cytology
    Body Cavity Fluids
    Lymph Nodes Cytology
    Bone and Soft Tissue Cytology
    Cerebrospinal Fluid Cytology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Wilfred C.G. Peh, editor.
    Summary: The practice of diagnostic radiology has become increasingly complex, with the use of numerous imaging modalities and division into many subspecialty areas. It is becoming ever more difficult for subspecialist radiologists, general radiologists, and residents to keep up with the advances that are occurring year on year, and this is particularly true for less familiar topics. Failure to appreciate imaging pitfalls often leads to diagnostic error and misinterpretation, and potential medicolegal problems. Diagnostic errors may be due to various factors such as inadequate imaging technique, imaging artifacts, failure to recognize normal structures or variants, lack of correlation with clinical and other imaging findings, and poor training or inexperience. Many, if not most, of these factors are potentially recognizable, preventable, or correctable. This textbook, written by experts from reputable centers across the world, systematically and comprehensively highlights the pitfalls that may occur in diagnostic radiology. Both pitfalls specific to different modalities and techniques and those specific to particular organ systems are described with the help of numerous high-quality illustrations. Recognition of these pitfalls is crucial in helping the practicing radiologist to achieve a more accurate diagnosis.

    Contents:
    Part1: Imaging modality and technique pitfalls
    Radiography and fluoroscopic and contrast-based techniques
    Ultrasonography
    Computed tomography
    Magnetic resonance imaging
    Nuclear medicine imaging including SPECT-CT and PET
    Interventional radiology techniques
    Bone mineral density and quantitative imaging
    Radiation dose management
    Approach to characterizing radiological errors
    Part 2: System-based imaging pitfalls
    Musculoskeletal system
    Spine
    Brain
    Head and neck
    Chest including lungs
    Cardiac and vascular system
    Abdomen- solid organs
    Gastrointestinal system
    Genitourinary system
    Reproductive system- female
    Obstetrics
    Breast
    Pediatrics. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Geraldine B Hunt.
    Contents:
    Can't you do anything right / Geraldine B Hunt
    Beastly bellies / Geraldine B Hunt
    The Friday night special, or, Why do patients become critical just before the weekend? / Geraldine B Hunt
    Between a rock and a hard place : when to refer and what do you do when referral is not an option
    Courage, mystery and awe : the intangibles of being a veterinary doctor / Julie M Meadows
    Placed on earth to test us : the not-so-humble spay / Catherine F Le Bars
    "Oops!", not a good word to hear during surgery / Geraldine B Hunt
    Learning the hard way : student, resident, teacher / Geraldine B Hunt
    "But I don't want to look stupid" : how to let others help you / Geraldine B Hunt
    "It didn't look like that on paper" / Geraldine B Hunt
    It will be interesting to see whether that works : how to be a creative surgeon / Geraldine B Hunt
    When the unthinkable happens : mishaps, mis-steps and medical errors / Geraldine B Hunt
    "Things went south, now what?" / Geraldine B Hunt
    There's got to be a morning after : things went wrong, now live with it / Geraldine B Hunt
    One leg too many : patients who lost limbs / Geraldine B Hunt
    Reconstruction rescue : when the hole just keeps getting bigger and bigger / Geraldine B Hunt
    "Why is Sam straining?" : iatrogenic strictures and stray oddities / Geraldine B Hunt
    "An alien in my waiting room" : everyday occurences of the unexpected and unbelievable / Geraldine B Hunt
    Rewind : what would I do differently if I had the chance / Geraldine B Hunt.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Shlomo Melmed.
    Contents:
    Setion I Hypothalamic - Pituitary Function
    1. Pituitary development / Jacques Drouin
    2. Hypothalamic regulation of anterior pituitary function / Anat Ben-Shlomo and Shlomo Melmed
    3. Adrenocorticotrophin / Carmen L. Soto-Rivera and Joseph A. Majzoub
    4. Growth hormone / Vivien S. Bonert and Shlomo Melmed
    5. Prolactin / Nadine Binart
    6. Thyroid-stimulating hormone / Virginia D. Sarapura and Mary H. Samuel
    7. Gonadotrophin hormones / Ursula B. Kaiser
    8. The posterior pituitary / Daniel G. Bichet
    Section II Hypothalamic-Pituitary Disorders
    9. The hypothalamus / Andrea Giustina, Stefano Frara, Alfio Spina and Pietro Mortini
    10. Anterior pituitary failure / John D. Carmichael
    11. Pituitary dysfunction in systemic disorders / Maria Fleseriu
    12. Drugs and pituitary function / Maria Fleseriu
    13. The pituitary gland in pregnancy / Andrea Glezer and Marcello D. Bronstein
    14. Psychiatric disease in hypothalamic-pituitary disorders / Caroline Sievers and Gunter K. Stalla
    Section III Pituitary Tumors
    15. Acromegaly / Shlomo Melmed
    16. Prolactinoma / Phillipe Chanson and Dominique Maiter
    17. Cushing disease / John D.C Newell-Rice
    18. Thyrotrophin-secreting pituitary tumors / Yona Greenman
    19. Nonfunctioning and gonadotrophin-secreting adenomas
    20. Atypical pituitary adenomas / Daniel A. Donoho and Gabriel Zada
    21. Genetics of pituitary tumor syndromes / Adrian F. Daly and Albert Beckers
    22. Nonpituitary sellar masses / Luis V. Syro, Fabio Rotondo, Olga Moshkin and Kalman Kovacs
    Section IV Pituitary Procedures
    23. Pituitary imaging / Marcel Maya and Barry D. Pressman
    24. Pituitary surgery / Rudolf Fahlbusch and Michael Buchfelder.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Gianluca Tamagno, Manuel D. Gahete, editors.
    Summary: Stemming from the ENEA Young Researcher Committee, this didactical book comprehensively discusses all aspects of pituitary adenomas, particularly the practical aspects arising in everyday clinical practice. Offering valuable tips, it serves as a guide for young trainee endocrinologists facing their first cases of pituitary adenomas. It also includes illustrative clinical cases of acromegaly, prolactinomas, Cushing's disease, and TSHomas. In addition, a Questions & Answers section is available online. The mix of fresh enthusiasm and well-established expertise in the field provided by the editors and the committee they belong to make the book both solid and innovative, with an appropriate balance between the traditional knowledge and the most exciting innovations from recent or ongoing research. Written and edited by young researchers active in the field of neuroendocrinology, it is a valuable resource for anyone working or interested in the field.

    Contents:
    Anatomy of the pituitary gland
    Physiology of the pituitary hormone secretion
    Pathogenesis of pituitary adenomas
    Epidemiology of pituitary adenomas
    Acromegaly
    Clinical case of acromegaly
    Prolactinoma
    Clinical case of prolactinoma
    Cushing disease
    Clinical case of Cushing disease
    TSHoma
    Clinical case of TSHoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Dora Reglodi, Andrea Tamas, editors.
    Summary: The first comprehensive book to cover all aspects of the last 25 years of PACAP (pituitary adenylate cyclase activating polypeptide) research, this book contains contributions from virtually all the leading researchers in the field, and addresses some of the following topics: evolutionary aspects of PACAP, distribution and occurrence of PACAP and its receptors, hormonal effects of PACAP, intracellular signaling, effects on cellular proliferation and differentiation, protective effects of PACAP, behavioral effects of PACAP, developmental aspects of PACAP, other physiological effects of PACAP (cardiovascular, thermoregulatory), human studies, drug design, metabolism and transport. This compendium can serve as an important reference for researchers and students in PACAP research and can also be a thorough introduction for those in related fields.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Mehmet Turgut [and three others], editors.
    Summary: Pituitary apoplexy is a rare and life-threatening complication that occurs in 0.6-10.5% of all patients with pituitary adenomas. Unfortunately, pituitary apoplexy is often misdiagnosed before surgery. Furthermore, in spite of all the advances in imaging techniques and therapeutic methods, its optimal management is still controversial owing to the limited individual experience and the very variable clinical course of the condition, which ranges from asymptomatic to critical illness with visual loss and subarachnoid hemorrhage. The management of visual dysfunction in particular remains a subject of debate. This book provides an in-depth review of knowledge of the management of pituitary apoplexy, with an emphasis on clinical and neuroradiological findings and treatment modalities, medical and surgical. In addition, it supplies clinicians and investigators with detailed information on current evidence and considers future areas of investigation and innovative therapeutic philosophies. Both the editors and the authors are leading international authorities in the field.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Definition, History, Frequency, Histopathology and Pathophysiology of Pituitary Apoplexy. Overview: Conservative versus Surgical Decompression for Pituitary Apoplexy. Tumours Types which Show Apoplexy: Predisposing factors for Pituitary Apoplexy
    Non-functioning tumour apoplexy
    Apoplexy in previously known tumours
    Post-operative Pituitary Apoplexy. Clinical Features: Clinical features of Pituitary Apoplexy
    Subarachnoid hemorrhage with Pituitary Adenoma
    Cerebral ischaemia in Pituitary Apoplexy. Visual and Endocrine Assessment: Visual acuity, eye movements and visual fields
    Visual outcome following Pituitary Apoplexy.- Preoperative endocrine function and fluid electrolyte balance
    Endocrinopathies and other biochemical abnormalities in Pituitary Apoplexy. Mimicking Conditions: Carotid artery aneurysm
    Hypothalamic lymphoma
    Rathke's cleft cysts mimicking Pituitary Apoplexy. Management: Conservative management of Pituitary Apoplexy
    Surgical decompression for Pituitary Apoplexy
    Timing of surgery and outcome in Pituitary Apoplexy. Complications: Subarachnoid hemorrhage after transsphenoidal surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Susan L. Samson, Adriana G. Ioachimescu, editors.
    Summary: The pituitary gland is often referred to as the master gland, coordinating hormonal signals from the hypothalamus and peripheral circulation to maintain homeostasis in the body. Patients with pituitary dysfunction are faced with challenges unique to each stage of their life cycle. For example, the goals of management for a hypopituitary adolescent transitioning to adulthood would be to optimize growth and sexual development. In early adulthood, approaches that optimize of fertility in men and women can be a priority, and the management approach will be very different from that of older adults requiring sex hormone replacement. This case-based guide will provide practical clinical guidance on approaches to the management of pituitary disorders organized by time of life, from childhood and fertile years through to older age. Sensibly divided into sections, various pituitary disorders and conditions are described and relevant treatment strategies are outlined. Sections included discussions of the unique considerations for the pituitary gland in childhood and adolescents, patients desiring fertility and pregnant patients, health optimization and non-tumoral diagnoses in adults, and management of disorders of the hypothalamic-pituitary axis in the elderly. Each chapter presents a clinical case vignette as an introduction to the concepts and a framework for the discussion of the diagnosis, management and unique consideration of each pituitary pathology. Practical and user-friendly, Pituitary Disorders throughout the Life Cycle is an excellent resource for practicing clinical endocrinologists (pediatric, transitional care, adult) and reproductive endocrinologists as well as specialty residents and trainees.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editor, Lisa B. Nachtigall.
    Summary: Comprised of cases presenting diverse clinical scenarios involving pituitary tumors and related conditions, this concise, practical casebook provides clinical endocrinologists with the best real-world strategies to properly diagnose and treat the various presentations and symptoms they may encounter in daily practice. Discussing macroprolactinoma, non-functioning adenoma, TSH-secreting adenoma, Cushing’s disease and acromegaly, each chapter is a case that provides a unique clinical presentation of a patient’s symptoms and clinical findings, diagnostic work-up and the thought process involved in navigating the treatment options, as well as the supporting evidence. Cases included illustrate different types of tumors, related disorders and special situations and considerations, in addition to various management strategies, complications and outcomes, with helpful clinical pearls and pitfalls. Pragmatic and reader-friendly, Pituitary Tumors: A Clinical Casebook is written by experts in the field and is designed to facilitate and guide endocrinologists in the sometimes challenging decision-making process by presenting real case scenarios that span the spectrum of pituitary tumor presentations and treatment options.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jenny C. Dohlman, Alice C. Lorch, editors.
    Summary: Pivotal Trials in Ophthalmology: A Guide for Trainees is an introductory text designed to give trainees a comprehensive and accessible overview of landmark trials in the different subspecialties of ophthalmology, and may also serve as a useful reference for practicing ophthalmologists, optometrists and researchers in the field. The text is subdivided by subspecialty, with each chapter authored by both a trainee and an expert in the field. A selection of pivotal research studies that have shaped how practitioners diagnose, manage, and treat disease are reviewed in chronological order. The purpose, study design, results, and study limitations are reviewed, and the key takeaway points from each study are listed in a digestible, bullet-point format. By listing the studies in chronological order, the reader will have an understanding of how studies have built upon each other and how knowledge has evolved over time. This text can serve as a basic introductory text for first year ophthalmology residents around which a standardized curriculum can be shaped, a study guide for board examination study, or a reference text for practitioners and researchers at any stage of training and practice. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Glaucoma
    Cornea
    Neuro-ophthalmology
    Pediatric Ophthalmology and Strabismus
    Retina
    Uveitis
    Oculoplastics
    Ocular Trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Mikiko C. Siomi.
    Contents:
    Chromatin Immunoprecipitation Assay of Piwi in Drosophila / Hang Yin and Haifan Lin
    Drosophila Germline Stem Cells for In Vitro Analyses of PIWI-Mediated RNAi / Yuzo Niki, Takuya Sato, Takafumi Yamaguchi, Ayaka Saisho, Hiroshi Uetake, and Hidenori Watanabe
    RNAi and Overexpression of Genes in Ovarian Somatic Cells / Kuniaki Saito
    Making piRNAs In Vitro / Shinpei Kawaoka, Susumu Katsuma, and Yukihide Tomari
    A Framework for piRNA Cluster Manipulation / Ivan Olovnikov, Adrien Le Thomas, and Alexei A. Aravin
    Biochemical and Mass Spectrometric Analysis of 3ʹ-End Methylation of piRNAs / Takeo Suzuki, Kenjyo Miyauchi, Yuriko Sakaguchi, and Tsutomu Suzuki
    HITS-CLIP (CLIP-Seq) for Mouse Piwi Proteins / Anastassios Vourekas and Zissimos Mourelatos
    DNA Methylation in Mouse Testes / Satomi Kuramochi-Miyagawa, Kanako Kita-Kojima, Yusuke Shiromoto, Daisuke Ito, Hirotaka Koshima, and Toru Nakano
    Analysis of Small RNA-Guided Endonuclease Activity in Endogenous Piwi Protein Complexes from Mouse Testes / Michael Reuter and Ramesh S. Pillai
    Small RNA Library Construction from Minute Biological Samples / Jessica A. Matts, Yuliya Sytnikova, Gung-wei Chirn, Gabor L. Igloi, and Nelson C. Lau
    Analysis of sDMA Modifications of PIWI Proteins / Shozo Honda, Yoriko Kirino, and Yohei Kirino
    Analyses of piRNA-Mediated Transcriptional Transposon Silencing in Drosophila: Nuclear Run-On Assay on Ovaries / Sergey Shpiz and Alla Kalmykova
    Combined RNA/DNA Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization on Whole-Mount Drosophila Ovaries / Shpiz, Sergey Lavrov, and Alla Kalmykova
    Fast and Accurate Method to Purify Small Noncoding RNAs from Drosophila Ovaries / Thomas Grentzinger and Séverine Chambeyron
    Isolation of Zebrafish Gonads for RNA Isolation / Hsin-Yi Huang and René F. Ketting
    Small RNA Library Construction for High-Throughput Sequencing / Jon McGinn and Benjamin Czech
    Analysis of Piwi-Loaded Small RNAs in Terahymena / Tomoko Noto, Henriette M. Kurth, and Kazufumi Mochizuki
    Effective Gene Knockdown in the Drosophila Germline by Artificial miRNA-Mimicking siRNAs / Hailong Wang, Haidong Huang, and Dahua Chen
    Isolation and Bioinformatic Analyses of Small RNAs Interacting with Germ Cell-Specific Argonaute in Rice / Reina Komiya and Ken-Ichi Nonomura.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Susan M. Blaney, MD, Professor, Hematology-Oncology Section, Baylor College of Medicine, Deputy Director, Texas Children's Cancer Center and Hematology Centers, Texas Children's Hospital, Houston, Texas, Peter C. Adamson, MD, Professor of Pediatrics and Pharmacology, Perelman School of Medicine, The University of Pennsylvania, Children's Hospital of Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Lee J. Helman, MD, Professor, Pediatrics and Medicine, Keck School of Medicine, University of Southern California, Head, Basic and Translational Research, Cancer and Blood Disease Institute, Children's Hospital Los Angeles, Los Angeles, California.
    Summary: "This authoritative reference is a comprehensive resource on the biology and genetics of childhood cancer as well as its diagnosis, multimodal treatment, as well as long-term management of young patients with cancer. Also addressed are a broad array of topics on the supportive and psychosocial aspects of care of children and families. Covering virtually every aspect of the breadth and depth of childhood cancer, this reference provides expert guidance on state-of-the-art, multidisciplinary care for children and families"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Oncology)
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Brian Castellani, Rajeev Rajaram, J. Galen Buckwalter, Michael Ball, Frederic Hafferty.
    Summary: The history of public health has focused on direct relationships between problems and solutions: vaccinations against diseases, ad campaigns targeting risky behaviors. But the accelerating pace and mounting intricacies of our lives are challenging the field to find new scientific methods for studying community health. The complexities of place (COP) approach is emerging as one such promising method. ℗ℓ Place and Health as Complex Systems demonstrates how COP works, making an empirical case for its use in for designing and implementing interventions. This brief resource reviews the defining characteristics of places as dynamic and evolving social systems, rigorously testing them as well as the COP approach itself. The study, of twenty communities within one county in the Midwest, combines case-based methods and complexity science to determine whether COP improves upon traditional statistical methods of public health research. Its conclusions reveal strengths and limitations of the approach, immediate possibilities for its use, and challenges regarding future research. Included in the coverage: ℗ℓ Characteristics of places and the complexities of place approach. The Definitional Test of Complex Systems. Case-based modeling using the SACS toolkit. Methods, maps, and measures used in the study. Places as nodes within larger networks. Places as power-based conflicted negotiations. ℗ℓ Place and Health as Complex Systems brings COP into greater prominence in public health research, and is also valuable to researchers in related fields such as demography, health geography, community health, urban planning, and epidemiology. ℗ℓ

    Contents:
    The Complexities of Place Approach.-Definitional Test of Complex Systems
    Case-Based Modeling and the SACS Toolkit
    Methods
    C1: Places are Complex
    C2: Places are Emergent and Self-Organizing
    C3 Places are Nodes Within Larger Networks
    C4: Places are Dynamic and Evolving
    C5: Places are Nonlinear
    C6: Places are Subjective and Historical
    C7: Places are Open- Ended with Fuzzy Boundaries
    C8: Places are Power-Based Conflicted Negotiations
    C9: Places are Agent-Based
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Fabrizio Benedetti, Paul Enck, Elisa Frisaldi, Manfred Schedlowski, editors.
    Summary: Due to the recent explosion of placebo research at many levels the Editors believe that a volume on Placebo would be a good addition to the Handbook of Experimental Pharmacology series. In particular, this volume will be built up on a meeting on Placebo which will be held in Tuebingen (Germany) in January 2013, and where the most prominent researchers in this field will present and exchange their ideas. The authors who will be invited to write chapters for this volume will be the very same speakers at this meeting, thus guaranteeing high standard and excellence in the topic that will be treated. The approach of the book is mainly pharmacological, including basic research and clinical trials, and the contents range from different medical conditions and systems, such as pain and the immune system, to different experimental approaches, like in vivo receptor binding and pharmacological/behavioral conditioning. Overall, the volume will give an idea of modern placebo research, of timely concepts in both experimental and clinical pharmacology, as well as of modern methods and tools in neuroscience.

    Contents:
    Pain: Placebo and Nocebo Effects.-Placebo, Nocebo and Learning Mechanisms
    A Meta-Analysis of Brain Mechanisms of Placebo Analgesia
    Placebo Analgesia: Cognition of Perception
    Pain Related Negative Emotions and Placebo Analgesia
    How Positive and Negative Expectations Shape the Experience of Visceral Pain.-Placebo Effects in Idiopathic and Neuropathic Pain Conditions.-Emerging Models: Great Expectations: The Placebo Effect in Parkinsons's Disease
    The Effects of Placebos and Nocebos on Physical Performance
    Learned Placebo Responses in Neuroendocrine and Immune Functions
    Placebo Responses on Cardiovascular, Gastrointestinal, and Respiratory Organ Functions
    Placebo and Nocebo Effects in Itch and Pain. Clinical Practice and Clinical Trials: Clinical and Ethical Implications of Placebo Effects: Enhancing Patients' Benefits from Pain Treatment
    Traditional and Innovative Eperimental and Clinical Trial Designs and Their Advantages and Pitfalls
    Lessons to be Learned from Placebo Arms in Psychopharmacology Trials.-The Emperor's New Drugs: Medication and Placebo in the Treatment of Depression.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Dimos D. Mitsikostas, Fabrizio Benedetti, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the role of placebos and nocebos in the treatment of headache disorders. These disorders are usually treatable, but safety and tolerability issues mean that available preventive treatments have often limited success, even in the right hands – one in five patients treated with a migraine preventive pharmaceutical agent discontinues treatment for those reasons. The nocebo effect plays a role here, with patients’ negative expectation and previous unpleasant treatment experiences creating negative belief in the treatment’s benefits and safety, which in turn limits treatment outcomes and adherence significantly. In RCTs on migraine prevention, one in 20 patients treated with a placebo discontinued treatment because of adverse events, indicating a considerable nocebo effect; the fewer potential adverse events described in the consent form, the smaller the nocebo effect. As such, physicians treating headache sufferers should acknowledge nocebo as a significant cofactor for treatment adherence and failure, and plan techniques to limit the effects, such as patient education and close follow-up. This highly informative and painstakingly presented book provides scientific insights for professionals and scholars with an interest in internal medicine, neurology and pain medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Kush R. Desai, Osman Ahmed, Thuong Van Ha, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses placement and retrieval of inferior vena cava (IVC) filters. Until 2010, utilization of IVC filters had been increasing since their introduction in 1967. Studies in the early 2000's, however, identified that prolonged caval interruption with IVC filters were fraught with complications including filter fracture, migration, and caval thrombosis. This subsequently led the FDA to issue an advisory recommending judicious placement and timely retrieval of IVC filters by treating physicians. This safety advisory ultimately created a heightened awareness by medical professionals and the general public regarding the negative consequences surrounding long-term caval filtration. Subsequently, IVC filter placements decreased nationally while retrievals conversely increased in the post-FDA advisory era. During this same time period, interest in complex IVC filter retrieval also increased as a method to manage patients identified to have or be at risk for complications secondary to prolonged filter implantation. Given these established trends and interest surrounding advanced techniques in IVC filter retrieval, this book addresses these topics in a reader-friendly, case-based format. Chapters focus particularly around the recognition and management of filter-related complications. Additionally, advanced techniques employed by experienced operators for complex filter retrieval are also discussed. For completeness, the book also includes a review of indications and appropriate methods for IVC filter placement. This book is unique in that, at present, descriptions of complications and advanced techniques utilized for complicated IVC filter removal consist mainly of case reports and case series scattered throughout the literature. This publication serves to compile these sources into a single comprehensive entity for physicians treating patients with IVC filters. Chapters are organized to begin with a few introductory paragraphs highlighting the relevant literature (and providing references for in-depth reading) followed by several cases demonstrating tips, tricks, and procedural pitfalls. When possible, each case will include a step-by-step description of the technique being described. This is an ideal guide for interventional radiologists, interventional cardiologists, and vascular surgeons that perform or are interested in performing filter retrieval beyond standard techniques.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: Current Data and Trends on Inferior Vena Cava Filter Placement and Retrieval
    History
    Why Filters Are Inserted
    Trends in Filter Placement
    Trends in Filter Complications
    Filter Retrieval
    Conclusion
    References
    2: IVC Filter Placement: Accepted and Relative Indications
    Introduction
    Accepted Indication for IVCF Insertion
    Relative and Prophylactic Indications of IVCF Insertion
    Special Patient Populations
    Recommendations Against IVCF Insertion
    Bibliography 3: Inferior Vena Cava Filter Placement: Anatomical Evaluation and Approach to Variant Anatomy
    Introduction
    Embryogenesis of the Inferior Vena Cava
    Procedural Technical and Anatomic Considerations
    Variant Anatomic Considerations
    Renal Vein Variants
    Duplicated IVC
    Mega Cava
    Suprarenal Filter Placement Considerations
    Conclusions
    References
    4: IVC Filter Retrieval: Routine Approach
    IVC Filter Clinic
    Equipment and Technique
    Escalation to Complex Retrieval
    References
    5: Complex Filter Retrieval Planning
    Introduction Defining Complex IVC Filter Retrieval
    Pre-procedure Clinical Evaluation
    Pre-procedure Imaging Workup
    Informed Consent and Anesthetic Considerations
    References
    6: Filter Strut Penetration: Does It Matter?
    Case 1: Retroperitoneal Fat Strut Penetration
    Case 2: Filter Strut and Apex Penetration into Extra-Caval Space
    Case 3: Filter Penetration into Nonvascular Organs - Bowel
    Case 4: Filter Penetration into Nonvascular Organs - Spine
    Case 5: Filter Strut Penetration with Aortic Involvement and Intraluminal Thrombus Case 6: Penetrating Filter Removal Complicated by Renal Arteriovenous Fistula Formation
    References
    7: Retrieval of Filters with Embedded Apices
    Case 1: Tilted IVC Filter
    Case 2: Tilted and Embedded Filter
    Case 3: Deeply Embedded Filter
    References
    8: Filter Strut Incorporation: Tools for Success and Improved Procedural Safety
    Excimer Laser-Assisted Retrieval for Filter Strut Incorporation
    Case 1: Chronically Embedded Optease Filter
    References
    9: Mechanism and Approach to Fractured Filters
    Introduction
    Filter Construction
    Filter Geometry Mechanism of Filter Fracture
    Evaluation of a Patient with a Fractured IVCF
    Fragment Characterization
    Local
    Technical Considerations
    Extracaval Involvement
    Central Embolization
    Intracardiac
    Technical Considerations
    Intrapulmonary
    Technical Considerations
    Patient Preference
    Understanding Limitations
    Conclusions
    References
    10: IVC Filter Migration and Misplacement
    Case 1: Pulmonary Filter Strut Migration
    Case 2: Cardiac Migration of an IVC Filter
    Case 3: Filter Misplacement: Azygos Vein
    Case 4: Filter Misplacement: Right Renal Vein
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sherif A. Shazly, Ahmed A. Nassr, editors.
    Summary: Placenta accreta spectrum (PAS), an obstetric emergency associated with significant maternal morbidity and mortality, has increasingly become a global challenge with the rising trend of cesarean deliveries. This book provides a comprehensive review of basic science-related to PAS, discusses modern practice in diagnosis and classification of PAS disorders, and appraise current recommendations on PAS management in view of recent studies, guidelines, and expert opinions. In the last few years, there have been many new updates to practice guidelines including ACOG, RCOG, and FIGO guidelines in addition to several new studies, some of which were unusually multicenter and of large sample size, that are eligible to make major changes in our PAS practice. In addition, the book aims at providing more comprehensive review of all aspects related to PAS from experts, including topics that are deficient in similar books e.g., vascular anatomy, risk reduction, adjuvant treatments. The book provides a single source that provides academic knowledge for researchers and investigators, and clinical guidance to best practice and recent updates in management of women with PAS.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: History of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    References
    Chapter 2: Epidemiology of Placenta Accreta Spectrum: A Comprehensive Review of Current Evidence
    Introduction
    Definition and Terminology
    Incidence and Increasing Trend Globally
    Morbidity and Mortality
    Risk Factors
    Caesarean Section
    Placenta Praevia
    Advanced Maternal Age
    Assisted Reproductive Technologies
    Previous Gynaecological History
    Previous Obstetric History
    Management
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Pathogenesis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum Introduction
    Clinicopathology Classification
    Vascular Classification
    Placental-Type Invasion
    Type 1
    Type 2
    Type 3
    Type 4
    Type 5
    Placental Mapping for Prenatal Diagnosis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum Grading
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 6: Diagnosis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum: Clinical and Radiological Diagnosis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum and the Ability of Sonographic and MRI Findings to Predict Definitive Diagnosis
    The Importance of Antenatal Diagnosis of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Antenatal Diagnosis: Role of Different Imaging Modalities First Trimester Imaging
    Second or Third Trimester Ultrasound Evaluation
    MRI Evaluation
    Special Considerations
    References
    Chapter 7: Definitive Management of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Introduction
    Preoperative Preparation
    Anaesthesia
    Surgical Management of an Antenatally Suspected Case
    Surgical Management of an Unexpected Case
    Postoperative Considerations
    Surgical Morbidity
    Psychological Impact
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 8: Conservative Management of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Definition
    Risk Factors
    Clinical Presentation and Diagnosis Management
    Timing of Delivery
    Cesarean Delivery and Hysterectomy
    Conservative Management
    Follow-Up After Conservative Management
    Long-Term Considerations
    References
    Chapter 9: Adjunctive Treatment of Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Introduction
    Surgical Control of Bleeding
    Uterine Artery Embolization
    Internal Iliac Artery Ligation
    Endovascular Balloon Occlusion of the Pelvic Circulation
    Uterine Compression Sutures
    Use of Tranexamic Acid
    Investigational Therapies
    High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
    Methotrexate
    Conclusions
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Raymond W. Redline, Case Western Reserve University, Theonia K. Boyd, Harvard Medical School, Drucilla J. Roberts, Harvard Medical School.
    Summary: This concise and comprehensive resource is vital for the pathologist faced with providing accurate, timely, and clinically useful diagnoses for placentas, products of conception, and gravid hysterectomies. Combining the pathologic, research, and clinical expertise of a diverse group of editors and authors from centers of excellence for placental pathology, this book enables easy application of the latest Amsterdam international consensus classification criteria, with cross-references to previous terminology and a pathophysiology-based classification system. It provides complete descriptions and illustrations of diagnostic gross, microscopic, and immunohistochemical findings together with a thorough discussion of potential pitfalls and differential diagnosis. Current theories of the genetic and physiologic basis for disease processes, culminating in placental lesions are discussed. The book features high-quality images and standardized measurement tables to assist real-time diagnoses and provides access to an online version on Cambridge Core, which can be accessed via the code printed on the inside of the cover.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Christoph Lees, Gerard H.A. Visser, Kurt Hecher.
    Summary: "Master the effective evaluation, analysis and management of placental-fetal growth restriction (PFGR), reducing the risk of perinatal mortality and morbidity in patients worldwide. Extensively researched by international experts, this manual provides practitioners with a detailed, hands-on approach to the practical 'pearls' for direct patient management. This authoritative volume advises on matters such as the correct evaluation and management of high-risk patients in danger of PFGR through to delivery. Extensive and wide-ranging, this book is an invaluable companion to the developing research interest and clinical applications in PFGR, including developmental outcomes in early childhood. Featuring a critical evaluation of a variety of abnormal conditions, such as fetal hypoxia, which are clearly displayed through extensive illustrations. This essential toolkit ensures that practitioners of all levels can effectively limit the risk of mortality and morbidity, and reach the correct diagnosis, first-time"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Samuel Myers and Howard Frumkin.
    Summary: Human health depends on the health of the planet. Earth's natural systems--the air, the water, the biodiversity, the climate--are our life support systems. Yet climate change, biodiversity loss, scarcity of land and freshwater, pollution and other threats are degrading these systems. The emerging field of planetary health aims to understand how these changes threaten our health and how to protect ourselves and the rest of the biosphere. Planetary Health: Protecting Nature to Protect Ourselves provides a readable introduction to this new paradigm. With an interdisciplinary approach, the book addresses a wide range of health impacts felt in the Anthropocene, including food and nutrition, infectious disease, non-communicable disease, dislocation and conflict, and mental health. It also presents strategies to combat environmental changes and its ill-effects, such as controlling toxic exposures, investing in clean energy, improving urban design, and more.

    Contents:
    Front Cover
    About Island Press
    Subscribe
    Title Page
    Copyright Page
    Dedication
    Contents
    List of Tables
    List of Boxes
    Preface: A Note on Covid-19
    Acknowledgments
    Part 1: Foundations
    1. An Introduction to Planetary Health
    2. Assembling Planetary Health: Histories of the Future
    3. Population, Consumption, Equity, and Rights
    4. A Changing Planet
    Part 2: The Health of Populations
    5. Food and Nutrition on a Rapidly Changing Planet
    6. Planetary Health and Infectious Disease
    7. Global Environmental Change and Noncommunicable Disease Risks
    8. Environmental Change, Migration, Conflict, and Health
    9. Mental Health on a Changing Planet
    10. Climate Change and Human Health
    11. Happiness on a Healthier Planet
    Part 3: Pivoting from Threat to Opportunity
    12. Energy and Planetary Health
    13. Urban Places and Planetary Health
    14. Controlling Toxic Exposures
    15. A New Economics for Planetary Health
    16. The Business of Planetary Health: From Economic Theory to Policy and Practice
    Part 4: Saving Ourselves, Saving Our Planet
    17. Planetary Health Ethics
    18. A Bright Future for Planetary Health
    Afterword: Coronavirus and Planetary Health
    Index
    About the Editors
    Island Press Board of Directors.
  • Digital
    Mónica S. Hoffmeyer, Marina E. Sabatini, Frederico P. Brandini, Danilo L. Calliari, Norma H. Santinelli, editors.
    Summary: This book integrates a variety of issues such as regional settings of productivity and nutrient cycling; plankton of coastal and shelf systems; plankton, climate change and human-induced changes; harmful algae and their impacts; and gelatinous zooplankton. This book explores the intriguing marine plankton communities of the SWA region of South America encompassing low to high latitude environments, framed by a complex hydrographic background and global climate change. This vast and iconic region has been largely under-recognized and under-studied. However, in recent years a strong interest has emerged along with the acknowledgment of its high biological productivity. The book concludes by discussing conservation in the region, highlighting regional biodiversity hotspots where the challenges of climate change, habitat loss, and other threats to biodiversity may be particularly acute. Plankton Ecology of the Southwestern Atlantic is a timely synthesis of the field, setting a new baseline for future research. It will be important reading for both researchers and graduate students, and will also be of interest and use to a professional audience of oceanographers, conservation biologists, stake holders and educated science enthusiasts.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Avrum I. Gotlieb.
    Summary: Planning for a Career in Biomedical and Life Sciences: Learn to Navigate a Tough Research Culture by Harnessing the Power of Career Building, Second Edition, presents useful information, insights and tips to those pursuing a career in the biomedical and life sciences. The book focuses on making educated choices during schooling, training, and the job search in both the academic and non-academic sectors. The book's premise lies in the notion that if users understand the full path of a career in either the biomedical or life science fields, they can proactively plan their career, recognize any opportunities that present themselves, and be well prepared to address important aspects of their own professional development. Topics include choosing a training path, selecting the best supervisor/mentor, and negotiating a job offer. Updates to this edition include an outline of core competencies to achieve success, how to build soft skills and tailor them to specific job opportunities, and how to increase collaborations across disciplines. Additionally, coverage on issues around diversity, health, wellness and work/life balance are expanded. This book is a valuable resource for undergraduate, graduate, medical and postdoctoral students in the biomedical and life sciences, as well as academic faculty and advisors.--Publisher's description
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, Kamrun Nahar, Hesham F. Alharby, editors.
    Summary: Plants have to manage a series of environmental stresses throughout their entire lifespan. Among these, abiotic stress is the most detrimental; one that is responsible for nearly 50% of crop yield reduction and appears to be a potential threat to global food security in coming decades. Plant growth and development reduces drastically due to adverse effects of abiotic stresses. It has been estimated that crop can exhibit only 30% of their genetic potentiality under abiotic stress condition. So, this is a fundamental need to understand the stress responses to facilitate breeders to develop stress resistant and stress tolerant cultivars along with good management practices to withstand abiotic stresses. Also, a holistic approach to understanding the molecular and biochemical interactions of plants is important to implement the knowledge of resistance mechanisms under abiotic stresses. Agronomic practices like selecting cultivars that is tolerant to wide range of climatic condition, planting date, irrigation scheduling, fertilizer management could be some of the effective short-term adaptive tools to fight against abiotic stresses. In addition, "system biology" and "omics approaches" in recent studies offer a long-term opportunity at the molecular level in dealing with abiotic stresses. The genetic approach, for example, selection and identification of major conditioning genes by linkage mapping and quantitative trait loci (QTL), production of mutant genes and transgenic introduction of novel genes, has imparted some tolerant characteristics in crop varieties from their wild ancestors. Recently research has revealed the interactions between micro-RNAs (miRNAs) and plant stress responses exposed to salinity, freezing stress and dehydration. Accordingly transgenic approaches to generate stress-tolerant plant are one of the most interesting researches to date. This book presents the recent development of agronomic and molecular approaches in conferring plant abiotic stress tolerance in an organized way. The present volume will be of great interest among research students and teaching community, and can also be used as reference material by professional researchers.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; About the Book; Contents; Editors; Contributors; About the Editors; Maize Production Under Salinity and Drought Conditions: Oxidative Stress Regulation by Antioxidant Defense and Glyoxalase Systems; Introduction; General Situation of Maize Production Under Salinity and Drought; Oxidative Stress in Maize; Antioxidative Defense Mechanisms; Superoxide Dismutase; Catalase; Peroxidase; Ascorbate Peroxidase; Glutathione Peroxidase; Glutathione Reductase; Monodehydroascorbate Reductase; Dehydroascorbate Reductase; Glutathione S-Transferases Effect of Salinity on Chlorophyll and CarotenoidsEffect of Salinity on Photosynthesis; Effect of Salinity on Nutrients; Effect of Salinity on Na+ and K+ Concentration in Plant and Its Relation with Salinity Tolerance; Effect of Salinity on Osmolites and Osmoprotectants; Effect of Salinity on Proline Content in Plants; Effect of Salinity on Cell Membrane Stability; Salinity Tolerance in Plants; Salt Tolerance Mechanisms; Salinity Tolerance at the Whole Plant; Salinity Tolerance at Molecular Level; Salinity Tolerance at the Cellular Level; Screening Methods for Salinity Tolerance Methylglyoxal Detoxification EnzymesNonenzymatic Antioxidants; Ascorbic Acid; Glutathione; Osmoregulation and Osmoprotection; Conclusion; References; Plants Behavior Under Soil Acidity Stress: Insight into Morphophysiological, Biochemical, and Molecular Responses; Introduction; Soil pH and Acidic Soil; Causes; Worldwide Distribution; Nutrient Imbalance and Toxicity Due to Acidity; Biogeography of Plants in Relation to Acidic Soil; Effects of Soil Acidity Stress on Plants; Germination and Seedling Emergence; Vegetative Stage; Reproductive Stage; Yield Attributes and Yield Physiological Responses of Plants to Acidity StressMembrane Integrity; Photosynthetic Machinery; Water Relations and Transpiration; Oxidative Damages; Antioxidative Defense; Mechanisms of Acid Stress Tolerance in Plants; Conclusion and Future Perspectives; References; Salinity: A Major Agricultural Problem-Causes, Impacts on Crop Productivity and Management Strategies; Introduction; Causes of Salinity and General Effects; Effects of Salinity on Crops; Salinity Management Approaches; Modifications in Agricultural Practices Seed Priming and Plant Growth Promoting Bacteria (Bio-Priming) for Salinity ManagementConclusions; References; Salinity Stress Tolerance in Plants: Physiological, Molecular, and Biotechnological Approaches; Introduction: An Overview on Salinity; Definition of Salinity; Types of Salinity and Its Causes; Primary or Natural Salinity; Secondary Salinity or Salinity Created by Humans; Problems Caused by Salinity in Plants; Effects of Salinity; Effect of Salinity on Plant Germination; Effects of Salinity on Plant Morphology; Effect of Salinity on Vegetative Growth
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Richard Crang, Sheila Lyons-Sobaski, Robert Wise.
    Summary: Intended as a text for upper-division undergraduates, graduate students and as a potential reference, this broad-scoped resource is extensive in its educational appeal by providing a new concept-based organization with end-of-chapter literature references, self-quizzes, and illustration interpretation. The concept-based, pedagogical approach, in contrast to the classic discipline-based approach, was specifically chosen to make the teaching and learning of plant anatomy more accessible for students. In addition, for instructors whose backgrounds may not primarily be plant anatomy, the features noted above are designed to provide sufficient reference material for organization and class presentation. This text is unique in the extensive use of over 1150 high-resolution color micrographs, color diagrams and scanning electron micrographs. Another feature is frequent side-boxes that highlight the relationship of plant anatomy to specialized investigations in plant molecular biology, classical investigations, functional activities, and research in forestry, environmental studies and genetics, as well as other fields. Each of the 19 richly-illustrated chapters has an abstract, a list of keywords, an introduction, a text body consisting of 10 to 20 concept-based sections, and a list of references and additional readings. At the end of each chapter, the instructor and student will find a section-by-section concept review, concept connections, concept assessment (10 multiple-choice questions), and concept applications. Answers to the assessment material are found in an appendix. An index and a glossary with over 700 defined terms complete the volume.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Section I: Plants as Unique Organisms; History and Tools of Plant Anatomy
    1. The Nature of Plants
    2. Microscopy and Imaging
    Section II: Cellular Plant Anatomy
    3. Plant Cell Structure and Ultrastructure
    4. Mitosis and Meristems
    5. Cell Walls
    6. Parenchyma, Collenchyma and Sclerenchyma
    Section III: Vascular Tissues
    7. Xylem
    8. Phloem
    Section IV: Primary Vegetative Growth
    9. Epidermis
    10. The Root
    11. The Stem
    12. The Leaf
    13. Secondary Structures
    Section V: Secondary Vegetative Growth
    14. Vascular Cambium
    15. Wood: Economics, Structure and Composition
    16. Periderm
    Section VI: Flowering and Reproduction
    17. Floral Development & Male Reproduction
    18. Female Reproduction & Embryogenesis
    19. Fruits, Seeds and Seedlings
    Appendices: Answers to end-of-chapter review and assessment material
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Munir Ozturk, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, editors.
    Summary: Early anthropological evidence for plant use as medicine is 60,000 years old as reported from the Neanderthal grave in Iraq. The importance of plants as medicine is further supported by archeological evidence from Asia and the Middle East. Today, around 1.4 billion people in South Asia alone have no access to modern health care, and rely instead on traditional medicine to alleviate various symptoms. On a global basis, approximately 50 to 80 thousand plant species are used either natively or as pharmaceutical derivatives for life-threatening conditions that include diabetes, hypertension and cancers. As the demand for plant-based medicine rises, there is an unmet need to investigate the quality, safety and efficacy of these herbals by the "scientific methods". Current research on drug discovery from medicinal plants involves a multifaceted approach combining botanical, phytochemical, analytical, and molecular techniques. For instance, high throughput robotic screens have been developed by industry; it is now possible to carry out 50,000 tests per day in the search for compounds which act on a key enzyme or a subset of receptors. This and other bioassays thus offer hope that one may eventually identify compounds for treating a variety of diseases or conditions. However, drug development from natural products is not without its problems. Frequent challenges encountered include the procurement of raw materials, the selection and implementation of appropriate high-throughput bioassays, and the scaling-up of preparative procedures. Research scientists should therefore arm themselves with the right tools and knowledge in order to harness the vast potentials of plant-based therapeutics. The main objective of Plant and Human Health is to serve as a comprehensive guide for this endeavor. Volume 1 highlights how humans from specific areas or cultures use indigenous plants. Despite technological developments, herbal drugs still occupy a preferential place in a majority of the population in the third world and have slowly taken roots as alternative medicine in the West. The integration of modern science with traditional uses of herbal drugs is important for our understanding of this ethnobotanical relationship. Volume 2 deals with the phytochemical and molecular characterization of herbal medicine. Specifically, It will focus on the secondary metabolic compounds which afford protection against diseases. Lastly, Volume 3 focuses on the physiological mechanisms by which the active ingredients of medicinal plants serve to improve human health. Together this three-volume collection intends to bridge the gap for herbalists, traditional and modern medical practitioners, and students and researchers in botany and horticulture.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Free Radicals, Diabetes, and Its Complexities; Introduction; Homeostasis; Oxidative Stress; Reactive Species; Free Radicals; The Role of ROS; ROS Involve in Lipid Peroxidation; The Source of Reactive Species; Oxidative Stress-Inducing Agents; Air Pollution; Dust; Heavy Metals; Temperature; Electromagnetic Fields; Alcohol; Herbicides; Pesticide; Fungicides; Cigarette Smoke; Industrial Foods; Oxidative Stress Is the Main Reason of Diseases; Cancer; Cardiovascular Disease; Neurological Disease; Pulmonary Disease Anti-tick ActivityAntibacterial Activity; Antifungal Activity; Herbicidal Activity; Antioxidant Activity; Anticancer Activity; Sedative Activity; Antidiabetic Activity; Antidiuretic Activity; Anti-inflammatory Activity; Conclusions; References; Evidence-Based Assessment of Moringa oleifera Used for the Treatment of Human Ailments; Introduction; Botanical Description; Nutrition Value; Medicinal Properties; Antispasmodic, Antiulcer, and Hepatoprotective Activities; Antihypertensive, Diuretic, and Cholesterol-Lowering Activities; Antibacterial and Antifungal Activities; Antidiabetic Activity Geographical DistributionEssential Oil of Vetiver; Phyto-constituents; Biosynthesis; Distillation; Economics; Ethnobotanical Uses; Traditional Application; Nutraceutical Application; Commercial Applications; Agriculture-Related Uses; Manure; Pesticide; Weed Control; Flavoring Agent; Perfumery; Aromatherapy; Other Uses; Refrigerant; Handicrafts; Construction; Textiles; Medicinal Uses and Health Benefits; An Update of Therapeutic Potentials of Vetiveria zizanioides; Insecticidal Activity; Termicidal Activity; Pesticidal Activity; Anti-plasmodial (Antimalarial) and Larvicidal Activity Reduction in Food Security and Increasing the Risk of Agricultural ProductionConclusion; References; Secondary Metabolites from Turkish Astragalus Species; Introduction; Phytochemistry and Biological Activity; Chemotaxonomy; Structural Summary of Cycloartanes; 20,24-Epoxy Side Chain Compounds; Acyclic Side Chain Compounds; 20,25-Epoxy Side Chain Compounds; Stereochemistry of Astragalus Cycloartanes; References; Vetiveria zizanioides (L.) Nash: A Magic Bullet to Attenuate the Prevailing Health Hazards; Introduction; Description of Plant; Types; Common Names; Morphology; Habit; Leaves; Flowers Rheumatoid ArthritisNephropathy; Ocular Disease; Aging; Defensive Systems Against Free Radicals; Antioxidants; Antioxidants with New Conversation; Sleeping; Fasting; Mountains' Clean Air Have Bracing Effect; Lifestyle Alteration Eliminates Oxidative Stressors; Diabetes; Glucose Auto-oxidation; Synergism Between Oxidative Stress and Glycation; Preservatives; New Conversation; Molecular Oxidative Stress; Diabetes Complications; Diabetes and Climate Changes; Direct Effects; Thermal Stress; Spiritual Consequences; Indirect Effects; Suburbs; Food Quality and Food Habits
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Munir Ozturk, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, editors.
    Summary: Early anthropological evidence for plant use as medicine is 60,000 years old as reported from the Neanderthal grave in Iraq. The importance of plants as medicine is further supported by archeological evidence from Asia and the Middle East. Today, around 1.4 billion people in South Asia alone have no access to modern health care, and rely instead on traditional medicine to alleviate various symptoms. On a global basis, approximately 50 to 80 thousand plant species are used either natively or as pharmaceutical derivatives for life-threatening conditions that include diabetes, hypertension and cancers. As the demand for plant-based medicine rises, there is an unmet need to investigate the quality, safety and efficacy of these herbals by the "scientific methods". Current research on drug discovery from medicinal plants involves a multifaceted approach combining botanical, phytochemical, analytical, and molecular techniques. For instance, high throughput robotic screens have been developed by industry; it is now possible to carry out 50,000 tests per day in the search for compounds which act on a key enzyme or a subset of receptors. This and other bioassays thus offer hope that one may eventually identify compounds for treating a variety of diseases or conditions. However, drug development from natural products is not without its problems. Frequent challenges encountered include the procurement of raw materials, the selection and implementation of appropriate high-throughput bioassays, and the scaling-up of preparative procedures. Research scientists should therefore arm themselves with the right tools and knowledge in order to harness the vast potentials of plant-based therapeutics. The main objective of Plant and Human Health is to serve as a comprehensive guide for this endeavor. Volume 1 highlights how humans from specific areas or cultures use indigenous plants. Despite technological developments, herbal drugs still occupy a preferential place in a majority of the population in the third world and have slowly taken roots as alternative medicine in the West. The integration of modern science with traditional uses of herbal drugs is important for our understanding of this ethnobotanical relationship. Volume 2 deals with the phytochemical and molecular characterization of herbal medicine. Specifically, it will focus on the secondary metabolic compounds which afford protection against diseases. Lastly, Volume 3 focuses on the physiological mechanisms by which the active ingredients of medicinal plants serve to improve human health. Together this three-volume collection intends to bridge the gap for herbalists, traditional and modern medical practitioners, and students and researchers in botany and horticulture.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Phytochemical Constituents and Pharmacological Effects of Licorice: A Review; Introduction; Taxonomic Description; Botanical Description; Traditional Uses; Pharmacological Activities; Antimicrobial Activity; Antiviral Activity; Anti-inflammatory; Anti-ulcer; Antitumor; Antioxidant; Hepatoprotective Activity; Dermatological Effect; Antidepressant and Memory-Enhancing Activity; Other Effects; Phytochemistry; Flavonoids; Saponins; Phenolic Compounds; Coumarins; Essential Oils and Other Compounds; Side Effects and Toxicity; Conclusion; References Amino AcidSaponins; Terpenoids (Isoprenoids); Abscisic Acid (ABA); Lycopene and b-Carotene; Oxyphytosterol; Phytosterols/Stanols; Conclusion; Future Consideration; References; Antianxiety Activities Associated with Herbal Drugs: A Review; Introduction; Allopathic Anxiolytic Agents, Pharmacodynamics, and Disadvantages; Plants Having Anxiolytic Effects; Ashwagandha; Kava; St. John's-Wort; Brahmi; Passionflower; Siberian Ginseng; Star Flower; Ginseng; Salvia reuterana; Ginkgo; American Skullcap; Valerian; Damiana; Nees; Safed Musli; Griseb; Clary; Mugwort; Magnoliaceae Antidiabetes Effects of Artemisia absinthiumAnticancer Activity of Artemisia absinthium; Gastrointestinal Effects of Artemisia absinthium; Antioxidant Activity of Artemisia absinthium; Immunomodulatory Effect of Artemisia absinthium; Central Nervous System and Epileptic Effects of Artemisia absinthium; Anti-obesity Effects of Artemisia absinthium; Antifertility Effects of Artemisia absinthium; Toxicity and Interaction of Artemisia absinthium; References; Dietary Phytochemicals and Their Potential Effects on Diabetes Mellitus 2; Introduction; Pathogenesis; Dietary Phytochemicals; Polyphenols Comparison of Anxiolytic Activity of Herbal Plant Against Allopathic FormulationsConclusion; References; Medicinal Plants in the Treatment of Arthritis; Introduction; Causes; Epidemiology; Need for Herbal Drugs for the Management of RA; Medicinal Plants with Antiarthritic Potential; Arctium lappa; Artemisia absinthium L.; Senna; Citrus medica L.; Clematis ochroleuca; Colchicum autumnale; Cuscuta epithymum; Asafoetida; Black Caraway; Rhubarb Root; China Root; Nux Vomica; Karanja; Punarnava; Haritaki; Avocado; Cat's Claw; Tayuya; Chuchuhuasi; Carrapicho; Guaco; Shallaki; Sarasaparilla Glycyrrhiza glabra (Licorice) in Turkmenistan: Medicinal and Biological AspectsIntroduction; Medicinal Value of Licorice (G. glabra); Industrial Aspects; Conclusions; References; Chemical Composition and Biological Uses of Artemisia absinthium (Wormwood); Introduction; Historical Background of Artemisia absinthium; Medicinal Importance of Artemisia absinthium; Taxonomy; Phytochemistry of Artemisia absinthium; Active Constituents; Antimicrobial Activity of Artemisia absinthium; Adaptogenic and Nootropic Activity of Artemisia absinthium; Forced Swimming Test (FST); Tail Suspension Test
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by David Edwards.
    Contents:
    Using GenBank / Eric W. Sayers and Ilene Karsch-Mizrachi
    UniProtKB/Swiss-Prot, the manually annotated section of the UniProt knowledgebase : how to use the entry view / Emmanuel Boutet ... [et al.]
    KEGG bioinformatics resource for plant genomics and metabolomics / Minoru Kanehisa
    Plant pathway databases / Pankaj Jaiswal and Björn Usadel
    Plant ontology : a tool for plant genomics / Laurel Cooper and Pankaj Jaiswal
    Ensembl plants : integrating tools for visualizing, mining, and analyzing plant genomics data / Dan Bolser ... [et al.]
    Gramene : a resource for comparative analysis of plants genomes and pathways / Marcela Karey Tello-Ruiz ... [et al.]
    PGSB/MIPS plant genome information resources and concepts for the analysis of complex grass genomes / Manuel Spannagl ... [et al.]
    MaizeGDB : the maize genetics and genomics database / Lisa Harper ... [et al.]
    WheatGenome.info : a resource for wheat genomics resource / Kaitao Lai
    User guidelines for the brassica database : BRAD / Xiaobo Wang, Feng Cheng, and Xiaowu Wang
    TAG sequence identification of genomic regions using TAGdb / Pradeep Ruperao
    Short read alignment using SOAP2 / Bhavna Hurgobin
    Tablet : visualizing next-generation sequence assemblies and mappings / Iain Milne ... [et al.]
    Analysis of genotyping-by-sequencing (GBS) data / Sateesh Kagale ... [et al.]
    Skim-based genotyping by sequencing using a double haploid population to call SNPs, infer gene conversions, and improve genome assemblies / Philipp Emanuel Bayer
    Finding and characterizing repeats in plant genomes / Jacques Nicolas, Pierre Peterlongo, and Sébastien Tempel
    Analysis of RNA-Seq data using TopHat and cufflinks / Sreya Ghosh and Chon-Kit Kenneth Chan.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Anja Geitmann, Joseph Gril, editors.
    Summary: This book provides important insights into the operating principles of plants by highlighting the relationship between structure and function. It describes the quantitative determination of structural and mechanical parameters, such as the material properties of a tissue, in correlation with specific features, such as the ability of the tissue to conduct water or withstand bending forces, which will allow advanced analysis in plant biomechanics. This knowledge enables researchers to understand the developmental changes that occur in plant organs over their life span and under the influence of environmental factors. The authors provide an overview of the state of the art of plant structure and function and how they relate to the mechanical behavior of the organism, such as the ability of plants to grow against the gravity vector or to withstand the forces of wind. They also show the sophisticated strategies employed by plants to effect organ movement and morphogenesis in the absence of muscles or cellular migration. As such, this book not only appeals to scientists currently working in plant sciences and biophysics, but also inspires future generations to pursue their own research in this area.

    Contents:
    Organ and Tissue Mechanics
    Wood cell wall structure and organization in relation to mechanics
    Modelling, evaluation and biomechanical consequences of growth stress profiles inside tree stems
    Bending stress in plant stems: Models and assumptions
    Tree mechanics and wind loading
    Growth, Morphogenesis & Motion
    The mechanics of leaf growth on large scales
    Twisting growth in plant roots
    Plants at bodybuilding: development of plant "muscles"
    Modeling plant morphogenesis: An introduction
    Mechanical conflicts in growth heterogeneity
    Folding, wrinkling and buckling in plant cell walls
    Structural principles in the design of hygroscopically moving plant cells
    Using modeling to understand the hygromechanical and hysteretic behavior of the S2 cell wall layer of wood
    Molecular Underpinnings of Cell Wall Mechanics
    Calcium-pectin chemistry and biomechanics: Biological background and mathematical modelling
    Cell wall expansion as viewed by the creep method
    Tensile testing of primary plant cells and tissues.+- Water Transport, Mechanosensing & Biomimetics
    Water motion and sugar translocation in leaves
    Molecular mechanisms of mechanosensing and mechanotransduction
    Biomechanics and functional morphology of plants
    inspiration for biomimetic materials and structures.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Guanqun Chen, Randall J. Weselake, Stacy D. Singer, editors.
    Summary: Among the major challenges facing society today, seeking renewable alternatives to petroleum-based fuels and manufactured goods is critically important to reducing society's dependency on petroleum and tackling environmental issues associated with petroleum use. In recent years there has been considerable research targeted toward the development of plant-derived bioproducts to replace petrochemical feedstocks for both fuel and manufacturing. Plants not only provide a large amount of renewable biomass, but their biochemical diversity also offers many chemical and molecular tools for the production of new products through biotechnology. Plant Bioproducts is an introduction to the production and application of plant bioproducts, including biofuels, bioplastics, and biochemicals for the manufacturing sector. Contributing authors examine various bioproducts with respect to their basic chemistry, relationship to current petrochemical-based products, and strategies for their production in plants. Chapters cover the integrated roles of agronomy, plant breeding, biotechnology, and biorefining in the context of bioproduct development. Environmental, economic, ethical, and social issues surrounding bioproducts, including the use of genetically modified crops, challenges to food security, and consumer acceptance, are also covered.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Editor Biographies;
    Chapter 1: Building a Case forPlant Bioproducts; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Towards Closing the Carbon Cycle; 1.3 Why Plant Bioproducts?; 1.4 Closing Comments; References;
    Chapter 2: Introduction to Plant Biomolecules and Cellular Metabolism; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Atoms and Molecules; 2.3 Lipids; 2.4 Carbohydrates; 2.5 Amino Acids and Proteins; 2.6 Biochemical Reactions Are Catalyzed by Enzymes; 2.7 Elementary Plant Metabolism; 2.8 Structural Diversity as a Major Advantage for Bioproducts; References 4.7 Improving Biodiesel ThroughModification ofPlant Storage Lipid Biosynthesis4.7.1 Seed Oil Biosynthesis; 4.7.2 Strategies forAltering Plant Fatty Acid Composition forImproved Biodiesel Quality; 4.7.3 Strategies forEnhancing Seed Oil Content toIncrease Supplies ofBiodiesel Feedstocks; 4.8 Applications forBy-Products ofBiodiesel Production: Maximizing theValue ofBiodiesel Feedstocks; 4.9 Closing Comments; References;
    Chapter 5: Production ofOther Bioproducts fromPlant Oils; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Industrial Feedstocks; 5.2.1 Fatty Acids; 5.2.1.1 Medium-Chain Saturated Fatty Acids 5.2.1.2 Monounsaturated Fatty Acids5.2.1.3 Unusual Fatty Acids; 5.2.2 Plant-Derived Wax Esters; 5.2.3 Lipid-Derived Polymers; 5.2.3.1 Bioplastics; 5.2.3.2 Natural Rubber; 5.3 Production of Bioactive Oils in Plants; 5.3.1 Very Long-Chain Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids; 5.3.2 Conjugated Linolenic Acids; 5.4 Challenges Associated with the Metabolic Engineering of Lipid Composition in Plants; 5.4.1 Preference of Kennedy Pathway Acyltransferases for Particular Substrates; 5.4.2 The Importance of Acyl Transfer from Phosphatidylcholine to Triacylglycerol in Fatty Acid Composition; 5.5 Closing Comments
    Chapter 3: An Integrated Approach to Plant Bioproduct Production 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Plant Breeding and Agronomy; 3.3 Plant Biotechnology, Genomics, and Modern Plant Breeding; 3.4 The Biorefinery; 3.5 Bioproduct Development and the Social Sciences; References;
    Chapter 4: Production of Biodiesel from Plant Oils; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 What Is Biodiesel?; 4.3 Other Types of Fuel Produced from Plant Oils; 4.4 Advantages and Challenges of Biodiesel Versus Petroleum-Derived Diesel; 4.5 Structure/Function Relationships Influencing Biodiesel Performance; 4.6 Sources of Plant-Derived Biodiesel
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    S.M. Paul Khurana, Rajarshi Kumar Gaur, editors.
    Summary: Refinement in sequencing technologies and potential of genomic research resulted in meteoric growth of biological information such as sequences of DNA, RNA and protein requiring databases for efficient storage, management and retrieval of the biological information. Also, computational algorithms for analysis of these colossal data became a vital aspect of biological sciences. The work aims to show the process of turning bioscience innovation into companies and products, covering the basic science, the translation of science into technology. Due to rapid developments, there seems to be no basic difference between the pharmaceutical industry and the biotechnological industry. However, approved products in the pipeline and renewed public confidence make it one of the most promising areas of economic growth in the near future. India offers a huge market for the products as well as cheap manufacturing base for export. The book is a sincere work of compilation of new and recent advances in the topic of concern through various innovative researches and scientific opinion therefrom. The book is dedicated to the readers who will definitely find it interesting and knowledgeable in carrying out their respective researches in different aspects of applied microbiology and biotechnology.

    Contents:
    Selected Innovative Solutions for the Regulation of GM crops in times of Gene Editing
    Principles and Implications of various genome enrichment approaches for targeted sequencing of plant genomes
    Genomic intervention in wheat improvement
    Current Trends in Biotechnology: from genome sequence to crop improvement
    Emergence of Medicagotruncatula as a model for legume genomics
    Genomics and supporting factors involved in plant response to abiotic and biotic stress accompanied with molecular mechanism
    Genome editing: Advances and Prospects
    Bioinformatics Intervention In Plant Biotechnology In The Era of Genomics: An Overview
    Plant Oil Biodiesel: Technologies for Commercial Production, Present Status and Future Prospects
    Effect of nanomaterials and their possible implication on the plants
    Generating bioelectricity from different organic residues using microbial fuel cells
    Progress and Prospects in the Production of Cellulosic Ethanol
    Importance of Actinobacteria for Bioremediation
    Medicinal properties and health benefits of Withania somnifera
    Active compounds and Bacteria harbouring capacity of Lichens and its medicinal use in bacterial and cancer infections
    Symbiosis between Sebacinales and Aloe vera
    Nanotechnological Interventions For Improving Plant Health And Productivity
    Root nodule development in model versus non-canonical plants
    CRISPR Applications in Plant Genetic Engineering and Biotechnology
    Defense mechanism and diverse actions of fungal biological control agents against plant biotic stresses
    Role of ROS in induction signalling mediated defense in Plants against abiotic stresses
    Plant viruses as Virus Induced Gene Silencing (VIGS) vectors
    Post-transcriptional gene silencing as a tool for controlling viruses in plants
    Plant platform for therapeutic monoclonal antibody production
    Droplet digital PCR for absolute quantification of plant pathogens
    Diagnostics for citrus greening disease (Huang longbing): current and emerging technologies
    Chloroplast proteins & virus interplay: a pathfinder to crop improvement.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mohamed Ramadan Rady.
    Summary: Plant tissue culture and advanced biotechnologies have proven to be influential tools that complement conventional breeding and accelerate development of many medicinal plants. Various approaches, such as pathway engineering, precursor feeding, transformation, elicitation with biotic and abiotic elicitors and scaling up in bioreactors, have been explored to improve the production of secondary metabolites from different medicinal plants. This book provides a comprehensive description of various studies, carried out on in vitro culture and hairy root cultures of Catharanthus roseus, Silybum marianum and Digitalis species which have been considered as alternative sources for the production of anti-tumour compounds, flavonolignans and cardenolides. Specific focus is on elicitation strategy for increasing production of bioactive compounds of C. roseus L., S. marianum and Digitalis species to overcome the constrains of conventional propagation. This book is valuable for researchers or students working on medicinal plants, phytochemistry, and plant tissue culture. It also serves as a reference for the pharmaceutical industry.

    Contents:
    1. Terpenoid indole alkaloid production from in vitro culture of Catharanthus roseus through biotic, abiotic elicitation and precursors feeding
    2. Biotic elicitation and TIA production from in vitro cultures of C.roseus
    3. Precursor feeding and TIA production from in vitro cultures of C.roseus
    4. Conclusion and future aspects
    5. Terpenoid indole alkaloid production from in vitro culture of Silybum marianum through biotic, abiotic elicitation and precursors feeding
    6. Biotic elicitation and TIA production from in vitro cultures of S. marianum
    7. Precursor feeding and TIA production from in vitro cultures of S. marianum
    8. Conclusion and future aspects
    9. Terpenoid indole alkaloid production from in vitro culture of Digitalis species through biotic, abiotic elicitation and precursors feeding
    10. Biotic elicitation and TIA production from in vitro cultures of Digitalis species
    11. Precursor feeding and TIA production from in vitro cultures of Digitalis species
    12. Conclusion and future aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ajit Varma, Swati Tripathi, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights recent advances in the field of plant-biotic interactions and explores current serious issues in the crop production industry. It is intended to attract more attention to these important, but often overlooked areas, and to stimulate new ideas for future research. Plants are constantly under attack by pathogens, pests, and parasites, which can significantly impact worldwide food production and human health. While pathogens and pests attack and interconnect with their hosts in a variety of ways, plants have developed sophisticated immune systems to fight infections. In the field of plant-biotic interactions, most of the studies to date have focused on the function and signaling pathways of plant disease resistance proteins and pattern recognition receptors, as well as pathogen effector proteins. In contrast, this book presents new and emerging research areas, and introduces students, researchers, academics, and policy advisors to the latest trends in e.g. microbial technology, environmental microbiology, agricultural science, the health sciences, biological sciences and other related disciplines.

    Contents:
    Endophytic Microorganisms as Biological Control Agents for Plant Pathogens: A Panacea for Sustainable Agriculture
    Plant
    Phytophthora Interaction Proteomics
    Impact of Climate Change on Soil- Microbial Community
    Industrial Effluents: Impact on Agricultural Soils and Microbial Diversity
    Plant Metabolites Involved in Plant-Pathogen Interactions
    Management of Root Knot Nematode in Different Crops Using Microorganisms
    Plant Growth Promoting Bacterial Life at High Salt Concentrations: Genetic Variability
    Rhizosphere: A Home for Human Pathogens
    Effect of Organic Farming on Structural and Functional diversity of Soil Microbiome- Benefits and Risks
    Plants for Biocontrol and Biological Control of Plant Pathogens
    Entomopathogenic Nematodes in Biological Control of Insect Pests with Reference to Insect Immunity
    Interaction Between Aromatic Oil Components and Bacterial Targets
    Enhancement of Active Constituents of Medicinal Plants Through the Use of Microbes
    Effect of Agnihotra Ash on Drug Resistant Escherichia coli in water
    Plant Microbe Interface: The Plant Antimicrobial Peptides
    Microbe Mediated Abiotic Stress Alleviation: Molecular and Biochemical Basis
    Microbial Diversity in Soil: Biological Tools for Abiotic Stress Management in Plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    P. M. Priyadarshan.
    Summary: This book offers a detailed overview of both conventional and modern approaches to plant breeding. In 25 chapters, it explores various aspects of conventional and modern means of plant breeding, including: history, objective, activities, centres of origin, plant introduction, reproduction, incompatibility, sterility, biometrics, selection, hybridization, methods of breeding both self- and cross- pollinated crops, heterosis, synthetic varieties, induced mutations and polyploidy, distant hybridization, quality breeding, ideotype breeding, resistance breeding, breeding for stress resistance, G x E interactions, tissue culture, genetic engineering, molecular breeding, genomics, gene action and varietal release. The book's content addresses the needs of students worldwide. Modern methods like molecular breeding and genomics are dealt with extensively so as to provide a firm foundation and equip readers to read further advanced books. Each chapter discusses the respective subject as comprehensively as possible, and includes a section on further reading at the end. Info-boxes highlight the latest advances, and care has been taken to include nearly all topics required under the curricula of MS programs. As such, the book provides a much-needed reference guide for MS students around the globe.

    Contents:
    Part I. General Topics
    1. Introduction
    2. Objectives, Activities and Centres of Origin
    3. Plant Introduction
    Part II. Developmental Aspects
    4. Mode of Reproduction and Breeding Systems in Plants
    5. Incompatibility
    6. Sterility
    7. Biometrics and Informatics
    Part III. Breeding Methods
    8. Selection
    9. Backcross Method of Selection
    10. Hybridization
    11. Breeding Self-pollinated Crops
    12. Breeding Cross-Pollinated Crops
    13. Inbred Line Development
    14. Population Improvement
    Part IV. Specialized Breeding
    15. Heterosis
    16. Hybrids and Synthetic Cultivars
    17. Induced Mutations and Polyploidy Breeding
    18. Distant Hybridization
    19. Quality Breeding
    20. Ideotype Breeding and Multi-trait Selection
    21. Host Plant Resistance Breeding
    22. Breeding for Stress Adaptation
    23. Genotype-By-Environment Interactions
    Part V. Plant Biotechnology
    24. Tissue Culture
    25. Genetic Engineering
    26. Molecular Breeding
    27. Genomics in Plant Breeding
    Part VI Intellectual Property Management
    28. Intellectual Property Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Charles T. Anderson, Elizabeth S. Haswell, Ram Dixit.
    Summary: "Plant Cell Biology, volume 160 in "Methods in Cell Biology", includes chapters on modern experimental procedures and applications developed for research in the broad area of plant cell biology. Topics covered in this volume include techniques for imaging and analyzing membrane dynamics and movement across membranes; cell wall composition, structure and mechanics; cytoskeleton dynamics and organization; cell development; ion channel physiology; cell mechanics; and methods related to quantifying cell morphogenesis."--publisher's web page, viewed September 7, 2020.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by José M. Estevez.
    Contents:
    Penium margaritaceum as a model organism for cell wall analysis of expanding plant cells / Maja G. Rydahl ... [et al.]
    Using chemical genomics to study cell wall formation and cell growth in Arabidopsis thaliana and Penium margaritaceum / N. Worden ... [et al.]
    Optimized method for growing in vitro Arabidopsis thaliana pollen tubes / Cecilia Borassi ... [et al.]
    Imaging of calcium dynamics in pollen tube cytoplasm / María Laura Barberini and Jorge Muschietti
    Live imaging of root hairs / Silvia M. Velasquez, Jose R. Dinneny, and José M. Estevez
    Improved ROS measurement in root hair cells / Paola Silvina Denita Juárez, Silvina Mangano, and José M. Estevez
    Root hair assay to expedite cell death research / Joanna Kacprzyk and Paul F. McCabe
    Vacuolar staining methods in plant cells / David Scheuring ... [et al.]
    Live cell imaging of FM4-64, a tool for tracing the endocytic pathways in Arabidopsis root cells / Adeline Rigal, Siamsa M. Doyle, and Stéphanie Robert
    Salt-stress regulation of root system growth and architecture in Arabidopsis seedlings / Lina Duan, Jose Sebastian, and Jose R. Dinneny
    Quantification of fluorescent reporters in plant cells / Michael Pound, Andrew P. French, and Darren M. Wells
    Live cell imaging of the cytoskeleton and cell wall enzymes in plant cells / Arun Sampathkumar and Raymond Wightman
    Using the split-ubiquitin yeast two-hybrid system to test protein-protein interactions of transmembrane proteins / Logan Bashline and Ying Gu
    Activation tag screening for cell expansion genes in Arabidopsis thaliana / Chaowen Xiao and Charles T. Anderson
    BiFC for protein-protein interactions and protein topology : discussing an integrative approach for an old technique / Giovanni Stefano, Luciana Renna, and Federica Brandizzi
    N-Glycosylation and plant cell growth / Christiane Veit, Ulrike Vavra, and Richard Strasser
    Peptide separation methodologies for in-depth proteomics / Sajad Majeed Zargar ... [et al.]
    Structural and mechanical characterization of growing Arabidopsis plant cell walls / Friederike Saxe, Ingo Burgert, and Michaela Eder.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Viktor Žárský, Fatima Cvrčková.
    Contents:
    Essential Methods of Plant Sample Preparation for Light Microscopy / Aleš Soukup and Edita Tylová
    Selected Simple Methods of Plant Cell Wall Histochemistry and Staining for Light Microscopy / Aleš Soukup
    Resin Embedding, Sectioning and Immunocytochemical Analyses of Plant Cell Walls in Hard Tissues / Kieran J.D. Lee and J. Paul Knox
    Automated Microscopy in Forward Genetic Screening of Arabidopsis / Tereza Dobisová and Jan Hejátko
    Image Analysis: Basic Procedures for Description of Plant Structures / Jana Albrechtová, Zuzana Kubínová, Aleš Soukup, and Jiří Janáček
    Identifying Subcellular Protein Localization with Fluorescent Protein Fusions After Transient Expression in Onion Epidermal Cells / Andreas Nebenführ
    Visualizing and Quantifying the in vivo Structure and Dynamics of the Arabidopsis Cortical Cytoskeleton using CLSM and VAEM / Amparo Rosero, Viktor Žárský, and Fatima Cvrčková
    Sequential Replicas for In Vivo Imaging of Growing Organ Surfaces / Dorota Kwiatkowska and Agata Burian
    Time-lapse Imaging of Developing Meristems using Confocal Laser Scanning Microscope / Olivier Hamant, Pradeep Das, and Agata Burian
    Quantifying Cell Shape and Gene Expression in the Shoot Apical Meristem using MorphoGraphX / Pierre Barbier de Reuille, Sarah Robinson, and Richard S. Smith
    Mechanical Measurements on Living Plant Cells by Micro-indentation with Cellular Force Microscopy / Anne-Lise Routier-Kierzkowska and Richard S. Smith
    High-pressure Freezing and Low-temperature Processing of Plant Tissue Samples for Electron Microscopy / Ichirou Karahara and Byung-Ho Kang
    Reconstructing Plant Cells in 3D by Serial Section Electron Tomography Kiminori Toyooka and Byung-Ho Kang
    Imaging Plant Nuclei and Membrane-associated Cytoskeleton by Field Emission Scanning Electron Microscopy / Jindřiška Fišerová and Martin W. Goldberg
    Immunogold Labeling of Resin-embedded Electron Microscopical Sections / Ilse Foissner and Margit Hoeftberger
    Live Cell Imaging of Arabidopsis Root Hairs / Tijs Ketelaar
    Morphological Analysis of Cell Growth Mutants in Physcomitrella / Jeffrey P. Bibeau and Luis Vidali
    Plant Cell Lines in Cell Morphogenesis Research / Daniela Seifertová, Petr Klíma, Markéta Pařezová, Jan Petrášek, Eva Zažímalová, and Zdeněk Opatrný
    Antisense Oligodeoxynucleotide-mediated Gene Knockdown in Pollen Tubes / Radek Bezvoda, Roman Pleskot, Viktor Žárský, and Martin Potocký
    Lab-on-a-Chip for Studying Growing Pollen Tubes / Carlos G. Agudelo, Muthukumaran Packirisamy, and Anja Geitmann
    Laser Microdissection of Plant Cells / Yvonne Ludwig and Frank Hochholdinger
    Optical Trapping in Plant Cells / Tijs Ketelaar, Norbert de Ruijter, and Stefan Niehren
    Heterologous Expression in Budding Yeast as a Tool for Studying the Plant Cell Morphogenesis Machinery / Fatima Cvrčková and Michal Hála .
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Glenn R. Hicks, Stéphanie Robert.
    Contents:
    Fully-automated Compound Screening in Arabidopsis thaliana Seedlings
    Time-profiling Fluorescent Reporters in the Arabidopsis Root
    Screening for Bioactive Small Molecules by in vivo Monitoring of Luciferase-based Reporter Gene Expression in Arabidopsis thaliana
    Application of Yeast-two Hybrid Assay to Chemical Genomic Screens: A High-throughput System to Identify Novel Molecules Modulating Plant Hormone Receptor Complexes
    High-throughput Screening of Small Molecule Libraries for Inducers of Plant Defense Responses
    Using a Reverse Genetics Approach to Investigate Small Molecule Activity
    Investigating the Phytohormone Ethylene Response Pathway by Chemical Genetics
    Screening for Inhibitors of Chloroplast Galactolipid Synthesis Acting in membrano and in Planta
    Forward Chemical Screening of Small RNA Pathways
    Identification and Use of Fluorescent Dyes for Plant Cell Wall Imaging Using High-Throughput Screening
    High-throughput Identification of Chemical Endomembrane Cycling Disruptors Utilizing Tobacco Pollen
    Plant Chemical Genomics: Gravity Sensing and Response
    Screening Chemical Libraries for Compounds that Affect Protein Sorting to the Yeast Vacuole
    The use of Multi-drug Approach to Uncover New Players of the Endomembrane System Trafficking Machinery
    Cheminformatic Analysis of High-Throughput Compound Screens
    Endomembrane Dissection Using Chemically-Induced Bioactive Clusters
    Statistical Molecular Design: A Tool to Follow Up Hits From Small Molecule Screening
    Early Stage Hit Triage for Plant Chemical Genetic Screens and Target Site Identification
    Screening for Gene Function using the FOX (Full-length cDNA OvereXpressor gene) Hunting System
    Quantification of Stable Isotope Label in Metabolites via Mass Spectrometry
    1H NMR Based Metabolomics Methods for Chemical Genomics Experiments
    Determination of Auxin Transport Parameters on the Cellular Level
    Analyzing the in vivo Status of Exogenously Applied Auxins: A HPLC-based Method to Characterize the Intracellularly Localized Auxin Transporters.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Dorothee Staiger.
    Summary: "Plant Circadian Networks: Methods and Protocols provides a collection of protocols to investigate clock-controlled parameters including transcript and small RNA levels, promoter activity using luciferase reporters, protein levels and posttranslational modification, protein-protein interaction, in vivo DNA-protein interaction and RNA-protein interaction, cellular redox state, Ca2+ levels, and innate immune responses. Furthermore, the use of bioinformatics resources is described to evaluate high throughput data sets and to integrate the data into an overarching picture of circadian networks in the cell. Additional chapters focus on seasonal processes like flowering time control, and techniques on trees, moss and algae. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and key tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Authoritative and practical, Plant Circadian Networks: Methods and Protocols is designed not only for the chronobiology community dealing with circadian biology but also for the plant community in general."--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Dirk K. Hincha, Ellen Zuther.
    Contents:
    Introduction : plant cold acclimation and freezing tolerance / Dirk K. Hincha and Ellen Zuther
    Measuring freezing tolerance : survival and regrowth assays / Daniel Z. Skinner and Kimberly Garland-Campbell
    Measuring freezing tolerance : electrolyte leakage and chlorophyll fluorescence assays / Anja Thalhammer, Dirk K. Hincha, and Ellen Zuther
    Conducting field trials for frost tolerance breeding in cereals / Luigi Cattivelli
    A whole-plant screening test to identify genotypes with superior freezing tolerance / Annick Bertrand, Yves Castonguay, and Josée Bourassa
    Mapping of quantitative trait loci (QTL) associated with plant freezing tolerance and cold acclimation / Evelyne Téoulé and Carine Géry
    Common garden experiments to characterize cold acclimation responses in plants from different climatic regions / Andrey V. Malyshev, Hugh A.L. Henry, and Juergen Kreyling
    Identification of Arabidopsis mutants with altered freezing tolerance / Carlos Perea-Resa and Julio Salinas
    Infrared thermal analysis of plant freezing processes / Gilbert Neuner and Edith Kuprian
    Cryo-scanning electron microscopy to study the freezing behavior of plant tissues / Seizo Fujikawa and Keita Endoh
    Three-dimensional reconstruction of frozen and thawed plant tissues from microscopic images / David P. Livingston III and Tan D. Tuong
    Proteomic approaches to identify cold-regulated soluble proteins / Stefanie Döll, Rico Lippmann, and Hans-Peter Mock
    Proteomic approaches to identify cold-regulated plasma membrane proteins / Daisuke Takahashi [and four others]
    Profiling methods to identify cold-regulated primary metabolites using gas chromatography coupled to mass spectrometry / Frederik Dethloff [and eigt others]
    A lipidomic approach to identify cold-induced changes in Arabidopsis membrane lipid composition / Hieu Sy Vu [and three others]
    Quantification of superoxide and hydrogen peroxide in leaves / Ilona Juszczak and Margarete Baier
    Estimating ice encasement tolerance of herbage plants / Bjarni E. Gudleifsson and Brynhildur Bjarnadottir
    Characterization of ice binding proteins from sea ice algae / Maddalena Bayer-Giraldi, EonSeon Jin, and Peter W. Wilson
    Isolation and characterization of ice-binding proteins from higher plants / Adam J. Middleton [and five others].
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mallappa Kumara Swamy, editor.
    Summary: Plants produce a vast number of bioactive compounds with different chemical scaffolds, which modulate a diverse range of molecular targets and are used as drugs for treating numerous diseases. Most present-day medicines are derived either from plant compounds or their derivatives, and plant compounds continue to offer limitless reserves for the discovery of new medicines. While different classes of plant compounds, like phenolics, flavonoids, saponins and alkaloids, and their potential pharmacological applications are currently being explored, their curative mechanisms are yet to be understood in detail. This book is divided into 2 volumes and offers detailed information on plant-derived bioactive compounds, including recent research findings. Volume 1, "Plant-derived Bioactives: Chemistry and Mode of Action" discusses the chemistry of highly valued plant bioactive compounds and their mode of actions at the molecular level. Volume 2, "Plant-derived Bioactives: Production, Properties and Therapeutic Applications" explores the sources, biosynthesis, production, biological properties and therapeutic applications of plant bioactives. Given their scope, these books are valuable resources for members of the scientific community wishing to further explore various medicinal plants and the therapeutic applications of their bioactive compounds. They appeal to scholars, teachers and scientists involved in plant product research, and facilitate the development of new drugs.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    About the Book
    Contents
    About the Editor
    1: Orientin: A C-Glycosyl Flavonoid that Mitigates Colorectal Cancer
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Flavonoid's Role in Cancer Prevention
    1.3 About Orientin
    1.3.1 Chemistry
    1.3.2 Natural Occurrence
    1.3.3 Pharmacological Properties
    1.4 Experimental Colorectal Carcinogenesis
    1.4.1 HT29 (Human Colorectal Adenocarcinoma) Cell Line
    1.4.2 Chemically Induced Animal Models
    1.4.2.1 DMH-Induced Experimental Colon Carcinogenesis
    1.4.2.2 Metabolism of DMH 1.5 Orientin Against Colon Cancer in Different Ways
    1.5.1 Body Weight, Growth Rate, and Polyp's Incidence
    1.5.2 Lipid Peroxidation and Antioxidant Status
    1.5.3 Xenobiotic Metabolizing Enzymes
    1.5.4 ACF Formation
    1.5.5 Tumor Marker Levels
    1.5.6 Mast Cell Infiltration
    1.5.7 Tumor Cell Proliferation
    1.5.8 NF-B and Inflammatory Cytokine Expression
    1.5.9 Pro-Inflammatory Enzymes
    1.5.10 Cell Cycle Arrest
    1.5.11 Apoptosis
    1.6 Conclusions
    References
    2: Plant Flavonoids Against Colorectal Cancer and Mechanisms of Action
    2.1 Introduction 2.2 Bacterial Enzymes and Colon Cancer
    2.3 Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) and Cancer
    2.4 Flavonoid
    2.5 Functional Flavonoids as Antioxidants
    2.5.1 Eriodictyol
    2.5.2 Umbelliferone
    2.5.3 Luteolin
    2.6 Conclusions
    References
    3: Plant Neoflavonoids: Chemical Structures and Biological Functions
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Classification of Neoflavonoids
    3.2.1 Dalbergin Group
    3.2.2 Latifolin Group
    3.3 Biological Activities of Neoflavonoids
    3.3.1 Cytotoxic Activities
    3.3.2 Cardiovascular Activities
    3.3.3 Antidiabetic Activity 3.3.4 Antioxidant Activity
    3.3.5 Antiplasmodial Activity
    3.3.6 Anti-Allergic and Anti-Inflammatory Activities
    3.3.7 Anti-Melanogenic Activity
    3.3.8 Antimicrobial Activity
    3.3.9 Antileishmanial Activity
    3.3.10 Urease Inhibitor Activity
    3.3.11 Anti-Osteoporosis Activity
    3.4 Conclusions and Future Prospects
    References
    4: Polyphenols' Role in Autoimmune and Chronic Inflammatory Diseases and the Advent of Computer-Driven Plant Therapies
    4.1 Introduction 4.2 Major Biomarkers in the Progression of Chronic Inflammatory Diseases and Atherosclerosis under the Perspective of Autoimmunity
    4.3 Polyphenol-Driven Modulation of Signalling Pathways in both Chronic Inflammation and Autoimmune Pathologies
    4.4 Challenges and Progress in Herbal Therapies
    4.5 Computer-Aided Approaches in Polyphenolic Therapies
    4.6 Conclusions
    References
    5: Plant Alkaloids: Structures and Bioactive Properties
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Classification of Plant Alkaloids
    5.2.1 True Alkaloids (Heterocyclics)
    5.2.1.1 Pyrrole Alkaloids
    5.2.1.2 Pyrrolidine Alkaloids.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mallappa Kumara Swamy, editor.
    Summary: Plants produce a vast number of bioactive compounds with different chemical scaffolds, which modulate a diverse range of molecular targets and are used as drugs for treating numerous diseases. Most present-day medicines are derived either from plant compounds or their derivatives, and plant compounds continue to offer limitless reserves for the discovery of new medicines. While different classes of plant compounds, like phenolics, flavonoids, saponins and alkaloids, and their potential pharmacological applications are currently being explored, their curative mechanisms are yet to be understood in detail. This book is divided into 2 volumes and offers detailed information on plant-derived bioactive compounds, including recent research findings. Volume 1, Plant-derived Bioactives: Chemistry and Mode of Action, discusses the chemistry of highly valued plant bioactive compounds and their mode of actions at the molecular level. Volume 2, Plant-derived Bioactives: Production, Properties and Therapeutic Applications, explores the sources, biosynthesis, production, biological properties and therapeutic applications of plant bioactives. Given their scope, these books are valuable resources for members of the scientific community wishing to further explore various medicinal plants and the therapeutic applications of their bioactive compounds. They appeal to scholars, teachers and scientists involved in plant product research, and facilitate the development of innovative new drugs. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editor
    Molecular Approaches to Screen Bioactive Compounds from Medicinal Plants
    1 Introduction
    2 Medicinal Plants
    3 Bioactive Compounds in Medicinal Plants
    3.1 Secondary Metabolites
    3.2 Bioactive Peptides
    4 Screening of the Bioactive Compounds
    4.1 Extraction
    4.1.1 Conventional Extraction Techniques
    Soxhlet's Extractor
    Maceration
    Hydrodistillation
    Sonification
    4.1.2 Non-conventional Extraction Techniques
    Ultrasound-Assisted Extraction (UAE)
    Pulsed-Electric Field Extraction (PEF) 5 Essential Oil Isolation Methods
    6 Healing Characteristics of Essential Oils
    6.1 Action Against Viruses
    6.2 Action Against Bacteria
    6.3 Action Against Free Radicals
    6.4 Action Against Malignancy
    6.5 Action Against Fungi
    7 Challenges
    8 Metabolic Engineering Aspects
    8.1 Engineering Biosynthesis in Microbial Terpenoids
    8.2 Engineering Biosynthesis in Plant Terpenoids
    8.3 Engineering Biosynthesis in Plant Phenylpropanoids
    9 Case Study: Sandalwood Oil
    9.1 Initial Detection of the Gene and Full-Sequence cDNA Cloning
    9.2 Results of This Study 6.2 High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) and Ultra HPLC
    6.3 Hyphenated Chromatographic Techniques
    7 Conclusions and Future Prospects
    References
    Essential Oils: An Update on Their Biosynthesis and Genetic Strategies to Overcome the Production Challenges
    1 Introduction
    2 Sources and Plant Defense Responsibility
    3 Biosynthesis of Essential Oils
    3.1 The MVA Pathway
    3.2 The MEP Pathway
    3.3 Formation of Prenyldiphosphates
    3.4 The Shikimate Pathway
    4 Synthesis of Essential Oils
    4.1 From Cell and Callus Cultures
    4.2 From Hairy Root Cultures 9.2.1 The Functional Documentation of SaCYP76Fs of Clade I and II, In Vitro
    9.2.2 Discrete Sesquiterpene Mediated Clade I and II SaCYP76F Characterization
    9.2.3 Synthesis of Bergamotol and Santalols in Altered Yeast Cells
    9.3 Inferences from This Study
    10 Conclusions and Future Prospects
    References
    Biosynthesis of Secondary Metabolites in Plants as Influenced by Different Factors
    1 Introduction
    2 Metabolomics Engineering
    2.1 Approaches in Plant Metabolomics
    2.1.1 Targeted Metabolomics
    2.1.2 Un/Non-targeted Metabolomics Enzyme-Assisted Extraction (EAE)
    Microwave-Assisted Extraction (MAE)
    Pressurized Liquid Extraction (PLE)
    Supercritical Fluid Extraction (SFE)
    5 Identification and Characterization
    5.1 Thin-Layer Chromatography and Bio-autography Technique
    5.2 UV-Visible Spectroscopy
    5.3 Infrared Spectroscopy: Near-Infrared Spectroscopy and Mid-Infrared Spectroscopy
    5.4 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy (NMR)
    5.5 Mass Spectrometry
    6 Phytochemical Screening Assays
    6.1 Fourier-Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FTIR)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Imran Ul Haq, Siddra Ijaz, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an account of the classical and recent trends in plant sciences, which have contributed for disease management strategies in plants for sustainable agriculture. Advancements in the disciplines of biological sciences like biotechnology, microbiology, bioinformatics as well as information and communication technology etc has given the new dimensions for the development of new plant disease management strategies. By keeping this perspective in view, the editors collected and compiled the useful, practical and recent information regarding plant disease management from a diverse group of authors from different countries associated with well-reputed scientific, teaching and research organizations with the objective to update and equip the researchers with comprehensive and latest knowledge of plant disease management. This book is based on the knowledge of traditional and modern approaches for plant disease management. It has 15 chapters, each chapter describing the pillar strategies, which may be the possible way for crop protection from diseases. This effort deals with the history and recent trends in plant disease control, plant genetics and physiology in disease prognosis, conventional plant breeding program for disease resistance, synthetic chemicals: major component of plant disease management, biological antagonism: expected safe and sustainable way to manage plant diseases, soil microbes and plant health, conventional and modern technologies for the management of post-harvest diseases, nanobiotechnology, an innovative plant disease management approach, transgenic approaches in plants: strategic control for disease management, exploiting RNAi mechanism in plants for disease resistance, genome editing technologies for resistance against phytopathogens: principles, applications and future prospects, plant health clinics in Pakistan: operations and prospects, precision agriculture technologies for management of plant disease, quarantine and regulat ions and development and implementation of IDM program for annual and perennial crops.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: History and Recent Trends in Plant Disease Control: An Overview
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Plant Pathology: Food Safety and Security
    1.3 Brief History of Plant Pathology
    1.4 Basic Principles of Plant Disease Management
    1.5 Biological Control
    1.6 Integrated Plant Disease Management
    1.7 Recent Advances in Plant Disease Management
    References
    Chapter 2: Plant Genetics and Physiology in Disease Prognosis
    2.1 Introduction 2.2 Recent Trends in Biochemical and Molecular Detection of Plant Pathogens
    2.3 Physiology of Diseased Plants
    2.4 Rhizobacteria and Host Plants
    2.5 Induced Resistance Against Pathogen Infection
    References
    Chapter 3: Conventional Plant Breeding Program for Disease Resistance
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Disease Economic Impact
    3.2.1 Examples of Plant Diseases
    3.3 Pathogens Targeted by Plant Breeders
    3.3.1 Fungi
    3.3.2 Nematodes
    3.3.3 Protozoa and Algae
    3.3.4 Bacteria
    3.3.5 Actinomycetes
    3.3.6 Mycoplasmas and Spiroplasms
    3.3.7 Viruses and Viroids 3.11 Advantages of Breeding for Disease Resistance
    3.12 Problems in Breeding for Disease Resistance
    3.13 Breeding Challenges for Pathogen Resistance
    References
    Chapter 4: Synthetic Chemicals: Major Component of Plant Disease Management
    4.1 Historical Prospective of Chemicals for Plant Disease Control
    4.2 Basic Principles of Plant Disease Management with Synthetic Chemicals
    4.2.1 Fungicides
    4.2.2 Antibiotics
    4.2.3 Nematicides
    4.2.4 Viricides
    4.3 Application of Chemicals
    4.4 Human Civilization and Fungicides
    4.5 Classification of Fungicides 3.4 Management of Plant Diseases
    3.5 Genetics of Disease Resistance
    3.5.1 Vertical Resistance
    3.5.2 Horizontal Resistance
    3.6 Resistance Breeding Strategies
    3.6.1 Prioritize the Importance of Diseases
    3.6.2 Steps in Breeding for Disease Resistance
    3.6.2.1 Sources of Resistance Genes
    3.6.2.2 Utilization of Genetic Resource
    3.7 Planned Deployment of Resistance Genes
    3.7.1 Self-Pollinated Crops
    3.7.2 Cross-Pollinated Crops
    3.8 Evaluation
    3.9 Release to Growers
    3.10 Factors Affecting Expression of Disease Resistance 4.5.1 Mode of Action
    4.5.2 Classification Based on General Uses
    4.6 Recent Trends in Development of Synthetic Chemicals
    4.7 Broad Spectrum and New Chemistry Fungicides in Plant Disease Control
    4.8 Fungicide Market, Policies and Procedures
    4.9 Fungicide Resistance and Plant Pathogens
    References
    Chapter 5: Biological Antagonism: A Safe and Sustainable Way to Manage Plant Diseases
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Biological Control
    5.2.1 Terminology
    5.3 Biological Management of Fungal Plant Pathogens
    5.3.1 Beneficial Microbes and Plant Interaction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Frédérique Van Gijsegem, Jan M. van der Wolf, Ian K. Toth, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a detailed review of many different aspects of pathogens, from the effects of single base pair mutations to large-scale control options, bringing into a single volume over 100 years of findings from thousands of researchers worldwide. Diseases caused by soft rot Pectobacteriaceae (SRP) are a major cause of loss to crop, vegetables and ornamental plants worldwide, and have been found on all continents except Antarctica. While different aspects of the SRP have appeared in other books on plant disease, no book, until now, has been dedicated solely to them.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. General characteristics and history
    Chapter 2. Taxonomy and Evolution. I Toth, John Elphinstone
    Chapter 3 Environment to disease development. I Toth, Jacquie van der Walls, Kristyna Hromodova
    Chapter 4 Molecular plant pathogen interactions
    Chapter 5. Detection and diagnostics
    Chapter 6. Economic impact in potato cultures
    Chapter 7 Disease management
    Chapter 8. Soft rot diseases around the world
    Chapter 9. Outlook
    Chapter 10. Methodology section.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ernst-Detlef Schulze [and more] ; with contributions by Almust Arneth [and more].
    Summary: This completely updated and revised second edition provides a unique and up-to-date treatment of all aspects of plant ecology, making it an ideal textbook and reference work for students, researchers and practitioners. More than 500 high-quality images and drawings, mostly in colour, aid readers' understanding of various key topics, while the clear structure and straightforward style make it user friendly and particularly useful for students. Written by leading experts, it offers authoritative information, including relevant references. While Plant Ecology primarily addresses graduate students in biology and ecology, it is also a valuable resource for post-graduate students and researchers in botany, environmental sciences and landscape ecology, as well as all those whose study or work touches on agriculture, forestry, land use, and landscape management. Key Topics: - Molecular ecophysiology (molecular stress physiology: light, temperature, oxygen deficiency, water deficit (drought), unfavorable soil mineral conditions, biotic stress) - Physiological and biophysical plant ecology (ecophysiology of plants: thermal balance, water, nutrient, carbon relations) - Ecosystem ecology (characteristics of ecosystems, approaches how to study and how to model terrestrial ecosystems, biogeochemical fluxes in terrestrial ecosystems) - Community ecology and biological diversity (development of plant communities in time and space, interactions between plants and plant communities with the abiotic and the biotic environment, biodiversity and ecosystem functioning) - Global ecology (global biogeochemical cycles, Dynamic Global Vegetation Models, global change and terrestrial ecosystems).

    Contents:
    Introduction
    General Themes of Molecular Stress Physiology
    Light
    Temperature
    Oxygen Deficiency
    Water Deficiency (Drought)
    Adverse Soil Mineral Availability
    Biotic Stress
    Thermal Balance of Plants and Plant Communities
    Water Relations
    Nutrient Relations
    Carbon Relations
    Ecosystem Characteristics
    Approaches to Study Terrestrial Ecosystems
    Approaches to Model Processes at the Ecosystem Level
    Biogeochemical Fluxes in Terrestrial Ecosystems
    Development of Plant Communities in Time
    Spatial Distribution of Plants and Plant Communities
    Interactions between Plants, Plant Communities and the Abiotic and Biotic Environment
    Biodiversity
    Global Biogeochemical Cycles
    Dynamic Global Vegetation Models
    Global Change and Terrestrial Ecosystems.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the state-of-the-art in plant ecophysiology. With a particular focus on adaptation to a changing environment, it discusses ecophysiology and adaptive mechanisms of plants under climate change. Over the centuries, the incidence of various abiotic stresses such as salinity, drought, extreme temperatures, atmospheric pollution, metal toxicity due to climate change have regularly affected plants and, and some estimates suggest that environmental stresses may reduce the crop yield by up to 70%. This in turn adversely affects the food security. As sessile organisms, plants are frequently exposed to various environmental adversities. As such, both plant physiology and plant ecophysiology begin with the study of responses to the environment. Provides essential insights, this book can be used for courses such as Plant Physiology, Environmental Science, Crop Production and Agricultural Botany. Volume 1 provides up-to-date information on the impact of climate change on plants, the general consequences and plant responses to various environmental stresses.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editor and Contributors
    About the Editor
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Climate Change Influences the Interactive Effects of Simultaneous Impact of Abiotic and Biotic Stresses on Plants
    1.1 Introduction: Climate Change Alters Habitats and Affects Ecosystem Functioning
    1.2 New Ecological Entities "Metaorganism" and "Holobiont"
    1.3 Climate Change Affects Natural Habitats and Biodiversity of Plants and Microorganisms
    1.3.1 Physicochemical Soil Properties
    1.3.2 Soil Influence on Microbiota and Plant Diversity 1.3.3 The Role of Microbiota in Habitat Modulation
    1.3.4 The Role of Plants in Modulation of Habitats
    1.4 Global Climate Change Affects Diversity of Plants and Microbiota and Interactions in Ecosystems
    1.4.1 The Effect on Plants Adapted to Extremal Climate Conditions
    1.4.2 Climate Change and Plant Invasion
    1.4.3 The Role of Links Between Genotypes and Phenotypes in Adaptation to Climate Changes
    1.5 Ecological Interactions Between the Soil, Plants, and Microorganisms Promoting Plastic Response to Climate Change
    1.5.1 The Rhizomicrobiomes
    1.5.2 The Endosymbionts 1.5.3 Plant-Pathogen Interaction
    1.6 Plant and Microbiota Internal Factors Enabling the Response to Complex Environmental Challenges
    1.7 Carbon and Nitrogen Balance Under Climate Change
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Loss of Agro-Biodiversity and Productivity Due to Climate Change in Continent Asia: A Review
    2.1 Introduction
    2.1.1 Agro-Biodiversity: Trends and Varieties
    2.1.2 Productivity of Crops
    2.1.2.1 100 Years of Agricultural Change: Trends and Figures Related to Agro-Biodiversity
    2.1.2.2 The Decrease in Cultivated Land and Green Revolution Agriculture 2.1.2.3 Food System and Marketing Globalization
    2.1.2.4 Reduced Incorporation of Livestock in Arable Production
    2.1.3 Varieties of Crops and Their Production
    2.1.3.1 South Asia
    2.1.3.2 Southeast Asia
    2.1.3.3 East Asia
    2.2 Impact of Climate Change on Crops
    2.2.1 Factors Involved in Decreasing Crop Productivity
    2.2.1.1 Temperature Variations
    2.2.1.2 Water Deficiency
    2.2.1.3 Rising CO2
    2.2.1.4 Emission Trends
    2.2.2 Most Affected Crops
    2.3 Impact of Climate Change on Livestock
    2.3.1 Direct Impacts of Climate Change on Livestock 2.3.1.1 Feeds Quality and Quantity
    2.3.1.2 Heat Stress
    2.3.1.3 Water Availability
    2.3.1.4 Diseases and Infections
    2.3.1.5 Biodiversity
    2.3.2 Indirect Impacts of Climate Change
    2.4 Impact of Climate Change on Fisheries
    2.5 Economic Loss Due to Climate Change
    2.5.1 Fluctuation in Prices of Staple Foods
    2.5.2 GDP and Economic Growth
    2.6 Effects on Food Security and Nutrition
    2.6.1 Fluctuation in Prices
    2.6.2 Nutrient Quality of Food
    2.7 Future Projections of Climate Change
    2.8 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Stress Implications and Crop Productivity
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the state-of-the-art in plant ecophysiology. With a particular focus on adaptation to a changing environment, it discusses ecophysiology and adaptive mechanisms of plants under climate change. Over the centuries, the incidence of various abiotic stresses such as salinity, drought, extreme temperatures, atmospheric pollution, metal toxicity due to climate change have regularly affected plants and, and some estimates suggest that environmental stresses may reduce the crop yield by up to 70%. This in turn adversely affects the food security. As sessile organisms, plants are frequently exposed to various environmental adversities. As such, both plant physiology and plant ecophysiology begin with the study of responses to the environment. Provides essential insights, this book can be used for courses such as Plant Physiology, Environmental Science, Crop Production and Agricultural Botany. Volume 2 provides up-to-date information on the impact of climate change on plants, the general consequences and plant responses to various environmental stresses.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editor and Contributors
    About the Editor
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Salinity Stress Management in Field Crops: An Overview of the Agronomic Approaches
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Salinity and Its Causes
    1.3 Plants' Responses to Salinity Stress
    1.4 Effect of Salinity on Crop Plants
    1.5 Agronomic Practices for Salinity Stress Management
    1.5.1 Changes in Irrigation Pattern
    1.5.2 Restoration of Vegetation Cover and Reforestation
    1.5.3 Soil Amendments and Appropriate Use of Fertilizers
    1.5.4 Selection of Appropriate Crop Plants 1.6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Improving Cotton Crop Tolerance to Drought Stress Through Molecular Approaches
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Cotton Breeding Strategies for Drought Stress Management
    2.3 Molecular Approaches to Combat Drought Stress
    2.3.1 Molecular Breeding Methods
    2.3.1.1 DNA Markers and Marker-Assisted Selection for Drought Stress
    2.3.1.2 QTL Mapping for Drought Stress
    2.3.2 Drought-Responsive Genes Studied in Cotton
    2.3.3 Transgenic Approaches to Combat Drought Stress
    2.4 Modern Techniques Used in Cotton to Combat Drought Stress
    2.5 Conclusion 3.5 Conclusion and Perspective
    References
    Chapter 4: Molecular Mechanism of Plant Adaptation and Tolerance to Cold Stress
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Cell Signaling During Cold Acclimatization in Plants
    4.2.1 Calcium Ion Channels
    4.2.2 Reactive Oxygen Species as Signaling Component
    4.2.3 Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MAPK) Signaling
    4.2.4 Lipid Molecule Signaling
    4.3 Physiological Changes Adapted in Plants for Defense Against Cold Stress
    4.3.1 Effect on Membrane Rigidity
    4.3.2 Changes in Cytoskeleton
    4.3.3 Effect of Reactive Oxygen Species 4.3.4 Effect on Photosynthesis
    4.3.5 Low Temperature and Phytohormones
    4.3.6 Microbes and Cold Stress
    4.4 Role of Cold-Responsive Gene in Conferring Resistance to Plant
    4.4.1 Role of Hydrophilic Peptide Providing Cold Tolerance in Plants
    4.4.2 Role of Transcription Factors in Augmenting Cold Tolerance in Plants
    4.4.3 Role of Promoters in Regulating Cold Tolerance in Plants
    4.5 Advancement in Molecular Approaches for Cold Stress
    4.5.1 Transgenic Approach
    4.5.2 Genome Editing
    4.5.3 Omics Approach
    4.6 Challenges Faced in Harboring Plants from Cold Stress
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Marisa S. Otegui.
    Contents:
    Use of FM dyes to analyze plant endocytosis / Kateřina Malínská, Adriana Jelínková, and Jan Petrášek
    Sterol dynamics during endocytic trafficking in Arabidopsis / Thomas Stanislas, Markus Grebe, and Yohann Boutté
    Live microscopy analysis of endosomes and vesicles in tip-growing root hairs / Miroslav Ovečka, Irene Lichtscheidl, and Jozef Šamaj
    Analysis of fluid-phase endocytosis in (intact) plant cells / Vera Bandmann, Peter Haub, and Tobias Meckel
    Immunogold labeling and electron tomography of plant endosomes / Alexandra Chanoca and Marisa S. Otegui
    Investigating protein-protein interactions in the plant endomembrane system using multiphoton-induced FRET-FLIM / Jennifer Schoberer and Stanley W. Botchway
    Analysis of Rab GTPase-effector interactions by bimolecular fluorescence complementation / Emi Ito and Takashi Ueda
    In vivo imaging of brassinosteroid endocytosis in Arabidopsis / Niloufer G. Irani, Simone Di Rubbo, and Eugenia Russinova
    Analysis of prevacuolar compartment-mediated vacuolar proteins transport / Caiji Gao, Yi Cai, Xiaohong Zhuang, and Liwen Jiang
    Evaluation of defective endosomal trafficking to the vacuole by monitoring seed storage proteins in Arabidopsis thaliana / Tomoo Shimada, Yasuko Koumoto, and Ikuko Hara-Nishimura
    Trans-species complementation analysis to study function conservation of plant endosomal sorting complex required for transport (ESCRT) proteins / Francisca C. Reyes
    Re-elicitation assay to correlate flg22-signaling competency with ligand-induced endocytic degradation of the FLS2 receptor / Michelle E. Leslie and Antje Heese
    Preparation of enriched plant clathrin-coated vesicles by differential and density gradient centrifugation / Gregory D. Reynolds, Ben August, and Sebastian Y. Bednarek
    Proteomics of endosomal compartments from plants case study : isolation of trans-golgi network vesicles / Eunsook Park and Georgia Drakakaki
    Analysis of global ubiquitylation and ubiquitin-binding domains involved in endosomal trafficking / Kamila Kalinowska and Erika Isono
    Analysis of endocytosis and ubiquitination of the BOR1 transporter / Koji Kasai, Junpei Takano, and Toru Fujiwara
    Ubiquitination of plant immune receptors / Jinggeng Zhou, Ping He, and Libo Shan
    Ubiquitylation-mediated control of polar auxin transport : analysis of Arabidopsis PIN2 auxin transport protein / Johannes Leitner and Christian Luschnig
    Chemical genomics screening for biomodulators of endomembrane system trafficking / Carlos Rubilar-Hernández, Glenn R. Hicks, and Lorena Norambuena
    Integrative chemical proteomics and cell biology methods to study endocytosis and vesicular trafficking in Arabidopsis / Tomáš Takáč, Tibor Pechan, Olga Šamajová, and Jozef Šamaj.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Charles Spillane, Peter C. McKeown.
    Contents:
    1. Landscaping plant epigenetics / Peter C. McKeown and Charles Spillane
    2. The gene balance hypothesis: dosage effects in plants / James A. Birchler and Reiner A. Veitia
    3. High-throughput RNA-seq for allelic or locus-specific expression analysis in Arabidopsis-related species, hybrids, and allotetraploids / Danny W.-K. Ng, Xiaoli Shi, Gyoungju Nah and Z. Jeffrey Chen
    4. Inference of allele-specific expression from RNA-seq data / Paul K. Korir and Cathal Seoighe
    5. Screening for imprinted genes using high-resolution melting analysis of PCR amplicons / Robert Day and Richard Macknight
    6. Analysis of genomic imprinting by quantitative allele-specific expression by pyrosequencing® / Peter C. McKeown, Antoine Fort and Charles Spilane
    7. Endosperm-specific chromatin profiling by fluorence-activated nuclei sorting and chip-on-chip / Isabelle Weinhofer and Claudia Köhler
    8. Imaging sexual reproduction in Arabidopsis using fluorescent markers / Mathieu Ingouff
    9. Genome-wide analysis of DNA methylation in Arabidopsis using MeDIP-chip / Sandra Cortijo, René Wardenaar, Maria Colomé-Tatché, Frank Johannes and Vincent Colot
    10. Methylation-sensitive amplified polymorphism (MSAP) marker to investigate drought-stress response in montepulciano and sangiovese grape cultivars / Emidio Albertini and Gianpiero Marconi
    11. Detecting histone modifications inplants / Jie Song, Bas Rutjens and Caroline Dean
    12. Quantitatively profiling genome-wide patterns of histone modifications in Arabidopsis thaliana using a chIP-seq / Chongyuan Luo and Eric Lam
    13. Analysis of retrotransposon activity in plants / Christopher DeFraia and R. Keith Slotkin
    14. Detecting epigenetic effects of transposable elements in plants / Christian Parisod, Armel Salmon, Malika Ainouche and Marie-Angèle Grandbastieu
    15. Detection and investigation of transitive gene silencing in plants / Leen Vermeersch, Nancy De Winne and And Depicker.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Susana Araújo, Sarvajeet Singh Gill, editors.
    Summary: This book comprehensively introduces all aspects of the physiology, stress responses and tolerance to abiotic stresses of the Fabaceae plants. Different plant families have been providing food, fodder, fuel, medicine and other basic needs for the human and animal since the ancient time. Among the plant families Fabaceae have special importance for their agri-horticultural importance and multifarious uses apart from the basic needs. Interest in the response of Fabaceae plants toward abiotic stresses is growing considering the economic importance and the special adaptive mechanisms. Recent advances and developments in molecular and biotechnological tools has contributed to ease and wider this mission. This book provides up-to-date findings that will be of greater use for the students and researchers, particularly Plant Physiologists, Environmental Scientists, Biotechnologists, Botanists, Food Scientists and Agronomists, to get the information on the recent advances on this plant family in regard to physiology and stress tolerance.

    Contents:
    1. The biology of legumes and their agronomic, economic and social impact
    2.Tropical Legumes: Status, Distribution, Biology and Importance
    3.Nitrogen fixation of legumes: Biology and physiology
    4.Nitrogen fixation of legumes under the family Fabaceae: Adverse effect of abiotic stresses and mitigation strategies
    5.Genetic engineering and genome editing for the improvement of Fabaceae for abiotic stress tolerance
    6.GWAS and genomic approaches in Legumes, an expanding toolkit for examining responses to abiotic stresses
    7.Use of Osmolytes for Improving Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Fabaceae Plants
    8.Role of biostimulants for enhancing abiotic stress tolerance in Fabaceae plants
    9.Abiotic and biotic stresses interaction in Fabaceae plants. Contributions from the grain legumes-soilborne vascular diseases-drought stress triangle
    10.Leguminosae (nom. alt. Fabaceae)
    Its Diversity, Use and Role in Environmental Conservation in the Harsh Environs of the Cold Deserts of North West India
    11.Morphological, physiobiochemical and molecular adaptability of legumes of Fabaceae to drought stress, with special reference to Medicago sativa L.
    12.Phaseolus species responses and tolerance to drought
    13.Fabaceae plants responses and tolerance to high temperature stress
    14.Legume responses and adaptations to nutrient deficiencies
    15.Nutrient Management for improving abiotic stress tolerance in legumes of the family Fabaceae
    16.Fabaceous Plants Under Abiotic Stresses and Biochemical Functions of Micronutrients
    17.Response and tolerance of Fabaceae plant to metal/metalloid toxicity
    18.Oxidative stress and antioxidant defense in Fabaceae plants under abiotic stresses
    19.Threat imposed by O3 induced ROS on defence, nitrogen fixation, physiology, biomass allocation and yield of legumes
    20.Salinity Stress Responses in Three Popular Field Crops Belonging to Fabaceae Family: Current Status and Future Prospect.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Víctor Resco de Dios.
    Summary: This book provides a unique exploration of the inter-relationships between the science of plant environmental responses and the understanding and management of forest fires. It bridges the gap between plant ecologists, interested in the functional and evolutionary consequences of fire in ecosystems, with foresters and fire managers, interested in effectively reducing fire hazard and damage. This innovation in this study lies in its focus on the physiological responses of plants that are of relevance for predicting forest fire risk, behaviour and management. It covers the evolutionary trade-offs in the resistance of plants to fire and drought, and its implications for predicting fuel moisture and fire risk; the importance of floristics and plant traits, in interaction with landform and atmospheric conditions, to successfully predict fire behaviour, and provides recommendations for pre- and post- fire management, in relation with the functional composition of the community. The book will be particularly focused on examples from Mediterranean environments, but the underlying principles will be of broader utility.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Introduction
    1. Forest Fires as a Global Phenomenon
    2. Fire as an Earth System Process
    3. Evolution of the Mediterranean Flora in a Flammable Plant
    4. Fire Regimes across Space
    Section 2: Organismal and Ecosystem Responses to Forest Fires
    5. Effects of Forest Fires on Soil Processes and Organisms
    6. Plant Traits and Forest Fires
    7. Forest Succession, Alternative States and Fire-Vegetation Feedbacks
    Section 3: The Physiology of Forest Fuels
    8. Plant Carbon Economies and the Dynamics of Forest Fuels
    9. Environmental Plant Responses and Forest Fire Risk
    10. Plant Survival after Fire
    Section 4: Fire Behaviour and Management
    11. Ecological Impacts of Anthropogenic Fire
    12. Fire Propagation
    13. Forest Planning and Fire Risk Reduction
    14. Post-Fire Management
    Section 5: Forest Fires and Global Change
    15. Forest Fires and Global Change.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Kirankumar S. Mysore, Muthappa Senthil-Kumar.
    Contents:
    Advances in plant gene silencing methods / Prachi Pandey, Muthappa Senthil-Kumar, and Kirankumar S. Mysore
    Strategies for altering plant traits using virus-induced gene silencing technologies / Christophe Lacomme
    Bioinformatics tools for achieving better gene silencing in plants / Firoz Ahmed, Xinbin Dai, and Patrick Xuechun Zhao
    Profiling of small RNAs involved in plant-pathogen interactions / Dongdong Niu ... [et al.]
    RNAi-mediated resistance to viruses in genetically engineered plants / Abdulrazak B. Ibrahim and Francisco J. L. Aragão
    Simplifying transgene locus structure through Cre-lox recombination / Vibha Srivastava and David W. Ow
    Transgene-induced gene silencing in plants / Yun Jin and Hui-Shan Guo
    Gene silencing by DNA interference in fern gametophytes / Masamitsu Wada and Hidenori Tsuboi
    Induction of stable epigenetic gene silencing in plants using a virus vector / Akira Kanazawa and Megumi Kasai
    Method for validating microRNAs in plants by miR-RACE / Jinggui Fang and Xin Sun
    MR VIGS : microRNA-based virus-induced gene silencing in plants / Weiwei Chen ... [et al.]
    High-throughput RNA interference (RNAi)-based approach using hairy roots for the study of plant-rhizobia interactions / Senjuti Sinharoy, Catalina I. Pislariu, and Michael K. Udvardi
    Functional genomics method for assaying gene function in phytopathogenic fungi through host-induced gene silencing mediated by agroinfiltration / Vinay Panwar, Brent McCallum, and Guus Bakkeren
    Effective and convenient method for the delivery of apple latent spherical virus (ALSV)-based vectors into plant cells by agroinoculation / Tatsuya Kon and Nubuyuki Yoshikawa
    Virus-induced gene silencing (VIGS) for functional genomics in rice using Rice tungro bacilliform virus (RTBV) as a vector / Ravi Kant, Shweta Sharma, and Indranil Dasgupta
    Virus-induced gene silencing of fiber-related genes in cotton / John R. Tuttle, Candace H. Haigler, and Dominique (Niki) Robertson
    Establishment of an efficient virus-induced gene silencing (VIGS) assay in Arabidopsis by agrobacterium-mediated rubbing infection / Ana Marcia E. de A. Manhães, Marcos V. V. de Oliveira, and Libo Shan
    Virus-induced gene silencing as a scalable tool to study drought tolerance in plants / Gavin M. George, Michael E. Ruckle, and James R. Lloyd
    VIGS for dissecting mechanisms involved in the symbiotic interaction of microbes with plants / Mette Grønlund
    Construction of a cotton VIGS library for functional Genomics study / Maoying Li, Fangjun Li, and Ping He
    Synthetic gene complementation to determine off-target silencing / Dhirendra Kumar
    Construction of mismatched inverted repeat (IR) silencing vectors for maximizing IR stability and effective gene silencing in plants / M. E. Chrissie Rey ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nigel Maxted, Danny Hunter, Rodomiro Ortiz Ríos.
    Summary: "Plant genetic conservation is a current critical issue because of the increasing loss of taxa and genetic diversity associated with climate change and environmental mismanagement on all biodiversity, but particularly plant diversity that forms the foundation of all food chains and human food security. The United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity in 1992 was first to draw attention to the need to conserve the world's natural resources, the need to link biodiversity conservation to sustainable exploitation and human development and the requirement to ensure equitable sharing of the benefits arising from the exploitation of biological diversity. A requirement echoed throughout numerous global environmental reports up the most recent State of the World Report on Biodiversity for Food and Agriculture (FAO, 2019) and Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services report (IPBES, 2019). The exploitation of plant genetic diversity is of fundamental importance to the survival of humankind, therefore, the need to safeguard plant genetic conservation and sustainable exploitation is crucial to all our futures. This text provides a practical and theoretical introduction to the strategies and actions we can adopt to conserve plant genetic diversity, as well as explaining how humankind can exploit these resources for sustainable development"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Jacqueline Batley.
    Contents:
    Advances in plant genotyping : where the future will take us / Dhwani A. Patel [and three others]
    Molecular marker applications in plants / Alice C. Hayward [and three others]
    Bioinformatics : identification of markers from next-generation sequence data / Pradeep Ruperao and David Edwards
    Molecular marker databases / Kaitao Lai, Michał Tadeusz Lorenc, and David Edwards
    Plant genotyping using flourescently tagged inter-simple sequence repeats (ISSRs) : basic principles and methodology / Linda M. Prince
    SSR genotyping / Annaliese S. Mason
    Genotyping analysis using an RFLP assay / Shutao Dai and Yan Long
    DNA barcoding for plants / Natasha de Vere [ and three others]
    Multiplexed digital gene expression analysis for gentical genomics in large plant populations / Christian Obermeier [and three others]
    SNP genotyping by heteroduplex analysis / Norma Paniego [and three others]
    Application of the high-resolution melting technique for gene mapping and SNP detection in plants / David Chagné
    Challenges of genotyping polyploid species / Annaliese S. Mason
    Genomic reduction assisted single nucleotide polymorphism discovery using 454-pyrosequencing / Peter J. Maughan, Joshua A. Udall, and Eric N. Jellen
    Inter-SINE amplified polymorphism (ISAP) for rapid and robust plant genotyping / Torsten Wenke [and four others]
    Screening of mutations by TILLING in plants / Nian Wang and Lei Shi
    Gene analysis using mass spectrometric cleaved amplified polymorphic sequence (MS-CAPS) with matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometry (MALDI-TOF) / Hideyuki Kajiwara
    Quantitative SNP genotyping of polyploids with MassARRAY and other platforms / Marcelo Mollinari and Oliver Serang
    SNP genotyping using KASPar assays / Scott M. Smith and Peter J. Maughan
    Skim-based genotyping by sequncing / Agnieszka A. Gilicz, Philipp E. Bayer, and David Edwards
    The restriction enzyme target approach to genotyping by sequencing (GBS) / Elena Hilario
    Methods for the design, implementation, and analysis of Illumina Infinium [trademark] SNP assays in plants / David Chagné [and four others]
    Use of the Illumina GoldenGate assay for single nuccleotide polymorphism (SNP) genotyping in cereal crops / Shiaoman Chao and Cindy Lawley.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, R. Z. Sayyed, M. S. Reddy, Sarjiya Antonius.
    Summary: Sustainable increase in agricultural production while keeping the environmental quality, agro-ecosystem function and biodiversity is a real challenge in current agricultural practices. Application of PGPR can help in meeting the expected demand for increasing agricultural productivity to feed the worlds booming population. Global concern over the demerits of chemicals in agriculture has diverted the attention of researchers towards sustainable agriculture by utilizing the potential of Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR). Use of PGPR as biofertilizers, biopesticides, soil, and plant health managers has gained considerable agricultural and commercial significance. The book Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR): Prospects for Sustainable Agriculture has contributions in the form of book chapter from 25 eminent global researchers, that discusses about the PGPRs and their role in growth promotion of various crop plants, suppression of wide range of phytopathogens, their formulation, effect of various factors on growth and performance of PGPR, assessment of diversity of PGPR through microsatellites and role of PGPR in mitigating biotic and abiotic stress. This book will be helpful for students, teachers, researchers, and entrepreneurs involved in PGPR and allied fields. The book will be highly useful to researchers, teachers, students, entrepreneurs, and policymakers.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Diversity and Plant Growth Promoting Potential of Bacterial Endophytes in Rice Seeds
    Chapter 2. Plant Growth-Promoting Microbes for Sustainable Agriculture
    Chapter 3. The Biological Method of Increasing Seed Germination and Productivity of Grain Crops
    Chapter 4. Development and Formulation of Beneficial Rhizobacteria Consortia to Improve Soil Health and Agricultural Practice Sustainability in Indonesia
    Chapter 5. Biochemical Characterization of Microbials and their Effects on the Growth and Yield of Multiplier Onion (Allium ascalonicum L.) in the Philippines
    Chapter 6. Evaluation of The Side Effects of Nitrification Inhibiting Agrochemicals In Soils
    Chapter 7. Cyanobacteria from Sorghum bicolor Grown Fields of Ecopark at Cibinong Science Center-Botanic Gardens, Indonesia
    Chapter 8. Stimulation of Seed Germination and Growth Parameters of Rice var. Sahbhagi by Enterobacter cloacae in Presence of Ammonia Sulphate as Substitute of ACC
    Chapter 9. Impact of Biofertilizer on Crop Yield of Isabgol (Plantago ovata) and Senna (Cassia alexandrina)
    Chapter 10. Evaluation of mixtures of beneficial microorganisms on Brassica chinensis, L
    Chapter 11. Characterization of Sugarcane Mosaic Disease and its Management with PGPR
    Chapter 12. Effect of Different Doses of Pendimethalin on Microbial Activities and Nodulation in Chickpea
    Chapter 13. Effect of Herbicide Application on Soil Microflora and Nutrient Status of Soil
    Chapter 14. Yield Maximization in Pigeonpea (cajanuscajan l. Millsp.) Through Application of Plant Growth Promoting Bacteria
    Chapter 15. Financial Analysis of Biofertilizer Application: Case Study of Gliocompost Utilization on Red Chili Farming
    Chapter 16. Viability of Pseudomonas plecoglossicida and Rhizobium sp. as Liquid Bacterial Fertilizers In Various Formulated Carriers
    Chapter 17. Studies on the Performance of Coropulse on Blackgram
    Chapter 18. Microbial Surfactants and Their Significance in Agricult ure
    Chapter 19. Compatibility Potential of Brassica Species and Mustard Seed Meal With Pseudomonas fluorescens for Biological Control of Soil-Borne Plant Diseases
    Chapter 20. Diversity Assessment of Antagonistic Trichoderma Species by Comparative Analysis of Microsatellites
    Chapter 21. Overview of bio-pesticides in Pakistan
    Chapter 22. Evaluation of Indigenous Fluorescent Pseudomonads for the Management of Newly Emerging Wilt of Pomegranate Caused by Ceratocystis fimbriata
    Chapter 23. Comparative Study of Indigenous and Non-indigenous Rhizobacterial Isolates to Induce the Resistance of Bunching Onion Against Spodoptera exigua (Hübner)
    Chapter 24. Use of Bioinoculants in the Modulation of Volatile Organic Compound Emission Under Environmental Stresses for Sustainable Agriculture
    Chapter 25. Salinity Resistance of Azotobacter Isolated from Saline Soil in West Java.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Ashok Kumar and Vijay Singh Meena.
    Summary: To meet the food security needs of the 21st century, this book focuses on ecofriendly and sustainable production technologies based on plant growth promoting rhizobacteria (PGPR). It is estimated that the global population could increase to 9 billion by 2050. Further, the amount of land devoted to farming has decreased. Soil is a living entity, and is not only a valuable natural resource for agricultural and food security, but also for the preservation of all life processes. Agricultural productivity rests on the foundation of microbial diversity in the soil, and in recent years, PGPR have emerged as an important and promising tool for sustainable agriculture. The injudicious use of agrochemicals by farmers has created a range of negative impacts, not only threatening the environment, but also destroying useful microorganisms in the soil. The efficient use of PGPR reduces the need for these chemicals while simultaneously lowering production costs. In turn, increased yields could provide a more favourable environment and encourage sustainability. This book assesses the impacts of PGPR on crops, environmental and socio-economic sustainability, and demonstrates these ecofriendly technologies' three critical advantages, namely (a) enhanced crop productivity, (b) reduced application of agrochemicals, and (c) increased incomes for farmers. Besides offering an economically attractive and ecologically sound means of augmenting the nutrient supply and combatting soil-borne pathogens, PGPR play an important part in boosting soil fertility, bioremediation and stress management for the development of ecofriendly and sustainable agriculture.

    Contents:
    Plant growth promoting bacteria: strategies to improve wheat growth and development under sustainable agriculture.- Rhizospheric microbiomes: biodiversity, mechanisms of plant growth promotion and biotechnological applications for sustainable agriculture.- Advances in the application of plant growth promoting rhizobacteria in horticulture.- Agriculture application of Pseudomonas
    A view on the relative antagonistic potential against pests and diseases.- Plant growth-promoting rhizobacteria as biological tools for nutrient management and soil sustainability.- Rhizobacteria mediated root architectural improvement: A hidden potential for agricultural sustainability.- Role of Rhizobia for sustainable agriculture: Lab to Land.- Plant growth promoting rhizobacteria: harnessing its potential for sustainable plant disease management.- Soil microbial hotspots and hot moments: management vis-a-vis soil biodiversity.- Surfactin: an emerging biocontrol tool for agriculture sustainability.- Molecular approaches to study plant growth-promoting rhizobacteria (PGPRs).- Impact of land uses on microbial biomass C, N, P and microbial population in Indian Himalaya.- Potassium solubilizing bacteria (KSB): a microbial tool for K solubility, cycling and its availability to crop plants.- ACC deaminase producing bacteria: a key player in alleviating abiotic stresses in plants.- The sustainability of crop production by PGPR under abiotic stress conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    R.Z. Sayyed, Naveen Kumar Arora, M.S. Reddy, editors.
    Summary: Increasing agro productivity to feed a growing global population under the present climate scenario requires optimizing the use of resources and adopting sustainable agricultural production. This can be achieved by using plant beneficial bacteria, i.e., those bacteria that enhance plant growth under abiotic stress conditions, and more specifically, microorganisms such as plant growth promoting rhizobacteria (PGPR), which are the most promising candidates in this regard. Attaining sustainable agricultural production while preserving environmental quality, agro-ecosystem functions and biodiversity represents a major challenge for current agricultural practices; further, the traditional use of chemical inputs (fertilizers, pesticides, nutrients etc.) poses serious threats to crop productivity, soil fertility and the nutritional value of farm produce. Given these risks, managing pests and diseases, maintaining agro-ecosystem health, and avoiding health issues for humans and animals have now become key priorities. The use of PGPR as biofertilizers, plant growth promoters, biopesticides, and soil and plant health managers has attracted considerable attention among researchers, agriculturists, farmers, policymakers and consumers alike. Using PGPR can help meet the expected demand for global agricultural productivity to feed the world?s booming population, which is predicted to reach roughly 9 billion by 2050. However, to do so, PGPR strains must be safe for the environment, offer considerable plant growth promotion and biocontrol potential, be compatible with useful soil rhizobacteria, and be able to withstand various biotic and abiotic stresses. Accordingly, the book also highlights the need for better strains of PGPR to complement increasing agro-productivity.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Role of plant growth promoting rhizobacteria to modulate proline biosynthesis in plants for alleviation of salt stress.- Chapter 2. Salinity stress and plant growth-promoting rhizobacteria: A journey into the soil.- Chapter 3. Dark Septate Endophytes and Their Role in Enhancing Plant Resistance to Abiotic Stress.- Chapter 4. Rhizobacteria-abiotic stress management.- Chapter 5. Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria: benign and useful substitute for mitigation of biotic and abiotic stresses.- Chapter 6. Rhizospheric microflora: A natural alleviator of drought stress in agricultural crops.- Chapter 7. Quorum sensing molecules of rhizobacteria: A trigger for developing systemic resistance in plants.- Chapter 8. Zinc solubilizing bacteria: A boon for sustainable agriculture.- Chapter 9. Rhizobacteria as bio-protectants against stress conditions.- Chapter 10. Rhizobacteria for reducing heavy metal stress in plant and soil.- Chapter 11. Pesticide induced cross-resistance in soil bacteria.- Chapter 12. Psychrotrophic microbes: Biodiversity and biotechnological implications for cold stress in plant.- Chapter 13. Phosphate Solubilising Drought Tolerant Microbes: Biodiversity and Biotechnological Application for Alleviation of Drought Stress in Plant.- Chapter 14. Methylotrophic Bacteria Mitigating Abiotic Stress.- Chapter 15. Rhizobacteria and Phytohormones Mediated Salt Induced Abiotic Stress Management in Plant".
    Chapter 16. Role of PGPR for alleviating aluminium toxicity in acidic soil.- Chapter 17. Rhizobacteria in Abiotic Stress Management.- Chapter 18. Rhizobacteria
    plant interaction, alleviation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    R.Z. Sayyed, editor.
    Summary: Attaining sustainable agricultural production while preserving environmental quality, agro-ecosystem functions and biodiversity represents a major challenge for current agricultural practices; further, the traditional use of chemical inputs (fertilizers, pesticides, nutrients etc.) poses serious threats to crop productivity, soil fertility and the nutritional value of farm produce. Given these risks, managing pests and diseases, maintaining agro-ecosystem health, and avoiding health issues for humans and animals have now become key priorities. The use of PGPR as biofertilizers, plant growth promoters, biopesticides, and soil and plant health managers has attracted considerable attention among researchers, agriculturists, farmers, policymakers and consumers alike. Using PGPR as bioinoculants can help meet the expected demand for global agricultural productivity to feed the worlds booming population, which is predicted to reach roughly 9 billion by 2050. However, to provide effective bioinoculants, PGPR strains must be safe for the environment, offer considerable plant growth promotion and biocontrol potential, be compatible with useful soil rhizobacteria, and be able to withstand various biotic and abiotic stresses. Accordingly, the book also highlights the need for better strains of PGPR to complement increasing agro-productivity.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Biosynthesis of Antibiotics by PGPR and its Role in Biocontrol of Plant Diseases
    Chapter 2. Effect of Substrates on Azotobacter chroococcum Enriched Vermicompost for Growth of Phaseolus
    Chapter 3. PGPR in Biotic Stress Management of Fungal Diseases
    Chapter 4. Management of Plant Diseases by PGPR-Mediated Induction Resistance
    Chapter 5. Amelioration of Biotic Stress by Application of Rhizobacteria for Agriculture Sustainability
    Chapter 6. Role of Serratia spp. as Biocontrol Agents and Plant Growth Stimulator With Respects of Biotic Stress Management In Plant. Chapter 7. Seed Biopriming Through Beneficial Rhizobacteria For Mitigating Soil and Seedborne Diseases
    Chapter 8. Zinc Solubilizing Bacteria: A Boon for Sustainable Agriculture
    Chapter 9. Plant Small RNAs: Big Players in Biotic Stress Responses
    Chapter 10. Interaction of Rhizobacteria with beneficiary Microorganisms : A Agrobeneficiary Aspect
    Chapter 11. Role of Indigenous Technology knowledge in Biological Control of Crop Diseases Under Organic Agriculture In India: An Overview
    Chapter 12. PGPRs
    Effective Managers of Biotic Stress
    Chapter 13. Biotic and Abiotic Stress Management by AM-Mediated PGPR
    Chapter 14. Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria: An Overview In Agricultural Perspectives
    Chapter 15. Impact of Acinobacteria on Agriculture.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Tariq Aftab, Khalid Rehman Hakeem.
    Summary: Agriculture faces many challenges to fulfil the growing demand for sustainable food production and ensure high-quality nutrition for a rapidly growing population. To guarantee adequate food production, it is necessary to increase the yield per area of arable land. A method for achieving this goal has been the application of growth regulators to modulate plant growth. Plant growth regulators (PGRs) are substances in specific formulations which, when applied to plants or seeds, have the capacity to promote, inhibit, or modify physiological traits, development and/or stress responses. They maintain proper balance between source and sink for enhancing crop yield. PGRs are used to maximize productivity and quality, improve consistency in production, and overcome genetic and abiotic limitations to plant productivity. Suitable PGRs include hormones such as cytokinins and auxins, and hormone-like compounds such as mepiquat chloride and paclobutrazol. The use of PGRs in mainstream agriculture has steadily increased within the last 20 years as their benefits have become better understood by growers. Unfortunately, the growth of the PGR market may be constrained by a lack of innovation at a time when an increase in demand for new products will require steady innovation and discovery of novel, cost-competitive, specific, and effective PGRs. A plant bio-stimulant is any substance or microorganism applied to plants with the aim to enhance nutrition efficiency, abiotic stress tolerance and/or crop quality traits, regardless of its nutrients content. Apart from traditional PGRs, which are mostly plant hormones, there are a number of substances/molecules such as nitric oxide, methyl jasmonate, brassinosteroids, seaweed extracts, strigolactones, plant growth promoting rhizobacteria etc. which act as PGRs. These novel PGRs or bio-stimulants have been reported to play important roles in stress responses and adaptation. They can protect plants against various stresses, including water deficit, chilling and high temperatures, salinity and flooding. This book includes chapters ranging from sensing and signalling in plants to translational research. In addition, the cross-talk operative in plants in response to varied signals of biotic and abiotic nature is also presented. Ultimately the objective of this book is to present the current scenario and the future plan of action for the management of stresses through traditional as well as novel PGRs. We believe that this book will initiate and introduce readers to state-of-the-art developments and trends in this field of study.

    Contents:
    Prospective Role of Plant Growth Regulators for Tolerance to Abiotic Stresses
    Accumulation, Partitioning and Bioavailability of Micronutrients in Plants and their Crosstalk with Phytohormones
    An insight into role of plant growth regulators in stimulating abiotic stress tolerance in some medicinally important plants
    Hormonal Regulation in cell culture of Artemisia annua L. plant
    Medicinal and Aromatic Plants under Abiotic Stress: A Crosstalk on Phytohormones' Perspective
    Cytokinin-mediated signaling during environmental stress in plants
    Leaf senescence and ethylene signaling
    Methyl Jasmonate and Brassinosteroids: Emerging Plant growth regulators in Plant abiotic stress tolerance and Environmental Changes
    Brassinosteroids signalling pathways in plant defense and adaptation to stress
    Roles of hydrogen sulfide in regulating temperature stress response in plants
    Physiological, biochemical and molecular mechanism of nitric oxide-mediated abiotic stress tolerance
    Melatonin: Role in abiotic stress resistance and tolerance
    Strigolactones, A Novel Carotenoid-Derived Phytohormone: Biosynthesis, Transporters, Signalling and Mechanisms in Abiotic Stress
    Role of soluble sugars in metabolism and sensing under abiotic stress
    Natural Polysaccharides: Novel Plant Growth Regulators
    Role of AM fungi and PGPR in alleviating stress responses and inducing defense mechanism
    Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi: A Natural Biotechnological Tool for Sustainable Crop Production under Saline Soils in the Modern Era of Climate Change
    PGPR assisted bioremediation and plant growth: A sustainable approach for crop production using polluted soils
    Rhizobia: A Potent Tool for Amelioration of Drought Stress in Legumes
    Understanding the role of bacterial fertilizers in stressed agriculture: actions, mechanisms and future prospects
    Bioreactor upscaling of different tissue of medicinal herbs for extraction of active phytomolecules: a step towards industrialization and enhanced production of phytochemicals.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rizwan Ali Ansari, Irshad Mahmood, editors.
    Summary: The current scenario of increasing sensitivity towards the sustainable agriculture has given a large space to extensively utilize natural resources that are environmental friendly and are a good replacement of chemicals in agriculture. Application of organic additives in the sustainable disease management can provide new insight in sustenance of plant productivity along with improved host stress tolerance. In the present book we have focussed upon a range of organic strategies to control plant pathogens of wide spectrum in addition to maintaining robust plant health. A detailed account on the application of organic additives has been discussed, irrespective of their origin and nature. In addition, the methods of utilising these organic supplements in the management of plant diseases and promotion of plant yield in more economic way have also been presented with reference to developing, underdeveloped and developed countries. The book has included the works of eminent scholars from across the world thus flashing light on the key literature related to application of organic matters including phytoextracts, chopped leaves, composted organic manures and liquid manures in eco-friendly agriculture. The mechanisms underlying the effectiveness of these organic amendments in promoting plant health has also been presented and discussed in understandable ways.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Organic Soil Amendments: Potential Tool for Soil and Plant Health Management; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Possible Sources of Organics; 1.3 Types of Organic Amendments Applied to Soils; 1.3.1 Animal Manure; 1.3.2 Municipal Biosolids and Septage; 1.3.3 Green Manures and Crop Residues; 1.3.4 Food Residues and Wastes; 1.3.5 Wastes from Manufacturing Processes; 1.3.6 Compost; 1.4 Role of Organic Amendments in Soil Health Improvement; 1.4.1 Physical Properties; 1.4.2 Chemical Properties; 1.4.3 Biological Properties 1.5 Significance of Organic Amendments in Plant Health Amelioration1.5.1 Plant Biomass Promotion; 1.5.2 Plant Disease Management; 1.6 Mechanisms Implicated in Action of Organic Amendments on Soil and Plant; 1.7 Conclusions and Future Prospects; References;
    Chapter 2: Grafting, Agrochemicals, and Oxidative Enzymes as Factor for Plant Biotic Resistance; 2.1 Grafting; 2.1.1 Grafting and Production; 2.1.2 Agrochemicals; 2.1.3 Agrochemicals and Systemic Acquired Resistance (SAR); 2.1.4 Oxidative Enzymes; 2.1.5 Conclusions; References 4.8 Biochemical Response of Corn Plants Under Hydric Stress and Insect AttackReferences;
    Chapter 5: Integrated Management of Rice Blast Caused by Magnaporthe oryzae; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Biology of Magnaporthe oryzae; 5.3 Rice Blast Management; 5.3.1 Water and Planting Time; 5.3.2 Nutrient Management; 5.3.3 Botanical and Biological Management; 5.3.3.1 Botanicals; 5.3.3.2 Biocontrol Agents; 5.3.3.3 Chemical Management; 5.3.3.4 Antibiotics; 5.4 Forecasting; 5.5 Host Resistance; 5.6 Biotechnological Approaches; 5.6.1 Blast Resistance Genes; 5.7 Future of Rice Blast Management; 5.8 Conclusions
    Chapter 3: Management of Plant Biotic Stress with Botanicals and Antagonistic Fungi in the Tropics3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Meaning of Biotic Stress; 3.2.1 Definition of Plant Stress; 3.3 Biotic Stressor and Host Plant Relationship; 3.3.1 Biotic Stress and Crop Production; 3.3.2 Biotic Stress and Food Security in the Tropics; 3.4 Management of Plant Biotic Stress; 3.4.1 Botanicals as Viable Alternative to Synthetic Chemicals in the Management of Plant Biotic Stress in the Tropic; 3.4.2 Antagonistic Fungi for the Management of Plant Biotic Stress in the Tropics; 3.5 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Rizwan Ali Ansari, Irshad Mahmood, editors.
    Summary: The book illustrates the use of putative microbial agents which provide good protection to the plant from biotic pathogens attack. An up to date knowledge on plant-microbiome interaction strategies in terms of improved sustainability has been discussed. Information from experts across the globe on the application of microbes for providing amicable solution in sustainable agriculture has been gathered. In addition, information related to microbes mediated resistance levels leading to enhanced plant health has been well presented. The chapters have emphasised the use of Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR) and other potential biocontrol agents/antagonists in the management of plant diseases which provide extensive information to the readers. Literature on microbial root colonization, plant growth promotions, and also on the protection of plants from attack of various soil borne pathogens have been presented in a coherent way. Information on the application of potential strain of the bio-control fungi, endophytes, actinomycetes strengthening the plants ability which rescue the plant from pathogens attack leading to improved plant health has also been underpinned.

    Contents:
    Endophytic bacteria: Prospects and applications for the plant disease management
    Helpful linkages of Trichodermas in the Mycoremediation and Mycorestoration
    Biofilmed biofertilizers for sustainable agriculture
    Role of rhizospheric microbes in the management of phytopathogenic problems of medicinal plants
    Microbial mediated plant growth ameliorations and protection from disease
    Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR): Modern prospects for sustainable agriculture
    Trichoderma spp.: a potential biocontrol agent: Molecular prospectus and Application
    Changes in plant biomarkers in response to phytonematodes infection
    Potentiality of Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria in plant health ameliorations
    Harnessing endophytes as biocontrol agents
    Bacillus as Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR): A Promising Green Agriculture Technology
    Significance of microbial agents in augmentation of plant health
    Plant growth and health promoting plant-microbe interactions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    P. Vidhyasekaran.
    Summary: Engineering durable nonspecific resistance to phytopathogens is one of the ultimate goals of plant breeding. However, most of the attempts to reach this goal fail as a result of rapid changes in pathogen populations and the sheer diversity of pathogen infection mechanisms. Recently several bioengineering and molecular manipulation technologies have been developed to activate the 'sleeping plant innate immune system, which has potential to detect and suppress the development of a wide range of plant pathogens in economically important crop plants. Enhancing disease resistance through altered regulation of plant immunity signaling systems would be durable and publicly acceptable. Strategies for activation and improvement of plant immunity aim at enhancing hosts capability of recognizing invading pathogens, boosting the executive arsenal of plant immunity, and interfering with virulence strategies employed by microbial pathogens. Major advances in our understanding of the molecular basis of plant immunity and of microbial infection strategies have opened new ways for engineering durable resistance in crop plants. The volume III of the book presents the ways and means to manipulate the signals and signaling system to enhance the expression of plant innate immunity for crop disease management. It also describes bioengineering approaches to develop transgenic plants expressing enhanced disease resistance using plant immunity signaling genes. It also discusses recent commercial development of biotechnological products to manipulate plant innate immunity for crop disease management.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1 Introduction
    1.1 Signals and Signaling Systems Involved in Activation of Plant Innate Immune System
    1.2 Bioengineering Technologies to Activate Plant Immunity Signaling Systems for Management of Crop Diseases
    1.3 Molecular Manipulation of Plant Immunity Signaling Systems Using Abiotic or Biotic Elicitors for Management of Crop Diseases
    References
    2 Manipulation of Calcium Ion Influx-Mediated Immune Signaling Systems for Crop Disease Management
    2.1 Ca2+ Signaling Components
    2.2 Bioengineering G-Proteins for Plant Disease Management 2.10 Engineering Calcium-Dependent Protein Kinase Genes for Crop Disease Management
    2.11 Manipulation of Ca2+-Dependent Signaling Pathway by Vitamin B1
    References
    3 Manipulation of Reactive Oxygen Species, Redox and Nitric Oxide Signaling Systems to Activate Plant Innate Immunity for Crop Disease Management
    3.1 Complexity of ROS-Redox-NO Signaling System
    3.2 Manipulation of ROS Signaling System Using Benzothiadiazole (BTH) for Crop Disease Management
    3.2.1 BTH Triggers Oxidative Burst and Accumulation of ROS Through Phospholipid Signaling 2.3 Engineering Glutamate-Gated Ca2+ Channel for Plant Disease Management
    2.4 Engineering H+-ATPase for Plant Disease Management
    2.5 Molecular Manipulation of H+-ATPase Proton Pump by Laminarin for Crop Disease Management
    2.6 Manipulation of H+-ATPase Using Chitosan Commercial Formulations
    2.7 Engineering Annexins for Crop Disease Management
    2.8 Bioengineering Calmodulin Genes to Promote Immune Responses for Plant Disease Management
    2.9 Engineering CBP60g Calmodulin-Binding Proteins for Disease Management 3.2.2 BTH Triggers Accumulation of ROS Through Action of Peroxidases and Superoxide Dismutases
    3.2.3 BTH May Trigger Accumulation of ROS Through Suppression of ROS-Degrading Enzymes
    3.2.4 Fine-Tuning of Accumulation of ROS by BTH
    3.2.5 BTH Activates NPR1 by Inducing ROS-Mediated Redox Signaling
    3.2.6 BTH Primes the Plants for Faster and Stronger Production of ROS
    3.2.7 Manipulation of Peroxidases by BTH for Crop Disease Management
    3.2.8 BTH Induces Several Host Plant Defense Responses Downstream of ROS Signaling 3.2.9 Management of Fungal Diseases in Crop Plants by Triggering Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.10 Management of Oomycete Diseases of Crop Plants by Triggering Plant Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.11 Management of Bacterial Diseases in Crop Plants by Triggering Plant Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.12 Management of Virus Diseases in Crop Plants by Triggering Plant Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.13 Management of Phytoplasma Diseases of Crop Plants by Triggering Plant Immune Responses Using BTH
    3.2.14 Management of Parasitic Plants by Manipulation of ROS Signaling System Using BTH
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Manuel Rodríguez-Concepción.
    Contents:
    Plant isoprenoids: A General Overview
    Measuring the Activity of 1-Deoxy-D-Xylulose 5-Phosphate Synthase, the First Enzyme in the MEP Pathway, in Plant Extracts
    Determination of 3-Hydroxy-3-methylglutaryl CoA Reductase Activity in Plants
    Farnesyl Diphosphate Synthase Assay
    Metabolite Profiling of Plastidial Deoxyxylulose-5-Phosphate Pathway Intermediates by Liquid Chromatography and Mass Spectrometry
    Analysis of Carotenoids and Tocopherols in Plant Matrices and Assessment of Their In Vitro Antioxidant Capacity
    Simultaneous Analyses of Oxidized and Reduced Forms of Photosynthetic Quinones by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography
    Determination of Sterol Lipids in Plant Tissues by Gas Chromatography and Q-TOF Mass Spectrometry
    Analysis of Plant Polyisoprenoids
    Analysis of Diterpenes and Triterpenes from Plant Foliage and Roots
    Gas Chromatography Mass-Spectrometry Method for Determination of Biogenic Volatile Organic Compounds Emitted by Plants
    Analysis of Steroidal Alkaloids and Saponins in Solanaceae Plant Extracts using UPLC-qTOF Mass Spectrometry
    Isoprenoid and Metabolite Profiling of Plant Trichomes
    Sample Preparation for Single Cell Transcriptomics
    Essential Oil Glands in Citrus Fruit Peel as an Example
    Prenylquinone Profiling in Whole Leaves and Chloroplast Subfractions
    Confocal Laser Scanning Microscopy Detection of Chlorophylls and Carotenoids in Chloroplasts and Chromoplasts of Tomato Fruit
    Heterologous Expression of Triterpene Biosynthetic Genes in Yeast and Subsequent Metabolite Identification Through GC-MS
    High Throughput Testing of Terpenoid Biosynthesis Candidate Genes Using Transient Expression in Nicotiana benthamiana
    Heterologous Stable Expression of Terpenoid Biosynthetic Genes Using the Moss Physcomitrella patens
    Quantification of Plant Resistance to Isoprenoid Biosynthesis Inhibitors
    A Flexible Protocol for Targeted Gene Co-Expression Network Analysis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by George Komis and Jozef Šamaj.
    Summary: "Mitogen-activated protein kinases (MAPKs) are versatile phosphorylating enzymes which regulate multiple proteins involved in gene expression, cell architecture, plant development and reaction to diverse abiotic and biotic factors. The main aim of Plant MAP Kinases: Methods and Protocols is to provide established and new MAPK protocols adapted to the challenges posed by working with plants. The book contains 19 chapters which encompass a wide array of methods progressively scaling from the single gene, protein or cell level to large-scale arrays of proteomic, phosphoproteomic and interactomic data in order to uncover previously unidentified plant MAPK signaling pathways and to tackle with the challenging task of substrate identification. Techniques for MAPK sequence analysis and subcellular localization helping to identify their substrates and subcellular compartmentalization are also provided. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols and key tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Authoritative and practical, Plant MAP Kinases: Methods and Protocols represents a collection of useful plant MAPK protocols written by experts in the field for researchers and students."--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Beatriz Caiuby Labate, Clancy Cavnar, editors.
    Summary: This is a book about the intersections of three dimensions. The first is the way social scientists and historians treat the history of psychiatry and healing, especially as it intersects with psychedelics. The second encompasses a reflection on the substances themselves and their effects on bodies. The third addresses traditional healing, as it circles back to our understanding of drugs and psychiatry. The chapters explore how these dimensions are distinct, but deeply intertwined, themes that offer important insights into contemporary healing practices. The intended audience of the volume is large and diverse: neuroscientists, biologists, medical doctors, psychiatrists, psychologists; mental health professionals interested in the therapeutic application of psychedelic substances, or who work with substance abuse, depression, anxiety, and PTSD; patients and practitioners of complementary and alternative medicine; ethnobotanists and ethnopharmacologists; lawyers, criminologists, and other specialists in international law working on matters related to drug policy and human rights, as well as scholars of religious studies, anthropologists, sociologists, and historians; social scientists concerned both with the history of science, medicine, and technology, and concepts of health, illness, and healing. It has a potentially large international audience, especially considering the increasing interest in "psychedelic science" and the growing spread of the use of traditional psychoactives in the West.

    Contents:
    Who is keeping tabs? LSD lessons from the past for the future
    Peyote's race problem
    Undiscovering the pueblo magico : lessons from Huautla for the psychedelic renaissance
    The use of salvia divinorum from a Mazatec perspective
    Examining the therapeutic potential of kratom within the American drug regulatory sytem
    Bubbling with controversy : legal challenges for ceremonial ayahuasca circles in the United States
    Integrating psychedelic medicines and psychiatry : theory and methods of a model clinic
    Whole organisms or pure compounds? Entourage effect versus drug specificity
    Placebo problems : boundary work int he psychedelic science renaissance
    Psychedelic naturalism and interspecies alliance : views from the emerging do-it-yourself mycology movement
    Plant knowledges: indigenous approaches and interspecies listening toward decolonizing ayahuasca research
    Gnosis potency : DMT breakthroughs and paragnosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Martine Dieuaide-Noubhani, Ana Paula Alonso.
    Contents:
    Application of Metabolic Flux Analysis to Plants
    Metabolic Network Reconstruction and Their Topological Analysis
    14C pulse Labeling to Estimate External Fluxes and Turnovers in Primary Metabolism
    Optimization of Steady-state 13C-labeling Experiments for Metabolic Flux Analysis
    Quantification of 13C Enrichments and Isotopomer Abundances for Metabolic Flux analysis using 1D NMR Spectroscopy
    Analysis of Proteinogenic Amino Acid and Starch Labeling by 2D NMR
    Analysis of Kinetic Labeling of Amino Acids and Organic Acids by GC-MS
    Quantifying 13C-labeling in Free Sugars and Starch by GC-MS
    Liquid Chromatography Tandem Mass Spectrometry for Measuring 13C-labeling in Intermediates of the Glycolysis and Pentose-phosphate Pathway
    In Vivo NMR for 13C metabolic? Flux Analysis
    Steady State and Instationary Modeling of Proteinogenic and Free Amino Acid Isotopomers for Flux Quantification
    Isotopically Nonstationary MFA (INST-MFA) of Autotrophic Metabolism
    Simulating Labeling to Estimate Kinetic Parameters for Flux Control Analysis
    High-throughput Data Pipelines for Metabolic Flux Analysis in Plants
    Analysis of Enzyme Activities
    Analytical Kinetic Modeling: A Practical Procedure
    Flux Balance Analysis as an Alternative Method to Estimate Fluxes Without Labeling
    Flux Variability Analysis: Application to Developing Oilseed Rape Embryos using Toolboxes for Constraint-Based Modeling
    Plant Genome-Scale Modeling and Implementation
    34S and 15N Labelling to Model S and N Flux in Plants and Determine the Different Components of N and S use Efficiency
    Ecophysiological Process-based Model to Simulate Carbon Fluxes in Plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Ganesh Sriram.
    Contents:
    MeRy-B, a metabolomic database and knowledge base for exploring plant primary metabolism / Catherine Deborde and Daniel Jacob
    Targeted deuteration of polyphenolics for their qualitative and quantitative metabolomic analysis in plant-derived extracts / Mikel R. Roe, Jerry D. Cohen, and Adrian D. Hegeman
    Relative quantitation in single-cell metabolomics by laser ablation electrospray mass spectrometry / Bindesh Shrestha and Akos Vertes
    Quantification of plant volatiles / Anthony V. Qualley and Natalia Dudareva
    Quantitative imaging approaches for small-molecule measurements using FRET sensors in plants / Sakiko Okumoto
    Isotopomer measurement techniques in metabolic flux analysis I : nuclear magnetic resonance / Quyen X. Truong, Jong Moon Yoon, and Jacqueline V. Shanks
    Isotopomer measurement techniques in metabolic flux analysis II : mass spectrometry / Jamey D. Young, Douglas K. Allen, and John A. Morgan
    Mathematical modeling of isotope labeling experiments for metabolic flux analysis / Shilpa Nargund and Ganesh Sriram
    Optimal design of isotope labeling experiments / Hong Yang, Dominic E. Mandy, and Igor G.L. Libourel
    Putting the plant metabolic network pathway databases to work : going offline to gain new capabilities / Kate Dreher
    Elucidation of metabolic pathways from enzyme classification data / Andrew G. McDonald and Keith F. Tipton
    Deducing intracellular distributions of metabolic pathways from genomic data / Ansgar Gruber and Peter G. Kroth
    Genome-scale models of plant metabolism / Margaret Simons, Ashish Misra, and Ganesh Sriram
    Elementary flux modes, flux balance analysis, and their application to plant metabolim / Katrin Lotz [and four others]
    Systems approaches to unraveling plant metabolism : identifying biosynthetic genes of secondary metabolic pathways / Martin J. Spiering [and three others]
    Applications of kinetic modeling to plant metabolism / Johann M. Rohwer
    Kinetic modeling of plant metabolism and its predictive power : peppermint essential oil biosynthesis as an example / Bernd Markus Lange and Rigoberto Rios-Estepa.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sudhakar Srivastava, Ashish K. Srivastava, Penna Suprasanna, editors.
    Summary: Metal toxicity and deficiency are both common abiotic problems faced by plants. While metal contamination around the world is a critical issue, the bioavailability of some essential metals like zinc (Zn) and selenium (Se) can be seriously low in other locations. The list of metals spread in high concentrations in soil, water and air includes several toxic as well as essential elements, such as arsenic (As), cadmium (Cd), chromium (Cr), aluminum (Al), and selenium (Se). The problems for some metals are geographically confined, while for others, they are widespread. For instance, arsenic is an important toxic metalloid whose contamination in Southeast Asia and other parts of world is well documented. Its threats to human health via food consumption have generated immense interest in understanding plants? responses to arsenic stress. Metals constitute crucial components of key enzymes and proteins in plants. They are important for the proper growth and development of plants. In turn, plants serve as sources of essential elements for humans and animals. Studies of their physiological effects on plants metabolism have led to the identification of crucial genes and proteins controlling metal uptake and transport, as well as the sensing and signaling of metal stresses. Plant-Metal Interactions sheds light on the latest development and research in analytical biology with respect to plant physiology. More importantly, it showcases the positive and negative impacts of metals on crop plants growth and productivity.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; An Integrated Transcriptomic, Proteomic, and Metabolomic Approach to Unravel the Molecular Mechanisms of Metal Stress Tolerance in Plants; 1 Introduction; 2 Heavy Metal-Induced Nutritional and Water-Deficit Stresses; 2.1 Nutritional Stress in Metal-Exposed Plants; 2.2 Water Stress in Metal-Exposed Plants; 3 Role of Thiol- and Non-thiol Compounds and Metal(loid) Chelation; 3.1 Phytochelatins and Their Induction; 3.2 Biosynthesis of PCs and Variations (Homo-PCs, Hydroxymethyl-PCs, and Iso-PCs); 3.3 Mode of Action of PCs 3 Heavy Metal-Induced Oxidative Damage in Plants4 Signaling Response Under Heavy Metal Stress; 4.1 Signal Transduction; 4.2 Protein Metabolism; 4.3 Functional Genomics; 4.4 miRNA-Based Regulation; 5 Conclusion and Future Outlook; References; Heavy Metal Toxicity and Plant Productivity: Role of Metal Scavengers; 1 Heavy Metal Toxicity: An Oxidative Challenge; 2 Non-protein Thiols: Key Metabolites in Heavy Metal Scavenging; 3 The Role of Proline and Glycine Betaine in Improving Heavy Metal Stress Tolerance in Plants; 4 Concluding Comments; References 3.4 The Superfamily of Metallothioneins: Classification and Structure of Metallothioneins3.5 Expression of MT Genes; 3.6 Metal(loid) Specificity and Chelation; 3.7 Functions of MTs; 4 Heavy Metal Stress Tolerance at Molecular Level: Omics Approach; 4.1 Transcriptomics; 4.2 Proteomics; 4.3 Metabolomics; 5 Conclusions and the Way Forward; References; Molecular Mechanism and Signaling Response of Heavy Metal Stress Tolerance in Plants; 1 Introduction; 2 Heavy Metal Ion Uptake and Translocation; 2.1 Factors Influencing Metal Uptake; 2.2 Sequestration of Heavy Metals and Compartmentalization 5 ConclusionsLiterature; Heavy Metal Hyperaccumulator Plants: The Resource to Understand the Extreme Adaptations of Plants Towards Heavy Metals; 1 Introduction; 2 Response of Hyperaccumulator to Metals; 2.1 Metal Uptake by Roots of Hyperaccumulator Plants; 2.2 Metal Accumulation in Hyperaccumulator Plants; 2.2.1 Metal-Binding Proteins; 2.2.2 Phytochelatins; 2.2.3 Metal Chelation by Small Molecules; 3 Long-Distance Transport of Metal Ions in Hyperaccumulator Plants; 4 Intracellular Partitioning and Subcellular Transport of Metals in Plants Cadmium (Cd): An Emerging Regulatory Metal with Critical Role in Cell Signalling and Plant Morphogenesis1 Cadmium in Nature; 2 The Uptake and Distribution of Cadmium in Plants; 2.1 Cd in Plant Organs; 2.2 Cd Transporters, Mechanisms of Translocation and Final Distribution; 3 Toxicity to Plants; 3.1 The Impact on Plant Anatomy, Morphogenesis and Development; 3.2 Cd/Zn and Cd/Fe Interactions; 3.3 Can Cd be advantageous to Plants?; 4 Cadmium Signalling; 4.1 ROS, NO and Hormones; 4.2 Ethylene; 4.3 Jasmonic Acid; 4.4 Salicylic Acid; 4.5 Brassinosteroids; 4.6 Abscisic Acid; 4.7 microRNAs
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Gaurav Sablok.
    Summary: Major portion of the planet earth is covered by seas and oceans representing 96.5% of the planets water, playing a detrimental role in sustaining the plant including crop diversity and productivity for human consumption. Water resources contain both soluble and transition metals, which are easily absorbed by plants through roots as a first point of contact and subsequently play important physiological and biological functions in plants. Transition metals such as copper (Cu), iron (Fe), manganese (Mn) and zinc (Zn) contribute to the plant productivity by playing key functional roles in the photosynthesis. In addition, to their major role in regulating the plant productivity, they also play an important role by acting as homeostatic regulators in uni-parentally inherited chloroplasts and maintains the flow of the electron transfer. It is worthwhile to mention that they play a critical role as transporters, which acts as electron balancing units for managing the electrostatic potential across the membranes. In contrast, some metals such as Cd, As play a significant role in inducing the stress mechanism and influencing either directly or in-directly Haber-Weiss reactions either through the production of the reactive oxygen species (ROS) or through the membrane damage thus leading to leakage of membrane transporters. However, besides playing a detrimental role as transporters in plant system, excessive accumulation of these metals due to the increasing contamination in the marginal soil and water are posing important threats to the plant system. Realizing the toxic effects of the metals, several physiological evidences have been laid for the credence of the metal toxicity and their concurrent effect on plant productivity. Increasing effects of the metals as toxicants can have three adverse effects on the populations: population can move, persist via local adaptation or phenotypic plasticity, or die. Next generation sequencing studies have revolutionized our abilities to detect the changes in expression profiles across an array of genes, which can in-turn help to develop early markers of metal induced stress. Plant Metallomics and Functional Omics: A System-Wide Perspective focuses on the applications of the system wide understanding of the biological and functional interplay occurring at the juncture of the metalloid induced stress and toxicity. The main goal of this book is to familiarize the readers with the most up-to-date information on metal-induced physiological changes in plant species.

    Contents:
    Energy crop at heavy metal contaminated arable land as an alternative for food and feed production: biomass quantity and quality
    Systems biology of metal tolerance in plants: a case study on the effects of long-term Cd-exposure on the stem of alfalfa
    One for all and all for one! Increased plant heavy metal tolerance by growth promoting microbes: a metabolomic standpoint
    Genomics and Physiological Evidence of heavy metal tolerance in plants
    Redox mechanism and plant tolerance to heavy metals: Genes and regulatory networks
    System biology of metal tolerance in plants: An integrated view of genomics, transcriptomics, metabolomics and phenomics
    Crosstalk between plant miRNA and heavy metal toxicity
    Recent Advances in imaging of element distribution in plants by focussed beam techniques
    As, Cd, Cr, Cu, Hg:Physiological implications and toxicity in plants
    Heavy Metal Toxicity: Physiological Implications of Metal Toxicity in Plants
    Impact of heavy metals on non-food herbaceous crops and prophylactic role of Si. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ajit Varma, Swati Tripathi, Ram Prasad, editor.
    Summary: This book shares the latest insights into the genetic basis of molecular communication between plants and their microbial consortia. Further, the book highlights the capabilities of the rhizosphere and endosphere, which help manage ecosystem responses to climate change, nutrient cycling and sequestration of carbon; and discusses their application to the development and management of renewable energy sources. In their natural environments, plants are surrounded by a tremendous number of microorganisms. Some microbes directly interact with plants in a mutually beneficial fashion, while others colonize plants solely for their own advantage. In addition, microbes can indirectly affect plants by drastically altering their environments. Understanding the complex nature of the plant-microbe interface (PMI) can pave the way for novel strategies to improve plant productivity in an eco-friendly manner. The PMI approach focuses on understanding the physical, molecular, and chemical interactions between organisms in order to determine their functional roles in biological, physical, chemical and environmental systems. Although several metabolites from plants and microbes have now been fully characterized, their roles in chemical interactions between these associates remain poorly understood, and require further investigation.

    Contents:
    Mycorrhizae Resource Allocation in Root Development and Root Morphology
    Plant-Mycorrhizal and Plant-Rhizobial Interfaces: Underlying Mechanisms and Their Roles in Sustainable Agroecosystems
    Truffles and Morels: Two Different Evolutionary Strategies of Fungal-Plant Interactions in the Pezizales
    AM Fungi and Trichoderma Interaction for Biological Control of Soilborne Plant Pathogen Fusarium oxysporum
    Management of Soil-Borne Diseases of Grain Legumes Though Broad-Spectrum Actinomycetes Having Plant Growth-Promoting and Biocontrol Traits
    Soil-Microbes-Plants: Interactions and Ecological Diversity
    Pathogen and Management of Fungal Wilt of Banana Through Biocontrol Agents
    Potential of Plant-Microbe Interactions in Management of Pesticides-Riddled Soil
    Algae and Cyanobacteria as Biocontrol Agents of Fungal Plant Pathogens
    Non-target Effects of Trichoderma on Plants, and Soil Microbial Communities
    Olive Anthracnose and Its Management by Fungal Endophytes: An Overview
    Metagenomics as a Tool to Explore New Insights from Plant Microbe Interface
    A Concise Compilation of the Diverse Detection Methods to Study Plant-Microbe Interfaces at the Cellular and Molecular Level: The Past, Present and Future
    Anthosphere Microbiome and Their Associated Interactions at the Aromatic Interface
    Efficiency of Soil, Plant and Microbes for Healthy Plant Immunity and Sustainable Agricultural System
    Biological Control of Soft-Rot of Ginger: Current Trends and Future Prospects
    Biological Effects of Uranium and Its Decay Products on Soil Microbes, Plants, and Humans
    An Overview of Effective Concentration of Industrial Effluent for Improving Crop Production and its Effect on Micro-Biodiversity Zone of Soil.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ajit Varma, Swati Tripathi, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of the latest advances concerning symbiotic relationships between plants and microbes, and their applications in plant productivity and agricultural sustainability. Symbiosis is a living phenomenon including dynamic variations in the genome, metabolism and signaling network, and adopting a multidirectional perspective on their interactions is required when studying symbiotic organisms. Although various plant-microbe symbiotic systems are covered in this book, it especially focuses on arbuscular mycorrhiza (AM) symbiosis and root nodule symbiosis, the two most prevalent systems. AM symbiosis involves the most extensive interaction between plants and microbes, in the context of phylogeny and ecology. As more than 90% of all known species of plants have the potential to form mycorrhizal associations, the productivity and species composition, as well as the diversity of natural ecosystems, are frequently dependent upon the presence and activity of mycorrhizas. In turn, root nodule symbiosis includes morphogenesis and is formed by communication between plants and nitrogen-fixing bacteria. The biotechnological application of plantmicrobe symbiosis is expected to foster the production of agricultural and horticultural products while maintaining ecologically and economically sustainable production systems. Designed as a hands-on guide, this book offers an essential resource for researchers and students in the areas of agri-biotechnology, soil biology and fungal biology.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Chapter 1: The Rhizobium-Plant Symbiosis: State of the Art
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Legume-Rhizobium Symbiosis for Root Nodulation
    1.3 Diversity of Legumes Depending on Rhizobium
    1.4 Taxonomy and Host Specificity of Rhizobium Species
    1.5 Factors Affecting Legume-Rhizobium Symbiosis
    1.6 Mechanism Behind Root Nodulation
    1.7 Role of Nitrogen and Mechanism of Root Nodulation
    1.8 Role of Ethylene in Preinfection Events
    1.9 Organogenesis of the Nodule
    1.10 Genetic Basis of Phytohormones During Root Nodule Development 1.11 Application of Rhizobia as Biofertilizers
    1.12 New Aspects of Plant-Rhizobia Symbiosis
    1.13 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Diversity and Importance of the Relationship Between Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi and Nitrogen-Fixing Bacteria in T ...
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Agroforestry Systems in the Mexican Tropics
    2.3 Functionality of Soil Microorganisms in AFS
    2.4 Soil Microorganisms in AFS in the Tropics of Mexico
    2.4.1 Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi
    2.4.2 Nitrogen-Fixing Bacteria
    2.5 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References 5.2 Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Development
    5.2.1 Asymbiotic Stage
    5.2.2 Mutual Recognition of Symbiotic Partners
    5.2.2.1 Strigolactones
    5.2.2.2 Regulation of Strigolactone Biosynthesis
    5.2.2.3 Fungal Signaling Molecules and Plant Receptors
    5.2.3 Formation of Appresorium/Hyphopodium
    5.2.4 PPA Formation
    5.2.4.1 Plant Genes Required for PPA Formation
    5.2.5 The Common SYM Pathway
    5.2.5.1 SYMRK
    5.2.5.2 CASTOR and POLLUX
    5.2.5.3 Nucleoporins
    5.2.5.4 CCaMK
    5.2.5.5 CYCLOPS
    5.2.6 Arbuscule Development
    5.3 Diverse Roles of AM Chapter 3: Nitrogen Fixation in a Legume-Rhizobium Symbiosis: The Roots of a Success Story
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Root Nodule
    3.2.1 Definition and Types
    3.2.2 Nodule Formation
    3.2.2.1 Preinfection Stage
    3.2.2.2 Infection Stage
    3.2.2.3 Nodule Organogenesis
    3.3 N2 Fixation in a Legume-Rhizobium Symbiosis
    3.4 Effect of Abiotic Stress on Legume-Rhizobium Symbioses and N2 Fixation
    3.4.1 Salinity Stress
    3.4.2 Drought Stress
    3.4.3 Heat Stress
    3.4.4 Soil Acidity/Low pH
    3.4.5 Soil Nutrient Deficiency
    3.5 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References Chapter 4: A Genome-Wide Investigation on Symbiotic Nitrogen-Fixing Bacteria in Leguminous Plants
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Rhizobia and Legume
    4.3 Nodulation Factors (NFs)
    4.4 Advances in Nitrogen-Fixing Root Nodule Symbiosis
    4.5 Genome-Wide Investigation of Nodule Forming Bacteria
    4.6 Conclusions and Future Prospects
    References
    Chapter 5: Symbiotic Signaling: Insights from Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Symbiosis
    5.1 Introduction
    5.1.1 Types of Mycorrhiza
    5.1.1.1 Ectomycorrhizae (ECM)
    5.1.1.2 Endomycorrhizae
    5.1.1.3 Arbuscular Mycorrhiza
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ajar Nath Yadav, Joginder Singh, Ali Asghar Rastegari, Neelam Yadav, editors.
    Summary: This book encompasses the current knowledge of plant microbiomes and their potential biotechnological application for plant growth, crop yield and soil health for sustainable agriculture. The plant microbiomes (rhizospheric, endophytic and epiphytic) play an important role in plant growth, development, and soil health. Plant and rhizospheric soil are a valuable natural resource harbouring hotspots of microbes, and it plays critical roles in the maintenance of global nutrient balance and ecosystem function. The diverse group of microbes is key components of soil-plant systems, where they are engaged in an intense network of interactions in the rhizosphere/endophytic/phyllospheric. The rhizospheric microbial diversity present in rhizospheric zones has a sufficient amount of nutrients release by plant root systems in form of root exudates for growth, development and activities of microbes. The endophytic microbes are referred to those microorganisms, which colonize in the interior of the plant parts, viz root, stem or seeds without causing any harmful effect on host plant. Endophytic microbes enter in host plants mainly through wounds, naturally occurring as a result of plant growth, or through root hairs and at epidermal conjunctions. Endophytes may be transmitted either vertically (directly from parent to offspring) or horizontally (among individuals). The phyllosphere is a common niche for synergism between microbes and plant. The leaf surface has been termed as phyllosphere and zone of leaves inhabited by microorganisms as phyllosphere. The plant part, especially leaves, is exposed to dust and air currents resulting in the establishments of typical flora on their surface aided by the cuticles, waxes and appendages, which help in the anchorage of microorganisms. The phyllospheric microbes may survive or proliferate on leaves depending on extent of influences of material in leaf diffuseness or exudates. The leaf diffuseness contains the principal nutrients factors (amino acids, glucose, fructose and sucrose), and such specialized habitats may provide niche for nitrogen fixation and secretions of substances capable of promoting the growth of plants.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1
    Diversity, Plant Growth Promotion Attributes and Agricultural Applications of Rhizospheric Microbes (Gangavarapu Subrahmanyam, Amit Kumar, Sosanka Protim Sandilya, Mahananda Chutia, Ajar Nath Yadav)
    Chapter 2
    Culturable Endophytic Fungal Communities Associated with Cereal Crops and their Role in Plant Growth Promotion(Hira Saleem, Hareem Mohsin, Rabia Tanvir, Yasir Rehman)
    Chapter 3
    Current Perspectives on Phosphate Solubilizing Endophytic Fungi: Ecological Significances and Biotechnological Applications (Edla Sujatha, Kuraganti Gunaswetha, Pallaval Veera Bramhachari)
    Chapter 4
    Endophytic Microbes from Medicinal Plants and Their Secondary Metabolites for Agricultural Significances (Chanda V. Parulekar Berde, Prachiti. P. Rawool, Pallaval Veera Bramhachari, Vikrant B. Berde)
    Chapter 5
    Phyllospheric Microbiomes: Diversity, Ecological Significance, and Biotechnological Applications (Natesan Sivakumar, Ramamoorthy Sathish Kumar, Gopal Selvakumar, Rajaram Shyamkumar and Kalimuthu Arjune Kumar)
    Chapter 6
    Biofilms Forming Microbes: Diversity and Potential Application in Plant-Microbe Interaction and Plant Growth (Ajay Kumar and Joginder Singh)
    Chapter 7
    Actinobacteria: Diversity, Plant Interactions and Biotechnology Applications (Monnanda Somaiah Nalini, and Harischandra Sripathy Prakash)
    Chapter 8
    Phylogenetic Diversity of Epiphytic Pink-Pigmented Methylotrophic Bacteria and Role in Alleviation of Abiotic Stress in Plants (Ganapathy Ashok, Guruvu Nambirajan, Krishnan Baskaran, chandran Viswanathan and Xavier Alexander)
    Chapter 9
    Potassium Solubilizing Microbes: Diversity, Ecological Significances and Biotechnological Applications (Dheeraj Pandey, Ifra Zoomi, Harbans Kaur Kehri, Uma Singh, Kanhaiya L. Chaudhri and Ovaid Akhtar)
    Chapter 10
    Alleviation of Stress-Induced Ethylene-Mediated Negative Impact on Crop Plants by Bacterial ACC Deaminase: Perspectives and Applications in Stressed Agriculture Management (Hass an Etesami, Fatemeh Noori, Ali Ebadi, Narges Reiahi Samani)
    Chapter 11
    Halophilic Microbes from Plant Growing Under the Hypersaline Habitats and Their Application for Plant Growth and Mitigation of Salt Stress (Jai Prakash, Enespa, Prem Chandra)
    Chapter 12
    Microbes Mediated Drought Tolerance in Plants: Current Developments and Future Challenges (Iti Gontia-Mishra, Swapnil Sapre, Reena Deshmukh, Sumana Sikdar and Sharad Tiwari)
    Chapter 13
    Microbial Consortium as Biofertilizers for Crops Growing Under the Extreme Habitats (Chuks Kenneth Odoh, Kabari Sam, Nenibarini Zabbey, Chibuzor Nwadibe Eze, Amechi S. Nwankwegu, Charity Laku and Boniface Barinem Dumpe)
    Chapter 14
    Global Scenario of Plant Microbiome for Sustainable Agriculture: Current Advancements and Future Challenges (Simranjeet Singh, Vijay Kumar, Satyender Singh, Daljeet Singh Dhanjal, Shivika Datta and Joginder Singh)
    Chapter 15
    Current Aspects and Application of Biofertilizers for Sustainable Agriculture (Modhurima Misra, Ashish Sachan, Shashwati Ghosh Sachan)
    Chapter 16
    Plant Microbiomes for Sustainable Agriculture: Conclusion and Future Vision (Ajar Nath Yadav).
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Célia Miguel, Tamas Dalmay, Inês Chaves, editors.
    Summary: This book summarizes the latest findings on the functions of microRNAs in the regulation of plant development and responses to the surrounding environment. MicroRNAs are an important class of molecules that can be found in diverse groups of organisms, including plants and animals, and the investigation of their roles is a highly dynamic and "hot" research topic. The respective chapters address four main aspects, namely: microRNA investigation and annotation, the regulatory roles of microRNAs in various developmental processes, in response to abiotic factors, and in the context of biotic stress response regulation. Systematically reviewing the most important findings in this field, the book offers an essential guide for undergraduate and graduate students, teachers, and plant science researchers. Due to the potential applications of microRNAs in crop breeding and plant protection, it also represents a valuable resource for scientists in academia and the private sector alike.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    Studying microRNAs in Plants
    1 Regulation of Plant microRNA Biogenesis
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Regulation of microRNA Biogenesis Via Regulation of Microprocessor Complex
    1.3 Regulation of microRNA Biogenesis Via pri-miRNA Splicing, Alternative polyA Site Selection and miPEPs
    1.4 microRNA Action and Turnover in the Cytoplasm
    1.4.1 Export of miRNAs from Nucleus to the Cytoplasm
    1.4.2 microRNA Strand Selection in RISC Complex
    1.4.3 Stabilization of microRNA in Cytoplasm 1.4.4 microRNA Mode of Action: mRNA Cleavage or Translational Inhibition?
    1.5 Conclusions
    References
    2 Technologies to Address Plant microRNA Functions
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Gain-of-Function Strategies
    2.3 Loss-of-Function Strategies
    2.3.1 Targeting Mature miRNAs
    2.3.2 Targeting pri/pre-miRNAs
    2.4 Expressing Cleavage-Resistant Target Genes
    2.5 Delivering TMs and STTMs or Overexpressing miRNAs in Plants Through Viral Vectors
    2.6 Studying Interactions of miRNAs
    2.7 Conclusions and Future Perspectives
    References 3 Strategies and Resources for the Identification of microRNAs in Non-model Plants
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Available Tools and Resources
    3.3 Further Considerations
    References
    4 microRNAs in the Formation of Epigenetic Memory in Plants: The Case of Norway Spruce Embryos
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Environmentally Induced Epigenetic Memory
    4.3 Identification of Conserved and Novel miRNAs in Spruce
    4.4 miRNAs and Their Targets Profiling in Spruce Embryos During Formation of an Epigenetic Memory
    4.5 Differentially Expressed miRNAs Targeting Epigenetic Regulators
    4.6 Conclusion 6.4 miRNAs in the Control of Embryo/Seed Maturation
    6.5 miRNAs Highlighted During Embryogenesis of Non-model Species
    6.6 miRNAs in the Induction and Development of Somatic Embryos
    6.7 Conclusions
    References
    7 Emerging of microRNAs as Key Regulators in Plant Secondary Metabolism
    7.1 Introduction
    7.2 miRNA Roles in the Biosynthesis of Terpenoids
    7.3 miRNA Roles in the Biosynthesis of Flavonoids
    7.4 miRNA Roles in the Biosyhthesis of Alkaloids and Nitrogen-Containing Secondary Compounds
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by James Whelan, Monika W. Murcha.
    Contents:
    Isolation of intact mitochondria from the model plant species Arabidopsis thaliana and Oryza sativa / Monika W. Murcha and James Whelan
    Determining mitochondrial transcript termini for the study of transcription start sites and transcript 5' end maturation / Stefan Binder and Kristina Kühn
    Mitochondrial run-on transcription assay using biotin labeling / Kristina Kühn
    In vitro RNA uptake studies in plant mitochondria / Szymon Kubiszewski-Jakubiak [and five others]
    In vitro and in vivo protein uptake studies in plant mitochondria / Owen Duncan [and three others]
    Plant mitochondrial proteomics / Nicolas L. Taylor and A. Harvey Millar
    Identification of lysine-acetylated mitochondrial proteins and their acetylation sites / Markus Hartl, Ann-Christine König, and Iris Finkemeier
    Flowchart to analyze protease activity in plant mitochondria / Pedro F. Teixeira [and three others]
    Activity measurements of mitochondrial enzymes in native gels / Peter Schertl and Hans-Peter Braun
    Activity assay for plant mitochondrial enzymes / Shaobai Huang, Chun Pong Lee, and A. Harvey Millar
    Analysis of type II NAD(P)H dehydrogenases / Kathleen L. Soole and Chevaun A. Smith
    Assessment of respiration in isolated plant mitochondria using clark-type electrodes / Richard P. Jacoby, A. Harvey Millar, and Nicolas L. Taylor
    Micro-respiratory measurements in plants / Yun Shin Sew, A. Harvey Millar, and Elke Stroeher
    Improvements to define mitochondrial metabolomics using nonaqueous fractionation / Richard Fly [and four others]
    Mitochondrial markers of programmed cell death in Arabidopsis thaliana / Theresa J. Reape ... [et al.]
    Imaging and analysis of mitochondrial dynamics in living cells / Sanjaya B. Ekanayake [and four others]
    Analysis of plant mitochondrial function using fluorescent protein sensors / Stephan Wagner [and six others]
    In planta analysis of leaf mitochondrial superoxide and nitric oxide / Marina Cvetkovska and Greg C. Vanlerberghe
    Databases and informatics resources for analysis of plant mitochondria / Reena Narsai
    Expression and crystallization of the plant alternative oxidase / Benjamin May [and six others].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ram Prasad, editor.
    Summary: An improved understanding of the interactions between nanoparticles and plant retorts, including their uptake, localization, and activity, could revolutionize crop production through increased disease resistance, nutrient utilization, and crop yield. This may further impact other agricultural and industrial processes that are based on plant crops. This two-volume book analyses the key processes involved in the nanoparticle delivery to plants and details the interactions between plants and nanomaterials. Potential plant nanotechnology applications for enhanced nutrient uptake, increased crop productivity and plant disease management are evaluated with careful consideration regarding safe use, social acceptance and ecological impact of these technologies. Plant Nanobionics: Volume 1, Advances in the Understanding of Nanomaterials Research and Applications begins the discussion of nanotechnology applications in plants with the characterization and nanosynthesis of various microbes and covers the mechanisms and etiology of nanostructure function in microbial cells. It focuses on the potential alteration of plant production systems through the controlled release of agrochemicals and targeted delivery of biomolecules. Industrial and medical applications are included. Volume 2 continues this discussion with a focus on biosynthesis and toxicity.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Author;
    Chapter 1: Recent Advancements and New Perspectives of Nanomaterials;
    Chapter 2: Recent Progress in Applied Nanomaterials; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Nanotechnology in Agriculture Sector; 2.2.1 Effect of Nanoparticles on Germination of Seed; 2.2.2 Nanofertilizer and Nanopesticides; 2.2.2.1 Macro- and Micronutrient Nanofertilizers; 2.2.2.2 Nanopesticides; 2.2.3 Role of Nanosensors in Agriculture; 2.3 Role of Nanoparticles in Food Sector; 2.3.1 Food Processing and Packaging; 2.3.1.1 Antimicrobial Packaging; 2.3.1.2 Barrier Packaging 2.3.1.3 Biodegradable Packaging2.3.2 Other Advantages of Nanomaterials in Food Industry; 2.3.2.1 Nanosensors; 2.4 Application of Nanomaterials in Manufacture and Electronics; 2.5 Applications in Environment; 2.6 Nanotechnology in Medicine; 2.6.1 Organic Nanoparticles; 2.6.1.1 Polymeric Nanoparticles Role in Therapeutics; 2.6.1.1.1 PLGA Nanoparticles; 2.6.1.1.2 Chitosan; 2.6.1.1.3 Dendrimers; 2.6.2 Liposomes; 2.6.3 Inorganic Nanoparticles; 2.6.3.1 Gold Nanoparticles (AuNPs); 2.6.3.2 Quantum Dots; 2.7 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 3: An Insight into Plant Nanobionics and Its Applications 6.5.2 Physiological and Biochemical Responses6.6 Conclusion and Future Prospects; References;
    Chapter 7: Nanoagriculture and Energy Advances; 7.1 Nanotechnology and Nanoagriculture; 7.2 Water; 7.2.1 Sensor for Diagnostic; 7.2.1.1 Quality; 7.2.1.2 Microorganism and Contaminants Detected; 7.2.2 Water Purification; 7.2.2.1 Photocatalysis; 7.2.2.2 Membranes, Zeolites, and Nanoporous Materials; 7.2.2.3 Metallic and Magnetic Nanoparticles; 7.3 Nanoagriculture; 7.3.1 Pesticides and Fertilizers; 7.3.2 Smart Agrochemical Delivery Systems; 7.3.3 Sensor to Monitor Soil Conditions; 7.4 Energy 7.4.1 Biogas7.4.2 Biofuels; 7.4.3 Photovoltaic Cells; 7.4.4 Photoelectrochemical Cells; 7.5 Outlooks; References;
    Chapter 8: Nanopesticides and Nanosensors in Agriculture; 8.1 Introduction; 8.2 Pesticide Toxicity; 8.3 Nanopesticides; 8.4 Nanoformulations; 8.5 Detection of Pesticides; 8.6 Ecotoxicology of Nanomaterials and Related Regulations; References;
    Chapter 9: Nano-agriculture in the Food Industry;
    Chapter 10: Nanotechnology and Plant Extracts as a Future Control Strategy for Meat and Milk Products; 10.1 Introduction; 10.2 Nanoencapsulation of Plant Extracts
    Chapter 4: Plastics, Micro- and Nanomaterials, and Virus-Soil Microbe-Plant Interactions in the Environment
    Chapter 5: Characterization Methods for Chitosan-Based Nanomaterials;
    Chapter 6: Impact of Nanomaterials in Plant Systems; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Types of Nanomaterials; 6.2.1 Metal Nanomaterials; 6.2.2 Carbon-Based Materials; 6.2.3 Polymeric Nanomaterials; 6.2.4 Hybrid Nanomaterials; 6.3 Synthesis of Nanomaterials; 6.3.1 Top-Down Synthesis; 6.3.2 Bottom-Up Synthesis; 6.4 Role of Nanomaterials in Plant Growth; 6.5 Phytotoxic Responses to Nanomaterials; 6.5.1 Nanotoxicity and Plant Growth
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ram Prasad, editor.
    Summary: Plant Nanobionics, Volume 2 continues the important discussion of nanotechnology in plants, but focuses with a focus on biosynthesis and toxicity. This book discusses novel approaches to biosynthesis of nanoparticles for the increase of plant production systems, controlled release of agrochemicals and management of plant biotic stress. Green biosynthesis of metallic nanoparticles from bee propolis, artificial photosynthesis and hybrid structures are presented. Although engineered nanoparticles have great potential for solving many agricultural and societal problems, their consequences on the ecosystems and environment must be responsibly considered. This volume aims to contribute to the limited literature on this topic through its comprehensive examination of nanoparticle toxicity on plants, microbes and human health. Environmental risks with recent data are discussed as well as risks associated with the transfer of nanoparticles through the food chain. This volume highlights the study of a mechanistic approach and the study of nanoparticles towards nanobionics. The application of polymeric materials for smart packing in the food industry and agriculture sector as well as the future of nanomaterials in detecting soil microbes for environmental remediation are also included.

    Contents:
    1. Carbon Dots from Green Precursors with Amplified Photoluminescence: Synthesis, Characterization and Its Application
    2. Perovskite Oxides Based Photocatalysts for Excellent Visible Light Driven Photocatalysis and Energy Conversion
    3. Biogenic Material With Iron Nanoparticles for As(V) Removal
    4. Potentialies of Biogenic Plants Mediated Iron and Iron Oxides Nanoparticles and Their Utility
    5. Potentialies of Biogenic Plants Mediated Copper and Copper Oxides Nanostructures Nanoparticles and Their Utility
    6. Applications and Future Perspectives of Nanomaterials Towards Nanobionics
    7. Nanomaterials, Polymers and Smart Packing for Food Materials
    8. Polymeric Nanoparticles in Foods
    9. Application of Nano-particles in Crop Production and Protection
    10. Nanopesticide: Future Application of Nanomaterials in Plant Protection
    11. Nanotechnology: An Emerging Tool for Management of Biotic Stresses in Plants
    12. Plant Nanobionics: Application of Nanobiosensors in Plant Biology
    13. Toxicity of Nanomaterials in Plants and Environment
    14. Nanocellulose as Polymer Composite Reinforcement Material
    15. Nanomaterials and Their Applications in Bioimaging
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Masayuki Fujita, Hirosuke Oku, Kamrun Nahar, Barbara Hawrylak-Nowak, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses many aspects of plant-nutrient-induced abiotic stress tolerance. It consists of 22 informative chapters on the basic role of plant nutrients and the latest research advances in the field of plant nutrients in abiotic stress tolerance as well as their practical applications. Today, plant nutrients are not only considered as food for plants, but also as regulators of numerous physiological processes including stress tolerance. They also interact with a number of biological molecules and signaling cascades. Although research work and review articles on the role of plant nutrients in abiotic stress tolerance have been published in a range of journals, annual reviews and book chapters, to date there has been no comprehensive book on this topic. As such, this timely book is a valuable resource for a wide audience, including plant scientists, agronomists, soil scientists, botanists, molecular biologists and environmental scientists.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; List of Editors and Contributors; Editors; Contributors; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Biological Functions, Uptake and Transport of Essential Nutrients in Relation to Plant Growth; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Essential Nutrients; 1.2.1 Criteria for Essentiality; 1.3 Classification of Nutrients; 1.3.1 Classification Based on Quantity; 1.3.1.1 Major or Macronutrients; 1.3.1.2 Micronutrients; 1.3.2 Classification Based on Biochemical Behaviour; 1.4 Role of Nutrients in Plant Growth and Physiology; 1.4.1 Nitrogen; 1.4.1.1 Uptake and Assimilation. 1.4.1.2 Physiological Functions 1.4.1.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.1.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.2 Phosphorus; 1.4.2.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.2.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.2.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.3 Potassium; 1.4.3.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.3.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.3.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.3.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.4 Calcium; 1.4.4.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.4.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.4.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.5 Magnesium; 1.4.5.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.5.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.5.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.6 Sulphur. 1.4.10.2 Physiological Functions 1.4.10.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.10.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.11 Boron; 1.4.11.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.11.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.11.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.11.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.12 Molybdenum; 1.4.12.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.12.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.12.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.12.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.13 Nickel; 1.4.13.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.13.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.13.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.13.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.14 Chlorine; 1.4.14.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.14.2 Physiological Functions. 1.4.14.3 Deficiency Symptoms 1.4.14.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.15 Silicon; 1.4.15.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.15.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.15.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.5 Growth Laws; 1.5.1 Liebig's Law of the Minimum; 1.5.2 Mitscherlich's Laws; 1.5.3 Law of Maximum; 1.6 Bray's Concept of Nutrient Availability and Mobility; 1.7 Mechanisms of Nutrient Transport; 1.7.1 Mass Flow; 1.7.1.1 Factors Affecting Mass Flow; 1.7.2 Diffusion; 1.7.2.1 Factors Affecting Diffusion; 1.7.3 Root Interception; 1.8 Nutrient Uptake into the Root and Plant Cells; 1.8.1 Uptake of Water and Nutrients by Roots. 1.4.6.1 Uptake and Assimilation 1.4.6.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.6.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.6.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.7 Iron; 1.4.7.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.7.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.7.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.7.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.8 Manganese; 1.4.8.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.8.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.8.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.8.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.9 Zinc; 1.4.9.1 Uptake and Assimilation; 1.4.9.2 Physiological Functions; 1.4.9.3 Deficiency Symptoms; 1.4.9.4 Toxicity Symptoms; 1.4.10 Copper; 1.4.10.1 Uptake and Assimilation.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Paul Birch, John T. Jones, Jorunn I.B. Bos.
    Contents:
    Galaxy as a Platform for Identifying Candidate Pathogen Effectors
    Bioinformatic analysis of expression data to identify effector candidates
    Two-dimensional data binning for the analysis of genome architecture in filamentous plant pathogens and other eukaryotes
    On The Statistics Of Identifying Candidate Pathogen Effectors
    High-throughput imaging of plant immune responses
    In vivo protein-protein interaction studies with BiFC: conditions, cautions and caveats
    Particle bombardment-mediated transient expression to identify localization signals in plant disease resistance proteins and target sites for the proteolytic activity of pathogen effectors
    Purification of fungal haustoria from infected plant tissue by flow cytometry
    Functional Characterisation of Nematode Effectors in Plants
    Silencing of aphid genes by feeding on stable transgenic Arabidopsis thaliana
    Leaf-disc assay based on transient over-expression in Nicotiana benthamiana to allow functional screening of candidate effectors from aphids
    A growth quantification assay for Hyaloperonospora arabidopsidis isolates in Arabidopsis thaliana
    Simple quantification of in planta fungal biomass
    Virus-induced gene silencing and Agrobacterium tumefaciens-mediated transient expression in Nicotiana tabacum
    DIGE-ABPP by click chemistry: Pairwise comparison of serine hydrolase activities from the apoplast of infected plants
    A Simple and Fast Protocol for the Protein Complex Immunoprecipitation (Co-IP) of Effector Host Protein Complexes
    An Arabidopsis and Tomato Mesophyll Protoplast System for fast Identification of early MAMP-triggered Immunity-Suppressing Effectors
    Production of RXLR effector proteins for structural analysis by X-ray crystallography
    The Dos and Donts of effectoromics
    Protoplast cell death assay to study Magnaporthe oryzae AVR gene function in rice
    A Bacterial Type III Secretion Based Delivery System for Functional Assays of Fungal Effectors in Cereals
    Capture arrays to annotate resistance genes in plant genomes and to accelerate plant resistance gene discovery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Indrakant K. Singh, Archana Singh, editors.
    Summary: As food producers, plants are constantly under attack by insects. Over the course of evolution, plants have not only developed a sophisticated defense apparatus but have also refined biochemical defense mechanisms to protect themselves, thereby maintaining the ecological balance. Plant-pest interactions induce an elaborate array of reactions involving the release of volatile compounds, effector and signaling molecules, trans-membrane proteins, and a variety of enzymes and hormones. This book offers a comprehensive guide to the strategies that plants employ against insects and other pests to ensure their continued survival. Addressing an important gap in the literature, it shares the latest findings in the field of plant-pest interactions for a broad audience. Providing an overview of the current state of knowledge on plant-pest interactions and their role in the genetic improvement of crops, it offers an essential guide for researchers and professionals in the fields of agriculture, plant pathology, entomology, cell biology, molecular biology and genetics.

    Contents:
    1. Role of Herbivore-Associated Modulator Patterns (HAMPs) in Modulating Plant Defences
    2. Transcriptomics studies revealing enigma of Insect-Plant interaction
    3. Plant-Insect Interaction: A Proteomic approach in Defense Mechanism
    4. Role of miRNA in plant defense against insects
    5. Role of MAPKs during plant insect interaction
    6. Thioredoxins as molecular players in plants, pests and pathogens
    7. Plant volatiles and their role in insect olfaction
    8. Direct and indirect defense against Insects
    9. Signalling during Insect-Plant interaction
    10. Role of Phytohormones in Plant defense against Insects: signalling and crosstalk
    11. Plant proteinase inhibitor and protease Interactionduring Insect-Plant communication
    12. Natural insecticidal proteins and their potential in future IPM
    13. Deciphering the role of phytoanticipins, phytoalexins, and polyphenols in plant-insect defense
    14. Microbial influence on plant-insect interaction
    15. Microbe-plant insect Interactions: A Comparative dissection of Interactome
    16. Simplified perspective of complex Insect-plant interactions
    17. Molecular, biochemical aspect of Insect-Plant Interaction: A perspective for pest management
    18. Molecular, biochemical aspect of Insect-Plant Interaction: A perspective for pest management.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Waltraud X. Schulze.
    Contents:
    The plant kinome / Monika Zulawski and Waltraud X. Schulze
    Phosphatases in plants / Alois Schweighofer and Irute Meskiene
    Phosphoproteomics in cereals / Pingfang Yang
    Screening of kinase substrates using kinase knockout mutants / Taishi Umezawa
    Phosphopeptide pofiling of receptor kinase mutants / Xu Na Wu and Waltraud X. Schulze
    Combining metabolic N labeling with improved tandem MOAC for enhanced probing of the phosphoproteome / Martin Thomas [and four others]
    Kinase activity and specificity assay using synthetic peptides / Xu Na Wu and Waltraud X. Schulze
    Absolute quantitation of protein posttranslational modification isoform / Zhu Yang and Ning Li
    Phosphorylation stoichiometry determination in plant photosynthetic membranes / Björn Ingelsson, Rikard Fristedt, and Maria V. Turkina
    Phosphopeptide immuno-affinity enrichment to enhance detection of tyrosine phosphorylation in plants / Sharon C. Mithoe and Frank L. H. Menke
    The peptide microarray ChloroPhos1.0 : a screening tool for the identification of Arabidopsis thaliana chloroplast protein kinase substrates / Anna Schönberg and Sacha Baginsky
    Plant protein kinase substrates identification using protein microarrays / Shisong Ma and Savithramma P. Dinesh-Kumar
    Targeted analysis of protein phosphorylation by 2D electrophoresis / Kristin Mayer, Sally Albrecht, and Andreas Schaller
    Computational phosphorylation network reconstruction : methods and resources / Guangyou Duan and Dirk Walther
    Computational identification of protein kinases and kinase-specific substrates in plants / Han Cheng [and three others]
    Databases for plant phosphoproteomics / Waltraud X. Schulze, Qiuming Yao, and Dong Xu
    Phosphorylation site prediction in plants / Qiuming Yao, Waltraud X. Schulze, and Dong Xu.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    S. L. Kochhar, Sukhbir Kaur Gujral.
    Summary: "New findings populate the enormous literature on plant physiology, almost on a daily basis. This text is a detailed introduction to the essential concepts of this rapidly advancing field of study, to important physiological aspects related to the functioning of plants. It covers a wide range of topics including water, absorption of water, ascent of sap, transpiration, mineral nutrition, fat metabolism, enzymes and plant hormones. Photosynthesis, respiration and nitrogen metabolism get discussed in separate chapters because their contribution towards food security, climate resilient farming and sustainable life needs highlighting. Unlike other books on the subject, this text lays due emphasis on the conceptual framework. Alongside its emphasis on theoretical concepts, this text details experiments relating to each topic/chapter. A structured approach including principle, procedure, discussion, results and observation, and precautions has been used to explain the experiments"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge [2020]
  • Digital
    Satish C Bhatla, Manju A. Lal.
    Summary: This book focuses on the fundamentals of plant physiology for undergraduate and graduate students. It consists of 34 chapters divided into five major units. Unit I discusses the unique mechanisms of water and ion transport, while Unit II describes the various metabolic events essential for plant development that result from plants' ability to capture photons from sunlight, to convert inorganic forms of nutrition to organic forms and to synthesize high energy molecules, such as ATP. Light signal perception and transduction works in perfect coordination with a wide variety of plant growth regulators in regulating various plant developmental processes, and these aspects are explored in Unit III. Unit IV investigates plants' various structural and biochemical adaptive mechanisms to enable them to survive under a wide variety of abiotic stress conditions (salt, temperature, flooding, drought), pathogen and herbivore attack (biotic interactions). Lastly, Unit V addresses the large number of secondary metabolites produced by plants that are medicinally important for mankind and their applications in biotechnology and agriculture. Each topic is supported by illustrations, tables and information boxes, and a glossary of important terms in plant physiology is provided at the end.

    Contents:
    Part I TRANSPORT OF WATER AND NUTRIENTS
    Chapter 1. Plant water relations
    Chapter 2. Mineral nutrition
    Chapter 3. Water and soluble transport
    Part II METABOLISM
    Chapter 4. Concepts in metabolism
    Chapter 5. Photosynthesis
    Chapter 6. Photosynthate translocation
    Chapter 7. Respiration
    Chapter 8. ATP synthesis
    Chapter 9. Metabolism of storage carbohydrates
    Chapter 10. Lipid metabolism
    Chapter 11. Nitrogen metabolism
    Chapter 12. Sulphur, phosphorus and iron metabolism
    Part III DEVELOPMENT
    Chapter 13. Light perception and transduction
    Chapter 14. Plant growth regulators
    Chapter 15. Auxins
    Chapter 16. Cytokinins
    Chapter 17. Gibberellins
    Chapter 18. Abscisic acid
    Chapter 19. Ethylene
    Chapter 20. Brassinosteroids
    Chapter 21. Jasmonic acid
    Chapter 22. Recently discovered plant growth regulators
    Chapter 23. Mechanisms of signal reception and transduction
    Chapter 24. Embryogenesis, vegetative growth and organogenesis
    Chapter 25. Physiology of flowering
    Chapter 26. Pollination, embryogenesis and seed development
    Chapter 27. Fruit development and ripening
    Chapter 28. Seed dormancy and germination
    Chapter 29. Plant movements
    Chapter 30. Senescence and programmed cell death
    Part IV STRESS PHYSIOLOGY
    Chapter 31. Abiotic stress
    Chapter 32. Biotic interactions
    Part V APPLIED PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
    Chapter 33. Secondary metabolites
    Chapter 34. Plant physiology in agriculture and biotechnology
    Glossary.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Udo Blum.
    Summary: This volume continues the retrospective analyses of Volumes I and II, but goes beyond that in an attempt to understand how phenolic acids are partitioned in seedling-solution and seedling-microbe-soil-sand culture systems and how phenolic acid effects on seedlings may be related to the actual and/or conditional physicochemical properties (e.g., solubility, hydrophobicity, pKa, molecular structure and soil sorption/desorption) of simple phenolic acids. Specifically, it explores the quantitative partitioning (i.e., source-sink relationships) of benzoic and cinnamic acids in cucumber seedling-solution and cucumber seedling-microbe-soil-sand systems and how that partitioning may influence phenolic acid effects on cucumber seedlings. Regressions, correlations and conceptual and hypothetical models are used to achieve these objectives. Cucumber seedlings are used as a surrogate for phenolic acid sensitive herbaceous dicotyledonous weed seedlings. This volume was written specifically for researchers and their students interested in understanding how a range of simple phenolic acids and potentially other putative allelopathic compounds released from living plants and their litter and residues may modify soil chemistry, soil and rhizosphere microbial biology, seedling physiology and seedling growth. In addition, this volume describes the potential relationships, where they may exist, for direct transfer of organic compounds between plants, plant communication and plant-plant allelopathic interactions and addresses the following questions: Can physicochemical properties of phenolic acids be used as tools to help understand the complex behavior of phenolic acids and the ultimate effects of phenolic acids on sensitive seedlings? What insights do laboratory bioassays and the conceptual and hypothetical models of laboratory systems provide us concerning the potential behavior and effects of phenolic acids in field systems? What potential role may phenolic acids play in broadleaf-weed seedling emergence in wheat debris cover crop no-till systems?

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Reflections Regarding Plant-Plant Interactions, Plant-Plant Communications and Plant-Plant Allelopathic Interactions with an Emphasis on Plant-Plant Allelopathic Interactions
    Chapter 2. General Background for Plant-Plant Allelopathic Interactions
    Chapter 3. Conceptual Models for Soil Systems and Physicochemical Properties of Organic Compounds
    Chapter 4. Simple Phenolic Acids in Solution Culture I: pH and pKa
    Chapter 5. Simple Phenolic Acids in Solution Culture II: Log P, Log D and Molecular structure
    Chapter 6. Simple Phenolic Acids in Soil Culture I: Sorption, Kd and KOC
    Chapter 7. Simple Phenolic Acids in Soil Culture II: Biological Processes in Soil
    Chapter 8. Hypothetical Solution-Culture System Sub-Models
    Chapter 9. Hypothetical Soil-Culture System Sub-Models
    Chapter 10. Quantitative Hypothetical System Models for Cecil Soil-Sand Systems
    Chapter 11. Quantitative Hypothetical System Model for Portsmouth Soil-Sand System and Potential Modifying Factors
    Chapter 12. Epilog: Assumptions, Models, Hypotheses and Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Edwin F. George, Michael A. Hall and Geert-Jan De Klerk.
    Contents:

    v. 1. The Background.
    Digital Access Springer 2008
  • Digital
    edited by Jesus V. Jorrin-Novo, Setsuko Komatsu, Wolfram Weckwerth and Stefanie WienKoop.
    Contents:
    Plant Proteomics Methods and Protocols
    From Proteomics to Systems Biology: MAPA, MASS WESTERN, PROMEX and COVAIN as a User-Oriented Platform
    Plant Proteomics: From Genome Sequencing to Proteome Databases and Repositories
    How to Use 2D Gel Electrophoresis in Plant Proteomics
    Standarization of Data Processing and Statistical Analysis in a 2-DE-Based Comparative Plant Proteomics Experiment
    The Expanding Universe of Mass Analyzer Configurations for Biological Analysis
    A Protocol for Protein Extraction from Lipid-Rich Plant Tissues Suitable for Electrophoresis
    Making a Protein Extract in Plant Pathogenic Fungi for Gel- and LC-Based Proteomics
    Plant Proteomics Methods to Reach Low-Abundance Proteins
    Combination of 2DE and LC for Plant Proteomics Analysis
    2DE Analysis of Forest Tree Proteins Using Fluorescent Labels and Multiplexing
    Differential Plant Proteome Analysis by Isobaric Tags for Relative and Absolute Quantitation (iTRAQ)
    Global Quantitative Proteomics Using Spectral Counting: An Inexpensive Experimental and Bioinformatics Workflow for Deep Proteome Coverage
    Combining Chymotrypsin/trypsin Digestion to Identify Hydrophobic Proteins from Oil Bodies
    Mass Western for Absolute Quantification of Target Proteins and Considerations About the Instrument of Choice
    Selected Reaction Monitoring Mass Spectrometry: A Methodology Overview
    Mass Spectrometry Based Imaging of Metabolites and Proteins
    Using the Yeast Two-Hybrid System to Identify Protein-Protein Interactions
    Modifications of Wheat Germ Cell-Free System for Functional Proteomics of Plant Membrane Proteins
    Arabidopsis Proteomics: A Simple and Standardizable Workflow for Quantitative Proteome Characterization
    Analysis of Rice Proteins Using SDS-PAGE Shotgun Proteomics
    Medicago truncatula Proteomics for Systems Biology: Novel Rapid Shotgun LC-MS Approach for Relative Quantification Based on Full-Scan Selective Peptide Extraxtion (Selpex)
    Soybean Proteomics
    Proteome Analysis of Orphan Plant Species, Fact or Fiction?
    An Improved Detergent-Compatible Gel-Fractionation LC-LTQ-Orbitrap-MS Workflow for Plant and Microbial Proteomics
    Seed Proteomics
    Back to Osborne. Sequential Protein Extraction and LC-MS for Characterization of the Seed Proteome
    Xylem Sap Proteomics
    Suspension Cultured-Plant Cells as a Tool to Analyze the Extracellular Proteome
    Pollen Cultivation and Preparation for Proteome Studies
    Isolation of the Plant Cytosolic Fraction for Proteomic Analysis
    Quantitative Proteomic Analysis of Intact Plastids
    Shotgun Proteomics of Plant Plasma Membrane and Microdomain Proteins Using Nano-LC-MS/MS
    Plant Mitochondrial Proteomics
    Separation of the Plant Golgi Apparatus and Endoplasmic Reticulum by Free-Flow Electrophoresis
    Isolation of Leaf Peroxisomes from Arabidopsis for Organelle Proteomics Analyses
    Proteomics of Field Samples, the Case of the Chernobyl Area
    Differential Proteome and Secretome Analysis During Rice-Pathogen Interaction
    Protein Extraction and Gel-Based Separation Methods to Analyse Responses to Pathogens in Carnation (Dianthus caryophyllus L)
    StageTip-Based HAMMOC, an Efficient and Inexpensive Phosphopeptide Enrichment Method for Plant Shotgun Phosphoproteomics
    Simultaneous Identification and Quantification of Nitrosylation Sites by Combination of Biotin Switch and ICAT Labeling
    Tandem Metal-Oxide Affinity Chromatography for Enhanced Depth of Phosphoproteome Analysis
    N-Glycoprotein Enrichment by Lectin Affinity Chromatography
    Rapid and High-Throughput N-glycomic Analysis of Plant Glycoproteins
    Assay for Proteasome-Dependent Protein Degradation and Ubiquitinated Proteins
    Separation of Membrane Protein Complexes by Native LDS-PAGE
    Identification of Thioredoxin Target Disulfides Using Isotope-Coded Affinity Tags
    Class III Peroxidases
    Proteotyping of Holm oak (Quercus ilex subsp. ballota) Provenances Through Proteomic Analysis of Acorn Flour
    Immunoproteomics Analysis of Food Allergens
    Beer and Wort Proteomics
    Precipitation of Champagne Base Wine Proteins Prior 2D Electrophoresis
    The Minimal Information About a Proteomics Experiment (MIAPE) from the Proteomics Standards Initiative.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Vijay Pratap Singh, Samiksha Singh, Durgesh Kumar Tripathi, Sheo Mohan Prasad, Devendra Kumar Chauhan, editors.
    Summary: The population of the world continues to increase at an alarming rate. The trouble linked with overpopulation ranges from food and water scarcity to inadequacy of space for organisms. Overpopulation is also linked with several other demographic hazards, for instance, population blooming will not only result in exhaustion of natural repositories, but it will also induce intense pressure on the world economy. Today nanotechnology is often discussed as a key discipline of research but it has positive and negative aspects. Also, due to industrialization and ever-increasing population, nano-pollution has been an emerging topic among scientists for investigation and debate. Nanotechnology measures any substance on a macromolecular scale, molecular scale, and even atomic scale. More importantly, nanotechnology deals with the manipulation and control of any matter at the dimension of a single nanometer. Nanotechnology and nanoparticles (NPs) play important roles in sustainable development and environmental challenges as well. NPs possess both harmful and beneficial effects on the environment and its harboring components, such as microbes, plants, and humans. There are many beneficial impacts exerted by nanoparticles, however, including their role in the management of waste water and soil treatment, cosmetics, food packaging, agriculture, biomedicines, pharmaceuticals, renewable energies, and environmental remedies. Conversely, NPs also show some toxic effects on microbes, plants, as well as human beings. It has been reported that use of nanotechnological products leads to the more accumulation of NPs in soil and aquatic ecosystems, which may be detrimental for living organisms. Further, toxic effects of NPs on microbes, invertebrates, and aquatic organisms including algae, has been measured. Scientists have also reported on the negative impact of NPs on plants by discussing the delivery of NPs in plants. Additionally, scientists have also showed that NPs interact with plant cells, which results in alterations in growth, biological function, gene expression, and development. Thus, there has been much investigated and reported on NPs and plant interactions in the last decade. This book discusses the most recent work on NPs and plant interaction, which should be useful for scientists working in nanotechnology across a wide variety of disciplines.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Applications of Nanomaterials to Enhance Plant Health and Agricultural Production
    1 Introduction
    2 Nanoparticles: General Properties and Functions
    2.1 Silver Nanoparticles
    2.2 Zinc Nanoparticles
    2.3 Silicon Nanoparticles
    2.4 Carbon Nanotubes
    2.5 Quantum Dots
    3 Nanoparticles as an Agent In
    3.1 Plant Protection
    3.2 Plant Growth Augmentation
    4 Nanotechnology and Agricultural Development
    4.1 Nanofertilizers
    4.2 Nanopesticides
    4.3 Nanocomposites 5 Future Perspectives of Nanotechnology in the Field of Agriculture
    6 Conclusions
    References
    Nanoparticles and Their Impacts on Seed Germination
    1 Introduction
    2 Carbon-Based Nanoparticles
    2.1 Single-Walled Carbon Nanotubes
    2.2 Multiwalled Carbon Nanotube
    2.3 Graphene
    3 Metal-Based Nanoparticles
    3.1 Copper-Based Nanoparticles
    3.2 Silver Nanoparticles
    3.3 Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles
    3.4 Silicon Oxide Nanoparticles
    3.5 Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles
    4 Conclusions and Future Perspective
    References 5.1 ZnO NPs Affect Seed Germination and Vegetative Growth
    5.2 ZnO NP Affects Reproductive Processes
    6 Stress Alleviation by ZnO NPs
    7 Conclusions and Future Perspectives
    References
    Effect of TiO2 as Plant Growth-Stimulating Nanomaterial on Crop Production
    1 Introduction
    2 TiO2 Nanoparticles' Characterization and Biological Properties
    3 Behaviour of Nanoparticles in Culture Media and Soils
    3.1 Behaviour of Nanoparticles in Growth Media
    3.2 Behaviour of Nanoparticles in Soils and Specific Aspects of Field Experiments 5.7 Molecular Basis Responses
    5.8 Cytotoxicity, Genotoxicity, and Cell Cycle
    5.9 Secondary Metabolism
    5.10 Toxicity Mechanisms
    6 The nZnO-Mediated Protection Against Stress Condition
    7 In Vitro Application
    8 Knowledge Gaps, Exploitation, and Future Perspective
    References
    Physiology of Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles in Plants
    1 Introduction
    2 The Uptake and Transport of ZnO NPs in Higher Plants
    3 ZnO NPs and Oxidative Stress
    4 ZnO NPs Influence Nutrient Homeostasis and Photosynthetic Efficiency
    5 ZnO NPs and Plant Development Synthesis and Characterization of Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles and Their Impact on Plants
    1 Introduction
    2 Synthesis
    2.1 Biological, Chemical, and Physical Approaches
    2.2 Green Synthesis
    2.2.1 Biosynthesis of nZnO Using Plant Extract
    2.2.2 Biosynthesis of nZnO Using Microbes and Other Green Sources
    3 Soil Microbiome
    4 Uptake and Translocation
    5 Plant Responses to nZnO
    5.1 Seed Germination, Biomass, and Plant Early Growth
    5.2 Anatomical and Morphological Changes
    5.3 Antioxidant System
    5.4 Photosynthesis
    5.5 Phytohormones
    5.6 Nutritional Status
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Jose R. Botella, Miguel A. Botella.
    Contents:
    Suppressor screens in Arabidopsis / Xin Li and Yuelin Zhang
    Quantitative reverse transcription-qPCR-based gene expression analysis in plants / Heithem Ben Abdallah and Petra Bauer
    DNA-binding factor target identification by chromatin immunoprecipitation (ChIP) in plants / David Posé and Levi Yant
    Identification of genes responsible for natural variation in volatile content using next-generation sequencing technology / Iraida Amaya, Jeremy Pillet, and Kevin M. Folta
    Micro-tom tomato as an alternative plant model system : mutant collection and efficient transformation / Masahito Shikata and Hiroshi Ezura
    Culture of the tomato micro-tom cultivar in greenhouse / Christophe Rotha ... [et al.]
    Virus-induced gene silencing as a tool to study tomato fruit biochemistry / Elio Fantini and Giovanni Giuliano
    Simplified and rapid method for the isolation and transfection of Arabidopsis leaf mesophyll protoplasts for large-scale applications / Arnaldo L. Schapire and L. Maria Lois
    Preparation of epidermal peels and guard cell protoplasts for cellular, electrophysiological, and -omics assays of guard cell function / Mengmeng Zhu ... [et al.]
    Application of variable angle total internal reflection fluorescence microscopy to investigate protein dynamics in intact plant cells / Yinglang Wan ... [et al.]
    Immunoprecipitation of plasma membrane receptor-like kinases for identification of phosphorylation sites and associated proteins / asuhiro Kadota, Alberto P. Macho, and Cyril Zipfel
    Yeast three-hybrid system for the detection of protein-protein interactions / Natsumi Maruta, Yuri Trusov, and Jose R. Botella
    Cautions in measuring in vivo interactions using FRET and BiFC in Nicotiana benthamiana / Meral Tunc-Ozdemir, Yan Fu, and Alan M. Jones
    Analysis of protein-lipid interactions using purified C2 domains / Jessica Pérez-Sancho ... [et al.]
    Assessing kinase activity in plants with in-gel kinase assays / Pengcheng Wang and Jian-Kang Zhu
    Analyses of plant UDP-dependent glycosyltransferases to identify their volatile substrates using recombinant proteins / Yusuke Kamiyoshihara, Denise M. Tieman, and Harry J. Klee
    Competitive index : mixed infection-based virulence assays for genetic analysis in Pseudomonas syringae-plant interactions / Alberto P. Macho ... [e tal.]
    Simplified assays for evaluation of resistance to Alternaria brassicicola and turnip mosaic virus / Yuri Trusov ... [et al.]
    Simultaneous determination of plant hormones by GC-TOF-MS / José G. Vallarino and Sonia Osorio.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Fritz H. Schweingruber, Annett Börner.
    Summary: This unique and attractive open access textbook combines the beauty of macroscopic pictures of plant stems with the corresponding colorfully stained images of anatomical micro-structures. In contrast to most botanical textbooks, it presents all the stem characteristics as photographs and shows the microscopic reality. The amount of text is reduced to a minimum, and the scientific information is highlighted with short legends and labeled photographs, allowing readers to focus on the pictures to easily understand how the anatomical structures relate to genetic, ecological, decomposition and technical influences. It includes a chapter devoted to simple anatomical preparation techniques, and further chapters showing the cell content, cell walls, meristematic tissues and stem structures of all major taxonomic units and morphological growth forms in various ecological and climatic regions from subarctic to equatorial latitudes, as well as structures of fossil, subfossil and technically altered wood. This textbook appeals to students and researchers in the fields of plant anatomy, taxonomy, ecology, dendrochronology, history, plant pathology, and evolutionary biology as well as to technologists.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Preparation techniques
    Making anatomical structures visible
    Morphology of the plant body
    Cellular composition of the plant bodies
    Structure of cell walls and cell contents
    Primary, secondary and tertiary meristem
    Stem anatomical structures of major taxonomic units
    Evolution of stems
    Anatomical adaptions to permanent changed environmental conditions
    Anatomical adaptions to temporarily changed environmental conditions
    Coexistence of algae, fungi and vascular plants
    Wood decay
    Fossilization, permineralization, coalification, carbonization and wetwood conservation
    Technically altered wood products.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jan Hejátko, Toshio Hakoshima, editors.
    Summary: After decades of dominance of genetics and genomics, the importance of structural biology is growing exponentially in the field of plant biology. The main objectives of this new book series is to "demystify" structural biology for plant researchers and to provide important insights into the basic molecular mechanisms underlying plant development through the diverse approaches utilized by structural biologists. The book series starts with a theme dedicated to hormonal signaling that has benefited from the application of structural biology. "Plant Structural Biology: Hormonal Regulations" provides up-to-date knowledge of the structural aspects of hormonal signal recognition, signal transduction, hormonal control of downstream regulatory pathways and hormonal crosstalk. The most distinctive features of this book as well as future titles is/will be to provide overview of cutting-edge research in the field of plant structural biology, and to serve as a compendium of various approaches that could be applied to problems being solved in modern plant biology. Last but not least, we hope this book will facilitate and broaden the community of (not only) plant scientists who are interested in structural biology approaches and tools. For these reasons, the style of this series is concise and general, in order to avoiding unnecessary details. Explanatory boxes describing the basics of specific approaches (e.g. X-ray crystallography, NMR, SAXS, molecular dynamics simulations, etc.) are included.

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction
    1. Overview of Proteins in the Plant Hormone Signaling
    2. Overview of Protein Degradation in the Plant Hormone Signaling
    3. Structural Insight into Recognition of Plant Peptide Hormones by Receptors
    Part II. Nuclear receptors
    4. Auxin
    5. Structural Biology of Jasmonic Acid Metabolism and Responses in Plants
    6. Gibberellin
    7. Strigolactone Signaling Proteins
    8. Abscisic acid Signaling and Biosynthesis: protein structures and molecular probes
    Part III. Transmembrane Receptors
    9. Brassinosteroid Sensing and Signaling in Plants
    10. Cytokinin and Ethylene Signaling
    Part IV. Appendix: Method Guidance
    11. X-Ray Crystallography
    12. Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
    13. Structural Biology Using Electron Microscopy
    14. Biological Small-Angle X-ray Scattering (SAXS)
    15. Computational Molecular Modeling Techniques of Biomacromolecular Systems.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Kenneth Palmer, Yuri Gleba, editors.
    Summary: In this volume, the authors provide an excellent overview of how far the plant viral vector field has come. The discipline is no longer exclusively in the domain of academics-there is a small, but growing number of small biotechnology companies that exploit plant viruses as the platform for commercial innovation in crop improvement, industrial product manufacturing, and human and veterinary health care.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Ichiro Uyeda and Chikara Masuta.
    Contents:
    Detection of plant viruses in mixed infection by a macroarray-assisted method
    RT-PCR and real-time RT-PCR methods for the detection of potato virus Y in potato leaves and tubers
    A new method to isolate total dsRNA
    Multiplex RT-PCR method for the simultaneous detection of nine grapevine viruses
    Detection methods for rice viruses by a reverse-transcription loop-mediated isothermal amplification (RT-LAMP)
    Real-time PCR protocols for the quantification of the begomovirus tomato yellow leaf curl sardinia virus in tomato plants and in its insect vector
    Detection and analysis of non-retroviral RNA virus-like elements in plant, fungal, and insect genomes
    Detection of plant viruses in natural environments by using RNA-seq
    Cloning and profiling of small RNAs from cucumber mosaic virus satellite rna
    Drawing sirnas of viral origin out from plant siRNAs libraries
    Viral detection by high-throughput sequencing
    Analysis and application of viroid-specific small RNAs generated by viroid-inducing RNA silencing
    Detection and characterization of mycoviruses in arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi by deep-sequencing
    Supersage as an analytical tool for host and viral gene expression
    Microarray analysis of R-gene-mediated resistance to viruses
    Construction of infectious cDNA clones derived from the potyviruses clover yellow vein virus and bean yellow mosaic virus
    Virus-induced gene silencing of n gene in tobacco by apple latent spherical virus vectors
    Simplified methods for the construction of RNA and DNA virus infectious clones
    Efficient double-stranded RNA production methods for utilization in plant virus control
    Detection of plant virus in meristem by immunohistochemistry and in situ hybridization
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Anna Maria Mercuri, A. Catherine D'Andrea, Rita Fornaciari, Alexa Höhn, editors.
    Summary: There is an essential connection between humans and plants, cultures and environments, and this is especially evident looking at the long history of the African continent. This book, comprising current research in archaeobotany on Africa, elucidates human adaptation and innovation with respect to the exploitation of plant resources. In the long-term perspective climatic changes of the environment as well as human impact have posed constant challenges to the interaction between peoples and the plants growing in different countries and latitudes. This book provides an insight into/overview of the manifold routes people have taken in various parts Africa in order to make a decent living from the provisions of their environment by bringing together the analyses of macroscopic and microscopic plant remains with ethnographic, botanical, geographical and linguistic research. The numerous chapters cover almost all the continent countries, and were prepared by most of the scholars who study African archaeobotany, i.e. the complex and composite history of plant uses and environmental transformations during the Holocene.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; Plants and People in the African Past: Themes and Objectives of Archaeobotany; IWAA Workshops; Published Volumes from Previous IWAA Workshops; The Organization and Themes of This Book; Acknowledgements; References; Mediterranean Africa; Archaeobotanical Study at the Early Dynastic Cemetery in Helwan (3100-2600 BC), Egypt: Plant Diversity at Early Dynastic Memphis; Abstract; Introduction; The Study Area; Materials and Methods; Results; Crop Plants; Cereals; Flax; Pulses; Wild/Weedy Plants; Wild Fruits; Field Weeds; Plants of Moist Habitats; Plants of Dry Habitats. Dry-Sieved Samples from Squares C3-4 and C10-11Charred Residue Samples from the Vats in Operation B; Discussion; Conclusions; Acknowledgements; References; Grapes, Raisins and Wine? Archaeobotanical Finds from an Egyptian Monastery; Abstract; Introduction; The Monastic Settlement of Saint John the Little; Charred Grape-Pressing Remains; Grape Pressing Remains: Evidence of Wine Production?; Grape-Pressing Remains: Uses and Disposal; Wine Production in the Coptic Church; Conclusions; Acknowledgements; References. Indeterminate Taxa Discussion; Conclusions; Acknowledgements; References; Study of Plant Remains from the Embalming Cache KV63 at Luxor, Egypt; Abstract; Introduction; Floral Collars in Ancient Egypt; Materials and Methods; Results and Discussion; The Plant Remains Arranged in K
    V63: Floral Collars and Other Plant Remains; Floral Collars; Other Plant Remains; Conclusion; Acknowledgements; References; Farming and Trade in Amheida/Trimithis (Dakhla Oasis, Egypt): New Insights from Archaeobotanical Analysis; Abstract; Introduction; The Context of Study; Ecological Setting. The Archaeological ContextMaterials and Methods; Results; Discussion; Semi-desert Vegetation; Acacia nilotica (Nile Acacia); Ziziphus spina-Christi (Christ's Thorn); Phoenix dactylifera (Date Palm); Mediterranean Plants; Olea europaea (Olive Tree); Ceratonia siliqua (Carob); Asian and Rare Plants; Prunus persica (Peach); Terminalia chebula (Black Myrobalan); Conclusion; References; Archaeobotanical Studies from Hierakonpolis: Evidence for Food Processing During the Predynastic Period in Egypt; Abstract; Introduction; Materials and Methods; Results. The Role of Morphometry to Delineate Changes in the Spikelet Shape of Wild Cereals: The Case Study of Takarkori (Holocene, Central Sahara, SW Libya)Abstract; Introduction; The Study Area; Materials and Methods; Sample Selection; Morphometrical Analysis; Statistical Analysis; Results; Morphometrical Analysis; Statistical Analysis; Discussion; Cereals as Key to Understanding Plant Resources in Central Sahara; Conclusion; Acknowledgements; References; Web Sites; The Holocene Flora and Vegetation of Ti-n Hanakaten (Tassili n'Ajjer, Algerian Sahara); Abstract; Introduction.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Kamrun Nahar and Masayuki Fujita.
    Summary: In the industrial era, the most important potential threat to crop production is abiotic stress, including toxic metal/metalloid stress. Growing populations and rapid industrialization lead to the generation and release of huge amounts of toxic metals/metalloids into the environment, altering plant physiological processes and reducing yields. In the last few decades, there has been extensive research to elucidate the mechanisms of tolerance to metal/metalloid toxicity and ways to improve the defense system in plants. Use of exogenous photoprotectants such as osmoprotectants, plant nutrients, phytohormones, signaling molecules, antioxidants, amino acids and organic acids are widely being used to improve plants' tolerance to metal/metalloid stress. Recently, phytoremediation approaches have been effectively employed to remediate metal/metalloid pollution. This book presents the latest insights into plant responses and tolerance in plants grown under metal/metalloids stress to provide a better understanding of the topic and the future outlook.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; About the Book; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Recent Advances in Metal Induced Stress Tolerance in Plants: Possibilities and Challenges; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Response During Heavy Metal Stress in Plants; 1.3 Use of Transcriptomic Approaches to Identify Gene Function During Metal Induced Stress; 1.4 Use of T-DNA Mutants for Functional Genomics Studies in Metal Tolerance; 1.5 Role of Transcription Factors in Enhancing Heavy Metal Tolerance; 1.6 Role of Micro RNAs (miRNAs) in Conferring Heavy Metal Tolerance; 1.7 Challenges and Future Focus; References 2.7 Arbuscular Mycorrhizae: Characterization and Importance in Contaminated Soils2.8 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 3: Heavy Metal Toxicity and Antioxidative Response in Plants: An Overview; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Heavy Metals and Their Impact on Plants; 3.2.1 Cadmium; 3.2.2 Arsenic; 3.2.3 Mercury; 3.2.4 Chromium; 3.2.5 Copper; 3.2.6 Zinc; 3.2.7 Lead; 3.2.8 Nickel; 3.3 Reactive Oxygen Species; 3.4 Types of ROS; 3.5 Sites of Production of ROS; 3.5.1 Mitochondria; 3.5.2 Chloroplast; 3.5.3 Peroxisomes; 3.6 Heavy Metal Induced Antioxidative Defense System in Plants; 3.6.1 Enzymatic Antioxidants 4.3 Heavy Metal Toxicity4.3.1 Cellular Antioxidative Defense and Redox Heavy Metals (Fe, Cu, Mn and Cr); 4.3.1.1 Iron; 4.3.1.2 Manganese; 4.3.1.3 Copper; 4.3.1.4 Zinc; 4.3.1.5 Chromium; 4.3.2 Cellular Antioxidative Defense and Non-redox Heavy Metals Ni, Cd, As and Hg; 4.3.2.1 Nickel; 4.3.2.2 Cadmium; 4.3.2.3 Mercury; 4.3.2.4 Arsenic; 4.4 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 5: Stress Signaling Under Metal and Metalloid Toxicity; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Heavy Metal Stress Tolerance in Plants; 5.3 Plant Metal Homeostasis and Heavy Metal Stress; 5.4 Essential Transition Metals Homeostasis in Plants
    Chapter 2: Physiological, Biochemical Changes, and Phytotoxicity Remediation in Agricultural Plant Species Cultivated in Soils Contaminated with Copper and Zinc2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Source of Heavy Metals; 2.3 Behavior of Heavy Metals in Soils; 2.4 Physiological and Biochemical Effects of Cu and Zn on Plants; 2.5 Molecular Control of Cu and Zn Uptake and Distribution; 2.5.1 Copper; 2.5.2 Zinc; 2.6 Effects of Soil Conditioners on Plant Growth and Development; 2.6.1 Inorganic Soil Conditioners; 2.6.2 Organic Soil Conditioners
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Aldo M. Roccaro, Irene M. Ghobrial, editors.
    Contents:
    MGUS and smoldering myeloma
    Multiple Myeloma
    Primary amyloidosis, systemic light chain and heavy chain diseases plasmacytoma
    Waldenstrom's Macroglobulinemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC280.B6 P53 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Michael A. Linden, Robert W. McKenna, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Protein studies
    Electrophoresis and immunofixation
    Serum free light chain analysis
    Morphology and immunohistochemistry of normal and neoplastic plasma cells
    Classification of plasma cell neoplasms
    Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance
    Plasma cell myeloma
    Plasmacytoma {u2013} solitary and extraosseus
    Monoclonal immunoglobulin deposition diseases
    Cytogenetics
    Flow cytometry
    Integration of laboratory and clinical data into synoptic report
    Approaches to treatment, including stem cell transplant
    Conclusions
    References.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Robert B. Lorsbach, Marwan Yared, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Clinical features, management, and therapy of plasma cell neoplasms: what pathologists need to know
    3. Morphologic and immunohistochemical evaluation of plasma cell neoplasms
    4. Cytogenetics of plasma cell neoplasms
    5. Flow cytometric analysis in the diagnosis and prognostication of plasma cell neoplasms
    6. Renal manifestations of plasma cell neoplasms
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Shinya Toyokuni, Yuzuru Ikehara, Fumitaka Kikkawa, Masaru Hori.
    Summary: Plasma Medical Science describes the progress that has been made in the field over the past five years, illustrating what readers must know to be successful. As non-thermal, atmospheric pressure plasma has been applied for a wide variety of medical fields, including wound healing, blood coagulation, and cancer therapy, this book is a timely resource on the topics discussed.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Manfred Heinlein.
    Contents:
    Plasmodesmata : channels for intercellular signaling during plant growth and development / Iris Sevilem, Shri Ram Yadav, and Ykä Helariutta
    Plasmodesmata : channels for viruses on the move / Manfred Heinlein
    Imaging plasmodesmata with high-resolution scanning electron microscopy / Deborah A. Barton and Robyn L. Overall
    Preparative methods for imaging plasmodesmata at super-resolution / Karen Bell and Karl Oparka
    Isolation of plasmodesmata from Arabidopsis suspension culture cells / Magali S. Grison, Lourdes Fernandez-Calvino, Sébastien Mongrand, and Emmanuelle M.F. Bayer
    Immunofluorescence detection of callose deposition around plasmodesmata sites / Ali Pendle and Yoselin Benitez-Alfonso
    Imaging callose at plasmodesmata using aniline blue : quantitative confocal microscopy / Raul Zavaliev and Bernard L. Epel
    Localization of fluorescently tagged protein to plasmodesmata by correlative light and electron microscopy / Shannon Modla, Jeffrey L. Caplan, Kirk J. Czymmek, and Jung-Youn Lee
    Quantification of plant cell coupling with live-cell microscopy / Johannes Liesche and Alexander Schulz
    Drop-ANd-See : a simple, real-time, and noninvasive technique for assaying plasmodesmal permeability / Weier Cui, Xu Wang, and Jung-Youn Lee
    Mapping symplasmic fields at the shoot apical meristem using iontophoresis and membrane potential measurements / Christiaan van der Schoot and Päivi L. H. Rinne
    Analysis of the conductivity of plasmodesmata by microinjection / Friedrich Kragler
    Investigating plasmodesmata genetics with virus-induced gene silencing and an agrobacterium-mediated GFP movement assay / Jacob O. Brunkard, Tessa M. Burch-Smith, Anne M. Runkel, and Patricia Zambryski
    Probing plasmodesmata function with biochemical inhibitors / Rosemary G. White
    GAL4 transactivation-based assay for the detection of selective intercellular protein Movement / Dhinesh Kumar, Huan Chen, Yeonggil Rim, and Jae-Yean Kim
    Techniques for assessing the effects of pharmacological inhibitors on intercellular protein movement / Shuang Wu and Kimberly L. Gallagher
    Probing protein targeting to plasmodesmata using fluorescence recovery after photo-bleaching / Kathryn M. Wright and Katrin M. MacKenzie
    Tracking of intercellular small RNA movement / Christophe Himber and Patrice Dunoyer
    Analysis of the role of myosins in targeting proteins to plasmodesmata / Martin Di Donato and Khalid Amari
    Pumilio-based RNA in vivo imaging / Jens Tilsner
    In vivo RNA labeling using MS2 / Eduardo Peña, Manfred Heinlein, and Adrian Sambade.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Contents:
    Scope of plastic and aesthetic nursing practice
    Definition of plastic and aesthetic nursing
    Foundation of plastic and aesthetic nursing
    Growth of plastic and aesthetic nursing practice
    Development of plastic and aesthetic nursing practice
    Plastic and aesthetic nurses and healthcare clients
    Educational preparation for plastic and aesthetic nursing roles
    Roles of plastic and aesthetic registered nurses
    General nursing role
    Plastic and aesthetic advanced practice roles
    Plastic and aesthetic nurse educator role
    Certified aesthetic nurse specialist role
    Practice environments for the plastic and aesthetic nurse
    Plastic and aesthetic nursing researchand evidence-based practice
    Ethics and advocacy in plastic and aesthetic nursing
    Plastic and aesthetic nursing explications
    Insurance reimbursements
    Summary of the scope of plastic and aesthetic nursing practice
    Standards of plastic and aesthetic nursing practice
    Standards of plastic and aesthetic nursing practice
    Standards of professional performance for plastic and aesthetic nursing.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
  • Digital
    Amin Kalaaji, editor.
    Summary: Readers will discover the relatively new and rapidly growing field of regenerative surgery and fat grafting, valuable for numerous plastic surgery, reconstructive, and aesthetic/cosmetic essentials. Though many books have covered specific areas or topics in regenerative surgery, the market lacks a work that tackles the full spectrum of regenerative surgery and its clinical application. This book responds to that need and presents chapters written by the best: world-renowned surgeons in their field. After an introduction that reflects basic research, most of the book focuses on clinical experience as it relates to applied techniques of processing fat and on the different uses from head to toe. Readers will learn about the history of regenerative surgery, important definitions and background information, and the evidence supporting the use of regenerative surgery. Practitioners will also find valuable guidance regarding the application of stem cells, evaluation of patient needs, and operative techniques for fat transfer. Subsequent chapters address topics such as graft types, the skin, wound healing, scar treatment, osteoarthritis, burns, scleroderma, hair rejuvenation, facial enhancement combined with facelift, chin augmentation with fat, and breast argumentation or reconstruction with fat. Particular attention is paid to gluteal augmentation with fat, body contouring, genital male and female rejuvenation, and upper and lower extremity regenerative surgery. Surgical anatomy and complications treatment and prevention were emphasized when applied. This resulted is two volumes that encompass 125 chapters, with multiple figures, and video clips, written by 242 authors (including 72 female colleagues) from five continents. Highly informative and carefully structured, this book provides invaluable insight for beginners and experienced plastic surgeons alike, while benefitting advanced surgeons, specialists, and undergraduate and graduate students. .

    Contents:
    Part I. Introductory Part
    1. Evolving of concepts in fat grafting and Regenerative Surgery
    2. The Era of regenerative surgery
    3. Regenerative Surgery: Definitions and Background
    4. Current status on regenerative surgery
    5. Fluid balance, electrolytes, and anesthetic options in regenerative surgery and fat grafting
    6. Adipose Tissue Transplantation: Autologous versus cryopreserved (Frozen) versus heterologous. Present and future of fat transfer
    7. Comparison between fat and fillers
    Part II. Stem Cells and Clinical Path
    8. Features and biological properties of different adipose tissue based products. Milli-, Micro-, Emulsified (Nano-) fat, SVF and AD-multipotent mesenchymal stem cells
    9. Regenerative technologies and Adipose derived stem cells (ADSCs): regulatory, ethical and technical updates
    10. Stem Cell Research, Concepts, and Emerging Technologies
    11. Stem cells and their clinical applications
    12. Fat grafting, tissue banking and adipose stem cell therapies European regulatory status in 2021
    Part III. Operative Techniques for Fat Grafting
    13. Aesthetic Lipofilling: Trends, Patient needs and Assessment
    14. New perspective in Regenerative Surgery: The Acellular Adipose Matrix
    15. New strategies in Regenerative Medicine: The Bio-Active Composite Grafts
    16. Injectable Tissue Replacement and Regeneration- A New Standardized Fat Grafting Technique
    17. Novel strategies to improve graft survival and retention
    18. Impact of age, gender, body mass index, harvesting site, suction pressure, smoking, Diabetes, Systemic Lupus and other diseases on the regenerative properties of the grafted adipose tissue
    19. Fat Processing Methods
    20. Classification of Safe Autologous Fat Grafting: Quantity and Location Site
    21. Complications in Regenerative and Fat Transfer Surgery: Pathophysiology and Management with Technical Tips to Reduce Risk
    22. Fat grafting and Fat embolism. How to prevent, diagnose and treat
    23. Potentials and Limitations of the role of platelet rich plasma (PRP) in lipofilling. An evidence based approach
    24. The Role of Nurses in Fat Grafting Procedures: Planning, Preparation, and Implementation
    Part IV. Regenerative Surgery: Reconstructive Areas of Application
    25. Fat grafting as plastic surgeons' best friend: solving complex reconstructions problems with simple regenerative solutions
    26. Treatment of radiation-induced rectovaginal fistula: Safety and efficacy of fat grafting and stromal-vascular fraction injections
    27. Treatment of fibrotic radiotherapy damages in head & neck with fat grafting
    28. Vampire scar: outpatient quality improvement of scar regeneration with a composite approach with needling and PRP
    29. Post-Burn And Keloid Scar Treatment With Adipose Derived Stems Cells (ADSC)
    30. Treatment of chronic wounds with fat grafting and adipose-derived stromal-vascular fraction
    31. Fat grafting as an Ancillary treatment for burns and other complex wounds and their sequellae
    32. Treatment of scleroderma with Fat grafting, PRP and Adipose stem cells
    33. Scar modulations and maturation in post-burn scar contractures and skin grafts using autologous fat injections grafts
    34. Complex Regional Pain Syndrome and Steroid Atrophy Scar Retraction treatment with Adipose Grafting
    35. Acute Burns management. The current role of regenerative surgery and its challenges
    36. Regenerative surgery choices in Burns sequelae management
    37. Fat and stromal cells for acute burn treatment
    38. Physical therapies to improve fat grafting and regenerative surgery results in wound healing
    39. Combined fat, PRP and Laser for skin and soft tissues regeneration. Clinical applications
    40. Regenerative surgery and acellular dermal matrix as reconstructive surgical options in plastic surgery. Theoretical and practical basis
    41. The role of adipose tissue graft on nerve regeneration from the perspective of the adipose derived stem cell
    42. Cellular Optimized Nanofat for Microneedling and as a Unique Nanofat Biocreme
    Part V. Regenerative Surgery: Aesthetic Areas of Application, Hair
    43. Hair re-grow with Micrografts enriched with Human Follicle Mesenchymal Stem Cells and Platelet Rich Plasma
    44. The Efficacy of Platelet-Rich Plasma for Hair Loss: A Proven Therapy
    Part VI. Regenerative Surgery: Aesthetic Areas of Application, Skin
    45. The Process of Aging, State-of-the-art: Evidence Behind Regenerative Surgery
    46. Wrinkles: Etiology, Causes, treatment, and prevention
    47. Skin and Structural Aging in Patients of African Ethnicity. Features, management and the role of regenerative surgery
    48. The use of the fat grafting to improve skin quality
    Part VII. Regenerative Surgery Aesthetic and Reconstructive Areas of Application, Face
    49. Surgical anatomy in regenerative surgery of face, scalp and neck
    50. Facial Fat Grafting during Facelift Surgery
    51. Properly Diluted Fat (P.D.F.): A safer approach to periocular fat grafting
    52. Improved Facial Rejuvenation and Scar Regeneration by the Autologous Stemcell-Enriched Lipoconcentrate
    53. Aesthetic Chin augmentation with fat: Is there still a need for chin implants?
    54. Micro fat graft in facial rejuvenation
    55. Transgender Facial Aesthetics and Regenerative Techniques
    56. Posttraumatic contour deformities reconstruction and scars treatment with Microstructural and nano fat grafting in the face
    57. Nanofat grafting in facial rejuvenation: an innovative technique
    58. Parry- Romberg Syndrome treatment with Microstructural fat grafting of the face
    59. CORRECTION OF SECONDARY CRANIOSYNOSTOSIS DEFORMITIES WITH AUTOLOGOUS FAT
    60. The regenerative approach for the Management of severe dysphonia
    61. THE SAFE TREATMENT OF MILD VELOPHARYNGEAL INSUFFICIENCY (VPI) WITH AUTOLOGOUS FAT GRAFTING
    62. Degenerative retinopathy treatment with ADSC. Our experience
    Part VIII. Breast Augmentation and mastopexi with Fat
    63. Aesthetic Breast Augmentation Using Autologous Fat Grafting: Indications, Patient Assessment, and Comparison Between Different Processing Methods in 204 Cases
    64. New Trends in Breast Augmentation With Fat Grafting: Implant Conversion With Fat and Hybrid Implant-Fat Breast Augmentation
    65. Implant Conversion with fat grafting
    66. Composite Breast Augmentation with Implants and Fat Grafting
    67. Autologous Fat Grafting for breast augmentation in Asian women
    68. Improving Breast Footprint and Shape using Anchor Threads in Fat Grafting Breast Augmentation
    69. Breast augmentation with fat and threads using Power-Assisted Liposuction, Loops and Lipofilling (PALLL) technique
    70. Stromal Enriched Lipograft for Breast Augmentation
    71. Treatment of tuberous breast with fat
    72. Mastopexy with autoaugmentation and fat grafting
    73. Correction of severe congenital breast asymmetry in Poland syndrome and other breast asymmetries with autologous microstructural fat transfer and the combination of other techniques
    74. Inverted nipple correction with Central Tunnel Technique and fat grafting
    Part IX. Breast Reconstruction with Fat
    75. FAT GRAFTING FOR BREAST RECONSTRUCTION
    76. The Prepectoral, Hybrid Breast Reconstruction: the Synergy of Lipofilling and Breast Implants
    77. Breast reconstruction with inferior flap and fat transfer as curative treatment for BIA-ALCL
    78. Breast reconstruction with fat and threads using Power-Assisted Liposuction, Loops and Lipofilling (PALLL) technique
    79. Enhancing Flap breast reconstruction with percutaneous purse-string suture and fat grafting
    80. Lipomodeling for breast conservative treatment sequelae (precautions, indications, results)
    81. Lipomodelling as perfect complement to autologous latissimus dorsi flap breast reconstruction
    82. MaNAGEMENT OF SURGICAL DISASTERS AFTER BREAST IMPLANTS POSTMASTECTOMY RECONSTRUCTION: THE ROLE OF CONSERVATIVE HYBRID REGENERATION APPROACH (HRA)
    83. Revision surgery with fat grafting after implant and flap breast reconstruction
    84. Stem cell enriched fat injection in aesthetic, reconstructive breast surgery
    85. Safety of autologous fat transplantation in oncological postmastectomy breast reconstruction. A prospective study
    86. Oncologic safety of fat graft to the breast
    Part X. Gluteal Augmentation with Fat, Brazilian Butt Lift (BBL) and Related Body Contouring
    87. Gluteal Augmentation with Fat: Patient Assessment, Operative Technique and Safety Guidelines
    88. Artnatomy for advanced body contouring and Aesthetic balance between breast and body
    89. Gluteal augmentation with fat and threads using Power-Assisted Liposuction, Loops and Lipofilling (PALLL) technique
    90. Expansion Vibration Lipofilling (EVL) technique in Gluteal augmentation and waist feminization
    91. Gluteal augmentation: Avoidance of intramuscular injection using precise superficial fat graft technique
    92. Gluteal Augmentation Assisted by Stromal Enriched Lipograft
    93. Circumferential lipoabdominoplasty combined with Fat grafting the hips and buttocks
    94. MWL and post barriatric surgery patients: the role of fat grafting and regenerative surgery
    95. High Definition Abdominal Sculpting with Fat Grafting Highlights
    96. Safety for advanced body contouring: The darkest Hour
    Part XI. Genital Rejuvenation
    97. Surgical Anatomy of genital area to achieve Safety in fat grafting
    98. Quality of Life and Rejuvenation Techniques in Female Intimate Cosmetic Genital Surgery
    99. Fat grafting and Adipose Stem Cells to treat vulvar scarring and fibrosis post Female Genital Mutilation (FGM)
    100. The treatment of genital Vulvar and Penile Lichen Sclerosus with Autologous Fat Grafting
    101. Fat Grafting to Treat Vulvo-vaginal Stenosis
    102. Vulvovaginal rejuvenation by fat and stromal cells
    103. Fat grafting as a regenerative measu.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Adriana Cordova, Alessandro Innocenti, Francesca Toia, Massimiliano Tripoli.
    Summary: The thorax has a fundamental role in the aesthetic of the male body: congenital or acquired alterations are experienced as extremely frustrating clinical situations. Most breast surgery texts briefly mention gynecomastia, but no text comprehensively addresses the male breast and thorax, including reconstructive and cosmetic surgery and surgery in transgender patients. This gap is now thoroughly filled by Plastic and Cosmetic Surgery of the Male Breast: after introducing principles of anatomy and aesthetics for the male thorax, the first part focusses on the main congenital malformations and their treatment; the main benign acquired pathologies and their treatment (including an ample section dedicated to gynecomastia), the carcinoma of the male breast, with reference to familiar forms; the treatment of carcinoma and reconstruction of the thorax. The book closes with a chapter dedicated to breast surgery in transgender patients. While female breast surgery is increasingly practiced in specific Breast Units and highly specialized centers, male breast issues are treated in general and plastic surgeries units. This handy volume is a sound reference for the most complex clinical cases, and the latest reconstruction treatments for the male thorax and will be useful for general and thoracic surgeons, plastic surgeons and senologists.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Aesthetic Aspects of the Male Chest
    1 Arts and Aesthetics of Male Chest
    Part 2 Anatomy of the Male Chest
    2 Preoperative considerations on the thorax: Anatomy and Surgical Landmarks
    Part 3 Male Chest Congenital Pathologies
    3 Poland syndrome
    4 Pectus excavatum
    Pectus carenatum
    Part 4 Benign Pathologies of Male Breast
    6 Gynecomastia
    7 Gynecomastia after massive weight loss: reshaping with intercostal perforator flaps
    8 Male Tuberous Breast
    Part 5 Oncologic Pathologies of Male Breast
    9 Skin Tumors of the Male Chest
    10 Male Breast Cancer: Oncology
    11 Male Breast Cancer: Oncologic Surgery
    12 Male Breast Cancer: Reconstructive Surgery
    Part 6 Anterior Chest Wall Reconstruction
    13 Chest Fistula repair
    14 Reconstruction with Pedicled Flaps
    15 Reconstruction with Free Flaps
    Part 7 Feminization of the Male Chest
    16 Augmentation mammoplasty
    Part 8 Masculinization of the Female chest
    17 Masculinization of the Female chest. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Maria Z. Siemionow (ed.).
    Summary: With novel approaches to the application of new technologies via research based studies on stem cells, tissue engineering and new fields of reconstructive transplant (face, hand or larynx transplants), this book facilitates access to this latest knowledge which is not traditionally part of the plastic surgery curriculum. Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery ? Experimental Models and Research Designs presents pertinent introductions to different fields (stem cell, transplantation, nerve regeneration, tissue engineering) and experimental models which can be used as a tool to develop technologies of interest by various groups of surgeons. Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery ? Experimental Models and Research Designs benefits a range of surgeons, including plastic and reconstructive surgeons, microsurgeons, hand surgeons, orthopedic surgeons, neurosurgeons and transplant surgeons.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Microsurgery Models
    1. Microsurgery Techniques in Reconstructive Surgery
    2. Arterial and Venous Microanastomosis Models
    3. Lymphaticovenous Anastomosis Training Model in Rat
    4. Fallopian Tube Anastomosis
    5. Vasoepididymostomy Anastomosis
    6. The Microsurgical Groin Slin Flap in the Rat Model
    7. Free TRAM Flap Model
    Part 2. Microcirculation Models
    8. Application of Microcirculatory Models in Plastic Surgery Research
    9. Standard Cremaster Muscle Model for Ischemia Reperfusion
    10. Cremaster Muscle and Effect of Different Anesthetics
    11. Microcirculatory Shock Model
    12. Radiation and Microcirculation Models
    13. Microcirculation and Smoking
    14. Microcirculation Model for Invasive Animal Monitoring
    15. Cremaster Chamber Model
    16.Mouse Cremaster Muscle Allograft Model
    17. Microcirculation and Pace Therapy
    18. Microcirculation and Hypothermia Model.- Part 3. Transplantation Models
    19. Vascularized Composite Allotransplantation Models
    20. Rat Hind Cremaster Limb Allograft Model
    21. Limb and Microcirculation
    Cremaster Flap Model
    22. Bilateral Vascularized Composite Skin/Bone Transplantation Model
    23. Vascular Thymus and Hind Limb Allotransplantation Model
    24. Vascular Thymus Transplantation
    25. Vascularized Skin/Bone Transplantation Model
    26. Vascularized Bone-Femur Transplantation Model
    27. New Composite Tissue Allograft Model of Vascularized Bone Marrow Transplant: The Iliac Osteomyocutaneous Flap
    28. New Modification of the Oldest Flap in Rats to Increase Antigenixcity of Transplanted Skin: The Extended Groin Flap Model
    29. Combined Semimenbranosus Muscle and Epigastric Skin Flap Model
    30. Composite Osseomusculocutaneous Thymus, Allotransplantation Model
    31. Experimental Model for Monitoring of Composite Tissue Transplantation Induced Trauma
    32. Cryopreservation in Plastic Surgery: Our Experience and Review of the Literature
    33. A Xenotransplantation Model for Vascularized Composite Transplantation
    34. Full Face Transplant Model in Rats
    35. Hemiface Transplant Model
    36. Composite Hemiface/Calvarium Transplantation Model in Rat
    37. Maxilla Allograft Transplantation Model in Rat
    38. Composite Hemiface/Mandible/Tongue Allotransplantation Model in Rats
    39. Composite Osseomusculocutaneous Midface Allotransplantation Model with Motor and Sensory Units
    40. Transplantation of the Mystacial Pad
    41. Heterotopic Transplantation of Total Face/Scalp Flap
    42. Non-Invasive Monitoring of Skin-Containing Vascularized Composite Allotransplantation
    43. Abdominal Wall Transplant Models
    44. Penis Allotransplantation Model
    45. Composite Orbital and Periorbital Allotransplantation Model
    46. Ear Transplantation
    47. Heterotopic Vascularized Ovarian Autotransplantation Model in the Sheep
    48. Spleen Transplantation Model
    Part 4. Peripheral Nerve Surgery Models.- 49. A Contemporary Overview of Peripheral Nerve Research
    50. Epineural Sleeve End-to-End Repair
    51. Somatosensory Evoked Potential Model for Assessment of Nerve Regeneration
    52. Epineural Sleeve Nerve Grafting Technique
    53. Single Fascicle Graft Repair Mofel
    54. Nerve Decompression Models in Diabetic Rats
    55. Epineural Seath Grafts for Nerve Regeneration
    56. Epineural Tube Repair
    57. Tissue Engineered Conduit
    58. Venous Conduit as a Model for Nerve Regeneration
    59. DRG Decompression Model
    60. Epineural Patch Applications in Dorsal Root Ganglion Decompression Model
    61. Sheep as a Large Animal Model for Nerve Regeneration Studies
    62. Sciatic Nerve Crush Injury Model
    63. Crush Injury and Epineural Patch Model
    64. Neuroma Model
    65. Diabetic Rat Model
    66. Nerve Allograft Transplantation Review
    67. Nerve Allograft Transplantation Review
    Part 5. Microsurgical Robot Applications
    68. Application of the Microsurgical Robot RAMS in Microsurgery
    Part 6. Cellular Therapy Models
    69. Cellular Therapies in Vascularized Composite Allograft Transplantation- Review
    70. In Vivo Chimera Model by Chimera Creation
    71. Ex Vivo Chimera Model by Cell Fusion
    72. Cellular Therapies via Vascularized Bone Marrow Transplantation
    73. Cellular Therapies in Vascularized Composite Allograft
    74. Cellular Therapies in Post-Radiation Syndrome
    75. Cellular Therapies in Nerve Regeneration.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Viktor M. Grishkevich, Max Grishkevich.
    Summary: "This comprehensive atlas provides a step-by-step guide of new techniques in burn surgery and enables readers to identify the appropriate treatment plan and best possible procedure for each patient pre-surgery before delving into a variety of different surgical possibilities for treatment and recovery. Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery of Burns - An Atlas of New Techniques and Strategies presents new solutions in plastic and reconstructive surgery for burns built upon tried and true techniques of contracture restoration using various flaps and skin grafts. Accompanying illustrations and schemes allow the reader to visualize the process from mapping, dissecting and closing the wound. Preoperative and postoperative results are compared, with extensive illustrations and pictures that cover areas of the body most commonly treated for burns including face, neck, breast, torso, arms, legs, hands, and feet. Outcomes of the surgeries including full functional and aesthetic restoration of treated patients are meticulously photographed and provided alongside each technique. New classifications are presented based on contracture anatomy which showcase the development of new flaps and techniques that elevate functional and aesthetic rehabilitation of burned patients to a new level. The culmination of the decades long career of renowned plastic surgeon, Viktor M. Grishkevich, many new and original techniques, currently unpublished in U.S. literature, are detailed in depth alongside techniques uniquely designed by Dr. Grishkevich and previously published around the world. Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery of Burns - An Atlas of New Techniques and Strategies, has international reach and is meant for plastic and reconstructive surgeons with specialties inhand, maxillo-facial, facial, and ENT. Due to its detailed nature, the atlas is also appropriate for residents in the related fields of surgery as well."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    edited by George A. Sisson, M. Eugene Tardy, Jr.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD118.A1I6
    1
  • Digital
    Melvin A. Shiffman, Mervin Low, editors.
    Summary: This book deals with wound management in plastic surgery, orthopedics, ophthalmology and thoracic surgery. The first part provides information on the latest developments in orthopedic surgery, while the second addresses ophthalmology and wounds after e.g. cataract surgery or keratopathy. The third part, which exclusively focuses on wounds in plastic surgery, highlights recent results after microsurgical procedures and keloid reconstruction, but also after breast reconstruction and limb injuries. Lastly, the part on thoracic surgery informs the reader about sternotomy techniques and possible complications. Given it interdisciplinary approach, this book offers a valuable resource not only for plastic surgeons, but also for ophthalmologists, thoracic surgeons and orthopedic surgeons.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Rommy von Bernhardi, Jaime Eugenín, Kenneth J. Muller, editors.
    Summary: A comprehensive overview of the many factors that can influence brain plasticity throughout the lifespan. Addresses perinatal plasticity, functional state plasticity, injury-induced plasticity, and stressor-induced plasticity. Because it looks at so many aspects of the field, this volume will serve as a great resource for students as well as researchers interested in expanding their knowledge. The volume comes out as an integrated view based in the expertise of Ibero American neuroscientists working in the field.

    Contents:
    1. What is neural plasticity?
    2. CREB at the crossroads of activity-dependent regulation of nervous system development and function
    3. Models of short-term synaptic plasticity
    4. Plasticity in the interoceptive system
    5. Learning as a functional state of the brain: studies in wild-type and transgenic animals
    6. Bidirectional effects of mother-young contact on the maternal and neonatal brains
    7. Prenatal stress and neurodevelopmental plasticity: relevance to psychopathology
    8. Early postnatal development of somastostatinergic systems in brainstem respiratory network
    9. Respiratory rhythm generation: the whole is greater than the sum of the parts
    10. The onset of the fetal respiratory rhythm: an emergent property triggered by chemosensory drive?
    11. Neurodevelopmental effects of serontonin on the brainstem respiratory network
    12. Neural network reconfigurations: changes of the respiratory network by hypoxia as an example
    13. Progenitors in the ependyma of the spinal cord: a potential resource for self-repair after injury
    I[subscript]KD current in cold transduction and damage-triggered cold hypersensitivity
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Bruce A. Mast.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief: Rostam D. Farhadieh ; editors: Neil W. Bulstrode, Babak J. Mehrara, Sabrina Cugno.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    volume editor, Maurice Y. Nahabedian, editor-in-chief, Peter C. Neligan.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    David H. Song MD, MBA, FACS and Peter C. Neligan MB, FRCS(I), FRCSC, FACS.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    editor in chief, Peter C. Neligan ; volume editor, Geoffrey C. Gurtner.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    volume editor, James Chang, editor-in-chief, Peter C. Neligan.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    Eduardo D. Rodriguez MD, DDS, Joseph E. Losee MD and Peter C. Neligan MB, FRCS(I), FRCSC, FACS
    Summary: Fully updated to meet the demands of the 21st-century surgeon, Craniofacial, Head and Neck Surgery and Pediatric Plastic Surgery, Volume 3 of Plastic Surgery, 4th Edition, provides you with the most current knowledge and techniques across your entire field, allowing you to offer every patient the best possible outcome. Access all the state-of-the-art know-how you need to overcome any challenge you may face and exceed your patients' expectations. Consult this title on your favorite e-reader, conduct rapid searches,

    Contents:
    pt. 1. Craniofacial, head and neck surgery
    pt. 2. Pediatrics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    volume editor, J. Peter Rubin, editor-in-chief, Peter C. Neligan.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Albert S. Woo, Farooq Shahzad, Alison K. Snyder-Warwick ; executive editor, Timothy Hiscock ; managing editor, Elizabeth Palumbo ; editorial assistant, Mohammad Ibrar ; development, Cornelia Schulze ; production editor, Mason Brown ; president, Brian D. Scanlan.
    Summary: Focusing on the clinical information that must be mastered for success on oral board exams, Plastic Surgery Case Review presents 50 case studies, each of which highlights a specific topic that is frequently covered in the oral boards. It contains short, high-yield chapters that are designed to serve as a thorough yet quick review of pertinent information that physicians will encounter in the examination. Key Features: Each chapter begins with a case study that is modeled after the oral boards. Each case study includes: a description of the case and the work-up for similar scenarios, a discussi.

    Contents:
    Plastic Surgery Case Review: Oral Board Study Guide; Title Page; Copyright; Dedication; Preface; Acknowledgment; Contents; Contributors;
    Section I. Facial Fractures; 1. Zygoma Fractures; 2. Mandible Fractures; 3. Frontal Sinus Fractures; 4. Le Fort Fractures; 5. Pediatric Mandible Fractures;
    Section II. Face Cancer (Squamous Cell Carcinoma, Basal Cell Carcinoma, Melanoma, and Reconstruction (including Mohs Defects)); 6. Lip (Cancer and Reconstruction); 7. Nose (Cancer and Reconstruction); 8. Eyelid (Cancer and Reconstruction); 9. Ear (Cancer and Reconstruction). 10. Cheek (Cancer and Reconstruction)
    Section III. Face Congenital; 11. Unilateral Cleft Lip; 12. Bilateral Cleft Lip; 13. Cleft Palate; 14. Microtia;
    Section IV. Face Cosmetic; 15. Aging Face and Neck; 16. Aging Upper Face (Brow and Lids); 17. Lower Lid Ectropion (Cicatrical); 18. Lower Lid Ectropion (Senile or Paralytic); 19. Rhinoplasty; 20. Facial Paralysis;
    Section V. Foot and Lower Extremity Reconstruction; 21. OpenWound: Upper Third of Leg; 22. OpenWound: Middle Third of Leg; 23. OpenWound: Lower Third of Leg; 24. Foot and Ankle Reconstruction;
    Section VI. Breast. 25. Breast Cancer Reconstruction26. Tuberous Breast Deformity; 27. Breast Augmentation; 28. Mastopexy/Augmentation; 29. Breast Reduction; 30. Gynecomastia;
    Section VII. Trunk; 31. Ischial Pressure Sores; 32. Body Contouring after MassiveWeight Loss; 33. Major Liposuction; 34. AbdominalWall Defect; 35. Sternal Wound Infection; 36. Chest Wall Defect; 37. Perineal Reconstruction; 38. Abdominoplasty;
    Section VIII. Burn; 39. Acute Burn Injury; 40. Hand Burn; 41. Scalp Burn Reconstruction; 42. Neck Burn Contracture;
    Section IX. Hand; 43. Flexor Tendon Laceration; 44. Soft-Tissue Defect of the Hand. 45. Radial Nerve Injury; 46. Dupuytren Contracture; 47. Syndactyly; 48. Metacarpal and Phalangeal Fractures; 49. Carpal Tunnel Syndrome; 50. Tendon Transfers; Index.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Albert S. Woo, Reena A. Bhatt.
    Summary: "Plastic Surgery Case Review: Oral Board Study Guide, Second Edition by Albert S. Woo, Reena A. Bhatt, and esteemed contributors, features new cases in each chapter, as well as updated and expanded content. Like the widely acclaimed prior edition, the book is an excellent resource for plastic surgery residents and trainees of all skill levels, highlighting key adult and pediatric cases commonly featured on the plastic surgery oral board examination. The text is written in a "mock oral" format - designed to encourage critical thinking and analysis of case management - from initial workup to preventing key errors in judgment. Organized in 10 sections, the short, high-yield chapters provide a thorough yet quick review of the most pertinent information. The second edition features extensive updates including section restructuring, all new cases, and an additional section providing a more comprehensive review of plastic surgery. Each case includes high-quality photographs and one- to three-page descriptions including work-up, initial assessment, history, physical examination, diagnostic imaging, patient counseling, treatment, ethical considerations, potential complications, and critical errors. Key Highlights Additional topics include non-operative cosmetic techniques, Pierre Robin sequence, prominent ear deformity, giant congenital hairy nevus, male-to-female and female-to-male transgender, secondary breast deformities, electrical burns, degloving injury, traumatic amputation, and brachial plexus injury A concise, reader-friendly format ideal for learning core topics and prepping for the oral board exam quickly and efficiently High quality board examination-type case photographs, figures, and illustrations enhance visual learning and knowledge retention This is an essential resource for every plastic surgery resident looking to prepare for the oral boards, as well as medical students and trainees interested in developing a quick understanding of "bread and butter" plastic surgery topics. Albert S. Woo, MD, is Chief of Pediatric Plastic Surgery and Director of the Craniofacial Program, Division of Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery, The Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island, USA. Reena A. Bhatt, MD, is Associate Professor of Surgery (Hand and Microsurgery, General Reconstructive Plastic Surgery), Division of Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery, The Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island, USA"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Jamal M. Bullocks, Patrick W. Hsu, Shayan A. Izaddoost, Larry H. Hollier, Jr.
    Contents:
    Wound management
    Anesthesia and wound closure
    Pressure sores
    Bite wounds
    Burns and frostbite
    General assessment and management of facial trauma
    Facial lacerations
    Orbit and zygoma fractures
    Nasal and naso-orbital-Ethmoid (NOE) fractures
    Frontal sinus fractures
    Mandibular fractures
    Examination of hand injuries
    Anesthesia and splinting of the hand and wrist
    Hand and wrist fractures and dislocations
    Hand infections and injection injuries
    Hand and forearm tendon injuries
    Hand vascular injuries and digit amputations
    Upper extremity peripheral nerve injuries
    Upper extremity compartment syndrome
    Postoperative evaluation of free flap reconstructions
    The postoperative aesthetic patient
    Sternal wounds.
  • Digital
    Devra Becker.
    Contents:
    General approach to the oral board examination
    Preoperative assessment and perioperative management
    Deep venous thrombosis prophylaxis
    Postoperative events
    Free flap failure
    Fluid management
    Ethical considerations
    Skin cancer
    Reconstruction of the facial defect
    Aesthetic surgery for the aging face
    Facial trauma
    Breast reconstruction
    Elective breast surgery
    Back and trunk reconstruction
    Aesthetic body and trunk
    Pressure ulcers
    Traumatic hand injury
    Elective hand surgery
    Lower extremity reconstruction
    Lower extremity wounds
    Cleft lip and palate
    Craniosynostosis syndromes.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Gregory E. Lakin.
    Summary: "Plastic Surgery Review meets the need for a high-yield, compact review book for the plastic surgery in-service, written board, and maintenance of certification examinations. Its 50 chapters are organized into four sections tested by the plastic surgery in-service examination: comprehensive plastic surgery craniomaxillofacial surgery breast and cosmetic surgery hand and lower extremity. An outline format with bullet points, tables, figures, mnemonics, and references facilitates review and memorization. Invited expert reviewers ensure the material is accurate and up-to-date"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    edited by David Bates and Nima Bassiri.
    Contents:
    Toward an ethnography of experimental psychology / Emily Martin
    "You are (not) your synapses" : toward a critical approach to neuroscience / Catherine Malabou
    Plasticity, pathology, and pleasure in cold war America / Cathy Gere
    Epileptic insanity and personal identity : John Hughlings Jackson and the Formations of the neuropathic self / Nima Bassiri
    Integrations, vigilance, catastrophe : the neuropsychiatry of aphasia in Henry Head and Kurt Goldstein / Stefanos Geroulanos and Todd Meyers
    The history of a brain wound : Alexander Luria and the dialectics of Soviet plasticity / Hannah Proctor and Laura Salisbury
    Automaticity, plasticity, and the deviant origins of artificial intelligence / David Bates
    Plastic diagrams : circuits in the brain and how they got there / Joseph Dumit
    Imperfect reflections : norms, pathology, and difference in mirror neuron research / Katja Guenther
    On how adult cerebral plasticity research has decoupled pathology from death / Tobias Rees.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Kunihiro Sakuma, editor.
    Contents:
    Pluripotent stem cells and skeletal muscle differentiation: challenges and immediate applications
    Role of the ubiquitin-proteasome pathway in skeletal muscle
    Stem cell therapy in muscle degeneration
    The autophagy-dependent signaling in skeletal muscle
    Cytokines in skeletal muscle growth and decay
    The role of ribosome biogenesis in skeletal muscle hypertrophy
    Comprehensive approach to sarcopenia and cachexia treatment
    The role and regulation of PGC-1[alpha] and PGC-1[beta] in skeletal muscle adaptation
    Characteristics of skeletal muscle as a secretory organ
    Biological role of TRPC1 in myogenesis, regeneration, and disease
    ROS and nNOS in the regulation of disuse-induced skeletal muscle atrophy
    Participation of AMPK in the control of skeletal muscle mass
    Therapeutic potential of skeletal muscle plasticity and slow muscle programming for muscular dystrophy and related muscle conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Theodore Eliades, George Eliades, editors.
    Summary: The polycarbonate products, adhesives, and composite resins used in dentistry may have the potential to release bisphenol-A (BPA). BPA is known to exert effects at very low doses and presents a risk to reproductive, neurological, behavioural, and metabolic development, however, the actual effects induced by dental materials have not been sufficiently covered and critically analyzed. Nevertheless, many practicing dentists will be confused by the occasionally contradictory and often misinterpreted evidence in the literature. This book therefore represents a timely and comprehensive review of our current knowledge of BPA release from dental polymers and the potential presence of endocrinological consequences. After a review of the history and evolution of the issue within the broader biomedical context, the estrogenicity of BPA is explained. The basic chemistry of the polymers used in dentistry is then presented in a simplified and clinically relevant manner. Key chapters in the book carefully evaluate the release of BPA from dental polymets and the estrogenicity of these materials. Currently available evidence on the potential estrogenic action of dental composites, sealants, and adhesives is presented, and the exaggerated conclusions of various methodological protocols are assessed. The entire dental community will find this book to be an invaluable aid to safe practice.

    Contents:
    Endocrine Disruptors (Xenoestrogens): An Overview
    Analytical Methods for Determination of Bisphenol A
    In Vitro Assay Systems for the Assessment of Oestrogenicity
    BPA Effects In Vivo: Evidence from Animal Studies
    BPA and Dental Materials
    Bisphenol A and Orthodontic Materials.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Vinny R. Sastri.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Regulations for medical devices and application to plastics suppliers : history and overview
    3. Materials used in medical devices
    4. Material requirements for plastics used in medical devices
    5. Polymer additives used to enhance material properties for medical device applications
    6. Commodity thermoplastics : polyvinyl chloride, polyolefins, and polystyrene
    7. Engineering thermoplastics : acrylics, polycarbonates, polyurethanes, polyacetals, polyesters, and polyamides
    8. High-temperature engineering thermoplastics : polysulfones, polyimides, polysulfides, polyketones, liquid crystalline polymers, and fluoropolymers
    9. Other polymers : styrenics, silicones, thermoplastic elastomers, biopolymers, and thermosets
    10. Purchasing controls and supplier quality for medical device manufacturers and their suppliers
    11. Process validation for medical device manufacturers and their suppliers.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Neil S. Sadick, editor.
    Summary: This book details the uses of platelet-rich plasma (PRP) techniques for dermatologic purposes and describes the techniques and protocols for its application in clinical practice. Concise and practical, this reference covers not only the procedural steps in collecting PRP from a patient, but also applications in wound healing, hair loss, skin rejuvenation, scarring, and face and body augmentation. It addresses the issues that are caused by fad procedures, such as the "Vampire Facelift," and emphasizes the importance of reliable information in these cases. Chapters are supplemented with multimedia including high-quality images, illustrations, and an instructional video. Platelet-Rich Plasma in Dermatologic Practice is written for clinicians in practice looking to offer alternatives to more invasive aesthetic surgery techniques.

    Contents:
    1.Biology of Platelet Rich Plasma
    2. Platelet Rich Plasma Preparation Methodologies
    3. Platelet-Rich Plasma for Skin Rejuvenation
    4. Platelet-Rich Plasma for Wound Healing
    5. Platelet-Rich Plasma for Hair Loss
    6. PRP for Scarring and Striae
    7. Platelet-Rich Plasma for Dermal Augmentation of the Face and Body
    8. Combination Therapies for PRP
    9. Controversies in PRP.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Elie M. Ferneini, Regina Landesberg, Steven Halepas, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive overview of the use of platelet rich plasma (PRP), typically by injection, and its usage across medical disciplines. This multi-authored, multi-institutional, and multi-specialty based text is designed to guide health care providers in the varied uses of PRP -- starting from its history and preparation and moving through a variety of disciplines to illustrate how PRP can help healing. Clinical Applications of Platelet Rich Plasma in Medicine is divided into three sections: The first gives an overview of the basic science of PRP; the second provides a detailed overview of the clinical indications of PRP; and the third section discusses potential complications in conjunction with relevant case studies. It will feature a wealth of images and diagrams to illustrate best practices in using PRP. Written to be used by oral and maxillofacial surgeons, plastic surgeons, cosmetic surgeons, otolaryngologists, dentists, orthopedic surgeons, and general surgeons to name a few, this book will provide an evidence-based approach to using PRP in practice. The editors have extensive academic experience and have authored multiple scientific publications, while the contributions included in the text have been written by experts and leaders in the fields touched upon in the book.

    Contents:
    Section I: Basic Science of PRP
    1. History of PRP
    2. PRP Science
    3. PRP Preparation
    4. PRF vs. PRP
    Section II: Clinical Applications of PRP
    5. PRP in Sports Medicine
    6. PPR in Wound healing
    7. PRP in Hair restoration
    8. PRP in Facial Rejuvenation
    9. PRP in Oral Surgery
    10. PRP in Dental Implants
    11. PRP with bone grafting/periodontal surgery
    12. PRP in Veterinary Medicine
    13. Stem cell and PRP
    Section III: Complications and Relevant Cases
    14. Complications
    15. Cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Nicola Maffulli, editor.
    Contents:
    Contents and Formulations of Platelet Rich Plasma
    Platelet-Rich Plasma in Pain Medicine
    PRP: Tips for Application in the Musculoskeletal System
    PRP in Tendons and Other Non-bone Tissues
    Platelet Rich Plasma in Articular Cartilage Lesions
    Platelet-Rich Plasma in Knee Osteoarthritis in the Athlete
    Platelet Rich Plasma in Foot and Ankle Surgery
    Platelet Rich Plasma for Biological Therapy: Applications and Limits
    The Systemic Effects of Platelet-Rich Plasma
    Potential Links Between Tendon Pathology and Platelet Rich Plasma Biology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Eduardo Anitua, Ramón Cugat, Mikel Sánchez, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Pamela Meersand, Karen J. Gilmore.
    Contents:
    Why play therapy? Introduction to the psychodynamic treatment of young children
    Play, playfulness, and the sequence of play forms in development
    Pretend play
    Play in the digital age
    Basic psychodynamic concepts and their use in play therapy
    Therapeutic action and the multiple functions of play therapy
    Play and developmental psychopathology, deprivation, or disability
    The logistics: planning a practice and arranging for office space
    Getting started, creating an alliance and facilitating play
    Working with parents over the course of treatment
    Deepening play therapy via verbalizing inner states, expanding narratives and working with transference and defense
    Ending play therapy and the process of termination
    Play therapy, variations in development and serious psychopathology.
  • Print
    written and gathered by adrienne maree brown.
    Summary: "How do we make social justice the most pleasurable human experience? How can we awaken within ourselves desires that make it impossible to settle for anything less than a fulfilling life? Author and editor Adrienne Maree Brown finds the answer in something she calls "pleasure activism," a politics of healing and happiness that explodes the dour myth that changing the world is just another form of work. Drawing on the black feminist tradition, she challenges us to rethink the ground rules of activism. Her mindset-altering essays are interwoven with conversations and insights from other feminist thinkers, including Audre Lorde, Joan Morgan, Cara Page, Sonya Renee Taylor, and Alexis Pauline Gumbs. Together they cover a wide array of subjects -- from sex work to climate change, from race and gender to sex and drugs -- building new narratives about how politics can feel good and how what feels good always has a complex politics of its own."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    section 1. Who taught you to feel good?: Uses of the erotic / by Audre Lorde ; The legacy of "Uses of the erotic" : a conversation with Cara Page ; A spoilerific gush on how Octavia Butler turns me on ; Love as political resistance ; The sweetness of salt / by Alexis Pauline Gumbs ; Why we get off / by Joan Morgan ; A pleasure philosophy : a conversation with Ingri LaFleur
    section 2. The politics of radical sex: Pussy power / by Favianna Rodriguez ; Sex ed : a poem ; Wherein I write about sex
    section 3. A circle of sex: Conversation with a sex toy ; Sex majik (no one told me to do it) ; Nipples are magic ; It's bloody fantastic ; Fucking/having sex/making love ; The highs, lows, and blows of having casual sex ; Confessions of a queer sex goddess ; Are you there, goD? It's me, Day / by Holiday Simmons ; Feelmore : a conversation with Nenna Joiner ; Bodyminds reimagined : a conversation with Sami Schalk ; Fuck you, pay me / by Chanelle Gallant ; A timeline/tutorial on squirting
    sub-section: Skills for sex in the #MeToo era: From #MeToo to #WeConsent ; It's about your game ; It's time to reclaim our skin ; I want you, but I'm triggered ; Strategic celibacy ; Liberating your fantasies ; Pornography and accountability ; Use your voice
    section 4: The politics of radical drug use: Weed on, weed off ; Conditions of possibility : a conversation with Monique Tula ; Experiments in cannabis for the collective / by Malachi Garza ; Ecstasy saved my life
    section 5. Pleasure as political practice: sub-section: The politics of healing toward pleasure: Feeling from within ; Black woman wildness / by Junauda Petrus ; Beyond trans desire / by micha cárdenas ; Pleasure after childhood sexual abuse / by Amita Swadhin ; Fuck cancer : a conversation with Alana Devich Cyril ; Care as pleasure / by Leah Lakshmi Peipzna-Samarasinha ; sub-section: The politics of wholeness in movements: The pleasure of living at the same time as Beyoncé Giselle Knowles-Carter ; On fear, shame, death, and humor : a conversation between the Rocca family and Zizi ; The power to make light : a conversation with Dallas Goldtooth
    Fly as hell : a conversation with Sonya Renee Taylor ; On the pleasures of wardrobe : a conversation of Maori Holmes ; Adornment and burlesque : a conversation with Taja Lindley ; Burlesque and liberation / by Michi Osato and Una Osato ; Working the pole : a conversation with Suguey Hernandez ; Pleasure over sixty : a conversation with Idelisse Malave and Alta Starr ; The work of parenting / by Autumn Brown ; Raising sexually liberated kids / by Janine de Novais ; Tips for raising sexually liberated kids / by Zahra Ali ; subsection: The politics of liberated relationships: Radical gratitude spell ; Liberated relationships, expanded ; On nonmonogamy ; Being second ; The pleasure of deep, intentional friendship : a conversation with Dani McClain and Jodie Tonita ; Principles in practice
    section 6. Outro, thank yous: Outro ; Gratitude.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BJ1481 .B76 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Claudio Sorino, David Feller-Kopman, and Giampietro Marchetti.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Gerd Plewig, Bodo Melnik, WenChieh Chen.
    Summary: This book is a richly illustrated account of the clinical features, microscopic anatomy, and management of acne, acne-like disorders, and rosacea. The coverage includes all aspects of these diseases, from physiology to pathology, bacteriology, and endocrinology; special emphasis is placed on histopathology. Moreover, the full spectrum of pharmacological and physical methods of controlling the disorders are critically examined and the widely experienced team of authors present in detail their personal strategies for successful treatment. Since it was first published, Acne and Rosacea has become a well-known classic. This fourth edition has been completely revised and updated, with entirely new chapters on topics such as etiopathogenesis, auto-inflammatory acne syndromes, the role of nutrition, and novel therapies. The text is supplemented by selected references and a wealth of clinical and histopathological pictures, including additional high-definition photographs. The book is designed for all those physicians - dermatologists, general practitioners, pediatricians, gynecologists, pharmacologists, and surgeons - who must identify and treat the many different forms of acne and rosacea.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface to the Fourth Edition; Acknowledgments; Contents; About the Authors;
    1: Pilosebaceous Follicles: Structure, Biochemistry, and Function; 1.1 Anatomy of Follicles; 1.1.1 Terminal Hair Follicles; 1.1.2 Vellus Hair Follicles; 1.1.3 Sebaceous Follicles; 1.2 Sebaceous Glands; 1.3 Sebaceous Gland Functions; 1.4 Sebaceous Lipids and Normal Sebum; 1.5 Facial Pores; 1.6 The Pilosebaceous Unit: The Stage Setting; 1.7 Sebaceous Follicles of the Back and Face; 1.8 A Descent into Follicles; 1.9 Comparative Anatomy of the Face and Back 1.10 Follicular Filaments and Microcomedones1.11 Scanning Electron Microscopic Overview of a Sebaceous Follicle; 1.12 Sampling of Follicles by the Cyanoacrylate Technique; 1.13 Noninvolved Skin of an Acne Patient: A Horizontal View; 1.14 Large Sebaceous Glands in Acne Patients; 1.15 The Sebaceous Filament; 1.16 Comparative Ultrastructure of the Acroinfundibulum and the Infrainfundibulum; 1.17 The Appearances of Sebum; 1.18 The Microflora of Acne; Bibliography;
    2: Acne Epidemiology and Genetics; 2.1 Prevalence of Acne; 2.1.1 Adolescent Acne; 2.1.2 Postadolescent Acne 2.19 Proline-Serine-Threonine Phosphatase-Interacting Protein 12.20 l-Selectin; 2.21 TP53; Bibliography;
    3: Acne Pathogenesis; 3.1 Acne Sebum; 3.2 Acne Lipidomics; 3.3 SREBP1c: Key Promoter of Acne Sebum; 3.4 Propionibacterium acnes (P. acnes); 3.5 Acne Microbiome; 3.6 P. acnes Biofilm; 3.7 Virulence Factors; 3.8 P. acnes Biofilm and Disturbed Follicular Keratinization; 3.9 Comedogenesis; 3.10 Sebofollicular Inflammation; 3.11 Follicular and Comedonal Flora; 3.12 Internal Structures of Old Open Comedones; 3.13 Follicular Fluorescence; 3.14 The Life History of the Comedo
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Walter A. Orenstein, Paul A. Offit, Kathryn M. Edwards, Stanley A. Plotkin.
    Summary: "From the latest vaccination evidence, recommendations, and protocols . . . to new vaccine development and the use of vaccines in reducing disease, Plotkin’s Vaccines, 8th Edition, covers every aspect of vaccination. Now completely revised and updated from cover to cover, this award-winning text continues to provide reliable information from global authorities, offering a complete understanding of each disease, as well as the latest knowledge of both existing vaccines and those currently in research and development. Described by Bill Gates as "an indispensable guide to the enhancement of the well-being of our world," Plotkin’s Vaccines is a must-have reference for current, authoritative information in this fast-moving field." -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Jerome B. Posner, Clifford B. Saper, Nicholas D. Schiff, and Jan Claassen.
    Summary: The fifth edition of 'Plum and Posner's Diagnosis and Treatment of Stupor and Coma' provides a comprehensive overview of the theory behind regulation of consciousness in humans, the mechanisms of loss of consciousness clinically, and the examination and diagnosis of the cause of loss of consciousness in patients. New sections provide the latest information on the treatment of comatose patients, brain death, recovery from structural coma, and the ethics of dealing with comatose patients.

    Contents:
    Pathophysiology of signs and symptoms of coma
    Examination of the comatose patient
    Structural causes of stupor and coma
    Specific causes of structural coma
    Metabolic and diffuse encephalopathies: disruption of the internal milieu
    Psychogenic unresponsiveness
    Initial management of patients with stupor and coma
    Management of frequently encountered causes of unconsciousness
    Prognosis in coma and related disorders of consciousness and mechanisms underlying outcomes
    Brain death.
    Digital Access Oxford 2019
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB150.C6 P55 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Sharon M. Weinstein, Mary E. Hagle ; acquisitions editor, Shannon Magee ; product development editor, Ashley Fischer ; production project manager, David Saltzberg ; design coordinator, Stephen Druding.
    Summary: This reference covers basic and advanced infusion procedures, as well as current Infusion Nurses' Society standards of practice.

    Contents:
    History of infusion therapy
    Minimizing risk and enhancing performance
    Nursing role and responsibilities
    Standards of practice
    Nurse and patient education
    Anatomy and physiology applied to infusion therapy
    Diagnostic testing and values
    Fluid and electrolyte balance
    Principles of parenteral administration
    Complications and nursing interventions
    Evidence-based infusion practice
    Infusion delivery systems and safety
    Peripheral venous access
    Central venous access
    Expanded approaches to access and monitoring
    Parenteral nutrition
    Blood and component therapy
    Pharmacology applied to infusion therapy
    Antineoplastic therapy
    Pain management
    Pediatric infusion therapy
    Infusion therapy in an older adult
    Infusion therapy across the continuum of care
    The future of infusion nursing : a global approach.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    Kapil Bharti, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses applications of pluripotent stem cells to study eye disease in vitro and to create novel therapies for degenerative eye diseases. Chapters are contributed by experts in the field and cover such topics as the use of pluripotent stem cells in 2D and 3D engineering of ocular tissues for disease modelling and drug testing as well as approaches to replace degenerated RPE and photoreceptors in macular degeneration and retinitis pigmentosa. Pluripotent Stem Cells in Eye Disease Therapy presents a comprehensive discussion of basic science and clinical applications and is an indispensable resource for everyone from advanced graduate students to advanced professionals who want to learn about the potential of stem cell biology and its role in the field of retinal diseases.

    Contents:
    Pluripotent Stem Cells to Model Degenerative Retinal Diseases: The RPE perspective
    Utility of induced pluripotent stem cell-derived retinal pigment epithelium for an in vitro model of proliferative vitreoretinopathy
    Developing cell-based therapies for RPE-associated degenerative eye diseases
    Pluripotent Stem Cell derived 3D Ocular Tissue Transplantation
    role of immune system in cell integration
    Use of Stem Cells to model optic nerve degeneration diseases
    Surgical approaches for RPE/retina
    3D Engineering Ocular Tissues for Disease Modeling and Drug Testing
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Susan S. Adler, Dominiek Beckers, Math Buck.
    Summary: PNF (Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation) is a concept to therapeutic exercise which therapists all over the world have found effective for treating patients with a wide range of diagnoses. The approach presented in this richly illustrated guide is based on the concepts set out by Dr. Herman Kabat and taught by Margaret Knott. The fully revised fourth edition demonstrates how the principles of the International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF) and aspects of motor learning and motor control (from hands-on to hands-off management) are applied in modern PNF evaluation and treatment. A new fresh fully-coloured design and layout highlights the clearly structured way in which philosophy, basic procedures and treatment patterns of PNF are based. New for this edition -Fully revised introductory chapter on the PNF basics, now including discussion and demonstration of ICF and Motor Learning aspects in detailed case study. -Throughout chapters, new additional case studies that help visualize the application of PNF applications in promoting the patients everyday-life motor skills on activity and participation levels.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Basic Procedures for Facilitation
    Techniques
    Patient Treatment
    Patterns of Facilitation
    The Scapula and Pelvis
    The Upper Extremity
    The Lower Extremity
    The Neck
    The Trunk
    Mat Activities
    Gait Training
    Vital Functions
    Activities of Daily Living
    Test Your knowledge: Questions and Answers
    Glossary.
    Digital Access Springer 201e
  • Digital
    Dominiek Beckers, Math Buck.
    Summary: This book teaches you step by step all aspects of Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation. It ranges from neurophysiological basics to diagnostic findings, treatment techniques and PNF patterns. The goal is to make you an expert in this established method. In this book you will find: Basics of PNF, including PNF philosophy, ICF model, motor learning and much more PNF patterns and their functional application explained precisely and comprehensibly Over 640 color illustrations show all important techniques and treatment steps Treatment examples and numerous practical tips for uncomplicated implementation in everyday therapy Questions at the end of each chapter to monitor your learning success New in the 5th edition: Completely updated, introduction of the International PNF Association, additional applications and patient examples A must-have for everyone who wants to learn or already uses PNF! About the authors: Math Buck is Physical Therapist since 1972. He has been working for over 40 years with patients with predominantly spinal neurological symptoms. He has been an IPNFA instructor since 1984 and has taught many PNF courses. Dominiek Beckers completed a Master's degree in physiotherapy, movement science and rehabilitation at the University of Leuven in Belgium. He has been working as a physiotherapist since 1975 and as an IPNFA instructor since 1984.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Basic Principles and Procedures for Facilitation
    PNF Techniques
    Patient Assessment and Treatment
    Patterns of Facilitation
    The Scapula and Pelvis
    The Upper Extremity
    The Lower Extremity
    The Neck
    The Trunk
    Mat Activities
    Gait Training
    Vital Functions
    Activities of Daily Living
    Test Your knowledge: Questions and Answers
    Glossary.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Sarah Wakeman, Joshua D. Lee and Anika Alvanzo.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    LWW Health Library
    LWW Health Library
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    edited by Richard D. Urman, Jesse M. Ehrenfeld.
    Contents:
    Preoperative Patient Evaluation
    Pharmacology: Inhaled Anesthetics
    Non-Inhaled Anesthetics
    Analgesics
    Local Anesthetics
    Neuromuscular Blocking Drugs and Reversal Agents
    Vasoactive, Autonomic, and Cardiovascular Drugs
    Pharmacology: Antibiotics and Herbal Medicines
    Other Drugs Relevant to Practice of Anesthesia
    Anesthesia Equipment
    Airway Management
    Anesthesia Techniques
    Regional Anesthesia
    Perioperative Monitoring
    Ventilation Techniques
    Fluids, Electrolytes, & Transfusion Therapy
    Common Intraoperative Problems
    Procedures in Anesthesia
    Acute Pain Management
    PACU Management and Discharge
    Complications of Anesthesia
    Enhanced Recovery After Surgery
    Trauma, Burn, and Critical Care Management
    Anesthesia for Cardiac Surgery
    Anesthesia for Thoracic Surgery
    Anesthesia for General Surgery
    Anesthesia for Bariatric Surgery
    Anesthesia for Vascular Surgery
    Anesthesia for Neurologic Surgery, Neuroradiology, and ECT
    Anesthesia for Otolaryngology (ENT) and Ophthalmology
    Renal System and Anesthesia for Urologic Surgery
    Anesthesia for Orthopedic Surgery
    Anesthesia for Endocrine Surgery
    Anesthesia for Obstetric and Gynecologic Surgery
    Pediatric Anesthesia
    Ambulatory Anesthesia
    Anesthesia for Aesthetic Surgery & Surgery Outside of the Operating Room
    Chronic Pain Management
    Organ Transplantation
    Anesthesia for the Elderly
    Electrocardiogram (ECG) Interpretation
    Ethical Issues & Event Disclosure
    Emergency Algorithms
    Common Medical Phrases in Spanish.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    Richard D. Urman, Jesse M. Ehrenfeld.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Thomas Boehmeke, Ralf Doliva.
    Contents:
    Imaging and patient position
    Transducer and imaging planes
    Parasternal long-axis view
    Parasternal short-axis view
    Apical windows
    Suprasternal window
    Subcostal window
    M-mode echocardiography
    Doppler echocardiography
    Valvular heart disease
    Coronary heart disease
    Cardiomyopathies
    Prosthetic valves
    Carditis
    Septal defects
    Hypertensive heart diseases
    Intracardiac masses.
  • Digital
    George Laskaris.
    Summary: "The complete pictorial guide to oral diseases, a pocket-sized bestseller now in its third edition! A derivative of Prof. Laskaris' best-selling hardcover atlas, the Pocket Atlas of Oral Diseases provides complete information on the diagnosis and treatment of an exhaustive variety of oral diseases. The work is a practical interdisciplinary pocket reference for dentists, dermatologists, otolaryngologists, primary care practitioners, and dental and medical students. Highlights include: Full coverage of both local and systemic oral diseases and conditions; Complete lists of laboratory tests, differential diagnoses, and concise treatment guidelines for all conditions; Consistently structured headings to cover each condition: definition, etiology, clinical features, lab tests, differential diagnosis, and treatment; Exquisite, high-resolution color photographs and concise texts that lead the reader through the diagnostic process Among the revisions in the new edition are: Over 40 new disease entities and a new chapter have been added; The pictorial material has been renewed and enriched at a level of 95% with high-standard color images. An introduction to Oral Medicine and a schematic classification of oral diseases in the form of a tree have been added. George Laskaris' Pocket Atlas of Oral Diseases is a superb reference work of invaluable practical use to any clinician involved in the oral cavity"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    White lesions
    Red lesions
    Black and brown lesions
    Vesiculobullous lesions
    Ulcerative lesions
    Papillary lesions
    Gingival enlargement
    Soft-tissue tumors
    Soft-tissue cysts
    Bone swellings
    Neck swellings
    Lip disorders
    Tongue disorders.
  • Digital
    Torsten B. Moeller, Emil Reif.
    Summary: "This comprehensive, easy-to-consult pocket atlas is renowned for its superb illustrations and ability to depict sectional anatomy in every plane. Together with its two companion volumes, it provides a highly specialized navigational tool for all clinicians who need to master radiologic anatomy and accurately interpret CT and MR images. Special features of Pocket Atlas of Sectional Anatomy: - Didactic organization in two-page units, with high-quality radiologic images on one side and brilliant, full-color diagrams on the other - Hundreds of high-resolution CT and MR images, many made with the latest generation of scanners (e.g., 3T MRI, 64-slice CT) - Consistent color coding, making it easy to identify similar structures across several slices - Concise, easy-to-read labeling of all figures. Updates for the 4th edition of Volume I: - New cranial CT imaging sequences of the axial and coronal temporal bone - Expanded MR section, with all new 3T MR images of the temporal lobe and hippocampus, basilar artery, cranial nerves, cavernous sinus, and more - New arterial MR angiography sequences of the neck and additional larynx images Compact, easy-to-use, highly visual, and designed for quick recall, this book is ideal for use in both the clinical and study settings. Volume I: Head and Neck Volume II: Thorax, Heart, Abdomen, and Pelvis, ISBN 978-3-13-125604-1 Volume III: Spine, Extremities, Joints, ISBN 978-3-13-143171-4 Torsten B. Moeller, MD, and Emil Reif, MD, Department of Radiology, Marienhaus Klinikum Saarlouis-Dillingen, Dillingen/Saarlouis, Germany"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    V. 1 : Head and neck
    v. 2. Thorax, heart, abdomen, and pelvis
    v. 3. Spine, extremities, joints.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Education
    Thieme MedOne Education
    Thieme MedOne Education
  • Digital
    Kern Singh, Alexander R. Vaccaro.
    Contents:
    Anterior cervical discectomy and fusion
    Anterior cervical corpectomy and fusion
    Open posterior cervical foraminotomy
    Minimally invasive posterior cervical foraminotomy
    Posterior laminoplasty with instrumentation
    Posterior laminectomy and fusion
    Occipitocervical fusion
    Thoracic pedicle screw placement
    Minimally invasive thoracic corpectomy
    Percutaneous vertebral cement augmentation
    Open laminectomy and discectomy
    Open posterolateral lumbar fusion
    Minimally invasive lumbar exposure
    Minimally invasive laminectomy
    Minimally invasive far lateral discectomy
    Minimally invasive transforaminal lumbar interbody fusion (TLIF)
    Mini-open pedicle screw placement
    Percutaneous pedicle screw placement
    Extreme (Extreme) lateral interbody fusion
    Minimally invasive lumbar corpectomy
    Anterior lumbar interbody fusion.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Sara Hylwa, Elisabeth Hurliman, Jing Liu, Erin Luxenberg, Christina Boull.
    Summary: This pocketbook offers a quick one-stop reference for dermatologists and the dermatology resident. The pocketbook is written by dermatologists for dermatologists. It is full of essential dermatologic "pearls" in easy access, high yield format, delivering the must know essentials for hospital and clinic based dermatology. Tables and bulleted format help access crucial information quickly and there will be space for added notes for clinicians to personalize and enhance their pocketbook. Pocket Dermatology is a must-have resource for dermatology residents, dermatologists in clinic and on call who are supervising medical students or residents, and physicians who have patients with dermatologic concerns who will be consulting a dermatologist.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Biopsy Kits, Methods, and Guidelines Photodocumentation of the Skin
    Chapter 2 Anatomy
    Chapter 3 General Dermatology
    Chapter 4 Pediatric Dermatology
    Chapter 5 Surgical Dermatology
    Chapter 6 Cosmetic Dermatology
    Chapter 7 Contact Dermatology
    Chapter 8 Dermatopharmacology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Erica Ashley Morse, Graham Ingalsbe, Amy Follmer Hildreth, David Silvestri ; edited by Richard D. Zane, Joshua M. Kosowsky.
    Contents:
    I: Cardiovascular
    II: Pulmonary
    III: Gastrointestinal
    IV: Infectious disease
    V: Neurology
    VI: Renal and genitoruinary
    VII: Obgyn
    VIII: Dermatology
    IX: Endocrine and metabolic
    X: Environmental
    XI: Hematology and oncology
    XII: Musculoskeletal and rheumatological
    XIII: Otolaryngology/dental/ophthalmology
    XIV: Pediatrics
    XV: Psychiatric patient
    XVI: Toxicology
    XVII: Airway management
    XVIII: Trauma
    XIX: appendix.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Richard D. Zane, Joshua M. Kosowsky.
    Summary: "Pocket-sized and easy to use, Pocket Emergency Medicine, 5th Edition, provides accurate, actionable, and up-to-date information essential to caring for patients in life-threatening situations. Edited by Drs. Richard D. Zane and Joshua M. Kosowsky, this resource is designed to be used at the bedside by clinicians on the front lines of emergency care. A volume in the popular Pocket Notebook series, it organizes chapters by presenting condition and supports the thought processes needed to hone everyday diagnostic decision making"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2023
  • Digital
    by David A. Bradt, Christina M. Drummond.
    Summary: The Pocket Field Guide for Disaster Health Professionals: Missioncraft in Disaster Relief is a disaster management toolkit containing briefing checklists, systems profiles, assessment forms, reporting templates, project management worksheets, and other tools required in the field. It also provides mission-critical technical reference information adapted from internationally recognized sources. "Missioncraft" is the art and science of preparing and conducting effective field operations. This Field Guide enables disaster health professionals to collect and analyze critical information and then implement high-impact interventions in field settings. Tools and reference information are structured in a concise, comprehensive, structured format. Sections are arranged in logical order of relief operations to facilitate application in key field activities. These activities include: Field briefing Field assessment Field recommendations Field reporting Field project and staff management Medical coordination The Pocket Field Guide for Disaster Health Professionals is an authoritative resource for field-based clinical and public health providers responsible for health outcomes of disaster-affected populations; team leaders and medical coordinators in governmental, non-governmental, Red Cross, and UN agencies; information and program staff supporting technical best practices in relief operations; and, trainers preparing health professionals for field missions.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Section 1: Field Briefing
    Section 2: Field Assessment
    Section 3: Field Recommendations
    Section 4: Field Reporting
    Section 5: Field Project and Staff Management
    Section 6: Medical Coordination
    Section 7: Technical Annexes
    Section 8: Resilience and Reentry
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Rock G. Positano, DPM, MSc, MPH, Christopher W. DiGiovanni, MD, Andrew J. Rosenbaum, MD, Ronald L. Soave, DPM, FACFAS, Norman A. Wortzman, DPM, FACFAOM.
    Contents:
    General considerations
    The forefoot
    Nerve disorder
    Plantar heel pain
    Soft tissue disorders of the foot and ankle
    Arthritis
    Derformity
    Sport Medicine
    Trauma
    Diabetes
    Pediatrics
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Petros Levounis, M .D., M.A., Erin Zerbo, M.D., Rashi Aggarwal, M.D.
    Summary: Twenty concise chapters accessibly address a broad spectrum of topics, including the fundamentals of addiction; specific substances and addictive behaviors, including gambling disorder; and treatment approaches, including special issues with psychiatric and medical comorbidities.

    Contents:
    Neurobiology of addiction from reward to relief : the complex neuroadaptations underlying addiction
    Addiction assessment across settings of care : approaches for the twenty-first-century / Mirela Feurdean
    Dsm-5 diagnosis and toxicology / Petros Levounis, Lindsay Lynch
    Alcohol / Faye Chao, Nauman Ashraf
    Anabolic-androgenic steroids / Cheryl A. Kennedy, Tshering Bhutia
    Benzodiazepines / Vicki Kalira
    Caffeine / Grace Hennessy
    Cannabis / Michael A. Ketteringham
    Hallucinogens and dissociative drugs / C. Alexander Paleos
    Inhalants / Abigail J. Herron
    Opioids / Erin Zerbo, Rashi Aggarwal
    Stimulants / Douglas Opler, Shaojie Han
    Tobacco / Timothy Koehler Brennan, Annie Levesque, Caylin Riley
    Behavioral addictions : focus on gambling disorder / Timothy Fong
    Cognitive-behavioral therapy / Adam R. Demner
    Relapse prevention / Bernadine Han, Jonathan Avery
    Motivational interviewing / John Douglas
    Twelve-step programs and spirituality / J. David Stiffler, Emily Deringer
    Mindfulness and mentalization / Maryn Sloane
    Diet and exercise / Sonya Lazarevic, Alex Zaphiris.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2016
  • Digital
    Christopher D. Doern.
    Summary: "With fast facts and packed with tables, this useful updated edition continues to present valuable quick-reference information to the clinical microbiology community in a small package. Along with specifics on pathogenic microorganisms, there is updated information on essential diagnostic techniques--MALDI-TOF MS and sequencing--and a greatly expanded section on susceptibility testing."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Taxonomic classifcation of medically important microorganisms
    Section 2. Indigenous and pathogenic microbes of humans
    Section 3. Specimen collection and transport
    Section 4. Bacterial diagnosis
    SEction 5. Viral diagnosis
    Section 6. Fungal diagnosis
    Section 7. Parasitic diagnosis
    Section 8. Vaccines, susceptibility testing, and methods of organism identification.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    John Papdopoulos, author ; David R. Schwartz, consulting editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    S. David Hudnall, Melissa A. Much, Alexa J. Siddon.
    Summary: This book is designed not as a comprehensive textbook, but instead as a short practical guide to diagnosis of neoplastic and non-neoplastic diseases of blood, bone marrow, and lymphoid tissues. Concise and easy to read, this text provides essential information in a bulleted text format. This simple format was chosen to provide essential information that may quickly be reviewed at the microscope. Each single-page entry begins with a brief one-line Snapshot description, followed by short descriptions of important clinical, morphologic, immunohistochemical, and genetic features, and ending with Caveats and Pearls and Differential Diagnosis. In most cases, entries are accompanied by a few high-quality histologic images. To keep the text concise, recommended texts and recent review articles are cited in the bibliography at the end of the book. To help quickly find alternative diagnoses, the index cross-references all differential diagnoses. The Pocket Guide to Diagnostic Hematopathology should be of use to practicing hematopathologists (academic and private) and hematologic oncologists, as well as trainees (fellows) in hematopathology and hematologic oncology. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chronic myeloid neoplasms
    Myeloid neoplasms with germline predisposition
    Acute myeloid leukemia and related precursor neoplasms
    Mastocytosis
    Blastic plasmacytoid dendritic cell neoplasm
    Myeloid/lymphoid neoplasms with eosinophilia and rearrangement of PDGFRA, PDGFRB, FGFR1, or with PCM1-JAK2
    Acute leukemias of ambiguous lineage
    Precursor lymphoid neoplasms
    Mature B cell neoplasms
    Immunodeficiency-associated lymphoproliferative disorders
    Mature T- and NK-cell neoplasms
    Hodgkin lymphomas
    Histiocytic and dendritic cell Neoplasms
    Non-neoplastic marrow findings
    Non-neoplastic lymph node and spleen lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Nicoll, Diana.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC71 .P739
    2
  • Digital
    Manoj Monga, Kristina L. Penniston, David S. Goldfarb, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise, patient-directed approach to stone prevention. It defines who to evaluate and when to treat, and provides empiric guidelines for all stone formers. Specific treatment guidelines are also included, based on the kidney stone composition and the underlying metabolic abnormalities demonstrated by 24-hour urine stone risk profile. Written by experts in the field, Pocket Guide to Kidney Stone Prevention: Dietary and Medical Therapy serves as a valuable resource for a broad base of clinicians in primary and specialty care.

    Contents:
    What is the risk of stone recurrence?
    General Nutrition Guidelines For All Stone Formers
    24-hour Urine and Serum Tests: When and What?
    Nutrition Management of Hypercalciuria
    Hypercalciuria
    Nutrition Management of Hypocitraturia
    Medications
    Nutritional Management of Hyperoxaluria
    Nutrition Management of Uric Acid Stones
    Uric Acid Stones
    Cystinuria
    Struvite Stones, Diet, and Medications.- Laboratory Follow-Up of the Recurrent Stone Former
    Imaging (Cost, Radiation)
    What to do about Asymptomatic Calculi?
    Acute Renal Colic and Medical Expulsive Therapy
    Stratifying Surgical Therapy. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Petros Levounis, Eric Yarbrough.
    Summary: "The Pocket Guide for Understanding LGBTQ Mental Health is a manual for mental health clinicians working with patients of diverse gender and sexual identities: lesbians, gay men, bisexuals, transgender people, queer people, questioning people, intersex people, asexual people, pansexual people, and allied heterosexuals. The book discusses psychological and cultural contexts and challenges faced by patients and addresses questions that well-meaning people may ask"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Lesbian : The L in LGBTQ2IAPA / Daena L. Petersen, Mary E. Barber, Nix Zelin, Eric Yarbrough
    Gay : The G in LGBTQ2IAPA / Ahmad A. Mohammad, Eric Yarbrough
    Bisexual : The B in LGBTQ2IAPA / Sarah Noble
    Transgender : The T in LGBTQ2IAPA / Murat Altinay
    Queer : The First Q in LGBTQ2IAPA / Sam Marcus, E.K. Breitkopf
    Questioning : The Second Q in LGBTQ2IAPA / Mark Joseph Messih
    Intersex : (Disorder of Sex Development): The I in LGBTQ2IAPA / Adrian Jacques H. Ambrose
    Asexual : The First A in LGBTQ2IAPA / Selale Gunal, Petros Levounis
    Pansexual : The P in LGBTQ2IAPA / Victoria Formosa
    Ally : The Second A in LGBTQ2IAPA / Angeliki Pesiridou, Serena M. Chang.
  • Digital
    [editors] Cameron M. Baston, Christy Moore, Anthony J. Dean, Nova Panebianco.
    Summary: "The goal of this book is to present the most salient techniques and concepts in point-of-care ultrasound to clinicians and students at all levels of training. For the new learner, this includes basic direction in indications and acquisition. For the more advanced practitioner, points to improve image quality and identification of common pitfalls are combined with basic interpretation and examples of pathology. Conceptual and interpretation questions are provided in the last chapter to help reinforce knowledge and provide self-assessment."--Preface
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2019
  • Digital
    Andrea Fagiolini, Alessandro Cuomo, Roger S. McIntyre.
    Summary: The volume presents the most important and practical information to prescribe lithium, valproate, carbamazepine and other anticonvulsants in psychiatric practice safely and successfully. The information is ready to use and easy to remember and is focused primarily on clinically relevant issues such as preliminary laboratory evaluations, drug dosages, schedules, indications, contraindications, side effects and strategies to manage them. Clinical cases and clinical pearls are provided for each medication. The volume outlines the best strategies to choose psychotropic medications skillfully. The book will be an invaluable reference for psychiatric residents and any other health care practitioner seeking for a tool that is simple, concise and immediately useful for everyday clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Lithium: Indications. Pharmacokinetics. Pharmacodynamics. Drugs interactions. Side Effects and their management. Preliminary laboratory assessments. Dosage. Follow up laboratory assessment. Clinical Pearls. Clinical Case Presentation. Physical Examination
    Valproate: Indications. Pharmacokinetics. Pharmacodynamics. Drugs interactions. Side Effects and their management. Preliminary laboratory assessments. Dosage. Follow up laboratory assessments. Clinical Pearls. Clinical Case Presentation. Physical Examination. Carbamazepine: Indications. Pharmacokinetics. Pharmacodynamics. Drugs interactions. Side Effects and their management. Preliminary laboratory assessments. Dosage. Follow up laboratory assessments. Clinical Pearls. Clinical Case Presentation. Physical Examination
    Lamotrigine: Indications. Pharmacokinetics. Pharmacodynamics. Drugs interactions. Side Effects and their management Preliminary laboratory assessments. Dosage. Follow up laboratory assessments. Clinical Pearls. Clinical Case Presentation. Physical Examination
    Pregabalin: Indications. Pharmacokinetics. Pharmacodynamics. Drugs interactions. Side Effects and their management. Preliminary laboratory assessments. Dosage. Follow up laboratory assessments. Clinical Pearls. Clinical Case Presentation. Physical Examination.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Reneè Roberts-Turner, Rahul K. Shah, editors.
    Summary: This text will act as a quick quality improvement reference and resource for every role within the healthcare system including physicians, nurses, support staff, security, fellows, residents, therapists, managers, directors, chiefs, and board members. It aims to provide a broad overview of quality improvement concepts and how they can be immediately pertinent to one's role. The editors have used a tiered approach, outlining what each role needs to lead a QI project, participate as a team member, set goals and identify resources to drive improvements in care delivery. Each section of the book targets a specific group within the healthcare organization. Pocket Guide to Quality Improvement in Healthcare will guide the individual, as well as the organization to fully engage all staff in QI, creating a safety culture, and ultimately strengthening care delivery.

    Contents:
    Section I: QI for the Front Line Staff
    Care Delivery: Patient Family Center Care
    Introduction and History of HC Quality
    PDSA for Change
    Introduction & History of Safety in HC
    Culture of Safety (Reporting and Teamwork)
    Section II: QI for the Professional Staff
    Care Delivery: Patient Family Centered Care
    Introduction & History of HC Quality
    Model for Improvement
    PDSA for Change
    Section III: QI for Leadership Staff
    Care Delivery: Patient Family Centered Care
    Healthcare Leadership
    Quadruple Aim
    Creating Organizational Foundation for Quality and Safety: Organizational Readiness and Role of Organizational Leadership
    Introduction and History of HC Quality
    Model for Improvement
    PDSA for Change
    Using Date to Drive Change
    Leading QI
    Introduction & History of Safety in HC
    Err, Harm, & Human Factors
    Culture of Safety
    Responding to Adverse Events.-Section IV: QI for Executive Leadership and Board Members
    Care Delivery: Patient Family Centered Care
    Quadruple Aim
    Creating Organizational Foundation for Quality and Safety: Organizational Readiness and Role of Executive Leadership
    Introduction & History of HC Quality
    Model for Improvement
    PDSA for Change
    Using Big Data to Drive Change
    Introduction & History of Safety in HC
    Err, Harm, & Human Factors
    Culture of Safety
    Expectations for Responding to Adverse Events. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Marianna G. Mavilia, George Y. Wu.
    Summary: This new edition is a comprehensive yet concise text that combines current treatment protocols and practical pharmacological information for GI Disease. Each chapter addresses a specific GI disease or condition and lists all agents available for that condition, including all brand and generic names, indications, contraindications, lactation and pregnancy information, doses, routes of administration, duration, and relative cost. Special features include tables, algorithms, and key references. The book also has chapter tabs for easy access, a durable cover to withstand frequent use, and fits in a white coat pocket. The third edition has been updated with information on new medications for the treatment of GI diseases including esophageal motility, peptic diseases, bacterial and fungal infections, parasitic, malabsorptive, inflammatory bowel and viral hepatitis, as well as genetic diseases. Written by experts in the field, Pocket Handbook of GI Pharmacotherapeutics, Third Edition is a valuable and portable resource of use to anyone involved in the treatment of patients with GI disease.

    Contents:
    Gastroesophageal Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Bleeding
    Specific GI Motility Disorders
    General GI Motility Disorders
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    General GI Infections
    Specific GI Microbial Infections
    Liver Diseases
    Portal Hypertension
    Cholestasis
    Hepatic Encephalopathy
    Ascites
    Overload Disorders
    Generalized Pruritus
    Post-Liver Transplant Medications
    Acute and Chronic Pancreatitis Pain Syndromes
    Pancreatic Insufficiency
    Gut Malabsorption and Enzyme Deficiencies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    [edited by] Gyorgy Frendl, Avery Tung, Richard D Urman.
    Summary: "The Critical Care volume of the Pocket Notebook Series is, as are all titles in the series, designed for easy transport and quick reference. Pocket ICU presents essential information that intensivists, residents, and nurses will need daily in the ICU. This key content in all areas of critical care is presented in a telegraphic, bulleted outline format with a liberal use of tables and treatment algorithms throughout. The table of contents was overhauled for better organization in the second edition and will remain unchanged except for the addition of a chapter on the challenges an air-transmissible, pandemic-causing"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Gyorgy Frendl, Richard D. Urman.
    Summary: "Critical (intensive) care was born and remains a multi-disciplinary specialty. This is obvious in two facets of critical care: (a) it integrates knowlO¿¿edge and practices from many medical specialties (trauma, transplant medicine, cardiology, pulmonary medicine, anesthesiology and pain medicine, and many others); and (b) it requires the close collaboration of medical professionals from many specialties (physicians, nurses, physiotherapists, respiratory therapists, nutritionists, pharmacists, etc.). To achieve this, critical care professionals must be masters of communiO¿¿cation, team building, management, and possess the most up-to-date clinical knowledge"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Laura M. Mazer, Kiran Lagisetty, Kathryn L. Butler.
    Digital Access AccessSurgery 2017
  • Digital
    Amin Madani, Lorenzo Ferri, Andrew Seely, editors.
    Contents:
    Pre-Operative Evaluation of the Thoracic Patient
    Operative and Post-Operative Considerations
    Lung and Airway Disorders
    Pleural Disorders
    Mediastinal Disorders
    Chest Wall Disorders
    Chest Trauma
    Benign Esophageal Disorders
    Esophageal Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editor, Marc S. Sabatine.
    Summary: "In Pocket Medicine High-Yield Board Review, we have provided readers with over 500 case-based questions across 9 subspecialties. The annotated answers are detailed and review the key diagnostic and therapeutic principles. Readers will see that the cases are based not only on the exceptional medical knowledge and clinical acumen of the teams of authors for each subspecialty for the 7th edition of Pocket Medicine, but also reflect the recent experience of the more junior members in taking Board exams"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Cardiology
    Pulmonary
    Gastroenterology
    Nephrology
    Hematology/Oncology
    Infectious Diseases
    Endocrinology
    Rheumatology
    Nephrology.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Marc S. Sabatine.
    Summary: "Many readers of Pocket Medicine have commented that they use that book not only on the wards, but also for preparation for their Board exams. To help further address that need, we created Pocket Medicine High-Yield Board Review. The very positive response to the 1st edition suggests we crafted a useful product"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    CARDIOLOGY / Andrew Abboud, Brett J. Doliner, Rachel C. Frank, Bradley J. Petek, Marc S. Sabatine, Michelle L. O'Donoghue
    PULMONARY / Louisa A. Mounsey, Alison Trainor, Robert Hallowell
    GASTROENTEROLOGY / Zoe N. Memel, Eric M. Przybyszewski, Lawrence S. Friedman
    NEPHROLOGY / Ignacio Portales Castillo, Sarah E. Street, Andrew S. Allegretti
    HEMATOLOGY-ONCOLOGY / Sara Khosrowjerdi, Howard J. Lee, Jr., Thomas J. Roberts, MacLean C. Sellars, Jean M. Connors, Daniel J. DeAngelo, David P. Ryan
    INFECTIOUS DISEASES / Jessica C. O'Neil, Rachel E. Erdil, Kimon C. Zachary
    ENDOCRINOLOGY / Caitlin Colling, Daria Schatoff, Michael Mannstadt
    RHEUMATOLOGY / Zandra E. Walton, Ian D. Cooley, Robert P. Friday
    NEUROLOGY / Rebecca L. Williamson, John Y. Rhee, Daniel S. Harrison, Jillian M. Berkman, Michael P. Bowley.
    Digital Access Ovid 2023
  • Digital
    Wooin Ahn, Jai Radhakrishnan.
    Summary: Pocket Nephrology joins the Pocket Notebook series as a complete resource for topics related to renal kidney physiology and pathophysiology designed as a first bedside reference for the busy clinicians. This book is intended for medical students, internal medicine and nephrology trainees as well as seasoned clinicians involved in the care of patients with kidney disease. The book is divided into two sections. The first part discusses the general approach to disorders of the kidney. The second part of book will address individual topics under each of the following categories: Electrolytes and Acid–Base Balance, Tubular, Interstitial and Cystic Diseases, Extrarenal Diseases, Glomerular and Vascular Diseases, Hypertension, Renal Replacement Therapy, and Transplantation. Individual topics are written to make pertinent information readily available to clinicians in order to facilitate evidence-based patient care.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2020
  • Digital
    edited by M. Brandon Westover, MD, PHD, Assistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MAssachusetts, Emily Choi DeCroos, MD, Neurohospitalist, Department of Neurology, Erlanger Health System, Afflilated Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Tennessee, College of Medicine, Chattanooga, Tennessee, Karim Awad, MD, Director Sleep Medicine, Havard Vanguard Medical Associates, Boston, Massachusetts, Matt T. Bianchi, MD, PHD, Assistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts.
    Contents:
    Neurologic emergencies: quick reference
    Lesion localization in clinical neurology
    Neuroimaging
    Vascular neurology
    Neurocritical care
    Interventional neurology
    Seizures, epilepsy, and EEG
    Delirium
    Poisons and vitamin deficiencies
    Rapidly progressive dementia
    Dementia
    Behavioral neurology
    Movement disorders
    Meningitis, encephalitis, and brain abscesses
    Neurologic infectious diseases
    Headache
    Central nervous system vasculitis
    Pain
    Dizziness and deafness
    Multiple sclerosis and other CNS inflammatory demyelinating diseases
    Spine and spinal cord diseases
    Motor neuron disease
    Peripheral neuropathy
    Radiculopathy and plexopathy
    Neuromuscular junction disorders
    Myopathy
    Nerve conduction studies and electromyography
    Neurorheumatology
    Neuro-oncology
    Sleep medicine
    Pregnancy neurology
    Neuro-ophthalmology.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Marcelo Matiello, Michael P. Bowley, Sahar F. Zafar, M. Brandon Westover.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2022
  • Digital
    edited by K. Joseph Hurt, MD, PhD, Assistant Professor, Department of Obstertics and Gynecology, University of Colorado School of Medicine.
    Summary: "This practical, high-yield Pocket Notebook title is an ideal on-the-go reference for trainees and practitioners of obstetrics and gynecology. Written by residents with oversight from fellows and faculty experts, and perfect for initial care plans during rounds, this easy-to-use, loose-leaf resource is packed with up-to-date information answering the clinical questions you face every day. Pocket Obstetrics and Gynecology, Second Edition, is an indispensable quick resource you won't want to be without! Includes a new chapter that covers substance abuse in pregnancy, depression, anxiety disorders, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and psychosis. Features fully revised content throughout, keeping you up to date with best practices and the latest research in the field. Covers primary care; emergencies; operative ob-gyn; pelvic surgery and urogynecology; infertility; prenatal care; normal labor and delivery; complicated pregnancy and delivery; cardiology; pulmonary; gastroenterology; hematology; neurology; gynecologic oncology, and more. Follows the popular Pockets Notebook format, featuring bulleted lists, tables, diagrams, and algorithms that make essential facts easy to find and retain. Contains helpful appendices on pelvic anatomy; common ob/gyn procedures and surgeries; drugs in OB and breastfeeding; ACLS algorithms; and NRP algorithm. Organizes chapters by organ system, putting women's health topics into general medical context - perfect for clerkship studies."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Neil Vasan, MD, PhD, Chief Medical Oncology Fellow, Department of Medicine, Memorial Sloan Ketttering Cancer Center, New York, New York, Maria I. Carlo, MD, Assistant Attending Physician, Genitourrinary Oncology Service, Department of Medicine, Memorial Sloan Ketttering Cancer Center, New York, New York ; advisors, Alexander E. Drilon, MD, Clinical Director, Early Drug Development Service, Assistant Attending, Thoracic Oncology Service, Department of Medicine, Memorial Sloan Ketttering Cancer Center, New York, New York, Michael A. Postow, MD, Assistant Attending Physician, Melanoma and Immunotherapeutics Service, Department of Medicine, Memorial Sloan Ketttering Cancer Center, New York, New York.
    Summary: "It is with great enthusiasm that we introduce the second edition of Pocket Oncology. The first edition was well received, and given many exciting new developments in the oncology, we are now eager to release an updated second edition. Several new sections have been added to this updated edition, including information on chimeric antigen receptor (CAR) T-cell therapy, immunotherapy toxicity, and novel oral anticoagulants. We have additionally incorporated more information about precision targeted therapeutic strategies. Each disease section has been updated to reflect cancer care in 2017"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    General oncology
    Clicical research methods
    Radiation oncology
    Cancer biology
    Molecular diagnostics
    Cancer immunology
    Cancer genetics
    Cancer pharmacology
    Cancer complications
    Pain and palliative care
    Cancer survivorship
    Infectious disease
    Genitourinary malignancies
    Thoracic malignancies
    Gastrointestinal malignancies
    Skin cancers and sarcomas
    Head and neck malignancies
    Endocrine malignancies
    Gynecologic malignancies
    Breast cancer
    Neurologic oncology
    Cancer of unknown primary
    Lymphomas
    Plasma cell disorders
    Myeloproliferative disorders
    Leukemias and myelodysplastic syndromes
    Stem cell transplantation
    Benign hematology.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    faculty editors, Alexander Drilon, Neil Vasan; editors, Noura Choudhury, Yonina Murciano-Goroff.
    Summary: "It is with great enthusiasm that we introduce the third edition of Pocket Oncology. Since the release of the second edition, both the field of oncology and the world at large have changed dramatically, with a cascade of new drug approvals, expansion of precision medicine and immuno-oncology, and of course, the COVID-19 pandemic"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2023
  • Digital
    editors, Jay (Jamal) Boughanem, MD, Attending Orthopaedic Surgeon, Clinical Assistant Professor, University of Hawaii, Hilo, Hawaii, Ritesh R. Shah, MD, Director of Hip and Knee Research, Hip Arthroscopy and Hip Preservation, Hip and Knee Reconstruction, Revision Hip and Knee Reconstruction, Illinois Bone and Joint Institute, LLC, the Center for Orthopaedic Surgery, Morton Grove, Illinois.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Paritosh Prasad ; associate authors, Uzair Admani, Peter Boulos, Francis Coyne.
    Contents:
    Primary care and adolescent medicine / Nicole Cifra and Paritosh Prasad
    Emergency department / Uzair Admani and Asim Abbasi
    Allergy and immunology / Sylvia Nowak, Maria A. Slack, and Jeanne Lomas
    Cardiology / Peter Boulos and Michael Joynt
    Endocrinology / Rose Barham and Sharia Bialo
    Fluids and electrolytes / Erin Rademacher and Hilary Whelan
    Gastroenterology / Margaret Connolly and Rebecca Abell
    Hematology / Francis Coyne and Craig Mullen
    Oncology / Francis Coyne and Craig Mullen
    Genetic and metabolism / Jenny Taylor and Chin-to Fong
    Neurology / Jonathan Mink, Justin Rosati, and Emily Krainer
    Pulmonary / Caitlin Metzger, Peter Boulos, and Karen Voter
    Renal / Julia Lister, Adam Bracken, and Erin Rademacher
    Rheumatology / Ajay Tambralli and Bethany Marston
    NICU / Maha Kaissi and Rita Dadiz
    PICU / Uzair Admani and Jake Deines.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Meghan M. Kiefer, Curtis R. Chong.
    Summary: "Pocket Primary Care was created out of a desire to support those practicing in the ambulatory setting - to recognize the unique and full spectrum of care provided there, from counseling patients on insomnia to diagnosing STIs, from interpreting PFTs to treating osteoporosis. The second edition includes innumerable updates in clinical practice, guidelines, and research from the past 5 years. It reflects the work of dozens of physicians from the MGH diaspora, and we hope that this edition, when combined with sound clinical judgement, improves the lives of its readers and their patients"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    General medicine
    Cardiology
    Dermatology
    Endocrine
    Gastrointestinal
    Hematology and oncology
    Infectious disease
    Musculosketal
    Neurology
    Heent
    Psychiatary
    Addiction medicine
    Pulmonary
    Renal/urology
    Women's health
    Men's health
    Abbreviation
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Curtis R. Chong.
    Contents:
    General medicine
    Cardiology
    Dermatology
    Endocrine
    Gastroenterology
    Hematology and oncology
    Infectious disease
    Musculoskeletal
    Neurology
    HEENT
    Psychiatry
    Addiction Medicine
    Pulmonary
    Renal/Urology
    Women's health
    Men's health
    Abbreviations
    Index.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Judith A. Puckett, Scott R. Beach, John B. Taylor.
    Contents:
    Psychiatric assessment
    Psychiatric disorders
    Substance use disorders
    Somatic therapies
    Psychotherapies
    Medications and side effects
    Emergency psychiatry
    Legal issues
    Special populations.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    edited by Chad Tang, Ahsan Farooqi.
    Contents:
    Radiation oncology principles / section editors : Aaron Joseph Grossbeg, Albert C. Koong
    Special radiation techniques / section editors : Penny Fang, Jennifer C. Ho, Steven J. Frank
    Central Nervous system / Hubert Young Pan, Erik P. Sulman
    Pediatrics / section editors : Ethan Bernard Ludmir, Arnold C. Paulino
    Head & neck / section editors : Brian J. Deegan, Courtney Pollard III, Adam Seth Garden
    Thoracic / section editors : Eric D. Brooks, Daniel Gomez
    Gastrointestinal / section editors : Lauren Elizabeth Colbert, Prajnan Das
    Breast / section editors : Jennifer Logan, Amy C. Moreno, Wendy Woodward
    Genitourinary / section editors : Geoffrey V. Marint, Shalini Moningi, Mitchell S. Anscher
    Gynecologic / section editors : Shane R. Stecklein, Ann H. Klopp
    Skin/sarcoma / section editors : Kaitlin Chrisopherson, B. Ashleigh Guadagnolo
    Lymphoma / section editors : Tommy Sheu, Bouthania Dabaja
    Radiation emergencies, benign disease, and palliation / section editors : Adnan Elhammali, Amol Jitendra Ghia.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    Anna Burke [and more].
    Summary: This Pocket Reference offer a multifaceted guide on various aspects of Alzheimerℓ́ℓs disease. This thorough review discusses the challenges of diagnosis, different stages of the disease, testing, and current treatment methods, including pharmacological and nonpharmacological management of cognitive decline and symptoms due to Alzheimerℓ́ℓs disease. The book also has specific chapters on care issues for patients with Alzheimerℓ́ℓs disease, which describes what clinician's and caregivers should expect and how to manage the disease at its various stages. Additionally, the book provides helpful guides, tables, and tips for clinicians and caregivers to help care for the patient and the caregiver themselves.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Diagnosing Alzheimer's Disease
    Pharmacological Treatment of Cognitive Decline in Alzheimer's Disease
    Pharmacological Treatment of Behavioral and Psychological Symptoms of Alzheimer's Disease
    Managing Patients with Alzheimer's Disease and Related Dementias
    Care Issues in Advanced Dementia
    Supporting Caregiver Health
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Serge Livio Ferrari, Christian Roux, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    edited by Daniel B. Jones.
    Summary: "Pocket Surgery is the "go to" resource for medical students and Surgery house staff. The bulleted format gets the information usually found in a two-volume surgery textbook into one loose leaf notebook small enough to fit into your white coat pocket"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    editor, Daniel B. Jones, MD, MS, FACS.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Shantanu Warhadpande, Alex Lionberg, Kyle Cooper.
    Contents:
    The basics of IR / Alex Lionberg, Shantanu Warhadpande, and Joshua Pinter
    Tools of the trade / Suraj Prakash, Matthew Krosin, Alex Skidmore, Gregory Guy
    Vascular access / Suraj Prakash, Lisa Liu, Aaron Fischman, and Gregory Guy
    Lines, tubes, and drains / Devdutta Warhadpande and Gregory J. Woodhead
    Emergency IR / Matthew Krosin and Rakesh Navuluri
    Hepatobiliary / Orrie Close, Alexandra Jo, Patrick Grierson, and Bill Majdalany
    Oncology / Shantanu Warhadpande, Alex Lionberg, Junjian Huang, Carl Schmidt, and Jonathan Martin
    Arterial disease / Shantanu Warhadpande, Alexander El-Ali, Andrew Niekamp, Kurt Stahlfeld, Geogy Vatakencherry, and Kyle Cooper
    Venous disease / Andrew J. Klobuka, Trilochan Hiremath, and Deepak Sudheendra
    Dialysis access and interventions / Alex Lionberg, Shantanu Warhadpande, and Rakesh Navuluri
    Genitourinary disease / John Do, David Maldow, Zachary Nuffer, and Jason Mitchell
    Neuro IR / Juan Domingo Ly Liu, Mangala Patil, and Joseph J Gemmete
    Pediatric IR / Rajat Chand, Victor Beccera, Nicholas Zerona, Ashley Altman, and James Park.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    Thomas A Slater, Mohammed Abdul Waduud, Nadeem Ahmed.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    volume editors, Zhi-Hong Liu, John C. He.
    Contents:
    Cell biology of the podocyte / Jefferson, J.A.; Shankland, S.J.
    Cell cycle and podocyte injury / Hagmann, H.H.; Shankland, S.J.; Brinkkoetter, P.T.
    The podocyte cytoskeleton : key to a functioning glomerulus in health and disease / Faul, C.
    Crosstalk between podocytes and tubular epithelial cells / Leung, J.C.K.; Kar, N.L.; Tang, S.C.W.
    Role of mitochondria in podocyte injury / Yuan, Y.; Huang, S.; Zhang, A.
    Autophagy in podocytes / Zhang, L.; Livingston, M.J.; Chen, J.-K.; Dong, Z.
    PPAR- : signaling in podocyte injury / Wang, W.; Yang, T.
    Podocyte injury in FSGS / Ding, W.Y.; Saleem, M.A.
    Circulating soluble urokinase receptor and focal segmental glomerulosclerosis / Wei, C.; Reiser, J.
    Anti-phospholipase A2 receptor-1 autoantibodies and membranous nephropathy / Beck, L.H.
    Anti-neutral endopeptidase antibodies, autoantibodies, anti-bovine serum albumin antibodies and membranous nephropathy / Ronco, P.; Debiec, H.
    Podocytopathy in diabetes : a metabolic disorder / Merscher, S.; Lenz, O.; Fornoni, A.
    Obesity-related glomerulopathy and podocyte injury / Camici, M.
    Podocyte injury in HIV-associated nephropathy / Mallipattu, S.K.; He, J.C.
    Retinoic acid : a potential pharmacologic approach in the treatment of podocytopathy / Sharma, S.; Mallipattu, S.K.; Zhong, Y.; He, J.C.
    Immunomodulatory drugs and the podocyte / Mathieson, P.W.
    Triptolide protects podocytes from injury / Qin, W.; Liu, Z.-H.
    Fly : a model to study the podocyte / Na, J.; Cagan, R.L.
    Zebrafish models of podocytopathies / Boucher, R.C.; Zhou, W.
    The role of micrornas in podocytes / Shi, S.; Liu, Z.-H.
    An integrative biology approach to study podocyte function / Ju, W.; Hodgin, J.; Jiang, S.; Kretzler, M.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Digital
    Tasneem Z. Naqvi ; contributing editor, Afsoon Fazlinezhad.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    Peter B. Luppa, Ralf Junker (eds.).
    Summary: The underlying technology and the range of test parameters available are evolving rapidly. The primary advantage of POCT is the convenience of performing the test close to the patient and the speed at which test results can be obtained, compared to sending a sample to a laboratory and waiting for results to be returned. Thus, a series of clinical applications are possible that can shorten the time for clinical decision-making about additional testing or therapy, as delays are no longer caused by preparation of clinical samples, transport, and central laboratory analysis. Tests in a POC format can now be found for many medical disciplines including endocrinology/diabetes, cardiology, nephrology, critical care, fertility, hematology/coagulation, infectious disease and microbiology, and general health screening. Point-of-care testing (POCT) enables health care personnel to perform clinical laboratory testing near the patient. The idea of conventional and POCT laboratory services presiding within a hospital seems contradictory; yet, they are, in fact, complementary: together POCT and central laboratory are important for the optimal functioning of diagnostic processes. They complement each other, provided that a dedicated POCT coordination integrates the quality assurance of POCT into the overall quality management system of the central laboratory. The motivation of the third edition of the POCT book from Luppa/Junker, which is now also available in English, is to explore and describe clinically relevant analytical techniques, organizational concepts for application and future perspectives of POCT. From descriptions of the opportunities that POCT can provide to the limitations that clinician's must be cautioned about, this book provides an overview of the many aspects that challenge those who choose to implement POCT. Technologies, clinical applications, networking issues and quality regulations are describ ed as well as a survey of future technologies that are on the future horizon. The editors have spent considerable efforts to update the book in general and to highlight the latest developments, e.g., novel POCT applications of nucleic acid testing for the rapid identification of infectious agents. Of particular note is also that a cross-country comparison of POCT quality rules is being described by a team of international experts in this field.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; About the editors; List of authors; Abbreviations; Definitions and areas of application; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Terminology and definitions; 1.3 Areas of application; References; The relevance of POCT in healthcare; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 The medical and financial ­aspects of POCT diagnostics; 2.2.1 Medical aspects; 2.2.2 Economic aspects; 2.3 The POCT market; 2.3.1 Problems with market ­valuation; 2.3.2 POCT categories; 2.3.3 Future market trends; References; Device classes; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Type 1a
    Qualitative POCT methods; 3.3 Type 1b
    "Unit-use" POCT systems 3.4 Type 2
    Benchtop POCT ­instruments3.5 Type 3
    Viscoelastic ­coagulation analyzers; 3.6 Type 4
    Continuous POCT methods; 3.7 Type 5
    Molecular biological POCT analyzers; 3.8 Type 6
    Direct-to-consumer testing (DTC); References; Pre- and post-analytical ­phases; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Pre-analytical phase; 4.2.1 Choosing a suitable test; 4.2.2 Capillary blood sampling; 4.2.3 Venous blood sampling; 4.2.4 Arterial blood sampling; 4.2.5 Blood sampling systems and anticoagulants for blood gas analysis; 4.2.6 Blood samples from central lines; 4.2.7 Taking swabs; 4.2.8 Urine sampling 4.2.9 Inspection of the sample4.2.10 Reliable identification of patient and sample; 4.3 Post-analytical phase; 4.4 Avoiding pre- and ­post-analytical problems; References; Analytical methods, ­biosensor technology; 5.1 Biosensor technology; 5.1.1 Sensor (bioreceptor); 5.1.2 Transducers, electronic ­amplifiers; 5.1.3 Sample application/fluidic unit; 5.2 Continuous monitoring ­methods; 5.2.1 Continuous monitoring ­methods; 5.2.2 Continuous glucose ­monitoring (CGM); References; Laboratory coagulation tests 6.2.2 Combined recording of ­plasmatic coagulation, platelet count and fibrinolysis (viscoelastic methods)6.2.3 Analysis of platelet function; 6.2.4 POCT applications with ­coagulation testing methods; 6.3 Confounders and influencing variables; 6.4 Quality management; References; Analysis of cellular blood components; 7.1 Introduction; 7.2 Device technology and methods; 7.2.1 POCT blood count analyzers; 7.2.2 Blood gas analyzers; 7.2.3 Single analyses; References; Clinical chemistry ­parameters; 8.1 Introduction; 8.2 Device technology and methods; 8.2.1 Dry chemistry; 8.2.2 Wet chemistry 8.2.3 Dedicated devices for ­singular analytes8.3 Applications and indications; References; Immunological methods; 9.1 Methods; 9.1.1 Immunosensors; 9.1.2 Homogeneous and heterogeneous immunoassays; 9.1.3 Immunological rapid tests; 9.2 Device format and quality; 9.3 Areas of application; 9.3.1 Hospital setting; 9.3.2 Physician practice setting; 9.3.3 Home testing; 9.4 Aptamers as adjuncts or ­alternatives to antibodies; References; Molecular biological tests; 10.1 Introduction; 10.2 Integrated and miniaturized systems; 10.3 Selection criteria for POCT systems
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    CAP Point-of-care testing Committee.
    Summary: "Point-of-Care Testing Toolkit, developed by the CAP Point-of-Care Testing Committee, is intended to be a resource for any member of the POCT team who wants to learn about POCT or who has responsibility to guide or direct POCT. It may be particularly useful to pathology residents, pathologists who have been longtime directors of POCT programs, or pathologists who have been recently assigned to lead POCT programs. Pathologists may also use the toolkit to guide other members of their POCT teams, including POCT coordinators and medical technologists who are involved in POCT. Contents include POCT advantages and disadvantages, current and projected technology, pathologist roles in POCT, laboratory director and point-of-care coordinator roles, selection of appropriate test methods, validation and verification protocols, quality control and data management, patient safety, and POCT training and competency."-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Nilam J. Soni, Robert Arntfield, Pierre Daniel Kory.
    Summary: Compact, hand-carried ultrasound devices are revolutionizing how health care providers practice medicine in nearly every specialty. The 2nd Edition of this award-winning text features new and updated chapters, a greatly expanded video library, and review questions to keep you fully up to date with the latest technology and its applications. -- From publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Fundamentals principles of ultrasound. Evolution of point-of-care ultrasound
    Ultrasound physics and modes
    Transducers
    Orientation
    Basic operation of an ultrasound machine
    Imaging artifacts
    Section 2: Lungs & pleura. Overview
    Lung and pleural ultrasound technique
    Lung ultrasound interpretation
    Pleura and diaphragm
    Lung and pleural procedures
    Dyspnea & pulmonary embolism
    Section 3: Heart. Overview
    Cardiac ultrasound technique
    Left ventricular function
    Right ventricular function
    Inferior vena cava
    Pericardial effusion
    Valves
    Transesophageal echocardiography
    Hemodynamics
    Hypotension and shock
    Cardiac arrest
    Section 4: Abdomen & pelvis. Peritoneal free fluid
    Kidneys
    Bladder
    Gallbladder
    Abdominal aorta
    First trimester pregnancy
    Second and third trimester pregnancy
    Testicular ultrasound
    Abdominal pain
    Trauma ultrasound
    Section 5: Vascular system. Lower extremity deep venous thrombosis
    Upper extremity deep venous thrombosis
    Central venous access
    Peripheral venous access
    Arterial access
    Section 6: Head and Neck. Ocular ultrasound
    Thyroid gland
    Lymph Nodes
    Section 7: Nervous system. peripheral nerve blocks
    lumbar puncture
    transcranial ultrasound
    Section 8: Soft Tissues & Joints. Soft Tissues and Joints
    Joints
    Section 9: Pediatrics. Pediatrics
    Neonatology
    Section 10: Ultrasound program management. Competence, credentialing, and certification
    Equipment, image archiving, & billing.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Kent R. Olson ; associate editors Ilene B. Anderson, Neal L. Benowitz, Paul D. Blanc, Richard F. Clark, Thomas E. Kearney, Susan Y. Jim-Katz, and Alan H.B. Wu.
    Contents:
    Section I: Comprehensive evaluation and treatment --- Section II: Specific poisons and drugs: diagnosis and treatment
    Section III: Therapeutic drugs and antidotes --- Section IV: Environmental and occupational toxicology.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Kent R. Olson, Craig G. Smollin, Ilene B. Anderson, Neal L. Benowitz, Paul D. Blanc, Susan Y. Kim-Katz, Justin C. Lewis and, Alan H. B. Wu.
    Summary: "Poisoning & Drug Overdose provides practical advice for the diagnosis and management of poisoning and drug overdose and concise information about common industrial chemicals"-- Preface.

    Contents:
    Section I: Comprehensive evaluation and treatment --- Section II: Specific poisons and drugs: diagnosis and treatment
    Section III: Therapeutic drugs and antidotes --- Section IV: Environmental and occupational toxicology.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2022
  • Digital
    Jørgen Berge, Geir Johnson, Jonathan H. Cohen, editors.
    Summary: Until recently, the prevailing view of marine life at high latitudes has been that organisms enter a general resting state during the dark Polar Night and that the system only awakens with the return of the sun. Recent research, however, with coordinated, multidisciplinary field campaigns based on the high Arctic Archipelago of Svalbard, have provided a radical new perspective. Instead of a system in dormancy, a new perspective of a system in full operation and with high levels of activity across all major phyla is emerging. Examples of such activities and processes include: Active marine organisms at sea surface, water column and the sea-floor. At surface we find active foraging in seabirds and fish, in the water column we find a high biodiversity and activity of zooplankton and larvae such as active light induced synchronized diurnal vertical migration, and at seafloor there is a high biodiversity in benthic animals and macroalgae. The Polar Night is a period for reproduction in many benthic and pelagic taxa, mass occurrence of ghost shrimps (Caprellides), high abundance of Ctenophores, physiological evidence of micro- and macroalgal cells that are ready to utilize the first rays of light when they appear, deep water fishes found at water surface in the Polar night, and continuous growth of bivalves throughout the winter. These findings not only begin to shape a new paradigm for marine winter ecology in the high Arctic, but also provide conclusive evidence for a top-down controlled system in which primary production levels are close to zero. In an era of environmental change that is accelerated at high latitudes, we believe that this new insight is likely to strongly impact how the scientific community views the high latitude marine ecosystem. Despite the overwhelming darkness, the main environmental variable affecting marine organisms in the Polar Night is in fact light. The light regime during the Polar Night is unique with respect to light intensity, spectral composition of light and photoperiod. .

    Contents:
    Preface
    The marine physical environment during the Polar Night
    Light in the Polar Night
    Marine micro- and macroalgae in the Polar Night
    Zooplankton in the Polar Night
    Benthic communities in the Polar Night
    Fish ecology in the Polar Night
    Biological clocks and rhythms in polar organisms
    Sensor carrying platforms
    Operative habitat mapping and monitoring in the Polar Night
    The Polar Night exhibition: Life and light at the dead of night
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Paresh Wankhade, David Weir, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Understanding the Management of Police Services
    Historical Perspective: British Policing and the Democratic Ideal
    Part 2- Context of Policing
    Quo Vadis: A New Direction for Police Leadership through Community Engagement?
    Initial police training and the development of police occupational culture
    Community Engagement, Democracy and Public Policy: a Practitioner Perspective
    Dealing with Diversity in Police Services
    Risk Management in Policing
    Perspectives on the Essence of Policing
    Part 3- Current debates in Policing
    Enhancing Police Accountability in England and Wales: What differences are Police and Crime Commissioners making?
    Police management and workforce reform in a period of austerity
    Personal Resilience and Policing
    Part 4- Looking to the Future
    Some Futures for the Police: Scenarios and Science
    The Future of Policing in the United Kingdom
    A Crisis or a Perfect Storm: the trouble with Public Policing?.-International Perspectives in Policing: Challenges for 2020.-International perspectives in policing: Challenges for 2020.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    editors, Sandra Sundquist Beauman and Susan Bowles.
    Contents:
    Policies and procedures. Admission, transfer, and discharge
    Amplitude-integrated electroencephalography monitoring
    Arterial puncture and cannulation, peripheral: use and care of peripheral arterial line (PAL)
    Blood sampling
    Car seat observational monitoring
    Case management and family-centered care
    Chest tube management: placement, needle aspiration, and maintenance
    Circumcision, preparation and care
    Code blue
    Critical Congenital Heart Defects (CCHDs), screening for
    Cue-based feeding
    Deliveries, attendance at
    Donor human milk use
    Enteral tube, insertion and management of
    Exchange transfusion: double volume and partial volume
    Gastric decompression
    Gastrostomy tube care
    Glucose homeostasis
    Golden hour: initial management of the very-low-birth-weight infant
    Guidelines for nursing care
    Hearing screening
    Human milk: pumping, use, and storage
    Hyperbilirubinemia
    Hypothermia, induced
    Infection prevention
    Infusion therapy
    Intravenous infiltration, treatment of
    Late-preterm and early term infants, caring for
    Lumbar puncture, assisting with
    Massage, infant
    Near-infrared spectroscopy, use of
    Neonatal opioid withdrawal syndrome
    Noninvasive ventilation, nursing care
    Ostomy care
    Oxygen administration for the neonate
    Palliative care
    Perioperative care
    Peripherally inserted central catheters, insertion of
    Peritoneal dialysis
    Retinopathy of prematurity, laser surgery for
    Sedation and analgesia
    Shunts, internal and external
    Skin care
    Suctioning the mechanically ventilated infant
    Suctioning: oral, nasal, or pharyngeal
    Tachyarrhythmias, management of
    Thermoneutral environment
    Transport
    Umbilical arterial catheters, placement and care of
    Umbilical cord management
    Umbilical venous catheters, placement and care of
    Urinary catheterization. Competency assessments. Competency assessment overview
    Admission to the NICU
    Amplitude Integrated Electroencephalography (aEEG) monitoring
    Arterial puncture
    Blood sampling
    Breast pumping, educating mothers
    Breastfeeding dyad care
    Car seat screening
    Cardiac care, basic
    Cardiac care, advanced
    Chest tube management
    Congenital cardiac defects
    Exchange transfusion, double volume and partial volume
    Gastrostomy tube care
    Golden hour: immediate stabilization and care of high-risk infants
    Hearing screening
    Hemodynamic monitoring, invasive
    Hyperbilirubinemia, care of the infant with
    Hypothermia therapy
    Infusion therapy
    Nasal continuous positive airway pressure
    Neonatal opioid withdrawal, assessment for
    Ostomy care
    Perioperative care in the neonatal patient
    Peritoneal dialysis
    Physical exam
    PICC insertion
    Postmortem care
    Respiratory management
    Sedation
    Urinary catheterization.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ253 .P65 2019
    1
  • Digital
    INS, Infusion Nurses Society.
    Contents:
    General organizational policies
    Infection prevention and safety compliance
    Vascular access device placement
    Site care and maintencance
    Infusion-related complications : identification & intervention
    Other infusion-related procedures
    Other infusion access
    Infusion therapies.
    Digital Access R2Library 2016
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Infusion Nurses Society.
    Summary: Polices and Procedures for Infusion Therapy is a companion product to the Infusion Therapy Standards of Practice (the Standards), 8th edition. Evidence-based guidance for clinical practice has been derived directly from the Standards, including associated references, glossary of terms, abbreviations, and acronyms. Polices and Procedures for Infusion Therapy is intended to reflect current knowledge and practices of the clinical specialty of infusion therapy. Because clinical practice continuously evolves based on ongoing research, clinicians should make an independent assessment of the appropriateness and applicability of a policy or procedures in any specific instance.

    Contents:
    Section 1: General organizational policies. Organization of infusion and vascular access services ; Competency and competency assessment ; Product evaluation, integrity, and defect reporting ; Informed consent ; Latex sensitivity or allergy ; Adverse and serious adverse events
    Section 2: Infection prevention and safety compliance. Hand hygiene ; Standard precautions ; Aseptic non touch technique (ANTT®) ; Transmission-based precautions ; Hazardous drugs and waste ; Medical waste and sharps safety
    Section 3: Preparing for vascular access device placement. Key definitions ; Vascular access device planning ; Site selection ; Vascular visualization ; Vascular access site preparation and skin antisepsis ; Pain management for venipuncutre and vascular access procedures
    Section 4: Vascular access device placement. Policy statements ; Key definitions ; Short peripheral intravenous catheter insertion ; Short peripheral intravenous catheter insertion via the external jugular vein ; Ultrasound-guided long peripheral intravenous catheter insertion ; Ultrasound-guided midline catheter insertion ; Central vascular access device tip location ; Ultrasound-guided peripherally inserted central catheter insertion using modified Seldinger technique ; Ultrasound-guided nontunneled central vascular access device insertion using modified Seldinger technique ; Ultrasound-guided nontunneled central vascular access device insertion using Seldinger technique
    Section 5: Site care and management. Administration set management ; Maintaining vascular access device patency: flushing and locking ; Vascular access device assessment, care, and dressing changes ; Vascular access device removal
    Section 6: Vascular access device-related complications: identification and intervention. Phlebitis ; Infiltration and extravasation ; Nerve injury ; Infection ; Air embolism ; Central vascular access device occlusion ; Catheter damage (embolism, repair, exchange) ; Catheter-associated deep vein thrombosis ; Central vascular access device malposition ; Catheter-associated skin injury ; Allergic reaction and anaphylactic/anaphylactoid reactions
    Section 7: Infusion-related procedures and access. Implanted vascular access port: accessing and deaccessing ; Subcutaneous access device: placement and infusion administration ; Intraspinal access device: care and management ; Intraosseous access device: placement, care, and management ; Blood sampling from a vascular access device ; Therapeutic phlebotomy
    Section 8: Infusion therapies. Medication verification ; Compounding and preparation of parenteral solutions and medications ; First dose administration ; Infusion medication and solution administration ; Blood administration ; Parenteral nutrition ; Antineoplastic therapy ; Biologic therapy ; Patient-controlled analgesia ; Moderate sedation/analgesia using intravenous infusion.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Contents:
    Infusion therapy for the pediatric patient
    The role of the child life specialist in infusion therapy
    General organizational policies
    Infection prevention and safety compliance
    Vascular access device placement
    Site care and maintenance
    Infusion-related complications: identification & intervention
    Other infusion-related procedures
    Other infusion access
    Infusion therapies.
    Digital Access R2Library 2016
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Infusion Nurses Society.
    Summary: Polices and Procedures for Infusion Therapy is a companion product to the Infusion Therapy Standards of Practice (the Standards), 8th edition. Evidence-based guidance for clinical practice has been derived directly from the Standards, including associated references, glossary of terms, abbreviations, and acronyms. Polices and Procedures for Infusion Therapy is intended to reflect current knowledge and practices of the clinical specialty of infusion therapy. Because clinical practice continuously evolves based on ongoing research, clinicians should make an independent assessment of the appropriateness and applicability of a policy or procedures in any specific instance.

    Contents:
    Section 1: General organizational policies. Organization of infusion and vascular access services ; Competency and competency assessment ; Product evaluation, integrity, and defect reporting ; Informed consent ; Latex sensitivity or allergy ; Adverse and serious adverse events
    Section 2: Infection prevention and safety compliance. Hand hygiene ; Standard precautions ; Aseptic non touch technique (ANTT®) ; Transmission-based precautions ; Hazardous drugs and waste ; Medical waste and sharps safety
    Section 3: Preparing for vascular access device placement. Key definitions ; Vascular access device planning ; Site selection ; Vascular visualization ; Vascular access site preparation and skin antisepsis ; Pain management for venipuncutre and vascular access procedures
    Section 4: Vascular access device placement. Policy statements ; Key definitions ; Short peripheral intravenous catheter insertion ; Short peripheral intravenous catheter insertion via the external jugular vein ; Ultrasound-guided long peripheral intravenous catheter insertion ; Ultrasound-guided midline catheter insertion ; Central vascular access device tip location ; Ultrasound-guided peripherally inserted central catheter insertion using modified Seldinger technique ; Ultrasound-guided nontunneled central vascular access device insertion using Seldinger technique ; Umbilical catheter placement, site care and management, and removal
    Section 5: Site care and management. Administration set management ; Maintaining vascular access device patency: flushing and locking ; Vascular access device assessment, care, and dressing changes ; Vascular access device removal
    Section 6: Vascular access device-related complications: identification and intervention. Phlebitis ; Infiltration and extravasation ; Nerve injury ; Infection ; Air embolism ; Central vascular access device occlusion ; Catheter damage (embolism, repair, exchange) ; Catheter-associated deep vein thrombosis ; Central vascular access device malposition ; Catheter-associated skin injury ; Allergic reaction and anaphylactic/anaphylactoid reactions
    Section 7: Infusion-related procedures and access. Implanted vascular access port: accessing and deaccessing ; Subcutaneous access device: placement and infusion administration ; Intraspinal access device: care and management ; Blood sampling from a vascular access device ; Therapeutic phlebotomy
    Section 8: Infusion therapies. Medication verification ; Compounding and preparation of parenteral solutions and medications ; First dose administration ; Infusion medication and solution administration ; Blood administration ; Parenteral nutrition ; Antineoplastic therapy ; Biologic therapy ; Patient-controlled analgesia ; Moderate sedation/analgesia using intravenous infusion.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Infusion Nurses Society.
    Summary: Polices and Procedures for Infusion Therapy is a companion product to the Infusion Therapy Standards of Practice (the Standards), 8th edition. Evidence-based guidance for clinical practice has been derived directly from the Standards, including associated references, glossary of terms, abbreviations, and acronyms. Polices and Procedures for Infusion Therapy is intended to reflect current knowledge and practices of the clinical specialty of infusion therapy. Because clinical practice continuously evolves based on ongoing research, clinicians should make an independent assessment of the appropriateness and applicability of a policy or procedures in any specific instance.

    Contents:
    Section 1: General organizational policies. Organization of infusion and vascular access services ; Competency and competency assessment ; Product evaluation, integrity, and defect reporting ; Informed consent ; Latex sensitivity or allergy ; Adverse and serious adverse events
    Section 2: Infection prevention and safety compliance. Hand hygiene ; Standard precautions ; Aseptic non touch technique (ANTT®) ; Transmission-based precautions ; Hazardous drugs and waste ; Medical waste and sharps safety
    Section 3: Preparing for vascular access device placement. Key definitions ; Vascular access device planning ; Site selection ; Vascular visualization ; Vascular access site preparation and skin antisepsis ; Pain management for venipuncutre and vascular access procedures
    Section 4: Vascular access device placement. Policy statements ; Key definitions ; Short peripheral intravenous catheter insertion ; Short peripheral intravenous catheter insertion via the external jugular vein ; Ultrasound-guided long peripheral intravenous catheter insertion ; Ultrasound-guided midline catheter insertion ; Central vascular access device tip location ; Ultrasound-guided peripherally inserted central catheter insertion using modified Seldinger technique ; Ultrasound-guided nontunneled central vascular access device insertion using modified Seldinger technique ; Ultrasound-guided nontunneled central vascular access device insertion using Seldinger technique
    Section 5: Site care and management. Administration set management ; Maintaining vascular access device patency: flushing and locking ; Vascular access device assessment, care, and dressing changes ; Vascular access device removal
    Section 6: Vascular access device-related complications: identification and intervention. Phlebitis ; Infiltration and extravasation ; Nerve injury ; Infection ; Air embolism ; Central vascular access device occlusion ; Catheter damage (embolism, repair, exchange) ; Catheter-associated deep vein thrombosis ; Central vascular access device malposition ; Catheter-associated skin injury ; Allergic reaction and anaphylactic/anaphylactoid reactions
    Section 7: Infusion-related procedures and access. Implanted vascular access port: accessing and deaccessing ; Subcutaneous access device: placement and infusion administration ; Intraspinal access device: care and management ; Intraosseous access device: placement, care, and management ; Blood sampling from a vascular access device ; Therapeutic phlebotomy
    Section 8: Infusion therapies. Medication verification ; Compounding and preparation of parenteral solutions and medications ; First dose administration ; Infusion medication and solution administration ; Blood administration ; Parenteral nutrition ; Antineoplastic therapy ; Biologic therapy ; Patient-controlled analgesia ; Moderate sedation/analgesia using intravenous infusion.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital/Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA395.G6 P7
    2
  • Digital
    Cannon, Loren.
    Summary: The politicization of trans identity-also affecting gender non-binary and gender non-conforming persons-is a form of backlash to the Obergefell ruling (legalizing same sex marriage) and increased LGBTQ equality. This book provides a conceptual analysis and application of the notions of backlash, scapegoating, dog whistling, and virtue signaling.

    Contents:
    Cover
    Contents
    Acknowledgments
    Introduction
    The Obergefell Decision
    The Anti-Trans Offensive
    The Case against Anti-Transgender Bathroom Bills
    Backlash
    Scapegoating
    Scapegoating
    Dog Whistles and Virtue Signaling
    " But for " and the Bostock Decision
    Epilogue
    Bibliography
    Index
    About the Author
  • Digital
    edited by Michiel Hofman and Sokhieng Au.
    Summary: The 2014-2015 Ebola epidemic in West Africa was an unprecedented medical and political emergency that cast an unflattering light on multiple corners of government and international response. Fear, not rational planning, appeared to drive many decisions made at population and leadership levels, which in turn brought about a response that was as uneven as it was unprecedented: entire populations were decimated or destroyed, vaccine trials were fast-tracked, health staff died, untested medications were used (or not used) in controversial ways, humanitarian workers returned home to enforced isolation, and military was employed to sometimes disturbing ends. The epidemic revealed serious fault lines at all levels of theory and practice of global public health: national governments were shown to be helpless and unprepared for calamity at this scale; the World Health Organization was roundly condemned for its ineffectiveness; the US quietly created its own African CDC a year after the epidemic began. Amid such chaos, Médecins sans Frontières was forced to act with unprecdented autonomy -- and amid great criticism -- in responding to the disease, taking unprecedented steps in deploying services and advocating for international aid. The Politics of Fear provides a primary documentary resource for recounting and learning from the Ebola epidemic. Comprising eleven topic-based chapters and four eyewitness vignettes from both MSF- and non-MSF-affiliated contributors (all of whom have been given access to MSF Ebola archives from Guinea, Sierra Leone, and Liberia for research), it aims to provide a politically agnostic account of the defining health event of the 21st century so far, one that will hopefully inform current opinions and future responses.

    Contents:
    Introduction / Michiel Hofman and Sokhieng Au
    Doctors against borders / João Nunes
    Whose security? / Adia Benton
    vignette 1. A few days in July / Lindis Hurum
    The "humanitarian" response to the ebola epidemic in Guinea / Jean-Francois Caremel, Sylvain Landry B. Faye, and Ramatou Ouedraogo
    The initial international aid response in Sierra Leone / Thomas Kratz
    Dying of the mundane in the time of ebola / Mit Philips
    vignette 2. Treating, suffering, and surviving ebola
    How did Médecins san frontiers negotiate clinical trials of unproven treatments during the 2014-2015 ebola epidemic? / Annette Rid and Annick Antierens
    Failing Dr. Khan / Tim O'Dempsey
    Finding an answer to ebola's greatest challenge / Armand Sprecher
    vignette 3. Children in the ebola treatment centers / Allie Tua Lappia and Patricia Carrick
    Fear and containment / Alice Desclaux, Moustapha Diop, and Stéphane Doyon
    Challenges of instituting effective medevac policies / Duncan McLean
    vignette 4. Returing to the "ebola world" / e Maud Santantonio.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Maximilian Jungmann.
    Summary: "This book compares how governments in 192 countries perceive climate change related health risks and which measures they undertake to protect their populations. Building on case studies from the United Kingdom, Ireland, South Korea, Japan and Sri Lanka, The Politics of the Climate Change-Health Nexus demonstrates the strong influence of epistemic communities and international organisations on decision making in the field of climate change and health. Jungmann shows that due to the complexity and uncertainty of climate change related health risks, governments depend on the expertise of universities, think tanks, international organisations and researchers within the public sector to understand, strategize and implement effective health adaptation measures. Due to their general openness towards new ideas and academic freedom, the book shows that more democratic states tend to demonstrate a higher recognition of the need to protect their populations. However, the level of success largely depends on the strength of their epistemic communities and the involvement of international organisations. This volume will be of great interest to students and scholars of climate change and public health. It will also be a valuable resource for policymakers from around the world to learn from best practices and thus improve the health adaptation work in their own countries"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2021
  • Digital
    Leobardo Manuel Gómez-Oliván, editor.
    Summary: The indiscriminate use of chemical substances in industrial processes and anthropogenic activities, have resulted in the release of these compounds into aquatic ecosystems through municipal, hospital and industrial discharges, producing various undesired effects on the environment and on species of ecological interest. These compounds, such as metals, pesticides, emerging pollutants and other substances are persistent and susceptible to biotic and/or abiotic transformations, yielding metabolites that can be more toxic than the original compounds. In this book, researchers from diverse environmental science disciplines share their experiences in countries such as Argentina, Brazil, Colombia and Mexico, and critically examine the problem of contaminants in aquatic ecosystems in Latin America, as well as the risks presented by their presence.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Historical findings on presence of pollutans in water bodies in Latin America and their ecotoxicological impact
    Toxicity produced by an industrial effluent from Mexico on the common carp (Cyprinus carpio)
    Pesticide contamination in Southern Brazil
    Embryotoxicity and teratogenicity induced by naproxen in Xenopus laevis, species of ecological interest in Mexico
    Differential responses of biochemical and behavioral parameters in the native gastropod Chilina gibbosa exposed subchronically to environmental concentrations of two insecticides used in argentina
    Oxidative stress induced by water from a hospital effluent of the city of Toluca, Mexico on Hyalella azteca
    Evaluation of the toxicity of municipal effluents from a locality in the State of Mexico using Hyalella azteca as a bioindicator
    Analysis of heavy metals present on air through the toxicity analysis in water by the gas washer method, using the organism Daphnia magna
    Ecotoxicological Studies of Metal Pollution in Sea Turtles of Latin America
    Evaluation of the toxicity of an industrial effluent before and after a treatment with Sn-modified TiO2 under UV irradiation through oxidative stress biomarkers
    Effects of river pollution on its biota: results from twenty years studies in the Suquía River Basin (Córdoba, Argentina)
    Effects found and induced by the presence of metals in species of the economic and ecological importance of Mexican aquatic environments
    Environmental Pollution by Hydrocarbons in Colombia and its Impact on the Health of Aquatic Ecosystems
    Biomonitoring of diffuse contamination in the Subtropical Region of Brazil: Multibiomarker Assessment in neotropical freshwater fishes
    Genotoxicity biomarkers in fish erythrocytes and water quality parameters
    Health diagnosis of the fish Scomberomorus cavalla from Tecolutla, Ver. México
    Histopathological assessment of organisms in ecotoxicological studies from Mexico
    Histopathological analysis of the intestine from Mugil cephalus on environment reference sites
    Impacts caused by manganese in the aquatic environments of Brazil
    Genotoxic effect of amoxicillin on peripheral blood of common carp (Cyprinus carpio)
    Final conclusions
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Joanna Rorbach, Agnieszka J. Bobrowicz.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Arthur G. Hunt, Qingshun Quinn Li.
    Contents:
    Computational analysis of plant polyadenylation signals / Xiaohui Wu , Guoli Ji , and Qingshun Quinn Li
    Prediction of plant mRNA polyadenylation sites / Xiaohui Wu , Guoli Ji , and Qingshun Quinn Li
    Extraction of poly(A) sites from large-scale RNA-seq data / Min Dong ... [et al.]
    Poly(A)-tag deep sequencing data processing to extract poly(A) sites / Xiaohui Wu, Guoli Ji, and Qingshun Quinn Li
    Analysis of poly(A) site choice using a java-based clustering algorithm / Patrick E. Thomas
    RADPRE : a computational program for identification of differential mRNA processing including alternative polyadenylation / Denghui Xing and Qingshun Quinn Li
    Characterization of plant polyadenylation complexes by using tandem affinity purification / Hongwei Zhao, Xinfu Ye, and Qingshun Quinn Li
    In vitro analysis of cleavage and polyadenylation in Arabidopsis / Hongwei Zhao and Qingshun Quinn Li
    Production, purification, and assay of recombinant proteins for in vitro biochemical analyses of the plant polyadenylation complex / Stephen A. Bell and Balasubrahmanyam Addepalli
    Detection of disulfide linkage by chemical derivatization and mass spectrometry / Balasubrahmanyam Addepalli
    Transient expression using agroinfiltration to study polyadenylation in plants / Carol Von Lanken and Arthur G. Hunt
    3' RACE protocol to confirm polyadenylation sites / Liuyin Ma and Arthur G. Hunt
    Phage display library screening for identification of interacting protein partners / Balasubrahmanyam Addepalli, Suryadevara Rao, and Arthur G. Hunt
    Genome- wide determination of poly(A) site choice in plants / Pratap Kumar Pati, Liuyin Ma, and Arthur G. Hunt
    DNA/RNA hybrid primer mediated poly(A) tag library construction for illumina sequencing / Man Liu, Xiaohui Wu, and Qingshun Quinn Li
    Poly(A) tag library construction from 10 ng total RNA / Jingyi Cao and Qingshun Quinn Li
    Rapid, simple, and inexpensive method for the preparation of strand-specific RNA-seq libraries / Arthur G. Hunt
    Genome-wide analysis of distribution of RNA polymerase II isoforms using ChIP-Seq / Laura de Lorenzo.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Kazuichi Hayakawa, editor.
    Summary: This book reviews Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs) and Nitropolycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (NPAHs) contamination in the context of environmental pollution in Asia. It is comprised of the following sections: 1. Fundamental Chemistry and General Characteristics; 2. Analytical Methods; 3. Emission Source and Atmospheric Behavior; 4. Atmospheric Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons and PM2.5; 5. Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons in Marine Environments; 6. Metabolic Activation/Toxicities; and 7. Environmental Standards and Guidelines. This volume concentrates on the Far East due to the massive consumption of coal and petroleum in China, which has led to considerable levels of air pollution. High concentration of atmospheric PM2.5 in Beijing have been reported since January 2013 and exposure to such high concentrations may cause respiratory, cardiac and lung diseases. Gathering contributions from international experts, this volume provides a valuable reference guide for global researchers and students interested in learning from the East Asian experience.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Introduction
    Introduction
    Part 2. Physical and Chemical Characteristics
    Physical Parameters of PAHs/NPAHs/Oxidative Derivatives
    Chemistry of PAHs/NPAHs/Oxidative Derivatives (structures/name/numbering by IUPAC)
    Part 3. Analytical Method
    PAHs/NPAHs (including Application to Environmental Samples)
    PAHOHs/PAHQs (including application to biological samples)
    Part 4 Atmospheric Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons and PM2.5
    Sampling Methods for PM
    PAHs/NPAHs in PM (including formation of PAHs/NPAHs)
    Atmospheric Reaction: Formation and Degradation
    PAHs/NPAHs in Japan (Tokyo/Sagamihara, Hokkaido, Kanazawa, Kitakyushu, Muroran)
    PAHs/NPAHs in North-East Asia (China, Korea, Russia)
    Long-Range Transport of PAHs/NPAHs (Noto and Tateyakma)
    PAHs/NPAHs in South East Asia
    PAHs/NPAHs in Africa
    Emission Sources of PAHs/NPAHs (including source marker)
    Emission of PAHs/NPAHs from Diesel-Engine Vehicles
    Model Simulation of PAHs in North-East Asia
    Part 5. Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons in Marine
    PAHs Pollution caused by Oil Spill
    PAHs in North-West Japan Sea
    PAHs in South-East China Sea
    Part 6. Metabolic Activation/Toxicities
    Metabolic Activation
    Carcinogenicity/Mutagenicity
    Endocrine Disruption
    ROS Production
    Toxicities in Fish and Other Marine Organisms
    Part 7. Environmental Standards/Guidelines
    Environmental Standards/Guide Lines of PAHs/NPAHs (including environmental standards/guide lines in Japan and in the world.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Benjamin D. Cowley, Jr., John J. Bissler, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive guide to polycystic kidney disease captures the growing knowledge of this common, potentially-fatal and hereditary disease. The first two sections of the book provide an overview of PKD gene structures, mutations and pathophysiologic mechanisms. This is followed by chapters focused on PKD's clinical features, including renal and extrarenal manifestations, and appropriate management of patients. The final section covers current clinical trials and emerging therapies in PKD. Authored by experts in the field, this book provides the clinician and researcher with critical information on basic and translational science and clinical approaches in one concise resource.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Lubna Pal, editor.
    Summary: Presenting an overview of the current understanding of the pathophysiology of PCOS and a paradigm for the clinical evaluation and management of the disorder, Polycystic Ovary Syndrome is written in an easy to digest, concise format that, with bulleted key points introducing each chapter, is suitable for the trainee and the busy clinician. The breadth and depth of coverage of today's queries and controversies will be of particular interest to the specialist and researcher. An international group of leading experts addresses the varied etiologies of PCOS, comprehensively covering the contemporary treatment approaches and long-term implications of PCOS, a common yet poorly understood disorder. Chapters on treatment will be of particular relevance to the clinician and the trainee as they cover conventional therapies, lifestyle, and diet, as well as address emerging strategies such as the use of statins and surgery in PCOS management. Spanning the breadth of clinical presentations and morbidities related to the diagnosis of PCOS, Polycystic Ovary Syndrome is an exceptional resource for primary care providers, gynecologists, reproductive endocrinologists, and others involved in the care of these patients, and provides the essential tools to aid clinicians in initiating a timely diagnostic workup and appropriate interventions to address both the immediate and long-term sequelae related to PCOS.

    Contents:
    Diagnostic Criteria and Epidemiology of PCOS
    Pathophysiology of PCOS
    Managing PCOS
    Unique Considerations in PCOS
    Role of Surgery in PCOS Management
    Recognized Risks and Emerging Concepts.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Lubna Pal, David B. Seifer, editors.
    Summary: Now in a completely newly revised and expanded second edition, this comprehensive text presents the current state of the art in our understanding and management of polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), the most common hormonal disorder of reproductive aged women. The numerous bothersome symptoms of PCOS include menstrual irregularities, hirsutism, acne, scalp hair thinning, weigh excess and infertility; additionally, as they age, women with PCOS are at a higher risk for metabolic abnormalities such as diabetes and dyslipidemias, as well as for cardiovascular disease and even certain cancers. Despite improvements in our understanding of this condition, the exact cause/s of PCOS remain elusive; genetic, hormonal, metabolic and environmental underpinnings are all suggested as relevant. All chapters have been updated, with eight new chapters added across seven thematic sections. Part one discusses the epidemiology of PCOS in both adults and adolescents. Part two covers the pathophysiology of PCOS, including genetics, the hypothalamo-pituitary-ovarian and the hypothalamo-pituitary-adrenal axes, insulin resistance, inflammation, and obesity. The next three sections present the various management strategies, medical and surgical, for harnessing the symptomatology, including PCOS-related infertility; these chapters include added case material to provide real-world examples of the treatments in action and their efficacy. Part six covers the comorbidities that women with PCOS commonly encounter, such as issues of mental health, sleep disturbances, endometrial hyperplasia, and cancer, as well as examines the economic burden of PCOS. The final section discusses emerging concepts surrounding possible mechanisms and potential therapeutic approaches to PCOS, including angiogenic dysfunction, the role of vitamin D, future potential therapies to targeted AMH signaling. The closing chapter, by familiarizing the readers with the intergenerational implications of PCOS and by raising awareness of potential "ripple effects", aims at alerting the community on a need for vigilance as regards the health of PCOS progeny. With contributions from leaders in the field, Polycystic Ovary Syndrome, Second Edition remains the gold-standard text on this common medical condition and a valuable resource for the wide range of healthcare professionals engaged in caring for the women with PCOS.

    Contents:
    Part I. Epidemiology of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    1. Diagnostic Criteria and Epidemiology of PCOS
    2. Prevalence, Presentation, and Diagnosis of PCOS in Adolescents
    3. Polycystic Ovarian Syndrome: A Diagnosis of Exclusion
    Part II. Pathophysiology, Endocrine and Metabolic Milieus of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    4. Recent Advances in the Genetics of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    5. The Hypothalamo-Pituitary Axis in PCOS
    6. Ovarian Dysfunction in Polycystic Ovary Syndrome (PCOS)
    7. The Role of the Adrenal Glands in the Hyperandrogenism associated with the Polycystic Ovarian Syndrome
    8. Insulin Resistance and Lipotoxicity in PCOS: Causes and Consequences
    9. Obesity, Dysmetabolic and Proinflammatory Milieu of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    Part III. Management of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    10. Managing PCOS in the Adolescent
    11. Managing the PCOS-Related Symptoms of Hirsutism, Acne, and Female Pattern Hair Loss
    12. Role of Insulin-Sensitizing Drugs in PCOS Management
    13. Role of Statins & Resveratrol in PCOS Management
    14. Role of Lifestyle, Diet and Exercise in the Management of Polycystic Ovarian Syndrome
    Part IV. Management of Polycytic Ovary Syndrome Related Infertility
    15. Managing PCOS-Related Infertility: Ovulation Induction, In Vitro Fertilization, and In Vitro Maturation
    16. Considerations and Challenges for Pregnancy in Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    Part V. The Role of Surgery in the Management of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    17. Rationale and considerations for Bariatric Surgery
    18. Surgical Management of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome: A Contemporary Viewpoint on Place of Ovarian Surgery in PCOS Management
    Part VI. Health Risks and Burden of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    19. PCOS and its Association with Mental Health
    20. Obstructive Sleep Apnea in Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    21. Endometrial cancer and pre-cancer in polycystic ovary syndrome
    22. Economic Burden of Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    Part VII. Emerging Concepts in Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    23. The Role of Angiogenic Factor Dysregulation in the Pathogenesis of Polycystic Ovarian Syndrome
    24. Emerging Concepts: Role of Vitamin D Deficiency in the Pathogenesis of PCOS
    25. Anti-Mullerian Hormone Signaling relevance for pathophysiology of PCOS & implications for novel therapeutic approaches to managing ovulatory dysfunction of PCOS
    26. Newer Glucose Lowering Medications and Potential Role in Metabolic Management of PCOS
    27. Intergenerational Implications of PCOS.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Kikuo Iwabuchi.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of our current understanding of polyembryony in insects. The study of polyembronic insects has advanced considerably over the last several decades. The book shows the exciting potential of polyembryonic insects and their impact on life sciences. It describes the mechanisms of polyembryogenesis; tissue-compatible invasion of the host, which is the first case of compatible cellular interaction between phylogenetically distant organisms without rejection; the sex differences in defense; and the environmental regulation of caste structure. The first book devoted to polyembryony in insects, it draws on the author's research on polyembryonic wasps from 1990 to the present day, covering various topics such as polyembryogenesis in vitro, host-parasite interaction, sex differences in soldier function/humoral toxic factor, and the transcription analysis of polyembryogenesis. It is intended not only for researchers in the field of entomology, parasitology, ontogeny, reproductive biology, developmental biology, sociobiology, and evolutionary developmental biology (Evo-Devo), but also for postgraduate students in these fields.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Overview of polyembryony
    Chapter 2. Polyembryony in encyrtid parasitoids. Chapter 3. Host-polyembryonic parasitoid interactions
    Chapter 4. Sociality in polyembryonic parasitoids
    Chapter 5. Ecology and evolution of polyembryony. .
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Annamaria Colao, Marie-Lise Jaffrain-Rea, Albert Beckers, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive reference book is meant to support clinicians in the diagnosis and treatment of polyendocrine diseases and endocrine neoplastic syndromes. Although a large majority of endocrine diseases present as sporadic cases, an increasing proportion can be identified as part of a polyendocrine or systemic syndrome. These include autoimmune endocrine diseases, which may be part of autoimmune polyendocrine disorders (APS) or rare complex disorders such as POEMS (polyneuropathy, organomegaly, endocrinopathy, M-protein and skin changes) or IPEX (immune dysregulation, polyendocrinopathy, enteropathy, X-linked) syndromes. On the other hand, endocrine tumors may develop in a variety of clinical conditions, including multiple endocrine neoplasia (MEN) syndromes, syndromic diseases such as McCune Albright or Carneys complex, or peculiar familial associations such as pheochromocytoma/paraganglioma syndromes. The book discusses the significant advances that have been made in the clinical and genetic characterization of such entities, with major implications in terms of diagnosis and clinical management - with special attention to emerging syndromes, familial screening , multidisciplinarity and multimodal treatment. This volume is intended for clinicians, residents, specialists and physicians involved in the diagnosis and treatment of affected patients, including specialists in endocrinology, internal medicine, oncology , genetics and imaging.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Series Preface
    Volume Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Part I: Polyendocrine Disorders in Autoimmune and Systemic Diseases
    1 Autoimmune Polyendocrine Syndromes (APS) or Multiple Autoimmune Syndromes (MAS)
    Introduction
    Criteria for the Diagnosis of Autoimmune Diseases
    Classification of Autoimmune Diseases
    Natural History of Autoimmune Diseases
    Old Classification of APS
    New Classifications of APS/MAS
    Hypothesis on the Pathogenesis of APS/MAS
    APS/MAS-1
    Historical Features
    Frequency and Epidemiology Animal Models of APS/MAS-1
    Genetics of APS/MAS-1
    Main Clinical Manifestations of APS/MAS-1
    Chronic Mucocutaneous Candidiasis (CMC)
    Chronic Hypoparathyroidism (CH)
    Autoimmune Addisonś Disease (AAD)
    Minor Autoimmune Diseases
    Premature Ovarian Failure (POF)
    Autoimmune Gastritis (AG)
    Auto-Immune Thyroid Diseases (AITD)
    Type 1 Diabetes Mellitus (DM-1)
    Alopecia Areata (AA)
    Vitiligo
    Autoimmune Hepatitis (AH)
    Autoimmune Enteropathy (AE)
    Splenic Atrophy (SA)
    Pituitary Failure (PF)
    Renal Diseases
    Pulmonary Diseases (PD) Chronic Inflammatory Demyelinating Polyradiculoneuropathy (CIDP)
    Vasculitis
    Ectodermal Dystrophy
    Cancer
    Other Rare Diseases
    Total Number of Diseases in the Italian Cohort of APS/MAS-1
    Diseases of APS/MAS-1 and Related Autoantibodies
    New Diagnostic Criteria for APS/MAS-1
    How to Manage Patients with ASP/MAS-1
    When to Investigate for AIRE Gene Mutations
    Therapy
    APS/MAS-2
    Historical Features
    Animal Models
    Genetics of APS/MAS-2
    Frequency and Epidemiology of APS/MAS-2
    Main Clinical Manifestations of APS/MAS-2
    Autoimmune Addisonś Disease (AAD) Autoimmune Thyroid Diseases (AITD)
    Type 1 Diabetes Mellitus (DM-I)
    Combinations of the Three Major Diseases
    Incomplete or Subclinical Forms of APS/MAS-2
    Minor Autoimmune Diseases
    Premature Ovarian Failure (POF)
    Autoimmune Gastritis (AG)
    Vitiligo
    Alopecia
    Celiac Disease
    Other Autoimmune Diseases
    Autoimmune Diseases and Autoantibodies in APS/MAS-2
    Therapy
    APS/MAS-3
    General Considerations
    Frequency of APS/MAS-3
    A New Classification of APS/MAS-3
    Genetics of APS/MAS-3
    APS/MAS 3A: Association Between AITD and Other Autoimmune Endocrine Diseases AITD and DM-1
    AITD and Hirataś Disease (HD)
    AITD and Hypergonadotropic Hypogonadism (HH)
    AITD and Lymphocytic Adenohypophysitis (LAH)
    AITD and Lymphocytic Neurohypophysitis (LNH)
    AITD and Chronic Hypoparathyroidism (CH)
    AITD and Lymphocytic Mastopathy
    Incomplete APS/MAS 3A
    APS/MAS-3B: Association Between AITD and Other Autoimmune Diseases of the Digestive System
    AITD and Autoimmune Gastritis (AG)
    AITD and Pernicious Anemia (PA)
    AITD and Celiac Disease (CD)
    AITD and Autoimmune Hepatitis (AH)
    AITD and Primary Biliary Cholangitis (PBC)
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Clévio Nóbrega, Luís Pereira de Almeida, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a cutting-edge review of polyglutamine disorders. It primarily focuses on two main aspects: (1) the mechanisms underlying the pathologies' development and progression, and (2) the therapeutic strategies that are currently being explored to stop or delay disease progression. Polyglutamine (polyQ) disorders are a group of inherited neurodegenerative diseases with a fatal outcome that are caused by an abnormal expansion of a coding trinucleotide repeat (CAG), which is then translated in an abnormal protein with an elongated glutamine tract (Q). To date, nine polyQ disorders have been identified and described: dentatorubral-pallidoluysian atrophy (DRPLA); Huntington's disease (HD); spinal-bulbar muscular atrophy (SBMA); and six spinocerebellar ataxias (SCA 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 17). The genetic basis of polyQ disorders is well established and described, and despite important advances that have opened up the possibility of generating genetic models of the disease, the mechanisms that cause neuronal degeneration are still largely unknown and there is currently no treatment available for these disorders. Further, it is believed that the different polyQ may share some mechanisms and pathways contributing to neurodegeneration and disease progression.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Declan M. Devine, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to give readers a basic understanding of commonly used additive manufacturing techniques as well as the tools to fully utilise the strengths of additive manufacturing through the modelling and design phase all the way through to post processing. Guidelines for 3D printed biomedical implants are also provided. Current biomedical applications of 3D printing are discussed, including indirect applications in the rapid manufacture of prototype tooling and direct applications in the orthopaedics, cardiovascular, drug delivery, ear-nose-throat, and tissue engineering fields. Polymer-Based Additive Manufacturing: Biomedical Applications is an ideal resource for students, researchers, and those working in industry seeking to better understand the medical applications of additive manufacturing.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Polymer-Based Additive Manufacturing: Historical Developments, Process Types and Material Considerations; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Stereolithography (SLA); 1.3 Fused Filament Fabrication; 1.4 Selective Laser Sintering (SLS); 1.5 Freeformer; 1.6 InkJet Techniques; 1.7 Laminated Object Manufacturing; 1.8 Summary; References;
    Chapter 2: Design for Additive Manufacturing; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Design for Manufacturing and Assembly; 2.3 Advantages of Additive Manufacturing as a Production Process; 2.3.1 Product Digitisation and Rapid Prototyping 2.3.2 Topology Optimisation2.3.3 Geometrical Design Freedom at Low Cost; 2.3.4 Product Customisation; 2.3.5 Product Consolidation; 2.3.6 Lightweight Structures; 2.3.7 Integrated Functions and Internal Features; 2.3.8 Multiple Material Builds; 2.3.9 Optimisation of Supply Chain and Inventory; 2.4 Suitability of Additive Manufacturing; 2.5 Product Design Considerations; 2.5.1 Additive Technology Selection; 2.5.2 Material Selection; 2.5.3 Layer Height; 2.5.4 Support Structures; 2.5.5 Build Orientation; 2.5.6 Overhangs and Unsupported Features; 2.5.7 Hole Design 2.5.8 Hollow Sections and Escape Holes2.5.9 Thin Features; 2.5.10 Geometric Tolerances and Surface Quality; 2.6 Post-processing; 2.6.1 Material Removal; 2.6.2 Surface Finishing and Improving Geometrical Tolerances; 2.7 Product Consolidation and Weight Saving Using Additive Manufacturing; 2.8 Chapter Summary; References;
    Chapter 3: Mechanics Modeling of Additive Manufactured Polymers; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Nonlinear Modeling of Additive Manufactured Photopolymers; 3.2.1 Finite Strain Anisotropic Model for Plastics; 3.2.2 Anisotropic Hyperelastic Model for Elastomers 3.3 Modeling of Shape Memory Photopolymers3.3.1 Background of Shape Memory Polymers; 3.3.2 Model Descriptions; 3.3.3 Additive Manufactured Shape Memory Structures; 3.4 Summary; References;
    Chapter 4: Additive Manufacturing of Tooling for Use in Mass Production Processes; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Technologies; 4.2.1 Injection Moulding; 4.2.2 Blow Moulding; 4.3 Cooling; 4.3.1 Benefits of Optimised Cooling System Design; 4.3.2 Conformal Cooling; 4.4 Comparison of UV Photocurable AM Resin Tools to Metal AM Tools; 4.5 Benefits of Using Resin-Based Rapid Tools for Injection Moulding 4.6 Rapid Tooling: Case Studies4.6.1 Design Verification Through the Use of Resin-Based Tooling; 4.6.2 Resin-Based Rapid Tooling to Reduce Costs and Lead Times; 4.6.3 Ceramic-Polymer Tooling Inserts for Use in the Production of Electrical Switch Components; 4.6.4 Comparison of Resin-Based Printed Tooling to Metal Tooling; 4.6.5 Comparison of Service Life of Tools Using Different Resins; 4.6.6 Carbon Fibre-Reinforced Rapid Tooling Inserts; 4.7 Limitations of Polymer-Based Rapid Tooling; 4.8 Summary; References;
    Chapter 5: Current Market for Biomedical Implants; 5.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Carmen Scholz.
    Summary: "This book highlights dynamic developments in polymer synthesis, focusing on synthetic techniques that yield new biomedically relevant polymers, macromolecular super-structures, and biopolymers for surface modification. An added emphasis deals with characterizing these polymers through structure verification"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Characterization of polypeptides and polypeptoides
    methods and challenges / David Huesmann, Matthias Barz
    Poly(2-oxazoline): the structurally diverse biocompatibilizing polymer / Rodolphe Obeid
    Poly(2-oxazoline) polymers
    synthesis, characterization and applications in development of therapeutics / Randall W. Moreadith Tacey X. Viegas
    Polypeptoid polymers: synthesis, characterization and properties / Brandon A. Chan, Sunting Xuan, Ang Li, Jessica M. Simpson and Donghui Zhang
    Polyanhydrides: synthesis and characterization / Rohan Ghadi, Eameema Muntimadugu Wahid Khan, Abraham J. Domb
    New routes to tailor-made polyesters / Kazuki Fukushima, Tomoko Fujiwara
    Polyphosphoesters: an old biopolymer in a new light / Kristin N. Bauer, Hisaschi T.C. Tee, Evandro M. Alexandrino, Frederik R. Wurm
    Design and synthesis of amphiphilic vinyl copolymers with antimicrobial activity / Leanna L. Foster, Masato Mizutani, Yukari Oda, Edmund F. Palermo, Kenichi Kuroda
    Enhanced polyethylenimine-based delivery of nucleic acids / Jeff Sparks, Tooba Anwer, Khursheed Anwer
    Cationic graft copolymers for DNA engineering / Atsushi Maruyama, Naohiko Shimada
    Synthesis of (bio)degradable polymers by controlled/"living" radical polymerization" / Shannon R. Woodruff, Nicolay V. Tsarevsky
    Polymerized drugs
    a novel approach to controlled release systems / B. Demirdirek, J.J. Faig, R. Guliyev, K.E.Uhrich
    Structural design and synthesis of polymer prodrugs / Petr Chytil, Libor Kostka, Tomáš Etrych
    Polymeric ultrathin films for surface modifications / Henning Menzel
    Surface functionalization of biomaterials by poly(2-oxazoline)s / Giulia Morgese, Edmondo M. Benetti
    Biorelated polymer brushes by surface initiated reversible deactivation radical polymerization / Rueben Pfukwa, Lebohang Hlalele, Bert Klumperman
    Synthesis of amphiphilic invertible polymers for biomedical applications / A.M. Kohut, I.O. Hevus, S.A. Voronov, A.S. Voronov
    Bioadhesive polymers for drug delivery / Eenko Larrañeta, Ryan F. Donnelly.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Bhaskar Dasgupta, Christian Dejaco.
    Summary: Polymyalgia rheumatica (PMR) and giant cell arteritis (GCA) are related conditions occurring almost exclusively in older people. Polymyalgia rheumatica is considered to be the rheumatic disease that is subject to the widest variations of clinical practice, partially due to the considerable uncertainty related to diagnosis and outcomes. Giant cell arteritis, an inflammatory form of vasculitis, may present with a broad spectrum of clinical manifestations and can be complicated by acute ischemic events, the most serious of which is permanent blindness. Early recognition and adequate treatment of the condition is thus necessary to prevent patients' loss of independence and to maintain their quality of life. Part of the Oxford Rheumatology Library series, Polymyalgia Rheumatica and Giant Cell Arteritis provides quick and practically relevant information on several aspects of the diseases, particularly on diagnosis and management, with the ultimate aim of improving the patient's care. Chapters highlight current concepts of pathogenesis, recent advances of diagnostic and therapeutic approaches, and the ongoing research into the identification of new biomarkers and corticosteroid-sparing medications. Each chapter is complemented with key message boxes highlighting the most relevant information for clinical practice. This concise but comprehensive reference is particularly suited for rheumatologists, general practitioners, and other professionals caring for patients with PMR and GCA.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Jozef Rovensky, Burkhard Leeb, Viera Štvrtinová, Richard Imrich, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jian Li, Roger L. Nation, Keith S. Kaye, editors.
    Summary: It is our wish that readers discover the importance of polymyxin structure in relation to the mechanisms of activity, resistance and toxicity. We emphasized that reliable analytic methods for polymyxins are critical when investigating their pharmacokinetics (PK) and pharmacodynamics (PD). The complicated dose definitions and different pharmacopoeial standards have already compromised the safe use of polymyxins in patients. Therefore, informed by the latest pharmacological information, scientifically-based dosing recommendations have been proposed for intravenous polymyxins. Considering the PK/PD limitations and potential development of resistance, polymyxin combinations are encouraged; however, the current literature has not shown definite microbiological benefits, possibly because most clinical studies to date overlooked key PK/PD principles. Nephrotoxicity is the major dose-limiting factor and it is imperative to elucidate the mechanisms and develop novel approaches to minimize polymyxin-associated toxicities. In addition, the anti-endotoxin effect of polymyxins supports their clinical use to treat Gram-negative sepsis. Fortunately, the discovery of new-generation polymyxins with wider therapeutic windows has benefited from the latest achievements in polymyxin research.

    Contents:
    Overview
    Multidrug resistant Gram-negative pathogens: the urgent need for 'old' polymyxins
    Discovery, antibacterial spectrum and chemistry
    Mechanisms of antibacterial activity
    Mechanisms of resistance
    Bioanalysis and stability of polymyxins
    In vitro pharmacodynamics and PK/PD in animals
    Antibacterial susceptibility breakpoints
    Labeling of parenteral products of colistin methanesulfonate
    Meta-analysis of polymyxin use in patients
    Clinical use of colistin
    Clinical use of polymyxin B
    Pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, toxicodynamics and dosing recommendations
    Rational combinations with other antibiotics
    Toxicities in patients: management and mechanisms
    Antiendotoxin effect
    Discovery of novel polymyxin-like antibiotics
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Omkar, editor.
    Summary: Polyphagous pests are primarily agricultural pests that feed on economically important agricultural and horticultural crops of wide taxonomic diversity across the globe. They cause immense damage across different crop varieties owing to their generalist and voracious food habits. The advent of mono-crop culture in a huge area and the massive use of pesticides post green revolution have massively increased pest outbreaks all over the world. The Middle Eastern countries, African continent and even the Indian subcontinent is increasingly facing resurgences of polyphagus pests. This book compiles an inclusive account of polyphagous pests. It covers locusts, termites, aphids, whiteflies, mealybugs, scale insects, gram pod borer, fall armyworm, thrips, mites and rodents. The book discusses mode of spread, enormity of losses caused, mechanism of action, and also means to reduce the crop losses. It brings together a unique perspective for researchers to learn effective pest management practices across all crops. This book is a reference guide to researchers and also useful for academicians and students of entomology. .

    Contents:
    1 Locusts
    2 Termites
    3 Aphids
    4 Whiteflies
    5 Mealybugs
    6 Scale Insects
    7 Gram Pod Borer-(Helicoverpa armigera)
    8 Fall Armyworm-Spodoptera frugiperda
    9 Thrips
    10 Mites
    11 Rodents.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Ronald Ross Watson, Victor R. Preedy, Sherma Zibadi.
    Summary: Polyphenols in Human Health and Disease documents antioxidant actions of polyphenols in protection of cells and cell organelles, critical for understanding their health-promoting actions to help the dietary supplement industry. The book begins by describing the fundamentals of absorption, metabolism and bioavailability of polyphenols, as well as the effect of microbes on polyphenol structure and function and toxicity. It then examines the role of polyphenols in the treatment of chronic disease, including vascular and cardiac health, obesity and diabetes therapy, cancer treatment and prevention, and more. Explores neuronal protection by polyphenol metabolites and their application to medical care. Defines modulation of enzyme actions to help researchers see and study polyphenols' mechanisms of action, leading to clinical applications. Includes insights on polyphenols in brain and neurological functions to apply them to the wide range of aging diseases.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Polyphenols in chronic diseases and their mechanisms of action
    Volume 2. Polyphenols in the prevention and treatment of vascular and cardiac disease, and cancer.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Graham C. Burdge.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction: more than 50 years of research on polyunsaturated fatty acid metabolism
    2. Polyunsaturated fatty acid biosynthesis and metabolism in adult mammals
    3. Polyunsaturated fatty acid biosynthesis and metabolism in fish
    4. Polyunsaturated fatty acid biosynthesis and metabolism in agriculturally important species
    5. The biochemistry and regulation of fatty acid desaturases in animals
    6. Biochemistry and regulation of fatty acid desaturases in animals
    7. Polyunsaturated fatty acids: metabolism and nutritional requirements in pregnancy and infancy
    8. Metabolism of polyunstaurated fatty acids by cells of the immune system
    9. Polyunsaturated fatty biosynthesis and metabolism in reproductive tissues
    10. The effect of dietary modification on polyunsaturated fatty acid biosynthesis and metabolism
    11. Omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acid metabolism in vegetarians
    12. Genetic influences on polyunsaturated fatty acid biosynthesis and metabolism
    13. Interactions between plyunsaturated fatty acids and the epigenome
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Gregory K. Webster, J. Derek Jackson, Robert G. Bell.
    Contents:
    1. The modern pharmaceutical development challenge : BCS class II and IV drugs / Gregory K. Webster, Robert G. Bell, and J. Derek Jackson
    2. Solubility determinations for pharmaceutical API / Kofi Asare-Addo and Barbara R. Conway
    3. Use of surfactants in dissolution testing / Amit Gupta
    4. Intrinsic dissolution evaluation of poorly soluble drugs / Michele Georges Issa and Humberto Gomes Ferraz
    5. Oral delivery of poorly soluble drugs / Dev Prasad, Akash Jain, and Sudhakar Garad
    6. A staged approach to pharmaceutical dissolution testing / Gregory K. Webster, Xi Shao, and Paul D. Curry, Jr.
    7. Development and application of in vitro two-phase dissolution method for poorly water-soluble drugs / Ping Gao, Yi Shi, and Jonathan M. Miller
    8. The use of apparatus 3 in dissolution testing of poorly soluble drug formulations / G. Bryan Crist
    9. Use of apparatus 4 in dissolution testing, including sparingly and poorly soluble drugs / Rajan Jog, Geoffrey N. Grove, and Diane J. Burgess
    10. Dissolution of nanoparticle drug formulations / John Bullock
    11. Dissolution of lipid-based drug formulations / Stephen M. Cafiero
    12. Dissolution of stabilized amorphous drug formulations / Justin R. Hughey
    13. Dissolution of pharmaceutical suspensions / Beverly Nickerson, Michele Xuemei Guo, Kenneth J. Norris, and Ling Zhang
    14. Dissolution testing of poorly soluble drugs : "biorelevant dissolution" / Mark McAllister and Irena Tomaszewska
    15. Clinically relevant dissolution for low-solubility immediate-release products / Paul A. Dickinson, Talia Flanagan, David Holt, and Paul W. Stott
    16. The QbD approach to method development and validation for dissolution testing / Alger D. Salt
    17. Regulatory considerations in dissolution and drug release of BCS class II and IV compounds / Robert G. Bell and Laila Kott
    18. Dissolution of liquid-filled capsules based formulations / Rampurna Prasad Gullapalli
    19. Current and emerging non-compendial methods for dissolution testing / Namita Tipnis and Diane J. Burgess.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Print
    collected by the Engineering foundation, New York, Jan. l5, 1921.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    Q162 .E57 1924
    1
  • Print
    Patricia M. Schoon, Carolyn M. Porta.
    Summary: "Population-Based Public Health Clinical Manual: The Henry Street Model for Nurses has proven to be one of the most important public health texts for students and practitioners alike. Focused on developing a competent public health nursing practice in diverse settings, the core text builds on the Henry Street Consortium's framework of 13 competencIes for population-based, entry-level public health nursing (PHN). Full-color; 500 pages"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library [2024]
  • Digital
    Patricia M. Schoon, Carolyn M. Porta, Marjorie A. Schaffer.
    Contents:
    Introduction to public health nursing practice
    Evidence-based public health nursing practice
    Competency 1 : applies the public health nursing process to communities, systems, individuals, and families
    Competency 2 : utilizes basic epidemiological principles (the incidence, distribution, and control of disease in a population) in public health nursing practice
    Competency 3 : utilizes the principles and science of environmental health to promote safe and sustainable environments for individuals, families, systems, and communities
    Competency 4 : practices public health nursing within the auspices of the nurse practice act
    Competency 5 : works within the responsibility and authority of the governmental public health system
    Competency 6 : utilizes collaboration to achieve public health goals
    Competency 7 : effectively communicates with communities, systems, individuals, families, and colleagues
    Competency 8 : establishes and maintains caring relationships with communities, systems, individuals, and families
    Competency 9 : incorporates mental, physical, emotional, social, spiritual, and environmental aspects of health into assessment, planning, implementation, and evaluation
    Competency 10 : demonstrates nonjudgmental and unconditional acceptance of people different from self
    Competency 11 : shows evidence of commitment to social justice, the greater good, and the public health principles
    Competency 12 : demonstrates leadership in public health nursing with communities, systems, individuals, and families
    Putting it all together : what it means to be a public health nurse.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2018
  • Digital
    Wenshi Pan.
    Summary: This book offers a rare and detailed insight into 20 years of in-depth field research and conservation of the white-headed langur. It focuses on the white-headed langurs natural refuge, territory and home range, diets and foraging strategies, behavior modes, reproductive strategies, population, possible future viabilities, and their interaction with human society. From 1996 through 2016, a small research team led by Prof. Wenshi Pan from Peking University conducted studies and conservation efforts on the white-headed langur, one of the most endangered endemic species of China, in Guangxi and saved the species from extinction. With the help of conservationists efforts, the white-headed langur population in Nongguan Mountains, Guangxi, gradually increased from 105 to approximately 820.This book shares the success story of the unification of human development and wildlife conservation.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. The origin of white-headed langur
    Chapter 2. From ancient Java langur to white-headed langur today
    Chapter 3. White-headed langur is an endemic species of Chongzuo
    Chapter 4. A catastrophe for the white-headed langur
    Chapter 5. White-headed langurs habitats and natural refugees
    Chapter 6. White-Headed Langurs Homeland in Nongguan Mountains
    Chapter 7. White-headed langurs diets and forage behaviors
    Chapter 8. Restoration of the White-headed Langur Population in Nongguan Mountains
    Chapter 9. The behavior patterns of a white-headed langur family
    Chapter 10. The strategy of white-headed langur reproductive behaviors
    Chapter 11.The number of the white-headed langur in Nongguan Mountains
    Chapter 12. A Population Viability Analysis for the white-headed langur in Nongguan Mountains
    Chapter 13. How to conserve the white-headed langur population.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Om P. Rajora.
    Summary: Population genomics has revolutionized various disciplines of biology including population, evolutionary, ecological and conservation genetics, plant and animal breeding, human health, medicine and pharmacology by allowing to address novel and long-standing questions with unprecedented power and accuracy. It employs large-scale or genome-wide genetic information and bioinformatics to address various fundamental and applied aspects in biology and related disciplines, and provides a comprehensive genome-wide perspective and new insights that were not possible before. These advances have become possible due to the development of new and low-cost sequencing and genotyping technologies and novel statistical approaches and software, bioinformatics tools, and models. Population genomics is tremendously advancing our understanding the roles of evolutionary processes, such as mutation, genetic drift, gene flow, and natural selection, in shaping up genetic variation at individual loci and across the genome and populations; improving the assessment of population genetic parameters or processes such as adaptive evolution, effective population size, gene flow, admixture, inbreeding and outbreeding depression, demography, and biogeography; resolving evolutionary histories and phylogenetic relationships of extant, ancient and extinct species; understanding the genomic basis of fitness, adaptation, speciation, complex ecological and economically important traits, and disease and insect resistance; facilitating forensics, genetic medicine and pharmacology; delineating conservation genetic units; and understanding the genetic effects of resource management practices, and assisting conservation and sustainable management of genetic resources. This Population Genomics book discusses the concepts, approaches, applications and promises of population genomics in addressing most of the above fundamental and applied crucial aspects in a variety of organisms from microorganisms to humans. The book provides insights into a range of emerging population genomics topics including population epigenomics, landscape genomics, seascape genomics, paleogenomics, ecological and evolutionary genomics, biogeography, demography, speciation, admixture, colonization and invasion, genomic selection, and plant and animal domestication. This book fills a vacuum in the field and is expected to become a primary reference in Population Genomics world-wide. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Population Genomics: Advancing Understanding of Nature / Luikart, Gordon (et al.)
    Genotyping and Sequencing Technologies in Population Genetics and Genomics / Holliday, J.A. (et al.)
    Computational Tools for Population Genomics / Salojärvi, Jarkko
    Population and Evolutionary Genetic Inferences in the Whole-Genome Era: Software Challenges / Stamatakis, Alexandros
    Population Epigenomics: Advancing Understanding of Phenotypic Plasticity, Acclimation, Adaptation and Diseases / Moler, Ehren R.V. (et al.)
    Landscape Genomics: Understanding Relationships Between Environmental Heterogeneity and Genomic Characteristics of Populations / Balkenhol, Niko (et al.)
    Paleogenomics: Genome-Scale Analysis of Ancient DNA and Population and Evolutionary Genomic Inferences / Lan, Tianying (et al.)
    Genome-Wide Association Studies and Heritability Estimation in the Functional Genomics Era / Pino Del Carpio, Dunia (et al.)
    Genomic Selection / Jonas, Elisabeth (et al.)
    Population Genomics Provides Key Insights in Ecology and Evolution / Hohenlohe, Paul A. (et al.)
    Inferring Demographic History Using Genomic Data / Salmona, Jordi (et al.)
    Advancing Biogeography Through Population Genomics / Johnson, Jeremy S. (et al.)
    Adaptation Without Boundaries: Population Genomics in Marine Systems / Oleksiak, Marjorie F.
    Population Genomics of Speciation and Admixture / Nadeau, Nicola J. (et al.)
    Population Genomics of Colonization and Invasion / Welles, Shana R. (et al.)
    Population Genomics of Crop Domestication: Current State and Perspectives / Cubry, Philippe (et al.)
    Population Genomics of Animal Domestication and Breed Development / Wilkinson, Samantha (et al.)
    Population Genomics of Domestication and Breed Development in Canines in the Context of Cognitive, Social, Behavioral, and Disease Traits / Irizarry, Kristopher J.L. (et al.)
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Marjorie F. Oleksiak, Om P. Rajora, editors.
    Summary: Population genomics has provided unprecedented opportunities to unravel the mysteries of marine organisms in the oceans' depths. The world's oceans, which make up 70% of our planet, encompass diverse habitats and host numerous unexplored populations and species. Population genomics studies of marine organisms are rapidly emerging and have the potential to transform our understanding of marine populations, species, and ecosystems, providing insights into how these organisms are evolving and how they respond to different stimuli and environments. This knowledge is critical for understanding the fundamental aspects of marine life, how marine organisms will respond to environmental changes, and how we can better protect and preserve marine biodiversity and resources. This book brings together leading experts in the field to address critical aspects of fundamental and applied research in marine species and share their research and insights crucial for understanding marine ecosystem diversity and function. It also discusses the challenges, opportunities and future perspectives of marine population genomics.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    Marine Population Genomics: Challenges and Opportunities
    Part II: Marine Microbes
    Part III: Genetic Diversity, Population Structure, and Biogeography
    Population Genomics of Marine Zooplankton
    Population Genomics of Early-Splitting Lineages of Metazoans
    Population Genomics and Biogeography of the Northern Acorn Barnacle (Semibalanus balanoides) Using Pooled Sequencing Approaches
    Part IV: Seascape Genomics
    Seascape Genomics: Contextualizing Adaptive and Neutral Genomic Variation in the Ocean Environment
    Part V: Adaptation, Acclimation, and Speciation
    Clinal Adaptation in the Marine Environment
    The Population Genomics of Parallel Adaptation: Lessons from Threespine Stickleback
    Mechanisms of Adaptive Divergence and Speciation in Littorina saxatilis: Integrating Knowledge from Ecology and Genetics with New Data Emerging from Genomic Studies
    Ecological Speciation in Corals
    Environmental Epigenomics and Its Applications in Marine Organisms
    Part VI: Protection, Conservation, and Management of Marine Organisms
    Marine Invasion Genomics: Revealing Ecological and Evolutionary Consequences of Biological Invasions
    Population Genomics Applied to Fishery Management and Conservation
    Marine Conservation and Marine Protected Areas
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Martin F. Polz, Om P. Rajora, editors.
    Summary: Population genomics is a rapidly emerging field that has the potential to transform our understanding of how evolutionary forces shape genomic diversity among microbes. There have already been considerable advances in understanding gene flow and spread of adaptive traits, and in linking epidemiology with evolutionary biology. The current challenge is to find unifying evolutionary principles for organisms that display a wide range of reproductive biology - from highly clonal to promiscuous - and for which the vast majority have eluded cultivation. This requires interdisciplinary approaches that incorporate novel computational tools, testing of existing and novel population genetic models, and creative new ways of linking genetic diversity to ecological factors. This pioneering book will discuss the advances made and promises of population genomics in microorganisms, outlining some of the key theoretical and practical challenges for microbial population genomics, including defining and identifying populations, genomics-based reverse ecology and building appropriate tools to understand microbes in a variety of complex environments.

    Contents:
    Preface I. Concepts and perspectives
    1. Microbial Population Genomics Perspectives and Promises Martin Polz, MITOm Rajora, Umiversity of New Brunswick
    2. Population Genomics and Microbial Species Concept Jesse Shapiro, University of Montreal
    3. Population Genomics and Metagenomics Jill Banfield, University of California Berkeley Vincent Denef, University of Michigan
    4. Reverse Ecology Martin Polz, MIT
    5. Genomic and Computational Methods in Microbial Population Genomics Xavier Didelot, Imperial College Daniel Falush, Swansea University Eric Alm, MIT II. Population Genomics of Bacteria
    6. Population Genomics of Plant Pathogenic Bacteria David Guttman, University of Toronto Boris Vinatzer, Virginia Tech
    7. Population Genomics of Human Pathogenic Bacteria Bill Hanage, Harvard School of Public Health Ed Feil, University of Bath Nick Croucher, Imperial College
    8. Population Genomics of Symbiotic Bacteria Nancy Moran, University of Texas, Austin
    9. Population Genomics of Dairy Industrial Bacteria Paul W. O'Toole, University College, Cork Paola Cremonesi, NRC, Italy
    10. Population Genomics of Environmental Bacteria and Archaea Rachel Whitaker, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign Daniel Buckley, Cornell University Thane Papke, University of Connecticut Francisco Rodriguez-Valera, University Miguel Hernandez III. Population Genomics of Fungi
    11. Population Genomics of Plant Pathogenic Fungi Michael G. Milgroom, Cornell University
    12. Population Genomics of Human Pathogenic Fungi Bruce McDonald, ETH Zurich Institute of Integrative Biology
    13. Population Genomics and Yeast Biodiversity and Evolution Cletus P Kurtzman, USDA AR Gianni Liti, Institute of Genetics, University of Nottingham Mathew R. Goddard, University of Auckland, University of Lincoln
    14. Population Genomics of Domestication in Yeast Edward J. Louis, Institute of Genetics, University of Nottingham; José Paulo Sampaio, Universidade Nova de Lisboa, Caparica, Portugal IV. Population Genomics of Viruses
    15. Population Genomics of Human Viruses Richard A. Neher, Max Planck Institute of Developmental BiologyFrancois Balloux, University of Cambridge
    16. Population Genomics of Plant Viruses Zhongguo Xiong, University of ArizonaH. C. Prasanna, Indian Institute of Vegetable Research
    17. Population Genomics of Bacterial Viruses Mathew Sullivan, University of Ohio
    18. Population Genomics of Insect Viruses Robert S. Cornman, Bee Research Lab, USDA-ARS Clement Gilbert, Universite de Poitiers Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Jennifer L. Hefner, Timothy R. Huerta, Ann Scheck McAlearney, the Ohio State University, Columbus, OH, USA.
    Summary: Aspects of health care organizations discussed in the volume include the PCMH, ACOs, integration with the public health and mental health systems, hospital-physician alignment, and resource planning.

    Contents:
    Strategic re-design of team-based patient-focused healthcare services / Denise C. Tahara, Richard P. Green
    Community-level sociodemographic characteristics and patient-centered medical home / Larry R. Hearld, Kristine R. Hearld, Tory H. Hogan
    Engaging the healthcare team through operations councils : strategies to improve population health from within / Susan Moffatt-Bruce [and others]
    Using teams to implement personalized health care across a multi-site breast cancer network / Sarah Lewis [and others]
    A business planning model to identify new safety net clinic locations / James Langabeer II [and others]
    Answering the call for integrating population health : insights from health system executives / Erik Carlton
    Population health management in integrated physical and mental health care / Cynthia J. Sieck, Thomas Wickizer, Laurel Geist
    Population, community and public health : measuring the benefits / Jason S. Turner, Connie Evashwick
    The evolving model of health care in the United States : system change is not enough / Randell Wexler
    Payment models to support population health management / Timothy R. Huerta, Jennifer L. Hefner, Ann Scheck McAlearney.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2014
  • Digital
    Katherine M. Keyes and Sandro Galea.
    Summary: 'Population Health Science' formalizes an emerging discipline at the crossroads of social and medical sciences, demography, and economics-an emerging approach to population studies that represents a seismic shift in how traditional health sciences measure and observe health events.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital/Print
    prepared by the Agency for International Development, Bureau for Technical Assistance, Office of Population.
    Digital Access Google Books Oct. 1970
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N236 .U60 1970
    1
  • Digital
    Michelle Falkenbach, Scott L. Greer, editors.
    Summary: This contributed volume is the first in-depth analysis of the health policies of populist radical right (PRR) parties worldwide and their actual involvement in health care. The prominence of authoritarian, nationalistic, and populist parties is expanding steadily. However, it is often difficult to discern what kind of policies they really stand for, particularly with regard to the welfare state and public health, where research remains sparse. This book fills this critical gap. The text connects PRR parties and leaders with actual health and social policy effects in Eastern and Western Europe as well as in the United States, Brazil, and the Philippines. The chapters highlight ten individual country case studies authored by young scholars and professors with political science and health experts: The Austrian Freedom Party in Government: A Threat to Public Health? The Alternative for Germany (AfD) and Health Policy: Normalization or Containment of Populist Radical Right Tendencies? Populist Radical Right Influence on Health Policy in the Netherlands: The Case of the Party for Freedom (PVV) The Evolution of the Populist Radical Right and Their Impact on Health in Italy The Populist Radical Right and Health in Hungary Is the Polish 'Law and Justice' (PiS) a Typical Populist Radical Right Party? A Health Policy Perspective The Case of the United Kingdom Independence Party (UKIP) Rhetoric and Reality in the United States of America: Trump, Populism, and Health Policy Ruling Through Chaos in Brazil: Bolsonaro's Authoritarian Agenda for Public Health An Authoritarian Reaction to COVID-19 in the Philippines: A Strong Commitment to Universal Health Care Combined with Violent Securitization The Populist Radical Right and Health is exceptionally timely and essential reading for political science and health colleagues researching and writing about PRR parties and leaders; students and faculty in public health, health and social policy, and political science; and anyone interested in learning more about this topic.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Abbreviations
    Contents
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    About the Editors and Contributors
    Contributors
    Introduction
    Introduction
    Populism and Health: Identifying What We Know
    Populism
    Populist Radical Right
    Populist Radical Right Parties and the Mainstream
    Populist Radical Right Politics and Health Policy
    The Coronavirus Test
    The Book in Brief
    References
    The Austrian Freedom Party in Government: A Threat to Public Health?
    Introduction
    History of the FPÖ From Welfare Populism to Welfare Chauvinism
    The FPÖ and Their Social Policies
    Haider (2000-2005)
    Strache (2017-2019)
    The FPÖ's Role in Shaping Health Policies
    The Social Insurance Merger
    Private Hospitals Financing Fund
    A New E-Card
    The Austrian Smoking Ban
    The FPÖ and the Coronavirus
    Conclusion
    References
    The Alternative for Germany (AfD) and Health Policy: Normalization or Containment of Populist Radical Right Tendencies?
    Introduction
    The History of the AfD
    The AfD as a PRR Party
    The AfD and Its Response to the Early COVID-19 Crisis The Health Policies of the AfD
    Conclusion
    References
    Populist Radical Right Influence on Health Policy in the Netherlands: The Case of the Party for Freedom (PVV)
    Introduction
    History of the PVV
    The Influence of the PVV on Dutch Health Policy
    Elderly Care
    Curative Care
    Public Health
    The PVV in Opposition
    The Dutch PRR and the COVID-19 Pandemic
    Conclusion
    References
    The Evolution of the Populist Radical Right and Their Impact on Health in Italy
    Introduction
    History of the Lega Nord
    From Bossi to Salvini
    PRR Lega?
    Health Policies of the Lega Berlusconi Government II and III (2001-2006)
    Berlusconi IV Government (2008-2011)
    Conte I Government (2018-2019)
    The Corona Pandemic
    Conclusion
    References
    The Populist Radical Right and Health in Hungary
    Introduction
    Fidesz's Turn to PRR
    Welfare Reforms Impacting Health
    Health Policies
    COVID-19 Response
    Conclusion
    References
    Is the Polish 'Law and Justice' (PiS) a Typical Populist Radical Right Party? A Health Policy Perspective
    Introduction
    PiS and PRR Ideology
    Health Policy Reforms Under PiS Since 2015
    Government's Response to COVID-19 Discussion
    Conclusion
    References
    The Case of the United Kingdom Independence Party (UKIP)
    Introduction
    The Rise of UKIP
    UKIP and Radical Right Populism
    Beyond Euroscepticism: The Influence of PRR Politics on UK Health Policy
    The COVID Crisis and Populism in the United Kingdom
    Conclusion
    References
    Rhetoric and Reality in the United States of America: Trump, Populism and Health Policy
    Introduction
    PRR, Donald Trump and the United States
    Trump and Traditional Conservative Health Policy
    Welfare Chauvinistic Policies
    Liberal Chauvinistic Policies
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Alejandro P. Heuck.
    Contents:
    X-ray crystallography shines a light on pore-forming toxins / Bronte A. Johnstone, Michelle P. Christie, Craig J. Morton, and Michael W. Parker
    How protein engineering has revealed the molecular mechanisms of pore-forming toxins / Jordan C. Evans and Rodney K. Tweten
    Electron microscopy as a critical tool in the determination of pore forming mechanisms in proteins / Robert J.C. Gilbert
    Going full circle : Determining the structures of complement component 9 / Bradley A. Spicer and Michelle A. Dunstone
    Preparation of Clostridium perfringens binary iota-toxin pore complex for structural analysis using cryo-EM / Tomohito Yamada and Hideaki Tsuge
    AFM imaging of pore forming proteins / Adrian W. Hodel, Katharine Hammond, and Bart W. Hoogenboom
    High-speed atomic force microscopy to study pore-forming proteins / Fang Jiao, Yi Ruan, and Simon Scheuring
    The use of giant unilamellar vesicles to study functional properties of pore-forming toxins / Saša Aden, Tina Snoj, and Gregor Anderluh
    Preparation and utility of asymmetric lipid vesicles for studies of perfringolysin O-lipid interactions / Shinako Kakuda, Bingchen Li, and Erwin London
    Molecular basis for the activation of actinoporins by lipids / Jose M.M. Caaveiro and Kouhei Tsumoto
    Biophysical approaches to study actinoporin-lipid interactions / Juan Palacios-Ortega, Esperanza Rivera-de-Torre, José G. Gavilanes, J. Peter Slotte, Álvaro Martínez-del-Pozo, and Sara García-Linares
    Conformational switching, refolding and membrane insertion of the diphtheria toxin translocation domain / Alexey S. Ladokhin, Alexander Kyrychenko, Mykola V. Rodnin, and Victor Vasquez-Montes
    Cysteine-based crosslinking approach for characterization of oligomeric pore-forming proteins in the mitochondrial membranes / Zhi Zhang, Bo Huang, Xuejun C. Zhang, and Jialing Lin
    Topological analysis of type 3 secretion translocons in native membranes / Yuzhou Tang, Hanling Guo, Arjan J. Vermeulen, and Alejandro P. Heuck
    Single-molecule imaging of pore-forming toxin dynamics in droplet interface bilayers / Christopher Parperis and Mark I. Wallace
    Using multiscale molecular dynamics simulations to obtain insights into pore forming toxin mechanisms / Rajat Desikan, Amit Behera, Prabal K. Maiti, and K. Ganapathy Ayappa
    The use of pore-forming toxins to image lipids and lipid domains / Nario Tomishige, Motohide Murate, Pascal Didier, Ludovic Richert, Yves Mély, and Toshihide Kobayashi
    The use of anthrolysin O and ostreolysin A to study cholesterol in cell membranes / Kristen A. Johnson and Arun Radhakrishnan
    Strategies for enzymological studies and measurements of biological molecules with the cytolysin A nanopore / Carsten Wloka, Nicole S. Galenkamp, Nieck J. van der Heide, Florian L.R. Lucas, and Giovanni Maglia
    Pore-forming toxins as tools for polymer analytics : From sizing to sequencing / Fabien Piguet, Tobias Ensslen, Mazdak A. Bakshloo, Monasadat Talarimoghari, Hadjer Ouldali, Gerhard Baaken, Ekaterina Zaitseva, Manuela Pastoriza-Gallego, Jan C. Behrends, and Abdelghani Oukhaled
    Use of pore-forming toxins to study co-translocational protein folding / Antonio De la Torre-Cabrera and David Rodriguez-Larrea.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    Roland Hennes, Gisela Müller, editors.
    Summary: Comprehensive and professional care for people with ports! This book offers nurses and medical professionals comprehensive knowledge for the care of people with ports. Starting with the selection and indication for port placement, through dressing changes and hygiene guidelines, to everyday handling - here you will find expert knowledge at the highest level! The different requirements in inpatient and outpatient settings are also taken into account. The authors come from different professional groups and show that good interprofessional cooperation is essential for successful, evidence-based treatment of patients with a port. Here's how to improve your patients' quality of life! This book is a translation of the original German 1st edition Portpflege by Roland Hennes and Gisela Muller, published by Springer-Verlag GmbH Germany, part of Springer Nature in 2020. The translation was done with the help of artificial intelligence (machine translation by the service DeepL.com). A subsequent human revision was done primarily in terms of content, so that the book will read stylistically differently from a conventional translation. Springer Nature works continuously to further the development of tools for the production of books and on the related technologies to support the authors. The Content Basics of port surgery and management of complications Wound care and dressing changes Hygiene standards and legal aspects of care Special situations: Children, ambulatory care The Editors Roland Hennes, MD, Head of the Heidelberg Port Center-Superior Physician, Department of General, Visceral and Transplant Surgery, Heidelberg University Hospital. Gisela Muller, Head of Nursing at the Surgical University Hospital Heidelberg.

    Contents:
    Interdisciplinary cooperation for the treatment of port patients
    Indications for a port catheter system, basics of port surgery and management of complications
    Hygiene standards for the treatment of port patients
    Legal aspects of port care
    Expert standard for port care
    Wound care and dressing changes
    Intra- and postoperative care after port implantation
    Special features of port care in oncological patients
    Port care in outpatient care
    Special patient groups. Intra- and postoperative care after port implantation
    Special features of port care for oncological patients
    Port care in outpatient care
    Special patient groups
    Port care in infants and children
    Documentation Patient counseling and information
    Current evidence of port care.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Egondu R. Onyejekwe, Jon Rokne, Cory L. Hill, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Larry D. Florman, M.D.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Mentors/Advisors
    Chapter 3. The Transition?Part 1
    Chapter 4. Attire
    Chapter 5. The Little Black Book
    Chapter 6. Communications
    Chapter 7. Teaching and Learning
    Chapter 8. Surgery Suite Etiquette
    Chapter 9. The Clinics
    Chapter 10. Rounds
    Chapter 11. The Difficult
    Chapter 12. Documentation
    Chapter 13. Presentations
    Chapter 14. Mortality and Morbidity Conference
    Chapter 15. On Call
    Chapter 16. Family and Friends
    Chapter 17. Your Health
    Chapter 18. Medical?Legal
    Chapter 19 The System
    Chapter 20. The Boards
    Chapter 21 The 80-Hour Week
    Chapter 22. Research
    Chapter 23. The Interview
    Chapter 24. HIPAA
    Chapter 25. Social Media
    Chapter 26. Electronic Medical Records
    Chapter 27. Insurance, Managed Care
    Chapter 28. Vacations
    Chapter 29. Finances
    Chapter 30. Assorted Affairs
    Chapter 31. The Transition?Part 2
    Chapter 32. The Mentor?s Wrap-Up
    Chapter 33. Epilogue
    Appendix A. Commonly Used Web-Based Sites
    Appendix B. Books of Interest. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Wael E.A. Saad.
    Contents:
    Pathogenesis and diagnosis
    Medical, endoscopic, percutaneous, and surgical management
    Endovascular management: shunts and splenic embolization
    Percutaneous and endovascular management: transvenous obliteration.
  • Digital
    Roberto de Franchis, editor.
    Summary: This book will be an excellent tool for practitioners seeking an update on the latest developments in the diagnosis and management of cirrhosis and portal hypertension. Among the topics addressed are risk stratification, prognosis, screening and surveillance, impact of etiological and antifibrotic therapy, the gut microbiome and cirrhosis, prevention of decompensation/further decompensation, management of the acute bleeding episode, controversies in pediatrics, and vascular diseases of the liver in cirrhotic and noncirrhotic portal hypertension. The book is a compilation of lectures and important consensus statements from the Sixth Baveno International Consensus Workshop on Portal Hypertension, the most recent of a series of workshops held every 5 years for hepatologists with an interest in the field. Portal Hypertension VI will serve as a reference book for clinical and research fellows in Gastroenterology and Hepatology and should inspire new research projects in the areas identified as promising by the experts of the Baveno VI Faculty.

    Contents:
    Session 1
    Risk stratification and prognosis
    Session 2
    Screening and surveillance: invasive and noninvasive methods
    Session 3
    Changing scenarios I: Impact of etiological therapy for cirrhosis and of anti-fibrotic therapy on portal hypertension
    Session 4
    The gut microbiome and cirrhosis
    Session 5
    Changing scenarios II: What to do after successful cure of the etiologic factor?
    Session 6
    Management of the acute bleeding episode
    Session 7
    Controversies and challenges in Pediatrics
    Session 8
    Prevention of further decompensation (ascites, spontaneous bacterial peritonitis, hepatorenal syndrome, hepatic encephalopathy)
    Session 9 Vascular diseases of the liver in cirrhotic and non-cirrhotic portal hypertension: coagulation, anti-coagulation, anti-platelet drugs.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Roberto de Franchis, editor.
    Summary: This book, the seventh in a series of proceedings volumes that began in 1995, reviews the latest developments in the diagnosis and management of cirrhosis and portal hypertension. It addresses a broad range of topics, including: risk stratification, HVPG, non-invasive surrogates for cACLD, CSPH, varices, progression and regression of cirrhosis, impact of etiological therapy on cirrhosis, impact of non-etiological novel therapies on cirrhosis, prevention of first/further decompensation, acute variceal hemorrhage, and Vascular Liver Disorders in Cirrhosis (VALDIG). The book is a compilation of lectures and important consensus statements from the Seventh Baveno International Consensus Workshop on Portal Hypertension, the latest in a series of workshops held every five years for hepatologists with an interest in the field. Portal Hypertension VII offers a valuable reference guide for clinical and research fellows in Gastroenterology and Hepatology and will inspire new research projects in the promising areas identified by the experts of the Baveno VII Faculty.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Thomas D. Boyer, MD (1943-2018)-A Tribute
    Memories of Prof Andrew K. Burroughs, MD (1953-2014)
    Tribute to Roberto J. Groszmann
    Tribute to Prof Luigi Pagliaro (1931-2020)
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Introductory Lectures
    1: Introduction: Baveno I to Baveno VII ... and Beyond
    Baveno I to VI
    Attendance at the Baveno Workshops
    Publications Derived from the Baveno Workshops
    Impact of the Baveno Consensus on the Medical Literature
    Validation of the Baveno Definitions and Recommendations
    Beyond Baveno VII, the Baveno Cooperation The Baveno I-VII Workshops Were a Concerted Effort of the Following
    Speakers and Chairpersons
    References
    2: New Concepts in Risk Stratification
    Introduction
    Risk Prediction and Probabilistic Thinking
    Diagnosis as a Risk Prediction Problem
    Decision Thresholds and Risk Stratification
    Risk Prediction and the Interpretation of Treatment Effects in Randomized Controlled Trials
    Conclusion
    References
    3: Clinical Stages and Ordinal Outcomes in Portal Hypertension
    Background
    Definition and Incidence of Decompensation
    Clinical Stages of Cirrhosis Ordinal Outcomes
    Examples of Application of an Ordinal Outcome in Compensated Cirrhosis
    Ordinal Outcomes for Randomized Clinical Trials in Cirrhosis
    Sample Size Estimation with Ordinal Compared to Binary Outcomes
    Using Ordinal Outcomes in Portal Hypertension
    Conclusions
    References
    4: Lifestyle and Genetic Modifiers of Liver Disease Progression
    Lifestyle Modifiers of Liver Disease Progression
    Unhealthy Lifestyle
    Alcohol
    Obesity
    Malnutrition, Sarcopenia, and Frailty
    Cigarette Smoke
    Healthy Lifestyle-Protective Factors
    Physical Activity and Exercise Coffee Consumption and Mediterranean Diet
    Genetic Modifiers of Progression of cACLD
    Individual Genetic Variants
    PNPA3 and HSD17B13
    SERPINA1/Alpha-1 Antitrypsin Deficiency
    NOD2
    NR1H4/FXR
    Conclusions and Outlook
    References
    Part II: HVPG as a Gold Standard
    5: HVPG as a Gold Standard: Accuracy Is Essential
    Procedure Technique
    Pressure Measurements and Data Recording
    Technical Aspects
    Diagnosis of Clinically Significant Portal Hypertension (CSPH) and Prediction of Main Outcomes in Patients with Different Etiologies of Cirrhosis
    Variceal Hemorrhage Hepatocellular Carcinoma (HCC)
    Survival
    Assessment of HVPG in Patients Receiving NSBBs for Prevention of Variceal Hemorrhage and Decompensation
    HVPG Predicts Risk of Decompensation and Mortality after Hepatic and Non-hepatic Surgery
    Patients with Cirrhosis and HCC: Candidates for Hepatic Resection
    Patients with Cirrhosis Who Undergo Extrahepatic Surgery
    PPG in the Setting of Tips
    PPG Measurement
    Anatomic Location for PPG Measurement
    Optimal PPG Threshold for Portal Hypertensive Bleeding/Ascites
    PPG Thresholds in Overshunting Adverse Events
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Xingshun Qi, Weifen Xie, editors.
    Summary: This book covers major knowledge and recent advance regarding portal vein thrombosis. Portal vein thrombosis, a potentially life-threatening vascular disorder of the liver, refers to the development of thrombosis within main portal vein trunk and intrahepatic portal vein branches with or without splenic and mesenteric veins. In patients with acute portal vein thrombosis, if a thrombus extends into the mesenteric veins, there is a risk of intestinal ischemia and necrosis; in patients with chronic portal vein thrombosis, portal hypertension and its complications develop. The book includes chapters on the topics of epidemiology, risk factors, diagnosis, and prognostic impact, pharmacological, interventional with surgical treatment of this disease. Concepts of early diagnosis of portal vein thrombosis and extensive assessment of its severity are fully introduced. The book is beneficial for physicians to establish standard treatment strategy, for researchers to launch creative clinical and experimental studies.

    Contents:
    1 Anatomy of Portal Vein System
    2 Epidemiology of Portal Vein Thrombosis
    3 Risk factors for portal vein thrombosis
    4 Imaging of Portal Vein Thrombosis
    5 Classification of Non-malignant Portal Vein Thrombosis
    6 Impact of Non-malignant Portal Vein Thrombosis on Outcomes of Liver Cirrhosis
    7 Anticoagulation for Nontumoral Portal Vein Thrombosis
    8 Thrombolysis for Non-malignant Portal Vein Thrombosis
    9 Transjugular Intrahepatic Portosystemic Shunt for Non-malignant Portal Vein Thrombosis
    10 Liver Transplantation in the Setting of Non-Malignant Portal Vein Thrombosis
    11 Management Of Portal Vein Thrombosis In Liver Cancer
    12 Future Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Grace D. Li.
    Summary: "Ocean's Eleven meets The Farewell in this lush, lyrical heist novel inspired by the true story of Chinese art vanishing from Western museums, about diaspora, the colonization of art, and the complexity of the Chinese American identity. History is told by the conquerors. Across the Western world, museums display the spoils of war, of conquest, of colonialism: priceless pieces of art looted from other countries, kept even now. Will Chen plans to steal them back. A senior at Harvard, Will fits comfortably in his carefully curated roles: a perfect student, an art history major and sometimes artist, the eldest son who has always been his parents' American Dream. But when a mysterious Chinese benefactor reaches out with an impossible--and illegal--job offer, Will finds himself something else as well: the leader of a heist to steal back five priceless Chinese sculptures, looted from Beijing centuries ago. His crew is every heist archetype one can imag­ine--or at least, the closest he can get. A con artist: Irene Chen, a public policy major at Duke who can talk her way out of anything. A thief: Daniel Liang, a pre-med student with steady hands just as capable of lockpicking as suturing. A getaway driver: Lily Wu, an engineering major who races cars in her free time. A hacker: Alex Huang, an MIT dropout turned Silicon Valley software engineer. Each member of his crew has their own complicated relationship with China and the identity they've cultivated as Chinese Americans, but when Will asks, none of them can turn him down. Because if they succeed? They earn fifty million dollars--and a chance to make history. But if they fail, it will mean not just the loss of everything they've dreamed for themselves but yet another thwarted at­tempt to take back what colonialism has stolen"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    PS3612.I136 P67 2022
    2
  • Digital
    Donata Villani, Maria Vittoria Meraviglia, editors ; foreword by Adriano Ferrari.
    Summary: This book provides clear guidance on the prevention, early diagnosis, and treatment of positional plagiocephaly. Information is first presented on classification, epidemiology, and etiopathogenesis. Diagnosis is then explained in detail, covering the significance of anamnestic data, physical examination, differential diagnosis, instrumental examinations, and anthropometric measurements. Preventive measures such as 'tummy time' and physiotherapy are described, and the role of orthoses, osteopathy, and surgery in treatment is closely examined. The closing chapter addresses prognosis and complications. Positional plagiocephaly is not only a "cosmetic" problem but can cause facial and mandibular asymmetry, visual disturbances, and cognitive and psychomotor impairment, yet when correctly treated it usually resolves by 6-7 years of age. This book will be an ideal aid for pediatricians, neurosurgeons,maxillo-facial surgeons, orthopedic physicians, physiotherapists, and for all involved in preventing and managing the condition.

    Contents:
    1 Historical notes
    2 Definition and classification
    3 Epidemiology
    4 Etiology and pathogenesis
    5 Diagnosis and clinical evaluation
    6 Prevention and physiotherapic treatment
    7 Osteopathic considerations
    8 Surgical indications and treatment for cranial occipital anomalies
    9 Outcomes.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Nico de Vries, Madeline Ravesloot, J. Peter van Maanen, editors.
    Summary: Obstructive Sleep Apnea (OSA) is the most prevalent sleep disordered breathing disorder. It has become apparent that in more than half the patients with OSA, the frequency and duration of apneas are influenced by body position. To treat patients with Position Dependent OSA (POSA), positional therapy can be considered for preventing patients from sleeping in the worst sleeping position. Recently, treatment of POSA has advanced dramatically with the introduction of a new generation of positional therapy. Positional Therapy in Obstructive Sleep Apnea presents improved OSA diagnostic methods and the tools needed to implement positional therapy in clinical practice. This includes patient work-up, positional therapy with or without other treatments, consequences of guidelines, and future developments. Clinicians, students and researchers will find this comprehensive guide to be an invaluable resource for evaluating and treating sleep breathing disorders.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction.- 2. OSA, the magnitude of the problem 3
    Compliance of various forms of OSA treatment
    4. Prevalence of positional obstructive sleep apnea in patients undergoing polysomnography and the effect of sleep stage
    5 The contribution of head position to the apnea hypopnea index in patients with position dependent obstructive sleep apnea
    6. Influence of sleep position on the transition of mild to moderate and severe OSA
    7. Clinical characteristics of positional obstructive sleep apnea among Asians.- 8. Positional therapy: left lateral decubitus position versus right lateral decubitus position
    9. Drug Induced Sleep Endoscopy and Sleep Position.- 10. Changes in site of obstruction in obstructive sleep apnea patients according to sleep position.- 11. Towards a clinical classification system (APOC) for positional dependent obstructive sleep apnea
    12. Retrospective cohort analysis with the APOC system.- 13. Correlation between calculated/predicted and actual AHI after positional therapy.- 14. Influence of sleep position on snoring
    15. The effect of body position on sleep apnea in children.- 16. Sleep position and pregnancy
    17. Positional OSA in Down syndrome.- 18. Positional OSA in the morbidly obese and the effect of weight loss on OSA severity.- 19. The impact of body weight changes on body posture dominance in adult Obstructive Sleep Apnea Patients.- 20. Positional central sleep apnea
    21. History of positional therapy: transition from tennis balls to new devices
    22. Long term results and compliance of a special vest preventing the supine position.- 23. Results of a first generation new device for positional therapy
    24. Short term (4 weeks) results of the Sleep Position Trainer for positional therapy.- 25. Long-term (6 months) effectiveness, compliance and subjective sleep outcomes of treatment with the Sleep Position Trainer in a large cohort of position-dependent OSA patients.- 26. 10 problems and solutions for Positional Therapy: Technical aspects of the Sleep Position Trainer
    27. Prevalence and Effect of supine-dependent obstructive sleep apnea and effect of oral appliance therapy.- 28. Positional therapy and palatal surgery
    29. Positional therapy and tongue base surgery.- 30. Residual POSA after maxillomandibular ad-vancement in patients with severe OSA.- 31. Impact of upper airway surgery on positional change during sleep.- 32. Comparison of positional therapy to CPAP in patients with positional obstructive sleep apnea .- 33. Position training: an indispensable therapy.- 34. Positional therapy, consequences for and implementation in OSA guidelines.- 35.- Position-dependent sleep apnea: implications for diagnosis and management.- 36. Positional Therapy in Obstructive Sleep Apnea: For whom and for whom not.- 37. Summary and future perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    [by] K. C. Clark. Rev. by James McInnes.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    U848 .C59
    2
  • Print
    by Paige Rawl with Ali Benjamin.
    Summary: "A teenager's memoir of the experinces of bullying, being HIV positive and surviving the experiences to become a force for positive change in this world"-- Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ387.A25 R38 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Nichole Wood-Barcalow, Tracy Tylka, Casey Judge.
    Summary: This clear and easy-to-use workbook provides clinicians, clients, and those interested in self-improvement with a practical guide to understanding and improving body image through the latest research findings and clinical tools. The key components of positive body image, such as embodiment, body appreciation, self-care, intuitive eating, social comparison, and body talk, are all covered, with reliable assessments and guidelines for applications accompanying each topic. An array of assignments are also included for clients and readers to complete based on their values, needs and interests to provide positive body image. Clinicians will appreciate the practical treatment planning sections (including talking points for sessions, goals and objectives) to assist in clinical interventions. Additionally, a specific chapter is devoted to how clinicians can prepare themselves both professionally and personally for body image work.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Joshua D. Greene, India Morrison, Martin E.P. Seligman.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Dilip V. Jeste, M.D., Senior Associate Dean for Healthy Aging and Senior Care, Estelle and Edgar Levi Chair in Aging, Director, Sam and Rose Stein Institute for Research on Aging, and Distinguished Professor of Psychiatry and Neurosciences, University of California, San Diego, La Jolla, California, Barton W. Palmer, Ph. D., Professor, Department of Psychiatry, University of California, San Diego, La Jolla, California.
    Contents:
    Introduction, what is positive psychiatry? / Dilip V. Jeste, Barton W. Palmer
    Positive psychological traits / Averria Sirkin Martin, Alexandrea l. Harmell, Brent T. Mausbach
    Resilience and post-traumatic growth / George E. Vaillant
    Positive social psychiatry / Dan G. Blazer, Warren A. Kinghorn
    Recovery in mental illnesses / Christine Rufener, Colin A. Depp, Maja K. Gawronska, Elyn R. Saks
    What is well-being? / Robert M. Kaplan, Wendy B. Smith
    Clinical assessments of positive mental health / Per Bech
    Clinical assessments of positive mental health / Per Bech
    Positive psychotherapeutic and behavioral interventions / Acacia C. Parks, Evan M. Kleiman, Todd B. Kashdan, Leslie R.M. Hausmann, Piper S. Meyer, Anne M. Day, Nichea S. Spillane, Christopher W. Kahler
    Positivity in supportive and psychodynamic therapy / Richard F. Summers, Julie A. Lord
    Complementary, alternative, and integrative medicine (CAIM) interventions / Helen Lavretsky, Taya C. Varteresian
    Preventive interventions / Carl C. Bell
    Integrating positive psychiatry into clinical practice / Samantha Boardman, P. Murali Doraiswamy
    Biology of positive psychiatry / Raeanne C. Moore, Lisa T. Eyler, Paul J. Mills, Ruth M. O'Hara, Katherine Wachmann, Helen Lavretsky
    Positive child psychiatry / David C. Rettew
    Positive geriatric and cultural psychiatry / Maria J. Marquine, Zvinka Z. Zlatar, Daniel D. Sewell
    Bioethics of positive psychiatry / Ajai Singh.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2015
  • Digital
    Erick Messias, Hamid Peseschkian, Consuelo Cagande, editors.
    Summary: This book is the first to bring together the innovations gained from positive psychology, positive psychotherapy, and positive psychiatry in one volume that will serve as an excellent resource for medical and mental health professionals looking to reap the benefits gained by the studies and experiences in these areas. Currently, the majority of texts that are available are targeting psychologists and researchers, whereas this book seeks to use positive mental health as the foundation on which the clinical applications are built. Written by 49 experts in psychiatry, psychotherapy, and psychology, from 13 countries representing 5 continents, this book is designed to take an accessible approach that leaves the reader with a clear understanding of the epidemiology, development, and clinical applications for modern practice. Chapters include discourse on positive interventions across the lifespan and psychiatric and psychosomatic disorders, including depression, psychosis, anxiety disorders, and substance use disorders. The text also covers special topics such as care of transcultural considerations, special psychotherapeutic settings, and hot topics. Positive Psychiatry, Psychotherapy and Psychology is a valuable resource for psychiatrists, psychologists, psychotherapists, social workers, and all other mental health professionals working with patients who may benefit from this approach.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Basic Concepts, Background, and History
    Positive Psychiatry: An Introduction
    Positive Psychotherapy: An Introduction
    Positive Psychology: An Introduction
    Part 2: Staying Positive Through Life
    Positive Child and Adolescent Psychiatry
    Positive Psychiatry in Midlife
    Professional well-being
    Successful Aging
    Life Balance with Positive Psychotherapy
    Part 3: Psychiatric and Psychosomatic Disorders
    Positive interventions in Depression
    Positive interventions in Anxiety disorders
    Positive interventions in Schizophrenia and Psychotic Disorders
    Positive interventions in Substance Use Disorders
    Positive Psychotherapy and Eating Disorders
    Positive interventions in PTSD and post traumatic growth
    Positive Psychosomatics
    Positive Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy
    Part 4: Special Settings and Populations
    Culture and Minorities: Positive Psychology and Positive Psychiatry Perspectives
    Positive Psychotherapy in different Cultures
    Positive Sports Psychiatry
    Positive Family Counselling and Marital Therapy
    Positive Pedagogy and Counselling
    Positive Group Psychotherapy
    Positive Psychotherapy in organizational and leadership coaching
    Psychotherapeutic work with men
    Part 5: Theoretical Foundations and Training
    Theoretical Foundations and Roots of Positive Psychotherapy
    The First Interview in Positive Psychotherapy
    The Conflict Model in Positive Psychotherapy
    Using stories, anecdotes and humor in Positive Psychotherapy
    Supervision in Positive Psychotherapy
    Spirituality and Religion in positive psychiatry and psychology
    Positive Psychotherapy as an Existentialism
    Positive Psychotherapy and other psychotherapeutic methods
    Positive Psychotherapy and Meaning
    Positive interpretation as a tool in psychotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sarah Lewis.
    Contents:
    About the author
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    The legacy of twentieth century idea about organisational change
    The challenge of leadership
    Helping people engage positively with imposed change
    How the methodologies described later approach organisations and change
    Using positive psychology to achieve change at the team and individual level
    Appreciative inquiry
    World cafe
    Simu-real
    Pulling it all together
    References
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Birendra Kishore Das, editor.
    Summary: This book provides basic information about the relatively new and evolving technology ?positron emission tomography- for its clinical applications and practical guidance for the referring physicians. Chapters cover application of PET in various clinical settings including oncology, cardiology, and neurology with a focus on its role in various cancers. Because most of the new PET equipments come as hybrid machines with CT or MRI, two chapters have been included at the end of the book to provide basic and comprehensive information about these two technologies. Molecular imaging is going to revolutionize the way we practice medicine in the future. It will lead to more accurate diagnosis of diseases and its extent which will lead to better management and better outcomes. PET imaging is mostly used in oncology, neurology and cardiology but also finds application in other situations such as infection imaging. The main focus, of course, is in management of cancer patients. PET (PET-CT) is not only very sensitive as it can detect changes in abnormal biochemical processes at cellular level but in one go all such areas can be detected in a whole body scan. It can show response to therapy, eradication of the disease or recurrence during the follow-up period. Some cancers, especially lymphoma or cancers of the head and neck, brain, lung, colon, or prostate, in very early stage may show up more clearly on a PET scan than on a CT scan or an MRI. A PET scan can also measure such vital functions as blood flow, oxygen use, and glucose metabolism, which can help to evaluate the effectiveness of a patient?s treatment plan, allowing the course of care to be adjusted if necessary. Apart from its vital role in oncology it can estimate brain's blood flow and metabolic activity. A PET scan can help finding various nervous system disorders, such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, multiple sclerosis, TIA etc. PET scan is also increasingly being used to find poor blood flow to the heart, which may mean coronary artery disease. It can most accurately estimate the extent of damage to the heart tissue especially after a heart attack and help choose the best treatment, such as coronary artery bypass graft surgery, stenting or medical treatment. PET scan can also contribute significantly in identifying areas exactly where radiotherapy is to be targeted avoiding unnecessary radiation exposure to surrounding tissue.

    Contents:
    Positron Emission Tomography ( PET ) ? an overview
    Development of Positron Emission Tomography (PET)
    A historical prospective
    Planning of a PET Facility in India
    PET in comparison with other imaging modalities
    Technical considerations during PET imaging
    Application of PET in Oncology ( Overview)
    Application of PET in Neurology (Overview)
    Application of PET in Cancer of the Brain
    Application of PET in Cancer of the Naso-Pharynx
    Application of PET in Cardiology
    Application of PET in Breast Cancer
    Application of PET-CT in lung cancer- The Current Status and Future Potentials
    Application of PET in Cancer of Gastro-Intestinal System
    Application of PET in Cancer of the Genito-Urinary System
    Application of PET in Cancer of the Endocrine Organs
    Application of PET in Cancer of the Bone and Bone Marrow
    Application of PET in Infection and inflammation
    Application of PET in therapy planning
    Basic principles and functional aspects of a medical Cyclotron
    Basic principles of CT Imaging
    Fundamentals of MRI Imaging
    Comparison of PET-CT with PET-MRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    by Jonas Francisco Y. Santiago.
    Summary: Positron Emission Tomography with Computed Tomography (PET/CT) is an accessible case book presenting interesting cases encountered by the author over the last ten years experience as the chairman and director of the only PET Center in the Philippines. It aims to guide physicians in the accurate interpretation of the PET scans of uncommon diseases, and sometimes common cases but in extraordinary situations or conditions. Encompassing a wide and varied range of fields such as oncology, inflammatory, immunology, anatomic variants etc., Positron Emission Tomography with Computed Tomography (PET/CT) will help those beginning their practice, and may even be useful to veterans of the field whose scope of practice has been limited to more common indications of an FDG-PET scan.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Brain
    3. Diagnosed by PET
    4. Tuberculosis
    5. Inflammation
    6. Rare or Unusual Primary Malignancies
    7. Unusual Metastatic Sites
    8. Missed in PET
    9. Anatomical and Physiological Variants
    10. Unconventional Imaging Techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Pamela A. Fenstemacher, Peter Winn, editors.
    Contents:
    Home Health Care
    Assisted Living and Residential Care
    PACE
    Department of Veteran Affairs Option for LTC
    Behind the Scenes at Nursing Facilities
    The Role of Practitioners and the Medical Director
    Nurse Practitioners, Clinical Nurse Specialists and Physician Assistants
    Common Clinical Conditions in Long Term Care
    Preventing Hospital Admissions and Readmissions
    Goals of Care and Prevention
    Integrating Palliative Care into Practice
    Weight and Nutrition
    Wound Care
    Dementia, Delirium and Depression
    Ethical and Legal Issues
    Caring for Families
    Documentation and Coding
    Medication Management in Long Term Care
    Rehabilitation and Maximizing Function.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Ayad K. Ali, Abraham G. Hartzema.
    Summary: Post-Authorization Safety Studies of Medicinal Products: The PASS Book bridges the gap in the literature by providing a complete look at post-authorization safety studies and important pharmacoepidemiology and pharmacovigilance aspects. It covers various types and limitations of active surveillance programs, including the use of large databases and disparate data sources for rapid signal detection, as well as novel and advanced design and analysis approaches for causal interference from observational data. This book serves as an important reference for pharmacovigilance scientists and pharmacoepidemiologists who are searching for the appropriate study design to answer safety research questions. Readers will be able to effectively and efficiently design and interpret findings from post-authorization safety studies with the goal of improving the benefit-risk balance of a drug in order to optimize patient safety.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Title page
    Table of Contents
    Copyright
    List of Contributors
    Foreword
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Risk Management and Benefit-Risk Evaluation
    Transparency
    About This Book
    Chapter 2. Risk Management Process
    Chapter 2.1. Risk Assessment
    Chapter 2.2. Risk Minimization
    Chapter 3. Data Sources for Post-Authorization Safety Studies
    Chapter 3.1. Health Insurance Administrative Claims
    Chapter 3.2. Electronic Medical Records
    Chapter 3.3. Registries
    Chapter 3.4. Big Data
    Chapter 3.5. Social Media
    Chapter 4. Study Designs for Post-Authorization Safety Studies
    Chapter 4.1. Drug Utilization and Prescription-Event Monitoring StudiesChapter 4.2. Self-Controlled Studies
    Chapter 4.3. Cohort and Nested Case-Control Studies
    Chapter 4.4. Enriched Studies
    Chapter 4.5. Prospective Studies
    Chapter 5. Analytical Approaches for Post-Authorization Safety Studies
    Chapter 5.1. Exposure Propensity Scores
    Chapter 5.2. Disease Risk Scores
    Chapter 5.3. Instrumental Variables
    Chapter 5.4. Data Analytic Platforms
    Chapter 5.5. Proactive Safety Surveillance
    Chapter 6. Benefit-Risk Evaluation
    Chapter 6.1. Benefit-Risk Evaluation Frameworks
    Chapter 6.2. Post-Authorization Effectiveness StudiesChapter 7. Post-Authorization Safety Studies for Specialty Products
    Chapter 7.1. Post-Authorization Safety Studies for Biosimilars and Interchangeable Biologic Products
    Chapter 7.2. Post-Authorization Safety Studies for Medical Devices and Combination Products
    Chapter 7.3. Post-Authorization Safety Studies for Vaccines
    Chapter 8. The European Union Post-Authorization Study Register
    Disclaimer/Acknowledgments
    Introduction
    Index
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Vinay K. Kapoor.
    Summary: This book provides detailed insight to the readers into various aspects of bile duct injury. Bile duct injury is a common complication of cholecystectomy to treat gall stone disease prevalent all over the world. Risk of bile duct injury is more during a laparoscopic procedure as compared to open procedure and most cholecystectomies today are performed laparoscopically. Bile duct injury causes major morbidity and may even result in death, additionally it increases the healthcare costs and impairs quality of life. It is therefore important that every surgeon who performs cholecystectomy knows how to suspect, diagnose, manage and prevent bile duct injury. This book provides practical information and offers assistance in managing patients with difficult cases of bile duct injury. It summarises Dr Kapoor's experience with management of more than 1,000 patients with post-cholecystectomy bile duct injury/ biliary stricture. Chapters cover anatomy, epidemiology, mechanism, pathophysiology, clinical presentation, investigations, classification, diagnosis, management and prevention of bile duct injury. It also includes non-medical issues including health care, socio-economic, costs and quality of life.

    Contents:
    Surgical anatomy
    Epidemiology
    Etiology
    Prevention
    Patho-physiology of bile leak, bile loss and biliary obstruction
    Non-biliary injuries
    Nomenclature and classification
    Intra-operative diagnosis and management
    Postoperative diagnosis and management
    External biliary fistula
    Benign biliary stricture
    Surgical management
    Endoscopic management
    Follow up
    Health care
    Socio-economic and medico-legal aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Anant Mohan, Saurabh Mittal, editors.
    Summary: The book covers all aspects of clinical manifestations and management of various complications following acute coronavirus disease 2019 (COVID-19). COVID-19 is considered a multisystem disease and may lead to long-term complications and sequelae in various organ systems, some of whom may severely impair quality of life and may cause higher mortality. The current understanding of these complications is still incomplete and unclear, consequently the management strategies are not well elucidated. This book provides an extensive review of the current understanding of post COVID-19 complications and a simple, yet rational approach to their management. The chapters include complications related to multiple organ systems of the body including the respiratory system, nervous system, cardiovascular system, psychiatric issues, endocrine abnormalities, and others. Every chapter provides a detailed description of a practical approach to chronic sequelae along with important summary points for quick reference. Each chapter provides easy-to-follow algorithms and key points. This book will assist medical practitioners in understanding various aspects of post COVID-19 complications and will be helpful for general practitioners, internists, pulmonologists and other healthcare workers dealing with patients with COVID-19. It will also be useful to undergraduates and postgraduates since COVID-19 has been included in medicine curriculum.

    Contents:
    COVID-19: An Overview
    Pulmonary Sequelae of COVID-19
    Role of Imaging in Post-COVID-19 Complications
    Cardiovascular Complications Following COVID-19
    Neurological Sequelae of COVID-19
    Psychiatric Issues After COVID-19
    Gastrointestinal and Hepatobiliary Complications Following COVID-19
    Post-COVID-19 Endocrine Abnormalities
    Renal Abnormalities Following COVID-19
    COVID-19 Sequelae Affecting Ear, Nose and Throat
    Rheumatological Complications Following COVID-19
    Dermatological Sequelae of COVID-19
    Eye Complications Following COVID-19
    Role of Rehabilitation in the Post-COVID-19 Period
    Palliative Care Issues in Post-COVID-19.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Steindler, Arthur.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Sect. A. Propedeutics in orthopedic diagnosis. Sect. B. Congenital deformities and disabilities
    v. 2. Sect. A. Paralytic disabilities. Sect. B. Static disabilities
    v. 3. Sect. A. Tuberculosis of the skeletal system. Sect. B. Osteomyelitis
    v. 4. Sect. A. Arthritis and diseases of muscle, bursae tendons and fasciae. Sect. B. Deficiency and degenerative diseases of the locomotor system.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M731 .S83 1952
    4
  • Digital
    Jean-Charles Preiser, Margaret Herridge, Elie Azoulay, editors.
    Summary: This book, part of the European Society of Intensive Care Medicine textbook series, provides detailed up-to-date information on the physical, cognitive, and psychological impairments that are frequently present following a stay in an intensive care unit and examines in depth the available preventive and therapeutic strategies, including adapted rehabilitation programs. Beyond acquainting readers with the multiple facets of post-intensive care syndrome (PICS), the book aims to promote the effective follow-up of patients, thereby enhancing their ability to work and their functional autonomy, and to identify risk factors for the development of PICS as a stimulus to beneficial organizational changes in intensive care departments. The background to the book is the realization by healthcare providers that the quality of life of patients who have required a stay in an intensive care unit can be severely impaired or even become unacceptable. All too often, the diverse sequelae are overlooked by specialists of other disciplines. Moreover, families and caregivers are also at high risk of post-traumatic stress disorder and depression. The European Society of Intensive Care Medicine has developed the Lessons from the ICU series with the vision of providing focused and state-of-the-art overviews of central topics in Intensive Care and optimal resources for clinicians working in Intensive Care. This book, written by renowned experts in the field, will facilitate the transmission of key knowledge with significant clinical and financial benefits.

    Contents:
    Foreword, by Jean-Louis Vincent.- Part I. Introduction.- Chapter 1. The post ICU syndrome, history and definition.- Chapter 2. The Differential Diagnosis of Persistent Critical Illness and Other Causes of Prolonged ICU Stays.- Part II. Physical Impairment.- Chapter 3. Changes in Skeletal Muscle Mass and Contractile Function.- Chapter 4. Critical Illness Neuromyopathy: clinical, electrophysiology and histological diagnosis.- Chapter 5. Neuromyopathy: histological and molecular finding.- Chapter 6. Functional Outcomes Following Critical Illness.- Chapter 7. Diaphragmatic involvement.- Chapter 8. Imaging.- Chapter 9. Endocrinopathy of the Critically Ill.- Chapter 10. Post-ICU diabetes.- Chapter 11. Short and long-term ICU-acquired immunosuppression.- Part III. Cognitive / Psychological Impairment Chapter 12. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder after Critical Illness: Current Issues and Future Directions.- Chapter 13. Mood Disorders and Dementia in Survivors of Intensive Care.- Chapter 14. Functional scores of disability.- Chapter 15. Pain, analgesic effectiveness and long-term opioid dependency.- Chapter 16. Behavioral therapies.- Chapter 17. Post-intensive Care Syndrome in relatives of critically ill patientsChapter 18. Psychological impairment in professional caregivers.- Part IV. Rehabilitation.- Chapter 19. Modalities for physical rehabilitation.- Chapter 20. Nutritional strategies.- Chapter 21. Nutritional rehabilitation in the ICU.- Chapter 22. Follow-up consultations
    why?.- Chapter 23. Feasibility of follow-up consultations.- Chapter 24. Coordinating rehabilitation in hospital after ICU discharge
    priorities and pitfalls.- Chapter 25. Cost of disability.- Chapter 26. Cost effectiveness of post-intensive care clinics.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ayeshea Shenton, Peter Kralt, S. Kim Suvarna.
    Summary: This book is an ideal introduction to the specialty of post mortem computed tomography (PMCT). It will serve as a comprehensive yet accessible guide to the understanding and interpretation of whole-body studies for both hospital and community settings. Both normal post mortem appearances and findings associated with a wide range of diagnoses encountered in real cases from the coronial service are presented with the aid of numerous images. The coverage encompasses not only findings in all anatomic regions but also the imaging appearances in cases following targeted coronary angiography, attempted cardiopulmonary resuscitation and various special circumstances such as suicide. The inclusion of many practical tips and possible pitfalls will support the radiologist to become more confident when reporting PMCT, while for the more experienced practitioner the wealth of examples will serve as a useful resource. In addition to radiologists, the book will be of value for pathologists at all levels of experience and anyone needing to understand the role and limitations of PMCT.

    Contents:
    1) Introduction to the Investigation of Death and Post mortem Computed Tomography
    2) Practical Considerations of Post Mortem Computed Tomography and Report Writing
    3) Death, Post Mortem Changes and Decomposition on Post Mortem Computed Tomography
    4) External Findings, Tubes and Devices on Post Mortem Computed Tomography
    5) Post Mortem Computed Tomography of the Brain and Spinal Cord
    6) Post Mortem Computed Tomography of the Extra-cranial Head and Neck
    7) Post Mortem Computed Tomography of the Chest
    8) Post Mortem Computed Tomography of the Heart
    9) Post Mortem Computed Tomography of the Abdomen and Pelvis
    10) Post Mortem Computed Tomography of the Bones and Soft Tissues
    11) Findings Related to Attempted Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation on Post Mortem Computed Tomography.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Erik Dassi.
    Contents:
    Regulation of gene expression / Alessandro Quattrone and Erik Dassi
    Computational approach for the discovery of protein-RNA networks / Domenica Marchese, Carmen Maria Livi, and Gian Gaetano Tartaglia
    Transcriptional regulation with CRISPR/Cas9 effectors in mammalian cells / Hannah Pham, Nicola A. Kearns, and René Maehr
    Studying the translatome with polysome profiling / Paola Zuccotti and Angelika Modelska
    Exploring ribosome positioning on translating transcripts with ribosome profiling / Pieter Spealman ... [et al.]
    Studying isoform-specific mRNA recruitment to polyribosomes with Frac-seq / Rocio T. Martinez-Nunez and Jeremy R. Sanford
    Use of the pBUTR reporter system for scalable analysis of 3' UTR-mediated gene regulation / Arindam Chaudhury and Joel R. Neilson
    Comprehensive identification of RNA-binding proteins by RNA interactome capture / Alfredo Castello ... [et al.]
    Identifying RBP targets with RIP-seq / Hans-Herman Wessels ... [et al.]
    PAR-CLIP : a method for transcriptome-wide identification of RNA binding protein interaction sites / Charles Danan, Sudhir Manickavel, and Markus Hafner
    Profiling the binding sites of RNA-binding proteins with nucleotide resolution using iCLIP / FX Reymond Sutandy, Andrea Hildebrandt, and Julian König
    Pipeline for PAR-CLIP data analysis / Marvin Jens
    Capture and identification of miRNA targets by biotin pulldown and RNA-seq / Shen Mynn Tan and Judy Lieberman
    Identification of miRNA-target RNA interactions using CLASH / Aleksandra Helwak and David Tollervey
    Genome-wide analysis of A-to-I RNA editing / Yiannis A. Savva, Georges St. Laurent, and Robert A. Reenan
    Nucleotide-level profiling of m5C RNA methylation / Tennille Sibbritt ... [et al.]
    Probing N 6-methyladenosine (m6A) RNA modification in total RNA with SCARLET / Nian Liu and Tao Pan
    Genome-wide identification of alternative polyadenylation events using 3'T-fill / Stefan Wilkening, Vicent Pelechano, and Lars M. Steinmetz
    Genome-wide profiling of alternative translation initiation sites / Xiangwei Gao, Ji Wan, and Shu-Bing Qian
    Genome-wide study of mRNA isoform half-lives / Joseph V. Geisberg and Zarmik Moqtaderi
    Visualizing mRNA dynamics in live neurons and brain tissues / Hye Yoon Park and Minho Song
    Single-molecule live-cell visualization of pre-mRNA splicing / Robert M. Martin ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Benjamin A. Garcia.
    Contents:
    Crosstalk between cellular metabolism and histone acetylation / Sophie Trefely, Mary T. Doan, and Nathaniel W. Snyder
    Purification and enzymatic assay of class I histone deacetylase enzymes / Mark K. Adams, Charles A.S. Banks, Sayem Miah, Maxime Killer, and Michael P. Washburn
    Multiplexed quantitative phosphoproteomics of cell line and tissue samples / Johannes Kreuzer, Amanda Edwards, and Wilhelm Haas
    Differentiation of peptide isomers and epimers by radical-directed dissociation / Tyler R. Lambeth and Ryan R. Julian
    Biochemical analysis of protein arginylation / Junling Wang, John R. Yates III, and Anna Kashina
    Site-specific determination of lysine acetylation stoichiometries on the proteome-scale / Yue Chen and Yunan Li
    RNA modifications and the link to human disease / Amber Yanas and Kathy Fange Liu
    Isolation and characterization of glycosylated neuropeptides / Yang Liu, Qinjingwen Cao, and Lingjun Li
    Utilizing intein trans-splicing for in vivo generation of site-specifically modified proteins / Igor Maksimovic, Devin Ray, Qingfei Zheng, and Yael David
    Systematic and site-specific analysis of N-glycoproteins on the cell surface by integrating bioorthogonal chemistry and MS-based proteomics / Fangxu Sun and Ronghu Wu
    Silencing glycosaminoglycan functions in mouse embryonic stem cells with small molecule antagonists / Sourav Chatterjee, Tesia N. Stephenson, Austen L. Michalak, Kamil Godula, and Mia L. Huang
    Biochemical and structural analysis of N-terminal acetyltransferases / Leah Gottlieb and Ronen Marmorstein
    Site-specific analysis of the Asp- and Glu-ADP-ribosylated proteome by quantitative mass spectrometry / Peng Li, Yuanli Zhen, and Yonghao Yu
    Analysis of the topology of ubiquitin chains / Lucia Geis-Asteggiante, Amanda E. Lee, and Catherine Fenselau
    Analysis of cardiac troponin proteoforms by top-down mass spectrometry / Timothy N. Tiambeng, Trisha Tucholski, Zhijie Wu, Yanlong Zhu, Stanford D. Mitchell, David S. Roberts, Yutong Jin, and Ying Ge
    Assays for tyrosine phosphorylation in human cells / Monica Kruk, Naomi Widstrom, Sampreeti Jena, Nicole L. Wolter, John F. Blankenhorn, Ibrahim Abdalla, Tzu-Yi Yang, and Laurie L. Parker
    Metabolomics analysis of lipid metabolizing enzyme activity / Timothy B. Ware, Myungsun Shin, and Ku-Lung Hsu
    Simplified high yield TAILS terminomics using a new HPG-ALD 800K-2000 polymer with precipitation / Nestor Solis, Anilkumar Parambath, Srinivas Abbina, Jayachandran Kizhakkedathu, and Christopher M. Overall
    Methods for the expression, purification, and crystallization of histone deacetylase 6-inhibitor complexes / Jeremy D. Osko and David W. Christianson
    Quantitative analysis of global protein lysine methylation by mass spectrometry / Peder J. Lund, Stephanie M. Lehman, and Benjamin A. Garcia
    The roles of S-nitrosylation and S-glutathionylation in Alzheimer's disease / Ryan R. Dyer, Katarena I. Ford, Renã A.S. Robinson
    Expression of authentic post-translationally modified proteins in organisms with expanded genetic codes / Kyle Mohler and Jesse Rinehart
    Preparation of a new construct of human histone deacetylase 8 for the crystallization of enzyme-inhibitor complexes / Nicholas J. Porter and David W. Christianson
    Methods for characterizing protein acetylation during viral infection / Laura A. Murray, Ashton N. Combs, Pranav Rekapalli, and Ileana M. Cristea.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Vikas R. Dharnidharka, Michael Green, Steven A. Webber, Ralf Ulrich Trappe, editors.
    Summary: This disorder transcends multiple disciplines and demands a team approach to improve knowledge and treatment. The highly experienced internationally recognized authors have updated every section and added many new chapters, including some on genetic abnormalities in virus and host seen in PTLDs. In this successor edition, there is a completely new section on PTLDs after hematopoietic stem cell transplantation. The newest PTLD classifications and current treatment paradigms that reflect recently conducted international trials are fully incorporated. As technologies have advanced, this book provided state-of-the-art new diagnostic and prognostic information. Post-Transplant Lymphoproliferative Disorders 2nd Edition is designed to be a valuable reference for oncologists and all transplant professionals, such as surgeons, nephrologists, cardiologists, hepatologists/gastroenterologists, pulmonologists, infectious disease specialists, pathologists, as well as interns and residents in training in these specialists. It provides these professionals with comprehensive and up-to-date information that guides their management of transplant patients before and after transplant, with and without PTLD. .

    Contents:
    Introduction and History
    Definitions and Pathology of PTLD
    EBV Biology in the Pathogenesis of PTLD
    Host genetic mutations and expression analyses in PTLD
    Immune responses to EBV in the immunocompromised host
    Technical aspects of Epstein-Barr viral load assays
    Epidemiology of PTLD after SOT
    Clinical Features and Diagnostic Considerations
    Prognostic Factors
    Management of PTLD
    Prevention of Epstein - Barr virus Infection and Post-Transplant Lymphoproliferative Disorders Following Transplantation
    Epidemiology and Prognosis of PTLD after HSCT
    Clinical Presentations and Features of PTLD after Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation
    Management of PTLD after HSCT
    Preventative and preemptive strategies for EBV infection and PTLD after hematopoietic stem cell transplantation
    Organ Specific issues of PTLD Kidney
    Liver
    Post-transplantation Lymphoproliferative Disorder in Intestinal Transplant Recipients
    PTLD After Heart Transplantation
    Lung Transplantation
    Research Priorities and Future Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Savyasachi Thakkar, Erik A. Hasenboehler, editors.
    Summary: The incidence and prevalence of post-traumatic arthritis (PTA) is increasing globally due to longevity of life and increased activity and injuries. Compared to the non-traumatic etiology of arthritis, post-traumatic arthritis differs in presentation, severity and complexity of management. This book illustrates all pertinent facets of post-traumatic arthritis, from the basic science and diagnostic modalities to their management and outcomes. The opening section reviews the current scientific literature on PTA and presents the preferred imaging techniques and interpretation methods. A unique chapter on the economic impact of PTA is also included here. The subsequent two sections discuss both the upper and lower extremity, respectively, with each joint covered in a dedicated chapter of its own, describing the mechanisms of injury, assessment, management strategies and outcomes. Case material provides real-world context for the concepts and techniques presented, supported by generous radiology and intraoperative photos and figures. With Post-Traumatic Arthritis, orthopedic surgeons, as well as trauma surgeons, rheumatologists and associated clinical staff, will receive a comprehensive framework on which to base their clinical decisions and enhance their post-operative outcomes.

    Contents:
    Chapter 2: Imaging Modalities for Post-traumatic Arthritis
    Introduction
    Conventional Radiography
    MR Imaging
    Association Between Pain and Imaging Findings of OA
    References
    Chapter 3: Economic Implications of Post-traumatic Arthritis of the Hip and Knee
    Introduction
    Post-traumatic Osteoarthritis of the Knee
    Types of Injuries Associated with PTOA of the Knee
    Anterior Cruciate Ligament Injuries
    Meniscus Injuries
    Intra-articular Fractures
    Management of Post-traumatic Osteoarthritis of the Knee
    Primary Prevention
    Secondary Prevention
    Tertiary Prevention Post-traumatic Osteoarthritis of the Hip
    Types of Injuries Associated with PTOA of the Hip
    Hip/Acetabular Fractures
    Hip Dislocations and Osteonecrosis
    Management of PTOA in the Hip
    Primary Prevention
    Secondary Prevention
    Tertiary Prevention
    Costs Associated with Post-traumatic Osteoarthritis
    Recommendations
    Summary
    References
    Part II: Post-traumatic Arthritis of the Upper Extremity
    Chapter 4: Post-traumatic Glenohumeral Arthritis
    Introduction
    Causes
    Fractures
    Instability
    Other Causes
    Treatment
    Nonoperative Treatment Elbow Arthrodesis
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 6: Post-traumatic Arthritis of the Wrist
    Introduction
    Main Text
    Wrist Anatomy
    Carpus and Intercarpal Joints
    Distal Radioulnar Joint
    Wrist Arthritis
    Evaluation
    Intercarpal and Radiocarpal Arthritis
    Scapholunate Advanced Collapse (SLAC) and Scaphoid Nonunion Advanced Collapse (SNAC)
    Management
    S4CF Versus PRC
    Wrist Denervation
    Total Wrist Arthroplasty and Arthrodesis
    Surgical Technique
    Isolated Radiocarpal Arthritis
    Management
    Isolated Intercarpal Arthritis
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Steven A. Olson, Farshi Guilak, editors.
    Summary: Bringing together the most up-to-date research on post-traumatic arthritis (PTA) and its management, this book is a comprehensive presentation of the current thinking on all aspects of the mechanisms of joint injury and subsequent development of PTA. Divided into thematic sections, it includes discussions of the incidence and burden of PTA, both in society at large and in the military population specifically; the relevant experimental work on PTA, from basic science to animal models; peri-articular tissue responses to of joint injury and potential mechanisms of PTA; the current clinical assessment and treatment of common joint injuries leading to PTA; and emerging technologies and treatments for PTA, including biomarkers and stem cell therapies. Taken together, it will be an invaluable resource for orthopedic surgeons, rheumatologists and other joint injury researchers and clinicians.

    Contents:
    Section I: The Problem of Post-Traumatic Arthritis
    Arthritis that Develops after Joint Injury: Is it Post-Traumatic Arthritis or Post-Traumatic OsteoArthritis?
    Post-Traumatic Arthritis: Definitions and Burden of Disease
    Arthritis after Joint Injury: The Military Experience
    Section II: Experimental Models of Joint Injury
    In Vitro Cartilage Explant Injury Models
    Animal Models of Meniscal Injury in Post-Traumatic Arthritis.-Anterior Cruciate Transection/Disruption Models of Posttraumatic Arthritis
    Closed Joint ACL Disruption Murine Model of PTA
    Whole Joint Models of Articular Injury and Articular Fracture
    Instability: Dynamic Loading Models
    Survey of Animal Models in Post-Traumatic Arthritis: Choosing the Right Model to Answer the Right Question
    Section III: Peri-articular Tissue Response to Joint Injury
    The Response of Cartilage to Injury
    The Response of Subchondral Bone to Injury
    Genetic Variability in the Response to Injury
    Aging and Post-Traumatic Arthritis.-Potential Mechanisms of PTA: Cell Death
    Potential Mechanisms of PTA: Inflammation
    Potential Mechanisms of PTA: Oxidative Stress
    Potential Mechanisms of PTA: Alterations in Joint Loading
    Section IV: Clinical Assessment and Treatment of Patients with Joint Injury
    Imaging Specific to Cartilage Injury
    Outcomes of ACL Injury: The MOON Consortium
    Current Treatment and Outcomes of Intra-articular Fractures
    Non-arthroplasty Treatments for PTA in the Lower Extremity
    Results of Arthroplasty in Post-Traumatic Arthritis
    Section V: Developing and Future Assessment and Therapies
    Measurement of Severity of Injury after Articular Fracture and Correlation with Post-Traumatic Arthritis Development
    Biomarkers of PTA
    Potential Targets for Pharmacologic Therapies for Prevention of PTA.- Stem Cells Therapies for Post-Traumatic Arthritis
    Unanswered Questions and Future Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    James F. Pagel.
    Summary: PTSD is in no way an easy diagnosis for the patient, the provider, or the therapist. It is a diagnosis developed at the border of our capacity to handle extreme stress, a marker diagnosis denoting the limits of our capacity for functioning in the stress of this modern world. For both individuals and society, PTSD marks the limits of our available compassion and our capacity to protect ourselves from the dangers of the environment and other humans. PTSD is often a chronic disease, forming at a place where mind sometimes no longer equals the brain, a point at which individual patient requirements often trump theory and belief. There are treatments for PTSD that work, and many that do not. This book presents evidence, rather than theory, anecdote, or case report. Psychological approaches including prolonged exposure, imagery rehearsal therapy and EMDR have a greater than 75% positive short-term response when used to treat PTSD. Yet these treatments vary markedly and have different, even contradictory underlying theory and objectives for treatment. Medications, rarely indicated as primary therapy, can be used to treat symptoms and address comorbid PTSD diagnoses. Treatment of sleep apnea in the PTSD population produces a positive effect on symptoms and a reduction in morbidity and mortality across the span of life. Complementary treatments offer the many individuals chronically affected by PTSD assistance in coping with symptoms and opportunities to attempt to functionally integrate their experience of trauma.

    Contents:
    Shell shock and society
    Unzipping PTSD: criteria and screeners
    Disasters and societal trauma: complex and societal PTSD
    The origins of PTSD: psychodynamic trauma and the human stress response
    Nightmare science
    Chronic PTSD
    Treating the emergency: acute trauma
    Classic psychotherapy for PTSD
    Group therapy for PTSD
    Classic cognitive behavioral therapy
    Prolonged exposure therapy
    Eye movement desensitization and processing (EMDR)
    Imagery rehearsal therapy
    PTSD: the medications
    Sleep apnea and PTSD
    Complementary approaches to healing PTSD: art, body, and mind awareness
    When treatment doesn't work
    An evidence-based approach to PTSD therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Daniel Thomas Ginat, Suzanne K. Freitag, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of the imaging features that are seen following the application of a variety of ophthalmic and orbital procedures and therapies in patients with disorders affecting the cornea, retina, lens and ocular adnexa, as well as glaucoma. A wealth of high-quality radiographic images, including CT, MRI and ultrasound, depict expected post-treatment findings and appearances in patients with complications. In addition, correlations are made with clinical photographs and photographs of implanted devices. This reference has been prepared by experts in the field and should serve as a valuable guide to both radiologists and ophthalmologists, facilitating navigation of the intricacies of the treated eye and orbit and optimization of patient management.

    Contents:
    Cornea
    Lens
    Retina
    Ocular Adnexa
    Glaucoma
    Intraocular Tumor Treatments.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Emmanuel Y. Lartey, Hellena Moon ; foreword by Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na'im; epilogue by Bonnie Miller-McLemore.
    Summary: "This anthology is about caring for all persons as a part of the revolutionary struggle against colonialism in its many forms. In recognition of the varied ways in which different forms of oppression, injustice, and violence in the world today are traceable to the legacy and continuing effects of colonialism, various authors have contributed to the volume from diverse backgrounds including differing ethnic identities, religious and cultural traditions, gender and sexual orientations, as well as communal and personal realities. As a postcolonial critique of spiritual care, it highlights the plurality of voices and concerns that have been overlooked or obscured because of the politics of race, religion, sexuality, nationalism, and other structures of power that have shaped what discursive spiritual care entails today. Postcolonial Images of Spiritual Care presents voices of practical and pastoral theologians, academics, spiritual care providers, religious leaders, students, and activists working to provide greater intercultural spiritual care and awareness in the areas of healthcare, community work, and education. The volume, as such, expands the discourse of spiritual care and participates in the ongoing paradigm shifts in the field of pastoral and practical theology."--Publisher.
  • Digital
    edited by Audrey J. Jaeger, Alessandra J. Dinin.
    Summary: The Postdoc Landscape offers historical, international, and domestic examples, solutions, and strategies for addressing the needs of postdoctoral scholars in terms of their presence in government, industry, and the academy. Growing issues and concerns are identified with a clear direction in terms of what practitioners, policymakers, and educators can do to improve the working conditions of postdoctoral scholars. The book includes chapters centered on three themes: the Postdoc Landscape, Postdoc Support and Postdoc Career Literacy, Agency and Choice. This comprehensive reference serves as a guide for scholars, individuals who supervise and mentor postdoctoral scholars and policymakers.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Committee to Review the State of Postdoctoral Experience in Scientists and Engineers, Committee on Science, Engineering, and Public Policy, Policy and Global Affairs, National Academy of Sciences, National Academy of Engineering, Institute of Medicine.
    Summary: The Postdoctoral Experience Revisited builds on the 2000 report Enhancing the Postdoctoral Experience for Scientists and Engineers. That ground-breaking report assessed the postdoctoral experience and provided principles, action points, and recommendations to enhance that experience. Since the publication of the 2000 report, the postdoctoral landscape has changed considerably. The percentage of PhDs who pursue postdoctoral training is growing steadily and spreading from the biomedical and physical sciences to engineering and the social sciences. The average length of time spent in postdoctoral positions seems to be increasing. The Postdoctoral Experience Revisited reexamines postdoctoral programs in the United States, focusing on how postdocs are being guided and managed, how institutional practices have changed, and what happens to postdocs after they complete their programs. This book explores important changes that have occurred in postdoctoral practices and the research ecosystem and assesses how well current practices meet the needs of these fledgling scientists and engineers and of the research enterprise. The Postdoctoral Experience Revisited takes a fresh look at current postdoctoral fellows--how many there are, where they are working, in what fields, and for how many years. This book makes recommendations to improve aspects of programs--postdoctoral period of service, title and role, career development, compensation and benefits, and mentoring. Current data on demographics, career aspirations, and career outcomes for postdocs are limited. This report makes the case for better data collection by research institution and data sharing. A larger goal of this study is not only to propose ways to make the postdoctoral system better for the postdoctoral researchers themselves but also to better understand the role that postdoctoral training plays in the research enterprise. It is also to ask whether there are alternative ways to satisfy some of the research and career development needs of postdoctoral researchers that are now being met with several years of advanced training. Postdoctoral researchers are the future of the research enterprise. The discussion and recommendations of The Postdoctoral Experience Revisited will stimulate action toward clarifying the role of postdoctoral researchers and improving their status and experience.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The disconnect between the ideal and reality
    Changing aspects of the postdoctoral experience
    The shifting career landscape
    Recommendations
    Appendixes.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad [2014]
  • Digital
    Arup Chakrabarti, editor.
    Contents:
    Anatomy of the Crystalline Lens
    Anatomy of the Vitreous
    Incidence, Magnitude and Significance of the Problem
    Posterior Capsular Rents
    Predisposing Factors
    Management Strategies for Cataracts with Pre-existing PCR
    How to Reduce the Incidence of Posterior Capsular Rupture
    Surgical Pearls
    Posterior Capsular Rupture during the Phaco Learning Curve
    Tips on How to Reduce the Incidence
    Posterior Capsular Rent
    Early Diagnosis
    Posterior Capsular Rupture
    Various Case Scenarios.-Management of Vitreous Disturbance and Basic Principles of Anterior Vitrectomy
    Staining of the Vitreous/Enhancing Visibility of Vitreous.-Bimanual Vitrectomy from Limbus
    Bimanual pars plana Anterior Vitrectomy
    Posterior Assisted Levitation (PAL)
    IOL Options in the Presence of Posterior Capsular Rent
    ACIOL
    Iris Claw IOLs.-Sutured Scleral Fixated IOLs
    Unsutured Scleral Fixated IOLs
    Glued IOLs
    Management of Retained Lens Matter in the Postoperative Period
    Posterior Capsular Rent
    Sequelae
    Postoperative Management of an Eye that has Suffered a Posterior Capsular Rupture.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jong S. Kim, editor.
    Summary: This book, written by renowned experts from across the world, provides readers with a detailed and up-to-date understanding of posterior circulation stroke and its management. Anatomy, pathophysiology, clinical syndromes, and imaging findings are clearly and thoroughly described with the aid of illustrative cases and schematic drawings. The management-oriented chapters explain all forms of treatment, including the use of antiplatelet agents and anticoagulants, thrombolysis, mechanical thrombectomy, stenting, and surgical therapy, i.e., bypass and decompression. Throughout, full account is taken of recent significant advances in knowledge and clinical practice. Stroke affecting the posterior circulation continues to pose particular challenges for clinicians. This book will help readers to avoid misdiagnosis, which still occurs far too frequently, and to manage individual patients optimally. It will be an excellent learning resource for residents in neurology, neurosurgery, radiology, interventional radiology, and vascular surgery, as well as an ideal reference for more experienced practitioners in these specialties.

    Contents:
    1. History of vertebro-basilar stroke and TIA
    2. Arterial anatomy and collaterals in posterior brain circulation
    3. Risk factors and stroke mechanisms in posterior brain
    4. Brainstem ischemic stroke syndromes
    5. Thalamic and occipital stroke syndromes
    6. Ocular-vestibular-otologic syndromes
    7. Hemorrhagic strokes in posterior brain
    8. Imaging diagnosis and assessment of perfusion in posterior circulation stroke
    9. Acute therapy (thrombolysis, thrombectomy) in posterior circulation stroke
    10. Angioplasty/stenting in posterior circulation stroke
    11. Medical treatment in posterior circulation stroke
    12. Surgical therapy: Bypass and decompression in posterior circulation stroke
    13. Non-atherosclerotic vascular diseases in posterior circulation stroke
    14. Outcome and prognosis in posterior circulation stroke.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gregory C. Fanelli, MD, editor.
    Summary: Now in a revised and expanded second edition including ten new chapters, this classic text on the diagnosis and management of posterior cruciate ligament injuries represents the state of the art. Comprehensive and used-friendly, the book covers PCL anatomy and biomechanics, diagnosis and evaluation, and both surgical and non-surgical treatment strategies. Surgical chapters discuss graft selection and open and arthroscopic techniques, including both primary and revision surgery and combined reconstruction with other knee ligaments. New chapters illustrate cutting-edge and advanced surgical techniques in reconstruction and primary repair, articular cartilage resurfacing and meniscus transplant in the PCL injured knee, mechanical graft tensioning, the role of osteotomy, treatment of PCL injuries in children, results of treatment and outcomes data in PCL injuries, clinical case studies, and the editorℓ́ℓs experience chapter based on 24 years of treating PCL injuries. Complications, bracing and rehabilitation round out the presentation. Written and edited by leaders in the management of injuries to the knee, this will be an invaluable text for orthopedic surgeons and sports medicine practitioners alike.

    Contents:
    Part I: Editor?s Experience
    Posterior Cruciate Ligament Injuries and Reconstruction: What I Have Learned
    Part II: Anatomy and Biomechanics
    Anatomy and Biomechanics of the Posterior Cruciate Ligament and their Surgical Implications
    Anatomy and Biomechanics of the Posterolateral and Posteromedial Corners of the Knee and their Surgical Implications
    Part III: Diagnosis and Evaluation
    Clinical and Arthroscopic Evaluation of the Posterior Cruciate Ligament Injured Knee
    Instrumented Measurement of the Multiple Ligament Injured Knee: Arthrometry, Stress Radiography, Rotationometry, and Computer Navigation
    MRI Imaging of PCL, Posteromedial, and Posterolateral Corner Injuries of the Knee
    Part IV: Non-Surgical Treatment
    Nonoperative Treatment and Natural History of Posterior Cruciate Ligament Injuries
    Part V: Surgical Treatment
    Graft Selection in Posterior Cruciate Ligament Surgery
    Arthroscopic Transtibial Tunnel Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    Open Tibial Inlay Graft for Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    All-Arthroscopic Tibial Inlay Double-Bundle Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    All-Inside Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    The All-Inside Technique: Surgical Technique and Outcomes
    Arthroscopic Primary Repair of Posterior Cruciate Ligament Injuries
    Combined PCL, ACL, Posteromedial, and Posterolateral Reconstruction
    Surgical Treatment of Combined PCL/Lateral-Sided Injuries
    Combined Posterior Cruciate Ligament and Posteromedial Reconstruction
    Combined PCL, Posteromedial Corner and Posterolateral Corner Reconstruction
    Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction in Patients Eighteen Years of Age and Younger
    Revision Surgery in the Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    Part VI: Other Considerations
    Mechanical Graft Tensioning in Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    The Role of Osteotomy in the Treatment of PCL Injuries
    Articular Cartilage Restoration in the PCL Injured Knee
    Meniscus Transplant in the PCL Injured Knee
    Rehabilitation Following PCL Reconstruction: Scientific and Theoretical Basis
    Brace Considerations for Posterior Cruciate Ligament (PCL) Injuries of the Knee
    Complications and PCL Reconstruction
    Part VII: Outcomes of Treatment
    Results of Treatment of Posterior Cruciate Ligament Surgery
    Part VIII: Clinical Case Studies
    Selected Case Studies in Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    M. Memet Özek, Giuseppe Cinalli, Wirginia Maixner, Christian Sainte-Rose, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Carlos Eduardo Costa Almedia, editor.
    Summary: This book will offer for the first time a step-by-step description of the posterior retroperitoneoscopic adrenalectomy, a minimally invasive technique, moving the gold standard of laparoscopic adrenalectomy towards the retroperitoneoscopic approach. Detailed information about the technique, the advantages over other approaches, the technical steps, the potential complications and how to solve them, outcomes, and robotics, will be offered to readers. This practical guide will be of great interest for all general surgeons and urologists already performing adrenal surgery, and for those that wish to start performing adrenalectomy.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Abbreviations
    1: Anatomy of the Adrenal Gland
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 The Adrenal Gland
    1.2.1 Anatomical Landmarks and Topographic Anatomy
    1.2.2 Arterial Supply
    1.2.3 Venous Drainage
    1.2.4 Lymphatic Drainage
    1.2.5 Innervation
    1.3 Anatomical Considerations in Posterior Retroperitoneoscopic Adrenalectomy
    1.3.1 Retroperitoneum
    1.3.2 Abdominal Wall (Posterior and Anterolateral)
    References
    2: Indications for Adrenalectomy
    2.1 Introduction 2.2 Posterior Retroperitoneoscopic Adrenalectomy in Overproduction Adrenal Syndromes
    2.2.1 Excessive Production of Aldosterone: Hyperaldosteronism
    2.2.2 Excessive Production of Glucocorticoids: Cushing's Syndrome
    2.2.3 Excessive Production of Catecholamines: Pheochromocytoma and Paraganglioma
    2.3 Posterior Retroperitoneoscopic Adrenalectomy in Adrenal Malignancies
    2.3.1 Adrenocortical Carcinoma
    2.3.2 Malignant Pheochromocytoma and Paraganglioma
    2.3.3 Metastases to the Adrenal Glands
    2.4 Adrenal Incidentaloma
    2.5 Partial Adrenalectomy
    References 3: Open Versus Minimally Invasive Approach
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Validation of Laparoscopic Adrenal Surgery
    3.3 Still a Place for Open
    3.4 Open Surgery
    3.4.1 Current Indications
    3.4.2 Risk of Conversion to Open
    3.5 Open Technique
    3.5.1 Anterior Approach
    3.5.1.1 Technique for the Right Side
    3.5.1.2 Technique for the Left Side
    3.5.2 Posterior Approach
    3.5.3 Thoracoabdominal Approach
    3.6 Conclusion
    References
    4: Retroperitoneoscopic Versus Laparoscopic Adrenalectomy
    4.1 Background and Clinical Considerations
    4.2 Intraoperative Outcomes 4.3 Postoperative Outcomes
    References
    5: Retroperitoneoscopic Approach in Malignant Disease
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Preoperative Evaluation of Patients with Adrenal Lesions Suspicious for Malignancy
    5.3 Minimally Invasive Adrenal Surgery for Indeterminate Adrenal Nodules Suspicious for Malignancy
    5.4 Minimally Invasive Adrenal Surgery for Metastatic Disease
    5.5 Minimally Invasive Adrenal Surgery for Adrenocortical Carcinoma
    References
    6: Anesthesia in Posterior Retroperitoneoscopic Approach
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Preoperative Patient Evaluation 6.3 Anesthesia for PRA
    6.4 Postoperative Pain Management
    References
    7: Technical Steps of Posterior Retroperitoneoscopic Adrenalectomy
    7.1 Introduction
    7.2 Surgical Instruments and Operation Table Setup
    7.3 Surgical Team
    7.4 Step-by-Step
    7.4.1 Positioning the Patient
    7.4.2 Placing the First Trocars (Balloon Trocar and Lateral Trocar)
    7.4.3 Creating the Working Space
    7.4.4 Placing the Third Trocar (Medial Trocar)
    7.4.5 Finding Upper Pole of the Kidney
    7.4.6 Finding the Inferior Vena Cava (IVC)
    7.4.7 Dissecting and Ligating the Adrenal Vein
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Meena Chakrabarti, Arup Chakrabarti, editors.
    Summary: Posterior segment complications of cataract surgery are encountered not only by the cataract and retinal surgeons but also by the general ophthalmologists in their daily practice. Yet, a definitive volume on this subject is not available. Written by experts in the field of cataract surgery and vitreoretinal surgery, this book is a comprehensive, updated practical guide on evaluation and management of patients with posterior segment complications following cataract surgery. This up-to-date reference covers all aspects of the field including evaluation of a patient, and all surgical procedures currently used in managing various complication in an organized systematic fashion. Necessary surgical modalities and approaches are thoroughly reviewed with ample illustrations for better understanding. Chapter dealing with surgical complications and failure has also been included in this book.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Introduction
    Contents
    1: Risk Factors for Posterior Segment Complications of Cataract Surgery
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Conclusion
    References
    2: Needle Stick Globe Injuries
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Epidemiology and Risk Factors
    2.3 Mechanism of Injury
    2.4 Signs and Symptoms
    2.5 Management
    2.6 Prognosis
    2.7 Prevention
    References
    3: The Dropping and Dropped Nucleus
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Intraoperative Management by the Cataract Surgeon
    3.3 IOL Implantation Options for the Cataract Surgeon
    3.4 Definitive Surgery 3.5 Management of Associated Complications
    References
    4: Pseudophakic Retinal Detachment
    4.1 Epidemiology
    4.2 Risk Factors
    4.2.1 Preoperative
    4.2.2 Intraoperative
    4.2.3 Postoperative
    4.3 After Nd:YAG Posterior Capsulotomy
    4.4 Clinical Findings
    4.5 Management
    4.6 Prognostic Factors
    4.7 Conclusion
    References
    5: Pseudophakic Cystoid Macular Oedema
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Definition
    5.3 History
    5.4 Incidence
    5.5 Aetiopathogenesis
    5.6 Histopathology
    5.7 Classification of Pseudophakic CMO 5.8 Classification Based on the Time of Onset [28]
    5.9 Risk Factors for Pseudophakic CMO
    5.10 Diagnosis, Symptoms and Signs
    5.11 Diagnostic Tests
    5.12 Management
    5.12.1 Medical Treatment
    Conservative Management
    NSAIDS
    Steroids
    Combination of Topical NSAIDS and Steroids
    Carbonic Anhydrase Inhibitor (Acetazolamide)
    Anti-VEGF Therapy
    5.12.2 Surgical
    5.12.3 Other Therapies
    5.13 Prophylactic Treatment
    5.14 Nepafenac 1 mg in 1 mL in Adults, Including the Elderly
    References 6: Prophylaxis of Postoperative Endophthalmitis Following Cataract Surgery
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Perioperative Nonantibiotic Prophylactic Measures
    6.2.1 Povidone-Iodine (PVP-I)
    6.2.2 Incision Construction
    6.3 The Role of Antibiotics
    6.3.1 Preoperative Topical Antibiotics
    6.3.2 Antibiotics in the Irrigating Solution
    6.3.3 Intracameral Antibiotics
    Vancomycin
    Cefuroxime
    Moxifloxacin
    6.3.4 Post-operative Antibiotics
    Appendix 1
    References
    7: Postoperative Endophthalmitis
    7.1 Introduction
    7.2 Incidence
    7.3 Classification 7.4 Risk Factors
    7.5 Pathogenesis
    7.6 Etiology
    7.7 Clinical Features
    7.8 Prophylaxis
    7.8.1 Topical Antibiotics
    7.8.2 Systemic Antibiotics
    7.9 Investigations
    7.10 Treatment
    7.10.1 Intravitreal Antibiotics
    7.10.2 Systemic Antibiotics
    7.11 Surgery
    7.12 Prognosis
    7.13 Conclusion
    References
    8: Toxic Anterior Segment Syndrome
    8.1 Introduction
    8.2 Clinical Presentation
    8.2.1 Differential Diagnosis
    8.3 Treatment and Clinical Course
    8.4 Etiology and Recommendations
    8.4.1 Recommendations
    Enzymatic Detergents
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Narsing A. Rao, Julie Schallhorn, Damien C. Rodger, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text provides readers with an in-depth examination of posterior uveitis, and expert instruction on diagnosis, imaging techniques and treatments that are being reshaped by advancements in the field. Posterior Uveitis: Advances in Imaging and Treatment focuses on the ocular imaging modalities used in the diagnosis of various uveitis and intraocular inflammation entities resulting from infectious and non-infectious etiologies. Each topic is succinctly presented by experts in the field of intraocular inflammation and ocular imaging and starts with salient clinical features, differential diagnosis and specific treatment, and concludes with in-depth and relevant clinical imaging findings. The book opens by touring a multitude of infectious and non-infectious uveitidies and explores how advances are aiding our diagnosis and treatment. The second half will delve into established and emerging therapeutics, including advances in drug delivery. Evolving treatments for recalcitrant uveitis are discussed, including the newer biological agents, and each chapter includes ample illustrations and several tables for readers to comprehend with ease the inflammatory disorders and to interpret the imaging changes in various uveitis entities.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by A. Victor Hoffbrand, Douglas R. Higgs, David M. Keeling, Atul B. Mehta.
    Contents:
    Stem cells and haemopoiesis / Emma de Pater, Elaine Dzierzak
    Erythropoiesis / Douglas R Higgs, Noémi Roy, Deborah Hay
    Iron metabolism iron deficiency and disorders of haem synthesis / Clara Camaschella, A Victor Hoffbrand, Chaim Hershko
    Iron overload / Clara Camaschella, A Victor Hoffbrand, Maria Domenica Cappellini
    Megaloblastic anaemia / A Victor Hoffbrand
    Haemoglobin and the inherited disorders of globin synthesis / Swee Lay Thein, David Rees
    Sickle cell disease / Anne Marsh, Elliott P Vichinsky
    Hereditary disorders of the red cell membrane and disorders of red cell metabolism / Paola Bianchi, Narla Mohandas
    Acquired haemolytic anaemias / Modupe O Elebute, Rachel Kesse-Adu
    Inherited aplastic anaemia/bone marrow failure syndromes / Inderjeet S Dokal
    Acquired aplastic anaemia and paroxysmal nocturnal haemoglobinuria / Judith CW Marsh, Austin G Kulasekararaj, Neal S Young, Peter Hillmen
    Red cell immunohaematology / Geoff Daniels, Marcela Contreras, Shubha Allard
    Clinical blood transfusion / Shubha Allard, Marcela Contreras
    Phagocytes / John Mascarenhas, Marina Kremyanskaya,, Ronald Hoffman
    Lysosomal storage disorders / Atul B Mehta, Derralynn A Hughes
    Normal lymphocytes and non-neoplastic lymphocyte disorders / Paul Moss, Mark Drayson
    The spleen / Paul Moss
    The molecular basis of haematological malignancies / Niccolo Bolli, George Vassiliou
    Laboratory diagnosis of haematological neoplasms / Torsten Haferlach, Barbara J Bain
    Acute myeloid leukaemia / Alan K Burnett, David Grimwade
    Adult acute lymphoblastic Llukaemia / Clare J Rowntree, Adele K Fielding
    Childhood acute lymphoblastic leukaemia / Ajay Vora
    Supportive care in the management of leukaemia / Eliza Gil, Vanya Gant, Panagiotis Kottaridis
    Chronic myeloid leukaemia / David TO Yeung, Timothy P Hughes
    The myelodysplastic syndromes / Kavita Raj, Ghulam J Mufti
    Myeloproliferative neoplasms / Peter J Campbell, Claire Harrison, Anthony R Green
    Chronic lymphocytic leukaemia and other chronic B-cell disorders / Emili Montserrat, Peter Hillmen
    T-cell lymphoproliferative disorders / Pier Luigi Zinzani, Alessandro Broccoli
    Multiple myeloma / Jesús San-Miguel, Joan Bladé́
    Amyloidosis / Simon DJ Gibbs, Philip N Hawkins
    The classification of lymphomas: updating the WHO classification / Elias Campo, Stefano A Pileri
    Hodgkin lymphoma / Piers Blombery, David Linch
    Non-Hodgkin lymphoma: low grade / William Townsend, Robert Marcus
    Non-Hodgkin lymphoma: high grade / Jessica Okosun, Kate Cwynarski
    Stem cell transplantation / Charles Craddock, Ronjon Chakraverty
    Normal haemostasis / Keith Gomez, John H McVey
    The vascular function of platelets / Stephen P Watson, Neil V Morgan, Paul Harrison
    Haemophilia and VonWillebrand disease / Michael A Laffan, K John Pasi
    Rare inherited coagulation disorders / Flora Peyvandi, Marzia Menegatti
    Acquired coagulation disorders / Peter W Collins, Jecko Thachil, Cheng-Hock Toh
    Congenital platelet disorders / Maurizio Margaglione, Paul RJ Ames
    Primary immune thrombocytopenia / Drew Provan, Adrian C Newland
    Thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura and haemolytic-uraemic syndrome (congenital and acquired) / Pier Mannuccio Mannucci, Flora Peyvandi, Roberta Palla
    Heritable thrombophilia / Trevor Baglin, David Keeling
    Acquired venous thrombosis / Beverley J Hunt, Henry G Watson
    Antithrombotic agents / Trevor Baglin, David Keeling
    Management of venous thromboembolism / Trevor Baglin, David Keeling
    Haematological aspects of systemic disease / A Victor Hoffbrand, Atul B Mehta
    Haematological aspects of tropical diseases / Imelda Bates, Ivy Ekem
    Neonatal haematology / Irene Roberts, Subarna Chakravorty
    WHO classification: Tumours of the haematopoietic and lymphoid tissues (2008).
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    H737 .W92 1950
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Paul A. Banaszkiewicz and Deiary F. Kader.
    Summary: "Develop an aptitude for defining key topics, features and processes, vital for your FRCS (Tr & Orth) Viva exam success, with this newly updated and detailed guide. This new edition expertly delivers invaluable insights into tactics and planning, for candidates to sharpen exam skills, and gain confidence. Thoroughly updated to include an expanded basic science section, to answer all of your viva questions, this guide also supplies candidates with new illustrations and exam-specific diagrams; adapting to meet the expectations of a constantly changing syllabus. Vital for orthopaedic surgeons in training, this forward-looking text includes a drawing chapter, for candidates to practise creating succinct, exam-style illustrations, before the exam itself. Proactive in its approach, this book addresses the balance between trauma, general orthopaedics and basic science; by editors with extensive national and international experience of preparing candidates for the FRCS(Tr & Orth)"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Print
    McFarland, John Bryan.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M39 .M14
    2
  • Digital
    Davide Spadaro, Samir Droby, Maria Lodovica Gullino, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: The book will address selected topics in postharvest pathology aiming at highlighting recent development in the science, technology and control strategies of postharvest diseases to reduce losses and enhance safety of harvested agricultural products. Topics will include: 1) Introduction: Perspectives and challenges in postharvest pathology 2) Elucidating host-pathogen interactions 3) Next generation technologies for management and detection of postharvest pathogens 4) Food safety in postharvest pathology 5) Alternative postharvest diseases control strategies 6) Chemical control of postharvest diseases.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Role of Effector Proteins in the Virulence of Penicillium expansum on Apple Fruit
    Introduction
    Plant Defense Mechanisms
    Pathogenicity of P. expansum on Fruit
    Fungal Effectors and Their Role in the Pathogenicity of Necrotrophic Fungi
    P. expansum Secretes Factors That Down-Regulate ROS Production in Apple During Infection
    Discovery and Functional Analysis of Effectors in Plant Pathogenic Fungi
    Small, Cysteine-Rich Proteins in P. expansum
    LysM Proteins in P. expansum
    NLP Proteins in P. expansum
    PePRT Protein
    Summary Chapter 3: Uncovering the NLR Family of Disease Resistance Genes in Cultivated Sweetpotato and Wild Relatives
    Introduction
    Importance of Sweetpotato
    Origin and History of Sweetpotato
    Sweetpotato Production
    The Sweetpotato Genome
    A Case Study: Ceratocystis fimbriata, The Causal Agent of Black Rot of Sweetpotato
    Management of Black Rot in Sweetpotato
    Sweetpotato Resistance Against Ceratocystis fimbriata
    Plant Defenses Against Pathogens
    Next Generation Sequencing Accelerates Resistance Gene Discovery
    Resistance Genes in Sweetpotato Chapter 5: Endophytic Microbiome in the Carposphere and Its Importance in Fruit Physiology and Pathology
    Introduction
    Entry, Colonization and Transmission of Endophytes into Plant Tissue
    Coevolution of Endophytes with Their Host
    Diversity of Endophytic Microbiota on Fruit Carpophore
    Stem-End Rots Pathogens in Fruit as Endophytes
    Utilization of Endophytic Microorganisms in Diseases Management of Fruits
    Future Prospective
    References
    Chapter 6: The Production of Mycotoxins as an Adaptation to the Post-Harvest Environment
    Introduction Genome Survey of NLR Encoding Genes in I. batatas, I. trifida, and I. triloba
    Future Perspectives
    References
    Chapter 4: Spatial and Compositional Diversity in the Microbiota of Harvested Fruits: What Can It Tell Us About Biological Control of Postharvest Diseases
    Introduction
    Spatial Differences in the Microbiome of Harvested Apples
    Genotype Effect on the Composition of the Endophytic Microbiome of Apple Scions and Rootstocks
    The Apple Rhizosphere
    Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Zsolt J. Balogh, Raul Coimbra, Salomone Di Saverio, Andrew W. Kirkpatrick, Federico Coccolini, editors.
    Summary: This book on post-injury multiple organ failure (MOF) offers a comprehensive overview and clinically focused practical guide to treating the condition. MOF is arguably the most difficult complication to manage in polytrauma patients and is responsible for the majority of trauma deaths among patients who survived the first 24 hours after injury. Beyond mortality, it has a major impact on healthcare resource utilization and a persistent negative effect on patients' long-term reported outcomes. This book is edited by surgeons who are passionate about the topic, and about optimizing the outcomes for polytrauma patients. Grasping the fascinating pathophysiology of MOF is essential for providing patients with quality early care. Each chapter highlights key learning objectives, historical perspectives, diagnostic and therapeutic pearls, and includes a must-know summary, additional reading suggestions and future research directions. Flowcharts, decision-making guides, summary tables, graphics and clinical photographs help to maximize the learning experience and to ensure readers retain what they've learned. The book fills a unique niche area for many specialties dedicated to critical care of polytrauma patients and to their management before and beyond intensive care.

    Contents:
    1 Historic perspective and relevant evolutionary landmarks in trauma care
    2 The definition of postinjury Multiple Organ Failure
    3 The pathomechanism of postinjury MOF
    4 Genomic considerations related to postinjury MOF
    5 The epidemiology of postinjury MOF
    6 The relevance of traumatic shock and its treatment on the epidemiology of MOF
    7 The relevance of the timing of surgical interventions
    8 The population at risk, predictors of MOF
    9 Postinjury MOF with and without infection
    10 The principles of treatment, modern therapeutic targets
    11 Central nervous system
    12 Respiratory failure
    13 Cardiac failure
    14 Liver failure
    15 Gastrointestinal failure, clinical presentations and treatment
    16 Kidney failure
    17 Bone marrow failure
    18 MOF management in low resource settings
    19 MOF in pregnancy and its relevance to Eclampsia
    20 MOF in paediatric patients
    21 Summary of randomised controlled trials with significant effect on MOF outcomes
    22 Iatrogenic causes leading to MOF
    23 Short term outcomes, what has changed during the last 40 years?
    24 Long term outcomes and functional outcomes
    25 Future directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Faustino R. Pérez-López, editor.
    Summary: Supported by the latest scientific data, this book serves as a guide to the clinical assessment of women’s health during the second half of life (post-reproductive years), including approaches to the management of the most frequent age-related diseases and disorders and the most recent advances in treatment. In addition, it discusses preventive aspects of healthcare in post-reproductive women, identifying lifestyle measures to enhance healthy aging. By highlighting research gaps, it promotes the development of quick and easy-to-use assessment tools and predictive markers of age-related co-morbidities. As such, the book is a valuable resource for researchers and clinicians alike. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Assisted reproductive technology in perimenopausal women / Nicolás Mendoza Ladrón de Guevara and Miguel Angel Motos Guirao
    2. Turner syndrome : primary amenorrhea from adolescence to aging / Camil Castelo-Branco and Iuliia Naumova
    3. Premature ovarian insufficiency / Agnieszka Podfigurna, Monika Grymowicz, Anna Szeliga, Ewa Rudnicka, Marzena Maciejewska-Jeske, Roman Smolarczyk, and Blazej Meczekalski
    4. Human papillomavirus infection and cancer risk in peri- and postmenopausal women / Pedro Vieira-Baptista, Mario Preti, and Jacob Bornstein
    5. Sporadic ovarian and fallopian tube cancer in postmenopausal women / Faustino R. Pérez-López
    6. Vulvar dermatoses and menopause / Joana Lyra and Pedro Vieira-Baptista
    7. Bladder pain syndrome/interstitial cystitis / Rui Almeida Pinto
    8. Overactive bladder / Visha K. Tailor and G. Alessandro Digesu
    9. Management of female stress urinary incontinence / Giampiero Capobianco, Pier Luigi Cherchi, and Salvatore Dessole
    10. Screening and management of female sexual dysfunction during the second half of life / Ana M. Fernández-Alonso, Marcos J. Cuerva, Peter Chedraui, and Faustino R. Pérez-López 11. Current treatment modalities for the genitourinary syndrome of menopause / Cemal Tamer Erel
    12. Laser treatment for vulvovaginal atrophy / Marco Gambacciani
    13. Laser treatments in female urinary incontinence / Ivan Fistonić and Nikola Fistonić
    14. Metabolic syndrome and excessive body weight in peri- and postmenopausal women / Andrea Giannini, Maria Magdalena Montt-Guevara, Jorge Eduardo Shortrede, Giulia Palla, Peter Chedraui, Andrea Riccardo Genazzani, and Tommaso Simoncini
    15. Metabolic syndrome and atherosclerosis in nondiabetic postmenopausal women / Stavroula A. Paschou, Panagiotis Anagnostis, Dimitrios G. Goulis, and Irene Lambrinoudaki
    16. Polycystic ovary syndrome-related risks in postmenopausal women / Panagiotis Anagnostis, Stavroula A. Paschou, Irene Lambrinoudaki, and Dimitrios G. Goulis
    17. Sleep and sleep disturbances in climacteric women / Päivi Polo-Kantola, Tarja Saaresranta, and Laura Lampio
    18. Impact of menopause on brain functions / Alice Antonelli, Andrea Giannini, Marta Caretto, Tommaso Simoncini, and Andrea R. Genazzani
    19. Vasomotor symptoms : clinical management / Maria Celeste Osorio-Wender and Mona Lúcia Dall’Agno
    20. Vasomotor symptoms, metabolic syndrome, and cardiovascular risks / Pauliina Tuomikoski and Hanna Savolainen-Peltonen 21. Menopause and age-related general health risk : a woman's heart needs her hormones / Adam Czyzyk and John C. Stevenson
    22. Menopausal hormone therapy to prevent chronic conditions / Rafael Sánchez-Borrego
    23. Selective estrogen receptor modulators (SERMs) : state of the art / Santiago Palacios
    24. Management of osteoporosis in postmenopausal women / J. J. Hidalgo-Mora, Antonio J. Cano-Marquina, A. Szeliga, Miguel Ángel García-Pérez, and A. Cano
    25. Anabolic agents for the treatment of postmenopausal osteoporosis / Salvatore Minisola
    26. The links between osteoporosis and sarcopenia in women / Juan Enrique Blümel, Eugenio Arteaga, María Soledad Vallejo, and Rosa Chea
    27. Female sarcopenic obesity / Fidel Hita-Contreras
    28. Cognitive decline in women : the ZARADEMP study / Patricia Gracia-García, Elena Lobo, Javier Santabárbara, Concepción de la Cámara, and Raúl López-Antón
    29. Managing menopause and post-reproductive health : beyond hormones and medicines / Skye Marshall and Margaret Rees
    30. Effects of exercise on menopausal prevalent conditions / Samuel J. Martínez-Domínguez, Juan Bueno-Notivol, Peter Chedraui, Vanesa Alonso-Ventura, Julia Calvo-Latorre, and Faustino R. Pérez-López.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sheri Berg [and] Edward A. Bittner.
    Contents:
    Section I. Patient care
    Section II. Postoperative complications
    Section III. Special considerations
    Section IV. Ethico-legal issues and PACU administration
    Index.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Mert Şentürk, Mukadder Orhan Sungur, editors.
    Contents:
    What happens to the lung during mechanical ventilation and one-lung ventilation?
    Where should I send my patient after the operation?
    Does it matter, how I ventilate the patient during the operation?
    Can the "postoperative pulmonary complications" (PPC) be objectively evaluated?
    Fluid management during and after the operation: Less is more or more is less?
    How to organize the PACU/ How to treat in PACU
    Should I blame the surgeon: Surgical complications and surgical treatment of the complications
    Should every "myasthenic thymectomy" be sent to ICU?
    How about esophagectomies?
    Do the "new" devices of monitoring and USG make sense compared to the "classical" ones?
    What is different in postop MV after thoracic surgery?
    Pro's & Con's of non-invasive ventilation after thoracic surgery
    Extracorporeal lung support: Also after thoracic surgery?
    Pneumonia after thoracic surgery: infectious / ventilatory induced / any other reason?
    When and how do I have to treat the arrhythmia's after thoracic surgery?
    DVT-PE prophylaxy and patient using anticoagulants: a challenge?
    Pain after thoracic surgery: Why is it so bad?
    Rehabilitation for thoracic surgical patients: why and how.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Ali Dabbagh, Fardad Esmailian, Sary Aranki editors.
    Summary: This text reviews the postoperative management of patients who have undergone cardiac surgical procedures, some of the most common and most complicated forms of surgery. These patients and their management are characterized by complex challenges, while among the factors determining ultimate clinical outcome, postoperative critical care is of major importance. This new and extensively updated edition of Postoperative Critical Care for Cardiac Surgical Patients maintains the general clinical approach in explaining and analyzing the course of clinical care in patients undergoing cardiac surgery, providing the reader with a practical "cookbook" of postoperative intensive care in adult cardiac patients. It has been extensively updated to include the developments in this field during the last few years, from new chapters on postoperative management of renal, gastrointestinal and respiratory systems, postoperative management of infectious and inflammatory complications, and postoperative care of transplant patients and postoperative safety. This book is of critical importance for cardiac surgeons, cardiac anesthesiologists and intensivists, and defines optimal daily practice for adult patients undergoing cardiac surgical procedures.

    Contents:
    Introduction to postoperative care of adult cardiac surgical patients
    Risk and Outcome Assessments in adult Cardiac Surgery
    Cardiac physiology
    Cardiovascular Pharmacology
    Principles of Pharmacoeconomics
    Cardiovascular monitoring after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Postoperative Central Nervous System Monitoring after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Postoperative coagulation and bleeding: monitoring and hematologic management after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Cardiovascular Complications & Management after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Renal and GI Complications & their Management after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Respiratory Complications & Management after adult Cardiac Surgery
    CNS Complications & Management after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Infectious and inflammatory Complications & their Management after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Postoperative rhythm disorders after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Fluid management and electrolyte balance after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Acid-base balance and blood gas analysis after adult Cardiac Surgery
    Postoperative care of adult cardiac transplant patients
    Postoperative safety in adult Cardiac Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ali Dabbagh, Fardad Esmailian, Sary F. Aranki, editors.
    Summary: Cardiac surgical procedures are among the most common and most complicated forms of surgery worldwide and the postoperative period is characterized by complex challenges. Among the factors determining ultimate clinical outcome, postoperative critical care is of major importance. This book adopts a clinical approach in explaining and analyzing the course of clinical care in patients undergoing cardiac surgery. Since the postoperative clinical status is directly influenced by preoperative and intraoperative factors, the early chapters briefly examine preoperative issues and the intraoperative course of cardiac surgery, with particular attention to anesthesia and the process of cardiopulmonary bypass. Subsequent chapters primarily address the critical care of patients by means of an organ-oriented approach, which will enable the reader to use the text as a "cookbook" of cardiac intensive care. This book is intended for use in daily practice by cardiac surgeons, cardiac anesthesiologists, intensivists and cardiac intensive care nurses.

    Contents:
    Synopsis of Cardiac Physiology.-Cardiac Pathophysiology
    Cardiovascular Pharmacology
    Cardiovascular Monitoring
    Central Nervous System Monitoring
    Coagulation Monitoring
    Risk and Outcome Assessments
    Cardiac Anesthesia
    Cardiopulmonary Bypass and its Effects
    Myocardial Protection and its Effects
    Respiratory Management
    Cardiovascular Management
    CNS Management
    Coagulation and Postoperative Bleeding
    Fluid and Electrolyte Management
    Management of the Other Systems.-Long Term Complications Postoperative care in Pediatric Cardiac Surgeries.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Emma Rowbotham, Andrew J. Grainger.
    Summary: This book describes and illustrates the normal and abnormal postoperative appearances that may be observed following common orthopaedic surgical procedures in patients with sports injuries. The majority of sports injuries comprise ligamentous, cartilage, and tendon injuries at and about the joints. While surgical repair techniques for such injuries have advanced immeasurably over recent years, it is essential that any postoperative abnormalities are recognized promptly. Therefore a key aim of Postoperative Imaging of Sports Injuries is to explain which imaging appearances are to be expected and which are not. The book is primarily organized according to the involved joints and covers procedures for shoulder, elbow, hand and wrist, hip, knee, and foot and ankle injuries. An additional chapter addresses articular cartilage repair techniques and their normal and abnormal imaging appearances. The authors are leading radiologists from Europe and North America who draw on their extensive experience. The book is copiously illustrated and readers will also have online access to ultrasound video clips.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreword
    List of Contributors
    1. Shoulder: Rotator Cuff Repair
    2. Post Op Imaging of the Shoulder: Stabilisation Surgery
    3. Elbow
    4. Post-operative imaging of the hand & wrist
    5. Postoperative Imaging of the hip
    6. Knee: Ligament Reconstruction
    7. Post Operative Imaging : The Menisci
    8. Postoperative Imaging of Sports Injuries: Foot and ankle
    9. Imaging following cartilage repair surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Andrew Green, Roman Hayda, Andrew C. Hecht.
    Summary: "Bridge the gap between orthopaedic surgery and rehabilitation! Postoperative Orthopaedic Rehabilitation, published in partnership with the AAOS, is the first clinical reference designed to achieve better outcomes and to empower orthopaedic surgeons and rehabilitation specialists by breaking down the traditional boundaries between these two phases of patient management.Key FeaturesAchieve the best possible outcomes with multidisciplinary content co-written by expert surgeons and physical and occupational therapists. Chapters include discussions of relevant anatomy, surgical indications and techniques, rehabilitation protocols, and specific clinical tips and pearls, as well as clear rationales for each rehabilitation protocol.Gain a more thorough, holistic understanding of the entire course of patient management so you can optimally collaborate with your colleagues and accomplish superior results.Access guidance at a glance through concise, clearly formatted chapters containing step-by-step protocols and bulleted lists as well as abundant imaging studies, intraoperative photographs and diagrams, and photographs of rehabilitation methods."--Publisher.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Shoulder. Anatomic and physiologic basis for postoperative rehabilitation for the shoulder
    Patient-related outcome measures for shoulder surgery and rehabilitation
    Acromioclavicular separations
    Capsular releases for shoulder stiffness: considerations for treatment and rehabilitation
    Shoulder instability repairs
    Open anterior glenohumeral instability repair
    SLAP repairs
    Rotator cuff repairs
    Shoulder arthroplasty
    Proximal humerus fractures
    Section 2. Elbow. Elbow anatomy
    Elbow contracture release
    Lateral and medial epicondylitis
    Current concepts in surgical techniques and postoperative rehabilitation strategies following ulnar collateral ligament reconstruction of the elbow
    Elbow rehabilitation after lateral collateral ligament reconstruction
    Rehabilitation following distal biceps tendon repair
    Evaluation and treatment of ulnar neuropathy at the elbow
    Rehabilitation after ORIF of elbow dislocations
    Rehabilitation after distal humerus fractures
    ORIF for olecranon fractures: singple olecranon fractures, transolecranon fracture-dislocations and posterior monteggia variant
    ORIF and radial head replacement for radial head fractures
    Total elbow arthroplasty
    Section 3. Hand and wrist. Introduction to hand and wrist anatomy
    Dupuytren disease
    Thumb CMC osteoarthritis: LRTI procedure, simple trapeziectomy, CMC arthrodesis
    MP and PIP joint arthroplasty
    Acute flexor tendon injuries
    Extensor tendon repairs
    Tenolysis: flexor and extensor
    Principles of tendon transfers
    Distal radius fractures
    Total wrist arthroplasty
    Wrist arthrodesis: limited and complete
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Peter Sutovsky, editor.
    Contents:
    Sperm proteases and extracellular ubiquitin-proteasome system involved in fertilization of ascidians and sea urchins
    ISGylation: a conserved pathway in mammalian pregnancy
    Src-family tyrosine kinases in oogenesis, oocyte maturation and fertilization: an evolutionary perspective
    Posttranslationally modified tubulins and other cytoskeletal proteins: their role in gametogenesis, oocyte maturation, fertilization and pre-implantation embryo development
    Deubiquitinating enzymes in oocyte maturation, fertilization and preimplantation embryo development
    Posttranslational modifications of zona pellucida proteins
    Role of aberrant protein modification, assembly, and localization in cloned embryo phenotypes
    Role of posttranslational protein modifications in epididymal sperm maturation and extracellular quality control
    Ubiquitin-proteasome system in spermatogenesis
    Role of posttranslational modifications in C. elegans and Ascaris spermatogenesis and sperm function.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Matthew J. Friedman.
    Summary: A handy, easy-to-read reference for the diag- nosis and treatment of posttraumatic and acute stress disorders,℗ℓ this important 6th ℗ℓedition has been revised and updated exten- sively, offering a wealth of new information in a concise format. The new DSM-5 diagnos- tic criteria for PTSD and ASD are discussed in depth. Updated tables listing instruments for assessing diagnosis and symptom severity are presented.℗ℓ℗ℓ Chapters 3-5 have been revised to keep pace with the ever-expanding literature on treatment of PTSD with specific attention to evidence-based cognitive-behavioral therapy, ℗ℓCBT, and other individual psychosocial treatments (e.g. eye movement desensitization and reprocessing, EMDR) as well as℗ℓ the growing literature on couples, family, group and school-based treatments. Chapter ℗ℓ5 reviews the pathophysiology of PTSD and evidence-based pharmacotherapy for the disorder.℗ℓ Chapter 6 then addresses both normal acute stress ℗ℓreactions and clinically significant ASD,℗ℓ as well as ℗ℓeffective interventions for each. In short this comprehensive, sophisticated, practical, guide is designed for all practitioners who wish to provide the best treatment for PTSD and ASD.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Overview of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)
    Chapter 2:Recognizing, Assessing and Diagnosing PTSD
    Chapter 3:Global Treatment Issues for PTSD
    Chapter 4:Psychological Treatments for PTSD
    Chapter 5:Pharmacological Treatments for PTSD
    Chapter 6:Strategies for Acute Stress Reactions and Acute Stress Disorder (ASD).
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] J. Douglas Bremner.
    Contents:
    Posttraumatic stress disorder : from neurobiology to clinical presentation / Arieh Shalev, J. Douglas Bremner
    The epidemiology of PTSD in children and adolescents : a critical review / Leah A. McGuire
    Early life stress and development : preclinical science / Dora B. Guzman, Brittany R. Howell, Mar Sanchez
    Amygdala contributions to fear and safety conditioning : insights into PTSD from an animal model across development / Christopher Cain, Regina Sullivan
    Preclinical evidence for benzodiazepine receptor involvement in the pathophysiology of PTSD, comorbid substance abuse and alcoholism / Robert Drugan, Nathaniel P. Stafford, Timothy A. Warner
    Psychosocial predator stress model for PTSD based on clinically relevant risk factors for trauma-induced psychopathology / Phillip R. Zoladz, David Diamond
    Coping with stress in wild birds : the evolutionary foundations of stress responses / Molly J. Dickens, Michael Romero
    Stress, fear, and memory in healthy human subjects / Christian Merz, Bernet Elzinga, Lars Schwabe
    Neurotransmitter, neurohormonal, neuropeptidal and immune function in stress and PTSD / J. Douglas Bremner, Brad Pearce
    Genomics of posttraumatic stress disorder / Anthony S. Zannas, Elisabeth Binder, Divya Mehta
    Cortisol and the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis in PTSD / Amy Lehrner, Nicolaos Daskalakis, Rachel Yehuda
    Neuroimaging of posttraumatic stress disorder / Carolina Campanella, J. Douglas Bremner
    Posttraumatic stress disorder and mild traumatic brain injury / J. Douglas Bremner
    Stress-related psychopathology and pain / Sarah C. Reitz, Karl-Juergen Bar, Christian Schmahl
    Stress and health / Vaccarino Vaccarino. Emeran Mayer, J. Douglas Bremner
    Pharmacotherapy for PTSD : effects on PTSD symptoms and the brain / Lori Davis, Mark Hamner, J. Douglas Bremner
    Effects of psychotherapy for psychological trauma on PTSD symptoms and the brain / J Douglas Bremner, Carolina Campanella.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Julian D. Ford, Damion J. Grasso, Jon D. Elhai, and Christine A. Courtois.
    Contents:
    Understanding psychological trauma and posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD)
    The impact of psychological trauma
    Etiology of PTSD: What causes PTSD?
    Epidemiology of PTSD
    Neurobiology of traumatic stress disorders and their impact
    Assessment of psychological trauma and PTSD
    Treatment of adults with PTSD
    Treatment of children and adolescents with PTSD
    Prevention of PTSD
    Forensic issues in the traumatic stress field
    Social, cultural and other diversity issues in the traumatic stress field
    Careers and ethical issues in the traumatic stress field.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Elspeth Cameron Ritchie, editor.
    Contents:
    The Basics of Post-traumatic Stress Disorder, Administrative Issues, and Cultural Competency
    Posttraumatic Stress Disorder Screening in US Military and VA Populations
    Therapeutic Alliance in the Treatment of Combat PTSD
    Shame and Moral Injury in an Operating Iraqi Freedom Combat Veteran
    Updates in Psychopharmacology for PTSD and Related Conditions
    Connie L. Barko, Rohul Amin, and Joshua N. Friedlander
    Virtual Reality Exposure Therapy for Combat-Related PTSD
    Psychoanalytic Approaches to Treatment-Resistant PTSD
    Accelerated Resolution Therapy
    Meditation for Combat-Related Mental Health Concerns
    Use of Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation for the Treatment of PTSD
    Adding a Face and the Story to the Data: Acupuncture for PTSD in the Military
    The Use of Stellate Ganglion Block in the Treatment of Panic/Anxiety Symptoms (Including Suicidal Ideation), with Combat-Related PTSD
    Canine Connection Therapy: Finding Purpose and Healing Through the Training of Service Dogs
    Trauma and Pain: Linking Emotional and Physical Symptoms
    The Multifactorial Approach to PTSD in the Active Duty Military Population
    Comorbid PTSD, Bipolar I and Substance Use Disorder
    Psychosis Masquerading as PTSD
    The Mefloquine Intoxication Syndrome: A Significant Potential Confounder in the Diagnosis and Management of PTSD and other Chronic Deployment-Related Neuropsychiatric Disorders
    Polytrauma with Sexual Dysfunction in a Female Soldier Following IED Blast Exposure
    A Community Building Approach to PTSD Using the Arts in a Military Hospital Setting
    Mental Health Care of Special Operations Forces. Treating War-Related Moral Injury and Loss with Adaptive Disclosure: A Case Study
    Treatment of Conversion Disorder with PTSD
    Intimate Relationship Distress and Combat-Related PTSD.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nicholas Gall, Lesley Kavi, Melvin D. Lobo, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the varying clinical manifestations of postural tachycardia syndrome (PoTS) and provides a robust yet practical set of clinical tools for those managing patients suffering with this syndrome. Guidance is provided by a range of disciplines relevant to PoTS including general and specialist assessments, associated conditions, diagnostic considerations, therapy and service models. Postural Tachycardia Syndrome: A Concise and Practical Guide to Management and Associated Conditions presents the scientific background and practical information for the busy medical professional, illustrating key features with care-based materials to help them manage this condition, which can be a challenge for patients and clinicians alike.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Contents
    POTS, An Introduction
    Introduction
    References
    Historical Background
    References
    Clinical Presentation
    References
    Specialty Assessment
    Diagnostic Criteria for Postural Tachycardia Syndrome: Consideration of the Clinical Features Differentiating PoTS from Other Disorders of Orthostatic Intolerance
    Abbreviations
    Background
    Diagnostic Criteria
    Clinical Evaluation of a Patient with Suspected PoTS
    Orthostatic Tachycardia Must Occur Within 10 minutes
    Symptoms of Orthostatic Intolerance and Symptoms Independent of Orthostasis PoTS is a Chronic Disorder
    Other Causes of Tachycardia
    Dehydration and Acute Blood Volume Loss
    Deconditioning
    Medications
    Other Medical Conditions
    Diurnal Variability in Orthostatic Tachycardia
    Common Misconceptions Regarding the Diagnosis of PoTS
    Tilt Table Testing
    Specialist Referral
    Syncope
    Distinguishing PoTS from Other Types of Orthostatic Intolerance
    Orthostatic Tachycardia Without Orthostatic Symptoms
    Orthostatic Symptoms Without Orthostatic Tachycardia
    Inappropriate Sinus Tachycardia (IST) Orthostatic Hypotension (OH) and Initial Orthostatic Hypotension (IOH)
    Diagnosing PoTS in the Pediatric Patient
    Conclusions
    References
    Pathophysiology and Classification of PoTS
    Abbreviations
    Introduction
    Partial Sympathetic Neuropathy
    Chronic Hypovolemia and Renin-Angiotensin-Aldosterone System
    Hyperadrenergic State
    Hyperadrenergic State: Norepinephrine Transporter Deficiency
    Immune-Mediated
    Mast Cell Activation
    Deconditioning
    Impaired Cerebral Autoregulation
    Conclusion
    References Cardiological Considerations: Tests to Consider, Are They Useful and What Do They Show?
    Echocardiography
    Holter Electrocardiography
    Cardiopulmonary Exercise Testing
    References
    Neurological Investigations
    Neurological Investigations in PoTS
    An Approach to Neurological Investigations in PoTS
    Neurological Investigations Within Primary Care
    Neurological Investigations Within Secondary/Tertiary Care
    In Summary
    References
    The Active Stand and Tilt Tests
    Abbreviations
    Assessment of Orthostatic Tachycardia
    General Considerations Advantages and Disadvantages of Active Stand Testing and the Head up Tilt Test
    Conclusion
    References
    Additional Autonomic Tests
    Introduction
    Autonomic Target-Organs Neurophysiological Tests (ATONT)
    Definition of Autonomic Failure
    Assessment of Central Parasympathetic Function
    Resting Supine Cardiac Vagal Tone (CVT)
    Respiratory Gating of Cardiac Vagal Tone (CVT) in Supine Position
    Resting Supine Cardiac Sensitivity to Baroreflex (CSB)
    Assessment of Central Baroreflex Gain
    Assessment of Peripheral Baroreflex Function
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Patricia Vit, Silvia R.M. Pedro, David W. Roubik, editors.
    Summary: This book covers pot-pollen--the other product, besides honey, stored in cerumen pots by Meliponini. Critical assessment is given of stingless bee and pot-pollen biodiversity in the Americas, Africa, Asia and Oceania. Topics addressed include historical biogeography, cultural knowledge, bee foraging behavior, pollination, ecological interactions, health applications, microbiology, the natural history of bee nests, and chemical, bioactive and individual plant components in stored pollen. Pot-pollen maintains the livelihoods of stingless bees and provides many interesting biological products that are just now beginning to be understood. The Meliponini have developed particular nesting biologies, uses of building materials, and an architecture for pollen storage. Environmental windows provide optimal temperature and availability of pollen sources for success in plant pollination and pollen storage. Palynological composition and pollen taxonomy are used to assess stingless honey bee pollination services. Pollen processing with microorganisms in the nest modifies chemical composition and bioactivity, and confers nutraceutical benefits to the honey and pollen widely relished by native people. Humans have always used stingless bees. Yet, sustainable meliponiculture (stingless bee-keeping) projects have so far lacked a treatise on pot-pollen, which experts provide in this transdisciplinary, groundbreaking volume.

    Contents:
    Forewords
    Introduction
    Acknowledgements
    SECTION 1 Pollen and the Evolution of Mutualism
    1. Pot-Pollen as a Discipline. What Does it Include?
    2. Are Stingless Bees a Broadly Polylectic Group? An Empirical Study of the Adjustments Required
    3. Pollen collected by stingless bees: a contribution to understand Amazonian biodiversity
    4. The Stingless Honey Bees (Apidae, Apinae: Meliponini) in Panama, and Ecology from Pollen
    5. The value of plants for the Mayan stingless honey bee Melipona beecheii (Apidae: Meliponini): a pollen-based study in the Yucatán Peninsula, Mexico
    6. Melittopalynological Studies of Stingless Bees from East Coast of Peninsular Malaysia
    7. The Contribution of Palynological Surveys to Stingless Bee Conservation: a Case Study with Melipona subnitida
    8. Pollen Storage by Melipona quadrifasciata anthidioides in a Protected Urban Atlantic Forest Area of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil
    9. Angiosperm Resources for Stingless Bees (Apidae, Meliponini): A Pot-Pollen Melittopalynological Study in the Gulf of Mexico
    10. Annual Foraging Patterns of the Maya Bee Melipona beecheii (Bennett, 1831) in Quintana Roo, Mexico
    11. Crop Pollination by Stingless Bees
    12. Stingless Bees as Potential Pollinators in Agroecosystems in Argentina: Inferences from Pot-Pollen Studies in Natural Environments
    SECTION 2 Biodiversity, Behavior and Microorganisms of the Stingless Bees (Meliponini)
    13. Stingless bees (Hymenoptera: Apoidea: Meliponini) from Gabon
    14. Pushing 100 Species: Meliponines (Apidae: Meliponini) in a Parcel of Western Amazonian Forest at Yasuní Biosphere Reserve, Ecuador
    15. Diversity of Stingless Bees in Ecuador, Pot-Pollen Standards and Meliponiculture Fostering a Living Museum for Meliponini of the World
    16. Nesting Ecology of Stingless Bees in Africa
    17. On the Trophic Niche of Bees in Cerrado Areas of Brazil and Yeasts in their Stored Pollen
    18. A Review of the Artificial Diets Used as Pot-Pollen Substitutes
    19. Yeast and Bacterial Composition in Pot-Pollen Recovered from Meliponini in Colombia: Prospects for a Promising Biological Resource
    SECTION 3 Stingless Bees in Culture and Traditions
    20. Cultural, Psychological and Organoleptic Factors Related to the Use of Stingless Bees by Rural Residents of Northern Misiones, Argentina
    21. The Maya Universe in a Pollen Pot Native Stingless Bees in Precolumbian Maya Art
    SECTION 4 Chemical Composition, Bioactivity and Biodiversity of Pot-Pollen
    22. Nutritional Composition of Pot-Pollen from Four Species of Stingless Bees (Meliponini) in South East Asia
    23. Characterization of Scaptotrigona mexicana Pot-Pollen from Veracruz, Mexico
    24. Chemical Characterization and Bioactivity of Tetragonisca angustula Pot-Pollen from Mérida, Venezuela
    25. Chemical, Microbiological and Palynological composition of the 'Samburá' Melipona scutellaris Pot-Pollen
    26. Characterization of Pot-Pollen from Southern Venezuela
    27. Bioactivity and Botanical Origin of Austroplebeia and Tetragonula Australian Pot-Pollen
    28. Antibacterial Activity of Ethanolic Extracts of Pot-Pollen from Eight Meliponine Species from Venezuela
    29. Metabolomics of Pot-Pollen from Three Species of Australian Stingless Bees (Meliponini)
    SECTION 6 Marketing and Standards of Pot-Pollen
    30. Rural-Urban Meliponiculture and Ecosystems in Neotropical areas. Scaptotrigona, a Resilient Stingless Bee?
    31. Pot-Pollen "Samburá" Marketing in Brazil, and Suggested Legisation
    APPENDIX A Ethnic Names of Stingless Bees
    APPENDIX B Microorganisms Associated with Stingless Bees or Used to Test Antimicrobial Activity (AM)
    APPENDIX C Taxonomic Index of Bees
    APPENDIX D List of Bee Taxa
    APPENDIX E Taxonomic Index of Plant Families
    APPENDIX F Microorganisms Associated to Stingless Bees or Used to Test Antimicrobial Activity
    INDEX.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    John E. Bradshaw.
    Summary: The potato (Solanum tuberosum) is the world's fourth most important food crop after maize, rice and wheat with 377 million tonnes fresh-weight of tubers produced in 2016 from 19.2 million hectares of land, in 163 countries, giving a global average yield of 19.6 t ha-1 (http://faostat.fao.org). About 62% of production (234 million tonnes) was in Asia (191), Africa (25) and Latin America (18) as a result of steady increases in recent years, particularly in China and India. As a major food crop, the potato has an important role to play in the United Nations Agenda for Sustainable Development which started on 1 January 2016 (http://faostat.fao.org). By 2030 the aim is to insure access by all people, in particular the poor and people in vulnerable situations, including infants, to safe, nutritious and sufficient food all year round. By then, the world population is expected to reach 8.5 billion and continue to increase to 9.7 billion in 2050. For potatoes, the need is to increase production and improve nutritional value during a period of climate change, a key aspect of which will be the breeding of new cultivars for a wide range of target environments and consumers. The aim of the book is to help this endeavour by providing detailed information in three parts on both the theory and practice of potato breeding. Part I deals with the history of potato improvement and with potato genetics. Part II deals with breeding objectives, divided into improving yield, quality traits and resistance to the most important diseases and pests of potatoes. Part III deals with breeding methods: first, the use of landraces and wild relatives of potato in introgression breeding, base broadening and population improvement; second, breeding clonally propagated cultivars as a way to deliver potato improvement to farmers' fields; third, as an alternative, breeding potato cultivars for propagation through true potato seed; and fourth, gene editing and genetic transformation as ways of making further improvements to already successful and widely grown cultivars. Included are marker-assisted introgression and selection of specific alleles, genomic selection of many unspecified alleles and diploid F1 hybrid breeding.

    Contents:
    1. Domestication to 21st century cultivars (i.e. historical introduction but including some modern analysis)
    2. Need for new cultivars (FAO objectives, yield gap, nutritional value, ideotypes, climate change, end uses and target environments)
    3. Utilization of germplasm: wild relatives, land races and modern cultivars (recent molecular studies and genetic structure of landraces, revised taxonomy of wild relatives)
    4. Utilization of genes and their alleles (major genes, QTLs of large effect and polygenes)
    5. Introgression breeding (diploid, tetraploid and marker-assisted)
    6. Population improvement (diploid and tetraploid, base broadening, combining major genes and QTLs and combining polygenes through genomic selection)
    7. Breeding clonally propagated cultivars (diploid and tetraploid, multistage and multi-trait selection)
    8. Seed-tuber production (including problems faced by poor farmers in developing countries
    9. Breeding TPS propagated cultivars (diploid and tetraploid)
    10. Breeding diploid F1 hybrids for TPS propagation
    11. Genetically modified potatoes
    12. Breeding for disease and pest resistance (theory, practice and problems)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Hugo Campos, Oscar Ortiz, editors.
    Summary: This book is open access under a CC BY 4.0 license. This book provides a fresh, updated and science-based perspective on the current status and prospects of the diverse array of topics related to the potato, and was written by distinguished scientists with hands-on global experience in research aspects related to potato. The potato is the third most important global food crop in terms of consumption. Being the only vegetatively propagated species among the world's main five staple crops creates both issues and opportunities for the potato: on the one hand, this constrains the speed of its geographic expansion and its options for international commercialization and distribution when compared with commodity crops such as maize, wheat or rice. On the other, it provides an effective insulation against speculation and unforeseen spikes in commodity prices, since the potato does not represent a good traded on global markets. These two factors highlight the underappreciated and underrated role of the potato as a dependable nutrition security crop, one that can mitigate turmoil in world food supply and demand and political instability in some developing countries. Increasingly, the global role of the potato has expanded from a profitable crop in developing countries to a crop providing income and nutrition security in developing ones. This book will appeal to academics and students of crop sciences, but also policy makers and other stakeholders involved in the potato and its contribution to humankind's food security.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Global Food Security, Contributions from Sustainable Potato Agri-Food Systems
    The Potato and its Contribution to the Human Diet
    Enhancing Value Chains through Collective Actions: Lessons From the Andes, Africa and Asia
    Ex situ Conservation of Potato [Solanum Section Petota (Solanaceae)] Genetic Resources in Genebanks
    The Genes and Genomes of the Potato
    Potato Breeding
    Genetics and Cytogenetics of Potato
    Insect Pests Affecting Potatoes in Tropical, Subtropical and Temperate Regions
    Fungal, Oomycete and Plasmodiophorid Diseases of Potato
    Bacterial Diseases of Potato
    Viral Diseases in Potato
    Potato Seed Systems
    Participatory Research (PR) at CIP with Potato Farming Systems in the Andes: Evolution and Prospects
    Gender Topics on Potato Research and Development
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jeffrey C. Stark, Mike Thornton, Phillip Nolte, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive guide to potato production systems management contains 20 chapters and more than 350 color photographs. Beginning with the history of potato culture, it spans all aspects of potato production, pest and planting management, storage, and marketing. Written by a team of over 35 scientists from North America, this book offers updated research-based information and serves as a unique, valuable tool for researchers, extension specialists, students, and farm managers. More than a description of principles, it contains practical analytical tools, charts, and methods to create guidelines for best production practices and cost estimates. Some key areas include: Potato Growth and Development, Potato Variety Selection and Management, Seed and Planting Management, Seed Production and Certification, Field Selection, Crop Rotation, and Soil Management, Integrated Pest Management for Potatoes, Potato Nutrient Management, Irrigation Management, Tuber Quality, Economics and Marketing, Production Costs, among others. Potato Production Systems should be a valuable reference for successful culture of the "noble tuber."

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Chapter 1: A Short History of Potato Production Systems
    Introduction
    History
    Production Principles
    Crop Rotation
    Soil Fertility
    Soil Preparation
    Irrigation
    Hilling
    Cultivar Improvement and Selection
    Seed Management
    Pest Control
    Harvest
    Storage
    Processing
    Exchange
    References
    Chapter 2: Potato Growth and Development
    Introduction
    Characteristics
    Below-Ground Structures
    Sprouts
    Roots
    Stolons
    Tubers
    Internal Structures
    External Structures
    Above-Ground Structures Chieftain
    Norland
    Red LaSoda
    Specialty Varieties for the Fresh Market (Yellow Flesh) (Figs. 3.17 & 3.18)
    Yukon Gem
    Yukon Gold
    Chapter 4: Seed Potato Production and Certification
    Introduction
    Seed Certification
    Seed Potato Production
    Introductory Materials
    Nuclear Material
    Production Systems
    Transplanting
    Fertilization
    Harvest and Storage of Pre-Nuclear Tubers
    Certification of Greenhouse Crops
    Field Production of Certified Seed Potatoes
    Cultural Practices for the Field Production of Seed Potatoes
    Isolation
    Selection of Planting Stocks Planting Stocks for Early-Generation Production
    Later Generation Increases
    Units of Production
    Planting and Nutrition
    Disease and Insect Control
    Vine Killing
    Harvesting and Storage
    Chapter 5: Field Selection, Crop Rotations, and Soil Management
    Introduction
    Field Selection
    Soil Health
    Soil Texture and Organic Matter
    Soil Compaction
    Topography
    Soil Chemical Characteristics
    Soil pH
    Cation Exchange Capacity
    Soil Salinity
    Sodicity
    Field History
    Crop Rotations
    Cover Crops and Green Manures
    Crop Sequences in Potato Cropping Systems Russet Varieties for Fresh Use or French Fry Processing (Figs. 3.1-3.4)
    Blazer Russet
    Clearwater Russet
    Russet Burbank
    Teton Russet
    Russet Varieties for French Fry Processing (Figs. 3.5 & 3.6)
    Ranger Russet
    Umatilla Russet
    Russet Varieties for Fresh Use (Figs. 3.7 & 3.8)
    Goldrush
    Russet Norkotah
    Long White Varieties for Processing (Figs. 3.9 & 3.10)
    Alturas
    Shepody
    Round White Varieties for Processing into Chips (Figs. 3.11-3.13)
    Atlantic
    Dakota Pearl
    Snowden
    Specialty Varieties for the Fresh Market (Red Flesh) (Figs. 3.14-3.16) Stems and Leaves
    Flowers
    Growth Stages
    Sprout Development (Growth Stage I)
    Plant Establishment (Growth Stage II)
    Tuber Initiation (Growth Stage III)
    Tuber Bulking (Growth Stage IV)
    Maturation (Growth Stage V)
    Growth Habit
    Impact of Management at Each Growth Stage
    Seed Physiological Age
    Plant Spacing
    Fertilization
    Irrigation
    Pest Management
    References
    Chapter 3: Variety Selection and Management
    Introduction
    The Purpose of Potato Variety Development
    Potato Market Classes
    Widely Grown, Commercially Available Varieties
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sergey V. Zhevora, Boris V. Anisimov, editors.
    Summary: This book comprises the best potato seed production practices and includes details on potato cultivation, classification, and the main structural elements of the successive stages of potato seed production. It presents potato varieties from Russian originators, describes modern technologies involved in the process of potato seed production, and presents special aspects of phytosanitary and process regulations for the cultivation of high-quality potato seed. Additionally, the authors illustrate the statutory regulation of salable quality of potato seed: purity of variety, diseases, pests, and defects. The authors identify Russian quality control methods and certification of potato seed, and consider the packaging and labeling of potato seed that is held for sale. Finally, the authors also clarify the features of foreign potato seed certification systems.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Russian Potato Growing History
    Potato Consumption Patterns, Crop Acreage, Bulk Yields, Yielding Capacity and Priority Lines of Innovative Development
    Technologies for Clonal Propagation of Healthy Parent in Vitro Material and in Vitro Microtuber Growth
    Technologies for Growing Minitubers
    Production of Potato Seed: Potato Breeding Using True Seeds
    Selection of Special Protected Territories with Favorable Natural, Climatic and Phytosanitary Conditions
    Basic Agronomical and Protective Techniques Used in Potato Seed Production
    Authenticity and Purity of a Variety
    Potato Bacterioses
    Defects Caused by Physiological Disorders Under Abnormal Conditions
    Quality Standards for Various Potato Seed Categories
    Soil Control of Varieties
    Bibliography
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Peter J. Hotez.
    Summary: While COVID-19 has ravaged global economies and changed the way of life for us all, the disease has a disproportionately devastating impact on poorer communities. For the millions without a job because of community shut downs, decisions about basic necessities and the fear of healthcare costs for those diagnosed with the novel coronavirus become critical. In these uncertain times, international diplomacy, solidarity, and cooperation are vital. Dr. Peter Hotez, dean of the National School of Tropical Medicine at Baylor College of Medicine, provides an essential look at the global issue of health and poverty through the lens of COVID-19. He introduces a new global paradigm known as "blue marble health," through which he asserts that poor people living in wealthy countries account for most of the world's poverty-related illness. He explores the current state of neglected diseases in both China and the United States. By crafting public policy and relying on global partnerships to control or eliminate some of the world's worst poverty-related illnesses, Hotez believes, it is possible to eliminate life-threatening disease while at the same time creating unprecedented opportunities for science and diplomacy. Urgent, timely, and compassionate, this excerpted edition of Hotez's wide-sweeping Blue Marble Health serves as a timely guide for anyone committed to helping the millions of people who are facing the visceral threats of both poverty and COVID-19.

    Contents:
    Information about Blue Marble Health
    Table of Contents
    What is Blue Marble Health? Introduction: COVID-19 and the Blue Marble
    China
    The United States of America
    The G20
    A Framework for Science and Vaccine Diplomacy.
    Digital Access Project MUSE 2020
  • Digital
    Govin Singh Saharan, Naresh K. Mehta, Prabhu Dayal Meena.
    Summary: Powdery mildew disease is the fourth most widespread disease in cruciferous crops and a devastating effect, causing significant losses in terms of quality and quantity in rapeseed and mustard. Powdery mildews are also a favourable host-pathosystem model for basic research on host-parasite interactions, developmental morphology, cytology, and molecular biology to identify the effector proteins/genes governing different biological functions. This book provides a comprehensive overview of all the published information in the field for researchers, teachers, students, extension experts, industrialists and farmers, and includes illustrations, photographs, graphs, figures, tables, histograms, micrographs, electron micrographs, and flow charts to aid understanding. It also describes standardized reducible techniques. The book discusses each disease in detail, describing the distribution, symptomatology, host range, yield losses and disease assessment, as well as the taxonomy, morphology, phylogeny, variability, sporulation, survival and perpetuation of the pathogen. Further, it explores topics such as spore germination; infection; pathogenesis; disease cycle; epidemiology; forecasting; fine structures; host resistance; biochemical, histological, genetic and molecular aspects such as cloning and mapping of R genes; sources of resistance; disease resistance breeding; and the genetics of host-parasite interactions and disease management.

    Contents:
    1) Powdery Mildew Perspective
    2)The Disease- Powdery mildew
    3) The Pathogen
    4) Infection, Pathogenesis, and Disease cycle
    5) Fine Structures, and Electron Microscopy
    6) Epidemiology, and Forecasting
    7) Host Resistance
    8) Disease Management
    9) Techniques
    10) Powdery mildew epilogue
    11) Future research priorities of crucifer's powdery mildew
    12) Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Irwin W. Sherman.
    Summary: This book presents an historical account of how plagues past and present have shaped the outcome of wars and altered the course of medicine, religion, education, feudalism, and science. Cholera gave birth to the field of epidemiology. The bubonic plague epidemic that began in 1346 led to the formation of universities in cities far from the major centers of learning (and hot spots of the Black Death) at that time. Pathogens are not the only stars of this book. Many scientists and physicians who toiled to treat and prevent these plagues are also featured. This edition also covers modern disease.

    Contents:
    The nature of plagues
    Plagues, the price of being sedentary
    Six plagues of antiquity
    An ancient plague, the black death
    A 21st century plague, AIDS
    Typhus, a fever plague
    Malaria, another fever plague
    King cholera
    Smallpox, the spotted plague
    Preventing plagues: immunization
    The plague protectors: antisepsis to antibiotics
    The great pox syphilis
    The people's plague: tuberculosis
    Leprosy, the striking hand of God
    Six plagues of Africa
    Emerging and re-emerging plagues.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Jay J. Van Bavel, PhD, and Dominic J. Packer, PhD.
    Summary: Most people believe their identity is stable, but in fact it is constantly changing to reflect the interests of the groups you belong to. Van Bavel and Packer integrate their own cutting-edge research in psychology and neuroscience to explain how identity really works. They explain how to harness it to boost cooperation and productivity, lead effectively, and much more. Packed with fascinating insights, vivid case studies, and a wealth of pioneering research, their book will change the way you understand yourself-- and the people around you-- forever. -- adapted from jacket.

    Contents:
    Power of Us
    Lens of Identity
    Sharing Reality
    Escaping Echo Chambers
    Value of Identity
    Overcoming Bias
    Finding Solidarity
    Fostering Dissent
    Leading Effectively
    Future of Identity.
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    HM753 .V36 2021
    1
  • Digital
    Patty McCord.
    Summary: "When it comes to recruiting, motivating, and creating great teams, Patty McCord says most companies have it all wrong. McCord helped create the unique and high-performing culture at Netflix, where she was chief talent officer. In her new book, Powerful: Building a Culture of Freedom and Responsibility, she shares what she learned there and elsewhere in Silicon Valley. McCord advocates practicing radical honesty in the workplace, saying good-bye to employees who don't fit the company's emerging needs, and motivating with challenging work, not promises, perks, and bonus plans. She argues that the old standbys of corporate HR--annual performance reviews, retention plans, employee empowerment and engagement programs--often end up being a colossal waste of time and resources. Her road-tested advice, offered with humor and irreverence, provides readers a different path for creating a culture of high performance and profitability. Powerful will change how you think about work and the way a business should be run"--Dust jacket flap.

    Contents:
    Introduction. A new way of working : foster freedom and responsibility
    The greatest motivation is contributing to success : treat people like adults
    Every single employee should understand the business : communicate constantly about the challenge
    Humans hate being lied to and being spun : practice radical honesty
    Debate vigorously : cultivate strong opinions and argue about them only on the facts
    Build the company now that you want to be then : relentlessly focus on the future
    Someone really smart in every job : have the right person in every single position
    Pay people what they're worth to you : compensation is a judgment call
    The art of good good-byes : make needed changes fast, and be a great place to be from.
    Digital Access OverDrive 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
  • Digital
    American Academy of Family Physicians [and others] ; editors, David T. Bernhardt, William O. Roberts.
    Summary: This best-selling resource guides health care professionals through the preparticipation physical evaluation PPE process in the medical home for young athletes from middle school through college.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Joseph F. Maalouf, Francesco F. Faletra, Samuel J. Asirvatham, Krishnaswamy Chandrasekaran, editors.
    Summary: This extensive clinically focused book is a detailed practical 3D echocardiography imaging reference that addresses the concerns and needs of both the novice and experienced 3D echocardiographer. Chapters have been written in a highly instructive and practical disease- and problem-oriented approach supported by illustrative high-quality images (and corresponding 3D echo video clips where applicable) that demonstrate the incremental value of 3D echocardiography over 2D echocardiography in practice. Practical 3D Echocardiography is an intuitive guide to 3D imaging -- what to look for, how to look for it, the best and special views, caveats and pitfalls when applicable, and clinical pearls and pointers -- that can be used in daily practice. It is therefore of immense value to any practicing or trainee echocardiographer, cardiologist and internist.

    Contents:
    Part I. Basic, practical principles of 3D Echocardiography
    Imaging principles and acquisition modes
    Image optimization tools and image display
    3DE Color Doppler acquisition and optimization and 3DE artifacts, caveats, and pitfalls
    3DE Knobology: A practical guide to use of the available vendor platforms
    Part II. Native and Prosthetic Heart Valves
    3DE of Normal mitral valve: Image display and anatomic correlations
    3DE Spectrum of mitral valve prolapse
    Rheumatic mitral valve diseases and mitral annular calcification: Role of 3DE
    Role of 3DE in assessment of functional mitral regurgitation
    Incremental value of 3DE over 2DE in assessment of mitral clefts and other congenital mitral valve diseases
    3D color flow Doppler assessment of mitral regurgitation: Advantages over 2D color Doppler
    3DE anatomy of normal aortic valve and root. Image display and anatomic correlations
    3DE of the spectrum of native aortic valve and subvalvular diseases and pathological correlations
    Correlation of 3DE with CT and MRI in the diagnosis and assessment of valvular heart disease and new trends
    3DE appearance of the different types of normal mechanical and biological valves
    3DE assessment of the pathological spectrum of mitral prosthesis and sewing ring dysfunction: Incremental value over 2DE
    3DE assessment of pathological spectrum of aortic prosthesis dysfunction: Incremental value over 2DE
    Native and Prosthetic Valve Endocarditis: Incremental value of 3DE over 2DE
    CT and MRI correlations with 3DE in assessment of prosthetic valves including new trends
    Part III. Atria and Atrial Septum
    Normal 3DE anatomy of atrial septum: Image display and anatomical specimen correlations
    Atrial septal defects: 2DE vs 3DE and anatomic specimen
    CT and MRI correlations of atria and atrial septum
    Part IV. Ventricles and Ventricular Septum
    How to acquire and calculate 3D LV and RV volumes and ejection fraction (three vendors)
    Is 3D better than 2D during stress echo?
    Congenital and acquired ventricular septal defects
    CT and MRI of ventricles and ventricular septum
    Part V. Cardiac Masses
    Role of 3DE in assessment of cardiac masses: incremental value over 2DE
    Part VI. Role of 3DE in catheter-based structural heart disease interventions
    Atrial Interventions
    Ventricular interventions
    Edge-to-Edge mitral valve repair
    Periprosthetic leak repair
    Valve-in-valve/ring implantation
    Part VII. Role of 3DE in catheter –based electrophysiologic procedures
    The role of imaging techniques in electrophysiologic procedures
    The Role of CT and MRI in electrophysiologic procedures
    Part VIII. New Trends for 3DE in catheter-based Interventions
    Novel percutaneous techniques for mitral and tricuspid valve repair
    Echo-navigation
    Evolving role of 3D printing in guiding interventional procedures.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    C. Philip Larson Jr., Richard A. Jaffe.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Preoperative Evaluation
    Chapter 2. Induction of General Anesthesia
    Chapter 3. Role of the Laryngeal Mask Airway in Airway Management
    Chapter 4. Essentials of Airway Management
    Chapter 5. Laryngospasm: The Silent Menace
    Chapter 6. Cricothyrotomy: A Lesson to Be Learned
    Chapter 7. Bronchospasm vs. Bronchoconstriction: A Different View
    Chapter 8. Management of the Full Stomach
    Chapter 9. Nitrous Oxide
    Yea or Nay
    Chapter 10. Meperidine: A Forgotten Jewel
    Chapter 11. Sevoflurane: The Best Volatile Anesthetic Ever Developed
    Chapter 12. The Bariatric Challenge
    Chapter 13. Preventing Ischemic Optic Neuropathy during Posterior Spine Surgery
    Chapter 14. Continuous Spinal Anesthesia: A Lost Art
    Chapter 15. Epidural Anesthesia: The Best Technique
    Chapter 16. An Incendiary Issue: Avoiding Operating Room Fires
    Chapter 17. Tension Pneumothorax
    Chapter 18. Tips on Blood-Gas Analysis
    Chapter 19. Preoxygenation
    Chapter 20. Diffusion Hypoxia.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Janine Brooks, Helen Caton-Hughes.
    Summary: "Mentoring is becoming more widely recognised within dentistry as a tool to enhance performance, motivation and well-being. Key national dental organisations promote mentoring. This includes the General Dental Council (2019) where mentoring is noted as a tool for peer learning and the facilitation of sharing experience and expertise. Mentoring is also identified as a long-term relationship that can contribute to an individual's sustained performance over a period of years. Coaching is less well known within the profession, indeed within healthcare generally, certainly at the level of the practitioner. Where coaching is recognised, it is often in a remedial context and because of that, it has been slow to take root. The use of mentoring and coaching as developmental tools is also less well understood, yet there is anecdotal evidence of their value to individuals, teams and organisations. This is a practically focused book showcasing uses of coaching and mentoring within the dental profession in the UK. It will include underlying theory and models; however, the main purpose is to demonstrate examples of how coaching and mentoring make a real difference to service provision. The impact and benefits of using a coaching and mentoring approach range widely to include individual dental professionals, patients, the team and the organisation. Skills that coach/mentors need to develop and hone are included. The book will also promote the importance of mentors receiving training before they begin to use the tools with other individuals. This will include a consideration of the differing methodologies employed in developing and delivering training and the acquisition of qualification"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Mentoring
    Coaching
    The Forton Model
    Practical case studies
    Discussion.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Sarah Pitts, Catherine M. Gordon, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive book thoroughly covers bone health in the adolescent, offering evidence-based guidance for clinical care in the primary care setting, and includes aspects of endocrinology, nutrition, radiology, sports medicine, and rehabilitation. A Practical Approach to Adolescent Bone Health begins with an in-depth review of normal bone physiology, and explains how to optimize bone mass accrual in the healthy adolescent. The following chapters detail the importance of nutrition and physical activity to the skeletal system, while later chapters provide a bone-centric review of clinical history taking, the physical examination, laboratory assessment, and imaging to evaluate bone health. Final chapters delve into providing comprehensive care for specific conditions commonly found in the adolescent, including adolescents with multiple fractures, eating disorders, athletic involvement, chronic illness, various ambulatory limitations, and bone fragility. Clinical vignettes are woven into chapters throughout the book, providing real-world application and highlighting key concepts for practitioners. A Practical Approach to Adolescent Bone Health is a unique resource,and ideal for the primary care clinician, including pediatricians, adolescent medicine specialists, and family medicine physicians, as well as endocrinologists, orthopedic surgeons, and any other practitioner working to guide adolescents towards optimal bone health.

    Contents:
    1. Optimizing Bone Mass Accrual in Healthy Adolescents
    2. Normal Bone Physiology 101
    3. Optimizing Nutrition to Promote Adolescent Bone Health
    4. Physical activity to promote bone health in adolescents
    5. The Bone Health History and Physical Examination in Adolescents
    6. Bone Health Laboratory Assessments
    7. Imaging to Evaluate Bone Health
    8. Bone Health in Adolescents with Multiple Fractures
    9. Bone Health in Adolescents with Eating Disorders
    10. Bone Health of Adolescent Athletes
    11. Bone Health in Adolescents with Chronic Disease
    12. Bone Health in Immobile Adolescents
    13. Treatment of Adolescent osteoporosis
    14. Conclusion: A Clinical Bone Perspective.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Yasushi Sugawara.
    Summary: Difficulty in rhinoplasty takes two forms: the aesthetic and the technical. Rhinoplasty surgeons need a sense of beauty to design the target shape. This shape must comply with the patient's demands, which, however, are often obscure, ambiguous, or inconsistent; thus even the greatest rhinoplasty surgeons have unhappy patients. The only appropriate approach is to suggest two or three shapes that suit the patient's appearance and expectations, and ask the patient to choose between them. Of course, these suggestions must be precise, visualized, and specific. The technical difficulty, on the other hand, lies in assessing the anatomical character of the patient's problem and selecting the procedure that will achieve the desired shape and the means to perform that procedure. This textbook is designed to help all readers: - Make accurate diagnoses by learning morphology based on varied anatomy - Simulate the target shape employing generally used retouch software - Suggest to patients different potential target shapes - Learn how to choose the appropriate procedure in order to produce the selected target shape It is the authors' hope that readers will find this textbook an invaluable aid in the performance of rhinoplasties which are not merely based on the surgeon's "taste" but rather take into account the individual patient's requirements and achieve aesthetic results that guarantee patient satisfaction.

    Contents:
    Clinical Anatomy
    The Presurgical Workflow
    Basic Surgical Techniques
    Dorsal Augmentation or Height Reduction
    Altering the Nasal Tip
    Alar and Pedestals
    Cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Curtis L. Baysinger, MD, Professor of Anesthesiology, Division of Obstetric Anesthesia, Department of Anesthesiology, Vanderbilt University School of Medicine, Nashville, Tennessee, Brenda A. Bucklin, MD, Professor of Anesthesiology, Assistant Dean, Clinical Core Curriculum, University of California School of Medicine, Aurora, Colorado, David R. Gambling, MB, BS, FRCP, Staff Anesthesiologist, Sharp Mary Birch Hospital for Women and Newborns, Clinical Professor (Voluntary), Department of Anesthesiology, University of California San Diego (UCSD), San Diego, California.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Dedication
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contributors
    Section I: Pharmacology and Physiology
    1 Physiologic Changes of Pregnancy
    2 Uteroplacental Anatomy, Blood Flow, Respiratory Gas Exchange, Drug Transfer, and Teratogenicity
    3 Local Anesthetics and Toxicity
    4 Obstetric Medications
    Section II: Antepartum Considerations
    5 Ethical and Legal Considerations in Obstetric Anesthesia
    6 Nonobstetric Surgery during Pregnancy
    Section III: Labor and Delivery
    7. Fetal Assessment and Monitoring
    8 Maternal Infection and Fever
    9 Non-neuraxial Analgesic Techniques
    10 Choice of Neuraxial Analgesia and Local Anesthetics
    11 Ultrasound and Echocardiographic Techniques in Obstetric Anesthesia
    12 Impact of Neuraxial Analgesia on Obstetric Outcomes
    13 Anesthetic Considerations for Women Receiving Cesarean Delivery
    14 Difficult Airway Management in the Pregnant Patient
    15 Anesthesia for Multiple Gestation and Breech Presentation
    16 Obstetric Emergencies
    17 Newborn Resuscitation
    Section IV: Postpartum Issues
    18 Postcesarean Analgesia
    19 Management of Postdural Puncture Headache
    20 Neurologic Deficits Following Labor and Delivery
    21 Postpartum Tubal Ligation
    Section V: Disease States
    22 Hypertensive Disorders of Pregnancy
    23 Endocrine Disorders
    24 Thrombophilias/Coagulopathies
    25 Cardiac Disease in the Obstetric Patient
    26 Neurologic and Neuromuscular Disease
    27 Renal and Hepatic Disease in the Pregnant Patient
    28 Obstetric Anesthesia for Parturients with Respiratory Diseases
    29 Obesity and Pregnancy
    30 Trauma in the Obstetric Patient
    31 Management of the Opioid Dependent Parturient
    32 Maternal Morbidity and Mortality
    Section VI: Guidelines From National Organizations
    33 Guidelines from National Organizations
    Index.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2016
  • Digital
    Robert S. Holzman, MD, MA (Hon.), FAAP, Professor of Anesthesia, Harvard Medical School, Senior Associate in Perioperative Anesthesia, Department of Anesthesiology, Perioperative and Pain Medicine, Boston Children's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Thomas J. Mancuso, MD, FAAP, Associate Professor, Department of Anesthesia, Harvard Medical School, Senior Associate in Perioperative Anesthesia, Pain Management and Critical Care Medicine, Department of Anesthesiology, Perioperative and Pain Medicine, Boston Children's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, David M. Polaner, MD, FAAP, Professor of Anesthesiology and Pediatrics, University of Colorado, Director of Transplant Anesthesia, Anesthesia Informatics, the Children's Hospital, Denver, Aurora, Colorado.
    Contents:
    Fundamental differences between children and adults
    Developmental pharmacology
    General preoperative evaluation and consultative pediatric anesthesia
    Risk management, assessment and quality improvement
    Ethical and legal considerations in pediatric anesthesia
    Anesthetic equipment and facilities
    Management of general anesthesia
    Regional anesthesia
    Postanesthetic recovery
    Pediatric pain management
    Systems-based pediatric anesthesia
    Healing and recovery in pediatric surgery
    Training and education in pediatric anesthesiology: a developmental approach
    The Central nervous system: pediatric neuroanesthesia
    The Eye: pediatric ophthalmological surgery
    The Head and neck: specialty and multidisciplinary surgery
    The Body cavity and wall
    The Cardiovascular system
    Vascular biology and vascular anomalies
    Gut development: surgical and anesthetic implications
    The Foregut and chest
    The Midgut
    The Hindgut
    Abdominal tumors
    The Urogenital system
    The Musculoskeletal system and orthopedic surgery
    Integumentary system
    Hematopoietic system
    Endocrine disease
    Neuromuscular disorders
    Metabolic diseases and inborn errors of metabolism
    Abnormalities of the immune response and infection
    Fetal medicine and anesthesia for fetal surgery
    Delivery room issues and resuscitation of the newborn
    Pediatric resuscitation
    Anesthesia for the preterm newborn
    Minimally invasive surgery
    Solid organ and bone marrow transplantation
    Anesthesia outside the operating room
    Trauma and casualty management
    Anesthesia and childhood obesity
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Joseph M. Neal, De Q.H. Tran, Francis V. Salinas ; editor of the previous editions, Michael F. Mulroy.
    Contents:
    Regional anesthesia systems / Edward R. Mariano
    Equipment / Andrew T. Gray
    Ultrasound-guided regional anesthesia / Michael D. Herrick and Brian D. Sites
    Premedication, monitoring, and multimodal analgesia / Rebecca Lee Johnson and Michael F. Mulroy
    Local anesthetic pharmacology / Francis V. Salinas
    Spinal anesthesia / Francis V. Salinas and De Q.H. Tran
    Epidural anesthesia and analgesia / De Q.H. Tran and Julian Aliste
    Upper extremity blocks / De Q.H. Tran and Joseph M. Neal
    Intravenous regional anesthesia / Joseph M. Neal and Susan B. McDonald
    Lower extremity : lumbar plexus blocks / Francis V. Salinas
    Lower extremity : sacral plexus blocks / Francis V. Salinas
    Truncal blocks / Ki Jinn Chin and Monica Liu
    Head and neck blocks / Roderick J. Finlayson
    Complications associated with regional anesthesia / Joseph M. Neal
    Pediatric regional anesthesia / Kathleen Larkin McGinn
    Acute pain medicine / Kevin E. Vorenkamp and Christine L. Oryhan.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Print
    editor, Stephan U. Schuele.
    Summary: "The book is a complete and practical guide to thinking and doing SEEG which will be a solid reference to practitioners around the world. It starts with a review of the main non-invasive pre-implantation investigations and how they inform the selection of patients and the implantation scheme. It proceeds to implantation techniques and issues specific to the different brain regions, including the complex question of temporal-plus epilepsies and investigation of regions that were practically impossible to reach with subdural electrodes such as the insula. The problem is then attacked according to the different types of epileptogenic lesions; as examples, the tuberous sclerosis complex and periventricular nodular heterotopia can only be investigated with SEEG. The critical importance given by the French and Italian epilepsy schools to the relation between a very carefully observed clinical symptomatology and functional anatomy is evident throughout this book"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Cover
    Title
    Copyright
    Contents
    Contributors
    Foreword
    Preface
    Abbreviations
    Section I: Introduction
    Chapter 1: The History and Principles of Stereo EEG
    The Prestereo EEG Era
    Laying the Foundation
    Conceptualization of Stereo EEG
    Technical Requirements
    From Comprehensive Brain Sampling to Rational Surgery
    The Stereo EEG Scriptures
    Summary
    Key References
    Section II: Noninvasive Evaluation
    Chapter 2: Phase I Evaluation
    Key Concepts
    Introduction
    Symptomatogenic Zone
    Irritative Zone
    Ictal Onset Zone
    Epileptogenic Lesion Functional Deficit Zone
    Eloquent Cortex
    Epileptogenic Zone and Surgical Planning
    Summary
    Key References
    Chapter 3: Advanced MRI Imaging
    Key Concepts
    Introduction
    An Optimized MRI Epilepsy Protocol
    What MRI "Can See"
    MRI for Identifying Lesions in Mesial Temporal Lobe Epilepsy
    MRI for Identifying Lesions in Neocortical Epilepsies
    The Future of MRI: a Role for Artificial Intelligence and Classifiers?
    Key References
    Chapter 4: Electromagnetic Source Imaging for Stereo EEG Planning
    Key Concepts
    Introduction and History Electrophysiological and Modelling Basis of Magnetoencephalography
    Advantages of Magnetoencephalography for Guidance Of stereo EEG Implantation
    Practical Use of Magnetoencephalography in Preimplantation Planning for Stereo EEG
    Ictal Magnetoencephalography
    Cautions and Limitations
    Summary
    Key References
    Chapter 5: Nuclear Imaging
    Key Concepts
    Introduction
    Single-Photon Emission Computed Tomography
    PET
    Case Examples
    Summary
    Key References
    Chapter 6: Patient Selection for Stereo EEG
    Key Concepts
    Introduction
    Developing a Hypothesis Invasive Monitoring
    Stereo EEG Versus Subdural Grid Implantation
    Indications for Stereo EEG
    Summary
    Key References
    Section III: Technical Aspects
    Chapter 7: Electrodes
    Key Concepts
    Introduction
    Electrode Materials
    Electrode Parameters
    Imaging Compatibility
    Electrode Manufacturers
    Summary
    Key References
    Chapter 8: Coregistration of Multimodal Imaging
    Key Concepts
    Introduction
    Importance of Multimodal Image Coregistration in Stereo EEG
    Identification of Structural Cerebral Abnormalities
    Localization of Epileptic Activity Presurgical Mapping of Eloquent Cortex
    Illustrative Case
    Summary
    Key References
    Chapter 9: Invasive Monitoring
    Key Concepts
    Introduction
    Technical Aspects
    Video-SEEG Monitoring: Early Management
    Patient's Care and Safety Procedures
    Interictal and Ictal Recordings
    Activation Procedures
    Intracerebral Stimulations
    Summary
    Key References
    Section IV: Electrode Placement
    Chapter 10: The Epileptogenic Zone: A Critical Reconstruction
    Key Concepts
    Introduction
    Different Methods, Different Meaning
    What Is Seizure Onset? From Focus to Network
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    editors, Albert C. Perrino, Jr., Scott T. Reeves.
    Contents:
    Principles and technology of two-dimensional echocardiography
    Two-dimensional examination
    Left ventricular systolic performance and pathology
    Diagnosis of myocardial ischemia
    Doppler technology and technique
    Quantitative Doppler and hemodynamics
    A practical approach to the echocardiographic evaluation of ventricular diastolic function
    Mitral regurgitation
    Mitral valve stenosis
    Mitral valve repair
    Aortic regurgitation
    Aortic stenosis
    Prosthetic valves
    Right ventricle
    Transesophageal echocardiography for coronary revascularization
    Echocardiography for percutaneous aortic valve and mitral clip implantation
    Transesophageal echocardiography of the thoracic aorta
    Critical care echocardiography
    Transesophageal echocardiography for congenital heart disease in the adult
    Cardiac masses and embolic sources
    3D TEE imaging
    Common artifacts and pitfalls of clinical echocardiography
    Techniques and tricks for optimizing transesophageal images.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    Joachim W. Fluhr, editor.
    Summary: Skin physiology assessment is moving from a descriptive approach to a deeper understanding of biophysical and biochemical processes in the stratum corneum, such as epidermal barrier function and stratum corneum hydration. New, non-invasive approaches offer reliable and reproducible methods for product testing in the pharmaceutical and cosmetic industry, as well as in basic research. While standard instruments focus on functional aspects, innovative devices offer a deeper understanding of underlying mechanisms. This book discusses the assessment of skin physiology and of skin functions in clinical studies using non-invasive biophysical instruments, offering readers a comprehensive guide to planning, performing and evaluating the results of scientific studies in skin measurement and the legal framework for these studies. Written by leading experts in the field, it focuses on practical aspects of non-invasive measurements. After introducing the legal aspects of the current framework for clinical cosmetic studies and basic research in cosmetology, it explores the technical practicalities of organizing a testing lab and the pre-requirements for planning a study. The third and main section addresses specific topics in cosmetic testing e.g. skin hydration, and also includes chapters on sensory aspects and in vivo skin structure vizualization. This new, updated edition of Practical Aspects of Cosmetic Testing is a valuable tool for researchers, students, and medical staff wanting to gain insights into how best to assess skin functions in controlled studies using non-invasive biophysical instruments.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface to the Second Edition
    Preface to the First Edition
    Contents
    Part I: Legal Aspects of Cosmetic Testing
    Chapter 1: Regulatory Aspects
    1.1 Comparison Between General Cosmetic Legislation in Europe and Other Countries
    1.2 Recent Changes in European Cosmetic Regulation
    1.3 Important Weblinks
    1.3.1 European Union
    1.3.2 USA
    1.3.3 Canada
    1.3.4 Japan
    1.3.5 Mercosur Countries (Examples)
    1.3.6 ASEAN Countries (Example)
    1.3.7 South Africa
    1.3.8 China
    1.3.9 India
    1.4 Cosmetic Safety Testing 1.5 Responsibility Considerations for Planning and Conduct of a Cosmetic Safety Study
    1.6 Frequent Cosmetic Safety Study Models
    1.7 Cosmetic Efficacy Testing
    1.8 Cosmetic Labeling and Packaging
    References
    Chapter 2: Ethical Aspects of Cosmetic Testing
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Brief History of Research Ethics
    2.3 Ethical Aspects of Cosmetic Testing
    2.4 Ethical Aspects of Noninvasive Skin Measurements
    2.5 Essential Ethical Requirements for Performing a Study
    2.6 Other Considerations
    2.7 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Good Clinical Practice 3.1 Principles of GCP
    3.2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
    3.3 Study Design and Protocol Standards
    3.4 Conduct Standards
    3.5 Recording and Reporting Standards
    References
    Chapter 4: Guidelines in Skin Testing
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Skin Bioengineering Endeavour
    4.3 Validation of Methods and Instrumentations
    4.4 Standardization and Quality Controls
    4.5 Search for "Good Biometrological Practice"
    4.6 Guidelines in Perspective
    4.7 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: Claim Support: How to Create and Substantiate Claims 5.1 Introduction: Cosmetic Claims and Cosmetic Product Testing
    5.1.1 What Is a Cosmetic Claim?
    5.1.2 Borderline Claims
    5.2 The Process of Creating Cosmetic Claims
    5.2.1 Global or Regional
    5.2.2 Communication Style and Medium
    5.2.3 Consumer Factors
    5.3 Deciding How to Support a Claim
    5.3.1 Classifying Claims
    5.3.2 Level of Evidence
    5.3.2.1 Established and Widely Available Evidence
    5.3.2.2 Established Rationale But Requiring Specific Evidence
    5.3.2.3 Evidence Based Upon a Significant Advance in Science or Technology
    5.4 Generating Information to Support Claims 5.5 Presenting Information in Support of a Claim
    5.6 State of the Art
    5.7 Conclusion
    References
    Part II: General Aspects of Cosmetic Testing
    Chapter 6: Testing Laboratory
    6.1 Requirements for Accommodation and Arrangement
    6.1.1 Reception/Volunteer Recruitment Office
    6.1.2 Data Base/Subject File Room
    6.1.3 Waiting Area for Volunteers
    6.1.4 Room for Conducting General Volunteer Information Sessions
    6.1.5 Investigator's Office(s)/Examination Room(s)
    6.1.6 Testing Lab Room(s)
    6.1.7 Staff Office(s)
    6.1.8 Restrooms for Volunteers
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Damkerng Pathomvanich, Kenichiro Imagawa, editors ; with contributions by Robert Haber.
    Summary: This book comprehensively discusses the practical aspects of hair transplantation in Asians. The demand for hair transplantation has increased globally in recent years and Follicular Unit Extraction (FUE) is gaining popularity. As such the book examines the techniques used by different ethnic group in Asia, included shaving, non-shaving FUE and robotic hair restoration surgery. With the help of illustrations, it describes surgical techniques and provides numerous practical tips. Written by leading experts and offering an overview of the current state of the art of hair restoration surgery, it enables experienced surgeons in the field to achieve optimal outcomes and to improve patients' QOL. It is a must read for hair surgeons performing hair transplantation on members of the Asian population.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Simona Stolnicu, Isabel Alvarado-Cabrero, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the basic concepts for understanding and practicing breast pathology in routine practice. It explains how to tackle the diagnosis, emphasizing diagnostic clues for each entity as well as pitfalls and mimickers. Each chapter has concise, relevant text illustrated by numerous high-quality pictures highlighting the pearls and challenges in the diagnosis of breast lesions. Experts from around the world describe common and rarer conditions affecting the breast. Histology, immunohistochemistry, cytology, radiology and key morphologic criteria are covered. The book includes a chapter dedicated to breast normal histology, which is very important for understanding breast pathology, and a separate chapter for breast radiology, which is essential in understanding and diagnosing the breast lesions especially in a multidisciplinary team. Also, there is a chapter with the latest TNM staging system as well as the recently revised World Health Organization classification of breast tumors. Since in many breast units the cytology is still used to diagnose breast lesions there is a chapter dedicated to this technique. This book is aimed at trainees and practicing pathologists in surgical pathology, particularly those with an interest in breast pathology and those tackling the daily sign-out.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    W. Dean Wallace, Bita V. Naini.
    Contents:
    Histocompatibility and Immunogenetics for Solid Organ Transplantation
    Heart Transplant Pathology
    Lung Transplant Pathology
    Kidney Transplant Pathology
    Liver Transplant Pathology
    Small Bowel Transplant Pathology
    Vascularized Composite Tissue Transplant Pathology
    Pancreas Transplant Pathology
    Post-transplant Lymphoproliferative Disorder.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Allen M. Khakshooy, Francesco Chiappelli.
    Summary: There is an ever-increasing emphasis on evidence-based medicine that is distinguished by systematic crafting of the patient-centered research question, detailed literature searches, and careful appraisal of the resulting evidence. The consensus that ultimately emerges must then be applied in specific clinical settings, and it is to this process that translational effectiveness analysis refers. This portable and easy-to-use handbook is intended as a practical teaching guide on translational effectiveness for students and clinicians. Specifically, it will serve as a primer on patient-centered outcomes research methodology in the health sciences and explain how to acquire and understand the fundamental data that determine which reports are valued as the "best available" evidence. It presents an accessible and readily intelligible set of principles which doctors, dentists, nurses, and insurance carriers will be able to use in the process of health care-related decision-making. ​
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Yan Peng and Ping Tang.
    Summary: This comprehensive volume reviews current topics and controversies in diagnostic breast pathology, and addresses frequently encountered diagnostic problems using a question and answer format and case presentations. Emphasis is placed on the diagnostic approach as it relates to morphology, clinical and radiographic correlation, differential diagnosis, and ancillary testing including immunohistochemical and molecular analyses. Answers are provided and serve as a practical, evidence-based, and problem solving guide to diagnostic issues having significant impacts on clinical management. Common but diagnostically challenging entities such as papillary lesions and fibroepithelial lesions are discussed in detail, as well as special types of breast cancer including solid papillary carcinoma, lobular lesions and its variants. Uncommon breast lesions such as mesenchymal, lymphoid, and metastatic lesions are also covered. Chapters discuss genetic alterations and molecular abnormalities in breast cancer, and commonly encountered interpretation dilemmas on immunohistochemistry in breast cancer and metastatic cancer to the breast with a focus on prognostic and predictive tumor biomarkers.

    Contents:
    Intraductal Proliferative Disease of the Breast
    Invasive Ductal Carcinoma (NOS) of the Breast
    Invasive Carcinoma of the Breast: Special Types
    Lobular Breast Lesions
    Papillary Lesions of the Breast (IDP, IDPC, EPC, SPC)
    Fibroepothelial Lesions (Phyllodes Tumor and Fibroadenoma) of the Breast
    Immunohistochemistry in Breast Cancer
    Breast Cancer with Hereditary Cancer Predisposition Syndromes
    Mesenchymal and Lymphoid Lesions in the Breast
    Metastatic Cancer in the Breast.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Majid Maleki, Azin Alizadehasl, Majid Haghjoo.
    Contents:
    Evidence-based cardiology practice / Reza Yousefi-Nooraie, Parham Sadeghipour
    Evaluation of patients with cardiovascular problems / Majid Maleki
    Electrocardiography / Mohammad Javad Alemzadeh-Ansari
    Exercise stress testing / Sedigheh Saedi
    Echocardiography / Anita Sadegpour, Azin Alizadehasl
    Chest radiography in cardiovascular disease / Hamidreza Pouraliakbar
    Cardiac computed tomography / Hamidreza Pouraliakbar
    Cardiac magnetic resonance imaging / Hamid Mojibian, Hamidreza Pouraliakbar
    Nuclear cardiology / Hadi Malek
    Catheterization and angiography / Ali Zahedmehr
    Hemodynamic study / Nasim Naderi
    Heart failure and pulmonary hypertension / Nasim Naderi
    Tachyarrhythmias / Majid Haghjoo
    Cardiac implantable electronic devices / Majid Haghjoo
    Bradyarrhythmias / Majid Haghjoo
    Preventive cardiology / Majid Maleki, Zahra Hosseini
    Hypertension / Ali Zahedmehr
    Dyslipidemia / Reza Kiani
    ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction / Bahram Mohebbi
    Percutaneous coronary intervention / Ata Firouzi
    Transcatheter therapies for structural heart disease / Hamidreza Sanati
    Aortic disorders and their management / Omid Shafe
    Peripheral artery disease / Jamal Moosavi
    Cardiomyopathies and myocarditis / Nasim Naderi
    Valvular heart disease / Feridoun Noohi, Anita Sadeghpour, Azin Alizadehasl
    Infective endocarditis / Anita Sadeghpour, Azin Alizadehasl
    Pericardial disease / Anita Sadeghpour, Azin Alizadehasl
    Congenital heart disease / Zahra Khajali
    Venous thromboembolism / Farshad Shakerian, Parham Sadeghipour
    Cardiovascualr genetics / Nejat Mahdieh, Majid Maleki
    Renal disorders and cardiovascular disease / Samira Tabiban, Nasim Naderi
    Endocrine disorders and the cardiovascular system / Zahra Ghaemmaghami
    The heart and pulmonary diseases / Hasan Allah Sadeghi
    Cardiovascular drugs and hemostasis / Bahram Fariboz Farsad, Hanieh Salehi
    Stable ischemic heart disease / Majid Kyavar, Mohammad Javad Alemzadeh-Ansari
    Non-ST-segment elevation acute coronary syndromes / Hamidreza Sanati
    Anesthesia and sedation in cardiac patients / Rasoul Azarfarin
    Principles of cardiovascular surgery / Alireza Alizadeh Ghavidel, Saeid Hosseini.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Ragavendra R. Baliga, Kim A. Eagle.
    Summary: This thoroughly updated new edition of the classic practical textbook provides a user-friendly, authoritative guide to evaluation of common cardiovascular symptoms and evaluation and management of common cardiovascular conditions. Coverage also includes clinical challenges such as management of chronic anticoagulation, assessing and minimizing cardiac risk in noncardiac surgery, and management of the cardiac surgery patient. Numerous tables and algorithms help readers find information quickly and aid in clinical decision-making. Practical Cardiology, Evaluation and Treatment of Common Cardiovascular Disorders reflects the current American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association guidelines and provides a concise yet comprehensive handbook presents practical information on the common cardiovascular problems that clinicians encounter daily.

    Contents:
    Chest Pain
    Dyspnea
    Palpitations
    Edema
    Syncope
    Approach to Claudication
    Coronary Artery Disease
    Primary Prevention of Coronary Artery Disease
    Secondary Prevention of Coronary Artery Disease
    Stable Angina
    Unstable Angina
    Non-ST Elevation Myocardial Infarction
    Acute ST Elevation Myocardial Infarction
    Hypertension
    Primary Hypertension
    Approach to Secondary Hypertension
    Congestive Heart Failure
    Heart Failure Due to Left Ventricular Systolic Dysfunction
    Heart Failure with Preserved Systolic Function
    Arrhythmias
    Paroxysmal Supraventricular Tachycardia
    Atrial Fibrillation & Atrial Flutter
    Ventricular Tachycardia
    Bradycardia
    Valvular Heart Disease
    Infectious Endocarditis
    Mitral Regurgitation
    Aortic Regurgitation
    Mitral Stenosis
    Aortic Stenosis
    Tricuspid
    Pulmonary Valve Disease
    Pericardial Disease & Cardiac Neoplasms
    Acute Pericarditis
    Pericardial Effusion
    Pericardial Constriction
    Aortic & Major Vascular Diseases
    Abdominal Aortic Aneurysms
    Nondissecting Thoracic Aneurysms
    Aortic Dissection
    Cerebrovascular Disease
    Deep Venous Thrombosis
    Lower Extremity Ischemia
    Pulmonary Vascular Diseases
    Pulmonary Embolism
    Pulmonary Hypertension & Cor Pulmonale
    Diagnosis & Management
    Congenital Heart Disease in Adults
    Management of Chronic Anticoagulation
    Assessing & Minimizing Cardiac Risk of Noncardiac Surgery
    Management of the Cardiac Surgery Patient
    Complementary & Alternative Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Majid Maleki, Azin Alizadehasl, Majid Haghjoo.
    Summary: From basic clinical facts to new advanced guidelines, *Practical Cardiology: Principles and Approaches-covers all aspects of cardiology in one quick and current resource. *Packed with "useful" tips and "step-by-step" guidance, this updated second edition reviews new drugs, new invasive and noninvasive therapeutic approaches, and new developments in-cardiology foundations, imaging modalities, management approaches, and specific interventions for all common cardiovascular disease modalities-in all patient care settings. Offers-practical plans of action for all major cardiovascular topics and diseases. *Includes three "new chapters on electrophysiology" (including tracing interpretation); mechanisms, diagnoses, and therapies; and hypotension, syncope, and sudden cardiac death. *Features updated and expanded content throughout, including new findings, non-ST elevation in specific populations (elderly, women), diabetes in heart disease, and more. *Provides integrated key points "that offer" quick clinical summaries for all aspects of common cardiovascular conditions. *Contains more than "125 full-color" illustrations with many algorithms of diagnostic and therapeutic pathways. -- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Digital
    Tariq Malik, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on both the management of the pain as well as the pain patient and is formatted as a practical, evidence-based guide to managing chronic pain conditions. It meets the market need for a reference that aides physicians in understanding and improving chronic pain in their patients. Organized across 46 chapters, the book begins with an introduction on chronic pain evaluation, and specifically stresses the importance of complete patient evaluation including social and psychological evaluation. Subsequent chapters then start with an evaluation, medical and interventional options available, how and when to move from one option to another and the level of evidence offered for each intervention. These unique chapter elements provide the reader with a case-based approach to managing their patients. Additionally, a brief discussion of epidemiology and pathophysiology of the disease process is included and the technical aspects of interventional techniques are reviewed. Edited by a leader in the field with international contributing authors across pain medicine, Practical Chronic Pain Management this book is written primarily for anesthesiologists, pain specialists, rheumatologists, and primary care physicians.

    Contents:
    What Is the Prognosis of This Condition? Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: ABCs of Chronic Pain Evaluation
    Evaluating a Chronic Pain Patient
    History and Physical Examination
    Standard Questionnaires
    Pain Quality
    Functional Limitations
    Pain Coping Assessment/Behavioral Assessment
    Conclusion
    References
    2: A 40-Year-Old Woman with Chronic Recurrent Headache (Migraine)
    Case Description
    What Is Your Preliminary Diagnosis?
    How Is the Diagnosis Confirmed?
    What Is the Pathophysiology of This Condition?
    How Is This Problem Managed?
    Acute Treatment
    Preventive Therapy What Is the Prognosis of This Condition?
    Discussion
    Prevalence
    Differential Diagnosis
    Predictive Value of Different Clinical Features (Both on History and Physical Exam) and Lab Testing/Imaging
    History
    Physical Exam
    Lab Testing
    Imaging
    Strength of Evidence for Different Treatment Modalities
    Future Directions or Clinical Trials in Progress
    Conclusion/Summary
    References
    3: Cluster Headache
    Case Description
    What Is Your Preliminary Diagnosis?
    How Is Diagnosis Confirmed?
    What Is the Pathophysiology of This Condition?
    How Is This Problem Managed? What Is the Prognosis of This Condition?
    Discussion
    Prevalence
    Differential Diagnosis
    Predictive Value of Different Clinical Features (Both on History and Physical Exam) and Lab Testing/Imaging
    Strength of Evidence for Different Treatment Modalities
    Future Directions or Clinical Trials in Progress
    Conclusion/Summary
    References
    4: Atypical Facial Pain/Persistent Idiopathic Facial Pain
    Case Description
    What Is Your Preliminary Diagnosis?
    How Is the Diagnosis Confirmed?
    What Is the Pathophysiology of This Condition?
    How Is This Problem Managed? What Is the Prognosis of This Condition?
    Discussion
    Prevalence
    Differential Diagnosis
    Predictive Value of Clinical Features
    Strength of Evidence for Treatment Modalities
    Future Directions
    Conclusion/Summary
    References
    5: A 75-Year-Old Woman with Frequent Fleeting Face Pain (Trigeminal Neuralgia)
    Case Description
    What Is Your Preliminary Diagnosis?
    How is the Diagnosis Confirmed?
    What Is the Pathophysiology of This Condition?
    How Is the Problem Managed?
    Trigeminal Nerve Block Technique
    Ophthalmic Branch (V1) Nerve Block Maxillary (V2) and Mandibular (V3) Nerve Block
    What Is the Prognosis of This Condition?
    Discussion
    Prevalence
    Differential Diagnosis
    Predictive Value of Different Clinical Features and Lab Testing/Imaging
    Strength of Evidence for Different Treatment Modalities
    Future Directions or Clinical Trials in Progress
    Conclusion
    References
    6: A Patient with Chronic Pain in the Back of the Head
    Case Description
    What Is Your Preliminary Diagnosis?
    How Is Diagnosis Confirmed?
    What Is the Pathophysiology of This Condition?
    How Is This Problem Managed?
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Carlo Bettocchi, Gian Maria Busetto, Giuseppe Carrieri, Luigi Cormio, editors.
    Summary: This open access book offers a valuable resource for understanding the correct pathways in the context of sexual disorders, couple reproduction, gender identity dysphoria, conditions for which patients commonly ask for consultation and treatment. Based on clinical evidence, international guidelines and experts experience, practical clinical management strategies are presented for each condition. Each clinical care pathway is based on updated algorithm, level of evidence, photos and video-clips that describes the clinical presentations and the best practice management through diagnostic tools and medical or surgical treatment. Leading experts from the most important center of excellence in the field of sexual medicine joined to cover the field of andrology in its entirety, each of them dealing with a single topic from the top of their recognized experience and providing a complete and update textbook that will help urologists and other physicians in their daily clinical practice. This book is thought to be a practical and valuable reference for urologists, gynecologists, endocrinologists, psychiatrics and psychologists, and residents who are not specialty trained in andrology. It is designed for both young fellows training in different specialties and coming into contact with andrological issues for the first time and also more experienced clinicians and surgeons requiring updated guidelines and clear advice on the most controversial issues. This book will represent an invaluable quick consulting tool, updated in its scientific contents and rich in tables, images and video-clips.

    Contents:
    History of Sexual Medicine
    Sexuality and sexual orientation in the 21st century
    Erectile Dysfunction : from pathophysiology to clinical assessment
    Erectile Dysfunction : medical therapy and rehabilitation
    Erectile Dysfunction : surgical and regenerative therapy
    Peyronie's disease & penile curvature
    Orgasm and ejaculation disorders .-Sexual dysfunctions in women - orgasm and female genital disorders
    Penile diseases and Dysmorphisms (Phimosis, frenulum, micropenis, buried penis
    Andrological urgency
    Andrological aspects of penile and testicular cancer
    Male reproduction - from pathophysiology to clinical assessment
    Seminal Analysis, value and reliability .-Therapy in oligozoospermia (varicocele, cryptorchidism, inflammation and seminal tract infections
    Therapy in secretory and obstructive azoospermia
    Pathophysiology of female reproduction and clinical management
    Laboratory and instrumental diagnostics
    Assisted Reproductive Technology : ART
    Male sex hormones in Andrology today
    The Transgender - Psychiatric assessment
    The Transgender - Endocrinological assessment
    The Transgender - Legal path to surgery
    Gender Affirming Surgery - Assigned Male at Birth
    Gender Affirming Surgery - Assigned Female at Birth
    Medico-legal aspects in Andrology today.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    editors, Peter J. Zimetbaum, Alfred E. Buxton, Mark E. Josephson.
    Contents:
    Anatomy in clinical electrophysiology
    Membrane and cellular electrophysiology
    Mechanism of tachycardias
    The basic electrophysiology study
    Basic principles in clinical electrophysiology
    Atrial fibrillation
    Atrial flutter
    Supraventricular tachycardia
    Wolff-Parkinson-White syndrome and variants
    Ventricular tachycardia
    Bradycardias
    Syncope
    Sudden death syndromes
    Pacemakers : indications and function
    Pacemaker troubleshooting
    ICD indications and function
    ICD troubleshooting
    Lead management
    Selected forms of congenital heart disease and cardiac arrhythmias
    Noninvasive diagnostic testing
    Antiarrhythmic drugs.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Peter Igaz, editor.
    Summary: This practical book aims to cover the whole scope of clinical endocrinology, including both common and selected rare but important diseases, with an emphasis on practical clinical management. A number of different questions and problems in clinical routine are discussed in this book in an unconventional format. Each topic begins with the presentation of a typical clinical case, and then the topic is approached in a question and answer format linked to the clinical case presented, highlighting the most important questions in diagnosis, differential diagnosis and therapy. Numerous figures and tables are included to help understanding. The book is chiefly intended for doctors in training (preparing for boarding exam in endocrinology or internal medicine), but also for established clinicians who want to broaden or refresh their skills. University students of medicine can also find this book interesting.

    Contents:
    Diseases of the pituitary and hypothalamus: Pituitary tumors
    Craniopharyngeoma
    Hypopituitarism
    Secondary hypogonadism/Kallmann syndrome
    Diabetes insipidus
    Diseases of the thyroid: Hypothyroidism and Hashimoto thyroiditis
    Graves-disease
    Endocrine ophtalmopathy
    Multinodular goiter
    de Quervain thyroiditis
    Thyroid cancer
    Thyroid hormone resistance.-Diseases of the parathyroid and metabolic bone diseases: Primary hyperparathyroidism
    Secondary and tertiary hyperparathyroidism
    Hypoparathyroidism.-Parathyroid cancer.-Osteoporosis.-Osteomalacia
    Diseases of the adrenal: Adrenal incidentaloma
    Adrenal Cushings syndrome
    Primary aldosteronism
    Secondary aldosteronism due to renovascular hypertension
    Adrenocortical cancer
    Addisons disease and pluriglandular autoimmune syndrome type 2
    Congenital adrenal hyperplasia
    Glucocorticoid resistance
    Pheochromocytoma
    Diseases of the gonads: Ovary
    Testicle
    Neuroendocrine tumors and Paraneoplastic endocrine syndromes: Carcinoid syndrome caused by a small intestinal neuroendocrine tumor
    Ectopic ACTH syndrome caused by a bronchial neuroendocrine tumor
    Pancreatic neuroendocrine tumors
    Multiple Endocrine Neoplasia syndromes: Multiple Endocrine Neoplasia type 1
    Multiple Endocrine Neoplasia type 2
    von Hippel Lindau syndrome
    Neurofibromatosis type 1
    Familial Isolated Pituitary Adenoma
    McCune-Albright syndrome .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Marc Shaw, Claire Wong, editors.
    Summary: This inclusive work presents a comprehensive update on vaccines for the international traveller. In over 21 chapters, written by leading writers in travel medicine from Australia, New Zealand and Singapore, vaccinology for travel is explained in accessible terms with a focus on practical information. An initial introduction to immunology proceeds into common travel-related diseases, and a risk-analysis for acquiring them, followed by vaccine administration techniques and examples of how this knowledge can be applied to the traveller with special risks including children, pregnant women and mass travel. The book also provides a summary of current clinical practice with respect to travel medicine in Australia, New Zealand and Singapore. This straightforward guide to the administration of vaccines for travellers is intended to be the one-stop for the primary healthcare professional needing authoritative practical information speedily. In addition to basic knowledge in vaccinology, guides are offered as to appropriate vaccine recommendations for travel to global regions together with vaccine contents in order to identify any precautions and contraindications. This text presents assessment and management guidelines for common medical presentations to the travel health professional in primary-care health. Easy reference chapters, with practical management parameters for vaccination for travellers, will confidently guide any knowledge acquired permitting self-responsibility in vaccine-preventable disease prevention.

    Contents:
    Requirements For Vaccination
    Indications For Immunisation, Recommending Vaccines
    Travel Vaccines At A Glance
    General Contraindications
    Accelerated Courses In Immunisation
    Special Risk Groups
    Faqs.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Margaret S. Pearle, Stephen Y. Nakada, editors.
    Summary: Practical Controversies in Medical Management of Stone Disease addresses areas of controversy regarding the evaluation and management of recurrent stone formers and provides the best available evidence to support or refute common drug and dietary recommendations. Aimed at dispelling common myths about preventative stone treatment, this book provides practical recommendations for the diagnostic evaluation and treatment of recurrent calcium stone formers, and addresses uric acid and cystine stone formers. Written by experts in stone disease, Practical Controversies in Medical Management of Stone Disease is a concise yet comprehensive resource that provides the best, current evidence supporting medical practices regarding kidney stone prevention. The book will be of value to anyone involved in the medical care of patients with kidney stones, including urologists, nephrologists, primary care physicians, and dieticians.

    Contents:
    Metabolic Evaluation: Underused or Overdone?
    Controversies in the Management of High Urine Oxalate as a Risk Factor for Idiopathic Calcium Oxalate Urolithiasis
    Dietary Calcium and Prevention of Calcium Stones: More or Less?
    Citrus Juices and Prevention of Calcium Stones: Some, but Not All?
    Bariatric Surgery and Stone Disease: Help or Hindrance?
    Protein Restriction and Stone Disease:? Myth or Reality?
    Uric Acid Nephrolithiasis: Uric Acid or Urine pH?
    Cystinuria: Assessing and Managing Risk
    Potassium Citrate and Calcium Stones: Benefit or Risk?
    Thiazides and Calcium Stones: Overrated or Underused?.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Andrew S. Field, Matthew A. Zarka.
    Summary: "Employing a systematic pattern recognition approach, Practical Cytopathology: A Diagnostic Approach equips you to achieve a more accurate diagnosis of aspirated and exfolliative tissue samples from all available body organs and sites. Part of the popular Pattern Recognition Series, this volume is designed to successfully guide you from identification of the dominant cytopathologic pattern, through the appropriate work-up, around the pitfalls, to the best diagnosis"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the practical algorithmic pattern recognition approach to fine needle aspiration biopsy
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of salivary gland : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of lymph nodes : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of thyroid : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of breast : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of liver : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of pancreas : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of lung and mediastinum : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of kidney : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy cytology of soft tissue : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition
    Intraoperative cytology of central nervous system lesions : a diagnostic approach based on pattern recognition.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Huihong Xu, Xiaohua Qian, He Wang, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, practical, and state-of-the art review addressing the major issues and challenges in cytopathology practice using a question and answer format. Making an accurate diagnosis, especially on a limited cytology sample obtained by minimally invasive procedures, is often challenging, yet crucial to patient care. Using the most current and evidence-based approaches, this book: 1) focuses on frequently asked questions in day-to-day practice of cytopathology as well as surgical pathology; 2) provides quick, accurate, and useful answers; 3) emphasizes the importance of clinical, radiological, and cytological correlation, as well as cyto-histological correlation; and 4) delineates how to judiciously use immunohistochemistry, molecular tests, flow cytometry, cytogenetics, and other established ancillary studies including next generation sequencing and computer-assisted diagnostics. Chapters are written by experts in their fields and provide the most up-to-date information in the field of cytopathology. Practical Cytopathology: Frequently Asked Questions serves as a practical resource and guide to relevant references for trainees, cytotechnologists, and cytopathologists at various skill levels.

    Contents:
    Cytology Techniques
    Cytopathology Laboratory Management
    Overview of Cervical and Anal Cytopathology
    Normal and Benign Cervical Cytology
    Cervical Cytology with Squamous and Glandular Abnormalities
    Gastrointestinal, Pancreas and Bile Ducts Cytology
    Lung and Respiratory Tract Cytology
    Urine Cytology
    Body Cavity Effusions and Washings
    Cerebrospinal Fluid
    Ovary and Peritoneal Washings
    Fine Needle Aspiration Cytology of the Breast
    Thyroid
    Salivary Gland
    Lymph Nodes
    Liver Cytopathology
    Soft Tissue and Bone
    Kidney, Adrenal Gland, and Retroperitoneum
    Ocular Cytology.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Peter V. Rabins, Professor of Psychiatry, Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Baltimore, MD, Professor of the Practice, Erickson School, University of Maryland, Baltimore County, Constantine G. Lyketsos, Professor of Psychiatry, Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Baltimore, MD, Cynthia D. Steele, Assistant Professor, Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Baltimore, MD.
    Contents:
    Definitions and overview of the book / Constantine G. Lyketsos
    Neurodegenerative diseases causing dementia / Paul Rosenberg, Gregory Pontone, Chiadikaobi Onyike
    Other diseases causing dementia / Peter V. Rabins
    The evaluation and formulation of dementia / Constantine G. Lyketsos
    Overview of dementia care / Quincy Samus and Betty Black
    Supportive care for the patient / Constantine G. Lyketsos and Peter V. Rabins
    Support for the family and care providers / Peter V. Rabins and Constantine G. Lyketsos
    Disease specific therapies and symptomatic cognitive enhancement / Christopher Marano and Constantine Lyketsos
    Neuropsychiatric symptoms of dementia : general approach and non-pharmacologic treatment / Helen C. Kales
    Pharmacologic treatments for neuropsychiatric symptoms / Christopher Marano and Constantine G. Lyketsos
    Prevention, early detection, and mild cognitive impairment / Paul Rosenberg
    Care in advanced disease / Peter V. Rabins
    Ethical and legal issues / Peter V. Rabins.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Ronald P. Rapini.
    Summary: Written from the perspective of both the histopathologist and clinician, Practical Dermatopathology, 3rd Edition, allows you to search by disease or pathologic feature to quickly locate key criteria and a differential diagnosis. Practical and portable, Practical Dermatopathology is your ideal high-yield microscope companion! Make accurate, complete reports by fully understanding clinical correlations. Accurately diagnose a wide range of conditions using nearly 800 full-color illustrations, with leader lines pointing out key pathologic and clinical features as they would be seen in daily practice. Find critical information quickly through extensive cross-referencing of differential diagnosis lists by finding and disease. Clinical lists are based on location, symptoms, duration, arrangement, morphology, and color. Pathologic lists include major categories such as epidermal changes, dermal changes, and cell types. Gauge your mastery of the material with online multiple-choice review questions (130 are NEW) that provide an ideal study resource for board review or recertification. Stay current with comprehensive updates throughout, as well as unique differential diagnosis lists, numerous tables and boxes, full-color histology images, and supporting clinical photographs including bonus clinical correlation images online. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Jie Liu, Xian-biao Zou.
    Summary: This book aims to provide readers with practical information on the procedure of streamline skin disease recognition with the use of dermoscopy. The first three chapters are mainly focused on the basic knowledge of dermoscopy, such as its history, how it works, the terminology. In the following chapters, the clinical photographs, dermoscopic images and histopathologic images of benign melanocytic neoplasms, malignant melanoma, basal cell carcinoma, seborrheic keratosis and related diseases, vascular diseases, squamous cell neoplasms and other neoplasms are presented in a case-based format. The clinical characteristics are introduced briefly, and the dermoscopic features are highlighted with a number of pictures. The chapter 12 to chapter 14 introduce the dermoscopic appearance of inflammatory skin diseases, infectious and parasitic skin diseases, hair and nail diseases, respectively, which is the extended application of dermoscopy. Last but not least, the development and future of articifial intellegence assisted diagnosis based on dermoscopic images is introduced. Written by dermatologists who have been involved in dermoscopic diagnosis for a long time, this case-based book will be a valuable reference for dermatologists and those who are interested in related field.

    Contents:
    Introduction of Dermoscopy
    Terminology in Dermoscopy
    Devices in Dermoscopy
    Diagnostic Strategies and Algorithms of Dermoscopy
    Benign Melanosytic Neoplasms
    Malignant Melanoma
    Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Seborrheic Keratosis and Related Diseases
    Vascular Diseases
    Squamous Cell Neoplasms
    Other Neoplasms
    Inflammatory Skin Diseases
    Infectious and Parasitic Skin Diseases
    Hair and Nail Diseases
    Artificial Intelligent Applications in Dermoscopy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    by David Levy.
    Contents:
    Classification, diagnosis, and presentation
    Diabetes emergencies
    Infections and the diabetic foot
    Eyes and kidneys
    Neuropathy, musculoskeletal, and skin
    Diabetes and the cardiovascular system
    Type 1 diabetes : glycaemic control
    Type 1 diabetes : technology and transplants
    Type 2 diabetes : weight loss, exercise, and other "lifestyle" interventions
    Type 2 diabetes : glycaemic control
    Hypertension
    Lipids
    Clinical aspects of the metabolic syndrome
    Youth and emerging adulthood : old age
    Psychological aspects of diabetes.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Min En Nga.
    Summary: This book presents rational diagnostic approaches to common areas of cytopathology, such as thyroid, lymph node and effusion cytology. It discusses differential diagnoses for each site, and describes a systematic approach to narrow down differential diagnoses in a logical manner based on cytomorphology and the judicious application of ancillary tests. Further, it introduces discriminatory panels of immunohistochemical tests, with an emphasis on patient-centred approaches with active clinicopathologic correlations. In addition, it provides practical recommendations for optimizing tissue triage for ancillary testing, in terms of both diagnostic and therapy-related testing. The book also includes sample diagnostic reports to help readers formulate appropriate comments and to aid clinicians in specific clinical scenarios, as well as test cases for readers to apply their diagnostic and specimen triage algorithms. The book equips readers to apply logical approaches to sound cytopathology reporting in daily clinical practice, guiding them through specimen collection and triage to diagnostic workup based on morphologic and clinical features, and writing rational and clinically useful diagnostic cytology reports with a focus on clinicopathologic correlation. As such it is relevant for practising cytopathologists and pathology trainees as well as for cytologists (cytotechnologists) and other clinicians involved in cytopathology diagnostic processes.

    Contents:
    Section I: Introduction to cytopathology
    Section II: General approaches to diagnostic cytology
    Diagnostic cytologic evaluation: where to start?
    Writing cytology reports: dos and donts
    On-site evaluation and reporting
    Section III: Effusion cytology
    General approach to effusion cytology
    Ancillary testing in effusion cytology
    Section IV: Aspiration cytology
    General approach to aspiration cytology
    Ancillary testing in aspiration cytology
    Approach to thyroid fine needle aspiration
    Approach to Lymph node fine needle aspiration
    Approach to Salivary gland fine needle aspiration
    Section V: Self-test cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Daniel M. Shindler, Olga I. Shindler, Alicia Wright.
    Summary: This is a practical reference that serves to introduce the discipline of echocardiography. It is meant to be integrated with the search capabilities of a modern cell phone. It enables the reader to quickly find, understand, and quote the relevant literature. The book stems from more than 30 busy years in an academic echocardiography laboratory, and from our initial efforts starting in 1994 to provide free echocardiography education and to promote social media discussions of echocardiography on the Internet.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Ultrasound
    Chapter 2: Doppler
    Chapter 3: Echocardiographic Quantification
    Chapter 4: Echocardiographic Imaging
    Chapter 5: Diastology
    Chapter 6: Heart Failure
    Chapter 7: Coronary Artery Disease
    Chapter 8: Aortic Valve Stenosis
    Chapter 9: Bicuspid Aortic Valve
    Chapter 10: Aortic Regurgitation
    Chapter 11: Mitral Regurgitation
    Chapter 12: Mitral Stenosis
    Chapter 13: Prosthetic Valves
    Chapter 14: Hypertrophic Cardiomyopathy
    Chapter 15: Cardiomyopathies
    Chapter 16: Pericardial Disease
    Chapter 17: Endocarditis
    Chapter 18: Cardiac Tumors and Masses
    Chapter 19: Diabetes and Hypertension
    Chapter 20: Pulmonary Disorders
    Chapter 21: Tricuspid Valve
    Chapter 22: Pulmonic Valve
    Chapter 23: Disorders of the Aorta
    Chapter 24: Stroke
    Chapter 25: Congenital Heart Disorders
    Chapter 26: The Stethoscope
    Chapter 27: The Electrocardiogram in the Echo Lab
    Chapter 28: Radiology
    Chapter 29: Internet Resources.
    Digital Access AccessCardiology 2020
  • Digital
    Malcolm D.C. Donaldson, John W. Gregory, Guy Van Vliet, Joseph I. Wolfsdorf ; guest chapter "An Endocrinologist's guide to genetic in the age of genomics" contributed by Johnny Deladoëy.
    Contents:
    Diabetes mellitus
    Hypoglycaemia
    Short stature
    Tall stature
    Puberty
    Thyroid disorder
    Differences in sex development and common genital anomalies
    Adrenal disorders
    Salt and water balance
    Calcium and bone
    Obesity
    Endocrine effects of cancer treatment / supplementary chapter by Johnny Deladoëy
    An Endocrinologist's guide to genetic in the age of genomics.
    Digital Access Wiley 2019
  • Digital
    Matthew T. Brodhead, David J. Cox, Shawn P. Quigley.
    Summary: Practical Ethics for Effective Treatment of Autism Spectrum Disorder is for behavior analysts working directly with, or supervising those who work with, individuals with autism. The book addresses important topics such as the principles and values that underlie the Behavior Analyst Certification Board's ® Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts, and factors that affect ethical decision-making. In addition, the book addresses critical and under-discussed topics of: scope of competence; evidence-based practice in behavior analysis; how to collaborate with professionals within and outside one's discipline; and how to design systems of ethical supervision and training customized to unique treatment settings. Across many of the topics, the authors also discuss errors students and professionals may make during analyses of ethical dilemmas and misapplications of ethical codes within their practice.--Publisher's description
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    Samuel J. Knapp, Leon D. VandeCreek, Randy Fingerhut.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    The legal floor and positive ethics
    Foundations of ethical behavior
    Ethical decision making
    Competence
    Informed consent, empowered collaboration, or shared decision making
    Multiple relationships and professional boundaries
    Confidentiality, privileged communications, and record keeping
    Life-endangering patients
    Forensic psychology
    Assessment
    Special topics in therapy
    Business issues
    Psychologists as educators
    Consultation and clinical supervision
    Research and scholarship
    Afterward
    References
    Index
    About the authors.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    BF76.4 .K64 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Lloyd A. Jacobs ; manuscript editor, Patricia A. James.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    John Heesakkers, Christopher Chapple, Dirk De Ridder, Fawzy Farag, editors.
    Contents:
    Basic: History
    Anatomy and neuroanatomy male / female
    Neurophysiology
    Diagnostics
    Pathology
    Neurourological diseases: Bifid Spine
    SCI
    MS
    Other ( Parkinson, MSA)
    CVA and CCT
    Intervertebral disc and failed back surgery
    Diabetes
    OAB dry / wet: Diagnostics
    Treatment
    Tips and tricks / do's and don'ts
    Detrusor Underactivity: Bladder emptying problems
    Catheterization in clinical practice
    Tips and tricks / do's and don'ts
    PBS / IC / Prostatitis: Diagnostics
    Treatment
    Tips and tricks / do's and don'ts
    SUI female: Diagnostics
    Treatment
    Tips and tricks / do's and don'ts
    SUI male: Diagnostics
    Treatment
    Tips and tricks / do's and don'ts
    POP: Diagnostics
    Treatment
    Tips and tricks / do's and don'ts
    UTI: Diagnostics
    Treatment
    Tips and tricks / do's and don'ts
    Urethral disorders: Urethral diverticula
    Urethral strictures.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Nicholas J. Talley ; section editors, Kenneth R. DeVault, Michael B. Wallace, Bashar A. Aqel, Keith D. Lindor.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Hanlin L. Wang, Zongming Eric Chen, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses practical issues that reflect the current landscape of GI pathology practice and is organized in such a way that fits the fast-pacing daily life of practicing pathologists. It contains more than 540 questions that address difficult, prevailing and controversial issues in GI pathology that are frequently encountered in daily practice and consult service. For most questions, answers are straightforward with ample literature support. However, true diagnostic controversies and clinical dilemma cannot be easily resolved with current knowledge and available information. To such challenges, an expert approach regarding how to synthesize complicated topics and clearly communicate the thinking process is valuable to readers and can help guide clinicians making optimal treatment plans for their patients. The latter types of answers are highly enriched throughout the book. Distinct from other existing GI pathology textbooks, this book is primarily organized according to disease entities and pathological processes instead of specific organs and anatomic locations. Guided by chapter titles and listed questions, readers should be able to look up a disease or a pathological feature and find the most important and relevant diagnostic criteria and pertinent differential diagnoses. Written by experts in the field, Practical Gastrointestinal Pathology provides easy and quick access to concise, evidence-based and up-to-date information to aid accurate diagnosis and serves as a useful resource for practicing pathologists, pathology trainees and GI clinicians as well as allied health professionals who frequently deal with GI pathology.

    Contents:
    Gastrointestinal Disorders in the Infant and Child
    Non-Barrett Esophagitis
    Barrett Esophagus
    Nonneoplastic Diseases of the Stomach
    Malabsorption Disorders
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Non-IBD Non-Infectious Colitis
    Appendiceal Diseases
    Anal Diseases
    Infections of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Drug-Induced Gastrointestinal Tract Injury
    Eosinophilic, Mastocytic, and Histiocytic Diseases of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Motility Disorders of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Non-syndromic Epithelial Polyps of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Syndromic Epithelial Polyps of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Mesenchymal Lesions Often Presenting as Polyps of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Neuroendocrine Tumors of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Carcinomas of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumor
    Non-GIST Primary Mesenchymal Tumors of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Lymphomas of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Transplant-related Issues in the Gastrointestinal Tract.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by McKinsey L. Goodenberger, Brittany C. Thomas, Teresa Kruisselbrink.
    Contents:
    Types of laboratories and business relationships
    Regulation of laboratory genetic testing
    Laboratory infrastructure
    Cytogenetic technologies and test issues
    Molecular technologies and test issues
    Biochemical technologies and test issues
    Prenatal screening technologies and test issues
    Genetic counselor role in laboratory case management
    Test development and validation
    Genetic counselor role in hospital test utilization
    Genetic counselor role in sales and marketing
    Genetic counselor communication and counseling skills for the laboratory
    Ethical considerations in the genetic testing laboratory
    The laboratory genetic counselor as an educator
    Genetic counselor contributions to medical literature and generalizable knowledge
    Considering a laboratory genetic counseling position.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    W. Allen Hogge, MD, MA, Professor, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology and Reproductive Sciences, University of Pittsburgh/Magee-Womens Hospital, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, Aleksandar Rajkovic, MD, PhD, Professor, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology and Reproductive Sciences, University of Pittsburgh/Magee-Womens Hospital, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
    Summary: Offers a guide to the clinical application of genetics in ob-gyn practice. Suitable for ob-gyn residents and practitioners, this book surveys the modern field of genetics and provides you with a practical understanding of its clinical uses - a critical skill set that you can leverage continually in the years to come.

    Contents:
    Gene structure and function
    Organization and structure of human chromosomes
    Patterns of inheritance
    Taking a family history
    Principles of genetic counseling
    Preconception counseling
    Common chromosomal abnormalities
    Screening for genetic disorders in pregnancy
    Methods of prenatal diagnosis
    Common fetal malformations diagnosed by ultrasound
    Gynecologic disorders with a genetic causation
    Hereditary cancer syndromes
    Disorders of sexual differentiation
    Genetics of infertility and pregnancy loss
    Methods of modern cytogenetic testing
    Molecular diagnostic testing.
    Digital Access AccessObGyn 2015
  • Digital
    Ximing J. Yang, Ming Zhou, editors.
    Summary: This book serves as a practical guide and provides updates in Genitourinary (GU) Pathology. By using a questions and Answers format, it addresses frequently encountered diagnostic challenges in daily practice for pathologists. Emphasis is placed on diagnosis and differential diagnosis based on morphological characteristics, clinicopathologic correlation, and interpretation of immunohistochemical and other ancillary tests. Concise answers to each question are provided by experts in the field accompanied by ample high quality illustrations and updated references. This book includes common and rare benign and malignant conditions in the GU system, covering the entire genitourinary system including the prostate, kidney, bladder, testis, urethra, ureter, penis and adrenal. It also reviews current topics, controversies and diagnostic dilemmas in diagnostic GU pathology. Practical Genitourinary Pathology serves as a quick reference for busy practicing pathologists, pathologists in training, urologists, medical students, and other physicians with questions of genitourinary conditions.

    Contents:
    Kidney Tumor
    Upper Urinary Tract Pathology
    Bladder Cancer
    Urethra
    Prostate Pathology
    Testis and Paratesticular Lesions
    Penis and Scrotum
    Adrenal Gland Pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Thoru Yamada, Elizabeth Meng.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Evoked potentials. Principles of evoked potentials ; Visual evoked potentials ; Brainstem auditory evoked potentials and auditory evoked potentials ; Somastosensory evoked potentials
    Section 2: Intraoperative neurophysiologic monitoring. The technologist's role in neurophysiologic intraoperative monitoring ; Brain function monitoring for carotid endarterectomy and aortic arch surgery ; Spinal cord monitoring ; Intraoperative monitoring of the brainstem and cranial nerve function
    Section 3: Long-term EEG monitoring. Diagnostic video-EEG monitoring for epilepsy and spells: indications, application, and interpretation ; Invasive video EEG monitoring in epilepsy surgery candidates: indications, technique, and interpretation ; Long-term bedside EEG monitoring for acutely ill patients (LTM/ccEEG)
    Section 4: Sleep studies. Technology of polysomnography ; Sleep physiology and pathology ; Sleep apnea and related conditions ; Evaluating narcolepsy and related conditions ; Parasomnias ; Electrophysiological measurement and rules for sleep-related movement disorders
    Section 5: Nerve conduction studies. Nerve conduction and electromyography studies.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2022
  • Digital
    Thoru Yamada, Elizabeth Meng.
    Contents:
    Introduction : history and perspective of clinical neurophysiologic diagnostic tests / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Basic EEG technology / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Basic electronics and electrical safety / Peter Seaba and Thoru Yamada
    Digital EEG / Malcolm Yeh
    Neuroanatomical and neurophysiologic basis of EEG / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Principles of visual analysis of EEG / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Characteristics of normal EEG / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    The assessment of abnormal EEG / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Activation procedures / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    EEG and epilepsy / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Diffuse EEG abnormalities / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Focal EEG abnormalities / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Continuous EEG monitoring for critically ill patients (CCEEG) / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Benign EEG patterns / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    Artifact recognition and technical pitfalls / Thoru Yamada and Elizabeth Meng
    EEG of premature and full-term infants / Thoru Yamada, Elizabeth Meng, and Michael Ciliberto.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2018
  • Print
    edited by John A. Dent, MMEd, MD, FAMEE, FHEA, FRCS(Ed), International Relations Officer, Association for Medical Education in Europe ; Honorary Reader in Medical Education and Orthopaedic Surgery, University of Dundee, Dundee, UK, Ronald M. Harden, OBE, MD, FRCP(Glas), FRCPC, FRCSEd, General Secretary, Association for Medical Education in Europe ; Former Professor of Medical Education, Director of the Centre for Medical Education and Teaching Dean, University of Dundee, UK ; Professor of Medical Education, Al-Imam University, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia, Dan Hunt, MD, MBA, Assistant Secretary, Liaison Committee on Medical Education ; Senior Director of Accreditation Services, Association of American Medical Colleges, Washington DC, USA ; foreward by Brian D. Hodges, PhD, MD, FRCPC, Executive Vice-President Education, University Health Network ; Professor, Department of Psychiatry, University of Toronto ; Scientist, Wilson Centre for Research in Education ; Richard and Elizabeth Currie Chair in Health Professions Education Research ; Senior Fellow, Massey College ; Senior Strategy Advisor, the AMS Phoenix Project, Toronto, Canada.
    Summary: "The Fifth Edition of the highly praised Practical Guide for Medical Teachers provides a bridge between the theoretical aspects of medical education and the delivery of enthusiastic and effective teaching in basic science and clinical medicine. Healthcare professionals are committed teachers and this book is an essential guide to help them maximise their performance. This highly regarded book recognises the importance of educational skills in the delivery of quality teaching in medicine. The contents offer valuable insights into all important aspects of medical education today. A leading educationalist from the USA joins the book's editorial team. The continual emergence of new topics is recognised in this new edition with nine new chapters: The role of patients as teachers and assessors; Medical humanities; Decision-making; Alternative medicine; Global awareness; Education at a time of ubiquitous information; Programmative assessment; Student engagement; and Social accountability. An enlarged group of authors from more than 15 countries provides both an international perspective and a multi-professional approach to topics of interest to all healthcare teachers. -- Publisher.

    Contents:
    Sect. I: Curriculum development
    New horizons in medical education
    Curriculum planning and development
    The undergraduate curriculum
    Postgraduate medical education: a 'pipeline' to competence
    Continuing professional development
    The hidden curriculum
    Sect. 2: Learning situations
    Lectures
    Learning in small groups
    Learning with patients: inpatient and outpatient
    Learning in the community
    Learning in rural and remote locations
    Learning in longitudinal integrated clerkships
    Learning in a simulated environment
    Distance education
    Sect. 3: Educational strategies and technologies
    Outcome-based education
    Integrated learning
    Interprofessional education
    Problem-based learning
    Team-based learning
    Using digital technologies
    Instructional design
    Sect. 4: Curriculum themes
    Basic sciences and curriculum outcomes
    Social and behavioural sciences in medical school curricula
    Clinical communication
    Ethics and attitudes
    Professionalism
    Evidence-based medicine
    Patient safety and quality of care
    Medical humanities
    Integrative medicine in the training of physicians
    Global awareness
    Medical education in an era of ubiquitous information
    Sect. 5: Assessment
    Concepts in assessment including standard setting
    Written assessments
    Performance and workplace assessment
    Portfolios, projects and theses
    Feedback, reflection and coaching: a new model
    The assessment of attitudes and professionalism
    Programmatic assessment
    Sect. 6: Staff
    Staff development
    Academic standards and scholarship
    Sect. 7: Students
    Student selection
    Student support
    Student engagement in learning
    Peer-assisted learning
    Sect. 8: Medical school
    Understanding medical school leardership: medical teachers as agents of change
    Medical education leardership
    The medical teacher and social accountability
    The educational environment
    Medical education research.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R735 .P73 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Henry W. Lim, Laurie L. Kohen, Samantha L. Schneider, Danielle Yeager, editors.
    Summary: This practical manual provides a real-world educationally focused resource. It enables the reader to gain a good understanding of a range of skin diseases, their differential diagnosis and various medical and/or surgical treatment options. Topics covered include general dermatology, oncodermatology, drugs, phototherapy, pigmentary disorders, skin of color, inpatient dermatology and pediatric dermatology. Emphasis is placed on concise, practical points that one can use in clinic, with informative pearls to reinforce the key messages in each chapter. Practical Guide to Dermatology: The Henry Ford Manual systematically describes a broad range of practical concepts, diagnostic and treatment techniques involving various dermatological disciplines. It represents a valuable reference guide for practising and trainee dermatologists alike.

    Contents:
    Treatments by Disease
    Acanthosis Nigricans
    Acne Vulgaris
    Acne Keloidalis Nuchae
    Actinic Keratoses: Field Treatment
    Alopecia
    Ashy Dermatosis
    Atopic Dermatitis
    Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Brittle Nails
    Bullous Pemphigoid
    Chronic Paronychia
    Chronic Urticaria
    Contact Dermatitis
    Lupus Erythematosus
    Dissecting Cellulitis Erythrasma
    Genital Warts
    Gram Negative Toe Web Infection
    Granuloma Annulare
    Hemangiomas
    Herpes
    Hirsutism
    Hidradenitis Suppurativa
    Hypercoagulability Work Up
    Hyperhidrosis
    Intertrigo
    Irritant Dermatitis
    Keloids
    Keratosis Pilaris
    Lichen Planus
    Lichen Sclerosus et Atrophicus, Melasma
    Molluscum Contagiosum
    Mycosis Fungoides
    Nephrogenic Systemic Fibrosis (from Gadolinium)
    Notalgia Paresthetica
    Onychomycosis
    Pediculosis Capitis / Pubis. Pediculosis Corporis
    Pemphigus Vulgaris
    Perioral Dermatitis
    Perleche, Photoprotection
    Porphyria
    Post-Inflammatory Hyperpigmentation
    Pruritus
    Pseudofolliculitis Barbae
    Pseudoporphyria
    Psoriasis
    Pyoderma Gangrenosum
    Rosacea
    Sarcoidosis
    Scabies
    Scalp Folliculitis
    Syphilis
    Tinea Tinea
    Versicolor
    Vitiligo
    Inpatient Diseases of Significance
    Calciphylaxis
    Cutaneous Metastases
    Drug Eruptions
    Graft Versus Host Disease
    Infections
    Ulcers
    Vasculitis
    Treatment By Drug
    Acitretin (Soriatane)
    Adalimumab (Humira)
    Apremilast (Otezla)
    Azathioprine (Imuran)
    Bexarotene (Targretin)
    Brodalumab (Siliq)
    Calcipotriene (Dovonex)
    Cyclosporine
    Dapsone
    Dupilumab (Dupixent)
    Etanercept (Enbrel)
    Finasteride (Propecia)
    Guselkumab (Tremfya)
    Hydroxychloroquine (Plaquenil)
    Isotretinoin
    Ixekizumab (Taltz)
    Methotrexate
    Mycophenolate Mofetil (CellCept)
    OCPs, Omalizumab (Xolair)
    Prednisone
    Rituximab (Rituxan)
    Secukinumab (Cosentyx)
    Spironolactone (Aldactone)
    SSKI
    Topical Corticosteroid Chart by Potency
    Ustekinumab (Stelara)
    Vitamins with Anticoagulation Effects
    Side Effects of Commonly Used Dermatology Medications
    Lupus Like Reactions
    Tetracyclines
    Oral/Topical Sulfa Antibiotics
    Penicillin
    Oral and Topical Erythromycin
    Topical Retinoids
    Topical Clindamycin
    Topical Metronidazole
    Benzoyl Peroxide
    Azeleic Acid
    Griseofulvin
    Terbinafine
    Itraconazole
    Voriconazole
    Azoles
    Common Cutaneous Side Effects of Immunotherapies and Chemotherapeutic Agents
    Bleomycin
    BRAF Inhibitors (vemurafenib)
    Anti CTLA-4
    Hand Foot Syndrome vs Hand Foot Skin Reaction
    MEK Inhibitors (trametinib)
    Anti-PD1 (ipilimumab)
    Tyrosine Kinase Inhibitors (sorafenib, sunitinib)
    Pregnancy Categories of Commonly Used Dermatology Medications
    Common Dosages for Pediatric Medications
    Antihistamines
    Anti-fungals for tinea capitis
    Antibiotics
    Phototherapy
    General Guidelines
    UVA
    UVB
    Photodynamic Therapy
    Compounds and Recipes
    Anthralin
    Bleach Bath
    Castellani's Paint
    Dapsone
    LCD or Tar Preparations
    Tri-Luma
    Vinegar Soaks
    Xylitol Cream
    Miscellaneous Formulations
    Staging and Management of Malignant Lesions
    Surgical Margin Recommendations
    Clinical Staging of Melanoma
    Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy (SNLB)
    New Treatments for Metastatic Melanoma
    Mycosis Fungoides Staging
    Mohs Appropriate Use Criteria
    Cosmetics Surgery and Laser
    Botulinum toxin, Filler: Perlane/ Restylane/ Juvederm/ Radiesse/ Sculptra, Kybella (Deoxycholic Acid)
    Peels
    Sclerotherapy
    CoolSculpt (cryolipolysis)
    Lasers
    cSkin Surgery
    Premedication for Skin Surgery
    Table of topical anti-septic characteristics
    Topical Injectable Anesthetics
    Diagram of Relaxed Skin Tension Lines
    Table of Suture Characteristics
    Wound Care
    Nail Definitions and Diseases
    Beau's Lines
    Blue lunula.-Brachyonychia
    Dolichonychia
    Habit Tic
    Heller Median Canaliform Dystrophy
    Koilonychia
    Apparent Leukonychia
    True Leukonychia
    Linday's Nails
    Longitudinal Melanonychia
    Mee's Lines
    Muehrcke's Lines
    Oil Spots
    Onychauxis
    Onychogryphosis
    Onycholysis
    Onychomadesis
    Onychomalacia
    Onychorrhexis
    Onychoschizia
    Pachyonychia
    Pitting
    Pincer Nails
    Dorsal Pterygium
    Terry's Nails
    Trachyonychia
    Triangular Lunula
    Yellow Nail Syndrome
    Key Dermoscopy Findings of Common Diagnoses
    Alopecia
    BCC
    Benign nevi
    Melanoma
    SCC / SCCis
    Sebaceous hyperplasia
    Seborrheic Keratoses.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Orit Markowitz.
    Contents:
    Patterns
    Equipment
    Color-wheel intro
    Flat, pink-clear, red
    Elevated, pink-clear, Red
    Flat, pink-clear, multicolored
    Elevated, pink-clear, multicolored
    Flat, pale brown, brown
    Elevated, pale brown, brown
    Flat, pale brown, multicolored
    Elevated, pale brown, multicolored
    Flat, brown-black, brown
    Elevated, brown-black, brown
    Flat, brown-black, multicolored
    Elevated, brown-black, multicolored
    Elevated, pink-clear, yellow
    Flat/elevated, purple, multicolored
    Flat/elevated, red, red
    When do I not use dermoscopy?
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Sarah R. Brown, Walter M. Gregory, Christopher Twelves, Julia Brown.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Print
    Daria Mochly-Rosen, Kevin Grimes, editors.
    Summary: "A lot of hard-won knowledge is laid out here in a brief but informative way. Every topic is well referenced, with citations from both the primary literature and relevant resources from the internet." Review of first edition from Nature Chemical Biology Written by the founders of the SPARK program at Stanford University, this book is a practical guide designed for professors, students and clinicians at academic research institutions who are interested in learning more about the drug development process and how to start transforming their basic research discoveries into novel drugs. Often many potentially transformative basic science discoveries are not pursued because they are deemed too early to attract industry interest. This comprehensive book lays out simple, relatively cost-effective things that academic researchers can do to advance their findings to the point that they can be tested in the clinic or attract more industry interest. Each chapter broadly discusses an important topic in drug development, from discovery, optimization and preclinical studies through clinical trial design, regulatory issues and marketing assessments. After the practical overview provided here, the reader is encouraged to consult more detailed texts on specific topics of interest. The SPARK model has been adopted in over 50 institutions on six continents, and the program has been honored with multiple awards including the 2020 Xconomy Award for Ecosystem Development, the 2020 Cures Within Reach Award for Patient Impact Research, and the 2022 California Life Sciences Pantheon Award for Academia, Non-Profits, & Research. The new edition updates every chapter with the latest developments since the 2014 publication of the first edition.

    Contents:
    Getting started
    Discovery and preclinical work
    Preparing for the clinic
    Transferring technology
    Commercialization and entrepreneurship
    Concluding thoughts.
    Digital Access Springer [2023]
  • Digital/Print
    Daria Mochly-Rosen, Kevin Grimes, editors.
    Summary: Written by the founders of the SPARK program at Stanford University, this book is a practical guide designed for professors, students and clinicians at academic research institutions who are interested in learning more about the drug development process and how to help their discoveries become the novel drugs of the future. Often many potentially transformative basic science discoveries are not pursued because they are deemed "too early" to attract industry interest. There are simple, relatively cost-effective things that academic researchers can do to advance their findings to the point that they can be tested in the clinic or attract more industry interest.

    Contents:
    Getting started
    Discovery and preclinical work
    Preparing for the clinic
    Transferring technology
    Commercialization and entrepreneurship
    Concluding thoughts.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM301.25 .P733 2014
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Karen S. Cosby, John L. Kendall.
    Contents:
    The History and philosophy of emergency ultrasound
    Fundamentals of ultrasound
    Trauma
    Echocardiography
    Lung and thorax
    Inferior vena cava
    A Problem-based approach to resuscitation of acute illness or injury: resusciative ultrasound
    Critical procedures for acute resuscitations
    Right upper quadrant: liver, gallbladder, and billiary tree
    Abdominal aorta
    Kidneys
    Bedside sonography of the bowel
    Abdominal procedures
    Pelvic ultrasound in the nongravid patient
    First trimester pregnancy
    Second and third trimester pregnancy
    Lower extremity venous studies
    Arterial emergencies
    Scrotal emergencies
    Skin and soft tissue
    Musculoskeletal
    Soft tissue and musculoskeletal procedures
    Eye emergencies
    Infections of the head and neck
    Head and neck procedures
    General pediatric problems
    Pediatric abdominal emergencies
    Pediatric procedures
    Implementing ultrasound into the community emergency department
    Implementing ultrasound into the academic emergency department
    Implementing ultrasound in the prehospital setting
    Implementing ultrasound in developing countries
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2014
  • Digital
    Tuulia Luomala, PT (Physiotherapist, Lecturer, Teacher, Veterinary Fascial Manipulation Teacher, MT-Physio Oy, Lempäälä, Finland), Mika Pihlman, PT ( Physiotherapist, Lecturer, Teacher, MT-Physio Oy, Lempäälä, Finland) ; consulting technical editor, Carla Stecco, MD (Orthopaedic Surgeon, Assistant Professor of Human Anatomy and Movement Science, University of Padua, Italy) ; English language editor, Warren Hammer, DC, MS (Postgraduate Faculty, New York Chiropractic College, NY, USA, Northwestern Health Sciences University, Bloomington, MN, USA) ; forewords by Luigi Stecco, PT and Carla Stecco, MD.
    Summary: This book focuses on concepts around evaluating the fascia based on functional testing, movement and direction in specific spatial planes, and the location of specific areas to treat safely.

    Contents:
    History of fascial manipulation
    Anatomy of the fascia from the clinical point of view
    Physiology of the fascia from the clinical point of view
    Fascial manipulation
    What kind of disorders and dysfunctions to treat with musculoskeletal fascial manipulation
    Fascial manipulation for internal dysfunctions
    Veterinary fascial manipulation
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Alfred Abuhamad, MD, Professor of Obstetrics & Gynecology, Professor of Radiology, Chairman, Department of Obstetrics & Gynecology, Vice Dean for Clinical Affairs, Eastern Virginia Medical School, Norfolk, Virginia, Rabih Chaoui, MD, Professor of Obstetrics & Gynecology, Prenatal Diagnosis and Human Genetics Center, Berlin, Germany.
    Contents:
    Congenital heart disease: incidence, risk factors, and prevention stragegies
    Guidelines for the performance of the sonographic screening and echocardiography examination of the fetal heart
    Embryology of the heart
    Genetic aspects of congenital heart diseases
    Cardiac anatomy
    Fetal situs
    Cardiac chambers: the four-chamber and short-axis views
    The great vessels: axial, oblique, and sagittal views
    The three-vessel-trachea view and upper mediastinum
    Systematic evaluation of the venous system
    Optimization of the two-dimensional grayscale image in fetal cardiac examination
    Color doppler in fetal echocardiography
    Pulsed doppler in fetal echocardiography
    Fetal cardiac function
    Three- and four-dimensional ultrasound of the fetal heart
    Fetal cardiac measurements and reference ranges
    Atrial, ventricular, and atrioventricular septal defects
    Univentricular atrioventricular connection, double inlet ventricle, and tricuspid atresia and ventricular septal defect
    Ebstein anomaly, tricuspid valve dysplasia, and tricuspid regurgitation
    Aortic stenosis and bicuspid aortic valve
    Hypoplastic left heart syndrome and critical aortic stenosis
    Coarctation of the aorta and interrupted aortic arch
    Pulmonary stenosis, pulmonary atresia with intact ventricular septum, and ductus arteriosus constriction
    Tetralogy of fallot, pulmonary atresia with ventricular septal defect, and absent pulmonary valve syndrome
    Common arterial trunk
    Double outlet right ventricle
    Complete and congenitally corrected transposition of the great arteries
    Right aortic arch, double aortic arch, and aberrant subclavian artery
    Fetal heterotaxy and situs inversus
    Anomalies of systemic and pulmonary venous connections
    Fetal cardiomyopathies and fetal heart tumors
    Fetal arrhythmias.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    Alfred Abuhamad, Rabih Chaoui.
    Summary: "Covering every aspect of fetal heart examination and all major cardiac malformations, A Practical Guide to Fetal Echocardiography is widely acknowledged as the definitive text in this challenging field. This award-winning title clearly depicts examples of commonly seen abnormalities and day-to-day cases, as well as rare pathology. Authored by renowned experts, the fully updated fourth edition is a lavishly illustrated, easy-to-read text designed to serve as a comprehensive reference for all practitioners involved in cardiac imaging. Features significant revisions including several new chapters, new artwork, and updated reference lists. Discusses disorders in terms of the ultrasound findings with key points summarized at the end of each chapter. Images are accompanied by clear, colorful schematic drawings that depict cardiac abnormalities. Features the addition of Approach to Diagnosis, an algorithm at the end of each chapter to assist providers in reaching the proper diagnosis.^Includes numerous tables that outline common and differentiating features of various cardiac malformations. Covers the technical aspects of the cardiac exam in the first half of the text; the second half features detailed discussions of fetal cardiac malformations, each presented in a practical, methodical format that includes the definition, spectrum of disease and incidence, the use of gray scale, color Doppler, 3D and early gestation ultrasound in diagnosis, followed by the differential diagnosis, prognosis, and outcome. Features a practical, concise, easy-to-use format, making it indispensable for both physicians and sonographers in the detection of congenital heart disease. Winner of British Medical Association Awards 2016: BMA Medical Book of the Year and Obstetrics and Gynecology - First Prize. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone.^Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. "-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Angela Amar, L. Kathleen Sekula.
    Summary: Victims of violence are unfortunately ever-present in healthcare today. Regardless of the setting, nurses are often the first to interact with victims and regularly must step into uncomfortable or difficult situations. To ensure patient and provider safety and enable the best possible outcomes, every nurse should be well- versed in forensic and theoretical issues of violence. A Practical Guide to Forensic Nursing is an evidence-based guide to understanding and applying forensic nursing science. Authors Angela F. Amar and L. Kathleen Sekula introduce practical and theoretical perspectives on violence and provide valuable resources, including injury assessment and violence prevention strategies as well as an overview of relevant legal, ethical, societal, and policy issues. Whether you are a student, new nurse, or experienced clinician, you will find the right tools and strategies to broaden your understanding of violence and help you integrate forensic science into your patient care. -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2016
  • Digital
    Shirley V. Hodgson, William D. Foulkes, Charis Eng and Eamonn R. Maher.
    Summary: A Practical Guide to Human Cancer Genetics, 4th edition, is a comprehensive and up-to-date guide to the diagnosis, clinical features and management of inherited disorders conferring cancer susceptibility. This fully updated new edition covers risk analysis and genetic counseling for individuals with a family history of cancer, and includes a discussion of predictive testing and the organisation of the cancer genetics service. There is also information about the genes causing Mendelian cancer predisposing conditions and their mechanisms of action. This book is an invaluable reference source for students, general practitioners, geneticists and specialist clinicians in all disciplines.

    Contents:
    1. Central Nervous System
    2. Eye
    3. Cardiorespiratory System and Thorax
    4. Endocrine System
    5. Gastrointestinal System
    6. Reproductive System
    7. Urinary System
    8. Blood and Lymph
    9. Musculoskeletal System
    10. Skin
    11. Inherited Cancer-Predisposing Syndromes.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ost, David E.; Wahidi, Momen M.
    Summary: "Concise, current, and evidence-based, Practical Guide to Interventional Pulmonology provides authoritative guidance on basic and advanced interventional pulmonology (IP) procedures and state-of-the-art technologies. Leading IP experts offer detailed, practical tips on everything from, how to start an IP practice, patient selection, and pre-procedural decision making to practical approaches and alternate therapies such as surgery or radiation. This one-stop manual covers all the latest IP procedures and their efficacy, precautions, safety aspects, complications, and step-by-step illustrated techniques and tips in one convenient volume"-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Guillaume Saliou, Marie Theaudin, Claire Join-Lambert Vincent, Raphaelle Souillard-Scemama.
    Summary: Modern vascular neurology, particularly in the emergency setting, often requires a great capacity for analysis and synthesis. Physicians who manage these patients must have acquired multidisciplinary skills, including a good knowledge of clinical neurology and medical imaging, but they may also need to be skilled in cardiology and intensive care. The initial clinical and imaging examinations play a decisive role in the management strategy. This book, written by neurologists and neuroradiologists, is designed to help all physicians involved in the management of neurovascular disease. The format and contents of this book, including the latest guidelines from learned societies, are designed to provide a succinct and practical guide. Although this book is particularly devoted to ischaemic stroke, other neurovascular diseases, especially haemorrhagic stroke, are also discussed. This book should constitute a valuable tool for everyday practice for all medical personnel involved in neurovascular disease.

    Contents:
    Principles of Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI)
    Arterial stroke overview
    Territorial brain infarction
    Watershed infarction
    Transient ischemic attack
    Lacunar infarction and small arteries diseases
    Rare cerebral vasculopathy
    Hemopathy
    Cerebral hemorrhage
    Cerebral venous thrombosis
    Medullary infarction
    Imaging differential diagnosis in stroke
    Incidentalomas
    Thrombolysis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jolanta Urszula Weaver.
    Summary: Get a quick, expert overview of the many key facets of obesity management with this concise, practical resource by Dr. Jolanta Weaver. Ideal for any health care professional who cares for patients with a weight problem. This easy-to-read reference addresses a wide range of topics - including advice on how to "unpack" the behavioral causes of obesity in order to facilitate change, manage effective communication with patients suffering with weight problems and future directions in obesity medicine.

    Contents:
    The global problem of obesity / Susan E. Jones
    Health economics of obesity / Sarah Hill, Yemi Oluboyede, Frauke Becker
    Glucagon-like peptide 1 and human obesity / Ananthi Anandhakrishnan
    Obesity, cortisol excess, and the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis / Ann L. Hunter, Akheel A. Syed
    Thyroid and weight / Angelos Kyriacou
    Obesity and polycystic ovary syndrome / Unaiza Qamar, Stephen L. Atkin, Thozhukat Sathyapalan
    The role of human gut microbiota in obesity / Stephen Hyer
    Obesity and cardiovascular disease prevention / Ray Meleady
    Obesity and nonalcoholic fatty liver disease / Nimantha M.W. de Alwis
    Lipid disorders in obesity / Manoj Wickramasinghe, Jolanta U. Weaver
    Obesity and the effects on the respiratory system / Dr. Anindo Banerjee, Dr. Emily Heiden
    The effect of obesity on reproductive health / Ian A. Aird, Yitka Graham
    Obesity and pregnancy / Emma Slack, Helene Brandon, Dr. Nicola Heslehurst
    Genetics and obesity / Béatrice Dubern, Karine Clément, Christine Poitou
    Childhood obesity / Cristina G. Matei, Philippe Bareille
    Obesity and depression / Floriana S. Luppino, Leonore M. de Witt
    Visual biases in estimating body size / Martin J. Tovée, Piers L. Cornelissen
    Eating disorders and obesity / Dr. Esther M. Cohen-Tovée
    Motivational interviewing and mindfulness in weight management / Lynne Johnston, Charlotte Hilton, Claire Lane
    The role of physical activity and exercise in managing obesity and achieving weight loss / Dr. Matthew D. Campbell, Dr. Zoe H. Rutherford
    Weight management programs / Pamela Dyson
    Breakfast for the prevention and treatment of obesity / Javier T. Gonzalez
    Overview of a range of diets in obesity management / Helen Long, Grace Stonebanks
    New approach to type 2 diabetes reversal in obesity / Sarah Steven
    Historical drug therapies in obesity / Ayat Bashir, Jolanta U. Weaver
    New therapies in obesity / Caroline Day
    Medical management of patients before and after bariatric surgery / Arutchelvam Vijayaraman
    Surgical management of obesity / Arutchelvam Vijayaraman
    Psychological management before and after weight loss surgery / Lynne Johnston, Charlotte Hilton, Claire Lane
    Dietary interventions for weight loss and essential aspects of nutrition post-bariatric surgery / Jordan Barnard, Deborah Snowdon, Lucy Hewitson
    The future of obesity medicine / Jolanta U. Weaver.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Görker Sel.
    Summary: This book, based on non-interactive question-and-answer format, offers an essential guide for medical students who need to prepare for oral exams or clinical visits. Starting from specific clinical situations the volume provides clear questions on the theory related to the cases. Each question is followed by correct answers that summarize the main information. Suggested reading are included to deepen the topics and enhance the readers knowledge. Accordingly, this practical guide will help students get ready for their oral exams, and help prepare young residents for their first clinical cases.

    Contents:
    Prenatal invasive procedures
    Rh incompatibility and fetal hydrops
    Amniotic fluid abnormalities
    Antenatal bleeding
    Vaginal Bleeding in Pregnant Women
    Multiple Pregnancies
    Intrauterine Growth Restriction (IUGR)
    Normal Birth
    Operative Births
    Preterm and postterm pregnancies
    Pregnancy and Diabetes
    Pregnancy and Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Pregnancy and Haematological Disorders
    Pregnancy and Hypertensive Disorders
    Cardiovascular Diseases in Pregnancy
    Pregnancy and Renal Diseases
    Pregnancy and Respiratory Disorders
    Pregnancy and Thyroid Diseases
    Ectopic Pregnancy
    Malpresentation and Dystocia
    Postpartum bleeding
    Diseases encountered in Puerperium
    Contraception
    Painful Conditions in Gynaecology
    Abnormal Uterine Bleeding
    STD-Infections-Genital Ulcers
    Endometriosis
    Benign Diseases of Uterus
    Benign Diseases of Ovarian and Tuba Uteri
    Osteoporosis-Menopause
    PCOS
    Pediatric and Adolescent Gynecology
    Approach to infertile patients
    Ovulation Induction
    Assisted Reproductive Techniques
    Pelvic Relaxation
    Urinary Incontinence
    Endometrial cancer
    Ovarian and Tuba cancer
    Cervical Pre-invasive Lesions, Cervix and Vulva Cancers
    Vaginal preinvasive lesions and Vaginal cancer
    Gestational Trophoblastic Diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Richard Balon, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to the Realm of Paraphilias / Richard Balon
    2. General Information: History, Etiology and Theory (e.g., Courtship), Diagnosis, Comorbidity and Prevalence / Richard Balon
    3. Assessment and Basic Management Principles of Paraphilic Disorders / Deyadira Baez-Sierra, Chandrika Balgobin, and Thomas N. Wise
    4. Treatment of Paraphilic Disorders / Deyadira Baez-Sierra, Chandrika Balgobin, and Thomas N. Wise
    5. Voyeuristic Disorder / Richard Balon
    6. Exhibitionistic Disorder / Richard Balon
    7. Frotteuristic Disorder / Richard Balon
    8. Sexual Masochism Disorder / Rebecca A. Wylie and Kevan R. Wylie
    9. Sexual Sadism Disorder / David V. Hamilton and Jordan Rosen
    10. Pedophilic Disorder / Julia Machado Khoury, Marco Antônio Valente Roque, and Frederico Duarte Garcia
    11. Fetishistic Disorder / Scott F. Martin
    12. Transvestic Disorder / Richard Balon
    13. Other Specified Paraphilic Disorders / Peer Briken, Verena Klein, and Fritjof von Franqué
    14. Non-paraphilic Hypersexual Disorder / Fritjof von Franqué, Verena Klein, and Peer Briken
    15. Emerging Issues: Compulsive Online Sexual Behaviors / Gabriel Tobia and Waguih William IsHak
    16. Ethics and the Therapeutic Relationship in the Care of People Living with Paraphilic Disorders / Christina Tara Khan, Tara C. Collins, and Laura Weiss Roberts
    17. Legal Issues Involved in the Management of Paraphilic Disorders / Brad D. Booth
    18. Cultural Aspects of Unusual Sexual Interests / A. Pacheco Palha and Mário F. Lourenço.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Alexandra Armitage, editor.
    Contents:
    The neurobiology of Parkinson's disease
    The patient exam
    Defining idiopathic Parkinson's disease
    Imaging and advanced studies
    Neuropsychological analysis
    Additional evaluations
    Parkinson-plus syndromes
    Other Parkinsonisms
    Treatment of motor symptoms
    Treatment of non-motor symptoms : autonomic dysfunction
    Treatment of non-motor symptoms : sleep disturbances
    Treatment of non-motor symptoms : disturbances of thought
    Treatment of non-motor symptoms : neuropsychiatric symptoms
    Exercise
    Complementary and alternative therapies
    Nutrition
    Caregiver burden and legal considerations.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Eustachio Nettis, Gianni Angelini, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides allergy and dermatology specialists with a practical guide to the correct patch test methodology for their day-to-day clinical practice: it includes the latest available hapten series (standard series and integrative series), the golden rules for concentration and conservation of the haptens themselves, and the indispensable test equipment. The book, coming in a handy softcover format, is also nicely illustrated with over 100 full color pictures and tables. The contents focus on the interpretation of the epicutaneous test reading as well, relating to clinical relevance of the reactions and granting a correct management of the allergic patient. Practical Guide to Patch Testing will be of great value to all practicing allergists or dermatologists and professionals related.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Contact Dermatitis
    Patch Testing
    Reading of Patchtest Reactions
    Evaluation of the Clinical Relevance of a Positive Patchtest Reaction
    Management of the Allergic Patient
    Other Techiniques of Diagnosis
    Examples of Patch Test Reactions and Related 72-hour Readings
    Bibliography.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jayanta Kumar Patra, Swagat Kumar Das, Gitishree Das, Hrudayanath Thatoi.
    Summary: Pharmacological biotechnology is applied to and used to study drug development, working mechanisms, diagnosis, and therapies. This manual is the textbook covering the whole range of experiments related to pharmacology. It also contains basic laboratory safety guidelines along with the basic calculations and formulas used in a laboratory. Each chapter starts with an introduction/theory into the basic approach followed by detailed methods sections with easy-to-follow protocols and comprehensive troubleshooting, calculations and possible questions for examination. The target group is researchers who are studying pharmacological biotechnology in the laboratory.

    Contents:
    General aspects of pharmacology laboratory
    Isolated tissues and organs
    Screening of drugs using cell lines/isolated tissues/intact animals
    Genotoxicity and toxicological studies
    Experimental animal studies
    Clinical trials
    IPR and ethics in animal studies.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Arunangshu Chakraborty, Balakrishnan Ashokka, editors.
    Summary: This book covers point of care ultrasound (POCUS) in a practical, problem oriented and illustrated manner. It begins with introduction to the basic principles of medical ultrasound imaging and ultrasound guided interventions and outlines point of care ultrasound in a lucid manner for rapid learning for medical students as well as practitioners. It contains chapters on ultrasound of the airways, thoracic ultrasound including lungs and transthoracic screening echocardiogram, vascular assessment, ultrasound of the abdomen for focussed trauma assessment, gastric volume assessment and ultrasound guided interventions such as vascular cannulations, pleurocentesis, etc. along with some of the latest point of care ultrasound techniques such as ocular assessment and assessment of the foetus and placenta in the operation theatre. This book will help the intensivist, emergency physician and anaesthesiologist to learn the basics of POCUS, which ostensibly, is the future of medical practice. It also includes objective structured clinical examination (OSCE) questions after every chapter as well as multiple choice questions (MCQs) that will benefit the students greatly. The book also includes videos from some of the celebrated practitioners of POCUS providing a unique learning experience. This book is suited for students, trainees and practitioners alike. The modules of POCUS described here are part of the curriculum of anaesthesiology in the UK, USA, Singapore, Australia/ New Zealand and most of the countries. The book also covers the curriculum of POCUS in critical care and emergency medicine courses.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Basics of USG and POCUS
    Chapter 2 Vascular cannulations: internal jugular vein, subclavian vein, femoral vein, basilic vein, radial artery, femoral artery
    Chapter 3 Ultrasound of the airway: oropharynx, larynx, trachea
    Chapter 4 Lungs ultrasound- imaging, pleural effusion, pneumothorax, consolidation, interventions (pleural aspiration- USG guided, pleurodesis
    Chapter 5 Screening TT echocardiogram, pericardiocentesis
    Chapter 6 Assessment of IVC, femoral vein and vascular incompetencies and thromboses
    Chapter 7 Focused assessment with sonography for trauma (FAST) scan
    Chapter 8 Paediatrics POCUS
    Chapter 9 Miscellaneous: including gastric volume assessment, urinary bladder volume assessment, optic nerve sheath diameter measurement etc
    Chapter 10 Future of ultrasound: 3d-4d RECONSTRUCTION real-time guidance, AI- direct web assistance, connectivity to group consult for remote expertise.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rebecca Case, Sinead Blake.
    Summary: This book is a practical guide, with rationale to supporting people with epilepsy. It encompasses epilepsy guidance such as NICE (2012, revised 2019), The Equality Act (2010), the children and families act (2014), current evidence based-practice, and regulatory organisation standards. It is predominantly aimed at nurses and student nurses, especially, those studying learning disability nursing but also residential, respite and supported living services, schools and family carers, to enable them to offer appropriate and evidence-based support to people with epilepsy of all ages. It is estimated there are approximately 1200 epilepsy related deaths each year in the UK. Many of these are considered to be preventable. High-profile cases have led to an increase in anxiety in people providing services, and greater scrutiny of those services by regulatory bodies. Over the years, the authors have been asked the same questions and witnessed the same misunderstandings and mistakes, by people supporting individuals with epilepsy. So they looked at the common themes and the resources available. It became clear that the information to address these gaps is available, but not easily accessible. There is lots of information in the public domain, however much of it is factual, rather than practical. This book provides practical information and resources with the focus on "what needs to happen"," how to make it happen" and "who needs to do it". This book is useful for supporting people with epilepsy wherever they live (both within and outside the United Kingdom).

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Chapter 1: What Is Epilepsy?
    1.1 What Is Epilepsy?
    1.1.1 Not All Seizures Are Due to Epilepsy (Differential Diagnosis)
    1.1.2 Dissociative Seizures (Also Referred to as Non-epileptic Attack Disorder, Psychogenic Seizures, Organic Seizures, Functional Seizures, Pseudo-Seizures)
    1.2 How Common Is Epilepsy?
    1.2.1 Patterns
    1.2.2 Causes
    1.2.2.1 Genetic Causes
    1.2.2.2 Symptomatic
    1.2.2.3 Unknown
    1.3 Diagnosis
    1.3.1 Witness Account
    1.3.2 Investigations
    1.3.2.1 EEG
    What Does It Mean?
    1.3.2.2 Radiology: MRI or CT Scans 1.3.2.3 MRI Scan (Magnetic Resonance Imaging)
    1.3.2.4 CT Scan (Computer Topography)
    1.3.2.5 Blood Tests
    1.4 Prognosis
    1.5 Summary
    References
    Resources
    Chapter 2: Seizures, Syndromes and Status
    2.1 Seizures
    2.2 Focal Seizures
    2.2.1 Focal Aware Seizures
    2.2.2 Focal Impaired Awareness Seizures
    2.2.3 Common Focal Symptoms
    2.2.3.1 Motor
    2.2.3.2 Non-motor
    2.2.4 Focal to Bilateral Tonic Clonic Seizure
    2.3 Generalised Seizures
    2.3.1 Tonic Clonic Seizures
    2.3.2 Tonic Seizures
    2.3.3 Clonic Seizures
    2.3.4 Atonic Seizures
    2.3.5 Myoclonic Seizures 2.3.6 Absence Seizures
    2.3.7 Epileptic Spasms
    2.4 Unknown Onset Seizures
    2.5 Seizure Syndromes
    2.5.1 Genetic Epilepsies (Previously Called Idiopathic Generalised Epilepsies)
    2.5.2 Childhood Absence Epilepsy (CAE)
    2.5.3 Dravet Syndrome
    2.5.4 Epileptic Encephalopathies
    2.5.5 Juvenile Absence Epilepsy
    2.5.6 Juvenile Myoclonic Epilepsy
    2.5.7 Lennox Gastaut Syndrome
    2.5.8 Panayiotopoulos Syndrome
    2.5.9 West Syndrome (Infantile Spasms)
    2.6 Summary
    References
    Resources Epilepsy Society (2018) Seizures. https://www.epilepsysociety.org.uk/seizure-types. Accessed 08 Jan 2020
    Chapter 3: Medication: Epilepsy
    3.1 The Likelihood of Getting Seizure Control
    3.2 When Are Antiseizure Medications Prescribed?
    3.3 How Antiseizure Medications Work
    3.4 Choosing a Medication
    3.5 Cost of Medication
    3.6 Monitoring Medications
    3.7 Common Medications
    3.8 Medications with Specific Considerations
    3.8.1 Controlled Antiepileptic Medications
    3.8.2 Sodium Valproate
    3.8.3 Medical Cannabis and CBD Oil 3.8.4 Enzyme-Inducing Medications (and Contraception)
    3.9 Adjusting Medications
    3.10 Withdrawing Medications
    3.11 Side Effects
    3.12 Interactions
    3.13 Addiction
    3.14 Brands of Medication
    3.15 Overdose/Incorrect Dose/Missed Dose
    3.16 Supply Issues
    3.17 Formulations
    3.18 Off Licence Use (Named Patient Basis)
    3.19 Travelling with Antiseizure Medication
    3.20 Summary
    References
    Resources
    Chapter 4: Emergency Medication
    4.1 Overview of Emergency Medications
    4.1.1 Community Treatments
    4.2 Types of Emergency Treatments
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    John L. Dornhoffer, Rudolf Leuwer, Konrad Schwager, Sören Wenzel.
    Summary: This book, written by international experts, is a detailed guide to the Eustachian tube, with emphasis on those aspects of most relevance to the practitioner. The opening chapters document the clinical anatomy and provide essential information on physiology, with explanation of the new model of tubal mechanics and the use of Eustachian tube function tests. Diagnosis and therapy for the patulous Eustachian tube are then discussed, placing special emphasis on a novel conservative treatment regimen that has proven to be a breakthrough for patients with this clinical syndrome. A further extensive chapter examines overall function of the Eustachian tube, primarily from the middle ear surgeons viewpoint. Tuboplasty procedures, including laser tuboplasty, and tympanoplasty are described, and the implications of different middle ear pathologies for surgical treatment are explained. Conservative treatment of Eustachian tube obstruction and hearing aids for the nonaerated middle ear are also discussed. The previously unpublished treatment methods that are described in this book will be invaluable in ensuring the best possible clinical outcomes.

    Contents:
    Clinical Anatomy of the Eustachian Tube
    Physiology of the Eustachian Tube
    Pathophysiology of the Eustachian Tube: The Patulous Eustachian Tube
    Tubal Function from a Middle Ear Surgeon's Viewpoint.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Angelo P. Giardino, Michelle A. Lyn, Eileen R. Giardino, editors.
    Summary: This updated second edition assists the reader in recognizing abuse and neglect in children and youth, as well as determining its extent. Complete with clinical illustrations, this guide details systematic evaluation procedures, prevention strategies and more.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; A Short Historical Reflection on Professional Attention to Child Abuse and Neglect; How the Book Is Organized; Acknowledgment; Authors' Note; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Child Abuse as a Health Problem;
    Chapter 1: Introduction: Child Abuse and Neglect; Definition; Child Abuse; Reporting; Scope of the Problem; Epidemiology; Fatal Child Abuse; Inflicted vs. Noninflicted Injuries; Etiology of Physical Abuse and Neglect; Models for Abuse; Helfer's Clinical/Developmental Model for Risk Factors; Caregiver Factors; Child Factors; Environmental Factors EffectsCosts; In Brief; References;
    Chapter 2: Evaluation of Physical Abuse and Neglect; Approach to the Medical Evaluation; The History and Interview; Documentation; The Caregiver-Child Interaction; History Related to Injuries; Past Medical History; Histories That Raise the Concern for Abuse; History Incongruous with the Physical Examination; History of Minor Trauma with Extensive Physical Injury; A History of No Trauma with Evidence of Injury (Unexplained Injury); A History of Self-Inflicted Trauma Incompatible with the Development of the Child Caregiver Blame for Serious Injuries on a Young ChildHistory of Injury Changes with Time; Delay in Seeking Treatment; The Physical Examination; Indicated Laboratory/Diagnostic Evaluation; Radiographic Skeletal Survey; Radionuclide Bone Scan; Computed Tomography; Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI); Bleeding Evaluation; Toxicology Screens; Tests for Abdominal Trauma; Photographic Documentation; In Brief; Appendix; References; Part II: Specific Injuries;
    Chapter 3: Skin Injury: Bruises and Burns; Introduction; Bruises; Overview; Pathophysiology; What Is an Inflicted Bruise?; Evaluation for Abuse HistoryPhysical Examination; Shape; Dating of Bruises; The Differential Diagnosis of Bruising; Forensic and Laboratory Evaluation; Burns; Overview; Pathophysiology; Burns and Abuse; Scalds; Tap Water: A Special Case; Contact Burns; Evaluation for Abuse; History; Physical Examination; Indicated Laboratory Assessment; Differential Diagnosis of Burns; Treatment: Overview; Critical Burn; Major Burn; Minor Burns; In Brief; Appendix; References;
    Chapter 4: Fractures and Skeletal Injuries; General Principles; Bone Anatomy and Fracture Description; Imaging Techniques; Skeletal Survey Radionuclide Bone Scan Computed Tomography; Magnetic Resonance Imaging; Stages of Fracture Healing; Stage 1: Induction; Stage 2: Callus Formation; Stage 3: Remodeling; Dating of Skeletal Injuries; Long Bone Fractures; Diaphyseal Fractures; Metaphyseal Fractures; Growth Arrest Lines; Physeal and Epiphyseal Fractures; Skull Fractures; Skull Anatomy; Skull Fractures and Abuse; Dating Skull Fractures; Rib Fractures; Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation and Rib Fractures; Radiographic Findings of Rib Fractures; Other Fractures Associated with Child Abuse; Vertebral Fractures; Pelvic Fractures
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Helena Knotkova, Michael A. Nitsche, Marom Bikson, Adam J. Woods, editors.
    Summary: Of the Effects of Weak Direct Current Stimulation on Synapses and Neuronal Populations and Open QuestionsEmerging Framework: Functional Targeting by tDCS; References; Chapter 3: Mechanisms of Acute and After Effects of Transcranial Direct Current Stimulation; Introduction; Regional Neuronal Effects of tDCS; Primary or Acute Effects; The Polarization Effect and Acute DCS Polarity-Specific Excitability Changes; Quantification of Polarization Effects with Coupling Constant; Geometry of Stimulation Effects and Sensitivity of Soma, Dendrite, and Axon Compartments.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Fiona M Lewis, Fabrizio Bogliatto, Marc van Beurden.
    Contents:
    The normal vulva
    Taking a history and examination
    How to take a vulval biopsy and the importance of clinico-pathological correlation
    Basic histology of the vulva
    Investigations in vulval disease
    Topical treatment in vulval disease
    Symptoms in vulval disease
    Signs in vulval disease
    Eczema, allergy and the vulva
    Psoriasis
    Lichen simplex
    Lichen sclerosus
    Lichen planus
    Hidradenitis suppurativa and Crohn's disease
    Disorders of pigmentation on the vulva
    Other dermatoses
    Vulval infection : sexually transmitted
    Vulval infection : non-sexually transmitted
    Vulval intraepithelial neoplasia
    Extramammary Paget's disease
    Vulval squamous cell carcinoma
    Other vulval cancers
    Vulvodynia
    Psychosexual aspects of vulval disease
    Benign lesions.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Print
    Andrew D. Hollenbach, Ph.D., Associate Professor of Genetics, Louisiana State University Health Sciences Center, New Orleans, LA.
    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: ch. 1 Ruth L. Kirschstein
    The Woman and Her Legacy
    1.1. Ruth L. Kirschstein
    A Brief Biography
    1.2. The Legacy
    The Ruth L. Kirschstein NRSA Grants
    ch. 2 The People Behind the Curtain
    Understanding the Review Process
    2.1. The Review Process
    2.2. The Role of Human Nature in the Review Process
    ch. 3 Who Are You?
    The Fellowship Applicant
    3.1. The Biosketch
    3.2. Goals for Fellowship Training and Career
    3.3. Selection of Sponsor and Institute
    3.4. Previous Research Experience
    3.5. Letters of Recommendation
    3.6. Respective Contributions
    3.7. Activities Planned Under This Award
    ch. 4 Who's the Boss?
    Sponsor, Collaborators, and Consultants
    4.1. Biosketch
    4.2. Sponsor and Cosponsor Information
    ch. 5 Blind Them with Science
    The Research Training Plan
    5.1. Specific Aims
    5.2. Significance
    5.3. Approach
    ch. 6 Last but Not Least: Institutional Environment, Training Potential, and Other Scored Items
    6.1. Institutional Environment and Commitment to Training
    6.2. Training Potential
    6.3. Overall Impact Score
    6.4. Other Scored Items
    ch. 7 Details, Details, Details
    Nonscored Items, Formatting, and the Cover Letter
    7.1. Project Summary/Abstract
    7.2. Project Narrative
    7.3. Responsible Conduct of Research
    7.4. Formatting
    7.5. Cover Letter
    ch. 8 Now What?
    Resubmission
    8.1. The Summary Statement
    8.2. To Resubmit or Not to Resubmit
    8.3. Addressing the Critiques
    8.4. Introduction to the Application.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Andrew D. Hollenbach, Ph.D., Associate Professor of Genetics, Louisiana State University Health Sciences Center, New Orleans, LA.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Andrew D. Hollenbach, Ph.D., Associate Professor of Genetics, Louisiana State University Health Sciences Center, New Orleans, LA.
    Summary: A Practical Guide to Writing a Ruth L. Kirschstein NRSA Grant, Second Edition, continues to provide F-Series grant applicants and mentors with insider knowledge on the process by which these grants are reviewed, the biases that contribute to the reviews, the extent of information required in an NRSA training grant, and a deeper understanding of the exact purpose of each section of the application. New additions to this edition include coverage of other NIH grants, such as R01, R21, and P20, as well as information on significant modifications to the Biosketch and Letters of Recommendation sections. This book is a solid resource for trainees and their mentors to use as a guide when constructing F30, F31, and F32 grant applications.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Practical guides for general practice to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Jian-Jun Wei, Pei Hui, editors.
    Summary: This book serves as a quick review or summary of major diagnostic challenges in gynecologic pathology and embraces a Q/A format by providing the desired diagnostic knowledge. It combines the diagnostic approach as it relates to morphology and the relevant ancillary tests which impact on clinical outcome or management. Each topic is written by subspecialty gynecological pathologists in the field in making this a valuable book for a broad spectrum of readers, particularly pathology trainees, junior pathologists and general practicing pathologists. These authors provide concise and accurate answers for a variety of common, yet challenging diagnostic scenarios that are relevant and frequently encountered in daily practice. The book walks readers through current topics, controversies and diagnostic dilemmas for common gynecologic diseases with morphologic features and key ancillary tests, richly illustrated with figures and tables. To reflex the current advances in diagnostic gynecological pathology, the topics are closely correlated with the updated disease classifications and diagnostic criteria, particularly those recognized by the World Health Organization. Practical Gynecologic Pathology provides a concise summary and review for some of the most difficult, prevailing and emerging concepts in gynecologic pathology.

    Contents:
    Diseases of the Vulva
    Diseases of the Vagina
    HPV-Associated Cervical Neoplasia
    NonHPV-Associated Cervical Neoplasia
    Uterine Epithelial Neoplasia
    Uterine Mesenchymal Neoplasia
    Gestational Trophoblastic Diseases
    Diseases of the Fallopian Tube
    Ovarian Epithelial Neoplasia
    Ovarian Germ cell and Sex Cord-Stromal Neoplasia
    Mescelineous Neoplasia of the Ovary
    Diseases of the Peritoneum
    Intraoperative Consultation
    Inherited Cancer Syndromes
    Immunohistochemistry
    Molecular Diagnosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ulrich Spandau, Heinrich Heimann.
    Summary: Since publication of the first edition of this book in 2012 vitreoretinal surgery has marched with huge steps forward. In 2012 23G was standard, today 25G and 27G are the most commonly used gauge sizes for vitrectomy. In 2012 the cutting rate was 5.000 cuts/min and today with the development of a novel vitreous cutter the cutting rate has increased to 16.000 cuts/min. The advent of 25G/27G made the instruments smaller and surgery less traumatic. Practical Handbook for Small-Gauge Vitrectomy: A Step-By-Step Introduction to Surgical Techniques, 2ndEdition focuses on these new developments and features new chapters on PVR detachment, intraocular tumour, macular translocation, sub macular hemorrhages and ocular trauma. The surgeries are demonstrated step-by-step and the material is shown in detail and videos vsualize the surgery. This book will serve as an immensely useful guide for all surgeons who are intending to make use of this exciting and increasingly used technique.

    Contents:
    Introduction to small-gauge vitrectomy
    Equipment
    General considerations and techniques of pars plana vitrectomy
    Special techniques for pars plana vitrectomy
    Conventional vitrectomy with 3-port trocar system
    Bimanual vitrectomy with 4-port trocar system
    Diabetic retinopathy
    Dislocated IOL and dropped nucleus
    Endophthalmitis
    Detachment
    Trauma
    Ocular trauma
    Iris Prosthesis, Special IOLþs and Submacular Hemorrhages
    Surgical pearls
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Thach Nguyen, Ernest F. Talarico, Jr., Shao Liang Chen, Duane S. Pinto, Moo-Hyun Kim, Cindy Grines, C. Michael Gibson.
    Contents:
    Vascular access / Thach N. Nguyen, Trung Le
    Dynamic coronary angiography and flow / Ernest F. Talarico, Jr. Thach N. Nguyen, Trung Le
    Guides / Dobrin Vassilev, Thach N. Nguyen
    Wires / Thach N. Nguyen
    Balloon angioplasty / Thach N. Nguyen, Nguyen Van Viet Thang, Nguyen Van Lanh, Kim Truong, Ria Shah
    Stenting / Thach N. Nguyen, Nguyen Van Thuan, Vy Le, Riichi André Ota González, Ami Shah
    Bioresorbable vascular scaffolds / Michael Nguyen, Tan Huay Cheem, Thach Nguyen, Azeem Latif
    Transradial approach / Jack Chen, Sandeep Nathan, Xian Kai Li, Thach Nguyen
    Slender transradial intervention / Yuji Ikari
    Left main PCI / Michael S. Lee, Heajung Nguyen, Madhan Shanmugasundaram
    Chronic total occlusion / Minh Vo, Sundeep Mishra, Mohamad Lazkani, Shishir Murarka, Ashish Pershad
    Ostial lesions / Szabolcs G. Szabo, Gautam Kumar, Thach N. Nguyen
    Acute ST segment elevation myocardial infarction / John Soverow, Son Pham, Quan H. Nguyen, Alan Fong, Michael Gibson
    INTERventions in patients after CABG / Faisal Latif, Timir Paul, Phuong Anh Do, Trung Le, Thach N. Nguyen
    Bifurcation lesion / Christian Stumpf, SL Chen, Imad Sheiban, Dobrin Vasilev
    Complications / Nguyen Ngoc Quang, Thach Nguyen
    High risk patients / Nathan Sandeep, Vien Truong, Florian Krackhardt, Khanh Duong, Pham Nguyen Vinh, Thach Nguyen
    Coronary atherectomy / Michael S. Lee, Arthur Lee
    Removal of embolized material / Thach N. Nguyen
    Subclavian artery interventions / Gianluca Rigatelli, Paolo Cardaioli, ARavinda Nanjundappa
    Renal artery interventions / Gianluca Rigatelli, Paolo Cardaioli
    Carotid artery occlusive disease / Gianluca Rigatelli, Paolo Cardaioli, Horst Sievert
    Iliac artery stenosis / Gianluca Rigatelli, Paolo Cardaioli, Aravinda Nanjundappa
    Infrainguinal and infragenicular interventions / Gianluca Rigatelli, Robert S Dieter, Faisal Latif, Nelson Bernardo, Aravinda Nanjundappa
    Pulmonary embolism / Faisal Latif, Mihas Kodenchery, Anas Safadi, Thao Nguyen and Zeeshan Khan
    MitraClip mitral valve repair system / Srinivas Iyengar, James Nguyen and Edgar Tay
    Septal puncture and inoue-balloon mitral valvuloplasty / Pham Manh Hung, Nguyen Ngoc Quang, Jui-Sung Hung
    Retrograde percutaneous aortic valvuloplasty / Ted Feldman, Thach Nguyen, Duane Pinto
    Watchman left atrial appendage closure device / Srinivas Iyengar, James Nguyen, Edgar Tay, Dongming Hou
    Interventions in acute ischemic stroke / Le Van Truong, Ernest Talarico, Thach Nguyen.
    Digital Access Wiley 2020
  • Digital
    Danielle Elliott Range, Xiaoyin "Sara" Jiang, editors.
    Summary: Practical Head and Neck Pathology: Frequently Asked Questions centers around frequently asked questions, but it is not meant to be comprehensive in its approach. Instead, it aims to touch on all major or commonly encountered entities. Each chapter begins with a list of questions typically ordered from basic histologic knowledge, to inflammatory processes, primary tumors, and secondary tumor types. Strategies for the diagnosis of salivary gland, metastatic head and neck cancers and thyroid disease using ancillary testing is highlighted. Small biopsy dilemmas in undifferentiated tumors of the sinonasal and nasopharyngeal tracts are undertaken with emphasis on differential diagnosis and ancillary techniques. The tables are the foundation of the book, offering a quick reference guide for salient features of various entities and differential diagnoses. A comprehensive set of references after each question can be used to supplement the information provided and give the reader a foundation for further learning. This book answers some of the difficult, prevailing and emerging questions in head and neck pathology that arise in everyday practice. While such challenges may not always be frequent, they have tremendous impact on clinical practice. Clinically pertinent, molecular advances in treatment and diagnosis for the practicing and junior pathologist are covered.

    Contents:
    Oral Cavity
    Oropharynx, Nasopharynx and Waldeyer Ring
    Larynx/Hypopharynx
    Sinonasal Tract
    Salivary Gland
    Jaw and Bones of the Head and Face
    Ear Lesions
    Thyroid Gland
    Parathyroid
    Soft Tissue and Lymph Nodes of the Head and Neck.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Ebbing Lautenbach, [and 5 others].
    Summary: "Practical Healthcare Epidemiology takes a hands-on approach to infection prevention for physicians, healthcare epidemiologists, infection preventionists, microbiologists, nurses, and other healthcare professionals. Increased regulatory requirements and patient knowledge and involvement has elevated patient safety, healthcare-associated infections, antibiotic stewardship and quality-of-care to healthcare wide issues. This fully updated new edition brings together the expertise of leaders in healthcare epidemiology to provide best practice expert guidance on infection prevention for adult and pediatric patients in all types of healthcare facilities, from community hospitals and academic institutions, to long-term care and resource limited settings. Written in clear, straightforward terms to address prevention planning and immediate responses to specific situations, this is the go-to resource for any practitioners in medicine or public health involved in infection prevention, regardless of their current expertise in the field"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Nigel S. Key, Michael Makris and David Lillicrap.
    Summary: "Designed as a practical, succinct guide, for quick reference by clinicians with everyday questions, this title guides the reader through the range of approaches available for diagnosis, management, or prevention of hemorrhagic and thrombotic diseases or disorders." -- Back cover.

    Contents:
    Basic Principles Underlying Coagulation / Dougald M Monroe
    Laboratory Tests of Hemostasis / Steve Kitchen, Michael Makris
    Molecular Diagnostic Approaches to Hemostasis / Paula James, David Lillicrap
    Tests of Platelet Function / Marie Lordkipanidz, Gillian C Lowe, Paul Harrison
    Evaluation of the Bleeding Patient / Alice Ma, Marshall Mazepa
    Hemophilia A and B / Rhona M Maclean, Michael Makris
    Von Willebrand Disease / Giancarlo Castaman, Alberto Tosetto, Francesco Rodeghiero
    The Rarer Inherited Coagulation Disorders / Paula HB Bolton-Maggs, Jonathan Wilde, Gillian N Pike
    Acquired Inhibitors of Coagulation / Riitta Lassila, Elina Armstrong
    Quantitative Platelet Disorders / Riten Kumar, Walter HA Kahr
    Qualitative Platelet Disorders / Eti A Femia, Gian Marco Podda, Marco Cattaneo
    Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation / Raj S Kasthuri, Nigel S Key
    Thrombotic Microangiopathies / Marie Scully, David Kavanagh
    Venous Thromboembolism / Sarah Takach Lapner, Lori-Ann Linkins, Clive Kearon
    Myeloproliferative Neoplasms: Thrombosis and Hemorrhage / Brandi Reeves, Stephan Moll
    Arterial Thrombosis / R Campbell Tait, Catherine N Bagot
    Anticoagulation: Heparins and Vitamin K Antagonists / Gualtiero Palareti, Benilde Cosmi
    The Direct Oral Anticoagulants / David A Garcia, Mark A Crowther, Walter Ageno
    Antiphospholipid Syndrome / Henry G Watson, Mark Crowther
    Cardiovascular Medicine / Sreekanth Vemulapalli, Richard C Becker
    Cardiothoracic Surgery / Denise O'Shaughnessy, Ravi Gill
    Neurology / Michael Wang, Natalie Aucutt-Walter, Valerie L Jewells, David Y Huang
    Hepatology / Lara N Roberts, Raj K Patel, Roopen Arya
    Nephrology / Vimal K Derebail, Thomas L Ortel
    Oncology / Anna Falanga, Marina Marchetti
    Obstetrics, Contraception, and Estrogen Replacement / Amy Webster, Sue Pavord
    Pediatrics / Mary E Bauman, Aisha Bruce, M Patricia Massicotte
    Intensive and Critical Care / Beverley J Hunt
    Transfusion / Adrian Copplestone.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Romil Saxena.
    Contents:
    Microscopic anatomy, basic terms, and elemental lesions
    Clinical features of liver disease
    Laboratory tests in liver disease
    Investigative imaging of the liver
    Liver diseases of childhood
    Medical genetics and biochemistry in diagnosis and management
    Histologic patterns of metabolic liver diseases
    Liver in Wilson disease
    Liver disease in alpha-1 antitrypsin deficiency
    Liver disease in cystic fibrosis
    Liver disease in iron overload
    Nonalcoholic fatty liver disease
    Acute viral hepatitis
    Hepatitis B
    Hepatitis c
    Chronic hepatitis : grading and staging
    Human immunodeficiency virus infection of the liver
    Nonviral infections of the liver
    Hepatic granulomas : differential diagnosis
    Hepatic sarcoidosis
    Autoimmune hepatitis and overlap syndromes
    Metabolism of drugs and xenobiotics
    Liver injury due to drugs and herbal agents
    Alcohol-induced liver disease
    Fibrocystic liver diseases
    Primary biliary cholangitis
    Primary sclerosing cholangitis
    Loss of intrahepatic bile ducts
    Intrahepatic cholestasis
    Vascular disorders of the liver
    Premalignant and early malignant hepatocellular lesions in chronic hepatitis/cirrhosis
    Benign hepatocellular tumors
    Hepatocellular carcinoma
    Benign and malignant tumors of bile ducts
    Liver tumors of childhood
    Miscellaneous liver tumors and tumor-like lesions
    Clinical aspects of liver transplantation
    Pathology of liver transplantation
    Biphenotypic primary liver carcinoma
    Regression of liver fibrosis : from myth to reality
    Cirrhosis : a term in need of a makeover.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Baron F. Branstetter IV.
    Summary: This new edition is a comprehensive source of imaging informatics fundamentals and how those fundamentals are applied in everyday practice. Imaging Informatics Professionals (IIPs) play a critical role in healthcare, and the scope of the profession has grown far beyond the boundaries of the PACS. A successful IIP must understand the PACS itself and all the software systems networked together in the medical environment. Additionally, an IIP must know the workflows of all the imaging team members, have a base in several medical specialties and be fully capable in the realm of information technology. Practical Imaging Informatics has been reorganized to follow a logical progression from basic background information on IT and clinical image management, through daily operations and troubleshooting, to long-term planning. The book has been fully updated to include the latest technologies and procedures, including artificial intelligence and machine learning. Written by a team of renowned international authors from the Society for Imaging Informatics in Medicine and the European Society of Medical Imaging Informatics, this book is an indispensable reference for the practicing IIP. In addition, it is an ideal guide for those studying for a certification exam, biomedical informaticians, trainees with an interest in informatics, and any professional who needs quick access to the nuts and bolts of imaging informatics.

    Contents:
    Section I: Medical Imaging
    Introduction to Medical Images
    Medical Terminology
    Imaging Modalities and Digital Images
    Image Post-Processing
    Incorporating Non-Image Data
    Section II: Information Technology
    Computers and Networking
    Data Storage
    Data Security and Patient Privacy
    PACS and Other Image Management Systems
    Ancillary Software
    Section III: Imaging Informatics
    Databases and Data Retrieval
    Standards and Interoperability
    Billing and Coding
    Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning
    Section IV: Image Interpretation and Support
    Roles and Relationships in Healthcare
    Workflow Steps in Radiology
    Viewing Images
    Reporting and Dictation
    User Governance
    External Data
    Section V: Work Environment and User Training
    Reading Room Design
    Enterprise Distribution
    Customer Relations
    User Training
    Quality Improvement and Workflow Engineering
    Change Management and Acceptance Testing
    Section VI: Operations
    Imaging Quality Assurance
    Disaster Recovery
    Downtime Procedures
    Policy Management and Regulatory Compliance
    Availability and Notification
    Section VII: Project Management
    PACS Readiness and PACS Migration
    Procurement
    Imaging Program Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Eugenio Leonardo, Ricardo H. Bardales.
    Summary: This book provides current information for a judicious use of conventional and molecular ICC markers performed in cytologic samples to help in the cost-effective diagnosis of superficial and deep-seated masses. By providing both an eminently practical information for appropriate technical preparation of cytologic samples and a systematic exposure of the immunophenotypic and biomolecular characteristics of normal and pathological cells, the reported morphological-molecular findings highlight the characteristics of different lesions that are useful for the practical solution of a particular differential diagnosis. Chapters include description of the cytomorphology followed by a practical ICC staining pattern for each entity. Cytologic materials include serous effusions, exfoliative cytology, fine needle aspiration cytology of superficial and deep-seated masses, and squash preparation from central nervous system masses. Practical Immunocytochemistry in Diagnostic Cytology serves as a valuable resource towards understanding critical differences between tests performed on tissue samples and those carried out on cytologic samples.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Immunocytochemistry: Technical Considerations Applied to Cytology
    Serous Effusions
    Exfoliative Cytology
    Aspiration Cytology of Masses of Superficial Organs
    Aspiration Cytology of Deep-Seated Masses
    Pitfalls in Immunocytochemistry.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Xing-Hua Gao, Hong-Duo Chen, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses typical skin diseases from an immunological point of view, introducing the latest immunological techniques and practices. It begins with a brief overview of the human immune system, including the basic concepts and principles as well as the general symbols used in immunology. Part Two describes the human skin as an integral part of the immune system, explaining the immunological roles of major cellular and molecular composites in the skin. Part Three illustrates typical skin diseases that have immunological involvement (immunodermatological conditions). It describes 40 skin diseases, focusing on immunological causes, pathogenesis, pattern of reaction and treatment choices and responses. The final part discusses advanced immunodiagnostics and immunotherapy in dermatology, providing detailed descriptions of immune techniques for the diagnosis of skin diseases, their principles and background, indications, requirements for sampling, test protocols, interpretation of results and trouble shooting. This work offers insights into both the systemic immune system and the skin immune system, and integrates the information into discussions of clinical diseases, relevant immune techniques and immunological drugs. Presenting the latest advances in clinical immunology, it is an invaluable resource for dermatologists, residents and graduate students in dermatology.

    Contents:
    Part I. The fundamentals of human immune system
    Part II. Skin immune system
    Part III. Immunodermatological conditions
    Part IV. Immuno-techniques, immuno-diagnosis and immunotherapy in dermatology.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Tamar F. Barlam, Boston Medical Center, Melinda M. Neuhauser, Department of Veteran Affairs, Pranita D. Tamma, Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, Kavita Trivedi, Stanford University School of Medicine.
    Summary: "Practical Implementation of an Antibiotic Stewardship Program provides an essential resource for healthcare providers in acute care, long-term care, and ambulatory care settings looking either to begin or to strengthen existing antibiotic stewardship programs. Each chapter is written by both physician and pharmacist leaders in the stewardship field and incorporates both practical knowledge as well as evidence-based guidance. This book will also serve as a useful resource for medical students, pharmacy students, residents, and infectious diseases fellows looking to learn more about the field of antibiotic stewardship"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    The need for antibiotic stewardship programs
    Structure of an antibiotic stewardship team and core competencies
    The social determinants of antibiotic prescribing
    Selecting and applying antibiotic stewardship strategies
    Syndrome-based antibiotic stewardship
    Duration of therapy
    Measurement in antibiotic stewardship
    What every steward should know about pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics
    Collaborating with the microbiology laboratory
    Informatics and stewardship
    Antibiotic allergies and antibiotic stewardship
    Antibiotic stewardship in post-acute care facilities
    Outpatient antibiotic stewardship
    Maintaining an antibiotic stewardship program: keeping everyone happy and remaining relevant
    Practical antibiotic stewardship.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Bryan J. Weiner, Cara C. Lewis, Kenneth Sherr, editors.
    Summary: "Implementation science seeks to close the research-to-practice gap by identifying the barriers that impede the adoption, implementation, sustainability, and scale-up of evidence-based health interventions, and by identifying the best methods for overcoming those barriers. As implementation scientists, our aspiration for the field is to generate useful and usable scientific knowledge to improve the practice of implementation. Put differently, we envision the field of implementation science producing the knowledge and tools to support the evidence-based implementation of evidence-based health interventions. The rapid growth of implementation science as a research enterprise, however, has given rise to concerns that we and other implementation scientists share that implementation science itself will replicate the research-to-practice gap that the field was intended to address. This book represents the first systematic attempt by leading implementation researchers to "translate" implementation science for implementation practitioners by making accessible and practical the wealth of scientific knowledge and associated tools that implementation science has produced"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introducing implementation science / Bryan J. Weiner, Cara C. Lewis, and Kenneth Sherr
    Assessing the practice (know-do) gap / Christine Fahim and Sharon E. Straus
    Selecting evidence-based interventions to reduce practice gaps / Jennifer Leeman, Mary Wangen, and Cam Escoffery
    Adaptation of evidence-based interventions / Heidi La Bash, Fiona C. Thomas, and Shannon Wiltsey Stirman
    Identifying barriers and facilitators for implementation in diverse settings / Maria E. Fernandez, Laura Damschroder, and Bijal Balasubramanian
    Engaging stakeholders / Melanie Pellechhia, Kimberly T. Arnold, Liza Tomczuk, and Rinad S. Beidas
    Creating a structure for implementation : building implementation teams and developing implementation plans / Kevin Fiori, Hueiming Liu, and Lisa R. Hirschhorn
    How to implement an evidence-based intervention / Ryan R. Singh and Lisa Saldana
    An introduction to evaluation and learning in implementation science / Arianna Rubin Means, Bradley H. Wagenaar, Sarah J. Masyuko, and Anjuli D. Wagner
    Disseminating information about evidence-based interventions / Jonathan Purtle, Margaret E. Crane, Katherine L. Nelson, and Ross C. Brownson
    Scaling up evidence-based interventions / Ruth Simmons, Peter Fajans, and Laura Ghiron
    Sustaining evidence-based interventions / Rachel C. Shelton and Nicole Nathan
    De-implementing practices / Christian D. Helfrich
    Implementation science in policy / Heather Bullock, Mile Wilson, and John Lavis.
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Liron Pantanowitz, Anil V. Parwani.
    Contents:
    Introduction to informatics / Liron Pantanowitz
    Basic computing / Seung L. Park, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Networking / Muhammad A. Syed, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Databases / Seung L. Park, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Coding / Seung L. Park, Jacqueline Cuda, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Laboratory information systems / Ioan C. Cucoranu, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Laboratory information system operations and regulations / Ioan C. Cucoranu, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Reporting / Liron Pantanowitz
    Quality management / Liron Pantanowitz, Luke T. Wiehagen, and R. Marshall Austin
    Barcoding / Ioan C. Cucoranu, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Informatics projects / Liron Pantanowitz
    Lean Six Sigman / Ioan C. Cucoranu, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Electronic medical records / Seung L. Park, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Digital imaging / Milon Amin, Anil V. Parwani, and Liron Pantanowitz
    Automated pap tests / Liron Pantanowitz
    Telecytology / Sara E. Monaco and Liron Pantanowitz
    Cytology online / Walid E. Khalbuss
    Bioinformatics / Somak Roy, Liron Pantanowitz, and Anil V. Parwani
    Research informatics / Somak Roy, Liron Pantanowitz, Anil V. Parwani.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kwang Hoon Lee, Eung Ho Choi, Chang Ook Park, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive, practical guide to the latest developments in the understanding and management of atopic dermatitis. Detailed information is provided on age-specific clinical symptoms, features, and diagnostic methods. Current theories on the pathogenesis of atopic dermatitis are closely examined, with attention to the roles played by genetic, allergic, immunologic, and skin barrier dysfunctions. In the second half of the book, the scientific background to and the practical use of the full range of treatment methods are described, covering topical agents, systemic agents, phototherapy, allergen-specific immunotherapy, and the most recently developed biologics and small molecules. This textbook will be an excellent guide to diagnosis and treatment for not only dermatologists but also practitioners in allergy and general medicine, including pediatricians, allergists, and primary care physicians. In addition, it will be of value for all scientists interested in developing new drugs for atopic dermatitis.

    Contents:
    Introduction to atopic dermatitis
    Epidemiology of atopic dermatitis
    Clinical manifestations
    Pruritus
    Diagnosis and severity assessment of atopic dermatitis (Korean guideline included)
    Genetics of atopic dermatitis
    Immune-mediated pathogenesis of atopic dermatitis
    Environmental factors related to atopic dermatitis
    Food, inhalents, and microbial allergens
    Role of infection and microbial factors
    Psychological stress
    Endophenotype and biomarker
    Topical treatment
    Systemic treatment
    Emerging treatment of AD: biologies and small molecules
    Phototherapy
    Allergen immunotherapy for atopic dermatitis
    Treatment algorithms
    Prevention of atopic dermatitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Vishal Madan, editor.
    Summary: This title introduces readers to the use of lasers in dermatology/aesthetic practice and focuses on the fundamentals of lasers and light-based devices and their clinical application. Each chapter addresses the use of lasers in the treatment of a variety of skin conditions, detailing mechanisms of action, pre-treatment preparation, post-treatment advice, follow-up, and potential complications and pitfalls. Besides discussing ablative, vascular, pigment-specific and epilation lasers, and intense pulsed light, the book also reviews the use of light-emitting diodes, low-level laser therapy and radio frequency devices. In addition, cosmeceuticals complementing laser treatments are also discussed. Readers will also find the chapter on self-assessment questionnaires especially useful. Practical Introduction to Laser Dermatology provides detailed explanation of the topics, while the chapters are supported by illustrative case studies that will enable readers to develop a deeper understanding of the subject of lasers in dermatology. Using clinically relevant Illustrations, it provides a comprehensive resource on a variety of laser technologies for novice readers and trained laser clinicians.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of lasers and light devices in dermatology
    Vascular lasers
    Pigment Specific lasers and light devices
    Ablative lasers
    Body sculpting including laser liposuction, ultrasound, cool sculpting
    Light emitting diodes and low level laser light therapy
    Lasers in pigmented skin
    Recent advances in cutaneous laser therapy and future trends.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Biagio Allaria, editor.
    Contents:
    1 Perioperative fluid therapy and fluid therapy in patients with sepsis. In search of clarification
    2 Enough has been written about the treatment of ALI, but has enough been said about how to prevent it?
    3 Prevention of perioperative myocardial ischemia
    4 Respiratory complications after major abdominal surgery: causes, diagnosis, and prevention
    5 Positive and negative aspects of aerosol therapies in ventilated patients
    6 Update on lung imaging to select ventilation management in ARDS patients
    7 Chest X-ray in ICU: an examination in which there is too much confidence. Possible alternatives
    8 Continuous renal replacement therapy (CRRT) in intensive care
    9 Loss of autoregulation of interstitial fluid dynamic in patients with sepsis and mechanisms causing edema
    10 How to prevent and effectively treat postoperative shivering
    11 Epidemiology, etiopathogenesis, diagnosis and treatment of postoperative paralytic ileus in intensive care
    12 Which adult patients undergoing non-cardiac surgery should be monitored postoperatively in ICU?
    13 Invasive candidiasis in the intensive care setting.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Davide Chiumello, editor.
    Summary: This book describes the state of the art concerning some of the most hotly debated topics in anesthesia and intensive care and is at the same time intended to serve as a useful practical guide that will assist in improving outcomes. The topics covered are wide ranging and include, for example, use of the prone position in ARDS, the role of therapeutic hypothermia in the critically ill, the value of immunoglobulins in the treatment of severe sepsis, drug management of septic shock, new strategies for prevention of ventilator-associated pneumonia, non-invasive ventilation outside of the ICU, management of postoperative bleeding, and prognostic factors in cardiac arrest. Written by recognized experts in the field, the book will offer a comprehensive and easy to understand update for specialists and students of anesthesia and intensive care.

    Contents:
    The prone position in the treatment of patients with ARDS: problems and real utility
    Therapeutic hypothermia in the critically ill patient
    Immunoglobulins in the treatment of severe sepsis
    Noradrenaline, vasopressin and terlipressin in the management of septic shock
    The most recent strategies for VAP (ventilator-associated pneumonia) prevention
    Hemodynamic optimization in the perioperative period: guidelines vs tailored strategies
    Management of perioperative bleeding in abdominal surgery
    How to manage coagulation during the perioperative period in patients with non-traumatic intracerebral hemorrhage
    How to improve the outcome after cardiac arrest
    Non-invasive ventilation outside of the Intensive Care Unit
    Interventional cardiology: the role of the anesthesiologist
    Everything you need to know about the plasma lactate level
    Dynamic tests to study liver function: the role of indocyanine green in clinical practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Haodong Xu, Robert W. Ricciotti, Jose G. Mantilla, editors.
    Summary: This text consists of neoplastic and non-neoplastic lung pathology. It discusses frequently encountered issues and diagnostic problems using a Q&A format and case presentations. Emphasis is placed on differentiating one from another based on the histopathological features, ancillary tests including immunohistochemical and molecular analyses, and clinical and radiologic correlation. In particular, clinical-radiologic-pathologic correlation is emphasized in the diagnosis of interstitial lung disease (ILD). This text addresses the issues and diagnostic criteria in segregating a reactive process from adenocarcinoma, poorly differentiated adenocarcinoma from poorly differentiated squamous cell carcinoma, small cell carcinoma from other types of neuroendocrine tumors, large cell carcinoma from large cell neuroendocrine carcinoma, spindle cell/sarcomatoid carcinoma from sarcomatoid mesothelioma, and carcinoma from epithelioid mesothelioma in small biopsy specimens. It also discusses key features useful for differentiating usual interstitial pneumonia (UIP) pattern from non-UIP patterns of ILD such as hypersensitivity pneumonitis, nonspecific interstitial pneumonia, and organizing pneumonia patterns in wedge biopsy specimens as well as highlights the differential diagnosis in the granulomatous inflammation. As a whole, this text answers many of the difficult questions relevant to daily practice of lung pathology. Each chapter addresses a specific diagnostic question significantly related to patients treatment options.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Endi Wang, Anand Shreeram Lagoo, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a step-by-step and practically applicable approach for the accurate and clinically relevant diagnosis of lymph node (LN) and bone marrow (BM) biopsies. Clinicians expect pathological guidance not only with accurate diagnosis, but also about disease progression, minimal residual disease, disease susceptibility to a particular therapy, effects of prior therapy on prognosis and subsequent therapy etc. This book provides brief but to the point guidance about the prognostic and therapeutic implications of key ancillary studies so that the pathologist is comfortable to answer clinician's questions over the entire arc of manifestations and management of the disease. The text follows the WHO (2016) classification in essence but the material is organized in a fashion most useful to a practicing surgical pathologist. This is achieved by focusing on the morphological findings as the starting point. Using this morphological "backbone" and several frequently asked questions (FAQs) the reader is guided to a rational list of differential diagnoses leading to a definitive diagnosis. The contents of each chapter are carefully selected so that the practically important and directly applicable information is available in an easy-to-find and easy-to-grasp format. Practical Lymph Node and Bone Marrow Pathology serves as a practical introduction and handbook for pathology trainees and hematopathology fellows and will remain a useful reference to practicing pathologists when they are signing out lymph nodes or bone marrow specimens.

    Contents:
    Essentials of the Immune Response and Immunophenotyping
    Molecular Genetics and Cell Biology for Hematopathology
    Evaluation of Excised Lymph Nodes
    Lymphoid Pathology on Small Biopsies (FNA and Small Core)
    Advantages and Limitations: Guidelines for Ancillary Studies According to Clinical Scenario and Morphology
    Small B-Cell Lymphomas With and Without Plasmacytic Differentiation
    Large B-Cell Lymphoma
    High-Grade B-Cell Lymphoma
    Major Subtypes of Mature T- and NK-cell Neoplasms
    Hodgkin Lymphomas
    Post-Transplant Lymphoproliferative Disorders (PTLD)
    Immunodeficiency-Associated Lymphoproliferative Disorders Other Than PTLD (In Primary Immune Deficiency, HIV, and Iatrogenic Conditions)
    Primary Extranodal Lymphomas of GI Tract, Lung, CNS and Skin With Common Mimics
    Lymphoid Neoplasms With "Benign" Clinical Course or Unclear Malignant Potential
    B-Cell Lymphoma in Children or Pediatric Type
    Indolent T/NK-Cell Lymphoproliferative Disorders
    Composite Lymphoma
    Histiocytic/Dendritic Cell Neoplasms: Primary and Transdifferentiated
    Typical Morphologic Patterns of Infectious and Other Reactive Lymphadenopathies
    HHV8-Associated Lymphoproliferative Disorders
    Bone Marrow at Initial Diagnosis: Clinical Associations and Approach to Diagnosis
    Acute Leukemias
    Chronic Myeloid Leukemia
    Chronic Myeloproliferative Neoplasms (Other Than Chronic Myeloid Leukemia)
    Myelodysplastic Syndromes
    Myelodysplastic/Myeloproliferative Neoplasms
    Plasma Cell Neoplasms (Including Plasma Cell Myeloma)
    Bone Marrow Involvement by Lymphoid Neoplasms
    Bone Marrow Involvement by Metastases and Granulomatous Conditions
    Bone Marrow Findings in Congenital/Hereditary Conditions
    Bone Marrow Involvement by More Than One Entity of Hematolymphoid Neoplasm
    Detection of Minimal Residual Disease
    Therapy Induced Marrow Changes.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Honorio T. Benzon, James P. Rathmell, Christopher L. Wu, Dennis C. Turk, Charles E. Argoff and Robert W. Hurley.
    Summary: "This volume is intended for the diverse range of pain clinicians looking for applications in their daily practice, pain researchers seeking extensive background on relevant topics, fellows reviewing for the pain medicine boards, and residents who want a complete discussion of the breadth of the field. Each chapter provides practical applications of the various and diverse acute and chronic pain syndromes"--Pref.

    Contents:
    General considerations
    Basic considerations
    Evaluation and assessment
    Clinical conditions
    Pharmacologic, psychological, and physical medicine treatments
    Nerve block techniques
    Interventional techniques
    Pain management in special situations and special topics
    Research, ethics, and reimbursement in pain.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Honorio T. Benzon, James P. Rathmell, Christopher L. Wu, Dennis C. Turk, Charles E. Argoff, Robert W. Hurley, Andrea L. Chadwick.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Marco Matucci-Cerinic, Christopher P. Denton, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a practical guide for managing a variety of problems encountered by the clinician in managing patients with systemic sclerosis. Chapters take a problem-orientated approach to help the reader cut through potential barriers that can arise when working with different medical specialities. Management strategies for a broad range of conditions, including pericardial and pleural effusion, sicca syndrome, calcinosis and watermelon stomach, are presented. Practical Management of Systemic Sclerosis in Clinical Practice describes a range of problems and clinical items encountered by a variety of medical professionals who encounter these patients. It is a valuable resource for rheumatologists, immunologists, specialist nurses and primary care professionals.

    Contents:
    Scleroderma Renal Crisis and Acute Kidney Injury
    Chronic Kidney Disease in Scleroderma
    Anemia
    Breathlessness
    Fatigue
    Itch
    Pain and Tenosynovitis, Tendon Friction Rubs
    Raynaud's
    Critical Ischemia
    Digital Ulcers
    Lower Limb Ulcers
    Decline in PFT
    Arrhytmias
    Pericardial and Pleural Effusion
    Constipation
    Incontinence
    Bloating
    GE reflux
    Diarrhea
    Watermelon Stomach
    Malnutrition
    Calcinosis
    Pregnancy
    Sicca Syndrome
    Sexual dysfunction
    Transitional care for juvenile onset systemic sclerosis
    Assessment for HSCT
    Very early disease
    VEDOSS type case
    Primary Biliary Cholangitis
    Hand Arthritis
    Contractures
    Tendon Friction Rubs
    Interpretation of the Modification of Laboratory Parameters.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ujjal K. Mallick [and 3 others], editors.
    Summary: The new edition of this book highlights the recent advances and state-of-the art in surgical and non-surgical management of thyroid cancer. Readers will learn about the latest advances and recommendations in the field, from molecular studies and biomarkers to the changing epidemiology, kinase inhibition in drug discovery and new surgical approaches, such as intra-operative neural monitoring and robotics. The management of differentiated thyroid cancer as well as childhood cancer, survivorship and clinical trial design and findings and how these fit into cancer management are discussed in detail. This comprehensive volume provides an overview of the current world literature and outlines the practical aspects of management from world leaders in this field and helps clinicians and patients on practical matters. With a selection of authors from around the world it draws on international experience giving a global perspective to the topic. Following on from the success of the first edition, it uses a multidisciplinary, evidence-based approach centered on the patient, discussing guidelines and how these have improved the quality of care and outcomes. This guide is aimed mainly at thyroidologists of all disciplines, (in training or experts) students, non-specialist clinicians, nursing staff, all the disciplines involved in a multidisciplinary team such as surgeons - Head & Neck or Endocrine and General Surgeons, Oncologists, Endocrinologists, Nuclear Medicine Physicians, Nuclear Medicine Physicists, Radiologists, Pathologists, Specialist Nurses, Geneticists, Clinical Psychologists, Palliative Care Physicians and, of course, patients.

    Contents:
    1. Pragmatism, Precision Oncology, International Partnership for Research and Quality-The New Paradigm for Thyroid Cancer
    Section I. Multidisciplinary Approach to Management of Thyroid Cancer
    2. The UK Evidence-Based Guidelines for the Management of Thyroid Cancer: Key Recommendations
    3. The 2015 American Thyroid Association Evidence-Based Guidelines for Management of Patients with Thyroid Nodules and Differentiated Thyroid Cancer: Key Recommendations
    4. Thyroid Cancer: One Doctor-Patient Partnership -The Newcastle Butterfly Model
    Section II. The Diagnosis of Thyroid Cancer
    5. Molecular Diagnosis of Thyroid Nodules
    6. Ultrasonography in Diagnosis and Management of Thyroid Cancer -Current International Recommendations
    Section III. Initial Thyroid Surgery
    7. The 21st Century Endocrine Surgeon
    8. Management of Cervical Lymph Nodes in Differentiated Thyroid Cancer
    9. Advances in Thyroid Surgery
    ^Section IV. Non surgical Management of Differentiated Thyroid Cancer
    10. Risk Stratification and Current Management of Low Risk Thyroid Cancer
    11. Management of Low risk Papillary Thyroid Carcinomo and Papillary Cancer and Microcarcinoma-the Japanese experience
    12. Radioiodine Ablation
    Current Status
    13. Dosimetric Approaches
    Current Concepts
    14. External Radiation in Differentiated Thyroid Cancer in the era of IMRT and modern radiation planning techniques
    Section V. Follow up and Longterm Management of Differentiated Thyroid Cancer
    15. Thyroglobulin
    16. Management of Post-Operative Hypocalcemia
    17. Radioiodine Refractory Thyroid Cancer
    Section VI. Medullary Thyroid Carcinoma
    18. Medullary Thyroid Cancer :Surgical Management
    19. Medullary Thyroid Cancer: Diagnosis and Non Surgical Management
    20. Familial Non-Medullary Thyroid Cancer
    Section VII. Thyroid Cancer in Children
    21. Pediatric Differentiated Thyroid Carcinoma
    ^Section VIII. Aggressive Thyroid Cancers
    22. Anaplastic Thyroid Cancer
    23. Palliative care
    Section IX. Future Developments and Directions for Research in Thyroid Cancer
    24. Translational Research and Genomics Driven Trials in Thyroid Cancer
    25. Thyroid Cancer Trials
    26. The Barriers to Uniform Implementation of Clinical Practice Guidelines (CPG) for Thyroid Cancer
    27. Survivorship: The Role of the Clinical Psychologist and the Clinical Nurse Specialist in Thyroid Cancer Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Anthony C.F. Ng, Michael Y.C. Wong, Shuji Isotani, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide readers a practical guidance in the management of urolithiasis from diagnosis to surgical treatment. First part introduces related anatomy, symptom, and Imaging of urinary calculi. In the following chapters, techniques, tips and tricks in endourological, ureteroscopic, PCNL, ESWL, and laparoscopic treatment of urinary calculi are described in details with high-resolution illustrations and typical cases. Last part discusses the choice of treatment for some specific case situations. Written by leaders and core faculties from the Asian Urology Surgery Training and Education Group (AUSTEG), this book will be a valuable reference for urologists, as well as practitioners in related disciplines.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Basic Principle and Management of Urinary Calculi
    Symptoms, Signs and Basic Investigations for Urinary Calculi
    Imaging for Urinary Calculi
    Part 2: Instrument for Endourological Treatment of Urinary Calculi
    Understanding the Instruments Endoscope
    Understanding the Instruments Endourology Accessory
    Understanding the Instruments Intracorporeal Lithotripsy Non-Laser Types
    Understanding the Instruments Intracorporeal Lithotripsy Laser
    Understanding the instruments ureteric stent
    Understanding the instruments-imaging system; radiation safety and ultrasound technique. Part 3: Ureteroscopy
    How to Perform Rigid Ureteroscopy Step by Step
    How to Perform Flexible Ureteroscopy Step by Step
    Management of Complications related to Ureteroscopy
    Part 4: Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy
    Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy Preparation and Procedure Overview
    How to Perform Renal Puncture Fluoroscopic Approach
    How to Perform Renal Puncture Ultrasound Approach
    Tips and tricks of Supine PCNL
    Mini-PCNL
    Recent Development of Endoscopic Intrarenal Stone Surgery: Approaches and Surgical Tips
    Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy: Management of complications
    Part 5: Other Approaches
    Principles of Modern ESWL and Best Lithotripsy Practice
    Laparoscopic Stone Surgery
    Part 6: Practical Advices on Special Situation
    Overview of Treatment Selection for Individual Patient
    Challenging Anatomy
    Patients with Special Medical Condition
    Patients with Special Anatomy
    Management of Stone Diseases in Special Patient Population.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Delphine J. Lee, Mark B. Faries, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a practically applicable resource for all clinicians managing patients with or who may develop melanoma. Each chapter focuses on clinically relevant information on the latest advances in the field, including techniques for early detection of skin cancers, cross-sectional imaging and staging of regional nodes. Algorithms for clinical decision-making along with clinical vignettes are incorporated into each chapter, enabling the reader to develop a deep understanding of how to manage a range of scenarios. Practical Manual for Dermatologic and Surgical Melanoma Management systematically details the latest diagnostic criteria, treatment guidelines and management techniques available for treating these patients and is a valuable resource for the trainee and practising clinician.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Can We End Melanoma As We Know It? The Role of Early Detection in Defeating Deadly Skin Cancer
    Introduction
    Case
    Additional Clinical History
    Melanoma Risk Factors
    Physical Exam Findings
    Discussion
    Critical Take Home Messages
    References
    Chapter 2: Melanoma Risk Factors and Prevention
    Introduction
    Case
    Melanoma Disparities
    Risk Factors
    Phenotypic Features
    Personal Medical History
    Genetic Predisposition/Family History
    Environmental Factors
    Screening
    Prevention
    Discussion of Case
    Conclusions Mutational Load
    Sentinel Lymph Nodes (SLN)
    Discussion of Case
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 4: Melanoma Epidemiology, Staging and Prognostic Factors
    Introduction
    Melanoma Epidemiology
    Melanoma Staging
    Prognostic Factors in Melanoma
    Depth of Invasion
    Ulceration
    Mitotic Rate
    Growth Phase and Melanoma Subtypes
    Regression
    Tumor Infiltrating Lymphocytes
    Lymphatic Invasion and Angiotropism
    Neurotropism
    Nevus Association
    Age
    Gender
    Marital Status
    Anatomical Location
    Tumor Derived Markers
    Molecular Markers of Melanoma Prognosis Conditional Survival
    Summary
    References
    Chapter 5: Imaging in Melanoma
    Lymphoscintigraphy for Sentinel Node Biopsy
    Lymphoscintigraphy Technique
    Possible Radiation Risk of LS
    Potential Problems with LS
    Wide Local Excision (WLE)
    Reproducibility
    The Melanoma Site Immediately Overlies a Node Field
    Conclusion
    Ultrasound in Melanoma Patients
    Diagnosis
    Patient Case
    Does US Have a Role in Primary Assessment of Melanoma?
    Staging
    Case Continued
    What Are the US Criteria for Defining Normal and Abnormal Lymph Nodes? What Is the Role of US Assessment of the Regional Lymph Node Basins Before Sentinel Node Mapping and/or Biopsy?
    Follow Up
    Case Continued
    How Is US Used in Follow Up?
    Conclusion
    Cross Sectional Imaging
    Staging
    Early Stage Disease
    Later Stage Disease
    Monitoring the Effects of Therapy
    Post Treatment Surveillance
    Effect on Survival
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 6: Primary Melanoma Treatment
    Case
    Introduction
    Operative Primary Melanoma Treatment
    Wide Excision
    Technique
    Recommended Margins for Wide Excision
    Clinical vs Pathologic Margins
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by David McCance, Michael Maresh, David Sacks.
    Contents:
    Section I. Introduction
    1. Epidemiology of diabetes in pregnancy
    2. Pathophysiology of diabetes in pregnancy
    3. The placenta in a diabetic pregnancy
    Section II. Gestational Diabetes
    4. Screening for gestational diabetes
    5. Diagnostic criteria for hyperglycemia in pregnancy
    6. Lifestyle treatment
    7. Obesity and diabetes in pregnancy
    8. Metabolic abnormalities in gestational diabetes
    9. Maternal risk after the gestational diabetes mellitus pregnancy
    Section III. Diabetes Preceding Pregnancy
    10. Pre-pregnancy care in Type 1 and Type 2 diabetes
    11. Malformations
    12. Provision of pregnancy care
    13. Problems encountered more frequently in women with Type 1 diabetes
    14. Problems encountered more frequently in women with Type 2 diabetes
    15. Advances in oral anti-diabetes drugs in pregnancy
    16. Advances in insulin therapy
    17. Putting pregnant women with diabetes on the pump
    18. Pregnancy, perinatal, and fertility outcomes following bariatric surgery
    19. Fetal surveillance
    20. Complications in pregnancy: hypertension and diabetic nephropathy in diabetes
    21. Retinopathy in diabetic pregnancy
    Section IV. Delivery and postnatal care
    22. Delivery and postdelivery care: obstetric management of labor, delivery, and the postnatal period for women with Type 1, Type 2, or gestational diabetes mellitus
    23. Diabetic management in labor, delivery, and postdelivery
    24. Delivery and postdelivery care: care of the neonate
    25. Postpartum contraception for women with diabetes
    26. Breastfeeding and diabetes
    Section V. Implications for the Future
    27. Implications for the mother with diabetes
    28. Diabetes in pregnancy: implications for the offspring
    29. From the bench to the bedside: potential future therapies for gestational diabetes- the enhancement of β-cell mass and function during pregnancy
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Peter H. Scanlon, Ahmed Sallam, Peter van Wijngaarden.
    Contents:
    Diabetes / Jonathan Shaw and Peter H. Scanlon
    Lesions and classifications of diabetic retinopathy / Peter H. Scanlon
    Screening for diabetic retinopathy / Peter H. Scanlon
    Imaging techniques in diabetic retinopathy / Peter van Wijngaarden and Peter H. Scanlon
    The normal eye / Stephen J. Aldington
    Diabetic macular oedema / Ahmed AB Sallam and Abdallah A. Ellabban
    Mild NPDR (background DR) / Peter H. Scanlon
    Moderate and severe NPDR (pre-proliferative DR) / Peter H. Scanlon
    Proliferative DR and advanced DR / Peter H. Scanlon
    Proliferative diabetic retinopathy with maculopathy / Ahmed AB Sallam and Peter H. Scanlon
    The stable treated eye / Peter H. Scanlon
    Vitrectomy surgery in diabetic retinopathy / Charles P. Wilkinson
    Cataract surgery in the diabetic eye
    pre, intra and postoperative considerations / Abdallah A. Ellabban, Ahmed AB Sallam
    Pregnancy and the diabetic eye / Peter H. Scanlon
    Low vision and blindness from diabetic retinopathy / Peter H. Scanlon
    Future advances in the management of diabetic retinopathy / Peter van Wijngaarden
    Other retinal conditions in diabetes / Stephen J. Aldington and Peter H. Scanlon
    Conditions with appearances similar to diabetic retinopathy / Stephen J. Aldington and Peter H. Scanlon.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Jelena Martinovic, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a concise guide to fetal pathology and postnatal fetal examination. The legal and ethical aspects of fetal examination are addressed, along with the modern practical approach to fetal malformations, oriented fetal autopsy, neuro-fetopathological examination, and pathology of the placenta. Practical Manual of Fetal Pathology aims to evaluate recent advancements and the impact they have had on clinical practice. This book is relevant to fetal and perinatal pathologists, geneticists, obstetricians, gynecologists, and pediatricians.

    Contents:
    1. Legal and Ethical Aspects of Fetal Examination Worldwide
    2. Biometrical Charts
    3. Fetal Examination
    4. Neuro-Fetopathological Examination
    5. Placenta Pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Enlan Xia, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to provide readers with the latest information on application of hysteroscopy in diagnosis and treatment of gynaecological diseases. The first chapters systematically review current status, equipment and instruments, applied anatomy, preoperative treatment and anesthesia for hysteroscopic surgery. In the following chapters, details in aspect of hysteroscopy from diagnostic to hysteroscopic surgery are explained with clinical cases. After that, advanced techniques in hysteroscopy combined with laparoscopy and ultrasound monitoring hysteroscopic surgery are introduced with high-resolution illustrations. Written by experts with wealthy experience in the field, this book will be a valuable reference for gynecologists at hysteroscopy units, reproductive units, gynecological and oncological units.

    Contents:
    1 History and Development of Hysteroscopy
    2 Equipment and Instruments for Hysteroscopy
    3 Anatomy and Histology In Hysteroscopy
    4 Effects of Preoperative Medication for Hysteroscopy and Commonly used drugs in Gynecology on Endometrium
    5 Application of High-frequency Electricity in Hysteroscopic Surgery and its Thermal Effects on Tissues
    6 Distention Medium in Hysteroscopy
    7 Anesthesia for Hysteroscopy
    8 Diagnostic Hysteroscopy
    9 Operative Hysteroscopy
    10 Combined Hysteroscopy and Laparoscopy
    11 Ultrasonography monitoring during Hysteroscopic surgery
    12 Complications of Hysteroscopic Surgery
    13 Hysteroscopy for Other Purpose
    14 Hysteroscopy Training.
    15 The Future of Hysteroscopy
    16 Digital Storage and Application of Endoscopic Image.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Annapoorna Kini, Samin Sharma, Jagat Narula.
    Summary: This practical handbook is based on an internal working manual developed by staff and fellows at Mount Sinai Heart Cardiovascular Catheterization Laboratory, renowned for its high-volume and low complication complex coronary procedures. The Practical Handbook of Interventional Cardiology captures the knowledge and methodological know-how from leaders in interventional cardiology, it intends to guide users in a stepwise, methodical and practical approach through various cardiac interventional procedures in order to achieve maximum patient safety and improved outcomes. From patient selection, preoperative work-up, setting up equipment to step-by-step illustrations of various procedural details and troubleshooting, this handbook captures all the details necessary to perform the simplest to the most complex cardiac interventions. The book is designed for cardiologists and trainees who desire an efficient way to review the steps of various cardiac interventional procedures and a quick, reliable reference for everyday use.

    Contents:
    Part I: Interventional Basics
    Basics of Radiation Safety
    Achieving Perfect Vascular Access
    The Perfect Shot: Angiographic Views for the Interventionalist
    Physiological assessment during interventional procedures
    Antiplatelet and Antithrombotic therapy in PCI
    Patient Selection and Appropriateness
    Guiding Catheter Selection
    Guidewire Properties and Selection
    Assessment of Lesion Severity (Intravascular Ultrasound, Optical Coherence Tomography, NIRS and Beyond)
    Basics of Intracoronary Devices
    Hemodynamic assessment: Right Heart Catheterization, Pulmonary Hypertension, Left-To-Right Shunt, And Constriction
    Hemodynamic Assessment of Aortic/Mitral Stenosis And Regurgitation
    Vascular Closure Devices and Complications
    Part 2: Coronary Intervention
    Basics of Intervention
    Difficult Stent Delivery
    Bifurcation Lesions
    Ostial Lesion Interventions
    Left Main Coronary Interventions
    Chronic Total Occlusions
    ACS: STEMI/ Non-STEMI Intervention
    Coronary Artery Bypass Graft Interventions
    Calcific Lesion Interventions
    Coronary Complications Of Percutaneous Coronary Interventions
    Radial Coronary Interventions
    Part 3: Special Procedures
    Advanced Hemodynamic Support
    Aortic Valve Interventions-Balloon Aortic Valvuloplasty/ Transcatheter Aortic Valve Implantation
    Balloon Mitral Valvuloplasty
    Alcohol Septal Ablation
    Pericardiocentesis and Balloon Pericardiotomy
    Contrast-Induced Nephropathy Post Percutaneous Interventional Procedures.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Annapoorna Kini, Samin K. Sharma, editors.
    Summary: The second edition of this essential book provides a practically applicable manual to a variety of procedures in interventional cardiology keeping up to date with the advancements in percutaneous interventions. All included chapters identify areas that have significantly developed, and feature step-by-step user guides for the latest cardiac intervention techniques for the treatment of various conditions and the use of devices. Many new tops have been discussed such as left main coronary interventions and how to use Cangrelor in patients requiring P2Y12 inhibition after surgery. New topics covered include how to select patients for transcatheter aortic valve replacement (TAVR), and appropriately apply in-stent restenosis methodologies. Practical Manual of Interventional Cardiology systematically describes the use of a range of simple and complex interventional cardiology procedures, and the challenges associated with utilizing these techniques. It is therefore ideal for use by practicing and trainee cardiologists seeking an easily accessible reference to apply in their everyday clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Part I Interventional Basics
    Basics of Radiation Safety
    Achieving Perfect Vascular Access
    The Perfect Shot: Angiographic Views for the Interventionalist
    Physiological Assessment During Interventional Procedures
    Antiplatelet and Antithrombotic Therapy in PCI
    Patient Selection and Appropriateness
    Guide Catheter Selection
    Guidewire Properties and Selection
    Assessment of Lesion Severity (Intravascular Ultrasound, Optical Coherence Tomography, NIRS, and Beyond)
    Basics of Intracoronary Devices
    Hemodynamic Assessment: Right Heart Catheterization, Pulmonary Hypertension, Left-to-Right Shunt, and Constriction
    Hemodynamic Assessment of Aortic/Mitral Stenosis and Regurgitation
    Part II Coronary Intervention
    Vascular Closure Devices and Complications
    Basics of Intervention
    Difficult Stent Delivery
    Bifurcation Lesions
    Ostial Lesion Interventions
    Left Main Coronary Interventions
    Chronic Total Occlusions
    ACS: STEMI/Non-STEMI Intervention
    Coronary Artery Bypass Graft Interventions
    Calcific Lesion Interventions
    Coronary Complications of Percutaneous Coronary Interventions
    Radial Coronary Interventions
    Part III Special Procedures
    Advanced Hemodynamic Support
    Aortic Valve Interventions: Balloon Aortic Valvuloplasty/Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement
    Percutaneous Mitral Balloon Valvotomy
    Alcohol Septal Ablation
    Pericardiocentesis and Balloon Pericardiotomy
    Contrast-Induced Nephropathy Post Percutaneous Interventional Procedures
    Guide catheter selection in patients with TAVR
    Transcatheter Mitral valve repair
    In-Stent Restenosis (ISR)
    Laser
    Rota
    IVBT
    Balloon
    Stent.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Osama I. Soliman, Folkert J. ten Cate, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Shad Deering.
    Contents:
    Introduction and basic principles of labor and delivery / Shad Deering
    Common examinations and procedures in labor and delivery / Ashley S. Coggins
    Fetal heart rate monitoring in labor and delivery / Noelle Breslin
    First-stage labor management / Emily Sheikh
    Second stage labor management / Kelsey J. Simpson
    Third stage labor management / Kelsey J. Simpson
    Induction and augmentation of labor / Irina U. Tunnage
    Obstetric analgesia/anesthesia in labor and delivery / Elise Diamond
    Operative vaginal delivery / Morgan Light
    Caesarean delivery / Meghan Yamasaki
    Laceration and episiotomy repair / Allison A.C. Aubanks
    Neonatal resuscitation in labor and delivery / Mary Kathryn Collins
    Postpartum care / Sierra Seamon
    Common OB complications and emergencies in labor and delivery / Devon M. Rupley and Kristen Elmezzi.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Pete S. Batra, Joseph K. Han, editors.
    Summary: Chronic rhinosinusitis (CRS) is an inflammatory disorder of the nose and paranasal sinuses with symptoms persisting for at least 3 months. The treatment paradigm for CRS includes medical therapy as the cornerstone, coupled with endoscopic sinus surgery in refractory cases. To date, however, no FDA-approved treatments exist for medical treatment of CRS, and most treatment algorithms rely on expert opinion supplemented by available peer-review data. This underscores the need for a comprehensive primer to optimize the care of CRS patients. This book is a detailed compendium on the medical and surgical treatment of CRS, with or without polyposis. Detailed coverage is provided of a wide range of topics, including pathophysiologic mechanisms, medical and surgical management of CRS and its subsets, medical therapy in the pre- and postoperative period, specific medical therapeutic classes currently employed in CRS patients, and optimization of the efficacy of endoscopic sinus surgery for postoperative medical therapy. Each chapter highlights key aspects of specific therapies, including mechanism of action, indications, dosages, side-effects, and available clinical efficacy data, and emphasizes practical management pearls and pitfalls from experts in the field. Operative techniques for endoscopic sinonasal procedures for CRS are also outlined. This book will be a valuable resource for practicing general otolaryngologists, rhinologists, and allergists as well as residents and fellows in training. It will also serve as a reference guide for physician assistants, nurse practitioners, and nurses involved in the care of CRS patients.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and Pathophysiology of Chronic Rhinosinusitis
    Microbiology of CRS
    Endoscopic Diagnosis of Chronic Rhinosinusitis
    Radiographic Diagnosis of Chronic Rhinosinusitis.-Classification of Chronic Rhinosinusitis and its Subsets
    Nasal Polyposis
    Fungal Rhinosinusitis
    Management of FESS Failures
    Pediatric Sinusitis
    Allergic Rhinitis
    Asthma
    Therapeutic Modalities for CRS
    Overview of Medical Treatment of CRS
    Oral Antibiotics as Anti-Infectives
    Oral Antibiotics as Anti-Inflammatories
    Topical and Intravenous Antibiotics
    Oral Steroids
    Topical Steroids
    Oral and Topical Antifungals
    Leukotriene Modifiers
    Aspirin desensitization
    Saline Irrigations
    Emerging Innovative Medical Therapies
    Endoscopic Sinus Surgery as Adjunct to Medical Therapy
    Endoscopic Sinus Surgery: Rationale, Indications, and Technique
    Medical Therapy in Preoperative and Postoperative Period
    Surgery for Maxillary Sinus Disease
    Ethmoid Sinus Surgery
    Surgery for Frontal Sinus Disease
    Surgery for Sphenoid Sinus Disease
    Surgery for Nasal Polyposis
    Surgery for Fungal Rhinosinusitis
    Surgery for Pediatric Sinusitis
    Surgery of the Nasal Septum and Turbinates.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Antonio Russo, Marc Peeters, Lorena Incorvaia, Christian Rolfo, editors.
    Summary: This textbook combines essential information on clinical cancer medicine with a guide to the latest advances in molecular oncology and tumor biology. Providing a systematic overview of all types of solid tumors, including epidemiology and cancer prevention, genetic aspects of hereditary cancers, differential diagnosis, typical signs and symptoms, diagnostic strategies and staging, and treatment modalities, it also discusses new and innovative cancer treatments, particularly targeted therapy and immunotherapy. Expert commentaries at the end of each chapter highlight key points, offer insights, suggest further reading and discuss clinical application using case descriptions. This textbook is an invaluable, practice-oriented tool for medical students just beginning their clinical oncology studies, as well as for medical oncology residents and young professionals.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and Cancer Prevention
    Tumor biology and natural history
    Histopathology of the Tumors
    Biomarkers
    Liquid biopsy
    Diagnosis and staging
    Molecular Diagnostics: innovative technologies for clinical and translational research
    Hereditary cancers and genetics
    Principles of anti-cancer therapy: Chemotherapy
    Principles of anti-cancer therapy: Hormonal therapy
    Principles of anti-cancer therapy: Target Therapy
    Principles of anti-cancer therapy: Immunotherapy
    The role of Surgery
    Surgery in the Management of Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumors
    Integrated Treatments: The role of radiotherapy
    Response assessment to cancer therapy
    Clinical trials and methodology in cancer research
    Basic principles of bioinformatics for next generation sequencing molecular testing in oncology
    New drugs development
    Treatment toxicity
    Cardioncology
    The cancer cachexia
    Support and palliative care
    Physician-Patient Communication
    Breast Cancer: Locoregional and locally advanced disease
    Metastatic breast cancer
    Chest Tumors: Lung Cancer
    Malignant Pleural Mesothelioma
    Gastrointestinal Cancers: Oesophagus
    Gastric cancer
    Gastrointestinal Cancers: Stomach, advanced/metastatic disease
    Gastrointestinal Cancers: Colorectum, locoregional disease
    Metastatic colorectal cancer
    Anal Carcinoma
    Gastrointestinal Cancers: exocrine pancreas
    Gastrointestinal Cancers - Biliary cancer
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Head and Neck Cancers (HNCs)
    Central Nervous System Malignancies
    Genitourinary cancers: Kidney
    Bladder Cancer
    Genitourinary cancers: Prostate, locoregional disease
    Advanced and Metastatic Prostate Cancer
    Genitourinary cancers: Testis
    Genitourinary cancers: Penis
    Gynaecological cancers: Ovaris, early primary disease
    Gynaecological cancers: Ovaris, primary advanced and recurrent disease
    Gynaecological cancers: Uterus, endometrial and cervical cancer
    Vulvar and Vaginal Cancer
    Endocrine cancers: Adrenal gland
    Endocrine cancers: Thyroid
    Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Cutaneous Melanoma and other skin cancers
    Soft Tissue Sarcomas (STS)
    The Role of Medical Treatment in the management of Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumors (GIST)
    Bone health in cancer patients
    Nutrition and cancer
    Personalized medicine
    Categorization of Cancer Survivors
    Precision medicine in oncology: glossary of relevant scientific terms.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Eric Marsault, University of Sherbrooke, Quebec, Canada, Mark L. Peterson, Quebec, Canada.
    Contents:
    1. Contemporary macrocyclization technologies
    2. A practical guide to structural aspects of macrocyles (NMR, X-Ray and Modeling)
    3. Designing orally bioavailable peptide and peptoid macrocycles
    4. Natural and nature-inspired macrocycles: a chemoinformatic overview and relevant examples
    5. Bioactive and membrane-permeable cyclic peptide natural products
    6. Chemical approaches to macrocycle libraries
    7. Biological and hybrid biological/chemical strategies in diversity generation of peptidic macrocycles
    8. Macrocycles for protein-protein interactions
    9. Synthetic strategies for macrocyclic peptides
    10. Ring-closing metathesis-based methods in chemical biology: building a natural product-inspired macrocyclic toolbox to tackle protein-protein interactions
    11. the synthesis of peptide-based macrocycles by Huisgen Cycloaddition
    12. Palladium-catalyzed synthesis of macrocycles
    13. Alternative strategies for the construction of macrocycles
    14. Macrocycles from multicomponent reactions
    15.Synthetic approaches used in the scale-up of macrocyclic clinical candidates
    16. Overview of macrocycles in cllinical development and clinically used
    17. The discovery of macrocyclic IAP inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
    18. Discovery and pharmacokietic-pharmacodynamic evaluation of an orally available novel macrocyclic inhibitor of anaplastic lymphoma kinase and c-Ros oncogene 1
    19. Optimization of macrocyclic ghrelin receptor agonist (Part II): development of TZP-102
    20. Solithromycin: fourth generation macrolide antibiotic
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Chunlin Hou, Shimin Chang, Juyu Tang, Zhigang Cai, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to introduce the most recent microsurgical techniques and applications in the pattern of illustrative case presentations, including digit replantation, toe-to-hand transplantation, peripheral nerve injuries especially total brachial plexus avulsion injury, surgical flaps. Microsurgery appeared to be a great procedure suitable for more applications. Anatomic research of the blood supply of skin, fascia, nerve, muscle, and bone identified flaps could be carried by pedicle vessels. Transfer of these flaps and revascularization by micro-vascular anastomoses of the arteries and veins set the stages for free flaps. In free flap surgery, single-stage and complex reconstructions could be achieved, which then lead to earlier mobilization and better restoration of function with a shorter hospital stay. Today, microsurgical technique is fully matured, and micro-vascular free tissue transfer is an essential part of reconstructive surgery. Development of microsurgery in China is introduced in the initiation of the current book. Key technical points and experience of replantation, reconstruction, tissue repair, nerve repair and reconstruction, oncological repair and reconstruction cases together with other applications of microsurgery are further demonstrated.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Upper limbs and hands
    1 Successful replantation of the distal phalanx of the little finger in a newborn: A case report
    2 Replantation of amputated finger composite tissue mass
    3 Replantation of severed fingers in children
    4 Replantation of single hand's multiplane severances with 17 segments
    5 Replantation of severed upper arm of a nine-month-old infant
    6 Replantation with vessel anastomosis for treatment of hand degloving injuries
    7 Transpositional replantation of severed fingers
    8 Salvage of the damaged hand by the emergency reconstruction with heterotopic replantation of discarded fingers
    9 Salvage of an amputated upper extremity with ectopic implantation followed by replantation at the second stage
    10 Emergency repair of a degloving injury in three fingers
    11 Reconstruction for forearm deformities with ulnar shortening induced by capitulum ulnae giant chondroma
    12 First intention combined plastic reconstruction of the thumb through transplanting separated second toe with full dorsal toenail flaps exchange between the first and second toes
    13 Tissues mass replantation of the index and middle finger
    14 The Use of a Third Metacarpal Base Vascularized Osteoarticular Graft for Treatment of Metacarpophalangeal Joint Traumatic Defects
    15 Two-Staged Surgical Treatment of Composite Tissue Defects of the Dorsum of Hand and Finger Involving Fingerweb
    16 Reconstruction of combined thumb amputation at the metacarpal base level and index amputation at the metacarpal level with pollicization and bilateral double toe composite transfer
    17 Harvest and separate the second toe for repair of compound tissue defects for multiple fingers
    18 Combined biological reconstruction can be used to repair large bone defect after resection of malignant bone tumor
    19 Anterolateral thigh flap for the reconstruction of forearm with severe injury
    20 The free peroneal artery perforator flap for combined medial ankle injury
    21 The ultra-long free peroneal artery perforator flap for lateral foot defect coverage
    22 Sural nerve nutritional vessel axial flap for the heel skin defect coverage and calcaneal reconstruction
    Part 2 Lower limbs and hands
    23 Repair and reconstruction of the segmentally destructed lower limb in a child
    24 Exploration of the superior retinacular arterial system of the femoral head after femoral neck fractures in young adults
    25 Replantation of Segmental destructive disconnect of the child's calf
    26 Extension of lower limbs for extreme flexion of knee joint induced by dorsal scar adhesion after burned for 13 years in a child
    27 Posterior tibial artery flap in series with medial plantar artery flap for repair of anterior foot degloving injury
    28 Adipofascial turnover flap for dorsal foot coverage and dead space filling
    29 Repair hot-pressed wound of hand with lobulated chimeric flaps of perforator branch of lateral circumflex femoral artery
    30 The waveform design of decending branch of lateral circumflex femoral artery perforator flap for the heel defect reconstruction
    31 Chimeric peroneal artery perforator flap for reconstruction post-traumatic osteomyelitis of tibia
    32 Dual skin paddles descending branch of the lateral circumflex femoral artery perforator flap for one-staged reconstruction of two adjacent wounds
    33 Dual skin paddles descending branch of the lateral circumflex femoral artery perforator flap for reconstruction of extensive foot defects
    34 Treatment of tibia GUSTILO IIIC fractures by bone transfer combined with flap technique
    35 Large Segmental Free Ectopic Revascularized and Prefabricated Bone Flap for Second Stage Repair of Bone and Soft Tissue Defects
    36 Repair of a lateral malleolus defect with a composite pedicled second metatarsal flap
    Part 3 Head, neck and trunk
    37 Replantation repair of total scalp avulsion
    38 Replantation of facial tissue mass
    39 A case for replantation of amputated ear
    40 Salvage of large scalp defect with exposed skull necrosis by a free vascularized greater omentum graft in a 3-year-old child: a case report and 10-year follow-up
    41 Maxillary and orbital floor reconstruction with anterolateral thigh flap and individual pre-bended titanium mesh
    42 Deep circumflex iliac artery (DCIA) flap for one-staged reconstruction of left mandible defects
    43 Case of facial nerve reconstruction
    44 Mandibular reconstruction with vascularized fibular flap in double-barrel technique
    45 Oromandibular Reconstruction with Intraoral Anastomosis of a Deep Circumflex Iliac Artery Perforator Fascial Flap with Iliac Crest
    46 Bilateral submandibular gland transplantations for paediatric several dry eye disease
    47 Chimeric thoracoacromial artery perforator flap for one-staged reconstruction of complex haryngoesophageal defects
    48 Maxillary reconstruction with vascularized fibula osteomyocutaneous flap using virtual surgical planning
    49 Transoral segmental mandibulectomy and intraoral anastomosis for mandibular reconstruction guided by virtual surgical planning and intraoperative navigation
    50 Reconstructed bladder innervation above the level of spinal cord injury to produce urination by abdomen-to-bladder reflex contractions
    51 Reconstructed bladder innervation below the level of spinal cord injury to produce urination by Achilles tendonto-bladder reflex contractions
    52 Transfer of normal S1 nerve root to reinnervate atonic bladder due to conus medullaris injury.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Eugene G. McNally.
    Contents:
    Shoulder: Anatomy and Techniques
    Shoulder 1: Supraspinatus Tendon
    Shoulder 2: The SASD Bursa, Rotator Interval and Other Rotator Cuff Tendons
    Shoulder 3: Beyond the Rotator Cuff
    Arm and Elbow Joint: Anatomy and Techniques
    Disorders of the Elbow: Lateral
    Disorders of the Elbow: Medial
    Disorders of the Elbow: Anterior
    Disorders of the Elbow: Posterior
    Forearm and Wrist Joint: Anatomy and Techniques
    Disorders of the Wrist: Radial
    Disorders of the Wrist: Ulnar Side
    Disorders of the Wrist: Miscellaneous
    Finger Anatomy and Techniques
    Disorders of the Fingers and Hand
    Hip Joint and Thigh: Anatomy and Techniques
    Disorders of the Groin and Hip: Groin Pain
    Disorders of the Groin and Hip: Anterior
    Disorders of the Groin and Hip: Lateral and Posterior
    Disorders of the Groin and Hip: Paediatric Hip
    Knee Joint and Calf: Anatomy and Techniques
    Knee Pat hology
    Ankle Joint and Forefoot: Anatomy and Techniques
    Disorders of the Ankle and Foot: Posterior
    Disorders of the Ankle and Foot: Anterior
    Disorders of the Ankle and Foot: Lateral
    Disorders of the Ankle and Foot: Medial
    Disorders of the Ankle and Foot: Forefoot
    Musculoskeletal Intervention: General Principles
    Specific Intervention Techniques
    Ultrasound of Soft Tissue Masses
    Ultrasound Imaging of Joint Disease
    Ultrasound of Muscle Injury.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Bijan Siassi, MD, FACC, Associate Professor of Pediatrics and Radiology, Keck School of Medicine, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California, Shahab Noori, MD, MS CBTI, RDCS, Associate Professor of Pediatrics, Keck School of Medicine, University of Southern California, Fetal and Neonatal Institute, Division of Neonatology, Children's Hospital Los Angeles, Los Angeles, California, Ruben J. Acherman, MD, Professor of Pediatric Cardiology, Children's Heart Center Nevada, Las Vegas, Nevada, Pierrce C. Wong, MD, Associate Professor of Pediatrics, Keck School of Medicine, University of Southern California, Director, Echocardiography Lab and Cardiac Pathology Registry, Children's Hospital Los Angeles, Los Angeles, California.
    Contents:
    Basic principles of echocardiography / Apichai Khongphatthanayothin
    Echocardiographic scanners and transducers / Mahmood (Mac) Ebrahimi
    Cross-sectional neonatal cardiac anatomy as depicted by standard two-dimensional echocardiography / Bijan Siassi, Mahmood Ebrahimi, Shilpa Patil, and Ruben Acherman
    Application of echocardiographic simulators in training for neonatal echocardiography / Bijan Siassi, Mahmood Ebrahimi, and Shahab Noori
    M-mode echocardiography and 2D cardiac measurements / Merujan Uzunyan and Lindsey Miller
    Pulse wave, continuous wave and color flow Doppler in assessment of regurgitant flow and measurement of pressure gradients / Merujan Uzunyan and Lindsey Miller
    Application of pulse wave and continuous wave Doppler in the assessment and measurement of cardiac and systemic blood flow / Shahab Noori
    Assessment of systolic, diastolic and global cardiac function / Shahab Noori
    Shunts through a patent foramen ovale / Bijan Siassi
    Shock, myocardial dysfunction and heart failure / Shahab Noori and Tai Wei Wu
    Patent ductus arteriosus / Shahab Noori
    Persistent pulmonary hypertension in newborn infants : assessment of pulmonary artery pressure / Tina A. Leone
    Desaturation and cyanosis in the newborn infant without congenital heart disease / Tina A. Leone
    Aneurysm of ductus arteriosus, cardiomyopathies, and aortopulmonary collaterals / Ruben Acherman
    Suspecting congenital heart disease / Bijan Siassi, Mahmood Ebrahimi, and Ruben Acherman
    Overview of fetal echocardiography / Ruben J. Acherman and William N. Evans.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2019
  • Digital
    Mark Harber, editor.
    Contents:
    Assessment of the Renal Patient
    Urine Analysis
    Imaging in Nephrology
    Kidney Biopsy
    Acute Kidney Injury: Epidemiology and Assessment
    Acute Kidney Injury: Management and Prevention
    Acute Renal Replacement Therapy
    Hepatorenal Syndrome
    Common Electrolyte Disorders
    Acid-Base Disorders
    Diagnosis and Investigation of the Hypertensive Patient
    Management of High Blood Pressure
    Podocytopathies
    Management of the Nephrotic Patient: The Overall Approach to the Patient with Nephrotic Syndrome (NS)
    Management of the Nephrotic Patient: Treatment of ECF Volume Expansion Due to Nephrotic Syndrome in Adults
    Minimal Change Disease and Focal Segmental Glomerulosclerosis
    Membranous Nephropathy
    Membranoproliferative Glomerulonephritis and C3 Glomerulopathy
    IgA Nephropathy and Henoch-Schonlein Purpura
    Systemic Small Vessel Vasculitis
    Goodpasture's or Anti-glomerular Basement Membrane (GBM) Disease
    Systemic Lupus Erythematosus, Antiphospholipid Syndrome and the Kidney
    Practical Immunosuppression Guidelines for Patients with Glomerulonephritis
    Infectious Diseases and the Kidney
    Blood-Borne Viruses and the Kidney
    Tubulointerstitial Nephritis
    Rheumatological Conditions and the Kidney
    Multiple Myeloma and the Kidney
    Amyloidosis
    Thrombotic Microangiopathies
    Sickle Cell Disease and Other Haematological Disorders Involving the Kidney
    Diabetes and the Kidney
    Pregnancy and the Kidney
    Disease of the Renal Vessels
    Urinary Tract Infection
    Renal Stone Disease
    Congenital Anomalies of the Kidneys and Urinary Tract
    Acquired Urinary Tract Obstruction
    Kidney Cancer
    Inherited Renal Tumour Syndromes
    Polycystic Kidney Disease
    Other Cystic Kidney Diseases
    Genetic Disorders of the Glomerular Basement Membrane
    Anderson-Fabry Disease and Other Inherited Lipid Disorders of the Kidney
    Inherited Metabolic Disease
    Dermatology in Kidney Disease
    Chronic Kidney Disease: Epidemiology and Causes
    Chronic Kidney Disease: Management
    Transition
    Anaemia Management in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Chronic Kidney Disease: Mineral and Bone Disorder (CKD-MBD)
    Chronic Kidney Disease: Cardiovascular Complications
    Coagulation in Kidney Disease
    Symptom Control and Palliative Care in Advanced CKD
    Nutrition and Kidney Disease
    Pharmacology and the Kidney
    Prevention of Infection in Kidney Patients
    Setting Up and Running a Haemodialysis Service
    Vascular Access: Improving Outcomes for Haemodialysis Patients
    Vascular Access: Fistulae and Grafts
    Complications of Maintenance Haemodialysis and How to Avoid Them
    Providing a Peritoneal Dialysis Service
    Peritoneal Dialysis Prescription
    Complications of Peritoneal Dialysis and How to Avoid Them
    Assessment of the Potential Transplant Donor
    Assessment of the Potential Transplant Recipient
    Tissue Typing, Crossmatch and Antibody Incompatibility in Kidney Transplantation
    Surgical Aspects of Kidney and Pancreas Transplantation
    Management of the Acute Transplant
    Immunosuppression for Kidney Transplantation
    Infectious Complications of Transplantation
    Long-Term Management of Kidney Transplant Recipients (KTRs)
    International Health Partnerships.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] José Biller, MD, FACP, FAAN, FAHA, professor and chairman, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Maywood, Illinois.
    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: 1. Approach to the Patient with Acute Confusional State (Delirium/Encephalopathy)
    2. Approach to the Patient with Dementia / Joseph Zachariah / Sara Hocker
    3. Approach to the Patient with Aphasia / Nilufer Ertekin-Taner / Neil R. Graff-Radford
    4. Approach to the Patient with Memory Impairment / Jeffrey L. Saver / Jose Biller
    5. Approach to the Comatose Patient / Torricia H. Yamada / Natalie L. Denburg / Daniel Tranel
    6. Approach to the Patient with Seizures / Michael P. Merchut
    7. Approach to the Patient with Syncope / Vicenta Salanova / Meridith Runke
    8. Approach to the Patient with Gait Disturbance and Recurrent Falls / Peter A. Santucci / Joseph G. Akar / David J. Wilber
    9. Approach to the Patient with Sleep Disorders / Xabier Beristain
    10. Approach to the Patient with Visual Loss / Mark E. Dyken / Kyoung Bin Im
    11. Approach to the Patient with Abnormal Pupils / Devin D. Mackay / Valerie Biousse / Nancy J. Newman
    12. Approach to the Patient with Diplopia / Aki Kawasaki
    13. Approach to the Patient with Facial Numbness / Devin D. Mackay / Valerie Purvin
    14. Approach to the Patient with Facial Pain / Arash Salardini / Betsy B. Love
    15. Approach to the Patient with Facial Weakness / Murray S. Flaster
    16. Approach to the Patient with Dizziness and Vertigo / Sam J. Marzo / John P. Leonetti
    17. Approach to the Patient with Hearing Loss / Timothy C. Hain / Marcello Cherchi
    18. Approach to the Patient with Dysphagia / Richard T. Miyamoto / Marcia J. Hay-McCutcheon
    19. Approach to the Patient with Dysarthria / Alejandro A. Rabinstein
    20. Approach to the Patient with Acute Headache / Sarah S. Kramer / Michael J. Schneck / Jose Biller
    21. Approach to the Patient with Chronic and Recurrent Headache / Mark W. Green / Sarah L. Rahal
    22. Approach to the Patient with Neck Pain and/or Arm Pain / Robert G. Kaniecki
    23. Approach to the Patient with Low Back Pain, Lumbosacral Radiculopathy and Lumbar Stenosis / Scott A. Shapiro
    24. Approach to the Patient with Upper Extremity Pain and Paresthesias and Entrapment Neuropathies / Eric M. Horn / Paul B. Nelson
    25. Approach to the Patient with Lower Extremity Pain, Paresthesias and Entrapment Neuropathies / Mark A. Ross
    26. Approach to the Patient with Failed Back Syndrome / Gregory Gruener
    27. Approach to the Patient with Acute Sensory Loss / Tarik F. Ibrahim / Russ P. Nockels / Michael W. Groff
    28. Approach to the Hyperkinetic Patient / Eoin R. Flanagan / Neeraj Kumar
    29. Approach to the Ataxic Patient / Javier Pagonabarraga / Christopher G. Goetz
    30. Approach to the Hypokinetic Patient / Adolfo Ramirez-Zamora
    31. Approach to the Patient with Acute Muscle Weakness / Ergun Y. Uc / Robert L. Rodnitzky
    32. Approach to the Patient with Neurogenic Orthostatic Hypotension, Sexual and Urinary Dysfunction and Other Autonomic Disorders / Holli A. Horak
    33. Approach to the Patient with Functional Disorders in the Neurology Clinic / Emilio Oribe
    34. Approach to the Patient with Suspected Brain Death / Jeannette M. Gelauff / Jon Stone
    35. Neuroimaging of Common Neurologic Conditions / Christopher R. Robinson / Eelco F.M. Wjdicks
    36. Approach to the Selection of Electrodiagnostic Cerebrospinal Fluid and Other Ancillary Testing / Jordan Rosenblum
    37. Approach to Common Office Problems of Pediatric Neurology . / Maria Baldwin / Matthew A. McCoyd
    38. Approach to Common Emergencies in Pediatric Neurology / Eugene R. Schnitzler / Nikolas Mata-Machado
    39. Approach to Ethical Issues in Neurology / Melissa G. Chung / E. Steve Roach
    40. Ischemic Cerebrovascular Disease / Bhupendra O. Khatri / Michael P. McQuillen
    41. Hemorrhagic Cerebrovascular Disease / Jose Biller / Rochelle Sweis
    42. Epilepsies in Children / Harold P. Adams Jr
    43. Epilepsy in Adults / Hema Patel / David W. Dunn
    44. Multiple Sclerosis / Omkar N. Markand
    45. Movement Disorders / Matthew A. McCoyd
    46. Dementia / Andrew P. Duker / Alberto J. Espay
    47. Central Nervous System Infections / Annya D. Tisher / Arash Salardini
    48. Neurologic Complications in Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome / Karen L. Roos
    49. Inherited Metabolic Neurologic Disorders / Krutika Kuppalli / Paul O'Keefe
    50. Spinal Cord Disorders / Marc C. Patterson
    51. Peripheral Neuropathy / Athena Kostidis
    52. Myopathy / John C. Kincaid
    53. Disorders of the Neuromuscular Junction / Holli A. Horak / Raul N. Mandler
    54. Therapy of Migraine, Tension-Type >and Cluster Headache / Robert M. Pascuzzi / Cynthia L. Bodkin
    55. Chronic Pain / Amy R. Tso / Peter J. Goadsby
    56. Complex Regional Pain Syndrome / Troy Buck / Walter S. Jellish
    57. Primary Central Nervous System Tumors / Joseph R. Holtman / Michael J. Frett Jr
    58. Nervous System Complications of Cancer / Edward J. Dropcho
    59. Neurotoxicology / Rimas V. Lukas
    60. Sleep Disorders / Laura M. Tormoehkn / Daniel E. Rusyniak
    61. Dizziness and Vertigo / Phyllis C. Zee / Alon Y. Avidan
    62. Neurologic Diseases in Pregnancy / Matthew L. Kircher / Sara Anderson-Kim
    63. The ABCs of Neurologic Emergencies / Kathleen B. Digre / Michael W. Varner.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    editor, Edward (Ted) Parks.
    Contents:
    The knee
    The shoulder
    The hip
    The hand, wrist, and elbow
    The foot and ankle
    Low back pain (spine)
    Orthopedic emergencies
    Fracture management
    Injection techniques.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    Yi Ding, Linsheng Zhang, editors.
    Summary: This book is a review and high-yield reference on the clinical molecular diagnostics of malignant neoplasms. It aims to address the practical questions frequently encountered in the molecular oncology practice, as well as key points and pitfalls in the clinical interpretation of molecular tests in guiding precision cancer management. The text uses a Q&A format and case presentations, with emphasis on understanding the molecular test methods, diagnosis, classification, risk assessment and clinical correlation. Starting with an update on the molecular biology of cancer, the book focuses on the topics related to molecular diagnostics and genetics-based precision oncology. Separate chapters are dedicated to discussion of the bioinformatics for the analysis of genetic/genomic data generated from molecular assays, and quality control (QC)/quality assurance (QA) programs in the clinical laboratories; both are critical in producing high quality results for clinical care of cancer patients. These are followed by organ system-based reviews and discussions on the molecular genetic abnormalities and related tests covering diverse types of common to rare malignant neoplasms. This book also provides up-to-date knowledge related to malignant neoplasms, discusses the established as well as evolving requirements for pathologic diagnosis of these malignancies. It also discusses the cost effective utilization of molecular tests in clinical oncology. Written by experts in the field, Practical Oncologic Molecular Pathology serves as a valuable reference for practicing pathologists, fellows, residents and other health care professionals.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Molecular Methods and Data Analysis in Clinical Molecular Diagnostic Laboratories
    1: The Molecular Pathobiology of Malignant Process and Molecular Diagnostic Testing for Cancer
    List of Frequently Asked Questions
    Frequently Asked Questions
    Case Presentations
    Case 1
    Learning Objectives
    Case History
    Initial Work-up
    Histologic Findings
    Molecular Genetic Study
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    Case 2
    Learning Objectives
    Case History
    Molecular Genetic Studies
    Final Diagnosis
    Clinical Follow-Up Discussion
    Case 3
    Learning Objectives
    Case History
    Laboratory Findings
    Molecular Genetic Studies
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    Case 4
    Learning Objective
    Case History
    Molecular Genetic Studies
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    Case 5
    Learning Objectives
    Case History
    Molecular Genetic Studies
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    References
    2: Molecular Diagnostic Methods
    List of Frequently Asked Questions
    Frequently Asked Questions
    Case Examples
    Case #1
    Learning Objectives
    Case History
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    Case #2 Learning Objectives
    Case History
    Laboratory Work-up
    Histologic Findings
    Molecular Genetic Studies
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    NGS Sequencing Results
    Case #3
    Learning Objectives
    Case History
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    Case #4
    Learning Objectives
    Case History
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    References
    3: Bioinformatics Analysis in Molecular Pathology
    List of Frequently Asked Questions
    Frequently Asked Questions
    Cases
    Case 1: HGVS Nomenclature and Rules
    Discussion for Case 1
    Case 2: Read Depth and Molecular Bar Coding Discussion for Case 2
    Case 3: FASTQ Format and Mate-Pairs
    Discussion for Case 3
    Case 4: Variant Filtering
    Discussion for Case 4
    Case 5: Protected Health Information and Cloud Services
    Discussion for Case 5
    References
    4: Quality Assurance and Quality Control in Molecular Diagnostic Laboratories
    List of Frequently Asked Questions
    Frequently Asked Questions
    Case Presentations
    Case 1
    Learning Objective
    Case History
    Case 2
    Learning Objective
    Case History
    Case 3
    Learning Objective
    Case History
    References Part II: Molecular Pathology of Solid and Soft Tissue Tumors
    5: Breast and Gynecologic Tumors
    List of Frequently Asked Questions
    Frequently Asked Questions
    Case Presentations
    Case 1
    Case History
    Histologic Finding
    Differential Diagnosis
    Ancillary Studies
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    Case 2
    History
    HER2 Testing
    Final HER2 Interpretation
    Discussion
    Case 3
    History
    Gross Findings
    Histologic Findings
    Differential Diagnosis
    Ancillary Studies
    Final Diagnosis
    Discussion
    Case 4
    History
    Histologic Findings
    MMR Studies
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Jaideep Pandit.
    Contents:
    Introduction and scope of book / Jaideep J Pandit
    Defining "efficiency" / Jaideep J Pandit
    Defining "productivity" / Jaideep J Pandit
    Case Scheduling / Jaideep J Pandit
    Capacity planning / Jaideep J Pandit
    Staffing and contracts / Jaideep J Pandit
    Theatre finances / Jaideep J Pandit
    Pre-operative patient preparation / Jaideep J Pandit
    Operating theatre management in New Zealand / Cameron C.R. Buchanan
    Operating theatre management in Japan / Yoshinori Nakata
    Operating theatre management in Two European Countries / André van Zundert and Thomas Sieber
    Operating theatre management in Australia / André van Zundert
    Operating theatre management in the United States / Emily B. Goldenberg and Alex Macario
    Clinical governance and safety in theatres / Meghana Pandit
    Summary and Overview / Peter H.J. Müller.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Andrea T. Deyrup, Gene P. Siegal.
    Contents:
    Normal bone anatomy / Michael J. Klein
    Patterns in radiology / D. Lee Bennett and Georges Y. El-Khoury
    Clinical patterns of orthopedic disease / Kevin B. Jones and Joseph A. Buckwalter
    Patterns of diagnostic evaluation / Michael J. Klein
    Lesions characterized by osteoid deposition and non-aggressive radiology / Luminita Rezeanu
    Lesions characterized by osteoid deposition and aggressive radiology located within bone / Anthony Montag
    Lesions characterized by osteoid deposition and non-aggressive radiology located on bone surface / Shi Wei
    Lesions characterized by osteoid deposition and aggressive radiology located on bone surface or within cortex / Anthony Montag
    Lesions characterized by cartilage deposition and non-aggressive/intermediate radiology / Yong-Koo Park
    Lesions characterized by cartilage deposition and aggressive radiology / Andrea T. Deyrup
    Lesions characterized by large numbers of giant cells replacing trabecular bone / Edward McCarthy
    Lesions characterized by a fibrous, spindle cell proliferation replacing trabecular bone / Frank Gannon and Benjamin Hoch
    Lesions characterized by vascular proliferation replacing trabecular bone / Wendong Yu, Sathiyamoorthy Selvarajan and Andrew E Rosenberg
    Lesions characterized by permeation of cells through trabecular bone with or without bone destruction / M. John Hicks
    Cystic lesions in bone / Yong-Koo Park
    Avascular necrosis bone infarcts, paget disease and "soft tissue tumors" of bone / Shadi A. Qasem
    Metastasis / Julie Fanburg-Smith, Michael E. Mulligan and Mark D. Murphey
    Notochordal and related lesions / Carrie Y. Inwards and Karen J. Fritchie
    Degenerative joint disease / Meera R. Hameed
    Crystalline arthropathies / Edward F. DiCarlo
    Synovial based lesions / Andrea T. Deyrup.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Zhonglin Mu, Jugao Fang, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide clinical advices on diagnosis and treatment of main and rare diseases of ear, nose, throat, head and neck to clinical practitioners. The highlight of this book is that important surgeries, for example, transoral robotic surgery for tongue base tumours, cochlear implant, are displayed in high-resolution videos. The first chapter gives a general introduction of otolaryngology, head and neck foundation which helps clinical practitioners generate the basic ideas of equipment, drugs and treatment used. The following chapters introduce anatomy, physiology, diagnosis and therapeutic approach for common diseases of otolaryngology, head and neck, with brief case studies. For each disease, a brief introduction, clinical symptoms, imaging diagnosis, treatment plan as well as complications management are offered to the readers. With the illustrative figures and videos, this book is a useful reference to otolaryngologists, head and neck surgeons, professional clinical staff, and medical students.

    Contents:
    General Otolaryngopharyngology Head and Neck Surgery
    Otology
    Rhinologgy
    Pharyngology
    Laryngology
    Tracheoesophagology
    Head and Neck Surgery
    Complications in Otorhinolaryngopharyngology Head and Neck Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Woodhead, G. Sims.
    Digital Access Google Books 1884-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J111 .W88 1884
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Alberto M. Marchevsky, Aliya N. Husain, Françoise Galateau-Sallé.
    Contents:
    The mesothelium : embryology, anatomy and biology / Thomas Krausz and Stephanie McGregor
    Classification of neoplastic and non-neoplastic lesions of the serosal surfaces / Alberto M. Marchevsky
    Multi-modality imaging of pleural and peritoneal disease / Jane Cunningham and Ritu R. Gill
    Processing of pleural and peritoneal biopsies / Francoise Galateau-Salle
    Cytology of pleural and peritoneal lesions / Shikha Bose
    Surgical pathology of non-neoplastic conditions of the pleura, pericardium and peritoneum / A. Valeria Arrossi and Fadi Abdul-Karim
    Surgical pathology of benign lesions of mesothelial origin / Aliya N. Husain and Marina Ivanovic
    Epidemiology, etiology and pathogenesis of malignant mesothelioma / Alberto M. Marchevsky
    Pathologic "markers" of above background asbestos exposure / Allen Gibbs
    Molecular aspects of malignant mesothelioma and other tumors of the pleura and peritoneum / Sanja Dacic
    Pathology of malignant mesothelioma / Alberto. M. Marchevsky, Francoise Galateau-Salle, Lucian Chirieac, and Aliya N. Husain
    Surgical treatment of pleural and peritoneal mesothelioma / Sean C. Wightman, Eugene A. Choi and Wickii T. Vigneswaran
    Non-surgical treatment of malignant mesothelioma / Manuel Fernández-Bruno, Silvia Fernández, Macarena González, Jordi Remon and Pilar Lianes
    Primary carcinoma of the pleura and peritoneum / Bonnie Balzer
    Lymphoid malignancies of the pleura and peritoneum / Richard Attanoos
    Mesenchymal and other unusual tumors of the pleura and peritoneum / Nicole A. Ciprani and Peter Pytel.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Alan G. Magee, Jan Till, Anna N. Seale, editors.
    Summary: This book is a collection of cases highlighting situations which can ensnare even the best cardiologist working with pediatric patients. Heart disease in children has a number of diagnostic traps for the unwary, and many of those involved in the specialty have been caught at one time or another. Although the cases contained within these pages illustrate the importance of taking a good history and performing a thorough examination, the most important lesson is learning to keep an open mind and develop the ability to think laterally. For example, it is sometimes very difficult to differentiate between respiratory and cardiac disease in infants and between neurological and cardiac conditions in older children, and the consequences of taking the wrong path can be significant. Practical Pediatric Cardiology is made up of concise chapters that are designed to shed some light on the often difficult management decisions in this group of patients. The chapters represent a wide range of clinical experience and thus will be useful for all readers from those in training through nursing and emergency medical professionals to practicing pediatric cardiologists and cardiac surgeons.

    Contents:
    It's Enough to Make You Anxious
    Fetal AVSD or Maybe Not?
    Mind the Gap
    Dilated Cardiomyopathy: If You Don't Suspect, You Can't Diagnose!
    Syncope: It's All in the History
    Chest Pain in Children: Not Always Benign
    Coronary Artery Imaging Is Crucial
    The Woes Lie Below
    When Not to Intubate Babies Receiving 100% Oxygen
    A Child with a Long QT?
    Breathlessness in an Ex-Prem When All Is Not What It Seems
    Think Outside the Chest
    Fontan Circulation: Forget the Atrial Septum at Your Peril
    Is This Really Bronchiolitis?
    A Neonatal Dilemma
    The Collapsing Teenager
    Dilated Cardiomyopathy: Think of the Diet
    A T-Wave Tight Spot
    Don't Forget the Head and Neck Vessels
    The Test that Gets Forgotten
    Don't Ignore Reverse Differential Cyanosis
    Pulmonary Resistance: How Best to Measure?
    Cardiomyopathy in Infants: Look at the Rhythm, Then Look Again.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by George Gershman, Mike Thomson.
    Summary: "The GI endoscopy market generally is on the rise - due to a combination of new techniques and procedures being developed (i.e. robotic endoscopy), higher levels of obesity worldwide causing more GI problems, colon and GI cancer on the rise, poorer diets in Western countries leading to GI problems, etc. The GI endoscopy market in the US alone is worth approximately $2.5 billion. Colonoscopy is the most common endoscopic procedure. It is estimated that there are approx. 14 million colonoscopies performed in the US alone each year, and 3 million flexible sigmoidoscopies (which only looks at the sigmoid colon, not the whole colon). The gastroenterologist him/herself will perform 85% of all colonoscopy procedures. There are many differences between how the gastroenterologist performs an adult and a pediatric endoscopy. The age of a patient is hugely significant: there are clear differences between the pediatric compared with the adult patient in terms of GI pathology, and the response to the non-physiological conditions induced by the procedure itself, such as esophageal intubation, increased abdominal pressure, gastric distension etc., which can compromise cardio-respiratory state. In addition, the reduced thickness of intestinal wall in infants and young children requires appropriate adjustment in technique"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Pediatric Endoscopy Setting. Introduction / George Gershman, Mike Thomson
    History of pediatric gastrointestinal endoscopy / Samy Cadranel, Jean-Fran©ʹois Mougenot, Douglas S Fishman
    The endoscopy unit / Harpreet Pall
    Pediatric procedural sedation and general anesthesia for gastrointestinal endoscopy / Tom Kallay, Rok Orel, Jernej Brecelj
    Pediatric endoscopy training and ongoing assessment / Catharine M Walsh, Looi Ee, Mike Thomson, Jenifer R Lightdale
    Recertification and revalidation as concepts in pediatric endoscopy / Priya Narula, Mike Thomson
    The role of the Global Rating Scale in pediatric endoscopy / Priya Narula, Mike Thomson
    Quality indicators as a critical part of pediatric endoscopy provision / Priya Narula, Mike Thomson
    e-learning in pediatric endoscopy / Claudio Romano, Mike Thomson
    Diagnostic Pediatric Endoscopy. Indications for gastrointestinal endoscopy in childhood / Dalia Belsha, Jerome Viala, George Gershman, Mike Thomson
    Diagnostic upper gastrointestinal endoscopy / George Gershman, Mike Thomson
    Pediatric ileocolonoscopy / George Gershman, Mike Thomson
    Handling of specimens and orientation of biopsies / Marta C Cohen, Paul Arnold
    Enteroscopy / Mike Thomson, Arun Urs
    Wireless capsule endoscopy / Mike Thomson
    Endoscopic ultrasonography / Simona Faraci, Luigi Dall'Oglio, Paola Angelis, Douglas S Fishman
    Chromoendoscopy / Mike Thomson, Paul Hurlstone
    Confocal laser endomicroscopy in the diagnosis of pediatric gastrointestinal disorders / Mike Thomson, Krishnappa Venkatesh
    High-risk pediatric endoscopy / Jenifer R Lightdale, Mike Thomson, Douglas S Fishman
    Pediatric GI Pathologies and the Role of Endoscopy in Their Management. Esophagitis / Mario C Vieira, Luciana B Mendez Ribeiro, Sabine Krger Truppel
    Eosinophilic esophagitis / Calies Menard-Katcher, Glenn T Furuta, Robert E Kramer
    Gastritis and gastropathy / Shishu Sharma, Mike Thomson
    Celiac disease / Alina Popp, Vasile Daniel Balaba, Markku M©Þki
    Role of endoscopy in inflammatory bowel disease including scoring systems / Salvatore Oliva, Mike Thomson, David Wilson, Dan Turner
    Therapeutic Pediatric Endoscopy. Endoscopic management of esophageal strictures / Michael Manfredi, Frederick Gottrand, Luigi Dall'Oglio, Mike Thomson, George Gershman, Antonio Quiros, Thierry Lamireau
    Endoscopic management of caustic ingestion / Erasmo Miele, Samy Cadranel
    Pneumatic balloon dilation and peroral endoscopic myotomy for achalasia / Valerio Balassone, Mike Thomson, George Gershman
    Endoscopic approaches to the treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease / Mike Thomson, Chris Fraser
    Foreign body ingestion / Raoul Furlano, George Gershman, Jenifer R Lightdale
    Non-variceal endoscopic hemostasis / George Gershman, Jorge H Vargas, Mike Thomson
    Variceal endoscopic hemostasis / Patrick McKiernan, Lauren Johanson, Mike Thomson
    Endoscopic approach to obscure gastrointestinal bleeding lesions / Natalia Nedelkopoulou, Sara Isoldi, Dalia Belsha, Mike Thomson
    Percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy / Natalie Bhesania, Mike Thomson, Marsha Kay
    Single-stage percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy / Andreia Nita, Jorge Amil-Dias, Arun Urs, Mike Thomson, Prithviraj Rao
    Pediatric laparoscopic-assisted direct percutaneous jejunostomy / Mike Thomson, Jonathan Goring, Richard Lindley, Sean Marven
    Naso-jejunal and Gastro-jejunal tube placement / George Gershman
    Endoscopic retrograde cholangiopancreatography / Douglas S Fishman, Paola Angelis, Luigi Dall'Oglio, Victor Fox
    Endoscopic drainage of pancreatic pseudocysts / Mike Thomson
    Duodenal web division by endoscopy / Mike Thomson, Shishu Sharma, Filippo Torroni, Jonathan Goring
    Polypectomy / George Gershman, Mike Thomson, Gabor Veres
    Endomucosal resection / Mike Thomson, Paul Hurlstone
    Endoscopic management of polyposis syndromes / Warren Hyer, Mike Thomson, Thomas Attard
    Transnasal gastrointestinal endoscopy / Sara Koo, Kristina Leinwand, Simon Panter, Joel A Friedlander
    Endoscopic bariatric approaches / Mike Thomson, Matjaz Homan
    Over-the-scope clip and full-thickness resection device / Mike Thomson
    Endoscopic treatment of gastrointestinal bezoars / Andreia Nita, Mike Thomson
    Natural orifice transendoluminal surgery / Mike Thomson
    Index
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Prasad Godbole, Duncan T. Wilcox, Martin A. Koyle, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a case based approach to the problems faced within pediatric urology and an evidence based approach to their solutions. Chapters on urodynamics, external genitalia, the upper urinary tract, the lower urinary tract, and office pediatric urology are included. Practical Pediatric Urology aims to utilise real life scenarios to improve data analysis, diagnosis, and treatment decisions within clinical settings. Key learning objectives are included to enable medical professionals to assimilate, synthesise, and formulate a management plan for pediatric urological conditions encountered in clinical practice in a safe and evidence based approach. This book is relevant to pediatricians, pediatric surgeons, pediatric urologists and adult urologists who undertake some pediatric urology practice.

    Contents:
    The Evolution of Evidence Based Clinical Medicine
    Clinical Practice Guidelines: Choosing wisely
    Antibiotic Stewardship in Pediatric Urology: Editorial Comment
    Pain Management in paediatric urology
    Antenatal Urology
    Office Paediatric Urology
    Neonatal UrologicalEmergencies
    Urinary Tract Infection in Infants and Children
    Upper Urinary Tract Obstruction UPJO, megaureter, ureterocele
    Congenital Upper Tract Anomalies: Duplication, Cystic Renal Dysplasia, Multicystic Dysplastic Kidney
    Practical Pediatric Urology: An Evidence Based Approach- Vesicoureteral Reflux and Bladder Diverticulum
    Lower Urinary Tract Obstruction
    Lower urinary tract : urethra: duplication, prostatic utricle, Cowper's gland cyst
    Hypospadias
    Bladder Exstrophy
    Genitalia: undescended testis, acute scrotum, buried penis
    Inguinal hernia, Hydrocele, Varicocele, Spermatocele and Abdomino-scrotal hydrocele
    Urolithiasis
    Urologic Tumors
    Pediatric Urologic Trauma
    Functional voiding disorders. Neurogenic Bladder
    Disorders of sex development
    Pediatric and Adolescent Gynecology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by S. Abbas Shobeiri.
    Summary: Practical Pelvic Floor Ultrasonography: A Multicompartmental Approach to 2D/3D/4D Ultrasonography of Pelvic Floor provides an introduction to pelvic floor imaging, as well as a resource to be used during initial and more advanced practice. The book helps readers gain competence in performing 2D/3D/4D transperineal, and 2D/3D endovaginal / endoanal ultrasound evaluation of the pelvic floor, including anal sphincter and levator ani complex. The text also shows interested clinicians how to obtain optimal images of pelvic floor muscles and organs, how to obtain useful images of the anal canal, levator ani complex, urethra, and how to interpret clinical implications of alterations of the anatomy. In addition, emerging techniques of dynamic pelvic floor ultrasound and 3D/4D ultrasound are introduced through step by step protocols that are aimed at optimizing sonographic images. Written entirely by experts in their fields, Practical Pelvic Floor Ultrasonography: A Multicompartmental Approach to 2D/3D/4D Ultrasonography of Pelvic Floor is a comprehensive resource that will be of great value to urogynecologists, colorectal surgeons, obstetrician and gynecologists, female urologists, ultrasonographers, radiologists, physiotherapists, as well as fellows in urogynecology and colorectal surgery.

    Contents:
    Pelvic Floor Anatomy
    2D / 3D Endovaginal and Endoanal Instrumentation and Techniques
    Instrumentation and Techniques for Translabial and Transperineal Pelvic Floor Ultrasound
    3D Endovaginal Ultrasound imaging of the Levator Ani Muscles
    Endovaginal Urethra and Bladder Imaging
    3D Endovaginal Imaging of the Anorectal Structures
    Endovaginal Imaging of Vaginal Implants
    Endovaginal Imaging of Pelvic Floor Cysts and Masses
    Three-dimensional Endoanal Ultrasonography of the Anorectal Region
    Endoanal Ultrasonographic Imaging of the Anorectal Cysts and Masses
    Emerging Imaging Technologies and Techniques
    Post-Test Questions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Yvonne Bouwman-Boer, V'lain Fenton-May, Paul Le Brun, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    Prescription assessment
    Availability of medicines
    Oral solids
    Oral liquids
    Pulmonary
    Oropharynx
    Nose
    Ear
    Eye
    Rectal and vaginal
    Dermal
    Parenteral
    Irrigation and dialysis
    Product design
    Biopharmaceutics
    Quality risk management
    Physical chemistry
    Microbiology
    Statistics
    Radiopharmacy
    Stability
    Raw materials
    Containers
    Human resources
    Occupational health and safety
    Premises
    Equipment
    Basic operations
    Sterilisation methods
    Aseptic handling
    Quality requirements and analysis
    Documentation
    Production, Validation Quality Control
    Quality systems
    Logistics
    Instructions for the use of medicines
    Impact on Environment
    Information sources
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Takashi Kudo, Kenneth L. Davis, Rafael Blesa Gonzalez, David George Wilkinson.
    Contents:
    Basic theory of pharmacology for Alzheimer's disease
    Practical Pharmacology of Donepezil
    Practical pharmacology of Galantamine
    Practical pharmacology of Rivastigmine
    Practical Pharmacology of Memantine
    How do we use Symptomatic drugs for Dementia.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    James M. Daniels, Richard A. Hoppmann, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    Equipment
    Knobology
    ENT
    Cardiovascular
    Pulmonary
    Gastrointestinal
    Genitourinary
    Musculoskeletal
    Trauma
    Procedures
    Index. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Anver Kuliev, Svetlana Rechitsky, Joe Leigh Simpson.
    Summary: Fully revised and updated with the most current information, the third edition of this practical clinical text covers all aspects of the rapidly advancing field of preimplantation genetic testing (PGT). Although PGT has become an established procedure for genetics and assisted reproduction practices over the last decade, its wider application has occurred after the introduction of next generation technologies in the last few years, necessitating this much-needed new edition. This will include, first of all, an update on PGT accuracy, reliability and safety, to ensure improved access to PGT for those who may benefit greatly from this technology. New content will also present progress in the primary prevention of genetic disorders, which now discusses approaches for prospective identification of at-risk PGT couples through the application of the extended gene testing panels. In fact, because of dramatic technological improvements in all aspects of PGT, most of the sections have been updated, with the addition of new sections on next generation technologies and universal PGT with combined testing for single gene and chromosomal disorders, which has previously presented a challenge. The guiding PGT strategies for different genetic disorders are presented, with emphasis on the most complicated cases that might be of special utility in the wider application PGT technologies worldwide. Additionally, a new section will be devoted to borderline indications, which will include common adult-onset conditions with genetic predisposition and non-genetic indications, expanding PGT applications to heart disease and cancer and the use of PGT for stem cell transplantation treatment of genetic and acquired disorders, where unique outcome data has become available. Combining the latest research and the most cutting-edge practice, Practical Preimplantation Genetic Testing, 3e is an excellent resource for clinical reproductive medicine specialists, genetic counselors, researchers and analysts.

    Contents:
    Place of Preimplantation Genetic Testing (PGT) in the Options for Primary Prevention of Genetic Disorders
    Major Components of Preimplantation Genetic Testing: Obtaining Biopsy Material
    Major Components of Preimplantation Genetic Testing: Adjustment of Available Genetic Technologies to PGT Practice
    Strategies and Indications for Preimplantation Genetic Testing of Monogenic Disorders (PGT-M)
    Preimplantation Genetic Testing for Human Leucocyte Antigens (HLA) (PGT-HLA)
    Preimplantation Genetic Testing for Chromosomal Disorders
    Clinical Outcomes of Preimplantation Genetic Testing
    Ethical, Social and Legal Issues with Preimplantation Genetic Testing.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Ying Cheong, Togas Tulandi, Tin-Chiu Li.
    Summary: "Authored by leading experts in the field, this user-friendly guide is an invaluable for any IVF practitioner and embryologist, facing everyday hands-on issues, through to high-pressure laboratory problems, efficiency ratings and ensuring cost-effective delivery of care. With the strict governance of regulatory bodies worldwide, the success of any fertility centre depends on successful problem solving, all day every day. Based on a wealth of experience, identify commonly occurring problems, and fresh perspectives of problem- solving, with 'must-have' protocols, patient information sheets and suggested equipment. This go-to companion tackles operational, organizational, clinical and laboratory issues to financial and clinical governance, with a focus on quick and effective solutions for the busy practitioner"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Christopher C.K. Ho.
    Summary: "Master the fundamentals and intricacies of implant dentistry with this comprehensive and practical new resource Practical Procedures in Implant Dentistry delivers a comprehensive collection of information demonstrating the science and clinical techniques in implant dentistry. Written in a practical and accessible style that outlines the principles and procedures of each technique, the book offers clinical tips and references to build a comprehensive foundation of knowledge in implantology. Written by an international team of contributors with extensive clinical and academic expertise, Practical Procedures in Implant Dentistry covers core topics such as: Rationale and assessment for implant placement and restoration, including the diagnostic records and surgical considerations required for optimal planning and risk management; Incision design considerations and flap management, with an essential knowledge of regional neuro-vascular structures; Implant placement, encompassing the timing of the placement, bone requirements and understanding the importance of the peri-implant interface for soft tissue stability; Impression techniques, loading protocols, digital workflows and the aesthetic considerations of implants Prosthetic rehabilitation of single tooth implants to fully edentulous workflows, including discussions of soft tissue support, biomechanics and occlusal verification Perfect for both general dental practitioners and specialists in implant dentistry, Practical Procedures in Implant Dentistry is also a valuable reference to senior undergraduate and postgraduate dental students"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Patient Assessment and History Taking / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Diagnostic Records / Aodhan Docherty and Christopher C.K. Ho
    Medico-Legal Considerations and Risk Management / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Considerations for Implant Placement: Effects of Tooth Loss / Kyle D. Hogg
    Anatomic and Biological Principles for Implant Placement / Kyle D. Hogg
    Maxillary Anatomical Structures / Kyle D. Hogg
    Mandibular Anatomical Structures / Kyle D. Hogg
    Extraction Ridge Management / Tino Mercado
    Implant Materials, Designs, and Surfaces / Jonathan Du Toit
    Timing of Implant Placement / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Implant Site Preparation / Tom Giblin
    Loading Protocols in Implantology / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Surgical Instrumentation / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Flap Design and Management for Implant Placement / Christopher C.K. Ho, David Attia, and Jess Liu
    Suturing Techniques / Christopher C.K. Ho, David Attia, and Jess Liu
    Pre-surgical Tissue Evaluation and Considerations in Aesthetic Implant Dentistry / Sherif Said
    Surgical Protocols for Implant Placement / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Optimising the Peri-implant Emergence Profile / David Attia
    Soft Tissue Augmentation / Michel Azer
    Bone Augmentation Procedures / Michel Azer
    Impression Taking in Implant Dentistry / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Implant Treatment in the Aesthetic Zone / Christopher C.K. Ho
    The Use of Provisionalisation in Implantology / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Abutment Selection / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Screw versus Cemented Implant-Supported Restorations / Christopher C.K. Ho
    A Laboratory Perspective on Implant Dentistry / Lachlan Thompson
    Implant Biomechanics / Tom Giblin
    Delivering the Definitive Prosthesis / Aodhan Docherty and Christopher C.K. Ho
    Occlusion and Implants / Christopher C.K. Ho and Subir Banerji
    Dental Implant Screw Mechanics / Christopher C.K. Ho and Louis Kei
    Prosthodontic Rehabilitation for the Fully Edentulous Patient / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Implant Maintenance / Kyle D. Hogg and Christopher C.K. Ho
    The Digital Workflow in Implant Dentistry / Andrew Chio and Anthony Mak
    Biological Complications / Christopher C.K. Ho
    Implant Prosthetic Complications / Christopher C.K. Ho and Matthew K. Youssef.
    Digital Access Wiley 2022
  • Digital
    Maggi A. Budd, Sigmund Hough, Stephen T. Wegener, William Stiers, editors.
    Contents:
    Basics and Biopsychosocial Practicalities
    Information gathering and documentation
    Language of rehabilitation
    Basic lab findings
    Neurology of neuropsychology
    Neurology
    Imaging basics
    Everyday psychopharmacology
    Practical ethics
    Models of adaptation and resilience
    Disability models
    Social participation and ability/disability
    Forensic issues: health care proxy, advance directives, and guardianship
    Populations, Problems, and Procedures
    Traumatic brain injury
    Stroke
    Neurological tumors.? Spinal cord injury
    Multiple sclerosis
    Sensory impairments
    Spine, back, and musculoskeletal disorders
    Amputation
    Total joint replacement
    Developmental similarities and differences: congenital and acquired disabilities
    Pediatric rehabilitation psychology
    Geriatric rehabilitation psychology
    Organ transplantation patients
    Intensive care patients.-Cardiovascular disease patients
    Pain
    Delirium
    Suicidality
    Substance abuse
    Severe mental illness
    Conversion disorder
    Treatment adherence to prevent secondary complications
    Sexual health
    Sleep issues
    Fatigue.-Obesity
    Burns
    Respiratory and pulmonary disorders
    Decision making capacity and competency
    Adaptive/assistive technology
    Incorporating accreditation standards
    Behavioral medicine: nutrition, medication management, exercise
    Biofeedback
    Group psychotherapy
    Assessment and Practical Intervention
    Neurological exam: mental status, cranial nerves, and motor systems
    Assessing acute mental status changes
    Differentiating dementias and delirium
    Depression and anxiety assessment
    Cognitive assessment
    Evaluating for opioid use
    Behavioral activation: smart goals
    Psychotherapy
    Interventions: family adaptation
    Coping effectiveness training.? Self-management.? Cognitive retraining and remediation
    Interventions to increase resilience and adaptation
    Managing challenging patients (countertransference, resistance, apathy, anger, etc.)
    Vocation and recreation
    Consultation and Advocacy
    Models of consultation
    Interdisciplinary teams
    Practice Management and Administration
    CPT and billing codes
    Burnout prophylactics: professional self-care
    Research and Self Evaluation
    Research made useful for clinicians
    Using technology to practice evidence-based medicine
    Systematic program evaluation and improvement activities .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Joseph F. Goldberg, Stephen M. Stahl ; foreword by Alan F. Schatzberg.
    Summary: "The impetus for this book comes from our perception of a distinct unmet need in the world of clinical psychopharmacology, that of a marriage between clinical neuroscience and evidence-based trials, brokered by the matchmaker of pragmatism. There is, on the one hand, an ever-growing literature of randomized controlled trials, crossover trials, open case series, proof of concept studies and case reports that lend varying degrees of support for innovative therapeutic strategies; and, on the other hand, there exists a clinical reality in which patients frequently start and stop drugs not always for compelling reasons, where everyday practitioners manage patients on extensive polypharmacy regimens that may at times look like random assemblages, pharmacodynamic rationales are not always purposeful, mechanisms of action can be unwittingly redundant or contradictory, and ineffective treatments may senselessly get retained (sometimes perhaps even hoarded) rather than deprescribed"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Core Concepts of Good Psychopharmacology
    Targets of Treatment : Categories versus Dimensions of Psychopathology
    Interpreting and Using the Literature : Integrating Evidence-Based Trials with Real World Practice
    Placebo and Nocebo Effects
    Tailoring the Fit : Moderators and Mediators of Treatment Outcome
    Complex Regimens and Rationale-Based Combination Drug Therapies
    Laboratory Values and Psychiatric Symptoms : What to Measure, What Not to Measure, and What to Do With The Results
    Pharmacogenetics : When Relevant, When Not
    Cross-tapering and the Logistics of Drug Discontinuation
    Managing Major Adverse Drug Effects : When to Avoid, Switch, or Treat Through
    Novel Drug Therapeutics : Nutraceuticals, Steroids, Probiotics, and Other Dietary Supplements
    Human Diversity and Considerations in Special Populations
    Disordered Mood and Affect
    Disorders of Impulsivity, Compulsivity, and Aggression
    Psychosis
    Deficit States and Negative Symptoms
    Anxiety
    Addiction and the Reward Pathway
    Trauma and Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
    Personality Disorders
    Cognition
    Putting it All Together.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Kevin O. Leslie, Mark R. Wick.
    Contents:
    Lung anatomy / Kevin O. Leslie and Mark R. Wick
    Pulmonary function testing for pathologists / Imre Noth
    Optimal Processing of diagnostic lung specimens / Staci Beamer, Dawn E. Jaroszewski, Robert W. Viggiano, and Maxwell L. Smith
    Computed tomography of diffuse lung diseases and solitary ulmonary nodules / Giorgia Dalpiaz
    Developmental and pediatric lung disease / Megan K. Dishop
    Acute lung injury / Oi-Yee Cheung, Paolo Graziano, and Maxwell L. Smith
    Lung infections / Ann E. McCullough and Kevin O. Leslie
    Chronic diffuse lung diseases / Mikiko Hashisako, Junya Fukuoka, and Maxwell L. Smith
    Nonneoplastic pathology of the large and small airways / Mattia Barbareschi and Alberto Cavazza
    Pneumoconioses / Kelly J. Butnor and Victor L. Roggli
    Pulmonary vasculitis and pulmonary hemorrhage / William David Travis, Kevin O. Leslie, and Mary Beth Beasley
    Pulmonary hypertension / Andrew Churg and Joanne L. Wright
    Pathology of lung transplantation / Andras Khoor
    Neuroendocrine neoplasms of the lung / Alain C. Borczuk
    Sarcomas and sarcomatoid neoplasms of the lungs and pleural surfaces / Mark R. Wick, Kevin O. Leslie, and Mark H. Stoler
    Hematolymphoid disorders / Madeleine D. Kraus and Mark R. Wick
    Nonneuroendocrine carcinomas (excluding "sarcomatoid" carcinoma) and salivary gland analogue tumors of the lung / Philip T. Cagle and Timothy C. Allen
    Metastatic tumors in the lung : a practical approach to diagnosis / Stephen Spencer Raab
    Pseudoneoplastic lesions of the lungs and pleural surfaces / Mark R. Wick, Timothy C. Allen, Jon H. Ritter, and Osamu Matsubara
    Benign and borderline tumors of the lungs and pleura / Mark R. Wick and Stacey E. Mills
    Malignant and borderline mesothelial tumors of the pleura / Mark R. Wick, Kevin O. Leslie, Jon H. Ritter, and Stacey E. Mills.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Leslie, Kevin O.; Smith, Maxwell L.; Wick, Mark R.
    Summary: Part of the in-depth and practical Pattern Recognition series, Practical Pulmonary Pathology, 4th Edition, helps you arrive at an accurate diagnosis by using a pattern-based approach. Leading diagnosticians in pulmonary pathology offer practical assistance in identifying all major neoplastic and non-neoplastic diseases of the lungs, guiding you from a pathological pattern through the appropriate work-up, around the pitfalls, and to the best diagnosis. More than 1,000 high-quality illustrations capture key morphologic patterns for a full range of common and rare conditions and assist in the interpretation of complex diagnostic puzzles. A unique "visual index at the beginning of the book directs you to the exact chapter and specific page you need for in-depth diagnostic guidance. Helps you quickly recognize the vast variety of appearances of the lung that result from infections, tumors, and tumor-like lesions, both malignant and benign. Discusses advances in molecular diagnostic testing, its capabilities and its limitations, including targeted/personalized medicine. Incorporates clinicopathologic background and relevant data from ancillary techniques (immunohistochemistry, cytogenetics, and molecular genetics), giving you the tools you need to master the latest breakthroughs in diagnostic technology. Covers the latest TNM staging and WHO classification systems, as well as new diagnostic biomarkers and their utility in differential diagnosis, newly described variants, and new histologic entities. Color-codes patterns to specific entities, and summarizes key points in tables, charts, and graphs so you can quickly and easily find what you are looking for. Shares the knowledge and expertise of new co-editor, Dr. Maxwell L. Smith. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Supriya Mallick, Goura K. Rath, Rony Benson, editor.
    Summary: This book addresses the most relevant aspects of radiation oncology in terms of technical integrity, dose parameters, machine and software specifications, as well as regulatory requirements. Radiation oncology is a unique field that combines physics and biology. As a result, it has not only a clinical aspect, but also a physics aspect and biology aspect, all three of which are inter-related and critical to optimal radiation treatment planning. In addition, radiation oncology involves a host of machines/software. One needs to have a firm command of these machines and their specifications to deliver comprehensive treatment. However, this information is not readily available, which poses serious challenges for students learning the planning aspect of radiation therapy. In response, this book compiles these relevant aspects in a single source. Radiation oncology is a dynamic field, and is continuously evolving. However, tracking down the latest findings is both difficult and time-consuming. Consequently, the book also comprehensively covers the most important trials. Offering an essential ready reference work, it represents a value asset for all radiation oncology practitioners, trainees and students.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; About the Editors; Part I: Practical Physics and Instrument;
    1: Interaction of Radiation with Matter; 1.1 Basic Physics Concepts to Understand Basic Interactions; 1.1.1 Electromagnetic Radiation; 1.1.2 Interaction of Charged Particles with Matter; 1.1.3 Radiative Interaction of Charged Particles; 1.2 Interaction of Electromagnetic Radiation; 1.2.1 Rayleigh Scattering; 1.2.2 Photoelectric Absorption; 1.2.3 Pair Production and Pair Annihilation; 1.2.4 Photodisintegration; 1.2.5 Linear Attenuation Coefficient and Mass Attenuation Coefficient 1.3 Interaction of Neurons with the Matte
    r2: Practical Aspects of QA in LINAC and Brachytherapy; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Linear Accelerator Quality Assurance; 2.2.1 Acceptance of Linear Accelerator; 2.2.2 Commissioning of Linear Accelerator; 2.2.3 Periodic Quality Assurance of Linear Accelerator; 2.3 Brachytherapy Quality Assurance; 2.3.1 Acceptance of Brachytherapy (Remote Afterloading); 2.3.2 Periodic Quality Assurance of Brachytherapy (Remote Afterloading); References;
    3: Radiation Dosimetry; 3.1 Radiation Dosimeter; 3.2 Ionization; 3.2.1 Free Air Ionization Chamber [3] 3.2.2 Thimble Chamber3.2.3 Farmer Chamber; 3.2.4 Parallel Plate Ionization Chamber; 3.2.5 Well Type Chamber; 3.3 Film; 3.3.1 Radiographic Film; 3.3.2 Radiochromic Film [4]; 3.3.3 Luminescence; 3.3.4 Thermoluminescent Dosimeter (TLD); 3.3.5 Optically Stimulated Luminescent Dosimeter (OSLD); 3.4 Semiconductor; 3.4.1 Diode Detector; 3.4.2 MOSFET Detector; 3.5 Gel Dosimeter; References;
    4: Radiation Protection Practical Aspects; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Important Organizations Pertaining to Radiation Safety; 4.3 Basic Quantities and Units in Radiation Safety 4.4 Transport of Radioactive Material4.5 Equipment Required for Radiation Safety; 4.6 Radioactive Waste Disposal; 4.6.1 Management of Radioactive Waste; 4.6.2 Radioactive Waste on the Basis of the Physical Form; 4.6.3 Quality Assurance and Radiation Safety in Radiotherapy; References;
    5: Beam Modifying Devices; 5.1 Shielding; 5.1.1 Gamma and X-Ray Shielding; 5.1.2 Neutron Shielding; 5.2 Custom Blocks [1]; 5.3 Independent Jaws; 5.4 Multileaf Collimator; 5.4.1 Types; 5.5 Compensators; 5.5.1 Types; 5.6 Wedge Filters; 5.7 Bolus; 5.7.1 Uses of Bolus; 5.8 Breast Cone 5.9 Penumbra Trimmers5.10 Flattening Filters; 5.11 Beam Modifying Devices for Electron Beams; References;
    6: Simulators; 6.1 2D Simulators; 6.2 3D Simulators; 6.2.1 CT Simulators (https://www.healthcare.siemens.com/magnetic-resonance-imaging/magnetom-world/hot-topics/mri-in-radiation-therapy/articles-and-case-studies); 6.2.2 MRI Simulators; 6.2.3 PET-CT Simulators; Reference;
    7: Telecobalt; 7.1 History; 7.2 Isotope [1]; 7.3 Machine Details; 7.4 Source Stuck; 7.5 Miscellaneous Points [2]; References;
    8: Gamma Knife; 8.1 Indication of Gamma Knife Surgery
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sonja Dieterich, Eric Ford, Daniel Pavord, Jing Zeng.
    Contents:
    Reference dosimetry for ionizing radiation
    Relative dosimetry for MV beams
    In-vivo dosimetry
    Quality assurance and commissioning of new radiotherapy technology
    Quality assurance of radiotherapy dose calculations
    Immobilization techniques in radiotherapy
    Image guidance and localization technologies for radiotherapy
    Brachytherapy
    Proton radiotherapy
    Radiation safety and shielding in radiotherapy
    Information technology in radiation oncology
    Quality and safety improvement in radiation oncology
    Simulation for radiotherapy treatment planning
    Treatment planning and quality metrics
    The use of electrons for external beam radiotherapy
    IMRT and VMAT
    SRS and SBRT
    Clinical aspects of image guidance and localization in radiotherapy
    Respiratory motion management for external beam radiotherapy
    Intracavitary brachytherapy
    Interstitial brachytherapy
    Prostate seed implant
    Intraoperative radiotherapy (IORT)
    Special procedures
    Resource documents.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Chandra Shekhar Biyani, Ben Van Cleynenbreugel, Alexandre Mottrie, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a detailed overview of a range of simulation models that have been developed which are applicable to urology. Chapters feature critical analysis of techniques including synthetic bench top models, computer-assisted virtual reality and box simulators. Furthermore, details of best practice, the latest innovations and guidance on how to select potential low-cost options is provided, enabling the reader to systematically develop a thorough understanding of the subject. Practical Simulation in Urology is a comprehensive resource that critically analyses the latest simulation techniques that are applicable in urology, making it an ideal resource for the practicing and trainee urologist seeking an up-to-date overview on the subject.

    Contents:
    History of Simulation in Urology
    Surgical Education and Learning Theory
    Role of a Surgeon as an Educator
    Proficiency-Based Progression Simulation Training; Shortening the learning curve
    Importance of e-learning
    Proficiency and Competency Assessment in training
    Procedural Training Simulators
    Basic Laparoscopic skills training
    Advanced Laparoscopic Simulation
    Cystoscopy and Ureteroscopy Simulation
    Simulation for Benign Prostatic Conditions
    PCNL simulation
    Simulation in Female Urology
    Simulation in penoscrotology (circumcision, SPC, catheterisation, Priapism)
    Simulation in Advanced Open Urology(Ileal conduit, ureteric reimplantation)
    Low-cost simulations in urology
    Learning Non-technical skills through Simulation
    Basic Robotic Skills Training
    Procedural Robotic Skills Training
    Validated training curricula in Robotic Urology
    Importance of a TTT Course.-Debriefing and Feedback
    Costs in surgical training, does it outweigh to the benefits?.-Standardisation of Training
    Role of Immersive Technology in Urological Simulation
    Role of 3D technology in simulation
    Simulation in Paediatric Urology
    Developing and Designing a Course.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Diya F. Mutasim.
    Contents:
    Part I. The pathologist's view
    1. What is Atypical Junctional Melanocytic Hyperplasia?
    2. What is Dysplastic Nevus?
    3. What is Hypersensitivity Reaction?
    4. What is Spongiotic Dermatitis?
    5. What is Psoriasiform Dermatitis?
    6. What is Lichenoid Dermatitis?
    7. What is Granulomatous Dermatitis?
    8. What is Dermatitis with Epidermotropism?
    9. What is Drug Eruption?
    10. What is Pseudolymphoma?
    Part II. The clinician's view
    11. Reddish Facial Papules
    12. Face infiltrated Plaques/Nodules
    13. Patchy Alopecia
    14. Diffuse Smooth Alopecia
    15. Follicular Pustules of the Scalp
    16. Scaly Scalp
    17. Oral Erosions
    18. Vulvar Lesions
    19. Penile Lesions
    20. Diffuse Leg Induration
    21. Subcutaneous Leg Nodules
    22. Leg Ulcers
    23. Follicular Papules and Pustules
    Trunk
    24. Palmoplantar Red Hyperkeratosis
    25. Skin Folds Diffuse Rash
    26. Exfoliative Erythroderma
    27. Generalized Pruritus
    28. Photo-Eruptions
    29. Hypopigmented Patches
    30. Pigmented Patches
    31. Red Smooth Patches
    32. Red Scaly Patches
    33. Red Sloughing Patches
    34. Red Scaly Papules
    35. Red Non-facial Papules
    36. Papulo-nodular Lesions with Scale and/or Crust
    37. Edematous Smooth Plaques
    38. Sclerotic Plaques
    39. Diffuse Sclerosis
    40. Purpuric Lesions
    41. Blisters.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jason L. Hornick.
    Contents:
    Introduction : tumor classification and immunohistochemistry / Jason L. Hornick
    Biologic potential, grading, staging, and reporting of sarcomas / Jason L. Hornick
    Spindle cell tumors of adults / Adrian Marino-Enriquez and Jason L. Hornick
    Pediatric spindle cell tumors / Cheryl M. Coffin and Rita Alaggio
    Tumors with myxoid stroma / Vickie Y. Jo and Jason L. Hornick
    Epithelioid and epithelial-like tumors / Leona A. Doyle and Jason L. Hornick
    Pleomorphic sarcomas / J. Frans Graadt van Roggen and Pancras C.W. Hogendoorn
    Round cell tumors / Enrique de Alava
    Biphasic tumors and tumors with mixed patterns / Jason L. Hornick
    Soft tissue tumors with prominent inflammatory cells / Jason L. Hornick
    Giant cell-rich tumors / Bernadette Liegl-Atzwanger and Jason L. Hornick
    Adipocytic tumors / Marta Sbaraglia and Angelo Paolo Dei Tos
    Vascular tumors / Briana Gleason and Jason L. Hornick
    Cartilaginous and osseous soft tissue tumors / Jodi Carter and Andre Oliveira
    Cutaneous mesenchymal tumors / Thomas Brenn and Jason L. Hornick
    Mesenchymal tumors of the gastrointestinal tract / Brian Rubin and Jason L. Hornick
    Lower genital soft tissue tumors / Marisa R. Nucci
    Applications of molecular testing to differential diagnosis / Wei-Lien Wang and Alexander J. Lazar.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    James E. De Muth.
    Summary: "This is an introductory statistics book designed to provide scientists with practical information needed to apply the most common statistical tests to laboratory research data. The book is designed to be practical and applicable, so only minimal information is devoted to theory or equations. Emphasis is placed on the underlying principles for effective data analysis and survey the statistical tests. It is of special value for scientists who have access to Minitab software. Examples are provided for all the statistical tests and explanation of the interpretation of these results presented with Minitab (similar to results for any common software package)"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Essential elements and statistical terms
    Descriptive statistics and univariate analysis
    Statistical inference and making estimates of the truth
    Dealing with inherent statistical error
    Multivariate analysis: tests to identify differences
    Multivariate analysis: tests to evaluate relationships
    Tests to identify similarities
    Tests to evaluate potential outliers
    Appendices. Flow charts for the selection of the most appropriate inferential test given the types of variables in the study
    Common statistical tables
    Summary of initial commands for Minitab 19®
    Calculations for statistical results present in various chapters.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Laura B. Dunn, Erin L. Cassidy-Eagle.
    Contents:
    Late-life depression I : "I can't keep up with my grandkids" / Dolores Gallagher-Thompson, Ann Choryan Bilbrey, Erin Cassidy-Eagle, Larry W. Thompson
    Late-life depression II : "I think of ending my life every day" / Aazaz U. Haq and Christopher O'Connell
    Working with depressed caregivers : behavioral activation: "I can't find the energy or time to leave the house" / Ann Choryan Bilbrey, Erin Cassidy-Eagle, and Dolores Gallagher-Thompson
    Diagnosis and treatment of generalized anxiety disorder in later life : "Getting old is not for wimps!" / Marla Kokesh Daniel D. Sewell
    Somatic complaints and anxiety in older adults : "I wish the doctor would figure out what's wrong with me" / Sheila Lahijani
    Pain and psychological factors in older adults : "I need more pain medication, not less!" / Beth D. Darnall
    Primary sleep disorders : "My wife says I snore loudly and sometimes stop breathing while I'm asleep" / Cathy I. Cheng and Clete A. Kushida
    Evaluation and management of insomnia : "My sleeping pill isn't working anymore" / Erin L. Cassidy-Eagle, Laura B. Dunn, and Oxana Palesh
    Bipolar disorder : "What's wrong with Mom? Is it dementia?" / Barbara R. Sommer
    Post-traumatic stress disorder : "My stomach hurts" / Kelli M. Columbo and Aazaz U. Haq
    Evaluation and treatment of substance use disorders : "I just have one drink with dinner, Doc" / Karen Reimers and Ilse R. Wiechers
    Mild cognitive impairment : "I'm forgetting things. Is this normal for my age, or do I have dementia?" / Iuliana Predescu and Laura B. Dunn
    Neuropsychological testing : "I sometimes forget things" / Tonita E. Wroolie, Erin Cassidy-Eagle, and Laura B. Dunn
    Behavioral and psychological symptoms of dementia : "Little men are invading my backyard" / Awais Aftab and Daniel Kim
    Delirium in older adults : "Me, confused? Nah!" / Patricia Serrano, Elizabeth Hathaway, and Ajita Mathur
    Inpatient issues
    behavioral and pharmacologic interventions : "He tried to kick a staff member" / Nishina A. Thomas, Monica Mathys, and Mary (Molly) E. Camp
    Post-intensive care syndrome : "He's just not himself" / Duane Allen, Babar Khan, and Sophia Wang
    Physical activity in late life : "I run out of breath" / J. Kaci Fairchild, Kathryn Phillipps, and Peter Louras
    The social worker in geriatric outpatient care : "Can you help me with this patient?" / Laura Clayton
    Initial evaluation and management of frontotemporal dementia : "My wife seems different" / Eveleigh Wagner, Warren Taylor, and R. Ryan Darby
    Legal issues in cognitive disorders : "Mom changed her will" / Leah McGowan, Michael Kelly
    Driving in the older adult : "My husband can be absent-minded when he's driving, that's all" / Christopher O'Connell and Aazaz U. Haq
    LGBT issues in aging : "I've been a woman my whole life" / Kevin K. Johnson
    Practical strategies for approaching grief : "When in doubt, be human" / Alana Iglewicz.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC451.4.A5 P73 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Craig A. Solid.
    Summary: These days, the idea of value is at the center of many activities and decisions in health care in the United States. While there exist books that detail the technical steps for how to carry out a specific type of value assessment, such as cost-effectiveness or return on investment, there are few that attempt to teach healthcare professionals how to think about value. This book provides a deeper understanding of value as a concept as well as an endeavor (as in, to determine or uncover the value of care) within the healthcare industry by illustrating the different components of value that should guide decision-making processes for policy, infrastructure, and quality improvement. Through an exploration of theories of economics and implementation science, as well as practical suggestions for real-world applications, this text provides a foundation for the long and complicated value journey the US has bet its entire healthcare system on. In the US, policy to promote what is referred to as value-based care is here to stay. As we move forward within this construct, we need to move beyond the over-simplified definition of value as quality per dollar spent to a more functional framework for how to think about value that can adapt to different circumstances and points of view. Only then will it be possible to compare value across settings, conditions, and activities. The book consists of 9 chapters organized in four sections: Part I: Understanding the Challenges of Assessing the Value of Health Care Part II: A Primer on Fundamental Concepts and Current Techniques Used to Measure Value in Health Care Part III: A Discussion of the Real-world Motivations and Requirements that Should be Contemplated when Exploring Value Part IV How to Design and Perform a Value Assessment Practical Strategies to Assess Value in Health Care is an essential resource for healthcare professionals at all levels and points of care who are interested in understanding how best to assess and interpret value for a particular situation including providers, administrators, payers, insurers, health plans, and policy-makers.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    Part I: Understanding the Challenges of Assessing the Value of Health Care
    2. Challenge One: Complexity
    3. Challenge Two: Continuity
    4. Challenge Three: Lack of Consistency
    Part II: A Primer on Fundamental Concepts and Current Techniques Used to Measure Value in Health Care
    5. Key Economic Concepts and Their Implications
    6. Current Methods of Value Assessments
    Part III: A Discussion of the Real-world Motivations and Requirements that Should be Contemplated when Exploring Value
    7. Practical and Human Considerations
    Part IV: How to Design and Perform a Value Assessment
    8. The Value Assessment Framework
    9. Examples and Practical Suggestions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Arie Perry, Daniel J. Brat.
    Summary: "Part of the in-depth and practical Pattern Recognition series, Practical Surgical Neuropathology, 2nd Edition, by Drs. Arie Perry and Daniel J. Brat, helps you arrive at an accurate CNS diagnosis by using a pattern-based approach. Leading diagnosticians in neuropathology guide you from a histological (and/or clinical, radiologic, and molecular) pattern, through the appropriate work-up, around the pitfalls, and to the best diagnosis. Almost 2,000 high-quality illustrations capture key neuropathological patterns for a full range of common and rare conditions, and a "visual index" at the beginning of the book directs you to the exact location of in-depth diagnostic guidance"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    Yuichi Hirase.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1 : Reconstruction of Upper Arm and Medial and Lateral Elbow
    Chapter 2 : Reconstruction of Forearm Region
    Chapter 3 : Reconstruction of Dorsum of Hand
    Chapter 4 : Degloving Injury
    Chapter 5 : Reconstruction of Palm and Wrist Area
    Chapter 6 : Reconstruction of First web space Area
    Chapter 7 : Reconstruction of Finger Trunk
    Chapter 8 : Reconstruction of Fingertip
    Chapter 9 : Toe Transfer
    Chapter 10 : Nail Reconstruction
    Chapter 11 : Reconstruction of Mediastinitis/ Pyothorax/ Abdominal Incisional Hernia
    Chapter 12 : Reconstruction of Inguinal Region
    Chapter 13 : Reconstruction of the Gluteal, Sacral, and Trochanteric Regions
    Chapter 14 : Patella Region Reconstruction
    Chapter 15 : Anterior lower leg reconstruction
    Chapter 16 : Reconstruction of Distal 1/3 of Lower Leg
    Chapter 17 : Reconstruction of Achilles Tendon Area
    Chapter 18 : Reconstruction of Calcaneal Region/ Lateral Plantar Region
    Chapter 19 : Reconstruction of the Plantar Forefoot
    Chapter 20 : Reconstruction of Dorsum and Amputated Foot Stump
    Chapter 21 : Reconstruction of Dorsum of Toes
    Chapter 22 : Nerve Transplant & Nerve Transfer
    Chapter 23 : Transplantation of Bone and Joints
    Chapter 24 : Fat graft
    Chapter 25 : Muscle graft.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Tae-Hwan Lim.
    Summary: This up-to-date textbook comprehensively reviews all aspects of cardiac CT and MRI and demonstrates the value of these techniques in clinical practice. A wide range of applications are considered, including imaging of atherosclerotic and non-atherosclerotic coronary artery disease, coronary revascularization, ischemic heart disease, non-ischemic cardiomyopathy, valvular heart disease, cardiac tumors, and pericardial disease. The numerous high-quality images illustrate how to interpret cardiac CT and MRI correctly for the purposes of diagnosis, treatment planning, and follow-up. Helpful summarizing sections in every chapter will facilitate rapid retrieval of information. This book will be of great value to radiologists and cardiologists seeking a reliable guide to the optimal use of cardiac CT and MRI in real clinical situations. An additional feature is the provision of QR codes allowing internet access to references, further figures, and motion pictures. The reader will be able to enjoy this book using a smartphone or tablet PC.

    Contents:
    Part I: Coronary artery imaging
    Chapter 1: Normal anatomy, variations and anomalies
    Chapter 2: Atherosclerotic coronary artery disease
    2-1 Calcium scoring
    2-2 Determination of coronary artery stenosis by CT
    2-3 Plaque morphology evaluation by CT
    2-4 MR coronary angiography
    Chapter 3: Non-atherosclerotic coronary artery disease
    Chapter 4: Imaging of coronary revascularization: stent and CABG
    Part II: Ischemic Heart disease
    Chapter 5: Assessment of myocardial ischemia, non-MI
    Chapter 6: Acute MI
    Chapter 7: Chronic ischemic cardiomyopathy
    Part III: Non-Ischemic Cardiomyopathy
    Chapter 8: Dilated cardiomyopathy
    Chapter 9: Hypertrophic cardiomyopathy
    Chapter 10: Restrictive cardiomyopathy
    Chapter 11: Myocarditis and Other Cardiomyopathies
    Part IV: Valvular Heart Disease
    Chapter 12: Aortic valvular heart disease
    Chapter 13: Non-aortic valvular heart disease
    Part V: Cardiac tumor
    Chapter 14: Cardiac tumor
    Part VI: Pericardial Disease
    Chapter 15: Pericardial Disease
    Part VII: Technical Overviews
    Chapter 16: Technical Overviews.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    John A. Elefteriades, Bulat A. Ziganshin.
    Summary: This textbook provides practical tips on the conduct of aortic surgery, from the aortic valve to the iliac arteries. It is organized as a series of Plates, each with a key central illustration, followed by bullet items of accompanying explanatory text. The accompanying text concentrates on specific, critical dos and donts that promote and enhance patient safety. Chapters include dozens of color illustrations by one of the nations premier medical illustrators, along with selected classic pen and ink line drawings. Each central illustration is accompanied by additional secondary figures interspersed at intervals within the accompanying text. Each practical tip has an accompanying short (15-30 second) video demonstrating vividly the specific didactic point being made in each Plate. Chapters provide Q & A sections, to promote an interactive feel and experience. The textbook shares practical, potentially life-saving tipsgleaned from over three decades of experience in thousands of aortic operationsregarding virtually every standard operation that arises in aortic surgery. Practical Tips in Aortic Surgery will be an essential resource for surgeons and trainees at all levels of experience: residents and fellows, surgical physician assistants, surgical nurses and technicians, and medical students. The book directly targets two surgical specialties: Cardiac Surgery and Vascular Surgery.

    Contents:
    Section 1. General Tips
    General Approach
    Cannulation Sites
    Bevel Your Distal Ascending or Hemi-Arch Anastomosis
    Aortic Wrap
    Carbon Dioxide Flooding of the Pericardial Well
    Innominate Vein Ligation
    Pericardial Bridge for Delayed Sternal Closure
    Pull Hard on Graft to Measure Length
    Reduction of Graft Diameter
    Increase of Graft Diameter
    Reinforcement of Posterior Wall of Aortic Anastomosis
    Retrosternal Sponge Re-entry Technique
    Reinforced Sternal Closure
    The Tightening Stitch
    Towel Clip Technique to Control Re-entry Bleeding
    Turn Off LV Vent Well Before Finishing Last Ascending Suture Line
    Conduct of DHCA
    Clamping the Aorta
    Other Cerebral Perfusion Strategies
    Swing Venous Line Down to Expose Aortic Root
    Intraoperative Malperfusion
    Surrounding the Ascending AortaWithout Injuring the PA
    Do NOT obliterate a chronic flap
    Hugging but not Restricting the Innominate Artery with the Clamp
    Do Not Cut Too Close to the Clamp
    Graft Sizing
    Valerie Stitch for Exposure of the Aortic Root
    Cannulation of Left Inferior Pulmonary Vein
    Left Atrial Cannulation in Atrial Fibrillation
    The E-Rule: Never Start LA-FA Artery Perfusion w/o the Aorta Clamped
    Remember the Pulmonary Artery for Venous Return
    Mobilize the Posterior Wall Completely
    Mobilize the Descending Aorta from the Esophagus
    Sub-adventitial Hematoma
    Sienna graft for Mega-aorta
    The Inclusion Anastomotic Technique
    Big Needle for Thick Aortas
    Aneurysms of the Branches of the Aortic Arch
    Attaching Arch Graft to Ascending Graft (Configurations)
    BioGlue on Graft-to-Graft Anastomoses
    Lung Adhesions
    Adherence of Aneurysm to Chest Wall
    Reoperative Adhesions
    Extracting old prosthetic valves
    Section 2. Ascending Aorta and Aortic Arch
    Aortic Morphology Determines Extent of Resection
    Use the Corner of the Commissure to Advantage
    Aortic Valve Repair
    Ascending Aortic Replacement (*deeper stitches on non-coronary sinus)
    Composite Graft (Aortic Root Replacement) (Bentall Procedure)
    Composite Graft (Aortic Root Replacement) (Bentall Procedure)
    V-Shaped Aortic Root Remodeling
    Valve-Sparing Aortic Root Replacement
    Arch Replacement Options (2-vessel, 3-vessel, trifurcated graft)
    Standard (Non-Frozen) Elephant Trunk Procedure
    Retrieving the Elephant TrunkFour Options
    Stand-alone Elephant Trunk
    Acute Type A Aortic Dissection
    Ross Procedure
    Section 3. Descending and Thoracoabdominal Aorta
    Descending Aortic Replacement
    Acute Type B Aortic Dissection: Clinical Perspectives to Guide Surgery
    Fenestration Procedure
    Thoracoabdominal Aortic Replacement
    Abdominal aortic replacement
    Visceral artery aneurysms
    Pulmonary Artery Aneurysms
    Section 4. Vascular Rings
    General Comments
    Vascular Rings and Kommerils Diverticula.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Abhay Rané, Burak Turna, Riccardo Autorino, Jens J. Rassweiler, editors.
    Summary: This book is a compact, illustrated reference which provides the reader with practical tips and advice in managing day-to-day urological issues encountered in a clinical setting. Practical Tips in Urology draws on practical experience and offers useful information that is often lacking in didactic textbooks of urology and in journal articles. The chapters provide tips in dealing with urological emergencies, elective surgery and common outpatient consultation problems, among other things. Written by experts in the field, Practical Tips in Urology is key reading for all practicing urologists and residents in training.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Michael F. Murphy, David J. Roberts, Mark H. Yazer.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Carolyn A. Sink.
    Contents:
    The blood donor
    Blood collection
    Blood product overview
    Clinical considerations in transfusion practice
    Adverse effects of blood transfusion
    Methods and storage
    Quality assurance.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital/Print
    ... With a paper on the diseases of the breasts, by Robert S. Newton.
    Digital Access Google Books 1857-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    X361 .S43 1857
    1
  • Digital
    editor: Davide Chiumello.
    Summary: This book offers an essential guide to managing the most-debated hot topics of practical interest in anesthesia and intensive care. It reviews the state of the art in issues concerning both intensive care medicine and anesthesia, such as perioperative coagulation management, neuroaxial blockade and complications, postoperative pain management, pediatric airway management, septic shock and hemodynamic management, diagnosis and management of acute respiratory distress syndrome, and antifungal treatments for critically ill patients. Written by leading experts and including updated references, it provides a comprehensive, easy-to-follow update on anesthesia and intensive care. The book clearly explains complex topics, offering practicing clinicians valuable insights into the latest recommendations and evidence in the field while, at the same time, making it a vital resource for students new to the fields of anesthesia and intensive care.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Davide Chiumello, editor.
    Summary: This book offers an essential guide to managing the most heatedly debated topics of practical interest in anesthesia and intensive care. It reviews the state of the art in issues concerning both intensive care medicine and anesthesia, such as antibiotic therapy in multidrug resistance infection, acute hepatic failure, weaning, ECMO, difficult airway in pediatric patients, goal directed fluid therapy, preoperative anesthesia evaluation and delirium. Written by leading experts and including updated references, it provides a comprehensive, easy-to-follow guide to anesthesia and intensive care. The book clearly explains complex topics, offering practicing clinicians valuable insights into the latest recommendations and evidence in the field while, at the same time, making it a vital resource for students new to the fields of anesthesia and intensive care.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1: The Role of the Heart in Weaning Failure
    1.1 Weaning as an Intense Exercise
    1.2 The Diagnosis of Weaning Failure of Cardiovascular Origin
    1.3 Transthoracic Echocardiography
    1.4 Conclusions
    References
    2: MDR Infections in the ICU
    2.1 Infections and Resistance: The Problem Dimension
    2.2 Infections and Resistance: Definitions
    2.3 MDR Gram Positive
    2.3.1 MRSA
    2.3.2 Potential Role for the New Antibiotics
    2.3.3 VRE
    2.4 MDR Gram Negative
    2.4.1 ESBL-Producing Enterobacteriaceae
    2.4.2 AmpC-Producing Enterobacteriaceae 2.4.2.1 Carbapenem-Resistant Gram Negative
    2.4.3 XDR P. aeruginosa
    2.4.4 XDR A. baumannii
    2.4.5 KPC-Producing K. pneumoniae and Other Carbapenemase-Producing Enterobacteriaceae (CRE)
    2.5 Empiric Therapy
    2.6 Duration of Therapy
    2.7 Role of Additional Therapies in Gram-Negative MDR/XDR Bacteria Septic Shock
    2.8 Prevention and Control of MDR Infections in the ICU
    2.9 Antimicrobial Stewardship
    References
    3: The Diaphragmatic Dysfunction
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 The Diaphragm
    3.3 Anatomy and Respiratory Function 3.4 Diaphragmatic Dysfunction and Fatigue
    3.4.1 Diaphragmatic Dysfunction
    3.5 Invasive Evaluation of Diaphragmatic Function
    3.6 Noninvasive Evaluation of Diaphragmatic Function: The Ultrasound
    3.7 Diaphragmatic Displacement
    3.7.1 Limits of the Technique
    3.8 Thickness and Thickening Fraction
    3.9 Conclusion
    References
    4: Neuromuscular Blocking Agents: Review on Agents (NMBA and Antagonists) and Monitoring
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Neuromuscular Blocking Agents (NMBAs): The Classification [5, 7, 8, 10, 16, 18] 4.2.1 Neuromuscular Junction and Basic Physiology of Neurotransmission [5, 15, 18, 19] (Fig. 4.1)
    4.3 Depolarizing Neuromuscular Blocking Agents: Succinylcholine (SCh) [7, 8, 10, 18, 19] (Fig. 4.2)
    4.3.1 Side Effects [7, 8, 18, 19]
    4.4 Nondepolarizing Neuromuscular Blocking Agents (NDNMBAs)
    4.4.1 Aminosteroidal NDNMBAs
    4.4.2 Benzylisoquinoline Derivatives
    4.5 Monitoring Neuromuscular Function in Anesthesia [5, 15, 16, 17, 20-22]
    4.5.1 Train of Four (TOF) [5, 15, 16, 22]
    4.5.2 Post-Tetanic Twitch Count (PTC) [5, 15, 22] 4.5.3 Double-Burst Stimulation (DBS) [5, 15]
    4.6 Neuromuscular Blockade Antagonization
    4.6.1 Acetylcholinesterase Inhibitors (ACEIs) [5, 7, 8, 17, 18]
    4.6.2 Sugammadex (SUG) [5, 7, 8, 17, 18, 31, 32]
    4.7 Future Perspectives [7, 8, 34-36]
    References
    5: Extracorporeal Circulation in Acute Respiratory Failure: High Flow Versus Low Flow
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 General Principles of Treatment
    5.3 History
    5.4 Techniques
    5.4.1 Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO)
    5.4.2 Extracorporeal CO2 Removal (ECCO2R)
    5.5 Indications and Contraindications
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Davide Chiumello, editor.
    Summary: This book offers an essential guide to managing the most-debated hot topics of practical interest in anesthesia and intensive care. Part I reviews the state of the art in issues concerning both intensive care medicine and anesthesia, such as perioperative medicine, acute liver failure, anesthesia monitoring and ERAS in hepatic surgery. Part II focuses on microbiome in critically ill patients, on COVID-19 aspects and related issues, on sepsis in pediatric patients and ventilatory management in obese patients. Written by leading experts and including updated references, it provides a comprehensive, easy-to-follow update on anesthesia and intensive care. The book clearly explains complex topics, offering practicing clinicians valuable insights into the latest recommendations and evidence in the field while, at the same time, making it a vital resource for students new to the fields of anesthesia and intensive care.

    Contents:
    Part I. Anesthesia
    Perioperative Management of Patients Affected by Ischemic Cardiomyopathy
    Acute Liver Failure: Definition, Epidemiology, Management. Update 2022
    Perioperative Medicine: Technical and Organizational Issues
    Perioperative Hypertension and Anesthesia
    Depth of Anesthesia Monitoring
    ERAS (Enhanced Recovery After Surgery) in Liver Surgery
    Part II. Critical Care Medicine
    The Microbiome in Critically Ill Patients
    Coagulation Abnormalities in Patients with COVID-19
    Vascular Failure and Sepsis In Pediatrics
    Ventilatory Management of the Patient with Severe Obesity.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Taizhu Yang, Hong Luo, editors.
    Summary: With rapid development of ultrasound technology, its clinical application is expanding and deepening. This book is focused on practical application of ultrasound in obstetrics and gynecology. Besides ultrasound diagnosis, the new progress of ultrasound in obstetrics and gynecology, such as interventional ultrasound, 3D ultrasound, and endoscopic ultrasonography, is also discussed. Typical images selected from abundant cases are provided with concise and refining key points. It serves as a valuable reference for sonologists, radiologists and gynaecologists for accurate diagnosis.

    Contents:
    Clinical Basis of Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics and Gynecology
    Application of Ultrasound in Perinatal Period
    Ultrasound Diagnosis in Pathological Obstetrics
    Ultrasound Diagnosis of Fetal Heart
    Application of Ultrasound in Gynecology
    Application of Ultrasound in Female Infertility and Contraception
    Application of Interventional Ultrasound in Obstetrics and Gynecology
    Application of 3D Ultrasound in Obstetrics and Gynecology
    Application of Endoscopic Ultrasonography.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Andrew C. Peterson, Matthew O. Fraser, editors.
    Contents:
    The Basic Science Behind Practical/Clinical Urodynamics Analysis
    Urodynamics Equipment: What the Clinician Needs to Know to Set Up the Lab
    The Clinical Evaluation of the Patient Who Requires Urodynamics
    Noninvasive Urodynamics
    The Cystometrogram
    The Pressure Flow Study
    The EMG
    The Use of Fluoroscopy
    Putting it All Together: Practical Advice on Clinical Urodynamics
    Nomograms
    Ambulatory Urodynamics
    Bedside Urodynamics
    Practical Urodynamics in Children.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Pat F. Fulgham, Bruce R. Gilbert, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive volume covers the basic science of ultrasound - a popular choice in medical imaging - and thoroughly explores its clinical applications in urology. Covers changing technology and regulatory requirements, and includes detailed illustrations.

    Contents:
    1. History of ultrasound in urology
    2. Physical principles of ultrasound
    3. Bioeffects and safety
    4. Maximizing image quality: user-dependent variables
    5. Renal ultrasound
    6. Scrotal ultrasound
    7. Penile ultrasound
    8. Transabdominal pelvic ultrasound
    9. Pelvic floor ultrasound
    10. Transrectal ultrasound
    11. Ultrasound for prostate biopsy
    12. Pediatric urologic ultrasound
    13. Applications of urologic ultrasound during pregnancy
    14. Application of urologic ultrasound in pelvic and transplant kidneys
    15. Intraoperative urologic ultrasound
    16. Urologic ultrasound protocols
    17. Urology ultrasound practice accreditation
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Pat F. Fulgham, Bruce R. Gilbert, editors.
    Summary: Practical Urological Ultrasound has become a primary reference for urologists and sonographers performing urologic ultrasound examinations. This third edition is comprised of twenty-two chapters including newly added chapters on technical advancements in ultrasound, male reproduction ultrasound, point-of-care ultrasound, quality assessment and implementation for urologic practices, and sonographers in the urologic practice. All chapters are fully updated and expanded, covering additional literature on further elucidation of Doppler ultrasound principles, sonoelastography, quantitative evaluation of the clinical causes of ED, evaluations of the pelvic mesh implant and its complications, developments in multiparametic ultrasound of the prostate, and updated protocols in POCUS. Written by experts in the field of urology, Practical Urological Ultrasound, Third Edition continues to serve as an important resource for the novice and a comprehensive reference for the advanced sonographer.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: History of Ultrasound
    History of Doppler Ultrasound
    History of Ultrasound in Urology
    Prostate
    Kidney and Renal Hilum
    Scrotum
    Emerging Techniques
    High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
    Elastography
    Histioscanning or Computer-Analyzed Ultrasound
    Harmonics
    Contrast-Enhanced Ultrasonography
    Multiparametric Ultrasound
    Ultrasound in Therapeutics
    Conclusion
    References
    2: Physical Principles of Ultrasound
    Introduction
    The Mechanics of Ultrasound Waves
    Ultrasound Image Generation Interaction of Ultrasound with Biological Tissue
    Artifacts
    Modes of Ultrasound
    Gray-Scale, B-Mode Ultrasound
    Doppler Ultrasound
    Artifacts Associated with Doppler Ultrasound
    Harmonic Scanning
    Contrast Agents in Ultrasound
    References
    3: Bioeffects and Safety
    Introduction
    Bioeffects of Ultrasound
    Thermal Effects
    Mechanical Effects
    Patient Safety
    Mechanical Index
    Thermal Index
    ALARA
    Scanning Environment
    Patient Identification and Documentation
    Equipment Maintenance
    Cleaning and Disinfection of Ultrasound Equipment
    References 4: Maximizing Image Quality: User-Dependent Variables
    Introduction
    Tuning the Instrument
    Transducer Selection
    Scanning Environment
    Monitor Display
    Scanning Technique
    User-Controlled Variables
    Dynamic Range (Contrast)
    Conclusion
    Summary
    References
    5: Renal Ultrasound
    Introduction
    Point-of-Service Ultrasound
    Indications
    Equipment
    Patient Preparation
    Anatomic Considerations for Renal Imaging
    Imaging the Right Kidney
    Technique
    Imaging the Left Kidney
    Technique
    Normal Findings
    Adjacent Structures
    Ultrasound Report Indications
    Equipment
    Findings
    Impression
    Image Documentation
    Doppler
    Resistive Index
    Artifacts
    Renal Findings
    Extrarenal Pelvis
    Normal Parenchymal Variants
    Ultrasound Diagnosis of Renal Pathology
    Renal Cysts
    Parapelvic Cysts
    Hydronephrosis
    Urolithiasis
    Renal Masses
    Angiomyolipomas
    Renal Scars
    Medical Renal Disease
    Applications of Intraoperative Renal Ultrasound
    Conclusion
    References
    6: Scrotal Ultrasound
    Introduction
    Scanning Technique and Protocol
    Transducer Selection
    Overview of the Exam Color and Spectral Doppler
    Documentation
    Indications
    Normal Anatomy of the Testis and Paratesticular Structures
    Scrotum
    Testis
    Epidymis
    Vascular Anatomy
    Embryology Relevant to Ultrasound Imaging of the Scrotum
    Early Gonadal Developmental Anatomy
    Testicular Descent
    Development of the Scrotum
    Pathologic Conditions and the Scrotal Ultrasound
    Extratesticular Findings
    Hydrocele
    Pyocele
    Scrotal Hernia
    Sperm Granuloma
    Tumors of the Spermatic Cord
    Epididymal Findings
    Epididymo-Orchitis
    Torsion of the Appendix Epididymis and Testis
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ruifang Sui, Fu Tang, Minglian Zhang.
    Summary: This book includes the concept, general summary and the equipment of the visual electrophysiological examination. It also covers the clinical application scope, diagnosis protocol, standardized operation steps, clinical report samples, and the key points of reading reports, etc. of visual evoked potential (VEP), electroretinogram (ERG), electrooculogram (EOG), multifocal VEP, multifocal ERG and other commonly used visual electrophysiological examinations. Typical clinical report examples of normal and abnormal waveforms are specially added, which is a highlight of this book and can help clinical technicians quickly grasp the key points of electrophysiological report reading.

    Contents:
    Visual Electrophysiology Summary
    Visual Electrophysiology equipment
    Visual Electrophysiology report reading key points
    Visual Electrophysiology clinical cases
    Visual Electrophysiology equipment install and operation
    ISCEV extended visual electrophysiological examinations
    Visual electrophysiological in animal experiments.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Karen Fenstermacher, Barbara Toni Hudson.
    Summary: Prepare for FNP practice with the latest evidence-based guidelines! Practice Guidelines for Family Nurse Practitioners, 4th Edition provides essential information on current assessment and management protocols for primary care patients of all ages. Key details are easy to find, with the book's concise, outline-style guidelines and abundant summary tables and charts. And you'll be ready to manage care more effectively with the latest information on topics such as pain management, bariatric surgery follow-up, restless legs syndrome, and new medications for diabetes and cardiovascular disorders. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    History and physical examination. Adult assessment ; Pediatric assessment ; Geriatric assessment ; Laboratory and diagnostic pearls
    Common Conditions. Skin conditions ; Respiratory conditions ; Eye, ear, nose, and throat conditions ; Cardiovascular conditions ; Peripheral vascular and hematologic conditions ; Abdominal conditions ; Gynecologic conditions ; Common urinary tract conditions ; Neurologic conditions ; Musculoskeletal conditions ; Pain ; Endocrine conditions ; Pediatric conditions ; Psychiatric conditions.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Print
    American Academy of Neurology.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Reference (Upstairs)
    1997-<2001>
    (including updates)
    RC346 .A44
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Catherine M. Otto.
    Contents:
    Advanced Principles for the Echocardiographer
    The Left Ventricle
    Ischemic Heart Disease
    Valvular Heart Disease
    Cardiomyopathies and Pericardial Disease
    The Right Heart
    Vascular And Systemic Diseases
    Adult Congenital Heart Disease and the Pregnant Patient.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Gerhard Heinemeyer, Matti Jantunen, Pertti Hakkinen.
    Summary: This book closes a current gap by providing the scientific basis for consumer exposure assessment in the context of regulatory risk assessment. Risk is defined as the likelihood of an event occurring and the severity of its effects. The margin between the dose that leads to toxic effects and the actual dose of a chemical is identified by estimating population exposure. The objective of this book is to provide an introduction into the scientific principles of consumer exposure assessment, and to describe the methods used to estimate doses of chemicals, the statistics applied and computer tools needed. This is presented through the backgrounds of the special fields in exposure analysis, such as exposure via food and by the use of consumer products, toys, clothing and other items. As a general concept, human exposure is also understood to include exposure via the environment and from the work setting. In this context, the specific features of consumer exposure are pointed out and put into the context of regulation, in particular food safety, chemicals safety (REACh) and consumer product safety. The book is structured into three parts: The first part deals with the general concepts of consumer exposure as part of the overall risk analysis framework of risk characterization, risk assessment and risk communication. It describes the three basic features of exposure assessment (i) the exposure scenario (ii) the exposure model and (iii) the exposure parameters, addressing external and internal exposure. Also, the statistical presentation of data to characterize populations, in connection with variability, uncertainty and quality of information and the presentation of exposure evaluation results is described. The second part deals with the specific issues of exposure assessment, exposure via food consumption, exposure from use of consumer products, household products, toys, cosmetic products, textiles, pesticides and others. This part also covers methods for acquisition of data for exposure estimations, including the relevant information from regulations needed to perform an accurate exposure assessment. The third part portrays a prospect for further needs in the development and improvement of consumer exposure assessment, as well as international activities and descriptions of the work of institutions that are involved in exposure assessment on the regulatory and scientific level. And conversely, it creates the rationale for the exposure assessment details necessary to satisfy regulatory needs such as derivation of upper limits and risk management issues.

    Contents:
    1. General Introduction
    2. Major Principles and Concepts of Risk Assessment
    3. General Aspects of Exposure Evaluation
    4. Exposure to Substances via Food Consumption
    5. Exposure to Substances by use of Consumer Products
    6. Data Availability and Data Generation Concepts
    7. Activities Encountered by European and Other International Authorities.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Eelco F.M. Wijdicks, MD, PhD, FACP, FNCS, FANA, Professor of Neurology, Mayo Clinic, College of Medicine, Chair, Division of Critical Care Neurology, Consultant, Neurosciences Intensive Care Unit, Mayo Clinic Hospital, Saint Marys Campus, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minnesota.
    Contents:
    Begleitband Selected tables and figures from The practice of emergency and critical care neurology.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    chief editors, I. Kempf, K.S. Leung ; co-editors, A. Grosse ... [et al.].
    Contents:
    v. 1. Scientific basis and standard techniques
    v. 2. Advanced techniques and special applications
    v. 3. New developments in techniques and applications.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital/Print
    by James Tyson and M. Howard Fussell.
    Digital Access Google Books 1896-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L46 .T994 1906
    1
  • Digital
    John C.M. Brust.
    Contents:
    The neurological examination. Overview
    Mental status: the components of thinking are not easily isolated
    Cranial nerves: twelve is a misleading number
    Motor examination: there is always more than weakness
    The sensory examination: boundaries and comparisons are crucial
    Reflexes: remember the afferent limb
    Examination of the comatose patient
    79 ways of looking at the nervous system: case presentations and commentary. Mostly somatosensory
    Mostly visual
    Mostly auditory or vestibular
    Mostly olfactory
    Mostly motor
    Mostly autonomic
    Mixed disorders: somatosensory, motor, and autonomic
    Disorders of consciousness
    Disorders of language, praxis, gnosis, and thought.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2021
  • Digital
    Mohammad Diab, MD, Professor, Chief, Paediatric Orthopaedics, Department of Orthopaedic Surgery, University of California, San Francisco, San Francisco, California, Lynn T. Staheli, MD, Emeritus Professor, Department of Orthopaedics, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, Washington, Emeritus Editor, Journal of Paediatric Orthopaedics.
    Summary: "Profusely illustrated basic book on pediatric orthopaedics aimed at the resident in orthopaedics, the general orthopaedic surgeon, and the pediatrician. It is densley packed with relevent clinical information and a multitude of illustrations presented in a highly structured style"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Carrie Doehring.
    Contents:
    Intercultural care : trust and theological accountability
    Basic ingredients of caregiving relationships
    Embodied listening
    Establishing a caregiving relationship
    Theological themes and reflexivity
    Narrative themes of loss, violence, and coping
    Systematic assessment
    Planning care : liberative spiritual integration.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Print
    by various authors ; edited by Joseph Brennemann ...
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    P23 .B83
    10
  • Digital
    Boris A. Stuck, Joachim T. Maurer, Angelika A. Schlarb, Michael Schredl, Hans-Günter Weeβ.
    Summary: The book provides an overview of the entire field of sleep medicine, from the basics of sleep physiology to the diagnosis and treatment of specific sleep disorders. It offers a valuable introduction to the field of sleep medicine, but also serves as a reference work on all aspects of clinical practice, including diagnosis, differential diagnosis and treatment of all relevant sleep disorders in children and adults. It starts by presenting sleep physiology and the classification of sleep disorders, and explains in detail all the relevant diagnostic measures in the field. Based on these introductory chapters, it discusses the relevant sleep disorders, including insomnia, sleep-related breathing disorders, hypersomnia, sleep-wake-rhythm disorders, parasomnia, sleep related movement disorders, and secondary sleep disorders, as well as various isolated symptoms. In addition, an entire chapter is dedicated to sleep disorders in children. Drawing on the long-time experience of five board-certified sleep physicians with different professional backgrounds, the book reflects the interdisciplinary nature of sleep medicine. It includes the current international classification systems as well as scoring rules and clinical guidelines. It is intended for physicians and therapists from various specialities, including internal medicine (e.g. pulmonology and cardiology), psychology, psychiatry, neurology, paediatrics, otorhinolaryngology and general medicine who are interested in sleep medicine. It also serves as a textbook in these specialties. To optimize its clinical value, a uniform structure is used for the various chapters, including practical tips, comprehension questions and clinical case presentations.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    About the Authors
    1: Physiological Basics of Healthy and Disturbed Sleep
    1.1 History of Sleep Medicine
    1.2 Classification of Sleep Disorders
    1.3 Phenomenology of Sleep
    1.4 Physiological Alterations During Sleep
    1.4.1 Cardiovascular System During Sleep
    1.4.2 Thermoregulation
    1.4.3 Hormone System and Sleep
    1.5 Circadian Rhythm
    1.6 Sleep Regulation
    1.7 Functions of Sleep
    1.8 Dreaming
    1.8.1 Definitions
    1.8.2 Dream Recall
    1.8.3 General Characteristics of Dreams
    1.8.4 Correlation Between Wakefulness and Dream 1.8.5 Function of Dreams
    1.9 Questions
    Further Reading
    2: Diagnostic Methods
    2.1 History Taking
    2.1.1 Sleep-Related Personal Anamnesis
    2.1.2 Sleep-Related History Compiled by Third Parties
    2.1.3 History Taking Regarding Sleepiness, Fatigue, and Daytime Performance
    2.1.4 Further History Taking for Differential Diagnostic: Assessment of Possible Origins of Sleep Disorders
    2.2 Laboratory Parameters for Sleep Disorders
    2.3 Sleep Questionnaire
    2.3.1 Insomnia Questionnaire
    2.3.2 Questionnaires for the Assessment of Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders 2.3.3 Questionnaire Regarding Restless Legs Syndrome
    2.4 Physical Examination
    2.5 Actigraphy
    2.6 Outpatient Step-by-Step Diagnostics for Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders and Polygraphy Systems
    2.7 Polysomnography (PSG)
    2.7.1 Standard Parameters of Polysomnography (PSG)
    2.7.1.1 Measurement of Blood Pressure During Sleep
    2.7.2 Parameters to Be Reported for Polysomnography (PSG)
    2.7.2.1 Sleep Scoring Data
    2.7.2.2 Phenomenology and Classification of Arousals
    2.7.3 Polysomnography (PSG) in Patients with Insomnia 2.7.4 Polysomnography (PSG) in Patients with Periodic Limb Movements in Sleep and Patients with Restless Leg Syndrome
    2.7.5 Polysomnography (PSG) in Cases of Bruxism
    2.7.6 Polysomnography (PSG) in Cases of REM Behavior Disorders
    2.7.7 Polysomnography (PSG) in Cases of Rhythmic Movement Disorders in Sleep
    2.7.8 Polysomnography (PSG) in Cases of Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders
    2.8 Examination of Sleepiness- and Fatigue-Related Daytime Impairments
    2.8.1 Diagnostics of Daytime Sleepiness
    2.8.1.1 Diagnostic Procedures of Central Nervous System Alertness Multiple Sleep Latency Test (MSLT)
    Maintenance of Wakefulness Test (MWT)
    Pupillographic Sleepiness Test
    2.8.1.2 Diagnostic Procedures to Assess Vigilance
    Vigilance Test According to Quatember and Maly
    Sub-test of Vigilance of the Test Battery for Attentional Performance
    2.8.1.3 Diagnostic Procedures to Assess Selective Attention
    Achievement Motivation Test Series, Version 3.00 of the Vienna Test System
    Go/NoGo of the Test Battery for Attentional Performance
    2.8.1.4 Diagnostic Procedures to Assess Divided Attention
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Erin E. Ruel, Georgia State University, William E. Wagner, III, California State University, Channel Islands, Brian Joseph Gillespie, Sonoma State University.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    HM538 .R84 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Dong Keun Lee, editor.
    Summary: This book combines provision of basic knowledge on anorectal diseases with clear description of special surgical techniques based on 30 yearsâ#x80;#x99; experience in anorectal cases at one hospital. A wide range of anorectal diseases and conditions are covered, in each case with presentation of relevant clinical information and detailed step-by-step descriptions of established surgical procedures and recently introduced approaches. The aim is to enable surgeons unfamiliar or less familiar with the procedures to gain a sound understanding of first principles and technical details that will assist them in the course of their future practice. In addition, expert analyses and commentaries are provided on the clinical practices of proctology in the form of case presentations. Without exception, the contributing authors are recognized authorities in their fields. Practices of Anorectal Surgery will be of high value for all junior surgeons who treat anorectal diseases, assisting in the achievement of optimal outcomes through meticulous technique and avoidance of surgery-related complications.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    by Tizian Zumthurm.
    Summary: "Tizian Zumthurm uses the extraordinary hospital of an extraordinary man to produce novel insights into the ordinary practice of biomedicine in colonial Central Africa. His investigation of therapeutic routines in surgery, maternity care, psychiatry, and the treatment of dysentery and leprosy reveals the incoherent nature of biomedicine and not just in Africa. Reading rich archival sources against and along the grain, the author combines concepts that appeal to those interested in the history of medicine and colonialism. Through the microcosm of the hospital, Zumthurm brings to light the social worlds of Gabonese patients as well as European staff. By refusing to easily categorize colonial medical encounters, the book challenges our understanding of biomedicine as solely domineering or interactive"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access 2020
  • Digital
    Professor Brian Dolan, FRSA, MSc(Oxon), MSc(Nurs), RGN, RMN, Professor Sue Hinchliff, BA, MSc, RN, RNT [and others].
    Summary: Do you mentor student nurses and/or newly registered nurses? This is a trusted handbook on how to teach others: peers, students, patients and relatives. Using a 'talking through' strategy, this is a practical 'how to' guide, rather than an academic treatise, with a much stronger focus on the use of competencies.

    Contents:
    How we learn and how we can help others to learn--How to make your teaching effective--How to use competencies in teaching--How to support learners--How to assess teaching and learning.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2017
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Valerie A. Shepard and April L. Perry.
    Contents:
    Introduction : context, research, and applications / Katherine Hall-Hertel, Lisa C.O. Brandes, and Valerie A. Shepard
    Brief history, background, and definitions / Matthew W. Imboden and Marlaina Kloepfer
    Overview of post-baccalaureate student needs / Brandon S. McLeod and George S. McClellan
    Transition to graduate and professional school / Tammy Briant Spratling and Sarah Valdovinos
    Graduate student success and socialization / Stephanie K. Eberle, Jamie Heck, Angie Cook, and Dawn Loyola
    Graduate student engagement and campus programming / Mariann Sanchez and Trista Beard
    A diversity, equity, and inclusion approach to graduate student access and outcomes / Matt Newlin, Maria Dykema Erb, and Kathy Wood
    A space and a place for graduate dducation : building community and belonging / Karen P. DePauw and Monika Gibson
    Assessment : using data to support graduate student success and program effectiveness / Anne E. Lundquist and Christine Kelly
    Curriculum project / April L. Perry and Katherine Hall-Hertel
    Conclusion : toward thriving / Valerie A. Shepard and April L. Perry
    Appendix: Selected resources and associations : graduate education and graduate student affairs / Lisa C.O. Brandes.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2022
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    LB2371.4 .P73 2022
    1
  • Digital
    Louise Cummings.
    Summary: This wide-ranging survey of the state of the art in clinical pragmatics includes an examination of pragmatic disorders in previously neglected populations such as juvenile offenders, children and adults with emotional and behavioural disorders, and adults with non-Alzheimer dementias. This book makes a significant contribution to the discussion of pragmatic disorders by exploring topics which have a fast-rising profile in the field. These topics include disorders in which there are both pragmatic and cognitive components, and studies of the complex impacts of pragmatic disorders such as mental health problems, educational disadvantage and social exclusion. This book also presents a critical evaluation of our current state of knowledge of pragmatic disorders. The author focuses on the lack of integration between theoretical and clinical branches of pragmatics and argues that the work of clinicians is all too often inadequately informed by theoretical frameworks. She attempts to bridge these gaps by pursuing a closer alliance of clinical and theoretical branches of pragmatics. It is claimed that this alliance represents the most promising route for the future development of the field. At once a yardstick measuring progress thus far in clinical pragmatics, and also a roadmap for future research development, this single-author volume defines where we have reached in the field, as well as where we have to go next.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Pragmatics and Language Pathology
    Chapter 2. Pragmatic Disorders across the Life Span
    Chapter 3. Disorders of the Pragmatics-Cognition Interface
    Chapter 4. Theoretical Models and Pragmatic Disorders
    Chapter 5. The Impact of Pragmatic Disorders
    Chapter 6. Pragmatic Disorders in Complex and Undeserved Populations
    Chapter 7. Pragmatic Disorders and Social Communication
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    von T. von Lanz, W. Wachsmuth.
    Contents:
    Bd.1, 3.T., Arm.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: Oversize (Downstairs)
    QM23 .L332
    1
  • Print
    von T. von Lanz, W. Wachsmuth.
    Contents:
    Bd. 1, 2. T. Hals
    Bd. 1, 3. T. Arm
    Bd. 1, 4. T. Bein und Statik.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: Oversize (Downstairs)
    QM23 .L331
    3
  • Digital/Print
    Pauchet, Victor; Luquet, Gabriel; Martel, Th. de; Quénu, Jean.
    Digital Access Google Books 1921-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M32 .P32 1921
    1
  • Digital
    Manfred Dietel, Christian Wittekind, Gianni Bussolati, Moritz von Winterfeld, editors.
    Summary: This book presents an overview of the most important current developments in the pre-analytical handling of tissue. It addresses in particular potential ways to improve the situation whereby methods employed in the pre-analytical phase ? the period from surgical removal of tissue to the start of pathological processing ? have remained essentially unchanged for decades with only modest standardization. It is examined how the pre-analytical period can be optimized, resulting not only in an increase in diagnostic quality but also in a reduction in processing time and costs. Among the key topics examined are the so-called cold ischemia time between tissue removal and fixation, the potential superiority of vacuum-based preservation over immediate formalin fixation, two-temperature fixation, molecular analysis methods, and the pre-analytics of specimens from particular tissues. Readers will find this book to be an important update that reveals the full importance of the pre-analytical phase for quality of pathological work-up.

    Contents:
    What Is Pre-Analytics in Surgical Pathology?
    Histologic Validation of Vacuum Sealed Formalin
    Free Tissue Preservation and Transport System
    Pre-Analytics and Molecular Pathology
    Experiences in Vacuum Preparation of Routine Specimens
    Tissue Heterogeneity as a Pre-Analytical Source of Variability
    Vacuum Fixation of Breast Specimens Before Grossing
    How Do Short Fixation and Rapid Microwave Processing Affect Her2 Testing?
    Current Projects in Pre-Analytics ? Where to Go?
    Nucleic Acid Extraction from FFPE Tissue as Critical Preanalytic Step for NGS Applications
    Experiences With Pre-Analytics of Lung Specimen
    Experiences With Pre-Analytics of GI-Specimen
    Bone Marrow Work-Up
    Two-Temperature Fixation Preserves Activation Status with High Efficiency
    Towards the Lean Lab. The Industry Challenge. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Adam E.M. Eltorai, Steven Rougas, Paul George.
    Summary: "The perfect, one-of-a-kind companion to clerkship bootcamps, dedicated courses, or independent study, The Pre-Clerkship Guide: Procedures and Skills for Clinical Rotations delivers clear guidance on fundamental skills and basic clinical procedures essential for success in clinical rotations. Concise, step-by-step instructions and supplemental illustrations detail need-to-know information at a glance for quick reference when studying or practicing in a clinical setting, accompanied by professional insights and examples that highlight effective application. Whether paired with Bates's Pocket Guide or used as a standalone resource, this compact, easy-to-use text reinforces key information in a cohesive approach to help students feel comfortable and confident in clinical settings"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Fatma Sarsu [and 9 more].
    Summary: This open access book presents simple, robust pre-field screening protocols that allow plant breeders to screen for enhanced tolerance to heat stress in rice. Two critical heat-sensitive stages in the lifecycle of the rice crop are targeted - the seedling and flowering stages - with screening based on simple phenotypic responses. The protocols are based on the use of a hydroponics system and/or pot experiments in a glasshouse in combination with a controlled growth chamber where the heat stress treatment is applied. The protocols are designed to be effective, simple, reproducible and user-friendly. The protocols will enable plant breeders to effectively reduce the number of plants from a few thousands to less than 100 candidate individual mutants or lines in a greenhouse/growth chamber, which can then be used for further testing and validation in the field conditions. The methods can also be used to classify rice genotypes according to their heat tolerance characteristics. Thus, different types of heat stress tolerance mechanisms can be identified, presenting opportunities for pyramiding different (mutant) sources of heat stress tolerance.

    Contents:
    General Introduction
    Screening Protocols for Heat Tolerance in Rice at the Seedling and Reproductive Stages
    Validation of Screening Protocols for Heat Tolerance in Rice
    Conclusion
    References.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Andrew Griffiths, Tim Lowes, Jeremy Henning, Amy Gospel.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Indications and Decision Making
    3. Pre-Hospital Rapid Sequence Intubation (PRSI)
    4. Crew Resource Management (CRM)
    5. Post-Intubation Management
    6. Equipment and Minimum Monitoring Standards
    7. Drugs and Sedation
    8. Special Circumstances
    9. Complications, Adverse Events and Clinical Governance.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Advanced Life Support Group (ALSG) ; edited by Alan Charters, Hal Maxwell, Paul Reavley.
    Contents:
    Scene management in incidents involving children
    Preparation
    Assessment and immediate management of the seriously ill or injured child
    Immediate management of the seriously ill child
    The structured approach to the seriously injured child
    Management of cardiac arrest
    When a child dies
    The non-seriously ill child
    The chronically ill child
    Safeguarding children
    Pain management in children
    Paediatric triage
    Military
    Practical procedures : airway and breathing
    Practical procedures : circulation
    Practical procedures : trauma.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Joel Thomas, Phillip Wagner, Ray Funahashi, Nitin Agarwal.
    Summary: "In recent years, applying for and getting accepted to medical schools in the U.S. has become increasingly difficult. In 2020-2021, only 38% of the 53,370 students who applied to U.S. medical schools were accepted. For the most prestigious medical schools, the acceptance rate was just 1.4-2%. Pre-Medicine: The Complete Guide for Aspiring Doctors by Joel Thomas, Phillip Wagner, Ray Funahashi, and Nitin Agarwal is a comprehensive roadmap that guides aspiring physicians through the rigorous process of preparing for and getting into medical school in the U.S. By bringing together multiple authors with different life experiences and perspectives, this unique book has broad appeal to students from diverse backgrounds"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    edited by Farhad B. Naini, Daljit S. Gill.
    Summary: "Explore the possibilities of preadjusted edgewise appliances in orthodontics with this essential resource Preadjusted Edgewise Fixed Orthodontic Appliances: Principles and Practice comprehensively covers the increasingly popular preadjusted edgewise technique in orthodontics. The book integrates clinical practice and research findings, focusing on the biomechanics and clinical management of patients with preadjusted edgewise appliances. A unique learning resource for specialists and trainees in orthodontics, the book is highly illustrated and broad in scope, covering everything from informed patient consent to clinical techniques to information about how to manage patient malocclusions. Core topics include: A thorough introduction to the principles of treatment planning, orthodontic biomechanics, anchorage, informed patient consent, and the dentolegal aspects of orthodontic treatment ; An exploration of the preadjusted edgewise appliance, including bracket design, bracket placement, orthodontic bonding and debonding, archwires, mini-implants (TADs) and auxiliaries; Comprehensive description of the stages of treatment with preadjusted edgewise appliances, including alignment and levelling, controlled space closure, finishing and retention Information on the management of the major malocclusions (Class II, Class III, anterior open bite, deep overbite and transverse problems) with preadjusted edgewise appliances Perfect for postgraduate dentists undergoing specialist training in orthodontics, specialist practitioners, and hospital consultant orthodontists, Preadjusted Edgewise Fixed Orthodontic Appliances: Principles and Practice will also be useful to dentists with a special interest in orthodontics, orthodontic therapists, and orthodontic nurses who seek a comprehensive manual of the most popular fixed orthodontic appliance technique"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Principles of Treatment Planning / Farhad B. Naini and Daljit S. Gill
    Principles of Orthodontic Biomechanics / Farhad B. Naini and Daljit S. Gill
    Anchorage / Zaid B. Al-Bitar
    Consent / Gavin J. Mack
    Dentolegal aspects of orthodontic treatment / Alison Williams
    Bracket Design / Chris D. Donaldson
    Bracket Placement / Hemendranath V. Shah, Daljit S. Gill and Farhad B. Naini
    Bonding in Orthodontics / Declan Millett
    Debonding / Lucy Davenport Jones
    Archwires / Leila Khamashta-Ledezma
    Auxiliaries / Andrew T. DiBiase and Jonathan Sandler
    Mini-implants (TADs) / Richard R. J. Cousley
    Care of fixed appliances / Nazan Adali, Daljit S. Gill and Farhad B. Naini
    Stages of Treatment with Preadjusted Edgewise Appliances
    Alignment and Levelling / Farhad B. Naini and Daljit S. Gill
    Controlled Space Closure / Daljit S. Gill and Farhad B. Naini
    Finishing / Mohammed Owaise Sharif and Stephen M. Chadwick
    Retention / Simon J. Littlewood
    Management of Class II malocclusions / Martyn T. Cobourne and Mithran S. Goonewardene
    Management of Class III malocclusions / Grant T. McIntyre
    Management of Deep Incisor Overbite / Farhad B. Naini, Daljit S. Gill and Umberto Garagiola
    Management of Anterior Open Bite / Chung How Kau and Tim S. Trulove
    Management of the Transverse Dimension / Lucy Davenport-Jones.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Oluwole Fadare, editor.
    Summary: This volume provides a concise yet comprehensive overview of precancerous lesions and gynecologic tract cancers. Each section discusses the historic evolution of a precancerous lesion, its epidemiology, the nature of the published evidence that supports its characterization as a precancerous lesion, and gives a detailed description of morphologic, immunophenotypic and molecular properties, and patient outcomes. The volume also features two separate chapters on the clinical management of precancerous lesions of the gynecologic tract as a well as the cytopathology of cervical precancerous lesions. Lavishly illustrated and written by some of the foremost experts in the field, Precancerous Lesions of the Gynecologic Tract: Diagnostic and Molecular Genetic Pathology is a definitive account of precancerous lesions of the gynecologic tract and is a valuable resource for pathologists, oncologists, and gynecologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Smith, Christian.
    Contents:
    Contents
    t. 1. Anatomie, urologie, affections de l'urèthre.
    Digital Access Google Books 1880-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N70 .S64
    1
  • Digital/Print
    par Ch. Dopter et E. Sacquépée.
    Digital Access Google Books 1914-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    G46 .D69 1921
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Redier, Jean.
    Digital Access Google Books 1909-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    S301 .R31
    1
  • Digital
    Shingo Fujii, Kentaro Sekiyama.
    Summary: This extraordinary monograph provides the precise neurovascular anatomy involved in open-abdominal radical hysterectomies, information that is essential for surgeons. For the surgical treatment of invasive cervical cancer, E. Wertheim reported the first systematic data on radical hysterectomy in the early 20th century. While Okabayashi's radical hysterectomy technique, which modified Wertheim's approach, later became the mainstream choice for the treatment of Stage Ib and IIb cervical cancer in Japan, the anatomy of the pericervical area is still not fully understood. The recent spread of laparoscopic surgery and robotic surgery also requires a clear grasp of the anatomy of the blood vessels in the connective tissues of the female pelvis. This book offers comprehensive information on the anatomy required for radical hysterectomies. All illustrations presented in this book were drawn by the first author - a pioneering gynecological surgeon - and reflect real-world procedures. All anatomical features described are essential and practical, and have been refined based on the latest clinical practice. As such, the book offers a valuable resource for all gynecological surgeons and general surgeons with an interest in gynecological oncology.

    Contents:
    1. Brief History of Surgical Treatment for Cervical Cancer
    2. Classification of Radical Hysterectomy
    3. Concept of Original Okabayashi's Radical Hysterectomy
    4. Atlas of Original Okabayashi's Transabdominal Radical Hysterectomy
    5. Novel Points of Okabayashi's Radical Hysterectomy
    6. Step-by-Step Radical Hysterectomy with Pelvic Lymphadenectomy (without nerve-sparing)
    7. What is Nerve-sparing Radical Hysterectomy?
    8. Step-by-Step Nerve-sparing Radical Hysterectomy with Pelvic Lymphadenectomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hadi Goubran, Gaafar Ragab, Suzy Hassouna, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Coagulation and Anticoagulants
    Introduction
    The Coagulation Cascade
    Cell-Based Model of Hemostasis
    Natural Anticoagulants, Predisposing Factors, and Exposing Factors of Clot Formation
    Anticoagulants
    Injectable Indirect Thrombin/Anti-Xa Inhibitors
    Unfractionated Heparin (UFH)
    Historic Background
    Route and Dose
    Therapeutic
    Prophylactic
    Side Effects
    Contraindications
    Reversal
    Low-Molecular-Weight Heparins [LMWHs]
    Indications and Dosage [39-46]
    Warning and Precautions
    Monitoring Pentasaccharide
    Fondaparinux
    Indication and Dose
    Deep Vein Thrombosis Prophylaxis Following Hip Fracture, Hip Replacement, and Knee Replacement Surgery
    Deep Vein Thrombosis Prophylaxis Following Abdominal Surgery
    Deep Vein Thrombosis Prophylaxis in Medical Patients
    Deep Vein Thrombosis and Pulmonary Embolism Treatment, Including HIT
    Acute Coronary Syndrome
    Warnings and Precautions
    Vitamin K Antagonists [VKAs] and Warfarin
    Warfarin
    Historic Background
    Bioavailability and Half-Life
    Formulation
    Dose and Administration
    Warfarin Resistance Warfarin Interactions
    Food, Food Supplement, and Herbal Interactions
    Other Interactions
    Drug Interactions [69-73]
    Contraindications
    Adverse Events
    Injectable Direct Thrombin Inhibitors
    Hirudins
    Bivaluridin
    Argatroban [103-106]
    NOACs/DOACs
    Contraindications
    NOACs Include
    Oral Direct Thrombin Inhibitor: Dabigatran
    Indications
    Dose
    Contraindications [110]
    Risk of Bleeding
    Drug Interactions [110]
    Other Drugs
    Impact of Dabigatran on Other Drugs
    Conversion to Warfarin [110]
    Converting from or to Parenteral Anticoagulants Oral Direct Factor Xa Inhibitors
    Apixaban [112]
    Formulation
    Indications
    Contraindications [112]
    Dose
    Precautions in Special Populations [112]
    Renal Impairment
    Hepatic Impairment
    Concomitant Use of Antiplatelet Agents
    Drug Interactions [112]
    Switching from to and from Other Anticoagulation Agents
    Switching from or to Parenteral Anticoagulants
    Switching from VKA to Apixaban
    Switching from Apixaban to VKA
    Anticoagulation Bridging (See Chap. 12)
    Betrixaban [121]
    Formulation
    Indications
    Dose
    Precautions
    Side Effects and Bleeding Risks Bleeding Reversal
    Edoxaban [123]
    Formulation
    Indications
    Contraindications [123, 126]
    Precautions [123]
    Drug Interactions: [120]
    Switching Between Agents [123]
    Bridging Anticoagulation (Please refer to Chap. 12)
    Rivaroxaban [129]
    Formulation
    Indications
    Dose
    Precautions and Bleeding Risks
    Switching from One Anticoagulant to Another
    Switching from Parenteral Anticoagulants to Rivaroxaban
    Switching from Rivaroxaban to Parenteral Anticoagulants
    Switching from Vitamin K Antagonists (VKAs) to Rivaroxaban
    Switching from Rivaroxaban to a VKA
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sameek Roychowdhury, Eliezer M. Van Allen, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive book was written by leading researchers in the emerging and changing field of precision cancer medicine. Precision cancer medicine entails connecting the right molecular diagnosis to the right treatment plan for individual patients. The textbook covers a range of topics from basic science to clinical application for patient care. Precision cancer medicine includes multi-disciplinary fields of research expertise ranging from genomics, pathology, oncology, hereditary genetics, bioinformatics, immunology, cancer biology, and bioethics. Basic topics include molecular diagnostics, liquid biopsy, immunogenomics, drug resistance mechanisms, and bioinformatics analyses of big data. The clinical topics include clinical interpretation, hereditary cancers, designs of basket clinical trials, exceptional responders, and the ethical, legal, and social implications of clinical genomics research. Readers who are involved in one of the specialities of precision cancer medicine can benefit from this book through exposure to other fields. Any level of training or professional practice can benefit from the broad exposure this book can provide.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Between Hype and Hope, on the Cutting Edge of Precision Cancer Medicine
    Molecular Diagnostics in Cancer: a Fundamental Component of Precision Oncology
    Clinical Interpretation
    Precision Cancer Medicine and Clinical Trial Design
    Resistance to Anti-Cancer Therapeutics
    Exceptional Responders
    Immunogenomics
    Managing Germline Findings from Molecular Testing in Precision Oncology
    Ethical, legal, and social implications of precision cancer medicine
    Liquid Biopsy: Translating Minimally Invasive Disease Profiling From The Lab To The Clinic
    Data Portals and Analysis
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Bharat Jasani, Ralf Huss, Clive R. Taylor.
    Summary: This book describes the changing role of pathology in aiding reproducible and accurate patient selection for predictive cancer therapy. Particular attention is given to the clinical application of cutting-edge cancer biomarkers to accurately select patients for targeted cancer therapy and how artificial intelligence can improve the precision of treatments. The advent and basis of predictive cancer care, the role of pathologists in translational cancer research, the analysis of cancer samples, the management of biopsy results, and the accuracy of biopsy results are also discussed. Precision Cancer Medicine: Role of the Pathologist details how pathologists can use the latest biomarkers and apply artificial intelligence technology in cancer diagnosis and management. It is also relevant to oncologists and medical practitioners involved in cancer management seeking an up-to-date resource on the topic.

    Contents:
    Part I Introduction
    Rationale & Role of Pathology in Personalised Precision Cancer Medicine
    Part II Preparation & Analysis of Cancer Samples for Digital & Computational Pathology Analysis
    Methods of Tissue Preparation & Analysis
    Part III Precision diagnostic, prognostic and predictive analysis of cancer for personalised cancer medicine
    Cancer Typing & Reporting
    Cancer Specific Applications
    Part IV Developing Digital and Computational Technology and Methods for Predictive Cancer Analysis
    Cancer Agnostic Predictive Analysis
    Development of Multiplexed Analysis
    Part V Future of Pathology in Cancer Medicine
    Discussion from a pathologist's perspective the fears and opportunities of the increasing use of digital and computational analysis in cancer pathology
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Jeanette McCarthy, Bryce Mendelsohn.
    Contents:
    Preconception carrier screening
    Pregnancy
    The newborn
    Emergency medicine, metabolic disease
    Childhood and adolescence
    Pharmacogenomics
    Heart disease
    Cancer predisposition testing
    Cancer : genomic-guided treatment decisions
    The brain
    Wellness
    Appendices.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Hans-Peter Deigner, Matthias Kohl.
    Summary: Precision Medicine: Tools and Quantitative Approaches discusses precision and personalized medicine, two relevant topics that are revolutionizing diagnostics and treatment, while also providing a shift toward prevention. The book covers the most relevant features and explanations underlying developments in the field. A timely review on prerequisites, causes and consequences is given. Unique to this book is a combined view on technical and data analysis aspects that is mandatory for obtaining and interpreting results. This book is a valuable source for researchers in medical and life sciences, physicians and students with an interest in this emerging field of precision medicine.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Stephen H. Tsang, editor, forward by George M. Church.
    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction to the CRISPR revolution
    1. Viral vectors, engineered cells and the CRISPR revolution
    2. Combining engineered nucleases with adeno-associated viral vectors for therapeutic gene editing
    Part II. CRISPR in model systems
    3. From reductionism to holism: toward a more complete view of development through genome engineering
    4. A transgenic core facility's experience in genome editing revolution
    5. Genome editing to study Ca²⁺ homeostasis in zebrafish cone photoreceptors
    6. CRISPR: from prokaryotic immune systems to plant genome editing tools
    Part III. The future of CRISPR
    7. Target discovery for precision medicine using high-throughput genome engineering
    8. CRISPR in the retina: evaluation of futre potential
    9. The futrue of CRISPR applications in the lab, the clinic, and society.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jules J. Berman.
    Summary: Despite what you may have read in the popular press and in social media, Precision Medicine is not devoted to finding unique treatments for individuals, based on analyzing their DNA. To the contrary, the goal of Precision Medicine is to find general treatments that are highly effective for large numbers of individuals who fall into precisely diagnosed groups. We now know that every disease develops over time, through a sequence of defined biological steps, and that these steps may differ among individuals, based on genetic and environmental conditions. We are currently developing rational therapies and preventive measures, based on our precise understanding of the steps leading to the clinical expression of diseases. Precision Medicine and the Reinvention of Human Disease explains the scientific breakthroughs that have changed the way that we understand diseases, and reveals how medical scientists are using this new knowledge to launch a medical revolution.

    Contents:
    Introduction: seriously, what is precision medicine?
    Redefining disease causality
    Genetics: clues, not answers to the mysteries of precision medicine
    Disease convergence
    The precision of the rare diseases
    Precision organisms
    Reinventing diagnosis
    Precision data
    The alternate futures of precision medicine.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Daniel D. Von Hoff, Haiyong Han.
    Summary: This book presents the latest advances in precision medicine in some of the most common cancer types, including hematological, lung and breast malignancies. It also discusses emerging technologies that are making a significant impact on precision medicine in cancer therapy. In addition to describing specific approaches that have already entered clinical practice, the book explores new concepts and tools that are being developed. Precision medicine aims to deliver personalized healthcare tailored to a patientâ#x80;#x99;s genetics, lifestyle and environment, and cancer therapy is one of the areas in which it has flourished in recent years. Documenting the latest advances, this book is of interest to physicians and clinical fellows in the front line of the war on cancer, as well as to basic scientists working in the fields of cancer biology, drug development, biomarker discovery, and biomedical engineering. The contributing authors include translational physicians with first-hand experience in precision patient care.

    Contents:
    Part I: Individual types of cancer precision medicine, Hematological malignancies
    Lung cancer
    Breast cancer
    Rare malignancies
    Part II: Currently available techniques, Immunohistochemistry enabled precision medicine
    Genomics enabled precision medicine
    Proteomics enabled precision medicine
    Metabolomics enabled precision medicine, Part III: Future precision medicine
    Imaging precision medicine
    Single cell sequencing in precision medicine
    Microbiome in precision medicine
    Perspectives on precision medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC270.8 .P74 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Seth S. Martin, editor.
    Summary: This book contains the current knowledge and potential future developments of precision medicine techniques including artificial intelligence, big data, mobile health, digital health and genetic medicine in the prevention of cardiovascular disease. It reviews the presently used advanced precision medicine techniques and fundamental principles that continue to act as guiding forces for many medical professionals in applying precision and preventative medical techniques in their day-to-day practices. Precision Medicine in Cardiovascular Disease Prevention describes current knowledge and potential future developments in this rapidly expanding field. It therefore provides a valuable resource for all practicing and trainee cardiologists looking to develop their knowledge and integrate precision medicine techniques into their practices.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    1 Social Determinants
    Social Determinants of Health and Cardiovascular Care: A Historical Perspective
    Landmark Reports on Health Disparities: Relevance to CVD
    Role of SDOH in Cardiovascular Care: Ignored for Far Too Long
    Current State of CVD Disparities in the US
    SDOH, 'Traditional' Risk Factors and Current Models of CVD Care
    SDOH and CVD: A Review of Current Literature
    SDOH: A Domain-Based Analysis
    Economic Stability
    Current Evidence and Pathways
    Summary
    Education
    Current Evidence and Pathways
    Summary Neighborhood and Physical Environment
    Current Evidence and Pathways
    Summary
    Food
    Current Evidence and Pathways
    Summary
    Community and Social Context
    Current Evidence and Pathways
    Summary
    Healthcare
    Current Evidence and Pathways
    Summary
    Conclusions
    References
    2 Biomarkers
    Introduction
    Lipid Biomarkers and Cardiovascular Risk
    Low-Density Lipoprotein Cholesterol
    Estimation of LDL-C in Precision Medicine
    There is More Than LDL-C: LDL Particles and Apolipoprotein B
    Non-High-Density Lipoprotein Cholesterol (non-HDL-C): The "Poor Man" apoB? Maximizing the Use of the Standard Lipid Panel: The Total Cholesterol to HDL-C Ratio
    Residual Risk and Lipoprotein-Related Risk Beyond LDL: Triglyceride-Rich Lipoproteins
    Lipoprotein (a)-ready for Prime-Time Use?
    Non-Lipid Cardiac Biomarkers in Risk Stratification of Asymptomatic Patients
    Cardiac Biomarkers of Wall Stress and Myocardial Injury
    Factors Affecting Biomarker Interpretation
    Cardiac Troponin and Cardiovascular Risk
    Cardiac Biomarkers in Hypertension
    Cardiac Biomarkers in Aortic Stenosis
    Cardiac Biomarkers in Heart Failure
    HsCRP
    GlycA
    Galectin-3 Lp-PLA2
    Hepatocyte Growth Factor
    Fibrinogen
    Adipokines
    Sex Hormones
    Conclusions
    References
    3 Genetics
    Introduction
    Rare Variation Highlights Novel Disease Pathways
    Background
    Relevance for Cardiovascular Prevention
    Leveraging Common Variant Genomics to Understand Disease Pathophysiology
    Background
    Relevance for Cardiovascular Prevention
    Mendelian Randomization Can Help Us Understand Causal Relationships
    Background
    Relevance for Cardiovascular Prevention
    Polygenic Risk Scores Can Improve Risk Prediction
    Background Relevance for Cardiovascular Prevention
    Conclusions and Future Perspectives
    References
    4 Atherosclerosis Imaging
    Traditional Risk Scores and Individualized Risk Assessment
    Proposed Tools for Personalizing Risk Estimation
    Serum Biomarkers and Genetics: Pros and Cons
    Coronary Artery Calcium
    CAC Imaging
    CAC Scoring
    Early Data
    Major Population-Based Studies
    MESA
    Heinz Nixdorf
    Rotterdam Study
    Meta-Analysis
    CAC in Guidelines
    Shared Decision-Making
    Risk Re-Classification Through CAC
    CAC Future Directions
    CAC Score = 0
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Mandana Hasanzad, editor.
    Summary: The book provides complete information on the cornerstones of precision medicine through the omics approach. Clinical applications of genomics and precision medicine have progressed from a theoretical wish list to an impactful force in medical practice.Step-by-step descriptions are provided from basics to the future application and its benefit in clinical practice. Precision medicine aims to personalize health care by tailoring decisions and treatments to each individual in every possible way. Precision medicine includes pharmacogenomics. Essential information is provided on the role of precision medicine and pharmacogenomics in the clinical practice of cancer, cardiovascular disease, diabetes, psychiatric disease, and also the importance for healthcare professionals. This book will assist the practitioners how to integrate precision medicine and pharmacogenomics data into their clinical practice. It is hoped that physicians, pharmacists, and scientists with basic scientific knowledge of precision medicine will findthis book useful.

    Contents:
    Principles of precision medicine
    Principles of pharmacogenomics and pharmacogenetics
    Precision medicine in oncology and cancer therapeutics
    Precision medicine in cardiovascular disease practice
    Precision medicine in endocrinology practice
    Precision medicine in psychiatric Disorders
    Precision public health perspectives
    DNA technologies in precision medicine and pharmacogenetics
    Precision medicine initiatives
    Economic aspects in precision medicine and pharmacogenomics
    Ethical, legal and social aspects of precision medicine
    Personalized Medicine Literacy
    Precision medicine in infectious disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rita Basu, editor.
    Summary: Bringing clarity to the emerging model of precision medicine within the diabetes field, and expanding upon how it will lead to the development of specifically tailored treatment for patients and even macro strategies in public health, this unique book explores the realm of biomarkers in the era of big data. Various experts in their respective areas discuss the current practice to illuminate how creating a more discreet profile of patients and even substratum of populations will lead to more refined therapies targeted towards the phenotype and genotype of the patient. Embracing a multidisciplinary team science approach, this book demonstrates how precision medicine in diabetes can mine a web of data toward diabetes risk stratification and treatment options. The authors skillfully articulate how the construction of various prediction-based models can revolutionize clinical decision-making, and they examine the challenges and pitfalls of integrating disparate sources of information and how the collection of data and cooperation among stakeholders will be key to the future of precision medicine in diabetes treatment. Topics include personalized approaches to the management of both type 1 and type 2 diabetes, various macro and microvascular complications of diabetes, inpatient management of glycemia, nutrition, exercise, advances in diabetes technology and others. Ideal for clinical endocrinologists and other professionals involved in the management of diabetes and its complications, Precision Medicine in Diabetes is first of its kind to address this paradigm-shifting topic in a comprehensive way. .

    Contents:
    Precision Medicine Approaches for Management of type 2 Diabetes
    Precision Medicine for Diabetes and Cardiovascular Disease
    Precision Medicine for Diabetes and Dyslipidemia
    Imaging in Precision Medicine for Diabetes
    Implementation of Precision Genetic Approaches for Type 1 and 2 Diabetes
    Precision Genetics for Monogenic Diabetes
    Precision Medicine for Diabetic Nephropathy
    Precision Medicine for Diabetic Neuropathy
    Inpatient Precision Medicine for Diabetes
    Medical Management for Precision Diabetes Remission
    Surgical Management for Precision Diabetes Remission
    Precision Nutrition for Type 2 Diabetes
    Precision Exercise and Physical Activity for Diabetes
    Diabetes Technology for Precision Therapy in Children, Adults and Pregnancy
    Adaptive and Individualized Artificial Pancreas for Precision Management of Type 1 Diabetes
    Evolving Approaches to Type 1 Diabetes Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    Ikuo Konishi, editor.
    Summary: This volume presents the scientific advances and current status of our understanding of precision medicine for common diseases in gynecology and obstetrics. Standard treatments based on clinical guidelines in the field have been established for decades, and those are essential to daily clinical practice. Meanwhile comprehensive genomic and genetic analyses have led to personalized medicine by precise clinical and genomic approaches. This book is organized into two major parts, gynecology and obstetrics, and the chapters in each part give a clear exposition of the current knowledge and the future perspectives for the treatment of various gynecological cancers, maternal disorders, and other diseases that affect female patients. Topics on novel treatment strategy with the application of molecular targeted drugs, immunotherapy, and prevention medicine are also covered. This collection benefits not only experienced gynecologists and obstetricians, but also young physicians who would like to begin clinical and basic research on diseases in women, researchers in basic medicine, and all medical oncologists who are involved in gynecological cancers.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Introduction
    1 Toward Precision Medicine in Gynecology and Obstetrics
    Part 2: Gynecology
    2 Genomics in Gynecological Cancer: Future Perspective
    3 Signal Transduction and Targeted Therapy for Gynecologic Cancer
    4 Immune Therapy for Gynecologic Cancer: Coming True
    5 Prevention of Cervical Cancer: Era of HPV Testing and Vaccination
    6 Pathology, Genomics, and Treatment of Endometrial Cancer
    7 Diversity in Pathology and Genomics in Ovarian Cancer
    8 Hereditary Ovarian and Endometrial Cancers: Current Management
    9 Molecular Pathology and Novel Therapy for Uterine Sarcomas
    Part 3:Obstetrics
    10 Recurrent Pregnancy Loss: Current Evidence and Clinical Guideline
    11 Genomic Approach for Recurrent Abortions: Prevention Feasible?
    12 Prenatal Diagnosis of Embryo and Fetus in the Human
    13 Pathology and Genomics in Gestational Trophoblastic Neoplasia
    14 Genomic Analysis for Hypertension in Pregnancy
    15 Molecular Mechanisms for Preterm Delivery
    16 Developmental Origins for Health and Disease (DOHaD): Future Perspective.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG103 .P75 2017
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Bulent Aydogan, James A. Radosevich.
    Summary: "Most medical treatments have been designed for the "average patient." As a result of this "one-size-fits-all-approach," treatments can be very successful for some patients but not for others. This is changing with the emergence of precision medicine, an innovative approach to disease prevention and treatment that takes into account individual differences in people's genes, environments, and lifestyles. Precision medicine gives clinicians tools to better understand the complex mechanisms underlying a patient's health, disease, or condition, and to better predict which treatments will be most effective. Precision or personalized medicine in cancer treatment was once a buzzword, but it is finally becoming a reality with recent advances in imaging, genetic, and biological sciences. The importance of interpatient and intratumor variability has long been recognized, but realistic opportunities to take these into account in cancer care have emerged only recently. Innovations in patient characterization through genomics, proteomics, and metabolomics have opened new avenues to personalize cancer treatment in ways that were not possible before. Furthermore, advances in quantitative assessment of therapeutic response, as provided by functional and molecular imaging, have been critical in the implementation of precision medicine paradigm in radiation oncology. This book will be a comprehensive review of science and technology making precision medicine possible for radiation oncology, current examples and future direction"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Genomic strategies for personalized cancer therapy
    Blood-based biomarkers for the diagnosis and prognosis of cancer
    Application of circulating cell free DNA for personalized cancer therapy
    Prognostic Implications of EGFR, p53, p16, cyclin D1, Bcl-2 in head & neck squamous cell carcinoma (HNSCC)
    Predictive and prognostic markers for cancer medicine
    Dual energy imaging in precision radiation therapy
    The role of Big Data in personalized medicine.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Ana Catarina Fonseca, José M. Ferro, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive coverage of the state of the art in precision medicine in stroke. It starts by explaining and giving general information about precision medicine. Current applications in different strokes types (ischemic, haemorrhagic) are presented from diagnosis to treatment. In addition, ongoing research in the field (early stroke diagnosis and estimation of prognosis) is extensively discussed. The final part provides an in-depth discussion of how different interdisciplinary areas like artificial intelligence, molecular biology and genetics are contributing to this area. Precision Medicine in Stroke provides a practical approach to each chapter, reinforcing clinical applications and presenting clinical cases. This book is intended for all clinicians that interact with stroke patients (neurologists, internal medicine doctors, general practitioners, neurosurgeons), students and basic researchers.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Precision Medicine
    Introduction
    Precision Medicine:enabling health care progresso in the 21stcentury
    Do we need precision medicine in stroke
    Part 2: Current applications of precision medicine in Ischemic stroke
    monogenic diseases
    Pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics of stroke therapy
    Acute stroke imaging
    Part 3: Current applications of precision medicine in Haemorrhagic stroke
    Intracerebral haemorrhage
    Part 4: Future application
    Blood protein biomarkers in the diagnosis of stroke
    prognosis determination
    Part 5: Interdisciplinary approach
    Artificial intelligence applications in stroke
    Registry-based stroke research
    From bedside to bench: methods in precision medicine
    Approach for genetic studies
    Part 6: Conclusion
    Precision medicine versus personalized medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Donna E. Hansel, Seth P. Lerner, editors.
    Summary: "This succinct yet comprehensive volume describes current and emerging concepts in molecular pathology of bladder cancer. Divided into two distinct sections, the first part focuses on the general principles of molecular findings in bladder cancer, while the second part focuses on the molecular changes associated with specific histologic subtypes. The volume also addresses such topics as molecular alterations in non-invasive and invasive disease, including bladder cancer variants as appropriate, emerging molecular classifiers of bladder cancer, and molecular associations to outcome and treatment. Written by experts in the field, Precision Molecular Pathology of Bladder Cancer is a valuable resource for those in the urologic community, including urologic pathologists, urologists, urologic oncologists and radiation oncologists, who treat and manage bladder cancer."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1.Risk Factors and Molecular Features Associated with Bladder Cancer Development.- 2.Grading, Staging, and Morphologic Risk Stratification of Bladder Cancer
     3.Genomic Assessment of Muscle-Invasive Bladder Cancer: Insights from The Cancer Genome Atlas (TCGA) Project
     4.Molecular Alterations in the Pathogenesis of Bladder Cancer Subtypes and Urothelial Carcinoma Variants
    5.Treatment Paradigms in Bladder Cancer: Clinical Implications of Histological and Molecular Analysis.- 6.Requisite for Collection and Distribution of Tissue and Fluid Specimens for Molecular Diagnostics and Discovery in Bladder Cancer
     7.Diagnostic, Prognostic and Predictive Biomarkers on Bladder Tissue and Blood
    8.Urine Cytology and Existing Urinary Biomarkers for Bladder Cancer.- 9.Molecular Targeted Therapy of Bladder Cancer
    10.Response to Immunotherapy: Application of Molecular Pathology to Predict Successful Response
    11.Emerging Molecular Approaches in the Analysis of Urine in Bladder Cancer Diagnosis
    12. Stromal Contributions to Tumor Progression in Urothelial  Carcinoma of the Bladder
    13.Modeling Bladder Cancer with Genetic Engineering: Fidelity of Human-to-laboratory Models.      .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ashraf Khan, Ian O. Ellis, Andrew M. Hanby, Ediz F. Cosar, Emad A. Rakha, Dina Kandil, editors.
    Contents:
    Molecular basis of breast cancer imaging
    Familial Breast Cancer and Genetic Predisposition in Breast Cancer
    Modelling the Molecular Pathology of Breast Cancer Initiation
    Molecular Pathology of Precancerous Lesions of the Breast
    Breast Cancer Stem Cells: Role in Tumor Initiation, Progression and Targeted Therapy
    Molecular Pathology of Pre-Invasive Ductal Carcinoma. -Molecular Pathology of Lobular Carcinoma Ali Sakhdari, Lloyd Hutchinson, Ediz Cosar
    Molecular Pathology of Hormone Regulation in Breast Cancer: Hormone Receptor Evaluation and Therapeutic Implications
    Molecular Pathology of HER Family of Oncogenes in Breast Cancer: HER-2 Evaluation and Role in Targeted Therapy
    Molecular Classification of Breast Cancer
    Triple Negative Breast Cancer: Subtypes with Clinical Implications
    Molecular-based Diagnostic, Prognostic and Predictive Tests in Breast Cancer
    Role of MicroRNAs in Breast Cancer
    Molecular Pathology of Fibroepithelial Neoplasms of the Breast
    Molecular Features of Mesenchymal Tumors of the Breast
    Molecular Pathology of Breast Cancer Metastasis
    The molecular pathology of chemoresistance during the therapeutic response in breast cancer
    The Molecular Pathology of Male Breast Cancer
    Specimens for Molecular Testing in Breast Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Victor G. Prieto, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Hematolymphoid Proliferations of the Skin
    Molecular Testing in Cutaneous Mesenchymal Tumors
    Molecular Pathology of Cutaneous Adnexal Tumors
    Infectious diseases of the skin
    Application of Molecular Pathology to Cutaneous Melanocytic Lesions
    Application of Molecular Pathology to Tissue Identification in Cutaneous Pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    José Javier Otero, Aline Paixao Becker, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides a balanced and realistic review of the current state of glioblastoma, ranging from traditional histological review, molecular pathology of glioma, modern radiomics, neurosurgical focus, and integration of treatment plans by neuro-oncologists. The book reviews basic principles such as epidemiology and etiology, and modern 2016 WHO classification of CNS tumors. Chapters cover a general overview of common molecular techniques used in molecular pathology, molecular pathology in a developing country, key drivers of patient outcomes and predictors of response to radiation and/or chemotherapy treatment, and immunohistochemical surrogates for key molecular pathology. It concludes with reviews on radiomics, animal and stem cell models of glioblastoma, and a chapter on the emerging field of Glioblastoma Neuroscience. Precision Molecular Pathology of Glioblastoma is intended for pathology residents and fellows interested in glioblastoma, general surgical pathologists who need reviews on how to implement modern glioblastoma classification, as well as neuro-radiologists, oncologists, and radiation oncologists needing a holistic perspective to glioblastoma diagnosis and management.

    Contents:
    Part I: General Principles
    Epidemiology and etiology of glioblastoma
    The role of Molecular Genetics of Glioblastoma in the Clinical Setting
    Neurosurgical Approach to the Patient with Glioblastoma
    Machine Learning Approaches Pertinent to Glioma Classification
    Histopathology of Adult and Pediatric Glioblastoma
    Principles of Radiation Therapy for Glioblastoma Patients
    'Implementing Molecular Pathology in a Developing Country
    Part II: Molecular Pathology of Glioblastoma
    Molecular Stratification of Adult and Pediatric High Grade Gliomas
    Genomic Heterogeneity of Aggressive Pediatric and Adult Diffuse Astrocytomas
    Immunohistochemical Surrogates for Molecular Pathology
    Part III: Key Molecular Pathways in Glioblastoma Development and Progression
    Learning-Based Automated Methods for Brain Tumor Segmentation, Subtype Classification, Tracking and Patient Survival Prediction
    Rodent Brain Tumor Models for Neuro-Oncology Research
    Stem cell based modelling of glioblastoma
    The Neuroscience of Glioblastoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Chen Liu, editor.
    Summary: This volume provides the most updated knowledge on the advancement of molecular pathogenesis, molecular diagnosis, and therapy development for hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC). Topics covered include the etiology and pathogenesis of HCC, recent advances in HCC genomics, biomarker discovery and validation in HCC diagnosis, the role of liver biopsy in HCC early diagnosis, and the future prospects of surgical approaches and targeted therapy for HCC. In addition to reviewing the current available knowledge, the book also discusses the future development of a precision and personalized medicine approach for HCC. Written by experts in the field, Precision Molecular Pathology of Liver Cancer is a concise yet comprehensive resource for practitioners who treat patients with hepatocellular carcinoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Larissa V. Furtado, Aliya N. Husain, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the art review of pediatric oncology. The text covers relevant concepts in molecular biology and addresses technical principles, applications, challenges, and integration of current and emerging genomic and molecular methods in the diagnosis and personalized management of childhood cancers. The text also discusses a wide array of pediatric neoplasms in the context of molecular pathology in a concise and understandable manner, with focus on their molecular pathogenesis, clinicopathological features, classification, molecular diagnosis, and approaches to personalized care. Written by experts in the field, Precision Molecular Pathology of Neoplastic Pediatric Diseases serves as a valuable resource for pathologists, pediatric oncologists, trainees and researchers with an interest in pediatric and molecular pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Brian D. Robinson, Juan Miguel Mosquera, Jae Y. Ro, Mukul Divatia, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Michael T. Deavers, Donna M. Coffey, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    Endometrial Carcinoma: Precursor Lesions and Molecular Profiles
    Part II: Endometrial Carcinoma
    Classification of Endometrial Carcinoma
    Immunohistochemical Markers in Endometrial Carcinoma
    Molecular Pathology of Endometrioid Adencarcinoma
    The Molecular Pathology of Serous Endometrial Cancer
    Uterine Clear Cell Carcinoma
    Mucinous Adenocarcinoma of the Endometrium
    Molecular Pathology of Uterine Carcinosarcoma
    Hereditary Endometrial Carcinomas
    Targeted Therapy and Prevention of Endometrial Cancer
    Part III: Uterine Mesenchymal Tumors (Nucci)
    Molecular Pathology of Cervival Dysplasia and Carcinoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Juan Bueno.
    Summary: Translational medicine addresses the gap between research and the clinical application of new discoveries. To efficiently deliver new drugs to care centers, a preclinical evaluation, both in vitro and in vivo, is required to ensure that the most active and least toxic compounds are selected as well as to predict clinical outcome. Antimicrobial nanomedicines have been shown to have higher specificity in their therapeutic targets and the ability to serve as adjuvants, increasing the effectiveness of pre-existing immune compounds. The design and development of new standardized protocols for evaluating antimicrobial nanomedicines is needed for both the industry and clinical laboratory. These protocols must aim to evaluate laboratory activity and present models of pharmacokinetic-pharmacodynamic and toxicokinetic behavior that predict absorption and distribution. Likewise, these protocols must follow a theranostics approach, be able to detect promising formulations, diagnose the infectious disease, and determine the correct treatment to implement a personalized therapeutic behavior. Given the possibilities that nanotechnology offers, not updating to new screening platforms is inadequate as it prevents the correct application of discoveries, increasing the effect of the valley of death between innovations and their use. This book is structured to discuss the fundamentals taken into account for the design of robust, reproducible and automatable evaluation platforms. These vital platforms should enable the discovery of new medicines with which to face antimicrobial resistance (RAM), one of the great problems of our time.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Dedication
    Preface
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Antimicrobial Screening: Foundations and Interpretation
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing from Anti-infectives Research Until Clinical Use
    1.3 Phenotypic Resistance Versus Genetic Resistance
    1.4 Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing and Virulence Factors
    1.5 Biomarkers and Antimicrobial Testing
    1.6 Integral Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing
    1.7 Biosensors in Antimicrobial Evaluation
    1.8 Conclusions
    References 3.3 Antimicrobial Nanoformulations in Drug Delivery
    3.4 Antimicrobial Nanotheranostics Trojan Horse
    3.5 Cellomics of Synergism Under a Multi-target Strategy
    3.6 Biofilm Penetration: Synergy and Strategy
    3.7 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 4: In Vitro Nanotoxicity: Toward the Development of Safe and Effective Treatments
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Nanomaterials in Interaction with Tissues
    4.3 Toxic Dose 50 and Lethal Dose 50 in Nanotechnology
    4.4 Drug Interactions and Adverse Events with Nanodrugs
    4.5 Immunotoxicity: Immune Response Without Control 4.6 Genotoxicity, Epi-genotoxicity, and Carcinogenesis
    4.7 Nanotoxicokinetics
    4.8 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 5: ADMETox: Bringing Nanotechnology Closer to Lipinski's Rule of Five
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 ADMET Score
    5.3 Absorption and Interaction with Biological Systems in Nanotechnology
    5.4 Distribution: Specificity After Absorption
    5.5 Metabolism: Nanomaterial Clearance
    5.6 Nanopharmaceutical Excretion: The Risk of Gastrointestinal Disorders
    5.7 Conclusions
    References Chapter 2: Antimicrobial Activity of Nanomaterials: From Selection to Application
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Antimicrobial Activity of Nanomaterials
    2.3 Antimicrobial Models for Nanomaterials Evaluation
    2.4 Implementation of Antimicrobial Methods for Nanomaterials Evaluation
    2.5 Selection Criteria on the Basis of Biodegradability and Toxicity
    2.6 Therapeutic Index in Nanomaterials
    2.7 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 3: Synergy and Antagonism: The Criteria of the Formulation
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Multi-target Antimicrobial Strategy Chapter 6: Antimicrobial Nanotechnology in Preventing the Transmission of Infectious Disease
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Nanomaterials in Antimicrobial Surfaces
    6.3 Antibiofilm Activity of Antimicrobial Nanotechnology
    6.4 Antiquorum Sensing: Avoid Dissemination by Preventing Communication
    6.5 Nanomaterials and Surfactant Activity
    6.6 Nano-Bio Interaction and Antimicrobial Effects
    6.7 Nanotoxicological Models in Antimicrobial Coatings
    6.8 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 7: Nanotechnology in the Discovery of New Antimicrobial Drugs: Is a New Scientific Revolution Possible?
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jill Shawe, Eric A.P. Steegers, Sarah Verbiest, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a practical, multidisciplinary approach to support a broad range of health professionals, social workers, public health workers and others tasked with providing health and care to young adults. The continuum of life begins with the health and wellness of parents prior to conception, followed by embryonic and fetal development, and continues throughout life. Each persons life stages prepare them for the next and determine their health outcome and wellbeing over time. The text highlights the importance of promoting health throughout the lifespan, , the influence of intergenerational health, and the concept of the Developmental Origins of Health and Disease in epigenetic processes and embryology. Authors underscore the importance of advancing health equity and lift up some of the ethical considerations in this work. The authors explore specific interventions in four major categories: Lifestyle, Infections, Nutrition, and Contraception / Pregnancy Planning (LINC). Preconception care is defined by the World Health Organization as the provision of biomedical, behavioural and social health interventions to women and couples before conception. Preconception care includes evidence-based interventions to improve health status, to reduce behaviours, individual and environmental factors that contribute to poor health outcomes. This book offers readers evidence-based guidance regarding fertility awareness and sperm health, genetic counselling and lifestyle assessments, as well as mental wellbeing, alcohol, tobacco and pharmacotherapy, and specialist care for those with chronic conditions, including a review of medications. It also covers relevant infections, including HIV and the Zika virus, as well as different types of environmental and occupational exposure. The book employs a framework focusing on health promotion, the social determinants of health, and the science behind preconception care. Strategies for improving preconception and interconception hea lth, including examples from around the globe, are described in detail.

    Contents:
    Forward
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. Definitions, background, history, challenges and opportunities (global perspectives)
    Chapter 2. Epigenetics, Embryology, Preconception science, Periconception, Sperm health
    Chapter 3. Lifestyle: behavioural health, alcohol, tobacco, substance use
    Chapter 4. Lifestyle: weight (obesity, overweight, underweight)
    Chapter 5. Chronic conditions: risk assessment, diabetes, cardiac, RA, Thyroid, Cystic Fibrosis, Haematological, IBD, pharmacotherapy
    Chapter 6. Infections: vaccinations, toxoplasmosis, listeriosis, CMV, STIs , HIV/AIDS, Zika
    Chapter 7. Nutrition: folic acid, nutrients
    Chapter 8. Occupational Environment: occupational hazards. Environmental Pollutants: exposures to toxins, pollution, water
    Chapter 9. Social Environment: interpersonal violence, trafficking
    Chapter 10. Fertility awareness, maternal/paternal age, menstrual issues, reproductive life plan, birth spacing
    Chapter 11. Genetic health, genetic counselling, consanguinity
    Chapter 12. Strategies for improving preconception health
    examples from around the globe (China, Ethiopia, Europe, Canada, US, Bangladesh)
    Chapter 13. The Way Forward.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Roman Fuchs, Petr Veselý, Jana Nácarová.
    Summary: This Springer Brief answers the question on how birds recognize their predators using multidisciplinary approaches and outlines paths of the future research of predator recognition. A special focus is put on the role of key features to discriminate against predators and non-predators. The first part of the book provides a comprehensive review of the mechanisms of predator recognition based on classical ethological studies in untrained birds. The second part introduces a new view on the topic treating theories of cognitive ethology. This approach involves examination of conditioned domestic pigeons and highlights the actual abilities of birds to recognize and categorize.

    Contents:
    Intro; Abstract; Acknowledgements; Contents;
    Chapter 1: How to Study Predator Recognition; 1.1 Observation in the Wild; 1.2 Experiments; 1.2.1 Experiments on Nests; 1.2.2 Experiments on Winter Feeders; 1.2.3 Experiments in Aviaries; 1.2.4 Presentation of Predators; 1.3 Predator Recognition Markers; 1.3.1 Behavioural Markers; 1.3.1.1 Mobbing; 1.3.1.2 Alarm Calls; 1.3.2 Physiological Markers;
    Chapter 2: Evidence for Abilities of Predator Recognition; 2.1 Predator vs. Non-predator; 2.2 Ground vs. Aerial Predators; 2.3 Nest vs. Adult Predators; 2.4 Different Species of the Same Ecological Guild
    Chapter 3: Tools Used for Predator Recognition 3.1 Non-manipulative Studies; 3.2 Manipulative Studies; 3.2.1 Silhouettes; 3.2.2 Particular Features: Colouration; 3.2.3 Particular Features: Size; 3.2.4 Particular Features: Eyes and Beaks; 3.2.5 Particular Features: Multiple Features; 3.3 Conclusions;
    Chapter 4: General Principles of the Objects Recognition; 4.1 Particulate Feature Theory x Recognition by Components; 4.2 Local vs. Global Features; 4.3 Category Discrimination and Concepts Formation; 4.4 Features x Exemplars x Prototypes; 4.5 Functional Categorization 4.6 Process of Discrimination and Categorization in Behavioural Experiments with Untrained Birds 4.6.1 Cues Used for Discrimination and Categorization; 4.6.2 Category Formation; 4.7 Future Research Vision; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Chris E. Forsmark, Timothy B. Gardner, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides a comprehensive summary of pancreatitis and its complications, with expert recommendations on prediction and management. The text thoughtfully summarizes the current prediction models for severe acute pancreatitis, including laboratory, clinical and imaging parameters, and highlights the relative advantages and disadvantages of several of these models. Evidenced-based guidelines into medical and surgical management of both the hospitalized and discharged patient are described, with recommendations from expert authors pertaining to various clinical situations. The volume also discusses complications of acute pancreatitis and their management, including the use of cutting-edge minimally-invasive therapies. Prediction and Management of Severe Acute Pancreatitis serves as the fundamental source for those interested in and treating this disease, including practicing gastroenterologists, surgeons, radiologists, intensivists, hospitalists and pathologists.

    Contents:
    1. Revised Atlanta Classification of Acute Pancreatitis
    2. Organ Failure and Acute Pancreatitis
    3. Sterile and Infected Pancreatic Necrosis
    4. Evolving Definitions of Severe Acute Pancreatitits
    5. Clinical Predictors
    6. Imaging Predictors
    7. Predictive Scoring Systems in Acute Pancreatitis
    8. Fluid Resuscitation in Acute Pancreatitis
    9. Antiobiotic Therapy
    10. Nutrition in Severe Acute Pancreatitis
    11. Pharmacologic Therapy
    12. Management of Ductal Leaks
    13. Endoscopic Management of Severe Gallstone Pancreatitis
    14. Direct Endoscopic Necrosectomy
    15. Retroperitoneoscopic Approaches for Infected Necrotizing Pancreatitis
    16. Surgical Approaches
    17. Internventions for Nectrotizing Pancreatitis: A Mutlidisciplinary Approach.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nabil Djouder, editor.
    Summary: This book reviews recent work on molecular chaperones of the prefoldin family from their discovery in Archaea to the basic clarification of their structure. Even though, there is still a lot to investigate in order to understand the roles and functions of prefoldins, some preliminary work suggests their contribution in assembly and activation of a variety of macromolecular complexes. Hence, the reader is introduced to recent structural findings via cryo-electron microscopy and to the importance of this particular group of proteins in health and disease. This book also discusses the particular structure of the URI prefoldin-like complex. In addition, recent developments in the generation of URI mouse models speculate on the functions and emerging roles of the URI prefoldin-like complex in various cellular processes. This novel protein complex represents a unique cellular machinery, which molecular basis of its activity still remains to be determined. This work is thus a guide to help researchers in the field to have a more comprehensive and critical view of the prefoldin world.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Structure of the molecular chaperone prefoldin
    Structure and function of archaeal prefoldin
    Role and functions of prefoldins
    Nuclear functions of prefoldins
    The yeast prefoldin Bud27
    URI-like prefoldin complex
    HSP90 and its R2TP/Prefoldin-like cochaperone
    Role and functions of URI: mouse models for URI
    Nuclear function of URI-like prefoldin complex
    URI and androgen regulation. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: Pregnancy, childbirth, postpartum and newborn care: a guide for essential practice (3rd edition) (PCPNC), has been updated to include recommendations from recently approved WHO guidelines relevant to maternal and perinatal health. These include pre-eclampsia & eclampsia; postpartum haemorrhage; postnatal care for the mother and baby; newborn resuscitation; prevention of mother-to- child transmission of HIV; HIV and infant feeding; malaria in pregnancy, interventions to improve preterm birth outcomes, tobacco use and second-hand exposure in pregnancy, post-partum depression, post-partum family planning and post abortion care. The aim of PCPNC is to provide evidence-based recommendations to guide health care professionals in the management of women during pregnancy, childbirth and postpartum, and newborns, and post abortion, including management of endemic diseases like malaria, HIV/AIDS, TB and anaemia. The PCPNC is a guide for clinical decision-making. All recommendations are for skilled attendants working at the primary level of health care, either at the facility or in the community. They apply to all women attending antenatal care, in delivery, postpartum or post abortion care, or who come for emergency care, and to all newborns at birth for routine and emergency care.
    Digital Access WHO 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG551 .P74 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Jolien W. Roos-Hesselink, Mark R. Johnson, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    David A. Schwartz, Julienne Ngoundoung Anoko, Sharon A. Abramowitz, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Part I: The West African Ebola Epidemic, Women, and Their Children;
    1: Ebola's Assault on Women, Children, and Family Reproduction: An Introduction to the Issues; 1.1 An Introduction; References;
    2: Effects of the West African Ebola Epidemic on Health Care of Pregnant Women: Stigmatization With and Without Infection; 2.1 Introduction: Stigma, Ebola Virus, and Pregnant Women; 2.2 Rethinking Stigma in the Context of an Acute Epidemic; 2.3 Gendering Outbreaks; 2.4 Ebola and Women 2.5 Stigmatization of Health Facilities and Health Care Workers: Avoidance of Hospitals and Birthing Centers 2.6 Stigmatization of Pregnant Women Due to Ebola Infection; 2.7 Conclusions; References;
    3: The Challenges of Pregnancy and Childbirth Among Women Who Were Not Infected with Ebola Virus During the 2013-2015 West African Epidemic; 3.1 Introduction: The Story of Aminata; 3.2 Partners In Health; 3.3 The Ebola Epidemic and the Partners In Health Response; 3.4 The Health System in West Africa Prior to Ebola; 3.5 The Impact of Ebola on Health Systems; 3.5.1 Staff; 3.5.2 Stuff 3.5.3 Space 3.5.4 Systems; 3.5.5 Referral Systems and Ambulances; 3.5.6 Travel and Movement Restrictions; 3.5.7 Communication and Messaging; 3.5.8 Cost; 3.5.9 Ebola Screening; 3.6 Impact of the Ebola Epidemic on Women Without Ebola Infection; 3.6.1 The Story of Fatmata; 3.7 Impact on Maternal Health Services; 3.7.1 Maternal Mortality; 3.7.2 Facility-Based Deliveries; 3.7.3 Surgical Delivery; 3.7.4 Antenatal Care; 3.7.5 Economic Impact on Women; 3.7.6 Stigma and Mistrust; 3.8 The Way Forward; 3.9 Conclusions; References
    4: Ebola Virus Disease and Pregnancy: Perinatal Transmission and Epidemiology 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Epidemiology of Ebola Infection in Pregnancy; 4.3 Managing Ebola Virus Disease in Pregnancy-Supportive Care and Obstetric Considerations; 4.4 Transplacental and Perinatal Ebola Virus Transmission; 4.5 Outcomes of Ebola Virus Disease-Affected Pregnancies; 4.6 Nosocomial Ebola Virus Disease Transmission; 4.7 Sexual Transmission; 4.8 Impact of Ebola Virus Disease on Routine Pregnancy Care in West Africa; 4.9 Pregnancy Outcomes After Recovery from Ebola Virus Disase; 4.10 Summary References
    5: Comprehensive Clinical Care for Infants and Children with Ebola Virus Disease; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Protocol Development; 5.3 Admission Criteria for Ebola Treatment Units; 5.4 Accompaniment and Challenges in Pediatric Ebola Care; 5.5 Protocols for the Management of Ebola Virus Disease in Children; 5.5.1 Overview; 5.5.2 Initial Assessment and Management; 5.5.3 Fluid Management; 5.5.3.1 Oral Rehydration; 5.5.3.2 Parenteral Rehydration; 5.5.4 Electrolyte Supplementation; 5.5.4.1 Potassium; 5.5.4.2 Magnesium; 5.5.4.3 Zinc; 5.5.5 Antimicrobial Therapy
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Monique Rainford, MD.
    Summary: "A tragedy is unfolding all around us and is receiving well overdue attention. Black women are three times more likely to die from pregnancy than their white peers. But Dr. Monique Rainford is working to better understand these disparities and do something about them. Pregnant While Black is a hopeful exploration of the issues pregnant Black women face in America. Within these pages, Dr. Rainford draws on over twenty years of experience working in obstetrics and gynecology to offer a primer on Black pregnancies and how to better care for them. She shares the successes and testimonies of Black women who have struggled during pregnancy and childbirth, anchoring the stories of these women with carefully researched facts. Despite medical advances over the last twenty years, for Black women, the overwhelming dangers of carrying and delivering children remain and it only seems to be getting worse. In Pregnant While Black, Rainford begins the work of 'repairing the damage of the past' with an examination of the conditions that plague Black pregnancies. This important book carries the hopes and dreams of a generation looking to effect change, here and now."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Why Black mothers are dying in America
    Black women and fertility: how is the system failing them?
    A deep dive into miscarriages and why they affect Black women more
    Navigating the healthcare system: the added burden
    Preterm birth story: how the disparity perpetuates
    Multiple gestation: how many Black babies will survive?
    Preeclampsia/hypertensive disorders: too common for Black women
    Stillbirth: the searing pain of loss and why Black women suffer more
    Low birthweight babies: what's in a number?
    Social support for Black pregnant women and the role of the father
    Sickle cell disease and lupus: ignored and undertreated
    Mental health challenges: the silent pandemic
    Covid-19 and the effect on Black pregnant women
    The route of delivery
    The postpartum experience: the care that ends too quickly
    The newborn tax on Black children
    The ray of hope.
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    RG962.5.B53 R35 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Arunangshu Chakraborty, Ashokka Balakrishnan, editors.
    Summary: This book explores the concept of prehabilitation to great depths using all possible modes of prehabilitation across surgical specialities. Prehabilitation is a unique concept that is becoming popular day-by-day. It began from the enhanced recovery after surgery (ERAS) program and has found importance in almost all of the surgeries now. The book possibly being the first on prehabilitation globally introduces the concept, describes the methods of functional assessment of the patients scheduled for extensive cancer surgery, and ways of pre-optimisation. It covers the methods of prehabilitation system-wise and then provides pehabilitation tools specific for individual onco-surgical subspecialties. The book will be an invaluable resource for practitioners of onco-anesthesia and onco-surgery in optimizing their patients before surgery for best results. It will also be useful for the allied disciplines such as nutritionists, physiotherapists, psychiatrists and oncology nurses.

    Contents:
    Section I: Introduction to Prehabilitation
    Concept of prehabilitation
    Functional assessment: MET, ECOG
    Section II: Systemic Prehabilitation
    Cardiovascular prehabilitation
    Respiratory prehabilitation
    Endocrine prehabilitation
    Hematological prehabilitation
    Nutritional prehabilitation
    Role of Physiotherapy in prehabilitation
    Psychological and social prehabilitation
    Section III: Prehabilitation for Cancer Surgery- Speciality wise
    Prehabilitation for Liver, hepato-pancreato-biliary surgery
    Prehabilitation for Colorectal surgery, ERAS elements
    Prehabilitation for thoracic surgery
    Prehabilitation for uro-gynae-oncological surgery
    Prehabilitation for head and neck onco-surgery
    Prehabilitation for Skeletal/muscular cancer surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert P. Olympia, Jeffrey S. Lubin.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    Reuven Zimlichman, Stevo Julius, Giuseppe Mancia, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Tarek El-Toukhy, Peter Braude, editors.
    Summary: This unique book offers a comprehensive yet practical user-friendly guide to preimplantation genetic diagnosis (PGD). It provides understanding of and insight into the complete procedure, its recent clinical and laboratory developments and its future prospects, whilst offering an easy point of reference for patient enquiries. Concluding with perspectives on the ethical and social issues often encountered by healthcare professionals counselling patients with regards to PGD. Each chapter within Preimplantation Genetic Diagnosis in Clinical Practice is written by established authorities in their fields. An essential resource for PGD specialists and non-specialists, and for all practitioners working within the disciplines of fertility, reproductive medicine and medical genetics.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Basic Genetics for PGD
    Genetic counselling and its role in PGD
    Complex issues in PGD
    Assisted Reproductive Care for PGD Patients
    Embryology and PGD
    PGD for sex-determination and chromosome rearrangements: FISH and emerging technologies
    PGD analysis of embryos for monogenic disorders
    Managing the PGD cycle
    Training and Accreditation in PGD
    PGD data in the UK and Europe
    PGD Facts and Figures
    Pre-implantation diagnosis and HLA-typing: the potential for selection of unaffected HLA matched siblings
    PGD and human embryonic stem cell technology
    Ethical and Social aspects of PGD
    Preimplantation Genetic screening
    Regulation of PGD in the UK and Worldwide
    New Developments in PGD
    The Future of Preimplantation Genetic Testing.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Peter A. Brennan, Tom Aldridge, Raghav C. Dwivedi, editors.
    Summary: Oral squamous cell carcinoma (SCC) is the 13th commonest cancer worldwide, and the most common cancer in the Asian subcontinent due to the widespread habit of tobacco and betel nut chewing. Despite many advances in diagnosis and treatment, the survival statistics have only marginally improved. However our understanding of the disease process and transformation from pre-cancerous lesions of the oral mucosa to an invasive SCC cancer and their progression has expanded exponentially. There are many conditions of the oral mucosa that can progress to an invasive malignancy. A thorough understanding of these conditions is a prerequisite for all those involved in the management of the diseases of the oral mucosa and head and neck region. The recognition and timely treatment of potentially pre-malignant conditions of the oral cavity can minimize the change to an overt malignancy in many patients through patient education, appropriate treatment and surveillance. In this book we cover relevant anatomy, biology, diagnosis and latest management strategies for pre-cancerous conditions that affect the oral mucosa. The respective chapters are written by expert contributors from around the world, lending the book a global perspective and making it an essential guide for all those involved in the management of pre-malignant lesions arising in this challenging anatomical region.

    Contents:
    Introduction to oral premalignant lesions including epidemiology
    Development, relevant anatomy and physiology of the oral cavity and mucosa
    Basic cellular and molecular biology to include the effects of carcinogens (smoking, alcohol, betel nut, HPV, chronic candida)
    Pathophysiology of the transformation from normal mucosa to invasive malignancy (carcinogenesis) including dysplasia
    Leukoplakia including benign lesions
    Erythroplakia and erythroleukoplakia.-The lichenoid group of diseases including erosive and atrophic lichen planus.-Systemic diseases that are potentially pre-cancerous (iron deficiency anaemic, immunosuppression
    Clinical presentation of oral mucosal premalignant lesions (this will be a larger section), and include high and low risk lesions
    Diagnosis including biopsy techniques and other relevant investigations
    Management of premalignant disease of the oral mucosa with up to date clinical trials and adjuvant therapies. Role of surgery, laser treatments
    The future. .
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    by Mansfield Mela.
    Summary: "This book provides clinically relevant information for mental health experts, including professionals in the medical, mental, educational, vocational, legal and correctional, child welfare, and others, who encounter individuals with a hidden disability. Professionals require essential training to appropriately support patients who navigate the mental health system because of the consequences of prenatal alcohol exposure (PAE). Because curricula have only recently begun to incorporate this material, a text providing basic as well as advanced information is necessary. This book is significant because its content is useful for professional training across many mental health disciplines. It covers information missing from curricula about the long-term effects of PAE (fetal alcohol spectrum disorder ["FASD 101"]) and includes clinical information on the mental disorders relevant to FASD. Given the burgeoning research and knowledge in this area, the text also updates, synthesizes, and consolidates current information into one source. Even seasoned mental health professionals well versed in the research data can use this information to become better educated and informed on the intersecting mental health consequences of PAE"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    History of Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorder and Mental Disorders
    Epidemiology
    Prenatal Exposure to Multiple Substances
    Understanding Etiological Mechanisms
    Neurocognitive Mechanisms
    Clinical Presentation
    Mental Disorder Manifestation of Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorder
    Profile of Associated Mental Disorders
    Neuroimaging
    Psychological Testing
    Laboratory Testing
    Diagnostic Nosology
    Pharmacological Intervention
    Psychological Treatment
    Critical Success Factors
    Special issues in Children and Adolescents (the Young)
    Special Issues in the Elderly
    Special Issues in Forensic Mental Health
    The Emergency Room
    Clinical Relevance of Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorder in the Mental Health System
    Future of the Interface of Prenatal Alcohol Exposure and Mental Disorder.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2021
  • Digital
    Joann Paley Galst, Marion S. Verp, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Prenatal genetic screening and diagnostic testing
    2. Preimplantation genetic screening and diagnostic testing
    3. Medical reasons for pregnancy interruption: chromosomal and genetic abnormlaities
    5. Medical reasons for pregnancy interruption: fetal reduction
    6. Fetal pain
    7. Giving bad and ambiguous news
    9. Ethical issues
    10. Religious traditions
    11. Disability perspectives
    12. Feminist perspectives on prenatal and preimplantation diagnosis
    13. Critical aspects of decision-making and grieving after diagnosis of fetal anomaly
    14. Helping patients cope with their decisions
    15. A burden of choice: the ripple effect: parent's grief and the role of family and friends
    16. Postscript: a patient's perspective
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Gabriele Tonni, Waldo Sepulveda, Amy E. Wong, editors.
    Contents:
    1. The Genetics of Facial Cleft
    2. Evaluation of the Fetal Face in the First Trimester
    3. The role of 2D/3D/4D Ultrasound in the Prenatal Assessment of Cleft Lip and Palate
    4. 2D/3D/4D Ultrasound of the Fetal Face in Genetic Syndromes
    5. Prenatal Diagnosis of Head and Neck Tumors
    6. Micrognathia
    7. Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) in the Evaluation of the Fetal Face
    8. The Fetal Brain in Fetuses with Orofacial Abnormalities
    9. Development and Autospy Assessment of the head and Face
    10. Postnatal Management of Cleft Lip and Palate
    11. Cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Derek Dillane, Barry A. Finegan, editors.
    Summary: This book uses a case-based approach to provide current information on a range of medical issues with the goal of enhancing preoperative evaluation and optimization. It meets the market need for a resource that concisely encapsulates current knowledge on the medical management of specific topics in a setting relevant to the preoperative clinic. In so doing the book aims to improve patient care and safety, enhance resource use, facilitate appropriate and timely management of preexisting conditions and diminish patient concerns. Organized into sections according to body system, each section consists of chapters delineating a specific disorder. Each chapter starts with a clinical vignette followed by a question-and-answer style investigation of the relevant issues. These questions attempt to address commonly encountered clinical dilemmas where opinion often differs between, and occasionally within, medical sub-specialties. Expertly written chapters are also supplemented by a number of chapters which address special considerations such as the frail patient and chronic opioid use. Preoperative Assessment: A Case-Based Approach is an invaluable reference for all physicians involved in preoperative assessment including anesthesiologists, surgeons, internists, family doctors and residents in these fields. Nurse practitioners and other allied heath professionals involved in preoperative evaluation may also find this a book a valuable and timely resource. .

    Contents:
    1. Preoperative Assessment and Optimization
    PART I CARDIAC
    2. The Cardiac Patient Undergoing Non-Cardiac Surgery
    3. The Adult Congenital Cardiac Patient for Non-Cardiac Surgery
    4. Hypertension
    5. Cardiac Failure
    6. Atrial Arrhythmias
    7. Aortic Stenosis
    8. Pulmonary Hypertension
    9.Cardiac Implantable Electronic Devices
    PART II VASCULAR
    10. Carotid Endarterectomy
    11. Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm
    12. Marfan Syndrome
    PART III PULMONARY.-13. Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    14. Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease (COPD)
    15. Asthma
    16. Restrictive Lung Disease
    PART IV ENDOCRINE
    17. Diabetes Mellitus
    18. Hyperthyroidism
    19. Adrenal Insufficiency.-20. Pituitary Adenoma.-21. Pheochromocytoma
    PART V HEPATOBILIARY
    22. Liver Dysfunction.-23. The Patient Presenting for Liver Transplantation
    PART VI GASTROINTESTINAL.-24. Crohns Disease
    25. Carcinoid Tumor
    PART VII RENAL
    26. Chronic Kidney Disease and the Dialysis Patient
    27. Non-transplant Surgery for the Transplant Patient.-PART VIII MUSCULOSKELETAL
    28. Systemic Sclerosis
    29. Rheumatoid Arthritis
    30. Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
    31. Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy
    IX NEUROLOGICAL
    32
    Myasthenia Gravis
    33. Ischemic Stroke
    34. Parkinson Disease
    35. Multiple Sclerosis
    36. Intracranial Mass
    X HEMATOLOGICAL
    37. Easy Bruising
    38. Thrombocytopenia
    39. Long Term Anticoagulation
    40. Venous Thromboembolic Disease
    41. Anemia
    42. Sickle Cell Disease
    XI MISCELLANEOUS
    43. The Pregnant Patient
    44. The Psychiatric Patient
    45. The Obese Patient Undergoing Non-Bariatric Surgery
    46. The Frail Patient
    47. The Opioid Tolerant Patient
    48. Substance Abuse Disorder
    49. Amyloidosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by BobbieJean Sweitzer.
    Contents:
    Overview
    Preoperative basics
    Heart disease
    Pulmonary disease
    Neurologic/neuromuscular
    Renal disease
    Hepatobiliary disease
    Endocrine and metabolic disorders
    Hematologic issues
    Musculoskeletal and autoimmune
    The acutely ill patient
    Psychiatric disorders, chronic pain, and substance abuse
    Miscellaneous issues
    Geriatric patients
    Pediatric patients
    Anesthesia specific issues
    Preoperative assessment for specific locations
    Medication management
    Business logistics.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Arne Staby, Anurag S. Rathore, Satinder Ahuja.
    Summary: "Preparative Chromatography for Separation of Proteins addresses a wide range of modeling, techniques, strategies, and case studies of industrial separation of proteins and peptides. Covers broad aspects of preparative chromatography with a unique combination of academic and industrial perspectives. Presents Combines modeling with compliantce useing of Quality-by-Design (QbD) approaches including modeling. Features a variety of chromatographic case studies not readily accessible to the general public. Represents an essential reference resource for academic, industrial, and pharmaceutical researchers"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Model-Based Preparative Chromatography Process Development in the QbD Paradigm / Arne Staby, Satinder Ahuja, Anurag S Rathore
    Adsorption Isotherms / Jørgen M Mollerup
    Simulation of Process Chromatography / Bernt Nilsson, Niklas Andersson
    Simplified Methods Based on Mechanistic Models for Understanding and Designing Chromatography Processes for Proteins and Other Biological Products-Yamamoto Models and Yamamoto Approach / Noriko Yoshimoto, Shuichi Yamamoto
    Development of Continuous Capture Steps in Bioprocess Applications / Frank Riske, Tom Ransohoff
    Computational Modeling in Bioprocess Development / Francis Insaidoo, Suvrajit Banerjee, David Roush, Steven Cramer
    Chromatographic Scale-Up on a Volume Basis / Ernst B Hansen
    Scaling Up Industrial Protein Chromatography / Chris Antoniou, Justin McCue, Venkatesh Natarajan, Jörg Thömmes, Qing Sarah Yuan
    High-Throughput Process Development / Silvia M Pirrung, Marcel Ottens
    High-Throughput Column Chromatography Performed on Liquid Handling Stations / Patrick Diederich, Jürgen Hubbuch
    Lab-Scale Development of Chromatography Processes / Hong Li, Jennifer Pollard, Nihal Tugcu
    Problem Solving by Using Modeling / Martin P Breil, Søren S Frederiksen, Steffen Kidal, Thomas B Hansen
    Modeling Preparative Cation Exchange Chromatography of Monoclonal Antibodies / Stephen Hunt, Trent Larsen, Robert J Todd
    Model-Based Process Development in the Biopharmaceutical Industry / Lars Sejergaard, Haleh Ahmadian, Thomas B Hansen, Arne Staby, Ernst B Hansen
    Dynamic Simulations as a Predictive Model for a Multicolumn Chromatography Separation / Marc Bisschops, Mark Brower
    Chemometrics Applications in Process Chromatography / Anurag S Rathore, Sumit K Singh
    Mid-UV Protein Absorption Spectra and Partial Least Squares Regression as Screening and PAT Tool / Sigrid Hansen, Nina Brestrich, Arne Staby, Jürgen Hubbuch
    Recent Progress Toward More Sustainable Biomanufacturing / Milton T W Hearn.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Muhammad Waseem, Isabel A. Barata, Jennifer H. Chao, David Foster, Noah Kondamudi.
    Summary: This book outlines the essential knowledge required for the management of critically ill and severely injured children. It is designed to facilitate successful completion of the Pediatric Emergency Medicine Board Examination of the American Board of Pediatrics (ABP). Each chapter follows a Question & Answer format, covering major areas in pediatrics such as cardiology, dermatology, nephrology, surgery and trauma. The book concludes with a comprehensive practice test, allowing it to function as a well-rounded reference and study guide. Prepare for the Pediatric Emergency Medicine Board Examination is an essential resource for any clinician or trainee seeking a concise review of how to manage critically ill and severely injured children.

    Contents:
    1. Resuscitation
    2. Emergency Medical Services/prehospital care
    3. Environmental Emergencies
    4. Airway and respiratory Emergencies
    5. Cardiology
    6. Dermatology
    7. Neonatal
    8. Nephrology
    9. NEUROLOGY
    10. Gynecology
    11. Infectious Diseases
    12. Endocrine and Metabolic Diseases
    13. Hematology and Oncology
    14. Toxicology
    15. Psychosocial Emergencies
    16. Child Abuse
    17. ENT
    18. Ophthalmology
    19. Surgery
    20. Trauma
    21. Emergency Obstetric Ultrasound
    22. Emergency Cardiac Ultrasound
    23. Emergency Ultrasound in Trauma
    24. Emergency point of care Ultrasound
    25. Orthopedics
    26. Procedures
    27. Dental
    28. Dental Procedures
    29. Burns
    30. Snake Envenomation/Animal Bites
    31. Administration
    32. Epidemiology
    33. Biostatistics
    34. Practice Test.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Joanne Chaperlo Langan.
    Summary: 'Preparing Nurses for Disaster Management' helps you build the skills you need to prepare for, respond to, and recover from emergency situations efficiently and effectively. It includes the personal stories of nurses who have experienced disasters, describing the specific incident, the response, what worked or didn't work, and the lessons learned. Case studies show how to apply international response guidelines in providing care for those in need.

    Contents:
    Overview of disaster preparedness
    Stages of disaster response
    Nursing roles in disasters and public health emergencies
    Actual diasters and public health emergencies
    Anticipating the future: brainstorming exercies.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2023
  • Digital
    Rosemary M. Caron.
    Summary: In concept and practice, public health casts a wide net, spanning assessment, intervention, and policy; education, prevention, and protection; public, private, and government entities. But key elements are often missing from the picture, including a clear understanding of public health and its goals by the general public, and specific public health education throughout the workforce. Public Health Practice responds to these and related challenges by elegantly summarizing the state of the field in an era of dwindling budgets, competing and overlapping services, and a shaky professional infrastructure. In keeping with public health goals set out by the CDC and other leading agencies, the author makes a real-world case for standardizing training, establishing best practices in the field, and coordinating public health systems with their healthcare counterparts. Theory, case examples, tools, and callout boxes highlight knowledge, preparation, and skills professionals need in addressing chronic issues and complex emergencies. Throughout, the emphasis is on greater competency and visibility for the profession, resulting in a more informed, healthier public. Featured in the coverage: Issues in defining the public health workforce. The state of public health education. Practicing and teaching public health: local, national, and international cases. Standardizing public health practice: benefits and challenges. Integrating public health and healthcare. The future of public health as seen from academia and the frontlines. Identifying urgent issues and providing cogent answers, Public Health Practice is a call to action for those involved in creating the next level of public health, including professors, practitioners, students, and administrators.

    Contents:
    Introduction and Overview
    Public Health Workforce
    Public Health Education: Changing Times
    Public Health Lessons: Practicing and Teaching Public Health
    Standardizing Public Health Practice: Benefits and Challenges
    The Future of the Public?s Health from the Perspective of Public Health Experts
    Vision for Public Health Practice in the 21st Century: Target Improvement Areas.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Stephen M. Stahl
    Summary: "With the range of psychotropic drugs expanding and the usages of existing medications diversifying, we are pleased to present the Seventh Edition of the world's best-selling formulary in psychopharmacology. The new edition features nine new compounds as well as information about several new formulations of existing drugs. Many important new indications are covered for existing drugs, as are updates to the profiles of the entire content and collection, including new injectable and transdermal formulations, as well as updated warnings and indications. The Pearls have all been refreshed and the antipsychotics section has been completely revised. With its easy-to-use, full-colour template-driven navigation system, Prescriber's Guide combines evidence-based data with clinically informed advice to support everyone who is prescribing in the field of mental health"-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Janet L. Peacock, Sally M. Kerry, Raymond R. Balise.
    Summary: "As many medical and healthcare researchers have a love-hate relationship with statistics, the second edition of this practical reference book may make all the difference. Using practical examples, mainly from the authors' own research, the book explains how to make sense of statistics, turn statistical computer output into coherent information, and help decide which pieces of information to report and how to present them. --- The book takes you through all the stages of the research process, from the initial research proposal, through ethical approval and data analysis, to reporting on and publishing the findings. Helpful tips and information boxes, offer clear guidance throughout, including easily followed instructions on how to: *develop a quantitative research proposal for ethical/institutional approval or research funding; *write up the statistical aspects of a paper for publication; *choose and perform simple and more advanced statistical analyses; *describe the statistical methods and present the results of an analysis. --- This new edition covers a wider range of statistical programs - SAS, STATA, R, and SPSS, and shows the commands needed to obtain the analyses and how to present it, whichever program you are using. Each specific example is annotated to indicate other scenarios that can be analysed using the same methods, allowing you to easily transpose the knowledge gained from the book to your own research. The principles of good presentation are also covered in detail, from translating relevant results into suitable extracts, through to randomised controlled trials, and how to present a meta-analysis. An added ingredient is the inclusion of code and datasets for all analyses shown in the book on our website (http://medical-statistics.info). --- Written by three experienced biostatisticians based in the UK and US, this is a step-by-step guide that will be invaluable to researchers and postgraduate students in medicine, those working in the professions allied to medicine, and statisticians in consultancy roles." --- from website publisher

    Contents:
    1: Introduction
    2: Introduction to the research process
    3: Writing a research protocol
    4: Writing Up a research study
    5: Introduction to presenting statistical analyses
    6: Single group studies
    7: Comparing two groups
    8: Analysing matched or paired data
    9: Analysing relationshipsbetween variables
    10: Multifactorial analyses
    11: Survival analysis
    12: Presenting a randomized controlled trial
    13: Presenting a meta-analysis
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Clifford D. Packer.
    Summary: Medical students often struggle when presenting new patients to the attending physicians on the ward. Case presentation is either poorly taught or not taught at all in the first two years of medical school. As a result, students are thrust into the spotlight with only sketchy ideas about how to present, prioritize, edit, and focus their case presentations. They also struggle with producing a broad differential diagnosis and defending their leading diagnosis. This text provides a comprehensive guide to give well-prepared, focused and concise presentations. It also allows students to discuss differential diagnosis, incorporate high-value care, educate their colleagues, and participate actively in the care of their patients. Linking in-depth discussion of the oral presentation with differential diagnosis and high value care, Presenting Your Case is a valuable resource for medical students, clerkship directors and others who educate students on the wards and in the clinic. .

    Contents:
    The Importance of a Good Case Presentation, and Why Students Struggle with It
    Organization of the Oral Case Presentation
    Variations on the Oral Case Presentation
    The HPI: A Timeline, Not a Time Machine
    Pertinent Positives and Negatives
    The Diagnostic Power of Description
    The Assessment and Plan
    Approaches to Differential Diagnosi
    Searching and Citing the Literature
    Adding Value to the Oral Presentation
    Teaching Rounds: Speaking Up, Getting Involved, and Learning to Accept Uncertainty
    On Pimping
    The Art of the Five-Minute Talk
    Future Directions of the Oral Case Presentation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    by Allison Hubel.
    Contents:
    Pre-freeze processing and characterization
    Formulation and introduction of cryopreservation solutions
    Freezing protocols
    Storage and shipping of frozen cells
    Thawing and post-thaw processing
    Post-thaw assessment
    Algorithm-driven protocol optimization
    Protocols.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Felmet Gernot.
    Summary: This book describes all aspects of a purely biological approach to knee ligament reconstruction that entirely avoids the use of foreign materials in a manner analogous to the use of dowels in carpentry. The technique, referred to as Ball-press-fit reconstruction was developed by the author in 1995 for anterior cruciate ligament (ACL) reconstruction and has since been further developed so that it is now applicable to all knee ligaments and also osteochondral autologous transplantation surgery. It has the advantages of maintenance of individual biological resources (no bone loss), rapid rehabilitation, and excellent clinical outcomes in terms of stability and anchoring. This book explores subtle clinical and technical diagnostics and provides step-by-step descriptions of the various surgical techniques used by the author. Readers will also learn about the history of ACL reconstruction and the results achieved to date, sources of graft for ACL replacement, the surgical instrumentation required for press-fit fixation, the healing response, and procedures for revision of re-rupture. In addition, rehabilitation and prevention programs are fully described for every level of athletic activity. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Overview Anatomy
    Use and overuse of the knee
    Diagnostic
    History of ACL reconstruction
    History of material free ACL-Reconstruction
    Press fit fixation
    Surgical techniques
    Healing response
    Revision of Re-Rupture
    OATS / Mega OATS
    Rehabilitation
    Return to sports & competition.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    David R. Thomas, Gregory A. Compton, editors.
    Summary: Pressure Ulcers in the Aging Population: A Guide for Clinicians is a resource primarily aimed at physicians interested in the fundamentals of wound care. This book is written for geriatricians, internists, general practitioners, residents and fellows who treat older patients. Unlike other wound texts on the market, the book addresses the specific issues of wound prevention and management in older individuals.The text emphasizes proper documentation and elements of the team care process. There is up to date information on skin changes at the end of life and the concept of unavoidability.Chapters are written by experts in their fields and include such evolving topics as deep tissue injury and the newer support surface technologies.

    Contents:
    1.The Biology of Wound Healing / David R. Thomas
    2.Incidence and Prevalence of Pressure Ulcers / Dan Berlowitz
    3.Prevention of Pressure Ulcers / Theodore M. Johnson
    4.Assessment and Documentation of Pressure Ulcers / Kathrin Raeder
    5.General Principles of Pressure Ulcer Management / David R. Thomas
    6.Local Wound Treatment in Pressure Ulcer Management / David R. Thomas
    7.Surgical Management of Pressure Ulcers / Dean P. Kane
    8.The Role of Nutrition in the Management and Prevention of Pressure Ulcers / David R. Thomas
    9.Assessment and Management of Wound Colonization and Infection in Pressure Ulcers / Gregory A. Compton
    10.Palliative Wound Care and Treatment at End of Life / R. Gary Sibbald
    11.Quality of Care / Janet Cheng
    12.Legal Aspects of Pressure Ulcer Care / Gregory A. Compton
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Hiroshi Sameshima, editor.
    Summary: This splendid volume presents numerous aspects of preterm labor and delivery, from its fundamental mechanism to clinically focused approaches. The incidence of preterm delivery is 6-7% in Japan, while globally up to 10% of pregnancies with preterm labor result in premature delivery. The rates of overall survival and intact survival of the premature infants are also excellent in Japan. Thus Japans approach to preterm labor and delivery has long attracted attention. In each chapter, experts describe specific issues unique to conditions in Japan, including diagnosis, tocolytic agents, definition of clinical chorioamnionitis, treatment of bacterial vaginosis, role of amniocentesis, management of preterm premature membrane rupture and also placental pathology, presenting definitive evidence of the reduced incidence of preterm delivery in Japan. This book benefits not only obstetricians, pediatricians and gynecologist, but also midwives, nurse practitioners, and medical and associated staffs in the field of obstetrics, pediatrics, as well as neonatal and perinatal medicine who are involved in delivery.

    Contents:
    Part I. Preterm labor: A challenge 1. Preterm labor: impacts on perinatal ecology
    2. Definition and diagnosis of preterm labor
    3. Epidemiology and incidence of preterm delivery
    Part II. Preterm labor and intrauterine infection and inflammation 4. Subclinical intrauterine infection
    5. Clinical and subclinical intrauterine infection/inflammation
    6. Cervical changes 1: morphological and biochemical changes
    7. Cervical changes 2 : USG findings
    Part III. Other mechanisms related to preterm labor 8. Multiple mechanisms of preterm labor other than intrauterine infection
    9. Abruption and preterm labor
    Part IV. Prevention, Treatment, and Management 10. Prevention and Tocolytic agents 1
    11. Prevention and Tocolytic agents 2
    12. Tocolytic agent 3
    13. Antibiotics for preterm labor
    14. Probiotics for preterm labor
    15. Progesterone
    16. Cerclage 1: general
    17. Cerclage 2: abdominal vs vaginal
    18. Bacterial vaginosis
    19. Antenatal corticosteroid
    20. Mode of delivery of premature infants
    21. Management of pPROM in general
    22. Prevention of PTB: meta-analysis
    Part V. Preterm Newborn 23. The preterm newborn: Morbidity and Mortality
    Part VI. Placental Pathology 24. Placental pathology
    Part VII. Research Frontier 25. Research frontier.-.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jami F. Young, Laura Mufson, Christie M. Schueler.
    Contents:
    Importance of depression prevention
    IPT-AST overview
    Selecting adolescents to participate in IPT-AST
    IPT-AST individual pre-group sessions
    IPT-AST initial phase
    IPT-AST middle phase
    IPT-AST mid-group session
    IPT-AST termination phase
    IPT-AST booster sessions
    Conducting IPT-AST in schools
    IPT-AST with adolescents at varying levels of risk and in diverse settings
    Common clinical issues
    Review of empirical evidence for IPT-AST.
    Digital Access Oxford [2016]
  • Digital
    developed by American Academy of Pediatrics, American Public Health Association, National Resource Center for Health and Safety in Child Care and Early Education.
    Summary: Help prevent childhood obesity with the latest national standards describing evidence-based best practices in nutrition, physical activity, and screen time for early care and education programs.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital/Print
    A Prüss-Ustün, J Wolf, C Corvalán, R Bos and M Neira.
    Contents:
    Acronyms and abbreviations
    Preface
    Executive summary
    1. Introduction
    2. Methods: Estimating the environmental burden of disease
    The environment: A contextual determinant of health
    The link with social determinants of health
    What is meant by the population attributable fraction of a risk factor?
    Estimating the population attributable fraction
    Comparative risk assessment
    Calculations based on limited epidemiological data
    Disease transmission pathway
    Expert survey
    Combining risk factors for individual diseases
    Estimating the burden of disease attributable to the environment
    Estimating uncertainties
    3. Results: A systematic analysis of fractions attributable to the environment, by disease Infectious and parasitic diseases
    Infectious and parasitic diseases
    Respiratory infections
    Diarrhoeal diseases
    Intestinal nematode infections
    Malaria
    Trachoma
    Schistosomiasis
    Chagas disease
    Lymphatic filariasis
    Onchocerciasis
    Leishmaniasis
    Dengue
    Japanese encephalitis
    HIV/AIDS
    Sexually transmitted diseases
    Hepatitis B and C
    Tuberculosis
    Other infectious and parasitic diseases
    Neonatal and nutritional conditions
    Neonatal conditions
    Protein-energy malnutrition
    Noncommunicable diseases
    Cancers
    Mental, behavioural and neurological disorders
    Cataracts
    Hearing loss
    Ischaemic heart disease
    Stroke
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Asthma
    Musculoskeletal diseases
    Congenital anomalies
    Other noncommunicable diseases
    Risks factors for noncommunicable diseases from other areas but related to the environment
    Overweight and obesity
    Physical inactivity
    Unintentional injuries
    Road traffic accidents
    Unintentional poisonings
    Falls
    Fires, heat and hot substances
    Drownings
    Other unintentional injuries
    Intentional injuries
    Self-harm
    Interpersonal violence
    The link between the environment and demographics
    Global results of the analysis by disease and population subgroups
    Disease specific results
    Age differences
    Gender differences
    Regional and country differences
    Trends
    4. Discussion: Leveraging environment-health links
    Environment, health and the Sustainable Development Goals
    Strengths and weaknesses of the analysis
    5. Conclusion: Towards healthy environments
    Key findings
    Reducing the burden of unhealthy environments
    Annexes
    Annex 1. WHO Member States and country groupings by income region
    Annex 2. Results tables
    Annex 3:. Technical annex on methods
    Annex 3.1. Calculation of population attributable fractions
    Annex 3.2. Combination of risk factors for one disease: Additional information
    Annex 3.3. Additional information on estimation of PAFs for selected diseases
    References
    Acknowledgements
    Photo credits.
    Digital Access WHO 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA565 .P78 2016
    1
  • Digital/Print
    World Health Organization.
    Summary: "Far too many people around the world know the pain of losing a loved one to drowning. Each year almost 360 000 people die from drowning--over 90% of them in low- and middle income countries. More than half of these deaths are among those younger than 25, with children aged under 5 facing the greatest risk. Drowning is the third leading cause of death worldwide for those aged from 5 to 14. Despite these tragic facts, drowning prevention gets relatively little attention and few resources. There is far more we can do to prevent drowning. Global commitments made as part of the Sustainable Development Goals, for example, cannot be met as long as this preventable cause of death is left largely unchecked. All of us--policymakers, parents, non-profit organizations, businesses and concerned citizens--can help prevent drowning. Explaining how is the goal of this guide. Building on the World Health Organization's 2014 Global report on drowning, the following pages provide practical, step-by-step guidance on how to implement 10 effective measures to prevent drowning. They range from community-based solutions, such as day care for children and barriers controlling access to water, to effective national policies and legislation around water safety, including setting and enforcing boating, shipping and ferry regulations. Data show that all of these solutions can help save lives. The more we work together to implement the measures outlined in this guide, the more lives can be saved. We urge all concerned to adopt as many of the interventions and strategies as their resources will allow, and to protect those most vulnerable without delay."--Page iv.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Situational assessment for drowning prevention interventions and strategies
    Section 2. Interventions to prevent drowning
    Provide safe places away from water for pre-school children
    Install barriers controlling access to water
    Teach school-age children (aged over 6 years) swimming and water safety skills
    Build resilience and manage flood risks and other hazards
    Train bystanders in safe rescue and resuscitation
    Set and enforce safe boating, shipping and ferry regulations
    Section 3. Strategies to support drowning prevention interventions
    Promote multisectoral collaboration
    Strengthen public awareness of drowning through strategic communications
    Establish a national water safety plan
    Research: advance drowning prevention through data collection and well-designed studies
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access WHO 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA1076 .P748 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Kim Maryniak, Robbie Garrett.
    Summary: This book informs nurses about the most common and the more serious errors made in caring for patients with infectious diseases. It provides learnings about a variety of infectious diseases, including COVID-19, methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA), Vancomycin-resistant Enterococcus (VRE), Clostridium difficile (C-diff.), and tuberculosis (TB), amongst others. Factors that are predisposing and contributing factors for nursing errors are reviewed. The types of errors, consequences, detection, and monitoring for nursing errors are included. This book examines how errors can be avoided with necessary precautions, and managed appropriately based on current evidence-based practice. Recommendations for further study are also provided. This book is a useful tool for nurse educators/ leaders/mentors to educate and guide their students and professional nurses.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Predisposing and contributing factors for nursing errors
    Chapter 3. Types of errors
    Chapter 4. Consequences of nursing errors
    Chapter 5. Monitoring for and detecting nursing errors
    Chapter 6. Best practices to prevent nursing errors
    Chapter 7. Recommendations for further study
    Chapter 8. Summary and Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Amber Hogan Mitchell.
    Summary: This book is a practical guide for preventing occupational exposures to bloodborne and infectious disease in health care. It is a timely and essential resource given that people working in healthcare settings sustain a higher incidence of occupational illness than any other industry sector, and at the time of publication of this book we are in the midst of a global pandemic of COVID-19. While the guide is focused on health care primarily, it would be useful for preventing exposures to essential workers in many other industries as well. The guide offers easy-to-follow instruction, all in one place, for creating, implementing, and evaluating occupational health and safety programs. Readers have practical information that they can use now to either build a new program or expand an existing one that protects workers from occupationally associated illness and infection. With a focus on the public health significance of building better, safer programs in health care, the book provides not just the evidence-based or data-driven reasoning behind building successful programs, but also includes sample programs, plans, checklists, campaigns, and record-keeping and surveillance tools. Topics explored among the chapters include: • Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulatory Compliance • Other Regulatory Requirements, National Standards, and Accreditation • Performing a Hazard Assessment and Building an Exposure Control Plan • Engineering Controls and Safer Medical Devices • Personal Protective Equipment Placement and Use • Facing a Modern Pandemic Preventing Occupational Exposures to Infectious Disease in Health Care is a comprehensive resource for both seasoned and novice professionals with primary, secondary, or ancillary responsibility for occupational or employee health and safety, infection prevention, risk management, or environmental health and safety in a variety of healthcare or patient care settings. It also would appeal to those working in public health, nursing, medical, or clinical technical trades with an interest in infection prevention and control and/or occupational health and infectious disease.

    Contents:
    1. IntroductionThe introduction to the guide describes why it serves as a resource to be used by those with the greatest responsibility of all The concepts of the industrial hygiene hierarchy of controls are introduced. The hierarchy is an evidence-based method to help readers build, design, and evaluate preventive strategies that provide the highest and most productive levels of protection. It also provides information on workers' rights, whistleblowing, and personnel-based opportunities for change. 4. Microbiology
    Chapter 4 provides a background on the most epidemiologically important microbes likely to be an occupational exposure risk Serving as a Microbiology 101 for non-microbiologists. It can be incorporated into new employee onboarding or annual refresher training. It describes how microorganisms propagate and transmit and why some microorganisms cause disease (are pathogenic). It provides control strategies to mitigate exposure risk for personnel, leadership, and the communities they serve. It also highlights the critical elements of Post-Exposure Prophylaxis and Antimicrobial Stewardship Plans. 5. Regulatory Compliance; OSHA StandardsThere are surprisingly few regulatory standards or laws that apply to occupational infection prevention and control. The bulk of the standards are promulgated by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). This chapter provides in-depth information on the elements of OSHA Standards applicable to infectious disease in health care, including the Bloodborne Pathogens, Respiratory Protection, and Personal Protective Equipment Standards.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    John Henden.
    Contents:
    About the author
    Foreword
    Acknowledgments
    How to use this book
    The book?s : style and purpose
    Defining suicide and self-harm
    Current service provision : risk assessment, management and medication
    Other approaches to helping the suicidal
    What is solution focused brief therapy?
    Suicide encounters : the crucial first ten minutes
    The solution focused approach in working with the suicidal
    Case study : reg and "the demons calling from the deep"
    Some more case vignettes
    Connecting with people and the shift towards suicide mitigation
    Working on the phone with the suicidal person
    Blaming those who take their lives
    International solution focused applications to suicide prevention
    Zero suicides : should this be our goal?
    Where do we go from here?
    Appendix 1 flow diagram for an episode of treatment
    Appendix 2: specialist solution focused training workshops
    References
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: "Suicides are preventable. Even so, every 40 seconds a person dies by suicide somewhere in the world and many more attempt suicide. Suicides occur in all regions of the world and throughout the lifespan. Notably, among young people 15-29 years of age, suicide is the second leading cause of death globally. Suicide impacts on the most vulnerable of the world's populations and is highly prevalent in already marginalized and discriminated groups of society. It is not just a serious public health problem in developed countries; in fact, most suicides occur in low- and middle-income countries where resources and services, if they do exist, are often scarce and limited for early identification, treatment and support of people in need. These striking facts and the lack of implemented timely interventions make suicide a global public health problem that needs to be tackled imperatively. This report is the first WHO publication of its kind and brings together what is known in a convenient form so that immediate actions can be taken. The report aims to increase the awareness of the public health significance of suicide and suicide attempts and to make suicide prevention a higher priority on the global public health agenda. It aims to encourage and support countries to develop or strengthen comprehensive suicide prevention strategies in a multisectoral public health approach. For a national suicide prevention strategy, it is essential that governments assume their role of leadership, as they can bring together a multitude of stakeholders who may not otherwise collaborate. Governments are also in a unique position to develop and strengthen surveillance and to provide and disseminate data that are necessary to inform action. This report proposes practical guidance on strategic actions that governments can take on the basis of their resources and existing suicide prevention activities. In particular, there are evidence-based and low-cost interventions that are effective, even in resource-poor settings. This publication would not have been possible without the significant contributions of experts and partners from all over the world. We would like to thank them for their important work and support. The report is intended to be a resource that will allow policy-makers and other stakeholders to make suicide prevention an imperative. Only then can countries develop a timely and effective national response and, thus, lift the burden of suffering caused by suicide and suicide attempts from individuals, families, communities and society as a whole."--Preface, page 03.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowlegements
    Executive summary
    Introduction
    Global epidemiology of suicide and suicide attempts
    Suicide mortality
    Suicide attempts
    Risk and protective factors, and related interventions
    Health system and societal risk factors
    Community and relationship risk factors
    Individual risk factors
    What protects people from the risks of suicide?
    The current situation in suicide prevention
    What is known and what has been achieved
    What are countries doing about suicide prevention now?
    Current legal status of suicide around the world and perspectives for change
    Working towards a comprehensive national response for suicide prevention
    How can countries create a comprehensive national strategy and why is it useful?
    How can progress be tracked when evaluating a national suicide prevention strategy?
    The cost and cost-effectiveness of suicide prevention efforts
    The way forward for suicide prevention
    What can be done and who needs to be involved?
    Forging a way forward
    What does success look like?
    Key messages
    References
    Annexes
    Annex 1. Estimated numbers and rates of suicide by sex and age, 2000 and 2012
    Annex 2. WHO Member States grouped by WHO Region and average income per capita.
    Digital Access WHO 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC569 .P725 2014
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Amy A. Eyler, Jamie F. Chriqui, Sarah Moreland-Russell, and Ross C. Brownson.
    Contents:
    Policy and prevention / Amy A. Eyler and Ross C. Brownson
    Policy explained / Shelley Golden and Sarah Moreland-Russell
    Policy theory / Sarah Moreland-Russell and Marissa Zwald
    Policy analysis / Jamie F. Chriqui and Sabrina K. Young
    Social determinants / Jason Q. Purnell, Sarah Simon, Emily B. Zimmerman, Gabriela J. Camberos, and Robert Fields
    Tobacco / Sarah Moreland-Russell and Shelley Golden
    Obesity and food policy / Jamie F. Chriqui and Christina N. Sansone
    Physical activity / Amy A. Eyler and Marissa Zwald
    Alcohol policy / Richard A. Grucza and Andrew D. Plunk
    Infectious disease / William G. Powderly
    Injury prevention / David A. Sleet and Frederic E. Shaw
    Violence / Melissa Jonson-Reid, Janet L. Lauritsen, Tonya Edmond, and F. David Schneider
    Sexual behavior / Bradley Stoner
    Illicit drug use / Duane C. McBride, Yvonne M. Terry-McElrath, and Curtis W. VanderWaal
    Tracking and surveillance / Jamie F. Chriqui and Amy Eyler
    Communication / Harry T. Kwon and David E. Nelson
    Advocacy / Roberta R. Friedman and Marlene B. Schwartz
    Next steps / Ross C. Brownson and Amy A. Eyler.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Raja A. S. Mukherjee, Neil Aiton, editors.
    Summary: This book presents clinical assessment and management solutions for those people who are exposed to Alcohol in Pregnancy. Over the last few decades we have begun to understand the enduring effects of prenatal alcohol exposure on the developing fetus. The consequence of prenatal alcohol exposure - Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorders is a lifelong disorder and affects children and adults. It is a condition which is significantly under-recognised for many reasons. Assessment and diagnosis requires the input of multiple different professionals, and referral pathways are often poorly developed or non-existent. Information to support and guide these professionals in practical ways, what to do and how to help, remains limited. This book seeks to fill some of that gap by offering professionals, clear and useable research-based information and guidance that will help in their practice whilst also being a useful resource for anyone new to this increasingly recognised area of work. The book is divided into four broad areas bringing together chapters authored by experts in their field including those with lived experiences. Part one focuses on presenting an overview of the condition, and approaching women about their alcohol use and risk followed by part two focusing more around diagnostic issues. Part three follows with management advice, and part four revolves around policy and health prevention in general. Each chapter is designed to offer insight but also practical tips and support in an accessible manner. The book offers an essential guide for a broad range of health and social care professionals working with this condition.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Overview FASD
    Alcohol and pregnancy: why is the evidence so confusing
    Pathology of FASD: a brief overview
    Knowledge and prevalence of FASD in communities
    Ethics of consuming alcohol in pregnancy
    Part 2 Prevention
    Public health strategies and FASD
    Alcohol related harm and recognition
    Brief interventions for alcohol using women
    Midwifery approaches to recognising drinking in pregnant women
    Social care issues in manging high risk families
    Part 3 Recognition
    Physical stigmata in FASD
    Ruling out other disorders related to FASD: a diagnosis of exclusion
    Growth problems in FASD
    Psychometric testing and FASD
    Communication assessments used in FASD
    Sensory processing in FASD
    Overlapping diagnoses in FASD
    Recognising a FASD child in the classroom
    Attachment and FASD
    Changing pattern of presentation in people with FASD with age
    Psychiatric difficulties in people with FASD
    Multidisciplinary approaches to FASD
    Part 4 Management
    Managing withdrawal in babies born to mothers abusing
    Development of commissioning awareness
    Clinical pathways for accessing care: including the role of the advocate
    Medication use in people with FASD
    Psychological therapies for FASD
    Educational strategies for people with FASD
    Social care needs for people and families with FASD
    Envornmental modifications and management of sensory issues for people with FASD
    Family support needs and the role of support groups.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bjørg Marit Andersen.
    Summary: This volume offers extensive information on preventive and infection surveillance procedures, routines and policies adapted to the optimal infection control level needed to tackle today’s microbes in hospital practice. It especially focuses on preventive measures for serious hospital infections. Each chapter includes a practical section that addresses the main aspects of procedures and treatment, and a theoretical section that contains updated documentation that can be used for further study, or to help select infection control measures. Infection control concerns all healthcare professional working directly or indirectly with patients; in diagnosis, treatment, isolation measures, operations, equipment, drugs, cleaning, textiles, transport, porter service, food and water, building and maintenance, etc. Hygiene and environmental control is central to infection prevention for patients, visitors and staff alike. Good hygienic practices, individual infection control, well implemented and frequent environmental cleaning, and a high professional standard of hygiene in the treatment and care of patients, are essential to patient safety and a safe working environment. Addressing this essential topic, this book is intended for doctors, nurses and other healthcare workers, students in health-related subjects, hospital managers and health bureaucrats, as well as patients and their families.

    Contents:
    Healthcare Associated Infections (HAI), registering and prevalence
    Microbes and ways of transmission
    Antimicrobials and resistance
    Tracing and prevention of infections
    Prevention of infections in Healthcare workers (HCW)
    Hand hygiene and the use of gloves
    Protection of Airways
    Isolation to protect against microbial transmission
    Care of patients; patient hygiene, mouth hygiene, treatment of wounds etc.
    Protection against airborne infections; ventilator equipments: use, cleaning and disinfection; ventilator associated pneumonia (VAP) etc.
    Prevention of postoperative wound infections
    Surgical hand disinfection
    Operation department- prevention of infections
    Treatment of operation wounds and drains
    Peritoneal dialysis
    Hemodialysis
    Catheter-associated, bloodborne infections
    Prevention of urinary tract infections
    Protection of premature and newborne against infections
    Intensive patient treatment
    prevention of infections
    ^Cystic fibrosis
    infections and preventive measures
    Important patient information before admission
    Import infections, unknown infection – preventive measures
    HCW exposed for infections
    Preventing transmission in healthcare institutions
    Disinfection of instruments and equipment
    Disinfection of endoscopes and other special equipment
    Sterilization
    Medicine room; hygiene and infection control
    Cleaning of patient rooms and departments
    Disinfection of rooms and areas
    Textiles; wash, control, transport and store
    Patient beds; wash, control, transport and store
    Human-biological waste; treatment, storing cleaning, control
    Ambulances in acute medicine and other transport of patients
    Food and other nourishment; service, dishwashing and control of hygiene
    Water and water systems in hospitals
    Technical and medical-technical equipment – infection control
    Laboratory medicine – infection control
    ^Building, arrange and establish on wards/departments
    Intern hygiene control – check list
    Dangerous microbes – preparedness in hospitals
    Resources for infection control work in hospitals.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Weizhong Yang, editor.
    Summary: This book systematically assesses the risk of 21 major infectious diseases threatening BRI countries. It consists of 14 chapters. Chapter 1 is an overview. Chapter 2 introduces the history of health cooperation between China and other BRI countries. Chapters 3-14 introduce the prevalence of major infectious diseases threatening BRI countries such as cholera, vaccine preventable diseases (polio, measles, meningitis, Japanese encephalitis, diphtheria, hepatitis A), tuberculosis, influenza, and insect-borne diseases (Dengue fever, Zika virus disease, yellow fever, Chikungunya, Rift Valley fever), plague, malaria, Ebola virus disease, MERS, schistosomiasis, COVID-19 and AIDS, and risk factors, principles and cases of their prevention and control. It is a useful reference book in the research of infectious disease control and prevention, and provides historical experience and lessons learned. It also provides decision support for international cooperation among BRI countries in the field of epidemic prevention and control in the future.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    2 Health Cooperation between China and Other Belt and Road Countries
    3 Cholera Risk Assessment, Control and Prevention
    4 Risk Assessment and Control on Vaccine-Preventable Diseases
    5 Risks of Tuberculosis Prevention and Control
    6 The Risk and Prevention and Control of Influenza
    7 The Risk, Prevention, and Control of Arthropod-borne Infectious Diseases
    8 Plague Risk and Prevention
    9 Malaria Risk and Control
    10 Ebola Virus Disease Risk and Control
    11 Risk and Prevention of Middle East Respiratory Syndrome (MERS)
    12 Schistosomiasis Risk and Prevention
    13 COVID-19 Risk and Control
    14 Risk of AIDS and Its Prevention and Control.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    comp. by Professional Service Dept., Frederick Stearns & Company Division.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F551 .S79 1944
    1
  • Digital
    Kristian Thorborg, David Opar, Anthony Shield, editors ; foreword by Michael Kjær.
    Summary: This innovative book presents the latest insights into hamstring strain injuries (HSI), one of the most common problems in elite and recreational sport, with a unique focus on prevention and rehabilitation. The research within this area has evolved rapidly over the past 10 years and this text offers a comprehensive overview of the recent and most relevant advances. It fills a gap in the literature, since other books focus on muscle injuries in general and their surgical treatment. Structured around the current evidence in the field, it includes sections on functional anatomy and biomechanics; basic muscle physiology in relation to injury and repair; assessment of risk factors; and factors associated with hamstring strains. It also discusses considerations in relation to acute and chronic injuries and hamstring injury prevention, including pre-season and in-season interventions, as well as management strategies and rehabilitation protocols. The final chapter is devoted to additional interventions when conservative rehabilitation and injury prevention fail. Written by renowned experts in the field, this book will be of great interest to sports physiotherapists, sports physicians, physical trainers and coaches.

    Contents:
    1 Functional anatomy and biomechanics
    2 Basic muscle physiology in relation to hamstring injury and repair
    3 Assessment of risk factors and factors associated with hamstring injury
    4 Diagnosis considerations in relation to acute and chronic hamstring injuries, including imaging, and muscle injury classification systems
    5 Hamstring injury prevention including both pre-season and in-season interventions and management strategies
    6 Rehabilitation of hamstring injuries, both acute and chronic
    7 Rehabilitation of hamstring ruptures
    8 Return to sport after hamstring injuries
    9 Optimising hamstring muscle strength and function for performance
    10 When conservative rehabilitation and injury prevention fails. (This will include injections, surgery etc.).
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Michael J. Wilkinson, Michael S. Garshick, Pam R. Taub, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses all aspects of non-pharmacologic approaches to primary and secondary CVD prevention. It highlights the strength of evidence for particular diet styles in CVD prevention, including plant-based diets, the Mediterranean diet, the DASH diet, and low-carbohydrate diets. Chapters present evidence and future directions for diet and nutrition in diseases related to CVD, such as dyslipidemia, cardiometabolic disease (pre-diabetes, the metabolic syndrome, type-2 diabetes mellitus), and obesity. Finally, the book reviews novel and emerging aspects of dietary intervention in CVD prevention, such as dietary approaches to inflammation and the role of the microbiome in CVD. Up-to-date, evidence-based, and clinically oriented, Prevention and Treatment of Cardiovascular Disease: Nutritional and Dietary Approaches is an essential resource for physicians, residents, fellows, and medical students in cardiology, clinical nutrition, family medicine, endocrinology, and lipidology.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Role of Dietary Nutrition, Vitamins, Nutrients and Supplements in Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 2. Impact of Nutrition on Biomarkers of Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 3. The Mediterranean Dietary Pattern
    Chapter 4. Dietary Approaches to Hypertension: Dietary Sodium and the DASH Diet for Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 5. The Impact of Carbohydrate Restriction and Nutritional Ketosis on Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 6. Plant Based Diets in the Prevention and Treatment of Cardiovascular Disease
    Chapter 7. Plant-Based Oils
    Chapter 8. Prevention and Treatment of Obesity for Cardiovascular Risk Mitigation: Dietary and Pharmacologic Approaches
    Chapter 9. Fasting for Cardiovascular Health
    Chapter 10. Optimal dietary approaches for those living with metabolic syndrome to prevent progression to diabetes and reduce the risk of cardiovascular disease
    Chapter 11. Optimal diet for diabetes: Glucose control, Hemoglobin A1c reduction, and CV risk
    Chapter 12. Dietary and Lifestyle Cardiometabolic Risk Reduction Strategies in Pro-inflammatory Diseases
    Chapter 13. Dietary approaches to lowering LDL-C
    Chapter 14. Lifestyle approaches to lowering triglycerides
    Chapter 15. Role of the Microbiome in Cardiovascular Disease
    Chapter 16. Dietary and nutritional recommendations for the prevention and treatment of heart failure
    Chapter 17. Dietary Considerations for the Prevention and Treatment of Arrhythmia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Marco Colizzi, Mirella Ruggeri, editors.
    Summary: The book brings together into a single text the interrelated but different research efforts to translate the current evidence on risk and outcome of severe mental disorders into a preventive perspective. The book also introduces a holistic approach to prevention in mental health, by combining biological, psychological and environmental evidence that attempts to blunt the risk and reduce the number of individuals with mental health vulnerabilities who eventually progress to the manifestation of a severe mental disorder. Finally, the book wants also to highlight the possibility to overcome the single disorder-oriented preventive approach in an attempt to intercept a wider at-risk youth population and explore clinical research areas underperformed where future efforts will have to concentrate. Mental health problems have their peak of incidence during the transition from childhood to young adulthood, interesting up to 20% adolescents. Half of those eventually developing such difficulties experience clinically relevant mental distress by the age of 14. Even more importantly, the symptomatic onset is generally anticipated by non-specific warning signs of psychosocial impairment potentially evolving in any severe mental disorder. This is of crucial importance, as almost one in two health problems contributing to the global disease burden across the 0-25 age span is a mental disorder. The search for preventive strategies among youth has developed over the past 2-3 decades, invigorated by a rethinking of mental disorders' ineluctable prodromal phase into a period where the trajectory of illness can be slowed down, blunted, or even halted. The paradigms for implementing preventing approaches in mental health have often developed independent of each other. This book aims at summarizing the available evidence and make a step towards a more mature vision of the potentialities of promotion and prevention in mental health.

    Contents:
    Part 1. General aspects and paradigms
    1. Gender and mental health prevention: when differences matter
    2. Clinical staging of psychiatric disorders: its utility in mental health prevention
    3. The Role of Psychopharmacology in Mental Health Prevention
    Part 2. Areas for intervention and improvement
    4. Postpartum (Puerperal) Psychosis: Risk factors, Diagnosis, Management and Treatment
    5. Childhood trauma and mental health: never too early to intervene
    6. Promoting positive parenting to prevent mental health problems
    7. Neurodevelopmental Disorders and Psychosocial Issues Later in Life
    8. Migration and mental health: from vulnerability to resilience
    9. Tackling Urbanicity and Pollution in Mental Health Prevention Strategies
    10. Is there room for anti-stigma interventions in mental health preventive programs?
    11. Combined prevention for substance use and mental health problems in youth: A glance at two conditions at high-risk for addiction
    12. Enhancing cognition in people with mental health vulnerabilities
    13. Targeting metabolic abnormalities in mental health prevention strategies
    14. Imaging in Psychiatry: a reappraisal of preventative potential
    15. Functional neurological symptoms: a potential sentinel of neurological and mental health disorders
    Part 3. Future perspectives
    16. Unmet therapeutic needs in psychotic illness: the gut-microbiome-endocannabinoid axis as a target for the development of new preventative strategies
    17. Prodromal dementias with Lewy bodies: a paradigm for identifying people at ultra-high risk
    18. Neglected vulnerabilities in mental health: where do we need to do more.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Almudena Sánchez-Vellegas, Ana Sánchez-Tainta.
    Summary: The Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease through the Mediterranean Diet presents dietary habits that will have maximum impact on cardiovascular health and other major chronic diseases. Data collected through the results of large clinical trials, such as PREDIMED, one of the longest trials ever conducted, has allowed researchers to conclude that the Mediterranean Diet provides the best evidence for health benefits. Studies have shown that the Mediterranean Diet is able to reduce the risk of cardiovascular hard clinical events by 30%. This book explores the components of this diet, including the consumption of extra virgin olive oil, nuts, fresh fruits and vegetables, fatty fish, poultry and red wine for optimal health benefits. Analyzes the results of clinical trials that show that a healthy dietary pattern can prevent cardiovascular and other major chronic diseases. Explores the components of The Mediterranean Diet in detail, allowing practitioners to pass this understanding on to patients for optimal health benefits. Contains recipes, including modified versions for special populations or different cultures.

    Contents:
    A healthy-eating model called mediterranean diet / Almudena, Sánchez-Villegas and Itziar Zazpe
    Epidemiological and nutritional methods / Estefanía Toledo
    Not all fats are unhealthy / Ligia J. Dominguez and Mario Barbagallo
    Virign olive oil / Almudena Sánchez-Villegas and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    A small handful of mixed nuts / Maira Bes-Rastrollo and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    Fruits and vegetables / Angeliki Papadaki and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    Cereals and legumes / Karen J. Murphy, Iva Marques-Lopes and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    More fish, less meat / Mary K. Downer and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    Red wine moderate consumption and at mealtimes / Alfredo Gea and Ana Sánchez-Tainta
    The mediterranean lifestyle / Ignacio Ara
    A healthy diet for your heart and brain / Almudena Sánchez-Villegas and Elena H. Martínez-Lapiscina
    The mediterranean cook / María Soledad Hershey and Ana Sánchez-Tainta.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Jadelson P. Andrade, Fausto J. Pinto, Donna K. Arnett, editors.
    Contents:
    Global burden of non-transmissible chronic diseases.- A global perspective about cardiovascular diseases.- Value of primary prevention for cardiovascular diseases.- How to estimate cardiovascular risk.- Tobacco and alcohol control
    preventable risk factors.- Physical inactivity: preventable risk factor for cardiovascular diseases.- Diet and cardiovascular health: global challenges and opportunities.- Raised blood cholesterol: preventable risk factor for cardiovascular diseases.- Hypertension: primary health care approach.- Diabetes: a primary health care approach
    Risk factors in childhood and youth.- Other determinants in cardiovascular diseases: social impact, globalization and urbanization.- Genetics of cardiovascular diseases.- Cardiovascular diseases in women: an update
    Rheumatic heart disease: a neglected condition.- Chagas disease.- Prevention and control of cardiovascular: policies, strategies and prevention.- Prevention and control of cardiovascular in low income countries.- Prevention and Control of cardiovascular: What Works?.- Prevention and control of cardiovascular: integrated and complementary strategies.- Post-traumatic stress disorders and cardiovascular diseases.- Individual interventions for prevention and control of cardiovascular diseases.- Social mobilization on prevention and control of cardiovascular diseases.- Frugal Innovation: Solutions for Sustainable Global Cardiovascular Health.- Atrial fibrillation and stroke prevention.- A global alliance for cardiovascular diseases prevention in clinical practice.- Priority areas for cardiovascular research.- Evidence for preventing cardiovascular diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ruth Solomon, John Solomon, Lyle J. Micheli, editors.
    Summary: Focusing exclusively on injury treatment and prevention in the young dancer, this comprehensive text addresses the unique needs of these athletes and stresses how their bodies differ in significant ways from adults', requiring that their training and clinical management be overseen by specialized personnel. The book opens with a discussion of the epidemiology of injury in the young dancer, followed by a description of screening procedures and a sample screening program. Physical therapy and resistance training are then covered, along with common conditions and injuries at the spine, hip, knee, and foot and ankle complex. Additional chapters discuss the use of diagnostic and interventional ultrasound, nutrition and bone health, psychological issues such as anxiety, eating disorders and peer relationships, and lastly the prevention of degenerative hip injuries. Prevention of Injuries in the Young Dancer is an essential resource with regard to the physical and psychological challenges facing young performers. It is relevant reading for dance medicine, sports medicine, and orthopedic professionals, as well as dancers, their parents, and especially those persons who promote their careers.

    Contents:
    Machine-generated contents note: 1. Epidemiology of Injury in the Young Dancer / Amy X. Yin
    2. Screening the Young Dancer: Summarizing Thirty Years of Screening / Itzhak Siev-Ner
    3. A Screening Program for the Young Dancer: Perspectives on What and Why to Include in a Screen / Maribeth Crupi
    4. Physical Therapy Rehabilitation for the Young Dancer / Maribeth Crupi
    5. Resistance Training for Pediatric Female Dancers / Avery D. Faigenbaum
    6. Spine Conditions in the Young Dancer / Joana L. Fraser
    7. Hip Injuries in the Young Dancer / Mininder S. Kocher
    8. Knee Problems in the Young Dancer / Marina G. Gearhart
    9. Foot and Ankle Injuries in the Adolescent Dancer / Nancy J. Kadel
    10. The Use of Diagnostic and Interventional Ultrasound in Treating and Preventing Injuries in the Young Dancer / Pierre d'Hemecourt
    11. Nutrition, Bone Health, and the Young Dancer / Derrick D. Brown
    12. Psychological Issues Facing the Injured Adolescent Dancer / Katherine L. Wilson
    13. Preventing Degenerative Hip Injuries from a Dance Technique Perspective / Ruth Solomon, Professor Emerita.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Olivia I. Okereke, editor.
    Contents:
    Prevention of Major Depression: A Global Priority
    The Framework for Prevention
    Social and Behavioral Risk Factors for Late-life Depression
    Prevention of Depression in Medical Conditions
    Vascular Depression and the Role of Neuroimaging and Biomarkers
    Measurement and Assessment in Late-life Depression
    Applications I: Indicated Prevention
    Applications II: Selective and Universal Prevention of Late-life Depression
    Health Policy and Economic Aspects of Late-life Depression Prevention
    Depression among Blacks during Late Life: Examining Within Group Variations
    Global Priorities and Possibilities.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Zili Sloboda, Hanno Petras, Elizabeth Robertson, Ralph Hingson, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides a serious examination of substance use prevention research and practice as components of the continuum from health promotion through to prevention and health care in sub-groups and in the general population. Extensive background chapters provide portals into the evolution of the field and the cutting edge research being conducted on the etiology, epidemiology, and genetics of substance use and abuse. The global nature and health burden of substance use and abuse incorporates assessments of the serious problems related to the prevention of legal substance use (i.e., alcohol and tobacco) and how lessons learned in those arenas may apply to the prevention of illicit substance use. Research and practice chapters detail a range of effective evidence-based programs, policies and practices and emerging prevention interventions from the literatures on the family and school contexts in addition to innovations involving mindfulness and the social media. Continued advancements in substance use prevention research, practice, training, and policy are projected. Included among topics addressed are: Progression of substance use to abuse and substance use disorders The tobacco prevention experience: a model for substance use prevention? Policy interventions: intended and unintended influences on substance use Qualitative methods in the study of psychoactive substance use Use of media and social media in the prevention of substance use Supporting prevention science and prevention research internationally The array of research accomplishments and real-world methods presented in Prevention of Substance Use merits the attention of a variety of researchers and practitioners, including public health professionals, health psychologists, and epidemiologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Kris Bosworth, editor.
    Summary: This straightforward volume makes a strong, practical, research-based case for integrating prevention programs into middle and high schools. Written by experts in prevention science and education, it examines educational goals and prevention of risky behaviors as parallel and complementary processes and provides evidence for health-promoting schools as a critical forum for student development. Chapters show the benefits of this collaboration, as instructors engage with prevention content, prevention scientists study schools and create interventions, and counselors develop and implement activities, resulting in improved academic, social, and health outcomes. Examples of successful prevention strategies address personal and public health issues as varied as substance abuse, dating violence, dropping out, and suicide. Among the topics covered: Engaging school leaders in prevention Developing school-based prevention curricula Scaling up evidence-based prevention interventions and practices Conducting prevention research and evaluation in schools Promoting a positive school climate and culture Reducing disruptive behavior, violence, and bullying Child and school psychologists, administrators, teachers, school counselors, and prevention specialists will find significant common ground in Prevention Science in School Settings. The breadth and depth of coverage point to new, multidisciplinary directions in health education, school climate/culture, and positive youth development.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Section 1: How Schools Work.- The American Education System 1970-Present
    Leadership in American Schools
    Counselors' Impact on Schools
    Teachers on the Frontline of Prevention Science
    Health Education and Health Services
    Section 2: Prevention Science
    Prevention Science: From Birth of the Field in 1970 to the Present
    Curriculum Development
    Scaling Up
    Section 3: Research in and with Schools
    Schools as Venues for Prevention Programming
    Evaluating and Researching School-Based Prevention
    School as a Unit of Analysis
    Section 4: Parallels between Education and Prevention Science
    Culture and Climate
    Social-Emotional Learning (SEL)
    Behavior and Discipline (Including Violence and Bullying)
    Suicide
    Dropout Prevention
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Godrey Grech, Iris Grossman, editors
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Preventive and predictive genetics: a perspective
    Roadmap to drug development enabled by pharmacogenetics
    Pharmacogenetics, statistical considerations
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacogenetics: bringing the magic bullet closer to reality
    Pharmacogenetics of adverse drug reactions
    Pharmacogenomics for haemoglobinopathies therapeutics
    Pharmacogenetics of neurodegenerative disorders
    Pharmacogenetics of asthma
    Pharmacogenetics and antineoplastic therapies
    Pharmacogenetics of coumarin anticoagulant therapy
    Implementation of genomic medicine: tools and challenges
    Ethical considerations in the genomic era
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Mary S. Fewtrell, Ferdinand Haschke, Susan L. Prescott.
    Contents:
    Early nutrition as a major determinant of 'immune health' : implications for allergy, obesity and other noncommunicable diseases / Prescott, S.L. (Australia)
    The future of infant and young children's food : food supply/manufacturing and human health challenges in the 21st century / Venter, C.; Maslin, K. (UK)
    Infant feeding : foods, nutrients and dietary strategies to prevent allergy / Beyer, K. (Germany)
    Using food and nutritional strategies to induce tolerance in food-allergic children / Nowak-Wȩgrzyn, A. (USA)
    Summary on allergy / Prescott, S.L. (Australia)
    Interrupting intergenerational cycles of maternal obesity / Gillman, M.W. (USA)
    Development, epigenetics and metabolic programming / Godfrey, K.M., Costello, P., Lillycrop K. (UK)
    Endocrine and metabolic biomarkers predicting early childhood obesity risk / Socha, P. (Poland), Hellmuth, C. (Germany), Gruszfeld, D. (Poland), Demmelmair, H., Rzehak, P., Grote, V., Weber, M. (Germany), Escribano, J., Closa-Monasterolo, R. (Spain), Dain, E., Langhendries, J.-P. (Belgium), Riva, E., Verduci, E. (Italy), Koletzko, B. (Germany), for the European Childhood Obesity Trial Study Group
    Effects of early nutrition on the infant metabolome / Hellmuth, C., Uhl, O., Kirchberg, F.F., Grote, V., Weber, M., Rzehak, P. (Germany), Carlier, C. (Belgium), Ferre, N. (Spain), Verduci, E. (Italy), Gruszfeld, D., Socha, P. (Poland), Koletzko, B. (Germany), for the European Childhood Obesity Trial Study Group
    Postnatal high protein intake can contribute to accelerated weight gain of infants and increased obesity risk / Haschke, F. (Austria), Grathwohl, D., Detzel, P., Steenhout, P., Wagemans, N. (Switzerland)
    Summary on obesity prevention / Haschke, F. (Austria)
    Complementary feeding : taste, eating behavior and later health
    Can optimal complementary feeding improve later health and development? / Fewtrell, M.S. (UK)
    Learning to eat : behavioral and psychological aspects / Birch, L.L., Flatt, W.P. (USA)
    The development of flavor perception and acceptance : the roles of nature and nurture / Forestell, C.A. (USA)
    Dietary patterns during complementary feeding and later outcomes / Emmett, P.M. (UK)
    Nature and nurture in early feeding behavior / Cooke, L. (UK)
    Summary on complementary feeding : taste, eating behavior and later health / Fewtrell, M.S. (UK).
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Sumita Mehta, Anshuja Singla, editor.
    Summary: This book explores all aspects of preventive oncology of the female genital tract and provides readers with detailed insights on the topic. Preventive oncology has long been recognized as a pressing need, though formally few steps have been taken to actively promote it. The book's respective chapters holistically cover the concept of cancer prevention for the female genital tract & breast. In addition, it explains the evidence-based value of each screening modality, and the rationale behind the recommended screening guidelines. In closing, the book highlights a wealth of recent evidence-based literature, making it a highly informative resource that will significantly broaden readers' understanding of preventive oncology.

    Contents:
    HPV epidemiology in prevention of cervical cancer
    Cytology versus HPV testing for primary prevention
    Methods of HPV testing: clinical implications
    Novel biomarkers for HPV detection
    Colposcopic principles & tissue basis
    Colposcopic features of cervical intraepithelial lesions
    HPV vaccines
    Cervical cancer screening in pregnancy
    Cervical cancer screening in low resource settings
    Ablative methods for treatment of intraepithelial lesions
    CIN 2 lesions: management dilemmas
    Follow up after treatment of CIN
    Epidemiology/Risk factors of endometrial cancers
    Role of cytology
    Hysteroscopy and cancer prevention
    Premalignant lesions of endometrium? Endometrial hyperplasia
    Hereditary endometrial cancers & prevention
    Chemoprevention of endometrial cancers
    Ovarian malignancy: risk factors
    Role of tumor markers
    Sonographic screening
    Role of prophylactic surgery/oophorectomy
    Risk factors for breast malignancy
    Role of breast examination/CBE
    Facts about mammography
    Cancer risk & genetic testing
    What's new in breast screening
    Classification of vulval lesions
    Vulvoscopy: the way forward
    Vulval intraepithelial lesions(VIN): diagnosis & management
    Vaginal intraepithelial lesions(VAIN)
    Screening guidelines for cervical cancer
    Screening guidelines for endometrial cancer
    Recommendations for ovarian cancer screening
    Breast cancer screening strategies
    Case discussions on various scenarios of different premalignant conditions of cervix, endometrium, breast & ovary.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ed Schoonveld.
    Contents:
    Pt. A. Drug market access and pricing basics
    pt. B. Structured market access and pricing approaches
    pt. C. Developing an integrated global strategy
    pt. D. Market access and pricing strategy implementation
    pt. E. Key healthcare systems.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Marty Makary, MD.
    Digital Access OverDrive 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA410.53 .M336 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Guido Gasparri, Michele Camandona, Nicola Palestini, editors ; foreword by Francesco Corcione.
    Contents:
    1 History of parathyroids
    2 Surgical anatomy of the parathyroid glands
    3 Parathyroid hormone secretion and action
    4 Etiology and pathogenesis of Primary hyperparathyroidism
    5 Clinical manifestations of Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    6 Diagnosis and differential diagnosis of Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    7 Management of Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    8 Preoperative localization for parathyroid surgery in Primary and Secondary Hyperparathyroidism
    9 Pathology of the parathyroid glands
    10 Parathyroid exploration for Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    11 Minimally invasive parathyroid surgery (MIP)
    12 Surgical technique in reoperations
    13 Genetic syndromes associated with primary hyperparathyroidism
    14 Parathyroid carcinoma
    15 Hypocalcemia after parathyroidectomy
    16 Secondary hyperparathyroidism in adult predialysis and dialysis patients
    17 Indications for parathyroidectomy in end-stage renal disease and after renal transplantation
    18 Patient information in Primary and Secondary Hyperparathyroidism.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Kenneth Cardona, Shishir K. Maithel.
    Summary: The incidence of primary and metastatic liver tumors is rising and the therapeutic armamentarium for these tumors is expanding at a rapid pace. As surgery remains the primary treatment modality for these tumors, this book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the art review of the current state of surgical, locoregional and systemic therapy options for malignant liver tumors. It serves as a valuable resource not only for surgeons, oncologists, and clinicians but also for researchers with an interest in malignant liver tumors. Chapters focus on the therapeutic approach to primary and metastatic tumors, providing an up-to-date review on surgical approach, new imaging techniques, patient selection, and technical considerations for liver resection and transplantation. In addition, the text provides new insight into novel and evolving therapies in the areas of advanced surgical techniques and liver-directed arterial based and ablative therapies. Written by experts in their fields, new and evolving approaches in diagnosis and treatment are described and lend insight into contemporary knowledge. Primary and Metastatic Liver Tumors: Treatment Strategy and Evolving Therapies serves as a useful resource for clinicians and researchers managing and treating patients with these challenging malignancies, and provides a concise yet comprehensive summary of the current status of the field that guides patient management and stimulate investigative efforts.

    Contents:
    Liver Resection and Liver-directed Therapies for Non-colorectal, Non-neuroendocrine Liver Metastases
    Radiographic Assessment for Liver Tumors
    Liver Transplantation for Hepatocellular Carcinoma: The Challenge of Organ Availability
    Surgical Approach in Hepatocellular Carcinoma: Resection Versus Transplantation
    Locoregional Therapies in the Management of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Hepatocellular Carcinoma: Role of Radiation Therapy
    Medical Therapy Options for Advanced Disease
    Guidelines for Resection of Intra-Hepatic Cholangiocarcinoma
    Regional Liver Directed Therapies for Intrahepatic Cholangiocarcinoma
    Role of Radiation Therapy for Intrahepatic Cholangiocarcinoma
    Current and Emerging Medical Therapies for Advanced Disease
    Pathological Classification and Surgical Approach to Hepatic Adenomas
    Regional Therapies for Hepatic Adenoma
    Preinvasive Cystic Neoplasms of the Intra- and Extrahepatic Bile Ducts
    Pre-malignant Cystic Neoplasms of the Bile Duct
    Colorectal Liver Metastases: Patient Selection and Surgical Approach
    Ablative Techniques for Colorectal Liver Metastases
    Hepatic Arterial Therapy for Colorectal Liver Metastases
    Hepatic Artery Infusion Therapy for Colorectal Cancer Liver Metastases
    Neuroendocrine Tumor Liver Metastases: Selection and Surgical Approach
    Liver-directed Therapies for Neuroendocrine Metastases
    Systemic Therapy for the Management Of Neuroendocrine Tumor Liver Metastases
    Patient Selection Guidelines for Resection and Liver-Directed Therapies: Non-colorectal, Non-neuroendocrine Liver Metastases
    Liver transplantation for Other Cancers
    Radiation Therapy for Liver Metastases
    MRI-guided Laser Ablation of Liver Tumors
    Hepatic Artery Infusion Therapy for Primary Liver Tumors
    Two-staged Approach to Liver Resection.
    Digital Access Springer 201220
  • Digital
    Thomas S. Roukis, Christopher Bibbo, Murray J. Penner, Mark A. Prissel, Gregory C. Berlet, Christopher F. Hyer, Markus Wunschel, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Part I: Introduction
    History of total ankle replacement in North America.- Survivorship of First, Second, and Third Generation Total Ankle Replacement Systems.- Fixed versus Mobile Bearings in Total Ankle Arthroplasty.- Total Ankle Replacement Based on Worldwide Registry Data Trends.- Total Ankle Replacement versus Ankle Arthrodesis.- Current Indications and Contraindications for Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    Part II: Primary Total Ankle Replacement.- Primary INBONE Total Ankle Systems.- INFINITY® Total Ankle System.- Prophecy: Preoperative Navigation Alignment Guides.- Primary Salto Talaris Total Ankle Prosthesis.- STAR Technique.- Primary Zimmer Trabecular Metal Total Ankle Replacement
    Part III: Secondary Procedures with Total Ankle Replacement.- Managing Wound Healing Complications after Total Ankle Replacement.- Managing Varus and Valgus Mal-alignment during Total Ankle Replacement.- Managing soft-tissue ankle equinus and anterior/posterior translation of the talus during total ankle replacement.- The science behind peri-prosthetic aseptic osteolysis in toal ankle replacement.- Management of Periprosthetic Cystic Changes after Total Ankle Replacement.- Arthroscopic débridement for soft-tissue impingement after total ankle replacement.- Managing heterotopic ossification after total ankle replacement.- Management of painful malleolar gutters after total ankle replacement.- Managing varus and valgus mal-alignment after total ankle replacement.- The Role of Peri-Articular Osteotomies in Total Ankle Replacement
    Part IV: Revision Total Ankle Replacement.- Failure and Success of Current Total Ankle Replacements Used in the United States.- Revision of aseptic osteolysis with and without component subsidence after total ankle replacement.- Management of the Infected Total Ankle Replacement.- Primary and revision total ankle arthroplasty in Japan.- Alternate Incision Approaches to Revision Total Ankle Replacement.- The Learning Curve Associated with Revision Total Ankle Replacement.- Revision of Failed Primary Agility and Agility LP Total Ankle Replacements.- Revision of the Failed INBONE Total Ankle Systems.- The Salto Talaris XT revision total ankle replacement system.- Revision of the failed STAR total ankle replacement.- Ankle and tibio-talo-calcaneal arthrodesis after failed total ankle replacement.- Ankle Arthrodesis and Malunion Takedown to Total Ankle Replacement.- Limb Salvage Techniques Following Failed Total Ankle Replacement. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Thomas S. Roukis, Christopher F. Hyer, Gregory C. Berlet, Christopher Bibbo, Murray J. Penner, editors.
    Summary: Now in a fully revised and updated second edition, this definitive text provides comprehensive coverage of all aspects of total ankle replacement (TAR), written by authors who are recognized experts in the field. Though the main focus is on total ankle replacement prostheses available for use in North America, the lessons learned and presented here are applicable to the growing volume of cases worldwide. Divided into five thematic sections, each chapter is a purposeful mix of theory, data, and tips/pearls with detailed illustrations, tables, and references. Appropriately evidence-based, they include bullet points for quick reference and rely heavily on step-by-step intraoperative photographs and radiology. Part I presents the history of TAR, implant considerations (mobile-bearing vs. fixed-bearing), and indications/contraindications for the procedure. The subsequent three sections discuss all aspects of primary TAR, procedures secondary to primary TAR, and revision TAR, respectively, bringing together the most recent evidence, implant options and surgical techniques. The final section covers topics related to limb salvage after failed TAR, including preventive measures, wound healing, and infection management. Generously illustrated and well-referenced, Primary and Revision Total Ankle Replacement remains the gold standard text on this topic for orthopedic surgeons, podiatrists and foot and ankle clinicians at all levels.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    History of Total Ankle Replacement in North America
    Total Ankle Replacement Based on Worldwide Registry Data Trends
    Mobile-Bearing versus Fixed-Bearing Total Ankle Replacement
    Total Ankle Replacement versus Ankle Arthrodesis
    Current Indications and Contraindications for Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    A Guide to Surgical Consent for Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    Risk Factors for Failure of Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    Cemented, Biocemented, and Cementless Total Ankle Replacement Fixation Methods
    3D Orthopedic Pre-operative Surgical Planning for Total Ankle Replacement
    Part II: Primary Total Ankle Replacement
    Cadence Total Ankle Arthroplasty
    INBONE 2 Total Ankle Replacement System Including Prophecy Specific Alignment Guides
    INFINITY® Total Ankle Replacement Including PROPHECY® Patient Specific Alignment Guides
    Vantage Total Ankle Replacement
    Hintermann Series H2 Fixed and H3 Mobile Bearing Total Ankle Replacement Systems
    Salto Talaris Total Ankle System and Salto Talaris XT Primary and Revision Total Ankle System
    STAR Total Ankle Replacement
    The Quantum Total Ankle Prosthesis
    Alignment/Rebalancing Procedures for Total Ankle Replacement
    Ankle Arthrodesis and Malunion Takedown to Total Ankle Replacement
    Part III: Secondary Procedures with Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Adjacent Joint Arthritis: Indications and Techniques for Concomitant or Staged Fusions of the Hindfoot and Midfoot
    Managing Significant Varus and Valgus Malalignment during Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Soft-Tissue Ankle Equinus and Anterior/Posterior Translation of the Talus During Total Ankle Replacement
    The Science Behind Periprosthetic Aseptic Osteolysis in Total Ankle Replacement
    Management of Periprosthetic Cystic Changes after Total Ankle Replacement
    Arthroscopic Debridement for Soft-Tissue Impingement after Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Heterotopic Ossification after Total Ankle Replacement
    Management of Painful Malleolar Gutters after Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Varus and Valgus Malalignment after Total Ankle Replacement
    The Role of Periarticular Osteotomies in Total Ankle Replacement
    Part IV: Revision Total Ankle Replacement
    Revision of Aseptic Osteolysis with and without Component Subsidence after Total Ankle Replacement
    Revision Total Ankle Arthroplasty
    The Salto Talaris XT Revision Total Ankle Replacement System
    Custom Metallic Prostheses after Failed Total Ankle Replacement
    Tibio-talo-calcaneal Arthrodesis after Failed Total Ankle Replacement: Autograft and Bulk Structural Allograft Techniques
    Tibio-talo-calcaneal Arthrodesis after Failed Total Ankle Replacement: Metallic 3D Printed Custom Cages
    Part V: Limb Salvage of Failed Total Ankle Replacement
    Preventative Measures against Wound Healing Complications after Total Ankle Replacement
    Managing Wound-Healing Complications after Total Ankle Replacement
    Alternate Incision Approaches to Revision Total Ankle Replacement
    Management of the Infected Total Ankle Replacement
    Permanent Polymethylmethacrylate Antibiotic Spacer for Definitive Management of Failed Total Ankle Replacements.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jonathan A. Bernstein, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a broad clinical overview of primary and secondary immunodeficiencies nested in clinical cases that will help the reader understand the approach to evaluation, diagnosis, and management of these challenging cases. Chapters begin with a comprehensive overview of immunodeficiencies to ground the reader in practical knowledge of the field and these complex conditions. Chapters cover B lymphocyte immunodeficiency, T cell immunodeficiency, immune dysregulation syndromes, and innate immune defects. They discuss a range of treatment options including gene therapy or bone marrow transplant. The book continues with a discussion on secondary immunodeficiencies and their treatment. Each chapter was written by authors with expertise related to different immunodeficiency disorders and provide a succinct overview of pathomechanisms, diagnosis, and treatment of a specific condition. Primary and Secondary Immunodeficiency will be an excellent resource for practicing allergists, hematologists, clinical immunologists, fellows, residents, and other clinicians who work with immunodeficiency patients.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Overview of Immunodeficiency
    Part I. B-Lymphocyte Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 2. Common Variable Immunodeficiency, Hypogammaglobulinemia, and Specific Antibody Deficiency
    Chapter 3. Agammaglobulinemia
    Chapter 4. Class Switch Defects
    Chapter 5. Transient Immunodeficiency of Infancy
    Chapter 6. Selective Isotype Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 7. Common Variable Immunodeficiency Disorders-like Disorders
    Part II. T-Cell Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 8. Severe Combined Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 9. Idiopathic CD4 Lymphopenia
    Chapter 10. Hyper IgE Syndrome
    Chapter 11. Genetic Syndromes with Associated Immunodeficiencies
    Part III. Immune Dysregulation Syndromes
    Chapter 12. Autoimmune Lymphoproliferative Syndrome
    Chapter 13. Auto-inflammatory Syndromes
    Chapter 14. Immune Dysregulation Leading to Autoimmunity
    Chapter 15. Dendritic Cells in Primary Immunodeficiency
    Part IV. Innate Immune Defects
    Chapter 16. Congenital Neutropenia and Migration Defects
    Chapter 17. Chronic Granulomatous Disease
    Chapter 18. Primary Immunodeficiencies of Complement
    Chapter 19. Natural Killer Cell Defects
    Chapter 20. Mucocutaneous Candidiasis
    Part V. Secondary Immunodeficiency
    Chapter 21. Immunodeficiency Secondary to Malignancies and Biologics
    Chapter 22. Immunodeficiency Secondary to Prematurity, Pregnancy, and Aging
    Chapter 23. Vaccinations in Primary and Secondary Immunodeficiencies Including Asplenia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Timothy J Watson, Paul JL Ong, James E Tcheng, editors.
    Summary: This book is open access under a CC BY 4.0 license. This quick-reference handbook offers a concise and practical review of key aspects of the treatment of ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction (STEMI) in the era of primary percutaneous coronary intervention (PPCI). In the context of STEMI, PPCI is the preferred mode of emergency revascularization. Access to PPCI is rapidly increasing and is now routinely practiced in both general and specialist hospitals and there has been a recent emphasis on developing STEMI networks to enhance and expedite the referral pathway. This coupled with concurrent developments to enhance the safety and efficacy of the PPCI procedure has heralded an era where STEMI interventions are increasingly considered an important subspecialty within interventional cardiology. Written by leading cardiologists who have been instrumental in the adoption of PPCI in their respective institutions, the book provides junior and senior cardiologists alike with insightful and thought-provoking tips and tricks to enhance the success of PPCI procedures, which may in turn translate into direct improvements in outcomes. The book is also relevant for healthcare providers and emergency department physicians.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Historical perspectives on management of acute myocardial infarction
    Pre-hospital diagnosis and management of acute myocardial infarction
    STEMI network and logistics - rural vs. urban
    Cath lab design, staffing, training
    Patient preparation and vascular access for primary PCI
    Management of intra-coronary thrombus
    Culprit only artery versus multi-vessel disease
    Pharmacologic therapies in primary PCI - antiplatelet agents
    Pharmacologic therapies in primary PCI - glycoproteins, heparins, bivalirudins, etc
    Pharmacologic therapies in primary PCI - inotropes, etc
    Drug-eluting stents vs. bare-metal stents in Primary PCI
    Is there still a debate?
    Drug-eluting balloons in primary PCI
    High bleeding risk scenarios in primary PCI
    Mechanical complications of myocardial infarction - free-wall rupture, VSD, acute MR
    The role of mechanical circulatory support in primary PCI - IABP, ECMO, IMPELLA, LUCAS?
    Methods of reducing infarct size and reperfusion injury in primary PCI
    Time to reperfusion, door to balloon times, and how to reduce them
    Utilization of facilitated and rescue angioplasty in primary PCI
    Primary angioplasty: the economics
    Role of bypass surgery in acute myocardial infarction: indications, timing, outcome
    Role of intravascular imaging in emergency PCI
    Patients ineligible for primary PCI .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Clement C.Y. Tham, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to provide the readers with an up-to-date and evidence-based management approach for primary angle closure glaucoma (PACG), which makes effective and safe use of all the interventions currently available. The book presents to the glaucoma subspecialists and the general ophthalmologists a clear and concise introduction to the latest advances in the management of primary angle closure glaucoma (PACG), from the latest imaging technologies to objectively quantify the drainage angle closure and structural glaucomatous progression, to an up-to-date review of the laser and surgical options for treating PACG. The laser and surgical interventions include laser peripheral iridotomy, laser peripheral iridoplasty, lens extraction alone or in combination with other glaucoma surgery, filtration surgery (including minimally-invasive and non-penetrating variants), goniosynechialysis (GSL), glaucoma drainage device implantation, and cyclodestructive procedures. This informative book, written based on the authors' vast clinical, teaching, and research experience in this field, will offer the readers in-depth and useful resources on PACG.

    Contents:
    1 Primary Angle Closure Glaucoma (PACG) - A Logical Approach Base on Angle Closures Types and Mechanism
    2 Intraocular Pressure Fluctuation in Angle Closure Glaucoma
    3 Objective Quantitative Evaluation of Angle Closure
    4 Medical Therapy in Angle Closure Glaucoma
    5 Laser Peripheral Iridotomy
    6 Laser Peripheral Iridoplasty
    7 The role of selective laser trabeculoplasty in primary angle closure glaucoma
    8 Lens extraction in PACG
    9 Goniosynechialysis For Synechial Angle Closure
    10 Filtration Surgery and Glaucoma Drainage Devices in PACG
    11 Cyclodestructive Procedures
    12 Trabecular, Canal and Suprachoroidal Surgery in Primary Angle Closure
    13 Malignant glaucoma and choroidal detachment after drainage surgery and its management
    14 Management of acute primary angle closure
    15 Recent Advances in our Understanding of the Genetic Basis of Primary Angle-closure Glaucoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Alain Dabdoub, Bernd Fritzsch, Arthur N. Popper and Richard R. Fay, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Connecting the inner ear to the central auditory system: molecular development and characteristics of the primary auditory neurons and their network
    2. Early development of the spiral ganglion
    3. Neurotrophic factor function during ear development: expression changes define critical phases for neuronal viability
    4. The electrophysiological signature of spiral ganglion neurons
    5. The ribbon synapse between type I spiral ganglion neurons and inner hair cells
    6. Central projections of spiral ganglion neurons
    7. The spiral ganglion in an out-of-body experience: a brief history of in vitro studies of the spiral ganglion
    8. Loss, degeneration, and preservation fo the spiral ganglion neurons and their processes
    9. Stem cells for the replacement of auditory neurons.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey Nursing
    ClinicalKey
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    98
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    41
  • Digital
    editors, Robert F. Kushner, Daniel H. Bessesen, Adam H. Gilden
    Summary: "Written by and for primary care professionals, this unique title presents step-by-step, evidence-based information for the assessment and treatment of patients who present with overweight or obesity. Highly practical and easy to use, Primary Care: Obesity helps you develop and hone the specific knowledge, skills, and clinical practices necessary to provide effective care to this highly prevalent and at-risk patient population. This comprehensive guide is an essential resource for today's internal medicine and family medicine physicians, pediatricians, nurse practitioners, physician assistants, and other healthcare professionals who practice outpatient primary care"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Obesity as a disease / David R. Saxon, Daniel H. Bessesen
    The obesity encounter / Robert F. Kushner
    Assessment and staging : identification and evaluation of the high-risk patient / W. Timothy Garvey
    Comanagement of obesity-related comorbidities : assessment, treatment, and monitoring / Sharon J. Herring, Keerthana Kesavarapu, Jessica Briscoe
    Dietary treatment / Maria L. Collazo-Clavell
    Physical activity treatment / Seth A. Creasy, Danielle Marie Ostendorf, Victoria A. Catenacci
    Behavioral treatment / Ariana M. Chao, Kerry M. Quigley, Thomas A. Wadden
    Obesity pharmacotherapy / Donna H. Ryan, Rekha Kumar
    Metabolic and bariatric surgery / Wayne J. English, Vance L. Albaugh
    Care of the post-bariatric surgery patient / Christopher D. Still, Peter N. Benotti, Shannon Marie McShea, Fahad Zubair
    Pediatric and adolescent obesity / Edmond Pryce Wickham III, Melanie K. Bean
    Practice management / Ethan A. Lazarus, Adam H. Gilden
    Team care, referrals, and practice resources / Deborah Bade Horn
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Terry Mahan Buttaro, JoAnn Trybulski, Paticia Polgar-Bailey, Joanne Sandberg-Cook.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2020
  • Digital
    Bobby Desai, Alpa Desai, editors.
    Summary: This book is written for physicians who work within an emergency department or urgent care setting to provide them with a treatment plan for those patients who are deemed not to have an emergency medical situation and can be safely treated as an outpatient. Emergency physicians (EPs) see a wide variety of patients and ostensibly for emergency reasons. However, many patients present to the emergency department for primary care-related reasons due to multiple factors or are diagnosed with potentially chronic problems that require a primary care intervention. Examples include a new diagnosis of hypertension (without hypertensive emergency) or diabetes. Thus, it is prudent for the EP to learn about basic primary care management of these conditions. Unfortunately, the training of EPs does not include these conditions, and they are left to guess appropriate treatment or to start a new medication that may not be appropriate. This book aims to fill this gap by educating the EP on basic primary care interventions for specific conditions.

    Contents:
    Headache
    Eye Issues (Stye, etc) + The Red Eye
    Ear Pain + Cerumen Impaction
    Oral Issues (Sore throat, etc) + Dental Pain
    Cough, Cold & Congestion
    Allergies (Allergic rhinitis, etc) Sinonasal Disease
    Neck Pain Dysphagia + Odynophagia
    Noncardiac chest pain, including chest wall pain
    Hypertension
    GERD/Heartburn
    Dyspnea
    Hemoptysis
    Abdominal pain
    Irritable bowel syndrome
    Bloating
    Constipation
    Diarrhea
    Hemorrhoids
    Vaginal problems
    Dysmenorrhea
    Diabetes Mellitus
    Back pain including Sciatica
    Skin problems (including scabies)
    Insomnia
    Anxiety
    Depression.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Allan H. Goroll, Albert G. Mulley, Jr.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Emergency)
    LWW Health Library (Internal Medicine)
    LWW Health Library (PA Rotations)
    LWW Health Library (PA Rotations)
  • Digital
    [edited by] Allan H. Goroll, Albert G. Mulley Jr.
    Contents:
    Principles of primary care
    Systemic problems
    Cardiovascular problems
    Respiratory problems
    Gastrointestinal problems
    Hematologic and oncologic problems
    Endocrinologic problems
    Gynecologic problems
    Genitourinary problems
    Musculoskeletal problems
    Neurologic problems
    Dermatologic problems
    Ophthalmologic problems
    Ear, nose and throat problems
    Psychiatric and behavioral problems
    Multidisciplinary and allied fields.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Internal Medicine)
    LWW Health Library (PA Rotations)
    LWW Health Library (Emergency)
  • Digital
    edited by Linda Gask, University of Manchester, Tony Kendrick, University of Southhampton, Robert Peveler, University of Southhampton, Carolyn A. Chew-Graham, Keele University.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Carlos Augusto de Mendonça Lima, Gabriel Ivbijaro, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    David Heber, Zhaoping Li.
    Contents:
    Incorporating nutrition into primary care practice
    Personalization of nutrition advice
    Nutrition and immune system
    Nutrition and gastrointestinal disorders
    Approach to the overweight and obese patient
    Evolution of type 2 diabetes mellitus
    Managing diabetes without weight gain
    Fatty liver
    Lipid disorders and management
    Nutrition and coronary artery disease
    Hypertension and obesity
    Nutrition and renal failure
    Nutrition and heart failure
    Pulmonary function, asthma, and obesity
    Frailty nutrition and elderly
    Nutrition and neurodenerative disorders
    Gene-nutrient interactions
    Nutrition and risks of common forms of cancer
    Nutrition and the cancer patient
    Writing a personal nutrition prescription.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Christopher J. Wong, editor.
    Summary: Solid organ transplantation offers a new chance at life to those suffering from failing organs. With these successes, however, comes the everyday management that is required to maintain health. The field of solid organ transplantation has become a part of medicine that generalists should be familiar with, as recipients are living longer and frequently returning to primary care for management. While specialists will still need to be involved with the care of solid organ transplant recipients on a life-long basis, many conditions will still need initial and often ongoing care by generalists, including infections, metabolic conditions, psychiatric illnesses, and malignancy. This book focuses on the care of adult solid organ transplant recipients, and is targeted at the level of the primary care provider. It begins with an introduction and overviews of solid organ transplantation and anti-rejection medications. It then delves into organ-specific chapters that provide the primary care provider with an overview of how to take care of patients with the most commonly-transplanted solid organs: kidney, kidney-pancreas, liver, heart, and lung. The final section focuses on specific complications that arise from transplantation including cancer, metabolic conditions, infections, and common presenting syndromes. Preventative health is also discussed, and the book concludes with a chapter on palliative care. Primary Care of the Solid Organ Transplant Recipient is a unique text that provides the reader with organ and complication-specific sections that can be independently read as they relate to the individual physicians and their patients. Written by experts in the field, this text is a valuable resource for primary care providers, medical students, residents and anyone involved in the care of solid organ transplant recipients.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Overview of adult solid organ transplantation for primary care providers
    Anti-rejection medication therapy in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Primary care of the adult kidney transplant and kidney-pancreas transplant recipient
    Primary care of the adult liver transplant recipient
    Primary care of the adult heart transplant recipient
    Primary care of the adult lung transplant recipient
    Infections in the adult-solid organ transplant recipient
    Common syndromes in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Cancer risk in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Metabolic complications in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Preventive health in the adult solid organ transplant recipient
    Palliative care in the adult solid organ transplant recipient.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Charles De Mesa, Samir J. Sheth, Craig Keenan, Robert M. McCarron, Joslyn John.
    Summary: "Authored by experts in pain medicine and internal medicine at the University of California, Davis School of Medicine, Primary Care Pain Management delivers just the right amount of clinically relevant information for primary care physicians, nurse practitioners, and physician assistants. Addressing safe and effective pain management in the primary care setting, it follows a user-friendly, high-yield format for quick reference at the point of care, helping you understand the full range of options for treating patients with chronic and acute pain"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    Cathryn B. Heath, Sandra M. Sulik, editors.
    Summary: There are many reasons for primary care providers to offer women's health procedures in an office setting, from the values patients place on continuity of care to the lack of access to specialty care tha patients may experience in rural areas. This book introduces simple office procedures to clinicians, as well as office staff who must familiarize themselves with new equipment and billing and coding information.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Introduction: The Case for Procedures in Primary Care
    Case Studies
    Location of Practice
    Continuity of Care: "The Medical Home"
    Procedure Training
    Insurance Coverage
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Coding, Billing, and Reimbursement for Procedures
    Introduction
    Procedure Coding
    Documentation of Procedures
    Insurance Company Coverage
    Durable Medical Goods
    Charity Care Procedures
    Cosmetic Surgery Billing
    Summary
    References
    Additional Resource
    Websites Chapter 3: Legal Aspects of Office-Based Women's Health Procedures
    Introduction
    Office Physical Plant Concerns
    O.S.H.A. Concerns
    Promotion of Services
    Credentialing Concerns
    Informed Consent
    Rights of Minors
    Use of Chaperones
    Patient Preprocedure Preparation Concerns
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Cervical Cytology and Pap Smears
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Pessary
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Contraceptives
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Diaphragms Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Long-Acting Reversible Contraception (LARC), IUDs and Implants
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Colposcopy and Loop Electrocautery Excision Procedure (LEEP)
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Endometrial Biopsy
    Procedure-Specific Legal Concerns: Elective Termination of Pregnancy in the United States
    References
    Chapter 4: Population Health in Women's Healthcare
    Introduction
    Health Outcomes
    Policies and Interventions
    Patterns of Social Determinants
    Summary
    References
    Additional Resources Chapter 5: Empathic Pelvic Examination
    Introduction
    Case Study
    Diagnosis (Algorithm 5.1)
    Indications (Algorithm 5.1)
    Contraindications
    Equipment (Fig. 5.1)
    Procedure
    Complications and Risks
    Tricks and Helpful Hints
    Procedure Note
    Coding
    Postprocedure Patient Instructions
    Case Study Outcome
    Postprocedure Patient Handout
    References
    Additional Resources
    Articles
    Websites
    Videos
    Chapter 6: Difficult Exams: Cystocele, Rectocele, Stenotic Cervix/Cervical Dilatation, Nonsexually Active Women, and Elderly Women
    Introduction
    Case Study Diagnosis (Algorithms 6.1 and 6.2)
    Differential Diagnosis (Algorithms 6.1 and 6.2)
    Indications (Algorithms 6.1 and 6.2)
    Contraindications
    Equipment (Fig. 6.1)
    Procedure
    Complications and Risks
    Tricks and Helpful Hints
    Procedure Note
    Coding
    Postprocedure Patient Instructions
    Case Study Outcomes
    Postprocedure Patient Handout
    References
    Chapter 7: Sexual Assault Victim Examination
    Introduction
    Case Study
    Indications (Algorithm 7.1)
    Contraindications
    Equipment
    Optional Equipment
    Procedure (Algorithm 7.1)
    Tricks and Helpful Hints
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Ovid
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert M. McCarron, Glen L. Xiong, Shannon Suo, Paul Summergrad, Philip R. Muskin, Sarah Rivelli ; assistant editors, Matthew Reed, Shawn Hersevoort.
    Summary: "Publisher's Note: Products purchased from 3rd Party sellers are not guaranteed by the Publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product. Perfect for primary care physicians, nurse practitioners, and PAs, who are routinely confronted with behavioral health disorders among patients in a primary care setting, the second edition of this unique multimedia handbook--now affiliated with the Association of Medicine and Psychiatry--sits at the intersection of primary care and psychiatry. You'll find much that is new: updated fundamentals on depression, anxiety, psychosis, substance, and eating disorders, as well as overviews on CBT, motivational therapy, and common pharmacological therapies. With contributors from the worlds of both psychiatry and primary care, you have a perfect package on how to integrate the two in order to deliver better mental health care for your patients. Ebook now features 30-minute educational videos, instructional PowerPoint slides, and a 15-question multiple-choice assessment for every chapter. Includes tips on navigating the psychiatric interview and updated DSM-5 diagnostic criteria. Disorder-specific chapters follow a handy templated format: clinical highlights, diagnosis, treatment, medications, practice tips, and more. True-to-life case studies and patient scenarios illuminate key concepts in psychiatry. Guidance on navigating the Collaborative Care Model and applying the primary care psychiatry assessment. Packed with easy-to-read figures and tables that helps make information easy to digest and implement. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience with Enhanced Video, Audio and Interactive Capabilities! Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. Adapt for unique reading needs, supporting learning disabilities, visual/auditory impairments, second-language or literacy challenges, and more."--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    Ben Yuk Fai Fong, Vincent Tin Sing Law, Albert Lee, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    About the Book
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    Part I: Principles of Primary Care and Systems
    Chapter 1: Renewal of Primary Care
    Primary Health Care: Roles and Challenges
    Health for All: Declaration of Alma-Ata
    Development of Primary Care
    History of Primary Health Care
    Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion in 1986
    The New Public Health
    The Bangkok Charter for Health Promotion in a Globalized World (2005) The World Health Report 2008: Primary Health Care - Now More Than Ever
    Shanghai Declaration on Promoting Health in the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development (2016)
    Primary Health Care Revisited
    The World Perspectives
    Cases of Developed Countries
    Cases of Developing Countries
    Priority Setting in Primary Health Care
    Evidence-Based Primary Care
    The Way Forward
    References
    Chapter 2: Philosophy of Primary Health Care
    Philosophy of Primary Health Care Needs Urgent Revisitation
    What Actually Contribute to Health Improvement? Failing to Meet the Challenges of Health-Care Provision
    Ecology of Health Care
    Management of Chronic Illnesses by Primary Health Care Versus Various Hospital Specialities
    Some Other Important Key Features of Primary Health Care
    Case Scenario Demonstration of the Key Features of Primary Care (Lee 2019)
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Fiscal Sustainability Challenge and the Importance of Primary Healthcare
    Introduction
    Health Financing Models
    The Beveridge Model
    The Bismarck Model
    The Mandatory Savings Model
    The Private Health Insurance Model The Out-of-Pocket Model
    Major Challenges Facing the Current Healthcare Systems
    The Economic Benefits of Primary Healthcare
    Creating a Better Balance Between Tertiary and Primary Care
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Sustainable Healthcare Systems
    Introduction
    Healthcare in Australia
    Medicare
    Overview of the Australian Healthcare System
    Primary Healthcare
    Access to Health Facilities and Services
    Tax-Funded Public Insurance and Lifetime Health Cover
    Shortage of Manpower
    Healthcare in the United Kingdom
    Role of NHS Overview of the UK Healthcare System
    Primary Healthcare
    UK Healthcare System Challenges
    Healthcare in Canada
    Strengths of the Canadian System
    Access to Healthcare
    Primary Care in Canada
    Drawbacks of the Canadian System
    Preference for Private Service
    Waiting Time
    Canada Health Act
    Elderly Care in Canada
    Healthcare in Hong Kong
    Key Initiatives
    Public-Private Partnership
    Primary Care Office
    Delivery of Quality Service
    Electronic Health Record
    Major Concerns
    Public Services Are Hospital-Oriented
    Challenges Practical and Sustainable Healthcare Systems
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    James F. Pagel, S.R. Pandi-Perumal, editors.
    Summary: Diagnosing and treating sleep disorders have been added to the primary care physician's list of ever-growing responsibilities. This added expectation presents many risks since sleep medicine is rarely included in the curricula of medical schools or in non-sleep medicine residency training. The second edition to Primary Care Sleep Medicine fulfills the need of a comprehensive text assisting the physician with up-to-date information on the sleep medicine field. This updated volume represents the cutting edge of knowledge for the field, with summaries of the latest research on new diagnostic tests, medications and therapies; useful for any physician considering specialization in the field. Chapters are authored by leaders in the field of sleep medicine with an understanding of the primary care environment. Practical and comprehensive, this text is an invaluable resource for physicians and allied health professionals.

    Contents:
    Sleep Disorders in Primary Care: Evidence-Based Clinical Practice
    Epidemiology of Sleep
    Assessment of Insomnia
    Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy Approaches for Insomnia
    Pharmacological Treatment of Insomnia
    Determinants and Measurements of Daytime Sleepiness
    Central Sleep Apnea: Implications for the Failing Heart
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea: Clinical Presentation
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea/Hypopnea Syndrome: Epidemiology and Pathogenesis
    Evidence and Mechanisms Linking Obstructive Sleep Apnea to Cardiovascular Disease
    Treatment for Obstructive Sleep Apnea: Surgical and Alternative Treatments
    Positive Airway Pressure Therapy for Obstructive Sleep Apnea/Hypopnea Syndrome
    Oral Appliances for the Treatment of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Medicolegal Aspects of Obstructive Sleep Apnea/Hypopnea Syndrome
    Overview of the Treatment of Obesity
    Sleep in Patients With Pulmonary Disease
    Pediatric Sleep I: Normal Sleep and Nonrespiratory Sleep Complaints: Infancy Through Adolescence
    Pediatric Sleep II: Pediatric Sleep-Disordered Breathing
    Sleep and Sleep Disorders in Women
    Parasomnia in Adults
    Clinical Features, Diagnosis and Treatment of Narcolepsy
    Mental Disorders Associated With Disturbed Sleep
    Sleep and the Esophagus
    Circadian Rhythm Disorders
    Bruxism
    Restless Legs Syndrome and Periodic Limb Movements
    Introduction to Polysomnography
    Portable Monitoring
    Correct CPT Coding, Billing, and Documentation in Sleep Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editor, Jong-Soo Lee.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive, in-depth, and up-to-date resource on eye examination that will be of great practical value for ophthalmologists and optometrists. The aim is to guide the practitioner through the diagnostic process and the implications for management of the ocular patient, and in so doing to demonstrate that it is possible to reach appropriate decisions on the basis of eye examination. Every year, existing ocular equipment is being upgraded and new diagnostic equipment is appearing on the market. This book reflects recent progress in upgrading by providing information and guidance on the latest innovations in ocular examination and eye testing while also highlighting the continuing important role of the traditional eye test. The coverage accordingly ranges from such long-established techniques as ophthalmoscopy, tonometry, and slit lamp examination through to the latest advances in OCT technologies, digital fundus photography, confocal scanning laser ophthalmoscopy, ocular ultrasound, and angiography. The authors hope that the book will assist all practitioners who perform ophthalmologic examinations. .

    Contents:
    1. Eye Examination Sequence.- 2. Visual Acuity Test.- 3. Refraction & Glasses Exam.- 4. Contact Lens.- 5. Accommodation & Convergence.- 6. Color Vision Test.- 7. Dark Adaptation.- 8. Ocular alignment & Movement Exam
    9. Binocular Vision Exam.- 10. Slit lamp Exam.- 11. Conjunctiva & Cornea Exam.- 12. Pupil Exam.- 13. Tonometry.- 14. Anterior Chamber Angle Exam.- 15. Optic nerve & Retinal nerve fiber Exam.- 16. Visual Field Exam.- 17. Fundus Exam
    18. Fluorescein & Indocyanine Green Angiography.- 19. Ultrasound Exam.- 20. Optical Coherence Tomography.- 21. Electrophysiologic Test.- 22. Preoperative exam.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nima Rezaei, Asghar Aghamohammadi, Luigi D. Notarangelo, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to primary immunodeficiency diseases
    2. Combined T- and B-cell immunodeficiences
    3. Predominantly antibody deficiences
    4. Phagocytes defects
    5. Genetic disorders of immune regulation
    6. Defects in intrinsic and innate immunity: receptors and signaling components
    7. Autoinflammatory disorders
    8. Complement deficiences
    9. Other well-defined immunodeficiencies
    10. Syndromic immunodeficiencies
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Daniele Bissacco, Alberto M. Settembrini, Andrea Mazzari, editors.
    Summary: "Thinking as a specialist, acting as an ER doctor." The emergency setting remains one of the most important parts of daily clinical practice for surgeons. Moreover, the triage surgeon may be faced with complicated patients, who are often suffering from a wide range of diseases and emerging conditions. To this end, the emergency surgeon must know how to interpret the symptoms/signs of each condition and initiate appropriate management before directing the patient to the most correct path and specialist. Although several books have been published concerning a specific surgical field (e.g. emergencies in vascular, thoracic or general surgery), this book provides a concise and quick point of view describing the clinical and instrumental surgical pictures in all vascular, thoracic, and general surgical emergencies. This approach can be useful in gaining a practical understanding of different clinical scenarios in order to adopt a correct management and treatment. It offers a simple guide to discriminating between urgent and non-urgent conditions, avoiding unnecessary diagnostic and interventional workup. This book would like to be a practical help also for general practitioners and emergency physicians to learn more about primary management of life threatening pathologies.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1: Historical Overview
    1.1 New Science
    1.2 Young People in Science
    Part I: Surgical Instruments and Materials
    2: Surgical Instruments and Materials in General Surgery
    2.1 Cut and Dissect Instruments
    2.1.1 Monopolar Electrosurgery
    2.1.2 Bipolar Electrosurgery
    2.1.3 Ultrasonic Energy
    2.1.4 Radiofrequency Energy
    2.2 Grasp and Hold Instruments
    2.3 Clamp Instruments
    2.4 Suture Instruments
    2.5 Suction Instruments
    2.6 Surgical Staplers and Clips
    2.7 Retractors
    2.8 Laparoscopic Surgery
    References 3: Surgical Instruments and Materials in Thoracic Surgery
    3.1 Thoracentesis
    3.2 Tube Thoracostomy
    3.3 Thoracotomy
    3.4 Video-assisted Thoracic Surgery (VATS)
    Further Reading
    4: Surgical Instruments and Materials in Vascular Surgery
    4.1 Introduction
    4.1.1 Open Surgery
    4.1.2 Endovascular Surgery
    4.1.3 Hybrid Surgery
    References
    Part II: Neck
    5: Supra-aortic Trunks Emergency Conditions
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Anatomy of Supra-aortic Trunks
    5.3 Stroke
    5.4 Internal Carotid Artery Stenosis
    5.4.1 Etiology 5.4.2 Asymptomatic and Symptomatic Patients
    5.4.3 Clinical Presentation
    5.4.4 Diagnosis
    5.4.5 Treatment
    5.4.5.1 Complication Following Carotid Intervention
    5.5 Carotid Artery Dissection
    5.5.1 Etiology
    5.5.2 Clinical Presentation
    5.5.3 Diagnosis
    5.5.4 Treatment
    5.6 Vertebral Artery Disease
    5.6.1 Etiology
    5.6.2 Clinical Presentation
    5.6.3 Diagnosis
    5.6.4 Treatment
    5.7 Vascular Injuries to the Cervical Vessels
    5.7.1 Etiology
    5.7.2 Clinical Presentation
    5.7.3 Diagnosis
    5.7.4 Treatment
    References 6: Upper Airways Tract in Emergency Settings
    6.1 Hemoptysis
    6.1.1 Etiology
    6.1.2 Clinical Presentation
    6.1.3 Diagnosis
    6.1.4 Treatment
    6.2 Airway Obstruction
    6.2.1 Etiology
    6.2.2 Clinical Presentation
    6.2.3 Diagnosis
    6.2.4 Treatment
    6.2.5 Main Causes of Airway Obstruction
    6.2.5.1 Foreign Bodies' Inhalation
    6.2.5.2 Tracheal Stenosis
    6.2.5.3 Malignant Airway Obstruction
    6.3 Tracheobronchial Injuries
    6.3.1 Etiology
    6.3.2 Clinical Presentation
    6.3.3 Diagnosis
    6.3.4 Management
    6.4 Pneumomediastinum
    6.4.1 Etiology 6.4.2 Clinical Presentation
    6.4.3 Diagnosis
    6.4.4 Management
    References
    7: Multidisciplinary Surgical Consensus on Neck Emergencies
    7.1 General Approach to Neck Emergencies
    7.1.1 Airway Patency Assessment
    7.1.2 Evaluation of Bleeding
    7.1.3 Evaluation of a Possible Involvement of the Surrounding Tissues
    7.2 Etiologies of Neck Emergencies
    7.2.1 Traumatic Neck Emergencies
    7.2.2 Remember
    7.2.2.1 Extrinsic Forces
    7.2.2.2 Intrinsic Forces
    Foreign Bodies
    7.2.2.3 Caustics
    7.2.2.4 Non-traumatic Neck Emergencies
    7.2.3 Infections
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Suk-Kyung Hong, Dong Kwan Kim, Sang Ryong Jeon, editors.
    Summary: This well-illustrated book describes a practical approach to the primary management of patients who have multiple injuries, or polytrauma, with the aim of providing medical and paramedical personnel with the knowledge required in order to achieve optimal clinical outcomes. The opening chapters explain initial assessment and management and the early diagnosis and treatment of shock. The primary management of injuries to the head, spine, chest, abdomen, musculoskeletal system, and soft tissues is then discussed in detail. The role played by diagnostic and interventional radiology in trauma management is explained, and an individual chapter is devoted to care of the pediatric patient. The book emphasizes the need for systematic assessment of multiple injuries from head to toe and the fact that the mechanisms and severity of injury and the anatomic disruption will differ in each patient. Taking these factors into account, readers will be able to identify and initiate treatment of those injuries likely to cause most harm to the individual patient.

    Contents:
    1. Initial Assessment and management
    2. Shock management
    3. Head Injury
    4. Spinal Injury
    5. Thoracic Injury
    6. Abdominal Injury
    7. Musculoskeletal Injury
    8. Soft Tissue Injury
    9. Pediatric Injury
    10. Radiology in Trauma (intervention) 11. Radiology in Trauma
    12. Interhospital transfer.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nanette F. Santoro, Amber R. Cooper, editors.
    Summary: Presenting the most current and relevant information on the diagnosis and management of primary ovarian insufficiency, also known as premature ovarian failure (POI/POF), this book presents two equally important voices. The first is the scientific, evidence-based voice discussing the latest information on POI/POF in a concise and logical fashion: etiologies, symptoms, genetics, mechanisms, associated conditions, as well as psychological and lifestyle considerations. The second voice presents the first-person stories of affected women, who are often faced with a diagnosis of irreversible infertility at a very young age and who somehow learn to live with great uncertainty about their ability to create a family - a core identity issue for many women. It is thus not simply a clinical, case-based presentation, but a more collaborative effort between clinicians who are well-versed in the field and women who have POI/POF. Primary Ovarian Insufficiency: A Clinical Guide to Early Menopause will therefore be an excellent practical yet personal reference for OB/GYNs, reproductive medicine specialists, and any clinician, nurse or health care worker treating women living with POI/POF.

    Contents:
    Defining Menopause: What Is Early, What Is Late
    Etiologies of Premature Ovarian Insufficiency
    Signs and Symptoms of Premature Ovarian Insufficiency
    Diagnosis of Premature Ovarian Insufficiency
    Mechanisms for Infertility Associated with Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Non-Reproductive Associations with Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Non-Invasive Methods for Enhancing Ovarian Function
    IVF and Egg Donation in Women with Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Treatment-Independent Conception in Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Mood Matters in Women with Premature Ovarian Insufficiency and Failure
    Future Shock: Can the Ovary Replenish Its Egg Supply?- When Pregnancy Is Not the Issue: Hormone Therapy and Long-Term Health Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Lisa M. Forman, editor.
    Summary: This text provides a state-of-the art review of primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC). The volume focuses on new data about the risk factors for PSC, its natural history of the disease, and the epidemiology and genetics of PSC, while providing a comprehensive overview on current and future therapies for PSC, management of cholangiocarcinoma, and other hepatobiliary malignancies. It also touches upon up-to-date surgical and endoscopic management, including liver transplantation-both deceased donor and living related liver transplantation. Written by experts in the field, Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis: Current Understanding, Management, and Future Developments is a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons and researchers with an interest in biliary liver disease, inflammatory bowel disease, and liver transplantation.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and Natural History of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Malignancy and Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis: Cholangiocarcinoma, Hepatocellular Carcinoma and Gallbladder Carcinoma
    Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis-Associated Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Overlap Syndromes of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    IgG4-Related Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Pediatric Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Cholangiocyte Biology
    Genetics of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Immunology of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Pruritus in Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis: New Insights into Cause and Treatment
    Ursodeoxycholic Acid Treatment in Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Future Therapies for Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Noninvasive Imaging of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis: A Radiologic Perspective
    Endoscopic Evaluation and Management of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Percutaneous Biliary Intervention in Patients with Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Liver Transplantation for Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Recurrent Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis after Liver Transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Deborah Kramer.
    Summary: This book offers solutions on how to enhance the normal development of the well child incorporating complementary medicine. The primary care provider is the only healthcare professional to see every child (0-18) and their parent, and can assess the child's health and advise parents on how to provide a healthy environment and important practices to nurture healthy children. The book provides realistic scenarios encountered by new nurse practitioners in their clinical training. It is structured in a question and answer framework to help practitioners critically think through the best practices to be implemented during the well child visit and develop a plan of action for the family. This book provides assessment and diagnostic criteria and tools and presents common developmental and behavioral issues for each age group. The book promotes the role of professional as advocate by making recommendations for broad social policies to help all children succeed. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Steven P. Shelov, MD, MS, FAAP, editor jefe ; Juan C. Kupferman, MD, MPH, FAAP, revisor médico.
    Summary: Provides advice on all aspects of infant care from the members of the American Academy of Pediatrics, discussing such topics as behavior, growth, immunizations, and safety. Traducción al español del resumen en inglés: Brinda asesoramiento sobre todos los aspectos del cuidado infantil a los miembros de la Academia Estadounidense de Pediatría, y analiza temas como el comportamiento, el crecimiento, las inmunizaciones y la seguridad.

    Contents:
    Preparación para recibir un nuevo bebé
    El parto y los primeros momentos después
    Cuidado básico del bebé
    Alimentación de su bebé
    Los primeros días de su bebé
    El primer mes
    Desde el mes hasta los 3 meses de edad
    De los 4 a los 7 meses de edad
    De los 8 a los 12 meses de edad
    Educatión temprana y guarderías
    Cómo mantener seguro a su hijo
    Abdomen y tracto gastrointentinal
    Alergias
    Conducta
    Pecho y pulmones
    Afecciones y enfermedades crónicas
    Discapacidades del desarrollo
    Oídos, nariz y garganta
    Emergencias
    Salud ambiental
    Ojos
    Problemas familiares
    Fiebre
    Sistemas genital y urinario
    Cabeza, cuello y sistema nervioso
    Corazón
    Vacunas
    Problemas musculoesqueléticos
    Piel
    El sueño de su hijo.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2017
  • Digital
    Mukesh G. Harisinghani, John W. Chen, Ralph Weissleder.
    Contents:
    1. Chest imaging
    2. Cardiac imaging
    3. Gastrointestinal imaging
    4. Genitourinary imaging
    5. Musculoskeletal imaging
    6. Neurologic imaging
    7. Head and neck imaging
    8. Vascular imaging
    9. Breast imaging
    10. Obstetric imaging
    11. Pediatric imaging
    12. Nuclear imaging
    13. Contrast agents
    14. Imaging physics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Louis R. Caplan, José Biller, Megan C. Leary, Eng H. Lo, Ajith J. Thomas, Midori Yenari, John H. Zhang.
    Summary: "Since its publication in 1997, the Primer on Cerebrovascular Diseases has been an authoritative reference source for students, scientists, and clinicians needing rigorous summaries of molecular mechanisms, physiology, pathophysiology, and medical issues related to brain vasculature. In the Second Edition, Dr. Louis Caplan leads a new team of editors to completely revise and update this classic text. The new edition reflects wide-ranging advances made over the last two decades, and provides the mechanistic underpinnings for molecular understanding as well as clinical diagnosis and treatment of cerebrovascular disease. Key features: concise chapters written in an accessible format, authored by international authorities on cerebrovascular physiology and pathophysiology, new and expanded topics including cell signaling in the neurovascular unit, angiogenesis and stroke recovery, proteomics, molecular imaging, carotid stenting, effects of risk factors, and iatrogenic causes of stroke" -- Back cover.

    Contents:
    Basic sciences. Anatomy and physiology
    Pathophysiology
    Neuroprotection
    Molecular mechanism
    Models and methods
    Clinical chapters. Clinical aspects : medical and surgical
    Medical conditions and stroke
    Diagnostic testing
    Management.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    edited by Mark Harber.
    Summary: This new edition provides readers with a practice-based approach to all aspects of clinical nephrology. Extensively updated, it offers invaluable practical advice on how to manage specific illnesses and, uniquely, the importance of establishing systems and processes to improve patient safety, enhance the patient pathway and guidance on how to systematically improve clinical governance. A unique feature of this book are the tips and tricks and, suggestions for avoiding common errors based on the vast experience of the authors. In addition, the Editor has collated a list of links to international registries and guidelines as well as selected disease specific organisations, providing both clinicians and patients with access to helpful and recommended resources. Designed and written in a user-friendly fashion, Primer in Nephrology continues to be the definitive reference for practising nephrologists, trainees and non-nephrologist who encounter renal patients in their daily practice.

    Contents:
    Assessment of the Renal Patient
    Urine Analysis - Scott R Henderson and Mark Harber
    Imaging in Nephrology
    Kidney Biopsy
    Acute Kidney Injury: Epidemiology and Assessment
    Acute Kidney Injury: Management and Prevention
    Acute renal replacement therapy
    Hepatorenal syndrome
    Common Electrolyte Disorders
    Acid Base Disorders
    Diagnosis and Investigation of the hypertensive patient
    Management of high blood pressure
    Podocytopathies
    Management of the Nephrotic Patient: The overall approach to the patient with Nephrotic Syndrome (NS)
    Management of the Nephrotic Patient: Treatment of ECF volume expansion due to nephrotic syndrome in adults
    Minimal Change Disease and Focal Segmental Glomerulosclerosis
    Membranous Nephropathy
    Membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis and C3 glomerulopathy
    IgA nephropathy and Henoch-Schonleinpurpura
    Systemic Small Vessel Vasculitis
    Goodpastures or Anti-glomerular basement membrane (GBM) disease
    Systemic lupus erythematosus, antiphospholipid syndrome & the kidney
    Practical immunosuppression guidelines for patients with glomerulonephritis
    Infectious disease and the kidney
    Blood-borne viruses and the Kidney
    Tubulo-Interstitial Nephritis
    Rheumatological conditions and the Kidney
    Multiple myeloma and the kidney
    Amyloidosis
    Thrombotic Microangiopathies
    Sickle cell disease and other haematological disorders involving the Kidney
    Diabetes and the Kidney
    Pregnancy and the Kidney
    Disease of the Renal Vessels
    Urinary tract infection
    Renal Stone Disease
    Congenital anomalies of the kidneys and urinary tract
    Acquired Urinary Tract Obstruction
    Kidney Cancer
    Inherited Renal Tumour Syndromes
    Polycystic kidney disease
    Other Cystic Kidney Diseases
    Genetic disorders of the glomerular basement membrane
    Anderson-Fabry disease and other inherited lipid disorders of the kidney
    Inherited Metabolic Disease
    Dermatology In Kidney Disease
    Chronic kidney disease: Epidemiology and causes
    Chronic kidney disease: management
    Transition
    Anaemia Management in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Chronic Kidney Disease: Mineral and Bone Disorder (CKD-MBD)
    Chronic Kidney Disease: Cardiovascular Complications
    Coagulation in Kidney Disease
    Symptom control and palliative care in advanced CKD
    Nutrition and Kidney Disease
    Pharmacology and the Kidney
    Prevention of Infection in Kidney Patients
    Setting up and running a Haemodialysis Service
    Vascular access- dialysis lines
    Vascular Access- fistulae and grafts
    Complications of maintenance haemodialysis and how to avoid them
    Providing a peritoneal dialysis service
    Peritoneal Dialysis Prescription
    Complications of peritoneal dialysis and how to avoid them
    Assessment of the potential transplant donor
    Assessment of the Potential Transplant Recipient
    Tissue-typing, crossmatch and antibody incompatibility in kidney transplantation
    Surgical aspects of kidney and pancreas transplantation
    Management of the Acute Transplant
    Immunosuppression for Kidney Transplantation
    Infectious complications of transplantation
    Long Term Management of Kidney Transplant Recipients (KTRs)
    International health partnerships
    Appendix. Resources for Patients and Carers and, Physicians
    Videos.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Vasileios Fotopoulos, editors.
    Summary: This book introduces readers to both seed treatment and seedling pretreatments, taking into account various factors such as plant age, growing conditions and climate. Reflecting recent advances in seed priming and pretreatment techniques, it demonstrates how these approaches can be used to improve stress tolerance and enhance crop productivity. Covering the basic phenomena involved, mechanisms and recent innovations, the book offers a comprehensive guide for students, researchers and scientists alike, particularly Plant Physiologists, Agronomists, Environmental Scientists, Biotechnologists, and Botanists, who will find essential information on physiology and stress tolerance. The book also provides a valuable source of information for professionals at seed companies, seed technologists, food scientists, policymakers, and agricultural development officers around the world.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Methods of Seed Priming; 1 Introduction; 2 Hydropriming; 3 Halopriming; 4 Osmopriming; 5 Solid Matrix Priming; 6 Biopriming; 7 Nutripriming; 8 Seed Priming with Plant Growth Regulators, Hormones, and Other Organic Sources; References; Advances in the Concept and Methods of Seed Priming; 1 Introduction; 2 History of Seed Priming; 3 Phenomenon of Seed Priming; 4 Methods of Seed Priming; 4.1 Conventional Seed Priming Methods; 4.1.1 Hydro-priming; 4.1.2 Osmo-priming; 4.1.3 Nutrient Priming; 4.1.4 Chemical Priming; 4.1.5 Bio-priming 2.1 Initial Fast Imbibition2.2 Starting of Metabolic Processes in the Seed (Lag Phase); 2.3 Subsequent Radicle Emergence and Resumption of Growth; 3 The Benefits of Seed Priming; 4 Mechanism of Seed Priming; 5 Factors Affecting Seed Priming; 5.1 Kind of Priming; 5.2 Temperature; 5.3 Oxygen Availability; 5.4 Osmotic Potential and Solution Concentration; 5.5 Duration of Treatment; 5.6 Seed Quality; 5.7 Light; 5.8 Dehydration after Priming; 5.9 Storage Condition; 6 Physiological, Biochemical, and Molecular Responses to Seed Priming; 7 Stresses-Induced Metabolic Changes in Germinating Seeds 2.2 Better Imbibition and Vigorous Seedling Growth2.3 Osmotic Adjustment; 2.4 Membrane Properties; 2.5 Antioxidant Defense System; 2.6 Changes in Metabolic Events; 2.7 Hormonal Balance and Regulation; 2.8 Aquaporins and Tonoplast Intrinsic Proteins; 2.9 Dehydrins (Late Embryogenesis Abundant Proteins); 2.10 Reactive Oxygen Species: Key Signaling Molecules in Priming; 2.11 Activation of DNA Repair Pathways; 3 Seed Priming and Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Plants; 4 Conclusion; References; Fundamental Processes Involved in Seed Priming; 1 Introduction; 2 The Physiology of Seed Germination 4.1.6 Priming with Plant Growth Regulators (PGR)4.1.7 Priming with Plant Extract; 4.2 Advanced Methods of Seed Priming; 4.2.1 Seed Priming Through Nanoparticles; 4.2.2 Seed Priming Through Physical Agents; 5 Factors Affecting Seed Priming; 6 Seed Priming: Physiological Basis and Plant Response; 6.1 Occurrence of Seed Germination and Seedling Growth; 6.2 Crop Nutrition and Yield; 6.3 Seed Priming for Stress Management; 7 Assessment of Priming Effects on Plant Growth and Development; 7.1 Seed Priming Using Compost Extract for Improving Germination Parameters 7.2 Preparation and Characteristics of Compost Tea7.3 Seed Priming and Experimental Setup; 7.4 Effects on Germination Parameters; 7.4.1 Germination Rate and Germination Index (GI); 7.4.2 Mean Germination Time (MGT) and Seed Vigor Index (SVI); 7.4.3 Effects on Root and Shoot Length; 8 Limitations and Perspective in Seed Priming Technology; 9 Conclusions; References; Physiological, Biochemical, and Molecular Aspects of Seed Priming; 1 Introduction; 2 Physiological, Biochemical, and Molecular Aspects of Seed Priming; 2.1 Pregerminative Metabolism
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Roya Kelishadi, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents;
    1: Life-Cycle Approach for Prevention of Non Communicable Disease; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Behavioral Risk Factors; 1.2.1 Tobacco Use; 1.2.2 Physical Inactivity; 1.2.3 Unhealthy Dietary Habits; 1.2.4 Exposure to Environmental Chemicals; 1.2.5 Socio Demographic Influences; 1.3 Conclusion; References;
    2: Epigenetics and Common Non Communicable Disease; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 The Role of DNA Methylation and Chromatin Modifications in Developing Cancer, Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus and Schizophrenia; 2.2.1 Cancer; 2.2.1.1 DNA Methylation 2.2.1.2 Chromatin Modifications2.2.2 Diabetes Mellitus; 2.2.3 Schizophrenia; 2.3 The Importance of ncRNAs as Epigenetic Mechanisms; 2.3.1 Types of ncRNA and Their Functions; 2.3.2 ncRNAs as Biomarkers in Cancer; 2.3.2.1 Cancer Diagnosis; 2.3.2.2 Tumor Classification; 2.3.2.3 Cancer Prognosis; 2.3.2.4 Prediction of Therapeutic Responses; 2.3.3 Diabetes Mellitus and ncRNAs; 2.3.4 Schizophrenia and ncRNAs; 2.4 Future Perspectives; References;
    3: The Role of Environmental Disruptor Chemicals in the Development of Non Communicable Disease; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Overview of EDCs 3.2.1 EDC Categories3.2.1.1 Phthalates; 3.2.1.2 Bisphenols; 3.2.1.3 Polychlorinated Biphenyls; 3.2.1.4 Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons; 3.2.1.5 Pesticides; 3.2.2 Sources and Pathways of Exposure to EDCs; 3.3 EDCs Contributions to Major NCDs; 3.3.1 EDCs and Metabolic Diseases; 3.3.1.1 Obesity; 3.3.1.2 Diabetes; 3.3.1.3 Metabolic Syndrome; 3.3.2 Effects on the Reproductive Health; 3.3.3 EDCs and Cancer; 3.3.4 EDCs and Respiratory Diseases; 3.4 Endocrine Disrupting Mechanism of Action; 3.5 Conclusions; References;
    4: Early Life Nutrition and Non Communicable Disease 4.1 Introduction4.2 Nutrition In Utero and Risk of NCDs in Later Life; 4.3 Maternal Macronutrient Intake and Its Influence on Appetite and Food Preferences in the Offspring; 4.4 Early Life Nutrition and Allergic Disease; 4.5 Nutrition in Early Life and Diabetes; 4.6 Nutrition in Early Life and Non-alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD); 4.7 Early-Life Nutritional Status and Metabolic Syndrome; 4.8 Early Life Nutrition and Cancer Risk; References;
    5: Family Based Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease Risk Factors in Children by Lifestyle Change: The PEP Family Heart Study 5.1 Introduction5.2 Subjects and Methods; 5.3 Results; 5.3.1 Cardiovascular Risk Factors; 5.3.1.1 Family Screening; 5.3.1.2 Adolescents; 5.3.1.3 Percentage Body Fat; 5.3.1.4 Metabolic Syndrome; 5.3.1.5 Elevated Blood Pressure; 5.3.1.6 Dyslipidemia; 5.3.1.7 Overweight and obesity; 5.3.1.8 Smoking; 5.3.1.9 Low Birth Weight; 5.3.1.10 Migrants; 5.3.2 Lifestyle Change; 5.3.2.1 Healthy Nutrition; 5.3.2.2 Leisure Time Physical Activity; 5.4 Discussion; 5.4.1 International Comparisons in youths; 5.4.1.1 Children; 5.4.1.2 Adolescents; 5.4.1.3 Adults; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Françoise Charnay-Sonnek, Anne E. Murphy, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a unique overview of oncology nursing care in a new health environment, one in which oncology nurses play an increasingly important role. In this regard, it addresses not only the biomedical aspects of new drugs but also the challenges they pose in day-to-day nursing practice. It also highlights the new skills that oncology nurses will need to develop in light of the changing care setting. Drawing on evidence-based practice in Europe and around the globe, the book offers a holistic approach to nursing for adult and pediatric patients. Written by respected professionals in the field, it provides nurses interested in oncology with clear and comprehensive information on the specific abilities required, with a focus on therapeutic education, supportive care, genetic counseling and e-health. In addition, it addresses the new role of patients as decision makers and full partners throughout their treatment cycle.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. Basis of carcinogenesis
    Chapter 2. Epidemiology and prevention
    Chapter 3: Basic and new treatments
    Chapter 4: Targeted therapies
    Chapter 5 : Immunotherapies
    Chapter 6 : Robotic surgery
    Chapter 7 : Forming and maintaining interpersonal relationships, communication skills
    Chapter 8: Nursing diagnosis specific to oncology
    Chapter 9: Nursing counseling after announcement of the diagnosis, coordination of the patient pathway
    Chapter 10: Therapeutic education
    Chapter 11: Specificity of breast cancer
    Chapter 12: Gynaecology cancers
    Chapter 13: Prostate cancer
    Chapter 14: Bladder and renal cancers
    Chapter 15: Melanoma cancer
    Chapter 16: Lung cancer
    Chapter 17: GI cancer
    Chapter 18: Pancreas cancer
    Chapter 19: Haematology
    Chapter 20: How to progress in your specialty
    Chapter 21: North American models
    Chapter 22: European Model
    Chapter 23: Added Value of the associative networking in oncology
    Chapter 24: Children
    Chapter 25 : Teenager and Young Adults
    Chapter 26 : Elderlies
    Chapter 27: Rare diseases
    Chapter 28: Supportive care
    Chapter 29: Genetic counselling
    Chapter 30: Oncology nursing in the primary care
    Chapter 31 : Ehealth
    Chapter 32: Patient as actor of his treatment, shared decision making.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Bernhard Gleich.
    Summary: Bernhard Gleich introduces Magnetic Particle Imaging (MPI) including all aspects that are necessary for a complete understanding. MPI is a new imaging modality invented by Bernhard Gleich and Jrgen Weizenecker. The method is capable of imaging the distribution of superparamagnetic iron oxide particles (SPIOs) with high sensitivity, high spatial resolution, and high imaging speed. The author summarizes the results of a number of original papers and countless innovations he has elaborated in the young discipline of magnetic particle imaging.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Medical imaging methods
    3. Basic idea of magnetic particle imaging
    4. Magnetic particle properties
    5. The focus field
    6. Resolution, sensitivity and speed
    7. Experimental and simulation results on MPI
    8. Potential applications of MPI
    9. Potential further developments and applications
    10. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ruifu Yang, editor.
    Summary: This book presents an overview of up-concerting phosphor (UCP), including UCP preparation, development of the rapid detection strips and UCP industrialization. It also discusses the wide clinical applications of this technology, such as in food poisoning, infectious diseases, drug-abuse and disaster rescue, where rapid point-of-care testing is often critical. Conventional testing methods are mainly based on gold immunochromatography, which relies heavily on results being read with the naked eye. However, up-converting phosphor technology (UPT) employs UCP particles as labels for rapid target detection. Unlike other conventional fluorescence techniques, UCP is excited by infrared light and emitted visible light. This anti-stokes phenomenon provides this special label with significant advantages, including zero background detection, high resistance to environmental influences (e.g. pH, salts, sample contamination), high sensitivity and quantitative detection. Systematically summarizing UCP technology and its wide applications, this book is a valuable resource for researchers and technicians in the field.

    Contents:
    Upconversion luminescent materials: properties and luminescence mechanisms
    Synthesis and preparation of upconverting phosphor particles
    Modification and Functionalization of Up-Converting Phosphor Particles
    Upconvertion nanoparticles-based point-of-care testing technology
    Up-converting phosphor technology-based biosensing technology
    Industrialization of up-converting phosphor diagnostic products
    The application of UPT-POCT in emergency medicine
    The application of UPT-POCT in internal medicine
    The application of UPT-POCT in combat-related traumatic infection
    Application of UPT-POCT for medical relief in disasters
    Application of UPT-POCT for detection of foodborne pathogens
    Applications of UCNPs in the detection of food safety related mycotoxins
    The application of UPT-POCT in public health emergencies
    Applications of UPT-POCT in Import and Export Quarantine
    Application of UPT-POCT in detection of drugs
    Applications of UPT-POCT in anti-bioterrorism and biosecurity
    Applications of UCNPs in bio-imaging and treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jae Dong Lee, Jong Kook Lee, Min Jin Maya Oh.
    Summary: This book describes the principles of laser treatment in dermatology and, taking into account these principles, provides clinicans with clear, up-to-date guidance on choice of the appropriate laser and parameters for different skin conditions. The aim is to provide a gold standard laser reference book that will meet the needs of those who are already performing laser surgery as well as novices to the field. Readers will find readily understandable coverage of both basic and advanced laser theory. Based on this theory, the authors proceed to explain all the considerations that need to be taken into account when choosing laser systems and parameters for a variety of indications, including all relevant vascular and pigmented lesions and the removal of hair, scars, and tattoos. Close attention is paid to the skin characteristics of Asians and the impacts of these characteristics on parameter selection. In addition, a separate chapter is devoted to the efficacy and safety of laser treatment of melasma, a common disease in Asians. .

    Contents:
    1. Laser principles
    2. Laser-induced tissue reactions
    3. Important laser principles
    4. Etiology and treatments of post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation
    5. Skin of Asian and a kinds of laser in dermatology
    6. Vascular lasers and treatment of erythema
    7. Lasers in the treatment of pigmented lesions
    8. Laser hair removal
    9. Non-ablative lasers
    10. Ablative lasers and fractional lasers
    11. Various treatments of scar
    12. Causes and treatments of melasma.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editor, Peter Slinger.
    Summary: This book covers recent advances in anesthesia for thoracic surgery, including advances in management of one-lung anesthesia, lung isolation, and lung transplantation. It includes clinical case discussions and tables of detailed anesthetic management.

    Contents:
    pt. 1. Preoperative evaluation
    pt. 2. Thoracic anatomy, physiology, and pharmacology
    pt. 3. Diagnostic and therapeutic procedures of the trachea and airways
    pt. 4. Diagnostic and therapeutic procedures of the mediastinum
    pt. 5. Anesthetic management for intra-thoracic surgery
    pt. 6. Specific patient considerations
    pt. 7. Complex thoracic surgical procedures
    pt. 8. Anesthetic management of uncommon pulmonary procedures
    pt. 9. Anesthesia for surgical procedures for end-stage lung diseases
    pt. 10. Anesthesia for pediatric thoracic surgical procedures
    pt. 11. Trauma
    pt. 12. Post-operative management.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Steven Piantadosi, Curtis L. Meinert, editors.
    Summary: This is a comprehensive major reference work for our SpringerReference program covering clinical trials. Although the core of the Work will focus on the design, analysis, and interpretation of scientific data from clinical trials, a broad spectrum of clinical trial application areas will be covered in detail. This is an important time to develop such a Work, as drug safety and efficacy emphasizes the Clinical Trials process. Because of an immense and growing international disease burden, pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies continue to develop new drugs. Clinical trials have also become extremely globalized in the past 15 years, with over 225,000 international trials ongoing at this point in time. Principles in Practice of Clinical Trials is truly an interdisciplinary that will be divided into the following areas: 1) Clinical Trials Basic Perspectives 2) Regulation and Oversight 3) Basic Trial Designs 4) Advanced Trial Designs 5) Analysis 6) Trial Publication 7) Topics Related Specific Populations and Legal Aspects of Clinical Trials The Work is designed to be comprised of 175 chapters and approximately 2500 pages. The Work will be oriented like many of our SpringerReference Handbooks, presenting detailed and comprehensive expository chapters on broad subjects. The Editors are major figures in the field of clinical trials, and both have written textbooks on the topic. There will also be a slate of 7-8 renowned associate editors that will edit individual sections of the Reference.

    Contents:
    Intro
    A Foreword to the Principles and Practice of Clinical Trials
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Editors
    About the Section Editors
    Contributors
    Part I: Perspectives on Clinical Trials
    1 Social and Scientific History of Randomized Controlled Trials
    Introduction
    Early History of Clinical Trials
    Refining Trial Methods in the Early Twentieth Century
    The Role of Governments in the Institutionalization of Randomized Controlled Trials
    Historical Trial Ethics
    RCTs and Evidence-Based Medicine The Globalization of RCTs and the Challenges of Similarities and Differences in Global Populations
    Social and Scientific Challenges in Randomized Controlled Trials
    Summary and Conclusion
    Key Facts
    Cross-References
    References
    2 Evolution of Clinical Trials Science
    Introduction
    The Scientific MethodScience is the study of natural phenomena, which are accessible to both passive and active observation. P...
    Some Key Evolutionary Developments
    Ethics Governance ModelsRunning a clinical trial in the modern world is not simple and requires some unique governance features. Whil...
    Computerization
    Statistical Advances
    A Likely Future
    Final Comments
    Key Facts
    Cross-References
    References
    3 Terminology: Conventions and Recommendations
    Introduction
    Clinical Trial
    Trial Versus Study
    Pilot Study Versus Feasibility Study
    Name of Trial
    Name of the Experimental Variable: Treatment Versus Intervention
    Name for Groups Represented by Experimental Variable: Study Group, Treatment Group, or Arm Persons Studied: Subject, Patient, or Participant
    Trial Protocol Versus Manual of Operations
    Blocking Versus Stratification and Quotafication
    Open
    Controlled
    Placebo
    Consent
    Randomization Versus Randomized
    Registration Versus Enrollment
    Single Center Trial Versus Multicenter Trial
    Multicenter Versus Cooperative Versus Collaborative
    Principal Investigator (PI) Versus Study Chair
    Clinical Investigator Versus Investigator
    Steering Committee Versus Executive Committee
    Data Monitoring Versus Data Monitoring Committee
    Random Versus Haphazard Primary Versus Secondary Outcomes
    Outcome Versus Endpoint
    Treatment Failure Versus Treatment Cessation
    Blind Versus Mask
    Lost to Followup
    Dropout
    Withdrawals
    Design Variable Versus Primary Outcome Measure
    Baseline Versus Baseline Period
    Screened Versus Enrolled
    End of Followup Versus End of Trial
    Analysis by Assigned Treatment Versus Per Protocol Analysis
    Bias
    Early Stop Versus Nominal Stop
    Summary
    References
    4 Clinical Trials, Ethics, and Human Protections Policies
    Origins of Research Ethics
    Conception of Trials
    Design of Trials
    Digital Access Springer [2022]
  • Digital
    John A. Vaughn, Anthony J. Viera, editors.
    Summary: This unique and comprehensive title offers state-of-the-art guidance on all of the clinical principles and practices needed in providing optimal health and well-being services for college students. Designed for college health professionals and administrators, this highly practical title is comprised of 24 chapters organized in three sections: Common Clinical Problems in College Health, Organizational and Administrative Considerations for College Health, and Population and Public Health Management on a College Campus. Section I topics include travel health services, tuberculosis, eating disorders in college health, and attention deficit hyperactivity disorder among college students, along with several other chapters. Subsequent chapters in Section II then delve into topics such as supporting the health and well-being of a diverse student population, student veterans, health science students, student safety in the clinical setting, and campus management of infectious disease outbreaks, among other topics. The book concludes with organizational considerations such as unique issues in the practice of medicine in the institutional context, situating healthcare within the broader context of wellness on campus, organizational structures of student health, funding student health services, and delivery of innovative healthcare services in college health. Developed by a renowned, multidisciplinary authorship of leaders in college health theory and practice, and coinciding with the founding of the American College Health Association 100 years ago, Principles and Practice of College Health will be of great interest to college health and well-being professionals as well as college administrators.

    Contents:
    part 1. Common clinical problems in college health
    part 2. Population and public health management on a college campus
    part 3. Organization and administrative considerations for college health.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Surveen Ghumman, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Detection of ovulation and aetiology of anovulation
    2. Evaluation prior to controlled ovarian stimulation
    3. Therapeutic intervention of endometrial pathology before ovarian stimulation
    4. Obesity and its impact on ovarian stimulation
    5. Oral ovulogens in IUI and IVF
    6. Ovarian stimulation in IUI
    7. Protocols for gonadotropin use
    8. Human menopausal gonadotropin, pure FSH, and recombinaant FSH: a comparative analysis
    9. GnRH agonists in controlled ovarian stimulation
    10. GnRH antagonist in ovarian stimulation
    11. GnRH agonist versus antagonist in ART
    12. Mild stimulation protocol
    13. Individualizing ovarian stimulation protocols in ART
    14. Impact of mutations and polymorphisms of gonadotrophins and their receptors on the outcome of controlled ovarian stimulation
    15. The role of androgens in controlled ovarian stimulation
    16. The role of LH in controlled ovarian stimulation
    17. Ovulation trigger: HCG vs. GnRH agonist
    18. The pharmacoeconomics of ovarian stimulation
    19. Endocrine monitoring of ART cycles
    20. Ultrasonography in controlled ovarian stimulation
    21. Effect of ovarian stimulation on the endometrium
    22. Luteal support: what to use when?
    23. Endometrial support beyond hormones
    24. Prediction of poor responders and current concepts in management
    25. Premature rise of progesterone during ovarian stimulation
    26. Empty follicle syndrome
    27. Luteinizing unruptured follicle
    28. Endometriosis: surgical management and optimal ovarian stimulation protocol for ART
    29. Hyperprolactinemia
    30. Polycystic ovarian syndrome and response to stimulation
    31. Role of laparoscopic ovarian drilling in polycystic ovarian syndrome and its effect on ART
    32. Ovulation induction in hypogonadotropic hypogonadism
    33. Ovarian stimulation protocols in fertility preservation
    34. Ovarian stimulation in cancer patient
    35. Epidenetics and ovarian stimulation
    36. Effect of ovarian stimulation protocols on oocyte and embryo quality
    37. Ovarian hyperstimulation syndrome: can we eliminate it as a complication of ART?
    38. Multifetal pregnancy reduction.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    ... by Noxon Toomey ...
    Contents:

    v. 3. Treatment.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    T71 .T67 1930
    1
  • Digital
    Ronnie A. Rosenthal, Michael E. Zenilman, Mark R. Katlic, editors.
    Summary: This new edition builds upon the foundation of the first and second editions of the handbook, volumes separated by a decade of experience in the field, in a format that is both comprehensive and fluid. The combination of print and electronic versions will promote more rapid up-dating of chapters as new information appears. The Third Edition opens with general principles. The broad body of the volume encompasses diseases of the elderly and physiologic changes by system, as well as geriatric syndromes, perioperative management, and transitions of care into post-acute settings. The large concluding section is comprised of specialty-specific results of surgery in the elderly and suggested modifications recommended by experienced surgeons. Principles and Practice of Geriatric Surgery provides a comprehensive account that will allow all providers of healthcare to the elderly understand the issues involved in choosing surgery as a treatment option for their patients.

    Contents:
    Section I: Principles
    Principles of Geriatric Surgery
    Defining Quality of Care
    Basic Science of Aging
    Surgery in Centenarians
    Section II: Pre-Operative Assessment and Perioperative Planning
    Patient Centered Surgical Decision
    Anesthesia Evaluation
    Geriatric Syndromes
    Frailty
    Function and Pre-habilitation
    Cognitive Function
    Nutrition
    Polypharmacy
    Cancer in Older Adults
    Diabetes in Older Adults
    Cardiac Disease in Older Adults
    Pulmonary Disease in the Older Adult
    Renal Disease in Older Adults
    Traumatic Injury in Older Adults
    Ethical Issues in Older Adults
    Legal Issues in Older Adults
    Section III: Peri-Operative Care
    Anesthetic Management
    Pain Management
    Post-Operative Delirium
    Models of Care
    Nursing Issues in Older Adult Surgery Patients
    Intensive Care in Older Adult Surgery Patients
    Wound Healing
    Enhanced Recovery After Surgery
    Section IV: Transitions of Care
    Transitioning Care of Discharge
    Rehabilitation and Functional Recovery
    Available Government and Community Resources
    Outcomes of Surgery in Older Adults
    Section V: Specific Specialties
    Neurosurgery
    Otolaryngology, Head and Neck Surgery
    Oral Surgery
    Breast Surgery
    Heart Surgery
    Vascular Surgery
    Lung Surgery
    Esophageal Surgery
    Stomach and Duodenal Surgery
    Large Bowel Surgery
    Anal Rectal Surgery
    Abdominal Wall and Hernia Surgery
    Liver and Biliary Tract Surgery
    Pancreatic Surgery
    Renal Surgery
    Baldder and Prostate Surgery
    Gynecologic Surgery
    Orthopedic Surgery
    Skin and Soft Tissue Surgery
    Transplantation Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Dennis S. Chi, MD, Deputy Chief, Head of Ovarian Cancer Surgery, Gynecology Service, Department of Surgery, Memorial Kettering Cancer Center, New York, New York, Andrew Berchuck, MD, Director, Division of Gynecologic Oncology, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Director, Gynecologic Cancer Program, Duke Cancer Program, Duke Unitersity Medical Center, Durham, North Carolina, Don S. Dizon, MD, FACP, Clinical Co-Director, Gynecologic Oncology, Massachusetts General Hospital Cancer Center, Associate Professor, Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts, Catheryn Yashar, MD, Professor, Chief of Breast and Gynecologic Services, Medical Director La Jolla, University of California, San Diego, San Diego, California.
    Contents:
    Sect. I: Etiology, prevention, and molecular biology
    Epidemiology of gynecologic cancers
    Molecular pathogenesis of gynecologic cancers
    Hereditary gynecologic cancers
    Invasion, metastasis, and angiogenesis
    Development and identification of tumor serum markers
    Cancer prevention strategies
    Preinvasive disease of the lower genital tract
    Sect. II: Diagnostic and therapeutic modalities
    Perioperative and critical care
    Surgical principles in gynecologic oncology
    Diagnostic imaging
    Biologic and physical principles of radiation oncology
    Targeted therapies in gynecologic cancers
    Principles of chemotherapy in gynecologic cancer
    Pharmacology and therapeutics in gynecologic cancer
    Immunotherapy of gynecologic malignancies
    Clinical trials methodology and biostatistics
    Cost-effective and value-based gynecologic cancer care
    Sect. III: Disease sites
    Vulva
    Vaginal cancer
    Cervix uteri
    Corpus: epithelial tumors
    Corpus: mesenchymal tumors
    Epithelial ovarian cancer
    Overian germ cell tumors
    Overian sex cord-stromal tumors
    Gestational trophoblastic disease: molar pregnancy and gestational trophoblastic neoplasia
    Sect. IV: Special management topics
    Breast cancer
    Management of infection in patients with gynecologic malignancy
    Management of surgical complications of gynecologic cancer treatment
    Management of pain
    Nutrition support of patients with gynecologic cancer
    Palliative and supportive care.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    editors, Sylvia C. McKean, MD, SFHM, FACP, Deputy Editor for Editorial Projects, UpToDate, formerly, leave of absence, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Hospitalist, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, John J. Ross, MD, CM, FIDSA, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Hospitalist Service, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Daniel D. Dressler, MD, MSC, SFHM, FACP, Professor of Medicine, Director, Internal Medicine Teaching Services, Emory University Hospital, Associate Program Director, J. Willis Hurst Internal Residency Program, Co-Director, Semmelweis Society, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, Georgia, Danielle B. Scheurer, MD, MSCR, SFHM, Chief Quality Officer and Hospitalist, Associate Professor of Medicine, Medical University of South Carolina, Charleston, South Carolina.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2017
  • Digital
    Mohammad Javed Ali, editor.
    Summary: Lacrimal Disorders and Surgery: Historical Perspective -- Embryology of the Lacrimal Drainage System -- Anatomy, Physiology and Immunology of Lacrimal System -- Paradigm Shifts in Lacrimal Anatomy -- The Sino-nasal Anatomy: Endoscopic Lacrimal and Orbital Perspectives -- Evaluation of Epiphora -- Set up for Nasal Endoscopy and Endoscopic Surgery -- Nasal Endoscopic Evaluation -- Dacryoendoscopic Examination of the Lacrimal System -- Imaging Modalities for Lacrimal Disorders -- Disorders of the Upper Lacrimal System -- Congenital Nasolacrimal Duct Obstructions Primary and Secondary Acquired Lacrimal Duct Obstructions (PANDO and SALDO) -- Functional Obstructions of the Lacrimal System -- Infections of the Lacrimal Drainage System -- Lacrimal Trauma and its Management -- Primary External Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Endoscopic Guided Single Self-linking of Stents -- Aesthetic External Dacryocystorhinostomy: The Subciliary Approach -- Aesthetic External Dacryocystorhinostomy: The Transconjunctival Approach -- Primary Endoscopic Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Ultrasonic Endoscopic Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Non-endoscopic Endonasal Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Primary Endocanalicular Laser Dacryocystorhinostomy -- 5mm and 9mm Balloon Assisted Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Revising a Failed Dacryocystorhinostomy Conjunctivodacryocystorhinostomy: Indications, Techniques and Complications -- Adjunctive Endonasal Procedures with Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Evaluation of a Dacryocystorhinostomy Ostium and DOS Scoring -- Intubation in Lacrimal Surgery: Devices and Techniques -- Pediatric and Adult Balloon Dacryoplasty -- Dacryoendoscopic guided canalicular and nasolacrimal duct recanalization -- Tumors of the Lacrimal Drainage System -- Dacryocystectomy: Indications and Techniques -- Debates in Dacryology: The Ostium Dilemma! -- Selva -- Debates in Dacryology: The Mitomycin C Dilemma -- Debates in Dacryology: The Intubation Dilemma! -- The Great Debate: External versus Endonasal Dacryocystorhinostomy -- Quality of Life in Lacrimal Disorders and Patient Satisfaction following Management -- Future Directions in Lacrimal Disorders and their Management. Lacrimal disorders are one of the very common conditions encountered not only by the oculoplastic surgeons but also by the general ophthalmologists in their daily practice. Written by global experts in the field of dacyrology, this book is a comprehensive, updated practical guide on evaluation and management of patients with lacrimal diseases. This up-to-date reference work covers all aspects of the field including the basic anatomy and underlying pathology, evaluation of a patient, and all surgical procedures currently used in managing various disorders in an organized fashion. Surgical modalities including the endoscopic approaches are thoroughly and succinctly reviewed with ample illustrations for better understanding. Since familiarity with a surgical technique is incomplete without the knowledge of risk factors and red flags, an emphasis on dealing with surgical complications and failure has received priority in this treatise. Controversial topics and treatment dilemmas have been discussed in detail with the objective of reviewing the present consensus among the experts.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Robert A. Convissar.
    Summary: Successfully expand the use of lasers in your dental practice! With vibrant, detailed clinical images and easy-to-follow writing, Principles and Practice of Laser Dentistry, 3rd Edition walks you through the most common uses of lasers in areas such as periodontal surgery, dental implants, prosthetic and cosmetic reconstruction and describes how lasers work, how they interact with tissues, and how this knowledge may be applied to dental practice with a focus on technology, surgical techniques, and key steps in treatment. Written by laser dentistry pioneer Dr. Robert A. Convissar and a team of leading experts, this edition includes an ebook free with each purchase of a print book, three new chapters, and new case histories and clinical tips. It contains everything you need to know to build your skills in the rapidly growing field of laser dentistry.

    Contents:
    Einstein’s “Splendid Light”: Origins and Dental Applications
    Laser Fundamentals
    Laser-Assisted Nonsurgical Periodontal Therapy
    Minimally Invasive Surgical and Regenerative Laser Periodontics and Laser-Assisted Oral Medicine
    Lasers in Implant Dentistry
    Photodynamic Therapy in Management of Periodontitis and Periimplantitis
    Lasers in Fixed Prosthetic and Cosmetic Reconstruction
    Laser Bleaching: Tooth Whitening and Mucosal Depigmentation
    Laser-Enhanced Removable Prosthetic Reconstruction
    Use of Lasers for Minor Oral Surgery in General Practice
    Lasers in Major Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery
    Lasers in Restorative Dentistry
    Lasers in Pediatric Dentistry
    Lasers in Neonatal Dentistry—Tongue-Tie and Lip-Tie Release
    Lasers in Orthodontics
    Lasers in Endodontics
    Photobiomodulation Therapy in Clinical Dentistry
    Noninvasive Outpatient Laser Therapy for Adult Snoring and Apnea
    Introducing Lasers Into the Dental Practice
    Research in Laser Dentistry: Current and Novel Treatments and Theranostics
    Selected US FDA Marketing Clearances
    Professional Societies Dedicated to the Use of Lasers in Medicine and Dentistry
    Selected Journals of Interest to Dental Laser Practitioners.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ming-Huei Cheng, David W. Chang, Ketan M. Patel.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    Ming-Huei Cheng, David W. Chang, Ketan M. Patel.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Sharon Einav, Carolyn F. Weiniger, Ruth Landau, editors.
    Summary: "This book contains a collection of the most recent insights regarding maternal morbidity and mortality and optimization of the care processes during acute critical illness. The volume represents a practical resource to be used in real-time by medical practitioners faced with a woman who is critically ill during pregnancy and the peripartum period. By providing concise tools for disease identifiers and management flow-charts, the Editors aimed to increase awareness and improve processes of care for this population. Many care paradigms for obstetric patients are currently unstandardized, unfocused and often do not follow a pre-determined path. Each chapter will provide the practitioner with updated information on how to identify specific critical conditions and how to manage them once they have been identified, to enhance recognition and readiness. This book should be used as a resource to improve the quality of care administered to obstetric patients, to reduce fragmented care processes and to improve interdisciplinary co-ordination and communication, with the overall aim of decreasing maternal morbidity and mortality. Therefore, this book represents an invaluable guide to specialists in critical care, anesthesia and obstetrics as well as to intensive care nurses and midwives.".

    Contents:
    Part I. Epidemiology
    Preventable maternal deaths
    Identifying the critically ill parturient
    Maternal near miss
    Maternal ICU admission
    Part II. The coagulation system
    Physiology of hyper and hypocoagability during pregnancy
    Severe peripartum hemorrhage
    Fluid management
    Management and prevention of thromboticand embolic phenomena during pregnancy- DVT, AFE and PE
    Part III. The cardiovascular system
    Normal changes in cardiovascular physiology during pregnancy
    Exacerbation of pre-existing heart disease (valves, IHD)
    Cardiomyopathy of pregnancy
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    POCUS
    point of care ultrasound in critical illness
    ECMO
    Part IV. The immune system
    Physiological changes of the immune system during pregnancy
    Hypertension, eclampsia and pre-eclampsia
    Viral infections during pregnancy
    HIV, Zika, H1N1, Dengue (including isolation and ICU management)
    Infection during early pregnancy and septic abortions
    Infections in Late Pregnancy and Puerperium
    Part V. The respiratory system
    Physiological changes in the airway and the respiratory system
    Airway management
    Lung ultrasound
    advanced
    Management of ventilation
    Part VI. The neuromuscular system
    Physiology and monitoring of the brain during pregnancy
    Management of maternal stroke
    Neurological crises (e.g. status epilepticus)
    Part VII. Maternal cardiac arrest
    Maternal Cardiac Arrest
    Post-resuscitaton care and targeted temperature management
    The brain dead mother
    ethics and physiology
    Part VIII. The renal system
    Renal physiology during pregnancy
    Kidney failure and RRT
    Part IX. The endocrine and metabolic systems
    Nutrition
    Acute fatty liver of pregnancy, liver failure and transplant
    Part X. Surgical dilemmas in critically ill women
    Trauma during pregnancy
    Intra-abdominal surgery
    Brain surgery
    Maternal critical care during disasters
    Part XI. Medications and complications
    Drugs
    Pain management
    Anaphylaxis.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Joseph Jankovic, Mark Hallett, Michael S. Okun, Cynthia L. Comella, Stanley Fahn; with contributions by Jennifer G. Goldman.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Rita Charon, Sayantani DasGupta, Nellie Hermann, Craig Irvine, Eric R. Marcus, Edgar Rivera Colsn, Danielle Spencer, and Maura Spiegel.
    Contents:
    Accounts of self : exploring relationality through literature / Maura Spiegel and Danielle Spencer
    This is what we do, and these things happen : experience, emotion, and relationality in the classroom / Maura Spiegel and Danielle Spencer
    Dualism and its discontents I : philosophy, literature, and medicine / Craig Irvine and Danielle Spencer
    Dualism and its discontents II : philosophical tinctures / Craig Irvine and Danielle Spencer
    Deliver us from certainty : training for narrative ethics / Craig Irvine and Rita Charon
    The politics of pedagogy : cripping, queering and un-homing health humanities / Sayantani Dasgupta
    Close reading : the signature method of narrative medicine / Rita Charon
    A framework for teaching close reading / Rita Charon
    Creativity : what, why, and where? / Nellie Hermann
    Can creativity be taught? / Nellie Hermann
    The ethnographic field : narrative, visual, contextual / Edgar Rivera Colón
    A narrative transformation of health and health care / Eric Marcus and Rita Charon
    Clinical contributions of narrative medicine / Rita Charon.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    [editors], Vikas Dhikav, Kuljeet Singh Anand
    Summary: "Principles and Practice of Neuropsychopharmacology: A Clinical Reference for Residents, Physicians, and Biomedical Scientists is a concise yet comprehensive book that discusses the drugs used in the treatment of neurological and psychiatric diseases from the perspective of practicing clinicians. There is a considerable overlap between these two specialties as neurologists often use the medicines used by psychiatrists and vice versa. This book addresses the merger of topics of mutual interest for them in a single volume of contemporary pharmacology. It provides detailed coverage of pharmacotherapy of neurological and psychiatric disorders in general practice. The content has been made more accessible with the judicious use of tables and figures, case examples, and details of neurochemical alterations. The book is useful for both beginners and advanced readers as it details clinical practices followed in dealing with psychiatric patients in developing nations like India to enhance practice-oriented learning and provides evidence-based guidelines from world’s leading medical bodies." - Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    History of neuropsychopharmacology
    Functional neuroanatomy in neuropsychopharmacology – Neurotransmitters
    Pharmacokinetic principles in neuropsychopharmacology
    Pharmacodynamics of neuropsychopharmacological agents
    Drug treatment of headaches – Antidepressants – Antipsychotics
    Antimanic agents
    Drugs for anxiety and insomnia
    Antiepileptic drugs
    Drugs for Parkinson’s disease
    Drugs for dementia
    Pharmacotherapy of stroke
    Deaddiction pharmacotherapy
    Pharmacological management of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder
    Genetic polymorphism in neuropsychopharmacology
    Cognitive enhancers.
  • Digital
    Stephen J. D. O'Keefe.
    Summary: This book provides the reader with an understanding of human nutritional and metabolic physiology and how it goes wrong in illness. Divided into three major sections, the volume instructs the reader on how and when to use nutritional support, and includes a summary of the published outcome studies on the application of nutritional support to the management of common illnesses. In this way, the book supplies the reader with all the known information on how to make the best judgment of when, what and how to feed sick patients. Authored by a renowned expert in the field, The Principles and Practice of Nutritional Support is a valuable resource for gastroenterologists, surgeons, critical care physicians, endocrinologists, and all those involved with patient-care, both in hospital, in rehabilitation, or at home.

    Contents:
    Cell Biology
    Physiology of Human Nutrition: Starvation and Obesity
    Physiology of Digestion and Absorption: the interdependence between food and the gut
    Pathophysiology: Nutrition in Illness
    Nutritional Support
    The Nutrition Support Team
    Key Principles for Nutritional Intervention
    Enteral Nutrition
    Parenteral Feeding
    Nutritional Support at Home
    Permanent Intestinal Failure and the Short Bowel Syndrome
    Small Bowel Transplantation
    Acute and Chronic Pancreatitis
    Liver Disease
    Renal Disease
    Nutrition Support in the Obese
    Nutritional Support in the Elderly.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Zahid H. Bajwa, R. Joshua Wootton, Carol A. Warfield.
    Summary: This concise yet comprehensive text is a true one-stop resource for anesthesiologists, specialists in pain medicine, neurologists, physiatrists, and primary care physicians wishing to understand more about pain medicine, and fellows and residents training in pain medicine. Every aspect of diagnosing and treating specific pain conditions and syndromes is covered, including general principles, anatomy, physiology, physical and laboratory diagnosis, psychology, and therapeutic interventions. Each chapter represents a careful distillation of current science, key concepts, and clinical treatments of the subject, all presented in a highly accessible design. The authors have included an extensive list of references at the end of each chapter to encourage further research.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessAnesthesiology
    AccessNeurology
  • Digital
    [editors], Ann M. Berger, Joseph F. O'Neill.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    editor, Sarah S. Long ; associate editors, Charles G. Prober, Marc Fischer.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    editor, Sarah S. Long ; associate editors, Charles G. Prober, Marc Fischer, David W. Kimberlin.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    editors, Philip A. Pizzo, MD, David and Susan Heckerman Professor of Pediatrics and of Microbiology and Immunology, former Dean of the Stanford University School of Medicine, Founding Director, Stanford Distinguished Careers Institute, Stanford University, Stanford, California, David G. Poplack, MD, Elise C. Young Professor of Pediatric Oncology, Head Hematology-Oncology Section, Department of Pediatrics, Baylor College of Medicine, Deputy Director, Texas Children's Cancer and Hematology Centers, Texas Children's Hospital, Houston, Texas ; associate editors: Peter C. Adamson, MD, Professor of Pediatrics & Pharmacology, Perelman School of Medicine of the University of Pennsylvania, The Children's Hospital of Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Susan M. Blaney, MD, Professor, Hematology-Oncology Section, Department of Pediatrics, Baylor College of Medicine, Deputy Director, Texas Children's Cancer Center and Hematology Centers, Texas Children's Hospital, Houston, Texas, Lee J. Helman, MD, Scientific Director for Clinical Research, Center for Cancer Research, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Maryland.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of childhood cancer
    Childhood cancer and heredity
    Molecular and genetic basis of childhood cancer
    Biology of childhood cancer
    Tumor immunology and pediatric cancer
    Clinical assessment and differential diagnosis of the child with suspected cancer
    Pathology and molecular diagnosis of leukemias and lymphomas
    Diagnostic pathology of pediatric malignancies
    Imaging studies in the diagnosis and management of pediatric malignancies
    General principles of chemotherapy
    Molecularly targeted therapies and biotherapeutics
    General principles of surgery
    General principles of radiation oncology
    Adoptive cellular immunotherapy
    Adolescents and young adults with cancer
    Hematopoietic stem cell transplantation in pediatric oncology
    Cancer clinical trials: design, conduct, analysis, and reporting
    Maximizing safety in cancer treatment
    Acute lymphoblastic leukemia
    Acute myeloid leukemia and myelodysplastic syndromes
    Myeloproliferative neoplasms of childhood
    Hodgkin lymphoma
    Malignant Non-Hodgkin lymphomas in children
    Lymphoproliferative disorders and malignancies related to immunodeficiencies
    Histiocytic diseases
    Gliomas, ependymomas, and other nonembryonal tumors of the central nervous system
    Embryonal and pineal region tumors
    Retinoblastoma
    Live tumors
    Renal tumors
    Neuroblastoma
    Rhabdomyosarcoma
    The nonrhabdomyosarcoma soft tissue sarcoma
    Ewing sarcoma
    Osteosarcoma
    Germ cell tumors
    Endocrine tumors
    Rare pediatric tumors
    Oncologic emergencies
    Hematologic supportive care for children with cancer
    Infectious complications in pediatric cancer patients
    Nutritional supportive care
    Pain and symptom management
    Nursing support of the child with cancer
    Rehabilitation of the child with cancer
    Psychiatric and psychosocial support for the child and family
    The other side of the bed: what caregivers can learn from listening to patients and their families
    Ethical considerations in pediatric oncology
    Late effects of childhood cancer and its treatment
    Educational issues for children with cancer
    Palliative care for the child with cancer
    Economic issues in pediatric cancer
    Pediatric cance policy and case advocacy on insurance, education, and employment
    Complementary and alternative medical therapies in pediatric oncology
    Pediatric oncology in countries with limited resources.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    [edited by] Stephen H. Sheldon, Meir H. Kryger, Richard Ferber, David Gozal.
    Summary: Principles and Practice of Pediatric Sleep Medicine, 2nd Edition, written by preeminent sleep medicine experts Drs. Sheldon, Kryger, Ferber, and Gozal, is the most comprehensive source for diagnosing and managing sleep disorders in children. Newly updated and now in full color throughout, this medical reference book is internationally recognized as the definitive resource for any health practitioner who treats children, providing absolute guidance on virtually all of the sleep-associated problems encountered in pediatric patients. Organized format separates coverage into Normal and Abnormal sleep for quick access to the key information you need.Abundantly referenced chapters help you to investigate topics further. Equips you with a complete understanding of both medical and psychiatric sleep disorders.

    Contents:
    The Function, Phylogeny and Ontogeny of Sleep
    History of Pediatric Sleep Medicine
    Development of Sleep in Infants and Children
    Chronobiology
    Circadian Rhythm Disorders: Diagnosis and Treatment
    Sleep during Adolescence
    Pharmacology of Sleep
    Promoting Healthy Sleep Practices
    Sleep History and Differential Diagnosis
    Sleep and Colic
    Sleep and Gastroesophageal Reflux
    Sleep and Pain
    Sleep Related Enuresis
    Bedtime Problems and Night Wakings
    Attention Deficit, Hyperactivity, and Sleep Disorders
    Sleep and Its Disturbances in Autism Spectrum Disorder
    Metabolic Syndrome and Obesity
    Narcolepsy
    Idiopathic Hypersomnia
    Kleine-Levin Syndrome and Recurrent Hypersomnias
    Post-Traumatic and Post-Neurosurgical Hypersomnia
    Medication-Related Hypersomnia
    Respiratory Physiology and Pathophysiology During Sleep
    Apnea of Prematurity
    Apparent Life Threatening Events (ALTE)
    Primary Snoring
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea Syndrome: Pathophysiology and Clinical Characteristics
    Diagnosis of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Cognitive and Behavioral Consequences of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Cardiovascular Consequences of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Metabolic Consequences of Sleep Disordered Breathing
    Treatment Options in Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    The Otolaryngologist Approach to Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Sleep Disorder Breathing: A Dental Perspective
    Non-Invasive Positive Airway Pressure Treatment
    Novel Pharmacological Approaches for Treatment of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Congenital Central Hypoventilation Syndrome
    Rapid-Onset Obesity with Hypothalamic Dysfunction, Hypoventilation, and Autonomic Dysregulation (ROHHAD)
    Disorders of Arousal
    REM Behavior Disorder
    Other Parasomnias
    Sleep-Related Movement Disorders
    Restless Legs Syndrome, Periodic Leg Movements and Periodic Limb Movement Disorder
    Sleep and Sleep Disorders in Epilepsy
    Neoplasms and Sleep: Impact and Implications
    Sleep in Psychiatric Disorders
    Evaluation of Sleep in Cancer
    Sleep and School Start Times
    Polysomnography and MSLT.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2014
  • Digital
    Mahmoud Torabinejad, Mohammad A. Sabeti, Charles J. Goodacre ; [contributors, Aladdin Al-Ardah ... et al].
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Meir Kryger, Thomas Roth, Cathy A. Goldstein, William C. Dement.
    Contents:
    Part I. Principles of sleep medicine
    Part II. Practice of sleep medicine.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    Lawrence S. Chin, William F. Regine, editors.
    Summary: Principles and Practice of Stereotactic Radiosurgery (SRS), Second Edition aims to serve as the definitive reference textbook for SRS practitioners. It provides a theoretical basis for the use of therapeutic SRS including imaging techniques and radiobiology. The bulk of the textbook contains chapters that are comprehensive in scope on all diseases that are treated by SRS. Lastly, it addresses administrative and technical aspects of running an SRS unit. Each chapter provides an expansive treatment of the subject. Emphasis is placed on the technical aspects of SRS so that practitioners in this field will use it as a daily reference. Each subject is presented by historical context, then by its pathophysiology. Current treatment methods and results are addressed in depth. A liberal use of tables and figures enhance the presentation. A review of all major clinical studies and representative case presentations, where possible, are provided with imaging, treatment planning, and follow-up results. Each chapter is followed by one or two mini-chapters that provide a counter-viewpoint experience to the main chapter, which is oriented to SRS. These counter-viewpoint chapters are written by a noted expert in that field and address in greater detail the indications, results, and complications of their approach to the disease discussed in the main chapter. Principles and Practice of Stereotactic Radiosurgery, Second Edition is the only reference needed for neurosurgeons, radiation oncologists, and medical physicists at all levels of training and practice who are interested in SRS.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    History of Stereotactic Radiosurgery
    Imaging and Treatment and Follow-up in Stereotactic Radiosurgery
    Techniques of Stereotactic Neurosurgery
    Radiation Biology and Physics
    The Physics of Stereotactic Radiosurgery
    Radiobiology Principles of Stereotactic Radiosurgery
    Experimental Radiosurgery Models
    Treatment Planning
    Designing and Building a Radiosurgery Unit
    Stereotactic Radiosurgery Techniques
    Gamma Knife
    LINAC
    Charged Particle
    Cyberknife
    GammaPod
    Treatment of Disease Types
    Metastatic Brain Tumors
    Glial Tumors
    Meningiomas
    Acoustic Tumors
    Pituitary Tumors
    Pediatric Disorders
    Pineal Region Tumors
    Skull Base Tumors
    Head and Neck Tumor
    Spinal Tumors
    Arteriovenous Malformations
    Cavernous Malformations and other Vascular Abnormalities
    Trigeminal Neuralgia
    Movement Disorder
    Psychiatric and Pain Disorders
    Epilepsy
    Ocular and Orbital
    Extracranial Radiosurgery
    Patient Care and Socio-Economic Issues
    Complication Management in Radiosurgery
    Cost Effectiveness and Quality of Life.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by O. James Garden, Rowan W. Parks.
    Contents:
    Metabolic response to injury, fluid and electrolyte balance and shock / Stuart McKechnie, Timothy Walsh
    Transfusion of blood components and plasma products / Rachel H.A. Green, Marc L. Turner
    Nutritional support in surgical patients / Gordon L. Carlson, Ken Fearon
    Infections and antibiotics / Savita Gossain, Peter M. Hawkey
    Ethics, preoperative considerations, anaesthesia and analgesia / Ewen M. Harrison, Michael A. Gillies
    Principles of the surgical management of cancer / Mark A. Potter
    Trauma and multiple injury / Euan J. Dickson
    Practical procedures and patient investigation / Damian James Mole
    Postoperative care and complications / Pawanindra Lal
    Evidence-based practice and professional development / Steven Anderson, Siun Walsh, Arnie D.K. Hill
    The abdominal wall and hernia / Andrew de Beaux
    The acute abdomen / Simon Paterson-Brown
    The oesphagus, stomach and duodendum / Richard Hardwick
    The liver and the biliary tract / Saxon Connor
    The pancreas and spleen / C. Ross Carter, Colin McKay
    The small and large intestine / Malcolm G. Dunlop
    The anorectum / Farhat Din
    Plastic surgery including common skin and subcutaneous lesions / Patrick Addison
    The breast / J. Michael Dixon
    Endocrine surgery / Sonia Wakelin
    Vascular and endovascular surgery / Hanafiah Harunarashid
    Cardiothoracic surgery / Robert R. Jeffrey
    Urological surgery / Grant D. Stewart
    Neurosurgery / Lynn Myles, Paul M. Brennan
    Transplantation surgery / Lorna Marson, John Forsythe
    Ear, nose and throat surgery / Janet Wilson
    Orthopaedic surgery / John C. McKinley, Issaq Ahmed.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    editor, Amar Safdar.
    Summary: This comprehensive volume provides a platform from which both major and minor infectious diseases related issues are addressed in-depth among this highly susceptible population. The book begins with an overview of infections in various modalities. This is followed by chapters on clinical disorders, etiologic agents, therapeutics, and infection prevention. Chapters include easy-to-follow figures and tables, radiologic images, and pictorial demonstrations of various disease states to familiarize and reacquaint the transplant clinicians and surgeons in practice and training, and those belonging to subspecialties providing supportive care for these patients. Discussions to enumerate the noninfectious causes that mimic infectious diseases; clinical relevance and effective utility of existing and emerging diagnostic tools are presented throughout the book. Authored by leaders in their fields, this book is the go-to reference for management of patients undergoing hematopoietic and solid organ transplantation.

    Contents:
    Es iseases due to Other Endemic Fungi in Transplant Recipients
    Cytomegalovirus
    Epstein-Barr Virus Infection and Post-Transplant Lymphoproliferative Disease
    Herpes Simplex Viruses 1 and 2, Varicella Zoster Virus and Human Herpes Viruses 6, 7 and 8 in Transplant Recipients
    Respiratory Viral Infections in Transplant Recipients
    . Hepatitis A, B, C
    Enterovirus Infection in Immunocompromised Hosts
    Parvovirus B19
    West Nile Virus in Immunocompromised Hosts
    Rare and Emerging Viral Infections in the Transplant Population
    Parasitic Infections in Transplant Recipients: Toxoplasmosis, Strongyloidiasis and Other Parasites
    Impacts and Challenges of Advanced Diagnostic Assays for Transplant Infectious Diseases
    Diagnosis of Systemic Fungal Diseases
    Viral Diagnostics
    Antibiotic Consideration in Transplant Recipients
    Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Antibiotics in Transplant Patients
    Antifungal Consideration for Transplant Recipients
    Immunomodulatory Properties of Antifungal Agents on Immune Functions of the Host
    Antiviral Consideration for Transplantation Including Drug Resistance
    Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Antiviral Drugs in Special Population
    Anti-Mycobacterial Consideration in Transplantation Including Drug Non-Susceptibility and Resistance: Tuberculosis and Nontuberculous Mycobacterial Disease
    Adaptive Immunotherapy for Opportunistic Infections
    Immunotherapy for Invasive Mold Disease in Transplant Patients – Dendritic Cell Immunotherapy, Interferon-gamma, Remcobinant Myeloid Growth Factors, and Healthy Donor Granulocyte Transfusions
    Antimicrobial Stewardship: Considerations for a Transplant Center
    The Use of Palliative Care in Organ Transplant Patients and End of Life Issues
    Infection Control Strategies in Transplant Populations
    Travel and Transplantation
    Vaccination in Organ Transplant
    Prevention of Fungal Disease
    Antimicrobial Drug Prophylaxis: Challenges and Controversi.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    A Tamilselvi, Ajay Rane, editors.
    Summary: Despite the wide prevalence of urogynaecological problems, in clinical practice, there is a paucity of specialists that are skilled in the management of these conditions. The recognition of the need for a specialist to deal with these specific problems has led to the recent evolution of urogynaecology as a subspecialty. This book, Principles and Practice of Urogynaecology, aims to equip the practicing professionals - Gynaecologists, Urogynaecologists and Urologists, with up-to-date information on the principles that guide the evaluation and management of pelvic organ prolapse and other common urogynaecological problems. With an emphasis on evidence based medicine, the book aims to deliver guidance on management of common urogynaecological problems and provides information on the latest cutting-edge surgical techniques. Written by global experts in the field of urogynaecology, the book focuses initially on pelvic floor anatomy and function, moving seamlessly to the evaluation and management of clinically relevant pelvic floor problems. A detailed discussion on management of mesh related complications is a highlight.

    Contents:
    Part I : Anatomy and Physiology
    Current Concepts in Pelvic Anatomy
    Neuroanatomy of Female Pelvis
    Physiology of Urinary Continence Part II: Lower Urinary Tract Dysfunction
    Evaluation of Urinary Incontinence
    Urodynamics -The Practical aspects
    Overactive bladder.-Management of Stress Urinary Incontinence
    Management of Sling surgery Complications
    Neurogenic Bladder
    Voiding Dysfunction
    Bladder Pain Syndrome Part III: Pelvic Floor Dysfunction
    Evaluation of Pelvic Organ Prolapse.-Conservative management of Pelvic Organ Prolapse.-Anterior and Posterior Vaginal Wall Prolapse
    Surgical management of Apical Prolapse
    Mesh in Prolapse Surgery Part IV: Ano-rectal Dysfunction
    Obstetric Anal Sphincter Injuries and Repair
    Fecal Incontinence.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Indranill Basu-Ray, editor-in-chief ; Darshan Mehta, editor.
    Summary: This is the worlds first reference book covering the role of Yoga in Cardiovascular Diseases. It details epidemiology, physiology, pathology, prevention, and management of cardiovascular diseases based on the current scientific understanding of Yoga. Seventy-five experts from four continents, including the most notable names, contributed to this work to create the worlds first comprehensive reference literature on Yoga in cardiovascular medicine. The chapters cover information related to Yoga, both as prevention and therapy, including coronary artery disease, heart failure, and arrhythmias. In addition, important cardiovascular topics like obesity and diabetes mellitus are also included. A special chapter covers the role of Yoga in the prevention of cardiovascular complications in COVID-19 patients.

    Contents:
    Yoga-A Historical Perspective
    Yoga as Therapy: Ethnomedical Perspective
    Neurophysiology and Neuroanatomy of Meditation
    Effects of Meditation on Psychological, Psychosocial and Physiological Responses to Stress
    Yoga and Autonomic, Vascular and Endothelin Function
    Yoga and Inflammation
    Yoga and Hypertension
    Yoga and Diabetes Mellitus
    Yoga and Obesity
    Yoga and Metabolic Syndrome
    Effects of Yoga on Subclinical Atherosclerosis
    Yoga and Primary Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease
    Yoga and Lifestyle Factors - Diet, Physical activity, Tobacco cessation, Alcohol, and Sleep
    Yoga and Coronary Artery Disease
    Yoga and Heart Failure
    Yoga and Atrial Fibrillation
    Yoga and Implantable Cardioverter: Defibrillator Therapy
    Yoga for Cardiac Surgeries
    Role of Yoga in Cardiovascular Health In HIV Patients. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    M.A. Hayat.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QH212.E4 H38
    1
  • Digital
    Amanda Bergeron, Russell Perkins, Emily Ingebretson, Linda Holifield, editors.
    Summary: This guide provides a summary of key nursing practices and established guidelines necessary to provide care to the spectrum of patients with COVID-19. Experts in the field offer concise and relevant information to fill current knowledge gaps. With the discovery of the novel Coronavirus, SARS-CoV-2, and the development of the subsequent pandemic, large amounts of information have become available about the nature of the virus and how best to care for those afflicted. As nurses caring for these critically ill patients, discerning good evidence-driven data from the masses can be overwhelming, and integrating it into current guidelines can be challenging. This book is meant as a practical nursing guide for both the inpatient and outpatient settings as well as the adult and pediatric populations. This virus has progressed rapidly, causing substantial disruption on a global scale never before seen in our lifetime. Caring for these patients has proven especially challenging due to the rapid growth of research and ever evolving data that comes with the discovery of a new disease. The editors desired to produce a concise, current, and convenient resource accessible to nurses of any background, in any geographical location, which would provide a foundation for the care of patients with COVID-19.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. History and Epidemiology
    Chapter 2. Prevention and Infection Control
    Chapter 3. Clinical Presentation
    Chapter 4. Pharmacological Management
    Chapter 5. Management of Oxygenation/Ventilation positioning
    Chapter 6. Systemic Complications
    Chapter 7 Pediatric Considerations
    Chapter 8. Hospital Discharge
    Chapter 9. Long Term Sequelae
    Chapter 10. Outpatient Management of Covid. 11. Psychological and Sociological Effects. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Niels D. Martin, Lewis J. Kaplan.
    Contents:
    Pain, Agitation, Delirium and Immobility in the ICU
    Bedside Neurologic Monitoring
    Status Epilepticus
    Traumatic Brain Injury
    Care of the Spinal Cord Injured Patient
    Non-traumatic Neurological Conditions
    Hemodynamic Monitoring and Resuscitation
    Hemodynamic Monitoring in Surgical Critical Care
    Cardiovascular Emergencies
    Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO)/Extracorporeal Carbon Dioxide Removal (ECCO2R)
    Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome and Lung Protective Ventilation
    Noninvasive Ventilation in the Peri-operative Period
    Care of the Surgical ICU Patient with Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease and Pulmonary Hypertension
    Diagnosis and Management of Acute Kidney Injury
    Renal Replacement Therapy in the Critically Ill Surgical Patient
    Gastrointestinal Hemorrhage
    Critical Care Management of Severe Acute Pancreatitis
    Hepatic Failure
    Abdominal Compartment Hypertension and Abdominal Compartment Syndrome
    Nutrition in the Surgical ICU Patient
    Antibiotic Strategy and Stewardship
    Sepsis, Severe Sepsis, and Septic Shock
    Source Control and Supporting Therapeutics: Integrating bacterial invasion, host defense, and clinical interventions with source control procedures
    Soft Tissue Infections
    Anemia in the Surgical ICU
    Coagulopathies and Anticoagulation
    Thrombocytopenia in the Surgical Intensive Care Unit
    Venous Thromboembolism in the Intensive Care Unit
    Glycemic Control, Insulin Resistance
    Critical Illness-Related Corticosteroid Insufficiency in the Intensive Care Patient
    Thyroid Disorders
    Hyperadrenergic Crisis
    Trauma
    Immunocompromised Patients
    Transplantation
    Intensive Care in Obstetrics
    The Pediatric Patient Cared for in the Adult ICU
    Organ Donor Management
    Biostatistics for the Intensivist: A Clinically-Oriented Guide to Research Analysis and Interpretation
    Administration
    Practical Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Ethics and the ICU
    Disaster Management and Preparedness
    Post-operative complications following surgery abroad
    Post-Intensive Care Syndrome (PICS)
    Operative Procedures in the Intensive Care Unit
    Anesthesia-Related Issues in the ICU
    Incorporating Advanced Practice Practitioners in the ICU
    Contemporary ICU Design
    Telemedicine for the Intensive Care Unit.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Tom L. Beauchamp and David DeGrazia.
    Summary: This volume is the first to present a framework of general principles for animal research ethics together with an analysis of the principles' meaning and moral requirements. This new framework of six moral principles constitutes a more suitable set of moral guidelines than any currently available, including the influential framework presented in the Principles of Humane Experimental Technique published in 1959 by zoologist and psychologist William M. S.0Russell and microbiologist Rex L. Burch. While other accounts have presented specific directives to guide the use of animals in research, Tom L. Beauchamp and David DeGrazia here offer a set of general moral principles that are adequate to the task of evaluating biomedical and behavioral research involving animals today. Their comprehensive framework addresses ethical requirements pertaining to societal benefit-a critical consideration in justifying the harming of animals in research-and features a thorough program of animal welfare protection. In doing so, their principles bridge the gap between the concerns of the research community and the animal-protection community.0The book is distinctive in featuring commentaries on the framework of principles by eminent figures in animal research ethics from an array of relevant disciplines: veterinary medicine, biomedical research, biology, zoology, comparative psychology, primatology, law, and bioethics. The seven commentators-Larry Carbone, Frans de Waal, Rebecca Dresser, Joseph Garner, Brian Hare, Margaret Landi, and Julian Savulescu-scrutinize Beauchamp and DeGrazia's principles in terms of both their theoretical cogency and practical implications, evaluating their relevance to the medical and scientific professions.

    Contents:
    Preamble to Principles of Animal Research Ethics
    The Essential Place of Moral Justification : Principles of Social Benefit : (1) The Principle of No Alternative Method
    (2) The Principle of Expected Net Benefit
    (3) The Principle of Sufficient Value to Justify Harm
    Principles of Animal Welfare : (1) The Principle of No Unnecessary Harm
    (2) The Principle of Basic Needs
    (3) The Principle of Upper Limits to Harm
    The Crucial Role of Ethics Review Committees
    Scientific Necessity as a Justification for Causing Harm
    On The Principles of Humane Experimental Technique
    Critical Commentary by Authorities on Animal Research Ethics : The Potential and Impacts of Practical Application of Beauchamp and DeGrazia's Six Principles / Larry Carbone
    Reflections on Primates in Research Frans B. M. de Waal
    Putting the Ethical Principles into Practice / Rebecca Dresser
    The Mouse in the Room : The Distinction Between Regulations and Ethics / Joseph P. Garner
    Compassion for Other Animals Beyond the Human Hierarchy of Concern / Brian Hare
    Commentary on the Beauchamp-DeGrazia Framework of Principles / Margaret S. Landi
    The Six Principles, Philosophy, and Applying Human Ethics to Animals / Julian Savulescu.
    Digital Access Oxford 2020
  • Digital
    William E. Prentice, PhD, ATC, PT, FNATA, professor, coordinator Sports Medicine Program, Department of Exercise and Sport Science, the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.
    Summary: Designed to be used by athletic trainers in courses concerned with the scientific evidence-based and clinical foundations of athletic training and sports medicine. The text leads the student from general foundations to specific concepts relative to injury prevention, evaluation management, and rehabilitation."--Publisher

    Contents:
    pt. I. Professional development and responsibilities. Ch. 1. The athletic trainer as a health care provider ; Ch. 2. Health care organization and administration in athletic training ; Ch. 3. Legal concerns and insurance issues
    pt. II. Risk management. Ch. 4. Fitness and conditioning techniques ; Ch. 5. Nutrition and supplements ; Ch. 6. Environmental considerations ; Ch. 7. Protective equipment ; Ch. 8. Wrapping and taping
    pt. III. Pathology of sports injury. Ch. 9. Mechanisms and characteristics of musculoskeletal and nerve trauma ; Ch. 10. Tissue response to injury
    pt. IV. Management skills. Ch. 11. Psychosocial intervention for sports injuries and illnesses ; Ch. 12. On-the-field acute care and emergency procedures ; Ch. 13. Off-the-field injury ; Ch. 14. Infectious diseases, bloodborne pathogens, and universal precautions ; Ch. 15. Using therapeutic modalities ; Ch. 16. Using therapeutic exercise in rehabilitation ; Ch. 17. Pharmacology, drugs, and sports
    pt. V. Musculoskeletal conditions. Ch. 18. The foot ; Ch. 19. The ankle and lower leg ; Ch. 20. The knee and related structures ; Ch. 21. The thigh, hip, groin, and pelvis ; Ch. 22. The shoulder complex ; Ch. 23. The elbow ; Ch. 24. The forearm, wrist, hand, and fingers ; Ch. 25. The spine
    pt. Vi. General medical conditions. Ch. 26. The head, face, eyes, ears, nose, and throat ; Ch. 27. The thorax and abdomen ; Ch. 28. Skin disorders ; Ch. 29. Additional general medical conditions
    Appendixes.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2017
  • Digital
    William E. Prentice.
    Summary: "Since the first edition of Principles of Athletic Training was published in 1963, the profession of athletic training has experienced amazing growth, not only in numbers but also in the associated body of knowledge. During all those years and in fifteen previous editions, the authors of this text, Daniel Arnheim, John Klafs, and now Bill Prentice, have taken it as a personal responsibility to provide the reader with the most current clinical information in athletic training and sports medicine. It has always been based on the most current research evidence and, consequently, it has endured as one of the preeminent textbooks for athletic training students and professionals for more than 50 years"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    The athletic trainer as a health care provider
    Health care organization and administration in athletic training
    Legal concerns and insurance issues
    Fitness and conditioning techniques
    Nutrition and supplements
    Environmental considerations
    Protective equipment
    Wrapping and taping
    Mechanisms and characteristics of musculoskeletal and nerve trauma
    Tissue response to injury
    Psyhosocial intervention for sports injuries and illnesses
    On-the-field acute care and emergency procedures
    Off-the-field injury evaluation
    Infectious diseases, blood borne pathogens, and universal precautions
    Using therapeutic modalities
    Using therapeutic exercise in rehabilitation
    Pharmacology, drugs, and sports
    The foot
    The ankle and lower leg
    The knee and related structures
    The thigh, hip, groin, and pelvis
    The shoulder complex
    The elbow
    The forearm, wrist, hand, and fingers
    The spine
    The head, face, eyes, ears, nose, and throat
    The thorax and abdomen
    Skin disorders
    Additional general medical conditions.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Abbott, A. C.
    Digital Access Google Books 1892-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    G41 .A13 1892
    1
  • Digital
    Ira J. Kalet, Ph.D.
    Summary: This second edition of a pioneering technical work in biomedical informatics provides a very readable treatment of the deep computational ideas at the foundation of the field. Principles of Biomedical Informatics, 2nd Edition is radically reorganized to make it especially useable as a textbook for courses that move beyond the standard introductory material. It includes exercises at the end of each chapter, ideas for student projects, and a number of new topics, such as: .tree structured data, interval trees, and time-oriented medical data and their use . On Line Application Processing (OLAP), an old database idea that is only recently coming of age and finding surprising importance in biomedical informatics a discussion of nursing knowledge and an example of encoding nursing advice in a rule-based system X-ray physics and algorithms for cross-sectional medical image reconstruction, recognizing that this area was one of the most central to the origin of biomedical computing .an introduction to Markov processes, and an outline of the elements of a hospital IT security program, focusing on fundamental ideas rather than specifics of system vulnerabilities or specific technologies. It is simultaneously a unified description of the core research concept areas of biomedical data and knowledge representation, biomedical information access, biomedical decision-making, and information and technology use in biomedical contexts, and a pre-eminent teaching reference for the growing number of healthcare and computing professionals embracing computation in health-related fields. As in the first edition, it includes many worked example programs in Common LISP, the most powerful and accessible modern language for advanced biomedical concept representation and manipulation. The text also includes humor, history, and anecdotal material to balance the mathematically and computationally intensive development in many of the topic areas. The emphasis, as in the first edition, is on ideas and methods that are likely to be of lasting value, not just the popular topics of the day. Ira Kalet is Professor Emeritus of Radiation Oncology, and of Biomedical Informatics and Medical Education, at the University of Washington. Until retiring in 2011 he was also an Adjunct Professor in Computer Science and Engineering, and Biological Structure. From 2005 to 2010 he served as IT Security Director for the University of Washington School of Medicine and its major teaching hospitals. He has been a member of the American Medical Informatics Association since 1990, and an elected Fellow of the American College of Medical Informatics since 2011. His research interests include simulation systems for design of radiation treatment for cancer, software development methodology, and artificial intelligence applications to medicine, particularly expert systems, ontologies and modeling.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    José Antonio Fornés.
    Summary: Molecular motors convert chemical energy (typically from ATP hydrolysis) to directed motion and mechanical work. Biomolecular motors are proteins able of converting chemical energy into mechanical motion and force. Because of their dimension, the many small parts that make up molecular motors must operate at energies only a few times greater than those of the thermal baths. The description of molecular motors must be stochastic in nature. Their actions are often described in terms of Brownian Ratchets mechanisms. In order to describe the principles used in their movement, we need to use the tools that theoretical physics give us. In this book we centralize on the some physical mechanisms of molecular motors.

    Contents:
    Brownian Ratchets and Molecular Motors
    The Fokker-Planck equation
    Biased Brownian Motion
    The Smoluchowski model
    Rotation of a dipole
    Ratchet dimer Brownian motor with Hydrodynamic interactions
    Fluctuations of the proton electromotive force across inner mitochondrial membrane
    Quantum Ratchets.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    by Wolfgang Link.
    Summary: This book explains how current medicines against cancer work and how we find new ones. It provides an easy-to-understand overview of current options to treat patients with cancer, which includes Surgery, Radiation therapy, Chemotherapy, Targeted therapy and Immunotherapy. The efficiency of all these treatments is limited by the capacity of cancer cells to escape therapy. This book explains the mechanisms of anti-cancer drug resistance and strategies to overcome it. The discovery and development process of a new drug is detailed beginning with the identification and validation of a therapeutic target, the identification of an inhibitor of the target and its subsequent preclinical and clinical development until its approval by regulatory authorities. Particular emphasis has been given to specific aspects of the development process including lead generation and optimization, pharmacokinetics, ADME analysis, pharmacodynamics, toxicity and efficacy assessment, investigational new drug (IND) and new drug application (NDA) and the design of clinical trial and their phases. The book covers many aspects of modern personalized oncology and discusses economic aspects of our current system of developing new medicines and its impact on our societies and on future drug research. The author of this book, Dr. Link counts with more than 20 years of experience in biomedical research reflected in numerous publications, patents and key note and plenary presentations at international conferences. Interested readers, students and teachers should read this book as it provides a unique way to learn/teach about basic concepts in oncology and anti-cancer drug research.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    Abbreviations
    Introduction
    Cancer Therapy
    Cancer drug resistance
    Drug Discovery and Development
    Economic and social implications of modern drug discovery. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Stuart J. Hutchison, MD, FRCP(C), FACC, FAHA, FSCCT, Clinical Professor of Medicine, Departments of Cardiac Sciences, Medicine, and Radiology, University of Calgary, Director of Echocardiography, Foothills Medicine Centre and Libin Cardiovascular Institute, Calgary, Alberta, Canada, Naeem Merchant, MD, FRCP(C), Clinical Professor of Medicine, Departments of Cardiac Services, Medicine, and Radiology, University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta, Canada.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Michael R. Barratt, Ellen S. Baker, Sam L. Pool, editors.
    Summary: In its first edition, Principles of Clinical Medicine for Space Flight established itself as the authoritative reference on the contemporary knowledge base of space medicine and standards of care for space flyers. It received excellent notices and is used in the curricula of civilian and military training programs and used as a source of questions for the Aerospace Medicine Certifying Examination under the American Board of Preventive Medicine. In the intervening few years, the continuous manning of the International Space Station has both strengthened existing knowledge and uncovered new and significant phenomena related to the human in space. The Second Edition incorporates this information. Gaps in the first edition will be addressed with the addition new and revised chapters. This edition is extensively peer reviewed and represents the most up to date knowledge. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part I: Unique attributes of space medicine: 1. Physical and bioenvironmental aspects of human space flight / Michael R. Barratt
    2. Radiation and radiation disorders / Jeffrey A. Jones, Fathi Karouia, Lawrence Pinsky, and Octav Cristea
    3. Hypoxia, hypercarbia, and atmospheric control / George Beck, Jennifer Law, Kira Bacal, and Michael R. Barratt
    4. Health effects of atmospheric contamination / John T. James and Valerie E. Ryder
    5. Acoustic and auditory issues / Richard W. Danielson, Christopher S. Allen, José G. Limardo, and Jonathan B. Clark
    6. Spaceflight medical systems / Terrance A. Taddeo, Stevan Gilmore, and Cheryl W. Armstrong
    7. Surgical capabilities / Mark R. Campbell and Roger D. Billica
    8. Telemedicine / Shannon Melton, Scott C. Simmons, Byron A. Smith, and Douglas R. Hamilton
    9. Diagnostic imaging in space medicine / Ashot E. Sargsyan
    10. Medical evacuation risk and crew transport / Smith L. Johnston III, Kieran T. Smart, and James M. Pattarini. Part II: Spaceflight clinical medicine: 11. Medical evaluations and standards / Gary W. Gray, Smith L. Johnston III, Joan Saary, and Tim Cook
    12. Human response to space flight / Ellen S. Baker, Michael R. Barratt, Clarence F. Sams, and Mary L. Wear
    13. Spaceflight metabolism and nutritional support / Scott M. Smith, Helen W. Lane, and Sara R. Zwart
    14. Space and entry motion sickness / Hernando J. Ortega Jr., Deborah L. Harm, and Millard F. Reschke
    15. Acute care / Thomas H. Marshburn, Kjell N. Lindgren, and Shannan Moynihan
    16. Decompression-related disorders / Andrew A. Pilmanis and Jonathan B. Clark
    17. Medical aspects of extravehicular activity / Joseph Dervay, Robert W. Sanders, Moriah S. Thompson, and Tracy Jo Snow
    18. Renal and genitourinary concerns / Jeffrey A. Jones, Robert A. Pietrzyk, Octav Cristea, and Peggy A. Whitson
    19. Musculoskeletal response to space flight / Linda C. Shackelford
    20. Physical performance, countermeasures, and postflight reconditioning / Stuart M. C. Lee, Richard A. Scheuring, Mark E. Guilliams, and Eric L. Kerstman 21. Immunology and microbiology / Clarence F. Sams, Brian E. Crucian, and Duane L. Pierson
    22. Cardiovascular aspects of space flight / Douglas R. Hamilton
    23. Neurologic concerns / Jonathan B. Clark, Jacob J. Bloomberg, and Kira Bacal
    24. Gynecologic and reproductive considerations / Richard T. Jennings and Ellen S. Baker
    25. Behavioral health and performance support / Walter E. Sipes, Christopher F. Flynn, and Gary E. Beven
    26. Sleep, circadian rhythms, and fatigue management in space flight operations / Smith L. Johnston III, Alexandra Whitmire, Thomas H. Marshburn, and Lakshmi Putcha
    27. Spaceflight pharmacology / Virginia Wotring
    28. Ophthalmologic concerns / Thomas H. Mader, C. Robert Gibson, and F. Keith Manuel
    29. Dental considerations / Michael H. Hodapp and Arthur H. Jeske
    30. Spacecraft accident investigation / Robert Banks, Serena M. Auñón, Richard Harding, and Amy Mumbower.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Jose Cibelli [and six others].
    Summary: Principles of Cloning, Second Edition is the fully revised edition of the authoritative book on the science of cloning. The book presents the basic biological mechanisms of how cloning works and progresses to discuss current and potential applications in basic biology, agriculture, biotechnology, and medicine. Beginning with the history and theory behind cloning, the book goes on to examine methods of micromanipulation, nuclear transfer, genetic modification, and pregnancy and neonatal care of cloned animals. The cloning of various species-including mice, sheep, cattle, and non-mammals-is considered as well.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Mark Savarise, Christopher Senkowski, editors.
    Contents:
    Section I: History
    Section II: ICD Coding
    ICD-9 Coding
    ICD-10 Coding
    Section III: CPT
    The CPT Process and Panel
    CPT Application
    Section IV: The RUC
    Harvard Study and the Evolution of the RVU
    History of the RUC
    RVU Valuation Process
    How RVU have been Used for Physician Benchmarking
    Section V: Reimbursement
    CMS and the SGR
    Copays, Deductibles, Out of Pocket
    Billing and Collections
    Section VI: APC, DRGs and Hospital Reimbursement
    Medicare Part A
    DRG-Based Payment, CCs and MCCs and APCs
    How ASCs are Reimbursed Differently
    Durable Medical Equipment
    Section VII: Alternative Payment Schemes
    Bundled Payment Models
    Accountable Care Organizations
    Pay for Performance
    Section VIII: Quality Measures
    PQRS, SCIP and Other Existing Measures
    Pay for Performance
    Section IX: Specific Coding Issues
    Evaluation and Management
    Skin and Soft Tissue Procedures
    Breast
    Vascular
    GI
    Laparoscopy
    Bariatric
    Colon and Rectal
    Abdominal Wall
    Oncology
    Transplant
    Trauma and Critical Care
    Endoscopy.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Jesse B. Hall, Gregory A. Schmidt, John P. Kress.
    Contents:
    An overview of the approach to and organization of critical care
    General mangement of the patient
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Pulmonary disorders
    Infectious disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Hematalogic and oncologic disorders
    Renal and metabolic disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    The surgical patient
    Special problems in critical care.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessSurgery
    AccessAnesthesiology
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    Alpesh Gandhi, Narendra Malhotra, Jaideep Malhotra, Nidhi Gupta, Neharika Malhotra Bora, editors.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Seth Navinda Delpachitra, Anton William Sklavos, Ricky Ritesh Kumar.
    Summary: "First text to focus solely on dentoalveolar extractions and surgery, Highly illustrated with full colour photographs throughout. Written using the format of a technical walk-through guide that can be used as a reference prior to surgery. Accompanied by a companion website featuring step-by-step videos, and MCQs to test knowledge"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Principles of Surgery
    Local Anaesthesia
    Basic Surgical Instruments and Principles of Use
    Simple Extraction Techniques
    Surgical Extraction Techniques
    Intraoperative Complications
    Third Molar Surgery
    The Management of Medical Compromise
    Postoperative Care and Late Complications.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Print
    Lewis Wolpert [and four others].
    Summary: Developmental biology is at the core of all biology. This text emphasises the principles and key developments in order to provide an approach and style that will appeal to students at all levels.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Leonid Poretsky, editor.
    Summary: The third edition of this important work is a timely update to the comprehensive textbook first published in 2002 and reissued in a second edition in 2010. The past few years have witnessed major developments in our understanding of diabetes and in therapeutic approaches to this disease and its numerous complications. Thus, all chapters have been significantly revised and updated with current evidence and best practices, and four brand new chapters are included, discussing the potential role of vitamin D in the pathogenesis of diabetes, peculiarities of diabetes in the elderly, oral manifestations of diabetes, and the current state of bariatric surgery. Written by an international group of experts and carefully edited by a leading authority on the subject, Principles of Diabetes Mellitus, Third Edition is an invaluable resource for researchers and physicians of all specialties, as well as medical students and investigators of all aspects of diabetes, who deal with an illness that has reached epidemic proportions.

    Contents:
    Part I: The Main Events in the History of Diabetes Mellitus
    Part II: Physiology of Glucose Metabolism
    Part III: Diagnosis and Epidemiology of Diabetes
    Part IV: Genes and Diabetes
    Part V: Diabetes Syndromes
    Part VI: Complications of Diabetes
    Part VII: Related Disorders
    Part VIII: Therapy of Diabetes Mellitus
    General Principles
    Part IX: Diabetes Prevention
    Part X
    Resources for Patients with Diabetes.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Antonino Belfiore, Derek LeRoith, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Wayne F. Larrabee Jr., David A. Sherris, Jeffrey C. Teixeira ; Kate Sweeney, medical illustrator,
    Contents:
    Soft tissue biomechanics and physiology
    Fundamental techniques
    Scalp
    Forehead
    Eyes
    Nose
    Cheek
    Ears
    Lips and chin
    Graft harvest techniques.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    edited by Shamsuddin Akhtar, Stanley Rosenbaum.
    Summary: The proportion of the population of octogenarians and elderly patients presenting for intensive care is rapidly increasing thus exacerbating the need to modify our critical care management to cater for this patient group. This book will provide practical guidance on all issues related to the critical care of elderly patients, incorporating physiological and epidemiological information, clinical guidance, ethical and end-of-life issues and advice about optimal use of drugs and new technologies. Complications of polypharmacy, high-risk surgery and increased recovery times are also discussed. Chapters are concise, each including a list of key points and summary of available data, making this a quick reference for experienced consultants, as well as a useful resource for trainees preparing for exams.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of critical illness in the elderly
    Chronic critical illness in geriatric patients
    Principles of geriatric pharmacotherapy
    Respiratory critical care in the elderly
    Neurocognitive dysfunction and geriatric neurocritical care
    Geriatric cardiovascular critical care
    Nutritional and metabolic derangements in the critically ill elderly
    Electrolyte and renal disorders in the critically ill elderly
    Trauma and musculoskeletal system dysfunction in the critically ill elderly
    Immune response and infections in the elderly
    Transfusion therapy and common hematologic problems in the critically ill elderly
    Stress response to surgery in the elderly
    Perioperative care of geriatric patients at risk of developing critical illness
    Ethical issues: withdrawing, withholding, and futility
    Geriatric critical care units: model for interdisciplinary approach.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    editors Danielle Laraque-Arena, Bonita F. Stanton.
    Summary: "This indispensable resource provides a cohesive, sustainable, and ethical approach to medical education and research that addresses the health needs of children locally and globally"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Part I. Operating principles for engaging in global education and research. Global child health populations: a community pediatrics framework and relevance to education and research
    Evolution of our understanding of the concept and challenges of global health research and education
    Positive strategies in achieving health for all children: an equity framework and its effect on research design and education
    Epidemiology and social determinants of global health as the basis for education and research
    A new development matrix for global child health
    Part II. Domains of competency for global health. Global health administrative competencies
    Global health education faculty competencies
    Global health research competencies
    Global health clinical competencies
    Part III. Educational models in global health settings
    Purposeful and mindful leadership: an educational framework for global child health
    A new advocacy paradigm for education: the role of persistence
    Cross-cultural training of residents and medical students in global child health
    The role of simulation in health education globally: a review of the Neonatal Resuscitation Program and Helping Babies Breathe
    Child development: the next global health frontier
    Part IV. Models for global health research. Environmental hazards and global child health: the need for evidence-based advocacy
    Implication of a community-based participatory research model in a behavioral intervention project in china
    Ethical research in global child health
    The GHESKIO Centers for Research in Haiti: an education and research model in action
    Injury prevention research and global child health
    A global snapshot of child maltreatment and child protection
    Developing the agenda for global child health at the American Academy of Pediatrics
    Global health research: role of specialty care
    Appendixes. Faculty competencies for global health
    List of abbreviations/organizations
    Glossary.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Pedro T. Ramirez, Michael Frumovitz, Nadeem R. Abu-Rustum.
    Summary: "With an emphasis on a practical, "how-to" approach, this comprehensive text addresses the most important and commonly performed procedures in gynecologic oncology surgery today. Written by leaders in the field, Principles of Gynecologic Oncology Surgery clearly describes the critical steps for each procedure, provides up-to-date information on the recent literature, and includes high-quality illustrations of anatomy and technique"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    I. Introduction
    II. Principles of abdominal and pelvic surgery
    III. Abdominal and Pelvic Anatomy
    IV. Vulvar/vaginal cancer. Preoperative evaluation
    Vulvectomy and sentinel node mapping
    Groin lymphadenectomy
    Vaginectomy
    Management of surgical complications
    V. Cervical cancer. Preoperative evaluation
    Indications for surgery for early- and locally advanced disease
    Conservative surgery
    Radical hysterectomy
    Sentinel node mapping
    Surgical staging for treatment planning
    Management of surgical complications
    VI. Endometrial cancer. Preoperative evaluation
    Indications for sentinel node mapping and lymphadenectomy
    Technique of standard hysterectomy and lymphadenectomy
    VII. Ovarian cancer. Preoperative evaluation
    Indications for laparoscopic assessment for cytoreduction
    Radical upper abdominal surgery (liver, diaphragm, spleen)
    Radical pelvic surgery
    Complications and management of radical cytoreduction
    VIII. Pelvic exenteration. Preoperative evaluation
    Removal of specimen
    Complications of exenteration
    IX. Surgery on the intestinal tract. Principles
    Small bowel resection/anastomosis
    Large bowel resection/anastomosis
    Creation of a stomae
    Complications and management of complications
    X. Surgery on the urinary tract. Principles
    Repair of cystotomy
    Reimplantation of ureter
    Creation of neobladders
    XI. Pelvic reconstructive procedures. Rectus abdominus flap
    Gracilis flap
    Continent and incontinent urinary diversion
    XII. Management of general complications. GI injuries
    GU injuries
    Vascular injuries
    XIII. Management of radiation complications. Radiation-related bowel obstruction
    Fistulae
    Radiation necrosis
    XIV. Novel Surgery in gynecologic oncology. Image-guided surgery
    Single-site minimally invasive surgery
    Robotic surgery.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Thomas E. Trumble, Ghazi M. Rayan, Jeffrey E. Budoff, Mark E. Baratz, David J. Slutsky.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Tim Benson, Grahame Grieve.
    Summary: This extensively updated fourth edition expands the discussion of FHIR (Fast Health Interoperability Resources), which has rapidly become the most important health interoperability standard globally. FHIR can be implemented at a fraction of the price of existing alternatives and is well suited for use in mobile phone apps, cloud communications and electronic health records. FHIR combines the best features of HL7's v2, v3 and CDA while leveraging the latest web standards and clinical terminologies, with a tight focus on implementation. Principles of Health Interoperability has been completely re-organised into five sections. The first part covers the core principles of health interoperability, while the second extensively reviews FHIR. The third part includes older HL7 standards that are still widely used, which leads on to a section dedicated to clinical terminology including SNOMED CT and LOINC. The final part of the book covers privacy, models, XML and JSON, standards development organizations and HL7 v3. This vital new edition therefore is essential reading for all involved in the use of these technologies in medical informatics.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Part 1 Principles of Health Interoperability
    The Health Information Revolution
    Why Interoperability is Hard
    Terminology, Content, Exchange
    Safety Thinking
    Part 2 FHIR
    FHIR Principles
    FHIR API
    FHIR Resources
    Administrative
    FHIR Resources - Clinical Summary
    FHIR Terminology
    FHIR Implementing FHIR
    Part 3 Other Exchange Standards
    HL7 Version 2
    CDA
    IHE XDS
    Part 3 Terminology
    Clinical Terminology / Coding and Classification
    SNOMED CT+ Concept Model
    LOINC
    Terminology & Content models
    Mapping between Terminologies
    Terminology Services
    Part 4 Security & Privacy
    Security : TLS & OAuth
    Integrity: Provenance and Audit Trails
    Privacy and Consent
    Part 5 Supporting Standards
    UML, XML, JSON
    Standards Development Organizations
    The HL7 V3 Framework
    Glossary
    Bibliography.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tim Benson, Grahame Grieve.
    Contents:
    PART 1 Principles of Health Interoperability
    Chapter 1 The Health Information Revolution
    Chapter 2 Why Interoperability is Hard
    Chapter 3 Models
    Chapter 4 UML, XML and JSON
    Chapter 5 Information Governance
    Chapter 6 Standards Development Organizations
    PART 2 Terminologies and SNOMED CT
    Chapter 7 Clinical Terminology
    Chapter 8 Coding and Classification Schemes
    Chapter 9 SNOMED CT
    Chapter 10 SNOMED CT Concept Model
    Chapter 11 Implementing SNOMED CT
    PART 3 HL7 and Interchange Formats
    Chapter 12 HL7 Version 2
    Chapter 13 The HL7 V3 RIM
    Chapter 14 Constrained Information Models
    Chapter 15 CDA
    Clinical Document Architecture
    Chapter 16 HL7 Dynamic Model
    Chapter 17 Sharing Documents and IHE XDS
    PART 4 FHIR
    Chapter 18 Principles of FHIR
    Chapter 19 The FHIR RESTful API
    Chapter 20 FHIR Resources
    Chapter 21 Conformance and Terminology
    Chapter 22 Implementing FHIR.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Donald W. Pfaff, Robert T. Rubin, Jill E. Schneider, Geoffrey A. Head.
    Contents:
    Section I. Characterizing the phenomena: hormone effects on behavior are strong and reliable
    Section II. History: hormone effects can depend on family, gender, and development
    Section III. Time: hormonal effects on behavior depend on temporal parameters
    Section IV. Space: spatial aspects of hormone administration and impact are important
    Section V. Mechanisms: molecular and biophysical mechanisms of hormone actions give clues to future therapeutic strategies
    Section VI. Environment: environmental variables influence hormone/behavior relations
    Section VII. Evolution.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Steven J Wang, Kevin Fung, editors.
    Summary: This text comprehensively reviews the major reconstruction challenges that are associated with the extirpation of tumors of the parotid gland and the lateral craniofacial region. It covers major functional and cosmetic consequences related to facial nerve paralysis, facial contour deformity, and soft tissue loss including the skin, ear, temporal bone, mandible, orbit, and cranial base. The text also includes basic concepts, a practical anatomical defect-based approach, and will highlight specific technical challenges that are commonly encountered in the contemporary era of intensive chemoradiation therapy, the aging population, and global health. Principles of Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction will be a great resource for residents and fellows in training and practitioners in otolaryngology, plastic surgery, facial plastic surgery, oral maxillofacial surgery, ophthalmology, head and neck surgery, and oculoplastic surgery.

    Contents:
    Section I: Basic Concepts and Principles
    Lateral Craniofacial Anatomy
    Anatomic Defect-based Approach to Reconstruction
    Section II: Defect Specific Reconstructive Issues
    Cutaneous Considerations in Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction
    Soft Tissue Considerations in Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction
    Maxillomandibular Considerations in Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction
    Rehabilitation of Facial Palsy-The Brow
    Surgical Rehabilitation of Facial Paralysis-Eyelids and Lower Face
    Parotidectomy Defect and Facial Nerve Reconstruction
    Section III: Special Considerations
    Role of Prosthetics/osseointegration in Lateral Craniofacial Reconstruction
    Technical Issues in the High Risk Patient
    Lateral Craniofacial Reconstructive Challenges in the Developing World
    Emerging New Technologies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Shigehiko Katada.
    Summary: This book introduces physicians and physiotherapists around the world to the principles and techniques of the Arthrokinematic Approach (AKA)-Hakata method, which is currently being used to treat joint dysfunction, in particular sacroiliac joint dysfunction. Although manual medicine is not popular among young orthopaedic surgeons, it offers a number of benefits with regard to treating functional disorders. Further, the AKA-Hakata method is quite different from conventional manual techniques, as it takes into consideration articular neurology aspects, can prevent many patients from developing severe conditions, and can help avoid unnecessary sacroiliac joint surgery. The authors have extensive experience in this field and especially with this unique manual technique. As such, Principles of Manual Medicine for Sacroiliac Joint Dysfunction offers a valuable guide for physicians and physiotherapists alike, helping them achieve optimal outcomes in the treatment of sacroiliac joint dysfunction.

    Contents:
    The history of developing AKA-Hakata method for sacroiliac joint dysfunction
    Introduction to the principle of AKA-Hakata method and sacroiliac joint dysfunction
    Anatomical aspects
    Diagnosis of sacroiliac joint dysfunction
    Manual treatment for sacroiliac joint dysfunction
    Manual technique for recovering joint play in sacroiliac joint
    Classification of sacroiliac joint pathological conditions in AKA-Hakata method
    Articular originating referred pain: Location of pain and selection of joint to be treated
    Evidence of AKA-Hakata method
    Clinical case series.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gerhard Meisenberg, William H. Simmons.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to biomolecules
    2. Introduction to protein structure
    3. Oxygen-binding proteins: hemoglobin and myoglobin
    4. Enzymatic reactions
    5. Coenzymes
    6. DNA, RNA, and protein synthesis
    7. The human genome
    8. Protein targeting and proteostasis
    9. Introduction to genetic diseases
    10. Viruses
    11. DNA technology
    12. Biological membranes
    13. The cytoskeleton
    14. The extracellular matrix
    15. Extracellular messengers
    16. Intracellular messengers
    17. Plasma proteins
    18. Defense mechanisms
    19. Cellular growth control and cancer
    20. Digestive enzymes
    21. Introduction to metabolic pathways
    22. Glycolysis, tricarboxylic acid cycle, and oxidative phosphorylation
    23. Oxygen deficiency and oxygen toxicity
    24. Carbohydrate metabolism
    25. The metabolism of fatty acids and triglycerides
    26. The metabolism of membrane lipids
    27. Lipid transport
    28. Amino acid metabolism
    29. Metabolism of iron and heme
    30. The metabolism of purines and pyrimidines
    31. Micronutrients
    32. Integration of metabolism.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Michael Chappell.
    Summary: This introduction to medical imaging introduces all of the major medical imaging techniques in wide use in both medical practice and medical research, including Computed Tomography, Ultrasound, Positron Emission Tomography, Single Photon Emission Tomography and Magnetic Resonance Imaging. Principles of Medical Imaging for Engineers introduces fundamental concepts related to why we image and what we are seeking to achieve to get good images, such as the meaning of 'contrast' in the context of medical imaging. This introductory text separates the principles by which 'signals' are generated and the subsequent 'reconstruction' processes, to help illustrate that these are separate concepts and also highlight areas in which apparently different medical imaging methods share common theoretical principles. Exercises are provided in every chapter, so the student reader can test their knowledge and check against worked solutions and examples. The text considers firstly the underlying physical principles by which information about tissues within the body can be extracted in the form of signals, considering the major principles used: transmission, reflection, emission and resonance. Then, it goes on to explain how these signals can be converted into images, i.e., full 3D volumes, where appropriate showing how common methods of 'reconstruction' are shared by some imaging methods despite relying on different physics to generate the 'signals'. Finally, it examines how medical imaging can be used to generate more than just pictures, but genuine quantitative measurements, and increasingly measurements of physiological processes, at every point within the 3D volume by methods such as the use of tracers and advanced dynamic acquisitions. Principles of Medical Imaging for Engineers will be of use to engineering and physical science students and graduate students with an interest in biomedical engineering, and to their lecturers.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; About This Book; Contents; From Signals ... ; 1 Introduction; 1.1 What Is Medical Imaging?; 1.2 Signals; 1.3 Noise; 1.4 Contrast; 1.5 Electromagnetic Spectrum; 2 Transmission-X-rays; 2.1 Photon Interactions with Matter; 2.1.1 Photoelectric Attenuation; 2.1.2 Compton Scattering; 2.1.3 Other Mechanisms; 2.1.4 Attenuation Coefficient; 2.2 Contrast; 2.3 Background Signal; 2.4 Anti-scatter Grids; 2.5 The CT Number; 3 Reflection-Ultrasound; 3.1 Wave Propagation; 3.2 Acoustic Impedance; 3.3 Reflection and Refraction; 3.4 Scattering; 3.5 Absorption; 3.6 Attenuation 10.3 Iterative PET Reconstruction10.4 Compressed Sensing MRI Reconstruction; And Beyond ... ; 11 Generating and Enhancing Contrast; 11.1 Manipulating the Signal; 11.1.1 MRI Relaxation Contrast; 11.1.2 Diffusion; 11.2 Contrast Agents; 11.2.1 X-ray Contrast Agents; 11.2.2 Ultrasound Contrast Agents; 11.2.3 SPECT/PET Contrast Agents; 11.2.4 MRI Contrast Agents; 12 Beyond Contrast: Quantitative, Physiological and Functional Imaging; 12.1 Quantitative Imaging; 12.1.1 Transmission Methods; 12.1.2 Reflection Methods; 12.1.3 Emission Methods; 12.1.4 Dynamic Data; 12.1.5 Resonance Methods 3.7 Ultrasonic Contrast3.8 Doppler Ultrasound; 4 Emission-SPECT/PET; 4.1 Radionuclides; 4.1.1 Single-Photon Emission; 4.1.2 Positron Emission; 4.1.3 Radioactive Decay; 4.2 Detection; 4.2.1 Gamma Camera; 4.2.2 Attenuation; 4.2.3 Scatter; 4.2.4 Deadtime; 5 Resonance-Nuclear Magnetic Resonance; 5.1 Microscopic Magnetization; 5.2 Precession; 5.3 Macroscopic Magnetization; 5.4 Transverse Magnetization; 5.5 RF Excitation; 5.6 The Rotating Frame; 5.7 Relaxation; 5.7.1 Transverse Relaxation: T1; 5.7.2 Longitudinal Relaxation: T2; 5.8 The Bloch Equations; 5.9 Spin Echoes and T2*; To Images ... 6 Imaging6.1 Resolution; 6.1.1 Pixels and Voxels; 6.1.2 Line and Point Spread Functions; 6.2 The General Image Formation Problem; 6.3 The General Image Restoration Problem; 6.4 A Revision of Frequency Analysis; 6.4.1 Fourier in One Dimension; 6.4.2 Fourier in Two Dimensions; 6.4.3 2D FT in Polar Coordinates; 6.5 Sampling; 7 Timing-Based Reconstruction-Ultrasound; 7.1 Converting Time to Depth; 7.2 Ultrasound Beams and Pulse-Echoes; 7.3 Scanning; 7.4 Artefacts in Ultrasound; 8 Back-Projection Reconstruction-CT and PET/SPECT; 8.1 Projection: Computed Tomography; 8.2 The Sinogram 8.3 Slice-Projection Theorem8.4 Filtered Back-Projection; 8.5 SPECT; 8.6 PET; 8.6.1 Randoms; 8.6.2 Positron Range; 9 Fourier Reconstruction-MRI; 9.1 Gradients; 9.2 Slice Selection; 9.3 Frequency Encoding; 9.4 Scanning k-Space; 9.5 MRI Reconstruction; 9.5.1 Field of View; 9.5.2 k-Space Coverage and Resolution; 9.5.3 The Effect of T2 Decay; 9.6 More Advanced k-Space Trajectories; 9.6.1 Partial Fourier; 9.6.2 Non-Cartesian; 9.6.3 3D k-Space; 9.6.4 Compressed Sensing; 10 Principles of Reconstruction; 10.1 Analytic Reconstruction; 10.2 Reconstruction as Cost Function Minimization
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Eric R. Kandel, John D. Koester, Sarah H. Mack, Steven A. Siegelbaum.
    Summary: The goal of this sixth edition of Principles of Neural Science is to provide readers with insight into how genes, molecules, neurons, and the circuits they form give rise to behavior. With the exponential growth in neuroscience research over the 40 years since the first edition of this book, an increasing challenge is to provide a comprehensive overview of the field while remaining true to the original goal of the first edition, which is to elevate imparting basic principles over detailed encyclopedic knowledge.

    Contents:
    Part I: Overall Perspective
    Part I: Overall Perspective
    Chapter 1: The Brain and Behavior
    Chapter 2: Genes and Behavior
    Chapter 3: Nerve Cells, Neural Circuitry, and Behavior
    Chapter 4: The Neuroanatomical Bases by Which Neural Circuits Mediate Behavior
    Chapter 5: The Computational Bases of Neural Circuits That Mediate Behavior
    Chapter 6: Imaging and Behavior
    Part II: Cell and Molecular Biology of Cells of the Nervous System
    Part II: Cell and Molecular Biology of Cells of the Nervous System
    Chapter 7: The Cells of the Nervous System
    Chapter 8: Ion Channels
    Chapter 9: Membrane Potential and the Passive Electrical Properties of the Neuron
    Chapter 10: Propagated Signaling: The Action Potential
    Part III: Synaptic Transmission
    Part III: Synaptic Transmission
    Chapter 11: Overview of Synaptic Transmission
    Chapter 12: Directly Gated Transmission: The Nerve-Muscle Synapse
    Chapter 13: Synaptic Integration in the Central Nervous System
    ^Chapter 14: Modulation of Synaptic Transmission and Neuronal Excitability: Second Messengers
    Chapter 15: Transmitter Release
    Chapter 16: Neurotransmitters
    Part IV: Perception
    Part IV: Perception
    Chapter 17: Sensory Coding
    Chapter 18: Receptors of the Somatosensory System
    Chapter 19: Touch
    Chapter 20: Pain
    Chapter 21: The Constructive Nature of Visual Processing
    Chapter 22: Low-Level Visual Processing: The Retina
    Chapter 23: Intermediate-Level Visual Processing and Visual Primitives
    Chapter 24: High-Level Visual Processing: From Vision to Cognition
    Chapter 25: Visual Processing for Attention and Action
    Chapter 26: Auditory Processing by the Cochlea
    Chapter 27: The Vestibular System
    Chapter 28: Auditory Processing by the Central Nervous System
    Chapter 29: Smell and Taste: The Chemical Senses
    Part V: Movement
    Part V: Movement
    Chapter 30: Principles of Sensorimotor Control
    Chapter 31: The Motor Unit and Muscle Action
    ^Chapter 32: Sensory-Motor Integration in the Spinal Cord
    Chapter 33: Locomotion
    Chapter 34: Voluntary Movement: Motor Cortices
    Chapter 35: The Control of Gaze
    Chapter 36: Posture
    Chapter 37: The Cerebellum
    Chapter 38: The Basal Ganglia
    Chapter 39: Brain-Machine Interfaces
    Part VI: The Biology of Emotion, Motivation, and Homeostasis
    Part VI: The Biology of Emotion, Motivation, and Homeostasis
    Chapter 40: The Brain Stem
    Chapter 41: The Hypothalamus: Autonomic, Hormonal, and Behavioral Control of Survival
    Chapter 42: Emotion
    Chapter 43: Motivation, Reward, and Addictive States
    Chapter 44: Sleep and Wakefulness
    Part VII: Development and the Emergence of Behavior
    Part VII: Development and the Emergence of Behavior
    Chapter 45: Patterning the Nervous System
    Chapter 46: Differentiation and Survival of Nerve Cells
    Chapter 47: The Growth and Guidance of Axons
    Chapter 48: Formation and Elimination of Synapses
    ^Chapter 49: Experience and the Refinement of Synaptic Connections
    Chapter 50: Repairing the Damaged Brain
    Chapter 51: Sexual Differentiation of the Nervous System
    Part VIII: Learning, Memory, Language and Cognition
    Part VIII: Learning, Memory, Language and Cognition
    Chapter 52: Learning and Memory
    Chapter 53: Cellular Mechanisms of Implicit Memory Storage and the Biological Basis of Individuality
    Chapter 54: The Hippocampus and the Neural Basis of Explicit Memory Storage
    Chapter 55: Language
    Chapter 56: Decision-Making and Consciousness
    Part IX: Diseases of the Nervous System
    Part IX: Diseases of the Nervous System
    Chapter 57: Diseases of the Peripheral Nerve and Motor Unit
    Chapter 58: Seizures and Epilepsy
    Chapter 59: Disorders of Conscious and Unconscious Mental Processes
    Chapter 60: Disorders of Thought and Volition in Schizophrenia
    Chapter 61: Disorders of Mood and Anxiety
    ^Chapter 62: Disorders Affecting Social Cognition: Autism Spectrum Disorder
    Chapter 63: Genetic Mechanisms in Neurodegenerative Diseases of the Nervous System
    Chapter 64: The Aging Brain.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2021
  • Digital
    Alejandro Monroy-Sosa, Srikant S. Chakravarthi, Jaime G. de la Garza-Salazar, Abelardo Meneses Garcia, Amin B. Kassam, editors.
    Summary: "This book provides a comprehensive overview of the management of brain and skull base tumors. It features detailed insight into the intrinsic molecular biology, anatomical foundation, radiological planning, surgical execution, and the novel therapeutics that guide today's treatment regimens. The first section features concepts related to the epidemiology and pathological basis of disease processes, including relevant cellular and molecular biology. In the second section, integral anatomical foundations and principles are covered including microsurgical anatomy of the cerebrum, white matter tracts, ventricles, brainstem, skull base, advancements in radiological imaging, and cognitive examinations. Surgical approaches and how to execute these procedures are then subsequently discussed in the third part of the work. Principles of Neuro-Oncology: Brain & Skull Base is a practically applicable guide to the latest treatment techniques available to treat these patients"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Liqun Luo.
    Summary: "Principles of Neurobiology, Second Edition presents the major concepts of neuroscience with an emphasis on how we know what we know. The text is organized around a series of key experiments to illustrate how scientific progress is made and helps upper-level undergraduate and graduate students discover the relevant primary literature. Written by a single author in a clear and consistent writing style, each topic builds in complexity from electrophysiology to molecular genetics to systems level in a highly integrative approach. Students can fully engage with the content via thematically linked chapters and will be able to read the book in its entirety in a semester-long course. Principles of Neurobiology is accompanied by a rich package of online student and instructor resources including animations, figures in PowerPoint, and a Question Bank for adopting instructors"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: An Invitation to Neurobiology
    Chapter 2: Signaling within Neurons
    Chapter 3: Signaling across Synapses
    Chapter 4: Vision
    Chapter 5: Wiring the Visual System
    Chapter 6: Olfaction, Taste, Audition, and Somatosensation
    Chapter 7: Constructing the Nervous System
    Chapter 8: Motor Systems
    Chapter 9: Regulatory Systems
    Chapter 10: Sexual Behavior
    Chapter 11: Memory, Learning, and Synaptic Plasticity
    Chapter 12: Brain Disorders
    Chapter 13: Evolution of the Nervous System
    Chapter 14: Ways of Exploring
    Digital Access TandFonline 2021
    Limited to 4 simultaneous users
  • Print
    Liqun Luo.
    Contents:
    1. An invitation to neurobiology. Nature and nurture in brain function and behavior ; How the nervous system organized ; General methodology ; Summary
    2. Signaling within neurons. Cell biological and electrical properties of neurons ; How do electrical signals propagate from the neuronal cell body to its axon terminals? ; Summary
    3. Signaling across synapses. How is neurotransmitter release controlled at the presynaptic terminal? ; How do neurotransmitters act on postsynaptic neurons? ; Summary
    4. Vision. How do rods and cones detect light signals? ; How are signals from rods and cones analyzed in the retina? ; How is information processed in the visual cortex? ; Summary
    5. Wiring of the visual system. How do retinal ganglion cell axons find their targets? ; How do experience and neuronal activity contribute to wiring? ; How do molecular determinants and neuronal activity work together? ; Visual system development in drosophila : linking cell fate to wiring specificity ; Summary
    6. Olfaction, taste, audition, and somatosensation. How do we sense odors? ; How do worms and flies sense odors? ; Taste : to eat, or not to eat? ; Audition : how do we hear and localize sounds? ; Somatosensation : how do we sense body movement, touch, temperature, and pain? ; Summary
    7. Wiring of the nervous system. How does wiring specificity arise in the developing nervous system? ; Assembly of olfactory circuits : how do neural maps form? ; How do ~20,000 genes specify 10¹⁴ connections? ; Summary
    8. Motor and regulatory systems. How is movement controlled? ; How does the brain regulate the functions of internal organs? ; How is eating regulated? ; How are circadian rhythms and sleep regulated? ; Summary
    9. Sexual behavior. How do genes specify sexual behavior in the fly? ; How are mammalian sexual behaviors regulated? ; Summary
    10. Memory, learning, and synaptic plasticity. Prelude: What is memory, and how is it acquired by learning? ; How is synaptic plasticity achieved? ; What is the relationship between learning and synaptic plasticity? ; Where does learning occur, and where is memory stored in the brain? ; Summary
    11. Brain disorders. Alzheimer's disease and other neurodegenerative diseases ; Psychiatric disorders ; Neurodevelopmental disorders ; Summary
    12. Evolution of the nervous system. General concepts and approaches in evolutionary analysis ; Evolution of neuronal communication ; Evolution of sensory systems ; Evolution of nervous system structure and development ; Summary
    13. Ways of exploring. Animal models in neurobiology research ; Genetic and molecular techniques ; Anatomical techniques ; Recording and manipulating neuronal activity ; Behavioral analyses ; Summary and perspectives
    Glossary.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP355.2 .L86 2016
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Richard G. Ellenbogen, Laligam N. Sekhar, Neil D. Kitchen.
    Contents:
    Section 1: General overview. Landmarks in the history of neurosurgery
    Challenges in global neurosurgery
    Pearls for clinical evaluation of the nervous system
    Principles of modern neuroimaging
    Neuro anesthesia and monitoring for cranial and complex spinal surgery
    Surgical positioning, navigation, important surgical tools, craniotomy and closure of cranial and spinal wounds
    Section 2: Pediatric neurosurgery. Spinal dysraphism and tethered spinal cord
    Hydrocephalus in children
    Diagnosis and surgical options for craniosynostosis
    The Chiari malformations and syringohydromyelia
    Posterior fossa and brainstem tumors in children
    Craniopharyngiomas
    All other brain tumors in pediatrics
    Pediatric vascular disease and stroke
    Section 3: Vascular neurosurgery. Medical and surgical treatment of cerebrovascular occlusive disease
    Intracranial aneurysms, gen principles of management (ruptured and unruptured)
    Surgery for anterior circulation aneurysms
    Surgery for posterior circulation aneurysms
    Complex intracranial aneurysms and bypasses for aneurysms
    Vascular malformations (arteriovenous malformations and rural arteriovenous fistulas)
    Cavernous malformations of the brain and spinal cord
    Spontaneous intracerebral hemorrhage
    Endovascular treatment of acute stroke and occlusive cerebrovascular disease
    Endovascular treatment of intracranial aneurysms
    Section 4: Trauma. Surgical Management of Closed Head Injury
    Critical Care Management of Neurosurgical Patients
    Penetrating Brain Injury
    Traumatic Skull and Facial Fractures
    Section 5: The spine. Injuries to the cervical spine
    Thoracolumbar spine fractures
    Intradural extramedullary and intramedullary spinal cord tumors
    Treatment of spinal metastatic tumors
    Spinal cord injury
    Craniovertebral junction: a reappraisal
    Degenerative spine disease (cervical)
    Degenerative spine disease (thoracolumbar)
    Pediatric and adult scoliosis
    Section 6: Tumors. High-grade gliomas
    Low-grade gliomas
    Metastatic brain tumors
    Convexity, and parasagittal vs. skull base meningiomas
    Tumors of the pineal region
    Cerebellopontine angle tumors
    Pituitary tumors: diagnosis and management
    Endoscopic approaches to ventricular tumors and colloid cysts
    Microsurgical approaches to the ventricular system
    Base tumors: evaluation and microsurgery
    Endoscopic approaches to skull base lesions
    Jugular foramen tumors: paraganglioma and schwannoma
    Section 7: Radiosurgery and radiotherapy. Application of current radiation delivery systems and radiobiology
    Radiosurgery of central nervous system tumors and arteriovenous malformations
    Proton beam therapy and particle beam radiotherapy for cranial and skull base tumors
    Section 8: Functional pain. Trigeminal neuralgia
    Spasticity: classification, diagnosis and management
    Surgery for temporal lobe epilepsy
    Extratemporal procedures and hemispherectomy for epilepsy
    Deep brain stimulation for movement disorders
    Stereotactic functional neurosurgery for mental health disorders, pain and epilepsy
    Section 9: Miscellaneous. Surgical management of infections of the central nervous system, cranium and of the spine
    Adult congenital CSF disorders
    Management of peripheral nerve injuries
    Entrapment neuropathies, peripheral nerve tumors
    Pre-hospital care of TBI patients.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    Alan David Kaye, Scott Francis Davis, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to the Operating Room
    2. Anatomy of Intraoperative Monitoring
    3. Cellular Neurophysiology
    4. Electrophysiology and Bioinstrumentation
    5. Anesthesiology and Intraoperative Electrophysiological Monitoring
    6. Somatosensory Evoked Potential Monitoring
    7. Motor Evoked Potentials
    8. Electromyography (EMG)
    9. Brainstem Auditory Evoked Potentials
    10. Electroencephalography
    11. The H-Reflex and F-Response
    12. Monitoring Procedures of the Spine
    13. Intraoperative Monitoring for Surgery of the Spinal Cord and Cauda Equina
    14. Monitoring Posterior Fossa Craniotomies
    15. Intraoperative Monitoring for Carotid Endarterectomy
    16. Monitoring for ENT Procedures
    17. Peripheral Nerve Monitoring
    18. Intraoperative Cortical Mapping: Basic Concepts, Indications, and Anesthesia Considerations
    19. Neurological Assessment and Correlation in Spinal Cord Nerve Root Pathology
    20. Electrophysiological Assessment of Spinal Cord Pathology in Pain Medicine
    21. Spinal Cord Stimulation: Principles and Applications
    22. New Vistas: Small-Pain-Fibers Method of Testing for Spinal Cord Assessment in Pain States.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Scott Francis Davis, Alan David Kaye, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive, focused resource on intraoperative neurophysiological monitoring (IOM). This rapidly evolving field has created a demand for an up-to-date book such as this that builds on foundational concepts necessary to the practice of IOM in the context of anatomy and physiology. Each chapter is designed to not only inform the reader, but to also test the reader on the information presented - therefore promoting practical, problem-based learning. Boxes on important pathological conditions supplement chapter discussions, along with high quality figures and tables. Surpassing the quality of its successful predecessor, Principles of Neurophysiological Assessment, Mapping, and Monitoring, Second Edition, is positioned to suit the needs of residents and fellows studying for the IOM certificate programs, physicians and anesthesiologists practicing IOM, and neurotechnologists both experienced and in training. .

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction to the Operating Room
    Chapter 2. Anatomy of Intraoperative Monitoring
    Chapter 3. Cellular Neurophysiology
    Chapter 4. Electrophysiology and Bioinstrumentation
    Chapter 5. Anesthesiology and Intraoperative Electrophysiological Monitoring
    Chapter 6. Somatosensory-Evoked Potential Monitoring
    Chapter 7. Motor Evoked Potentials
    Chapter 8. Electromyography (EMG)
    Chapter 9. Brainstem Auditory Evoked Potentials
    Chapter 10. Electroencephalography
    Chapter 11. The H-Reflex and F-Response
    Chapter 12. Monitoring Procedures of the Spine
    Chapter 13. Monitoring and Mapping of the Spinal Cord
    Chapter 14. Monitoring Posterior Fossa Craniotomies
    Chapter 15. Intraoperative Monitoring for Carotid Endarterectomy
    Chapter 16. Monitoring ENT Procedures
    Chapter 17. Peripheral Nerve Monitoring
    Chapter 18. Intraoperative Cortical Mapping: Basic Concepts, Indications, and Anesthesia Considerations
    Chapter 19. Neuromonitoring in the Pediatric Patient
    Chapter 20. Neurological Assessment and Correlation in Spinal Cord Nerve Root Pathology
    Chapter 21. Electrophysiological Assessment of Spinal Cord Pathology in Pain Medicine
    Chapter 22. Spinal Cord Stimulation: Principles and Applications
    Chapter 23. New Vistas: Intraoperative Neurophysiological Monitoring and Small-Pain-Fibers Method of Testing for Spinal Cord Assessment in Pain States.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Majid Assadi, Hojjat Ahmadzadehfar, Hans-Jürgen Biersack.
    Summary: This book is the ideal study tool for all who are preparing for national or international nuclear medicine exams and in addition represents a truly outstanding quick review resource. More than 4200 questions, with comprehensive answers, are presented in order to enable readers to assess their knowledge and identify areas of weakness that require further self-study. Informative subchapters permit exploration of specific topics in greater depth, and practice tests will familiarize readers with the process of taking multiple-choice examinations. The book covers the entire spectrum of nuclear medicine, from basic science to clinical applications for diagnosis and treatment. Individual sections focus on oncology, bone and joint disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, acute care, cardiology, neurology and psychiatry, and renal disease. Principles of Nuclear Medicine is highly recommended for those who are taking nuclear medicine or radiology board examinations or recertifying their subspecialty certificate (CAQ) in nuclear medicine. More generally, it will be an asset for all trainees and practitioners of nuclear medicine and radiology.

    Contents:
    Nuclear medicine in tumor diagnosis
    Nuclear medicine in tumor therapy
    Nuclear medicine in bone and joint disorders
    Nuclear medicine in gastrointestinal function
    Nuclear medicine in acute care
    Nuclear cardiology
    Nuclear medicine in neurological and psychiatric diagnosis
    Nuclear medicine in renal disorders
    Basic sciences.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Andrew J. Schoenfeld, Cheri A. Blauwet, Jeffrey N. Katz, editors.
    Summary: Primary care providers (physicians, nurse practitioners, physician assistants) make decisions on a daily basis regarding treatment for musculoskeletal problems, including referrals to orthopedic surgeons and other specialists. Despite the large number of patients presenting with musculoskeletal complaints, primary care providers often feel poorly educated about how to assess and manage these conditions. Now in its fully revised second edition, Principles of Orthopedic Practice for Primary Care Providers continues to be a go-to resource for clinicians interested in the effective treatment of musculoskeletal disorders. Written by expert orthopedic, physical medicine and pain management specialists at major Harvard teaching hospitals, the second edition of Principles of Orthopedic Practice for Primary Care Providers represents a high-yield and succinct resource on the assessment and management of musculoskeletal conditions. Chapters overview specific body parts, typical presentations of disease, options for diagnostic testing, treatment paradigms, and anticipated outcomes of management both in the primary care setting and following specialist consultation. The text offers suggested pathways for working up and treating these problems with an emphasis on when referral to a specialist, or surgical intervention, is needed. While all previous chapters have been fully revised, this edition also includes nine brand new chapters, including chapters on pain management, hip-spine syndrome, adult spinal deformity, sports-related injuries, and cost and quality in musculoskeletal care.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: The Spine
    Chapter 1: Axial Neck and Back Pain
    Introduction
    Definition and Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation
    Pain History
    Physical Examination
    Differential Diagnosis and Diagnostic Testing
    Myofascial Pain
    Pain Associated with Fractures and Ligamentous Injuries
    Discogenic Pain
    Facetogenic Pain
    Sacroiliac Pain
    Conditions Causing Referred Pain to the Spine
    Nonoperative Management
    Indications for Surgery
    Operative Management
    Anterior Spinal Fusion Posterior Spinal Fusion
    SI Joint Fusion
    Expected Outcomes
    Suggested Reading
    Chapter 2: Sacroiliac Joint Dysfunction and Piriformis Syndrome
    Part I: Sacroiliac Joint Dysfunction
    SI Joint Anatomy, Innervation, and Function
    Anatomy
    Innervation
    Function
    Etiology and Pathology of SI Joint Pain
    Epidemiology
    Diagnostic Evaluation
    History
    Physical Examination
    Differential Diagnosis
    Imaging
    Diagnostic Injections
    Treatment Options
    Physical Therapy
    Manual Therapy and Manipulation
    Orthotics
    Medications
    Intra-Articular Injection Radiofrequency (RF) Ablation
    Prolotherapy and Platelet-Rich Plasma (PRP) Injection
    SI Joint Fusion
    Conclusion
    Part II: Piriformis Syndrome
    Anatomy
    Etiology
    Epidemiology
    Diagnostic Evaluation
    History
    Physical Examination
    Imaging and Diagnostic Testing
    Treatment
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Pain Management for Chronic Musculoskeletal Disorders
    Myofascial Pain Syndrome
    Pharmacologic Therapy
    Minimally Invasive Therapy
    Trigger Point Injection
    Botulinum Toxin Injection
    Lumbar Spine
    Lumbar Epidural Steroid Injections Lumbar Facet Interventions
    Sacroiliac Joint Interventions
    Thoracic Spine
    Thoracic Facet Interventions
    Thoracic Epidural Steroid Injections
    Cervical Spine
    Cervical Epidural Steroid Injections
    Cervical Facet Nerve Blocks and Ablation
    Post-Laminectomy Syndrome
    Spinal Cord Stimulation
    Dorsal Root Ganglion Stimulation
    Intrathecal Pump
    References
    Chapter 4: Adult Spinal Deformity
    Definition and Epidemiology
    Cobb Angle Measurement
    Scoliosis
    Kyphosis/Lordosis
    Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation and Diagnosis
    Non-operative Management Indications for Surgery, Operative Management, Postoperative Management
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 5: Cervical Radiculopathy and Myelopathy
    Cervical Radiculopathy
    Definition and Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation
    Differential Diagnosis and Diagnostic Testing
    Nonoperative Management
    Indications for Surgery
    Operative Management and Expected Outcomes
    Cervical Myelopathy and Myeloradiculopathy
    Definition and Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation
    Differential Diagnosis and Diagnostic Testing
    Nonoperative Management
    Indications for Surgery
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    David E. Golan, MD, PhD, editor in chief ; Ehrin J. Armstrong, MD, MSc, April W. Armstrong, MD, MPH, associate editors.
    Summary: "Highly regarded by both students and instructors, Principles of Pharmacology: The Pathophysiologic Basis of Drug Therapy, 4th Edition, _offers an integrated mechanism-based and systems-based approach to contemporary pharmacology and drug development. An easy-to-follow format helps first- and second-year students grasp challenging concepts quickly and efficiently. Each chapter presents a clinical vignette illustrating a therapeutic problem within a physiologic or biochemical system; followed by a discussion of the biochemistry, physiology, and pathophysiology of the system; and concluding with a presentation of the pharmacology of_the drugs and drug classes that activate or inhibit the system by interacting with specific molecular and cellular targets. Chapters are integrated into sections that focus on organ systems and therapeutic areas of highest importance. Clear, concise illustrations highlight key points, and drug summary tables offer quick access to essential information"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    SECTION I, Fundamental Principles of Pharmacology :
    1. Drug-Receptor Interactions / David E. Golan
    2. Pharmacodynamics / David E. Golan
    3. Pharmacokinetics / David E. Golan
    4. Drug Metabolism / F. Peter Guengerich
    5. Drug Transporters / Keith A. Hoffmaster
    6. Drug Toxicity / David E. Golan
    7. Pharmacogenomics / Kelan Tantisira. SECTION II, Principles of Neuropharmacology :
    SECTION IIA, Fundamental Principles of Neuropharmacology :
    8. Principles of Cellular Excitability and Electrochemical Transmission / Gary R. Strichartz
    9. Principles of Nervous System Physiology and Pharmacology / Daniel H. Lowenstein
    SECTION IIB, Principles of Autonomic and Peripheral Nervous System Pharmacology :
    10. Cholinergic Pharmacology / Gary R. Strichartz
    11. Adrenergic Pharmacology / David E. Golan
    12. Local Anesthetic Pharmacology / Gary R. Strichartz
    SECTION IIC, Principles of Central Nervous System Pharmacology :
    13. Pharmacology of GABAergic and Glutamatergic Neurotransmission / Eng H. Lo
    14. Pharmacology of Dopaminergic Neurotransmission / Victor W. Sung
    15. Pharmacology of Serotonergic and Central Adrenergic Neurotransmission / Roy H. Perlis
    16. Pharmacology of Abnormal Electrical Neurotransmission in the Central Nervous System / Daniel H. Lowenstein
    17. General Anesthetic Pharmacology / Keith W. Miller
    18. Pharmacology of Analgesia / Clifford J. Woolf
    19. Pharmacology of Drugs of Abuse / Sachin Patel. SECTION III, Principles of Cardiovascular Pharmacology :
    20. Pharmacology of Cholesterol and Lipoprotein Metabolism / David E. Cohen
    21. Pharmacology of Volume Regulation / Seth L. Alper
    22. Pharmacology of Vascular Tone / Joseph Loscalzo
    23. Pharmacology of Hemostasis and Thrombosis / David E. Golan
    24. Pharmacology of Cardiac Rhythm / David E. Clapham
    25. Pharmacology of Cardiac Contractility / Ehrin J. Armstrong
    26. Integrative Cardiovascular Pharmacology: Hypertension, Ischemic Heart Disease, and Heart Failure / Ehrin J. Armstrong. SECTION IV, Principles of Endocrine Pharmacology :
    27. Pharmacology of the Hypothalamus and Pituitary Gland / Ursula B. Kaiser
    28. Pharmacology of the Thyroid Gland / William W. Chin
    29. Pharmacology of the Adrenal Cortex / Gail K. Adler
    30. Pharmacology of Reproduction / Robert L. Barbieri
    31. Pharmacology of the Endocrine Pancreas and Glucose Homeostasis / Steven E. Shoelson
    32. Pharmacology of Bone Mineral Homeostasis / Ehrin J. Armstrong. SECTION V, Principles of Chemotherapy :
    33. Principles of Antimicrobial and Antineoplastic Pharmacology / David E. Golan
    34. Pharmacology of Bacterial Infections: DNA Replication, Transcription, and Translation / Donald M. Coen
    35. Pharmacology of Bacterial and Mycobacterial Infections: Cell Wall Synthesis / Sarah P. Hammond
    36. Pharmacology of Fungal Infections / April W. Armstrong
    37. Pharmacology of Parasitic Infections / Edward T. Ryan
    38. Pharmacology of Viral Infections / Donald M. Coen
    39. Pharmacology of Cancer: Genome Synthesis, Stability, and Maintenance / David A. Frank
    40. Pharmacology of Cancer: Signal Transduction / David A. Frank
    41. Principles of Combination Chemotherapy / David E. Golan. SECTION VI, Principles of Inflammation and Immune Pharmacology :
    42. Principles of Inflammation and the Immune System / April W. Armstrong
    43. Pharmacology of Eicosanoids / Charles N. Serhan
    44. Histamine Pharmacology / April W. Armstrong
    45. Pharmacology of Hematopoiesis and Immunomodulation / George D. Demetri
    46. Pharmacology of Immunosuppression / April W. Armstrong
    47. Integrative Inflammation Pharmacology: Peptic Ulcer Disease / Helen M. Shields
    48. Integrative Inflammation Pharmacology: Asthma / Stephen Lazarus
    49. Integrative Inflammation Pharmacology: Gout / Lloyd B. Klickstein. SECTION VII, Environmental Toxicology :
    50. Environmental Toxicology / Joshua M. Galanter
    SECTION VIII Fundamentals of Drug Development and Regulation
    51. Drug Discovery and Preclinical Development / Maarten Postema
    52. Clinical Drug Evaluation and Regulatory Approval / Alexander E. Kuta
    53. Systematic Detection of Adverse Drug Events / Jerry Avorn. SECTION IX, Frontiers in Pharmacology :
    54. Protein Therapeutics / David E. Golan
    55. Drug Delivery Modalities / Robert Langer.
  • Digital/Print
    translated from the 5th German ed. (1902) by Edwrd Bradford Titchener.
    Digital Access Google Books 1904-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F355 .W966t
    1
  • Digital
    Yixin Zhou, Jing Tang, Hongyi Shao, editors.
    Summary: This book covers pertinent principles and practical surgical techniques related to primary total hip arthroplasty (THA) including complex cases. Written by experienced hip and knee surgeons, this book introduces the basic concepts of THA, helping the reader understand the basic science and history of THA. More chapters cover the preoperative planning and preparation, exposure using the various approaches, together with tips and tricks to position implants properly. Navigation-guided and robotic THA techniques are also included. Complications related to surgery, such as leg-length discrepancy, periprosthetic infections and fractures, hip instability, and deep vein thrombosis, are further discussed. Complex situations in specific diseases and pathology, such as rheumatoid hip arthritis, ankylosis spondylitis, and post-traumatic arthritic hip diseases are demonstrated.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Steven E. Weinberger, Barbara A. Cockrill, Jess Mandel.
    Contents:
    Pulmonary anatomy and physiology: the basics
    Presentation of the patient with pulmonary disease
    Evaluation of the patient with pulmonary disease
    Anatomic and physiologic aspects of airways
    Asthma
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Miscellaneous airway diseases
    Anatomic and physiologic aspects of the pulmonary parenchyma
    Overview of diffuse parenchymal lung diseases
    Diffuse parenchymal lung diseases associated with known etiologic agents
    Diffuse parenchymal lung diseases of unknown etiology
    Anatomic and physiologic aspects of the pulmonary vasculature
    Pulmonary embolism
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Pleural disease
    Mediastinal disease
    Anatomic and physiologic aspects of neural, muscular, and chest wall interactions with the lungs
    Disorders of ventilatory control
    Disorders of the respiratory pump
    Lung cancer: etiologic and pathologic aspects
    Lung cancer: clinical aspects
    Lung defense mechanisms
    Pneumonia
    Tuberculosis and nontuberculous mycobacteria
    Miscellaneous infections caused by fungi and pneumocystis
    Pulmonary complications in the immunocompromised host
    Classification and pathophysiologic aspects of respiratory failure
    Acute respiratory distress syndrome
    Management of respiratory failure
    Appendices. Sample problems using respiratory equations
    Pulmonary function tests: guidelines for interpretation and sample problems
    Arterial blood gases: guidelines for interpretation and sample problems
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony Atala, Robert Lanza, Antonios G. Mikos, Robert Nerem.
    Summary: "Principles of Regenerative Medicine, Third Edition, details the technologies and advances applied in recent years to strategies for healing and generating tissue. Contributions from a stellar cast of researchers cover the biological and molecular basis of regenerative medicine, highlighting stem cells, wound healing and cell and tissue development. Advances in cell and tissue therapy, including replacement of tissues and organs damaged by disease and previously untreatable conditions, such as diabetes, heart disease, liver disease and renal failure are also incorporated to provide a view to the future and framework for additional studies"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Raj Mitra.
    Contents:
    Section I: General assessment in rehabilitation medicine.
    An overview of rehabilitation medicine
    The history and physical examination of a patient with disability
    Nervous system
    Overview of the musculoskeletal system
    Assessment of the bladder and bowel dysfunction for the rehabilitation professional
    Skin, connective tissue, bone, and joints
    Autonomic and endocrine nervous system
    Common diagnostic tests in physical medicine and rehabilitation
    Outcome measures in the field of rehabilitation medicine
    Section II: Neurosciences: stroke, spinal cord injury, and traumatic brain injury. Stroke rehabilitation
    Rehabilitation of peripheral neuropathy
    Peripheral nerve injuries: mononeuropathy
    Other neurologic disorders: Alzheimer's, Parkinson's, and multiple sclerosis
    Traumatic myelopathy
    An overview of nontraumatic spinal cord injury and dysfunction
    Spinal cord injury: infectious and inflammatory etiologies
    Neoplastic diseases of the spinal column
    The pathophysiology of traumatic brain injury
    Epidemiology of traumatic brain injury
    Traumatic brain injury: patterns of injury
    Rehabilitation outcomes, systemic manifestations, and problems in traumatic brain injury
    Patient evaluation and diagnosis of TBI
    Patient management for traumatic brain injury
    Section III: Ambulatory care: sports, musculoskeletal, and pain medicine. The role of the team physician
    Basic principles of exercise physiology
    Health promotion and preventive health aspects of sports medicine
    Emergency assessment and care of the athlete
    A brief review of common sports-related injuries and conditions
    Rehabilitation of lower extremity injuries
    Rehabilitation of musculoskeletal conditions of the upper extremity
    Hand rehabilitation
    An overview of soft tissue disorders
    Taxonomy of pain systems
    Basic anatomy and physiology of pain mechanisms
    Spine pain
    Overview and management of complex regional pain syndrome
    Interventional pain management
    Rehabilitation of the pregnant and postpartum patient with pain
    Overview of headache
    Neuropathic pain
    Pain management in the geriatric population
    Pediatric pain management
    Pain management in individuals with cognitive impairment
    Orofacial pain
    Principles of pharmacology and selective agents in physical medicine and rehabilitation
    Cancer pain management
    Complementary and integrative health (CIH) approaches in rehabilitation
    Section IV: Basic principles: amputations, cardiovascular and pulmonary rehabilitation, basic principles of inpatient rehabilitation. Basic principles in the rehabilitation of persons with limb amputation
    Cardiac rehabilitation
    Pulmonary rehabilitation
    Neurogenic bladder dysfunction: a guideline for management
    Wound care
    Emergencies in the rehabilitation unit
    Rehabilitation psychology
    General topics in inpatient rehabilitation
    Spasticity and contractures
    Speech, language, and swallowing disorders
    Section V: Pediatric rehabilitation. Pediatric neurologic disorders
    Issues in pediatric amputations
    Pediatric musculoskeletal medicine
    Cardiovascular rehabilitation in the pediatric patient
    A review of movement disorders in the pediatric patient
    Pediatric oncology rehabilitation
    Pediatric rehabilitation: an overview of problems and outcomes
    History and physical examination of the pediatric rehabilitation patient
    Electrodiagnostic testing in the pediatric patient
    Clinical management of the pediatric patient with disability
    Prosthetics and orthotics: pediatric considerations
    Family-centered care and shared decision making in rehabilitation medicine
    Section VI: Electrodiagnostic and neuromuscular medicine. General concepts in electrodiagnosis
    Neuromuscular disease: motor neuron disorders
    Rehabilitation of root and plexus lesions
    Electrodiagnostic evaluation of neuropathy
    Disorders of the neuromuscular junction: myasthenia gravis
    Myopathies
    Section VII: Ancillary therapy services, prosthetics and orthotics. Modalities
    An overview of physical therapy
    Occupational therapy
    An overview of orthotics
    Section VIII: Special topics in physical medicine and rehabilitation. Arthritis: rheumatoid, osteoarthritis, crystalline arthropathies, and seronegative spondyloarthropathies
    General topics in end-of-life rehabilitation
    Management of the palliative care patient
    Geriatric rehabilitation
    Rehabilitation medicine of hip fractures and falls
    Sexual dysfunction in patients with disabilities
    Rehabilitation of the organ transplant patient
    Rehabilitation of the burn patient
    Management of the rehabilitation patient with psychiatric disorders
    Low vision rehabilitation
    Rehabilitation of the polytrauma patient
    Rehabilitation of reconstruction orthopedics: a smart care model for interdisciplinary, patient-focused care
    Rehabilitation of the temporomandibular joint
    Ethical considerations in rehabilitation
    Recent innovations in rehabilitation science
    Stem cell research and regenerative medicine
    Spinal manipulation: the osteopathic approach to rehabilitation
    Gait evaluation and management
    Oncology rehabilitation
    Work-attributed musculoskeletal conditions
    The rehabilitation of veterans with disability
    Rehabilitation issues in the developing world.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessNeurology
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    editor, Raj Mitra.
    Summary: "A high-yield study resource to help individuals test themselves on the core knowledge covered on the ABPMR Exam"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Contributors
    PrefaceSection 1: Neurologic Disorders
    1. Stroke Rehabilitation
    2. Rehabilitation of Patients with Spinal Tumors
    3. Spinal Cord Injury: Traumatic Myelopathy
    4. An Overview of Nontraumatic Spinal Cord Injury and Dysfunction
    5. Spinal Cord Injury: Infectious and Inflammatory Etiologies
    6. Patient Evaluation and Diagnosis of Traumatic Brain Injury
    7. Patient Management for Traumatic Brain Injury
    8. The Pathophysiology of Traumatic Brain Injury
    9. Rehabilitation Outcomes, Systemic Manifestations, and Problems in Traumatic Brain Injury
    10. Traumatic Brain Injury: Patterns of Injury
    11. Epidemiology of Traumatic Brain Injury
    12. Mononeuropathies and Polyneuropathies
    13. Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
    14. Multiple Sclerosis, Alzheimer's, and Parkinson's
    15. Rehabilitation of Motor Neuron Disease
    16. Pediatric Neurological Disorders
    17. Acute and Chronic Inflammatory Demyelinating Polyneuropathy
    18. Myopathies
    19. Rehabilitation of Thoracic Outlet Syndrome
    20. Rehabilitation of Plexopathy
    21. Cervical and Thoracic Radiculopathy22. Lumbar Radiculopathy
    Section 2: Musculoskeletal Medicine
    23. Overview of the Musculoskeletal System
    24. Pediatric Musculoskeletal Medicine
    25. Muscle and Joint Pain in Pediatric Rehabilitation
    26. Rehabilitation of Upper Extremity Injuries
    27. Rehabilitation of Lower Extremity Injuries
    28. A Brief Review of Common Sports-Related Injuries and Conditions29. Work-Attributed Musculoskeletal Conditions
    30. Arthritis: Rheumatoid, Osteoarthritis, Crystalline Arthropathies, and Seronegative Spondyloarthropathies31. An Overview of Soft Tissue Disorders
    32. Fibromyalgia and Myofascial Pain
    33. Emergent and Rehabilitative Care of the Athlete
    34. The Rehabilitation of Hip Fractures35. Rehabilitation of Strains and Sprains
    36. Tendinitis and Bursitis
    Section 3: Medical Rehabilitation
    37. Rehabilitation of the Patient with Osteoporosis38. Basic Principles in the Rehabilitation of Persons with Limb Amputation
    39. Pediatric Amputations
    40. Cardiac Rehabilitation
    41. Pulmonary Rehabilitation42. Urologic and Gastrointestinal Disorders in Rehabilitation43. Neurogenic Bowel Rehabilitation44. Sexual Dysfunction in Patients with Disabilities45. Pain in Pregnancy46. Oncology Rehabilitation
    47. Pediatric Oncology Rehabilitation
    48. Infectious Disease on the Rehabilitation Unit
    49. Endocrine and Autonomic Nervous System
    50. Burn Rehabilitation
    51. Rehabilitation of the Patient with Organ Transplant
    52. Geriatric Rehabilitation
    53. General Topics in Inpatient Rehabilitation
    54. Spasticity and Contractures
    55. Hydrocephalus on the Rehabilitation Unit
    56. Seizure Management in Rehabilitation Settings
    57. Posture and Balance Issues and Conditions
    58. Effects of Prolonged Bed Rest and Deconditioning During Inpatient Rehabilitation
    59. Heterotopic Ossification
    60. Rehabilitation of the Polytrauma Patient
    61. Wound Care
    62. Emergencies in the Rehabilitation Unit
    63. Communication Disorders and Dysphagia
    64. Visual Dysfunction
    65. Low Vision Rehabilitation
    66. Cognitive Impairments Seen in Acquired Brain Injuries
    67. Sleep Disorders
    68. A Review of Movement Disorders in the Pediatric Patient
    69. Rehabilitation Psychology
    70. Substance Abuse
    71. Disorders of Consciousness
    72. Spine Pain
    73. Complex Regional Pain Syndrome
    74. Opioid Management
    75. Pain Management in the Geriatric Population
    76. Neuropathic Pain
    77. Pediatric Pain Management
    Section 4: Patient Management
    78. Patient Evaluation and Diagnosis: Physical Examination, Signs, Symptoms, and Functional Evaluation
    79. Pediatric Rehabilitation: History, Physical Examination, and Assessment
    80. Common Diagnostic Tests in Physical Medicine & Rehabilitation
    81. Gait Evaluation and Management
    82. Clinical Management of the Pediatric Patient with Disability83. Pediatric Rehabilitation: An Overview of Problems and Outcomes
    84. General Concepts in Electrodiagnostic Medicine85. Electrodiagnosis
    86. Disorders of the Neuromuscular Junction: Myasthenia Gravis
    87. Ethics and Clinical Decision-Making in Rehabilitation
    88. Physical Agent Modalities
    89. An Overview of Physical Therapy
    90. Exercise Physiology
    91. Spinal Manipulation, Traction, and Massage
    92. Pharmacology of Analgesics
    93. Pharmacology of Antiseizure and Antispasmodic Medications
    94. Pharmacologic Interventions: Antibiotics
    95. Psychopharmacology in Rehabilitation
    96. Pharmacology of Anti-inflammatory Medications
    97. A Review of Procedures and Interventions in Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation
    98. Biofeedback
    99. Neuropsychological Evaluations
    Section 5: Equipment & Assistive Technology
    100. Orthotics
    101. Lower Extremity Prosthetics
    102. Functional Electrical Stimulation
    103. Transcutaneous Electrical Stimulation
    104. Electrical Stimulation in Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation
    105. Augmentative Communications
    106. Wheelchair and Seating in Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation
    Section 6: Basic Sciences
    107. Anatomy Review of the Brain
    108. Anatomy of the Spine
    109. Anatomy Review of the Peripheral Nerves
    110. Anatomy Review of the Head and Neck
    111. Anatomy Review of the Knee, Hip, Shoulder, Arm, Wrist, and Ankle
    112. Anatomy Review of the Hand and Foot
    113. Anatomy Review of Bone
    114. Basic Science Review of Muscles
    115. Basic Science Review of Cancer Rehabilitation
    116. Physiology Review of the Muscles, Joints, and Spine
    117. Kinesiology
    118. Nutrition in Rehabilitation Medicine
    119. Rehabilitation in the Developing World
    120. Rehabilitative Management of the Palliative Care Patient
    121. General Topics in End of Life Rehabilitation
    122. Stem Cell Research and Regenerative Medicine
    Index.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Rajender R. Aparasu, John P. Bentley.
    Summary: "Most pharmacy schools offer a course in the pharmacy professional program that covers fundamentals of research design, biostatistics, and evaluation of pharmacy literature, as required by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE). Consequently, this book is divided into three sections to provide comprehensive course content to meet and exceed these curriculum standards set by the ACPE. Section 1 of the book covers principles of scientific research with an emphasis on clinical research designs ranging from randomized clinical trials to case reports. Section 2 of the book provides the foundation necessary to understand statistics and to critically evaluate results from statistical analyses reported in the medical literature with a focus on common statistical methods. Section 3 of the book covers principles of evidence-based medicine, drug literature sources and evaluation techniques, and application of evidence to patient care. There are seven chapters in each section of the book. This book is designed for professional pharmacy (PharmD) students. Instructors teaching principles of research and drug literature evaluation can design the professional course primarily based on this book or can supplement this book with research articles. The contents of the book can be delivered in one or two semesters. Chapters are written by expert authors specializing in pharmacy practice and research. Each chapter includes the following elements: Learning Objectives present the chapter's desired outcomes to the reader. Key Terminology helps the reader quickly identify critical new terms. Review Questions allow readers to apply what has been learned in the chapter and assess their understanding of the content. Online Resources direct students to web sites relevant to the content"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The scientific approach to research and practice
    Ethical considerations in clinical research
    Research design and methods
    Randomized controlled trials
    Cohort and case control studies
    Other observational studies
    Case reports and case series
    Measurement and descriptive analysis
    Interpretation and basic statistical concepts
    Bivariate analysis and comparing groups
    Simple and multiple linear regression
    Logistic regression and survival analysis
    Sample size and power analysis
    Systematic review and meta-analysis
    Principles of evidence-based medicine
    Introduction to drug literature
    Evaluating clinical literature : an overview
    Evaluating randomized clinical trials
    Evaluating observational studies
    Applying drug literature to patient care
    Basics of journal club.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Emanuel Rubin, MD, Distinguished Professor of Pathology, Anatomy and Cell Biology, Kimmel Medical College, Thomas Jefferson University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, American Medical Writer's Award: Best Medical Textbook of the Year, 1989, Tom Kent Award of Group for Research in Pathology Education (GRIPE): Excellence in Pathology Education, 2001, Association of Pathology Chairs: Distinguished Service Award, 2006, American Society for Investigative Pathology: Robbins Distinguished Educator Award, 2017, Howard M. Reisner, PhD, Professor of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine Department of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, North Carolina, Professor of Pathology, Jerry M. Wallace School of Osteopathic Medicine, Campbell University, Buies Creek, North Carolina ; illustrations by Dimitri Karetnikov, George Barile, and Kathy Jaeger.
    Summary: "Principles of Rubin's Pathology" distills need-to-know concepts and practices into an easy-to-read text with expert coverage of disease processes and their effects on cells, organs, and individuals. The seventh edition presents a combination of basic science and clinical information for the modern pathology curriculum -- beginning with principles of general pathology chapters applicable to all or most organ systems, followed by chapters focused on organs or systemic disease that include pathologic descriptions, epidemiology, molecular biology, and clinical features. -- From publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Cell adaptation, injury, death, and aging
    Inflammation and repair
    Immunopathology
    Neoplasia
    Developmental and genetic diseases
    Infectious and parasitic diseases
    The amyloidoses
    Blood vessels and hemodynamic disorders
    Heart
    The respiratory system
    The gastrointestinal tract
    The liver and biliary system
    The exocrine pancreas
    The kidney
    The lower urinary tract and male reproductive system
    The female reproductive tract
    The breast
    Hematopathology
    Endorine system, diabetes, and nutritional diseases
    The skin
    The head and neck
    Bones, joints, and soft tissue
    Skeletal muscle
    The central nervous system and eye
    Traumatic and environmental injury.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    Michael K. Pugsley, Michael J. Curtis, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Part 1. An Overview of Safety Pharmacology and its Role in Drug Discovery
    Part 2. The Safety Pharmacology Core Battery
    Part 3. Supplemental Safety Pharmacology
    Part 4. Safety Pharmacology of Biological and Anticancer Pharmaceuticals
    Part 5. Clinical Safety Pharmacology.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Robert Lanza, Robert Langer, Joseph Vacanti.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Martin Wehling, Department of Clinical Pharmacology Mannheim, University of Heidelberg, Mannheim, Germany.
    Summary: Principles of Translational Science in Medicine: From Bench to Bedside, Second Edition, provides an update on major achievements in the translation of research into medically relevant results and therapeutics. The book presents a thorough discussion of biomarkers, early human trials, and networking models, and includes institutional and industrial support systems. It also covers algorithms that have influenced all major areas of biomedical research in recent years, resulting in an increasing numbers of new chemical/biological entities (NCEs or NBEs) as shown in FDA statistics. The book is ideal for use as a guide for biomedical scientists to establish a systematic approach to translational medicine.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    S. Jane Flint, Vincent R. Racaniello, Glenn F. Rall, Anna Marie Skalka and Lynn W. Enquist.
    Summary: Principles of Virology is the leading virology textbook because it does more than collect and present facts about individual viruses. Instead, it facilitates an understanding of basic virology by examining the shared processes and capabilities of viruses. Using a set of representative viruses to present the complexity and diversity of a myriad of viruses, this rational approach enables students to understand how reproduction is accomplished by known viruses and provides the tools for future encounters with new or understudied viruses. This fully updated edition represents the rapidly changing field of virology. A major new feature is the inclusion of 26 video interviews with leading scientists who have made significant contributions to the field of virology. Applicable courses: undergraduate courses in virology and microbiology as well as graduate courses in virology and infectious diseases.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Molecular biology
    Volume 2. Pathogenesis and control.
  • Digital/Print
    Jane Flint, Department of Molecular Biology, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey, Vincent R. Racaniello, Department of Microbiology & Immunology, Vagelos College of Physicians and Surgeons, Columbia University, New York, New York, Glenn F. Rall, Fox Chase Cancer Center, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Theodora Hatziioannou, The Rockefeller University, New York, New York, Anna Marie Skalka, Fox Chase Cancer Center, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
    Summary: "All five editions of this textbook have been written according to the authors' philosophy that the best approach to teaching introductory virology is by emphasizing shared principles. Studying the common steps of the viral reproductive cycle illustrated with a set of representative viruses, and considering mechanisms by which these viruses can cause disease, provides an integrated overview of the biology of these infectious agents. Such knowledge cannot be acquired by learning a collection of facts about individual viruses. Consequently, the major goal of this book is to define and illustrate the basic principles of virus biology. In this information-rich age, the quantity of data describing any given virus can be overwhelming, if not indigestible, for student and expert alike. The urge to write more and more about less and less is the curse of reductionist science and the bane of those who write textbooks meant to be used by students. In the fifth edition, we continue to distill information with the intent of extracting essential principles, while providing descriptions of how the information was acquired, and tools to encourage our readers' exploration of the primary literature. Boxes are used to emphasize major principles and to provide supplementary material of relevance, from explanations of terminology to descriptions of trailblazing experiments. Our goal is to illuminate process and strategy as opposed to listing facts and figures. In an effort to make the book readable, we have been selective in our choice of viruses that are used as examples. The encyclopedic Fields' Virology (Knipe DM, Howley PM (ed). 2020. Fields Virology, 7th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, PA.) is recommended as a resource for detailed reviews of specific virus families"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Molecular biology
    volume 2. Pathogenesis and control.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Khaled M. Emara, Nicolas S. Piuzzi, editors.
    Summary: Filling a gap in literature, this concise and practical book presents the principles of virtual orthopedic assessment and shares insights into the use of technology for distance patient-physician communication. Offering expert know-how and best practices, it equips readers with essential information on how to best remotely manage the diagnosis, treatment and follow-up of patients. The book starts by defining telemedicine and presenting the basic requirements. The following chapters each focus on a specific joint or compartment, highlighting its peculiarities in terms of remote clinical assessment, and also discussing data security, patient confidentiality and consent as well as medico-legal issues. Moreover, the book features a dedicated chapter that analyzes specific issues related to remote assessment in children, older patients, noncompliant patients, and patients with pain. Covering all the basic and practical aspects of this emerging field, this book is a must-read for orthopedists and other professionals, such as general practitioners and physiotherapists, wanting to gain insights into remote orthopedic patient care.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    What is telemedicine?
    Basic requirements for proper virtual orthopedic assessment
    Shoulder and upper arm
    Elbow and forearm
    Hand and wrist
    Pelvis, hip and thigh
    Knee
    Lower leg, foot and ankle
    Spine
    Neurological assessment
    Special issues and situation on telemedicine
    Medico legal & confidentiality & data security & patients consents
    Dealing with children and old age and noncompliant patients, and patients in pain
    Other related issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Eckhard Nagel, Michael Lauerer, editors.
    Summary: The gap between a rising demand for health care services on the one side and scarce resources on the other, is leading to a growing pressure on decision-making processes. Hence, prioritization in medicine has become an increasingly important issue for assuring stability of health systems and improving the capability of health care. The present volume addresses normative dimensions of methodological and theoretical approaches, the legal basis behind priority setting as well as international experiences concerning the normative framework and the process of priority setting. It also examines specific criteria for prioritization and discusses economic evaluations. Contributing authors from a broad range of scientific disciplines discuss prioritization within an international dialogue.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    International Experiences: Normative Basis and Process of Priority Setting
    Criteria for Prioritization
    Methodological Approaches to Prioritization
    Economical Aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Larry Yet.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Benzodiazepines
    3. 1,4-dihydropyridines
    4. Biaryls
    5. 4-(Hetero)Arylpiperidines
    6. Spiropiperidines
    7. 2-Aminopyrimidines
    8. 2-Aminothiazoles
    9. 2-(Hetero)Arylindoles
    10. Tetrahydroisoquinolines
    11. 2,2-Dimethylbenzopyrans
    12. Hydroxamates
    13. Bicyclic pyridines containing ring-junction nitrogen
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Naheed Mojgani, Maryam Dadar, editors.
    Summary: This book covers all aspects of probiotic bacteria and their metabolites, as well as their role and significance in human and animal health. Given the role of probiotic bacterial strains in the production of short chain fatty acids, butyrate etc probiotics may be considered as an alternative approach for the prevention or treatment of intestinal dysbiosis, cancers, cardiovascular diseases, hypertensions. Additionally, the significance of probiotics added in aquaculture systems for improving health, performance and growth of aquatic organisms has been highlighted. In this book, the multi-functional role of probiotics and their post-biotic metabolites in improving overall health status of man and animals, is discussed. It is a comprehensive compilation useful for researchers, academics, veterinarians and students in the field of microbiology, food technology and biotechnology.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Bacillus spp. In Aquaculture mechanisms and Applications: An Update View
    Chapter 2. Immunity and Gut Microbiome: role of Probiotics and Prebiotics
    Chapter 3. Preventive Effects of Probiotics and Prebiotics in Food Allergy: potentials and promises
    Chapter 4. An Overview of Dairy Probiotic Microflora
    Chapter 5. Remarkable Metabolic Versatility of the Commensal Bacteria Eubacterium hallii and Intestinimonas butyriciproducens, Potential Next Generation Probiotics
    Chapter 6. Anti-carcinogenic Potential of Probiotic, Postbiotic Metabolites and Paraprobiotics on Human Cancer Cells
    Chapter 7. Postbiotic Metabolites of Probiotic in Animal Health
    Chapter 8. Probiotics Application: Implication for Sustainable Aquaculture
    Chapter 9. Honeybees Gut as a Reservoir of Probiotic Bacteria
    Chapter 10. Role of Probiotic Bacteria on Bio-availability of Functional Ingredients Under Fermentation Process
    Chapter 11. Quality and Health Aspects of Dairy Foods Affected by Probiotic Microbes and Their Metabolites
    Chapter 12. Encountering the Antibiotic Resistance by Bioactive Components and Therapies: Probiotics, Phytochemicals and Phages
    Chapter 13. Probiotic Bacteria as a functional Delivery Vehicle for the Development of Live Oral Vaccines
    Chapter 14. Promising Aspects of Probiotics and Postbiotics Derived from Lactic Acid Bacteria as Pharma Foods
    Chapter 15. Non-Dairy Foods as Potential Carriers of Probiotic Bacteria and Postbiotics.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Martin H. Floch, Adam Kim.
    Contents:
    Clinical insights : probiotics, prebiotics and gut health / Martin H. Floch & Adam Kim
    Ask the experts : an introduction to probiotics, prebiotics and gut health / Adam Kim & Martin H. Floch
    Modification of the gut microbiota to promote human health / Catherine Tomaro-Duchesneau, Shyamali Saha & Satya Prakash
    Antimicrobial and immune modulation properties of probiotics / Saad Y. Salim & Karen L. Madsen
    Prebiotics and synbiotics : how do they affect health? / Kristin Verbeke
    Probiotic use in the critically ill / Lee E. Morrow, Vijaya K. Gogineni & Mark A. Malesker
    Use of probiotics and prebiotics in inflammatory bowel disease / Sanam Verma, Rosica Valcheva, Shakir Bakkari & Levinus Dieleman
    Use of probiotics in irritable bowel syndrome / Eamonn M.M. Quigley
    Diarrheal disease / Eavan G. Muldoon, Shira Doron & Sherwood L. Gorbach
    Multiple choice questions : answers.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    Stefano Guandalini, Flavia Indrio, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Diana Di Gioia, Bruno Biavati.
    Summary: This book discusses the role of probiotics and prebiotics in maintaining the health status of a broad range of animal groups used for food production. It also highlights the use of beneficial microorganisms as protective agents in animal derived foods. The book provides essential information on the characterization and definition of probiotics on the basis of recently released guidelines and reflecting the latest trends in bacterial taxonomy. Last but not least, it discusses the concept of "dead" probiotics and their benefits to animal health in detail. The book will benefit all professors, students, researchers and practitioners in academia and industry whose work involves biotechnology, veterinary sciences or food production.

    Contents:
    1) Probiotics and prebiotics: an overview on recent trends (Tannock G.W., University of Otago, Dunedin, New Zealand; Pot B. Center for Infection and Immunity, Lille, Institute Pasteur de Lille, Lille, France)
    2) Characterization of probiotics for taxonomic purpose (Biavati B., University of Malta, Department of Earth Systems, Division of Rural Sciences and Food Systems, Malta)
    3) Role of the gut microbiota in health and disease (Holzapfel W.H., School of Life Sciences, Handong Global University, Pohang, Gyeongbuk, South Korea)
    4) Protective cultures for the safety of animal derived foods (Rovira J. and Melero B., Department of Biotechnology and Food Science, University of Burgos, Burgos, Spain)
    5) Probiotics and prebiotics for the health of monogastric farm animals (poultry, pig, horses)
    (Kritas S.K., Faculty of Veterinary Medicine, Scholl of Health Science, Aristotele University of Thessaloniki, Greece; Akoy R., School of Biological Sciences, University of Plymouth, Plymouth, Devon, UK)
    6) Probiotics and prebiotics for the health of polygastric farm animals (Azad E., Department of Animal Science, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Canada)
    7) Probiotics and prebiotics for the health of companion animals (Ridgway M.D., University of Illinois College of Veterinary Medicine, USA)
    8) Probiotics and prebiotics in aquaculture (Pandiyan P., CAS in Marine Biology, Annamalai University, Parangipettai 608502, Tamil Nadu, India)
    9) Probiotics for bees' health (Gaggia Francesca, Baffoni Loredana, Alberoni Daniele, Department of Agricultural Science, University of Bologna, Italy)
    10) Dead or live probiotics for animal health? (Sant'Ana A., Department of Food Science, Faculty of Food Engineering, University of Campinas, Brazil)
    11) Conclusion and future perspectives (Diana Di Gioia, Department of Agricultural Science, University of Bologna, Italy; Bruno Biavati, University of Malta, Department of Earth Systems, Division of Rural Sciences and Food Systems, Malta).
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Daniel Alicata, Negar Jacobs, Anthony Guerrero, Melissa Piasecki, editors.
    Summary: In keeping with the growing emphasis on psychiatry in the medical school curriculum, problem-based learning (PBL) offers students a unique patient-centred, multidisciplinary approach to study and the synthesis of knowledge. The new 2nd edition of Problem-Based Behavioral Science and Psychiatry integrates DSM-5 updates and diagnostic criteria, and is fully consistent with PBL models and methods. Building on the strengths of the popular and widely downloaded 1st edition, the 2nd edition is a clinically robust resource for both the medical and the behavioral science student. Over 40 contributors, many themselves graduates of PBL medical schools, apply problem-based learning methods to specific psychiatric disorders, general clinical issues, and bedrock physician skills such as the intake interview and treatment planning. The book's fictional case vignettes illustrated typical patient scenarios, providing real-world context for content areas, and accompanying case diagrams show the relationships between patient behaviour and underlying neurobiological structures. Each student-friendly section ends with helpful review questions. A sampling of the content areas covered: · Childhood development and brain development. · Major psychiatric illnesses, including personality, mood, anxiety, and psychotic disorders. · Stress, substance abuse, and violence. · Eating, sleep, and sexual disorders. · Coping skills and treatment compliance. · End-of-life care. · PLUS chapters on cultural sensitivity, ethical concerns, and the physician/patient relationship. This book is ideal for first and second year medical students wanting to learn about psychiatry in the exciting context of realistic cases. It also makes an excellent prep/review text for third- and fourth-year medical students preparing for the USMLE Step 1 and 2 exams, as well as being suited to graduate students in psychology or clinical social work. Problem-Based Behavioral Science and Psychiatry encourages lifelong learning and helps build the foundation for a lifelong career.

    Contents:
    How to Use this Book
    Child Development
    Effects of Early Experience on Brain and Body
    Learning Principles of Human Behavior
    Sexuality Throughout the Life Cycle
    Adaptation and Coping in a Medical Setting
    Violence and Abuse
    The Physician-Patient Relationship
    Clinical Ethics and Professionalism
    Adherence in Medicine
    Stress and Health
    Healthcare 101 and Systems-based Practice
    Stigma and Medicine
    Culture, ethnicity, and medicine
    Quantitative Measures in Healthcare
    Death, Dying, and End-of-life Care
    Basic Principles of Evaluation: Interviewing, Mental Status Examination, Differential Diagnosis, and Treatment Planning
    Disorders of Childhood
    Substance-related and Addictive Disorders
    Schizophrenia Spectrum and Other Psychotic Disorders
    Mood Disorders and suicide
    Anxiety disorders, obsessive-compulsive and related disorders, trauma and stressor-related disorders
    Somatic Symptom and Related Disorders
    Personality Disorders
    Neurocognitive Disorders
    Sleep-Wake Disorders
    Feeding and Eating Disorders
    Sexual Disorders
    Other Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Hemanshu Prabhakar, Shobana Rajan, Indu Kapoor, Charu Mahajan, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Stockholm International Peace Research Institute.
    Contents:
    pt. 1. History
    pt. 2. Weapons, military doctrines, national policies
    pt. 3. CBW at the League of Nations and United Nations 1920-69
    pt. 4. Verification
    pt. 5. International law
    pt. 6. Possible steps to avoid CB warfare.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I1246 .S86
    3
  • Digital
    Joseph Schulman, editor.
    Summary: Neonatal intensive care unit (NICU) teams in the US and around the world receive performance reports that locate their particular value for selected process and outcome measures within the range of values from all reporting NICUs. Understandably, many providers focus primarily, if not exclusively, on their particular value. When a value appears undesirable, providers often justify it in an apparent reflex response rather than critically analysing their data. Exceedingly few reflect on the width or implications of the range within which their performance lies. Standard medical education does not include these skills, yet unwarranted practice variation necessarily compromises a populations overall quality of care. Researchers report wide variation in health care resource use with little connection to patient outcomes, challenging the belief that directing incrementally more resources at certain healthcare problems necessarily produces better results. This book provides requisite knowledge to enable readers without research expertise to understand the notion of unwarranted practice variation, how to recognize it, its ubiquity, and why it is generally undesirable why narrowing is pervasiveness improves quality. The book begins by describing practice variation, its prevalence, and why it matters. Next, it examines alternative conceptualizations of NICU work. One view is task-oriented, while the other is aim-oriented. NICU teams rarely articulate their aims explicitly, so this book offers examples that guide thinking and action. Finally, this book asks, "Which rate is 'right'; what is the performance target?" The answer entails identifying the lowest resource use rate associated with desirable outcomes. This requires data describing efficient and predictably performing provision of current evidence-based care, along with relationships to a variety of outcomes. Provider conceptualization of healthcare quality also is often vague. The challenge lies in defining this notion operationally. This book does precisely that and gives readers tools to think critically about process, outcome, and quality measures, via some understanding of systems, risk-adjustment modelling, and discriminating signal from noise in process data.

    Contents:
    1. What is practice variation and why should we care about it?
    2. Clinical Care: Why do we do what we do? Exactly what are we trying to achieve?
    3. How do practice variation and quality improvement efforts relate?
    4. The ubiquity of practice variation
    5. The Dartmouth Atlas of Neonatal Care. Author: David C. Goodman, MD, MS
    6. The Norwegian Neonatal Healthcare Atlas. Author: Atle Moen, MD, PhD
    7. NICU Antibiotic Practice Variation
    8. Can Performance Feedback Affect NICU Antibiotic Practice Variation?
    9. A Single Measure of Antibiotic Practice Variation is Insufficient Hospital Diagnostic Efficiency for Early- and Late-onset Neonatal Sepsis
    10. Association Between Inborn NICU Admission rates and Proportion With High Illness Acuity
    11. Expanding Our Evaluative Focus
    12. The NICU Electronic Medical Record and Performance Evaluation
    13. How to Interpret Your Dot: What Does Your Risk-Adjusted Performance Measure Actually Tell You?
    14. A Primer on Systems Thinking and Understanding Variation in Care Processes Results Statistical Process Control Methods
    15. Practice Variation and (Mis)Aligned Incentives
    16. Eliminating Site of Care as an Independent Outcome Determinant
    17.Which Rate is "Right?"
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Subba R. Digumarthy, Suhny Abbara, Jonathan H. Chung.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    section/associate editors, Stuart Mirvis, Wayne Scott Kubal, Kathirkamanathan Shanmuganathan, Jorge Soto, Joseph S. Yu.
    Contents:
    Strategies for reducing radiation exposure from MDCT in the acute care setting / Aaron D. Sodickson
    Image management in emergency radiology / Martin Lee Gunn
    Craniocerebral trauma / Wayne Scott Kubal
    Non-traumatic brain emergencies / Wayne Scott Kubal
    Face and neck emergencies / Wayne Scott Kubal
    Spinal trauma / Wayne Scott Kubal
    Non-traumatic spine emergencies / Thomas Ptak
    Blunt chest trauma / Lisa A. Miller and Stuart E. Mirvis
    Nonvascular chest emergencies / Jamlik-Omari Johnson, Anuj Tewari and Waqas Shuaib
    Vascular chest emergencies / Sanjeev Bhalla
    Blunt abdominal and retroperitoneal trauma / Kathirkamunathan shanmuganathan
    Imaging of penetrating trauma of the torso and / Kathirkamunathan shanmuganathan
    Non-traumatic abdominal emergencies / Jorge Soto and Kathirkamunathan shanmuganathan
    Upper extremity / Joseph S. Yu
    Lower extremity / Joseph S. Yu
    Pelvis / Joseph S. Yu
    Emergent soft tissue conditions / Joseph S. Yu.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Francesco Maria Angelici, Lorenzo Rossi, editors.
    Summary: In a world where habitats are constantly changing and the impact of anthropization on the environment is increasingly intense, interactions between human and wildlife are becoming more and more complex. Some species pose problems for human activities while many others need to be helped in order to continue to exist. This book follows the first volume called 'Problematic Wildlife', edited by F.M. Angelici and published by Springer in 2016, which has had considerable success with readers and critics. The volume includes 21 chapters divided into 7 parts devoted specific topics which are approached in a multidisciplinary way. There are both review chapters and specific cases, always bearing in mind the interest for an international audience. The book can be useful both for scientists, wildlife specialists, conservationists, zoologists, ecologists, university students, nature managers, and for those who live in contact with wildlife and its problems, such as farmers, shepherds, hunters, urban planners, and staff of parks and nature reserves. Its ultimate goal is to offer scientific and pragmatic approaches to manage each categories of problematic species.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Part 1. Introduction to 'Problematic Wildlife II'. Problematic species are increasing, in a world that is constantly changing
    Chapter 1. The need and relevance of the book. Problematic Wildlife and the Modern World
    Part 2. From direct danger to humans to negative impact on human activities
    Chapter 2. Large Felid Predators and 'Man-eaters: Can we successfully balance conservation of endangered apex predators with the safety and needs of rapidly expanding human populations?
    Chapter 3. A large carnivore among people and livestock: the common leopard
    Chapter 4. Recent changes in wolf habitat occupancy and feeding habits in Italy: implications for conservation and reducing conflict with humans
    Part 3. Urban wildlife conflicts are an emerging problem
    Chapter 5. 'Good and 'bad urban wildlife
    Chapter 6. Wildlife and traffic
    an inevitable but not unsolvable problem?
    Chapter 7. The colonization of the Western Yellow-legged Gull (Larus michahellis) in an Italian city: evolution and management of the phenomenon
    Part 4. Hunting and eco-tourism: possible mechanisms for conservation and coexistence?
    Chapter 8. How hunting and wildlife conservation can coexist. Review and case studies
    Chapter 9. What do we know about wild boar in Iberia?
    Chapter 10. Travelling in a fragile world: The value of Ecotourism
    Part 5. Species extinction
    Chapter 11. Assessing presence, decline and extinction for the conservation of difficult-to-observe species
    Chapter 12. Extinct or perhaps surviving relict populations of big cats. Their controversial stories and implications for conservation
    Part 6. Zoos, Conservation, Animal Rights
    Chapter 13. Alternative facts and alternative views: Scientists, managers, and animal rights activists
    Chapter 14. Zoos and conservation in the Anthropocene: opportunities and problems
    Chapter 15. Problematic Animals in the Zoo: the issue of charismatic megafauna
    Chapter 16. Cryptic pr oblematic species and troublesome taxonomists: A tale of the Apennine bear and the Nile white rhinoceros
    Chapter 17. Communication and wildlife conservation (grey wolf and brown bear in Italy)
    Part 7. Humans and Herpetofauna
    Chapter 18. Snakes, snakebites, and humans
    Chapter 19. Giant Snake-Human Relationships
    Chapter 20. Risk assessment model for brown treesnake introduction into the continental United States
    Chapter 21. The Asian toad (Duttaphrynus melanostictus) in Madagascar: A report of an ongoing invasion
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Jack Fisher, MD, FACS, Associate Clinical Professor, Department of Plastic Surgery, Vanderbilt University, Nashville, Tennessee, Neal Handel, MD, FACS, Associate Clinical Professor, Division of Plastic Surgery, David Geffen School of Medicine, University of California, Los Angeles, Los Angeles, California.
    Summary: "Problems in Breast Surgery: A Repair Manual is destined to become a valued part of every plastic surgeon and breast surgeon's library. This unique book provides a virtual lifeline for addressing the challenges encountered in aesthetic and reconstructive breast surgery and avoiding possible problems and complications. This is not a traditional technique-oriented textbook; rather, it has a problem focus and provides different solutions for solving complex problems associated with secondary breast surgery. The book begins with chapters on the basic principles of corrective breast surgery and the key anatomic factors and mechanisms of failure that are key to accurate analysis. With this foundation in place, it proceeds to address the spectrum of potential problems that can occur with each of the different procedures, ranging from breast augmentation, reduction, and mastopexy to breast and nipple-areola reconstruction. Each chapter is introduced with a specific problem presented by Drs. Fisher and Handel. Then the second portion of the chapter features a variety of solutions from different experts for treating the problem. These experts provide case examples of similar problems with the step-by-step explanation of how they solved these problems and why they took the approach that they used. The book covers both aesthetic and reconstructive breast surgery. The goal of this book is not to judge which solution is the best (that decision is left to the reader). Designed to provide a detailed road map, this manual explains how to move from point A, the problem, to point B, the solution. Beautifully Illustrated, Dramatic color illustrations and numerous preoperative, intraoperative, and postoperative images will help the reader visualize the steps of each operative solution. Unique Features: This book's approach is unique and should be of great educational value to surgeons, both residents and practitioners, in solving challenging problems and complications; but even more important, it will help them avoid problems and complications in future cases"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Michael W. Neumeister, Michael Sauerbier.
    Summary: "The intricate balance of the intrinsic and extrinsic soft tissue structure and boney scaffold of the hand, coupled with 31 articulating services in the hand and wrist can lead to significant surgical challenges. Providing surgeons with technical pearls to overcome these challenges is the primary focus of Problems in Hand Surgery by internationally renowned hand surgeons Michael W. Neumeister, Michael Sauerbier, and an impressive group of contributors. Organized by 29 sections and 90 chapters, this comprehensive book focuses on secondary hand surgeries to optimize hand form and function in patients with challenging trauma- and disorder-related hand issues. Among the many topics addressed are problems associated with nonunion, malunion, dysvascular limbs, trauma-related degenerative changes, stiffness, tendon dysfunction, joint disruption, nerve injury, neuropathy, vasospasm, fractures, and osteoarthritis"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    [edited by] Foad Nahai, Ted H. Wojno.
    Summary: "The field of periorbital surgery has expanded exponentially in recent decades. With its rise in popularity, however, comes a rise in complications. Finally there is a comprehensive guide to repairing the problems encountered in periorbital surgery, compiled by masters in the art of periorbital surgery! This unique resource for plastic, facial plastic and oculoplastic surgeons offers several key features: - A thorough discussion on the history and examination for the evaluation of the eyelid - Stepwise guidance for correcting a range of complications in periorbital surgery, including infection and bleeding, blindness and motility disorders, specific upper and lower eyelid problems including lid retraction, chemosis, and adverse results from fillers and resurfacing - Several chapters, presenting different approaches, devoted to the challenging problem of lid retraction and its multifactorial etiology - A case-report format that provides detailed discussions of all possible complications - Expert techniques from renowned surgeons providing multiple perspectives on the same problems - More than 300 color photographs and beautifully detailed surgical illustrations - Multiple video clips showing details of eyelid evaluation and corrective techniques - Both print and electronic formats for easy access everywhere To meet the ever-increasing patient demand for these youth-restoring procedures, all surgeons undertaking eyelid surgery and committed to prevent and treat complications of periorbital surgery should have this resource in their collection! Foad Nahai, MD, FACS, FRCS (HON), Maurice"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
  • Digital
    editors Marc R. Avram, Mathew M. Avram, Désirrée Ratner.
    Digital Access AccessDermatology 2015
  • Print
    [edited by] David H. Ciocon, Yoon-Soo Cindy Bae.
    Summary: "Since the 1980s, dermatologists have increasingly assumed the reins of surgical reconstruction after Mohs micrographic surgery of the head and neck, as well as delicate areas of the hands, feet, and genitalia. Volume I of Procedural Dermatology: Postresidency and Fellowship Compendium, edited by esteemed dermatologists David H. Ciocon and Yoon-Soo Cindy Bae, provides a comprehensive review of the latest techniques in surgical reconstruction after Mohs surgery based on the location of the defect. The content reflects years of firsthand expertise from an impressive group of internationally recognized reconstructive surgery experts, who contributed chapters on evidence-based surgical, cosmetic, and laser techniques"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Facial, Scalp, Neck, Hands, Lower Extremities, and Genital Anatomy
    Reconstruction of the Forehead Unit
    Reconstruction of the Nasal Unit
    Reconstruction of the Eyelid Units
    Reconstruction of the Cheek
    Reconstruction of the Upper and Lower Lip Unit
    Reconstruction of the Mental Unit
    Reconstruction of the Ear
    Reconstruction of the Neck Unit
    Reconstruction of the Scalp
    Reconstruction of the Hand and Nail Unit after Mohs Surgery
    Reconstruction of the Genital
    Reconstruction of the Lower Legs
    Reconstruction of Scars
    Mohs and Melanoma
    Prevention and Repair of Internal Nasal Valve Dysfunction for the Reconstructive Surgeon
  • Print
    [edited by] Yoon-Soo Cindy Bae, David H. Ciocon.
    Summary: "Since the 1980s, dermatologists have increasingly assumed the reins of surgical reconstruction after Mohs micrographic surgery of the head and neck, as well as delicate areas of the hands, feet, and genitalia. Procedural Dermatology: Postresidency and Fellowship Compendium, edited by esteemed dermatologists David H. Ciocon and Yoon-Soo Cindy Bae, provides a comprehensive review of the latest techniques in surgical reconstruction after Mohs surgery based on the location of the defect. The content reflects years of firsthand expertise from an impressive group of internationally recognized reconstructive surgery experts, who contributed chapters on evidence-based surgical, cosmetic, and laser techniques"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Nonablative Rejuvenation
    Ablative Rejuvenation
    Body Contouring
    Cellulite Treatment
    Skin Laxity: Microneedling
    Scar Treatments
    Pigmented Lesion Removal
    Lasers and Light Devices for Hair Removal
    Tattoo Removal
    Leg Vein Treatment
    Lasers and Lights in Acne
    Chemical Peels
    Light-Emitting Diode Photomodulation
    Combining Treatments
    Neuromodulators and Injection Technique
    Soft-Tissue Augmentation with Dermal Fillers
    Procedural Hair Restoration: Platelet-Rich Plasma for Hair Loss and Hair Transplant
    Blepharoplasty, Lower Facelift, and Brow Lift
    Devices and Treatment Options for Axillary Hyperhidrosis
    Thread Lifts
    Cosmeceuticals
    Kybella/Deoxycholic Acid/Off-Label Uses
    High-Definition Body Contouring: Advancing Traditional Liposuction through Experience
    Fat Transfer
  • Digital
    Bedros Taslakian, Aghiad Al-Kutoubi, Jamal J. Hoballah, editors.
    Contents:
    Core Biopsy of Cervical Lymph Node
    Core Biopsy of Neck Lesion
    Core Biopsy of the Parotid Gland
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Cervical Lymph Node
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Thyroid Nodule
    Sialography
    Aspiration of Pleural Effusion
    Catheter Drainage of Lung Abscess
    Catheter Drainage of Pleural Effusion
    Core Biopsy of Chest Wall Lesion
    Core Biopsy of Lung Lesion
    Core Biopsy of Mediastinal Lesion
    Exchange of Chest Drain
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Lung Lesion
    Thermal Lung Ablation
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Axillary Lymph Node
    Fine Needle Aspiration of Breast Lesion
    MRI-Guided Biopsy of Breast Lesion
    Needle Localization of Breast Lesion
    Stereotactic Core Biopsy of Breast Lesion
    Ultrasound-Guided Core Biopsy of Breast Lesion
    Colorectal Stent Placement
    Conversion Gastrojejunostomy
    Esophageal Balloon Dilation and Stent Placement
    Gastroduodenal Stent Placement
    Nasal /Oral Feeding Tube Insertion
    Percutaneous Cecostomy
    Percutaneous Direct Jejunostomy
    Percutaneous Feeding Tube Replacement
    Percutaneous Gastrojejunostomy
    Percutaneous Gastrostomy
    Core Biopsy of the Liver
    Hepatic Tumor Ablation
    Liver Abscess Drainage
    Percutaneous Cholecystolithotomy
    Percutaneous Cholecystostomy
    Percutaneous Diagnostic Cholecystocholangiography
    Percutaneous Biliary Stone Extraction (Hepatolithotomy and Choledocolithotomy)
    Percutaneous Transhepatic Biliary Balloon Dilation for Benign Biliary Strictures
    Percutaneous Transhepatic Biliary Drainage
    Percutaneous Transhepatic Biliary Stent Placement
    Percutaneous Transhepatic Cholangiography
    Ablation of Renal Tumors
    Alcohol Ablation of Renal Cyst
    Antegrade Nephrostogram
    Core Biopsy of the Kidney
    Nephrostomy
    Antegrade Ureteral Stenting
    Nephroureterostomy
    Suprapubic Cystostomy
    Bone Biopsy
    Discography
    Intra-Articular Facet Joint Injection
    Kyphoplasty
    Percutaneous Epidural and Nerve Root Block
    Percutaneous Management of Malignant Bone Tumors
    Percutaneous Nucleotomy
    Radiofrequency Ablation of Osteoid Osteoma
    Sacroiliac Joint Injection
    Sacroplasty
    Shoulder Arthrography
    Soft Tissue Biopsy
    Steroid Injections in the Shoulder
    Vertebroplasty
    Aspiration of Abdominopelvic Fluid Collection
    Catheter Drainage of Abdominopelvic Abscess
    Catheter Drainage of Ascites
    Celiac Plexus Neurolysis and Block
    Core Biopsy of Abdominopelvic Lesions
    Exchange of Drainage Catheter
    Fluoroscopy Guided Lumbar Puncture
    Myelography
    Tractography (Pull-Out Tractography)
    Tubography (Sinography)
    Aortography and Selective Angiography
    Endovascular Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm Repair (EVAR)
    Percutaneous Transluminal Embolization of Type II Endoleak
    Thoracic Endovascular Aortic Repair (TEVAR) and Aortic Fenestration
    Transarterial Embolization of Type II Endoleak
    Brachiocephalic / Subclavian Venoplasty and Stenting
    Inferior vena Cava Filter Insertion
    Inferior vena Cava filter Retrieval
    Inferior Vena Cavogram
    Peripherally Inserted Central Catheter (PICC)
    Placement of Non-Tunneled Central Venous Catheter
    Placement of Subcutaneous Central Venous Port
    Placement of Tunneled Central Venous Catheter
    Superior Vena Cava Stent Insertion
    Superior Vena Cavogram
    Abdominal Visceral Arteriography
    Celiac and Superior Mesenteric Artery Angioplasty and Stenting
    Embolization for Management of Acute Non-Variceal Gastrointestinal Hemorrhage
    Embolization of the Splenic Artery in Nontraumatized Patients
    Embolization of the Splenic Artery in Traumatic Splenic Injury
    Embolization of Visceral Aneurysms and Pseudoaneurysms
    Thrombolysis for Management of Acute Mesenteric Ischemia
    Catheter-Directed Embolization of Renal Artery in Nontraumatized Patients
    Embolization of Renal Angiomyolipoma
    Management of Acute Renal Ischemia
    Renal Arteriography
    Renal Artery Angioplasty and Stent Placement
    Renal Sympathetic Denervation
    Renal Venography
    Transcatheter Embolization for the Treatment of Renal Trauma
    Transjugular Renal Biopsy
    Embolization of Hepatic Tumors
    Part 1: Bland and Chemoembolization
    Embolization of Hepatic Tumors
    Part 2: Radioembolization
    Embolization of the Hepatic Artery in Traumatic Liver Injury
    Management of Budd-Chiari Syndrome
    Preoperative Portal Cein Embolization
    Transjugular Intrahepatic Portosystemic Shunt (TIPS)
    Transjugular Liver Biopsy
    Interventional Therapy for Varicoceles
    Ovarian Vein Embolization
    Uterine Artery Embolization
    Bronchial Artery Embolization
    Embolization for Pulmonary Arteriovenous Malformations
    Pulmonary Angiography
    Pulmonary Artery Thrombectomy and Thrombolysis
    Subclavian artery Balloon Angioplasty and Stenting
    Subclavian Vein Thrombolysis
    Subclavian/Brachial Artery Thrombolysis
    Upper Extremity Angiogram
    Endovascular Treatment of Popliteal Aneurysm
    Lower Extremity Angiogram
    Superficial Femoral, Popliteal, and Tibial Artery Angioplasty and Stenting
    Thrombectomy for Management of Acute Limb Ischemia
    Thrombolytic Therapy for Lower Extremity Deep Vein Thrombosis
    Adrenal Venous Sampling
    Inferior Petrosal Vein Sampling
    Parathyroid Venous Sampling
    Renal Vein Renin Sampling
    Venous Sampling for Localizing Pancreatic Endocrine Tumors
    Dialysis Access Interventions (Arteriovenous Fistulas and Grafts)
    Dialysis Fistulogram
    Endovenous Thermal Ablation for Lower Extremity Venous Insufficiency
    Management of Visceral and Extremity Arteriovenous Malformations
    Percutaneous Obliteration of Common Femoral Artery Pseudoaneurysm
    Retrieval of Intravascular Foreign Body
    Brain Arteriovenous Malformation Embolization
    Diagnostic Cerebral Angiography
    Endovascular Management of Epistaxis
    Extracranial Carotid Artery Angioplasty and Stenting
    Intracranial Aneurysm Coil Embolization
    Intracranial Stenting
    Transcatheter Treatment of Acute Ischemic Stroke
    Vertebral Artery Stenting
    Wada Test
    Review of History and Physical Examination
    Society of Interventional Radiology Guidelines for Preprocedural Coagulation Parameter Surveillance Based on the Procedural Risk for Bleeding
    Society of Interventional Radiology Preprocedural Management Guidelines for Current Antithrombotic Medications Based on the Procedural Risk for Bleeding
    Surgical Procedures? Classification
    Antibiotic Prophylaxis in Vascular and Interventional Radiology
    Interventional Radiology Preprocedural Documentation
    Immediate Procedure Note
    Supplemental Reading Material.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Andrew Krakowski ; associate editors, John C. Browning, Craig N. Burkhart, Lucia Z. Diaz, Amanda A. Gosman, Kristen M. Kelly, H. Peter Lorenz, Harper N. Price.
    Summary: "Many factors contribute to the challenge of performing dermatologic procedures in children including the use of different instruments, skin differences, patient and parental anxiety, pain management and anesthesia, and the need to optimize outcomes over the lifetime of the patient. Pediatric Procedural Dermatology is a first-of-its-kind reference that provides thorough, step-by-step instruction for over 100 dermatological procedures specific to the pediatric population. Using a multidisciplinary, practical approach, this unique title equips today's clinicians to perform safe, effective care to children with guidelines and clinical pearls/tips for pre-, intra- and postprocedure strategies in addition to coding and insurance guidelines. Six sections: I: Pre-procedural Approach II: Procedural Approach III. Diagnostic-specific Procedures IV. A to Z lesion-specific Procedures V. Postprocedure Approach"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    Section on Anesthesiology and Pain Medicine, American Academy of Pediatrics ; editors, Joseph D. Tobias, Joseph P. Cravero.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2015
  • Digital
    Niraj Arora, editor.
    Summary: This practical book covers neuro-critical care procedures performed in medical or surgical ICU and different procedures dedicated to acute neurological care. The book's format allows for quick decisions about care and protocols while treating neurologically injured patients. Divided into two sections, the first focuses on procedures. The outlines of these chapters include indication, technique, types of kits available, and challenges. The second section covers the protocols; these chapters feature flowcharts, drugs/device, doses of drugs, description of device, indication, evidence, and future prospects. This succinct guide will serve as a go-to reference for residents, fellows, intensivists, or any healthcare personnel within neuro-critical care unit.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Murad Alam, Jeffrey S. Dover.
    Summary: Offering a step-by-step, practical approach to this expanding area of dermatology, Procedures in Cosmetic Dermatology: Hair Restoration enables you to master the up-to-date hair restoration techniques that produce the superior results your patients expect. Focusing on non-invasive treatment of diffuse, non-scarring hair loss, including androgenetic alopecia, this unique title, edited by expert clinicians Drs. Murad Alam and Jeffrey S. Dover, thoroughly covers the latest treatment options—all abundantly illustrated and evidence based. A video library demonstrating techniques helps you successfully incorporate today’s most effective procedures into your practice.

    Contents:
    Medical workup for hair loss
    Ethnic differences in hair
    Diagnosis and treatment of scarring alopecia
    Nutritional supplements
    Hair cosmetics, styling, and processing
    Wigs and hair prosthetics
    Micropigmentation and microblading
    Minoxidil, finasteride, and dutasteride
    Topical immunotherapies
    Systemic immunotherapies
    Complementary and alternative medicine for hair loss
    Platelet-rich plasma
    Stem cell–based therapies
    Hair transplantation
    Lasers, lights, and led
    Emerging medications
    Devices and genomic therapies.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    edited by Jean Carruthers, Alastair Carruthers, Jeffrey S. Dover, Murad Alam, Omer Ibrahim.
    Summary: Offering a step-by-step, practical approach to sought-after cosmetic procedures, Procedures in Cosmetic Dermatology: Soft Tissue Augmentation, 5th Edition, enables you to master the up-to-date cosmetic techniques that produce the superior results your patients expect. Edited by expert clinicians Drs. Jean Carruthers and Alastair Carruthers, along with Jeffrey S. Dover, Murad Alam, and Omar Ibrahim, it covers the different classes of fillers including how to choose a filler, treatment areas by location including different injection techniques, and reversals, as well as an entire section on complications—all abundantly illustrated and evidence based. A substantial video library helps you successfully incorporate the latest procedures into your practice. Provides complete, clear descriptions and rationales for using dermal fillers to combat loss of facial fat, muscle, and bone density. Logically organized content begins with general injection techniques and facial considerations, followed by numerous options of filler material and chapters for each treatment area.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Fillers: Paradigm Shifts Produce New Challenges
    Facial Beauty and the Central Role of Volume
    Introduction to Temporary Fillers: Pros and Cons
    Restylane Filler Product Family
    Juvéderm Family
    The Belotero Family
    Resilient Hyaluronic Acid (RHA®) Fillers
    Calcium Hydroxylapatite Ultradilute, HA Dilution
    Poly-L-Lactic Acid
    Emervel Family (Now as Restylane Optimal Balance Technology Line Part of the Restylane Family)
    Autologous Fat
    Introduction to Permanent Fillers: Pros and Cons
    Liquid Injectable Silicone
    Bellafill
    Forehead Reflation
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of the Temple
    Three-Dimensional Reflation of the Glabella and Adjacent Forehead
    Volumetric Treatment of the Brows
    Infraorbital Hollow and Nasojugal Fold
    Midface
    The Anatomical Basis for Safe Injection Rhinoplasty
    Filler Injection of the Melolabial Folds and Marionette Lines
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of the Chin and Jawline
    Lip Augmentation
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of Lip Lines
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of the Hands
    Soft Tissue Augmentation of the Neck and Chest
    Soft Tissue Augmentation and Buttocks Contouring
    Earlobe Rejuvenation
    Hyaluronic Acid Microdroplet Injection for Skin Quality Enhancement
    Filler Injection Techniques
    Soft Tissue Filler for the Transgender Patient
    Combinations
    Complications of Temporary Fillers
    Complications of Permanent Fillers
    Vascular Compromise
    Reversers
    Legal Considerations in Soft Tissue Fillers.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Print
    edited by G. L. Cantoni & David R. Davies.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    V581.N9 C2
    2
  • Digital
    Anggoro Cahyo Sukartiko, Tri Rini Nuringtyas, Siti Nurleily Marliana, Alim Isnansetyo, editors.
    Summary: The proceeding of the 2nd International Conference on Tropical Agriculture (ICTA) is a proceeding to publish papers presented at the corresponding conference held in 26-27 October 2017. The conference was organized by Universitas Gadjah Mada, Indonesia in collaboration with five Faculties including Faculty of Agriculture, Faculty of Animal Science, Faculty of Veterinary, Faculty of Agricultural Technology and Faculty of Forestry. The conference was held with the theme "Integrated and sustainable tropical agriculture with subtheme "Building community socio-ecological resilience to climate change through agricultural innovations." Interest is growing in sustainable agriculture when agriculture has evolved for many years from simple or manual farming to more industrial agriculture. The sustainable agriculture involves the use of productive farming technology that takes advantages of biological resources and process to conserve the environment and enhance public health. Furthermore, sustainable agriculture should include all aspects of sustainable criteria, such as technical, socio-economic, and ecological aspects. This book covers the sustainable tropical agriculture, sustainable tropical animal production and health, sustainable tropical forestry, socio-economic dimension in tropical agriculture and innovative and emerging food technology and management as chapters in this book. The common challenging problems in plant, animal, and fisheries production in the tropic are climate change, inefficiency production system, low technological innovation, decreasing environment quality, and the outbreak risk of pest and diseases. The problems are closely bound to the condition of socio-economic of farmers as the small scale farm is dominant in this area. In addition, post-harvest technology is crucial to maintaining the high quality of the product after on farm production.^This book provides the recent research and development on tropical agriculture production systems either for the plant, terrestrial animal and aquatic animal to establish the sustainable agriculture production in the tropic.

    Contents:
    Preface
    1. Sustainable Tropical Agriculture
    2. Sustainable Tropical Animal Production and Health
    3. Innovative and Emerging Agricultural Technology and Management
    4. Socio-economic Dimensions in Tropical Agriculture
    5. Organizing committee, editors and reviewers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    U735 .N29 1967
    1
  • Print
    General editor: M. Rocha e Silva.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Mode of action of anti-parasitic drugs.--
    v. 2. Pharmacology of reproduction.--
    v. 3. Clinical pharmacology.--
    v. 4. Mechanisms of drug toxicity.--
    v. 5. The control of growth processes by chemical agents.--
    v. 6. Drugs in relation to blood coagulation haemostasis and thrombosis.--
    v. 7. Physico-chemical aspects of drug action.--
    v. 8. Salt and water balance.--
    v. 9. Pharmacology of pain.--
    v. 10. Monoamine oxidas inhibitors: relationship between pharmalogical clinical effects.--
    v. 11. Immunopharmacology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    V502 .I63 1966
    11
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    D333 .C74.7
    2
  • Print
    edited by Olof Gilland.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Theme 1 : Technical progress in neurological diagnostics
    v. 2. Themes II-IV : The demand for neurological services ; Steroid treatment of neurological disorders ; Free subjects.
  • Print
    editors, D.T. Mason, G.G. Neri Serneri, M.F. Oliver.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC685.I6 F56 1979
    2
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    U735 .I59
    1
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC960 .I54
    5
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    TL6 .S78
    7
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access SPIE v. 1200-, 1990-
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Proceedings of SPIE-- the International Society for Optical Engineering to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP552.P4 A43
    10
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QP95 .L63
    2
  • Print
    General editor: Börje Uvnäs.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Plenary session. Pharmacological control of release of hormones including antidiabetic drugs.--
    v. 2. Effects of drugs on synthesis and mobilization of lipids.--
    v. 3. New aspects of cardiac glycosides.--
    v. 4. Drugs and membranes.--
    v. 5. Methods for the study of pharmacological effects at cellular and subcellular levels.--
    v. 6. Metabolic factors controlling duration of drug action.--
    v. 7. Modern concepts in the relationship between structure and pharmacological activity.--
    v. 8. Pharmacological analysis of central nervous action.--
    v. 9. Bradykinin and vaso-dilating polypeptides. Pharmacology of the lung.--
    v. 10 Abstracts.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    V502 .I63 1961
    1
  • Print
    editors: Carlos D. Guerrero, Abner I. Weisman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N12 .W92 1953
    2
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
  • Digital
    edited by Uwe Gottschalk.
    Contents:
    1. Downstream processing of monoclonal antibodies: current practices and future opportunities
    2. The development of antibody purification technologies
    3. Harvest and recovery of monoclonal antibodies: cell removal and clarification
    4. Next-generation clarification technologies for the downstream processing of antibodies
    5. Protein A-based affinity chromatography
    6. Purification of human monoclonal antibodies: non-protein A strategies
    7. Hydrophobic interaction chromatography for the purification of antibodies
    8. Purification of monoclonal antibodies by mixed-mode chromatography
    9. Advances in technology and process development for industrial-scale monoclonal antibody purification
    10. Alternatives to packed-bed chromatography for antibody extraction and purification
    11. Process-scale percipitation of impurities in mammalian cell culture broth
    12. Charged ultrafiltration and microfiltration membranes for antibody purification
    13. Disposable prepaced-bed chromatography for downstream purification: form, fit, function, and industry adoption
    14. Integrated polishing steps for monoclonal antibody purification
    15. Orthogonal virus clearance applications in monoclonal antibody production
    16. Development of a platform process for the purification of therapeutic monoclonal antibodies
    17. The evolution of platform technologies for the downstream processing of antibodies
    18. Countercurrent chromatography for the purification of monoclonal antibodies, bispecific antibodies and antibody-drug conjugates
    19. The evolution of continuous chromatography: from bulk chemicals to biopharma
    20. Accelerated seamless antibody purification: simplicity is key
    21. Process economic drivers in industrial monoclonal antibody manufacture
    22. Design and optimization of manufacturing
    23. Smart design for an efficient facility with a validated disposable system
    24. High-throughput screening and modeling technologies for process development in antibody purification
    25. Downstream processing of monoclonal antibody fragments
    26. Downstream processing Fc fusion proteins bispecific antibodies, and antibody-drug conjugates
    27. Manufacturing concepts for antibody-drug conjugates
    28. Purification of IgM and IgA
    29. Purification of monoclonal antibodies from plants
    30. Very-large-scale production of monoclonal antibodies in plants
    31. Trends in formulation and drug delviery for antibodies
    32. Antibody purification: drivers of change.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Timothy Hodgson, editor.
    Summary: This volume covers a broad range of current research topics addressing the function of visuospatial attention and working memory. It discusses a variety of perspectives ranging from evolutionary and genetic underpinnings to neural substrates/computational processes and the connection between attention and working memory. Contributions address the topic at the molecular, system and evolutionary scales and will be of interest to a range of audiences from animal behaviour specialists, experimental psychologists to clinicians in the field of psychiatry and neurology.

    Contents:
    Part I Evolution and Development
    The Evolution of Gaze Shifting Eye Movements
    Visuospatial integration and hand-tool interaction in cognitive archaeology
    Development of Visual-Spatial Attention
    Variations in the beneficial effects of spatial structure and serial organization on working memory span in humans and other species
    Part II Processes, mechanisms and models
    Biasing allocations of attention via selective weighting of saliency signals: behavioral and neuroimaging evidence for the Dimension-Weighting Account
    Active inference, novelty, and neglect
    Prefrontal contributions to attention and working memory
    Functions of memory across saccadic eye movements
    What is memory-guided attention? How past experiences shape selective visuospatial attention in the present
    Superstitious perception in humans and neural networks
    Dynamic Protention: the architecture of real-time cognition for future events
    Recent studies on the relationship between covert visuo-spatial attention, visual search and saccadic eye movements
    Functional imaging of visuo-spatial attention in complex and naturalistic conditions
    Part III Neuropsychology and Neuropsychiatry
    Visuo-spatial attention and working memory in progressive supra-nuclear palsy
    Attention and working memory in Alzheimers and Parkinsons disease
    Mechanisms underlying visuospatial working memory impairments in schizophrenia
    Dopamine and working memory: The impact of genetic variation, stress and implications for mental health
    Eye movements in neuropsychological tasks.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Rafael Díaz-Nieto, editor.
    Summary: This practical guide provides a full but concise account of the organ donation and transplantation process, from the management of the donor and organ preservation to perioperative management and surgical techniques. Readers will learn about various aspects of multi-organ retrieval such as different types of donors and evaluation of organ donors, as well as the retrieval process itself and ethical aspects of transplantation. Written in a consistent format, each of the themed parts examines the different types of solid organ transplantation, namely kindey, pancreas and liver. Each part discusses the indications for transplantation, organ allocation, surgical technique, post-operative management outcomes and professional skills for the surgeon. This is an essential guide for the transplant surgeon offering a unique summary of the critical issues in abdominal organ transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Vivekkumar K. Redasani, Sanjay B. Bari.
    Contents:
    Ch. 1. Introduction
    Ch. 2. Concept of prodrug
    Ch. 3. Types of prodrugs
    Ch. 4. Approaches for prodrugs
    Ch. 5. Applications
    Ch. 6. Role in drug discovery
    Ch. 7. Work reported
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    Cathy Thomas Hess.
    Summary: "Get informed on the numerous skin and wound care products on the market - and make safe and accurate choices for your patients - with this crucial product guide. Choose the best skin and wound care products to support your patients' skin health and wound healing, with Product Guide to Skin and Wound Care, 8th Edition. Listing more than 294 products in alphabetical order, this handy product guide for wound care practitioners across all practice settings offers detailed information - sizes, action, indications, contraindications, application, and removal information - so that your choices stay informed and accurate. A must for wound care nurses, this pocket guide also offers vital on-the-spot support for home healthcare, emergency, family practice, and dermatology nurses, as well as physical therapists. Know the purpose and use of skin and wound care products, to assist in the proper product choice, usage, and documentation. This new edition has a softcover format that fits easily in your coat pocket for on-the-go information access. There are new products to update your formulary choices, including sizes, action, indication, application and removal. Offers concise reviews of the many skin and wound care products now available - including collagens, hydrocolloids, antifungals and antimicrobials, liquid skin protectants, moisture barriers, and other skin care products. There are newly enhanced full-color manufacturer photos of each product. Offers the characteristics, function, and use of skin and wound care dressings, drugs, and devices, including correct classification of a particular condition. Offers an Alphabetical Wound Care Product Guide that illustrates product information detailing action, indications, contraindications, application, and removal; reimbursement codes for products provided by manufacturers; and many product references supporting products. Provides information on products that may contain ingredients that can cause allergic reactions. Provides help in mixing products correctly, explaining which ingredients should not be mixed with certain other ingredients. Wound care product categories include alginates, antimicrobials, cellular and tissue-based products, collagens, composites, contact layers, drugs, foams, hydrocolloids, hydrogels, negative pressure wound therapy, specialty absorptives, surgical dressings, transparent films, wound fillers, and other devices and products. Offers a comprehensive listing of additional products such as abdominal dressing holders and binders, compression bandage systems, conforming bandages, elastic bandage rolls, impregnated gauzes, nonimpregnated gauzes, packing strips, tapes and wound cleansers. A must-have for any wound care practitioner as it provides you with the easy-to-reference product details needed to move your practice forward and stay at the forefront of your field."--from the publisher description.

    Contents:
    Part I. Wound care products
    Alginates
    Antimicrobials
    Cellular and tissue-based products (CTPs)
    Collagens
    Composites
    Contact layers
    Drugs
    Foams
    Hydrocolloids
    Hydrogels
    Negative pressure wound therapy
    Specialty absorptives
    Surgical supplies, Miscellaneous
    Transparent films
    Wound fillers
    Other products
    Part II. Skin care products and additional dressings and products
    Antifungals and antimicrobials
    Compression bandage systems
    Conforming bandages
    Elastic bandage rolls
    Gauze, impregnated with other than water, normal saline, or hydrogel, without adhesive border
    Gauze, impregnated with water or normal saline, without adhesive border
    Gauze, nonimpregnated, with adhesive border
    Gauze, nonimpregnated, without adhesive border
    Liquid skin protectants
    Moisture barriers
    Skin cleaners
    Surgical dressing holder, non-reusable, each
    Tapes
    Therapeutic moisturizers
    Wound cleansers.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    Zhen Fang, Richard L. Smith, Jr., Xiao-Fei Tian, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a collection of studies on state-of-art techniques developed specifically for lignocellulose component derivation, and for the production of functional materials, composite polymers, carbonaceous biocatalysts, and pellets from lignocellulosic biomass, with an emphasis on using sustainable chemistry and engineering to develop innovative materials and fuels for practical application. Technological strategies for the physical processing or biological conversion of biomass for material production are also presented. All chapters were contributed by respected experts in the field from around the globe, providing a broad range of perspectives on cutting-edge applications. The book offers an ideal reference guide for academic researchers and industrial engineers in the fields of natural renewable materials, biorefinery of lignocellulose, biofuels and environmental engineering. It can also be used as a comprehensive reference source for university students in chemical engineering, material science and environmental engineering.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Isolation and Purification of Lignocellulose Components
    Chapter 1. Isolation, Purification, and Potential Applications of Xylan
    Part 2: Composite Polymers Derived from Lignin and Cellulose
    Chapter 2. Development of Lignin-Based Antioxidants for Polymers
    Chapter 3. Nanocellulose Applications in Papermaking
    Part 3: Functional Materials Derived from Cellulose and Lignocelluloses
    Chapter 4. Recent Advances in Cellulose Chemistry and Potential Applications
    Chapter 5. Production, Characterization and Alternative Applications of Biochar
    Chapter 6. Carbons from Biomass for Electrochemical Capacitors
    Chapter 7. Carbonaceous Catalysts from Biomass
    Chapter 8. Synthesis and Design of Engineered Biochars as Electrode Materials in Energy Storage Systems
    Part 4: Biomass Pellets as Fuels
    Chapter 9. Biomass Pelletization: Contribution to Renewable Power Generation Scenarios
    Chapter 10. Biocarbon Production and Use as A Fuel
    Chapter 11. Mechanical Aspects and Applications of Pellets Prepared from Biomass Resources
    Part 5: Biosynthesis of Polymers from Renewable Biomass
    Chapter 12. Microbial Production and Properties of Lactic Acid-Based Polymers and Oligomers from Renewable Feedstock.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mohammad Maqbool Mir, Umar Iqbal, Shabir Ahmad Mi, editors.
    Summary: Globally stone fruits are emerging in the market due to the increased consumer's desire for health-promoting foods. Stone fruits attract research attention, mainly due to the cultural and commercial aspects of the array of varieties that are grown. Being grown in wide range of environments, it is very important to understand what factors influence the production and quality attributes of stone fruits. There is a lack of systematic scientific information on strategic approach for production technologies of such fruits. This book will be first of its kind focusing on technological aspects of stone fruits especially on latest developments in present day horticulture. It will be an essential reference for professionals including academicians, scholars, researchers and industries working in the said area. We hope that readers will find this book a useful resource for their research or studies, and it will be helpful in the development of high quality stone fruits in future which will improve the economic and social life of people. Besides, this book fulfills the needs of a number of horticultural courses of Universities and will serving as a pomological manual for all occasions.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Varietal diversification of stone fruits
    Chapter 2. Nutrient management in stone fruits
    Chapter 3. Pollination management in stone fruit crops
    Chapter 4. Canopy management in stone fruits
    Chapter 5. Rootstocks of stone fruit crops
    Chapter 6. Irrigation management in stone fruits
    Chapter 7. Physiological disorders in stone fruits
    Chapter 8. Orchard factors affecting postharvest quality of stone fruits
    Chapter 9. Nutritional composition of stone fruits
    Chapter 10. Chemical treatments for shelf life enhancement of stone fruits
    Chapter 11. Packaging and storage of stone fruits
    Chapter 12. Hi tech stone fruit industry, issues and approaches
    Chapter 13. Growth and supply chain of stone fruits in the world- an indian outlook
    Chapter 14. Diseases of stone fruit crops
    Chapter 15. Integrated pest management of stone fruits
    Chapter 16. Nematodes associated with stone fruits & their management strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Tahir Mahmood, Forth Park Hospital, Kirkcaldy, Sambit Mukhopadhyay, Norfolk & Norwich University Hospital.
    Summary: "Introduction to educational theories: There are a number of educational theories that underpin the practice of teaching and learning. Some of the more widely used theoretical frameworks relevant to medical education are highlighted here. Andragogy: Knowles suggests that adult learners share the following characteristics (1): . Are independent and self-directed learners . Use accumulated experience as a scaffold for new learning . Value integration of new learning into their existing commitments . Value problem-centred approaches to learning . Have internal drivers for motivation to learn . Need to know why and how learning benefits the learner In any setting involving adult learners, these characteristics need to be considered when planning educational events. Constructivist theory: Learning occurs through the construction of new ideas or concepts built upon the learners' existing knowledge and experiences. As this is based upon an individual's own previous knowledge and experiences, new knowledge can be constructed at the individual level, or be co-constructed by groups of learners within communities of practice (2)"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Laurence B. McCullough, John H. Coverdale, Frank A. Chervenak.
    Summary: A comprehensive, accessible approach to the everyday ethical challenges faced in obstetric and gynecological practice. Offering practical guidance for practitioners at all levels, the text also provides a sustained exploration of professional ethics in the intersection of obstetrics and gynecology with psychiatry. Drawing on their award-winning teaching, the authors start each chapter with goals, objectives, topics, and a list of key concepts, which are defined in a separate section. Chapters cover a multitude of topics, from pregnancy and the quest for the 'perfect' baby to end-of-life care - all underpinned by the need for professionally responsible research, advocacy, and health policy. Professional Ethics in Obstetrics and Gynecology is an indispensable resource for both trainee and practicing obstetricians and gynecologists. A chapter devoted solely to pedagogy in professional ethics in obstetrics and gynecology supports the readers' learning and those with or without formal training in ethics to teach students, residents, and colleagues.

    Contents:
    Professional ethics in medicine
    Professional ethics in obstetrics and gynecology
    Decision making by, with, and for patients
    Confidentiality
    Conflicts of interest and conflicts of commitment
    Teaching professional ethics in obstetrics and gynecology
    Prevention of pregnancy
    Initiation of pregnancy
    Induced abortion and feticide
    Fetal analysis
    Periviability
    Intrapartum management
    The perfect baby
    Cancer and pregnancy
    Setting ethically justified limits on clinical management
    Leadership
    Clinical innovation and research
    Health policy and advocacy.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    clinical editor, Laura M. Willis.
    Summary: "Although pathology changes very little, our understanding of pathophysiology is constantly changing as it is enriched by new scientific research. Indeed, research has contributed greatly to our knowledge base regarding normal physiology as well as disease states. This fourth edition of Professional Guide to Pathophysiology reflects such recent advances in medical knowledge. The first chapter of the book lays a foundation for normal cellular physiology and pathologic deviations of disease. Following that, cancer, infection, and fluid and electrolytes each deserve a specific chapter because of their ubiquitous effects. The remainder of the book is organized by body system, with an initial discussion of normal anatomy and physiology as a background for pathology specific to that area. Subsequent disease entries cover causes, pathophysiology, signs and symptoms, complications, diagnosis, treatment, and special considerations. Professional Guide to Pathophysiology, Fourth Edition, readily provides the vital information needed, helping the clinician keep current and helping the student emerge more knowledgeable"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of pathophysiology / Katrin Moskowitz
    Cancer / Kathryn E. Dinh
    Infection / Melanie DeGonzague
    Fluids and electrolytes / Cheryl L. Brady
    Genetics / Stefanie Nelson Tyler
    Cardiovascular system / Natalie Burkhalter
    Respiratory system / Alan C. Eddison
    Nervous system / Andrea Borchers
    Gastrointestinal system / Melanie DeGonzague
    Musculoskeletal system / Amy Weaver
    Hematologic system / Katrin Moskowitz
    Immune system / Kathryn E. Dinh
    Endocrine system / Katrin Moskowitz
    Renal system / Diego Acero
    Sensory system / Cherie R. Rebar
    Integumentary system / Amy L. Slusher
    Reproductive system / Alisha H. Wilkes
    Appendix: Less common disorders / Laura M. Willis.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Print
    Kathleen Koernig Blais, Ed. D., RN, Florida International University, Janice S. Hayes, PhD, RN, University of Northern Colorado.
    Contents:
    Beginning the journey
    Socialization to professional nursing roles
    Historical foundations of professional nursing
    Ethical foundations of professional nursing
    Legal foundations of professional nursing
    Knowledge development in nursing
    The nurse as health promoter and care provider
    The nurse as learner and teacher
    The nurse as leader and manager
    The nurse's role in evidence-based health care
    The nurse's role in quality and safety
    The nurse's role as political advocate
    The nurse as colleague and collaborator
    Communicating effectively
    Managing change
    Technology and informatics
    Nursing in an evolving health care delivery system
    Providing care in home and community
    Global health
    Dimensions of holistic health care
    Nursing in a culturally diverse world
    Nursing in a spiritually diverse world
    Nursing in a culture of violence
    Advanced nursing education and practice
    The future of nursing.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RT84.5 .B53 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Douglas E. Mitchell, Robert K. Ream, editors.
    Summary: At the center of this book is the complex and perplexing question of how to design professional preparation programs, organizational management practices, public policy systems and robust professional associations committed to and capable of, maintaining confidence, trust and the other hallmarks of responsible professionalism. To do this, we need to rebuild our understanding of professional responsibility from the ground up. We describe how individuals might be prepared to engage in responsible professional service delivery, examine promising options for the reform of professional service systems and finally, outline a reform strategy for improving practice in education and medicine ? two essential public services. The nexus of the reform problem in professionalism is establishing a more robust and effective working relationship between teachers and their students; between health care professionals and their patients and between educators and health professionals. Professionalism means acceptance of professional responsibility for student and patient outcomes ? not just acceptance of responsibility for technical expertise, but commitment to the social norms of the profession, including trustworthiness and responsibility for client wellbeing. In the past, it may have been sufficient to assume that adequate knowledge can be shaped into standards of professional practice. Today, it is clear that we must take careful account of the ways in which practicing professionals develop, internalize and sustain professionalism during their training, along with the ways in which this commitment to professionalism may be undermined by the regulatory, fiscal, technological, political and emotional incentive systems that impinge on professional workplaces and professional employment systems.

    Contents:
    A Brief Introduction to the Problem of Professional Responsibility
    Dilemmas of Educational Practice: Global Competition and Achievement Gaps
    Challenges Facing the Medical Profession in the US
    Professional Responsibility: The Problem and Why It Needs Attention
    How Institutional Contexts Shape Professional Responsibility
    Professional Practice in Complex Organizations
    Erecting the Pipeline for Socially Responsible Physicians
    How Linking University Research to School Needs Influences Scholars and Schools
    Cultural Induction: Professionalism?s Life or Death Struggle
    Creating Incentives to Support Professional Responsibility
    Getting Task Structures and Institutional Designs Right
    Educator Professional Responsibility for Family Health
    Professional Ethics and Virtue Ethics in Community Medical Practice
    The Role of Graduate Schools of Education in Training Autism Professionals to Work with Diverse Families
    Preparing Teachers as Momentum Builds for Dual-Language Classrooms
    Policy, Structural, Role and Knowledge Barriers to Best Practice in School Psychology
    Whither Collaboration? The Capacity and Will to Integrate Professional Services
    Collaborative Community in Schools
    Summarizing the Lessons, Shaping a Blueprint.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    by Grace W. Gengoux, Sanno E. Zack, Jennifer L. Derenne, Athena Robinson, Laura B. Dunn, Laura Weiss Roberts.
    Summary: "This volume is a collaboration by several psychiatrists and psychologists who posit a new culture, one that is supportive of the health and well-being of health care professionals and the patients and populations they serve. The individual and systemic barriers to professional well-being and the unique challenges faced by health care providers at different stages of professional and personal development are examined. Personal resilience and realistic strategies to improve well-being are discussed. Detailed case studies and vignettes and thought-provoking discussion questions and exercises are included"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Healthy Clinicians, Healthy Patients
    Professional and Personal Developmental Milestones
    Burnout and Clinician Mental Health
    Approaches to Mental Health Care for Fellow Clinicians
    Special Challenges for Clinicians-in-Training
    Systems and Supports for Clinician Wellness
    Legal and Ethical Issues in the Context of Impairment and Recovery
    Preventive Health Care Strategies : Fostering Positive Self-Care and Resilience
    Mindfulness and Spiritual Well-Being
    Nutrition and Physical Activity
    Sleep
    Relationships and Social Connection
    Psychiatric Care and Psychotherapy
    Meaningful Professional Contributions.
  • Digital
    Laura Weiss Roberts, M.D., M.A., Gabriel Termuehlen, B.A..
    Summary: "This new edition of Professionalism and Ethics: Q & A Self-Study Guide for Mental Health Professionals thoroughly updates the highly regarded and groundbreaking first edition, offering the contemporary reader clinical wisdom and ethical guidance for challenging times. As with its predecessor, the second edition features commentaries by leaders in psychiatric ethics, plus two foundational chapters on ethics and professionalism in the field of mental health. These commentaries and introductory chapters provide an overview of essential ethical principles and concepts, the professional obligations of the mental health clinician, common ethical tensions found in practice, ethical aspects of caring for special populations, and ethical issues in professional training and research. The introductory chapters are followed by case-oriented questions and answers on core concepts and topics in clinical care, medical research, and interactions with colleagues and trainees. Topics explored in-depth include authorship, disclosure, and ethical peer review for scientific publications; assisted suicide and euthanasia; professional voyeurism versus patient privacy online and on social media; the appropriate process for reporting an impaired colleague; and problems of burnout, work-life balance, and professional well-being. Professionalism and Ethics: Q & A Self-Study Guide for Mental Health Professionals poses and plumbs critically important ethical dilemmas in a compelling, down-to-earth way for today's practitioners and learners"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Ethics, Professionalism, and the Field of Mental Health : An Overview / Laura Weiss Roberts, Max Kasun, Gabriel Termuehlen
    Ethics in the Mental Health Professions / Laura Weiss Roberts, Max Kasun, Gabriel Termuehlen
    Core Concepts in Ethics and Professionalism
    Ethics and Professionalism in Clinical Care
    Ethics and Professionalism in Medical Research
    Ethics and Professionalism in Interactions With Colleagues and Trainees
    Ethics and Professionalism Questions for Review.
  • Digital
    Laura Weiss Roberts, Daryn Reicherter, editors.
    Summary: Professionalism and Ethics in Medicine: A Study Guide for Physicians and Physicians-in-Training is a unique self-study guide for practitioners and trainees covering the core competency areas of professionalism, ethics, and cultural sensitivity. This novel title presents real-world dilemmas encountered across the specialties of medicine, offering guidance and relevant information to assist physicians, residents, and medical students in their decision-making. The text is divided into two parts: Foundations and Questions with Answers. The first part provides a substantive foundation of knowledge in the principles, scholarship, policy guidelines, and decision-making strategies of the modern health professions. The second part assists practitioners and trainees in preparing for the complex issues that arise each day in the settings where health professionals work and train ? clinics, research centers, educational contexts, and communities. Developed by renowned leaders in a broad range of clinical fields, Professionalism and Ethics in Medicine: A Study Guide for Physicians and Physicians-in-Training is a major, invaluable contribution to the literature and an indispensable reference for clinicians at all levels.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Foundations
    Chapter 1: Introductions to Ethics in Clinical Medicine
    Chapter 2: The Legal Framework of Medical Ethics in the United States
    Chapter 3: Multicultural and Ethical Considerations in American Medicine
    Chapter 4: Ethical Issues in Biomedical Research and Clinical Training
    Chapter 5: Professionalism in Medicine as a Transnational and Transcultural Ethical Concept
    Part 2 Questions with Narrative Answers
    Part 3 Core Concept Q&A
    Part 4 Clinical Q&A
    Part 5 Research and Education Q&A.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ronald E. Domen, MD, Richard M. Conran, MD, PhD, JD, Robert D. Hoffman, MD, PhD, Cindy B. McCloskey, MD, Suzanne Zein-Eldin Powell, MD
    Summary: Professionalism in Pathology and Laboratory Medicine provides a basic understanding of how ethics and professionalism impact pathology and laboratory medicine. Approaches and guidance to educational and assessment tools, including more than 100 case vignettes to guide discussion, are included. The book also discusses professionalism in the context of research, pathologist well-being and burnout, legal aspects, diversity, organizational leadership, and patient safety and quality of care. Lapses in ethical and professional behavior as well as recommendations on future directions for research and education in professionalism also are addressed.

    Contents:
    Cover Title Copyright Contents Contributors Preface
    1 Introduction to Ethics and Professionalism in Pathology and Laboratory Medicine
    2 Professionalism and Ethics in Pathology Graduate Medical Education
    3 Teaching Professionalism
    4 Interprofessionalism and the Role of Pathologists
    5 Professionalism Across Organizational Culture and Leadership
    6 Diversity and Professionalism
    7 Professionalism, Patient Safety, and Quality of Care
    8 Professionalism in Research
    9 Professionalism and Physician Health and Wellness
    10 Addressing Unprofessional Behavior in the Workplace
    11 Recognizing and Remediating Lapses in Ethical and Professional Behavior
    12 Legal and Ethical Aspects of Professionalism
    13 Best Practices in Professionalism
    14 A Compendium of Case Scenarios in Ethics and Professionalism
    15 Future Directions for Research and Education in Professionalism Backcover
  • Print
    Karen Kelsky, Ph.D.
    Summary: Offers career guidance to Ph.D. degree holders, addressing such issues as publishing, interviews, CVs, cultivating references, avoiding career path mistakes, and transitioning to non-academic work.

    Contents:
    Part I. Dark times in the academy. The end of an era ; Breaking out of the ivory tower ; The myths grad students believe
    Part II. Getting your head in the game. The tenure track job search process explained ; Stop acting like a grad student! ; The attributes of a competitive tenure track candidate ; Building a competitive record ; Your campaign platform ; Why they want to reject you ; When to go on the market and how long to try ; Where are the jobs? Institution types and ranks ; Where and how to find reliable advice ; Why "yourself" is the last person you should be
    Part III. The nuts and bolts of a competitive record. Take control of your CV ; Getting teaching experience ; Publish this, not that ; Why you want and need grants ; Cultivating your references ; Applying to conferences ; How to work the conference
    Part IV. Job documents that work. The academic skepticism principle ; What's wrong with your cover letter ; Tailoring with dignity ; Rules of the academic CV ; Just say no to the weepy teaching statement ; Evidence of teaching effectiveness ; The research statement ; What is a diversity statement, anyway? ; The dissertation abstract
    Part V. Techniques of the academic interview. Academic job interview basics ; The key questions in an academic interview ; The conference interview (including phone and Skype) ; The campus visit ; The job talk ; The teaching demo ; How to talk to the dean ; They said what? Handling outrageous questions ; Waiting, wondering, Wiki
    Part VI. Navigating the job market minefield. Good job candidates gone bad ; Fear of the inside candidate ; Wrangling recalcitrant references ; Managing your online presence ; Evaluating campus climate ; When you feel like you don't belong ; What if you're pregnant? ; What not to wear ; Covering the costs
    Part VII. Negotiating an offer. Don't be afraid to negotiate ; The rare and elusive partner hire ; The rescinded offer--who is in the wrong?
    Part VIII. Grants and postdocs. The foolproof grant template ; Proving your project is worthy ; The postdoc application: How it's different and why ; The good and the bad of postdocs
    Part IX. Some advice about advisors. Best advisors, worst advisors ; A good advisor is not nice ; Ph.D. debt and ethical advising
    Part X. Leaving the cult. It's OK to quit ; Let yourself dream ; 100+ skills that translate outside the academy ; Collecting information ; Applying while Ph.D. Breaking free: The path of the entrepreneur ; Declaring independence.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Prof Dev 129
    1
  • Digital
    Howard J.A. Carp, editor.
    Summary: This book brings together the most up-to-date information about the physiology of progestogens. Addressing the bidirectional communication between hormones, fertility, tumors, and autoimmunity, it provides the basic science and clinical perspectives of progestogens which have not been previously available in one volume. In addition to estrogens, androgens, mineralocorticoids and glucocorticoids, progestogens are a major class of steroid hormone. While present in certain phases of estrous and menstrual cycles, progestogens are named for their function in maintaining pregnancy. This book is essentially practical in orientation, addressing the specific issues that confront the practitioner, and provides information to Obstetricians, Gynecologists, Reproductive endocrinologists, as well as Gynecological Oncologists and Rheumatologists. Contributions are from an international team of experts in the field, now completely updated in this new edition with new developments in primary dysmenorrhea and contraception.

    Contents:
    Physiological actions of Progesterone
    Pharmacology of different progestogens and side effects
    Progestogens in infertility practice
    Progestogens and threatened miscarriage
    Progestogens and recurrent miscarriage
    Progestogens in pre-term labour
    Progestogens in Abnormal uterine bleeding
    Progestogens in contraceptives
    Progestogens and Endometriosis
    Progestogens and Breast Cancer
    Progestogens in Endometrial Cancer
    Progestogens in the post menopause
    Progestogens and Autoimmunity
    Progestogens in non gynecological indications.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Angelo Sghirlanzoin, Giuseppe Lauria and Luisa Chiapparini, editors.
    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Vascular Diseases: Ischemic Stroke
    Vascular Diseases: Cerebral Hemorrhage
    Inflammatory Diseases of the Cerebral Arteries
    Trauma of the Central Nervous System
    Coma
    Sleep Disorders
    Viral Infections of the Nervous System
    Bacterial, Fungal and Parasitic Infections of the Central Nervous System
    Leprosy
    Prion Diseases
    Myelin Disorders: Multiple Sclerosis
    Myelin Disorders: Devic's Syndrome
    Myelin Disorders: Post-Infectious Neurological Syndromes (PINS)
    Leukodystrophies
    Antibody-Mediated Encephalitis
    Dementias
    Intellectual Disability
    Toxic and Deficiency Encephalopathies
    Inborn Errors of Metabolism
    Mitochondrial Disorders
    Disorders of Upper and Lower Motor Neurons
    Headaches
    Disorders of Cerebrospinal Fluid Circulation
    Epilepsy and Myoclonus
    Neoplastic Disorders
    Neurofibromatosis Type 1 and Type2.-Paraneoplastic Neurological Syndromes
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Parkinson's Disease
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Atypical Parkinsonisms
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Huntington's Disease
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Hyperkinetic Movement Disorders
    Tics and Tourette Syndrome
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Essential Tremor
    Extrapyramidal Diseases: Dystonia
    Ataxias and Cerebellar Degenerations
    Disorders of Peripheral Nerves
    Disorders of Autonomic Nervous System
    Autoimmune Ion Channel Disorders of the Peripheral Nervous System
    Muscular Dystrophies
    Inflammatory Myophaties
    Pain and Related Syndromes.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Click on Series link(s) for access options
  • Digital
    Hideaki Hara [and 4 others], editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest knowledge on the roles of progranulin (PGRN) in normal physiology and pathology and explores the emerging significance of PGRN as a therapeutic target and biomarker in various CNS disorders, including frontotemporal lobe degeneration and other neurodegenerative diseases. Following initial recognition of the importance of PGRN in sexual differentiation of the developing brain and adult neurogenesis, it was subsequently discovered that PGRN acts as a chaperone of lysosomal enzymes and plays a crucial role in maintaining cellular protein homeostasis. It has also been found that sex steroids modulate the expression of PGRN and its trophic effects in the developing CNS and that PGRN directly or indirectly influences neural stem and progenitor cells. Against this background, deeper understanding of the molecular and functional properties of PGRN would provide fresh impetus for the development of mechanism-based therapeutic approaches for multiple disorders. Medications targeting the recovery of lysosomal function appear to hold particular promise in patients with neurodegenerative diseases resulting from PGRN insufficiency. In examining multiple aspects of this fascinating field, the book will be of high value for researchers and graduate students.

    Contents:
    Molecular and functional properties of progranulin
    Progranulin as a potential biomarker of central nervous system disease
    Progranulin and frontotemporal lobar degeneration
    PGRN and neurodegenerative dieseases other than FTLD
    Progranulin regulations of lysosomal homeostatis and its involvement in neurodegenerative diseases
    Progranulin in sexual differentiation of the developing brain
    Progranulin and inflammation/neuroinflammation
    Neural stem/progenitor cells and progranulin
    Generationa nd phenotyping of progranulin-deficient mice
    Pleiotropic protective effects of progranulin in the treatment of ischemic stroke
    New therapeutic appraoches against ocular diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Mukesh Verma, Debmalya Barh.
    Contents:
    Introduction / C. Hizel, J. Tremblay, G. Bartlett and P. Hamet
    Clinical next-generation sequencing / D. Dhawan
    Phenotyping in precision medicine / R.Z. Paracha, A. Obaid and A. Ali
    Cancer genetic screening and ethical considerations for precision medicine / R.G. Dumitrescu
    Precision medicine in primary health care / G. Bartlett, M. Dawes, Q. Nguyen and M.S. Phillips
    Population approach to precision medicine / M. Verma
    Regulation of genomic testing in the era of precision medicine / A. Ali, A. Hassan, S. Rehman, S.T. Ashraf, K. Naz and A. Naz
    Image-based modeling and precision medicine / N.I. Soormo and S.M. Bakhtiar
    Sharing outside the sandbox? / V. Rahimzadeh
    Lessons learned from cohort studies, and hospital-based studies and their implications in precision medicine / A. Munshi, V. Sharma and S. Sharma
    Clinical trials in precision medicine / R. Simon
    Time to educate physicians and hospital staff in electronic medical records for precision medicine / S. Sharma, A. Munshi and V. Sharma
    Computational approaches in precision medicine / J. Espinal-Enríquez, R.A. Mejía-Pedroza and E. Hernández-Lemus
    Handling big data in precision medicine / E. Hernández-Lemus, J. Espinal-Enríquez and R. García-Herrera
    Trends in precision medicine / Jaspreet Kaur, B. Rahat, S. Thakur and Jyotdeep Kaur
    Personalized medicine / V. Lemay, P. Hamet, C. Hizel, É. Lemarié and Y. Tremblay.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Francisco M. Cánovas, Ulrich Lüttge, Christoph Leuschner, María-Carmen Risueño, editors.
    Summary: With one volume each year, this series keeps scientists and advanced students informed of the latest developments and results in all areas of the plant sciences. The present volume includes reviews on plant physiology, biochemistry, genetics and genomics, forests, and ecosystems.

    Contents:
    1. Nitrogen and Sulfur Metabolism in Microalgae and Plants: 50 Years of Research
    2. Progress Toward Deep Sequencing-Based Discovery of Stress-Related MicroRNA in Plants and Available Bioinformatics Tools
    3. Recent Advances in MS-Based Plant Proteomics: Proteomics Data Validation Through Integration with Other Classic and -Omics Approaches
    4. Membrane Trafficking and Plant Signaling
    5. Molecular Aspects of Iron Nutrition in Plants
    6. Urea in Plants: Metabolic Aspects and Ecological Implications
    7. Biosynthesis and Regulation of Secondary Cell Wall
    8. Stress-Induced Microspore Embryogenesis in Crop Plants: Cell Totipotency Acquisition and Embryo Development
    9. Potential of Microalgae Biomass for the Sustainable Production of Bio-commodities
    10. Crassulacean Acid Metabolism and Its Role in Plant Acclimatization to Abiotic Stresses and Defence Against Pathogens
    11. The Role of the Shikimate and the Phenylpropanoid Pathways in Root-Knot Nematode Infection
    12. Functional Diversity of Photosynthesis, Plant-Species Diversity, and Habitat Diversity
    13. When the Tree Let Us See the Forest: Systems Biology and Natural Variation Studies in Forest Species
    14. The Ecological Importance of Winter in Temperate, Boreal, and Arctic Ecosystems in Times of Climate.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Francisco M. Cánovas, Ulrich Lüttge, María-Carmen Risueño, Hans Pretzsch, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: With one volume each year, this series keeps scientists and advanced students informed of the latest developments and results in all areas of the plant sciences. This latest volume includes reviews on plant physiology, biochemistry, genetics and genomics, forests, and ecosystems.

    Contents:
    1.Tools Shape Paradigms of Plant-Environment Interactions
    2.Gene Expression in Coffee
    3. Cross-Talk Between Sporophyte and Gametophyte During Anther and Ovule Development In Angiosperms
    4. The Photosynthetic System in Tropical Plants Under High Irradiance and Temperature Stress
    5. Plant Peroxisomes and Their Metabolism of ROS, RNS, and RSS
    6. Ammonium Assimilation and Metabolism in Rice
    7. How can we Interpret the Large Number and Diversity of Abscisic Acid Transporters?
    8. Orient in the World with a Single Eye: The Green Algal Eyespot and Phototaxis
    9. Bidirectional Lateral Transport Barriers in Serving Plant Organs and Integral Plant Functioning: Localized Lignification, Suberinization, and Cutinization
    10. The Haustorium of Phytopathogenic Fungi: A Short Overview of a Specialized Cell of Obligate Biotrophic Plant Parasites
    11. Transmission of Phloem-Limited Viruses in the Host Plants by Their Aphid Vectors
    12. Biotechnology for Biofuel Production
    13. Modelling Urban Tree Growth and Ecosystem Services: Review and Perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Francisco M. Cánovas, Ulrich Luttge, Rainer Matyssek, Hans Pretzsch, editors.
    Summary: With one volume each year, this series keeps scientists and advanced students informed of the latest developments and results in all areas of the plant sciences. This latest volume includes reviews on plant physiology, biochemistry, genetics and genomics, forests, and ecosystems.

    Contents:
    Vegetation, climate and soil: 50 years of global ecology
    Engineering plants for the future: farming with value-added harvest
    Sequencing plant genomes
    NAC transcription factors in woody plants
    ON the elaborate network of thioredoxins in higher plants
    From aspartate to ethylene: central role of N, C, and S shuttles by aminotransferases during biosynthesis of a major plant growth hormone.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital/Print
    Shuren Zhang, editor.
    Contents:
    Antibody therapies in cancer / Shengdian Wang and Mingming Jia
    Biological response modifier in cancer immunotherapy / Ronghua Liu, Feifei Luo, Xiaoming Liu, Luman Wang, Jiao Yang, Yuting Deng, Enyu Huang, Jiawen Qian, Zhou Lu, Xuechao Jiang, Dan Zhang, and Yiwei Chu
    Therapeutic cancer vaccines / Zhenlong Ye, Zhong Li, Huajun Jin, and Qijun Qian
    Adoptive Cellular Therapy (ACT) for cancer treatment / Fan Yang, Hao Jin, Jian Wang, Qian Sun, Cihui Yan, Feng Wei, and Xiubao Ren
    Oncolytic immunotherapy for treatment of cancer / A. Tsun, X.N. Miao, C.M. Wang, and D.C. Yu.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N236 .P96
    5
  • Digital/Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    57
  • Digital/Print
    Jaroslava Halper, editor.
    Summary: This volume is a reference handbook focusing on diseases like Marfan syndrome, Ehlers-Danlos syndrome, Loeys-Dietz syndrome and other heritable soft connective tissue diseases. The book presents detailed information for both basic scientists and for clinicians seeing patients. It is also a stepping stone for new investigations and studies that goes beyond the facts about the composition and biochemistry of the connective tissue and extracellular matrix, as the authors connect individual components to specific aspects of various soft tissue disorders and to the actual or potential treatment of them. Progress in Heritable Soft Connective Tissue Diseases features very prominent physicians and scientists as contributors who bring their most recent discoveries to the benefit of readers. Their expertise will help clinicians with proper diagnosis of sometimes elusive and uncommon heritable diseases of soft connective tissues. This book also offers an update on the pathophysiology of these diseases, including an emphasis on unifying aspects such as connections between embryonic development of the different types of connective tissues and systems, and the role of TGF-beta in development and physiology of soft tissues. This new set of data explains, at least in part, why many of these disorders are interconnected, though the primary pathophysiological events, such as gene mutations, may be different for each disorder.

    Contents:
    Structure, physiology and biochemistry of collagens
    Basic components of connective tissues and extracellular matrix
    Proteoglycans and diseases of soft tissues
    Advances in the use of growth factors for treatment of disorders of soft tissues
    Clinical, diagnostic, and therapeutic aspects of the Marfan syndrome
    Loeys-Dietz syndrome
    Connective Tissue Disorders and Cardiovascular Complications: The indomitable role of Transforming Growth Factor-beta signaling
    The Ehlers-Danlos Syndrome
    Ehlers-Danlos syndrome associated with glycosaminoglycan abnormalities
    Cutis laxa
    Collagen type VI myopathies
    Mouse Models in Tendon and Ligament Research
    Connective tissue disorders in domestic animals.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jaroslava Halper, editor.
    Summary: This volume represents a substantially revised and updated 2nd edition of a reference handbook on major structural components of soft connective tissues and a whole slew of heritable diseases of soft connective tissues. The number of clearly identifiable and distinct disorders has grown somewhat since the 1st edition in 2014, e.g., Ehlers-Danlos syndrome has now 13 entities. A brand new syndrome, Meester Loeys syndrome carrying the name of Bart Loeys was added as a companion to Loeys-Dietz syndrome. Numerous variations of cutis laxa and joint mobility disorders have been discovered taking advantage of recent advancements in genetic analysis. We have acquired better understanding of pathogenesis and biochemical changes in some other, more established entities, such as Marfan and collagen VI myopathies where better management and possible treatment are on the horizon. Even in the case of connective tissue diseases in domestic animals some progress has been made. All these updates were contributed by a group of distinguished and preeminent physicians and scientists, all of them not just working in the field but making new discoveries described by them. Readers will notice that seemingly there is an overlap among many of these disorders. And indeed, many of them, if not most are interconnected because of the prominent roles of TGFβ, of fibrillin microfibrils and collagen fibril assembly (and other molecules) playing in connective tissues physiology, and by extension in pathogenesis of many disorders described in the book. What I found particularly helpful that author(s) of each chapter bring their own perspective even when described closely related mechanism of the disease. These observations should help with diagnosis and management of such cases. The first chapters are more general, concentrating more on the physiology, structure and biochemistry of normal soft tissues. That should help in better understanding of the pathophysiology. Last but not least, the chapters are very readable, more like detective stories than dry description of genetic/biochemical defects. I do hope that basic scientists and clinicians with similar and diverse interests alike will appreciate this volume and will be inspired by it to develop their research in the field.

    Contents:
    Basic structure, physiology and biochemistry of connective tissues and extracellular matrix collagens
    Tendon Extracellular Matrix Assembly, Maintenance and Dysregulation Throughout Life
    Basic Components of Connective Tissues and Extracellular Matrix: Fibronectin, Fibrinogen, Laminin, Elastin, Fibrillins, Fibulins, Matrilins, Tenascins and Thrombospondins
    Proteoglycans and Diseases of Soft Tissues
    Growth Factor Roles in Soft Tissue Physiology and Pathophysiology
    Connective Tissue Disorders and Cardiovascular Complications: The Indomitable Role of Transforming Growth Factor-β Signaling
    The Pathophysiology and Pathogenesis of Marfan Syndrome
    Ehlers-Danlos syndromes, joint hypermobility and hypermobility spectrum disorders
    Ehlers–Danlos Syndrome Associated with Glycosaminoglycan Abnormalities
    Loeys-Dietz Syndrome
    Meester-Loeys syndrome
    Clinical and Molecular Delineation of Cutis Laxa Syndromes: Paradigms for Elastic Fiber Homeostasis
    Collagen VI Muscle Disorders: Mutation Types, Pathogenic Mechanisms and Approaches to Therapy
    Connective Tissue Disorders in Domestic Animals.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    editors, Claude Griscelli, Jaak Vossen.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC606 .M49 1984
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Springer v. 84-, 2020-
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Progress in inflammation research to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: "This book is a compendium of articles providing insights into a range of contemporary ideas concerning the core yet unsettled clinical issues. Important aspects of pulmonary disorders are tackled such as occupational respiratory health hazards, asthma, or the role of vitamin D in obstructive airway diseases. Genotyping offers a clear promise in the diagnostics of chronic pulmonary lesions of autoimmune background. Cardiac and respiratory-driven pulsation of cerebrospinal fluid content offers novel arguments in the pathophysiologic savvy of a range of brain dysfunctional conditions, including respiratory-related hypoxic pathologies. Some other articles tackle the heady topics of rehabilitation medicine, offering an insight into research-underpinned diagnostics and practical management solutions in a range of musculoskeletal disorders and injuries that affect the human body's movement, particularly those controlled by the autonomic nervous system. The book is addressed to clinicians, researchers, physiotherapists, and medical professionals engaged in patient care"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Baker's asthma : is the ratio of rye flour-specific IgE to total IgE more suitable to predict the outcome of challenge test than specific IgE alone / V. van Kampen, I. Sander, R. Merget, T. Brüning, M. Raulf
    SERPINA1 gene variants in granulomatosis with polyangiitis / Malgorzata Hadzik-Blaszczyk, Aneta Zdral, Tadeusz M. Zielonka, Ada Rozy, Renata Krupa, Andrzej Falkowski, Kazimierz A. Wardyn, Joanna Chorostowska-Wynimko, and Katarzyna Zycinska
    Hyperglycemia in children hospitalized with acute asthma / Khalid F. Mobaireek, Abdulrahman Alshehri, Abdulaziz Alsadoun, Abdullah Alasmari, Abdullah Alashhab, Meshal Alrumaih, Mohammad Alothman, and Abdullah A. Alangari
    Serum vitamin D concentration and markers of bone metabolism in perimenopausal and postmenopausal women with asthma and COPD / K. Białek-Gosk, R. Rubinsztajn, S. Białek, M. Paplińska-Goryca, R. Krenke, R. Chazan
    Oscillations of subarachnoid space width as a potential marker of cerebrospinal fluid pulsatility / Marcin Gruszecki, Magdalena K. Nuckowska, Arkadiusz Szarmach, Marek Radkowski, Dominika Szalewska, Monika Waskow, Edyta Szurowska, Andrzej F. Frydrychowski, Urszula Demkow, and Pawel J. Winklewski
    Very high frequency oscillations of heart rate variability in healthy humans and in patients with cardiovascular autonomic neuropathy / Mario Estévez-Báez, Calixto Machado, Julio Montes-Brown, Javier Jas-García, Gerry Leisman, Adam Schiavi, Andrés Machado-García, Claudia Carricarte-Naranjo, and Eli Carmeli
    Improvement in hand trajectory of reaching movements by error-augmentation / Sharon Israely, Gerry Leisman, Eli Carmeli
    Estimation of posturographic trajectory using k-nearest neighbors classifier in patients with rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis / Beata Sokołowska, Teresa Sadura-Sieklucka, Leszek Czerwosz, Marta Hallay-Suszek, Bogdan Lesyng, Krystyna Księżopolska-Orłowska
    Effects of manual somatic stimulation on the autonomic nervous system and posture / Giovanni Barassi, Rosa Grazia Bellomo, Camillo Di Giulio, Giuseppe Giannuzzo, Giuseppe Irace, Claudia Barbato, and Raoul Saggini
    Robot-assisted body-weight-supported treadmill training in gait impairment in multiple sclerosis patients : a pilot study / Marek Łyp, Iwona Stanisławska, Bożena Witek, Ewelina Olszewska-Żaczek, Małgorzata Czarny-Działak, Ryszard Kaczor.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Mindy F. Levin, editor.
    Summary: "This volume is the most recent installment of the Progress in Motor Control series. It contains contributions based on presentations by invited speakers at the Progress in Motor Control IX meeting held in at McGill University, Montreal, in July, 2013. Progress in Motor Control is the official scientific meeting of the International Society of Motor Control (ISMC). The Progress in Motor Control IXI meeting, and consequently this volume, provide a broad perspective on the latest research on motor control in humans and other species"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Jozsef Laczko, Mark L. Latash, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Theoretical motor control. Modularity for motor control and motor learning / Andrea d'Vella
    Synergies in grasping / Jeroen B.J. Smeets and Eli Brenner
    Encoding temporal features of skilled movements: what, whether and how? / Katja Kornysheva
    Predictability and robustness in the manipulation of dynamically complex objects / Dagmar Sternad and Christopher J. Hasson
    part 2. Fifty years of the equilibrium-point hypothesis. Fifty years of physics of living systems / Mark L. Latash
    The relationship between postural and movement stability / Anatol G. Feldman
    Principles of motor recovery after neurological injury based on a motor control theory / Mindy F. Levin
    part 3. Neurophysiological mechanisms of motor control. What do TMS-evoked motor potentials tell us about motor learning? / Richard G. Carson, Kathy L. Ruddy and Emmet McNickle
    Motor control of human spinal cord disconnected from the brain and under external movement / Winfried Mayr, Matthias Krenn and Milan R. Dimitrijevic
    Anticipation in object manipulation: behavioral and neural correlates / Thomas Schneider and Joachim Hermsd̲rfer
    part 4. Learning of skilled behavior. Brain plasticity and the concept of metaplasticity in skilled musicians / Eckart Altenmüller and Shinichi Furuya
    The coordination dynamics of observational learning: relative motion direction and relative phase as informational content linking action-perception to action-production / John J. Buchanan
    Rethinking the study of volition for clinical use / Elizabeth B. Torres
    part 5. Impaired motor control and rehabilitation. Motor lateralization provides a foundation for predicting and treating non-paretic arm motor deficits in stroke / Robert L. Sainburg, Candice Maenza, Carolee Winstein and David Good
    Control of cycling limb movements: aspects for rehabilitation / Jozsef Laczko, Mariann Mravcsik and Peter Katona
    Impaired voluntary movement control and its rehabilitation in cerebral palsy / Andrew M. Gordon
    Can motor recovery in stroke be improved by non-invasive brain stimulation? / John C. Rothwell
    part 6. Human-machine interface. Organizing and reorganizing coordination patterns / Rajiv Ranganathan and Robert A. Scheidt
    A computational index to describe slacking during robot therapy / Davide Piovesan
    Toward a proprioceptive neural interface that mimics natural cortical activity / Tucker Tomlinson and Lee E. Miller.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editor, Jong-Whan Rhim.
    Contents:
    Progress in nanomaterials for food packaging / Jong-Whan Rhim
    From micro to nano : a background to nanotechnology in food packaging / Jong-Whan Rhim
    Progress in barrier packaging materials : bio-based nanocomposites as barrier materials for food packaging applications / Giuliana Gorrasi
    Nano and nanocomposite antimicrobial materials for food packaging applications / Paulraj Kanmani & Jong-Whan Rhim
    Progress in biodegradable packaging materials / Alberto Jiménez, Elmira Arab-Tehrany & Laura Sánchez-González
    Progress in active food packaging materials / Dong Sun Lee
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Karger v. 1-, 1966-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD593 .P964
    15
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC266.5 .P964
    2
  • Print
    Digital Access Karger v. 28-, 1997-
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Progress in respiratory research. to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    edited by Arthur Rook.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    T36 .R77 1960
    2
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access WHO 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    TD353 .P773 2017
    1
  • Digital/Print
    WHO/UNICEF Joint Monitoring Programme for Water Supply and Sanitation.
    Summary: "Even though progress towards the MDG target represents important gains in access for billions of people around the world, it has been uneven. Sharp geographic, sociocultural and economic inequalities in access persist and sometimes have increased. This report presents examples of unequal progress among marginalized and vulnerable groups. Section 1 presents the status of and trends in access to improved drinking water sources and sanitation. Section 2 provides a snapshot of inequalities in access to improved drinking water sources and sanitation. Section 3 presents efforts to strengthen monitoring of access to safe drinking water and sanitation services under a post-2015 development agenda, as well as the challenges associated with these efforts."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access WHO 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    TD353 .P773 2014
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: Despite significant progress in water and sanitation, much still remains to be done. This report shows how the world has changed since 1990. It provides an assessment of progress towards the MDG target, and insight into the remaining challenges. Section A provides an overview of progress against the parameters specified in the MDG target for water and sanitation, in both urban and rural areas. It presents data for the world as a whole, and compares progress across regions. The report goes on to examine trends over the MDG period by region and by level of service. It pays particular attention to the numbers of people who have gained the highest level of service in drinking water supply -- piped water on premises -- and those with no service at all, who use surface water for drinking and practise open defecation.
    Digital Access WHO 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA591 .P76 2015
    1
  • Digital
    volume editors, Holger Christiansen, Nina Merete Christiansen.
    Contents:
    Clinical features of progressive neuroblastoma / Simon, T.
    DNA copy number changes and beyond / Fieuw, A.; Schulte, J.; De Preter, K.; Speleman, F.
    Genomic alterations and abnormal cell cycle in high-risk neuroblastoma / Capasso, M.; Sidarovich, V.; Quattrone, A.; Tonini, G.P.
    MYCN and microRNAs / Althoff, K.; Schulte, J.H.
    MYCN and its posttranslational regulation in neuroblastoma / Otto, T.
    Neuroblastoma and the P53 pathway / Chen, L.; Tweddle, D.A.
    Targeting cell death pathways in neuroblastoma / Fulda, S.
    Neuroblastoma and angiogenesis / Russler, J.
    The role of the anaplastic lymphoma kinase receptor in neuroblastoma / Yeung, C.M.; George, R.E.
    Molecular-targeted therapy in refractory or relapsed neuroblastoma / Corbacioglu, S.
    Immune regulation in neuroblastoma / Fest, S.; Starke, S.
    Approaches to passive and active vaccination against neuroblastoma / Lode, H.N.
    Role of cell therapy in neuroblastoma / Bremm, M.; Brehm, C.; Huenecke, S.; Rettinger, E.; Bader, P.
    Minimal residual disease in neuroblastoma / Weber, A.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] James L. Harris, Linda A. Roussel, Catherine Dearman, Patricia L. Thomas.
    Summary: "This book answers the call to action for interprofessional teams to develop quality improvement initiatives. It encompasses project planning, management, budget strategies, cost calculations, big data, and skills necessary to remain viable, successful, and sustainable in a challenging healthcare landscape. The fourth edition has moderately-heavily revised content, with 2 new chapters and multiple combined chapters that advance knowledge, collaboration, and avenues for an interconnected link between amongst professionals"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Key Foundations of Successful Quality Project Planning, Implementation, Evaluation, and Management : An Overview / James L. Harris and Bettina Riley
    Quality Improvement Projects and Quality Improvement Research : Advancing Translational Science / Linda Roussel
    Implementation Science, Team Science, and Translational Science : The Value for Projects / Clista Clanton and Linda Roussel
    Forming and Managing a Synergistic Interprofessional Improvement Team
    Making the Case for a Project : Organizational and Needs Assessment / Carolyn Thomas Jones and Linda Roussel
    Using Findings from Organizational Analysis and Clinical Needs Assessment to Frame Improvement Projects and Implementation /Linda Roussel and Shea Polancich
    Literature Synthesis and Organizational Alignment to Project Interventions and Implementation / Catherine Dearman and Lolita Chappel-Aiken
    Building the Improvement Project Budget : Quantifying the Cost and Quality Equation / Patricia L. Thomas and James L. Harris
    Developing Metrics That Support Project Plans, Interventions, and Programs / Patricia L. Thomas
    The Institutional Review Board Process / Catherine Dearman, Dionne Roberts, and Lolita Chappel-Aiken
    Big Data and Information Systems : Understanding the Value for Improvement Projects / James L. Harris, Todd Harlan, and Lonnie K. Williams
    Developing Metrics That Support Project Plans, Interventions, and Programs / Patricia L. Thomas and Michael Bleich
    Innovation, Diffusion, and Dissemination of Improvement Outcomes / James L. Harris and Catherine Dearman.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Print
    by Claire Myers Vernier, Ph.D. .... ; foreword by Isabelle V. Kendig, Ph.D. ...
    Contents: <br/
    >1. Projective drawings.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L469 .V53
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Jean-Claude Bertrand, Philippe Normand, Bernard Ollivier, Télesphore Sime-Ngando.
    Summary: The purpose of this book is to show the essential and indispensable role of prokaryotes in the evolution of a living world. The evolutionary success of prokaryotes is explained together with their role in the evolution of the geosphere, the biosphere and its functioning, as well as their ability to colonize all biotopes, including the most extreme ones. We consider that all past and present living beings emerged from prokaryotes and have interacted with them. Forces and mechanisms presented in the various theories of evolution apply to prokaryotes. The major stages of their evolution and biodiversity are also described. Finally, it is emphasized that prokaryotes are living organisms that provide indisputable evidence of evolutionary processes. Many examples of ongoing evolution in prokaryotes, observable at the human scale, are provided.

    Contents:
    1. Prokaryotes /Eukaryotes dichotomy and Bacteria/Archaea/Eukarya domains: two inseparable concepts
    2. Phylogeny and Biodiversity of Prokaryotes
    3. Importance of Prokaryotes in the Functioning and Evolution of the Present and Past Geosphere and Biosphere
    4. Evolutionary Success of Prokaryotes
    5. The Evolution of Living Beings Started with Prokaryotes, and In Interaction with Prokaryotes
    6. Evolution Underway in Prokaryotes.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Nevan J. Krogan, Mohan Babu, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on innovative experimental and computational approaches for charting interaction networks in bacterial species. The first part of the book consists of nine chapters, focusing on biochemical and genetics and genomics approaches including yeast two hybrid, metagenomics, affinity purification in combination with mass spectrometry, chromatin-immunoprecipitation coupled with sequencing, large-scale synthetic genetic screens, and quantitative-based mass spectrometry strategies for mapping the bacterial physical, functional, substrate, and regulatory interaction networks needed for interpreting biological networks, inferring gene function, enzyme discovery, and identifying new drug targets. The second part comprises five chapters, covering the network of participants for protein folding and complex enzyme maturation. It also covers the structural approaches required to understand bacterial intramembrane proteolysis and the structure and function of bacterial proteins involved in surface polysaccharides, outer membrane, and envelope assembly. This volume concludes with a focus on computational and comparative genomics approaches, especially network-based methods for predicting physical or functional interactions, and integrative analytical approaches for generating more reliable information on bacterial gene function. This book provides foundational knowledge in the understanding of prokaryotic systems biology by illuminating how bacterial genes f unction within the framework of global cellular processes. The book will enable the microbiology community to create substantive resources for addressing many pending unanswered questions, and facilitate the development of new technologies that can be applied to other bacterial species lacking experimental data.

    Contents:
    Metagenomics as a tool for enzyme discovery : hydrolytic enzymes from marine-related metagenomes
    Investigating bacterial protein synthesis using systems biology approaches
    Biology and assembly of the bacterial envelope
    Comparative genomics and evolutionary modularity of prokaryotes
    Predicting functional interactions among genes in prokaryotes by genomic context
    Functional implications for domain organization within prokaryotic rhomboid proteases
    Mapping transcription regulatory networks with ChIP-seq and RNA-seq
    Quantitative and systems-based approaches for deciphering bacterial membrane interactome and gene function
    Toward network biology in E. coli cell
    Genetic interaction scoring procedure for bacterial species
    Mapping the protein-protein interactome networks using yeast two-hybrid screens
    Biogenesis of Escherichia coli DMSO reductase : a network of participants for protein folding and complex enzyme maturation
    Microbial proteome profiling and systems biology : applications to mycobacterium tuberculosis
    Structural aspects of bacterial outer membrane protein assembly
    Substrate interaction networks of the Escherichia coli chaperones : trigger factor, DnaK and GroEL
    Genetic, biochemical, and structural analyses of bacterial surface polysaccharides.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nicholas A. Tritos, Anne Klibanski, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro; Series Editor Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: History of Prolactin Disorders; Medical Therapy; Introduction; Did Mary Tudor of England Have a Prolactinoma? [1]; The Discovery of Human Prolactin; Cell of Origin; Prolactin Action; Neuroendocrine Regulation; Actions of High Levels of Prolactin; Medical Treatment of Hyperprolactinaemia; Pituitary Tumour Shrinkage; Surgery; Radiotherapy; Summary; References;
    Chapter 2: Pituitary Anatomy and Development; Historical Anatomy; Macroscopic Anatomy; Landmarks of the Sellar Region; Pituitary Gland Vascularization of the Pituitary GlandEmbryologic Anatomy; Radiologic Anatomy; Microscopic and Functional Anatomy; Anterior Pituitary (Adenohypophysis); Pars Distalis; Pars Intermedia; Marginal Zone; Pars Tuberalis; Posterior Pituitary; Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 3: Prolactin Assays and Regulation of Secretion: Animal and Human Data; Prolactin Assays; What Is Measured in Prolactin Assays?; The History of Prolactin Assays; Measurement of Prolactin Levels; Analytical Pitfalls; The "Hook Effect"; Macroprolactin; Interference from Heterophilic Antibodies; Interference with Biotin
    Chapter 4: Physiological Actions and ReceptorsPhysiological Actions in Humans and Other Mammals; Mammary Glands; Reproductive Tissues; Receptors and Signaling; Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 5: Prolactin Excess and Deficiency: Epidemiology, Causes (Excluding Prolactin-Secreting Pituitary Tumors); Introduction; Normal Levels of Prolactin; Prolactin Excess: Epidemiology and Causes; Physiologic Causes; Pregnancy; Nipple Stimulation and Lactation; Stress; Other; Pathologic Causes; Decreased Dopaminergic Inhibition of Prolactin Secretion; Decreased Clearance of Prolactin Prolactin Increase Due to Neural MechanismGenetic Causes: Germline Loss-of-Function Mutation; Other Causes; Pharmacological Causes; Antipsychotics; Antidepressants; Gastric Motility Drugs; Antihypertensive Drugs; Estrogens; Opioids; Other Drugs; Idiopathic Hyperprolactinemia; Prolactin Deficiency: Epidemiology and Causes; Pathological Causes; Sheehan's Syndrome; Genetic Causes; Pharmacological; Dopamine Agonists; Aripiprazole; Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 6: Prolactin-Secreting Pituitary Adenomas: Epidemiology and Natural History; Epidemiology of Sporadic Prolactinomas; Population Studies
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, Women's Health Care Physicians.
    Contents:
    Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Preface
    PROLOG Objectives
    Start of Critique Content
    Appendix
    Index
    Assessment Book
    Preface
    Instruction
    Start of Content
  • Digital
    American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, Women's Health Care Physicians.
    Contents:
    Front Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Preface
    Prolog Objectives
    1. Borderline ovarian tumor
    2. Complete mole
    3. Endometrial cancer
    4. Instrumental Activities of Daily Living score in an older patient
    5. Adenocarcinoma in situ
    6. High-risk gestational trophoblastic disease
    7. Human papillomavirus primary screening
    8. Vulvar cancer
    9. Postoperative hemorrhage
    10. Cervical cancer recurrence
    11. Wound infection
    12. Radiation proctitis
    13. Paget disease
    14. Chemotherapy for recurrent ovarian cancer 15. Pain management after surgery
    16. Total parenteral nutrition
    17. Imaging modality in a patient with a diagnosis of vulvar cancer
    18. Laparoscopic complications
    19. Palpable breast mass
    20. Intraoperative cell salvage
    21. Preoperative workup of a pelvic mass in an older patient
    22. Genetic counseling for familial history of breast cancer
    23. Posttreatment surveillance in cervical cancer
    24. Intraoperative hypercapnia in a patient with obesity
    25. Clostridium difficile infection
    26. Sex cord-stromal tumors of the ovary
    27. Serous endometrial cancer 28. Types of clinical studies
    29. Acupuncture for patients with cancer
    30. Malignant pleural effusion
    31. Cervical cancer
    32. Indications for BRCA testing
    33. Endometriosis-associated ovarian cancer
    34. Spinal metastasis
    35. Postmolar gestational trophoblastic disease
    36. Atypical glandular cells on cervical cytology
    37. Low-grade serous ovarian cancer
    38. Hospice
    39. Postoperative feeding
    40. Pulmonary embolism
    41. Ovarian cancer recurrence
    42. Minimally invasive surgery for endometrial cancer
    43. Receiver operator characteristic curve 44. Low-resource cervical cancer screening
    45. In vitro fertilization and ovarian cancer
    46. Complex adnexal mass in a postmenopausal woman
    47. Ureteral injury
    48. Ovarian cancer
    49. Endometrial cancer recurrence
    50. Early-stage cervical cancer
    51. Nosocomial pneumonia
    52. Paraneoplastic syndrome
    53. Placental site trophoblastic tumor
    54. Microinvasive cervical cancer
    55. First-line chemotherapy after suboptimal debulking
    56. Febrile neutropenia
    57. Immunohistochemistry staining for pathologic evaluation
    58. Pelvic exenteration 59. Intraperitoneal chemotherapy
    60. Positive and negative predictive values
    61. Human papillomavirus vaccination
    62. Brain metastases
    63. Malignant ovarian germ cell tumor
    64. Complications of epidural after surgery
    65. Perioperative cardiac risk assessment
    66. Perioperative venous thromboprophylaxis
    67. Small-bowel obstruction
    68. Lymph node involvement in cervical cancer
    69. Low-grade serous ovarian cancer and tumor showing a BRAF mutation
    70. Bladder injury
    71. Imaging modality in a patient with a diagnosis of cervical cancer
  • Digital
    the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists.
    Summary: "PROLOG: Patient Management in Office is the premier learning tool for staying up to date in the specialty area. Consisting of an assessment book and critique book, PROLOG is an effective, self-directed study resource and reference for both obstetricians-gynecologists and those in training. The content is peer-reviewed, current, and clinically relevant. Upon completion, users of this unit should be able to: Identify epidemiologic factors that contribute to women's health issues encountered in office practice Determine appropriate screening approaches to identify health conditions in women Correlate presenting signs and symptoms with appropriate diagnostic tools Describe appropriate traditional and alternative management strategies for select conditions encountered in office practice Counsel patients about the impact of health and illness throughout their lives and about risks and benefits of treatment Apply professional medical ethics to the practice of obstetrics and gynecology Incorporate appropriate legal, risk management, and office management guidelines and techniques in clinical practice"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists.
    Contents:
    Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Preface
    PROLOG Objectives
    Start of Critique Content
    Appendix
    Index
    Assessment
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Preface
    PROLOG Objectives
    Start of Assessment
    Instructions
  • Digital
    Mary Grossman.
    Summary: This is the first Nursing book on cancer care designed around a conceptual model of whole person care. Key concepts are stress, healing, resilience and health. As a clinical model, nursing goals, desired outcomes, key concepts and proposed psychosocial interventions with patients and family caregivers, advance the practice of clinical nursing toward a more comprehensive understanding of the whole person with cancer and their loved ones. As a model for teaching nursing students about chronic illness, it provides a scientific basis for students to learn how to assess and care for the whole person and his loved one. As a model for clinical research in the field of cancer care, it serves as a predicate for the development, evaluation and interpretation of clinical interventions. The model is a dynamic framework that both informs and is informed by research findings. It is hoped that future research findings will reveal the optimal combination of interventions to provide comprehensive care across clinical contexts. With a patient-centred humanistic focus anchored by the quality of the nurse patient and family caregiver relationships, it is hoped that the nurse's technical, procedural and medical expertise may complement rather than define the nurse's approach to the whole patient and family. The book is structured to facilitate the reader's easy access to needed information. Each chapter examines a key concept of the model, and is organized around an introduction, learning objectives, definitions, and relevant research findings that serve as the scientific predicate for suggested interventions discussed in Part 4, Nursing approaches. Clinical and personal anecdotes, tables and figures illustrate the concepts under discussion. Nurse practitioners, clinic nurse specialists, nursing professors, graduate students, and nurse researchers may find this book a useful reference for conceptualizing whole person care, and for determining relevant interventions that promote healing, resilience and health. But it is also relevant for family doctors and fourth year students learning to care for the whole person with a chronic illness.

    Contents:
    PART
    1 Stress, healing and resilience in the whole person with cancer. 1
    Introduction 2
    Stress, healing and resilience conceptual model of nursing 3
    Psychological stress PART 2;- Resilience 4
    Introduction 5
    Biological resilience 6
    Psychological resilience PART 3
    Poor resilience 7
    Introduction 8
    Poor resilience 9
    Cancer PART 4
    Fostering healing 10
    Introduction 11- Nurse-patient (family caregiver) relationship 12
    Promoting cognitive-behavioral adaptive coping 13
    Enhancing meaning, purpose and acceptance 14
    Strengthening supportive relationships 15.-Psychological healing and leveraging the placebo effect 16
    Enhancing the relaxation response and mindful meditation 17
    Use of touch, healing touch and massage PART 5
    Clinical approaches 18
    Introduction 19
    Diagnosis 20
    Treatment 21
    Transition to Survivorship 22
    End of life 23
    Closing remarks: Is it feasible 24
    Final comments.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Adele Martel, Jennifer Derenne, Patricia K. Leebens, editors.
    Summary: This concise and practical book provides an overview of how to safely and effectively transition adolescents with mental health conditions into a college environment. Therapeutic strategies to assess and promote readiness for transition to college are discussed in case-based chapters, which include case history, analysis of transition, clinical pearls, literature review, and helpful resources for clinicians, patients, and families. Filling a significant gap in the literature, this resource delivers essential information for psychiatrists, psychologists, and other mental health professionals who work with children, adolescents, and their families before, during, and after the transition to college.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Erin Martz.
    Summary: "Promoting Self-Management of Chronic Health Conditions covers a range of topics related to self-management-theories and practice, interventions that have been scientifically tested, and information that individuals with specific conditions should know (or be taught by healthcare professionals)"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note:
    1. Introduction: Why Study Self-Management?
    Erin Martz
    2. Defining Self-Management on the Individual Level
    Erin Martz
    Part I: Individual-Level Theories and Interventions to Promote Self-Management
    3. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy to Promote Self-Management
    Sharon Eldar, Nora M. Esser, and Stefan G. Hofmann
    4. Spreading HOPE: The Development of a Hope-Based Self-Management Intervention
    Andy Turner and Faith Martin
    5. Illness Intrusiveness and Self-Management of Medical Conditions
    Gerald M. Devins and Amy Deckert
    6. Motivational Interviewing to Promote Self-Management
    Rebecca Phillips, Anne Hogden, and David Greenfield
    Part II: Chronic Impairment-Specific Research
    7. Self-Management of Addictive Behaviors
    Vanja Radoncic, Betty Marcou, and Denise Hien
    8. Self-Management of Arthritis
    Jessica Brooks, Kanako Iwanaga, and Fong Chan
    9. Self-Management of Burn Injury
    James Fauerbach and Carisa Perry-Parrish
    10. Self-Management of Cancer
    Amy Deckert and Gerald M. Devins
    11. Self-Management of Cardiac-Related Health Issues
    Noa Vilchinsky
    12. Self-Management of Diabetes
    Jonathan F. Deiches, Emre Umucu, and Fong Chan
    13. Self-Management of Epilepsy
    Janice Buelow and Henry Smithson
    14. Self-Management of Hearing Impairments
    Lucy Handscomb, Gabrielle H. Saunders, and Derek J. Hoare
    15. Self-Management of HIV
    Faith Martin
    16. Self-Management of Multiple Sclerosis
    Malachy Bishop and Michael Frain
    17. Self-management of pain
    Thomas Hadjistavropoulos
    18. Self-Management of Tinnitus
    Erin Martz
    19. Self-management of vision impairments
    Vicki Drury, Ai Tee Aw, and Priscilla Lim Shiow Huey
    Part III: Innovative Technology and Techniques to Promote Self-Management
    20. Telemedicine
    Kristian Kidholm
    21. Internet Interventions
    Gerhard Andersson
    Part IV: Promoting Self-Management across the Globe
    22. Systemic Models of Self-Management
    Erin Martz.
    Digital Access Oxford [2018]
  • Digital
    edited by Rory A. Cooper, Paul F. Pasquina, Douglas A. Etter.
    Contents:
    Framework for reintegration and resilience for service members and veterans / Rory A. Cooper, Paul F. Pasquina, and Douglas A. Etter
    Physical medicine and rehabilitation / Adam J. Susmarski
    The promise of the future : assistive technology, transportation, and emerging technologies / Rosemarie Cooper, Cheng-Shiu (Joshua) Chung, John Coltellaro, Christina LaCroix, Amy Lane, Alissa Ling, Amanda Reinsfelder, Benjamin Salatin, and Goeran Fiedler
    Psychosocial factors in reintegration / Michelle L. Sporner and Anne E. Barry
    Spirituality and reintegration : building strength, fortitude, optimism, and connection / Douglas A. Etter, Amy Mountain, and Audrey Schoomaker
    The role of friends and family in reintegration : building insights and strategies that promote reintegration and resiliency / Christina Berchock Shook
    Sexuality and intimacy / Stanley H. Ducharme, Rebecca P. Cameron, and Linda R. Mona
    The role of sports and recreation in promoting successful reintegration / Rory A. Cooper, Michael Mushett, and Thomas Williams
    Virtual reality and telemedicine to support reintegration and health maintenance
    Deepan C. kamaraj and Rory A. Cooper
    Community/peer support and services / Al Condeluci, Rory A. Cooper, Melva Gooden-Ledbetter, and D. Joshua Marino
    Financial management / Daniel J. Fisher, Joseph A. Wineman, and Randy Levander
    Education and employment / Mary R. Goldberg, Anne E. Barry, Maria Milleville, Michelle L. Sporner, Ron Drach, Allen Lewis, and Brian Bilski
    Accessible homes, communities, and transportation / Carol Peredo Lopez, Lavinia Fici Pasquina, Amanda McAlpine, Patrick Rakszawaski, Steve Bucha, and Paul F. Pasquina
    Overview of military and veteran resources / Rory A. Cooper
    The role of service organizations and volunteers / S. Elaine Eitler and William M. Lake
    Culture and reintegration of veterans / Allen Lewis, Seth Messinger, Twylla Kirchen, Jeanne Wenos, and Shelly Brown
    Summary / Rory A. Cooper.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
  • Digital
    Sergio V. Delgado, Ernest V. Pedapati, Jeffrey R. Strawn.
    Summary: Clinicians often have difficulty helping the parents of youth with emotional and behavioral difficulties and fail to recognize that often it is the youths cognitive and learning weaknesses that drive their maladaptive behaviors. This book aims to help clinicians further understand the roots of youths maladaptive behaviors. It also addresses the impact of youths varied cognitive abilities on their behaviors and problems with self-esteem, particularly in youth that do not meet the diagnostic criteria for a formal learning disability. While many clinicians view learning deficits as impairments in specific academic skills, these deficits go beyond varied learning abilities and often experience difficulties in emotional, social, and behavioral functioning. These impairments vary from child to child and it is crucial to develop practical interventions for improved self-esteem and emotional success. Varied learning abilities reflect a neurodevelopmental problem in youth that can lead to difficulties with their emotional, social, and academic functioning and limit their intellectual potential. There are often treatment impasses when a youths behavioral problems do not improve with traditional forms of psychotherapy and medication. The practical individualized interventions recommended in this book will: 1) decrease conflict in day-to-day interactions between youth and parents, 2) improve self-esteem and 3) help to achieve realistic social, emotional and academic goals. The text will help clinicians determine which maladaptive behaviors are a result of cognitive deficits and not symptoms of a disease-based mental disorder. Written by experts in the field, Promoting the Emotional and Behavioral Success of Youths reviews appropriate interventions in the context of the public health strategies that address the prevention of secondary socio-economic aspects as a result of cognitive weaknesses, such as realistic educational needs, career and employment choices. Clinicians will be able to use this book to develop best fit multimodal interventions to help parents of youth develop adaptive behaviors.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Biological, Emotional and Social Development
    The Four Pillars of a Contemporary Diagnostic Interview
    Temperament: The Building Block of Personality
    Intelligence: Why dont you behave?
    Cognitive Flexibility (Theory of Mind): Being in your shoes
    Personality: My Friends Are Just Like Me
    Putting It All Together: Adapting to Youths Strengths and Weaknesses
    Parenting principles to help youths: Debunking common parenting myths.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Pauline Heslop, Crispin Hebron, editors.
    Summary: This textbook presents a practical guide for new and experienced health or social care staff, helping them promote the health and well-being of people with learning disabilities. Given the considerable demand for mandatory training on supporting people with learning disabilities, especially in England, the book provides a valuable resource for all training courses on working with people with learning disabilities. The chapters are co-written by practitioners and people with learning disabilities and their families, rooting the book in the lived experiences of those concerned. Topics covered include core elements of being happy and healthy, communication, changes in our behaviour when we are unwell, making decisions about our health, accessing health services, how we would want to be treated if we were unwell, the use of psychotropic medication, what a 'good death would be, and how to keep ourselves healthy. In addition, the chapters include narrative examples concerning people with learning disabilities and their families, so as to highlight key points and share best-practice examples. The use of personal reflection is used to consider how we can ensure that people with learning disabilities receive care and support that matches what we would expect for ourselves. Core questions at the end of each chapter ask the reader to reflect on how the chapter content relates to their own work and how they will apply what they have learned. A consistent theme throughout the book is equality of opportunity for people with learning disabilities to achieve good health. There is now substantial evidence that people with learning disabilities have poorer health than the general population, are more likely to have multiple health needs, and can experience difficulties in having their illnesses diagnosed and treated promptly. This book aims to help those supporting people with learning disabilities to achieve more equal outcomes.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Being happy and healthy
    Chapter 2. Communication
    Chapter 3. Behaviour
    Chapter 4. Decision-making
    Chapter 5. Access to health services
    Chapter 6. Providing holistic care
    Chapter 7. Psychotropic medication
    Chapter 8. Death and dying
    Chapter 9. Staying healthy
    Chapter 10. Sources of advice about our health or that of others.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Julie Ann St. John, Susan L. Mayfield-Johnson, Wandy D. Hernández-Gordon, editors.
    Summary: Community health workers (CHWs) are an increasingly important member of the healthcare and public health professions who help build primary care capacity. Yet, in spite of the exponential growth of CHW interventions, CHW training programs, and CHW certification and credentialing by state agencies, a gap persists in the literature regarding current CHW roles and skills, scope of practice, CHW job settings, and national standards. This collection of contributions addresses this gap by providing information, in a single volume, about CHWs, the roles CHWs play as change agents in their communities, integration of CHWs into healthcare teams, and support and recognition of the CHW profession. The book supports the CHW definition as defined by the American Public Health Association (APHA), Community Health Worker Section (2013), which states, "A community health worker is a frontline public health worker who is a trusted member of and/or has an unusually close understanding of the community served." The scope of the text follows the framework of the nationally recognized roles of CHWs that came out of a national consensus-building project called "The Community Health Worker (CHW) Core Consensus (C3) Project". Topics explored among the chapters include: Cultural Mediation Among Individuals, Communities, and Health and Social Service Systems Care Coordination, Case Management, and System Navigation Advocating for Individuals and Communities Building Individual and Community Capacity Implementing Individual and Community Assessments Participating in Evaluation and Research Uniting the Workforce: Building Capacity for a National Association of Community Health Workers Promoting the Health of the Community is a must-have resource for CHWs, those interested in CHW scope of practice and/or certification/credentialing, anyone interested in becoming a CHW, policy-makers, CHW payer systems, CHW supervisors, CHW employers, CHW instructors/trainers, CHW advocates/supporters, and communities served by CHWs.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Why community health workers (CHWs)?
    THe community health worker cor consensus (C3) project story: confirming core roles and skills of community health workers
    Roles, skills, and qualities of community health workers
    Describing results from the "Promoting the health of the community" national needs assessment
    Cultural mediation among individuals, communities, and health and social service systems
    Providing culturally appropriate health education and information
    Care coordination, case management, and system navigation
    Providing coaching and social support
    Advocating for individuals and communities
    Building individual and community capacity
    Providing direct services
    Implementing individual and community assessments
    Conducting outreach
    Participating in evaluation and research
    Uniting the workforce: building capacity for a national association of community health workers
    Where do we go from here? a closing reflection.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Iram Siddique, editor.
    Summary: Plant biotechnology has now become a key tool in improving crop productivity and enhancing commercial value of plant products. The book complies various methods of in vitro propagation and genetic manipulation of important aromatic and medicinal plants. It puts together latest techniques and innovations in the field of plant biotechnology such as effective protocols of genetic manipulation, isolation of secondary metabolites, use of somaclonal variation, stress management in plants. It also explores the role of various physiological and biochemical factors affecting the genetic stability of in-vitro cultured plants. These themes are of interest to both graduate and postgraduate students. Further this book will be useful for to researchers, academicians and industrialist to review latest progress and future prospects of these technologies.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    About the Editor
    1: Somaclonal Variation and Methods Used for Its Detection
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Uses of Somaclonal Variation in Agriculture
    1.2.1 Generation of New Agronomic Variants with Favorable Traits
    1.2.2 Generation of Disease Resistance Varieties
    1.2.3 Generation of Biochemical Variants with Abiotic Resistance
    1.3 Disadvantages of Somaclonal Variation
    1.4 Causes and Genetic Basis of Somaclonal Variation
    1.5 Methods Used for Assessing Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.1 Morphological Assessment of Somaclonal Variation 1.5.10 Detection of DNA Methylation Events Using the Methylation-Sensitive Amplification Polymorphism (MSAP)
    1.5.11 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using Transposon-Based Marker Systems
    1.5.12 Next-Generation Sequencing (NGS) for the Determination of Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.13 MicroRNA Involvement in Tissue Culture
    1.6 Conclusion
    References
    2: Synthetic Seed Technology in Some Ornamental and Medicinal Plants: An Overview
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Preparation of Synthetic Seeds
    2.3 Synthetic Seeds of Medicinal Plants
    2.4 Synthetic Seeds and Ornamental Plants 1.5.2 Biochemicals Used to Assess Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.3 Protein Markers Used to Assess Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.4 Cytogenetic Analysis for the Determination of Somaclonal Variation
    1.5.5 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using RFLP
    1.5.6 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using Random Amplified Polymorphic DNA (RAPD)
    1.5.7 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using Simple Sequence Repeat (SSR)
    1.5.8 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using the Inter-Simple Sequence Repeat (ISSR) Markers
    1.5.9 Detection of Somaclonal Variation Using the AFLP Technique 2.5 Factors Affecting Development of Synthetic Seeds
    2.6 Factors Affecting Synthetic Seeds ́Performance
    2.7 Advantages of Synthetic Seeds
    2.8 Disadvantages of Synthetic Seeds
    2.9 Conclusion
    References
    3: Cytokinin Influence on Micropropagation System of Dianthus caryophyllus L.
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Materials and Methods
    3.2.1 Nodal Explants and Surface Sterilization
    3.2.2 Culture Media and Culture Room Conditions
    3.2.3 Effect of PGRs on Shoot Induction and Multiplication
    3.2.4 In Vitro Rooting in Microshoots
    3.2.5 Hardening and Acclimatization of Plantlets 3.2.6 Statistical Analysis
    3.3 Result and Discussion
    3.3.1 Induction and Multiplication Phase
    3.3.2 Rooting of Microshoots
    3.3.3 Acclimatization
    References
    4: Phenolic Compound Contents of Hypericum Species from Turkey
    4.1 Introduction
    4.1.1 The Florstc Characters of Hypercum L.
    4.1.2 Hypericum Speces in Turkey
    4.1.3 Traditional Uses of Hypericum Species in Turkey
    4.2 Phenolic Compounds of Hypericum Species
    4.2.1 Naphthodianthrones
    4.2.2 Phloroglucinols
    4.2.3 Flavonoids
    4.2.4 Biflavones
    4.2.5 Phenylpropanes
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    edited by Osman Nuri Dilek, Selman Uranues, Rifat Latifi.
    Summary: This volume introduces the reader to the most important standards and principles of prophylactic surgery. After discussing the comparative effectiveness of screening in the treatment of hereditary cancer syndromes and evaluating genetic predisposition, the book moves on to address ethical, legal, social and cost-effectiveness dimensions of prophylactic surgery. With the aim of preventing hereditary predisposition syndromes, it also includes a chapter on the application of preventive surgery to all specific fields of surgery. Given its scope, the book will appeal to a broad readership, from experienced surgeons to students.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreward
    1. Prophylactic surgery; Why, when and how?
    2. Minimal invasive procedures and prophylactic surgery
    3. PROPHYLACTIC APPROACHES IN ABDOMINAL WALL SURGERY: PREVENTING AND REPAIRING THE BURST ABDOMEN
    4. Cost-effectiveness of prophylactic surgeries in preventing hereditary predisposition syndromes
    5. Prophylactic thyroidectomy
    6. Prophylactic parathyroidectomy
    7. Genetic Predispositions and Prophylactic Mastectomy in Breast Cancer Patients
    8. Prophylactic mastectomy for benign pathologies
    9. Prophylactic surgery for liver pathologies
    10. Prophylactic surgical procedures for pancreas pathologies
    11. Prophlactic surgery for gallbladder and biliary tract pathologies
    12. Prophylactic splenectomy
    13. Prophylactic surgical procedures for esophageal pathologies
    14. Stomach and duodenum resections for genetic predispositions
    15. Prophylactic surgery for benign diseases of stomach and duodenum
    16. PROPHYLACTIC SURGERY FOR SMALL INTESTINES
    17. Prophylactic appendectomy
    18. Vascular problems related to colectomy: habitual and variant anatomy, prevention and tactical aspects
    19. Prophylactic resection for genetic predispositions of colon and rectum
    20. Prophylactic colon and rectum resections for benign pathologies
    21. Prophylactic adrenalectomy
    22. Omentectomy; Whether to Perform Should be Questioned
    23. Open access in laparoscopic surgery to prevent entry complications
    24. Prophylactic Surgery in Trauma
    25. Surgical prophlaxis of obesity
    26. Histopathological findings in prophylactic surgical specimens
    27. Prophylactic surgery for genetic predisposition of female organs
    28. Prophylactic surgery for benign gynecologic pathologies
    29. Prophylactic surgical procedures in Plastic Surgery
    30. Prophylactic cardiac and vascular surgery procedures
    31. Prophylactic chest surgery procedures
    32. Prophylactic surgery for Urologic pathologies
    33. Prophylactic procedures in Pediatric Surgery
    34. Prophylactic surgery for Neurosurgical pathologies
    35. Prophylactic procedures for orthopedic pathologies
    36. ETHICAL AND LEGAL DIMENSIONS OF PROPHYLACTIC SURGERY
    37. Psychiatric aspects of prophylactic surgery in adults
    38. Child and adolescent aspects in prophylactic surgery
    39. Endoscopic approaches for prophlactic purposes
    40. The place of prophylactic surgery in guidelines
    41. Interventional procedures reducing the needs for conventional surgery
    42. Radiological Screening for Hereditary Cancer Predisposition Syndromes.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Wanda Bonnel, Katharine V. Smith.
    Summary: "This book provides students with tools to implement in their own scholarly practice. Three chapters, new to this edition, focus on implementing quality-improvement projects, writing the final project report, and ongoing clinical scholarship opportunities. Chapters, consistent with previous editions, feature boxes offering advice from doctor of nursing practice (DNP) students who have completed project proposals. Each chapter has been thoroughly updated and edited to enhance clarity. In response to reviewers' requests, new proposal and project tips have been added to many chapters. Key features to engage readers continue from the earlier editions; these include reflective questions, tips for making proposals complete and concise, exemplars, and reader activities. This text helps develop reflective clinical scholars who can write about clinical challenges, propose solutions, and use the methods of quality improvement and research to develop scholarly proposals and projects"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction : why a scholarly proposal for the clinical project proposal?
    Using the writing plan as a developmental tool for the advanced clinical project
    Writing a good clinical problem statement and placing the clinical problem in context
    Clinical projects and quality improvement : thinking big picture / Brigid Weyhofen
    Into the literature : gaining best evidence and relevant literature
    Synthesizing best evidence and literature review / Linda Kroeger
    Framing the advanced clinical project with relevant clinical frameworks
    Addressing outcomes evaluation in the advanced clinical project proposal
    Guiding the advanced clinical project : the purpose of a purpose statement
    Mapping it out, from problem to advanced clinical project plan
    Writing the methods section : organizing the advanced clinical project proposal
    Gaining credible clinical project data : being systematic and objective
    Writing the data-analysis plans for advanced clinical projects
    Keeping clinical projects ethical and dependable
    Finalizing the proposal as a professional document : reviewing, editing, and revising
    Moving your project proposal to completed project
    Moving your project to written final report
    Moving your completed project to dissemination and further scholarship.
    Digital Access R2Library [2022], ©2022
  • Digital
    Defne Kaya, Baran Yosmaoglu, Mahmut Nedim Doral, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Application of array comparative genomic hybridization in newborns with multiple congenital anomalies / Krzysztof Szczałuba [and 10 others]
    Cytogenomic evaluation of children with congenital anomalies: critical implications for diagnostic testing and genetic counseling / Krzysztof Szczałuba [and 7 others]
    Impairment of immune function in children with familial hemophagocytic lymphohistiocytosis / K. Popko [and 9 others]
    Thyroid function in obese children and adolescents and its association with anthropometric and metabolic parameters / Małgorzata Rumińska [and 3 others]
    Relationship between 25(OH)D and IgF-I in children and adolescents with growth hormone deficiency / E. Witkowska-Se̜dek [and 3 others]
    Viral infections in children in the 2014/2015 epidemic season in Poland / E. Hallmann-Szelińska [and 4 others]
    Gastroesophageal reflux disease in children with interstitial lung disease / M.A. Dziekiewicz [and 10 others]
    Treatment outcomes in children with Henoch-Schönlein nephritis / Małgorzata Mizerska-Wasiak [and 4 others]
    Respiratory function and language abilities of profoundly deaf adolescents with and without cochlear implants / A. Żebrowska [and 5 others]
    High-frequency jet ventilation against small-volume conventional mechanical ventilation in the rabbit models of neonatal acute lung injury / D. Mokra [and 6 others].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Andrew MacLeod.
    Summary: This book is about how we think about the future. It is about how we think about our own personal futures and how such prospection is connected to our well-being and mental health. The ability to think about the future is essential for functioning, and is also central to individual well-being and mental health. This book reviews the growing evidence for the link between prospection and well-being. A variety of aspects of prospection are discussed, including prediction and anticipation for future events, judging how we will feel when events do happen to us, and how we feel in the here-and-now when contemplating what will happen in the future. Each of these aspects of prospection is connected to experiences of well-being and mental health in different ways. Questions of bias and accuracy in prediction are also addressed in the context of discussing optimism and pessimism. Qualities of goals for the future that are strongly implicated in aspects of well-being and mental health are reviewed, along with the role that difficulties in planning how to reach goals play in states of low well-being. The book also attempts to reconcile the seeming contradiction between being mindful in the present and thinking about the future. Ways of trying to change problematic prospection are also reviewed in light of their ability to improve well-being and reduce psychological distress.

    Contents:
    Thinking about the future
    Expectancies
    Optimism and pessimism
    Predicting feelings
    Anticipatory feelings
    Memory
    Goals
    Plans
    Temporal orientation and mindfulness
    Intervention
    Prospection, well-being, and mental health.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Jacqueline MacDonald, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an in-depth explanation of the advantages and current limitations of recombinant plant-made vaccines for use in veterinary medicine, including for livestock, pets, and wild animals. Written by top scientists in the field, it discusses the background to and latest scientific advances in plant-made vaccines for the most commonly targeted veterinary infections. With the recent high-profile research into recombinant plant-made therapeutics for Ebola and Zika viruses, it is likely that the products will be commercialized and widely used in the future. Plant-made therapeutics have a variety of advantages over those made in traditional systems; however, their most fruitful application may be in veterinary medicine, due to less stringent regulations and a greater need for low-cost products.

    Contents:
    1) History and promise of plant-made vaccines for animals, Ed Rybicki
    2) Plant transformation strategies, Verónica Araceli Márquez-Escobar, Omar González-Ortega, Sergio Rosales-Mendoza
    Vaccines for wild, feral and companion animals, 3) Rabies and related lyssaviruses, Charles E. Rupprecht, Rachel Chikwamba
    4) A comprehensive review of Toxoplasma gondii biology and host-cell interaction: challenges for a plant-based vaccine, Valeria Sander, Sergio O. Angel, Marina Clemente
    5) Vaccines against West Nile virus, Haiyan Sun, Qiang Chen
    Vaccines for poultry, 6) Plant-made veterinary vaccines for Newcastle disease virus, David R. Thomas, Amanda M. Walmsley
    7) Infectious bursal disease virus, Evangelina Gómez, Soledad Lucero, Matías Richetta, Silvina Chimeno Zoth, Analía Berinstein
    8) Plant-produced avian influenza antigens, Yanaysi Ceballo, Alina Lopez, Kenia Tiel, Abel Hernandez
    9) Plant-made vaccines against avian reovirus, Ching-Chun Chang, Hung-Jen Liu
    Vaccines for swine, 10) Toward the optimization of a plant-based oral vaccine against cysticercosis, Edda Sciutto, Marisela Hernández, Jacquelynne Cervantes-Torres, Elizabeth Monreal
    Escalante, Omayra Bolaños-Martínez, Juan Francisco Rodríguez, Gladis Fragoso, Sergio, Rosales-Mendoza
    11) Classical swine fever virus, Han Sang Yoo
    12) Porcine epidemic diarrhea virus, Zayn Khamis, Rima Menassa
    13) Porcine reproductive and respiratory syndrome (PRRS), Elizabeth Loza-Rubio, Edith Rojas-Anaya
    Vaccines for ruminants, 14) The benefit of a plant-based cattle vaccine for reducing Enterohemorrhagic Escherichia coli shedding and improving food safety, Adam Chin-Fatt, Ed Topp, Rima Menassa
    15) Foot-and-mouth disease, Vanesa Ruiz, Andrés Wigdorovitz
    Vaccines with limited research, 16) Diseases with limited research of plant-based vaccines, Ann Meyers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Upjohn.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    QP801.P68 P76 1980
    2
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Wiley no. 1-, 1981-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    v. 1-7, 1981-96.
    Supplement 1 BOUND WITH: Prostate, v. 2.
    2
  • Digital
    Rajal B. Shah, Ming Zhou.
    Summary: This book covers practical issues related to the interpretation of prostatic biopsies in day-to-day practice. It examines common clinical scenarios and features high-quality color images and uses algorithms and tables to simulate the decision-making process.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; About the Authors;
    1: Anatomy and Normal Histology of the Prostate Pertinent to Biopsy Interpretation; 1.1 Anatomy of Normal Prostate; 1.2 Anatomy and Disease Preference of Three Zones of the Prostate; 1.3 Histology of Normal Prostate; 1.4 Immunophenotype of Prostate Glandular Cells; 1.5 Histology of Three Zones of Normal Prostate Glands, Other Intraprostatic Structures, and Their Mimics; 1.6 Histologic Variations of Normal Prostate Tissue (Also See Chap. 7); References
    2: Needle Biopsy Sampling Techniques and Role of Multiparametric-Magnetic Resonance Imaging Modality in Prostate Cancer Diagnosis and Management2.1 Comparisons of Three Biopsy Techniques Utilized for Prostate Cancer Detection [2-13]; 2.2 Comparisons of Transrectal and Transperineal Biopsy Approach [13-14]; 2.3 Multiparametric-Magnetic Resonance Imaging (mp-MRI) for Prostate Cancer Diagnosis and Management [15-19]; References;
    3: Diagnosis of Limited Cancer in Prostate Biopsy; 3.1 General Approach to Prostate Needle Biopsy Evaluation 3.2 Histological Features Considered Specific for and Diagnostic of Cancer3.3 Major and Minor Diagnostic Features of Prostate Cancer in Biopsy; 3.4 Benign Conditions That Cause Architectural and Cytological Atypia; 3.5 Quantitative Threshold for Diagnosing Limited Cancer in Biopsy; 3.6 Histological Features for and against Cancer Diagnosis in Biopsy; 3.7 A Practical Approach to Diagnosis of Limited Cancer in Needle Biopsy; References;
    4: Immunohistochemistry in Prostate Biopsy Evaluation; 4.1 Commonly Used Immunohistochemical Markers for Diagnosis of Prostate Cancer in Biopsy 5.2 Prostate Cancer Nomograms and National Comprehensive Cancer Network (NCCN) Recurrence Categories and Prediction Models [5-9]5.3 The 2005/2014 Modifications of Gleason Grading System [10, 11]; 5.4 Contemporary Gleason Pattern 1 [2, 3, 9-16]; 5.5 Contemporary Gleason Pattern 2; 5.6 Contemporary Gleason Pattern 3; 5.7 Common Pitfalls of Pattern 3 (Reasons for Over-interpretation of Pattern 3 as Pattern 4) (See Figs. 5.8, 5.9, 5.10, 5.11, 5.12, 5.13, 5.14, 5.15, 5.16, 5.17, 5.18, 5.19, and 5.20); 5.8 Contemporary Gleason Pattern 4
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gilles Plourde.
    Summary: Prostate Cancer: A Case Report discusses the prevention, treatment modalities, and side effects of the medications used to treat prostate cancer. The book presents the most appropriate information, allowing patient empowerment to make informed decisions on their choice of treatments. Through the analysis of a real case report, the book also discusses the main complication associated with prostate cancer-bone metastasis-and provides information on treatment modalities for lung and liver metastasis. Diet, physical activities and the management of stress are also discussed, as is palliative care and the use of palliative sedation when other treatment modalities have failed. Cannabis, the pros and cons of euthanasia, and concerns raised by society are also covered. Esteemed author Dr. Plourde has more than 12 years' experience working on drug safety, especially for biologic products involved in the treatment of various cancers. For more than 4 years he has suffered from prostate cancer with metastasis to the lungs and bones. During this time he has learned a lot on prostate cancer from the medical literature and from discussions with various specialists. The case report presented in this book represents his own medical history. Prostate Cancer: A Case Report provides the most relevant and up to date information on the various aspects involved in the screening, diagnosis and treatment of prostate cancer.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    René Sotelo, Juan Arriaga, Raed A. Azhar, Inderbir S. Gill, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. An Appointment with the Urologist
    3. Prostate-Specific Antigen (PSA)
    4. Prostate Biopsy
    5. Prostatitis- Pelvic Pain
    6. Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia
    7. Prostate Cancer
    8. How to Get a Second Opinion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Scott M. Dehm, Donald J. Tindall, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews biochemistry, molecular biology and genetic changes in prostate cells that are the driving forces in the initiation and progression of cancer. Surveys cell interactions, including stem cells, reactive Stromal cells and membrane lipid rafts.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sam S. Chang, Michael S. Cookson, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a single, comprehensive reference source that incorporates all the latest information regarding prostate cancer. It serves as an easy reference source for researchers, clinicians, individuals in training, allied health professionals and medical students regarding prostate cancer by focusing on the controversial points of debate. New data regarding PSA screening, prostate cancer biomarkers, diagnostic evaluation techniques, surveillance protocols, and treatment interventions for localized and more advanced disease are discussed, and gaps in current knowledge and areas for future research are highlighted. Ongoing important clinical trials are also discussed. This text is organized around defined clinical scenarios which are encountered routinely by physicians who care for patients with prostate cancer. The case based format permits presentation of information of concise practical significance. The chapters run the gamut from screening controversies, utility of biomarkers, surveillance strategies, and innovative treatment. The text incorporates key educational concepts in the framework of patient situations with evidence-based discussions of screening, diagnosis, evaluation, and therapeutic management. It also features a comment section from leaders in the field that will be more "opinion-based" allowing the reader to get access to experienced physicians' thought processes and practice patterns. Prostate Cancer: Clinical Case Scenarios will quickly become the ready reference source for professionals and students in various fields with an interest in the management of a complex and multifaceted disease such as prostate cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Jack H. Mydlo and Ciril J. Godec.
    Contents:
    pt. I. Etiology, pathology, and tumor biology
    pt. II. Genetic susceptibility and hereditary predisposition, screening, and counseling
    pt. III. Epidemiology
    pt. IV. Prevention of prostate cancer
    pt. V. Conservative management
    pt. VI. Surgery
    pt. VII. Radiation therapy
    pt. VIII. Clinical dilemmas
    pt. IX. Advanced prostate cancer
    pt. X. Cryoblation, HIFU and focal therapy
    pt. XI. Governmental policies
    pt. XII. New horizons for prostate cancer.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Nelson N. Stone, E. David Crawford, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text provides a complete description of the newest technologies to diagnose and manage the most common prostate cancer diagnosed today: low risk disease. The book reviews new data about genetic markers, transperineal mapping biopsy and mpMRI, how to apply each of these technologies in patients with elevated PSA, when a prior prostate biopsy performed by the standard TRUS method is negative, and, in cases where low risk disease is already diagnosed, how to differentiate those men who might harbor more aggressive disease from those who do not. Over 75% of newly diagnosed prostate cancer meets the criteria for low risk disease which has created a dilemma for both patients and clinicians because of the inaccuracy of the standard TRUS biopsy method. Active surveillance programs have been initiated and are reviewed. How the new technologies impact surveillance programs are addressed. Clinical stage designation is updated and a new intra-prostatic staging system is discussed. Prostate biopsy techniques utilizing transrectal ultrasound, transperineal mapping, elastography and mpMRI are compared. Finally, utilization of these new technologies in the application of focal therapy is reviewed. The Prostate Cancer Dilemma will serve as a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons and researchers with an interest in early prostate cancer. Chapters are written by experts in their fields and include the most up-to-date scientific and clinical information as well as links to procedural video content.

    Contents:
    Part One: Diagnosis
    History of PSA, from Detection to Over Diagnosis
    Pathology of Prostate Cancer: What has Changed in the Last 30 years?- Clinical Risk Prediction Tools for Prostate Cancer: TMN to CAPRA-Should Risk be Re-defined?- TRUS Biopsy: Is There Still a Role?- Transperineal Biopsy Technique
    3D Biopsy: A New Method to Diagnose Prostate Cancer
    Elastography: Can it Improve Prostate Biopsy Results?- Multi parametric MRI of the Prostate as a Tool for Prostate Cancer Detection
    Genomic Markers
    Part Two: Treatment
    Current Status of Clinical Trials in Active Surveillance
    Focused targeted Therapy in Prostate Cancer
    Technologies and Methods in Primary Ablation with Focal Therapy
    Multi parametric MRI (mpMRI)-Guided Focal Therapy
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Jack Cuzick, Mangesh A. Thorat, editors.
    Summary: Prostate cancer is by far the most common cancer in men and the second leading cause of death due to cancer. It comprises a mixed group of tumours displaying varying clinical behaviour: while some have a very aggressive course, others are rather indolent. Prevention of prostate cancer and discrimination between aggressive and indolent forms are important clinical goals, and the acquisition of significant new evidence on means of achieving these aims makes this book particularly timely. A wide range of topics are covered by leading authorities in the field. The biology and natural history of prostate cancer are reviewed, and the role of lifestyle and dietary factors, assessed. Detailed attention is paid to risk prediction biomarkers and to the role of novel high-throughput nucleic acid-based technologies in improving risk prediction and thereby allowing tailored approaches to cancer prevention. Potential means of chemoprevention of prostate cancer are also reviewed in depth, covering the very positive new data on the impact of aspirin as well as evidence regarding 5-reductase inhibitors, DFMO, and lycopene. Guidance is provided on the differentiation of aggressive from indolent disease, and the policy and research implications of recent findings are examined. This book will be of interest to both clinicians and researchers.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sanchia S. Goonewardene, Raj Persad.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Temel Tirkes, editor.
    Summary: This book is a basic, practical guide to performing and interpreting state-of-the-art prostate MRI, utilizing the latest guidelines in the field. Prostate MRI has become one of the fastest growing examinations in the radiology practice, and this demand has continuously increased within the past decade. Since it is relatively new, MRI of the prostate is predominantly being performed at academic institutions, however there is a growing demand within the lower-tier health care institutions to offer this examination to their patients. This is an ideal guide for radiologists who want to enhance or initiate prostate MRI service for their referring clinicians and as a manual for technologists and those who are in training. Prostate cancer is the second leading cause of cancer death in men, exceeded only by lung cancer. The best predictor of disease outcome lies with correct diagnosis, which requires precise imaging and diagnostic procedures aided by prostate MRI. Urologists, medical oncologists and radiation oncologists all agree that multi-parametric prostate MRI is essential for evaluation of prostate cancer. However, the technical aspects of prostate MR imaging are not as straightforward as for the other imaging modalities and constantly evolving. Its small size presents a real challenge to the radiologist, who needs to do the T2 and diffusion weighted images and perform a dynamic contrast enhanced sequence correctly. These images may also need to be analyzed on an independent workstation. Due to the absence of a current reference manual, when a radiologist wants to establish a prostate imaging service, he/she needs to attend dedicated prostate MR workshops or dive into the literature search alone, only to get more confused about what to do and how to do it. With this book, expert authors were asked to give clear guidance to those who want to enhance or initiate their prostate imaging service. With this much-needed, concise, practical guidance, radiologists can perform and interpret multi-parametric prostate MRI in a standardized fashion, in concordance with PI-RADS v2.1 that can be applicable to all available hardware platforms (GE, Philips, Siemens, Toshiba). Additionally, they can perform post-processing for possible targeted biopsy and interpret post-therapy and PET studies. The book discusses imaging protocols (planning and prescription) and sequence parameters with representative images for each MRI sequence. This handbook-style practical manual can be used in the radiology reading room by those interpreting the MR exam as a reference as well as at the MRI scanner by the technologists as a guide. Coverage of basic prostate anatomy, pathology, Urologists point of view, MRI guided radiation treatment planning and molecular imaging is also included. Throughout the book, authors will discuss basics, pitfalls, and provide tips in image acquisition and interpretation, alongside several case examples.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Christopher R. Porter, Erika M. Wolff, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    History of Prostate Ultrasound
    Applied Anatomy of the Male Pelvis
    Basic Physics of Diagnostic Ultrasound
    Advanced Prostate Imaging: Correlating Prostate Anatomy with MRI and MRI/Ultrasound Fusion
    Prostate Ultrasound Artifacts and How to Fix Them
    Male Infertility And Prostate Ultrasound
    Application of Prostate Ultrasound for Benign Prostate Hyperplasia and Male Urinary Stress Incontinence
    Application of Prostate Ultrasound for Prostate Biopsy
    Prostate Ultrasound Complications and Patient Safety
    Imaging the Prostate with Quantitative Ultrasound: Implications for Guiding Biopsies, Targeting Focal Treatment, and Monitoring Therapy
    Prostate Elastography.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Maoqiang Wang, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a state-of-the-art review of the technical and clinical aspects of the arterial embolization procedures currently employed in treatment of prostate diseases. A particular focus is on artery embolization for benign prostate hyperplasia, whose efficacy is compared with transurethral resection and open prostatectomy. Additional chapters on application of PAE in the treatment of hematuria of prostatic origin and prostate malignant tumor are presented. Detailed information is provided on the full range of relevant topics, including prostatic artery anatomy, preoperative preparation, patient selection, embolization agents selection, and post embolization management. Complications and side-effects are also fully discussed. It will be a valuable reference for interventional radiologists and urological surgeons who perform the embolization procedures, as well as diagnostic radiologists and urological physicians interested in interventional procedures.

    Contents:
    6.2.1 Embolization: Management of Anastomoses or Collateral Vessels. Intro
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    Associate Editors
    Contributors
    1: Benign Prostate Hyperplasia
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Epidemiology
    1.3 Pathogenesis
    1.3.1 Age and Gonadal Hormone
    1.3.2 Inflammation
    1.4 Manifestation
    1.5 Diagnosis
    References
    2: The Treatment of Benign Prostate Hyperplasia
    2.1 Pharmacotherapy
    2.2 Surgical Therapy
    2.2.1 Open Surgery
    2.2.2 Transurethral Resection of Prostate
    2.3 Minimally Invasive Treatment
    2.3.1 Transurethral Microwave Treatment
    2.3.2 Transurethral Needle Ablation of the Prostate 2.3.3 Laser Treatments of the Prostate
    2.3.4 Intraprostatic Stents
    2.3.5 Intraprostatic Injections
    2.3.6 Prostatic Urethral Lift
    2.3.7 Aquablation
    2.3.8 Rezum
    2.3.9 Prostatic Artery Embolization
    References
    3: The History of Prostatic Arterial Embolization
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 History of Prostatic Arterial Embolization
    3.3 Prostatic Arteries: Imaging Anatomy
    3.4 PAE: Early Outcomes
    3.4.1 Technical Success
    3.4.2 Clinical Success
    3.4.2.1 PAE: Outcomes of the Single-Arm Non-randomized Control Study 3.4.2.2 PAE: Outcomes of the Randomized Controlled Trials
    3.4.2.3 PAE: Predictors for the Clinical Outcomes
    3.5 PAE: Complications
    3.5.1 Major Complications
    3.5.2 Minor Complications
    3.5.3 PAE: Radiation Injuries
    3.6 Conclusions
    References
    4: Prostatic Artery Anatomy
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Pelvic Arterial Anatomy
    4.3 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Imaging Evaluation
    4.4 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type I Pattern
    4.5 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type II Pattern
    4.6 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type III Pattern 4.7 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type IV Pattern
    4.8 Prostate Arterial Anatomy: Type V Pattern
    4.9 Prostate Arterial Anastomosis
    4.10 Summary
    References
    5: Pre-prostatic Arterial Embolization Preparation
    5.1 Pre-procedure Testing
    5.1.1 Laboratory Tests
    5.1.2 International Prostate Symptom Score
    5.1.3 Quality of Life
    5.1.4 International Index of Erectile Function short form:
    5.1.5 Postvoid Residual Urine Volume
    5.1.6 Peak/Maximum Urinary Flow Rate
    5.2 Pre-procedure Imaging
    5.2.1 Ultrasound 5.2.2 Pelvic CT and CT Angiography (CTA) Prior to PAE
    5.2.3 Pelvic MRA Prior to PAE
    5.2.4 Intra-Procedural Cone-Beam CT
    5.3 Indications and Contraindications
    5.3.1 Indications
    5.3.2 Contraindications
    5.4 Pre-procedure Preparation
    5.5 Selection of Embolic Agents
    5.5.1 Type of Embolic Agents
    5.5.2 Optimal Sizes of Embolic Agents
    5.5.3 Coil Embolization
    References
    6: The Procedure of Prostatic Arterial Embolization
    6.1 Angiography
    6.1.1 Arterial Access
    6.1.2 DSA Procedures
    6.1.3 Cone-Beam CT Prior to Embolization
    6.2 Embolization
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ari J. Isaacson, Sandeep Bagla, Mathew C. Raynor, Hyeon Yu, editors.
    Summary: This book comprehensively covers prostatic artery embolization (PAE) in interventional radiology (IR). PAE is a recently developed procedure primarily for the treatment of benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH). BPH is an extremely common problem, affecting the urination of about half of men over the age of 50. PAE is a minimally invasive IR procedure that improves urinary symptoms secondary to BPH and, unlike most available BPH treatments, carries very little risk of compromising sexual function. It should be noted, however, that PAE is known to be a very difficult procedure due to the variations in pelvic arterial anatomy and small diameter of the target vessels. Because of the inherent challenge, interventional radiologists need resources to learn how to perform PAE, so they can add this exciting new procedure to their practice. This comprehensive, yet compact, text covers everything from patient evaluation, through procedure, and finally how to deal with failure or repeat procedures. Expert authors who are responsible for more than a third of PAEs performed in the United States include best practices and detailed steps for performing PAE, with potential pitfalls and related issues considered. Readers should come away from reading the text feeling confident in being able to provide PAE to their patients, whether it be for BPH, hemorrhage, or hematuria. This is an ideal guide for interventional radiologists hoping to learn or improve their skills for PAE.

    Contents:
    Anticholinergics/M3 AntagonistsMechanism of Action; Summary of Evidence; Side Effects and Pharmacodynamics; Beta-3-Agonists; Mechanism of Action; Efficacy; Side Effects; Medication Combinations; Alpha-Blockers and 5[alpha]-Reductase Inhibitors; Combination of [alpha]-Adrenergic Blockers and Antimuscarinic Medication; References;
    Chapter 4: Indications for Surgical Management of Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Introduction; Transurethral Resection of the Prostate (TURP) (Fig. 4.1); Efficacy; Complications; Photoselective Vaporization of the Prostate (PVP) (Fig. 4.2); Efficacy; Complications Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: The Prostate and Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Normal Prostate Anatomy; Embryonic Development (Fig. 1.1); Relationships within the Pelvis (Fig. 1.2); Internal Prostate Anatomy (Fig. 1.3a, b); Normal Prostate Physiology; Function of the Prostate; Hormonal Control; Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Epidemiology; Pathophysiology; Clinical Features; References;
    Chapter 2: Diagnosis of Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Introduction; Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms (Table 2.1); History; Physical Exam; Objective Questionnaires Regarding BPH Symptoms In-Office Objective BPH StudiesPressure-Flow Studies; Cystourethroscopy; Imaging Studies; References;
    Chapter 3: Medical Management of Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia; Indications for Medical Management; Alpha-Adrenergic Receptor Blockers; Mechanism of Action; Nonspecific Versus Specific Alpha-Blockers; Summary of Evidence; Terazosin; Doxazosin; Alfuzosin; Tamsulosin; Silodosin; Side Effects; 5-Alpha-Reductase Inhibitors; Mechanism of Action; Summary of Evidence; Finasteride; Dutasteride; Side Effects; Phosphodiesterase-5 Inhibitors; Mechanism of Action; Summary of Evidence; Side Effects The Rezūm® System (NxThera Inc., Maple Grove, MN, USA) (Fig. 4.3)Efficacy; Complications; The UroLift® System (NeoTract, Pleasanton, CA, USA) (Fig. 4.4); Operative Technique; Efficacy; Complications; Surgical Treatment for Larger Prostates; Simple Prostatectomy; Open Prostatectomy; Robotic/Laparoscopic Prostatectomy; Efficacy; Complications; Holmium Laser Enucleation of the Prostate (HoLEP); Operative Technique; Efficacy; Complications; References;
    Chapter 5: Imaging of the Prostate; Imaging Overview; Ultrasound; Computed Tomography; Magnetic Resonance Imaging; References
    Chapter 6: Preclinical and Clinical Evidence for Prostatic Artery EmbolizationBackground; Preclinical Animal Studies; Clinical Evidence; Summary; Conclusion; Future Directions; References;
    Chapter 7: Arterial Anatomy for Prostatic Artery Embolization; Introduction; Internal Iliac Artery Anatomy; Prostatic Artery Origin Classification; Conclusion; References; Bibliography;
    Chapter 8: Patient Selection for Prostatic Artery Embolization; Introduction; Symptom Evaluation; Prostatic Medication History; Prostate Anatomy; Cystoscopy; Uroflowmetry Testing; Comorbid Conditions
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tommaso Cai, Truls E. Bjerklund Johansen, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction and aim of the book
    Epidemiology and microbiological considerations: what's new?.- The diagnostic approach to patient with prostatitis-like symptoms: what do we have to do?
    Classification of prostatitis: what is the clinical usefulness?
    Imaging studies: what is their role?
    Treatment of bacterial prostatitis: the pharmacologist's point of view
    Treatment of non-bacterial prostatitis: what's new?
    The role of phythoterapy in the management of prostatitis patients
    Management of infective complications following prostate biopsy
    The contribution of prostate infection and inflammation to BPH and cancer
    The role of STD pathogens in bacterial prostatitis patients
    Andrologic sequelae in prostatitis patients
    The role of chronic prostatitis in male infertility: is there a relationship?
    Thoughtless treatment of prostatitis is malpractice, sometimes even a forensic issue
    The prostatitis patient: Questions and Answers.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Asif Muneer, Ian Pearce, David Ralph, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction to Prosthetic Devices
    History of Prosthetic Surgery in Urology
    Infection and biofilms
    Patient selection and assessment
    Patient Consent for Surgery
    Theatre preparation and equipment
    Patient preparation for surgery
    Urinary Catheters, Drains and Stomas
    Ureteric Stents
    Prostatic Stents
    Testicular Prosthesis
    Surgery for female urinary incontinence
    Sacral neuromodulation
    The artificial urinary sphincter
    Male urethral slings
    Injectable agents in urology
    Penile reconstructive surgery using grafts
    Penile prosthesis surgery
    Complications of penile prosthesis surgery
    Future developments in prosthetic surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Vibhor R. Agrawal.
    Contents:
    Prosthetic and Orthotics
    Case Study
    Ankle Foot Orthosis
    Case Study
    Knee-Ankle-Foot Orthosis
    Case Study
    Spinal Orthosis
    Amputee
    Case Study
    Above Knee (Transfemoral) Amputee
    Case Study
    Below Knee (Transtibial) Amputee.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2016
  • Digital/Print
    by Howard B. Woolston, Ph.D.
    Digital Access Google Books 1921-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    O725 .U58
    1
  • Digital
    editor in chief Ruth A. Etzel, associate editor Sophie J. Balk
    Summary: Parents concerned about the effects of environmental hazards on their children's health will appreciate this accessible Q&A guide.

    Contents:
    Front Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Editors
    Contents
    Foreword
    Preface
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. A Healthy Family Begins Before the Baby Arrives
    Chapter 2. Feeding Your Baby
    Breastfeeding
    Bottle-feeding and Formula
    Chapter 3. Safe Drinking Water: It's More Complicated Than Buying a Filter
    Water Testing, Regulations, and Notices
    Babies and Drinking Water
    Drinking Water at Home and School: How Do We Know It Is Safe?
    Well Water
    Chapter 4. Healthy Eating: From Farm to Kitchen
    Antibiotics in Food
    Cooking and Food Storage
    Pesticides in Food Food and Cancer
    Arsenic in Food
    Lead in Food and Cookware
    Herbs and Supplements
    Chapter 5. Your Home: Keeping It Safe for Your Family
    Getting Rid of Pests Safely
    Arts and Crafts Are Safe, Aren't They?
    Renovating Your Home Safely
    Air: What You Need to Know to Breathe Easy
    Allergy and Asthma Triggers
    Air Cleaners
    Tobacco Smoke
    A Sea of Chemicals?
    Personal Care Products
    Specific Hazardous Substances
    Asbestos
    Carbon Monoxide
    Lead
    Mercury
    Nickel
    Radon
    Chapter 6. Technology: Friend or Foe? Chapter 7. Let's Go Outside! Playing It Safe in the Yard or on the Beach
    Decks and Wooden Structures
    Fun in the Sun
    Heat
    Sunscreen
    Playing in the Yard
    Chapter 8. What a Beautiful Day in the Neighborhood!
    Healthy Neighborhoods
    Air Quality
    Noise Pollution
    Landfills
    Hazardous Waste Sites
    Chapter 9. Oh, the Places They Go! All Around Town With Your Child
    Healthy Child Care
    School
    Around Town
    Chapter 10. Your Teenager: A Whole New World
    Chapter 11. Navigating Your Child's Health Care
    Blood and Other Testing for Environmental Toxicants Dental Issues
    X-rays
    Specific Health Conditions
    Asthma
    Cancer
    Developmental Disabilities
    Obesity
    Chapter 12. The Big Green Picture: Saving People and the Planet
    Appendix
    Resources
    Index
    About the Editors
    Back Cover
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Richard J. Giannone, Andrew B. Dykstra.
    Contents:
    1D4 : a versatile epitope tag for the purification and characterization of expressed membrane and soluble proteins / Laurie L. Molday and Robert S. Molday
    Affinity purification of heme-tagged proteins / Wesley B. Asher and Kara L. Bren
    Purification of a recombinant protein with cellulose-binding module 3 as the affinity tag / Dongmei Wang and Jiong Hong
    Purification of E. coli proteins using a self-cleaving chitin-binding affinity tag / Michael J. Coolbaugh and David W. Wood
    Simplified protein purification using an autoprocessing, inducible enzyme tag / Aimee Shen
    SUMO as a solubility tag and in vivo cleavage of SUMO fusion proteins with UlP1 / Dennis Kuo, Minghua Nie, and Albert J Courey
    Rescuing aggregation-prone proteins in Escherichia coli with a dual His6-MBP tag / Danielle Needle and David S. Waugh
    Expression, purification, and immobilization of recombinant tamavidin 2 fusion proteins Yashimitsu Takakura, Naomi Oka, and Masako Tsunashima
    Use of tandem affinity chromatography for purification of cannabinoid receptor CB2 / Silvia C. Locatelli-Hoops and Alexei A. Yeliseev
    Detection of protein-protein interactions using tandem affinity purification / Ian Goodfellow and Dalan Bailey
    An improved in vivo biotinylation strategy combined with FLAG and antibody based approaches for affinity purification of protein complexes in mouse embryonic stem cells / Francesco Faiolo [and three others]
    Purification of recombinant proteins with a multifunctional GFP tag / Takashi Murayama and Takuya Kobayashi
    Targeted purification of SnAvi-tagged proteins / Ursula Schäffer, Ralf Baumeister, and Ekkehard Schulze
    An efficient fluorescent protein-based multifunctional affinity purification approach in mammalian cells / Hanhui Ma [and three others]
    Bimolecular affinity purification : a variation of TAP with multiple applications / Petro Starokadomskyy and Ezra Burstein.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jian Zhang, Ruth Nussinov, editors.
    Summary: The book focuses on protein allostery in drug discovery. Allosteric regulation, ʹthe second secret of lifeʹ, fine-tunes virtually most biological processes and controls physiological activities. Allostery can both cause human diseases and contribute to development of new therapeutics. Allosteric drugs exhibit unparalleled advantages compared to conventional orthosteric drugs, rendering the development of allosteric modulators as an appealing strategy to improve selectivity and pharmacodynamic properties in drug leads. The Series delineates the immense significance of protein allostery-as demonstrated by recent advances in the repertoires of the concept, its mechanistic mechanisms, and networks, characteristics of allosteric proteins, modulators, and sites, development of computational and experimental methods to predict allosteric sites, small-molecule allosteric modulators of protein kinases and G-protein coupled receptors, engineering allostery, and the underlying role of allostery in precise medicine. Comprehensive understanding of protein allostery is expected to guide the rational design of allosteric drugs for the treatment of human diseases. The book would be useful for scientists and students in the field of protein science and Pharmacology etc. .

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Allostery in Drug Development
    Chapter 2. Dynamic Protein Allosteric Regulation and Disease
    Chapter 3. Protein Allostery in Rational Drug Design
    Chapter 4. Progress in Allosteric Database
    Chapter 5. Correlation between Allosteric and Orthosteric Sites
    Chapter 6. Characteristics of Allosteric Proteins, Sites and Modulators
    Chapter 7. Advances in the Computational Identification of Allosteric Sites and Pathways in Proteins
    Chapter 8. Advances in NMR Methods to Identify Allosteric Sites and Allosteric Ligands
    Chapter 9. Interrogating Regulatory Mechanisms in Signal-ling Proteins by Allosteric Inhibitors and Activators: A Dynamic View through the Lens of Residue Interaction Network
    Chapter 10. GPCR Allosteric Modulator Discovery
    Chapter 11. Allosteric Small-Molecule Serine/Threonine Kinase Inhibitors
    Chapter 12. Allosteric regulation of protein kinases downstream of PI3-kinase signaling. Chapter 13. Allosteric Modulators of Protein-Protein Interactions (PPIs)
    Chapter 14. Allosteric Modulation of Intrinsically Disordered Proteins
    Chapter 15. Engineering Allostery into Proteins.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by David Eliezer.
    Contents:
    Semisynthesis and enzymatic preparation of post-translationally modified α-Synuclein / Bruno Fauvet and Hilal A. Lashuel
    Isotope-labeled amyloids via synthesis, expression, and chemical ligation for use in FTIR, 2D IR, and NMR studies / Tianqi O. Zhang ... [et al.]
    Intermolecular paramagnetic relaxation enhancement (PRE) studies of transient complexes in intrinsically disordered proteins / Maria K. Janowska and Jean Baum
    Detection of helical intermediates during amyloid formation by intrinsically disordered polypeptides and proteins / Andisheh Abedini, Ping Cao, and Daniel P. Raleigh
    Fluorescence correlation spectroscopy : a tool to study protein oligomerization and aggregation in vitro and in vivo / Bankanidhi Sahoo, Kenneth W. Drombosky, and Ronald Wetzel
    Deep UV resonance raman spectroscopy for characterizing amyloid aggregation / Joseph D. Handen and Igor K. Lednev
    Analyzing tau aggregation with electron microscopy / Carol J. Huseby and Jeff Kuret
    Characterization of amyloid oligomers by electrospray ionization-ion mobility spectrometry-mass spectrometry (ESI-IMS-MS) / Charlotte A. Scarff, Alison E. Ashcroft, and Sheena E. Radford
    Formation and characterization of α-Synuclein oligomers / Wojciech Paslawski, Nikolai Lorenzen, and Daniel E. Otzen
    Fluorescence methods for unraveling oligomeric amyloid intermediates / Niels Zijlstra, Nathalie Schilderink, and Vinod Subramaniam
    Preparation of amyloid fibrils for magic-angle spinning solid-state NMR spectroscopy / Marcus D. Tuttle ... [et al.]
    Spin labeling and characterization of tau fibrils using electron paramagnetic resonance (EPR) / Virginia Meyer and Martin Margittai
    Preparation of crystalline samples of amyloid fibrils and oligomers / Asher Moshe, Meytal Landau, and David Eisenberg
    Quenched hydrogen exchange NMR of amyloid fibrils / Andrei T. Alexandrescu
    Studying the early stages of protein aggregation using replica exchange molecular dynamics simulations / Joan- Emma Shea and Zachary A. Levine
    Computational methods for structural and functional studies of Alzheimer's amyloid ion channels / Hyunbum Jang ... [et al.]
    Analyzing ensembles of amyloid proteins using Bayesian statistics / Thomas Gurry ... [et al.]
    In vitro studies of membrane permeability induced by amyloidogenic polypeptides using large unilamellar vesicles / Ping Cao and Daniel P. Raleigh
    Cell models to study cell-to-cell transmission of α-Synuclein / Eun-Jin Bae, He-Jin Lee, and Seung-Jae Lee
    Preparation of amyloid fibrils seeded from brain and meninges / Kathryn P. Scherpel ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Mike S. Lee and Qin C. Ji.
    Contents:
    Contemporary Protein Analysis by Ion Mobility Mass Spectrometry / Johannes PC Vissers, James I Langridge
    High-Resolution Accurate Mass Orbitrap and Its Application in Protein Therapeutics Bioanalysis / Hongxia Wang, Patrick Bennett
    Current Methods for the Characterization of Posttranslational Modifications in Therapeutic Proteins Using Orbitrap Mass Spectrometry / Zhiqi Hao, Qiuting Hong, Fan Zhang, Shiaw-Lin Wu, Patrick Bennett
    Macro- to Micromolecular Quantitation of Proteins and Peptides by Mass Spectrometry / Suma Ramagiri, Brigitte Simons, Laura Baker
    Peptide and Protein Bioanalysis Using Integrated Column-to-Source Technology for High-Flow Nanospray / Shane R Needham, Gary A Valaskovic
    Targeting the Right Protein Isoform: Mass Spectrometry-Based Proteomic Characterization of Alternative Splice Variants / Jiang Wu
    The Application of Immunoaffinity-Based Mass Spectrometry to Characterize Protein Biomarkers and Biotherapeutics / Bradley L Ackermann, Michael J Berna
    Semiquantification and Isotyping of Antidrug Antibodies by Immunocapture-LC/MS for Immunogenicity Assessment / Jianing Zeng, Hao Jiang, Linlin Luo
    Mass Spectrometry-Based Assay for High-Throughput and High-Sensitivity Biomarker Verification / Xuejiang Guo, Keqi Tang
    Monitoring Quality of Critical Reagents Used in Ligand Binding Assays with Liquid Chromatography Mass Spectrometry (LC-MS) / Brian Geist, Adrienne Clements-Egan, Tong-Yuan Yang
    Application of Liquid Chromatography-High Resolution Mass Spectrometry in the Quantification of Intact Proteins in Biological Fluids / Stanley (Weihua) Zhang, Jonathan Crowther, Wenying Jian
    LC-MS/MS Bioanalytical Method Development Strategy for Therapeutic Monoclonal Antibodies in Preclinical Studies / Hongyan Li, Timothy Heath, Christopher A James
    Generic Peptide Strategies for LC-MS/MS Bioanalysis of Human Monoclonal Antibody Drugs and Drug Candidates / Michael T Furlong
    Mass Spectrometry-Based Methodologies for Pharmacokinetic Characterization of Antibody Drug Conjugate Candidates During Drug Development / Yongjun Xue, Priya Sriraman, Matthew V Myers, Xiaomin Wang, Jian Chen, Brian Melo, Martha Vallejo, Stephen E Maxwell, Sekhar Surapaneni
    Sample Preparation Strategies for LC-MS Bioanalysis of Proteins / Long Yuan, Qin C Ji
    Characterization of Protein Therapeutics by Mass Spectrometry / Wei Wu, Hangtian Song, Thomas Slaney, Richard Ludwig, Li Tao, Tapan Das.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Print
    Fabio Bagnoli, Rino Rappuoli, editors.
    Contents:
    Envelope structures of gram-positive bacteria / Mithila Rajagopal and Suzanne Walker
    The canonical and accessory sec system of gram-positive bacteria / Irfan Prabudiansyah and Arnold J.M. Driessen
    Twin-arginine protein translocation / Vivianne J. Goosens and Jan Maarten van Dijl
    Membrane translocation and assembly of sugar polymer precursors / Véronique L. Taylors, Steven M. Huszczynski and Joseph S. Lam
    Predicting subcellular localization of proteins by bioinformatic algorithms / Henrik Nielsen
    Anchoring of LPXTG-like proteins to the gram-positive cell wall envelope / Sara D. Siegel, Melissa E. Reardon and Hung Ton-That
    Spatial organization of cell wall-anchored proteins at the surface of gram-positive bacteria / Shaynoor Dramsi and Hélène Bierne
    Pilus assembly in gram-positive bacteria / Werner Pansegrau and Fabio Bagnoli
    Type VII secretion systems in gram-positive bacteria / Daria Bottai, Matthias I. Gröschel and Roland Brosch
    Protein secretion in gram-positive bacteria: from multiple pathways to biotechnology / Jozef Anné, Anastassios Economou and Kristel Bernaerts
    Surface and exoproteomes of gram-positive pathogens for vaccine discovery / Massimiliano Biagini, Fabio Bagnoli and Nathalie Norais.
  • Digital
    edited by Anna S. Kashina.
    Contents:
    Protein arginylation: over 50 years of discovery / Anna S. Kashina
    Recollection of how we came across the protein modification with amino acids by aminoacyl trna-protein transferase / Hideko Kaji and Akira Kaji
    Arginyltransferase: a personal and historical perspective / Ricahrd L. Soffer
    Arginylation in a partially purified fraction of 150k x g supernatants of axoplasm and injured vertebrate nerves / Nicholas A. Ingoglia
    Preparation of ATE1 enzyme from native mammalian tissues / Anna S. Kashina
    Correlated measurement of endogenous ATE1 activity on native acceptor proteins in tissues and cultured cells to detect cellular aging / Hideko Kaji and Akira Kaji
    Assaying the posttranslational arginylation of proteins in cultured cells / Mauricio R. Galiano and Marta E. Hallak
    Assaying ATE1 activity in yeast by [beta]-Gal degradation / Anna S. Kashina
    Bacterial expression and purification of recombinant arginyltransferase (ATE1) and arg-tRNA synthetase (RRS) for arginylation assays / Junling Wang and Anna S. Kashina
    Assaying ATE1 activity in vitro/ Junling Wang and Anna S. Kashina
    High-throughput arginylation assay in microplate format / Sougata Sha, Junling Wang and Anna S. Kashina
    Assay of arginyltransferase activity by a fluorescent HPLC method / Koichi Takao
    Identification of arginylated proteins by mass spectrometry / Anna S. Kashina and Jon R. Yates III
    Analysis of arginylated peptides by subtractive edman degradation / Anna S. Kashina and Jon R. Yates III
    Transferase-mediated labeling of protein N-termini with click chemistry handles / Anne M. Wagner [and four others]
    Applying arginylation for bottom-up proteomics / H. Alexander Ebhardt
    Development of new tools for the studies of protein arginylation / Anna S. Kashina.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Aitziber L. Cortajarena, Tijana Z. Grove, editors.
    Contents:
    Protein design for nanostructural engineering: general aspects / Tijana Z. Grove, Aitziber L. Cortajarena
    Designed protein origami / Igor Drobnak, Ajasja Ljubetič Helena Gradišar, Tomaž Pisanski, Roman Jerala
    Two-dimensional peptide and protein assemblies / Elizabeth Magnotti, Vincent Conticello
    Designed repeat proteins as building blocks for nanofabrication / Sara H. Mejias, Antonio Aires, Pierre Couleaud, Aitziber L. Cortajarena
    Assembly, engineering and applications of virus-based protein nanoparticles / Mauricio G. Mateu
    Dynamic and active proteins: biomolecular motors in engineered nanostructures / Marisela V̌lez
    Natural composite systems for bioinspired materials / Joseph A. Frezzo, Jin Kim Montclare PhD
    Protein-based hydrogels for tissue engineering / Ashley C. Schloss, Danielle M. Williams, Lynne J. Regan
    Design of self-assembling protein-polymer conjugates / Nathan A. Carter, Xi Geng, Tijana Z. Grove
    Design of redox-active peptides: towards functional materials / Dayn Joseph Sommer, Rafael Alcala-Torano, Zahra Bahrami Dizicheh, Giovanna Ghirlanda
    S-layer-based nanocomposites for industrial applications / Johannes Raff, Sabine Matys, Matthias Suhr, Manja Vogel, Tobias Günther [and others]
    Protein design for nanostructural engineering: concluding remarks and future directions / Tijana Z. Grove, Aitziber L. Cortajarena.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Brendan P. Orner.
    Contents:
    Encapsulation of nanoparticles in virus protein shells / Irina B. Tsvetkova and Bogdan G. Dragnea
    Use of protein cages as a template for confined synthesis of inorganic and organic nanoparticles / Masaki Uchida [and three others]
    Ferritin encapsulation and templated synthesis of inorganic nanoparticles / Katherine W. Pulsipher and Ivan J. Dmochowski
    Determining the relaxivity values of protein cage-templated nanoparticles using magnetic resonance imaging / Barindra Sana and Sierin Lim
    Computationally assisted engineering of protein cages / Maziar S. Andrejani and Brendan P. Orner
    Recombinant expression and purification of "virus-like" bacterial encapsulin protein cages / W. Frederik Rurup, Jeroen J.L.M. Cornelissen, and Melisa S.T. Koay
    Production of bacterial microcompartments / Jonathan K. Lassila
    Detection of protein cage assembly with bisarsenic fluorescent probes / Thomas A. Cornell and Brendan P. Orner
    Determining the role of metal binding in protein cage assembly / Anne Grove, Ambuj K. Kushwaha, and Khoa H. Nguyen
    Differential scanning calorimetry to quantify the stability of protein cages / Yu Zhang and Maziar S. Ardejani
    Material properties of viral nanocages explored by atomic force microscopy / Mariska G.M. van Rosmalen, Wouter H. Roos, and Gijs J.L. Wuite
    Computational mechanics of viral capsids / Melissa G. Gibbons, Luigi E. Perotti, and William S. Klug.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Joaquim Ros.
    Contents:
    Reactive oxygen species signaling from the perspective of the stem cell / Saghi Ghaffari
    Analysis of protein carbonylation / Ashraf G. Madian, Fred E. Regnier, Ao Zeng
    Diversity of protein carbonylation pathways : direct oxidation, glycoxidation and modifications by lipid peroxidation products / Maria Fedorova
    Protein carbonylation by reactive lipids / Koji Uchida
    Mechanism and functions of protein decarbonylation / Yuichiro J. Suzuki
    Carbonylated proteins and their metabolic regulation: overview of mechanisms, target proteins and characterization using proteomic methods / Somaieh Afiuni-Zadeh, Timothy J. Griffin
    Oxidative stress and protein carbonylation in malaria / Maria Linares, Antonio Puyet, Amalia Dieza and Jose M. Bautista
    Protein carbonylation in brains of subjects with selected eurodegenerative disorders / Tanea T. Reed and D. Allan Butterfield
    Cigarette smoke-induced protein carbonylation: focus on recent human studies / Graziano Colombo, Maria Lisa Garavaglia, Aldo Milzani, Isabella Dalle-Donne
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and oxidative damage / Esther Barreiro
    Protein carbonylation in aging and senescence / Jeannette Kenig, Tobias Jung and Tilman Grune
    Adipose carbonylation and mitochondrial dysfunction / Amy K. Hauck, Dalay H. Olson, Joel S. Burrill and David A. Bernlohr
    Protein carbonylation in plants / Ian Max Miller, Jesper F. Havelund and Adelina Rogowska-Wrzesinska
    Specificity of protein carbonylation and its relevance in aging / Elisa Cabiscol, Jordi Tamarit, and Joaquim Ros.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Ke-li Han, Xin Zhang, Ming-jun Yang, editors.
    Summary: "This book discusses how biological molecules exert their function and regulate biological processes, with a clear focus on how conformational dynamics of proteins are critical in this respect. In the last decade, the advancements in computational biology, nuclear magnetic resonance including paramagnetic relaxation enhancement, and fluorescence-based ensemble/single-molecule techniques have shown that biological molecules (proteins, DNAs and RNAs) fluctuate under equilibrium conditions. The conformational and energetic spaces that these fluctuations explore likely contain active conformations that are critical for their function. More interestingly, these fluctuations can respond actively to external cues, which introduces layers of tight regulation on the biological processes that they dictate. A growing number of studies have suggested that conformational dynamics of proteins govern their role in regulating biological functions, examples of this regulation can be found in signal transduction, molecular recognition, apoptosis, protein / ion / other molecules translocation and gene expression"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Protein folding simulations by generalized-ensemble algorithms
    Application of Markov state models to simulate long timescale dynamics of biological macromolecules
    Understanding protein dynamics using conformational ensembles
    Generative models of conformational dynamics
    Generalized spring tensor models for protein fluctuation dynamics and conformational changes
    The joys and perils of flexible fitting
    Coarse-grained models of the proteins backbone conformational dynamics
    Simulating protein folding in different environmental conditions
    Simulating the peptide folding kinetic related spectra based on the Markov state model
    The dilemma of conformational dynamics in enzyme catalysis: perspectives from theory and experiment
    Exploiting intrinsic flexibility in drug design
    NMR and computational methods in the structural and dynamic characterization of ligand-receptor interactions
    Molecular dynamics simulation of membrane proteins
    Free-energy landscape of intrinsically disordered proteins investigated by all-atom multicanonical molecular dynamics
    Coordination and control inside simple biomolecular machines
    Multi-state targeting machinery govern the fidelity and efficiency of protein localization
    Molecular dynamics simulations of F1-ATPase
    Chemosensorial G-proteins-coupled receptors: a perspective from computational methods.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Anthony P. Nicholas, Sanjoy K. Bhattacharya, editors.
    Contents:
    Physiological pathways of PAD activity and citrullinated epitope generation
    from citrullination to specific immunity and disease in rheumatoid arthritis
    The role of citrullinated proteins in the pathophysiology of rheumatoid arthritis
    Protein citrullination: the link between rheumatoid arthritis and periodontitis?
    From genes and environment to anti-culture immunity in rheumatoid arthritis: The role of the lungs
    Neutrophils and their contribution to autoimmunity in rheumatoid arthritis
    Deimination in skin and regulation of PAD expression in keratinocytes
    Importance of citrullination on hair protein molecular assembly during trichocytic differentiation
    Deimination in the peripheral nervous system: A wallflower existence
    Deimination in multiple sclerosis and experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis
    Protein hypercitrullination in CNS demyelinating disease reversed by PAD inhibition
    Deimination in prion diseases
    Deimination in Alzheimer's disease
    Ongoing studies of deimination in neurodegenerative diseases using the F95 antibody
    The role of protein deimination in epigenetics
    Identifying citrullination sites by mass spectroscopy
    Homocitrulline\U+2014\an analogue and confounder related to citrulline
    Picking the PAD lock: Chemical and biological approaches to identify PAD substrates and inhibitors.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Valentin Köhler.
    Contents:
    De novo design of stable [alpha]-helices / Alexander Yakimov, Georgy Rychkov, and Michael Petukhov
    Design of monomeric water-soluble [Beta]-hairpin and [Beta]-sheet peptides/ M. Angeles Jiménez
    Combination of theoretical and experimental approaches for the design and study of fibril-forming peptides / Phanourios Tamamis ... [et al.]
    Posttranslational incorporation of noncanonical amino acids in the RNase S system by semisynthetic protein assembly / Maika Genz and Norbert Sträter
    Design, synthesis, and study of fluorinated proteins / Benjamin C. Buer and E. Neil G. Marsh
    High-quality combinatorial protein libraries using the binary patterning approach / Luke H. Bradley
    Methods for library-scale computational protein design / Lucas B. Johnson, Thaddaus R. Huber, and Christopher D. Snow
    Symmetric protein architecture in protein design : top-down symmetric deconstruction / Liam M. Longo and Michael Blaber
    Identification of protein scaffolds for enzyme design using scaffold selection / André C. Stiel, Kaspar Feldmeier, and Birte Höcker
    Computational design of novel enzymes without cofactors / Matthew D. Smith, Alexandre Zanghellini, and Daniela Grabs-Röthlisberger
    De novo design of peptide scaffolds as novel preorganized ligands for metal-ion coordination / Aimee J. Gamble and Anna F. A. Peacock
    Computational design of metalloproteins / Avanish S. Parmar, Douglas Pike, and Vikas Nanda
    Incorporation of modified and artificial cofactors into naturally occurring protein scaffolds / Koji Oohora and Takashi Hayashi
    Computational redesign of metalloenzymes for catalyzing new reactions / Per Jr. Greisen and Sagar D. Khare.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Nikolaos E. Labrou.
    Contents:
    Protein Purification: An Overview
    Establishment of a Design Space for Biopharmaceutical Purification Processes Using DoE
    High Throughput Process Development: I. Process Chromatography
    High Throughput Process Development: II. Membrane Chromatography
    Media Selection in Ion Exchange Chromatography in a Single Microplate
    High Throughput Screening of Dye-Ligands for Chromatography
    Measurement of Uptake Curves and Adsorption Isotherms by Automated Microscale Chromatography Pipette Tips
    Recovery of Recombinant Proteins from Plants Using Aqueous Two-Phase Partitioning Systems: An Outline
    Aqueous Two-Phase Systems Strategies for the Recovery of Proteins from Plants
    Aqueous Two Phase Assisted Precipitation of Proteins: A Platform for Isolation of Process Related Impurities from Therapeutic Proteins
    Simultaneous Purification and Refolding of Proteins by Affinity Precipitation and Macro-(Affinity Ligand) Facilitated Three Phase Partitioning (MLFTPP)
    Co-Expression and Co-Purification of Antigen-Antibody Complexes in Bacterial Cytoplasm and Periplasm
    Immunoglobulin Purification by Caprylic Acid
    Affinity Tags in Protein Purification and Peptide Enrichment: An Overview
    Expression and Purification of Large Active GST Fusion Enzymes
    Synthetic Ligand Affinity Chromatography. Purification of Human Serum Albumin and Related Fusion Proteins
    Zbasic
    A Purification Tag for Selective Ion-Exchange Recovery
    An Orthogonal Fusion Tag for Efficient Protein Purification
    Phage Display of Engineered Binding Proteins
    Biomimetic Affinity Ligands for Protein Purification
    Synthesis and Application of Dye-Ligand Affinity Adsorbents
    Peptide Affinity Chromatography Based on Combinatorial Strategies for Protein Purification
    Affinity Chromatography of Proteins on Monolithic Columns
    Sample Displacement Batch Chromatography of Proteins
    Analysis of Host-Cell Proteins in Biotherapeutic Proteins by LC/MS Approaches
    Preparation of Monolithic Affinity Media for Nano-Liquid Chromatography Applications
    Proteomic Analysis of Complex Protein Samples by MALDI TOF Mass Spectrometry
    Modern Bioanalysis of Proteins by Electrophoretic Techniques
    Protein Structure Validation and Analysis with X-Ray Crystallography
    Measuring Binding Constants of His-Tagged Proteins using Affinity Chromatography and Ni-NTA Immobilized Enzymes
    Stabilization of Therapeutic Proteins in Aqueous Solutions and Freeze-Dried Solids: An Overview
    Stabilization of Protein by Freeze-Drying in the Presence of Trehalose: A Case Study of Tubulin
    G Protein-Coupled Receptor Expression and Purification.- (Hyper)thermophilic Enzymes: Production and Purification
    Affinity Chromatography for Antibody Purification
    Screening and Purification of Recombinant Lignocellulolytic Enzymes
    Purification of PEGylated Proteins, with the Example of PEGylated lysozyme and PEGylated scFv
    One-Step Purification of Glutamate decarboxylase from E. coli Using Aqueous Two Phase System.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Dennis R. Livesay.
    Contents:
    Monitoring Side-Chain Dynamics of Proteins Using 2H Relaxation
    CPMG Relaxation Dispersion
    Confocal Single-Molecule FRET for Protein Conformational Dynamics
    Protein Structural Dynamics Revealed by Site-directed Spin Labeling and Multifrequency EPR
    Probing Backbone Dynamics With Hydrogen/Deuterium Exchange Mass Spectrometry
    Carbon-Deuterium Bonds as Non-perturbative Infrared Probes of Protein Dynamics, Electrostatics, Heterogeneity, and Folding
    Balancing Bond, Nonbond and G?-like Terms in Coarse Grain Simulations of Conformational Dynamics
    Tutorial on Building Markov State Models with MSMBuilder and Coarse-graining them with BACE
    Analysis of Protein Conformational Transitions Using Elastic Network Model
    Geometric Simulation of Flexible Motion in Proteins
    Principal Component Analysis: A Method for Determining the Essential Dynamics of Proteins
    A Case Study Comparing Quantitative Stability/Flexibility Relationships Across Five Metallo-?-Lactamases Highlighting Differences within NDM-1
    Towards Comprehensive Analysis of Protein Family Quantitative Stability/Flexibility Relationships using Homology Models
    Using the COREX/BEST Server to Model the Native State Ensemble
    Morphing Methods to Visualize Coarse-grained Protein Dynamics.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Claudio M. Gomes, Patricía F.N. Faísca.
    Summary: This snapshot volume is designed to provide a smooth entry into the field of protein folding. Presented in a concise manner, each section introduces key concepts while providing a brief overview of the relevant literature. Outlook subsections will pinpoint specific aspects related to emerging methodologies, concepts and trends.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Authors; 1 Protein Folding: An Introduction; 1 Protein Structure-How Is Structure Maintained?; 1.1 The Dawn of Protein Structural Biology; 1.2 The Universe of Protein Structures; 1.3 Physical Interactions Stabilising Proteins; 1.4 Protein Dynamics and Solvation; 2 Protein Folding-Why Is Structure Acquired?; 2.1 The Anfinsen Experiments; 2.2 The Thermodynamic Hypothesis; 2.3 Driving Forces for Protein Folding-Hydrophobic Effect and the Thermodynamics of Protein Folding; 3 Folding Kinetics and Mechanisms: How Is Structure Acquired? 3.1 Two-State Cooperativity in Protein Folding3.2 The Levinthal Paradox and the Timescale of Protein Folding; 3.3 Mechanisms of Protein Folding; 3.4 The Nucleation Condensation Mechanism of Protein Folding; 3.5 Phi-value Analysis and the Structure of the Folding Transition State; 3.6 The Energy Landscape and Folding Funnels; 3.7 The Importance of Native Geometry as a Determinant of Folding Rates; 3.8 The Folding Mechanism of Knotted Proteins; 4 Protein Misfolding: Why Proteins Misbehave?; 4.1 Protein Folding In Vivo; 4.2 Protein Misfolding and Aggregation; 4.3 Protein Misfolding Diseases 4.4 The Amyloid State4.5 Mechanism and Kinetics of Protein Aggregation; 4.6 Aggregation Propensity; 5 Methods for Protein Folding; 5.1 Biophysical Spectroscopies; 5.2 Computational Methods; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Jatinder Bhatia, Raanan Shamir, Yvan Vandenplas.
    Contents:
    Proteins, peptides and amino acids : role in infant nutrition / Nutten, S.
    Hydrolyzed proteins in allergy / Salvatore, S.; Vandenplas, Y.
    Infant formula with partially hydrolyzed proteins in functional gastrointestinal disorders / Vandenplas, Y.; Salvatore, S.
    Hydrolyzed proteins in preterm infants / Senterrre, T.; Rigo, J.
    Hydrolyzed formula for every infant? / Fleischer, D.M.; Venter, C.; Vandenplas, Y.
    The benefits of breast feeding / Shamir, R.
    Protein evolution of human milk / Thakkar, S.K.; Giuffrida, F.; Bertschy, E.; De Castro, A.; Destaillats, F.; Lee, L.Y.
    Metabolic programming : effects of early nutrition on growth, metabolism and body composition / Haschke, F.; Grathwohl, D. Haiden, N.
    Human milk : bioactive proteins/peptides and functional properties / Lönnerdal, B.L.
    Human milk for preterm infants and fortification / Bhatia, J.
    Protein needs of preterm infants : why are they so difficult to meet? / Ziegler, E.E.
    Optimizing early protein intake for long-term health of preterm infants / Singhal, A.
    Defining protein requirements of preterm infants by using metabolic studies in fetuses and preterm infants / van den Akker, C.H.P.; van Goudoever, J.B.
    Amino acid intake in preterm infants / Burattini, I.; Bellagamba, M.P.; D'Ascenzo, R.; Biagetti, C.; Carnielli, V.P.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Jinjiang Li, Mary E. Krause, Raymond Tu, editors.
    Summary: Proteins are exposed to various interfacial stresses during drug product development. They are subjected to air-liquid, liquid-solid, and, sometimes, liquid-liquid interfaces throughout the development cycle-from manufacturing of drug substances to storage and drug delivery. Unlike small molecule drugs, proteins are typically unstable at interfaces where, on adsorption, they often denature and form aggregates, resulting in loss of efficacy and potential immunogenicity. This book covers both the fundamental aspects of proteins at interfaces and the quantification of interfacial behaviors of proteins. Importantly, this book introduces the industrial aspects of protein instabilities at interfaces, including the processes that introduce new interfaces, evaluation of interfacial instabilities, and mitigation strategies. The audience that this book targets encompasses scientists in the pharmaceutical and biotech industry, as well as faculty and students from academia in the surface science, pharmaceutical, and medicinal chemistry areas. .

    Contents:
    1. Overview of the impact of protein interfacial instability on the development of biologic products
    2. Protein adsorption at a gas-aqueous interface
    3. Interfacial behaviors of proteins
    4. Interfacial stresses during drug substance purification processes
    5. Evaluation of interfacial stress during drug product development
    6.Relating interfacial shear and dilatations stress-es to protein aggregation in mAbs
    7. Analytical techniques for evaluating protein instability at interfaces
    8. Analysis of aggregates and particles
    9. Protein interfacial instability of mixing and lyophilization during drug product manufacturing process scale-up and tech transfer
    10. Excipients: Characterization, purpose, and selection
    11. Interfacial stress and proteins prepared in the solid state
    12. Interfaces in protein drug delivery: device concern
    13. Future perspectives. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Khalil Ahmed, Olaf-Georg Issinger, Ryszard Szyszka, editors
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    volume editor, Kevan M. Shokat.
    Contents:
    Catalytic mechanisms and regulation of protein kinases / Zhihong Wang and Philip A. Cole
    A structural atlas of kinases inhibited by clinically approved drugs / Qi Wang, Julie A. Zorn, and John Kuriyan
    Fragment-based approaches to the discovery of kinase inhibitors / Paul N. Mortenson, Valerio Berdini, and Marc O'Reilly
    Targeting protein kinases with selective and semi-promiscuous covalent inhibitors / Rand M. Miller and Jack Taunton
    The resistance tetrad: amino acid hotspots for kinome-wide exploitation of drug-resistant protein kinase alleles / Fiona P. Bailey, Veselin I. Andreev, and Patrick A. Eyers
    FLiK: a direct binding assay for the identification and kinetic characterization of stabilizers of inactive kinase conformations / Jeffrey R. Simar and Daniel Rauh
    Discovery of allosteric BCR-ABL inhibitors from phenotypic screen to clinical candidate / Nathanael S. Gray and Doriano Fabbro
    The logic and design of analog-sensitive kinases and their small molecule inhibitors / Michael S. Lopez, Joseph I. Kliegman, and Kevan M. Shokat.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Ayse Basak Engin, Atilla Engin, editors.
    Summary: "Protein phosphorylation via protein kinases is an inevitable process that alters physiological and pathological functions of the cells. Thus, protein kinases play key roles in the regulation of cell life or death decisions. Protein kinases are frequently a driving factor in a variety of human diseases including aging and cellular senescence, immune system and endothelial dysfunctions, cancers, insulin resistance, cholestasis and neurodegenerative diseases, as well as bacterial resistance in persistent infections. Recent developments in quantitative proteomics provide important opinions on kinase inhibitor selectivity and their modes of action in the biological context. Protein Kinase-mediated Decisions Between Life and Death aims to have the reader catch insights about up-to-date opinions on “Protein Kinases” related pathways that threaten human health and life"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Protein kinase-mediated decision between the life and death
    Aging and protein kinases
    The connection between cell fate and telomere
    Dark-side of exosomes
    Signal transduction in immune cells and protein kinases
    Role of protein kinase C in immune cell activation and its implication chemical-induced immunotoxicity
    Combined toxicity of metal nanoparticles: comparison of individual and mixture particles effect
    Protein kinases signaling in pancreatic beta-cells death and type diabetes
    Bile acid toxicity and protein kinases
    N-Methyl-D-aspartate receptor signaling-protein kinases crosstalk in cerebral ischemia
    Alzheimer’s disease and protein kinases
    Bacterial protein kinases
    Indoleamine 2,3-dioxygenase activity-induced acceleration of tumor growth, and protein kinases-related novel therapeutics regimens
    A crosstalk between dual-specific phosphatases and dual-specific protein kinases can be a potential therapeutic target for anti-cancer therapy
    Protein kinases in hematological disorders
    Metabolic stress and immunity: nutrient-sensing kinases and tryptophan metabolism.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pandjassarame Kangueane, Christina Nilofer.
    Summary: This book illustrates the importance and significance of the molecular (physical and chemical) and evolutionary (gene fusion) principles of protein-protein and domain-domain interactions towards the understanding of cell division, disease mechanism and target definition in drug discovery. It describes the complex issues associated with this phenomenon using cutting edge advancement in Bioinformatics and Bioinformation Discovery. The chapters provide current information pertaining to the types of protein-protein complexes (homodimers, heterodimers, multimer complexes) in context with various specific and sensitive biological functions. The significance of such complex formation in human biology in the light of molecular evolution is also highlighted using several examples. The chapters also describe recent advancements on the molecular principles of protein-protein interaction with reference to evolution towards target identification in drug discovery. Finally, the book also elucidates a comprehensive yet a representative description of a large number of challenges associated with the molecular interaction of proteins.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Protein-protein binding
    3. Low-resolution protein complexes
    4. Heterodimer protein complexes
    5. Homo multimer protein complexes
    6. Hetero multimer protein complexes
    7. Hot spots at the protein-protein interface
    8. Principles of protein-protein interaction
    Databases for protein-protein interaction
    10. Homodimer protein folding and binding
    11. Protein subunit-subunit to domain-domain interactions
    12. Domain-domain interactions
    13. Protein-protein interaction tools
    14. Protein-protein docking: Methods and tools
    15. HLA-peptide interaction to short peptide vaccine design
    16. Protein-protein interfaces and diseases
    17. Patented protein structural complexes in discovery platform
    18. Proteome-scale analysis of protein complexes
    19. Conclusions and challenges
    Useful formula.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Maria Sandkvist, Eric Cascales, Peter J. Christie.
    Summary: "Protein transport into and across membranes is a fundamental process in bacteria that touches upon and unites many areas of microbiology, including bacterial cell physiology, adhesion and motility, nutrient scavenging, intrabacterial signaling and social behavior, toxin deployment, interbacterial antagonism and collaboration, host invasion and disruption, and immune evasion. A broad repertoire of mechanisms and macromolecular machines are required to deliver protein substrates across bacterial cell membranes for intended effects. Some machines are common to most, if not all bacteria, whereas others are specific to Gram-negative or Gram-positive species or species with unique cell envelope properties such as members of Actinobacteria and Spirochetes. Protein Secretion in Bacteria, authored and edited by an international team of experts, draws together the many distinct functions and mechanisms involved in protein translocation in one concise tome. This comprehensive book presents updated information on all aspects of bacterial protein secretion encompassing: Individual secretory systems-Sec, Tat, and T1SS through the newly discovered T9SS Mechanisms, structures, and functions of bacterial secretion systems Lipoprotein sorting pathways, outer membrane vesicles, and the sortase system Structures and roles of surface organelles, including flagella, pili, and curli Emerging technologies and translational implications Protein Secretion in Bacteria serves as both an introductory guide for students and postdocs, and a ready reference for seasoned researchers whose work touches on protein export and secretion. This volume synthesizes the diversity of mechanisms of bacterial secretion across the microbial world into a digestible resource to stimulate new research, inspire continued identification and characterization of novel systems, and bring about new ways to manipulate these systems for biotechnological, preventative, and therapeutic applications"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2019
  • Digital
    Natalya Kurochkina.
    Summary: The volume covers the advances made by the most recent experimental and theoretical research in the structure of the most extensively studied main biological macromolecules - the proteins. Proteins are remarkably regular highly ordered biopolymers. Their precise organization allows living organisms to reliably perform complex functions. The book features an introduction into methods of protein structure determination, design, and modeling, and addresses the structural principles of fibrous and globular proteins such as enzymes, channels, signaling molecules and adaptors, and the relationships between primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary structure. The main focus is on determinants of protein conformation, canonical and noncanonical amino acids and polypeptides, conformational states and transitions, structure elements and arrangements, protein folds, helical assemblies, multiprotein complexes, structure and function relationships, the specificity of molecular recognition, ligand binding, and involvement in cellular processes. The book is a must read for scientists, engineers, teachers, undergraduate and graduate students, business professionals, and curious learners in the fields of Life Sciences and Biomedical Research. Prof. Natalya Kurochkina heads The School of Theoretical Modeling, Washington, DC, USA, teaches, and conducts research. She has PhD in Biophysics, from the Institute of Protein Research, Russian Academy of Sciences and worked as a postdoctoral fellow at the National Cancer Institute of the National Institute of Health. Her research focuses on principles of protein structure and protein conformation, and determinants of specificity of molecular recognition.

    Contents:
    Protein Structure
    Conformational transitions
    Allosteric regulation
    Protein channels
    Helical assemblies
    Multiprotein complexes
    Methods of structure determination
    Protein modeling
    References
    Dictionary.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Daisuke Kihara.
    Contents:
    Protein structure modeling with MODELLER / Benjamin Webb and Andrej Sali
    RaptorX server : a resource for template-based protein structure modeling / Morten Källberg ... [et al.]
    MULTICOM protein tertiary structure prediction system / Jilong Li ... [et al.]
    Modeling of protein side-chain conformations with RASP / Zhichao Miao, Yang Cao, and Taijiao Jiang
    Direct coupling analysis for protein contact prediction / Faruck Morcos ... [et al.]
    ITScorePro : an efficient scoring program for evaluating the energy scores of protein structures for structure prediction / Sheng-You Huang and Xiaoqin Zou
    Assessing the quality of modelled 3D protein structures using the ModFOLD server / Daniel Barry Roche, Maria Teresa Buenavista, and Liam James McGuffin
    3D-SURFER 2.0 : web platform for real-time search and characterization of protein surfaces / Yi Xiong ... [et al.]
    SPOT-Seq-RNA : predicting protein-RNA complex structure and RNA-binding function by fold recognition and binding affinity prediction / Yuedong Yang ... [et al.]
    POODLE : Tools Predicting Intrinsically Disordered Regions of Amino Acid Sequence / Kana Shimizu
    Prediction of intrinsic disorder in proteins using MFDp2 / Marcin J. Mizianty, Vladimir Uversky, and Lukasz Kurgan
    Modeling protein-protein complexes using the HADDOCK webserver "modeling protein complexes with HADDOCK" / Gydo C.P. van Zundert and Alexandre M.J.J. Bonvin
    Predicting the structure of protein-protein complexes using the swarmdock web server / Mieczyslaw Torchala and Paul A. Bates
    DOCK/PIERR : web server for structure prediction of Protein-protein complexes / Shruthi Viswanath, D.V.S. Ravikant, and Ron Elber
    Pairwise and multimeric protein-protein docking using the LZerD program Suite / Juan Esquivel-Rodriguez ... [et al.]
    Protocols for efficient simulations of long-time protein dynamics using coarse-grained CABS model / Michal Jamroz, Andrzej Kolinski, and Sebastian Kmiecik.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Thomas Böldicke, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I Methods of Structure Prediction
    Chapter 1 In Silico Prediction of Target-Inhibitor Interactions
    Part II Antibodies
    Chapter 2 Antibodies and Selection of Monoclonal Antibodies
    Chapter 3 Selection of Recombinant Human Antibodies
    Chapter 4 Selection of Recombinant Human Antibodies against Toxins and Viruses
    Chapter 5 Recent Advances with ER Targeted Intrabodies
    Chapter 6 Therapeutic Blocking Antibodies against Oncogenic Receptors and Growth Factors
    Chapter 7 Synthetic Cystine-Knot Miniproteins-Valuable Scaffolds for Polypeptide Engineering
    Part III Peptides, Small Molecules and Aptamers
    Chapter 8 Peptides and Peptide Analogs to Inhibit Protein
    Chapter 9 Allosteric Modulators of the Class A G Protein coupled Receptors
    Chapter 10 Phosphatases: Their Roles in Cancer and their Chemical Modulators
    Chapter 11 Selection and Application of Aptamers and Intramers
    Part IV Angiogenesis Inhibitors
    Chapter 12 Inhibitors of Angiogenesis.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Tristan Vaughan, Jane Osbourn, and Bahija Jallal.
    Summary: In this practice-oriented two volume handbook, professionals from some of the largest biopharmaceutical companies and top academic researchers address the key concepts and challenges in the development of protein pharmaceuticals for medicinal chemists and drug developers of all trades. Following an introduction tracing the rapid development of the protein therapeutics market over the last decade, all currently used therapeutic protein scaffolds are surveyed, from human and non-human antibodies to antibody mimetics, bispecific antibodies and antibody-drug conjugates. This ready reference then goes on to review other key aspects such as pharmacokinetics, safety and immunogenicity, manufacture, formulation and delivery. The handbook then takes a look at current key clinical applications for protein therapeutics, from respiratory and inflammation to oncology and immune-oncology, infectious diseases and rescue therapy. Finally, several exciting prospects for the future of protein therapeutics are highlighted and discussed.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    André L.S. Santos, Marta H. Branquinha, Claudia M. d'Avila-Levy, Lucimar F. Kneipp, Cátia L. Sodré, editors.
    Summary: This book contains a collection of critical reviews on the expression of biologically functional proteins in Leishmania and Trypanosoma, which was written by renowned researchers on this field. Species belonging to these trypanosomatids genera are etiological agents of leishmaniasis, Chagas' disease and sleeping sickness that are extremely debilitating human infection diseases, which remain a major health problem especially in countries from Latin America, Africa and Middle East. Substantiating the problem, the currently accepted drugs for these diseases are quite unsatisfying due to their low efficacy and high toxicity. In order to solve these real problems, several research groups around the world have become involved in the study and identification of novel potential targets in the trypanosomatid cell. Since proteins are key macromolecules involved in crucial metabolic processes of all living cells, studies have focused on the expression of specific proteins produced by Leishmania and Trypanosoma by means of different biochemical, molecular and proteomic approaches in order to explore them as targets for understanding the parasite life cycle and developing new strategies against trypanosomiasis. With these proposals in mind, the book "Proteins and Proteome of Leishmania and Trypanosoma" encompasses (i) an integrated view about the biochemistry of parasites belonging to the Leishmania and Trypanosoma genera; (ii) an updated review on the expression of biologically relevant proteins by human pathogenic trypanosomatids and their possible role in the interaction with host cells/molecules as well as a target for development of both alternative chemotherapies and vaccine; and (iii) several pictures, diagrams and tables that can be used to illustrate both undergraduate and postgraduate teaching as well as scientific lectures, being a useful resource for students and researchers.

    Contents:
    Biology of Human Pathogenic Trypanosomatids: Epidemiology, Lifecycle and Ultrastructure
    Selection of Molecular Targets for Drug Development against Trypanosomatids
    A2 and other visceralizing proteins of Leishmania: role in pathogenesis and application for vaccine development
    Arginase in Leishmania
    The heat shock proteins of Trypanosoma cruzi
    The Gp82 Surface Molecule of Trypanosoma cruzi Metacyclic Forms
    The Gp85 Surface Glycoproteins from Trypanosoma cruzi
    Trypanosoma cruzi Trans-Sialidase: Structural Features and Biological Implications
    Surface Topology Evolution of Trypanosoma Trans-Sialidase
    Ecto-Nucleotidases and Ecto-Phosphatases from Leishmania and Trypanosoma Parasites
    Gp63 Function in the Interaction of Trypanosomatids with the Invertebrate Host: Facts and Prospects
    Highlights on Trypanosomatid Aminoacyl-tRNA Synthesis
    The Expected Outcome of the Trypanosoma cruzi Proteomic Map: a Review of its Potential Biological Applications for Drug Target Discovery
    Proteomics advances in the study of Leishmania parasites and leishmaniasis
    Towards the Phosphoproteome of Trypanosomatids.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Ákos Végvári, editor.
    Contents:
    Proteogenomic tools and approaches to explore protein coding landscapes of eukaryotic genomes / Dhirendra Kumar, Debasis Dash
    Next generation sequencing data and proteogenomics / Kelly V. Ruggles, David Feny̲
    Proteogenomics: key driver for clinical discovery and personalized medicine / Ruggero Barbieri, Victor Guryev, Corry-Anke Brandsma, Frank Suits, Rainer Bischoff [and others]
    Identification of small novel coding sequences, a proteogenomics endeavor / Volodimir Olexiouk, Gerben Menschaert
    Using proteomics bioinformatics tools and resources in proteogenomic studies / Marc Vaudel, Harald Barsnes, Helge Ræder, Frode S. Berven
    Mutant proteogenomics / Ákos Végvári
    Proteogenomic analysis of single amino acid polymorphisms in cancer research / Alba Garin-Muga, Fernando J. Corrales, Victor Segura
    Developments for personalized medicine of lung cancer subtypes: mass spectrometry-based clinical proteogenomic analysis of oncogenic mutations / Toshihide Nishimura, Haruhiko Nakamura
    Proteogenomics for the study of gastrointestinal stromal tumors / Tadashi Kondo
    Proteogenomics for the comprehensive analysis of human cellular and serum antibody repertoires / Paula Díez, Manuel Fuentes
    Antibody-based proteomics / Christer Wingren.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Paul C. Guest, editor.
    Summary: Due to continuous technical developments and new insights into the high complexity of neurological diseases, there is an increasing need for the application of proteomic technologies which can yield potential biomarker readouts for improved clinical management as well as for the development of new drugs by struggling pharmaceutical companies. This book describes the step-by-step use of proteomic methods such as two-dimensional gel electrophoresis, multiplex immunoassay, liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LC-MS) and selective reaction monitoring MS, to increase our understanding of these diseases, with the ultimate aim of improving patient care. The volume will be of high interest to clinical scientists, physicians and pharmaceutical company scientists as it gives insights into the latest technologies enabling the revolution of personalized medicine. It is of direct interest to both technical and bench biomarker scientists as it gives step by step instructions on how to carry out each of the protocols. It is also of interest to researchers as each technique will be presented in the context of a specific neurological disorder, including Alzheimer's disease, multiple sclerosis, autism spectrum disorders, schizophrenia, major depressive disorder and bipolar disorder. Finally, it will also highlight the future research efforts in this field, which are endeavoring to convert proteomic platforms to the form of hand held devices which can be used in a point of care setting and return diagnostic results within the timeframe of a visit to the general practitioner.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Proteomic studies in psychiatric disease and neurological disorders
    Part 1: REVIEWS
    Application of proteomic techniques for improved stratification and treatment of schizophrenia patients
    Multiplexing biomarker methods, proteomics and considerations for Alzheimer's disease
    What have proteomic studies taught us about novel drug targets in autism?
    Application of proteomic approaches to accelerate drug development for psychiatric disorders
    Proteomic biomarker identification in cerebrospinal fluid for leptomeningeal metastases with neurological complications
    Connecting brain proteomics with behavioural neuroscience in translational animal models of neuropsychiatric disorders
    LC-MSE for qualitative and quantitative proteomicstudies of psychiatric disorders
    The utility of multiplex assays for identification of proteomic signatures in psychiatry
    Part 2: PROTOCOLS
    Blood sampling and preparation procedures for proteomic biomarker studies of psychiatric disorders
    Multiplex immunoassay profiling of serum in psychiatric disorders
    Sequential immunopreciptation of secretory vesicle proteins from biosynthetically-labelled cells
    2d gel electrophoresis of insulin secretory granule proteins from biosynthetically-labelled pancreatic islets
    Two-dimensional gel electrophoresis: a reference protocol
    A two-dimensional difference gel electrophoresis (2D-DIGE) protocol for studies of neural precursor cells
    Identifying biomarker candidates in the blood plasma or serum proteome
    Selective reaction monitoring mass spectrometry for quantitation of glycolytic enzymes in post-mortem brain samples
    A selected reaction monitoring mass spectrometry protocol for validation of proteomic biomarker candidates in studies of psychiatric disorders
    Application of iTRAQ shotgun proteomics for measurement of brain proteins in studies of psychiatric disorders
    Co-immunoprecipitation for deciphering protein interactomes
    Sequential co-immunopreciptation and immunoblot approach to determine oligomerisation of G-protein coupled receptors
    A protocol for producing the maternal low protein rat model: a tool for pre-clinical proteomic studies
    A clinical study protocol to identify serum biomarkers predictive of response to antipsychotics in schizophrenia patients
    Generation of the acute phencyclidine rat model for proteomic studies of schizophrenia A protocol for generation of a corticosterone model of psychiatric disorders
    MK-801-treated oligodendrocytes as a cellular model to study schizophrenia
    Combining patient-reprogrammed neural cells and proteomics as a model to study psychiatric disorders
    SILAC mass spectrometry profiling: a psychiatric disorder perspective
    Preparation of peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) as a model for proteomic studies psychiatric disorders
    Proteomic profiling of skin fibroblasts as a model of schizophrenia Proteomic profiling of the pituitary gland in studies of psychiatric disorders
    Development of an assay for measuring proprotein-conversion activity on a multiplex magnetic bead-based array platform
    Phenotyping multiple subsets of immune cells in situ in formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded tissue sections
    Lab-on-a-chip proteomic assays for psychiatric disorders
    Development of a user-friendly app for testing blood coagulation status in schizophrenia patients
    Part 3:FUTURE PERSPECTIVES
    Proteomic approaches to enable point-of-care testing and personalized medicine for psychiatric disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Anton Posch.
    Contents:
    Mechanical/physical methods of cell distribution and tissue homogenization / Stanley Goldberg
    Sample preservation through heat stabilization of proteins : principles and examples / Mats Borén
    Isolating peripheral lymphocytes by density gradient centrifugation and magnetic cell sorting / Frederic Brosseron, Katrin Marcus, and Caroline May
    Investigating the adipose tissue secretome : a protocol to generate high-quality samples appropriate for comprehensive proteomic profiling / Simon Göddeke, Jorg Kotzka, and Stefan Lehr
    Methods for proteomics-based analysis of the human muscle secretome using an in vitro exercise model / Mika Scheler ... [et al.]
    Urinary pellet sample preparation for shotgun proteomic analysis of microbial infection and host-pathogen interactions / Yanbao Yu and Rembert Pieper
    Protocol for the parallel isolation of intact mitochondria from rat liver, kidney, heart, and brain / Sabine Schulz ... [et al.]
    Isolation of mitochondria from cultured cells and liver tissue biopsies for molecular and biochemical analyses / Sabine Schmitt ... [et al.]
    Dynamic range compression with ProteoMiner : principles and examples / Lei Li
    Qualitative and quantitative proteomic analysis of formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue / Omid Azimzadeh, Michael J. Atkinson, and Soile Tapio
    Full-length protein extraction protocols and gel-based downstream applications in formalin-fixed tissue proteomics / Alessandro Tanca, Sergio Uzzau, and Maria Filippa Addis
    Enrichment of low-abundant protein targets by immunoprecipitation upstream of mass spectrometry / Barbara Kaboord ... [et al.]
    Principles of protein labeling techniques / Christian Obermaier, Anja Griebel, and Reiner Westermeier
    Isolation of extracellular vesicles for proteomic profiling / Dong-Sic Choi and Yong Song Gho
    Protocol for exosome isolation and characterization : evaluation of ultracentrifugation, density-gradient separation, and immunoaffinity capture methods / David W. Greening ... [et al.]
    Chloroplast isolation and affinity chromatography for enrichment of low-abundant proteins in complex proteomes / Roman G. Bayer, Simon Stael, and Markus Teige
    Depletion of RuBisCO protein using the protamine sulfate precipitation method / Ravi Gupta and Sun Tae Kim
    Step-by-step preparation of proteins for mass spectrometric analysis / Thomas Franz and Xinping Li
    Identification of protein N-Termini using TMPP or dimethyl labeling and mass spectrometry / Jingjing Deng ... [et al.]
    Optimization of cell lysis and protein digestion protocols for protein analysis by LC-MS/MS / Dominic Winter, Alireza Dehghani, and Hanno Steen
    Comprehensive protocol to simultaneously study protein phosphorylation, acetylation, and n-linked sialylated glycosylation / Marcella Nunes Melo-Braga ... [et al.]
    Protein profiling and phosphoprotein analysis by isoelectric focusing / Giuseppina Maccarrone and Michaela D. Filiou
    Principles and examples of gel-based approaches for phosphoprotein analysis / Birgit Steinberger and Corina Mayrhofer
    Neutral phosphate-affinity SDS-PAGE system for profiling of protein phosphorylation / Emiko Kinoshita-Kikuta, Eiji Kinoshita, and Tohru Koike
    Enrichment and identification of bacterial glycopeptides by mass spectrometry / Nichollas E. Scott and Stuart J. Cordwell
    In-gel peptide IEF sample preparation for LC/MS analysis / Tom Berkelman, Sricharan Bandhakavi, and Aran Paulus
    Western blotting using in-gel protein labeling as a normalization control : stain-free technology / Jennifer E. Gilda and Aldrin V. Gomes
    2-D western blotting for evaluation of antibodies developed for detection of host cell protein / Tom Berkelman, Adriana Harbers, and Sricharan Bandhakavi
    Free llow electrophoresis for separation of native membrane protein complexes / Lutz Andreas Eichacker ... [et al.]
    Three-dimensional electrophoresis for quantitative profiling of complex proteomes / Sergio Mauro ... [et al.]
    Bead-based multiplex sandwich immunoassay to assess the abundance and posttranslational modification state of [beta]-catenin / Nicola Groll ... [et al.]
    Identification of SUMO E3 ligase-specific substrates using the huprot human proteome microarray / Eric Cox ... [et al.]
    Amyloid-binding proteins : affinity-based separation, proteomic identification, and optical biosensor validation / Alexei Medvedev ... [et al.]
    Proteomic profiling by nanomaterials-based matrix- assisted laser desorption/ionization mass spectrometry for high-resolution data and novel protein information directly from biological samples / Suresh Kumar Kailasa and Hui-Fen Wu.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    volume editor, Daniel Martins-de-Souza.
    Contents:
    Proteomic characterization of the brain and cerebrospinal fluid of schizophrenia patients / Caf-Mendes, C.C.; Gattaz, W.F.; Schmitt, A.; Britto, L.R.G.; Martins-de-Souza, D
    Peripheral biomarker candidates in schizophrenia / Thome, J.; Bratek, A.; Krysta, K
    Schizophrenia : blood-serum-plasma metabolomics / Lista, S.; Giegling, I.; Rujescu, D
    Proteomic and metabolomic evidence for glial alterations in schizophrenia / Beasley, C.L.; Barakauskas, V.E
    Insights from proteomic studies on schizophrenia preclinical models : what can we learn for drug discovery? / Farrelly, L.A.; Fcking, M.; Cotter, D.R
    Metabolomics to study psychotic disorders and their metabolic comorbidities / Oresi, M
    Peripheral biomarkers for depression by plasma and serum proteomics / Domenici, E
    Proteomics of preclinical models of depression / Carboni, L
    Antidepressant response metabonomics / Qin, X.; Gao, X.; Qiao, Y.; Zhou, Y.; Tian, J.; Li, Z
    Proteomics and metabolomics of bipolar disorder / Sussulini, A
    Use of metabolomics and proteomics to reveal pathophysiological pathways in anxiety disorders / Altmaier, E.; Emeny, R.T.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Arun K. Shukla.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Andre Martinho de Almeida, Ingrid Eckersall, Ingrid Miller, Editors.
    Summary: Proteomics, like other post-genomics tools, has been growing at a rapid pace and has important applications in numerous fields of science. While its use in animal and veterinary sciences is still limited, there have been considerable advances in this field in recent years, in areas as diverse as physiology, nutrition and food of animal origin processing. This is mainly as a consequence of a wider availability and better understanding of proteomics methodologies by animal and veterinary researchers. This book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the-art account of the status of farm-animal proteomics research, focusing on the principles behind proteomics methodologies and its specific applications and offering clear example.

    Contents:
    Proteomics in Domestic Animals on a Farm to Systems Biology perspective: introductory note
    Considerations for farm animal proteomics experiments: an introductory view gel based versus non-gel based approaches
    Quantitative Gel electrophoresis
    Sample preparation for 2DE using samples of animal-origin
    Gel-free Proteomics
    Proteomic research in farm animal serum and plasma
    Proteomic Research in Urine and Other Fluids
    Colostrum proteomics research: a complex fluid with multiple physiological functions
    PROTEOMICS IN MILK AND DAIRY PRODUCTS
    Proteomics in skeletal muscle research
    Proteomics and the characterization of fatty liver metabolism in early lactation dairy cows
    Proteomics Research in the adipose tissue
    Proteomics and mammary gland research in dairy species
    Proteomics in wool and fibre research
    Proteomics of meat products
    Proteomics in Fish and Aquaculture research
    The use of proteomics to study biomarkers of stress and welfare in farm animals
    Bioinformatics Support for Farm Animal Proteomics
    Peptidomics on Farm Animal Research
    Studying the animal transcriptome: state of the art and challenges in the context of Animal and Veterinary Sciences
    NMR Metabolomics pari passu with Proteomics: two relevant tools for animal sciences combined
    Omics and Systems Biology Integration of Production and Omics data in Systems Biology
    CONCLUSION: Proteomics in Domestic Animals on a Farm to Systems Biology perspective: final remarks and future prospects.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Rosa Barrio, James D. Sutherland, Manuel S. Rodriguez, editors.
    Summary: This book, written by members of the European network PROTEOSTASIS, provides an up-to-date review of the research regarding protein homeostasis in health and disease. With new discoveries contributing to the increasing complexity of this topic, the book offers a detailed overview of the pathways regulating protein homeostasis, including autophagy and the ubiquitin protein family. Following a basic introduction, it explains how defects in protein homeostasis contribute to numerous pathologies, including cancer, neurodegeneration, inflammation and a number of rare diseases. In addition, it discusses, the role of protein homeostasis in cellular development and physiology. Highlighting the latest research in the field of protein homeostasis and its implications for various clinically relevant diseases, the book appeals to researchers and clinicians, while also offering a reference guide for scholars who are new to the field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Part I: Cancer
    Chapter 1: Ubiquitin-Regulated Cell Proliferation and Cancer
    1.1 Introduction to Cell Cycle Regulation
    1.1.1 Regulation of CDK-Cyclin Activity by the UPS
    1.1.2 SCF in Cell Cycle Control
    1.1.3 SCF in DNA Damage
    1.1.4 APC/C and the Regulation of Mitosis
    1.2 Non-proteolytic Protein Ubiquitination in the Control of Cell Cycle Progression
    1.2.1 Cell Signaling and Non-proteolytic Protein Ubiquitination in G1
    1.2.2 Non-proteolytic Protein Ubiquitination During G1/S to G2 Transition 2.4.1.1 Ubiquitin E1 Inhibitors
    2.4.1.2 Nedd8 E1 Inhibitors
    2.4.1.3 SUMO E1 Inhibitors
    2.4.2 E2 Inhibitors
    2.4.3 E3 Inhibitors
    2.4.3.1 MDM2 Inhibitors
    2.4.3.2 IAP Inhibitors
    2.5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: The Proteasome System in Health and Disease
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 20S Proteasomes: Structure and Regulation
    3.2.1 Alternative Composition of the 20S Proteasome
    3.2.2 Expression and Assembly of the 20S Proteasome
    3.2.3 Activation of the 20S Proteasome
    3.2.4 Posttranslational Modifications (PTMs)
    3.2.5 Localization 3.4 Proteasomes in Diseased States
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Saizar, Pedro.
    Contents:
    Contents
    t. 2. Dientes artificiales. Materiales de base. Diagnóstico. Preparación quirúrgica. Prótesis inmediata. Reparaciones. Organismo y prótesis. Historia.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    S651 .S15 1938
    1
  • Digital
    Guillem Pons-Lladó, editor.
    Contents:
    1. MR sequences for cardiovascular applications and planning of studies
    2. Study protocol for Ischemic Heart Disease
    3. Study protocol for Cardiomyopathies
    4. Study protocol for Pericardial Diseases
    5. Study protocol for Cardiac Masses and Tumors
    6. Study protocol for Great Vessels
    7. Study protocol for Valvular Heart Disease
    8. Study protocol for Congenital Heart Disease
    9. Protocols for the practice of cardiac studies by Computed Tomography
    10. Post-processing and analysis of Cardiac CT studies.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by John T. Queenan, Catherine Y. Spong, Charles J. Lockwood.
    Summary: "The current acceleration in medical discoveries parallels Moore's law for computer chips. In the 1950's medical knowledge doubled every 50 years, by the 1980's it doubled every 7 years and now medical knowledge is estimated to double about every two months (1). How can busy obstetricians keep pace? Through 7 editions Protocols for High-Risk Pregnancies has helped address this exact challenge. Providing just-in-time content, its focus on protocols and guidelines helps organize medical thinking, avoid heuristic errors of omission and commission and optimize maternal and fetal outcomes"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Concerns in Pregnancy. Alcohol Use in Pregnancy and Lactation / Ruta M Nonacs
    Smoking, Vaping, and Nicotine Exposure / John Byrne, George Saade
    Opioid Use, Misuse, and Addiction in Pregnancy and Postpartum / Mishka Terplan
    Depression / Kimberly Yonkers
    Antenatal Testing. Prenatal Testing for Chromosomal Abnormalities / Mary E Norton
    Fetal Echocardiography / Joshua A Copel
    Clinical Use of Doppler / Henry L Galan
    Antepartum Testing / Michael P Nageotte
    Fetal Blood Sampling and Transfusion / Patricia Santiago-Munoz
    Preconception Genetic Screening / Lauren Sayres, Jeffrey A Kuller
    Maternal Disease. Maternal Anemia / Elaine Duryea
    Hemoglobinopathies in Pregnancy / Bradley Sipe, Judette Louis
    Fetal and Neonatal Alloimmune Thrombocytopenia / Russell Miller, Richard Berkowitz
    Rheumatological Disorders / Lisa R Sammaritano, Bonnie L Bermas
    Antiphospholipid Syndrome / Robert M Silver
    Inherited Thrombophilias / Andra H James, Jerome J Federspiel
    Valvular Heart Disease in Pregnancy / Blake Zwerling, Afshan B Hameed
    Peripartum Cardiomyopathy / Sarah Rae Easter, Carolyn M Zelop
    Thromboembolism / Michael J Paidas
    Renal Disease / Shivani Patel
    Obesity / Patrick S Ramsey
    Diabetes Mellitus / Mark B Landon, Steven G Gabbe
    Thyroid Disorders / Elizabeth O Buschur, Stephen F Thung
    Hepatitis in Pregnancy / Andrew Myers, Asa Oxner, John Sinnott, Christian Brechot
    Asthma / Michael Schatz
    Epilepsy / Thomas McElrath
    Chronic Hypertension / Michal Fishel Bartal, Baha M Sibai
    Cytomegalovirus, Genital Herpes, Rubella, and Toxoplasmosis / Kerry E Drury, Brenna L Hughes
    Syphilis / Emily H Adhikari
    Vector-Borne Diseases in Pregnancy / Karin Nielsen-Saines, Tara Kerin
    Influenza / Amanda C Zofkie, Vanessa Rogers
    Malaria / Blair J Wylie
    Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection / Emily H Adhikari
    Parvovirus B19 / Kathy C Matthews, Emilie L Vander Haar, Laura E Riley
    Group B Streptococcus / Caitlin A MacGregor, Mara J Dinsmoor
    Biliary, Liver, and Pancreatic Disease / Vic Velanovich, Elizabeth Hoover, Stephanie Ros
    Obstetric Problems. Cervical Insufficiency / Rupsa C Boelig, Vincenzo Berghella
    Nausea and Vomiting / Jared T Roeckner, Haywood L Brown
    Fetal Death and Stillbirth / Alexander M Saucedo, Robert M Silver
    Abnormal Amniotic Fluid Volume / Christina M Ackerman, Thomas R Moore, Heather S Lipkind
    Fetal Growth Restriction / Jodi S Dashe, Anne M Amb©Ưa
    Rh and Other Blood Group Alloimmunizations / Kenneth J Moise
    Preterm Labor / Hyagriv N Simhan
    Prevention of Preterm Birth / Anna King, Sarah JE Stock
    Premature Rupture of the Membranes / Brian M Mercer
    Indicated Late-Preterm and Early-Term Deliveries / Catherine Y Spong
    Chorioamnionitis / Catalin S Buhimschi, Irina A Buhimschi
    Third-Trimester Bleeding / Ilina D Pluym, Christina S Han
    Amniotic Fluid Embolism / Irene A Stafford, Michael A Belfort
    Preeclampsia / Michal Fishel Bartal, Baha M Sibai
    Labor and Delivery. Elective Induction of Labor / Rachel G Sinkey
    Electronic Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring / David A Miller
    Breech Delivery / G Justus Hofmeyr, Mercy-Nkuba Nassali
    Vaginal Birth After Cesarean / James R Scott
    Placenta Accreta Spectrum / Robert M Silver, Deirdre J Lyell
    Shoulder Dystocia / George A Macones, Robert B Gherman
    Twins, Triplets, and Beyond / Mary E D'Alton
    Postpartum Hemorrhage / David B Nelson
    Appendix A: Evaluation of Fetal Health and Defects.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Mathieu Vinken, Vera Rogiers.
    Contents:
    Isolation and culture of mouse hepatocytes
    Cryopreservation of hepatocytes
    Culture conditions promoting proliferation and cell cycle synchronization
    Immortalized human hepatic cell lines for In vitro testing and research purposes
    Culture and functional characterization of human hepatoma hepG2s
    Establishment and characterization of an in vitro model of Fas-mediated hepatocyte cell death
    Serum-free directed differentiation of human embryonic stem cells to hepatocytes
    Human skin-derived precursor Cells: isolation, expansion, and hepatic differentiation
    Generation of hepatocytes from pluripotent stem cells for drug screening and developmental modeling
    Differentiation-promoting medium additives for hepatocyte
    Cultivation and cryopreservation
    Coculture and long-term maintenance of hepatocytes
    Primary hepatocytes in sandwich culture
    Establishing liver bioreactors for In Vitro Research
    Epigenetic modifications as antidedifferentiation strategy for primary hepatocytes in culture
    Transfection of Primary Hepatocytes with Liver-enriched transcription factors using adenoviral vectors
    Transcriptomics of hepatocytes treated with Toxicants for Investigating Molecular mechanisms underlying hepatotoxicity
    Global microRNA analysis in primary hepatocyte Cultures
    Mass Spectrometry-Based proteomics for telative protein quantification and biomarker Identification in primary human Hepatocytes
    Targeted metabolomics for homocysteine-related metabolites in primary hepatocytes
    Measurement of cytochrome P450 Enzyme Induction and Inhibition in human hepatoma cells
    Analysis of sinusoidal drug uptake transporter activities in Primary Human Hepatocytes
    Measurement of albumin secretion as functionality test in primary hepatocyte cultures
    Measurembent of Blood Coagulation Factor Synthesis in cultures of human hepatocytes
    Functionality testing of primary hepatocytes in Culture by Measuring Urea Synthesis
    Assay of Bile acid conjugation and excretion in human hepatocytes
    General cytotoxicity assessment by Means of the MTT assay
    Measurement of apoptotic and necrotic cell death in primary hepatocyte cultures
    Critical factors in the Assessment of cholestatic liver injury In vitro
    In vitro cell culture models of hepatic steatosis
    Assessment of liver fibrotic Insults In Vitro.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Koji Tsuboi, Takeji Sakae, Ariungerel Gerelchuluun, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive, practical guide to understanding the physical and biological characteristics of proton beam radiotherapy. The application of proton beams to the treatment of solid cancers has expanded exponentially over the last decade due to their physical properties, which make it possible to administer higher doses of radiation to lesions with only a minimum dose to the surrounding healthy tissues. Accordingly, understanding the basic aspects of proton beam radiotherapy is a primary concern not only for medical physicists and radiation biologists, but also for all physicians involved in cancer treatment using proton beams. The major aspects discussed include the techniques development background, the generation and delivery system for proton beams, physical characteristics, biological consequences, dosimetry, and future prospects in both medical physics and radiation biology in terms of effective cancer treatment. Gathering contributions from experts who provide clear and detailed information on the basics of proton beams, the book will greatly benefit not only radiological technicians, medical physicists, and physicians, but also scientists in cancer radiotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Steven J. Frank, X. Ronald Zhu.
    Contents:
    Principles of radiobiology
    Principles of proton beam therapy
    Clinical commissioning of pencil beam scanning for intensity-modulated proton therapy
    Immobilization and simulation
    Principles of intensity-modulated proton therapy treatment planning
    Physics quality assurance
    Intensity-modulated proton therapy patient treatments
    Proton radiotherapy for breast cancer
    Adult central nervous system tumors
    Gastrointestinal
    Proton therapy for gynecologic malignancies
    Proton therapy for prostate cancer
    Head and neck
    Proton therapy for hematologic malignancies
    Pediatric considerations for proton therapy
    Proton therapy and sarcomas
    Esophagus cancer
    Lung cancer
    Technological advancements and outlook in proton therapy
    Appendices. The University of Texas MD Anderson cancer center’s recommended proton therapy indications
    MD Anderson cancer center head and neck proton case library.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Adam W. Dell, Jessica Robnett, Dana N. Johns, Emily M, Graham, Cori A. Agarwal, Lindsey Imber, Nicole L. Mihalopoulos ; with contributions by Brett Myers and Hayley McLaughlin.
    Summary: This book aids clinicians in supporting and caring for transgender and gender-diverse children and adolescents youth who are born into an incongruent body. A recent study using data from 19 states reported that 1.8% of American youth identified as transgender. Many people who are transgender will experience gender dysphoria, the intense emotional distress that is caused by a discrepancy between a person's gender identity and their sex assigned at birth. In this compact volume, the authors discuss the variety of domains involved in addressing gender dysmorphia: social, psychological, medical, and legislative/advocacy. They provide clear and concise information on the types and timing of gender-affirming medications and surgical interventions and offer useful suggestions for making interactions in the clinic and the clinical space inclusive for transgender and gender-diverse youth. Among the topics covered include: identity development and gender nonconformity in early childhood and puberty the importance of access to mental health professionals with expertise in gender nonconformity the responsible use of developmentally appropriate gender-affirming medications and surgical interventions related clinical issues such as nutrition counselling for youth receiving gender-affirming treatments creating a safe and inclusive healthcare environment for transgender and gender-diverse youth advocating for transgender and gender-diverse patients by working with local and national policy makers Providing Affirming Care to Transgender and Gender-Diverse Youth is essential reading for pediatric healthcare professionals including physicians in pediatrics and family medicine, plastic surgeons, nurses, dietitians, psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, and other practitioners. Students in these fields as well as policy makers also would find this a useful resource.

    Contents:
    Providing affirming care to transgender and gender-diverse youth
    Introduction
    Identity development and mental health
    Gender affirmation: medical
    Gender affirmation: surgical
    Related clinical issues
    Equity and inclusivity.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Michelle Croston, Ian Hodgson, editors.
    Summary: This very first book helps nurses and healthcare practitioners working in the field of HIV care across European to have practical examples of how they could improve/ adapt their services to improve outcomes for people living with HIV. It provides the reader with both knowledge on a variety of different HIV related topic areas and also helps them to translate this learning into a clinical setting. The main focus of the book is to share best practice in HIV nursing, with the aim of providing a practical guide from multiple countries to improve outcomes for people living with HIV. The book also acts as a resource to healthcare practitioners who are interested in working in many places in the world or carrying out research in HIV care.

    Contents:
    The changing landscape of HIV care: Humanistic approaches to care delivery
    How do HIV nurses contribute to HIV care delivery?
    Leadership in HIV nursing: pathing the future
    HIV care in rural areas
    Innovations in care delivery: the need to think creatively
    Reaching vulnerable population to provide care
    Working with young people living with HIV who have cognitive impairment
    Women and HIV
    Maximising LGBTQ access to services
    Care considerations for ageing with HIV
    HIV and Ageing: managing with frailty
    From prevention to successful treatment outcomes: Why we need more engagement of nurse in eastern Europe
    Activism and Community
    Reducing the power of shame: a compassion focused approach for people living with HIV
    Who cares for the workforce? : developing mindfulness and resilience.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Thomas Youm.
    Summary: Currently, there are no texts focused on proximal hamstring pathology and surgical treatment options. While midsubstance muscle tears of the hamstring are typically treated non-operatively, proximal hamstring tears often require surgery, which can create anxiety for the orthopedic surgeon, as the exposure is deep and the sciatic nerve is at risk for injury. Moreover, the algorithm for repairing proximal hamstring tears is complex, as the spectrum of pathology starts from partial tears to acute tears to chronic tears with varying degrees of retraction. With the advent of arthroscopic procedures around the hip, innovative treatment methods such as endoscopic surgery have been utilized to repair the proximal hamstring. For successful treatment of chronic hamstring tendon tears, allograft reconstruction has been shown to be successful. The book opens with a thorough review of the relevant functional anatomy of the hamstring and related structures, before moving on to discuss epidemiology, classification and biomechanics of injury. The main focus, however, is on treatment strategies, from non-operative methods, including cutting-edge biologics, to open, endoscopic and arthroscopic approaches for partial, acute and chronic tears. The management of complications and rehabilitation protocols round out the presentation. Detailed illustrative case examples provide real-world demonstration of each chapter's concepts. Practical and user-friendly, Proximal Hamstring Tears will be very useful for the sports medicine, orthopedic surgery, rehabilitation medicine, and physical therapy communities.

    Contents:
    Functional Anatomy of the Hamstrings
    Epidemiology, Biomechanics and Classification of Proximal Hamstring Injuries
    Non-operative Treatment of Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Surgical Treatment of Partial Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Surgical Treatment of Acute Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Surgical Treatment of Chronic Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Endoscopic Treatment of Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Open vs. Endoscopic Approaches to Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears: Techniques, Pearls and Pitfalls
    Surgical Complications of Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Biological Treatment of Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Rehabilitation after Surgery for Proximal Hamstring Tendon Tears
    Proximal Hamstring Injury Rehabilitation and Injury Prevention.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Lynn A. Crosby, Robert J. Neviaser, editors.
    Summary: Proximal Humerus Fractures includes everything the orthopedic surgeon needs to know about the clinical management of these common shoulder injuries. Although non-operative treatment techniques are addressed and can be used in less severe circumstances, this book focuses mainly on the current operative treatment techniques for proximal humerus and tuberosity fractures, malunions and nonunions, including open reduction, percutaneous pinning, locking plate and intramedullary nail fixation, and humeral head hemiarthroplasty and reverse shoulder arthroplasty. A chapter on complications associated with these types of fractures and their management is also included. Dedicated to a common musculoskeletal injury, especially in athletes and the elderly suffering from osteoporosis, Proximal Humerus Fractures will be a valuable resource to all orthopedic surgeons and practitioners of sports medicine.

    Contents:
    Anatomy and Classification of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Non-operative Treatment of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Closed Reduction and Percutaneous Fixation of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Tuberosity Fractures
    Intramedullary Locking Nail Fixation of Proximal Humerus Fractures: Rationale and Technique
    Proximal Humeral Locking Plates for Displaced Fractures of the Proximal Humeral Humerus
    Hemiarthroplasty for the Treatment of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Reverse Shoulder Arthroplasty for Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Complications of Treatment of Proximal Humerus Fractures
    Evaluation and Management of Proximal Humerus Nonunions and Malunions.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Amelia K. Hausauer, Derek H. Jones.
    Contents:
    Platelet-rich plasma : mechanism and practical considerations / Brian J. Abittan and Gary Goldenberg
    Platelet-rich plasma and fibrin sealants in plastic surgery : clinical applications and one practice's experience / Kamakshi Zeidler and R. Lawrence Berkowitz
    Platelet-rich plasma for rejuvenation and augmentation / Jeanette M. Black and Lisa M. Donofrio
    Platelet-rich plasma for alopecia and hair restoration / Jeffrey A. Rapaport, Sarah G. Versteeg, and Aditya K. Gupta
    Microneedling : mechanism and practical considerations / Amelia K. Hausauer
    Microneedling : clinical applications / Tina S. Alster and Brenda L. Pellicane
    Microneedling and radiofrequency / Chatchadaporn Chunharas, Douglas C. Wu, and Mitchel P. Goldman
    Applications and safety in skin of color / Naissan O. Wesley and DiAnne S. Davis
    Combination therapies / Peter W. Hashim and Gary Goldenberg
    Complications associated with PRP and microneedling in aesthetic medicine / Tatjana Pavicic and Matthias Aust.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Zhihong Gao, editor.
    Summary: This book reviews the current status of P. mume research, highlighting how the new data coming from the release of the P. mume genomes can advance science and help to solve a number of problems facing the P. mume industry. Prunus mume, which was domesticated in China more than 3,000 years ago as an ornamental plant and for its fruit, is one of the first genomes among the Prunus subfamilies of the Rosaceae family that has been sequenced. Combining the P. mume genome with available data, scientists have succeeded in reconstructing nine ancestral chromosomes of the Rosaceae family, as well as the chromosome fusion, fission and duplication history of three major subfamilies. The P. mumegenome sequence adds to our understanding of Rosaceae evolution and provides an important basis for the improvement of fruit trees. This book offers an essential a guide for all those who are interested in gene discovery, comparative genomics, molecular breeding and new breeding techniques; and will be particularly useful for scientists, breeders, university students, and public sector institutes that are involved in the P. mume industry and/or Rosaceae research.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface to the Series; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Abbreviations; 1 Production and Academic Importance of Prunus mume; Abstract; 1.1 Prunus mume Production in Eastern Asia; 1.2 Medicinal Values of Prunus mume; References; 2 Origin and Evolution of Prunus mume; Abstract; 2.1 Origin of Prunus mume; 2.2 Origin of Prunus mume; 2.3 The Evolution of Prunus mume; 2.4 Conclusions; References; 3 Botanical Description of Prunus mume; Abstract; 3.1 Growth Characteristics; 3.1.1 Tree Characteristics; 3.1.2 Roots; 3.1.3 Buds, Branches and Leaves; 3.1.3.1 Buds; 3.1.3.2 Branches; 3.1.3.3 Leaves 3.2 Fruiting Characteristics3.2.1 Fruiting Branch Types; 3.2.1.1 Water Sprout/Shoot; 3.2.1.2 Long Fruit Branch; 3.2.1.3 Medium Fruit Branch; 3.2.1.4 Short Branch; 3.2.1.5 Ultrashort or Tiny Fruit Branch; 3.2.1.6 Needle Branch; 3.2.2 Flower Dud Differentiation; 3.2.3 Flowering and Fruiting; 3.2.4 Fruit Development; 3.2.5 Fruit Drop; 3.2.5.1 First Fruit Drop; 3.2.5.2 Second Fruit Drop; 3.2.5.3 Third Fruit Drop; 3.3 Phenological Period; 3.3.1 Flowering Period; 3.3.2 Leaf-Opening Period; 3.3.3 Abscission and Dormancy Period; 3.4 Requirements in Terms of External Environmental Conditions 3.4.1 Temperature3.4.2 Precipitation; 3.4.3 Light; 3.4.4 Soil; 3.4.5 Other Environmental Conditions; References; 4 Taxonomy and Germplasm of Prunus mume; Abstract; 4.1 Overview, Criteria and Basis of Classification in Prunus Mume; 4.1.1 Overview of Classification; 4.1.2 Criteria and Basis of Classification; 4.2 Classification of Prunus mume; 4.2.1 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc; 4.2.2 Subspecies Group; 4.2.2.1 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. pleiocar Pa Maxim; 4.2.2.2 Prunus Mume Sieb. et Zucc, Var. Pallescens Franch; 4.2.2.3 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. cernua Franch 4.2.2.4 Prunus Mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. microcarpa Makino4.2.2.5 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. bungo Makino; 4.2.2.6 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. goethartiana Kochne; 4.2.2.7 Prunus mume Sieb. et Zucc. Var. pallidus Bao et Chen; 4.2.2.8 Prunus Mume Sieb. et Zucc. F. sempervirens Bao et Chen; 4.3 Prunus mume Varieties and Excellent Strains; References; 5 The Genome of Prunus mume; Abstract; 5.1 Plant Material; 5.2 Methods; 5.2.1 DNA Preparation and Whole-Genome Shotgun Sequencing; 5.2.2 K-mer Analysis; 5.2.3 Genome Assembly; 5.2.4 Estimation of Heterozygosity Rate 5.2.5 Whole-Genome Mapping5.2.6 Identification of RAD Markers; 5.2.7 Genetic Map Construction and Scaffold Anchoring; 5.2.8 Identification of Repetitive Elements; 5.2.9 Gene Prediction; 5.2.10 RNA-seq Data Generation; 5.2.11 Gene Annotation; 5.2.12 Identification of Noncoding RNA Genes; 5.2.13 Comparative Genome Analysis; 5.2.14 Identification of Duplicate and Syntenic Regions; 5.2.15 Identification of CBF and BEAT Genes; 5.3 Results; 5.3.1 Sequencing and Assembly; 5.3.2 Genome Annotation; 5.3.3 Genome Evolution; 5.3.4 Reconstruction of Ancestral Chromosomes of Rosaceae; 5.3.5 Early Blooming of P. Mume
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Laura Poliseno.
    Contents:
    Pseudogene redux with new biological significance / Leonardo Salmena
    Contribution of pseudogenes to sequence diversity / Mauno Vihinen
    Computational methods for pseudogene annotation based on sequence homology / Paul M. Harrison
    Computational methods of identification of pseudogenes based on functionality : entropy and GC content / Evgeniy S. Balakirev ... [et al.]
    Methods of identification of pseudogenes based on functionality : hybridization of 18S rRNA and mRNA during translation / Chuanhua Xing
    Whole-genome identification of neutrally evolving pseudogenes using the evolutionary measure dN/dS / Lise Olivia Andrieux and David Torrents Arenales
    Methods to study the occurrence and the evolution of pseudogenes through a phylogenetic approach / Jacques Dainat and Pierre Pontarotti
    Methods for detecting transcribed pseudogenes : PCR on regions of high sequence similarity followed by cloning and sequencing / Wenyong Ding and Jianwu Dai
    RNA amplification for pseudogene detection using RNA-Seq / Stephen C. M. Tsoi and Michael K. Dyck
    GENCODE pseudogenes / Adam Frankish and Jennifer Harrow
    Methods to detect transcribed pseudogenes : RNA-Seq discovery allows learning through features / Camilo Valdes and Enrico Capobianco
    Proteomics techniques for the detection of translated pseudogenes / Nadia Ucciferri and Silvia Rocchiccioli
    Pseudogenes as competitive endogenous RNAs : target prediction and validation / Florian A. Karreth ... [et al.]
    Pseudogenes : a novel source of trans-acting antisense RNAs / Per Johnsson, Kevin V. Morris, and Dan Grandér
    Pseudogene-derived endogenous siRNAs and their function / Wen-Ling Chan and Jan-Gowth Chang
    Methods to study translated pseudogenes : in vitro translation, fusion with a tag/reporter gene, and complementation assay / Anne Parle-McDermott
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Natalia Jura, James M. Murphy.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Alain Filloux, Juan-Luis Ramos.
    Contents:
    Gene transfer : transduction / Emanuela Frangipani
    Gene transfer : transformation/electroporation / Frédéric Cadoret, Chantal Soscia, and Romé Voulhoux
    Gene transfer : conjugation / Thibault G. Sana, Aurélie Laubier, and Sophie Bleves
    Pseudomonas bacteriophage isolation and production / Joana Azeredo, Sanna Sillankorva, and Diana P. Pires
    Genotyping methods / Burkhard Tümmler
    Drug susceptibility testing by dilution methods / Katy Jeannot and Patrick Plésiat
    Plate-based assay for swimming motility in Pseudomonas aeruginosa / Dae-Gon Ha, Sherry L. Kuchma, and George A. O'Toole
    Plate-based assay for swarming motility in Pseudomonas aeruginosa / Dae-Gon Ha, Sherry L. Kuchma, and George A. O'Toole
    Motility assay : twitching motility / Lynne Turnbull and Cynthia B. Whitchurch
    Qualitative and quantitative assays for flagellum- mediated chemotaxis / José Antonio Reyes Darias [and five others]
    Microscopic analysis : morphotypes and cellular appendages / Olga Zaborina, John Alverdy, Megha Shah, and Yimei Chen
    Determination of lipolytic enzyme activities / Karl-Erich Jaeger and Filip Kovacic
    Elastinolytic and proteolytic enzymes / Efrat Kessler and Mary Safrin
    In vitro assays to monitor the activity of Pseudomonas aeruginosa type III secreted proteins / Stephanie L. Rolsma and Dara W. Frank
    Cell fractionation / Bérengère Ize, Véronique Viarre, and Romé Voulhoux
    Characterization of molecular interactions using isothermal titration calorimetry / Tino Krell [and seven others]
    Proteomic analysis / Pascal Cosette and Thierry Jouenne
    Membrane proteomics of Pseudomonas aeruginosa / Zofia Magnowska, Isabel Hartmann, Lothar Jänsch, and Dieter Jahn
    Construction of Pseudomonas aeruginosa two-hybrid libraries for high-throughput assays / Sophie de Bentzmann and Christophe Bordi
    Biosensors for qualitative and semiquantitative analysis of quorum sensing signal molecules / Matthew Fletcher [and tree others]
    LC-MS/MS quantitative analysis of quorum sensing signal molecules / Catharine A. Ortori [and four others]
    LC/MS/MS-based quantitative assay for the secondary messenger molecule, c-di-GMP / Yasuhiko Irie and Matthew R. Parsek
    Metabolic footprinting : extracellular metabolomic analysis / Volker Behrends, Huw D. Williams, and Jacob G. Bundy
    Pyoverdine and pochelin measurements / Françoise Hoegy, Gaetan L. A. Mislin, and Isabelle J. Schalk
    Measurement of phenazines in bacterial cultures / Suzanne E. Kern and Dianne K. Newman
    Extraction and measurement of NAD(P)+ and NAD(P)H / Suzanne E. Kern, Alexa Price-Whelan, and Dianne K. Newman
    Cyanide measurements in bacterial culture and sputum / Chandrika Goh Nair, Ben Ryall, and Huw D. Williams
    Monitoring iron uptake by siderophores / Françoise Hoegy and Isabelle J. Schalk
    Exopolysaccharide quantification / Irina Sadovskaya
    Liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry for the identification and quantification of rhamnolipids / Ahmad Mohammad Abdel-Mawgoud, François Lépine, and Eric Déziel
    LPS quantitation procedures / Joseph S. Lam, Erin M. Anderson, and Youai Hao
    Monitoring lectin interactions with carbohydrates / Sophie de Bentzmann, Annabelle Varrot, and Anne Imberty
    Mining the Pseudomonas genome / Geoffrey L. Winsor and Fiona S. L. Brinkman
    Identification of bacterial small RNAs by RNA sequencing / María Gómez-Lozano [and three others.]
    Gene amplification and qRT-PCR / Cerith Jones and Alain Filloux
    The Standard European Vector Architecture (SEVA) plasmid toolkit / Gonzalo Durante-Rodríguez, Víctor de Lorenzo, and Esteban Martínez-García
    Chromosomal integration of transcriptional fusions / Rafael Silva-Rocha and Víctor de Lorenzo
    A method to capture large DNA fragments from genomic DNA / Geneviève Ball, Alain Filloux, and Romé Voulhoux
    Transposon mutagenesis / Hemantha D. Kulasekara
    Site-directed mutagenesis and gene deletion using reverse genetics / Daniela Muhl and Alain Filloux
    Signature-tagged mutagenesis / Irena Kukavica-Ibrulj and Roger C. Levesque
    Construction of a Pseudomonas aeruginosa genomic DNA library / Christophe Bordi
    Strategy for genome sequencing analysis and assembly for comparative genomics of Pseudomonas genomes / Julie Jeukens [and three others]
    Promoter fusions with optical outputs in individual cells and in populations / Ilaria Benedetti and Victor de Lorenzo
    Chromatin immunoprecipitation for ChIP-chip and ChIP-seq / Sebastian Schulz and Susanne Häussler
    Transcriptional analysis of Pseudomonas aeruginosa infected Caenorhabditis elegans / Ashleigh MacKenzie [and three others]
    Methods for studying biofilm formation : flow cells and confocal laser scanning microscopy / Tim Tolker-Nielsen and Claus Sternberg
    Biofilm formation in the 96-well microtiter plate / Barbara M. Coffey and Gregory G. Anderson
    Methods for studying biofilm dispersal in Pseudomonas aeruginosa / Nicolas Barraud [and three others]
    Pseudomonas aeruginosa PA14 pathogenesis in Caenorhabditis elegans / Natalia V. Kirienko [and three others]
    Assessing Pseudomonas aeruginosa virulence using a nonmammalian host : Dictyostelium discoideum / Geneviève Filion and Steve J. Charette
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence with nonmammalian host : Galleria mellonella / Gudrun Koch [and three others]
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence with the nonmammalian host model : Arabidopsis thaliana / Regina L. Baldini, Melissa Starkey, and Laurence G. Rahme
    Assessing Pseudomonas aeruginosa persister/antibiotic tolerant cells / Ronen Hazan [and three others]
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence with nonmammalian host : Zebrafish / María A. Llamas and Astrid M. van der Sar
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence with a nonmammalian host : Drosophila melanogaster / Samantha Haller, Stefanie Limmer, and Dominique Ferrandon
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence using host cells / Iwona Bucior, Cindy Tran, and Joanne Engel
    Assessing Pseudomonas aeruginosa virulence and the host response using murine models of acute and chronic lung infection / Irena Kukavica-Ibrulj [and four others]
    Assessing Pseudomonas virulence using mammalian models : acute infection model / Antje Munder and Burkhard Tümmler
    Burn mouse models / Henrik Calum, Niels Høiby, and Claus Moser.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Fuxiang Zhang, Alan Sugar, Graham D. Barrett.
    Contents:
    Optics and neurophysiology of pseudophakic monovision
    Non-pseudophakic monovision
    Pseudophakic monovision
    Ocular comorbidities and pseudophakic monovision
    Special situations
    Limitations of pseudophakic monovision.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
  • Digital
    edited by M. Alan Menter, Caitriona Ryan.
    Contents:
    1. The history of psoriasis
    2. Epidemiology
    3. Microscopic findings
    4. Genetics
    5. Immunology
    6. Other environmental risk factors
    7. Plaque-type psoriasis- chronic plaque, guttate, and erythrodermic phenotypes
    8. Palmoplantar psoriasis
    9. Generalized pustular psoriasis
    10. Inverse psoriasis and genital disease
    11. Nail psoriasis
    12. Differential diagnoses of psoriasis
    13. Genetics, immunology, and pathogenesis
    14. Psoriatic arthritis: clinical manifestations
    15. Pediatric psoriasis
    16. Cardiometabolic comorbidities
    17. Psychiatric comorbidities
    18. Other disease associations: liver, gastrointestinal, respiratory, and neoplastic
    19. Assessment and measurement of disease
    20. Current and future topical treatments for psoriasis
    21. Phototherapy and photochemotherapy
    22. Traditional systemic therapies and monitoring guidelines
    23. Current biologic therapies (including IL-17) and monitoring guidelines
    24. Current and future oral small molecules
    25. Biologic therapies in the pipeline
    26. Future directions and personalized medicine
    27. Conclusion
    Index.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Adewale Adebajo, Wolf-Henning Boehncke, Dafna D. Gladman, Philip J. Mease, editors.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Historical Aspects
    1. Historical Perspectives on Psoriatic Arthritis
    2. GRAPPA Historical Perspective
    Section 2. Epidemiological Aspects
    3. Classification Criteria for Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    4. Epidemiology of Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    5. The Natural History of Psoriatic Arthritis
    Section 3. Pathological and Genetic Aspects
    6. Immunopathogenesis of Psoriasis Skin and Nail
    7. Immunopathology of the Psoriatic Arthritis Musculoskeletal Lesions
    8. Innate and Acquired Cellular Immune Responses in Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    9. Cytokine Pathways in Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    10. Genetics of Psoriasis
    11. Update on the Genetics of Psoriatic Arthritis
    12. Animal Models of Psoriasis and PSoriatic Arthritis
    13. Mechanisms of Bone Remodelling in Psoriatic Arthritis
    Section 4. Clinical Aspects
    14. Psoriasis
    15. Scalp Psoriasis: Clinical Features and Assessment
    16. Nail Psoriasis: Clinical Features and Assessment
    17. Psoriatic Arthritis
    Section 5. Imaging
    18. Imaging Tools in Skin and Nail Psoriasis
    19. Radiographic Assessment of Psoriatic Arthritis (PsA)
    20. Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis: Ultrasound Applications
    21. Magnetic Resonance Imaging in Psoriatic Arthritis
    22. Future Trends in Imaging Modalities for Psoriasis and Psoriatic Arthritis
    Section 6. Laboratory Tests
    23. Relevant Laboratory Tests and Therapeutic Monitoring in Psoriasis
    24. Laboratory Tests for Psoriatic Arthritis. Section 7. Management Aspects
    25. Paradigms of Treatment in PsA
    26. Topical and Systemic Therapies for Moderate-to-severe Psoriasis.-27. Oral Non-Biologic Therapies and Non-Pharmacological Therapies in PsA
    28. Biologic Therapy for Psoriasis
    29. Biologic Therapy of Psoriatic Arthritis.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Tanya Calvey.
    Summary: "We are in the midst of what is being called the 'psychedelic renaissance' with growing interest into how psychedelics alter consciousness, brain function and brain connectivity. The acute, often profound, effects of the psychedelic experience can induce lasting improvements in mental health demonstrating that chemistry forms the basis of mystical experience, consciousness and mental wellbeing"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    An introduction to psychedelic neuroscience / Tanya Calvey and Fleur M. Howells
    The renaissance in psychedelic research: what do preclinical models have to offer / Kevin S. Murnane
    D-Lysergic acid diethylamide, psilocybin, and other classic hallucinogens: mechanism of action and potential therapeutic applications in mood disorders / Danilo De Gregorio, Justine P. Enns, Nicolas A. Nuñez, Luca Posa and Gabriella Gobbi
    Common neural signatures of psychedelics: frequency-specific energy changes and repertoire expansion revealed using connectome-harmonic decomposition / Selen Atasoy, Jakub Vohryzek, Gustavo Deco, Robin L. Carhart-Harris and Morten L. Kringelbach
    A case report SPECT study and theoretical rationale for the sequential administration of ibogaine and 5-MeO-DMT in the treatment of alcohol use disorder / Joseph Barsuglia, Martin Polanco, Robert Palmer, Benjamin Malcolm, Benjamin Kelmendi and Tanya Calvey
    Advances and challenges in neuroimaging studies on the effects of serotonergic hallucinogens: contributions of the resting brain / Felix Müller, Matthias E. Liechti, Undine E. Lang and Stefan Borgwardt
    Neurocognitive effects of cannabis: lessons learned from human experimental studies / Marco Colizzi and Sagnik Bhattacharyya
    Ibogaine as a treatment for substance misuse: potential benefits and practical dangers / John Martin Corkery.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Katie Evans, Debra Nizette, Anthony O'Brien ; UK adapting author, Catherine Johnson ; foreword by Gemma Stacey.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2020
  • Digital
    Sanjeev Sockalingam, Raed Hawa, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed to present a comprehensive, state-of the-art approach to assessing and managing bariatric surgery and psychosocial care. Unlike any other text, this book focuses on developing a biopsychosocial understanding of patients' obesity journey and psychosocial factors contributing to their obesity and its management from an integrated perspective. Psychiatric Care in Severe Obesity takes a 360 approach by covering the disease's prevalence and relationship to psychiatric illness and social factors, including genetics, neurohormonal pathways and development factors for obesity. This book presents evidence and strategies for assessing psychiatric issues in severe obesity and uses common psychiatric presentations to feature the impact on bariatric surgery and key assessment features for weight loss. Concluding chapters focus on evidence-based psychosocial treatments for supporting patients with weight loss and bariatric surgery and includes educational tools and checklists for assessment, treatment, and care. Experts on non-pharmacological interventions such as mindfulness, cognitive-behavioral therapy and nutrition education describe treatment approaches in each modality, concluding with pharmacological approaches for psychiatric conditions and eating pathology. Additional tools in the appendices support clinicians, making this the ultimate guide for managing psychiatric illness in patients suffering from severe obesity. As obesity continues to grow in prevalence as a medically recognized epidemic, Psychiatric Care in Severe Obesity serves a vital resource to medical students, psychiatrists, psychologists, bariatric surgeons, primary care physicians, dietitians, mental health nurses, social workers, and all medical professionals working with severely obese patients.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Severe Obesity for Psychiatrists
    Severe Obesity: A Patient's Perspective
    Causes and Treatment of Obesity: From Genes to Integrated Care Models
    Causes of Severe Obesity: Gene to Environment
    Insecure Attachment and Trauma in Obesity and Bariatric Surgery
    Medical Complications Resulting from Severe Obesity
    Overview of Medical & Surgical Treatment of Severe Obesity
    Integrated Models for Severe Obesity Management: Role for Psychosocial Teams
    Weight-Based Stigma and Body Image in Severe Obesity
    Mood Disorders and Severe Obesity
    Eating Disorders in Severe Obesity
    Addictive Disorders in Severe Obesity and After Bariatric Surgery
    Sleep and Severe Obesity
    Psychiatric Suitability Assessment for Bariatric Surgery
    Nutrition Education for Severe Obesity
    The Role of Social Support in Weight Loss Management for Morbidly Obese Individuals
    Motivational Interviewing for Severe Obesity
    Mindful Eating for Severe Obesity
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Severe Obesity
    Psychosocial/Behavioral Interventions in the Severely Mentally Ill
    Young Adulthood and Obesity Management: Developmental Issues and Transition of Care.-Technology to Promote Obesity Self-Management
    Pharmacological Treatment for Severe Obesity in Psychiatric Patients
    Psychopharmacology in Bariatric Surgery Patients
    Integrative Case and Summary.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Kathleen M. Prendergast, Kasey B. Jackman.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey
    ScienceDirect
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    40
  • Digital
    Alyson Gorun, Anna M. Kim, Christian Umfrid, Janna Gordon-Elliott, editors.
    Summary: This book guides psychiatry trainees through some of the most common psychiatric consultation requests in the general medical hospital, using accessible, case-based narratives. Clinical case scenarios are used to demonstrate how to consider both medical and psychological factors involved in the consultation, and the approach to challenging interpersonal dynamics that may occur between the hospitalized patient and the primary medical team. Each case illustrates how to begin to think like a consultation-liaison psychiatrist in order to arrive at a diagnosis and formulate a treatment plan in complex clinical situations. Cases unfold in real time to highlight the critical role of the psychiatrist as liaison to the patient and medical team in order to guide psychiatric management and facilitate effective communication and treatment in the hospital. In addition to clinical cases, each chapter features a concise list of strategies to identify and address patient symptoms and behaviors, interpersonal dynamics, and barriers to care that arise in the hospital. The Psychiatric Consult features resident-specific recommendations and a case-based format that make it a unique, realistic, and engaging learning tool.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Delirium
    Chapter 3: Altered Mental Status
    Chapter 4: Substance Intoxication and Withdrawal
    Chapter 5: Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV)
    Chapter 6: The Postpartum Patient
    Chapter 7: Mood Secondary to Medical Condition
    Chapter 8: Somatic Symptom Disorder
    Chapter 9: Malingering
    Chapter 10: The Suicidal Patient
    Chapter 11: Behaviors Interfering with Care
    Chapter 12: Adjustment Disorder
    Chapter 13: Major Neurocognitive Disorder.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, Lisa L. Boyle, editors.
    Summary: "Though mental health recommendations for the elderly is rapidly evolving, the few current textbooks on this subject are either too voluminous or complex for regular review by clinicians, and most do not contain the latest information available in the field. Written by experts in geriatric psychiatry, this book provides a comprehensive yet concise review of the subject. The text covers topics that include the social aspect of aging, treatment and diagnosis options unique to the elderly in need of psychiatric care, policy and ethics, and particular geriatric health concerns that may influence psychiatric considerations. Psychiatric disorders late in life is the ultimate resource for practicing psychiatrists, physicians, geriatricians, and medical students concerned with the mental healthcare of the elderly"--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Life course : developmental and transitional events / Nisha Mehta-Naik
    Demography and epidemiology / Sarah J. De Asis
    Culture and gender / Brandon C. Yarns
    Family and community / Jessica Koenig, Aurora Osteen, and Erica C. Garcia-Pittman
    Economics and health policy / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, Ashmita Banerjee, and Ravi Chivukula
    Neuroanatomy and neuropathology / Katherine Rice Goettsche, Caitlin Snow, and Jimmy Avari
    Biochemistry and neuropharmacology / Jimmy Avari, Katherine Rice Goettsche, and Caitlin Snow
    Anatomy and physiology / Caitline Snow, Katherine Rice Goettsche, and Jimmy Avari
    Interviewing and history taking / Lisa L. Boyle and Ali Abbas Asghar-Ali
    Mental status examination / Ali Abbas Asghar-Ali and Lisa L. Boyle
    Functional assessment / Lisa L. Boyle
    Psychological and neuropsychological testing / Lisa L. Boyle
    Neurologic examination / Lisa L. Boyle
    Clinical laboratory testing / Lisa L. Boyle
    Structural and functional imaging / Vimal M. Aga
    Neurocognitive disorders / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, Wynnelena C. Canio, Poorvanshi Alag, Dhweeja Dasarathy, and Joel P. Dey
    Depressive disorders and bipolar and related disorders / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, M. Ingre Walters, Geetha Manikkara, Poorvanshi Alag, and Garima Garg
    Sleep disorders / Nery A. Diaz
    Schizophrenia spectrum and other psychotic disorders / Michael Reinhardt, Dina Ghoneim, Bronwyn Huggins, Anup Mani, Tessa Murante, and Carl Cohen
    Substance-related and addictive disorders / Rachel D. Maree and Craig A. Riccelli
    Anxiety disorders / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, Suneela Cherlopalle, and Silpa Balachandran
    Sexual dysfunctions, gender dysphoria, and paraphilic disorders / Raman Marwaha, Poorvanshi Alag, and Amit Thour
    Intellectual disability in the elderly / Joanna C. Lim, Laurel J. Bessey, Pallavi Joshi, and Lisa L. Boyle
    Personality disorders / Karin Kerfoot
    Pharmacology and psychopharmacology / Rajesh R. Tampi, Deena J. Tampi, and Mallika Lavakumar
    Electroconvulsive therapy / Ali Ahsan Ali, Garima Garg, Deena J. Tampi, and Rajesh R. Tampi
    Psychotherapy / Brandon C. Yarns
    Multidisciplinary approaches / Jennifer Jacobson, Ashley Trust, Erica C. Garcia-Pittman, and Gayle Ayers
    Setting-specific treatment issues / Azziza Oluwakemi Bankole and Mamta Sapra
    Special management problems / Rosanne M. Radziewicz and Cheryl Bradas
    Policy, ethical, and legal issues / Aarti Gupta and Meera Balasubramaniam
    Care of patients with neurologic disease / Sophia Wang
    Psychiatric disorders due to a general medical condition / Michael C. Hann, Aaron Meyer, Evan N. Caporaso, and Thomas Wolfgang Klotz
    Psychological factors affecting medical conditions / Kalya Vardi.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Manfred Gerlach, Andreas Warnke, Laurence Greenhill, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive survey of the current state of knowledge in the field of neuro-psychopharmacology in childhood and adolescence. In the first part, the essentials of neuro-psychopharmacology are presented in order to provide a deeper understanding of the principles and particularities in the pharmacotherapy of children and adolescents. This part includes information on neurotransmitters and signal transduction pathways, molecular brain structures as targets for psychiatric drugs, characteristics of psychopharmacological therapy in children and adolescents, ontogenetic influences on pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics, and pharmacotherapy in the outpatient setting. The part on classes of psychiatric medications, which covers antidepressants, antipsychotics, anxiolytics and sedative-hypnotics, mood stabilizers, and psychostimulants and other drugs used in the treatment of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder, provides sufficient background material to better understand how psychoactive drugs work, and why, when, and for whom they should be used. For each drug within a class, information on its mechanisms of action, clinical pharmacology, indications, dosages, and cognate issues are reviewed. In the third part, the disorder-specific and symptom-oriented medication is described and discerningly evaluated from a practical point of view, providing physicians with precise instructions on how to proceed. Psychiatric Drugs in Children and Adolescents includes numerous tables, figures and illustrations and offers a valuable reference work for child and adolescent psychiatrists and psychotherapists, pediatricians, general practitioners, psychologists, and nursing staff, as well as teachers.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of Neuropsychopharmacology
    Special Features of Psychopharmacological Therapy in Children and Adolescents
    Pharmacotherapy in the Outpatient Practice
    Antidepressants
    Antipsychotics
    Anxiolytics and Sedative-Hypnotics
    Mood Stabilizers
    Psychostimulants and Other Drugs Used in the Treatment of Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD)
    Aggressive and Autoaggressive Behavior, Impulse Control Disorder, and Conduct Disorder
    Alcohol-Related Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders and Phobias
    Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorders
    Autism Spectrum Disorders
    Depressive Disorders
    Drug- or Substance-Related Disorders
    Eating Disorders
    Elective (Selective) Mutism
    Encopresis
    Enuresis and Functional Urinary Incontinence
    Manic Episode and Bipolar Affective Disorder
    Obsessive-Compulsive Disorders
    Personality Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders in Children and Adolescents with Intellectual Disability
    Psychiatric Emergency Therapy in Children and Adolescents
    Schizophrenia
    Sleep Disorders
    Tic Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Meera Balasubramaniam, Aarti Gupta, Rajesh R. Tampi, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive view of ethical, medicolegal, and forensic issues common to aging psychiatric patients. Written by experts in the field, this volume includes assessments of each patients capacity to make decisions, live independently, manage finances, drive a vehicle, have sexual relations, and a wide array of other topics in the context of ethics and the law. The text also discusses guardianship and care for patients who are no longer fit to handle their own care and the ethical dilemmas associated with these challenges. Finally, the text covers aging adults in the criminal justice system from an epidemiological perspective--a problem that is steadily increasing in many nations, including the United States. Psychiatric Ethics in Late-Life Patients is an excellent resource for all physicians navigating legal and ethical scenarios involving aging patients, including general, geriatric, and forensic psychiatrists, geriatricians, primary care providers, geriatric nurses, social workers, public health officials, and all others.

    Contents:
    Aging: Balancing Autonomy and Beneficence
    The capacity to make medical decisions
    The Capacity to Live Independently
    The Capacity to Manage Finances
    Capacity to Manage Critical Domains of Living: Driving, Voting and Sexual Expression
    Ethical Issues in Dementia: An Overview
    Research Ethics in Geriatric Psychiatry
    Advance Health Care Planning
    Surrogate Decision Making
    Guardianship
    Elder Abuse
    Social Determinants and Mental Health Among Older Adults in the Criminal Justice System
    Capacity to Stand Trial Evaluations for Geriatric Defendants
    Responding to Crisis of Aging People in Prison: Global Promising Practices and Initiatives.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Daniel J. Carlat.
    Summary: "Over the course of a 40-year professional career, you will do 100,000 diagnostic interviews. The diagnostic interview is by far the most important tool in the arsenal of any clinician, and yet the average training program directs relatively few resources to specific training in the skills required for it. The general assumption seems to be that if you do enough interviews with different kinds of patients, you'll naturally pick up the required skills. That may be true, but it can take a long time, and the learning process can be painful. I hatched the idea for this manual one night during my first year of psychiatric residency. Starting my shift in the acute psychiatry service (APS), I noticed five patients in the waiting room; the resident who handed me the emergency room beeper said that there were two more patients in the emergency room, both in restraints. At that moment, the beeper sounded, and I called the number. "Psychiatry? This is Ellison 6. We have a patient up here who says he's depressed and suicidal. Please come and evaluate, stat." That meant that I had a total of eight diagnostic assessments to do"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Daniel J. Carlat, M.D., Publisher, The Carlat Psychiatry Report, The Carlat Child Psychiatry Report, The Carlat Addiction Treatment Report, Associate Clinical Professor of Psychiatry, Tufts University School of Medicine, Boston, Massachusetts.
    Contents:
    Section 1. General principles of effective interviewing
    Section II. The psychiatric history
    Section III. Interviewing for diagnosis: the psychiatric review of symptoms
    Section IV. Interviewing for treatment.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
    LWW Health Library (PA Rotations)
  • Digital
    Claudio Cepeda, Lucille Gotanco.
    Summary: "The psychiatric interview is the foundation of the psychotherapeutic process and is critically important to establish trust, elicit useful responses, assess patient behavior and psychopathology, and establish treatment goals and plans."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    The diagnostic and therapeutic engagement
    General principles of interviewing
    Special interviewing techniques
    Family assessment
    Providing post-evaluation feedback to families
    Evaluation of special populations
    Psychiatric evaluation of preschoolers and very young children
    Documenting the examination
    Evaluation of internalizing symptoms
    Evaluation of externalizing symptoms
    Evaluation of abuse and other symptoms
    Neuropsychiatric interview and examination
    Comprehensive psychiatric formulation
    Symptom formation and comorbidity
    Diagnostic obstacles (resistances)
    Countertransference.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Shawn Christopher Shea.
    Contents:
    Part I. Clinical interviewing: the principles behind the art
    1. The delicate dance: engagement and empathy
    2. Beyond empathy: cornerstone concepts and techniques for enhancing engagement
    3. They dynamic structure of the interview: core tasks, strategies, and the continuum of open-endedness
    4. Facilics: the art of transforming interviews into conversations
    5. Validity techniques for exploring sensitive material and uncovering the truth
    6. Understanding the person beneath the diagnosis: the search for uniqueness, wellness, and cultural context
    7. Assessment perspectives and the human matrix: bridges to effective treatment planning in the initial interview
    8. Nonverbal behavior: the interview as mime
    Part II. The interview and psychopathology: from differential diagnosis to understanding
    9. Mood disorders: how to sensitivity arrive at a differential diagnosis
    10. Interviewing techniques for understanding the person beneath the mood disorder
    11. Psychotic disorders: how to sensitively arrive at a differential diagnosis
    13. Personality disorders: before the interview begins- core concepts
    14. Personality disorders: how to sensitively arrive at a differential diagnosis
    15. Understanding and effectively engaging people with difficult personality disorders: the psychodynamic lens
    Part III. Mastering complex interviewing tasks demanded in everyday clinical practice
    16. The mental status: how to perform and document it effectively
    17. Exploring suicidal ideation: the delicate art of suicide assessment
    18. Exploring violent and homicidal ideation: from domestic violence to mass murder.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC480.7 .S54 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Zakhari, Raymond.
    Contents:
    Cover
    Halftitle
    Authorbio
    Title
    Copyright
    Dedication
    Contents
    Preface
    Pass Guarantee
    Acknowledgments
    Part I Foundational Knowledge
    Chapter 1 Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing Certification
    Introduction
    PmH-Bc Exam Eligibility Requirements
    Studying And Caring For Yourself
    Self-Care
    Cognitive Distortions
    Exam Prep Exercise
    AbOut The American Nurses Credentialing Center (Ancc) Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Board C
    Pmh-Bc Test Content Map
    DisSecting Questions
    WhAt To Do After You Have Passed Your Boards
    RefErences Chapter 2 Scope and Standards of the Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse
    Introduction
    Health Promotion According to U.S. Governmental Entities
    Scope of Practice
    Professional Organizations
    Leadership Styles
    Health Promotion and Maintenance
    Ethics
    Cultural Competence
    Special Populations
    Forensics and Correctional Institutions
    Quality Improvement
    Prevention
    Health Behavior Guidelines
    Advanced Directives
    Anticipatory Guidance
    Knowledge Check: Chapter 2
    References
    Chapter 3 Fundamental Theories of Mental Illness and Nonpharmacological Interventions Introduction
    Health Belief Model (HBM)
    Transtheoretical Model (TTM)
    Motivational Interviewing (MI)
    Applying the four principles of MI
    Maslow's Hierarchy of Needs
    Relapse Prevention
    The probability of relapse is contingent on the coping strategy
    Social Learning Theory
    Psychological Stages of Human Development
    Key concepts
    Sullivan's Stages of Interpersonal Development
    Sigmund Freud
    Nursing Theorists
    Biopsychosocial Model
    Nonpharmacological Treatments
    Individual Therapy
    Group Therapy (Irvin Yalom, 1931-Present)
    Family Therapies Complementary and Alternative Therapies
    Knowledge Check: CHAPTER 3
    References
    Chapter 4 Neuroanatomy, Physiology, and Psychopharmacology
    Fast Facts
    Introduction
    THe Nervous System
    Neuroimaging
    Genetics
    Selected Neuropsychological Tests (Most Commonly Used)
    Psychopharmacology
    Psychotropic Classifications
    Psychopharmacology In Pregnancy
    Knowledge Check: Chapter 4
    References
    Part II Disorders
    Chapter 5 Substance Use Disorders and Addiction
    Fast Facts
    Substance Use Disorder
    Clinical Vignette Of The Prototypical Patient Incidence And Prevalence
    Screening Tools And Early Intervention
    Cultural Implications
    Knowledge Check: Chapter 5
    References
    Chapter 6 Delirium and Dementia
    FAst Facts
    Delirium
    Clinical Vignette Of The Prototypical Patient
    Incidence And Prevalence
    Screening Tools And Early Intervention
    Dementia
    Clinical Vignette Of The Prototypical Patient
    Incidence And Prevalence
    Screening Tools And Early Intervention
    Cultural Implications
    Traumatic Brain Injury
    Clinical Vignette Of The Prototypical Patient
    Incidence And Prevalence
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
  • Digital
    Raymond Zakhari.
    Summary: This review manual prepares students to successfully pass the ANCC Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Practitioner board certification examination. It encompasses all of the essential knowledge required, uses a succinct outline format that highlights critical detail, and systematically follows the test blueprint so that those taking the exam will be optimally prepared. The Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Practitioner Certification Review Manual begins with an overview of the certification examination, self-care, and test tips; the role of the psychiatric-mental health nurse practitioner, scope of practice, and regulations; and the theoretical foundations of care. Other topics examined include the neuroanatomy and physiology of mental illness; psychopharmacology; and physical assessment, diagnostic tests, and differential diagnosis. A wide range of psychiatric disorders, as organized in the DSM-5, are also reviewed. Each of the chapters include learning objectives and end-of-chapter review questions. The review manual concludes with a 150-question practice test. KEY FEATURES Reflects the latest ANCC test blueprint Includes test-taking strategies and tips for preparing for the big day; scope of practice; and theoretical foundations of care Covers a wide range of psychiatric disorders, as organized in the DSM-5 Includes end-of-chapter review questions and rationales PLUS a valuable 150-question practice test with rationales--more than 400 questions in total.

    Contents:
    Preparing to Pass the Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Practitioner Certification Exam
    The Role of the Psychiatric-Mental Health Nurse Practitioner : Regulations and Scope of Practice
    Theoretical Foundations of Care and Nonpharmacological Therapies
    Neuroanatomy, Physiology, and Mental Illness
    Psychopharmacology
    Physical Assessment, Diagnostic Tests, and Differential Diagnosis
    Substance Use Disorders
    Delirium and Neurocognitive Disorders
    Psychotic Disorders and Delusions
    Sleep Disorders
    Mood Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders
    Child/Adolescent Neurodevelopmental Disorders
    Personality Disorders
    Violence and Abuse
    Practice Test.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    Sheila L. Videbeck, Professor Emeritus, Des Moines Area Community College, Ankeny, Iowa ; illustrations by Cathy J. Miller.
    Summary: "Exploring the full psychiatric nursing curriculum, from theoretical foundations to interventions for commonly encountered disorders, Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing, 7th Edition provides a practical focus on the skills and concepts students need for successful practice. Throughout the book, students have opportunities to learn specific nursing interventions, build therapeutic communication skills, and apply content within the framework of the nursing process. A study guide built into every chapter reinforces student learning and builds critical reasoning skills"--Publisher.

    Contents:
    Foundations of psychiatric-mental health nursing
    Neurobiologic theories and psychopharmacology
    Psychosocial theories and therapy
    Treatment settings and therapeutic programs
    Therapeutic relationships
    Therapeutic communication
    Client's response to illness
    Assessment
    Legal and ethical issues
    Grief and loss
    Anger, hostility, and aggression
    Abuse and violence
    Trauma and stressor-related disorders
    Anxiety and anxiety disorders
    Obsessive-compulsive and related disorders
    Schizophrenia
    Mood disorders and suicide
    Personality disorders
    Addiction
    Eating disorders
    Somatic symptom illnesses
    Neurodevelopmental disorders
    Disruptive behavior disorders
    Cognitive disorders.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    Joan A. Camprodon, Scott L. Rauch, Benjamin D. Greenberg, Darin D. Dougherty, editors.
    Contents:
    Major Depression
    Obsessive Compulsive Disorder
    Neuroimaging and the Neurocircuitry of OCD and Major Depression
    ECT
    VNS
    Ablative Neurosurgical Procedures for OCD and MDD
    DBS for OCED and MDD
    TMS & MST
    Animal Models
    Ethis & History
    Future of Neurosurgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Victor Fornari, Ida Dancyger, editors.
    Summary: This book explores medical nonadherence to treatment and management of psychiatric disorders across the lifespan. Leading experts in the field, specializing in a range of mental health problems describe the impact of nonadherence in the treatment of children, adolescents, transition age youths, adults, and older adults. The book eloquently articulates the key elements of effective physicians and offers clinical pearls on professionalism, empathy, and the doctor-patient relationship-a key component to solving treatment nonadherence. This volume focuses on solutions for improved clinical outcomes, including communication skills, empathy and building trust, motivational interviewing techniques and the use of technology. Psychiatric Nonadherence is an excellent resource for all clinicians who care for individuals with psychiatric illness. This timely reference will provide guidance to enhance effective treatment adherence for a wide array of medical practitioners, including child and adolescent, adult forensic, and geriatric psychiatrists, addiction medicine specialists, primary care physicians, psychologists and nurses.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Mental Health Treatment Nonadherence;
    1: Health Economics: The Hidden Costs of Mental Illness; Introduction; Human Capital; Lost Economic Growth; Medical Conditions; Public Costs; Family Costs; The Impact of Psychiatric Illness; Comorbid Psychiatric and Physical Illness; The Financial Cost of Psychiatric Disorder; Family Burden of Psychiatric Disorder; The Cost of Incarceration; Summary; References;
    2: Nonadherence in Childhood Disorders: Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder; Overview of ADHD and Its Treatment Description, Impact, and CourseTreatment; Characteristics of Effective Pharmacotherapy for ADHD; Estimates of Treatment Adherence and Nonadherence; Correlates of Treatment Adherence; Treatment-Related Factors; Medications' Duration of Action; Care Delivery and Components; Pharmacotherapy Outcomes; Patient-Related Factors; Age; Clinical Characteristics; Family and Caregiver Factors; Caregiver Characteristics; Patient and Family Perspectives on ADHD and Treatment; Future Directions: Adherence with Interventions Other Than Pharmacotherapy Improving Outcomes by Diminishing Barriers to Adherence and Continuity with Effective TreatmentReferences;
    3: Coming of Age and Refusing to Eat: Overcoming Treatment Nonadherence for Adolescents with Anorexia Nervosa; Introduction; How Do Patients Comply with Treatment?; An Overview of AN; What Is the Etiology of AN?; Medical Complications of AN; What Are the Factors That Affect Adherence?; Healthcare Team and Health System-Related Factors; A Selective Brief Review of the Literature; Case Vignette # 1; Case Vignette # 2; Addressing the Factors That Impact Adherence What Are the Interventions to Improve Adherence?Conclusion; References;
    4: The Challenge of Nonadherence in Schizophrenia; Introduction; The Problem of Nonadherence; Engagement; Challenges for Studying Medication Nonadherence; Estimates of Medication Adherence in Schizophrenia; Factors Affecting Adherence; Social and Economic Factors; Health-Care Team- and System-Related Factors; Condition-Related Factors; Therapy-Related Factors; Patient-Related Factors; Interventions to Improve Adherence; Social and Economic Interventions; Health-Care Team and Health System Interventions Condition-Related InterventionsTherapy-Related Interventions; Patient-Related Interventions; Conclusion; References;
    5: Increasing Psychiatric Treatment Engagement and Adherence in the College Population; Introduction; The Current State of Mental Health on College Campuses; Costs of Nonengagement and Nonadherence in the College Population; Definition, Measures, and Rates of Nonadherence; Definition of Treatment Adherence; Measurement of Treatment Adherence; Rates of Mental Health Treatment Adherence in Emerging Adults; Barriers to Adherence and Recommendations for Intervention
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Anita W. Finkelman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC440 .F457 1994
    1
  • Digital
    Carlos W. Pratt, Kenneth J. Gill, Nora M. Barrett, Melissa M. Roberts.
    Summary: Psychiatric rehabilitation has grown tremendously as a field since the 1999 publication of the first edition of this work. With increased funding, evidence-based practice guidelines, a certification program, and increased academic programs at both graduate and undergraduate levels. The volume of information in this area keeps expanding exponentially. This book was written explicitly to serve as a text for the field and follows a logical progression from an intro to the field to the symptoms and etiology of severe mental illness, to treatment and outcome in a variety of settings. The new edition will discuss impending changes in DSM-V regarding diagnosis, new information on evidence-based treatment, skills training across mental disorders for better daily living, taking into account patient physical as well as mental health in treatment planning and outcome assessment. There will also be a new instructor website with ppts, and test questions and answers. Class exercises and biographical sketches will be moved from printed matter to the website on the basis of reviewer suggestions. Instructor website with ppts and test questions. Relocated boxed biographical sketches and class exercises to new website. Adds new coverage of DSM-V diagnosis, evidence based treatment, daily living skills training. Retains case studies, boxed controversial issues, glossary.

    Contents:
    Part 1
    Understanding the Nature of Severe Mental Illness; Chapter 1
    The Experience of Mental Illness: An Introduction to Psychiatric Rehabilitation; Introduction; The Story of Paul; The Serious Mental Illnesses; Psychiatric Disability; The Stigma of Major Mental Illness; What Does the Term "Psychiatric Rehabilitation" Mean?; Summary; Chapter 2
    Symptoms and Etiology of Serious Mental Illness; Introduction; Symptoms; Phases of Schizophrenia; Mood Disorders; How are Schizophrenia and Mood Disorders Different? Relevance to Psychiatric Rehabilitation; Dual Diagnosis and Co-occurring Disorders; Etiology; Summary; Chapter 3
    Course, Treatment, and Outcome of Severe Mental Illnesses; Introduction; Course; Treatment; Understanding Course, Treatment, and Outcome: What Is Not Known Can Hurt!; Summary; Part 2
    Psychiatric Rehabilitation Principles and Methodology; Chapter 4
    The Goals, Values, and Guiding Principles of Psychiatric Rehabilitation; Introduction; The Concept of Recovery; The Ongoing Study of Recovery; Recovery-oriented Mental Health Systems; The Goals, Values, and Guiding Principles of Psychiatric Rehabilitation; Psychiatric Rehabilitation Ethics; The Future of Psychiatric Rehabilitation Thought and Practice; Summary; Chapter 5
    Psychiatric Rehabilitation Methods; Introduction; Hallmarks of the Psychiatric Rehabilitation Process; The Psychiatric Rehabilitation Process; Evaluating Rehabilitation Progress; Summary; Part 3
    Applications of Psychiatric Rehabilitation Principles and Methodology; Chapter 6
    Health and Wellness; The Story of Ted; Overview of the Problem; Factors That Contribute to Poor HealthHealth Problems Interfere with the Attainment of Rehabilitation Goals; Strategies for Addressing Comorbid Illnesses; Promotion of Readiness for Lifestyle Changes; Wellness; Community-based Group Interventions; Summary; Chapter 7
    Psychiatric Day Programming; Introduction; Partial Hospitalization; The Development of Partial Hospitalization Programs; Components of a Psychiatric Day Program; The Development of Clubhouse Programs; The Story of Jill, Affinity House Member; Evaluating Psychiatric Day Programs; State-of-the-Art Psychiatric Rehabilitation Day Programming; Summary; Chapter 8
    Assertive Community Treatment and Case Management; Introduction; The Need for Continuity of Care; A Nonsystem System; Risk of Rehospitalization; Awareness of the Need for Care Coordination at the National Level; Case Management; The Story of Micky; Development of Assertive Community Treatment: A Practical Innovation; Evaluating Case Management; Fidelity and ACT; ACT as an Early Intervention Strategy; ACT and Persons in the Criminal Justice System; Other Case Management Approaches for Jail Diversion Purposes.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Luigi Mazzone, Benedetto Vitiello, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Psychiatric comorbidities in autism: diagnostic and treatment challenges
    Mood Disorders in ASD
    Anxiety Disorders and ASD
    Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder and ASD
    Schizophrenia spectrum, other psychotic disorders and ASD
    Feeding and Eating disorders in ASD
    Disruptive Behavioural Disorders, Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder in ASD
    Tourette's Disorder and tic disorder in ASD
    Substance-related disorders and ASD.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Elspeth Cameron Ritchie, Christopher H. Warner, Robert N. McLay, editors.
    Summary: This book tells the professional and personal experiences of American military psychiatrists and their fellow mental health providers in the longest conflict in American history. These men and women treat service members for the psychological consequences from their experiences in battle, including killing enemy combatants; seeing wounded and killed civilian casualties; losing their friends in combat; factoring in personal mental health needs, ; and potentially dealing with their own physical injuries from being shot or blown up. The volume consists of 20 short first-person case studies from mental health providers who have been risking their lives while treating patients in the battlefield since 9/11. Written by experts who have experienced these challenges directly, this text offers both clinical and personal accounts that are not found elsewhere. Topics include tips on providing psychotherapy in battle, evaluating and treating detainees in war prisons such as Abu Ghraib and Guantanamo Bay, and the unique challenges of prescribing medication to patients who are also comrades in war. Psychiatrists in Combat; Mental Health Clinicians in the War Zone is uniquely positioned to be a valuable resource for psychiatrists interested in trauma and veterans, psychologists, social workers, occupational therapists, military health personnel, and mental health professionals interested in military psychiatry.

    Contents:
    The Road to Iraq
    Farm Boy Turned Military Psychologist: A Summary of War Deployment Experiences, Struggles, and Coping
    Someone Always Has It Worse: The Convoy to Balad
    Psychiatrists in Combat: From the Deckplates to Division
    Occupational Therapists Share Deployment Experiences from Iraq and Afghanistan
    The Most Efficient Marine
    The Purposeful Doctor
    The Iraqi Heart of Darkness: A Visit to Abu Ghraib
    The Two Sides of Modern Day American Combat: From Camp Austerity to Camp Chocolate Cake
    Zero To Sixty: From Residency to the War Zone
    Research at the Tip of the Spear
    From Battalion Surgeon to Combat Psychiatrist: Three Tours in Iraq and Afghanistan
    "Oh, The Things You Can Find"
    Chronicles from the Cradle of Civilization
    To Squander the Fighting Strength? Personal
    Experiences with Preventive Psychiatry and the Dilemma of Wartime Public Mental Health
    Learning to Scale the Wall
    Shrink in the Making: Learning to Become a Psychiatrist From the War Wounded
    After the Smoke Clears
    The French Fourragère: Gore and Lore
    Leaving Our Mark
    Last of the OSCAR Psychologists in Afghanistan: An Expeditionary Model of Care Jesse. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    chairman, editorial board, Robert Michels ; editor, Jesse O. Cavenar, Jr. ; editorial board members, H. Keith H. Brodie ... [et al.].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    v. 1-4
    (including updates)
    RC454 .P7815
    4
  • Digital
    Konstantinos N. Fountoulakis.
    Summary: This book was the end product of life experiences, thoughts and intellectual wanderings of the author, who through his career and for the last twenty years was always serving all the three aspects of a Psychiatrist: He is a clinician, a researcher and an academic teacher. The book includes a comprehensive history of Psychiatry since antiquity and until today, with an emphasis not only on main events but also specifically and with much detail and explanations, on the chain of events that led to a particular development. At the center of this work is the question "what is mental illness?" and "does free will exist?" These are questions which tantalize Psychiatrists, neuroscientists, psychologists, philosophers, patients and their families and the sensitive and educated lay persons alike. Thus, the book includes a comprehensive review and systematic elaboration on the definition and the concept of mental illness, a detailed discussion on the issue of free will as well as the state of the art of contemporary Psychiatry and the socio-political currents it has provoked. Finally the book includes a description of the academic, social and professional status of Psychiatry and Psychiatrists and a view of future needs and possible developments. A last moment addition was the chapter on conspiracy theories, as a consequence of the experience with the social media and the public response to the COVID-19 outbreak which coincided with the final stage of the preparation of the book. Their study is an excellent opportunity to dig deep into the relation among human psychology, mental health, the society and politics and to swim in intellectually dangerous waters

    Contents:
    Foreword by Afzal Javed WPA President
    Foreword by Norman Sartorius, former WPA President
    Prologue
    Guide to read this book
    The origins of Psychiatry
    Part A: The historical roots
    Introductory remarks to history
    Antiquity
    Middle ages
    Renaissance
    Early modern period
    The Enlightenment
    Nineteenth century: the romantic first half
    Nineteenth century: the realistic second half
    Twentieth century: the pre-psychopharmacologic era
    Twentieth century: the era of psychopharmacology
    Part B: The Philosophical and scientific roots
    Introductory remarks to the philosophical roots
    The concept and definition of mental illness
    Mental health
    Disability in mental disorders
    The mind-brain problem and the issue of Free Will
    Part C: The identity of modern psychiatry
    Introductory remarks to the identity of modern psychiatry
    The state of the art
    Psychiatry among the other medical specialties
    Psychiatry as a professional activity
    Psychiatry among human, life and social sciences, philosophy and religion
    Psychiatry and society
    Anti-Psychiatry
    Post-Psychiatry
    Conspiracy theories
    The future of Psychiatry.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    Debra L. Klamen.
    Contents:
    Evaluation, assessment, and diagnosis
    Human behavior : theories of personality and development
    Human behavior : biologic and related sciences
    Disorders seen in childhood and adolescence
    Neurocognitive disorders and consultation-liaison psychiatry
    Schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders
    Psychotherapies
    Mood disorders
    Anxiety, obsessive-compulsive, trauma- or stressor-related, somatic symptom and dissociative disorders
    Personality disorders, human sexuality, and miscellaneous syndromes
    Substance-related disorders
    Psychopharmacology and other somatic therapies
    Law and ethics in psychiatry.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC457 .P78 2016
    2
  • Digital/Print
    Debra L. Klamen.
    Summary: "PreTest: Psychiatry is part of the successful PreTest clinical series, offering hundreds of Board style questions designed to help you in your clerkship and on the shelf exam. Completely revised to reflect new trends, findings and practices, all questions reflect both the format and range of content you'll be responsible for knowing during your clerkship and on your shelf exam. Each question is accompanied by a detailed answer that highlights important information and explains why each answer choice is right or wrong. To ensure that all content, was relevant, timely and high yield, this edition was carefully reviewed and edited by medical students who have successfully mastered their clerkship"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Basics of Psychiatry
    Biologic and Related Sciences
    Disorders Seen in Childhood and Adolescence
    Neurocognitive Disorders and Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry
    Schizophrenia and Other Psychotic Disorders
    Mood Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders, Obsessive-Compulsive, Trauma- or Stress-Related Disorders
    Somatic Symptom and Dissociative Disorders
    Personality Disorders
    Human Sexuality, Sleep and Other Disorders
    Substance-Related Disorders
    Management of Psychiatric Disorders
    Law and Ethics in Psychiatry
    Self-Test, Uncued Study Questions.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2021
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC457 .P78 2021
    2
  • Digital
    Pascual Ángel Gargiulo, Humberto Luis Mesones-Arroyo, editors.
    Contents:
    PART 1: EPISTEMOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT THE STUDY OF NORMAL AND ABNORMAL HUMAN BEHAVIORS
    1. Knowledge, by Philosophy or Science? Psychotherapy or Neuroscience?.- 2. Phenomenology as an approach method in the Neurosciences
    3. Trends in Philosophy of Mind and in Philosophy of Neuroscience
    4. Neurosciences, Neuroeconomics, and Metaphysics.- 5. Towards a Psychotherapy with a Philosophical Basis.- 6. DSM5: A Bioethical Overview.- PART 2: FROM BASIC NEUROSCIENCES TO HUMAN BRAIN.- 7. Brain Renin-Angiotensin System: A Novel Therapeutic Target for Psychostimulant and Alcohol Related Disorders?.- 8. Role of the Neuropeptide Angiotensin II in Stress and Related Disorders.- 9. Neurovascular Cognitive Alterations: Implication of Brain Renin-Angiotensin System (Ras). Therapeutic Opportunities and Risk Factors.- 10. Prevention of Stress-Induced Cognitive Impairment: Today and Tomorrow.- 11. Circadian Synchronization of Cognitive Functions.- 12. The Role of Iron and Other Trace Elements on Mental Development and Cognitive Function.- 13. New Insights in Glutamate-Mediated Mechanisms Underlying Benzodiazepines Dependence and Cocaine Vulnerability
    14. Soy and Psychotropic Effects: A Brief Overview.- 15. Use of Psychotropic Drugs: Between the Medicalization and Rationality
    PART 3: NEUROSCIENCES, LEARNING, TEACHING AND THE ROLE OF SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT
    16. Learning Styles: From Basic Investigation to Learning in the Classroom
    17. Learning Styles and Strategies: The Importance of the Tool Selection.- 18. Attentional Capacity in Children: Intervention Programmes for its Development.- 19. Social Representation and Imagery of Labor
    Evaluation Process of the Psychosocial and Labor Vulnerability (PSLV) and its Relation With Mental Health.- PART 4: EXPLAINING HUMAN PATHOLOGICAL BEHAVIORS: FROM BRAIN DISORDERS TO PSYCHOPATHOLOGY.- 20. The Ying and Yang of Pain: Protective vs. Damaging.- 21. Neuropsychological Disorders after Mild Traumatic Brain Injury or Concussion.- 22. Animal Models of psychopathology and its relation to clinical practice.- 23. Biological Markers in Psychiatry and its Relation with Translational Approaches: Brief Historical Review.- 24. 'Two Hit' Neurodevelopmental Mechanisms In Schizophrenia: Focus On Animal Models And The Role Of BDNF
    25. Translating the Glutamatergic Hypothesis of Schizophrenia through Homeostatic Regulation of Brain Glycine.- 26. Adenosine in the neurobiology of schizophrenia: potential adenosine receptor-based pharmacotherapy.- 27. Mindfulness and Neuroimaging.- 28. Clinical Magnetic Resonance Neuroimaging in Mild Cognitive Impairment and Alzheimeŕs Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Pascual Ángel Gargiulo, Humberto Luis Mesones Arroyo, editors.
    Summary: This broad and thought-provoking volume provides an overview of recent intellectual and scientific advances that intersect psychiatry and neuroscience, offering a wide range of penetrating insights in both disciplines. The fourth volume on the topic in the last several years from a varying panel of international experts identifies the borders, trends and implications in both fields today and goes beyond that into related disciplines to seek out connections and influences. Similar to its three Update book predecessors, Psychiatry and Neuroscience - Volume IV presents a range of interesting topics in the main disciplines - psychiatry and neuroscience - and attempts to provide deeper comprehension or explication of the normal and diseased human mind, its biological correlates and its biographical and existential implications. This engaging volume continues the previous style of exploring different disciplines and trying to integrate disciplinary evidence from varying points of view in an organic manner. The first section is about epistemological considerations regarding the study of normal and abnormal human behaviors, including, for example, the topic of phenomenological psychopathology and phenomenological psychiatry in relation to schizophrenia and substance misuse, among other topics. Section 2 addresses issues around the translation of basic neuroscience to expression in the human brain and behavioral implications. Section 3 discusses the issues of learning, teaching and the role of social environment in the field of neuroscience. Finally section 4 reviews various perspectives on explaining human pathological behaviors -- from brain disorders to psychopathology.

    Contents:
    SECTION 1. EPISTEMOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT THE STUDY OF NORMAL AND ABNORMAL HUMAN BEHAVIORS
    1. Psychiatry and the Inference to the Best Explanation
    2. The Notion of Empathy According to Edith Stein
    3. Coincidence with One's Self
    4. Naturalism, Psychology and Culture: Nature vs. Nurture?
    5. The Self-Organized Feedback Brain
    6. The Dynamis as the Object of a Philosophical Medicine. An Epistemological Analysis of the Treaty "On Ancient Medicine"
    7. Inserted Thoughts and the Higher-Order Thought Theory of Consciousness
    8. Relationship between Body and Soul According to Saint Thomas: An Obsolete Issue?
    9. The Conception of Psychosomatic Medicine in Spain: From Neurology to the Person
    10. From Phenomenological Psychopathology to Phenomenological Psychiatry: The Cases of Schizophrenia and Substance Misuse
    11. The Notion of Person in Neuroscience: From Cognitivism to a Comprehensive Phenomenology
    12. The Neuroethics of Beauty: Insights from Aldous Huxley's Theory of Knowledge
    13. Radical Solutions to the Ontological and Epistemological Problems of Consciousness
    14. A Discussion of Anxiety over the Last Millennium (1000 to 2000)
    SECTION 2: FROM BASIC NEUROSCIENCES TO HUMAN BRAIN
    15. Neurotransmitters and Hormones in Human Decision-Making
    16. Glial Cells in the Schizophrenia Puzzle: Angiotensin II Role
    17. Somatostatin and Neurotensin Systems in Schizophrenia
    18. Mechanisms of Action of Anxiolytics
    19. From Benzodiazepine Prescription to Dependence: Learning Processes Involved
    20. Beyond Acute Traumatic Brain Injury: Molecular Implications of Associated Neuro-inflammation in Higher-Order Cognitive Processes
    21. Physiology and Pharmacology of Melatonin
    22. Cytoprotection by Melatonin. The Metabolic Syndrome as an Example
    23. Neural-Network Simulations of a Possible Role of the Hippocampus in Pavlovian Conditioning
    24. Brassica Vegetables: Rich Sources of Neuroprotective Compounds
    25. Colored Compounds in Fruits and Vegetables and Health
    26. Prospects of Herbal Remedies in Neuropsychiatric Diseases from the Gut-Brain Communication Perspective
    27. Biological Strategies, Adjunct to the Current Antidepressant Treatment
    28. Potential Interactions between Environmental and Psychoneurobiological Factors in the Interface between Stress and Depression: A Road Map to Resilience
    29. The Impact of Apolipoprotein E allelic Variants on Alzheimer Disease
    30. Fearing Parkinson's Disease: Relationships between Cognition and Emotion
    SECTION 3: NEUROSCIENCES, LEARNING, TEACHING AND THE ROLE OF SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT
    31. Friendship Relationships in Children and Adolescents. Positive Development and Prevention of Mental Health Problems
    32. Bullying and Cyberbullying in Adolescents: A Meta-analysis on the Effectiveness of Interventions
    33. A Summary of the Developmental Trajectory of Executive Functions from Birth to Adulthood
    34. Approach to Learning in the University: Reference to Learning to Learn
    35. Comparative Cohort Study of Burnout Syndrome in State Schools' Teachers
    36. Traumatic Situations and Mental Disorders in Migrants, Refugees and Asylum Seekers
    SECTION 4: EXPLAINING HUMAN PATHOLOGICAL BEHAVIORS. FROM BRAIN DISORDERS TO PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
    37. The Transition to a Dimensional System for Personality Disorders: Main Advances and Limitations
    38. Epilepsy and psychiatric comorbidities: new approaches and perspectives
    39. Integrative Objective Quantification of Individual Locomotor Behavior in Depressive Patients: Implications for their Stratification and Personalized Treatment Monitoring
    40. Epidemiological Perspectives in Psychosomatic and Liaison Psychiatry
    41. Emotions and Cognitions in Bipolar Disorder
    42. Cannabis and Psychosis: A Causal Association
    43. Gut Microbiota Biomarkers in Autism Spectrum Disorders
    44. Brain Magnetic Resonance Imaging in Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD)
    45. Research Contributions of Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy in Psychopathology
    46. Prescribe Psychotropic Drugs in the Elderly. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pascual Ángel Gargiulo, Humberto Luis Mesones-Arroyo.
    Contents:
    Part I: Epistemological Considerations about the Study of Normal and Abnormal Human Behaviors.-Phenomenology of the Encounter According to Józef Tischner
    Psychopathology and Corporality: The Possibilities of Intersubjectivity for Restoring Experience--The Cases of Schizophrenia and Autism
    The Relationship between Philosophy and Neuroscience from Dan Zahavi's Phenomenology of Mind
    Aristotelian Hylomorphism: A Framework for Non-Physicalist Philosphers about Philosophy of Minder
    Aristotle's Concept of the Soul and the Link between Mind and Body in Contemporary Philosophy
    Life Project
    A Brief Bioethical Perspective on Work in the Field of Health
    Cosmetic Psychopharmacology, Inauthentic Experiences and the Instrumentalization of Human Faculties: Beyond Post-Emotional Society
    Dialogues between Philosophy and Psychiatry: The Case of Dissociative Identity Disorder
    Part II. From Basic Neurosciences to Human Brain
    Effects of Emotional Stress on Astrocytes and Their Implications in Stress-Related Disorders
    Role of the Glia and the Neural Crest in the Central Nervous System Health and Disease
    The Nitric Oxide Pathways in the Neurotoxicity from Glutamate-Induced Apoptosis: Mitochondrial Emerging Role
    Psychoneuroendocrinological and Cognitive Interactions in the Interface between Chronic Stress and Depression
    Mechanisms Involved in Memory Processes. Alterations Induced by Psychostimulants: Targeting the Central AT1 Receptors
    The Extent of Neuroadaptive Responses to Psychostimulants: Focus on Brain Angiotensin System
    Habit Learning and Addiction
    Stress and the Dynamic Fear Memory: Synaptic-Cellular Bases and its Implication for Psychiatry Disorders
    Relationship between drugs of abuse and palatable foods: pre-clinical evidence towards a better understanding of addiction-like behaviors
    Deep Brain Stimulation: A Promising Therapeutic Approach to the Treatment of Severe Depressed Patients. Current Evidence and Intrinsic Mechanisms
    Eye Movements: Parameters, Mechanisms and Active Vision
    Eye Movement Behavior Analyses for Studying Cognitive Performance and Conversion to Pathologies
    Psychotropic Medication Use in Elderly
    Part III: Neurosciences, Learning, Teaching and the Role of Social Environment
    Child Cognitive Stimulation Programs: Various Modalities of Intervention in Socially Vulnerable Contexts
    Work and Psychological Suffering: A Case Study on Customer Service's Employees at an Electrical Services Company
    Part IV: Explaining Human Pathological Behaviors. From Brain Disorders to Psychopathology
    Neuropathological Background Of Mk801 For Inducing Murine Model of Schizophrenia
    The Effect of Estradiol and its Analogues on Cognition in Preclinical and Clinical Research: Relevance to Schizophrenia
    Neuropsychiatric Symptoms Related to Cholinergic Deficits in Parkinson's Disease
    Pharmacotherapy through the Inhibition of Glycine Transporters: An Update on, and Beyond, Schizophrenia
    The Adenosinergic System in the Neurobiology of Schizophrenia: Prospective Adenosine Receptor-Based Pharmacotherapy
    Neuroimaging in Chronic Pain, Fibromyalgia, and Somatization
    Utility of Magnetic Resonance Findings in Elucidating Structural and Functional Brain Impairment in Traumatic Brain Injury
    Liaison Psychiatry: Playing "Hide and Seek"with Delirium
    Metabolic Association between Gut-Brain: Axis in Autism Spectrum Disorders
    Update on Dementia. Pathophisiology, Diagnosis and Treatment: DSM-IV versus DSM-V
    Nutrition and Central Nervous System
    Cognitive Impairment/Dementia in Chronic Renal Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Michal Lew-Starowicz, Annamaria Giraldi, Tillmann H. C. Krüger, editors.
    Summary: Psychiatry meets sexual medicine! This book explores the links between mental and sexual health and provides guidance for the treatment of the most common sexual problems. The book fills the need of many clinicians and trainees who work in the field of psychiatry and sexual medicine. Offering comprehensive and clearly structured information, case presentations, and key messages this book focuses on sharing essential knowledge and skills of recognized experts in the field. Get inspired by the vivid interactions of psychiatry and sexual medicine and help your patients on their way to improved sexual health!.

    Contents:
    Part 1 General aspects: Historical links between psychiatry and sexual medicine
    Sexual anatomy and functioning
    Neurophysiology of sexual response
    Sexual diversity and transcultural context
    Sexual relationships
    Sexual rights
    The (mental) health benefits of sexuality
    Sexual interview
    mental health and relationship issues
    Ethical issues in clinical sexology
    Part 2 Sexual dysfunctions
    focus on body and mind: Female sexual dysfunctions
    Male sexual dysfunctions
    Part 3 Psychiatric disorders and sexual functioning: Cognitive disorders
    Substance-related disorders
    Schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders
    Mood disorders
    Anxiety and somatoform disorders
    Eating disorders
    Sleep disorders
    Personality disorders
    Mental retardation
    Autism spectrum disorders
    Part 4 Impact of psychopharmacology on sexual functioning and its management
    Part 5 Psychiatry confronted with gender and sexual orientation-related issues: Non-mainstream sexual orientation
    Gender dysphoria
    Part 6 Traumatic sexual experiences and variant sexual behaviors: Sexual violence: Neuroscientific and clinical l issues in offenders and persons at risk
    Psychiatric and sexual issues in victims of sexual abuse
    Psychiatric issues of paraphilic disorders
    Forensic issues in sexology
    Part 7 Other topics related to psychiatry and sexual medicine: Late-life sexuality
    Problematic hypersexuality
    Genital dysmorphophobia
    Persistent genital arousal disorder
    Post-orgasmic illness syndrome
    Part 8 Psychotherapy and counseling in sexual medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Roberta Passione.
    Summary: This book is the result of extensive archival research conducted on the Collection "Silvano Arieti Papers" held in the Manuscript Division of the Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. It offers readers the first scientific biography of the renowned Italian-born psychiatrist Silvano Arieti, who in 1939 emigrated to the United States, where he gained fame and recognition for his work on schizophrenia. In 1975, the second edition of his book, Interpretation of Schizophrenia, received the National Book Award in Science. The book has been cast as a twofold journey: an exploration of the life of a psychiatrist and scientist and an overview of twentieth century psychiatry and its significant issues, debates, and transformations. Readers will find useful insights for a better understanding of psychiatry as a discipline capable of portraying the complexity of human nature. .

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Castaway
    3. New World
    4. Roots
    5. Horizons.-6. Landings
    7. At the End of the Journey.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Tobias Wasser, editor.
    Summary: This book is specifically designed for new psychiatrists and all other medical professionals who lack the legal training necessary to confront ethical issues in the face of the judicial system. Written by experts in the field, each chapter begins with a challenging case vignette synthesized from a historical legal case that places the reader in the role of the treatment administrator. The text presents details of the legal case, historical significance, and the precedent it sets before discussing the core principles of that particular subject area. Each chapter reviews the existing literature and reinforces the most salient points. Topics include risk assessment, substance misuse and the law, issues with child and adolescent psychiatry in the courtroom, prescription medication considerations, and other challenges that are not often adequately addressed in training. The text is specifically designed for new psychiatrists and other professionals who are transitioning from their studies into clinical practice, concisely explaining and defining the issues in a practical, reader-friendly tone suitable as both a quick-reference in a busy environment or as a resource for private study. Forensic Psychiatry: Basic Principles is an excellent resource for new psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, students, and other professionals accommodating medical and correctional boundaries in practice.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Why understanding the law matters / Tobias Wasser and Katherine Michaelsen
    Informed consent / Simha E. Ravven
    Confidentiality and privilege / Amanda Yuan Sun and Tobias Wasser
    Duties to third parties / Katherine Michaelsen
    Voluntary and involuntary hospitalization / Stephanie Yarnell and Reena Kapoor
    Civil commitment and involuntary outpatient commitment / Marina Nakic
    Involuntary medication / Kyle C. Walker
    Civil competence / Maya Prabhu
    Ethics / Karsten M. Heil and Charles C. Dike
    Malpractice / Scott Walmer
    Suicide risk assessment / Ish P. Bhalla and Kevin V. Trueblood
    Violence risk assessment / Alexander Westphal
    Substance abuse and the law / Lindsay Oberleitner
    Child and adolescent forensic psychiatry / Carlos A. Salgado
    Special topics in forensic psychiatry : the insanity defense and competence to stand trial / Hassan M. Minhas
    Conclusion: How to learn more about forensic psychiatry / Tobias Wasser.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Vincenzo Di Nicola, Drozdstoj Stoyanov.
    Summary: The field of academic psychiatry is in crisis, everywhere. It is not merely a health crisis of resource scarcity or distribution, competing claims and practice models, or level of development from one country to another, but a deeper, more fundamental crisis about the very definition and the theoretical basis of psychiatry. The kinds of questions that represent this crisis include whether psychiatry is a social science (like psychology or anthropology), whether it is better understood as part of the humanities (like philosophy, history, and literature), or if the future of psychiatry is best assured as a branch of medicine (based on genetics and neuroscience)? In fact, the question often debated since the beginning of modern psychiatry concerns the biomedical model so that part of psychiatry's perpetual self-questioning is to what extent it is or is not a branch of medicine. This unique and bold volume offers a representative and critical survey of the history of modern psychiatry with deeply informed transdisciplinary readings of the literature and practices of the field by two professors of psychiatry who are active in practice and engaged in research and have dual training in scientific psychiatry and philosophy. In alternating chapters presenting contrasting arguments for the future of psychiatry, the two authors conclude with a dialogue between them to flesh out the theoretical, research, and practical implications of psychiatry's current crisis, outlining areas of divergence, consensus, and fruitful collaborations to revision psychiatry today. The volume is scrupulously documented but written in accessible language with capsule summaries of key areas of theory, research, and practice for the student and practitioner alike in the social and human sciences and in medicine, psychiatry, and the neurosciences. Offers a critical survey of the history of modern psychiatry; Co-authors have dual training in scientific psychiatry and philosophy; Written in accessible language with capsule summaries of key areas of theory, research and practice; For students and specialists alike.

    Contents:
    Psychiatry in Crisis as a Medical Discipline
    Methods for clinical evaluation in psychiatry: quantitative decomposition of narratives vs. qualitative approach. Reconstruction of the methodological discrepancies based on an exemplary case: major depressive disorder
    Psychiatric nosology revisited: at the crossroads of psychology and medicine. Categorical vs. dimensional; nomothetic vs. ideographic classification and nomenclature; post-modern perspectives
    Psychiatry and neuroscience: at the interface. How to incorporate scientific data from neuroscience without turning psychiatry into an applied branch of neurology
    Invited commentary
    Critical Psychiatry
    The beginning of the end of psychiatry: a philosophical archaeology. Psychology: introspection and consciousness. Foundations of modern psychiatry. Schizophrenia: the worm in psychiatry's apple
    The end of phenomenology. "Who killed Ellen West?" A critical review of Ludwig Binswanger's foundational case of existential analysis
    The end of psychiatry. "Psychiatry against itself. " A philosophical archaeology of antipsychiatry
    Invited commentary
    Renewal in Psychiatry: Stoyanov in Dialogue with Di Nicola. Invited commentary
    Afterword.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Damir Huremović, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on how to formulate a mental health response to a massive infectious disease outbreak, including a pandemic outbreak. The book combines an emergency mental health response utilized by disaster psychiatry with clinical aspects and expertise on infectious diseases mental health developed by consultation-liaison psychiatry, making it an excellent resource for tackling each stage of an infectious outbreak crisis quickly and thoroughly. The book opens by contextualizing the issues with a historical overview of pandemics ranging from plagues of ancient times, through Black Death in the Middle Ages, Spanish flu pandemic of 1918, to outbreaks of modern times, including HIV, Ebola, and Zika. The text acknowledges the new infectious disease challenges presented by climate changes and bioterrorism and considers how to implement systems to prepare for these issues from an infection and social perspective. The manuscript then delves into the mental health aspects of these crises, including community and cultural responses, emotional epidemiology, and mental health concerns in the aftermath of a disaster. Finally, the text considers medical responses to situation-specific trauma, including quarantine and isolation-associated trauma, the mental health aspects of immunization and vaccination (including vaccine hesitancy), survivor mental health, and support for healthcare personnel, thereby providing guidance for some of the most alarming situations facing the medical community organizing a mental health response to an infectious outbreak. Written by experts in the field, Psychiatry of Pandemics is an excellent resource for infectious disease specialists, psychiatrists, psychologists, immunologists, hospitalists, public health officials, nurses, disaster mental health workers, and all medical professionals who may work with patients in an infectious disease outbreak.

    Contents:
    Historical Context
    History of Plagues and Their Impact on Human Civilizations
    Pandemics and Modern Medicine
    Pandemics and Psychiatry
    Spanish flu of 1918
    Smallpox Outbreak of 1972
    HIV Epidemic
    SARS (2003)
    Ebola Outbreak 2015
    MERS
    Zika Virus Outbreak
    Contagion as a Psychological Concept
    Emotional Epidemiology
    Cultural Aspects of a Pandemic
    Managing Public Perceptions and the Use of Social Media
    Effect on Mental health Patients
    Burden on Healthcare Personnel
    Psychological Challenges for Institutions and Communities
    History of Quarantine
    Mental Health Challenges Associated with Quarantine and Isolation
    Care for Individuals in Quarantine and Patients in Isolation
    Mental Health Aspects of Immunization and Vaccination
    Addressing Vaccine Hesitancy
    Mental health Care for Survivors
    Mental Health Care for Family Members of the Patients
    Mental Health Care and Psychological Support for Healthcare Personnel.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Sallie G. De Golia, Raziya S. Wang.
    Summary: Seamlessly combining the wisdom of seasoned leaders in psychiatry residency and fellowship training with the perspective of current residents-in-training, this book offers insights and guidance readers will not easily find in any other resource.

    Contents:
    Cover
    Half Title
    Title
    Copyright
    Table of Contents
    Preface
    Contributors
    PART 1 Understanding Residency
    1 Framing the Residency Experience
    2 The U.S. Mental Health Care Landscape
    PART 2 Centering Our Identities
    3 Centering Our Identities
    4 The Underrepresented in Medicine Experience
    5 Gender and Sexual Identity
    6 Professional and Personal Life: The International Medical Graduate Experience
    PART 3 Approaching Clinical Work
    7 Learning to Develop a Case Formulation
    8 Working With Historically Oppressed Patient Populations 9 The Psychiatric Emergency
    10 On Call and Night Float
    11 Nonpsychiatry Services
    12 Inpatient Services
    13 The Psychiatric Consultation
    14 Working in a Multidisciplinary Team
    15 Outpatient Services
    16 Best Practices in Prescribing Medications
    17 Best Practices in Providing Psychotherapy
    18 Telehealth Services
    19 Legal Issues
    20 Managing Patient Suicide
    21 Public Mental Health
    22 Supervision
    PART 4 Building Skills
    23 Blue Ink Spots Working Toward Accurate Self-Knowledge Through Self-Awareness
    24 Communication Skills and Managing Conflict 25 Embracing Uncertainty A Prescription Toward Clinical Expertise
    26 The Resident as Teacher
    27 Navigating Technology in Residency
    28 Navigating Use of Social Media
    29 Leadership
    30 Scholarship
    31 Publishing
    32 Advocacy
    PART 5 Developing a Career
    33 Mentorship and Sponsorship
    34 Preparing for Your Career
    35 Steps to Securing Your First Job
    36 Beyond Training Board Certification and Continuing Medical Education
    PART 6 Maintaining a Professional and Personal Life
    37 Work-Life Integration Accomplishing Your Professional and Personal Goals 38 Wellness Am I Well or Am I Burned Out?
    39 Handling Mistreatment and Discrimination
    40 Physician Impairment
    41 Practical Finances Creating a Budget and Beginning Investing
    Appendix: Self-Directed Learning
    Index
    Back Cover
  • Digital/Print
    J. Clive Spiegel, MD and John M. Kenny, MD.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC457 .S65 2017
    2
  • Print
    edited by William S. Breitbart, Phyllis N. Butow, Paul B. Jacobsen, Wendy W. T. Lam, Mark Lazenby, Matthew J. Loscalzo.
    Summary: "Psycho-oncology, 4th Edition is solemnly dedicated to Professor Jimmie C. Holland, M.D., internationally recognized as the founder of the field of Psycho-oncology. Dr. Holland, who was affectionately known by her first name "Jimmie", had a profound global influence on the fields of Psycho-oncology, Oncology, Supportive Care, Psychiatry, Behavioral Medicine and Psychosomatic Medicine. At the time of her passing, Dr. Holland was the Attending Psychiatrist and Wayne E. Chapman Chair at Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center (MSK) and Professor of Psychiatry, Weill Medical College of Cornell University in New York"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Cover
    Half title
    Psycho-Oncology Fourth Edition
    Copyright
    Dedication
    Contents
    Section editors
    Contributors
    Introduction: Our Past, Our Future-New Frontiers in Psycho-​Oncology
    SECTION I Behavioral and Psychological Factors in Cancer Risk and Prevention
    1 Tobacco Use and Cessation
    2 Diet and Cancer
    3 Physical Activity, Sedentary Behavior, and Cancer
    4 Sun Exposure and Cancer Risk
    5 Psychosocial Factors
    6 Viral Cancers and Behavior
    Section II Screening for Cancer in Normal and At-​Risk Populations
    7 Colorectal Cancer Screening 8 Cervical Cancer Screening and HPV Vaccination: Multilevel Challenges to Cervical Cancer Prevention
    9 Breast Cancer Screening
    10 Prostate Cancer Screening
    11 Lung Cancer Screening
    12 Skin Cancer Screening
    Section III Screening and Testing for Germ Line and Somatic Mutations
    13 Psychosocial Issues in Genetic Testing for Breast/​Ovarian Cancer
    14 Psychosocial Issues in Genetic Testing for Hereditary Colorectal Cancer
    15 Psychosocial Issues in Genomic Testing, Including Genomic Testing for Targeted Therapies 16 Psychosocial Issues Related to Liquid Biopsy for ctDNA in Individuals at Normal and Elevated Risk
    Section IV Screening and Assessment in Psychosocial Oncology
    17 Screening and Assessment for Distress
    18 Assessment, Screening, and Case Finding for Depression and Anxiety in People with Cancer
    19 Screening for Delirium and Dementia in the Cancer Patient
    20 Screening and Assessment for Cognitive Problems
    Section V Psychological Issues Related to Site of Cancer
    21 Melanoma
    22 Lung Cancer
    23 Breast Cancer
    24 Colorectal Cancer 25 Prostate Cancer and Genitourinary Malignancies
    26 Gastrointestinal Cancers
    27 Gynecologic Cancers
    28 Hematopoietic Dyscrasias and Stem Cell Transplantation/​CAR-​T Cell Therapy
    29 Head and Neck Cancer
    30 Central Nervous System Tumors
    31 HIV Infection and AIDS-​Associated Neoplasms
    Section VI Management of Specific Physical Symptoms
    32 Cancer-​Related Pain
    33 Nausea and Vomiting
    34 Cancer-​Related Fatigue
    35 Sexual Problems and Cancer
    36 Neuropsychological Impact of Cancer and Cancer Treatments
    37 Sleep and Cancer
    38 Weight and Appetite Loss in Cancer 39 Body Image-​An Important Dimension in Cancer Care
    Section VII Psychiatric Disorders
    40 Adjustment Disorders in Cancer
    41 Depressive Disorders in Cancer
    42 Suicide and Medical Aid in Dying
    43 Anxiety Disorders
    44 Delirium
    45 Substance Use Disorders
    46 Posttraumatic Stress Disorder Associated with Cancer Diagnosis and Treatment
    47 Psychiatric Toxicities of Cancer Therapies: Focus on Immunotherapy and Targeted Therapy
    Section VIII Evidence-​Based Interventions
    48 Delivering Integrated Psychosocial Oncology Care: The Collaborative Care Model
    Digital Access Oxford [2021]
  • Digital
    Ute Goerling, editor.
    Summary: Psycho-oncology is a thriving discipline in cancer care, and numerous research activities have been undertaken in the endeavor to improve treatment outcomes and to gain a better understanding of the psychological consequences of cancer. This book presents and discusses the latest findings from science and practice for a broad range of psychological and social issues related to cancer and its treatments. Not only are general psychosocial impacts of cancer described, but the very common fear of progression is elucidated. The relevance of psychooncology at different stages of disease (during oncological treatment, in rehabilitation, and during palliative care) is explained, and various psychooncological interventions are illustrated. Other important topics are the experience of being a cancer survivor, who may be cured but not be healthy, the psychological burden on relatives, and gender differences in coping with cancer. Quality of life and patient-reported outcomes are also commented on since they are among the key benchmarks for successful coping with the diagnosis of cancer, its treatment, and its late effects.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Ute Goerling, Anja Mehnert, editors.
    Summary: This book examines in detail the psychosocial impacts of cancer and its management, explaining the relevance of psycho-oncology during all stages from diagnosis and treatment through to cancer survivorship and rehabilitation and end-of-life care. This new edition has been revised throughout to reflect the latest knowledge and places particular emphasis on patients' perspectives and what professionals can learn from patients. Readers will find information on a variety of psycho-oncological interventions, and detailed attention is paid to quality of life and patient-reported outcomes (as key benchmarks for successful coping) and to the fear of progression during and after therapy. Entirely new chapters focus on the psychological impact of individualized therapies in oncology, communication skills training, medical risk communication, and current research approaches in psycho-oncology. Written by leading experts in the field, the book will serve as a valuable resource for all health care professionals who work with patients and their relatives in the field of psychosocial cancer care and oncology.

    Contents:
    Psychosocial impact of cancer
    Fear of progression in cancer patients and survivors
    Gender opportunities in psychosocial oncology
    Psycho-oncology : A patient's view
    The oncological patient in the palliative situation
    Family caregivers to adults with cancer: The consequences of caring
    Rehabilitation for cancer patients
    Cancer survivorship in adults
    Psychotherapy in the oncology setting
    Quality of life in oncology
    Psychosocial impact of personalized therapies in oncology
    COMSKIL communication training in oncology
    adaptation to German cancer care settings
    The barrier to informed choice in cancer screening: Statistical illiteracy in physicians and patients
    Future research in psycho-oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Shulamith Kreitler.
    Summary: This volume strives to give oncologists and other medical practitioners a thorough picture of the oncology patient. It's designed to show that psychological needs of the patient are an important aspect that should be considered for optimizing the effects of cancer treatment, no less than genetic, immunological, physiological and other medical features that are often considered as necessary components of personalized medicine. Using evidence-based information, the book describes the different ways cancer touches upon a person's life, including emotional, physical, and social changes, important decisions, and support structure. It also details the phases every cancer patient encounters along the way, from getting tested and waiting for the diagnosis, to treatments, survival, and confronting one's mortality. Psycho-oncology for the Clinician will serve to contribute to the further scientific development of psycho-oncology, expand its use as a treatment modality, strengthen its status as an essential component of cancer care, and promote the acceptance of psycho-oncology as the new evidence-based constituent of personalized medicine in oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Amritpal Singh Saroya, Jaswinder Singh.
    Summary: This book provides a clear and comprehensive overview of psychoactive medicinal plants, explaining in detail the species that are most commonly used in medicine, and describing their mechanism of action, the implicated toxin, clinical manifestation and therapeutic role. It explores the recent research in the area of psychoactive medicinal plants and fungal neurotoxins, and presents the various biochemical pathways involved and the bioactive targets. The book also discusses the current literature in the field, including the latest methodology used to identify the active compounds, their pharmacological and physiological properties along with their clinical efficacy. Compiling the most up to date information on major psychoactive medicinal plants and fungal neurotoxins, the book covers all major classes of psychoactive drugs, including stimulants, cognitive enhancers, sedatives and anxiolytics, psychotherapeutic herbs, analgesics and anesthetic plants, hallucinogens and cannabis.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Psychoactive Medicinal Plants
    Chapter 2: Major Hallucinogenic Medicinal Plants in Folk medicine
    3: Description of Psychoactive Medicinal Plants
    Chapter 4: Pharmacology of Fungal Neurotoxins
    CHAPTER 5: MYCOTOXINS IN HERBAL MEDICINES.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    edited by Mali Mann.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Psychoanalytic impact of assisted reproductive technology / Mali Mann
    Psychoanalytic understanding of repeated in-vitro fertilization trials, failures, and repetition compulsion / Mali Mann
    Family complexes and oedipal circles: mothers, fathers, babies, donors, and surrogates / Diane Ehrensaft
    Psychoanalytic treatment of anxiety related to motherhood and the use of assisted reproductive technology / Terese Schulman
    Egg donors and sperm donors: parental identity formation / Mali Mann and Andrea Mann
    Infertility, trauma, and assisted reproductive technology: psychoanalytic perspectives / Manisha Near-Akhtar
    Assisted reproduction as explored in The Kids Are All Right / Katherine MacVicar.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG133.5 .P79 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Kostas N. Fountoulakis, Ioannis Nimatoudis, editors.
    Summary: The book provides a comprehensive reference on the neurobiological understanding of behaviour, how behaviour is regulated by the brain, and how such behaviours in turn influence the brain. The work offers an introduction to neural systems and genetics/epigenetics, followed by detailed study of a wide range of behaviours - temperament and personality, instincts and drives, memory and cognitive function, sex and sexual differentiation, ethology and evolutionary biology, aging, drug abuse and other problematic behaviors, psychophysiology and ultimately the links to biological psychiatry and psychopharmacology. Research findings on the neural basis of social behaviour are integrated across different levels of analysis, from molecular neurobiology and neural systems/behavioural neuroscience to fMRI imaging data on human social behaviour. The content covers research on both normal and abnormal behaviours, as well as developmental aspects. The target audience includes psychiatrists, neurologists, nurses, psychologists and all researchers and advanced students in behavioural, social and developmental neuroscience, as well as clinical neuroscientists.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Functional anatomy of the human brain
    Memory-learning
    Basic vital functions and instincts
    Temperament-personality-character and evolutionary biology
    Sexuality
    Aging
    Substance use and abuse
    Sleep and dreams
    Genetics and behavior
    Psychobiology and psychoanalysis
    Psychophysiology
    The contribution of sociology, ethology and other disciplines
    Biological psychiatry and psychopharmacology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Anthony Bewley, Peter Lepping, Ruth Taylor, editors.
    Summary: This book represents a simple, practical resource for all healthcare professionals working with dermatological patients with psychological and psychiatric aspects to their disease. The emphasis is on effective guidance rather than exhaustive case reviews, providing readers with a manual on the appropriate way to approach management of the patient in each case. Comprehensive in coverage, but concise in its delivery of information, Psychodermatology in Clinical Practice presents an idealized approach to management of psychodermatology patients within a global perspective, and provides practical tools to aid assessment of patients and in the decision-making process. It is suitable for dermatologists, psychiatrists and psychologists, dermatology nursing staff, primary care physicians and pediatricians.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    History
    Exam
    Assessment tools
    Psych assessment
    Risk assessment
    Psychopharmacology
    Psychological Immunology
    Delusional disorders
    OCDs
    Factitious skin disease
    Nodular prurigo
    Psychogenic Itch
    Dysesthesias
    Trigeminal trophic syndrome
    Affective disorders in dermatology
    Substance abuse.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Vittorio Lingiardi, Nancy McWilliams.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Rationale for the PDM-2 classification system
    Updating and refining the original PDM
    Part I. Adulthood
    Part II. Adolescence
    Part III. Childhood
    Part IV. Infancy and early childhood
    Part V. Later life
    Part VI. Assessment and clinical illustrations
    Index.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    by David Mintz.
    Summary: "The troubling increase in treatment resistance in psychiatry has many culprits: the rise of biomedical psychiatry and corresponding sidelining of psychodynamic and psychosocial factors; the increased emphasis on treating the symptoms rather than the person; and a greater focus on the electronic medical record rather than the patient, all of which point to a breakdown in the person-centered prescriber-patient relationship. Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology illuminates a new path forward. It examines the psychological and interpersonal mechanisms of pharmacological treatment resistance, integrating research on evidence-based prescribing processes with psychodynamic insights and skills to enhance treatment outcomes for patients who are difficult to treat. The first part of the book explores the evidence base that guides how, rather than simply what, to prescribe. It describes precisely what psychodynamic psychopharmacology is and why its emphasis on combining the often-neglected psychosocial aspects of medication with biomedical considerations provides a more optimized approach to addressing treatment resistance. Part II delves into the psychodynamics that contribute to pharmacological treatment resistance, both when patients' ambivalence about their illness, the medication itself, or their prescriber manifests in nonadherence and when medications support a negative identity or are used as replacements for healthy capacities. Readers will gain basic skills for addressing the psychological and interpersonal dynamics that underpin both scenarios and will be better positioned to ameliorate interferences with the healthy use of medications. The final section of the book offers detailed technical recommendations for addressing pharmacological treatment resistance. It tackles issues that include countertransference-driven irrational prescribing; primitive dynamics, such as splitting and projective identification; and the overlap between psychopharmacological treatment resistance and the dynamics of treatment nonadherence and nonresponse in integrated and collaborative medical care settings. By putting the individual patient back at the center of the therapeutic equation, psychodynamic psychopharmacology, as outlined in this book, offers a model that moves beyond compliance and emphasizes instead the alliance between patient and prescriber. In doing so, it empowers patients to become more active contributors in their own recovery"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    What Is Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology?
    Why Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology?
    What Is Psychodynamic About Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology?
    Psychodynamics of Pharmacological Treatment Resistance
    Treatment Resistance to Medications
    Treatment Resistance From Medications
    The Prescriber's Contribution to Treatment Resistance
    Avoid a Mind-Body Split
    Know Who the Patient Is
    Attend to Patients' Ambivalence
    Cultivate the Pharmacotherapeutic Alliance
    Attend to Countertherapeutic Uses of Medications
    Identify, Contain, and Use Countertransference
    Who Is Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology For? Patient Characteristics
    Before Initiating Treatment
    The Engagement Phase
    The Maintenance Phase
    Split and Combined Treatments
    Psychodynamic Psychopharmacology and Integrated Care.
  • Digital
    Deborah L. Cabaniss and Sabrina Cherry, Carolyn J. Douglas, Anna Schwartz.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Barbara A. Dworetzky, Gaston C. Baslet.
    Contents:
    Ambulatory presentations in adults and children / by M. Angela O'Neal and Rochelle Caplan
    Emergency department and urgent care presentations / by Daniel Weisholtz and Barbara Dworetzky
    Psychiatric factors / by Kim Bullock and John Barry
    Neurologic and medical factors / by Victoria S.S. Wong and Martin Salinsky
    Mechanisms of possible neurocognitive dysfunction in psychogenic nonepileptic seizures / by Daniel L. Drane and Dona E.C. Locke
    The neurobiology of psychogenic nonepileptic seizures and other functional neurological symptoms / by David L. Perez and Valerie Voon
    Diagnostic challenges for the neurologist / by Jigar Rathod and Selim R. Benbadis
    Diagnostic challenges for the mental health team/psychiatrist / by Lorna Myers and John Barry
    Practical and diagnostic challenges for the neuropsychologist / by Kim Willment and David Loring
    Communicating the diagnosis / by Markus Reuber
    Clinician's response to the PNES diagnosis / by Sigita Plioplys, Shan Abbas, and Brien Smith
    Models of care for PNES / by Tyson Sawchuk, Joan K. Austin, and Debbie Terry
    Readiness to start treatment and obstacles to adherence / by Benjamin Tolchin and Gaston Baslet
    Evidence-based treatments for psychogenic nonepileptic seizures / by W. Curt LaFrance Jr and Laura H. Goldstein
    The role of the neurologist after the diagnosis of PNES / by Adriana Bermeo-Ovalle and Andres M. Kanner
    The roles of the patient and family in the diagnosis and treatment of PNES / by Julia Doss and Jeffrey Robbins
    Long-term outcome of psychogenic non epileptic seizures / by Roderick Duncan
    An integrated approach to other functional neurological symptoms and related disorders / by Jon Stone and Alan Carson
    Towards the integration of care / by Gaston Baslet and Barbara Dworetzky.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Riccardo Proietti, Gian Mauro Manzoni, Giada Pietrabissa, Gianluca Castelnuovo, editors.
    Summary: This book reveals aspects of the management of patients with implantable cardiac devices beyond the direct cardiovascular benefits. With approximately 600,000 new pacemakers implanted each year, electrical therapy of the heart has rapidly evolved over recent years. New technology is continuously introduced into the market for the treatment of electrical heart disease with optimized performance and implemented design. While much attention has mainly focused on the biomedical aspects of electrical therapy, the psychological, emotional, social and cognitive aspects of the implantable devices have been largely overlooked. Psychological, Emotional, Social and Cognitive Aspects of Implantable Cardiac Devices considers the impact that these devices have on quality of life (QoL) and psychological disorders, including anxiety and depression. It has collected, appraised and condensed the results of all empirical studies that have investigated, even marginally, the relationships between the implantable devices and any psychological, emotional, social and cognitive dimension and is thus a cornerstone for all involved in device utilization (physicians, nurses, technicians, industry representatives) that need to understand this topic.

    Contents:
    Cognitive function in patients with congestive heart failure
    Heart brain connection in patients with ischemic heart disease
    Neurovegetative system and congestive heart failure
    Cognitive performance in the elderly
    Evolution and principle of pacing devices
    Hemodynamic performance of cardiac devices
    Impact of cardiac devices on QoL
    Pacemakers and cognitive performance
    Anxiety, depression and QoL in patients with ICD
    Emotional impact of device recall
    Cognitive impact of CRT.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by O. Joseph Bienvenu, Christina Jones, Ramona O. Hopkins.
    Contents:
    Personal journeys through understanding the psychological and cognitive problems faced by critical illness survivors / Christina Jones, Peter Gibb, and Ramona O. Hopkins
    Delirium in critically ill patients / Mark van den Boogaard and Paul Rood
    Critical illness and long-term cognitive impairment / Ramona O. Hopkins, PhD, Maria E. Carlo, MD, James C. Jackson, PsyD
    Psychological impact of critical illness / O. Joseph Bienvenu and Christina Jones
    Rehabilitation psychology insights for the treatment of critical illness survivors / Jennifer E. Jutte, James C. Jackson, and Ramona O. Hopkins
    Prevention and treatment of posttraumatic stress and depressive phenomena in critical illness survivors / Christina Jones and O. Joseph Bienvenu
    Supporting pediatric patients and their families during and after intensive care treatment / Gillian Coville
    Family response to critical illness / Judy E. Davidson and Giroa Netzer.
    Digital Access Oxford [2017]
  • Digital
    Jennifer L. Steel, Brian I. Carr, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses the unmet needs of the medical community in dealing with the psychological problems, particularly anxiety and depression, of patients diagnosed with cancer. Providing a scholarly review of the impact of cancer diagnosis on patients emotional and psychological status, as well as the evidence that psychological factors impact cancer occurrence and biological behavior, this book explores the therapeutic implications of such converse dynamics. Chapters review financial toxicity, eHealth, palliative care, mindfulness, sleep and cancer, social support and cancer, cultural diversity, pediatric and adolescent oncology, and geriatric oncology. While intended primarily for the professional readership of oncologists, psychologists, psychiatrists, social workers, and palliative care physicians, a final chapter also provides practical information on available resources for patients. This fully updated and expanded new edition of Psychological Aspects of Cancer: A Guide to Emotional and Psychological Consequences of Cancer, Their Causes, and Their Management provides practitioners with cutting edge knowledge as well as practical information that translates into better care for patients with cancer. .

    Contents:
    Inflammation, Chronic Disease, and Cancer: Is Psychological Distress the Common Thread?
    Psychological Factors and Survivorship: A Focus on Post-Treatment Cancer Survivors
    Couple Relationships and Cancer
    The Impact of Cancer and Its Therapies on Body Image and Sexuality
    Use of the Classic Hallucinogen Psilocybin for Treatment of Existential Distress Associated with Cancer
    Meaning, Spirituality, and Perceived Growth Across the Cancer Continuum: A Positive Psychology Perspective
    Stress, Coping, and Hope
    Religiousness and Spirituality in Coping with Cancer
    Psychoneuroimmunology and Cancer: Mechanisms Explaining Incidence, Progression, and Quality of Life Difficulties
    Psychosocial Interventions in Cancer
    Altruism in Relation to Live Donor Liver Transplants for Liver Cancer
    New and Emerging Challenges in Advanced Cancer Care: Opportunities for Enhancing Patient-Centered Communication
    Complementary Mind-Body Therapies in Cancer
    The Intersection between Cancer and Caregiver Survivorship
    Controversies in Psycho-Oncology
    Resources for Cancer Patients
    Adolescent and Young Adult Cancer Survivors
    Cancer Fatalism: Attitudes Toward Screening and Car
    The Intersection between Cancer and Caregiver Survivorship
    Cancer and the Aging Population
    Mindfulness Based Interventions for Patients with Cancer
    Social Genomics and Cancer: Neural Regulation of the Cancer Genome
    Psychological Aspects of Hereditary Cancer Risk Counseling and Genetic Testing: Toward an Expanded and More Equitable View
    Meaning-Centered Psychotherapy
    Quality of Life
    Bringing It All Together.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Nancy A. Pachana, PhD, Victor Molinari, PhD, ABPP, Larry W. Thompson, PhD, ABPP, Dolores Gallagher-Thompson, PhD, ABPP.
    Summary: "Mental health practitioners are encountering an ever-growing number of older adults and so an up-to-date and comprehensive text addressing the special considerations that arise in the psychological assessment and treatment of this population is vital. This accessible handbook does just that by introducing the key topics that psychologists and other health professionals face when working with older adults. Each area is introduced and then the special considerations for older adults are explored, including specific ethical and healthcare system issues. The use of case examples brings the topics further to life. An important feature of the book is the interweaving of diversity issues (culture, race, sexuality, etc.) within the text to lend an inclusive, contemporary insight into these important practice components. The Pikes Peak Geropsychology Knowledge and Skill Assessment Tool is included in an appendix so readers can test their knowledge, which will be helpful for those aiming for board certification in geropsychology (ABGERO). This an ideal text for clinical psychologists and mental health professionals transitioning to work with older clients, for those wanting to improve their knowledge for their regular practice, and for trainees or young clinicians just starting out."-- Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC451.4.A5 P79 2021
    1
  • Print
    edited by Scott O. Lilienfeld, Irwin D. Waldman.
    Contents:
    Introduction: psychological science under scrutiny : recent challenges and proposed remedies / Scott O. Lilienfeld and Irwin D. Waldman
    Cross-cutting challenges to psychological science
    Maximizing the reproducibility of your research / Open Science Collaboration
    Powering reproducible research / atherine S. Button and Marcus R. Munaf
    Psychological science's aversion to the null and why many of the things you think are true, aren't / Christopher J. Ferguson and Moritz Heene
    False negatives / Klaus Fiedler and Malte Schott
    Toward transparent reporting of psychological science / Etienne P. LeBel and Leslie K. John
    Decline effects : types, mechanisms, and personal reflections / John Protzko and Jonathan W. Schooler
    Reverse inference / Joachim I. Krueger
    The need for bayesian hypothesis testing in psychological science / Eric-Jan Wagenmakers, Josine Verhagen, Alexander Ly, Dora Matzke, Helen Steingroever, Jeff N. Rouder, and Richard Morey
    Domain-specific challenges to psychological science
    The (partial but) real crisis in social psychology : a social influence analysis of the causes and solutions / Anthony R. Pratkanis
    Popularity as a poor proxy for utility : the case of implicit prejudice / Gregory Mitchell and Philip E. Tetlock
    Suspiciously high correlations in brain imaging research / Edward Vul and Harold Pashler
    Critical issues in genetic association studies / Elizabeth Prom-Wormley, Amy Adkins, Irwin D. Waldman, Danielle Dick
    Is the efficacy of?antidepressant? medications overrated? / Brett J. Deacon and Glen I. Spielmans
    Pitfalls in parapsychological research / Ray Hyman
    Psychological and institutional obstacles to high quality psychological science
    Blind analysis as a correction for confirmatory bias in physics and psychology / Robert J. MacCoun and Saul Perlmutter
    Allegiance effects in clinical psychology research and practice / Marcus T. Boccaccini. David Marcus, and Daniel C. Murrie
    We can do better than fads / Robert J. Sternberg
    Afterword: paul bloom
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Benjamin A. Bensadon.
    Contents:
    1. Goal-Oriented care
    2. Family caregiving
    3. Attitudes, beliefs, and behavior
    4. Communication
    5. Culture of medicine
    6. Psychology consult: when and why
    7. Managing safety and mobility needs of older drivers
    8. Person-centered suicide prevention
    9. End-of-life care
    10. Experiential learning and "selling" geriatrics
    11. Simulation education.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Gisli H. Gudjonsson.
    Contents:
    Part I. The Emerging Science and Practice
    1. An era of enquiry and development
    2. The impact of real-life cases on legal changes, police practice, and science
    3. Interrogative suggestibility
    4. The psychology of false confessions: the theories
    5. The development of the science: the evidence base
    Part II. The Gundmundur and Geirfinnur Cases
    6. Icelandic society in the 1970s
    7. The Keflavik investigation and the first confession
    8. The confessions in the Gudmundur Einarsson case
    9. The confessions in the Geirfinnur Eianrsson case
    10. Misguiding force
    11. The return of the Gudmundur and Geirfinnur cases
    12. The findings from the working group, special prosecutor, and Icelandic Court Cases Review Commission
    Part III. A Psychological Analysis of the Confessions of the Six Convicted Persons
    13. Did Saevar Ciesielski have undiagnosed ADHD?
    14. Erla Bolladottier- a vulnerable young woman
    15. Kristjan Vidarsson's memory distrust syndrome and confession
    16. Tryggvi Leifsson's memory distrust syndrome and confession
    17. Gudjon Skarphedinsson's memory distrust syndrome and confession
    18. Albert Skaftason's memory distrust syndrome and confession
    Appendix 1
    Appendix 2
    References
    Author Index
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Rod A. Martin, Thomas E. Ford.
    Summary: Most of us laugh at something funny multiple times during a typical day. Humor serves multiple purposes, and although there is a sizable and expanding research literature on the subject, the research is spread in a variety of disciplines. The Psychology of Humor, 2e reviews the literature, integrating research from across subdisciplines in psychology, as well as related fields such as anthropology, biology, computer science, linguistics, sociology, and more. This book begins by defining humor and presenting theories of humor. Later chapters cover cognitive processes involved in humor and the effects of humor on cognition. Individual differences in personality and humor are identified as well as the physiology of humor, the social functions of humor, and how humor develops and changes over the lifespan. This book concludes noting the association of humor with physical and mental health, and outlines applications of humor use in psychotherapy, education, and the workplace. In addition to being fully updated with recent research, the second edition includes a variety of new materials. More graphs, tables, and figures now illustrate concepts, processes, and theories. It provides new brief interviews with prominent humor scholars via text boxes. The end of each chapter now includes a list of key concepts, critical thinking questions, and a list of resources for further reading.

    Contents:
    Front-matter
    Copyright
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Chapter 1: Introduction to the Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 2: Classic Theories of Humor
    Chapter 3: Contemporary Theories of Humor
    Chapter 4: The Personality Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 5: The Cognitive Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 6: The Physiological Psychology of Humor and Laughter
    Chapter 7: The Developmental Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 8: The Social Psychology of Humor
    Chapter 9: The Clinical Psychology of Humor: Humor and Mental Health
    Chapter 10: The Health Psychology of Humor: Humor and Physical Health
    Chapter 11: Applications of Humor in Education and in the Workplace
    Bibliography
    Author Index
    Subject Index
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Clive R. Hollin.
    Contents:
    1. Interpersonal Violence
    2."Everyday" Violence
    3. Violence at Home
    4. Criminal Violence
    5. Sexual Violence
    6. Where To Next?
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Gordon L. Flett.
    Summary: The Psychology of Mattering: Understanding the Human Need to be Significant is the first comprehensive examination of mattering that is discussed in terms of associated motives, cognitions, emotions and behaviors. As mattering involves the self in relation to other people, the book tackles key relational themes of internal working models of attachment, transactional processes, and more. Extensive analysis from a conceptual perspective is balanced by a similar analysis of mattering from an applied perspective, specifically the relevance of mattering in clinical and counseling contexts, in assessment and treatment. The book is supported by recent empirical advances making it an authoritative text on the psychology of mattering that will heighten awareness of mattering by informing academic scholars and the general public.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Michael A. West.
    Summary: In the past 20 years meditation has grown in popularity across the world - practiced by the general public, as well as by an increasing number of psychologists within their daily clinical practice. This text explores the practice of meditation and mindfulness, providing accounts of the cognitive and emotional processes elicited in meditation.

    Contents:
    The practice of meditation / Michael A. West
    Meditation : practice and experience / Martine Batchelor
    How conscious experience comes about, and why meditation is helpful / Guy Claxton
    Fish discovering water : meditation as a process of recognition / James Carmody
    Psychology of meditation : philosophical perspectives / Loriliai Biernacki
    Traditional and secular views of psychotherapeutic applications of mindfulness and meditation / Lynn C. Waelde and Jason M. Thompson
    Meditation and the management of pain / Vidyamala Burch
    Addictive disorders / Sarah Bowen ... [et al.]
    Meditation and physical health / Linda E. Carlson
    The cognitive and affective neurosciences of meditation / Antonino Raffone
    Mindfulness and meditation in the workplace : an acceptance and commitment therapy approach / Frank W. Bond, Paul E. Flaxman, and Joda Lloyd
    Mindfulness in education / Katherine Weare
    Meditation : future theory and research / Peter Sedlmeier, Juliane Eberth, and Maika Puta
    How meditation changes lives : practice, research, and personal journeys / Michael A. West.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Dominic Upton, Penney Upton.
    Summary: This book addresses the psychological consequences of wounds and the psychological components of wound care, building on contemporary research evidence and presenting practical clinical guidelines. Particular emphasis is given to the psychological impact of both wounds and wound treatment. Implications for practice are discussed, making this book both educational and practical. Psychology of Wounds and Wound Care in Clinical Practice is aimed at clinicians, including GPs, vascular surgeons and physicians, nurses, especially tissue viability nurses, and podiatrists, and is also of interest to academic teachers and researchers.

    Contents:
    Psychosocial Consequences of Wounds
    Pain
    Stress
    Quality of Life and Well-Being
    Different wound type
    Treatment
    Concordance
    Family, friends and social support
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Barry Cripps.
    Contents:
    The History of Psychometrics / Craig Knight
    Ride the Horse Around the Course: Triangulating Nomothetic and Idiographic Approaches to Personality Assessment / Barry Cripps
    A Very Good Question? / Peter Saville and Rab Maciver
    Big Data and Predictive Analytics: Opportunity or Threat to the Future of Tests and Testing / Eugene Burke
    The Practical Application of Test User Knowledge and Skills / Gerry Duggan
    The Utility of Psychometric Tests for Small Organisations / Paul Barrett
    HR Applications of Psychometrics / Rob Bailey
    Defining and Assessing Leadership Talent: A Multi-layered Approach / Caroline Curtis
    Psychometrics: The Evaluation and Development of Team Performance / Stephen Benton
    Psychometrics in Sport: The Good, the Bad and the Ugly / Dave Collins and Andrew Cruickshank
    Using Psychometrics to Make Management Selection Decisions: A Practitioner Journey / Hugh McCredie
    Psychometrics in Clinical Settings / Hamilton Fairfax
    The Use and Misuse of Psychometrics in Clinical Settings / Susan van Scoyoc
    Measuring the Dark Side / Adrian Furnham
    Projective Measures and Occupational Assessment / Christopher Ridgeway
    Testing across Cultures: Translation, Adaptation and Indigenous: Test Development / Lina Daouk-Oyry and Pia Zeinoun
    Personality Testing in the Workplace: Can Internet Business Disruption Erode the Influence of Psychology Ethics? / Earon Kavanagh
    A Practitioner's Viewpoint: Limitations and Assumptions Implicit in Assessment / Jay Roseveare
    When Profit Comes In the Door, Does Science Go Out the Window? / Robert Forde
    The Future of Psychometric Testing / Robert McHenry.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Carina Coulacoglou, Donald H. Sklofske.
    Summary: Psychometrics and Psychological Assessment: Principles and Applications reports on contemporary perspectives and models on psychological assessment and their corresponding measures. It highlights topics relevant to clinical and neuropsychological domains, including cognitive abilities, adaptive behavior, temperament, and psychopathology.Moreover, the book examines a series of standard as well as novel methods and instruments, along with their psychometric properties, recent meta-analytic studies, and their cross-cultural applications.

    Contents:
    Recent advances in psychological assessment and test construction
    Classical test theory, generalizablity theory, and item response perspectives on reliability
    Validity
    Advances in latent variable measurement modeling
    Executive function, theory of mind, and adaptive behavior
    Metacognition, empathy, and cognitive biases in schizophrenia and OCD
    The role of temperament in development and psychopathology
    The assessment of family, parenting, and child outcomes
    Perspectives and advances in personality
    Measures of personality
    Advances in theoretical, developmental and cross-cultural perspectives of psychopathology
    Psychiatric taxonomies and corresponding measures
    Theoretical perspectives of criminal behaviors and developmental criminology
    General overview of violence risk assessment and corresponding measures
    The aggressive implications of suicide.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Ana Hategan, James A. Bourgeois, Azim S. Gangji, Tricia K.W. Woo, editors.
    Summary: The book focuses on pharmacological and non-pharmacological approaches of psychiatric syndromes that commonly occur in patients with kidney disease. It specifically reviews principles of psychotherapy and psychopharmacology with an emphasis on organ impairment and drug-drug interactions specific to nephrology. This book also covers issues with medication nonadherence in patients with chronic kidney disease and psychiatric comorbidity, as well as the associated issues in dialysis and renal transplantation. Additionally, chapters cover various other topics addressing an active stance towards health promotion in chronically ill patients, including the critical role of the diet and physical activity. Such advice is often complex and changing depending on the stage of chronic kidney disease and the individual needs of the patient. Written by specialists in the field, Psychonephrology: A Guide to Principles and Practice serves as a valuable reference and teaching tool that provides an opportunity for learning across a rapidly evolving medical field.

    Contents:
    Section I. Fundamentals of Psychonephrology
    Psychiatric examination in nephrology
    Psychometric assessment of neuropsychological function in kidney disease
    Current state, knowledge gaps, and management strategies of kidney disease for the psychiatrist
    Renal transplant essentials
    Overview of psychopharmacology principles in nephrology
    Renal toxicity of psychotropic medications
    Overview of psychotherapy principles for patients with kidney disease
    Decisional capacity determinations in psychonephrology
    Consultation-liaison psychiatry and collaborative care models of the patient with renal disease
    Section II. Common Psychiatric Presentations and their Management in the Patient with Kidney Disease
    Common psychiatric disorders in the renal patient
    Substance use disorders and the kidney
    Neurocognitive ramifications of renal disease
    Sexuality and sexual dysfunction in the renal patient
    Psychotoxicity of immunomodulators: corticosteroids, mycophenolate, tacrolimus, cyclophosphamide, and hydroxychloroquine
    Psychological aspects of adaptation to critical care nephrology, dialysis, and transplantation for the patient and the caregiver
    Palliative, end-of-life, and psychiatric care of patients with advanced renal disease
    Difficult patient encounters in nephrology
    Section III. Special Issues in Psychonephrology
    Chronic kidney disease and the aging population: Addressing unmet needs
    Physical activity and nutrition in chronic kidney disease
    Gender disparity and women's health in kidney disease
    Cultural considerations when caring for racial and ethnic minority patients with end-stage renal disease
    Occupation-related stress affecting physicians caring for patients with renal disease
    Modernizing continuing professional development using social media
    Psychonephrology of the future: A global psychiatry and nephrology inter-specialty curriculum for training the next generation of specialists.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Margarita Sáenz-Herrero.
    Summary: Gender has a fundamental influence on the human brain, not only by virtue of biological and hormonal differences between the sexes but also because of the impact of gender-specific cultural, social, anthropological, and environmental factors. Nevertheless, the relation of gender and psychopathology remains a largely neglected field. Gender perspective has been treated as a paradigm in this book on psychopathology because it determines the way in which a psychiatric symptom is defined, perceived, and understood. This conception of gender as being of key importance in the definition of psychiatric symptomatology is exceptional in the literature. The book opens by examining historical and cultural aspects of mental health in women worldwide and the relation of sex, brain, and gender, with coverage of both neurobiological and psychosocial aspects. The significance of gender with regard to specific aspects of psychopathology is then addressed in detail. A wide range of psychological disorders are considered, as well as hormonal influences and issues concerning body image, self identity, sexuality, and life instinct. It is hoped that this book will make a significant contribution in ensuring that gender perspective receives due attention within descriptive psychopathology.

    Contents:
    Historical and Cultural Aspects: Women and mental Health all over the world
    Sex, Brain and Gender: Neurobiology
    Sexual Differentiation of the Human Nervous System
    Psychosocial Aspects
    Specific Pathology in Women: Body Image, Corporality and Corporeality
    Body and corporality
    Concept and History of Body Image
    Body and Hysteria: Dissociated body
    Corporality and Trauma
    Dysmorphophobia: From Neuroticism to Psychoticism
    Self Identity and Gender differences
    Psychopathology of Eating Behavior
    Anorexia Nervosa
    Bulimia Nervosa
    Binge Eating Disorder
    Eating Disorder not otherwise specified
    Avoidant/ restrictive food intake disorders
    Psychopathology of Sexuality
    Psychopathology of Life Instinct
    Psychopathology associated to Hormonal Aspects: Relation of Estrogen, cycle phases and Psychopathology in Women
    Dysphoric Syndrome
    Depression during Pregnancy
    Postpartum and postnatal depression
    Puerperal Psychosis
    Menopause Depression
    Psychopathology and Gender in Psychiatric Syndromes and New Disorders: Mood Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders
    Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
    Schizophrenia
    Bipolar Disorder
    Personality Disorders and Gender Differences
    Borderline Personality Disorder
    Addiction
    Social and cultural differences
    Somatomorphic and Factitious Disorders
    Psychopathology Gender, Creativity, Body Art and Feminism
    Controversial Aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Margarita Saenz-Herrero, editor.
    Summary: This book examines sex and gender differences in the causes and expression of medical conditions, including mental health disorders. Sex differences are variations attributable to individual reproductive organs and the XX or XY chromosomal complement. Gender differences are variations that result from biological sex as well as individual self-representation which include psychological, behavioural, and social consequences of an individuals perceived gender. Gender is still a neglected field in psychopathology, and gender differences is often incorrectly used as a synonym of sex differences. A reconsideration of the definition of gender, as the term that subsumes masculinity and femininity, could shed some light on this misperception and could have an effect in the study of health and disease. This second edition of Psychopathology clarifies the anthropological, cultural and social aspects of gender and their impact on mental health disorders. It focuses on gender perspective as a paradigm not only in psychopathology but also in mental health disorders. As such it promotes open mindedness in the definition and perception of symptoms, as well as assumptions about those symptoms, and raises awareness of mental health.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; About the Editor; Introduction; Part I: General Aspects;
    1: Women Mental Health All over the World: Sociopolitical Aspects of Gender Discrimination and Violence: Immigration and Transnational Motherhood; 1.1 The Social Health Approach; 1.2 Gender Violence: A Public Health Problem Around the World; 1.2.1 Defining Poverty and Its Gender Distribution; 1.2.2 Human Trafficking; 1.2.3 Women in Armed Conflicts; 1.3 International Recommendations for the Prevention of Gender-Based Violence; 1.4 Prevention and Response; 1.5 The Feminization of Immigration 1.5.1 Transnational Motherhood1.6 The Empowerment of Women; References;
    2: What Is Human Resilience and Why Does It Matter?; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 The Many Definitions of Resilience and Related Terminology; 2.2.1 Origins of Resilience Research; 2.3 Resilience as a Complex and Dynamic 'Natural' Human Process; 2.4 Context Matters: Challenging Normative Stands in Definitions; 2.5 Going Beyond the Individual: The Structural Factors that Support, Enhance or Diminish Resilience Trajectories; 2.6 Gender Blindness: When Resilience Is About Rights and Equity; 2.7 Conclusion; References
    3: Intimate Partner Violence Against Women: Impact on Mental Health3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Explanatory Models; 3.2.1 Individual; 3.2.2 Microsystem; 3.2.3 Exosystem; 3.2.4 Macrosystem; 3.3 Vulnerability Factors: Attachment, Trauma, Resilience and Intimate Partner Violence Against Women; 3.4 Psychic Changes in People Exposed to Protracted Traumas; 3.4.1 Coercive Persuasion; 3.4.2 Domestic Stockholm Syndrome; 3.4.3 Paradoxical Adaptation to Domestic Violence Syndrome; 3.4.4 Cycle of Violence; 3.5 Specific Aspects of Mental Health Issues in Women Victims of Intimate Partner Violence Against Women 3.5.1 SMI and IPV Against Women3.5.2 Depression and Suicide; 3.5.3 PTSD; 3.5.4 Complex PTSD; 3.5.5 Substance Abuse; 3.5.6 Dissociative Disorders; 3.5.7 Psychosomatic Disorders; 3.5.8 Eating Disorders; 3.6 Final Thoughts About Intervention and Impact on Healthcare Professionals; 3.6.1 Impact of Working with IPV Victims on Professionals; References;
    4: Sexual Violence: Effects on Women's Identity and Mental Health; 4.1 The Roots of Sexual Violence; 4.1.1 Sexual Violence Throughout History; 4.1.2 Sexual Violence, Patriarchy and Desire; 4.2 Types of Sexual Violence and Their Context 4.2.1 Sexual Harassment4.2.2 Sexual Abuse; 4.2.3 Sexual Assault; 4.2.4 Other Sexual Violence Scenarios; 4.2.5 Sexual Violence in Childhood, Adolescence and in the Couple; 4.2.5.1 Sexual Abuse in Childhood; 4.2.5.2 Child Sexual Abuse Inside and Outside the Family; 4.2.5.3 Sexual Violence in Adolescents and the Use of Social Media; 4.2.5.4 Sexual Violence in the Couple; 4.2.6 Prostitution; 4.2.7 Human Trafficking; 4.2.8 Female Genital Mutilation; 4.3 Current Discussions on Sexual Violence; 4.4 Impact of Sexual Violence on Women's Mental Health; 4.4.1 The Starting Point
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Luca Malatesti, John McMillan, Predrag Šustar, editors.
    Summary: This book explains the ethical and conceptual tensions in the use of psychopathy in different countries, including America, Canada, the UK, Croatia, Australia, and New Zealand. It offers an extensive critical analysis of how psychopathy functions within institutional and social contexts. Inside, readers will find innovative interdisciplinary analysis, written by leading international experts. The chapters explore how different countries have used this diagnosis. A central concern is whether psychopathy is a mental disorder, and this has a bearing upon whether it should be used. The books case studies will help readers understand the problems associated with psychopathy. Academics and students working in the philosophy of psychiatry, bioethics, and moral psychology will find it a valuable resource. In addition, it will also appeal to mental health professionals working in forensic settings, psychologists with an interest in the ethical implications of the use of psychopathy as a construct and particularly those with a research interest in it.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the Volume
    Part I: Diagnosing Psychopathy. Practices, Case Studies, and Practical Concerns
    Chapter 1. Introductory Chapter
    Chapter 2. What it means to be Diagnosed as a Psychopath
    Chapter 3. The uses of the Construct of Psychopathy in the USA
    Chapter 4. The uses of the Construct of Psychopathy in UK
    Chapter 5. Antisocial Personality Disorders and Preventive Sentencing in New Zealand
    Chapter 6. The use of the Notion of Psychopathy within the Legal and Treatment Practice in Croatia
    Part II: The Plausibility of the Construct and the Validity of Psychopathy: Psychometric and Philosophical Issues
    Chapter 7
    Introductory Chapter
    Chapter 8. Psychopathy as a Scientific kind: Epistemic Usefulness, Metaphysical Underpinnings, and kind Construction
    Chapter 9. Capturing the Complexity of Psychopathic Personality Disorder: Recent Developments in the Assessment of the Disorder
    Chapter 10. The State of the Art of Neuropsychological Studies of Psychopathy
    Chapter 11. Psychopathy: Neuro-Hype and its Consequences
    Chapter 12. Psychopathy and the Issue of Existence
    Part III: Is Psychopathy a Mental Illness?
    Chapter 13. The Illness Status of Psychopathy: Between Biological Functions and Norms
    Chapter 14. The Medicalisation of Psychopathy
    Chapetr 15. Sameness in Darkness: Gender and Psychopathy
    Chapter 16. Psychopathy and Societal Values
    Chapter 17. Psychopathy and Public Values
    Conclusion of the Volume.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Grahame-Smith, David Grahame; Hippius, Hanns; Winokur, George.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC483 .P974
    1
  • Print
    Grahame-Smith, David Grahame; Hippius, Hanns; Winokur, George.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC483 .P975
    1
  • Digital
    David N. Osser
    Summary: "Algorithms are useful in the field of psychopharmacology as they can serve as guidelines for avoiding the biases and cognitive lapses that are common when treating conditions that rely on uncertain data. In spite of this, evidence-based practices in psychopharmacology often require years to become widely adopted. The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at Harvard's South Shore Medical Program is an effort to speed up the adoption of evidence-based research into the day-to-day treatment of patients"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    On the Value of Evidence-Based Psychopharmacology Algorithms / David N. Osser, Robert D. Patterson
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Unipolar Nonpsychotic Depression / Christoforos Iraklis Giakoumatos and David Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Bipolar Depression / Arash Ansari and David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Algorithm for Acute Mania / Othman Mohammad and David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : Update on Psychotic Depression / Michael Tang, David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Schizophrenia / David N. Osser, Mohsen Jalali Roudsari, and Theo Manschreck
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Algorithm for Generalized Anxiety Disorder / Harmony Raylen Abejuel, and David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at The Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Generalized Social Anxiety Disorder / David N. Osser and Lance R. Dunlop
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An Update on Posttraumatic Stress Disorder / Laura A. Bajor, Ana Nectara Ticlea, and David N. Osser
    The Psychopharmacology Algorithm Project at the Harvard South Shore Program : An algorithm for adults with obsessive-compulsive disorder / Ashley M. Beaulieua, Edward Tabaskyb, David N. Osser
    Pharmacologic Approach to the Psychiatric Inpatient / Arash Ansari, David N. Osser, Leonard S. Lai, Paul M. Schoenfeld, and Kenneth C. Potts
    Guidelines, Algorithms, and Evidence-Based Psychopharmacology Training for Psychiatric Residents / David N. Osser, Robert D. Patterson, James J. Levitt
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    Megan Galbally, Martien Snellen, Andrew Lewis, editors.
    Summary: This book examines the role of psychopharmacological treatment in a range of disorders that may be encountered during pregnancy, including major depressive disorders, anxiety disorders, bipolar affective disorder, schizophrenia, eating disorders, and substance abuse. The natural history of each condition pre- and post-partum is analyzed, and the evidence for the efficacy of drug treatments, evaluated. Special attention is paid to the potential dangers of different treatment options for both mother and fetus, covering risks of malformation, pregnancy and obstetric risks, neonatal risks, and possible long-term consequences. The risks of not treating a particular condition are also analyzed. On the basis of the available evidence, management guidelines are provided that additionally take into account non-pharmacological options. Closing chapters consider the value of complementary and alternative medicine and ECT and explore future research directions.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Pharmacological Treatments of Mental Disorders in Pregnancy
    The Process of Obtaining Informed Consent When Prescribing Psychopharmacology in Pregnancy
    Critical Evaluation of the Literature: Understanding the Complexities of Observational Research
    Maternal and Fetal Factors That Influence Prenatal Exposure to Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitor Antidepressants
    Pharmacological Management of Major Depression in Pregnancy
    Anxiety and Sleep Disorders, Psychopharmacology, and Pregnancy
    Bipolar Disorder, Psychopharmacology, and Pregnancy
    Schizophrenia, Psychopharmacology, and Pregnancy
    Postpartum Psychosis
    Borderline Personality Disorder and the Eating Disorders in the Perinatal Period
    Management of Substance Abuse in Pregnancy: Maternal and Neonatal Aspects
    Complements and Alternatives to Psychopharmacology During Pregnancy
    Electroconvulsive Therapy in Pregnancy.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniel P. Greenfield.
    Summary: This unique, easy-to-read title offers a concise, practical guide to psychopharmacology and psychopharmacotherapy. Designed for a wide range of practitioners and trainees in general and mental healthcare, this invaluable primer provides foundational information for those who wish to cultivate a deeper understanding of the often-mysterious psychopharmacology medication family. Unlike other books on this topic, the primer positions psychopharmacology within the larger context of psychiatric and psychological treatment and also discusses the variety of therapeutic and somatic techniques available to providers and their patients. Further, since many patients with psychiatric conditions unfortunately find themselves interacting with the justice system, the author offers useful considerations related to the intersection of mental health and the law. The primer consists of 13 chapters and is organized in four parts: Part 1 covers essentials of pharmacology and psychopharmacology, outlining the basic principles of pharmacology, psychopharmacology, and psychopharmacotherapy. Part 2 addresses therapies that may involve psychopharmacology/ psychopharmacotherapy, providing a succinct overview of selected and representative types of psychotherapy and counseling in contemporary psychiatry and psychology. Part 3 discusses forensic and legal applications of psychopharmacology/ psychopharmacotherapy, drawing on the authors long experience in various aspects of forensic psychiatry. Part 4 consists of one final chapter, titled "Synthesis and Conclusions." This chapter pulls together the most salient points of the book to assist the reader in the practical psychopharmacotherapeutic treatment of patients/clients. A timely and invaluable contribution to the literature, Psychopharmacology for Non-Psychiatrists: A Primer will be of great benefit as a user-friendly resource for professionals or as an exam-preparation book for medical students and trainees in a wide range of mental health fields. Specifically, the primer will be of great interest to primary care physicians, nurse practitioners, physician assistants, counselors, therapists, non-psychiatric physicians and dentists whose practices involve psychopharmacotherapy, naturopaths, homeopaths, physical therapists, occupational therapists, and speech/language therapists. Legal professionals and others who are not themselves healthcare professionals, but who interact with healthcare professionals, also will find the primer a handy resource.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Epidemiologic Triangle Model, Diagnosis, Psychiatric Diagnosis, and Other Necessary Preliminaries
    Basic Principles of Pharmacology, Psychopharmacology, and Psychopharmacotherapy
    The Four Major Anti-s
    The Sixteen Minor Anti-s
    Illicit Substances and Drugs
    Botanicals, Herbals, Nutraceuticals and (Dietary) Supplements ("Natural Products")
    A Selective Overview of Therapies In Mental Health Care
    Psychotherapies and Counseling
    Somatic Therapies (Somatotherapies)
    Overview
    Selection and Use of Experts: Five Questions
    Evaluating Versus Treating Doctor/Therapist: A Word To The Wise
    Synthesis and Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Luigi Grassi, Michelle Riba, editors.
    Summary: This practical manual presents the main drugs and protocols currently used in the psychopharmacological treatment of psychiatric disorders in cancer and palliative care settings and explores the principal issues involved in such treatment. Significant clinical challenges encountered in the psychopharmacological management of various psychiatric conditions are discussed, covering aspects such as side-effects and drug-drug interactions. Attention is also paid to the emerging theme of adjuvant use of psychotropic drugs for the treatment of symptoms or syndromes not primarily related to psychiatric disorders (e.g. pain, hot flashes). In addition, practical suggestions are provided for dealing with special populations, including children, the elderly, and people affected by severe mental illness. The book is designed to be easy to read and to reference: information is clearly displayed in concise tables and boxes, accompanied by further detail within the text and clinical vignettes. The authors include some of the most renowned clinicians working in the field of psycho-oncology.

    Contents:
    Psychopharmacology in Oncology and Palliative Care: General Issues
    General Principles of Psychopharmacological Treatment in Psycho-Oncology
    Diagnostic Issues
    Psychological Assessment in Psychopharmacology
    Interpersonal Relationship Issues in Psychopharmacology
    Integration of Psychopharmacotherapy with Psychotherapy and Other Psychosocial Treatment
    Psychopharmacology and Complementary and Nonconventional Treatments in Oncology
    Treatment of Anxiety and Stress-Related Disorders
    Pharmacotherapy of Depression in Cancer Patients
    Treatment of Somatoform Disorders and Other Somatic Symptom Conditions (Pain, Fatigue, Hot Flashes, and Pruritus)
    Bipolar Disorder in the Cancer Patient
    Treatment of Delirium and Confusional States in Oncology and Palliative Care Settings
    Pharmacological Treatment of Psychotic Disorders
    Treatment of Sleep Disorders
    Substance Abuse in Oncology
    Treatment of Sexual Disorders Following Cancer Treatments
    Psychiatric Emergencies
    Psychopharmacology in Palliative Care and Oncology: Childhood and Adolescence
    Special Issues in Psychopharmacology: The Elderly
    Sedation for Psychological Distress at the End of Life
    Research Issues in Psychopharmacology in Oncology and Palliative Care Settings
    Ethics of Psychopharmacological and Biological Treatments in Psycho-oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Victor I. Reus, Daniel Lindqvist.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Elena Vittoria Longhi, Giorgio Franco, Fulvio Colombo.
    Summary: This book combines concise descriptions of the various andrological surgical interventions in the adolescent and adult with detailed analysis of the pre- and postoperative psychosexual counseling of the patient and his family that is appropriate to each procedure. It offers a multidisciplinary approach to the candidate for andrological surgery that reflects the everyday experiences of an andro-sexology team. Each chapter focuses on a particular surgical procedure. Succinct description of the disease and its epidemiology, diagnosis, and treatment is followed by extensive discussion of all aspects of psychosexual relevance and the required counseling. Topics addressed include, for example, the impact of diagnosis, body image issues, fears relating to the surgical procedure and its outcome, the risk of excessive expectations and consequent disillusionment, relationship issues and communication problems, and the role of the sexologist. The analysis and guidance offered in this book will be of particular value to the less experienced andrologist and will assist in achieving postoperative patient satisfaction.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Perry M. Nicassio, editor.
    Contents:
    1. The importance of the biopsychosocial model for understanding the adjustment to arthritis
    2. Mechanisms of arthritis pain
    3. Understanding and enhancing pain coping in patients with arthritis pain
    4. Psychological factors in arthritis: cause or consequence?
    5. Stress in arthritis
    6. Socioeconomic disparities in arthritis
    7. The heart of clinical relationships: doctor-patient communication in rheumatology
    8. Resilience to chronic arthritis pain is not about stopping pain that will not stop: development of a dynamic model of effecttive pain adaptation
    9. Sleep disturbance in rheumatic disease
    10. Disability, limitations, and function for people for arthritis
    11. Revisiting unequal treatment: disparities in access to and quality of care for arthritis
    12. Evaluation of psychological distress in the rheumatology clinic
    13. Physical activity and psychosocial aspects of arthritis
    14. Evidence-based complementary and alternative medical approaches for arthritis
    15. Enhancing clinical practice with community-based self-management support programs
    16. The nature, efficacy, and future of behavioral treatments for arthritis
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Kurt Fritzsche, Susan H. McDaniel, Michael Wirsching.
    Summary: Psychosocial problems appear within a medical context worldwide, and are a major burden to health. Psychosomatic Medicine: An International Primer for the Primary Care Setting takes a uniquely global approach in laying the foundations of biopsychosocial basic care (such as recognizing psychosocial and psychosomatic problems, basic counseling, and collaboration with mental health specialists) and provides relevant information about the most common mental and psychosomatic problems and disorders. The scope of the book is interculturalit addresses global cultures, subcultures living in a single country, and strengthening the care given by physicians working abroad. This clinically useful book outlines best practices for diagnosing the most common biopsychosocialproblems and mastering the most common communication challenges (e.g. doctor-patient conversation, breaking bad news, dealing with difficult patients, family and health systems communication and collaboration). Every chapter integrates basic theoretical background and practical skills and includes trans-culturally sensitive material, important for work with patients from different cultures. Psychosomatic Medicine: An International Primer for the Primary Care Setting serves as an excellent resource for clinicians hoping to gain and develop knowledge and skills in psychosomatic medicine.

    Contents:
    What is Psychosomatic Medicine?
    Psychosomatic Medicine in Primary Care
    Objectives of Training in Psychosomatic Medicine in Primary Care
    Traditional Medicine and Psychosomatic Medicine
    The Doctor-Patient Relationship
    Doctor Patient Communication
    Family Medicine
    Balint Group
    Depressive Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders
    Somatoform Disorders
    Psycho-Oncology
    Psycho-Cardiology
    Acute and Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)
    Addiction
    Systems Development of Behavioral Health in Primary Care
    The Development of Psychosomatic Medicine in China, Vietnam and LaosThe ASIA-LINK Program
    Psychosomatic Medicine and its Implementation in the Latin America Region
    Psychosomatic Medicine in Iran.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Marc Lévêque ; preface by Bart Nuttin ; afterword by Marwan Hariz.
    Summary: Psychosurgery, or the surgical treatment of mental disorders, has enjoyed a spectacular revival over the past ten years as new brain stimulation techniques have become available. Neuromodulation offers new possibilities for the treatment of psychiatric disorders such as depression, obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), addiction, eating disorders and autism. This work presents the history of this unique specialty and investigates current techniques and ethical challenges. With a wealth of illustrations and detailed anatomical diagrams, it provides essential information for medical practitioners, as well as anyone else interested in the fascinating advances being made in neuroscience today.

    Contents:
    A Controversial Past
    The Neuroanatomy of Emotions
    Psychosurgical Procedures
    Disorders for Which Psychosurgery Is Relevant Today
    Some Legitimate Ethical Questions
    What Is Next?
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jeffery Smith.
    Summary: This title combines the many schools of thought on psychotherapy into one reader-friendly guide that coaches psychotherapists through the various techniques needed as the field expands. Unlike any other book on the market, this text considers all of the simultaneous advances in the field, including the neurobiology of emotions, the importance of the therapeutic relationship, mindfulness meditation, and the role of the body in healing. Written with genuine respect for all traditions from CBT to psychodynamics, the book unifies views of psychopathology and cure based on the notion of the mind-brain as an organ of affect regulation. The book accounts for the tasks that characterize psychotherapist activity in all therapies, how they are performed, and how they result in therapeutic change. The book also reviews the various pathologies seen in general practice and guides the reader to the specific therapist-patient interactions needed for their resolution. With its big-picture focus on clinical practice, Psychotherapy: A Practical Guide is a concise resource for students, psychotherapists, psychologists, residents, and all who seek to integrate what is new in psychotherapy.

    Contents:
    Avoidance of affect, a basic human instinct operating throughout development
    How painful affects are detoxified in psychotherapy and in life
    Creating a safe and attuned context
    Bringing dreaded feelings into consciousness
    Challenging and inviting change of dysfunctional patterns of though, values and behavior
    Building a narrative framework to support change
    Seeking to understand what is observed
    Introduction: Critical periods in development and the problems they pose
    Group One: Schemas, nonverbal learned behavior patterns that increase pleasure and avoid pain
    Group Two: Dissociative patterns
    Group Three: Inborn avoidance mechanisms: Anxiety, depression, and obsessive-compulsive patterns.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Adam M. Brenner, Laura S. Howe-Martin.
    Summary: "Offering unique, essential coverage of the theoretical foundations and core techniques of a variety of psychotherapies, Psychotherapy: A Practical Introduction is a one-stop resource for psychiatry residents and psychiatrists beginning practice, as well as graduate trainees in psychology and clinical social work. This practical reference is an invaluable tool for understanding the common approaches fundamental to all therapies, exploring the most frequently used therapy approaches, learning evidence-based approaches for making treatment decisions, and engaging patients in safe and effective psychotherapies, regardless of treatment setting. For faculty instructors, brand new resource provides a readable, highly applicable core textbook for any introductory psychotherapy course or psychotherapy didactic series. Offers a straightforward entryway to learning the essentials of psychotherapeutic work, with synopses and basic instructions for all ACGME-required approaches to psychotherapy (supportive, cognitive-behavioral, and psychodynamic approaches) and a helpful comparison and discussion of what works across all therapies, as well as how to incorporate the patient's broader system and cultural background into treatment. Includes an overview of assessment and case conceptualization that includes taking a useful history, articulating goals of the potential treatment, evaluation of the patient's capacity to engage in talk-based treatment, and guidance on appropriate therapy selection. Contains a section on providing psychotherapy in different clinical settings, such as community mental health settings, inpatient psychiatric units, consultation-liaison medical settings, and emergency rooms and crisis centers. Discusses combining therapy with medication (from both the perspective of MDs and non-MDs partnering with a prescriber), as well as a final chapter that highlights how trainees can prepare to make the most of psychotherapy supervision"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Lay of the Land / Adam M. Brenner
    Case Conceptualization and Psychological Assessment in Psychotherapy / Laura S. Howe-Martin
    Fitting the Therapy and the Therapist to the Patient / Shirali Patel and Adam M. Brenner
    How to Begin : Empathy, Alliance, and Boundaries / Adam M. Brenner
    Supportive Psychotherapy / Randon S. Welton and Erin M. Crocker
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy / Donna M. Sudak and Prasad R. Joshi
    Psychodynamic Therapy / Larry Thornton
    Beyond the Therapy Dyad : The Importance of Systems and Culture / Mona A. Robbins and Laura S. Howe-Martin,
    Psychotherapy in the Community Mental Health Setting / Amy S. Brenner
    Psychotherapy Within Consultation-Liaison Settings / Lindsey Pershern and Ben Lippe
    Psychotherapy in the Emergency Room/Crisis Clinical Encounter / Alexander S. Kane, Alison E. Lenet, and Deborah L. Cabaniss
    Psychotherapy on Inpatient Psychiatric Units / Amy S. Brenner and Adam M. Brenner
    Integrating Medication and Therapy / Matan White and Heidi Koehler
    Using Psychotherapy Supervision in Training and Beyond / Sallie G. De Golia and Megan E. Tan.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2021
  • Digital
    edited by , María Reinares, Anabel Martínez-Arán, Eduard Vieta.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Sita Patel, Daryn Reicherter, editors.
    Contents:
    Immigrant youth life stressors
    Cognitive-behavioral therapy for immigrant youth: the essentials
    Family factors: immigrant families and intergenerational considerations
    School-based interventions
    Trauma and acculturative stress
    Combined psychotherapy with psychopharmacology
    Information systems and technology
    Treating forcibly displaced young people: global challenges in mental healthcare
    Immigrant youth and navigating unique systems that interact with treatment
    Cultural perspectives in the context of Western psychological mind-sets: the need for cultural sensitivity in the mental health of immigrant youth
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Adriana Roncella, Christian Pristipino, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Complex psychoneural processes in ischemic heart disease: evidences for a systems medicine framework
    2. Psychosocial risk factors and coronary artery disease
    3. Psychological stress, inflammation, immunity, and coagulation intertwining in ischemic heart disease
    4. The second brain and possible interactions with the heart
    5. Sleep and dreams in cardiovascular pathophysiology
    6. The role of gender in the mind-heart relationship
    7. Integrated approach for cardiac patients and psychological interventions
    8. Psycho-educational interventions and cardiac rehabilitation
    9. Psychiatric pharmacotherapy in coronary artery disease patients
    10. Evidence-based psychotherapy in ischemic heart disease: umbrella review and updated meta-analysis
    11. Cognitive and behavioral psychotherapy in coronary artery disease
    12. Mind-body practices for prevention and treatment of cardiovascular disease
    13. Short-term psychotherapy in patients with acute myocardial infarction
    14. Psychometric tests: epistemology, rationale, aims, and applicability in cardiology, open issues
    15. Projective tests: the six-drawings test in ischemic heart disease
    16. Verbal communication and effective communication: communication in the psychotherapeutic setting
    17. Nonverbal communication: the forgotten frame
    18. Psychotherapy for cardiac patients: selection of clinical cases, part I
    19. Psychotherapy for cardiac patients: selection of clinical cases, part II
    20. A model integrating psychotherapy into medical practices at San Filippo Neri Hospital in Rome, Italy
    21. Model to integrate psychology/psychotherapy with medical activities at the Hospital of Terni, Italy
    22. An integrative model of psychotherapy in medical practice according to GICR-IACPR.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Joel Paris.
    Contents:
    Psychiatry : mindless or brainless?
    The limits of neuroscience
    Prescribing and overprescribing
    Thinking interactively
    Paradigms and practice
    What psychiatrists don't know about psychotherapy
    Integrating psychotherapy into practice
    Epilogue : psychiatry and humanism.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Peter N. Novalis, Virginia Singer, Carol M. Novalis.
    Summary: "To practice psychotherapy in a correctional setting is to encounter a range of cultural issues reflecting the various ethnic, class, gender, and physical subgroups of the prison population-as well as to navigate the culture of the prison, staff, and justice system that underpins the patients' circumstances. Drawing on the authors' extensive professional experience, Psychotherapy in Corrections offers mental health professionals a comprehensive look at the most common situations they are likely to face and provides practical advice on dealing with them. Diagnostically oriented chapters cover core issues that include self-harm and substance use disorders, as well as mood and personality disorders. Specific supportive therapy techniques for addressing these issues, as well as special situations-including the experience of women in prison, behaviors that can disrupt care, and efforts to reduce recidivism-are illustrated by clinical vignettes. In tackling the social and developmental conditions that lead individuals to interact with the correctional system, Psychotherapy in Corrections also acknowledges the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic and the movement for social justice on society. Anyone who conducts psychotherapy in a prison setting will benefit from an approach centered on treating the human in front of them, regardless of the setting or their crime"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Supportive psychotherapy in the correctional environment
    The techniques of supportive psychotherapy
    Entering the institution
    Managing therapy
    Crisis, self-harm, and suicidal behavior
    Trauma
    Substance use disorders
    Serious mental illness
    Mood disorders
    (They've got) personality (disorder) : a challenge in corrections
    Women in prison
    Deception and disruption
    Special topics
    Time to say goodbye.
  • Print
    edited by Rajesh R. Tampi, Brandon Yarns, Kristina F. Zdanys, Deena J. Tampi.
    Summary: "Psychotherapy is underutilized in later life, although decades of evidence point to its effectiveness for older adults. Psychotherapy in Later Life, with chapters written by leaders in old-age mental health, aims to help the psychiatrist, trainee, or other interested clinician learn of the special issues in psychotherapy with older adults and initiate practice of the leading evidence-based approaches. First, the reader is introduced to the indications for psychotherapy in later life and instructions on choosing an appropriate modality. In four extended chapters, how-to guides with practical instructions, detailed case presentations, and resources are presented for evidence-based approaches in later life: cognitive behavioral therapy, problem-solving therapy, interpersonal therapy, and psychodynamic therapy. Finally, special topics are reviewed, including psychotherapy in patients with cognitive disorders, combined psychotherapy and medication management, psychotherapy with diverse older adults, individual versus group psychotherapy, and psychotherapy at the end of life. This accessible work, intended to be scholarly yet practical, aspires to be a key resource for clinicians"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to psychotherapy with older adults / Erica Garcia-Pittman, Victor Gonzalez, Anh-Thu Tran, Christine Dozier
    Indications for psychotherapy with older adults / Danielle Tolton, Tyler Durns, Sarah A. Nguyen, Neha Jain
    Choice of psychotherapy approach / Feyza Marouf
    Cognitive behavioral therapy / Patricia Bamonti, Lindsey Jacobs
    Problem-solving therapy / Brenna N. Renn, Brittany A. Mosser, Patrick J. Raue
    Interpersonal therapy / Mark D. Miller, Richard K. Morycz
    Short-term psychodynamic therapy / Patricia Coughlin, Brandon Yarns
    Other therapies / Renz Juaneza, Nery Diaz, Pallavi Joshi
    Psychotherapy and cognitive disorders / Cynthia Kraus-Schuman, Melissa Sanchez, Karen Benson, Ali Abbas Asghar-Ali
    Combined psychotherapy and medication management / Meera Balasubramaniam, Deepti Anbarasan, Paul Campion
    Psychotherapy with diverse older adults / Sarah A. Nguyen, Philip Blumenshine, Boski Patel
    Individual versus group psychotherapy / Paroma Mitra
    End of life issues / Sandra Swantek, James Gerhart.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Omar C.G. Gelo, Alfred Pritz, Bernd Rieken, editors.
    Summary: This book provides readers with essential information on the foundations of psychotherapy research, and on its applications to the study of both psychotherapy process and outcome. The aim is to stimulate a reflection on these issues in a way that will benefit researchers and clinicians, as well as undergraduate and graduate students, at different levels and from different perspectives. Accordingly, the book presents a balanced mix of chapters summarizing the state of the art in the field from different viewpoints and covering innovative topics and perspectives, reflecting some of the most established traditions and, at the same time, emerging approaches in the field in several countries. The contributors, who were invited from among the experts in our national and international professional networks, also represent a healthy mix of leading figures and young researchers. The first part of the book addresses a number of fundamental issues in psychotherapy research at a historical, philosophical, and theoretical level. The second part of the book is concerned with research on psychotherapy processes; in this regard, both quantitative and qualitative approaches are given equal consideration in order to reflect the growing relevance of the latter. The book's third and last part examines research on psychotherapy outcomes, primarily focusing on quantitative approaches. Offering a balanced mix of perspectives, approaches and topics, the book represents a valuable tool for anyone interested in psychotherapy research.

    Contents:
    Section I: Foundations of psychotherapy research:The Prehistory of Psychotherapy and Its Implications for Psychotherapy Science: Shamanism, Folk Medicine, Philosophy, and Religion
    Historical paths in psychotherapy Research.-The philosophy of psychotherapy science: Mainstream and alternative views
    Psychotherapia Academica Universitatis: A Philosophical Argument for the Academic Discipline of Psychotherapy
    Interpretation as a Cognitive Instrument. Psychotherapy Science as an Attempt to Pool Paradigm-based Systems of Interpretation
    Institutional parameters of psychotherapy education as a prerequisite for systematic psychotherapy research
    Theory-Building, Enriching, and Fact-Gathering: Alternative Purposes of Psychotherapy Research
    Section II. Psychotherapy process research: Introduction to psychotherapy process research
    Outlines of a general theory of the psychotherapy process. The clinical exchange as communicational field: Implications for theory and methodology.- The Relationship: How it Works.- Data analysis in psychotherapy research
    Quantitative approaches to treatment process, change process, and process-outcome research
    Current issues on group psychotherapy research: An overview.- The Process of Change in Psychotherapy: Common and Unique Factors
    Therapeutic alliance and alliance ruptures and resolutions: Theoretical definitions, assessment issues and research findings.- Positive emotions in psychotherapy: Conceptual propositions and research challenges
    Psychotherapeutic Process from the Psychotherapist's Perspective.- From a psychoanalytic narrative case study to quantitative single case research.- Qualitative methods in psychotherapy process research
    Applications of Qualitative and Mixed-Methods Counseling and Psychotherapy Research.- Interpretation-Driven Guidelines for Designing and Evaluating Grounded Theory Research: A Constructivist-Social Justice Approach.- Consensual Qualitative Research (CQR) Methods for Conducting Psychotherapy Process Research.- Conversation analysis and psychotherapy process research.- A pragmatic approach to the study of therapeutic interaction: Towards an observational science of psychotherapy process. Section III. Psychotherapy outcome research: Quantitative psychotherapy outcome research: Methodological issues
    Qualitative methods in psychotherapy outcome research
    Outcome Research on Disorder-Specific Treatments: The Case of Grief Therapy
    Outcome research: Methods for Improving Outcome in Routine Care.- Psychotherapy outcome research and neuroimaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Oliver Freudenreich.
    Contents:
    Forward Preface Acknowledgements Section I: INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOSIS 1. Psychotic signs and symptoms 2. Psychosis interview Section II: DIAGNOSIS AND DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS OF PSYCHOSIS 3. Delirium 4. Drug-induced psychosis 5. Secondary schizophrenia 6. Psychiatric differential diagnosis of psychosis 7. Schizophrenia-spectrum disorders 8. Diagnosing schizophrenia
    clinical approach Section III: TREATMENT OF PSYCHOTIC DISORDERS 9. Emergency management of acute psychosis 10. Phase-specific treatment of schizophrenia 11. Antipsychotics
    overview 12. Antipsychotics
    motor side effects 13. Antipsychotics
    non-motor side effects 14. Antipsychotics
    clinical effectiveness 15. Ancillary medications 16. Drug interactions 17. Polypharmacy 18. Psychological treatments
    the patient 19. Psychological treatments
    the family 20. Psychiatric rehabilitation Section IV: PROGNOSTIC CONSIDERATIONS FOR PSYCHOTIC DISORDERS 21. Medical morbidity and mortality 22. HIV/AIDS and serious mental illness 23. Dual diagnosis 24. Nicotine dependence 25. Refractory psychosis and clozapine 26. Negative symptoms 27. Cognition in schizophrenia 28. Depression and suicide 29. Illness insight and medication adherence 30. Forensic aspects of schizophrenia care 31. Social aspects of schizophrenia care APPENDICES A. Emergency Cards B. Assessment Cards C. Wellness Cards Suggested readings and citations Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    André Barciela Veras, Jeffrey Paul Kahn.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Print
    contributors, M. Ackenheil ... [et al.] ; editors, F. Hoffmeister, G. Stille.
    Contents:
    Part 1, Antipsychotics and antidepressants ; Part 2, Anxiolytics, gerontopsychopharmacological agents ; Part 3, Alcohol and psychotomimetics, psychotropic effects of central acting drugs ;
  • Digital
    edited by Imaine Sahed, Antony Chaufton.
    Summary: This book promotes the interaction between research and professional practices in the field of prevention and harm reduction. Through the scientific work and experience of human and social sciences researchers and medical social actors, research and action assist one another in illuminating the problems associated with the consumption of psychotropic drugs and in developing intervention strategies. Over the course of several chapters, contributed by attendees of the Psychotropics, Prevention and Harm Reduction Put to the Test By "Human and Social Sciences workshop, a range of varied themes are explored within the scope of drugs and their uses. Both the socio-historical context of drug uses and the construction of prevention and harm reduction public policies in light of scientific knowledge are covered, as well as the issue of release, mobilization and/or negotiation of prevention and harm reduction standards, both for professionals and drug users.

    Contents:
    1. Scientific data and political decision in the field of addictive behaviors
    2. Social sciences and practice renewal: from prevention, to identification, to early intervention
    3. The beautiful life with or without drugs: questions on emancipation
    4. Tobacco and alcoholic beverage consumption of European adolescents: subtitutes or complements? The value of an all-encompassing
    5. Animated images, words coming alive, reflection in motion
    6. Towards the addiction of adolescents under public protection: paradoxical contextualization
    7. Socio-anthropological contributions to the Senegalese Harm Reduction Program
    8. Promoting harm reduction personal strategies by means of drugs checking: its use in CAARUD
    9. Initiation to injection: a community challenge.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital/Print
    udgivet paa foranledning af Direktoratet for fængselsvæsenet ved George E. Schrøder ...
    Digital Access Google Books 1917-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L602 .S37
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Philip Kumanov, Ashok Agarwal.
    Contents:
    1. Maturation and physiology of hypothalamic regulation of the gonadal axis
    2. Genetics of puberty
    3. Hormonal changes in childhood and puberty
    4. Physical changes during pubertal transition
    5. Growth in childhood and puberty
    6. Bone development in children and adolescents
    7. Body weight and puberty
    8. The environmental factors and epigenetics of gametogenesis in puberty
    9. Timing of puberty and secular trend in human maturation
    10. Precocious puberty
    11. Constitutional delayed puberty
    12. Pubertal dysfunction: a disorder of GnRH pulsatility
    13. Pubertal gynecomastia
    14. Pubertal acne
    15. Adolescent varicocele
    16. Polycystic ovary syndrome in adolescent girls
    17. Growth hormone and steroid assays' problems in childhood and puberty
    18. Psychosocial development of adolescents with and without deviations
    19. Substance use in adolescence
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    volume editors, Jean-Pierre Bourguignon, Anne-Simone Parent.
    Contents:
    The emerging role of epigenetics in the regulation of female puberty / Lomniczi, A.; Ojeda, S.R
    Normal variation in pubertal timing : genetic determinants in relation to growth and adiposity / Willemsen, R.H.; Dunger, D.B
    Genetics of hypogonadotropic hypogonadism / Topaloglu, A.K.; Kotan, L.D
    Sexual precocity : genetic bases of central precocious puberty and autonomous gonadal activation / Macedo, D.B.; Silveira, L.F.G.; Bessa, D.S.; Brito, V.N.; Latronico, A.C
    Congenital hypogonadotropic hypogonadism : a trait shared by several complex neurodevelopmental disorders / de Roux, N.; Carel, J.-C.; Léger, J. (Paris)
    Animal modeling of early programming and disruption of pubertal maturation / Castellano, J.M.; Tena-Sempere, M
    Contemporary trends in onset and completion of puberty, gain in height and adiposity / Biro, F.M.; Kiess, W
    Consequences of early life programing by genetic and environmental influences : a synthesis regarding pubertal timing / Roth, C.L.; DiVall, S
    Nutritional disorders and pubertal disorders / Muñoz-Calvo, M.T.; Argente, J
    Current changes in pubertal timing : revised vision in relation with environmental factors including endocrine disruptors / Parent, A.-S.; Franssen, D.; Fudvoye, J.; Pinson, A.; Bourguignon, J.-P
    Sex steroid and gonadotropin treatment in male delayed puberty / Howard, S.; Dunkel, L
    Sex steroid replacement therapy in female hypogonadism from childhood to young adulthood / Norjavaara, E.; Ankarberg-Lindgren, C.; Kriström, B
    Gonadotropin-releasing hormone agonist treatment in sexual precocity / Pienkowski, C.; Tauber, M
    Treatment of peripheral precocious puberty / Schoelwer, M.; Eugster, E.A
    Consultation for disordered puberty : what do adolescent medicine patients teach us? / Michaud, P.-A.; Ambresin, A.-E.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Seung Jong Lee.
    Summary: We all strive for personal happiness in one way or another, but what about public happiness? What does public happiness mean and what role can governments and public policies play? The current COVID-19 pandemic has highlighted the inadequacies of old governance paradigms and even before this pandemic, increasing inequalities and frustration with the old GDP-centric growth paradigm have fueled dissatisfaction with and distrust of governments. This book suggests a new path towards public happiness as a potential solution. The book builds a theory of public happiness as a distinct concept from individual happiness, borrowing especially from Eastern philosophy. It provides an overview of the efforts so far to go "beyond GDP" -- including measurement and exploration of the determinants of happiness -- and how these efforts have fallen short of expectation. Lastly, the book sketches out what a public happiness policy might look like and identifies the factors of a successful happiness policy.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Paradigm of progress
    Chapter 2. Nature of public happiness
    Chapter 3. Efforts of international community
    Chapter 4. Trends in happiness research
    Chapter 5. Happiness-driven public policy
    Chapter 6. New paradigm for happiness-driven governance
    Chapter 7. National happiness policy around the world: overview
    Chapter 8. Case: Government 3.0 of Korea
    Chapter 9. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Robert B. Greifinger, editor ; foreword by David Satcher.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Md. Nazrul Islam, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Challenges to Health Service System in China: Institutional and financial reforms
    Food safety Challenges in China
    Challenge of Population Ageing on Health
    Integrating Chinese Medicine in public health: Contemporary trend and challenges
    State-Religion Partnership: Delivery of Eldercare in Asia
    Substance Abuse and Its Prevention and Treatment in Macao
    Development of Healthcare Social Work in China.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Joshua M. Sharfstein.
    Contents:
    Elixir sulfanilamide
    Thalidomide
    The swine flu of 1976
    HIV
    Recognizing a crisis
    Crisis management
    Communications and politics
    Preventing the next crisis
    Responsibility and blame
    Opportunity in crisis
    Supplementary materials : a closer look at crises.
  • Digital
    editors,Tanya Telfair LeBlanc, Robert J. Kim-Farley.
    Summary: "Simulations are a core element of training in medicine, surgery, clinical care, biomedical engineering and the medical sciences. They allow the practice of safety, prevention, containment, treatment, and procedure in a risk-free setting." "This book is a practical guide and reference to the technology, operations and opportunities of clinical simulation. It shows how to develop and make efficient use of resources and provides practical information to those creating and operating simulation facilities as well as the development and delivery of simulation-based education programs." -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Topic I. Why Simulate?
    1. From Primitive Cultures to Modern Day: Has Clinical Education Really Changed? / G. Allan Shemanko
    2. Undergraduate Medical Education is NOT Rocket Science: But that Does NOT Mean it's Easy! / Mark R. Adelman
    3. Guidance for the Leader-Manager / Robert C. Cox and Lance Acree
    Topic II. What's In It For Me
    4. Basing a Clinician's Career on Simulation: Development of a Critical Care Expert into a Clinical Simulation Expert / Lorena Beeman
    5. Basing a Nonclinician's Career upon Simulation: The Personal Experience of a Physicist / Guillaume Alinier
    6. Overcoming Operational Challenges: An Administrator's Perspective / Alice L. Acker
    Topic III. How to Fit in while Standing Out
    7. When Simulation should and should not be in the Curriculum / Ronnie J. Glavin
    8. To Simulate or not to Simulate: That is the Question / G. Allan Shemanko and Linn Jones
    9. Simulated Realism: Essential, Desired, Overkill / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    10. Realism and the Art of Simulation / Roger E. Chow and Viren N. Naik
    11. Integrating Simulation with Existing Clinical Educational Programs: Dream and Develop while Keeping the Focus on your Vision / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    Topic IV. Curriculum: Planning for Success
    12. Integration of Simulation with Existing Clinical Educational Programs / Lorena Beeman
    13. Incorporating Simulation into Graduate (Resident) Medical Education: With Special Reference to the Emergency Department / Mark E.A. Escott and Lawrence E. Kass
    14. Theory and Practice of Developing an Effective Simulation-based Clinical Curriculum / Valerity V. Kozmenko, Alan D. Kaye, Barbara Morgan and Charles W. Hilton
    15. Creating Effective Learning Environments
    Key Educational Concepts Applied to Simulation Training / Ian Curran
    Topic V. The Best Form Follows the Essential Functions
    16. Thought Thinking Itself Out: Anticipatory Design in Simulation Centers / Jane Lindsay Miller
    17. Simulation Facility Design 101: The Basics / Michael Seropian
    18. Creation of Structure-Function Relationships in the Design of a Simulation Center / Brian C. Brost, Kay M.B. Thiemann, Thomas E. Belda and William P. Dunn
    19. Evaluating, Prioritizing, and Selecting Simulators / Brian C. Brost, Kay M.B. Thiemann and William P. Dunn
    20. Choosing Full-function Patient Simulators, Creating and Using the Simulation Suite / David H. Stern
    21. Survival Guide to Successful Simulation When Located Far Away / Ramiro Pozzo
    22. Retrofitting Existing Space for Patient Simulation: From Student Lounge to Acute Care Patient Unit / Michael C. Foss
    Topic VI. Functional Forms at the Institutional Size
    23. The One-Room Schoolhouse for Simulation: Adapting to the Learning / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    24. All-in-one-room Schoolhouse: Clinical Simulation Stage, Control, Debrief, and Utilities All within a Single Room / Guillaume Alinier
    25. The Clinical Simulation Service at NIH: Our Journey / Jill Steiner Sanko and Amy Guillet Agrawal
    26. The Single, Dedicated Clinical Simulation Suite / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    27. The Patient Simulation Suite: A Single Dedicated Clinical Simulator Stage Surrounded by Dedicated Control, Observing/Debriefing, Utility, and Office Rooms / Guillaume Alinier
    28. Multiservice, Single Institution Simulation Center with Multiple Simulation Suites / Judith C.P. Hwang and Betsy Bentken
    29. Operations and Management at the VA Palo Alto/Stanford Simulation Center / Claudia Sun and Steven K. Howard
    30. Health Care Simulation with Patient Simulators and Standardized Patients / Michael S. Goodrow
    31. Educational Needs Dictating Learning Space: Factors Considered in the Identification and Planning of Appropriate Space for a Simulation Learning Complex / Eileen R. Wiley and W. Bosseau Murray
    Topic VII. Functional Forms at the State and Nation Size
    32. Designing and Developing a Multi-institutional, Multidisciplinary Regional Clinical Simulation Center / Neil Coker
    33. Partners in Simulation: Public Academic-Private Health Care Collaboration / Sharon M. Denning, Constance M. Jewett Johnson, Dan Johnson, Marilyn Loen, Carl Patow and Cathleen K. Brannen
    34. A National Simulation Program: Germany / Stefan Monk, Jochen Vollmer and Wolfgang Heinrichs
    35. Statewide and Large-scale Simulation Implementation: The Work of Many / Michael Seropian and Bonnie Driggers
    36. Implementing Military Health Simulation Operations: The Australian Defence Force / Fabian E. Purcell and Denis B. French
    37. A National Simulation Center Influences Teaching at a National Level: Scotland / Ronnie J. Glavin
    38. Clinical Simulation on a National Level: Israel / Amitai Ziv, David Erez and Haim Berkenstadt
    Topic VIII. The Big Picture: Sum of Many Smaller Views
    39. The Invisible Standardized Patient / Leonard Pott
    40. Prehospital and Tactical Simulation: More than Just a Mannequin / Craig Balbalian
    41. Value Added by Partial-task Trainers and Simulation / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    42. Implementing Partial-task Trainers in Simulation / Larry A. Cobb
    43. The Role of Patient Simulators in Pediatric Education / Edmundo P. Cortez
    44. Simulation Training for Pediatric Emergencies / Chris Chin
    45. Considerations of Pediatric Simulation / Paul N. Severin, Edmundo P. Cortez, Christopher A. McNeal and Jane E. Kramer
    46. Critical Care Simulation: A Nursing Perspective / Carol J. Vandrey
    47. Transporting a Patient: Interdisciplinary Simulation Exercises / Michael C. Foss
    Topic IX. Make Your Own
    48. Development and Implementation of a Low-budget Simulation Center for Clinical Emergencies (Ambulance in a Box) / Ramiro Pozzo and Alfredo Guillermo Pacheco
    49. Physiologic Modeling for Simulators: Get Real / N. Ty Smith
    Topic X. Buy from Others
    50. Success with Clinical Simulation = Assessment + Planning + Implementation / William E. Lewandowski
    51. Successful Simulation Center Operations: An Industry Perspective / Thomas J. Doyle, Ronald G. Carovano and John Anton
    Topic XI. Funding, Funding is What Makes Simulation Go On
    52. Prosperous Simulation Under an Institution's Threadbare Financial Blanket / Guillaume Alinier
    53. Creative Procurement for Your Simulation Program / John Gillespie
    Topic XII. Hybrid Vigor: The Simulation Professional
    54. The Simulation Professional: Gets Things Done and Attracts Opportunities / Guillaume Alinier, Ramiro Pozzo and Cynthia H. Shields
    Topic XIII. Good Answers Start from Good Questions
    55. Pitfalls to Avoid in Designing and Executing Research with Clinical Simulation / Guillaume Alinier
    56. Fundamentals of Educational Research Using Clinical Simulation / William C. McGahie, Carla M. Pugh and Diane Bronstein Wayne
    Topic XIV. Simulation Scenario: Telling the Story
    Discussing the Story
    57. Scenario Design and Execution / Judith C.F. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    58. Simulation Scenario Building / Kristina Lee Stillsmoking
    59. Designing a Scenario as a Simulated Clinical Experience: The TuPASS Scenario Script / Peter Dieckmann and Marcus Rail
    Topic XV. Location, Location, Location
    60. Situated Simulation: Taking Simulation to the Clinicians / Derek J. LeBlanc
    61. On the Road with the Simulator / Christopher J. Gallagher, Riva R. Akerman, Daniel Castillo, Christina M. Matadial and Ilya Shekhter
    62. Mobile "In Situ" Simulation Crisis Resource Management Training / Marcus Rall, Eric Stricker, Silke Reddersen, Jorg Zieger and Peter Dieckmann
    Topic XVI. Move the Learning, Not the Learners
    63. Creation of a Combined Surgical Curriculum Using the Internet and Patient Simulation / Andreas H. Meier. 64. Distributed Simulation-based Clinical Training: Going Beyond the Obvious / Dag K.J.E. von Lubitz, Howard Levine, Frederic Patricelli and Simon Richir
    Topic XVII. We Teach in the Style that We Learn
    65. Staff Education for Simulation: Train-the-Trainer Concepts / Jochen Vollmer, Stefan Monk and Wolfgang Heinrichs
    66. Experiential Training for New Simulation Coordinators / Roger E. Chow and Viren N. Naik
    67. Becoming a Simulation Instructor and Learning to Facilitate: The Instructor and Facilitation Training (InFacT) Course / Peter Dieckmann and Marcus Rall
    Topic XVIII. Assessment: Why, What and How
    68. Simulation and High-stakes Testing / Carla M. Pugh
    69. Video-assisted Debriefing in Simulation-based Training of Crisis Resource Management / Peter Dieckmann, Silke Reddersen, Jorg Zieger and Marcus Rall
    70. Questionnaire Design and Use: How to Craft Tools to Determine How Well Your Simulation Program Objectives are Being Met / Guillaume Alinier
    71. Planning and Assessing Clinical Simulation using Task Analysis: A Suggested Approach and Framework for Trainers, Researchers, and Developers / Paul Williamson, Harry Owen and Valerie Follows
    Topic XIX. Tricks of the Trade
    72. Professional Stage Craft: How to Create Simulated Clinical Environments Out of Smoke and Mirrors / Guillaume Alinier
    73. Professional Audio/Video for Clinical Simulation / Michael S. Goodrow, Michael Seropian, Judith C.P. Hwang and Betsy Bencken
    74. Simulation Audio/Video Requirements and Working with Audio/Video Installation Professionals / Guillaume Alinier
    Topic XX. Rehearsing is the Basis of All Learning
    75. An Approach for Professional Development: Triad Gaming Techniques in Simulation / Anthony Brand
    76. Learning Through Play: Simulation Scenario = Obstacle Course + Treasure Hunt / Guillaume Alinier
    77. Adult Education Methods and Processes / Ronnie J. Glavin
    78. Creating Effective, Interesting, and Engaging Learning Environments / Diane C. Seibert
    79. Adult Learning: Practical Hands-on Methods for Teaching a Hands-on Subject / Kristina Lee Stillsmoking
    80. How to Build a Successful Simulation Strategy: The Simulation Learning Pyramid / Hal Doerr and W. Bosseau Murray
    Topic XXI. Expect the Unexpected
    81. Managing a Simulation Session at a Congress, Away from Home Base / Kristina Lee Stillsmoking and W. Bosseau Murray
    Topic XXII. Borrow Success
    82. An Innovative Way to Think about Simulation Laboratory Core Administrative Functions: Comparing Managing a Simulation Laboratory to a Restaurant / Mary Katherine Krause and Margaret Faut-Callanan.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
  • Digital
    Daniel S. Goldberg.
    Summary: This resource places concepts of social determinants of health in the larger contexts of contemporary health ethics and the evolution of social reform. It provides needed analysis of the larger causes behind the immediate causes of illness and epidemics, particularly injustice, systemic inequities, and the cumulative effect of compound disadvantages. This moral approach to collective and individual responsibilities--on the part of practitioners as well as the public--supports a sound blueprint for finding answers to longstanding global and local concerns. Readers are challenged to recognize the critical role of social determinants to their perception of health issues, controversies, and possibilities.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Ethics, justice, and the social determinants of health
    Justice, compound disadvantage and health inequities
    Ethics, responsibility and social patterning of risk health behaviors
    The social determinants of health and public health practice.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Ovid
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Public health in action to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Sundeep Sahay, T. Sundararaman, Jørn Braa.
    Summary: Challenges in the design, development, and implementation of health information systems, particularly in low and middle income countries, and examines approaches to addressing these.

    Contents:
    Public health informatics : position within an informatic framework
    Understanding public health informatics in context of health in low and middle-income countries
    The "information-use problematic" in health information systems
    The challenge of integration : (in)adequacy of technical solutions to institutional challenges
    Decentralized information use : the the cloud and big data supporting this?
    Institutions as barriers and facilitators of health information systems reform
    Complexity and public health informatics in low and middle-income countries
    Measuring progress toward universal health coverage and post-2015 sustainable development goals : the informational challenges
    Health information systems governance and standard the challenges of implementation
    Strengthening healthcare systems and health information systems : building synergies.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    J.A. Magnuson, Paul C. Fu, Jr., editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Context for Public Health Informatics
    1. Introduction to Public Health Informatics / J.A. Magnuson and Patrick W. O'Carroll
    2. History and Significance of Information Systems and Public Health / John R. Lumpkin and J.A. Magnuson
    3. Context and Value of Biomedical and Health Informatics / William R. Hersh
    4. Governmental and Legislative Context of Informatics / Margo Edmunds
    Part II. The Science of Public Health Informatics
    5. Public Health Informatics Infrastructure / Brian E. Dixon and Shaun J. Grannis
    6. Information Architecture / Dina Dickerson and Patricia Yao
    7. Data Sources and Data Tools / Edward Mensah and Johanna L. Goderre
    8. Public Health Information Standards / J.A. Magnuson, Riki Merrick, and James T. Case
    9. Privacy, Confidentiality, and Security of Public Health Information / William A. Yasnoff
    10. Electronic Health Records / Stephen P. Julien
    11. Ethics, Information Technology, and Public Health: Duties and Challenges in Computational Epidemiology / Kenneth W. Goodman and Eric M. Meslin
    12. Project Management and Public Health Informatics / James Aspevig
    13. Evaluation for Public Health Informatics / Paul C. Fu, Jr., Herman Tolentino, and Laura H. Franzke
    Part III. Key Public Health Information Systems
    14. Informatics in Disease Prevention and Epidemiology / Richard S. Hopkins and J.A. Magnuson
    15. Informatics in Toxicology and Environmental Public Health / Edwin M. Kilbourne
    16. Public Health Laboratories / Riki Merrick, Steven H. Hinrichs, and Michelle Meigs
    17. The National Vital Statistics System / Charles J. Rothwell, Mary Anne Freedman, and James A. Weed
    18. Risk Factor Information Systems / Alan Tomines
    19. Setting national Policies and Standards for Immunization Information Systems / Nedra Y. Garrett
    Part IV. New Challenges and Emerging Solutions
    20. New Means of Data Collection and Accessibility / I. Charie Faught, James Aspevig, and Rita Spear
    21. Geographic Information Systems / Carol L. Hanchette
    22. Public Health Informatics and Health Information Exchange / J.A. Magnuson and Paul C. Fu, Jr.
    23. Decision Support and Expert Systems in Public Health / William A. Yasnoff and Perry L. Miller
    24. Delivery of Preventive Medicine in Primary Care / Paul C. Fu, Jr., Alan Tomines, and Larry L. Dickey
    25. Case-Based Learning in Public Health Informatics / Herman Tolentino, Sridhar R. Papagari Sangareddy, Catherine Pepper, and J.A. Magnuson
    Part V. Case Studies: Information Systems and the Strata of Public Health
    26. Local and Regional Public Health Informatics / Jeffrey M. Kriseman and Brian J. Labus
    27. Public Health Informatics in High Population States: New York and Ohio / Geraldine S. Johnson, Guthrie S. Birkhead, Rachel Block, Shannon Kelley, James Coates, Bob Campbell, and Brian Fowler
    28. State Public Health Informatics: Perspective from a Low Population State / James Aspevig
    29. National Public Health Informatics, United States / Seth Foldy
    30. Public Health Informatics in Canada / Lawrence E. Frisch, Elizabeth M. Borycki, Alyse Capron, Abla Mawudeku, and Ronald St. John
    31. Perspectives on Global Public Health Informatics / Janise Richards, Gerry Douglas, and Hamish S.F. Fraser
    Part VI. Epilogue
    32. Public Health Informatics: The Path Forward / J.A. Magnuson.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    J.A. Magnuson, Brian E. Dixon, editors.
    Summary: This 3rd edition of a classic textbook examines the context and background of public health informatics, explores the technology and science underlying the field, discusses challenges and emerging solutions, reviews many key public health information systems, and includes practical, case-based studies to guide the reader through the topic. The editors have expanded the text into new areas that have become important since publication of the previous two editions due to changing technologies and needs in the field, as well as updating and augmenting much of the core content. The book contains learning objectives, overviews, future directions, and review questions to assist readers to engage with this vast topic. The Editors and their team of well-known contributors have built upon the foundation established by the previous editions to provide the reader with a comprehensive and forward-looking review of public health informatics. The breadth of material in Public Health Informatics and Information Systems, 3rd edition makes it suitable for both undergraduate and graduate coursework in public health informatics, enabling instructors to select chapters that best fit their students needs.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    Part I: Context for Public Health Informatics
    1: Public Health Informatics: An Introduction
    Introduction to PH Informatics
    Public Health in the US
    Background
    Federal Level
    State Level
    Local Level
    Principles and Purpose
    Current State
    Public Health Informatics
    Background
    Underlying Principles
    Data Sources and Data Partners
    Output of PHI Efforts
    Principles and Purpose
    Current State
    Public Health Information Systems
    Background
    Principles and Purpose
    Current State Drivers of Change for Public Health Informatics and Information Systems
    Health Care Reform
    Precision Public Health
    mHealth and uHealth
    Public Health 3.0
    Summary
    References
    2: History of Public Health Information Systems and Informatics
    Introduction
    Data, Information, and Knowledge
    The Development of Counting and Counting Machines
    Development of Mechanical Counting Devices
    The Development of Modern Mechanical Measuring Devices
    Stages in Development of Public Health Information Management Systems
    The Age of Observation
    The Age of Analysis The Origin of Modern Public Health Informatics
    The Cholera Outbreaks in England
    Public Health Data Collection in the United States
    The Three Waves of Federal-State Systems Development in the US
    The First Wave: Independent Systems Development
    The Second Wave: Federal Funding of State-Level Systems
    The Third Wave: Integration of the Benefits of State-Level System Development with the Tools of Software Reuse
    Summary
    References
    3: Public Health Informatics in the Larger Context of Biomedical and Health Informatics
    Introduction
    The Sub-Disciplines of Informatics Major Applications of Informatics
    Electronic and Personal Health Records
    Information Retrieval (Search) Systems
    Consumer Health
    Telemedicine
    Bioinformatics
    Data Science and Analytics
    Big Data
    Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence
    The Value of Informatics
    Summary
    References
    4: Governmental and Legislative Context for Informatics
    Overview
    Introduction
    Legal and Regulatory Framework for Public Health Informatics
    Fundamentals of the Policy Process in the United States
    Organization and Authority of the Legislative Branch Organization and Authority of the Executive Branch
    Role of the Private Sector in Policy Development and Implementation
    The Policy Environment for Public Health Informatics
    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
    Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act
    Affordable Care Act (ACA)
    Food and Drug Administration Safety and Innovation Act (FDASIA)
    MACRA, MIPS, and APMs (Alternative Payment Models)
    Twenty-First Century Cures Act
    Future Policy Challenges
    Data Sharing and Health Information Exchange
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    American Nurses Association.
    Summary: "Public Health Nursing: Scope and Standards of Practice describes a competent level of nursing care at each level of public health nursing practice and provides comprehensive overviews of the dynamic and complex practice of the public health nursing specialty. Published by ANA, this book is informed by advances in health care and professional nursing practice. It contains national standards of practice and performance that define the who, what, where, when, why, and how of public health nursing practice and is a vital reference for: - Quality improvement initiatives - Certification and credentialing - Position descriptions and performance appraisals - Classroom teaching and in-service education programs - Boards of nursing members' orientation programs and regulatory decision-making activities Public Health Nursing: Scope and Standards of Practice is intended to guide nurses, as well as administrators, legislators, regulators, legal counsel, and other interprofessional colleagues"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Public health nursing scope of practice
    Standards of public health nursing practice
    Standards of practice
    Standards of professional performance
    Glossary
    References
    Appendic: Public health nursing : past, present, and future ; PHN workforce data by program area and job function ; Certifications relevant to public health nursing practice.
    Digital Access R2Library [2022]
  • Digital
    Donald J. Lollar, Willi Horner-Johnson, Katherine Froehlich-Grobe, editors.
    Summary: In this new edition, the editors and contributors update and expand on the educational framework that was introduced in the first edition for rethinking disability in public health study and practice and for attaining the competencies that should accompany this knowledge. The second edition highlights key areas of research that have emerged since the first edition was published. This edition includes new and updated chapters that have particular relevance for public health practice: - Disability, Intersectionality, and Inequity: Life in the Margins - Disability and Health Programs: Emerging Partners - Children with Special Healthcare Needs - Disasters and Disability: Rhetoric and Reality - Inter-relationship of Health Insurance and Employment for People with Disabilities - Public Health, Work, and Disability - Actions to Prepare a Competent Workforce Public Health Perspectives on Disability: Science, Social Justice, Ethics, and Beyond, 2nd Edition, is an essential resource for public health educators and practitioners as well as students in graduate schools of public health throughout the United States.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Epidemiology and Biostatistics
    Chapter 3. Social Determinants of Health and Disability
    Chapter 4. Disability, Intersectionality, and Inequity: Life in the Margins
    Chapter 5. Environmental Contexts Shaping Disability and Health
    Chapter 6. Public Health Ethics and Disability: Centering Disability Justice
    Chapter 7. International Public Health and Global Disability
    Chapter 8. Disability and Health Programs: Emerging Partners
    Chapter 9. Children with Special Healthcare Needs
    Chapter 10. Achieving Equity: Including Women with Disabilities in Maternal and Child Health Policies and Programs
    Chapter 11. Aging with a Disability
    Chapter 12. Disasters and Disability: Rhetoric and Reality
    Chapter 13. Law, Benefits, Disability Rights, and Public Health: A Sum Greater than the Parts?- Chapter 14. Inter-relationship of Health Insurance and Employment for People with Disabilities
    Chapter 15. Public Health, Work, and Disability
    Chapter 16. Actions to Prepare a Competent Workforce.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    1950-71.
    Incomplete, Search 'Related Title Browse' for additional holdings of this title.
    558
  • Print
    Pauling, Linus.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R111 .L761
    1
  • Digital
    Daniel W. Byrne.
    Contents:
    Overview : Twenty key principles
    PLANNING. Laying the groundwork
    The methodology
    Minimizing bias
    The data collection/case report form
    Reproducible eligibility criteria
    Randomization, blinding, and confidentiality
    End points and outcome
    Sample size and power
    Preparing for modern statistical analysis
    Avoiding common criticisms
    Preparing to write a publishable paper
    OBSERVING. Collecting data and handling missing data
    Analyzing data : statistical analysis for reproducible research
    Interpreting the data
    Univariate analysis
    Nonparametric tests
    Matching and propensity score analysis
    Multivariate analysis and model validation
    WRITING. Title page
    Abstract
    Introduction
    Methods
    Results
    Discussion
    References
    Industry publications
    EDITING. Preparing your manuscript for submission
    Small but significant points to consider
    Improving your writing
    Fixes for problematic terms
    REVISING. Revising the final draft
    The cover letter
    Responding to peer reviewers' comments.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Ian Peate, Jay Macleod.
    Summary: Contemporary and fully updated, the new edition of this accessible guide builds on the success of previous editions to bring together all the key principles of nursing care for surgical patients. Split into two sections, the first section explains the basis of surgical care. The second section has comprehensive coverage of all major areas of surgical practice, providing both a theoretical and practical understanding across a wide range of procedures. Written from a patient-centred perspective but with an added emphasis on safety and the role of the nurse in relation to current legislation, the new Pudner's Nursing the Surgical Patient offers all you need to provide the best care. Its user-friendly format will make it invaluable not only to nurses but to a range of health care practitioners. Easy-to-read, easy-to-understand approach Ultra-clear and simple line art Written by 20+ expert contributors from around the UK Patient-centred approach places the patient at the centre of all that is done Reflects the latest practice and retains the principles of care.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Digital
    Chen Qiu, Pu-Xuan Lu, Shi-Ping Wu, editors.
    Summary: This book provides state-of-the-art information on advances in the diagnosis and treatment of pulmonary aspergillosis to help specialists and clinical practitioners make appropriate decisions concerning the management of patients with this condition. The incidence of pulmonary aspergillosis has increased steadily due to the widespread use of broad-spectrum antibiotics, cytotoxic drugs, immunosuppressive agents and adrenal hormones, as well as the growing number of organ transplantations and AIDS patients. The book discusses various aspects of the disease, including its history, characteristics, laboratory examination, imaging features, clinical diagnosis, differential diagnosis and treatment principles, and also presents illustrated case studies. Focusing on different characteristics in imaging and pathology, and addressing diagnostic difficulties in-depth, this clinical reference work brings together recent clinical investigations to making it a valuable resource for practitioners in the fields of respiratory and infectious diseases, oncology, intensive care, diagnostic imaging, pathology and microbiology.

    Contents:
    The basic information and clinical manifestation of pulmonary aspergillosis
    Etiology
    Epidemiology
    Pathology and pathogenesis
    Clinical manifestation
    Diagnosis
    Clinical classification
    Treatment and follow-up
    Typical cases report of pulmonary aspergillosis
    Pulmonary aspergillosis with similarity to tuberculosis presentation
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for chest tightness and chest pain
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for fever
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for hemoptysis
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for anhelation
    Pulmonary aspergillosis noted primarily for cough and expectoration
    Pulmonary aspergillosis with no symptom.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: This book examines a range of contemporary ideas and arguments concerning the core yet unsettled clinical issues. Important aspects of pulmonary disorders are tackled such as occupational and environmental respiratory health hazards, the role of vitamin D supplementation in airway allergy, or nutritional aspects of care for lung cancer patients. Metabolic disorders affecting the processes of atherogenesis and systemic inflammation also are tackled. Attention is directed to rare but severe pediatric disease entities. Articles give readers practice at analyzing clinical data. The practical insights emphasize the role of science in transforming biomedical knowledge and care. This volume will be essential reading for clinicians, researchers, and other healthcare professionals engaged in effective patient care and therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Anastassios C. Koumbourlis, Mary A. Nevin, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Yener S. Erozan, Ibrahim Ramzy.
    Summary: The Essentials in Cytopathology book series fulfills the need for an easy-to-use and authoritative synopsis of site specific topics in cytopathology. These guide books fit into the lab coat pocket and are ideal for portability and quick reference. Each volume is heavily illustrated with a full color art program, while the text follows a user-friendly outline format. This new edition of Pulmonary Cytopathology is fully updated and expanded providing more detailed discussion of the role of new techniques such as EUS needle biopsy and specific issues of adequacy assessment. The section on subclassification of poorly-differentiated non-small cell carcinomas has been expanded to include accuracy of diagnosis in small samples, the new classification of adenocarcinoma and NSCC, currently-used ancillary techniques; i.e., immunohistochemistry, molecular/genetic techniques and therapeutic applications. Molecular techniques have been added as needed for targeted therapy. The text and illustrations have been expanded throughout.

    Contents:
    1. Specimen Collection and Processing
    2. Normal Components
    3. Hyperplasia, Reactive Changes and Metaplasia
    4. Respiratory Infections
    5. Other Non-Neoplastic Conditions
    6. Benign Neoplasms
    7. Primary Epithelial Malignancies
    8. Primary Nonepithelial Malignancies
    9. Metastatic Tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Carol Farver, Subha Ghosh, Thomas Gildea, Charles D. Sturgis.
    Summary: This book covers neoplastic and non-neoplastic pulmonary diseases, supplying essential information for the most common pulmonary diseases as well as many of the rarer ones. Organized around disease entities and presented in outline form, this book provides easy access to the essential facts and is illustrated with plentiful figures. The essential pathology, radiology and bronchoscopic technologies are discussed, as well as the tools needed to facilitate the most specific diagnoses and thus the most appropriate therapies. Each chapter also provides a list of suggested readings to guide further study. Written for a broad audience of clinicians who encounter these diseases in their everyday practice, this book serves specialists in pulmonary medicine and internal medicine, as well as general surgical pathologists who encounter these diseases as pulmonary specimens and who use this information for definitive evaluation and diagnoses of these entities, especially in small biopsies and cytopathology specimens. Pulmonary Disease: Pathology, Radiology, Bronchoscopy brings together the essential clinical, radiologic and pathologic insights for the major diseases of the lung, emphasizing the diagnostic criteria needed to ensure accurate diagnoses from small specimens.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to present articles that are stimulating to read and inform readers with the most up-to-date clinical research. The articles incorporate the latest developments on a variety of topics in pulmonary medicine, therapy, and related mutlisystem disorders with varied manifestations. Emphasis is given to air quality and lung health, therapeutic management of airway reactivity and cough sensitivity linked to mucous clearance ability, ventilatory and cellular effects of hypoxia, influenza epidemics and persistently dismal vaccination coverage rate, disorders of mixed provenance and genetic background affecting lung parenchyma such as cystic fibrosis or Langerhans cell histiocytosis, and others. New diagnostic strategies and therapeutic management will hopefully serve to enhance the way patient care is delivered and thus clinical outcomes. Being a blend of medical research and practice the book addresses the needs of respiratory scientists and physicians, and allied health professionals.

    Contents:
    Acute and chronic effects of oral erdosteine on ciliary beat frequency, cough sensitivity and airway reactivity
    Inhalation exposure to PM-bound polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons released from barbecue grills powered by gas, lump charcoal, and charcoal briquettes
    Intensity of anxiety and depression in patients with lung cancer in relation to quality of life
    Oleic derivatives of dopamine and respiration
    Intermittent hypoxia and unsaturated aldehydes: effects on oral epithelial wound healing
    Body mass disorders in healthy short children and in children with growth hormone deficiency
    Survival of patients with cystic fibrosis depending on mutation type and nutritional status
    Lung function in pregnancy in langerhans cell histiocytosis
    Psychobehavioral effects of meditation
    Vaccine effectiveness against influenza in 2015/16 in hospital and ambulatory medical care facilities: Polish results of the European I-MOVE+ Multicenter Study.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Mieczyslaw Pokorski.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Adiponectin and Mortality in Smokers and Non-Smokers of the Ludwigshafen Risk and Cardiovascular Health (LURIC) Study, G.E. Delgado, R. Siekmeier, W. März, M.E. Kleber
    Chapter 2. Heart Rate Variability and Arrhythmic Burden in Pulmonary Hypertension, C. Witte, J.U. Meyer zur Heide genannt Meyer-Arend, R. Andrié, J.W. Schrickel, C. Hammerstingl, J.O. Schwab, G. Nickenig, D. Skowasch, C. Pizarro
    Chapter 3. Cardiac Vagal Control and Depressive Symptoms in Response to Negative Emotional Stress, I. Tonhajzerova, Z. Visnovcova, A. Mestanikova, A. Jurko, M. Mestanik
    Chapter 4. Effect of Simulated Microgravity and Lunar Gravity on Human Inspiratory Muscle Function: ?Selena-T? 2015 Study, M.O. Segizbaeva, N.P. Aleksandrova, Z.A. Donina, E.V. Baranova, V.P. Katuntsev, G.G. Tarasenkov, V.M. Baranov
    Chapter 5. Airway Evaluation with Multidetector Computed Tomography Post-Processing Methods in Asthmatic Patients, M. Patyk, A. Obojski , Ł. Gojny, B. Panaszek, U. Zaleska-Dorobisz
    Chapter 6. Genotyping of EGFR Mutations from Bronchial Cytological Specimens in Slovakian Lung Cancer Patients, K. Baluchova, M. Zahradnikova, P. Bakes, S. Trubacova, H. Novosadova, E. Halasova, I. Majer, P. Hlavcak
    Chapter 7. Antiinflammatory Effect of N-Acetylcysteine Combined with Exogenous Surfactant in Meconium-Induced Lung Injury, P. Mikolka, J. Kopincova, L. Tomcikova Mikusiakova, P. Kosutova, A. Calkovska, D. Mokra,- Chapter 8. Pertussis: History of the Disease and Current Prevention Failure, E. Kuchar, M. Karlikowska-Skwarnik, S. Han, A. Nitsch-Osuch
    Chapter 9. Awareness of Influenza and Attitude Toward Influenza Vaccination among Medical Students, A. Banaszkiewicz, E. Talarek, J. Śliwka, F. Kazubski, I. Małecka, J. Stryczyńska-Kazubska, W. Dziubak, E. Kuchar
    Chapter 10. Pathogens Causing Upper Respiratory Tract Infections in Outpatients, A. Jama-Kmiecik, M. Frej-Mądrzak, J. Sarowska, I. Choroszy-Król.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Eyal Herzog, editor.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive review of pulmonary embolism (PE) which, with deep vein thrombosis, is assigned to the term venous thromboembolism (VTE) and currently the third most frequent acute cardiovascular syndrome globally. In the past decade we have seen a remarkable improvement in new diagnostic tools as well as novel therapeutic options to manage patients with VTE and this book provides a thorough clinical discussion of the diagnosis and management of these patients. Pulmonary Embolism presents a comprehensive review of all aspects of the epidemiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis, risk assessment and therapeutic options to manage the patient with PE. To aid healthcare providers caring for patients with acute PE, it encapsulates a novel, comprehensive, yet simple, pathway for the management of patients with PE, which can be used in many health care systems around the globe. This pathway is at the core of the book and all chapters are related to this unique algorithm.

    Contents:
    Pathway for the diagnosis and management of Pulmonary Embolism
    Epidemiology, pathophysiology and predisposing factors of pulmonary embolism and Deep Vein Thrombosis
    Non-Imaging Diagnosis of pulmonary embolism
    Imaging modalities in PE: echocardiography
    Imaging Modalities in Venous-thromboembolism: Ultrasound for Lower Extremity Deep Venous Thrombosis
    Imaging modalities in PE
    Ventilation/Perfusion Scintigraphy for the Diagnosis of Pulmonary Embolism and Chronic Thromboembolic Pulmonary Hypertension
    Imaging modalities in PE: Pulmonary angiography
    Integrating clinical, imaging and laboratory data to assess risk and to Guide Treatment in PE
    Management of the High-Risk Pulmonary Embolism in the acute phase - Respiratory, Hemodynamic and Mechanical Support
    Pharmacologic treatment in Pulmonary Embolism
    Catheter Directed Thrombolytic Therapy in Pulmonary Embolism
    Surgical Treatment of Acute Pulmonary Embolism
    Pulmonary Embolism Response Team: A Multidisciplinary Approach to Improve Pulmonary Embolism Management
    Pulmonary embolism in pregnancy and the postpartum period
    Pulmonary embolism and cancer patients
    Chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension
    Pulmonary Embolism in the COVID 19
    Travel related Venous Thromboembolism
    Illustrative cases of multimodality imaging in the diagnosis and management of PE
    Pulmonary Embolism: Information for the patient and family.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Belinda Rivera-Lebron, Gustavo A. Heresi, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive guide to the diagnosis and management of all stages of pulmonary embolism, starting with acute and ending with chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension. Acute pulmonary embolism (PE) is responsible for 150-250,000 hospitalizations and 60-100,000 deaths each year in the United States, making it the third most common cause of cardiovascular death. Acute PE spans a wide spectrum of clinical outcomes mainly based on the right ventricles (RV) capacity to tolerate strain. There have been many recent advances in the field of PE, including guidelines on classification and risk stratification, anticoagulation, as well as evolving areas in treatment options and follow up. The text begins with a review of the epidemiology and risk factors for PE. Chapters then delve into reviewing the decision pathways based on PE severity and treatment options, including the use of oral anticoagulation, systemic and catheter-directed thrombolysis, mechanical and surgical thrombectomy, and hemodynamic support with extracorporeal membrane oxygenation. The text then focuses on post-PE complications such as post-PE syndrome, chronic thromboembolic disease, and chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension (CTEPH). This is an ideal guide for providers of lung health, including pulmonary and critical care physicians, cardiologists, thoracic and cardiovascular surgeons. Physician-trainees, physician assistants, nurses and respiratory therapists with interest in pulmonary disorders, cardiovascular disease, pulmonary embolism, critical care or pulmonary hypertension will also find great value in this comprehensive guide.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of Pulmonary Embolism
    PE Diagnosis
    Risk Stratification of Acute PE
    Bleeding Risk Considerations Prior to Initiation and Duration of Anticoagulation Therapy for the Treatment of Venous Thromboembolism
    Treatment for Pulmonary Embolism: Anticoagulation Selection and Duration
    Indications for systemic thrombolysis over anticoagulation
    Endovascular techniques in the treatment of acute PE
    Role of surgical embolectomy and ECMO in PE
    Inferior Vena Cava filters in Venous Thromboembolism
    Multidisciplinary PE response team (PERT) development and implementation
    Post-PE Management
    Epidemiology and Diagnosis of Chronic Thromboembolic Pulmonary Hypertension
    Medical, Endovascular and Surgical Treatment of CTEPH.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: The book discusses new concepts and findings in the field of pulmonary function. This function is notably associated with spirometry and gas exchange at the lungs. The technique of spirometry, its clinical meaning, and reference values have all been refined over decades of its use. Although spirometry remains ancillary in diagnosis-making, it seems hardly replaceable in monitoring of lung disease progression and treatment efficacy. Pulmonary function goes far beyond spirometry. It encompasses interactions with the cardiovascular system, sleep disordered breathing, etiological factors like occupational bio aerosol exposure or cigarette smoke related issues. Pulmonary function may crumple in any respiratory ailment, the case in point being all too often respiratory tract infections. Chapters contribute to the latest thinking on molecular mechanisms underpinning pulmonary function, on patient care and attempt to keep up-to-date with current clinical and research progress. The book will be of interest to both clinicians and biomedical researchers.

    Contents:
    Intermittent Hypoxia Impairs Endothelial Function in Early Pre atherosclerosis
    Mechanisms of Compensatory Responses of the Respiratory System to Simulated Central Hypervolemia in Normal Subjects
    Cellular and Soluble Inflammatory Markers in Induced Sputum of Composting Plant Workers.- The Influence of the Reference Values on the Interpretation of Lung Function in Children: Comparison of Global Lung Initiative 2012 and Polish 1998 Reference Values
    Variability of Transcutaneous Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Pressure due to Sensor Location
    Crosstalk between Co-Cultured A549 Cells and THP1 Cells Exposed to Cigarette Smoke
    Evaluation of Airway Inflammation in Compost Workers Exposed to Bio aerosols Using Exhaled Breath Condensate and Fractional Exhaled Nitric Oxide
    Plasma Fibrinolysis Parameters in Smokers and Non-smokers of the Ludwigshafen Risk and Cardiovascular Health (LURIC) Study
    Vertigo with a Vestibular Dysfunction in Children During Respiratory Tract Infections
    The Prevalence of Oral Inflammation Among Denture Wearing Patients with Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Antonio M. Esquinas, editor.
    Summary: This book comprehensively addresses the use of pulmonary function measurement for the evaluation, screening and timing of noninvasive mechanical ventilation (NIMV) from hospital to home care. To do so, it describes three clinical stages of NIMV support: before NIV, to detect early markers and determine whether NIV is appropriate; during NIV, to evaluate NIV response; and in long-term NIV support. Additionally, it assesses a range of complementary health care organizations (pulmonary function labs, pneumology wards, semi-intensive care units and home mechanical ventilation programs), techniques (chest physiotherapy/airway secretions, etc.) and applications. In closing, the book offers practical recommendations on how noninvasive ventilation and lung function measurement can improve outcomes and quality of life, making it a valuable resource for all specialists, e.g. intensivists and pneumologists, as well as anesthesiologists and therapists. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    David A. Kaminsky, Charles G. Irvin, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ali Altalag, Jeremy Road, Pearce Wilcox, Kewan Aboulhosn, editors.
    Summary: This review of pulmonary function tests in clinical practice provides a simplified approach to interpreting most diagnostic tests in the field of respiratory medicine. It contains more than 125 illustrated diagrams, 50 tables, and 30 illustrative examples.

    Contents:
    Intro; Pulmonary Function Tests in Clinical Practice; Copyright; Preface; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Spirometry; Definitions [1, 2]; Forced Vital Capacity (FVC); Forced Expiratory Volume in the First Second (FEV1); FEV1 /FVC Ratio; The Instantaneous Forced Expiratory Flow (FEF25, FEF50, FEF75) and the Maximum Mid-Expiratory Flow (MMEF or FEF25-75); Peak Expiratory Flow (PEF); Spirometric Curves; The Volume-Time Curve (The Spirogram); The Expiratory Flow-Volume Curve (FV Curve); The Maximal Flow-Volume Loop; Technique of Spirometry [1]; The American Thoracic Society (ATS) Guidelines [1, 2] Reference Values [10, 22-27]Grading of Severity; Office Spirometry and FEV6 to Identify Obstructive Lung Disease; Bronchodilator Response; Components of Spirometry; Spirometric Pattern of Common Disorders; Obstructive Disorders; Restrictive Disorders; Upper Airway Obstruction [55-59]; References;
    Chapter 2: Lung Volumes; Definitions; See Figure 2.1; Total Lung Capacity (TLC); Residual Volume (RV); Functional Residual Capacity (FRC); Expiratory Reserve Volume (ERV); Inspiratory Reserve Volume (IRV); Inspiratory Capacity (IC); Tidal Volume (VT); SVC or VC; The Terms: "Volume" and "Capacity" (Figure 2.1) [3]Correlation with the FV Curve; Methods for Measuring the Static Lung Volumes; Body Plethysmography (Body Box); Nitrogen Washout Method [1, 7]; Inert Gas Dilution Technique [1, 9, 10]; Radiographic Method (Planimetry or Geometry); Technique for Body Plethysmography; Correlating the Flow Volume Curve with Lung Volumes; Reference Values [1, 6, 18, 21-24]; Components of a Lung Volume Study; Clinical Significance of FRC; Disease Patterns; Defining Air Trapping and Hyperinflation in Obstructive Disorders; References;
    Chapter 3: Gas Transfer; Definitions Diffusing Capacity for Carbon Monoxide (DLCO)Alveolar Volume (VA); Single Breath DLCO Technique [1, 5]; Reference Values [11-14]; DLCO Adjustments; Causes of Abnormal DLCO; References;
    Chapter 4: Airway Dysfunction, Challenge Testing and Occupational Asthma; Definitions; Airway Dysfunction; Exercise Induced Asthma; Exercise Induced Bronchoconstriction; Occupational Asthma; Bronchial Challenge; Methacholine; PD20 or PC20; Background:  Asthmatic Bronchoconstriction; Technique; 2-Minute Tidal Breathing Test Using the EW Nebulizer; 5-Breath Dosimeter Test [3] Indications and Contraindications for Methacholine Bronchial ChallengeInterpretation; Exercise Induced Bronchoconstriction; Background; Exercise Induced Bronchoconstriction Testing; Technique: Eucapnic Voluntary Hyperventilation; Occupational Asthma (OA) Testing; Background; Technique [59, 60]; References;
    Chapter 5: Respiratory Muscle Function and Other Pulmonary Function Studies; Respiratory Muscle Function; Maximal Respiratory Pressures; Indications; Technique; Interpretation; Limitations; Sniff Tests; Transcutaneous Electrical Phrenic Nerve Stimulation; Cough Test
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Yoshiharu Ohno, Hiroto Hatabu, Hans-Ulrich Kauczor, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews the basics of pulmonary functional imaging using new CT and MR techniques and describes the clinical applications of these techniques in detail. The intention is to equip readers with a full understanding of pulmonary functional imaging that will allow optimal application of all relevant techniques in the assessment of a variety of diseases, including COPD, asthma, cystic fibrosis, pulmonary thromboembolism, pulmonary hypertension, lung cancer and pulmonary nodule. Pulmonary functional imaging has been promoted as a research and diagnostic tool that has the capability to overcome the limitations of morphological assessments as well as functional evaluation based on traditional nuclear medicine studies. The recent advances in CT and MRI and in medical image processing and analysis have given further impetus to pulmonary functional imaging and provide the basis for future expansion of its use in clinical applications. In documenting the utility of state-of-the-art pulmonary functional imaging in diagnostic radiology and pulmonary medicine, this book will be of high value for chest radiologists, pulmonologists, pulmonary surgeons, and radiation technologists.

    Contents:
    Anatomical Basis for Pulmonary Functional Imaging
    Pulmonary Function Tests
    Basics and Clinical Application of CT for Pulmonary Functional Evaluation
    Basics and Clinical Application of MR Assessment of Pulmonary Hemodynamics and Blood Flow
    Basics and Clinical Application of MR Assessment of Ventilation
    Principles and Clinical Applications of Respiratory Motion Assessment Using 4D Computed Tomography and Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    Pulmonary Functional Imaging, Basics and Clinical Application of Nuclear Medicine and Hybrid Imaging
    Functional Assessment of COPD
    Structure-Function Imaging of Asthma: Airway and Ventilation Biomarkers
    Functional Assessment of Cystic Fibrosis Lung Disease
    Functional Assessment of Pulmonary Venous Thromboembolism
    Multimodality Imaging of Pulmonary Hypertension: Prognostication of Therapeutic Outcomes
    Functional Assessment of Lung Cancer and Nodules
    Computational Approach Toward Pulmonary Functional Imaging
    Image-Based Phenotyping, Deep Learning (DL) and Artificial Intelligence (AI) Applications in Clinical and Research Radiology and Chest Imaging
    Future of Pulmonary Functional Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bradley A. Maron, Roham T. Zamanian, Aaron B. Waxman, editors.
    Contents:
    Historical Perspective on the Classification and Nomenclature of Pulmonary Hypertension
    The Defining Characteristics of Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Pulmonary Hypertension in Patients Without Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Epidemiology of Pulmonary Hypertension: From Quaternary Referral Centre to the Community
    The Effects of Chronic Hypoxia on Inflammation and Pulmonary Vascular Function
    Genetics of Pulmonary Vascular Disease
    Novel Mechanisms of Disease: Network Biology and MicroRNA Signaling in Pulmonary Hypertension
    Pulmonary Hypertension as a Metabolic Disease
    Renin-Angiotensin-Aldosterone and other Neurohumoral Factors in the Pathogenesis of Pulmonary Hypertension
    Animal Models of Pulmonary Hypertension
    The Cardiopulmonary Hemodynamic Evaluation of Pulmonary Hypertension
    Advanced Imaging in Pulmonary Hypertension
    Assessing Disease State in the Pulmonary Vasculature in Clinical Practice and Research
    Biomarkers and other Methods for Assessing Patient Progress
    Pulmonary Circulatory
    Right Ventricular Uncoupling: New Insights into Pulmonary Hypertension Pathophysiology
    Contemporary Pharmacotherapies Involving Nitric Oxide, Prostacyclin, and Endothelin Receptor Signaling Pathways
    Determining the Optimal Approach to Initiating Oral, Inhaled, and Intravenous Therapies in Clinical Practice: Sequential Goal-Directed Therapy is Best
    Counterpoint: Determining the optimal approach to initiating oral, inhaled, and intravenous therapies in clinical practice: Maximal upfront therapy is best
    Surgery, Devices, Transplantation and Other Interventional Options for the Treatment of Advanced Pulmonary Hypertension
    Patient Registries in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension: the Role of Survival Equations and Risk Calculators
    Support Care for the Pulmonary Hypertension Patient
    Special Considerations for the Pulmonary Hypertension Patient
    The Future of Pulmonary Hypertension.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    H. James Ford, Gustavo A. Heresi, Michael G. Risbano, editors.
    Summary: This book is a clinical guide to controversial and emerging topics in pulmonary hypertension. There are multiple challenges and unanswered questions encountered by clinicians that evaluate, diagnose and treat patients with suspected or confirmed pulmonary vascular disease. This book provides a deep dive into the diagnosis and therapeutics of pulmonary hypertension supported by the literature and balanced with personal clinical experience. Expert authors have chosen these specific topics to address issues where uncertainty and/or controversy exists as well as highlight areas that are just being incorporated into clinical practice. These topics include: exercise pulmonary hypertension, sickle cell disease and pulmonary hypertension, and sarcoid pulmonary hypertension, among many others. Chapters address the diagnostic and treatment dilemmas posed by these various clinical entities through literature review, sharing of expert opinion, and review of recent guidelines and their applicability to the multiple different nuanced presentations of pulmonary hypertension. This is an ideal guide for pulmonologists, cardiologists, and other specialty practitioners caring for patients with pulmonary hypertension.

    Contents:
    Exercise pulmonary hypertension
    Advanced Right Ventricular Assessment: Pulmonary Artery Compliance and RV:PA Coupling
    Beyond scleroderma: pulmonary arterial hypertension in patients with other connective tissue diseases
    Isolated Post-capillary and Combined Pre and Post-capillary Pulmonary Hypertension
    Current Approach to Chronic Thromboembolic Disease without Pulmonary Hypertension
    Pulmonary veno-occlusive disease and pulmonary capillary hemangiomatosis
    Controversies in the Management of Pulmonary Hypertension in the Setting of Lung Disease
    Pulmonary Hypertension in Sickle Cell Disease: Current Controversies and Clinical Practices
    Sarcoidosis-Associated Pulmonary Hypertension
    Parenteral Prostacyclin Use in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Pulmonary Hypertension in Chronic Kidney Disease and End Stage Renal Disease
    Gender and Race Disparities in Pulmonary Hypertension Diagnosis and Treatment .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Robert P. Baughman, Roberto G. Carbone, Steven D. Nathan, editors.
    Summary: The first edition of this book, published in 2009, was the only book of its kind dedicated exclusively to the diagnosis and management of pulmonary arterial hypertension (PAH) in patients with interstitial lung disease (ILD). Over the past few years, new diagnostic tests and treatments of pulmonary arterial hypertension have been developed and tested. Diagnostic testing has led to more frequent and specific diagnosis in PAH patients, leading to the more widespread use of effective treatment and improved quality of life and reduction of mortality for PAH patients. Pulmonary Hypertension and Interstitial Lung Disease: A Clinical Guide, Second Edition provides an updated and expanded state-of-the-art overview of the problems seen by physicians in the clinical management of ILDs. The first section of the book discusses general features and includes an overview of clinical features, diagnosis and pathology of ILD. The second part discusses specific disorders such as idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, sarcoidosis, and hypersensitivity pneumonia. Pulmonary Hypertension and Interstitial Lung Disease, Second Edition is an invaluable resource for all physicians whose practice involves the care and treatment of patients with interstitial lung disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Konstantinos Dimopoulos, Gerhard-Paul Diller, editors.
    Summary: This book is intended as a comprehensive, practically oriented reference on pulmonary hypertension within the context of adult congenital heart disease (ACHD). After an introductory chapter on pathophysiology, the various types of pulmonary hypertension that may be encountered in ACHD are discussed, highlighting the specifics observed within different patient categories. The diagnostic approach is then addressed in detail, and the last section of the book is devoted to management options, from conservative approaches to interventional treatment and the concept of treat and repair. Management in specific patient subjects, such as pregnant women, Fontan patients, and Down syndrome patients with Eisenmenger syndrome, is fully discussed, and guidance is also provided on palliative care. Pulmonary arterial hypertension related to congenital heart disease (PAH-CHD), despite significant similarities in lung pathohysiology, differs significantly from other types of PAH in terms of mechanism of onset, natural history and management. Mistakes and pitfalls in the management of patients with PAH-CHD are often related to a lack of knowledge or expertise in this condition. Pulmonary Hypertension in Adult Congenital Heart Disease will be a valuable resource and learning tool for all who care for patients with ACHD, both in tertiary practice and general cardiology.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Pathophysiology and Classification of Pulmonary Hypertension in Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    1. Congenital Heart Defects and Pulmonary Hypertension: The Heath Edwards Paradigm
    2. Definition and Classification of Pulmonary Hypertension in Congenital Heart Disease
    3. Eisenmenger Syndrome: Pathophysiology and Hematologic Effects
    4. PAH in Patients with Persistent Systemic-Pulmonary Shunts and PAH in Patients with Small Cardiac Defects
    5. Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension in Patients with Previous Reparative Surgery
    6. Segmental Pulmonary Hypertension
    7. Pulmonary Vascular Disease in Patients with Fontan-Type Circulation
    8. Post-Capillary Pulmonary Hypertension in ACHD
    Part 2: The Diagnosis of Pulmonary Hypertension in Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    9. Physical Examination and Electrocardiography in Patients with Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension due to Congenital Heart Disease: Initial Clinical Assessment
    10. The Role of Plain Chest Radiography and Computed Tomography
    11. Echocardiography in the Diagnosis and Follow-up of Patients with Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension Associated with Congenital Heart Disease
    12. Cardiovascular Magnetic Resonance
    13. Cardiopulmonary Exercise and Six-minute Walk Testing
    14. Cardiac Catheterization
    Part 3: Management of Pulmonary Hypertension in Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    15. Conservative Management and Recommendations for PAH-CHD
    16. Pulmonary Vasodilators in Patients with Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension Related to Congenital Heart Disease
    17. Perspectives on Shunts in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension: from Interventions to Create Shunts to the Concept of "Treat-and-Repair"
    18. Eisenmenger Syndrome in Patients with Down's Syndrome
    19. Pregnancy and Contraception
    20. Training and Recommendations for Exercise
    21. Prognostication in PAH-CHD
    22. Management of Fontan patients
    23. Palliative Care and End of Life Considerations in Patients with PAH-CHD
    24. PAH in ACHD: Research, Global Perspective and Future Prospects: An Epilogue. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: The respiratory tract is a frequent target of infections caused by a wide range of organisms. The book provides reader-friendly information on aspects of pulmonary infections, including comprehensive accounts of bacterial and viral diseases, therapeutic approaches, molecular and classical culture-related techniques of diagnosis, and explaining the basic cell biological mechanism. The role of oxidative stress, both helpful in fighting invading pathogens and detrimental in yielding to infection is detailed as it is often undervalued and needs focus. The chapters encompass latest developments and applications in bacteriology and virology, preventive and therapeutic tips, and raise attention to implementation of proper antibiotic policies by medical institutions to decrease resistance to antimicrobials. The perennial problem of low influenza vaccination coverage rate is rationalized. The volume will be of interest to both clinicians and biomedical researchers engaged in this exciting field.

    Contents:
    Evaluation of the Activity of Influenza and Influenza-like Viruses in the Epidemic Season 2013/2014
    Necrotizing Pneumonia and its Complications in Children
    Progress in the Diagnosis and Control of Ebola Disease
    Pathophysiology of Clinical Symptoms in Acute Viral Respiratory Tract Infections
    Stagnating Low Influenza Vaccine Coverage Rates in the Polish Elderly Population in 2008-2013
    Incidence of Circulating Antibodies against Hemagglutinin of Influenza Viruses in the Epidemic Season 2013/2014 in Poland
    Neutrophils
    the role of oxidative and nitrosative stress in health and disease
    The Incidence of Respiratory Tract Infections in Vertically HIV-Infected Children in Lower Silesia in Poland and the Approach to Infection Prevention
    Implementation of Hospital Antibiotic Policy Decreases Antimicrobial Use in the Pediatric Ward
    Detection of Chlamydophila Pneumoniae and Typical Bacteria in Patients with Chronic Cough
    Compliance with Vaccination Against Influenza Among the Elderly.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Prevalence of pulmonary infectins caused by atypical pathogens in non-HIV immunocompromised patients
    Effects of S-nitroso-N-acetyl-penicillamine (SNAP) on inflammation, lung tissue apoptosis and iNOS activity in a rabbit model of acute lung injury
    Combination therapy with budesonide and salmeterol in experimental allergic inflammation
    Monoclonal antibodies for the management of severe asthma
    Cough and arabinogalactan polysaccharide from the bark of Terminalia Arjuna
    Bronchodilator and anti-inflammatory action of theophylline in a model of ovalbumin-induced allergic inflammation
    Importance of social relationships in patients with chronic respiratory diseases
    The renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system in smokers and non-smokers of the Ludwigshafen risk and cardiovascular health (LURIC) study
    Electrodermal activity in adolescent depression
    Metagenomic analysis of cerebrospinal fluid from patients with multiple sclerosis
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Paul F. Dellaripa, Aryeh Fischer, Kevin R. Flaherty, editors.
    Summary: "The spectrum of systemic rheumatologic disease (often termed connective tissue disease) is characterized by autoimmune-mediated organ dysfunction, and the lungs are a frequent target. There are numerous pulmonary manifestations associated with connective tissue diseases, and all patients with rheumatologic disease are at risk of developing associated lung disease. Pulmonary Manifestations of Rheumatic Disease covers the comprehensive management of rheumatologic lung disease, which requires a multi-disciplinary approach and is optimized by active engagement by rheumatologists working closely with pulmonologists and other specialists. The book offers a practical reference using a case-based approach for practicing clinicians in the ongoing assessment and understanding of rheumatologic lung disease, and presents the science and pathophysiology underlying rheumatologic lung diseases. The first text of its kind specifically dedicated to describe diverse, commonplace, and challenging aspects of rheumatologic lung diseases, Pulmonary Manifestations of Rheumatic Disease serves as an invaluable tool for the practicing clinician."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    The lung in rheumatic diseases
    2. Evaluation of lung disease in patients
    3. Rheumatoid arthritis
    4. Interstitial lung disease in systemic sclerosis
    5. Inflammatory myopathy/anti synthetase syndrome
    6. Pulmonary manifestations of systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE)
    7. Pulmonary manifestations in mixed connective tissue disease
    8. Pulmonary manifestations of primary Sjogren's Syndrome
    9. Pulmonary manifestations of sarcoidosis
    10. Pulmonary manifestations of vasculitis
    11. Pulmonary hypertension associated with connective tissue disease
    12. Respiratory infections in the rheumatic disease patient
    13. Lung transplantation for connective tissue disease-associated lung disease
    14. Current and emerging treatment options in interstitial lung disease
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Dani S. Zander, Carol F. Farver.
    Contents:
    Normal anatomy, tissue artifacts, and incidental structures
    The uses and abuses of the lung biopsy
    A pattern-based approach to diagnosis
    Congenital, developmental, and inherited disorders
    Acquired and idiopathic disorders in neonates and young children
    Lung neoplasms in infants and children
    Vascular diseases
    Vasculitides and other causes of pulmonary hemorrhage
    Acute lung injury
    Bacterial diseases
    Mycobacterial diseases
    Fungal diseases
    Viral diseases
    Human parasitic pulmonary infections
    Chlamydial, mycoplasmal, rickettsial, and ehrlichial diseases
    Idiopathic interstitial pneumonias
    Other interstitial lung diseases
    Environmental- and toxin-induced lung diseases
    Drug reactions and other iatrogenic pulmonary diseases
    Emphysema and diseases of large airways
    Diseases of small airways
    Lymphoid lesions of the lung
    Uncommon histiocytic and dendritic cell proliferations
    Transplantation-related lung pathology
    Other nonneoplastic focal lesions, inclusions, and depositions
    Usual lung cancers
    Neuroendocrine neoplasms
    Unusual primary malignant lung neoplasms
    Pulmonary involvement by extrapulmonary neoplasms
    Precursors of malignancy
    Benign neoplasms of the lungs
    Primary pleural neoplasms
    Pleural involvement by extrapleural neoplasms
    Inflammatory and fibrosing pleural processes
    Pulmonary manifestations of systemic diseases
    Respiratory cytology.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    by Helmut Popper, Bruno Murer.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date overview of diagnostics in lung and pleura pathology. It helps surgical and clinical pathologist solve problem cases in lung and pleura tumor pathology as well as in other fields of pulmonary/pleura pathology such as interstitial lung disease, rare tumors, metabolic diseases, infectious pneumonias, pneumoconiosis, drug induced lung diseases, developmental and pediatric pulmonary pathology. Focusing on practical issues and providing numerous illustrated examples of typical and atypical cases, it guides residents as well as experienced pathologists through the problems and pitfalls in pulmonary and pleura pathology. References have been kept to a minimum.

    Contents:
    Carcinomas
    Sarcomas
    Lymphomas
    Benign Epithelial and Mesenchymal Tumors
    Preneoplasia Pneumonia
    Granulomatous Pneumonias
    Interstitial Pneumonia
    Eosinophilic Pneumonia
    Smoking Induced Lung Diseases
    Collagen Vascular Diseases
    Bronchitis Acute and Chronic
    Developmental Disorders
    Pneumoconiosis
    Systemic Vasculitis
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    Metabolic Disorders
    Emphysema
    Toxic Inhalation
    Drug Induced Lung Diseases
    Alveolar Hemorrhage
    Pleuritis
    Pleural Effusion
    Pleura Tumors
    Transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Philip T. Cagle ; associate editors, Timothy C. Allen [and 15 others].
    Summary: "In Pulmonary Pathology: An Atlas and Text, 3rd edition, a newly composed book, the general format of a user-friendly atlas that is highly illustrated, divided into readily accessible individual entities, and offering brief handy text with bullet points to expedite use is retained"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Sect. 1: Normal cytology and histology
    Sect. 2: Artifacts and age-related changes
    Sect. 3: Malignant neoplasms
    Sect. 4: Benign neoplasms
    Sect. 5: Pulmonary histiocytic proliferations
    Sect. 6: Benign and borderline lymphoid proliferations
    Sect. 7: Focal lesions
    Sect. 8: Granulomatous diseases
    Sect. 9: Diffuse pulmonary hemorrhage
    Sect. 10: Pulmonary hypertension and embolic disease
    Sect. 11: Large airways
    Sect. 12: Small airways
    Sect. 13: Alveolar infiltrates
    Sect. 14: Tobacco-related diseases
    Sect. 15: Diffuse interstitial lung diseases
    Sect. 16: Idiopathic interstitial pneumonias
    Sect. 17: Specific infectious agents
    Sect. 18: Transplant-related pathology
    Sect. 19: Lung pathology in collagen vascular diseases
    Sect. 20: Therapeutic drug reactions and radiation effects
    Sect. 21: Pneumoconioses
    Sect. 22: Metabolic disorders/storage diseases
    Sect. 23: Nonneoplastic lesions of the pleura
    Sect. 24: Pediatric pulmonary pathology.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    Philip T. Cagle, Keith M. Kerr, editors.
    Summary: This book covers the complete field of pulmonary pathology - neoplastic and non-neoplastic - from Acinic cell tumor in the lung to Wegener̀s Granulomatosis. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need. .

    Contents:
    Acinic cell tumor, lung
    Acute Fibrinous and Organizing Pneumonia
    Acute Interstitial Pneumonia
    Adenocarcinoma in situ
    Adenocarcinoma, lung
    Adenoid cystic carcinoma, lung
    Adenosquamous carcinoma, lung
    Allergic Bronchopulmonary Aspergillosis
    Alveolar adenoma
    Amyloidosis, Diffuse Alveolar-Septal.- Amyloidosis, Nodular.- Amyloidosis, Tracheobronchial
    Angiosarcomas, lung
    Anthrax and Related Organisms, Pulmonary
    Asbestosis
    Aspergillus, Pulmonary
    Atypical adenomatous hyperplasia, lung
    Atypical Mycobacteria, Pulmonary
    Bacterial Infections in Transplant Patients
    Basaloid carcinoma, lung
    Bronchial Associated Lymphoid Tissue Lymphoma
    Bronchiolitis, Constrictive.- Bronchiolitis, Follicular.- Bronchiolitis, Respiratory
    Carcinoid tumor, lung
    Carcinosarcoma, lung
    Chondroma, lung
    Chondrosarcoma, lung
    Churg-Strauss Syndrome, Pulmonary
    Clear cell tumor, lung
    Coal Worker̀s Pneumoconiosis
    Community Respiratory Viruses in Transplant Patients
    Cryptococcus, Pulmonary
    Cryptogenic Organizing Pneumonia
    Cytomegalovirus pneumonia in Transplant Patients
    Desmoid tumor, lung
    Desquamative Interstitial Pneumonia.- Desquamative Interstitial Pneumonia-like Pattern
    Diffuse Alveolar Damage
    Diffuse Alveolar Hemorrhage
    Diffuse idiopathic pulmonary neuroendocrine cell hyperplasia
    Diffuse Interstitial Lung Diseases
    Diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, lung
    Diffuse Panbronchiolitis and variants
    Eosinophilic Pneumonia, Acute
    Eosinophilic Pneumonia, Chronic
    Epithelial-myoepithelial carcinoma, lung
    Epithelioid heamangioendothelioma, lung
    Fibrous histiocytic tumors, incl. benign FH, MFH and cystic tumors of lung
    Ganglioneuroma, lung
    Germ cell tumors incl. choriocarcinoma, lung
    Giant Cell Interstitial Pneumonia/Hard Metal Pneumoconiosis
    Glandular papilloma, lung
    Glomus tumor, lung
    Granular cell tumor, lung
    Haemangioma, lung
    Haemangiomatosis, pulmonary
    Hamartoma, lung incl. mesenchymoma
    Histoplasma, Pulmonary
    Hodgkiǹs disease
    Hypersensitivity Pneumonitis
    Idiopathic Interstitial Pneumonias
    IgG4 Related Disease, Pulmonary
    Infectious Granulomas, pulmonary
    Inflammatory pseudotumors, lung
    Invasive and Colonizing Fungal Infections in Transplant Patients
    Kaposi sarcoma, lung
    Large cell carcinoma, lung
    Large cell neuroendocrine carcinoma, lung
    Leiomyoma, lung
    Leiomyomasarcoma, lung
    Lipoma, lung
    Liposarcoma, lung
    Lung Transplant, Acute Rejection
    Lung Transplant, Hyperacute Rejection
    Lymphangioleiomyomatosis
    Lymphangioma, lung
    Lymphangiomatosis, pulmonary
    Lymphoid Interstitial Pneumonia
    Lymphomatoid granulomatosis
    Melanoma, lung
    Meningioma, lung
    Mesenchymal cystic hamartoma
    Microcystic fibromyxoma, lung
    Minute meningothelial nodules, aka chemodectoma, lung
    Mixed squamous cell and glandular papilloma
    Mucinous cystadenoma, lung
    Mucoepidermoid carcinoma, lung
    Mucous gland adenoma, lung
    Multifocal micronodular pneumocyte hyperplasia
    Mycobacterial Disease in Transplant Patients
    Nerve sheath tumors incl. neurofibroma and neurilemmoma
    Nonspecific Interstitial Pneumonia
    Oncocytoma, lung
    Osteosarcoma, lung
    Papillary adenoma, lung
    Plasma cell tumors, lung shot
    Pleomorphic adenoma, lung
    Pneumocystis pneumonia in Transplant Patients
    Pneumonia, Aspiration
    Pneumonia, Cytomegalovirus.- Pneumonia, H1N1 (Swine Flu).- Pneumonia, Pneumocystis.- Pneumonia, Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome
    Pneumonia, Staphylococcus
    Primary leiomyosarcomas, lung
    Pulmonary Abscess
    Pulmonary Alveolar Microlithiasis.- Pulmonary Alveolar Proteinosis
    Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Pulmonary artery and vein sarcomas
    Pulmonary blastoma
    Pulmonary Capillary Hemangiomatosis
    Pulmonary Hyalinizing Granuloma
    Pulmonary Langerhans Cell Histiocytosis
    Pulmonary Thrombi and Emboli
    Radiation Pneumonitis
    Respiratory Bronchiolitis-Associated Interstitial Lung Disease
    Rhabdomyosarcomas, lung
    Sarcomatoid carcinomas, lung
    Sclerosing haemangioma, lung
    Silicosis
    Small cell carcinoma, lung
    Solitary fibrous tumor, lung
    Squamous carcinoma in situ
    Squamous cell carcinoma, lung.- Squamous cell papilloma, lung
    Squamous dysplasia, lung
    Synovial sarcoma, lung
    Thymoma, pulmonary
    Transplant-associated lymphoproliferative disorders
    Usual Interstitial Pneumonia
    Wegener̀s Granulomatosis, Pulmonary. .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Michael G. Levitzky.
    Contents:
    Function and structure of the respiratory system
    Mechanics of breathing
    Alveolar ventilation
    Blood flow to the lung
    Ventilation-perfusion relationships
    Diffusion of gases and interpretation of pulmonary function tests
    Transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide in the blood
    Acid-base balance
    Control of breathing
    Nonrespiratory functions of the lung
    The respiratory system under stress
    Clinical problem answers
    Appendices. Symbols used in respiratory physiology
    The laws governing the behavior of gases
    Frequently used equations
    Table of normal respiratory and circulatory values
    Common abbreviations.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2018
  • Digital
    Marc A. Judson, editor.
    Summary: Pulmonary Sarcoidosis: A Guide for the Practicing Clinician is a valuable resource for clinicians of varied disciplines concerning the care of the sarcoidosis patient. Sarcoidosis is a multi-system disorder and represents a major challenge to physicians. Although any organ may be involved with sarcoidosis, the lung is the most common organ affected. Chapters are written by distinguished authors who have extensive experience in caring for these patients. Detailed figures and tables are provided to guide the practicing clinician through all aspects of the condition, from clinical manifestations to treatment options. Pulmonary Sarcoidosis: A Guide for the Practicing Clinician is fully comprehensive and evidence-based and will be an essential addition to the bookshelves of all whose practice involves the care and treatment of patients with sarcoidosis.

    Contents:
    The Diagnosis of Sarcoidosis
    The Pulmonary Manifestations of Sarcoidosis
    The Treatment of Pulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Acute Pulmonary Exacerbation of Sarcoidosis: APES
    Advanced ("End-Stage") Pulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Sarcoidosis Associated Pulmonary Hypertension
    Monitoring Pulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Extrapulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Instructive Cases of Pulmonary Sarcoidosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Takefumi Saito, Masahiro Narita, Charles L. Daley, editors.
    Summary: Every year, 10 million people fall ill with tuberculosis (TB) in the world, and of those, 1.5 million people die even though it is a preventable and curable disease. As a result, TB remains the worlds leading infectious cause of death. On the other hand, in industrialized countries, the TB incidence has fallen to a historic low, and clinicians experience with TB diminished significantly in recent years. Additional challenges for clinicians include atypical presentation of TB in the immunocompromised, especially among the elderly, and an increasing number of patients with drug-resistant TB. Delayed diagnosis of TB leads to the spread of TB including nosocomial transmission because TB is an air-borne infectious disease, and suboptimal treatment can result in development of drug resistance. Furthermore, treatment of latent TB infection (LTBI) can prevent future TB cases but it has been under-utilized despite recent innovations in diagnosis and treatment regimens of LTBI. This book focuses on advances in diagnostic tools and treatment for both TB disease and latent TB infection. Each chapter/topic is written by one of the top TB experts in the field and the authors are from Japan and the US. Pulmonary Tuberculosis and its Prevention offers up-to-date information that can be incorporated into a busy practice of clinicians while they can appreciate broad international perspectives and gain in-depth knowledge on TB.

    Contents:
    Part I. Epidemiology and Pathogenesis
    Chapter 1. Epidemiology
    Chapter 2. Immunology
    Chapter 3. Impact of Biologic and JAK Inhibitor Therapies on TB: How do Biologic Therapies Affect the Presentation and Treatment Course of Pulmonary TB?
    Chapter 4. Advances in Mycobacterial Laboratories: What is the latest laboratory approach to diagnose and manage pulmonary tuberculosis?
    Part II Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    Chapter 5. Advances in Diagnostics of Pulmonary tuberculosis: What is the Latest Approach to Diagnose Pulmonary TB?
    Chapter 6. HRCT diagnosis of pulmonary tuberculosis: Microlesions
    Chapter 7. Advances in Treatment of Drug Resistant Pulmonary TB: What is the latest approach to treat drug-resistant pulmonary TB?
    Chapter 8. The Role of Surgical Interventions for Pulmonary TB: What is the Role of Surgical Intervention in Pulmonary TB?
    Part III Latent TB Infection: TB Prevention
    Chapter 9. Advances in Diagnosis of Latent TB Infection: What is the Latest Approach to Diagnose Latent TB Infection to Prevent TB?
    Chapter 10. Advances in Treatment of Latent TB Infection: What is the Latest Approach to Treat Latent TB Infection to Prevent Pulmonary TB?
    Part IV Research Areas
    Chapter 11. TB vaccines: What Type of TB Vaccines are Studied and will be Available in the Future?
    Chapter 12. Clinical Trials of Pulmonary TB: Challenges and Opportunities
    Chapter 13. Contributions of Japanese Scholars to Advances in Clinical Tuberculosis Management: In TB World, What Kind of Achievements are Accomplished by Japanese Researchers?.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Yong-Xiao Wang, editor.
    Contents:
    Adventitial fibroblast Nox4 expression and ROS signaling in pulmonary arterial hypertension
    Role of transcription factors in pulmonary artery smooth muscle cells: an important link to hypoxic pulmonary hypertension
    Molecular basis of nitrative stress in the pathogenesis of pulmonary hypertension
    Pentose shunt, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, NADPH redox, and stem cells in pulmonary hypertension
    Redox regulation of the superoxide dismutases SOD3 and SOD2 in the pulmonary circulation
    A brief overview of nitric oxide and reactive oxygen species signaling in hypoxia-induced pulmonary hypertension
    Altered redox balance in the development of chronic hypoxia-induced pulmonary hypertension
    ROS signaling in the pathogenesis of acute lung injury (ALI) and acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS)
    Redox-dependent calpain signaling in airway and pulmonary vascular remodeling in COPD
    Natural antioxidants as potential therapy, and a promising role for melatonin against pulmonary hypertension
    Effects of hyperoxia on the developing airway and pulmonary vasculature
    Lung ischaemia-reperfusion injury: the role of reactive oxygen species
    Redox mechanisms influencing cGMP signaling in pulmonary vascular physiology and pathophysiology
    Metabolic reprogramming and redox signaling in pulmonary hypertension
    Hydrogen sulfide as an O₂ sensor: a critical analysis
    Redox signaling and persistent pulmonary hypertension of the newborn
    Cross talk between mitochondrial reactive oxygen species and sarcoplasmic reticulum calcium in pulmonary arterial smooth muscle cells
    Endothelial cell reactive oxygen species and Ca²⁺ signaling in pulmonary hypertension
    Redox signaling in the right ventricle
    Hypoxia and local inflammation in pulmonary artery structure and function
    From physiological redox signalling to oxidant stress
    Emerging role of MicroRNAs and long noncoding RNAs in healthy and diseased lung
    Techniques for detecting reactive oxygen species in pulmonary vasculature redox signaling
    Mitochondrial and metabolic drivers of pulmonary vascular endothelial dysfunction in pulmonary hypertension
    Subcellular redox signalling
    Reactive oxygen species in COPD-related vascular remodeling
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: This book addresses several burning issues concerning diseases involving the lungs and respiratory tract. It discusses the epidemiology, mechanisms, prevention, and diagnosis of chest conditions such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, sleep apnea and respiratory infections. Further, it examines the intertwined connection between oxidative stress, cardiovascular disorders such as hypertension, and the occurrence and course of obstructive sleep apnea. It also provides pulmonologists with valuable information on the diagnosis and treatment of patients with severe airway obstruction or respiratory tract infections. Other topics covered include viral infections of the airways, such as influenza, particularly in high-risk groups like pediatric populations, as well as psychosocial aspects, e.g., quality of life in lung cancer patients. Combining basic science and clinical practice, the articles provide key insights and highlight the areas of still limited understanding of disease processes. Stimulating new directions in clinical practice, this collection of articles is intended for respiratory physicians, clinical experts, family practitioners, and all allied healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    Spirometry: a Need for Periodic Updates of National Reference Values
    Age at Menarche and Risk of Respiratory Diseases
    Effects of Osteopathic Manual Therapy on Hyperinflation in Patients with Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease: A Randomized Cross-over Study
    Oxidative Stress Markers and Severity of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Prevalence and Risk of Obstructive Sleep Apnea and Arterial Hypertension in the Adult Population in Poland: An Observational Subset of the International Prospective Urban Rural Epidemiology (PURE) Study
    Strategies of Coping with Pain: Differences Associated with the Histological Type of Lung Cancer
    Chest Radiography in Children Hospitalized with Bronchiolitis
    Evaluation of the 2017/18 Influenza Epidemic Season in Poland Based on the SENTINEL Surveillance System
    Occurrence of Influenza Hemagglutinin Antibodies in the Polish Population during the Epidemic Season 2017/18
    Respiratory Virus Infections in People over 14 Years of Age in Poland in the Epidemic Season of 2017/18.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Paolo Salvi.
    Summary: This new, revised and updated edition takes into account the most recent advances in the understanding of human pathophysiology. The book presents the complex basic principles of vascular hemodynamics and its pathophysiology in a direct and effective way, stressing the importance of the mechanical properties of large arteries in the origin of blood pressure. The readily understandable text, supported by helpful images, describes the elements that define blood pressure and explains such important concepts as pulse wave velocity, central blood pressure, reflected waves, and pulse pressure amplification. Entirely new chapters are included on the sympathetic nervous system and arterial stiffness and on the role played by arterial stiffness in influencing blood pressure variability. The book will enable the physician to answer some of the key questions encountered when addressing the problem of arterial hypertension in everyday clinical practice: How is blood pressure generated? How should blood pressure values be interpreted? Is systolic blood pressure of greater importance than diastolic blood pressure?

    Contents:
    1 Blood Pressure and Vascular Hemodynamics
    2 Pulse Wave Velocity and Arterial Stiffness Assessment
    3 Arterial Stiffness and Blood Pressure Variability
    4 Central Blood Pressure: Part 1, pathophysiology
    5 Central Blood Pressure: Part 2, Pulse Wave Analysis
    6 Aortic Stiffness and Myocardial Ischemia
    7 Arterial Stiffness in Chronic Kidney Disease
    8 Pulse Wave Velocity and Pulse Wave Analysis in Experimental Animals.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    A. Manickavasagan, Praveena Thirunathan, editors.
    Summary: World health authorities recommend people maximize their protein intake through vegetable sources (such as pulses), and reduce protein intake from animal sources. Increasing vegetable protein intake has been shown to be positively associated with the reduction of both cardiovascular-disease-related mortality and all-cause mortality. Pulse consumption has been shown to improve satiety and metabolism of glucose and lipids, due to their high protein and fiber content, which makes their consumption ideal for preventing and managing obesity. In recent years, there has been increasing demand for pulses and pulse-based products in developed countries. Several large-scale collaborative research projects on pulse products have been initiated by government agencies. Similarly, established multinational food companies have developed pulse product units. Pulses: Processing and Product Development fulfills the need for a comprehensive book on processing and products of pulses. The book addresses a specific pulse with each chapter to meet a wide range of audiences from undergraduate students to consumers.

    Contents:
    Adzuki bean
    Bambara groundnut
    Broad bean
    Chickpea
    Common bean
    Cowpea
    Hyacinth bean
    Lentil
    Lima bean
    Lupines
    Moth bean
    Mung bean
    Mungo bean
    Pea
    Pigeon pea
    Rice bean
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ricardo Gattas, Juliana G.M. Soares, Bruss Lima.
    Summary: This book discusses the hypothesis that the primate pulvinar contains an original scaffold which is derived from cytoarchitectural markers and specific protein distributions. Thereafter, along primate evolution, different selective pressures acted in order to shape and fine-tune the connectivity of the pulvinar with specific regions of the neocortex. This divergence created, among other things, the different sets of retinotopic map representations in the pulvinar nucleus depending on functional and behavioral requirements of each species. The pulvinar, the largest nucleus of the primate thalamus, has extensive and reciprocal connections with several areas of the neocortex. These input-output loops suggest that the pulvinar may regulate the flow of information within and between cortical areas in a highly dynamic fashion. Therefore, understanding the anatomical subdivisions within the pulvinar, and its connectivity with the cortex, is paramount to understanding pulvinar physiological function. However, there is a stark contrast regarding the way that the pulvinar is subdivided depending on the technique employed. Cytoarchitectural and immunohistochemical methods reveal a very similar pattern of pulvinar subdivision across Old- and New-World monkeys. On the other hand, electrophysiological and connectivity studies expose clear discrepancies in pulvinar organization across primate evolution.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Cytoarchitecture and myeloarchitecture of the pulvinar
    Chapter 3: Chemoarchitecture of the pulvinar
    Chapter 4: Visual map representations in the primate pulvinar
    Chapter 5: Connectivity of the pulvinar
    Chapter 6: Reestablishing the chemoarchitectural borders based on electrophysiological and connectivity data
    Chapter 7: Visual topography of the pulvinar projection zones
    Chapter 8: Comparative pulvinar organization across different primate species
    Chapter 9: Response properties of pulvinar neurons studied with single unit electrophysiological recordings
    Chapter 10: Modulation of pulvinar neuronal activity by arousal
    Chapter 11: Gaba inactivation of the pulvinar
    Chapter 12: The role of the pulvinar in spatial visual attention.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Joachim P. Sturmberg, editor.
    Summary: This idea-packed resource takes systems and complexity sciences out of blue-sky territory and into the concrete world of contemporary healthcare practice. Beginning with a new reframing of health and illness, its chapters redesign traditional disease-centered models of care into modern, health-centered -- and patient-centered -- health service systems. The approaches shown here combine innovation and common sense to recognize and attend to patients' needs across areas including health education and training, information accessibility, health service organization and delivery, and disease in individual context. The variety of solutions applied to this wide spectrum of issues shows the suitability of systems, complexity, and adaptive thinking to the ongoing objectives of making health services more responsive, effective, and equitable. Highlights of the coverage: Healthy smoker: an oxymoron? Maybe, but it is more complicated than thatTransforming monitoring and improving care with variability-derived clinical decision supportLinking Gulf War illness to genome instability, somatic evolution, and complex adaptive systemsComplexity of knowledge in primary care: understanding the discipline's requisite knowledge: a bibliometric studyNew ways of knowing and researching: integrating complexity into a translational health sciences program Understanding the emergency department ecosystem using agent-based modelling Putting Systems and Complexity Sciences into Practice is an inspiring idea book that sill interest health policymakers, health financiers, organizational leaders, healthcare administrators, clinicians, researchers, students, and interested lay readers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ajay Ohri.
    Summary: Short on theory and long on actionable analytics, this definitive guide provides readers with a detailed comparative introduction and overview of both languages and features concise tutorials with command-by-command translations of R to Python and Python to R. -- Edited summary from book.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Python R and data science
    Data input
    Data inspection and manipulation
    Exploratory data analysis
    Statistical modeling
    Data visualization
    Machine learning and data mining.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
all 2050 "P" titles

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Lane Library Bookmarklet

To install, drag this button to your browser bookmarks or tools bar.

What is it?

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Bookmark on Other Websites

Bookmark on Lane

  • To Install, Right Click this Button.
  • Select "Add to Favorites" (click “Continue” if you see a security alert)
  • From the "Create in" menu, select “Favorites Bar” (IE8, IE9) to install
  • Once installed it will look like this
  • Click "Bookmark on Lane" to bookmark any webpage
  • Your saved bookmark will appear on this page
To Install, Right Click this Button.

What is it?

Beyond Stanford

Derived from Current Medical Diagnosis & Treatment, AccessMedicine's Quick Medical Diagnosis & Treatment provides topic reviews with key diagnostic and treatment features for more than 500 diseases.

A repository of medical knowledge from internal medicine, cardiology, genetics, pharmacy, diagnosis and management, basic sciences, patient care, and more.

Continuously expanding, all databases in the repository contain the latest editions of selected medical titles.

MicroMedex: Premier pharmaceutical information source containing multiple databases and drug reference tools. Of particular value is DRUGDEX Evaluations, one of the most comprehensive drug sources available. DynaMed is a clinical information resource used to answer questions quickly at the point-of-care. Easy-to-interpret Levels of Evidence help clinicians rapidly determine the quality of the available evidence.

Biomedical and pharmacological abstracting and indexing database of published literature, by Elsevier. Embase® contains over 32 million records from over 8,500 currently published journals (1947-present) and is noteworthy for its extensive coverage of the international pharmaceutical and alternative/complementary medicine literature.

Scopus is the largest abstract and citation database of peer-reviewed literature: scientific journals, books and conference proceedings. A drug information resource containing: American Hospital Formulary System (AHFS), drug formulary for Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH) and Stanford Hospital & Clinics (SHC), Lexi-Drugs (adverse reactions, dosage and administration, mechanism of action, storage, use, and administration information), Lexi-Calc, Lexi-ID, Lexi-I.V. Compatibility (King Guide), Lexi-Interact, and Lexi-PALS. Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature (CINAHL) contains coverage of nursing and allied health literature. A knowledge database that provides access to topic reviews based on over 6000 clinically relevant articles. The evidence-based content, updated regularly, provides the latest practice guidelines in 59 medical specialties. Provides critical assessments of systematic reviews compiled from a variety of medical journals. Selects from the biomedical literature original studies and systematic reviews that are immediately clinically relevant and then summarizes these articles in an enhanced abstract with expert commentary.

Multidisciplinary coverage of over 10,000 high-impact journals in the sciences, social sciences, and arts and humanities, as well as international proceedings coverage for over 120,000 conferences.

Includes cited reference searching, citation maps, and an analyze tool.

Features systematic reviews that summarize the effects of interventions and makes a determination whether the intervention is efficacious or not.

Cochrane reviews are created through a strict process of compiling and analyzing data from multiple randomized control trials to ensure comprehensiveness and reliability.

Provides systematic coverage of the psychological literature from the 1800s to the present through articles, book chapters and dissertations. PIER (Physicians' Information and Education Resource) is a Web-based decision-support tool designed for rapid point-of-care delivery of up-to-date, evidence-based guidance for primary care physicians. Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) provides access to 300,000 controlled trials that have been identified the Cochrane Collaboration. Provides drug information targeted for patients. A continually updating drug monograph. ECRI Guidelines Trust: A comprehensive database of evidence-based clinical practice guidelines and related documents. MedlinePlus: A repository of health information from the National Library of Medicine. Links are from trusted sites. No advertising, no endorsement of commercial companies or products LPCH CareNotes via MicroMedex: Patient education handouts customized by LPCH clinical staff Micromedex Lab Advisor: Evidence based laboratory test information Provides patient handouts from the American Academy of Family Physician.

Largest, broadest eBook package; covers all sciences, as well as technology (including software), medicine, and humanities.

In addition to covering Wiley and Springer, MyiLibrary is also the only provider for Oxford and Cambridge University Press titles. No seat restrictions.

A collection of biomedical books that can be searched directly by concept, and linked to terms in PubMed abstracts.

A web-based, decision support system for infectious diseases, epidemiology, microbiology and antimicrobial chemotherapy. The database, updated weekly, currently includes 337 diseases, 224 countries, 1,147 microbial taxa and 306 antibacterial (-fungal, -parasitic, -viral) agents and vaccines.

Over 10,000 notes outline the status of specific infections within each country.

Large number of high quality software and database programming titles from O'Reilly. Other software titles are also available from Sams and Prentice Hall. Limited to 7 concurrent users. Includes peer-reviewed life science and biomedical research protocols compiled from Methods in Molecular Biology, Methods in Molecular Medicine, Methods in Biotechnology, Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology, Neuromethods, the Biomethods Handbook, the Proteomics Handbook, and Springer Laboratory Manuals. Contains full text access to selected biomedical and nursing books.

Provides online, full-text access to Springer's journal titles as well as journals from other publishers.

Subjects include: life sciences, chemical sciences, environmental sciences, geosciences, computer science, mathematics, medicine, physics and astronomy, engineering and economics. Also includes eBooks.

Collection of over 8 thousand fulltext titles in engineering, math, and basic and applied biomedical research. Coverage is from 1967 to the present. A library of ebooks on a wide array of topics, digitized and made available online in conjunction with the original publishers.